Acura RDX SRM 07 PDF

@
ACURA
I~'I~
Service Manual 2007
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes ....................... ........... 1~2

Identification Number Locations .................... 1-3
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations .... 1-4
Under-hood Emission Control Label............... 1-6
Lift and Support Points .............. ...................... 1-7
Towing .............................................................. 1-8
Parts Marking ... ..... ........ .... .............. ..... ............. 1-9
Precautions for Super Handling

All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System .............. 1-10
General Information
Chassis and Paint Codes
Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number
5J8 TB1 8 2 * 7 A 000001 K23A1 - 1000001
a
IIIII1I1
b cdefgh
I Ib
a
a. Manufacturer, Make and Type of Vehicle a. Engine Type
5J8: Honda of America Mfg., Inc., USA K23A 1: 2.3 L DOHC i-VTEC Sequential Multiport
Acura Multipurpose passenger vehicle Fuel-injected engine with turbo charger,
b. Line, Body and Engine Type inter cooler
TB1: Acura RDX/K23A1 b. Serial Number
c. Body Type and Transmission Type
8: 5-door/5-speed Automatic
d. Vehicle Grade (Series) Transmission Number
2:RDX
5: RDX with Technology Package
e. Check Digit BWEA - 9000001
f. Model Year
7:'07
g. Factory Code
I Ib
a
A:Marysville, Ohio Factory in USA
h. Serial Number
000001-: USA models a. Transmission Type
800001-: Canada models BWEA: 5-speed Automatic
b. Serial Number
Paint Code
Code Color
NH-603P White Diamond Pearl
NH-658P Graphite Pearl
NH-700M Alabaster Silver Metallic
B-92P Nighthawk Black Pearl
B-536P Royal Blue Pearl
Vehicle Identification Number R-528P Moroccan Red Pearl
and Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard Certification YR-562P Carbon Bronze Pearl
and Paint Code Label.
Vehicle Identification Number
and Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard Certification
and Paint Code Label.
PAINT CODE INTERIOR COLOR CODE
1-2 BACK
Identification Number Locations
Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN) Number (VIN)
Engine Number Transmission Number
BACK 1-3
General Information
Danger/Warning/Caution Label Locations
NOTE: FRONT PASSENGER (CHILD SEAT) AIRBAG WARNING TAG is installed on the glove box in the USA models.
Front Passenger's Compartment:

SRSWARNING
INFORMATION
SRSWARNING
INFORMATION
STEERING COLUMN
NOTICE
MONITOR NOTICE FRONT SEAT BELT TENSIONER WARNING
Steering Wheel: Rear Passenger's Compartment:
DRIVER MODULE DANGER ROOF SIDE MODULE DANGER

CABLE REEL CAUTION
1-4 BACK
Doorjamb:
ENGINE COOLANT
INFORMATION
SERVICE
AIR CONDITIONING INFORMATION
INFORMATION (Under-hood
Emission Control)
SRSWARNING
SIDE AIRBAG CAUTION

located on driver's and passenger's
doorjamb
TIRE INFORMATION
located on driver's doorjamb
RADIATOR CAP
DANGER
BACK 1-5
General Information
Under-hood Emission Control Label
Emission Group Identification Test Group and Evaporative Family
Example: Test Group:
7 HNX T 02.3 DKC
I1II1
abc de
LOAED 11M TESTING OF THIS a. Model Year

VEHICLE MUST BE CON.DUCTED 7: '07
ON A FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE SPEED b. Manufacturer Subcode
SYNCHRONIZED DYNAMOMETER.
OTHERWISE, A NON·LOADED TEST HNX: Honda
PROCEDURE MUST BE PERFORMED. c. Family Type
T:LDT
ACURA
HONDA MOTOR CO. , L1».
(2 of)
Rwe·AOO
d. Displacement Group
e. Sequence Characters
FEDERAL and CANADA

THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO U.S. EPA TIER 2 BIN 5 Evaporative Family:
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR
NEW LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS AND CALIFORNIA 7 HNX R 0140 BBB
REGULATIONS APPLICABLE TO 2007 MODEL YEAR
NEW LEV /I ULEV LIGHT-DUTY TRUCKS.
I1II1
abc de
a. Model Year
7: '07
b. Manufacturer Subeode
HNX: Honda
c. Family Type
R: Refueling
d. Canister Work Capacity
e. Sequence Characters
1-6 BACK
Lift and Support Points
NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components Floor Jack

such as suspension or the fuel tank from the rear of the
vehicle, first support the front of the vehicle with tall 1. When lifting the front of the vehicle, set the parking
safety stands. When substantial weight is removed brake. When lifting the rear of the vehicle, put the
from the rear of the vehicle,the center of gravity can shift lever in the P position.
change, causing the vehicle to tip forward on the lift.
2. Block the wheels that are not being lifted.
Vehicle Lift
3. Position the floor jack under the front jacking
1. Position the lift blocks (A) under the vehicle's front bracket (A) or the rear jacking bracket (B). Center
support points (B) and rear support points (C). the jacking bracket on the jack lift platform (C), and
jack up the vehicle high enough to fit the safety
stands under it.
A
c
2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle

gently to be sure it is firmly supported.
B
3. Raise the lift to its full height, and inspect the
c
vehicle support points for solid contact with the lift 4. Position the safety stands under the support points
blocks. and adjust them so the vehicle is level.
Safety Stands 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.
To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same

support points (B and C) as for a vehicle lift. Always use
safety stands when working on or under any vehicle
that is supported only by a jack.
BACK 1-7
General Information
Towing
If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional Front:

towing service. Never tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle with a rope or chain. It is very dangerous.
Emergency Towing
There are three popular methods of towing a vehicle.
Flat-bed Equipment - The operator loads the vehicle

on the back of a truck. This is the only way of
transporting the vehicle.
To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is

equipped with front towing hooks (A), front towing
hook slots (B), and rear tie down hook slots (e).
The towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the

vehicle onto the truck, and the tie down hook slots can A
be used to secure the vehicle to the truck.
Rear:
1-8 BACK
. Parts Marking
Wheel Lift Equipment - The tow truck uses two To deter vehicle theft, certain major components are
pivoting arms that go under the tires (front and rear) marked with the vehicle identification number (VIN).
and lift them off the ground. The other two wheels Original parts have self-adhesive labels. Replacement
remain on the ground. Never tow the vehicle with' body parts have generic self-adhesive labels. These
wheel lift equipment. labels should not be removed. The original engine or
transmission VIN plates are not transferable to the
Sling-type Equipment - The tow truck uses metal replacement engine or transmission.
cables with hooks on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension, and the cables lift that NOTE: Be careful not to damage the parts marking
end of the vehicle off the ground. The vehicle's labels during body repair. Mask the labels before
suspension and body can be seriously damaged if this repairing the part.
method of towing is attempted. This method of towing
the vehicle is unacceptable.
The only recommended way of towi ng the vehicle is on

a flat-bed truck.
INOTICE I
• Towing the vehicle with only two wheels on the
ground will damage parts of the SH-AWD system. If
the vehicle is damaged, it should be transported on a
flat-bed truck or trailer .
• Trying to lift or tow the vehicle by the bumpers will
cause serious damage. The bumpers are not
designed to support the vehicle's weight.
BACK 1-9
General Information
Precautions for Super Handling All Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) System
This vehicle is equipped with the Super Handling AU Wheel Drive (SH-AWD) system. The SH-AWD system distributes
driving torque between the front and rear wheels when accelerating and when wheel spin occurs.
The SH-AWD system does not have a manual switch to disable the AWD system. Whenever service work requires
spinning the front or rear wheels with the engine, always lift up and support the vehicle so all four wheels are off the
ground.
1-10 BACK
specs
Specifications
Standards and Service Limits

Engine Electrical ........................................................... 2-2
Engine Assembly .......................................................... 2-2
Cylinder Head ............................................................... 2-3
Engine Block ................................................................. 2-4
Engine Lubrication ....................................................... 2-5
Cooling System ............................................................ 2-6
Fuel and Emissions ...................................................... 2-6
Automatic Transmission and AfT Differential ........... 2-7
Rear Differential ............................................................ 2-16
Steering ..................................... ;................................... 2-16
Suspension ................................................................... 2-16
Brakes ..... ...... ........................ ...... ..........................•........ 2-17
Air Conditioning ........................................................... 2-17
Design Specifications
Dimensions .............•..................................................... 2-18
Weight ........................................................................... 2-18
Engine ............................................................................ 2-18
Starter ............................................................................ 2-18
Automatic Transmission .............................................. 2-18
Steering ......................................................................... 2-19
Suspension ................................................................... 2-19
Tires ............................................................................... 2-19
Wheel Alignment .......................................................... 2-19
Brakes ............................................................................ 2-19
Air Conditioning ........................................................... 2-19
Electrical Ratings .......................................................... 2-20
Body Specifications ...................................................... 2-21
Engme EI ect·
rica
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit
Ignition coil Rated voltage 12V
Firing order 1-3-4-2
Spark plug Type NGK: SllKR8A-S
Gap 0.7-0.8 mm (0.028-0.031 in.) --
Ignition timing At idle In N or P position 14±2°BTDC
Check the red mark
Drive belt Tension Auto-tensioner
Alternator Output At 13.5Vand 105A
normal engine
temperature
Coil (rotor) resistance At 68 "F (20 'C) 3.2 -4.0 Q
Slip ring 0.0. 14.4 mm (0.57 in.) 14.0 mm (0.55 in.)
Brush length 10.5 mm (0.41 in.) 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Brush spring tension 3.2 N (0.33 kgf, 0.7Ibf)
Starter Output 1.6kW
Commutator mica depth 0.40-0.50 mm (0.016-0.020 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
Commutator runout 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Commutator 0.0. 28.0-28.1 mm (1.10-1.11 in.) 27.5 mm (1.08 in.)
Brush length 11.1-11.5 mm (0.44-0.45 in.) 4.3 mm (0.17 in.)
Brush spring tension 13.7-17.7 N (1.40-1.80 kgf, 3.09-3.97Ibf)
Engme Assem blIV

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New
Compression Pressure Minimum 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm2, 135 psi)
Check the engine with the starter Maximum 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi)
cranking variation
2-2 BACK
c~JIn
r d er Head
Head Warpage ~
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Height 103.95-104.05 mm (4.093-4.096.in.) --
Camshaft End play, 0.05-0.20 mm (0.002-0.008 in.) 0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
Camshaft-to-holder oil clearance No.1 journal 0.030-0.069 mm (0.001-0.003 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
No.2, 3, 4,5 0.060-0.099 mm (0.002-0.004 in.) 0.15 mm (0.006 in.)
journals
Total runout 0.03 mm (0.001 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
Cam lobe height Intake, primary 33.925 mm (1.3356 in.). --
Intake, 29.638 mm (1.1668 in.) --
secondary
Exhaust 34.092 mm (1.3422 in.) --
Valve Clearance (cold) Intake 0.21-0.25 mm (0.008-0.010 in.) --
Exhaust 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.) --
StemO.D. Intake 5.475-5.485 mm (0.2156-0.2159 in.) 5.445 mm (0.214 in.)
Exhaust 5.450-5.460 mm (0.2146-0.2150 in.) 5.420 mm (0.213 in.)
Stem-to-guide clearance Intake ' 0.030-0.055 mm (0.0012-0.0022 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
"
Valve seat Width Intake 1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in.) 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
Exhaust 1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in.!' 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
Stem installed height Intake 44.0-44.5 mm (1.73-1.75 in.) 44.7 mm (1.76 in.)
Valve spring Free length Intake 47.61 mm (1.874 in.) --
Exhaust 49.64 mm (1.954 in.) '. --
Valveguide 1.0. Intake 5.515-5.530 mm (0.2171-0.2177 in.) 5.55 mm (0.219 in.)
Installed height Intake " 15.2-16.2 mm (0.598-0.638 in.) --
Exhaust 15.5-16.5 mm (0.610-0.650 in.) --
Rockerarm Arm-to-shaft clearance Intake 0.025-0.052 mm (0.0010-0.0020 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
BACK 2-3
Englne BI ock
Item Measurement OualHication Standard or New Service Limit
Block Warpage of deck 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
Bore diameter Aorl 86.010-86.020 mm (3.3862-3.3866 in.) 86.070 mm (3.3886 in.)
B or II 86.000-86,010 mm (3.3858-3.3862 in.) 86.070 mm (3.3886 in.)
Bore taper -- 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Reboring limit -- 0.25 mm (0,01 in.)
Piston Skirt 0.0. at 10 mm (0.4 in.) from I(slash) 85.980-85.990 mm (3.3850-3.3854 in.) 85.930 mm (3.3831 in.)
bottom of skirt B 85.970-85.980 mm (3.3846-3.3850 in.) 85.920 mm (3.3827 in.)
Clearance in cylinder 0.020-0.040 mm (0.0008-0.0016 in.) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
Ring groove width Top 1.535-1.565 mm (0.0604-0.0616 in.) 1.25mm (0.049 in.)
Second 1.230-1.240 mm (0.0484-0.0488 in.) 1.25mm (0.049 in.)
Oil 2.010-2.020 mm (0.0791-0.0795 in.) 2.05mm (0.081 in.)
Piston ring Ring-to-groove clearance Top 0.045-0.090 mm (0.0018-0.0035 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Second 0.040-0.065 mm (0.0016-0.0026 in.) 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
Oil 0.020-0.050 mm (0.0008-0.0020 in.) 0.08 mm (0.003 in.)
Ring end gap Top 0.20-0.30 mm (0.008-0.012 in.) 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
. Second 0.40-0.50 mm (0.016-0.020 in.) 0.75 mm (0.030 in.)
Oil 0.10-0.30 mm (0.004-0.012 in.) 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
Piston pin 0.0. 21.962-21.965 mm (0.8646-0.8648 in.) 21.953 mm (0.8643 in.)
Pin-to-piston clearance -0.005 to +0.002 mm 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.)
(-0.00020 to +0.00008 in.)
Connecting rod Pin-to-rod clearance 0.005-0.014 mm (0.0002-0.0006 in.) 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.)
. --
Small-end bore diameter 21.970-21.976 mm (0.8650-0.8652 in.)
Large-end bore diameter 51.0 mm (2.01 in.) --
End play installed on crankshaft 0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in.) 0.40 mm (0,016 in.)
Crankshaft Main journal diameter No.1 journal 54.984-55.008 mm (2.1648-2.1657 in.) --
No.2 journal
No.4 journal
No.5 journal
No.3 journal 54.976-55.000 mm (2.1644-2.1654 in.) --
Rod journal diameter 47.976-48.000 mm (1.8888-1.8898 in.) --
Rod/main journal taper 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0.010 mm (0.0004 in.)
Rod/main journal out-of-round 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. 0,010 mm (0.0004 in.)
End play 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0,014 in.) 0.45 mm (0,018 in.)
Runout 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) max. 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
Crankshaft Main bearing-to-journal oil clearance No. 1 journal 0.017-0.041 mm (0.0007-0.0016 in.) 0.050 mm (0.0020 in.)
bearing No.2 journal
No.4 journal
No.5 journal
No.3 journal 0.025-0.049 mm (0.0010-0.0019 in.) 0.055 mm (0.0022 in.)
Rod bearing clearance 0.033-0.064 mm (0.0013-0.0025 in.) 0.077 mm (0.0030 in.)
2-4 BACK
Engme Lb·
u rlcatlon
Engine oil Capacity Engine.overhaul 5.8 L (6.1 US qt)
Oil change 4.7 L (5.0 US qt)
including filter
Oil change 4.5 L (4.8 US qt)
without filter
Oil pump Inner-to-outer rotor clearance 0.10-0.17 mm (0.004-0.007 in.) 0.20 mm (0.008 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor clearance 0.035-0.090 mm (0.0014-0.0035 in.) 0.23 mm (0.009 in.)
Pump housing-to-outer rotor axial 0.030-0.075 mm (0.0012-0.0030 in.) 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
clearance
Balancer shafts, journal diameter No.1 journal, 19.938-19.950 mm (0.7850-0.7854 in.) 19.92 mm (0.784 in.)
front shaft
No.1 journal, 23.938-23.950 mm (0.9424-0.9429 in.) 23.92 mm (0.942 in.)
rear shaft
front and rear
shaft
Balancer shafts, journal taper 0.005 mm (0.0002 in.) max. --
Balancer shafts, end play Front 0.060-0.140 mm (0.0024-0.0055 in.) 0.14 mm (0.0055 in.)
Rear 0.060-0.140 mm (0.0024-0.0055 in.) 0.14 mm (0.0055 in.)
Balancer shafts, shaft-to-bearing No.1 journal, 0.050-0.082 mm (0.0020-0.0032 in.) 0.10 mm (0.004 in.)
clearance front shaft
rear shaft
front and rear
shaft
Balancer shaft bearings, 1.0. No.1 journal, 20.000-20.020 mm (0.7874-0.7882 in.) 20.03 mm (0.789 in.)
front shaft
rear shaft
front and rear
shaft
Relief valve, oil pressure with oil At idle 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm', 10 psi) min.
temperature at 176 "F (80 'C) At 3,000 rpm 300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm', 44 psi) min.
BACK 2-5
c00rrnQ SjYst em
Radiator Coolant capacities (including engine, Engine overhaul 8.4 L (2.22 US gal)
heater, hoses, and reservoir) Coolant change 7.0 L (1.85 US gal)
Use Acura Long Life Antifreezel
Coolant Type 2
Coolant reservoir Coolant capacity 0.7L (0.18 US gal)
Radiator cap Opening pressure 93-123 kPa (0.95-1.25 kgf/cm~, 14-18 pSi)
Thermostat Opening temperature Begins to open 169~176 "f (76-60 "C)
Fully open 194 "f (90 "C)
Valve lift at fully open 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Fuel and Emissions

Fuel pressure Pressure with fuel pressure regulator 320-370 kPa (3.3-3.8 kgf/cm', 47-54 psi)
regulator vacuum hose disconnected
Fuel tank Capacity 68 L (18 US gal)
Engine idle Idle speed without load In N or P position 720±50rpm
Idle speed with high electrical load In N or P position 720±50rpm
(AIC switch ON, temperature set to
Max Cool, blower fan on High, rear
window defogger ON, and headlights
on high beam)
2-6 BACK
Automatic Transmission and All Differential
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Umit
Automatic Capacity Fluid change 3.3 L (3.5 US qt)
transmission Use Acura ATF-Z1 Overhaul 7.8 L (8.2 US qt)
fluid
ATF pressure Line pressure At 2,000 rpm 950-1,010 kPa 900 kPa
in N or P position (9.7-10.3 kgf/cm', 140-146 psi) (9.2 kgf/cm', 130 psi)
5th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
in 5th gear (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm', 140-148 psi) (9.1 kgf/cm', 130 psi)
4th clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
in 4th gear (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm', 140-148 psi) (9.1 kgf/cm', 130 psi)
3rd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
in 3rd gear (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm', 140-148 psi) (9.1 kgf/cm', 130 psi)
2nd clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
in 2nd gear (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm', 140-148 psi) (9.1 kgf/cm', 130 psi)
1st clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
in 1st gear (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm', 140-148 psi) (9.1 kgf/cm', 130 psi)
1st-hold clutch pressure At 2,000 rpm 760-830 kPa 710 kPa
in 1st gear (7.7-8.5 kgf/cm', 110-120 psi) (7.2 kgf/cm', 100 psi)
Torque converter Stall speed 1,950 rpm 1,800-2,100 rpm
Check with vehicle on level ground
Clutch Clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance 1st -- 1.15-1.35 mm
(0.045-0.053 in.)
2nd -- 1.00-1.02 mm
(0.039-0.047 in.)
3rd -- 0.8-1.0mm
(0.031-0.039 in.)
4th,5th -- 0.75-0.95 mm
(0.030-0.037 in.)
1st-hold -- 0.6-1.0mm
(0.024-0.039 in.)
Clutch return spring free length 1st 68.3 mm (2.69 in.) 66.3 mm (2.61 in.)
2nd 48.3 mm (1.90 in.) 46.3 mm (1.82 in.)
3rd 52.0 mm (2.05 in.) 50.0 mm (1.97 in.)
4th 37.4 mm (1.47 in.) 35.4 mm (1.39 in.)
5th 50.0 mm (1.97 in.) 48.0 mm (1.89 in.)
Clutch disc thickness 1.94 mm (0.076 in.) --
Clutch plate thickness 1st 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) When discolored
2nd 1.8 mm (0.071 in.) When discolored
3rd 2.0 mm (0.079 in.) When discolored
4th,5th 1.6 mm (0.063 in.) When discolored
1st-hold 1.8 mm (0.071 in.) When discolored
1st clutch end plate thickness Mark 1 3.1 mm (0.122 in.) When discolored
Mark2 3.2 mm (0.126 in.) When discolored
MarkS 3.S mm (0.150 in.) When discolored
1st-hold clutch plate B thickness 5.0 mm (0.197 in.) When discolored
(cont'd)
BACK 2-7
Automatic Transmission and AfT Differential (cont'd)
Clutch (cont'd) 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch end plate Mark 1 2.1 mm (0.083 in.) When discolored
thickness Mark 2 2.2 mm (0.087 in.) When discolored
Mark 4 2.4 mm (0.094 in.) When discolored
Stator shaft 1.0. at needle bearing contact area Torque converter 27.000-27.021 mm (1.063-1.064 in.) When worn or
side damaged
ATF pump side 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.) --
1.0. at mainshaft sealing ring contact 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.) 31.05 mm (1.222 in.)
area
ATF pump Gear-to-body thrust clearance 0.03-0.06 mm (0.001-0.002 in.) 0.07 mm (0.003 in.)
Gear-to-body clearance Drive gear 0.210-0.265 mm (0.008-0.010 in.) --
Driven gear 0.070-0.125 mm (0.003-0.005 in.) --
Driven gear 1.0. 14.016-14.034 mm (0.5518-0.5525 in.) When worn or
damaged
Driven gear shaft 0.0. 13.980-13.990 mm (0.5504-0.5508 in.) When worn or
damaged
Reverse shift Fork finger thickness 5.90-6.00 mm (0.220-0.236 in.) 5.4 mm (0.213 in.)
fork
Park gear and -- -- When worn or
pawl damaged
Regulator valve Shift fork shaft bore 1.0. 14.000-14.010 mm (0.5512-0.5516 in.) --
body Shift fork shaft/servo valve bore 1.0. 37.000-37.039 mm (1.4567-1.4582 in.) 37.045 mm (1.4585 in.)
Mainshaft sealing ring contact 1.0. 31.000-31.025 mm (1.220-1.221 in.) 31.05 mm (1.222 in.)
Main valve body Third shaft sealing ring contact 1.0. 35.000-35.025 mm (1.3780-1.3789 in.) 35.05 mm (1.3799 in.)
ATF guide collar Secondary shaft sealing ring contact 29.000-29.021 mm (1.1417-1.1426 in.) 29.05 mm (1.1437 in.)
1.0.
Mainshaft Diameter at stator shaft needle bearing 22.984-23.000 mm (0.9049-0.9055 in.) When worn or
contact area damaged
5th gear collar diameter at needle 39.975-39.991 mm (1.5738-1.5744 in.) When worn or
bearing contact area damaged
5th gear collar length 48.7-48.8 mm (1.917-1.921 in.) --
5th gear collar flange thickness 5.15-5.30 mm (0.203-0.209 in.) When worn or
damaged
5th gear 1.0. 46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116 in.) When worn or
damaged
5th gear axial clearance 0.10-0.22 mm (0.004-0.009 in.) --
Sealing ring thickness 1.90-1.96 mm (0.074-0.077 in.) 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
Sealing ring groove width 2.025-2.060 mm (0.080-0.081 in.) 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
2-8 BACK
Counters haft Diameter at bearing contact area Torque converter 40.505-40.. 515 mm (1.5947-1.5951 in.) When worn or damaged
housing bearing
5th gear 34.975-34.991 mm (1.3770-1.3776 in.) When worn or damaged
Diameter of 2nd gear at needle 61.975-61.991 mm (2.2400-2.2406 in.) When worn or damaged
bearing contact area
Reverse gear collar O.D. 39.979-40.000mm (1.5740-1.5748 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse selector hub O.D. 55.885-55.900 mm (2.200-2.201 in.) When worn or damaged
Cotter thickness 4th gear 1.99-2.02 mm (0.078-0.080 in.) --
2nd gear 7.74-7.52 mm (0.295-0.296 in.) --
1.0. of gears 5th gear 41.000·-41.016 mm (1.6142-1.6148 in.) When worn or damaged
Idler gear 70.000-70.019 mm (2.7559-2.7567 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse gear 46.000-46.016 mm (1.8110-1.8116 in.) When worn or damaged
Axial clearance of gears 2nd gear 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-:-0.0016 in.) --
5th gear 0.12-0.27 mm (0.0047-0.0106 in.) --
Idler gear 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.) --
Reverse gear 0.10-0.25 mm (0.0039-0.0098 in.) --
61 mm washer thickness A 1.525 mm (0.0600 in.) When worn or damaged
B 1.505 mm (0.0593 in.) When worn or damaged
C 1.485 mm (0.0585 in.) When worn or damaged
D 1.465 mm (0.0577 in.) When worn or damaged
E 1.445 mm (0.0569 in.) When worn or damaged
F 1.425 mm (0.0561 in.) When worn or damaged
G 1.405 mm (0.0553 in.) When worn or damaged
50.8 mm washer thickness A 1.91 mm (0.0752 in.) When worn or damaged
H 2.05 mm (0.0807 in.) When worn or damaged
I 2.07 mm (0.0815 in.) When worn or damaged
J 2.09 mm (0.0823 in.) When worn or damaged
K 2.11 mm (0.0831 in.) When worn or damaged
L 2.13 mm (0.0839 in.) When worn or damaged
M 2.15 mm (0.0846 in.) When worn or damaged
N 2.17 mm (0.0854 in.) When worn or damaged
0 2.19 mm (0.0862 in.) When worn or damaged
p 2.21 mm (0.0870 in.) When worn or damaged
Q 2.23 mm (0.0878 in.) When worn or damaged
R 2.25 mm (0.0886 in.) When worn or damaged
S 2.27 mm (0.0894 in.) When worn or damaged
T 2.29 mm (0.0902 in.) When worn or damaged
U 2.31 mm (0.0909 in.) When worn or damaged
V 2.33 mm (0.0917 in.) When worn or damaged
W 2.35 mm (0.0925 in.) When worn or damaged
X 2.37 mm (0.0933 in.) When worn or damaged
y 2.39 mm (0.0941 in.) When worn or damaged
Z 2.41 mm (0.0949 in.) When worn or damaged
AA 2.43 mm (0.0957 in.) When worn or damaged
AB 2.45 mm (0.0965 in.) When worn or damaged
Thrust washer thickness 3.00 mm (0.118 in.) When worn or damaged
(cont'd)
BACK 2-9
Secondary shaft Diameter at bearing contact area 2nd gear 43.986-43.999 mm (1.7317-1.7322 in.) When worn or damaged
Torque converter 32.002-32.015 mm (1.2599-1.2604 in.) When worn or damaged
housing bearing
Torque converter 28.592-28.608 mm (1.1257-1.1263 in.) When worn or damaged
housing bearing
(shaft end side)
Diameter of 1st gear collar at 38.975-38.991 mm (1.5344-1.5351 in.) When worn or damaged
needle bearing contact area
1.0. of gears 1st gear 44.000-44.013 mm (1.7323-1.7328 in.) When worn or damaged
2nd gear 50.00-50.02 mm (1.9685-1.9693 in.) When worn or damaged
Axial clearance of gears 1st gear 0.100-0.130 mm (0.0039-0.0051 in.) --
2nd gear 0.060-0.228 mm (0.0024-0.0090 in.) --
52 mm thrust washer thickness M 2.405 mm (0.095 in.) When worn or damaged
A 2.705 mm (0.106 in.) When worn or damaged
1st gear collar length 63.3-63.4 mm (2.4921-2.4961 in.) --
ATF feed pipe 0.0. 1st clutch 11.47-11.48 mm (0.4516-0.4520 in.) 11.45 mm (0.4508 in.)
1st-hold clutch 5.97-5.98 mm (0.2350-0.2354 in.) 5.95 mm (0.2343 in.)
Feed pipe bushing 1.0. 1st clutch 11.518-11.530 mm (0.4535-0.4539 in.) 11.545 mm (0.4545 in.)
1st-hold clutch 6.018-6.030 mm (0.2369-0.2374 in.) 6.045 mm (0.2380 in.)
2-10 BACK
Secondary shaft 65 mm thrust shim thickness OA 0.80 mm (0.031 in.) When worn or damaged
(cont'd) A 0.84 mm (0.033 in.) When worn or damaged
o. 1.40 mm (0.055 in.) When worn or damaged
p 1.44 mm (0.057 in.) When worn or damaged
AB 1.92 mm (0.076 in.) When worn or damaged
AC 1.96 mm (0.077 in.) When worn or damaged
AD 2.00 mm (0.079 in.) When worn or damaged
AE 2.04 mm (0.080 in.) When worn or damaged
AF 2.08 mm (0.082 in.) When worn or damaged
AG 2.12 mm (0.083 in.) When worn or damaged
AH 2.16 mm (0.085 in.) When worn or damaged
AI 2.20 mm (0.087 in.) When worn or damaged
AJ 2.24 mm (0.088 in.) When worn or damaged
AK 2.28 mm (0.090 in.) When worn or damaged
AL 2.32 mm (0.091 in.) When worn or damaged
(cont'd)
BACK
Intermediary I.D. of 3rd gear 36.000-36.016 mm (1.4173-1.4179 in.) When worn or damaged
shaft Axial clearance of 3rd gear 0.005-0.045 mm (0.0002-0.0018 in.) --
Cotter thickness 2.99-3.02 mm (0.1177-0.1189 in.) --
53 mm splined washer thickness A 3.995 mm (0.1573 in.) When worn or damaged
26.5 mm washer thickness A 1.05 mm (0.041 in.) When worn or damaged
Reverse idler Gear shaft O.D. 13.99-14.00 mm (0.5508-0.5512 in.) When worn or damaged
gear I.D. oftransmission housing of 14.006-14.024 mm (0.5514-0.5521 in.) - -
gear shaft contact area
I.D. 18.007-18.020 mm (0.7089-0.7094 in.) When worn or damaged
Axial clearance 0.07-0.38 mm (0.003-0.015 in.) --
Thrust washer thickness Transmission 0.97-1.05 mm (0.038-0.041 in.) --
housing
Holder side 0.97-1.05 mm (0.038-0.041 in.) --
2-12 BACK
Wire Diameter 0.0. FreeLength No. of Coil
Main valve body Torque converter check valve spring 1.1 mm 8.6mm 35.0mm 12.6
spring (see page (0.043 in.) (0.339 in.) (1.378 in.)
14-330) Lock-up shift valve spring 1.0mm 6.6mm 35.5mm 18.2
(0.039 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.398 in.)
Shift valve E spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 42.4mm 17.6
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.669 in.)
Shift valve A spring 0.9mm 6.6mm 50.5mm 23.3
(0.035 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.988 in.)
Shift valve B spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Modulator valve spring 1.6mm 10.4mm 33.5mm 9.8
(0.063 in.) (0.409 in.) (1.319 in.)
CPC valve A spring 0.7mm 6.1 mm 17.8mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Servo control valve spring 0.9mm 9.6mm 30.2mm 8.4
(0.035 in.) (0.378 in.) (1.189 in.)
Lubrication control valve spring 0.9mm 8.7mm 25.0mm 7.2
(0.035 in.) (0.343 in.) (0.984 in.)
Lock-up timing valve spring 0.6mm 6.6mm 30.8mm 11.1
(0.024 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.213 in.)
Relief valve spring 1.0mm 9.6mm 28.1 mm 7.7
(0.039 in.) (0.378 in.) (1.106 in.)
Secondary valve CPC valve C spring 0.7mm 6.1mm 17.8mm 7.9
body spring (0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
(see page Shift valve D spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 42.4mm 17.6
14-332) (0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.669 in.)
Reverse CPC valve spring 0.8mm 6.1 mm 24.4mm 14.6
(0.031 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.961 in.)
Shift valve C spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
CPC valve B spring 0.7mm 6.1mm 17.8mm 7.9
(0.028 in.) (0.240 in.) (0.701 in.)
Reverse control valve spring 0.8mm 6.6mm 49.1 mm 21.7
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.933 in.)
Regulator valve 3rd accumulator spring 3.1 mm 19.6mm 41.4mm 5.5
(see page Cooler check valve spring 0.9mm 6.7mm 31.5mm 14.2
14-333) (0.035 in.) (0.264 in.) (1.240 in.)
Lock-up control valve spring 0.7mm 6.6mm 42.9mm 14.2
(0.028 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.689 in.)
0.8mm 6.6mm 44.3mm 25.5
(0.031 in.) (0.260 in.) (1.744 in.)
Regulator valve spring B 1.4mm 8.8mm 44.0mm 12.0
(0.055 in.) (0.346 in.) (1.732 in.)
Regulator valve spring A 1.85mm 14.7 mm 86.9mm 16.2
(0.073 in.) (0.579 in.) (3.421 in.)
Stator reaction spring 5.5mm 37.4mm 30.3mm 2.1
(0.217 in.> (1.472 in.) (1.193 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 2-13
Wire Diameter 0.0. FreeLength No. of Coil
Accumulator 4th accumulator spring. 3.3mm 19.6mm 39.1 mm 5.8
(see page 2nd accumulator spring 3.1 mm 19.6mm 53.4mm 7.5
14-334) (0.122 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.102 in.)
1st accumulator spring A 2.3mm 19.6mm 60.8mm 9.5
(0.091 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.394 in.)
1st accumulator spring B 2.5mm 12.8 mm 46.0mm· 9.5
(0.098 in.) (0.504 in.) (1.811 in.)
5th accumulator spring A 2.4mm 19.6mm 65.5mm 12.0
(0.106 in.) (0.772 in.) (2.579 in.)
5th accumulator spring B 2.4mm 13.2 mm 50.5mm 10.1
(0.094 in.) (0.520 in.) (1.988 in.)
1st-hold accumulator spring 2.0mm 13.1 mm 42.9mm 9.8
(0.079 in.) (0.516 in.) (1.689 in.)

AJT differential Pinion shaft contact area 1.0. 18.000-18.025 mm --
carrier (0.7087-0.7096 in.)
Carrier-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.013-0.054 mm 0.1 mm (0.004 in.)
(0.0005-0.0021 in.)
Oriveshaft contact area 1.0. 30.025-30.055 mm --
(1.182-1.183 in.)
Carrier-to-driveshaft clearance 0.045-0.096 mm 0.13 mm (0.005 in.)
(0.002-0.004 in.)
Carrier-to-intermediate shaft clearance 0.080-0.126 mm --
(0.003-0.005 in.)
Tapered roller bearing starting torque For new bearing 3.9-5.1 N·m Adjust
(preload) (40-52 kgf·cm, 35-45 Ibf·in.)
For used bearing 3.6-4.8N·m Adjust
(37-49 kgf·cm, 32-43Ibf·in.)
AJT differential Backlash 0.4-1.3 mm (0.016-0.051 in.) --
pinion gear 1.0. 18.042-18.066 mm --
(0.7103-0.7113 in.)
Pinion gear-to-pinion shaft clearance 0.055-0.095 mm 0.12 mm (0.005 in.)
(0.0022-0.0037 in.)
2-14 BACK
Transfer output Diameter at bearing contact area Transmission 21.977-21.990 mm (0.8652-0.8657 in.) 21.92 mm (0.8630 in.)
shaft housing side
Torque converter 40.002-40.018 mm (1.5749-1.5755 in.) 39.95 mm (1.5728 in.)
housing side
Axial clearance 0-0.39 mm (0-0.015 in.) --
28.5 mm thrust washer thickness A 1.82 mm (0.0717 in.) When worn or damaged
P 2.12 mm (0.0835 in.) When worn or damaged
Transfer Capacity Fluid change 0.43 L (0.45 us qt)
assembly fluid Hypoid Gear Oil Overhaul 0.45 L (0.48 us qt)
API classified GL4 or GL5 only
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
Transfer Diameter of transfer hypoid drive Transfer cover 50.002-50.018 mm (1.9686-1.9692 in.) 49.95 mm (1.9665 in.)
assembly gear/shaft assembly at tapered side
roller bearing contact area Transfer gear 24.987-25.000 mm (0.9837-0.9843 in.) 24.93 mm (0.9815 in.)
side
Diameter of transfer output shaft Transfer gear 40.002-40.018 mm (1.5749-1.5755 in.) 39.95 mm (1.5728 in.)
(hypoid gear) at tapered roller side
bearing contact area Companion 27.975-27.990 mm (1.1014-1.1020 in.) 27.92 mm (1.0992 in.)
flange side
Transfer gear backlash 0.06-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in.) Adjust
Tapered roller bearing total 2.75-4.65 N·m Adjust
starting torque (preload) (28.0-47.4 kgf·cm, 24.3-41.1Ibf·in.)
BACK 2-15
Rear Differential
Rear differential Capacity Fluid change 2.53 L (2.67 US qt)
fluid Use Acura ATF-Z1 Overhaul 2.77 L (2.93 US qt)
8teermg
Steering wheel Rotational play measured at outside 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in.)
edge with engine running
Starting load measured at outside 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)
edge with engine running
Gearbox Angle of rack guide screw loosened 15±5°
from locked position
Pump Output pressure with shut-off valve B,150-B,850 kPa (83-90 kgf/cm', 1,1BO-1,280 psi)
closed
Power steering Capacity Reservoir 0.30 L (0.32 US qt)
fluid Use Acura Power Steering Fluid System overhaul 0.9 L (0.96 US qt)
s uspenslon
Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New I Service Limit
Wheel alignment Camber Front 0 010 '±45 ,
Rear -1°00'±45'
Camber Front 0 030 '
(Maximum difference left to right)
Caster Front 2°57'±1°
Total toe-in Front 0±2 mm (O±O.OB in.)
Rear 2.5±2 mm (0.OB2±0.OB in.)
Front wheel turning angle Inward 35024'±2 0
Outward 30 030' (reference)
Wheel Runout Axial 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.) 1 2.0 mm (O.OB in.)
Radial 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.) 11.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Wheel bearing End play Front 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
Rear 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
nre Front and rear size P235/55R1B 99V M+S
Spare tire size T165/BOD17 104M
Pressure Front and rear 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm', 32 psi)
Spare 420 kPa (4.2 kgf/cm', 60 psi)
2-16 BACK
Brakes
Parking brake Distance traveled when pedal pressed 6to 7 clicks
with 294 N (30 kgf, 66lbf) of force
Drum 1.0. 199.9-200.0 mm (7.870-7.874 in.) 21 mm (7.913 in.)
Shoe lining thickness 3.2 mm (0.126 in.) 1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Brake pedal Pedal height (carpet removed) 165 mm (6 1/2 in.)
Free play 1-5 mm (1/16-3/16 in.)
Master cylinder Piston-to-pushrod clearance Omm(Oin.)
Brake disc Thickness Front 27.8-28.1 mm (1.09-1.11 in.) 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
Rear 8.9-9.1 mm (0.35-0.36 in.) 7.5 mm (0.30 in.)
Runout Front -- 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.)
Parallelism -- 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.)
Brake pad Pad thickness Front 11.5-12.2 mm (0.45-0.48 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Rear 8.3-9.0 mm (0.33-0.35 in.) 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
A"Ir Con dOt"

I lomng
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity of system 450-500 g (15.9-17.6 oz)
Refrigerant oil Type SP-l0 (pIN 38897-P13-A01AH or 38899-P13-A01)
Capacity of components Condenser 40 mL (1/3 fl·oz)
Evaporator 40 mL (1 1/3 fl·oz)
Each line and 10 mL (113 fl·oz)
hose
Compressor 75-85 mL (2 1/2-2516 fl·oz)
Compressor Field coil resistance At 68 'F (20 'C) 3.15 -8.45 Q
Pulley-to-armature plate clearance 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.026 in.)
BACK 2-17
Item Measurement Qualification Specification

DIMENSIONS Overall length 4,590 mm (180.7 in.)
Overall width 1,870 mm (73.6 in.)
Overall height 1,655 mm (65.2 in.)
Wheelbase 2,650 mm (104.3 in.)
Track Front 1,572 mm (61.9 in.)
Rear 1,590 mm (62.6 in.)
Seating capacity Five (5)
WEIGHT Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) 2,220 kg (4,894Ibs)
ENGINE Type Water cooled, 4-stroke DOHC i-VTEC engine, with turbo
charger
Cylinder arrangement Inline 4-cylinder, transverse
Bore and stroke 86 x 99 mm (3.39 x 3.90 in.)
Displacement 2,300 em' (140.4 cu in.)
Compression ratio 8.8
Valve train Chain drive, DOHC i-VTEC 4 valves per cylinder
Lubrication system Forced, wet sump, with trochoid pump
Oil pump displacement At 12,000 pump 68 L (72 US qt)/minute
rpm
Water pump displacement At 6,000 pump 120 L (127 US qt)/minute
rpm
Fuel required Premium UNLEADED gasoline with 91 Pump Octane Number
or higher
STARTER Type Gear Reduction
Nominal output 1.6kW
Nominal voltage 12 V
Hour rating 30 seconds
Direction of rotation Clockwise as viewed from gear end
AUTOMATIC Type Electronically controlled automatic, 5-speed forward, 1 reverse,
TRANSMISSION 3 elemnt torque converter with lock-up clutch
Primary reduction Direct 1:1
Gear ratio 1st 2.697
2nd 1.606
3rd 1.071
4th 0.766
5th 0.612
Reverse 1.889
Secondary reduction Gear ratio 1.238
Final reduction Type Single helical gear
Gear ratio 4.533
2-18 BACK
STEERING Type . Hydraulic power-assisted rack and pinion
Overall ratio 15.6
Turns, lock-to-Iock 2.76
Steering wheel diameter 380 mm (15.0 in.)
SUSPENSION Type Front· Independent McPherson with stabilizer, coil spring
Rear Independent double wishbone with stabilizer, coil spring
Shock absorber Front Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
Rear Telescopic, hydraulic, nitrogen gas-filled
TIRES Size of front and rear tires P235/55R18 99V M+S
Size of spare T165/80D17 104M
WHEEL Camber Front 0°10'
ALIGNMENT Rear -1 °00'
Caster Front 2 °57'
Total toe-in Front Omm (0 in.)
. Rear 2.5 mm (0.082 in.)
BRAKES Type of service brake Front Power-assisted self-adjusting ventilated disc
Rear Power-assisted self-adjusting solid disc
Type of parking brake Mechanical actuating, rear wheels
Pad friction surface area Front 60.5 cm' (9.38 sq in.) x 2
Rear 27.9 cm' (4.32 sq in.) x 2
AIR Compressor Type Scroll
CONDITIONING Capacity 97.9 mL (5.97 cu in.)/rev.
Maximum speed 10,000 rpm
Lubricant 75 mL (2 1/2 fl·oz)
capacity
Lubricant type SP-10
Condenser Type Corrugated fin
Evaporator Type Corrugated fin
Blower Type Stabilized swirling flow
Motor type 225 W/12 V
Speed control Infinite variable
Maximum 490 m' (17.276 cu ft)/h
capacity
Temperature control Air-mix type
Compressor clutch Type Dry, single plate, poly V-belt drive
Electrical power 42 W maximum at 12 V
consumption at
68 'f (20 "C)
Refrigerant Type HFC-134a (R-134a)
Capacity 450-500 g (15.9-17.6 oz)
(cont'd)
BACK 2-19

ELECTRICAL Battery 12 V-65 Ah/20 HR (12 V-52 Ah/5 HR)
RATINGS Fuses Under-hood fuse 100 A, SO A, 50 A, 40 A, 30 A, 20 A, 15 A, 10 A, 7.5 A
/relay box
Auxiliary under- 7.5A
hood fuse/relay
box
Under-dash fuse/ 30A,20A, 15A, 10A, 7.5A
relay box
Light bulbs Headlight high 12V-60W(HB3)
beam
Headlight low 12 V-35 W (D2S) HID
beam
Fog light 12 V-55 W (H11)
Front parking! 3/2.2 cp (two filaments) Amber Color
turn signal lights
Front side 3cp
marker lights
Side turn signal 12V-LED
lights
Rear turn signal 21W
lights
Brake/Taillights 12 V-21/5 W (two filaments)
Lid taillights 3cp
Rear side marker 3cp
light
High-mount 16W
brake light
Back-up lights 21W
License plate 3cpx2
light
Ceiling light SW
Front individual 5W
map lights
Vanity mirror 2W
lights
Door courtesy 2 cp
lights
Cargo area light 5W
AfT gear position 1.4W
console light
Glove box light 1.4W
Console box 1.4W
light
Gauge lights 12 V-LED (non-replaceable)
Indicator lights 12 V-LED, 14 V-0.56 W, 14V-0.S4 W
2-20 BACK
Body SpeCI·f·Ications
1,572 mm 161 •9·In. )

1,870 mm 173.6 in.)
i
E
E
ItI
..~
2,650 mm 1104.3 in.) 1,590 mm 162.6 in.)
4,590 mm 1180.7 in.)
BACK 2-21
BACK
Maintenance
Lubricants and Fluids ....................................... 3-2
Maintenance Minder
General Information (Information Display) ................ 3-4
General Information (Multi-Information Display) ...... 3-7
Maintenance Main Items ............................................. 3-10
Maintenance Sub Items ............................................... 3-11
Lubricants and Fluids
For details of the lubrication points and type of lubricants to be applied, refer to the illustrated index and various work procedures (such as
Assembly/Reassembly, Replacement, Overhaul, Installation, etc.) contained in each section.
ADDlication Lubricant or Fluid

A Engine Motor Oil:
American Honda: Always use Mobil1® PIN 5W-30-MB1-OOO or an
equivalent oil that meets the Acura HTO-06 standard. Not all synthetic
oils will meet this standards.
Honda Canada: Acura 5W-30 Full Synthetic PIN CA67007 or an
equivalent oil that meets the Acura HTO-06 standard. Not all synthetic
oils will meet this standards.
B Automatic transmission Acura Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1):
American Honda PIN OB200-9001A
Honda Canada PIN CA66689
Always use Acura ATF-Z1. Using a non-ACURA ATF can affect shift
quality.
C Transfer assembly Hypoid Gear Oil GL4 or GL5
Use a SAE90 or SAE BOW-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API classified GL
4 or GL5 only.
Viscosity SAE 90: above 0 "F ( -18 "C)
SAE BOW-90: below 0 "F ('-18 "C)
0 Rear differential Acura Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF-Z1):
American Honda PIN OB200-9001A
Honda Canada PIN CA66689
E Brake system (including VSA line) Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid: PIN OB798-900BA
Always useAcura DOT 3 Brake Fluid. Using a non-Acura brake fluid can
cause corrosion and decrease the life of the svstem.
F Brake booster clevis Multipurpose Grease
G Battery terminals
H Pedal linkage
I Fuel fill door
J Hood hinges and hood latch
K Tailgate hinges
L Cal~erQiston boot calioer Dins and boots Honda Silicone Grease: PIN OBC30-B0234M
M Door checker Molvkote Grease 44MA
N Power steering system Acura Power Steering Fluid: PIN OB206-9002A
Always use Acura Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause increased wear
and Door steering in cold weather.
0 Air conditioning compressor Compressor Oil: NO-OIL B (P/N 3B897-PR7-A01AH or 3BB99-P13-A01)
for refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a)
P Cooling Svstem Acura Long Life Antifreeze/coolant tvp~2: PIN OL999-9011A
API CERTIFICATION SEAL Required Engine Oil

Engine oil viscosity for ambient temperature ranges
-30 -20 -10 o 10 20 30 40·C
3-2 BACK
N A c J H o
J---r--
P------t-~I
E
L F M M L
BACK 3-3
Maintenance Minder
General Information (Information Display)

Maintenance Display
The Maintenance Minder is an important feature of the information display (RDX model). The RDX's onboard
computer (PCM) calculates the remaining engine oil and automatic transmission fluid life. The system also displays
the code for other scheduled maintenance items needing service.
MAINTENANCE
MINDER INDICATOR
INFORMATION DISPLAY
3-4 BACK
Service Information 3. When the ignition switch is inthe ON (II) position,
and the remaining engine oil life is 1 % to 5 %, the
1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is shown as a message "SERVICE" (A) is displayed along with
percentage in the information display. engine oil life and the same maintenance item
To see the current engine oil life, turn the ignition code(s).
switch to the ON (II) position, then push and release
the Select/Reset Knob repeatedly until the engine
oil life displays.
4. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,

and the remaining engine oil life is 0 %, the engine
oil life indicator (A) blinks.
2. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position, Pressing the Select/Reset Knob cancels the display,
and the remaining engine oil life (A) is 6 % to 15 %, but the maintenance minder indicator stays on.
the remaining engine oil life and other scheduled
maintenance item(s) needing service are displayed.
The maintenance minder indicator (B) also comes
on when the engine oil life is 15 % or less.
To cancel the display and the indicator, press the
Select/Reset Knob .
• Complete list of maintenance main items (C)

(see page 3-10) .
• Complete list of maintenance sub items (0)
(see page 3-11).
A
1 B
OUTSIPE C
-,-(,-
i....... E "H
,e,- SERVICE ~
=,-,=,C'
I -, -, I ,,- ,- •
~
AB IC
B
I
OIL LlF~,Z'
'---J I :J
(cont'd)
BACK 3-5
Maintenance Minder
General Information (Information Display) (cont'd)

5. If the indicated maintenance is not done, the engine Resetting the Maintenance Information
oil life indicator shows a negative mileage, for Display
example" -10," on the display.
If The negative mileage is between 0 and -9, the NOTE:
indicator is displayed for only a few seconds when • The vehicle must be stopped to reset the display.
the iginition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. • If a required service is done and the displClY is not
The negative mileage (A) remains displayed after the reset, or if the maintenance display is reset without
vehicle is driven more than 10 miles (for USA doing the service, the system will not show the
models) or 10km (for Canada models) after 0 % oil proper maintenance timing. This can lead to serious
life is reached, and the display cannot be cancelled. mechanical problems because there will be no
This means the indicated maintenance item(s) accurate record of when the required maintenance is
should have been done more than 10 miles (or needed.
10 km) ago. • The engine oil life and the maintenance items can be
reset independently onlywiththe HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) position.
2. Push and release the Select/Reset Knob repeatedly

until the engine oil life indicator is displayed.
3. Press and hold the Select/Reset Knob for about

10 seconds. The engine oil life indicator and the
maintenance item code(s) will blink.
NOTE: If you are resetting the display when the

engine oil life is more than 15 %, make sure the
maintenance item(s) requiring service are done
before resetting the display.
4. Press and hold the Select/Reset Knob for another

5 seconds. The maintenance item code(s) will
disappear, and the engine oil life will reset to
"100."
3-6 BACK
General Information (Multi-information Display)
Maintenance Display
The Maintenance Minder is an important feature of the multi-information display (RDX with Technology Package).
Based on engine operating conditions and accumulated engine revolutions, the RDX's onboard computer (PCM)
calculates the remaining engine oil and automatic transmission fluid life. The system also displays the codes for other
scheduled maintenance items needing service.
Speed Meter:
SYSTEM MESSAGE
INDICATOR
MULTI-INFORMATION
DISPLAY
(cont'd)
BACK 3-7
Maintenance Minder
General Information (Multi-information Display) (cont'd)
Service Information 3. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,

1. The remaining engine oil life (A) is shown as a maintenance system message "SERVICE DUE
percentage on the multi-information display. NOW" is displayed along with the same
To see the current engine oil life, turn the ignition maintenance item code(s). If the maintenance
switch to the ON (II) position, then push and release system message display is cancelled, a "SERVICE"
the Sel/Reset Button repeatedly until the engine oil message appears.
life displays.
2. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,

remaining engine oil life and other scheduled
maintenance item(s) needing service are displayed.
The maintenance system message "SERVICE DUE 4. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,
SOON" (A) also come on. To cancel the message, and the remaining engine oil life is 0 %, the
press the Info Button. The display continues to maintenance system message "SERVICE PAST
show the remaining engine oil life (B) and the DUE" is displayed along with the same
message indicator (C) until it is reset . maintenance item code(s).
• Complete list of maintenance main items (D)

(see page 3-10) .
• Complete list of maintenance sub items (E)
(see page 3-11).
i
c
t
D E
3-8 BACK
5. If the indicated maintenance is not done, the Resetting the Maintenance-Information
"SERVICE PAST DUE" message shows a negative Display
mileage, for example "-10," on the display. If the
negative mileage is between 0 and -9, the NOTE:
message is displayed for only a few seconds when • The vehicle must be stopped to reset the display.
the ignition switch is turned to the ON (II) position. • If a required service is done and the display is not
The negative mileage (A) remains displayed after reset, or if the maintenance display is reset without
the vehicle is driven more than 10 miles (for USA doing the service, the system will not show the
models) or 10 km (for Canada models) after 0 % oil proper maintenance timing. This can lead to serious
life is reached, and the display cannot be cancelled. mechanical problems because there will be no
This means the indicated maintenance item(s) accurate record of when the required maintenance is
should have been done more than 10 miles (or needed.
10 km) ago. • The engine oil life and the maintenance items can be
reset independently only with the HDS.
---A
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (II) position.
2. If system message(s) are displayed, press the Info

Button to cancel the display.
3. Push and release the Sel/Reset Button repeatedly

until the engine oil life indicator is displayed.
4. Press and hold the Sel/Reset Button for about 10

seconds, the "OIL LIFE RESET" mode display
appears.
NOTE:
• If you are resetting the display when the engine
oil life is more than 15 %, make sure any
maintenance item(s) requiring service are done
before resetting the display.
• To cancel the "OIL LIFE RESET" mode, press the
Info Button repeatedly until the"CANCEL"
indicator displayed, then press the Sel/Reset
Button.
5. Press Info Button repeatedly until the "RESET"

indicator is displayed, then press the Sel/Reset
Button.
The maintenance item code(s) will disappear, and
the engine oil life will reset to"100."
, ~, Ave.FUEL A"
,~
Oil LIFE
, .,~ 10Qyo.
BACK 3-9
Maintenance Minder
Maintenance Main Items
If the message "SERVICE" or "SERVICE DUE NOW"does not appear mor~ than 12 months after the display is reset,
change the engine oil every year.
NOTE:
• Replace the brake fluid every 3 years. Independent of the maintenance messages inthe information display.
• Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).
· Ad'
II ust th eva Ives d
Symbol
' services A , B, 1, 2 or 3,OnlY
unng I 'If th ey are nOISY.
Maintenance Main Items
A Replace engine oil (see page 8-9).
Engine oil capacity without oil filter: 4.5 L (4:8 US qt).
B Replace engine oil and oil filter .(see page 8-101.
Engine oil capacity with oil filter: 4.7 L (5.0 US qt).
Check front and rear brakes (see page 19-4).
• Check pads and discs for wear .(thickness), damage, and cracks.
• Check calipers for damage, leaks, and tightness of mounting bolts. .i ..,
Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-7).

Check the number of clicks (6 to 7) when the parking brake pedal is press~dwith,29<1:N (30 kgf,
661bf) o f f o r c e . , _ ""<,:,,,.;.
'.
Inspect tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and gei'Jrbox boots (see page 17-81. ~ ,~.
• Check rack grease and steering linkage.

• Check boots for damage or leaking grease.
• Check fluid lines for damage or leaks.
Inspect suspension components (see page 18-3).
• Check bolts for tightness.
• Check condition of ball joint boots for deterioration and damage.
Inspect driveshaft boots (see page 16-4).
Check boots for cracks and boot bands for tightness.
Inspect brake hoses and lines including VSA (see page 19-36).
Check the master cylinder and VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leakage.
Inspect all fluid levels and condition of fluids.
• Engine coolant (see page 10-7).
• Automatic transmission fluid (ATF-Z1) (see page 14-238).
• Rear differential fluid (ATF-Z1) (see page 15-69).
• Transfer fluid (see page 14-241).
• Power steering fluid (see page 17-12).
• Brake fluid (see page 19-11).
• Windshield washer fluid.
Inspect exhaust system' (see page 9-23).
Check catalytic converter heat shields, exhaust pipes, and muffler for damage, leaks, and tightness.
Inspectfuellines' (see page 11-368) and connections' (see page 11-370).
Check for loose connections, cracks, and deterioration; retighten loose connections and replace
damaged parts.
NOTE: According to state and federal regulations, failure to do the maintenance Items marked With an astensk ( * ) Will
not void the customer's emissions warranties. However, Acura recommends that all maintenance services be done at
the recommended interval, to ensure long-term reliability.
3-10 BACK
Maintenance Sub Items
Number Maintenance Sub Items

1 Rotate tires, and check tire inflation and condjtion.
Follow the pattern shown in the Owner's Manual.
2 Replace air cleaner element (see page 11-395).
Ifthe vehicle is regularly driven in dusty conditions, replace the element every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km).
Replace dust and pollen filter (see page 21-87). .
• Replace the filter at 15,000 miles (24,000 km) intervals if the vehicle i.s driven mostly in urban areas
that have high concentrations of soot in !he air from industry and diesel-poweredvehicles.
• Replace the filter whenever airflow from the heating and cooling system is less than normal.
Inspect drive belt (see page 4-31).
Look for cracks and damage, then check the position of the drive belt auto-tensioner indicator.
3 Replace automatic transmission fluid (see page 14-239) and transfer (see page 14-241) fluid.
• Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or trailer towing results in higher
transmission and transfer fluid temperatLires. This requires transmission fluid changes more
frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If the vehicle is regularly driven in these
conditions, change the transmission and transfer fluid at 60,000 mile;;; (100,000 km), then every
30,000 miles (48,000 km).
• Automatic transmission fluid capacity 3.3 L(3.5 US qt), use Acura automatic transmission fluid (ATF-
Z1).
• Transfer fluid capacity: 0.43 L (0.45 US Qt), use Hypoid Gear Oil GL4 or GL5.
4 Replace spark plugs (see page 4~22).
Use SILKR8A-S (NGK)
Inspect the valve clearance (cold) (see page 6-9).
Intake: 0.21-0.25 mm (0.008-0.010 in.), Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.).
5 Replace engine coolant (see page 10-7).
Capacity (including the reservoir): 6.5 L (1.72 US gal), use Acura Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Ty(!e 2.
6 Replace rear differential fluid (see page 15-69),
• Driving in mountainous areas at very low speeds, towing a trailer, or frequently driving fully loaded
results in a higher level of mechanical (shear) stress to fluid. This requires differential fluid changes
more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If the vehicle is regularly driven
under these conditions, change the differential fluid at 7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every
15,000 miles (24,000 km).
• Capacity: 2.53 L (2.67 US Qt), use Acura automatic transmission fluid (ATF-Z1)
BACK 3-11
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If engine electrical maintenance is required)
The RDX SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag in the dashboard above the
glove box, seat belt tensioners in the front seat belt retractors, driver's seat belt buckle tensioner in the driver's seat
belt lower anchor, front passenger's seat belt buckle tensioners in the front passenger's seat belt lower anchor, side
curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service
the SRS is included in this Service Manual. Items marked with an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are
located near SRS components. Servicing, disassembling, or replacing these items require special precautions and
tools, and should be done only by an authorized Acura dealer.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could lead to personal injury or death in the event of a severe frontal
or side collision, all SRS service work must b~ periormedby an authorized Acura dealer.
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment ofthe airbags and/or side airbags.
• Do not bUmp or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors when the ignition switch is ON (11),
or for at least 3 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF; otherwise, the system may fail in a collision, or the
airbags may deploy.
• SRS electrical connectors are identified by yellow color coding. Related components are located in the steering
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box, in the front seats,
in the roof side, and around the floor. Do not use electrical test equipment on these circuits.
BACK
Engine Electrical
Engine Electrical Charging System

Special Tools ............................ 4-2 Component Location Index .... 4-23
Symptom Troubleshooting
Starting System Index ...................................... 4-24
Component Location Index .... 4-3 Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-25
Symptom Troubleshooting Charging System Indicator
Index ...................................... 4-4 Circuit Troubleshooting ....... 4-26
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-5 Alternator and Regulator Circuit
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting ................... 4-28
Troubleshooting ................... 4-6 Alternator Control Circuit
Starter Performance Test ........ 4-8 Troubleshooting ................... 4-29
Starter Removal and Drive Belt Inspection ............... 4-31
Installation ............................ 4-9 Drive Belt Removal/
Starter Overhaul ...................... 4-12 Installation ............................ 4-31
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Ignition System Inspection ............................. 4-32
Component Location Index .... 4-17 Drive Belt Auto-tensioner
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-18 Removal/Installation ............ 4-33
Ignition Timing Inspection ...... 4-19 Tensioner Pulley
Ignition Coil Removal/ Replacement ......................... 4-33
Installation ............................ 4-20 Alternator Removal and
Ignition Coil Relay Circuit Installation ............................ 4-34
Troubleshooting ................... 4-20 Alternator Overhaul ................. 4-37
Spark Plug Inspection .............. 4-22
Cruise Control
Component Location Index .... 4-42
Index ...................................... 4-43
Circuit Diagram ........................ 4-45
Cruise Control Input Test ........ 4-46
* Cruise Control Combination
Switch Test/Replacement .... 4-48
Engine Electrical
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Oty

CD 077 46-00 10300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
® 077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
CD
4-2 BACK
~
Starting System I.::!..I
Component Location Index
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
STARTER TRANSMISSION RANGE

Starter Circuit Troubleshooting, page 4-6 SWITCH
Performance Test, page 4-8 Test, page 14-290
Removal/Installation, page 4-9 Replacement, page 14-292
Overhaul, page 4-12
BACK 4-3
Starting System
Symptom Troubleshooting Index
Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

Engine does not start 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections. Poor ground at G101
(does not crank) 2. Test the battery for a low charge (see page 22-63).
3. Check the starter (see page 4-6).
4. Check the starter cut relay (see page 22-64).
5. Check the transmission range switch (see page 14-290).
6. Check the ignition switch or wire (see page 22-66).
Engine cranks, but does 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
not start 2. Check PGM-FI main relays (see page 22-64).
3. Check for IMMOBI status and function (see page
22-333).
4. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-365).
5. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-368).
6. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-382).
7. Check the throttle body (see page 11-393).
8. Check forlow engine compression (see page 6-6).
9. Check for a damage or broken cam chain.
Engine is hard to start 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3).
2. Check for IMMOBI status and function (see page
22-333).
3. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-365).
4. Check for a plugged or damaged fuel line (see page
11-368).
5. Check for a plugged fuel filter (see page 11-382).
Engine cranks slowly 1. Check for loose battery terminals or connections.
2. Test the battery for a low charge (see page 22-63).
3. Check the starter for binding (see page 4-12).
4. Check for excessive drag in the engine.
4-4 BACK
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

BATTERY
No.1 (100 AI No.2 (50 AI
UNDER-DASH
:~~E/REIAY
t T
BLK/WHT
""r
BLK
B S
10
, TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
5 (ON:P,NI
STARTER
T
I
G101
BACK 4-5
Starting System
Starter Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 6. Set the parking brake, then with the shift lever in P
o Air temperature must be between 59 and 100 'f or N position, turn the ignition switch to START (III).
(15 and 38 'C) during this procedure.
o After this inspection, you must reset the powertrain Does the starter crank the engine normally?
control module (PCM), otherwise the PCM will
continue to stop the fuel injectors from functions. YES- The starting system is OK. Go to step 13.
o The battery must be in good condition and fully
charged. NO-Go to step 7.
1. Hook up the following equipment: 7. Check the battery condition (see page 22-63). Check
electrical connections at the battery, the negative
o Ammeter, 0-400 A battery cable to body, the engine ground cables,
o Voltmeter, 0-20 V (accurate within 0.1 V) and the starter for looseness and corrosion. Then
try cranking the engine again.
Does the starter crank the engine?
YES-Repairing the loose connection corrected the

problem. The starting system is OK. Go to step 13.
NO-Check the following:
o If the starter will not crank the engine at all, go to

step 8.
o If the starter cranks the engine erratically or too
slowly, go to step 10.
o If the starter does not disengage from the torque
converter ring gear when you release the key,
replace the starter, or remove and disassemble it
and check for the following:
- Solenoid plunger and switch malfunction
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) - Dirty drive gear or damaged overrunning
(see step 2 on page 11-3). clutch
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle

and the PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
circuit (see page 11-229).
5. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS

OFF on the HDS.
4-6 BACK
r--:'I
.~
8. Make sure the transmission is in Park or neutral, 10. While cranking the engine, check the cranking
and set the parking brake. Disconnect the voltage and the current draw.
connector from the starter solenoid S terminal.
Connect a jumper wire from the battery positive Is the cranking voltage greater than or equal to
terminal to the solenoid terminal. 8.5 V and is the current draw less than or equal to
380A?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Replace the starter, or remove and

disassemble it, and check the following:
• Drag in the starter armature

• Shorted armature winding
• Excessive drag in the engine
11. Check the engine speed while cranking the engine.
Is the engine speed above 100 rpm?
YES-Go to step 12.
Does the starter crank the engine? NO-Replace the starter, or remove and
disassemble it, and check the following:
YES-Go to step 9.
• Open circuit in the starter armature CQmmutator
NO-Remove the starter, and repair or replace as segments
necessary.• • Excessively worn starter brushes
• Open circuit in the commutator brushes
9. Check the following items in the order listed until • Dirty or damaged helical splines or drive gear
you find the open circuit: • Faulty drive gear clutch
• The VEL wire and connectors between the under- 12. Remove the starter, and inspect its drive gear and
dash fuse/relay box and the ignition switch. the torque converter ring gear for damage. Replace
• The RED and BLK/WHT wire and connectors any darnaged parts.
between the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
starter. 13. Select PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel ALL
• The ignition switch (see page 22-66). INJECTORS OFF on the HDS.
• The transmission range switch and connector.
• The starter cut relay (see page 22-64).
BACK 4-7
Starting System
Starter Performance Test
1. Connect the battery to the starter for this test using 4. Firmlyclamp the starter in a vise.
the thickest (gauge) vvire possible (preferably the
same gauge as used on the vehicle). 5. Connect the starter to the battery as shown, and
check that the motor turns and keeps rotating.
NOTE: To avoid damaging the starter, never leave
the battery connected for more than 10 seconds.
6. If the electric current meets the specification when

the battery voltage is at 11.5 V, the starter is
2. Connect the battery as shown. If the starter pinion working properly.
moves out, it is working properly.
Specification
3. Disconnect the battery from the body. If the pinion Electric Current: 80 A or less
retracts immediately, it is working properly.
4..8 BACK
r--:'I
1..=.1
Starter Removal and Installation
Removal 5. Disconnect the Ale condenserfan motor connector

(A), then remove the Ale condenser fan shroud
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the assembly (B).
audio system and the navigation system (if
equipped), then write down the audio presets.
2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery first,

then disconnect the positive cable.
3. Remove the clip (A), then remove the coolant

reservoir (B) from the holder.
6. Remove the harness clamp (A) and connector (B),

then remove the intake manifold bracket (e).
4. Remove the clips (A), then remove the support rod

clamp bracket (B).
(cont'd)
BACK 4-9
Starting System
Starter Removal and Installation (cont'd)
7. Disconnect the starter cable (A) from the 8 terminal, Installation

then disconnect the connector (8) from the S
terminal. 1. Install the starter, then install the starter cable (A)
and connector (8). Make sure the starter cable
crimped side of the ring terminal is facing out.
8x 1.25 mm 10x 1.25mm

9N·m 44N·m
(0.9 kgf·m, 7 Ibf·ft) (4.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibf·ft)
~ /
B
8. Remove the harness clamps (C), then remove the
starter. 12x 1.25 mm
64N·m
(6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ft) C
2. Install the harness clamps (C).
3. Install the intake manifold bracket (A), then install

the harness clamp (8) and connector (e).
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf.m, 16Ibf.ft)
4-10 BACK
~
I!:.I
4. Install the AlC condenser fan shroud assembly (A), 6. Install the coolant reservoir.
then connect the AlC condenser fan motor
connector (8).
/
6x1.0mm
7N·m
(0.7 kgf·m,5Ibf.ft)
B 7. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then

connect the negative cable.
8. Start the engine to make sure the starter works

5. Install the support rod clamp bracket (A), then properly.
install the clips (8).
9. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) the navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
~
audio presets.
10. Set the clock.
BACK 4-11
Starting System
Starter Overhaul
IReassembly
Disassembly GEAR HOLDER
RING ~
GEAR PLUNGER
PUSH NUT
~~@
BRUSH HOLDER
----;;::-/r
CONTACT S P / I
SWITCH SHAFT
MOVING. CO NTACT
DRIVE PLATE
PLANETARY GEAR
~
(Applymo Iybdenum
disulfide.)
/
ARMATURE HOUSING
~
(Applymoy I bdenum
disulfide.)
4-12 BACK
r:'I
I.!:!.I
Armature Inspection and Test 5. Check the commutator diameter. If the diameter is
below the service limit, replace the armature.
,. Remove the starter (see page 4-9).
Commutator Diameter
2. Disassemble the starter as shown at the beginning Standard (New): 28.0-28.1 mm (1.102-1.106 in.)
of this procedure. Service Limit: 27.5 mm (1.083 in.)
3. Inspect the armature for wear or damage from

contact with the permanent magnet. If there is wear
or damage, replace the armature.
6. Measure the commutator (A) runout .
• If the commutator runout is within the service

limit, checkthe comm\Jtator for carbon dust or
4. Check the commutator (A) surface. If the surface is brass chips between the segments.
dirty or burnt, resurface it with an emery cloth or a • Ifthe commutator runout is no~ within the service
lathe to the following specifications, or recondition limit, replace the armature.
with #500 or #600 sandpaper (B).
Commutator Runout
Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.001 in.) max.
Service Limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 4-13
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
7. Check the mica depth (A). If the mica is too high (B), 9. Place the armature (A) on an armature tester (B).
undercut the mica with a hacksaw blade to' the Hold a hacksaw blade (C) on the armature core. If
proper depth. Cut away all the mica (C) between the blade is attracted to the core or vibrates while
the commutator segments. The undercut should the core is turned, the armature is shorted. Replace
not be too shallow, too narrow, or V-shaped (0). the armature.
Commutator Mica Depth

Standard (New): 0.40-0.50 mm (0.016-0.020 in.)
. . . . .•. . . /A
/~
10. Check with an ohmmeter for continuity between
the commutator (A) and armature coil core (B), and
between the commutator and armature shaft (C). If
there is continuity, replace the armature.
8. Check for continuity between the segments of the
commutator. If there is an open circuit between any
of the segments, replace the armature.
4-14 BACK
~
~
Starter Brush Inspection Planetary Gear Inspection
11. Measure the brush length. If it is shorter than the 13. Check the planetary gears (A) and ring gear (8.).
service limit, replace the brush holder assembly. Replace them if they are worn or damaged.
Brush Length
Standard (New): 11.1-11.5 mm(O.44-0.45 in.)
B
Starter Brush Holder Test
12. Check for continuity between the (+) brush (A) and
(-) brush (8). Ifthere is continuity, replace the
brush holder assembly.
(cont'd)
BACK 4-15
Starting System
Starter Overhaul (cont'd)
Overrunning Clutch Inspection Starter Reassembly
14. While holding the drive gear (A), turn the gear 17. Install the brush into the brush holder, and setthe
shaft (B) counterclockwise. Check that the drive armature (A) in the brush holder(B).
gear comes out to the other end. If the drive gear
does not move smoothly, replace the gear cover NOTE: To seat the new brushes, slip a strip of # 500
assembly. or #600 sandpaper, with the grit side up, between
the commutator and each brush, and. smoothly turn
B the armature. The contact surface of the brushes
will be sanded to the same contour as the
commutator.
A
_---c
B
15. While holding the drive gear, turn the gear shaft
clockwise. The gear shaft should turn freely. If the
gear shaft does not turn freely, replace the gear
cover assembly.
16. If the starter drive gear is worn or damaged,

replace the overrunning clutch assembly; the gear 18. While squeezing a spring (C), insert it in the hole on
is not available separately. the brush holder, and push it until it bottoms.
Check the condition of the torque converter ri ng Repeat this for the other three springs (0, E, and F).
gear to see ifthe starter drive gear teeth are
damaged. 19. Install the armature and brush holder assembly
into the housing.
NOTE: Make sure the armature stays in the holder.
4-16 BACK
r--:'I
Ignition System I.!:!!.I
SPARK PLUG IGNITION COIL

Inspection, page 4-22 Ignition Timing Inspection, page 4-19
Removal/Installation, page 4-20
BACK 4-17
Ignition System
Circuit Diagram

SATIERY
No.18115AI
+ 1---1---<:1"0...0---1---,
IGNITION
COIL
RELAY
PCM
5V
.I
IGPLS4
C18 J.
IGPLS3
C17
IGPLS2
.I. C16 .,1. C15

A6
GRN
i
BLK/WHT
BRN WHT BLU BLU RED YELIGRN
BLKJWHT BJWHT BLK1HT BLKLT
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
ICM ICM ICM ICM ~
IGNmoN
COILS
j; --1
~' j~ j;
2 No.4 2 No.3 2 No.2 2 No.1
i
BLK
i T
,
I"
" I" SPARK
PLUGS
I ~~ ~~ I ~~ ~~
-' ..... ..JL -'L.. ..JL ..... r....
G101
ICM : Ign~ion Control Module
4-18 BACK
r:'I
I.::J
Ignition Timing Inspection
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 8. Aim the light toward the pointer (A) on the cam
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). chain case. Check the ignition timing under a no
load condition (headlights, blower fan, rear window
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). defogger, and air conditioner are turned off).
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle Ignition Timing:
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it 14 0±2 °BTDC (RED mark (BHat idle in P or N
doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page position
11-229).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at

3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
5. Check the idle speed (see page 11-338).
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
7. Connect the timing light to the service loop (white

tape).
9. If the ignition timing differs from the specification,

check the cam timing. If the cam timing is OK,
update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
system work properly, and the PCM was
substituted, replace the original PCM (see page
11-252).
10. Disconnect the HDS and the timing light.
BACK 4-19
Ignition System
Ignition Coil Removal/Installation Ignition Coil Relay Circuit

Troubleshooting
1. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-8).
2. Remove the ignition coil cover (A), disconnect the 1. Check the No. 18 (15A) fuse in the under-hood
ignition coil connectors (8), then remove the fuse/relay box.
ignition coils (C).
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse .•
2. Remove the ignition coil relay from the under-hood

fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-64).
Is the relay OK?
6x1.0mm YES-Go to step 3.

12N·m
11.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibf·ftl B NO-Replace the ignition coil relay.•
3. Measure the voltage between ignition coil relay 4P

socket terminal No.2 and body ground, then
terminal No.4 and body ground.
IGNITION COIL RELAY 4P SOCKET

3. Install the ignition coils in the reverse order of
removal.
= =
Terminal side of female terminals
Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.•
4-20 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!!..I
4. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P 10. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P
socket terminal No.2 and the No.1 ignition coil 3P socket terminal No.3 and body ground.
connector terminal No.3.
IGNITION COIL RELAY 4P SOCKET IGNITION COIL RELAY 4P SOCKET
Terminal side of 1
female terminals
2
Wire side of =
female terminals 2
3 \------' Terminal side of female terminals
No.1 IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR

Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between ignition coil
YES-Go to step 5. relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and PCM (A6) .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between ignition coil NO-Go to step 11.
relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and ignition coil 3P
connector terminal No.3.• 11. Check for continuity between ignition coil relay 4P
socket terminal No.3 and PCM connector terminal
5. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the A6.
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
IGNITION COIL RELAY 4P SOCKET
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1
2 Terminal side of
7. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle female terminals
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it
doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-229).
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the
ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM

from damage. PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
YES-The system is OK at this time. Check for

loose or poor connections at the ignition coil relay
and the PCM (A6) .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between ignition coil

relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and the PCM (A6) .•
BACK 4-21
Ignition System
Spark Plug Inspection
1. Remove the spark plugs, and inspect the electrodes 3. Replace the plug at the specified interval, or if the
and ceramic insulator. center electrode is rounded (A), or if the spark plug
gap (B) is out of specification. Use only the listed
• Burned or worn electrodes may be caused by: spark plugs.
- Advanced ignition timing
- Loose spark plug NOTE: Do not adjust the gap of iridium tip plugs.
- Plug heat range too hot
-Insufficient cooling Spark Plugs
NGK: SILKRSA-S
• Fouled plugs may be caused by: Electrode Gap
- Retarded ignition timing Standard (New): 0.7-0.S mm (0.028-0.031 in.)
- Oil in combustion chamber
- Incorrect spark plug gap A B
- Plug heat range too cold
- Excessive idling/low.speed running
- Clogged air cleaner element
- Deteriorated ignition coils
Worn or deformed ~~
T
electrodes
Olmproper gap
i
o Oil-fouling
{
o Carbon deposits
o Cracked center
electrode insulator
r-=::=--j
4. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to
the plug threads, and screw the plugs into the
cylinder head, finger-tight. Then torque them to
18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13Ibf.ft).
2. If the spark plug electrode is dirty or contaminated,

clean the electrode with a plug cleaner.
NOTE:
• Do not use a wire brush or scrape the iridium
electrode since this will damage the electrode.
• When using a sand blaster spark plug cleaner, do
not clean for more than 20 seconds to avoid
damaging the electrode.
4-22 BACK
r--:'I
Charging System ~
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

Un the .gauge control module}
o
(Has built-in ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD) UNIT)
AUTO-TENSIONER ALTERNATOR
Inspection, page 4-32 Replacement, page 4-34
Replacement, page 4-33 Overhaul, page 4-37
DRIVE BELT
Inspection, page 4-31
BACK
Charging System

Charging system Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
indicator does not come (see page 4-26).
on with the ignition
switch ON (II)
Charging system 1. Check for PGM-FIOrCs (see page 11-3).
indicator stays on 2. Troubleshoot the charging system indicator circuit
(see page 4-26).
3. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-31).
4. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).
Battery discharged 1. Check for excessive parasitic electrical currentdraw
with the ignition switch off, and the key removed. The
multiplex control unit may take up to 10 minutes to turn
off (sleep mode) for some models.
2. Check for a broken drive belt (see page 4-31).
3. Check the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-32).
4. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-28).
5. Check for a poor connection at the battery terminal.
6. Test the battery (see page 22-63).
Battery overcharged 1. Troubleshoot the alternator and regulator circuit
(see page 4-28).
2. Test the battery (see page 22-63).
4-24 BACK
r--:'I
~
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNmON SWITCH

BATIERY
No.1 (100 AI
UNDER-DASH
IGI HOT in ON 1111 FUSE/RELAY BOX
and START 11111
No.l0
(7.5 AI
~~---------------~L--------------~
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
BlK ORN
WHT RED CHARGING
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
PCM A36 A37

CANH CANL
~L
I
A23 ELD
G202
ALTF ALTL ALTC

B43 B42 841
BLK WHT RED WHT BLU WHT GRN BLK EL
FR C IG
VOLTAGE REGULATOR
RECTIRER
ALTERNATOR
BACK 4-25
Charging System
Charging System Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the charging system indicator come on? 8. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to step 14.
2. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it
2,000 rpm for 1 minute. doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-229).
Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES-Charging system indicator circuit is OK. Go ignition switch OFF.
to the alternator and regulator circuit
troubleshooting (see page 4-28) .• NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
from damage.
NO-Go to step 3.
12. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P).
3. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic
function procedure (see page 22-258). 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal 842 and body ground.
Does the charging system indicator flash?
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page

22-284) .•
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). =

Does the charging system indicator go off?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), or Is there continuity?

repair the alternator (see page 4-37) .•
YES-Repair short in the wire between the
NO-Go to step 7. alternator and the PCM .•
NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252) .•
4-26 BACK
r--:'I
I!:!.I
14. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic 19. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the
function procedure (see page 22-258). data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
Does the charging system indicator flash? 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Go to step 15. 21. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
22-284) .• 11-229).
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 22. Jump the SCS line with the HDS, then turn the
17. Connect alternator 4P connector terminal No.3 and from damage.
body ground with a jumper wire.
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
24. Check for continuity between PCM connector
L 2
(WHT/BLU) 1--+--/ PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
3 4
JUMPER
WIRE
=
Wire side of female terminals
Does the charging system indicator come on? Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), or Is there continuity?

YES-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
NO-Leave the jumper from step 17 connected and software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
go to step 19. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252).•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the

alternator and the PCM .•
BACK 4-27
Charging System
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Make sure the battery connections are good and 5. Release the accelerator pedal, and let the engine
the battery is sufficiently charged. idle.
2. Connect a VAT-40 (or equivalent tester), and turn 6. Make sure all accessories are turned off. Turn the
the selector switch to position 1 (starting). selector switch to position 2 (charging).
LOAD ADJUSTER FULL FIELD TESTER 7. Remove the inductive pickup, and zero the
(CARBON PILE) LEAD (BLU)
ammeter.
8. Place the inductive pickup over the B terminal wire

of the alternator so the arrow points away from the
alternator.
VOLT
SELECTOR
9. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it
there.
FIELD
Is the voltage less than 13.5 V?
SELECTOR
YES-Go to alternator control circuit
troubleshooting (see page 4-29) .•
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Apply a load with the VAT-40 until the battery

voltage drops within 12-13.5 V.
/s the amperage 90.0 A or more?
YES-The charging system is OK.•

INDUCTIVE PICKUP BTERMINAL
NOTE: If the charging system indicator is still on,
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at replace the alternator (see page 4-34).
3,000 rpm, with no load until the radiator fan comes
on, then let it idle. NO-Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), or
4. Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it
there.
Is the voltage over 15.1 V?
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), or

rear housing assembly (see page 4-37) .•
NO-Go to step 5.
4-28 BACK
r:'I
I.!::.I
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). terminal B41 and body ground.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)

11-229).
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,

diagnose and repair the cause before continuing
with this test.
5. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector from the

alternator. Terminal side of female terminals
6. Start the engine, and turn on the headlights to high Is there continuity?
beam.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the
7. Measure the voltage between alternator 4P alternator and the PCM .•
connector terminal No.2 and the positive terminal
of the battery. NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
BATTERY
C(WHT/GRN) NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM

r-oor--""" from damage.
ALTERNATOR 1 2 Wire side of
4P CONNECTOR 3 4female terminals
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
Is there 1 V or less?
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Go to step 8.

from damage.
(cont'd)
BACK 4-29
Charging System
Alternator Control Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Check for continuity betweenPCM connector

terminal 841 and alternator 4P connector terminal
No.2.
ALTERNATOR
4P CONNECTOR
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), or


alternator and the PCM .•
4-30 BACK
r:'I
L::.I
Drive Belt Inspection Drive Belt Removal/Installation
1. Inspect the belt for cracks and damage. If the belt is Special Tools Required
cracked or damaged, replace it. Belt tension release tool Snap-on YA9317 or equivalent,
commercially available
2. Check that the auto-tensioner indicator (A) is within
the standard range (B) as shown. If it is out of the 1. Move the auto-tensioner (A) with the belt tension
standard range, replace the drive belt (see page release tool to relieve tension from the drive belt,
4-31 ). then remove the drive belt.
2. Install the new belt in the reverse order of removal.
BACK 4-31
Charging System
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Inspection
Special Tools Required 6. Remove the auto-tensioner (see page 4-33).

Belt tension release tool Snap-on YA9317 or equivalent,
commercially available 7. Clamp the auto-tensioner (A) by using two 8 mm
, .. bolts (B) and a vise (C) as shown. Do not clamp the
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make sure to auto-tensioner itself.
turn the AlC switch OFF. Turn the ignition switch
OFF.
2. Check the position of the auto-tensioner indicator's

pointer (A). Start the engine then check the position
again with the engine idling. Ifthe position ofthe
indicator moves or fluctuates very much, replace
the auto-tensioner (see page 4-33).
3. Check for abnormal noise from the tensioner pulley.

If you hear abnormal noise, replace the tensioner
pulley.
4. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31).
5. Move the auto-tensioner within its limit with the

belt tension release tool in the direction shown.
Check that the tensioner moves smoothly and
without any abnormal noise. If the tensioner does
not move smoothly or you hear abnormal noise,
replace the auto-tensioner. 8. Set the torque wrench (D) in the pulley bolt in the
direction shown.
9. Align the indicator (E) on the tensioner base with

center mark (F) on the tensioner arm by using the
torque wrench, and measure the torque. If the
torque value is out of specification, replace the
auto-tensioner.
NOTE: If the indicator exceeds the center mark,

recheck the torque.
Auto-tensioner Spring Torque:

32.5-39.7 N·m (3.31-4.05 kgf·m, 23.9-29.3 Ibf·ft)
4-32 BACK
~
L::.I
Drive Belt Auto-tensioner Removall Tensioner Pulley Replacement
Installation
1. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31). 2. Remove the tensioner pulley bolt (A), then-remove
the tensioner pulley (B).
2. Remove the power steering (PIS) fluid reservoir
from the holder.
3. Remove the PIS pump (A) without disconnecting

the PIS hoses, then remove the PIS hose from the
clamp (B).
3. Install the tensioner pulley in the reverse order of

removal.
8x1.25mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the auto-tensioner.
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf.m, 16Ibf.ft)
5. Install the auto-tensioner in the reverse order of

removal.
BACK 4-33
Char.ging System
Alternator ,Removal 'and Installation
Removal 6. Disconn'ect the Ale condenser fan motor connector

(A), then remove the Ale condenser fan shroud
1. Make,sure'you have,the anti-theft code for the assembly (B).

4. Remove,the clip (A), then remove the coolant

7. Disconnect the alternator connector (A) and BlK

wire (B), then remove the harness clamp (e) from
the alternator.
5. Remove the clips (A), then remove the support rod

clamp bracket (B).
4-34 BACK
r--:'I
~
8. Remove the alternator. Installation
1. Install the alternator.
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ftl
2. Connect the alternator connector (A) and BLK wire

(B), then install the harness clamp (C) to the
alternator.
6x1.0mm
8N·m
(0.8 kgf·m, 6 Ibf·ftl
(cont'd)
BACK 4-35
Charging System
Alternator Removal and Installation (cont'd)
3. Install the AlC condenser fan shroud assembly (A), 5. Install the coolant reservoir.
then connect the AlC condenser fan motor
connector (8).
6x 1.0mm
7N·m
(0.7 kgf·m, 5 Ibf·tt)
6. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).
7. Connect the positive cable to the battery first, then

connect the negative cable.
4. Install the support rod clamp bracket (A), then
install the clips (8). 8. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
the navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
6x1.0mm audio presets.
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·tt)
~ 9. Set the clock.
4-36 BACK
r--:'I
l:I
Alternator 0 verhaul
Exploded V·lew
~~
~~
~~
TERMI~U ..
LATOR
a
ASSEM~&LDER
BRUSH
ASSEM~~:ING
REARH
(cant'd)
BACK 4-37
Cha'rging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the end cover.

• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during

this procedure.
1. Test the alternator and regulator before you

remove them (see page 4-28).
2. Remove the alternator (see page 4-34).
3. If the front bearing needs replacing, remove the

pulley locknut with a 10 mm wrench (A) and a
22 mm wrench (8). If necessary, use an impact
wrench.
6. Remove the brush holder.
4. Remove the harness stay and the three flange nuts

from the alternator.
4-38 BACK
r--:'I
I!:!.I
7. Remove the four bolts, then remove the rear 9. Inspect the rotor shaft for scoring, and inspect the
housing assembly (A), and washer (8). bearing journal surface in the drive end housing for
seizure marks .
• If the rotor is damaged, replace the rotor

assembly .
• If the rotor is OK, go to step 10.
10. Remove the front bearing retainer plate.
, 't
©;.
..
o .
o
0
..
8. If you are not replacing the front bearing, go to

step 13. Removethe rotor from the drive end
housing.
11. Drive out the front bearing with a brass drift and
hammer.
(cont'd)
BACK 4-39
Charging System
Alternator Overhaul (cont'd)
12. With a hammer, driver, and attachment, install a Rotor Slip Ring Test
new front bearing in the drive end housing.
14. Check for continuity between the slip rings (A).
• If there is continuity, go to step 15.

• If there is no continuity, replace the rotor
assembly.
077 46-0010300
Alternator Brush Inspection

15. Check for continuity between each slip ring and the
13. Measure the length of both brushes (A) with vernier rotor (8) and the rotor shaft (C).
calipers (8).
• If there is no continuity, replace the rear housing
• If either brush is shorter than the service limit, assembly, and goto step 16.
replace the brush holder assembly. • If there is continuity, replace the rotor assembly.
• If brush length is OK, go to step 14.
Alternator Brush Length

Standard (New): 10.5 mm (0.41 in.)
4-40 BACK
~
.I!:.J
Alternator Reassembly
16. If you removed the pulley, put the rotor in the drive
end housing, then tighten its locknut to 110 N·m
(11.2 kgf·m, 81.0 Ibf·ft).
17. Remove any grease or any oil from the slip rings.
18. Putthe rear housing assembly and drive end

housing/rotor assembly together, tighten the four
through bolts.
19. Push the brushes (A) in, then insert a pin or drill bit
(B) (about 1.6 mm (0.06 in.) diameter) to hold them
there.
20. Install the brush holder, and pull out the pin.
21. Install the end cover.
22. After assembling the alternator, turn the pulley by

hand to make sure the rotor turns smoothly and
without noise.
23. Install the alternator (see page 4-34) and drive belt
(see page 4-31).
BACK 4-41
Cruise Control
CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

(Built into gauge control module)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

(Built into gauge control module)
CRUISE CONTROL
COMBINATION SWITCH
Test/Replacement, page 4-48
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH

Test, page 22-180
Pedal Height Adjustment, page 19-6
POWERTRAIN CONTROL
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH MODULE (PCM)
Test, page 14-290 Cruise Control Input Test,
Replacement, page 14-292 page 4-46
4-42 BACK
r--:'I
~
Symptom Diagnostic. procedure Also check for

Cruise control cannot be 1. Check for PGM-FI OTCs (see page 11-3).
set 2. Check the No.3 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay
box.
3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-46).
4. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-48).
Cruise control can be set, 1. Check for PGM-FI OTCs (see page 11-3). Faulty gauge control
but the cruise main 2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function module
indicator does not come procedure (see page 22-258).
on 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-46).
Test the cruise control main switch signal inp_ut.
Cruise control can be set, 1. Check for PGM-FI OTCs (see page 11-3). Faulty gauge control
but the cruise control 2. Do the gauge control module self-diagnostic function module
indicator does not come (see page 22-258).
on 3. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-46).
Test the cruise control indicator signal input.
Vehicle does not 1. Check for PGM-FI OTCs (see page 11-3). Open circuit, loose or
decelerate or accelerate 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-46). disconnected
accordingly when the set/ Test the cruise control set/decel, resume/accel switch terminals: GRY or LT
decel or resume/accel signal input. BLU
switch is pressed 3. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-48).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI OTCs (see page 11-3). • Short to power on
cancel when the brake 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-46). the BRN wire
pedal is pressed Test the brake pedal position switch signal input. • Faulty brake pedal
3. Do the brakepedal~osition switch test (see page 19-6). position switch
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI OTCs (see page 11-3). Short to power on the
cancel when the cruise 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-46). LTGRN wire
control main switch is Test the cruise control main switch signal input.
pressed 3. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-48).
Set speed does not 1. Check for PGM-FI OTCs (see page 11-3). Open circuit, loose or
cancel when the cancel 2. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-46). disconnected
switch is pressed Test the cruise control cancel switch signal input. terminals: GRY or LT
3. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page BLU
4-48).
(cont'd)
BACK 4-43
Cruise Control
Symptom Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)

Set speed will not 1. Check for PGM-FI DTCs (see page 11-3). • Faulty brake pedal
resume when the 2. Check the brake pedal position switch adjustment position switch
resume/accel switch is (see page 19-6). • Open circuit, loose or
pressed (with the cruise 3. Check the No.3 (15 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay disconnected
control main switch box. terminals: LT BLU
turned on, and set speed 4. Do the cruise control input test (see page 4-46).
temporarily canceled by Test the cruise control resume/accel switch signal input.
pressing the brake pedal) Test the brake pedal position switch signal input.
5. Do the cruise control combination switch test (see page
4-48).
With the ignition switch Replace the cruise control combination switch (see page
ON (II), and the lighting 4-48).
switch turned on, the
cruise control
combination switch
illumination does not
corrie on
4-44 BACK
~
~
Circuit Diagram
MULllPlEX No.14D5A1RJSE
INTEGRATED lUNDER-DASH
CON11l0L UNIT RJSEIRELAY BOXI
BAT1EIIY
+
UNDER-HOOD RJSE/RB.AY BOX
Y ORN
Y
GAY
~OOAl No21115A1
PADDLE PADDLE
SHIFTER+ SHIF1ER-
IUPSHIFT IDOWNSHIFT
SWITCH) SWITCHI
No.12
YY
115 AI
BLK BLK
IGNIl10N
SWITCH
BAT
I',
161
CftUiSE
1G1HOTin CON11l0L CftUiSE
. ON lID and COMB1NAllON CON11lOL
STARlIIIII SWITCH MAIN
I I NoJ
115AI
UNDER-DASH
RJSE/RB.AY ::-1-----l---1-------1-------1) ="
.~...... ¥.......¥.......... ~...........~.
BOX
VEL LTBLU BLK LTGAN GAY LTBLU RED
T 4
1
I~--------~ 'I~ :
,
,
PEDAL
POSIl1ON
SWITCH
No.l0D
!UNDER
RJSE
2 3
LTGRN BRN GRN ORN VEL YELJGRN
PCM Ala Cl
GAUG£CON11l0L
ETCSRI.Y 1G1ETCS MODULE
5V 12V CANt. A37

~~~--~---~D----------~
NC ATPfWD
C43 B28
BlU/YEL
J7
OUTPUTSHAFT
SPEED SENSOR
TRANSMISSION
t
BlU/RBl
RAIIGE SWITCH 1I!ROTTlE

ACTUATOR
THROTTlE BODY
BACK 4-45
Cruise Control
Cruise Control Input Test
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)~'
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the PCM. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit
(see page 11-229). '
4. Go to PGM-FI, and check for DTCs.
5. Do the following tests while monitoring parameters in the PGM-FI DATA LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: Intermittent failures are often caused by loose circuit connections. While monitoring cruise control inputs,
flex their circuits, and note if any of the test results change. '
Signal to be tested Test condition Parameter: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
Brake switch Brake pedal pressed, CRUISE BRAKESW • Faulty brake pedal position switch
signal then released ' should indicate OFF • Blown No.3 (15A) fuse in the under-
when the brake pedal is dash fuse/relay box
pressed and ON when • An open in the wire between the
the brake pedal is powertrain control module (PCM) and
, released. the brake pedal position switch
• A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the brake pedal position switch
Transmission Shift lever in D and S SHIFT/CLUTCH SW • Faulty transmission range switch
range switch should indicate ON in P, • An open in the wire between the PCM
signal '.
Rand N and OFF in D and the transmission range switch
andS. • A wire shorted to ground between the
PCM and the transmission range switch
• Poor ground G101
Cruise control Cruise control main CRUISE CONTROL • Faulty cruise control main switch
main switch switch ON and OFF
It'",
'MAIN SW should • An open in the wire between the gauge
signal indicate ON when the control module and the cruise control
cruise control main main switch
switch is turned ON • A wire shorted to ground between the
and OFF when the gauge control module and the cruise
cruise control main control main switch .
switch is turned OFF.
Set switch Set/decel switch CRUISE CONTROL SET • Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal pressed and released SW should indicate ON • An open in the wire between the gauge
when the setldecel control module and the cruise control
~witch, is pressed and cmnbination switch
OFF when the setldecel • A wire shorted to ground between the
switch is released. gauge control module and the cruise
control combination switch
4-46 BACK
r--:'I
I.!:!..I
Signal to be tested .. Test condition Parameter: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
Resume Resume/accel switch CRUISE CONTROL • Faulty cruise control combination switch
switch signal pressed and released RESUME SW should • An open in the wire between the gauge
indicate ON when the control module and the cruise control
resume/accel switch is combination switch
pressed and OFF when • A wire shorted to ground between the
the resume/accel gauge control module and the cruise
switch is released. control combination switch
Cancel switch Cancel switch CRUISE CONTROL Faulty cruise control combination switch
signal pressed and released CANCEL SW should
indicate ON when the
cancel switch is
pressed and OFF when
the cancel switch is
released.
Cruise control Cruise control main CRUISE CONTROL • Faulty cruise control combination switch
main switch switch ON and OFF MAIN SW should • An open in the wire between the gauge
signal indicate ON when the control module and the cruise control
cruise control main combination switch
switch is turned ON • A wire shorted to ground between the
and OFF when the gauge control module and the cruise
cruise control main control combination switch
switch is turned OFF. • An open in the wire between the cruise
control combination switch and ground
Cruise control Start the engine, turn CRUISE INDICATOR Faulty gauge control module
indicator the cruise control. should indicate ON
signal main switch on, and when the cruise control
drive the vehicle to is set and OFF when
speeds over 25 mph the cruise control is
(40 km/h). Set and canceled.
cancel the cruise
control.
BACK 4-47
Cruise Control
Cruise Control Combination Switch Test/Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
SRS component locations (see page 24-12), and the switch position according to the table.
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14), in the
SRS before doing repairs or service. • If there is continuity, and it matches the table, but
switch failure occurred on the cruise control
1. Remove the driver's airbag (see page 24-146). input test, check and repair the wire harness on
the switch circuit .
2. Remove the steering wheel trim (see page 17-22). • If there is no continuity in one or more positions,
replace the switch.
3. Remove the cruise control combination switch.
Terminal side of
male terminals
1\ Terminal
1 7 4 11 6
Position \
Cruise control
main switch (ON) 0- :-0
Cruise control
main switch (OFF)
Set/decel -0
(PRESSED)
Resume/accel "
~ "
~
(PRESSED)
Cancel ~ ~
(PRESSED) 4;... f-o
5. Check for continuity between terminals No.1,

No.2, and No.3 on the switch. There should be
continuity. If a failure occurs between terminals
No.1, No.2, and No.3, replace the cruise control
combination switch.
6. Check for continuity between terminals No.4 and

No. 10 on the switch. There should be continuity. If
a failure occurs between terminals No.4 and
No. 10, replace the cruise control combination
switch.
4-48 BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Assembly
Special Tools ................................................................. 5-2
Engine Removal ........................................................... 5-3
Engine Installation ........................................................ 5-11
Side Engine Mount Replacement ............................... 5-20
Transmission Mount Replacement ............................. 5-22
Lower Torque Rod Replacement ................................ 5-24
Upper Torque Rod Replacement ................................ 5-25
Side Engine Mount Bracket Replacement .................. 5-26
Cylinder Head .................................................... 6-1
Engine Block ..................................................... 7-1
Engine Lubrication ........................................... 8-1
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System ............. 9-1

Engine Assembly
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description aty

CD 07 AAK-SNAA 120 Universal Eyelet 1
® 07 AAK-SNAASOO 1.8 Support Bolt 2
® 07 AAK-SNAA600 RDX Engine Support Eyelet 1
CD 07 AAK-STKA 120 RDX Engine Sup~ort Mount Pads 2
CD ®
5-2 BACK
Engine Removal
Special Tools Required 6. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly

• Universal eyelet 07AAK-.SNAA120 (see page 11-394).
'1.8 support bolt 07AAK-SNAA500
• RDX engine support eyelet 07AAK-SNAA600 7. Remove the relay block (A) and harness clamps (B).
• RDX engine support mount pads 07 AAK-STKA 120
• Front subframe adapter VSB02C000016 *
• Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566 *
* : Avai/abl~ through Amer,ican Honda Tool and
Equipment Program, 1-888-424-6857
NOll:::
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces .
• To avoid damaging the wiring and terminals, unplug
the wiring connectors carefully while holding the
connector- portion.
• Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection. A
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere,with other parts. .
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the

equipped), then write down the audJo presets.
B
2. Secure the hood in the wide open position (support
rod in the lower hole). 8. Loosen the bolts (C), and remove the bolts (D), then
remove the battery base (E).
9. Remove the charge air cooler cover (A), then

remove the charge air cooler cover front bracket (8).
3. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-362).

5. Remove the battery.
(cont'd)
BACK 5-3
Engine Assembly
Engine Removal (cont'd)
10. Remove the air bypass outlet pipe (A). 13. Disconnect the powertrain control module (peM)
connectors (A) and the engine wire harness .
connector (8).
11. Remove the battery cables (A) from the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
14. Remove the harness clamps (e).
15. Remove the under-hood fuse relay box from the

bracket.
12. Disconnect the harness connector (8).
5-4 BACK
16. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then 18. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister
disconnect the fuel feed hose (see page 11-372). hose (A), brake booster vacuum hose (8), and
vacuum hose. (e).
17. Remove the heater hoses from the clamps (A), then
remove the bolt (8) securing the heater hose clamp
bracket.
19. Remove the shift cable (see page 14-282).
21. Remove the power steering (PIS) pump (A) without

disconnecting the PIS hoses, then remove the PIS
hose from the clamp (8).
(cont'd)
BACK 5-5
Engine Assembly
22. Remove the radiator cap. 30. Separate the stabilizer'links (see page 18-22).
23. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height. 31. Separate the knuckles from the lower arms (see
step 12 on page 18-14).
24. Remove the front wheels.
32. Remove the driveshafts (see page 16-4). Coat all
25. Remove the splash shield. precision-finished surfaces with clean engine oil.
Tie plastic bags over the driveshaft ends.
33. Remove the propeller shaft from the transfer shaft

flange (see page 16-38h
34. Remove the bolt (A) securing the PIS fluid line
bracket, and unclamp the PIS fluid line clamps (8)
on the front subframe.
26. Loosen the drain plug in the radiator, and drain the
engine coolant (see page 10-7).
27. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-9).
28. Drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) 35. Remove the bolts securingthe steering gearbox
(see page 14-239). mounting brackets.
29. Remove the three way catalytic converter (TWC).
36. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
37. Remove the radiator (see page 10-19).
5-6 BACK
38. Disconnect the Ale compressor clutch connector 40. Remove the automatic transmission fluid (ATF)
(A), then remove the Ale compressor (8) without cooler, hoses (A), then plug the line a'nd hose.
disconnecting the Ale hoses.
39. Remove the heater hoses.

41. Remove the ground cable (8).
42. Attach the engine support eyelet with the support

bolt.
07 AAK-SNAASOO
(cont'd)
BACK 5-7
Engine Assembly
43. Remove the top corner clip (A) from the front grill 45. Removethe lower torque rod.
on both sides. Place the engine support mount
pads over the hood edge cushions (8), and align
the pins with the clip hole (C). Remove the lids from
both side of the cowl cover. Install the engine
support hanger (AAR-T-12566), theriattach the
hook to the engine support eyelet. Tighten the wing
nut (D) by hand to lift and support the enginel
transmission assembly.
46. Make reference marks on the body across the

marks (A) on the edge of the front subframe (8).
c B
44. Raise the lift to full height.
5-8 BACK
47. Attach the subframe adapter (A) to the subframe 51. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
and hang the belt of the subframe adapter over the
front of the subframe, then secure the belt with its 52. Remove the harness clamps (A), then remove the
stop. transmission mount (8).
VSB02C000016 53. Install the transmission hanger bracket (PIN 21232-

RCT-AOO) (A) and washer (8) on the transmission.
48. Raise the jack and line up the slots in the arms with
the bolt holes on the corner of the jack base, then
attach them with bolts securely.
49. Remove the subframe.
Replace.
50. Hang the steering gearbox with a rope.
(cont'd)
BACK 5-9
Engine Assembly
54. Attach the universal eyelet to the drive belt auto- 56. Remove the side engine mount bracket mounting
tensioner. bolt and nut.
07AAK·SNAA120
07 AAK·SNAA500
57. Check that the engine/transmission is completely
55. Attach a chain hoist (A) to the universal eyelet (B), free of vacuum hoses, fuel and coolant hoses, and
and the transmission hook (C). Lift up on the electrical wiring.
engine/transmission assembly until it's securely
supported by the chain hoist, and remove the 58. Slowly lower the engine/transmission assembly
engine hanger. about 150 mm (6 in.). Check once again that all
hoses and electrical wiring are disconnected and
free from the engine/transmission, then lower it all
the way.
59. Disconnect the chain hoist from the engine/

60. Raise the vehicle all the way on the lift, and remove
the engine/transmission assembly from under the
vehicle.
5-10 BACK
Engine Installation
Special Tools Required

• Universal eyelet 07AAK-SNAA120
·1.8 support bolt 07AAK-SNAA500
• RDX engine support eyelet 07AAK-SNAA600
* : Available through American Honda Tool and Equipment Program, 1-888-424-6857
1. Install the accessory brackets and tighten their bolts to the specified torques.
SIDE ENGINE MOUNT BRACKET
10x 1.25mm
44N·m
14.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibf·ft)
12x 1.25mm
74N·m
17.5 kgf.m, 54lbf·ft)
Replace. 10x 1.25 mm
44N·m
14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 5-11
Engine Assembly
Engine Installation (cont'd)
2. Raise the vehicle on the lift, and position the 4. Place the engine support mount pads over the
engine/transmission assembly under the vehicle. hood edge cushions (A), and align the pins with the
Lower the vehicle, and attach the universal eyelet clip hole (8). Remove the lids from both side of the
and chain hoist to the engine, then lift the engine cowl cover. Install the engine support hanger (AAR·
into position in the vehicle. T·12566), then attach the hook to the engine
support eyelet. Tighten the wing nut (e) by hand to
NOTE: Reinstall the mounting bolts/support nuts in lift and support the engine/transmission assembly.
the sequence given in the following steps. Failure
AAR·T·12566
to follow this sequence may cause excessive noise
and vibration, and reduce engine mount life. c
B
3. Attach the engine support eyelet with the support
bolt.
5. Loosen the upper torque rod mounting bolt (A).
07 AAK·SNAA500
5-12 BACK
6. Tighten the new side engine mount bracket 9. Remove the transmission hanger bracket (PIN
mounting bolt and nut. 21232-RCT-AOO).
10. Install the transmission mount, then tighten the

transmission mount stiffener mounting bolts (A)
7. Remove the chain hoist. and the new transmission mount mounting bolts
(8).
8. Remove the universal eyelet f.ram the drive belt
auto-tensioner. C B
12x1.2Smm 12x 1.2Smm
83N·m 83 N·m (8.5 kgf·m, 61 Ibf·ft)
07AAK-SNAA120 (8.5 kgf·m, 61 Ibf·ft) Replace.
Replace.
A
8x1.2Smm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
11. Tighten the new bolt and nuts (C).
12. Install the harness clamps (D).
(cont'd)
BACK 5-13
Engine Assembly
13. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height. 16. Align all reference marks (A) on the front subframe
(8) with the body, then tighten the bolts on the front
14. Using the subframe adapter (A) and a jack, raise subframe to the specified torque.
the subframe up to body.
VSB02C000016
15. Loosely install the new 14 x 1.5 mm bolts (A), and 17. Remove the jack and front subframe adapter.
loosely install the 12 x1.25 mm bolts (8).
18. Install the lower torque rod, then tighten the new
lower torque rod mounting bolts in the numbered
sequence shown.
A
14x1.5mm f
PI.
\~2X1.25mm
"A
54 N·m
®14x1~5mm
103N·m 93N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 76lbf·ttl (5.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibf·ttl (9.5 kgf·m, 69 Ibf·ttl
Replace.
5-14 BACK
19. Lower the vehicle on the lift. 24. Install the power steering (PIS) fluid line bracket (A),
and secure the hose with the hose clamps (8).
20. Remove the special tools from the engine and
6x 1.0mm
vehicle, then install the top corner clip to the front 9.8N·m
grille on both sides. (1.0 kgf.m. 7.2Ibf·ft)
21. Tighten the upper torque rod mounting bolt.
12x 1.25 mm
64N·m
25. Install the propeller shaft to the transfer shaft

flange (see page 16-39). '
26. Install a new set ring on the end of each driveshaft,

then install the driveshafts. Make sure each ring
"clicks" into place in the differential and
intermediate shaft.
22. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height. 27. Connect the lower arms to the knuckles (see step 8
on page 18-20).
23. Install the bolts securing the steering gearbox
mounting brackets. 28. Connect the stabilizer links (see page 18-22).
29. Install the three way catalytic converter (lWC) (A).

Use new gaskets (8) and new self-locking nuts (C).
C
....----10 x 1.25 mm
33N·m
13.4 kgf·m,
25Ibf·ft)
~
10x1.25mm
B
74 N·m 17.5 kgf·m, 54Ibf·ft)
8x 1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 5-15
Engine Assembly
30. Install the splash shield. 35. Install the heater hoses.
36. Install the Ale compressor (A), then connect the

Ale compressor clutch connector (8).
31. Install the front wheels.
33. Install the automatic transmission fluid (ATF) cooler

hoses (A), and secure the hoses with the clips (8)
(see page 14-273).
~ ~
8x1.25mm 10x 1.25 mm
22N·m 44N·m
12.2 kgf·m. 16lbf·ftl 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ftl
37. Install the radiator (see page 10-19).
34. Install the ground cable (e).
5-16 BACK
38. Install the PIS pump (A), then install the PIS hose to 42. Install heater. hose clamp bracket (A), then install
the clamp (8). the heater hoses to the clamps (8).
43. Connect the fuel feed hose (see page 11-374), then
8x1.2Smm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft) install the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
40. Install the shift cable (see page 14-282).
41. Install the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

hose (A), brake booster vacuum hose (8), and
vacuum hose (C).
(cont'd)
BACK 5-17
Engine Assembly
44. Install the under-hood fuse relayboxtothe bracket. 47. Install the battery cables (A) to the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
45. Connect the powertrain control module (PCM)

connectors (A) and engine wire harness connector
(B). 48. Connect the harness connector (B).
49. Install the air bypass outlet pipe (A).
46. Install the harness clamps (C).
5-18 BACK
50. Install the charge air cooler cover front bracket (A), 52. Install the air cleaner housing assembly (see page
then install the charge air cooler cover (8). 11-394).
B
~------------~
------------ ~
53. Install the battery. Clean the battery posts and
cable terminals, then assemble them, and apply
------------
-------------
--------------~
_--------- _
-------------
... ....
Gil
grease to prevent corrosion.
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m 54. Move the shift lever to each gear, and verify that
11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ftl the AfT gear position indicator follows the
transmission range switch.
55. Inspect for fuel leaks: Turn the ignition switch ON

(II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump
runs for about 2 seconds and pressurizes the fuel
line. Repeat this operation two or three times, then
check for fuel leakage at any point in the fuel line.
56. Refill the engine with engine oil (see step 4 on page
8-9).
57. Refill the transmission with ATF (see page 14-239).

51. Install the battery base (A), then install the harness
clamps (8) and relay block (C). 58. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed
air from the cooling system with the heater valve
. ____ 8x1.25mm
A--- 22N·m open (see step 5 on page 10-7).
12.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ftl
59. Do the PCM reset procedure (see page 11-4).
60. Do the crankshaft position (CKP) pattern clear/CKP

pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
61. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-338).
62. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-19).
c 63. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
audio presets.
65. Set the clock.

B
8x 1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ftl
BACK 5-19
Engine Assembly
Side Engine Mount Replacement
1. Support the engine with a jack and wood block 4. Remove.the side engine mount stiffener (A), then
under the oil pan. remove the side engine mount (B).
2. Remove the torque rod stiffener (A) and upper 6x 1.0mm

9.8N·m
torque rod (B). 11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
12x 1.25 mm
~ 64N·m
(6.5 kgf·m,
47Ibf·ft)
A B
5. Install the side engine mount, then install the side

3. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side engine mount stiffener.
engine mount bracket (B).
6. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), then
loosely tighten the new bolt and nut (B), and
loosely tighten the bolt (C).
7. Install the ground cable (D).
5-20 BACK
8. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly 12. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
(see page 11-394).
13. Tighten the side engine mount mounting bolts and
9. Loosen the transmission mounting bolt and nuts nut.
(A).
14x 1.5 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ft)
10. Raise the lift to full height. 12x1.25mm

72 N·m (7.3 kgf·m, 52 Ibf·ft)
11. Loosen the lower torque rod mounting bolt (A).
14. Tighten the transmission mounting bolt and nuts.
(cont'd)
BACK 5-21
· ,!
Engine Assembly
Side Engine Mount Replacement Transmission Mount Replacement

(cont'd)
1. Loosen the upper torque rod mounting bolt (A).
15. Raise the liftto full height.
16. Tighten the lower torque rod mounting bolt.
2. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly

(see page 11-394).
3. Remove the heater hoses from the clamps (A), then

remove the bolt (8) securing the heater hose clamp
bracket.
18. Install the air cleaner housing assembly (see page

11-394).
19. Install the upper torque rod (A) and torque rod
stiffener (8), and tighten the new stiffener
mounting bolts (e), then tighten the new upper
torque rod mounting bolts in the numbered
C
sequence shown.
12x1.25mm
54 N·m
(5.5 kgf.m,
40 Ibf·tt)
Replace.
.
CD12x1.25mm .
64N·m 7
(6.5 kgf·m, 47Ibf.tt)
I
Replace.
C
12 x 1.25 mm
54 N·m
Replace.
"" ____ ®12x1.25mm
'" --- 64
(6.5N·m
kgf·m, 4. Support the transmission with a jack and wood
47Ibf·tt)
Replace. block under the transmission.
5-22 BACK
5. Remove the harness clamps (A), then remove the 10. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
transmission mount stiffener (8) and transmission
mount (e). 11. Tighten the transmission mounting bolt and nuts .
D ........-8 x 1.25mm
12x 1.25 mm ~ 22N·m
83N·m (2.2 kgf·m. 16 Ibf·ftl
f
R'PI~ ~-.=,p'-lll.11l-
13. Tighten the lower torque rod mounting bolt.
6. Install the transmission mount with the new

mounting bolts (0), then install the transmission
mount stiffener and harness clamps.
7. Loosely tighten the new bolt and nuts (E).
(cont'd)
BACK 5-23
Engine Assembly
Transmission Mount Replacement Lower Torque Rod Replacement

(cont'd)
1.' Loosen the upper torque rod mounting bolt (A).
15. Install heater hose clamp bracket (A), then install

the heater hoses to the clamps (8).
3. Remove the lower torque rod (A).

11-394).

12x 1.25 mm
64N·m
16.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ftl
A~
~ ®14x1.5mm
CD 12 x 1.25 mm 93N·m
64 N·m 16.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ftl 19.5 kgf·m, 69 Ibf·ftl
Replace.
4. Install the lower torque rod, then tighten the new

lower torque rod mounting bolts in the numbered
sequence shown.
5-24 BACK
Upper Torque Rod Replacement
5. Lower the vehicle on the lift. 1. Remove the torque rod stiffener {A) and upper
torque rod (8).
C CD 12 x 1.25 mm
12x1.25mm 12x 1.25mm 64N.m C··
64N·m 54N·m 16.5 kgf.m, 47lbf.ttl 12 x 1.25mm
16.5 kgf.m, 47 Ibf·ttl 15.5 kgf.m, Replace. 54 N·m
40lbf·ttl 15.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ttl
/ Replace.
Rep~
____ ® 12 x 1.25 mm
--- 64N·m
16.5kgf·m,
471bf.ttl
Replace.
2. Install the upper torque rod and torque rod stiffener,

and tighten the new stiffener mounting bolts (C),
then tighten the new upper torque rod mounting
bolts in the numbered sequence shown.
BACK 5-25
Engine Assembly
Side Engine Mount Bracket Replacement
1. Support the engine with a jack and wood block 6. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly
under the oil pan. (see page 11-394).
2. Remove the torque rod stiffener (A) and upper 7. Loosen the transmission mounting bolt and nuts
torque rod (8). (A).
3. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side 9. Loosen the lower torque rod mounting bolt (A).
engine mount bracket (8).
4. Install the side engine mount bracket, then loosely

tighten the new bolt and nut (e), and loosely tighten
the bolt (D).
5. Install the ground cable.
5-26 BACK
10. Lower the vehicle on the lift. 13. Raise the lift to full height.
11. Tighten the side engine mount mounting bolts and 14. Tighten the lower torque rod mounting bolt.
nut.
14x 1.5 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf.m, 47 Ibf·ttl
12x1.25mm 15. Lower the vehicle on the lift.

72 N·m (7.3 kgf·m, 52 Ibf·ttl
12. Tighten the transmission mounting bolt and nuts. 11-394).
stiffener (8), and tighten the new stiffener
mounting bolts (e), then tighten the new upper
sequence shown.
C CD 12 x 1.25 mm
12x 1.25mm 64N.m C
54N·m (6.5 kgf.m,/4Ibf.ttl 12 x 1.25 mm
(5.5 kgf.m, Replace. 54 N·m
40lbf·ttl
Rep~
I (5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ttl
Replace.
.----® 12 x 1.25 mm
64N·m
(6.5 kgf·m,
47lbf·ttl
Replace.
BACK 5-27
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Cylinder Head
Special Tools ................................................................. 6-2
Component Location Index ......................................... 6-3
Engine Compression Inspection ................................. 6-6
VTEC Rocker Arm Test .....•........................................... 6-7
VTC Actuator Inspection .............................................. 6-8
Valve Clear~nce Adjustment ....................................... 6-9
Crankshaft Pulley Removal.and Installation .............. 6-12
Cam Chain Removal .......... ;.......................................... 6.,13
Cam Chain Installation .....•........................................... 6-16
Auto-tensioner Removal and Installation .................. 6-22
Chain Case Oil Seal Installation .................................. 6-24
Cam Chain Inspection .................................................. 6-24
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement ..................................... 6-26
Cylinder Head Cover Removal .................................... 6-28
Cylinder Head Cover Installation ................................ 6-29
Cylinder Head Removal ............................................... 6-31
CMP Pulse Plate A Replacement ................................. 6-34
CMP Pulse Plate B Replacement ................................. 6-34
VTC Actuator, Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket
Replacement ............................................................. 6-35
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage ...................... 6-36
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal ................................. 6-37
Rocker Arm and Shaft
Disassembly/Reassembly ........................................ 6-38
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection ............................... 6-39
Camshaft Inspection .............................................,...... 6-40
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal ..................... 6-42
Valve Inspection ........................................................... 6-43
Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance Inspection ............... 6-43
Valve Guide Replacement ........................................... 6-44
Valve Seat Reconditioning .......................................... 6-46
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation ................. 6-48
Rocker Arm Assembly Installation .............................. 6-49
Cylinder Head Installation ........................................... 6-50
Sealing Bolt Installation ............................................... 6-53
BACK
Cylinder Head
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Qty

CD 07AAJ-PNAA101 AirPressure Regulator 1
® 07 AAJ-RWCA 100 Cam Chain Inspection Gauge 1
® 07HAH-PJ7A100 Valve Guide Reamer, 5.5 mm 1
® 07 JAA-001 020A Socket, 19 mm 1
® 07 JAB-001 020A Holder Handle 1
® 07MAA-PR70110 Adjuster 1
(j) 07MAA-PR70120 LocknutWrench 1
® 07PAD-0010000 Stem Seal Driver 1
I ®
@
@
@
07ZAJ-PNAA 101
07ZAJ-PNAA200
07ZAJ-PNAA300
070AB-RJA0100
VTEC Air Adapter
VTEC Air Stopper
Air Joint Adapter
Crankshaft Pulley Holder
2
1
1
1
@ 07742-0010100 Valve Guide Driver,5.5 mm 1
@ 077 46-00 10400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
@ 07749-0010000 Driver 1
@ 07757-PJ1010A ValveSpring Compressor Attachment 1
.,:;, I
"; ..,
tJ CD
~
® ®
., B
u?
®
Wi?
®
I • '1
1®
~
(j) ® ® @
/ @
If /
@ @
@
@ @
LJ :D
@
6-2 BACK
CYLINDER HEAD COVER

Removal, page 6-28
Installation, page 6-29
70N COIL COVER
CAM CHAIN
Removal, page 6-13
CAM CHAIN GUIDE A
~CAM CHAIN GUIDE B
O-RING
,/
~ VARIABLE VALVE
TIMING CONTROL
(VTC) OIL CO",TROL
SOLENOID VALVE
CRANKSHAFT PULLEY
'. /Removallinstallation,
/' page 6-12
'""Uht~///hff~~ '%
OIL JET
AUTO-TENSIONER
Removal/Installation,
page 6-22 CHAIN CASE
CKP PULSE PLATE O-RING CRANKSHAFT PULLEY BOLT
Replacement, page 6-26 Removallinstallation,
page 6-12
CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) SENSOR CHAIN CASE COVER
(cant'd)
BACK 6-3
Cylinder Head
Component Location Index (cont'd)
CAMSHAFT HOLDERS
DOWEL PINS
INTAKE CAMSHAFT
VTC ACTUATOR
Inspection,
page 6-8
/ Replacement,
CMP PULSE PLATE B page 6-35
Replacement,
page 6-34
CMP PULSE PLATE A

Replacement,
~EXHAUSTCAMSHAFT
page 6-34
CMPSENSORB
(EXHAUST) SPROCKET
El Replacement,
~ ~I page 6-35
~ ~HAUSTCAMSHAFT
CAMSHAFT POSITION
(CMP) SENSOR A DOWEL PINS
(INTAKE)
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY

Rocker Arm Assembly Removal,
page 6-37
Rocker Arm and Shaft
Disassembly/Reassembly,
page 6-38
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection,
page 6-39
Rocker Arm Assembly Installation,
page 6-49
VTEC Rocker Arm Test,
. page 6'7
6-4 BACK
CYLINDER HEAD BOLT
VALVE COTTERS
EXHAUST VALVE
SEAL hNGRETAlNEH
~~ ~
~~ INTAKE VALVE SPRING
EXHAUST VALVE SPRING
§~~
~
INTAKE VALVE SEAL
Replacement,
(5 page 6-42
e~
~LVE SPRING SEAT
INTAKE VALVE GUIDE
Replacement, page 6-44
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
tECT) SENSOR1
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL

SOLENOID FILTER
HEAT SHIELD
~
ROCKER ARM OIL
CONTROL SOLENOID
COOLANT SEPARATOR
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
BACK 6-5
Cylinder Head
Engine Compression Inspection
NOTE: After this inspection, you must reset the 10. Open the throttle fully, then crank the engine with
powertrain control module (PCM), otherwise the PCM the starter motor and measure the compression.
will continue to stop the injectors from functioning.
Select PCM reset using the Honda Diagnostic System Compression Pressure:
(HDS) (see page 11-4). Above 930 kPa (9.5 kgf/cm 2, 135 psi)
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating 11. Measure the compression on the remaining
temperature (cooling fan comes on). cylinders.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Maximum Variation:

Within 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2, 28 psi)
3. Connect the HDS to the data .Iink connector (DLC)
(see step 2 on page 11-3). 12. Ifthe compression is not within specifications,
check the following items, then remeasure the
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). compression.
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle • Damaged or worn valves and seats
and the PCM. If it doesn't troubleshoot the DLC • Damaged cylinder head gasket
circuit (see page 11-229). • Damaged or worn piston rings
• Damaged or worn piston and cylinder bore
6. Select PGM-FI, INSPECTION, then ALL INJECTORS
OFF on the HDS. 13. Install the four spark plugs.
7. Remove the four ignition coils (see page 4-20). 14. Install the four ignition coils (see page 4-20).
8. Remove the four spark plugs. 15. Select the PCM reset (see page 11-4) to cancel the
ALL INJECTORS OFF function on the HDS.
9. Attach the compression gauge to the spark plug
hole.
6-6 BACK
VTEC Rocker Arm Test
Special Tools Required 5. Repeat step 4 on the remaining intake primary

·Air pressure regulator 07AAJ-PNAA101 rocker arms with each piston at TOC. When all the
• VTEC air adapter 07ZAJ-PNAA101 primary rocker arms pass the test, go to step 6.
• VTEC air stopper 07ZAJ-PNAA200
• Air joint adapter 07ZAJ-PNAA300 6. Check that the air pressure on the shop air
compressor gauge indicates over 400 kPa
1. Start the engine, and let it run for 5 minutes, then (4 kgf/cm 2, 57 psi).
turn the ignition switch OFF.
7. Inspect the valve clearance (see page 6-9) ..
2. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-28).
8. Remove the sealing bolt (A) from the relief hole,
3. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TOC) (see and install the VTEC air stopper (B).
D
07ZAJ-PNAA300
4. Verify that the intake primary rocker arm (A) moves
independently of the intake secondary rocker /
arm (B) .
• If the intake primary rocker arm does not move,

remove the primary and secondary rocker arms
as an assembly and check that the pistons in the
secondary and primarY rocker arms move
smoothly (see page 6-39). If any rocker arm
needs replacing, replace the primary and
secondary rocker arms as an assembly, and test.
• If the intake primary rocker arm moves freely, go
to step 5.
B C
07ZAJ-PNAA200 07ZAJ-PNAA101
9. Remove the No.2 and No.3 camshaft holder bolts,

and install the VTEC air adapters (C) finger-tight.
10. Connect the air joint adapter (0) and air pressure
regulator (E).
(cont'd)
BACK 6-7
Cylinder Head
VTEC Rocker Arm Test (cont'd) VTC Actuator Inspection
11. Loosen the valve on the regulator, and apply the 1. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13).
specified air pressure.
2. Loosen the rocker arm adjusting screws (see step 2
Specified Air Pressure: on page 6-37).
290 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm 2, 42 psi)
3. Remove the camshaft holder (see step 3 on page
NOTE: If the synchronizing piston does not move 6-37).
after applying air pressure; move the primary or
secondary rocker arm up and down manually by 4. Remove the intake camshaft.
rotating the crankshaft clockwise.
5. Check that the variable valve timing control (VTC)
12. With the specified air pressure applied, move the actuator is locked by turning the VTC actuator
intake primary rocker arm (A) forthe No.1 cylinder. counterclockwise. If not locked, turn the VTC
The primary rocker arm and secondary rocker arm actuator clockwise until it stops, then recheck it. If it
(8) should move together. is still not locked, replace the VTC actuator.
If the intake secondary rocker arm does not move, 6. Seal the advance holes (A) and retard holes (8) in
remove the primary and secondary rocker arms as the No.1 camshaft journal with tape.
an assembly, and check that the pistons in the
primary and secondaryrockerarms move
smoothly. Ifany rocker arm needs replacing,
replace the primary and secondary rocker arms as
an assembly, and test.
7. Punch a hole in the tape over one of the advance

holes.
A
13. Remove the special tools.
14. Tighten the camshaft holder mounting bolts to

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft).
15. Tighten the sealing bolt to 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m,

14Ibf·ft).
16. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-29).
6-8 BACK
Valve Clearance Adjustment
8. Apply air to the advance hole to release the lock. Special Tools Required
• Adjuster 07MAA-PR70110
• Locknut wrench 07MAA-PR70120
NOTE: Adjust the valves only when the cylinder head

temperature is less than 100 "F (38 "C).
2. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The

punch mark (A) on the variable valve timing control
(VTC) actuator and the punch mark (8) on the
exhaust camshaft sprocket should be at the top.
Align the TDC marks (C) on the VTC actuator and
exhaust camshaft sprocket.
9. Check that the VTC actuator moves smoothly. If the A

VTC actuator does not move smoothly, replace the
VTC actuator.
10. Remove the tape and adhesive residue from the

camshaft journal.
11. Make sure the punch marks on the VTC actuator

and exhaust camshaft sprocket are facing up, then
set the camshafts in the head (see step 6 on page
6-49).
12. Set the camshaft holders and chain guide 8 in place

(see step 7 on page 6-49).
13. Tighten the camshaft holder bolts to the specified

torque (see step 8 on page 6-49).
14. Hold the camshaft, and turn the VTC actuator

clockwise until you hear it click. Make sure to lock
the VTC actuator by turning it.
15. Install the cam chain (see page 6-16).
16. Adjust the valve clearance (see page 6-9).

(cont'd)
BACK 6-9
Cylinder Head
Valve Clearance Adjustment (cont'd)
3. Select the correct thickness feeler gauge for the 5. If you feel too much or too little drag, loosen the
valves you're going to check. locknut with the locknut wrench and adjuster, and
turn the adjusting screw until the drag on the feeler
Valve Clearance gauge is correct.
Intake: 0.21-0.25 mm (0.008-0.010 in.)
07MAA-PR70110
Exhaust: 0.28-0.32 mm (0.011-0.013 in.)
EXH~UST
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4
07MAA-PR70120
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4
6. Tighten the locknut to the specified torque, and
INTAKE recheck the clearance. Repeat the adjustment if
necessary.
4. Insert the feeler gauge (A) between the adjusting
screw (8) and the end of the valve stem, and slide it Specified Torque
back and forth; you should feel a slight amount of Intake:
drag. 7xO.75mm
20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14Ibf·ft)
Apply engine oil to the nut threads.
Exhaust:
7 xO.75 mm
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 Ibf·ft)
Apply engine oil to the nut threads.
6-10 BACK
7. Rotate the crankshaft 180 o clockwise (camshaft 11. Rotate the crankshaft 180 o clockwise (camshaft
pulley turns 90 "). pulley turns 90 ").
8. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance

on No.3 cylinder. 12. Check and, if necessary, adjustthe valve clearance
on No.2 cylinder.
9. Rotate the crankshaft 180 0 clockwise (camshaft
pulley turns 90 "). 13. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-29).
1O. Check and, if necessary, adjust the valve clearance

on No.4 cylinder.
BACK 6-11
Cylinder Head
Crankshaft Pulley Removal and Installation
Special Tools Required Installation

• Holder handle 07JA8-001020A
• Crankshaft pulley holder 070A8-RJA01 00 1. Clean the crankshaft pulley (A), crankshaft (8), bolt
• Socket, 19 mm 07JAA-001020A or a commercially (C), and washer (D). Lubricate as shown.
available 19 mm socket
0: Clean
Removal . : Lubricate
~ ~
2. Remove the splash shield (see step 25 on page 5-6). 00 A _ _
3. Removethe dri~e belt (see pa!;le 4-31). ••• 00000

o
00000
4. Hold the pulley with holder handle (A) and holder
attachment (8).
B D
070AB-RJA0100
/ 2. Install the crankshaft pulley, and hold the pl:llley

with holder handle (A) and holder attachment (8).
A
07JAB-001020A B
~
070AB-RJA0100
/
A
C 07 JAB-001020A
07 JAA-001 020A
~
(or commerially
available)
5. Remove the bolt with a 19 mm socket (C) and

breaker bar, then remove the crankshaft pulley.
C
07JAA-001020A
(or commerially
available)
3. Tighten the bolt to 49 N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 Ibf·ft) with

a torque wrench and 19 mm socket (C). Do not use
an impact wrench. If you are using a new pulley
bolt or new crankshaft, tighten the bolt to 177 N·m
(18.0 kgf·m, 130 Ibf·ft) with a torque wrench and
19 mm socket, loosen the bolt and tighten it 49 N·m
(5.0 kgf·m, 36 Ibf·ft).
4. Tighten the pulley bolt an additional 90 0.
6. Install the splash shield (see step 30 on page 5-16).
6-12 BACK
Cam Chain Removal
NOTE: Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields. 8. Support the engine with a jack and a woodblock
under the oil pan.
9. Remove the torque rod stiffener (A) and upper
2. Remove the splash shield (see step 25 on page 5-6). torque rod (8).
5. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The

10. Remove the ground cable (A), then remove the side
engine mount bracket (8).
c
6. Remove the VTC oil control solenoid valve
(see page 11-319).
7. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
(cont'd)
BACK 6-13
Cylinder Head
Cam Chain Removal (cont'd)
11. Remove the water bypass pipe mounting bolt (A), 13. Loosely install the crankshaft pUlley.
then remove the side engine mount bracket (8).
14. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise to compress
the auto-tensioner.
12. Remove the cam chain case.
15. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the auto-
tensioner (8), then insert a 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
diameter pin or lock pin (PIN 14511-PNA-003) (C)
into the holes. Turn the crankshaft clockwise to
secure the pin.
6-14 BACK
16. Remove the auto-tensioner. 18. Remove the cam chain guide A and tensioner arm
(B).
17. Remove the cam chain guide B.
19. Remove the cam chain.
BACK 6-15
Cylinder Head
Cam Chain Installation
NOTE: 3. To hold the intake camshaft, insert a change detent

• Keep the cam chain away from magnetic fields. arm shaft (PIN 24635-P6H-003) (A) into the
• Before this procedure, check that the variable valve maintenance hole in the camshaft position (GMP)
timing control (VTG) actuator is locked by turning the pulse plate A (B) and through the No.5 rocker shaft
VTG actuator counterclockwise. If not locked, turn the holder (G).
VTG actuator clockwise until it stops, then recheck it.
If it is still not locked, replace the VTG actuator.
1. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TOG). Align

the TOG mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with
the pointer (B) on the engine block.
4. To hold the exhaust camshaft, insert a change

detent arm shaft (PIN 24635-P6H-003) (A) into the
maintenance hole in the camshaft position (GMP)
pulse plate B (0) and through the No.5 rocker shaft
2. Set the camshafts to TOG. The punch mark (A) on holder (G).
the variable valve timing control (VTG) actuator and
the punch mark (B) on the exhaust camshaft 5. Install the cam chain on the crankshaft sprocket
sprocket should be at the top. Align the TOG marks with the center ofthetwo colored link plates (A)
(G) on the VTG actuator and exhaust camshaft aligned with the mark (B) on the crankshaft
sprocket. sprocket.
B A
6-16 BACK
6. Install the cam chain on the VTC actuator and the. 8. Install the auto-tensioner,
exhaust camshaft sprocket with the punch marks
(A) aligned with the center of the three colored link
plates (8).
B B
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ftl
9. Install the cam chain guide 8.
7. Install the cam chain guide Aand tensioner arm (8).
""'i
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 8.7I..·ft)
8x1.2Smm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf.m, 16lbf·ftl
(cont'd)
BACK 6-17
Cylinder Head
Cam Chain Installation (cont'd)
10. Remove the pin or lock pin (PIN 14511-PNA-003) 15. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
from the auto-tensioner. 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine
block mating surface of the chain case. Install the
component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
gasket.
NOTE:
• If you apply liquid gasket PIN 08718-0012, the
component must be install within 4 minutes.
• Iftoo much time has passed after applying the
liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
11. Remove the change detent arm shafts (PIN 24635-

P6H-003).
B B
Apply liquid gasket

along the bloken line.
16. Apply liquid gasket to the engine block upper

surface contact areas (A) on the chain case and
lower block upper surface contact areas (8) on the
chain case.
12. Check the chain case oil seal for damage. Ifthe oil 17. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004,08718-0001,
seal is damaged, replace the chain case oil seal 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the oil pan
(see page 6-24). mating surface ofthe chain case. Install the
13. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the chain gasket.
case mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
NOTE:
14. Clean, and dry the chain case mating surfaces. • If you apply liquid gasket PIN 08718-0012, the
• If too much time has passed after applying the
Apply liquid gasket

along the broken line.
6-18 BACK
18. Install the new O-ring (A) on the chain case. Set the 19. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), then
edge of the chain case (8) to the edge of the oil pan install the water bypass pipe mounting bolt (8).
(C), then install the chain case on the engine block
(D). Wipe off the excess liquid gasket on the oil pan
and chain case mating area.
NOTE:
• When installing the chain case, do not slide the
bottom surface onto the oil pan mounting surface.
• Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
with oil.
• Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the chain case.
20. Install the side engine mount bracket (A), then

loosely tighten the new bolt and nut (8), and
loosely tighten the bolt (C).
6x1.0mm 6x1.0mm
12N,m 12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) (1;2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
21. Install the ground cable (D).
(cont'd)
BACK 6-19
Cylinder Head
Cam Chain Installation (cont'd)
22. Remove the air cleaner housing assembly 26. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
(see page 11-394).
23. Loosen the transmission mounting bolt and nuts nut.
(A).
14x 1.5 mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ft)
24. Raise the lift to full height. 12x1.25mm

72 N·m (7.3 kgf·m, 52Ibf·ft)
28. Tighten the transmission mounting bolt and nuts.
6-20 BACK
29. Raise the lift to full height. 34. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
30. Tighten the lower torque rod mounting bolt. 35. Install the variable valve timing control (VTC) oil
control solenoid valve (see page 11-319).
36. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-29).
38. Do the CKP pattern clear/CKP learn procedure

(see page 11-4).

11-394).
stiffener (B), and tighten the new stiffener
mounting bolts (C), then tighten the new upper
sequence shown.
C CD 12 x 1.25 mm
12x 1.25 mm 64N.m C
54N·m (6.5 kgf.m,/4Ibf.ft) 12 x 1.25 mm
(5.5 kgf·m, Replace. 54 N·m
40Ibf·ft)
Replace. I (5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
~ _ _ ®12x1.25mm
64N·m
(6.5 kgf·m,
47Ibf.ft)
Replace.
BACK 6-21
Cylinder Head
Auto-tensioner Removal and Installation
Removal 3. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the auto-
tensioner (8), then insert a 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
1. Remove the chain case cover. diameter pin or lock pin (PIN 14511-PNA-003) (e)
into the holes. Turn the crankshaft clockwise to
secure the pin.
4. Remove the auto-tensioner.

the auto-tensioner.
BACK
Installation 5. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004,08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the chain
1. Install the auto-tensioner. case mating surface of the chain case cover. Install
the component within 5 minutes of applying the
liquid gasket.
NOTE:
• Iftoo much time has passed after applying the
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
2. Remove the pin or lock pin (PIN 14511-PNA-003)

from the auto.-tensioner. Apply liquid gasket
6. Install the chain case cover.
NOTE:
with oil.
installing the chain case cover.
3. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the chain

case cover mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
4. Clean, and dry the chain case cover mating

surfaces.
.____6 x 1.0 mm
12N·m
BACK 6-23
Cylinder Head
Chain Case Oil Seal Installation Cam Chain Inspection
Special Tools Required Special Tools Required

• Driver 077 49-0010000 Cam chain inspection gauge 07AAJ-RWCA100
• Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
1. Use the driver and attachment to drive a new oil
seal squarely into the chain case to the specified 2. Remove the splash shield (see step 25 on page 5-6).
installed height.
3. Remove four spark plugs.
5. Rotate crankshaft pulley two turns clockwise.
6. Set the No. 1 piston at top dead center (TDC). The

A
07746·0010400
2. Measure the distance between the chain case

surface and oil seal.
Oil Seal Installed Height:

33.0-33.7 mm (1.30-1.33 in.)
c
33.0-33.7 mm
(1.30-1.33 in.)
6-24 BACK
7. Measure the clearance between the cam chain and 14. Measure the oil pump chain auto-tensioner rod
the tensioner arm with the cam chain inspection length.
gauge.
Oil Pump Chain Auto-Tensioner Rod Length
• If the clearance is OK, Go to step 22 . Service Limit: 13 mm (0.5 in.)
• If the clearance is more than the service limit, Go
to step 8.
Chain-to-Arm Clearance
Service Limit:
MIL on with P0341 :4.3 mm (0.17 in.)
Without MIL: 5.5 mm (0.22 in.)
'( 07 AAJ-RWCA 100
~~
15. Ifthe length is over the service limit, replace the oil
pump chain (see page 8-21). When replacing, check
8. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13),and check the teeth on the crankshaft sprocket and oil pump
the teeth on the crankshaft sprocket, VTC actuator, sprocket for wear and damage. If any of them are
and exhaust camshaft sprocket for wear and worn or damaged, replace if necessary.
damage. If any of them worn or damaged, replace
if necessary. 16. Check the oil passage on the oil pump chain auto-
tensioner for clogs. If the auto-tensioner is clogged,
9. Check the oil passage on the auto-tensioner for replace it.
clog. Ifthe·auto-tensioner is clogged, replace it.
17. Install the oil pan (see page 7-29).
10. Remove the power steering (P/S) pump. Do not
disconnect the PIS hoses from the pump (see step 18. Support the engine with a jack and a wood block
21 on page 5-5). under the oil pan.
11. Attach the universal eyelet to the drive belt auto- 19. Remove the special tools from the engine and
tensioner (see step 54.on page 5-10). vehicle.
12. Remove the top corner clip from the front grill on 20. Install new cam chain (see page 6-16).
both sides. Place the engine support mount pads
over the hood edge cushions, and align the pins 21. Install the PIS pump (see step 38 on page 5-17).
with the clip hole. Remove the lids from both side
of the cowl cover. Install the engine support hanger 22. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-29).
(AAR-T-12566), then attach the hook to the
universal eyelet. Tighten the wing nut by hand to 23. Install four spark plugs.
lift and support the engine/transmission assembly
(see step 5 on page 8-21). 24. Install the splash shield (see step 30 on page 5-16).
13. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11). 25. Install the front wheels.
BACK 6-25
Cylinder Head
CKP Pulse Plate Replacement
1. Remove the front wheels. 14. Install the CKP pulse plate.
2. Remove the splash shield (see step 25 on page 5-6). 15. Check the chain case oil seal for damage. Ifthe oil
seal is damaged, replace the chain case oil seal
3. Remove the drive belt (see page 4-31). (see page 6-24).
4. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-28). 16. Remove all ofthe old liquid gasket from the chain
case mating surfaces, bolt and bolt holes.
5. Set the No.1 piston at top dead center (TOC). The
punch mark on the variable valve timing control 17. Clean, and dry the chain case mating surfaces.
(VTC) actuator and the punch mark on the exhaust
camshaft sprocket should be at the top. Align the 18. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
TOC marks on the VTC actuator and exhaust 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine
camshaft sprocket (see step 5 on page 6-13). block mating surface ofthe chain case. Install the
6. Remove the VTC oil control solenoid valve gasket (see step 13 on page 6-18).
(see page 11-319).
NOTE:
7. Remove the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12). • If you apply liquid gasket PIN 08718-0012, the
8. Support the engine with a jack and a wood block • Iftoo much time has passed after applying the
under the oil pan. liquid gasket, remove the old liquid gasket and
9. Remove the torque rod stiffener and upper torque
rod (see step 9 on page 6-13). 19. Apply liquid gasket to the engine block upper
surface contact areas on the chain case and lower
10. Remove the ground cable, then remove the side block upper surface contact areas on the chain case
engine mount bracket (see step 10 on page 6-13). (see step 16 on page 6-18).
11. Remove the side engine mount bracket (see step 11 20. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004, 08718-0001,
on page 6-14). 08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the oil pan
mating surface ofthechain case. Install the
12. Remove the cam chain case (see step 12 on page component within 5 minutes of applying the liquid
6-14). gasket (see step 17 on page 6-18).
13. Remove the CKP pulse plate. NOTE:

6-26 BACK
.. ,..
21. Install the new a-ring on the chain case. Set the 34. Install the air cleaner housing assembly (see page
edge of the chain case to the edge of the oil pan, 11-394).
then install the chain case on the engine block (see
step 18 on page 6-19). Wipe off the excess liquid 35. Install the upper torque rod and torque rod stiffener,
gasket on the oil pan and chain case mating area. and tighten the new stiffener mounting bolts, then
tighten the new upper torque rod mounting bolts in
NOTE: the numbered sequence shown (see step 33 on
• When installing the chain case, do not slide the page 6-21).
bottom surface onto the oil pan mounting surface.
• Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine 36. Install the variable valve timing control (VTC) oil
with oil. control solenoid valve (see page 11-319).
installing the chain case. 37. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
22. Install the side engine mount bracket (see step 19 38. Install the cylinder head cover (see page 6-29).
on page 6-19).
23. Install the side engine mount bracket, then loosely
tighten the new bolt and nut, and loosely tighten 40. Do the CKP patternclear/CKP learn procedure
the bolt. Install the ground cable (see step 20 on (see page 11-4).
page 6-19).

(see page 11-394).
25. Loosen the transmission mounting bolt and nuts

27. Loosen the lower torque rod mounting bolt (see


nut (see step 27 on page 6-20).
30. Tighten the transmission mounting bolt and nuts

32. Tighten the lower torque rod mounting bolt (see

BACK 6-27
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Removal
1. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-8). 6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid
connector (A), rocker armoil pressure switch
2. Remove the fuel injector cover. connector (8), and variable valve timing control
(VTe) oil control solenoid valve connector (e), then
remove the harness clamp (D).
3. Remove the four ignition coils (see page 4-20). 7. Disconnect the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector
(A), oil pressure switch connector (8), and
4. Remove the power steering hose bracket (A), crankshaft position (eKP) sensor connector (e),
breather hose (8), and dipstick (e). then remove the harness clamps (D).
5. Remove the bracket mounting bolts (D) from the

cylinder head cover.
BACK
Cylinder Head Cover Installation
8. Remove the cylinder head cover. ,1. Throughly clean the head cover gasket and the
grooye. Inspect the g~,sketfor signs of damage.
Replace if necessary.
2. Install a new head cover gasket (A) in the groove of

the cylinder head cover (8).
3. Check that the mating surfaces are clean and dry.
4. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004, 08718-0001,

08718-0003, or 08718-0009, on the chain case and
the No.5 rocker shaft holder mating areas. Install
liquid gasket.
NOTE:
component must be install within 4 minutes,
,·..If too much time has passed after applying the
Apply liquid gasket Apply liquid gasket

to these points. to these points.
(cont'd)
BACK 6-29
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Cover Installation (cont'd)
5. Set the spark plug seals (A) on the spark plug tubes. 8. Connectthe air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor connector (A),
Place the cylinder head cover (B) on the cylinder oil pressure switch connector (B), and crankshaft
head, then slide the cover slightly back and forth to position (CKP) sensor connector (C), then install the
seat the head cover gasket. harness clamps (D).
1/ D
.Cj.
9. Connect the rocker arm oil control solenoid
connector (A), rocker arm oil pressure switch
connector (B), and variable valve timing control
6. Inspect the cover washers (C). Replace any washer (VTC) oil control solenoid valve connector (C), then
that is damaged or deteriorated. install the harness clamp (D).
7. Tighten the bolts in two orthree steps. In the final

step tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf.ft).
NOTE:
with oil.
installing the head cover.
® CD ®
6-30 BACK
Cylinder Head Removal
10. Install the power steering hose bracket (A), NOTE:

breather hose (B), and dipstick (C). • Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
6x 1.0mm • To avoid damage, unplug the wiring connectors
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl D
6x1.0mm carefully while holding the connector portion.
~ 12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
• To avoid damaging the cylinder head, wait until the
c~t
engine coolanttemperature drops below 100 "F
(38 "C) before loosening the cylinder head bolts.
OJ • Mark all wiring and hoses to avoid misconnection.
Also, be sure that they do not contact other wiring or
hoses, or interfere with other parts.
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-362).
2. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-7).

(see page 11-394).
11. Install the bracket mounting bolts (D) to the 5. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
cylinder head cover.
6. Remove the exhaust manifold (see page 9-13).
12. Install the four ignition coils (see page 4-20).
7. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and
13. Install the fuel injector cover. wire harness clamps from the cylinder head.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1

connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor A (Intake)
connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B (Exhaust)
connector
• EVAP canister purge valve connector
14. Install the charge air cooler (see page 9-9).
(cont'dl
BACK 6-31
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Removal (cont'd)
8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then 10. Remove the two bolts (A) securing the EVAP
disconnect the fuel feed hose (see page 11-372).' canister purge control valve mounting bracket,
then remove the harness clamps (B).
9. Remove the evaporative emission (EVAP) canister

hose (A), brake booster vacuum hose (B), and' 11. Remove the upper radiator hose (A), heater hose
vacuum hose (C). (B), and water bypass hose (C).
6-32 BACK
12. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13).
13. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-37).
14. Remove the cylinder head bolts. To prevent

warpage, unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at
a time; repeat the sequence until all bolts are
loosened.
15. Remove the cylinder head.
BACK 6-33
Cylinder Head
CMP Pulse Plate A Replacement CMP Pulse Plate B Replacement
1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-28). 1. Remove the cylinder head cover (see page 6-28).
2. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor A 2. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) sensor B
(see page 11-320). (see page 11-246).
3. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then 3. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then
loosen the bolt. loosen the bolt.
4. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate B.

4. Remove the camshaft position (CMP) pulse plate A.
~L~~'---' 14 x 1.0 mm
14x1.0mm 39N·m
39N·m Apply engine oil to
(4.0 kgf.m, 29 Ibf·tt)
Apply engine oil to the bolt threads.
the bolt threads.
5. Install the CMP pulse plate B in the reverse order of
5. Install the CMP pulse plate A in the reverse order of removal.
removal.
6-34 BACK
VTC Actuator, Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Replacement
Removal Installation
1. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13). 1. Install the VTC actuator and exhaust camshaft
sprocket.
2. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then
loosen the variable valve timing control (VTC) NOTE: Install the VTC actuator to unlock position.
actuator mounting bolt and exhaust camshaft
sprocket mounting bolt. 2. Apply engine oil to the threads of the VTC actuator
mounting bolt and exhaust camshaft mounting bolt,
then install them.
3. Hold the camshaft with an open-end wrench, then

tighten the bolts.
Specified Torque
VTC Actuator Mounting Bolt:
12x1.25 mm
113 N·m (11.5 kgf·m, 83lbf·ft)
Exhaust Camshaft Sprocket Mounting Bolt:
10x1.25mm
72 N·m (7.3 kgf.m, 53 Ibf·ft)
3. If the VTC actuator is reused, do the following steps.
-1 Remove the intake camshaft, and seal the

advance holes and retard holes in the No.1
camshaft journal with tape (see step 6 on page
6-8).
-2 Punch a hole in the tape over one of the
advance holes (see step 7 on page 6-8).
-a Apply air to the advance hole to release the
lock (see step 8 on page 6-9).
-4 Remove the tape and adhesive residue from
the camshaft journal.
4. Remove the VTC actuator and exhaust camshaft 4. Hold the camshaft, and turn the VTC actuator
sprocket. clockwise until you hear it click. Make sure to lock
the VTC actuator by turning it.
BACK 6-35
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Inspection for Warpage
1. Remove the cylinder head (see page 6-28).
2. Inspect the camshaft (see page 6-40).
3. Check the cylinder head for warpage. Measure

along the edges, and across the center.
• If warpage is less than 0.05 mm (0.002 in.),

cylinder head resurfacing is not required.
• If warpage is between 0.05 mm (0.002 in.) and
0.2 mm (0.008 in.), resurface the cylinder head.
• Maximum resurface limit is 0.2 mm (0.008 in.)
based on a height of 104 mm (4.09 in.).
Cylinder Head Height

Standard (New): 103.95"""""104.05 mm
(4.093-4.096 in.)
6-36 BACK
Rocker Arm Assembly Removal
1. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13). 4. Remove the cam chain guide B, camshaft holders,
and camshafts.
2. Loosen the rocker arm adjusting screws (A).
5. Insert the bolts (A) into the rocker shaft holder, then
A
remove the rocker arm assembly (B).
3. Remove the camshaft holder bolts. To prevent

damaging the camshafts, unscrew the bolts, in
sequence, two turns at a time.
NOTE: Bolt CD is not on all engines.

® ®@@@@)@ ®
IJ) ® @ @ @ ® CD ® @ ®@®
BACK 6-37
Cylinder Head
Rocker Arm and Shaft Disassembly/Reassembly
NOTE:
o Identify each part as it is removed so that each item can be reinstalled.
o Inspect the rocker arm shaft and rocker arms (see page 6-39).
o If reused, the rocker arms must be installed in the same positions.
o When removing, or installing the rocker arm assembly, do not remove the camshaft holder bolts. The bolts will keep
the holders and rocker arms on the shaft.

o Prior to reassembling, clean all the parts in solvent, dry them, and apply lubricant to any contact points.
o Bundle the rocker arms with rubber bands to keep them together as a set.
o When replacing the intake rocker arm assembly, remove the fastening hardware from the new intake rocker arm
assembly.
____ EXHAUST ROCKER
fI~---o-----o------o---------------o--~--o----o---~~~ SHAFT
~ ______~0L________~
0L______o~0~o
e ..------- EXHAUST ROCKER ARM
No.1 CAMSHAFT , No.5 CAMSHAFT

HOLDER HOLDER
O~RUBBERBAND
No.2 No.3 No.4 INTAKE ROCKER
CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT ARM ASSEMBLY
HOLDER HOLDER HOLDER
~~o__o__~AJ'__o___
o~AJ' 0 0 rJ'~o_o_:::JJ~
INTAKE ROCKER SHAFT
6-38 BACK
Rocker Arm and Shaft Inspection
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-37). 5. Measure the inside diameter of the rocker arm, and
check it for an out-of-round condition.
2. Disassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page
6-38). Rocker Arm-to-Shaft Clearance
Standard (New):
3. Measure the diameter of the shaft at thecfirst rocker Intake: 0.025-0.052 mm
location. (0.0010-0.0020 in.'
Exhaust: 0.018-0.056 mm
(0.0007-:-0.0022 in.)
Service Limit: 0.08 mm (0.003 in.'
4. Zero the gauge (A) to the shaft diameter.

6. Repeat for all rocker arms and both shafts. If the
clearance is beyond the service limit, replace the
rocker shaft and all out of service limit rocker arms.
If any VTEC rocker arm needs replacement, replace
the rocker arms (primary and secondary', as a set.
7. Inspect the rocker arm pistons (A). Push on each

piston manually. If it does not move smoothly,
replace the rocker arm set.
NOTE: Apply oil to the pistons when reassembling.
flfio
~,
A
~
8. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-49).
BACK 6-39
Cylinder Head
Camshaft Inspection
NOTE: Do not rotate the camshaft during inspection. 3.' Seat,the camshaft'by pushing it away from the
camshaft pulley end of the cylinder head.
1. Remove the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-37).
4. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
2. Put the rocker shaft holders, camshaft,and camshaft, then push the camshaft back and forth,
camshaft holders on the cylinder head, then tighten and read the end play. If the end play is beyond the
the bolts, in sequence, to the specified torque. service limit, replace the cylinder head and recheck.
If it is still beyond the service limit, replace the
NOTE: If the engine does not have bolt ®, skip it camshaft.
and continue the torque sequence.
Camshaft End Play
Specified Torque Standard (New): 0.05-0.20 mm
8x1.25mm (0.002-0.008 in.)
22 N·m (2.2 kgf.m, 16Ibf·ft) Service Limit: 0.4 mm (0.02 in.)
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
6 x 1.0 mm Bolts: ®, @, @
@ @ @ ® ®
@ @®®CD®® ® @@
6-40 BACK
5. Unscrew the camshaft holder bolts two turns at a 10. Check the total runout with the camshaft supported
time, in a crisscross pattern. Then remove the on V-blocks.
camshaft holders from the cylinder head.
• If the total runout of the camshaft is within the
6. Lift the camshafts out ofthe cylinder head, wipe service limit, replace the cylinder head.
them clean, then inspect the lift ramps. Replace the • If the total runout is beyond the service limit,
camshaft if any lobes are pitted, scored, or replace the camshaft, and recheck the camshaft-
excessively worn. to-holder oil clearance. Ifthe oil clearance is still
beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder
7. Clean the camshaft journal surfaces in the cylinder head.
head, then set the camshafts back in place. Place a
plastigage strip across each journal. Camshaft Total Runout
8. Install the camshaft holders, then tighten the bolts Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.002 in.)
to the specified torque as shown in step 2.
9. Remove the camshaft holders. Measure the widest

portion of plastigage on each journal.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is within

limits, go to step 11.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit, and the camshaft has been replaced,
replace the cylinder head.
• If the camshaft-to-holder clearance is beyond the
service limit, and the camshaft has not been
replaced, go to step 10.
Camshaft-to-Holder Oil Clearance

Standard (New): 11. Measure cam lobe height.
No.1 Journal: 0.030-0.069 mm
(0.001-0.003 in.) Cam Lo be He!9
. ht Stan d ard (N ew:
No.2, 3, 4, 5 Journals: 0.060-0.099 mm INTAKE EXHAUST
(0.002-0.004 in.) PRI 33.925 mm 34.092 mm
Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) (1.3356 in.) (1.3422 in.)
SEC 29.638mm
(1.1668 in.)
PRI: Prrmary SEC: Secondary C/C: Cam Cham
INTAKE
SEC PRI
-C/C
BACK 6-41
Cylinder Head
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Removal
Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve guide seal remover.

Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A
Identify the valves and valve springs as they are

removed so that each item can be reinstalled inits
original position.
2. Using an appropriate-sized socket (A) and plastic

mallet (8), lightly tap the valve retainer to loosen
the valve cotters.
6. Remove the valve seal.,
3. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the

spring, and remove the valve cotters.
4. Remove the special tool, then remove the valve

retainer and valve spring.
6-42 BACK
Valve Inspection Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Inspection
1. Remove the valves (see page 6-42).
2. Measure the valve in these areas. 1. Remove the valves (see page 6-42).
Intake Valve Dimensions 2. Slide the valve outof its guide about 10 mm
A Standard (New): 34.85-35.15 mm (0.39 in.), then measure the guide-to-stem
(1.372-1.384 in.) clearance with a dial indicator while rocking the
B Standard (New): 108.7-109.5 mm stem in the direction of normal thrust (wobble
(4.280-4.311 in.) method).
C Standard (New): 5.475-5.485 mm • ·If the measurement exceeds the service limit,
(0.2156-0.2159 in.) recheck it using a new valve.
C Service Limit: 5.445 mm (0.214 in.) • If the measurementis now within the service
limit, reassemble using a new valve.
Exhaust Valve Dimensions • If the measurement with a new valve still
A Standard (New): 29.85-30.15 mm exceeds the service limit, go to step 3.
(1.175-1.187 in.)
B Standard (New): 108.4-109.0 mm Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
(4.268-:-4.291 in.) Standard (New): 0.06-0.11 mm
C Standard (New): 5.450-5.460 mm (0.002-0.004 in.)
(0.2146-0.2150 in.) Service Limit: 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
C Service Limit: 5.42 mm (0.213 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance
Standard (New): 0.11-0.16 mm
....~I-------- B - - - - - - _..~I (0.004-0.006 in.)
c
t
A
I\'--_---'t_ _-----,..,--,l
U
+
/ t
3. Subtract the 0.0. of the valve stem, measured with

a micrometer, from the I.D. of the valve guide,
measured with an inside micrometer or ball gauge.
Takethe measurements i'n three places along the
valve stem and three places inside the valve guide.
The difference between the largest guide
measurement and the smallest stem measurement
should not exceed the service limit.
Intake Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

(0.0012-0.0022 in.)
Exhaust Valve Stem-to-Guide Clearance

(0.0022-0.0031 in.)
BACK 6-43
Cylinder Head
Valve Guide Replacement

Special Tools Required 5. Working from the camshaft side, use the driver and
• Valve guide driver, 5.5 mm 07742-0010100 an air hammer to drive the guide about 2 mm
·Valve guide reamer, 5.5mm 07HAH-PJ7Al00 (0.1 in.) towards the combustion chamber. This will
knock off some of the carbon and make removal
1. Inspect the valve stem-to-guide clearance easier. Hold the air hammer directly in line with the
(see page 6-43). valve guide to prevent damaging the driver.
2. As illustrated, use a commercially.available air- 6. Turn the head over, and drive the guide out tOlivard
impact valve guide driver (A) modified to fit the the camshaft side. of the·head.
diameter of the valve guides. In most case.s, the
same procedure can be done using the special tool
and a conventional hammer.
I
.•. A . 5.3mm
(___, -w 0 L 87 mm - L - 57 mm
I - (3.43 in.) - I - (2.24 in.)
(0.21 in.)
IL~
{ft
_______
-I
10.8mm
(0.42 in.)
3. Selectthe proper replacement guides, and chill

them in the freezer section ofa refrigerator for
about an hour.
4. Use a hot plate or oven to evenly heat the cylinder

head to 300 "F (150 "C). Monitor the temperature
with a cooking thermometer. Do not get the head
hotter than 300 "F (150 "C); excessive heat may
loosen the valve seats.
7. If a valve guide won't move, drill it out with a 8 mm

(5/16 in.) bit, then try again. Drill guides only in
extreme cases; you could damage the cylinder
head ifthe guide breaks.
8. Take out the new guide(s) from the freezer, one at a

time, as you need them.
6-44 BACK
9. Apply a thin coat of clean engine oil to the outside 10. Coat both reamer and the valve guide with cutting
of the new valve guide. Install the guide from the oil.
camshaft side ofthe head; use the 5.5 valve guide
driver to drive the guide in to the specified installed 11. Rotate the reamer clockwise to the full length of the
height (A) of the guide (8). If you have all 16 guides valve guide bore.
to do, you may have to reheat the head.
07HAH-PJ70100
Valve Guide Installed Height
Intake: 15.2-16.2 mm (0.598-0.638 in.'
Exhaust: 15.5-16.5 mm (0.610-0.650 in.'
12. Continue to rotate the reamer clockwise while

removing it from the bore.
13. Thoroughly wash the guide in detergent and water

to remove any cutting residue.
14. Check the clearances with a valve (see page 6-43).

Verify that a valve slides into the intake and
exhaust valve guides without getting stuck.
BACK 6-45
Cylinder Head
Valve Seat Reconditioning
1. Inspectthe valve stem-to-guide clearance 5; Make one more very light pass with the 45 ° cutter
(see page 6-43). Ifthe valve guides are worn, to remove any possible burrs caused by the other
replace them (see page 6-44) before cutting the cutters.
valve seats.
Valve Seat Width
2. Renew the valve seats in the cylinder head using a Standard (New): 1.25-1.55 mm (0.049-0.061 in.)
valve seat cutter. Service Limit: 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
6. After resurfacing the seat, inspect for even valve

seating. Apply Prussian Blue compound (A) to the
valve face. Insert the valve in its original location in
the head, then lift it and snap it closed against the
seat several times.
3. Carefully cut a 45 ° seat, removing only enough

material to ensure a smooth and concentric seat. '
4. Bevel the upper and lower edges at the angles

shown in the illustration. 7. The actual valve seating surface (B), as shown by
Check the width ofthe seat and adjust accordingly. the blue compound, should be centered on the seat.
INTAKE: 35 0 • If it is too high (closer to the valve stem), you

EXHAUST: 30 0
must make a second cut with the 67.5 ° cutter to
move it down, then one more cut with the 45 °
cutter to restore seat width .
• If it is too low (close to the valve edge), you must
make a second cut with the 35 ° cutter (intake
side) or the 30 ° cutter (exhaust side) to move it
up, then make one more cut with the 45 ° cutter
to restore seat width.
NOTE: The final cut should always be made with

the 45 ° cutter.
6-46 BACK
8. Insert the intake and exhaust valves in the head,
and measure valve stem installed height (A).
Intake Valve Stem Installed Height

Exhaust Valve Stem Installed Height

9. If valve stem installed height is beyond the service

limit, replace the valve and recheck. If it is still
beyond the service limit, replace the cylinder head;
the valve seat in the head is too deep.
BACK 6-47
Cylinder Head
Valve, Spring, and Valve Seal Installation
Special Tools Required 5. Install the valve spring and valve retainer. Place the
• Stem seal driver 07PAD-0010000 end of the valve spring with the closely wound coils
• Valve spring compressor attachment 07757-PJ1010A toward the cylinder head .
1. Coat the valve stems with engine oil. Install the 6. Install the valve spring compressor. Compress the
valves in the valve guides. spring, and install the valve cotters.
2. Check that the valves move up and down smoothly.
3. Install the spring seats on the cylinder head.
4. Install the new valve seals (A) using the valve guide
seal installer (B).
NOTE: The exhaust valve seal (C) has a black spring

(D), and the intake valve seal (E) has a white spring
(F). They are not interchangeable.
F
" ~~~-==F=:::J...,)
~
7. Remove the valve spring compressor.
8. Lightly tap the end of each valve stem two or three

times with a plastic mallet (A) to ensure proper
E c seating of the valve and valve keepers. Tap the
valve stem only along its axis so you do not bend
B the stem.
07PAD-0010000
NOTE: Use 5.5 mm side.
6-48 BACK
Rocker Arm Assembly Installation
1. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly (see page 6. Make sure the punch marks on the variable valve
6-38). timing control (VTC) actuator and exhaust camshaft
sprocket are facing up, then set the camshafts (A) in
2. Clean and dry the No.5 rocker shaft holder mating the holder.
surface.

08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the cylinder
head mating surface of the No.5 rocker shaft
holder. Install the component within 5 minutes of
applying the liquid gasket.
NOTE:
component must be install within 4 minutes .
7. Setthe camshaft holders (8) and cam chain guide 8

(C) in place.
Apply liquid gasket 8. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.

4. Insert the bolts (A) into the rocker shaft holder, then NOTE: If the engine does not have bolt @, skip it
install the rocker arm assembly (8) on the cylinder and continue the torque sequence.
head.
Specified Torque
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf.ft)
6x 1.0 mr:n
12 N.m(1.2 kgf·m; 8.7 Ibf·ft)
6x 1.0 mm Bolts:@,@,®
@ ® @) @ ® @ @
® @®®Q)®® @ @@
9. Install the cam chain (see page 6-16), and adjustthe
5. Remove the bolts from the rocker shaft holder. valve clearance (see page 6-9).
BACK 6-49
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation
1. Install a new coolant separator in the engine block 4. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TOC). Align
whenever the engine block is replaced. the TOC mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with
the pointer (B) on the engine block.
5. Install the cylinder head on the block.

2. Clean the cylinder head and block surface.
6. Measure the diameter of each cylinder head bolt at
3. Install the new cylinder head gasket (A) and dowel point A and point B.
pins (B) on the engine block. Always use a new
B 50 mm (2.0 in.)
cylinder head gasket.
A 45 mm 11.8 in.)
7. If either diameter is less than 10.6 mm (0.42 in.),

replace the cylinder head bolt.
6-50 BACK
8. Apply engine oil to the threads and under the bolt 11. Install the rocker arm assembly (see page 6-49).
heads of all cylinder head bolts.
9. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in sequence to
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 Ibf·ft). Use a beam-type
torque wrench. When using a preset~type torque 13. Install the upper radiator hose (A), heater hose (B),
wrench, be sure to tighten slowly and do not and water bypass hose (e).
overtighten. If a bolt makes any noise while you are
torquing it, loosen the bolt and retighten it from the
first step. -
14. Install the harness clamps (A), then install the two
(j) ® CD ® ® bolts (B) securing the evaporative emission (EVAP)
canister purge control valve mounting bracket.
10. After torquing, tighten all cylinder head bolts in two
steps (90 0 per step). If you are using a new cylinder
head bolt, tighten the bolt an extra 90 o.
NOTE: Remove the cylinder head bolt if you

tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
back to step 6 of the procedure. Do not loosen it
back to the specified angle.
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 6-51
Cylinder Head
Cylinder Head Installation (cont'd)
15. Install the EVAP canister hose (A), brake booster 17. Connect the engine wire harness connectors and
vacuum hose (8), and vacuum hose (C). wire harness clampstothe cylinder head.
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT) sensor 1

connector
connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 8 (Exhaust)
connector
B
18. Install the exhaust manifold and turbocharger

(see page 9-17).
19. Install the intake manifold (see page 9~5).
A 20. Install the drive belt (see page 4-31).
21. Install the air cleaner housing (see page 11-394).
22. After installation,check that all tubes, hoses and

connectors are installed correctly.
16. Connect the fuel feed hose (see page 11 c374), then
install the quick-connect fitting cover (A). 23. Inspect for fuel leaks: Turn the ignition switch
ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump
24. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed

the air from the cooling system with the heater
valve open (see step 6 on page 10-7).
25. Inspect the idle speed (see page 11-338).
26. Inspectthe ignition timing (see page 4-19).
6-52 BACK
Sealing Bolt Installation
NOTE: When installing the sealing bolt, always use a

new washer.
22x1.5mm
74N·m
BACK 6-53
BACK
Engine Mechanical
Engine Block
Special Tools ................................................................. 7-2
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play
Inspection .................................................................. 7-5
Crankshaft Main Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-6
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement ...................... 7-8
Oil Pan Removal ........................................................... 7-11
Crankshaft and Piston Removal .................................. 7-13
Crankshaft Inspection .................................................. 7-15
Block and Piston Inspection ........................................ 7-16
Cylinder Bore Honing ................................................... 7-18
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement ......... 7-19
Piston Ring Replacement ............................................. 7-22
Piston Installation ......................................................... 7-24
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection .................................. 7-25
Crankshaft Installation ................................................. 7-26
Oil Pan Installation ....................................................... 7-29
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal
Installation -In Car .................................................... 7-31
Sealing Bolt Installation ............................................... 7-32
BACK
Engine Block
Special Tools

Q) 07ZAD-PNAA100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment, 96 mm 1
® 077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
Q)
7-2 BACK
Component location Index
7 EPLA
T<
MAIN BEARINGS CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL,

Oil Clearance, page 7-6 TRANSMISSION END
Selection, page 7-7 Installation, step 21 on page 7-27
CRANKSHAFT
End Play, page 7-5
Runout, page 7-15 THRUST WASHERS
Out-of-Round, page 7-15
Removal, page 7-13
(cont'd)
BACK 7-3
Engine Block
PISTON RINGS
~ Replacement, page 7-22
________ SNAP RING
a
PISTON
Removal, page 7-13
Measurement, page 7-16
PISTON PIN
Removal, page 7-19
CONNECTING ROD
End Play, page 7-5
Small End Measurement,
page 7-20
o
~
ENGINE BLOCK
Cylinder Bore Inspection, page 7-16
~
Warpage Inspection, page 7-16
Cylinder Bore Honing, page 7-18
Ridge Removal, step 15 on page 7-14
/ 11~NEcnNGROC
CONNECTING ROD
BEARINGS
Oil Clearance, page 7-8
Selection, page 7-9 . BEARING CAP
CONNECTING ROD BOLTS

7-4 BACK
Connecting Rod and Crankshaft End Play Inspection
1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-14). 5. Push the crankshaft firmly away from the dial
indicator, and zero the dial against the end of the
2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 7 on page 7-13). crankshaft. Then pull the crankshaft firmly back
towardthe indicator; the dial reading st'!ould not
3. Measure the connecting rod end play with a feeler exceed the service limit.
gauge between the connecting rod and crankshaft.
Crankshaft End Play
Connecting Rod End Play Standard (New): 0.10-0.35 mm (0.004-0.014 in.)
Standard (New): 0.15-0.35 mm (0.006-0.014 in.) Service Limit: 0.45 mm (0.018 in.)
4. If the connecting rod end play is beyond service 6. If the end play is beyond service limit, replace the
limit, install a new connecting rod, and recheck. If it thrust washers and recheck, if it is still beyond
is still beyond service limit; replace the crankshaft service limit, replace the crankshaft (see page 7-13).
(see page 7-13).
BACK 7-5
E'ngine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing'Replacement

Main Bearing Clearance Inspection 6. Ifthe plastigage measurestoo wide or too narrow,
remove the crankshaft, and remove the upper half
1. To check main bearing-to-journal oil clearance, of the bearing. Install a new, complete bearing with
removethe lower block and'bearing halves the same color code(s), and recheck the clearance.
(see page 7-13). Do not file, shim, or scrape the bearings or the caps
to adjust clearance.
2. Clean each main journal and bearing half with a
clean shop towel. 7. Ifthe plastigage shows the clearance is still
i. :.incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the
3. Place one strip of plastigage across each main color listed above or below the current one), and
journal. check again. If the proper clearance cannot be
obtained by using the appropriate larger or smaller
4. Reinstall the bearings and lower block, then torque bearings, replace the crankshaft and start over.
the bolts to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf.m,22 Ibf·ft) +
67 0 in
the proper sequence (see step 18 on page 7-27).
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during

inspection.
5. Remove the lower block and bearings again, and

measure the widest part of the plastigage.
Main Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance

No.1, 2, 4, 5 Journals:
Standard (New): 0.017 - 0.041 mm
(0.0007 - 0.0016 in.)
No.3 Journal:
Standard (New): 0.025 - 0.049 mm
(0.0010 - 0.0019 in.)
7-6 BACK
Main Bearing Selection Main Journal Code Location
Crankshaft Bore Code Location 2. The main journal codes are stamped on the
crankshaft in either location.
1. Numbers, letters, or bars have been stamped on
the end of the block as a code for the size of each of
the five main journal bores. Write down the crank
bore codes.
If you can't read the codes because of accumulated
dirt and dust, do not scrub them with a wire brush
or scraper. Clean them only with solvent or
detergent.
No.5 JOURNAL No.1 JOURNAL

(TRANSMISSION END) (PULLEY END)
(cont'd)
BACK 7--7
Engine Block
Crankshaft Main Bearing Connecting Rod Bearing

Replacement (cont'd) Replacement
3. Use the'crank bore codes and crank journal codes Rod Bearing Clearance Inspection
to select the appropriate replacement bearings
from the following table. 1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-14).
NOTE: 2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 7 on page 7-13).

• The color code is on the edge of the bearing .
• When using bearing halves of different colors, it 3. Remove the connecting rod cap and bearing half.
does not matter which color is used in the top or
bottom. 4. Clean the crankshaft rod journal and bearing half
with a clean shop towel.
, Crank ;==::::;=:::j~~~~~~~
bore 5. Place plastigage across the rod journal.
Main code
journal
code 6. Reinstall the bearing half and cap, and torque the
Pink!
+
bolts to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 Ibf.ft) 90 0
1 Pink Yellow Green
Yellow
NOTE: Do not rotate the crankshaft during
Pink! Green Green! inspection.
2 Yellow Brown
Yellow
Yellow Green Green! Brown

7. Remove the rod cap and bearing half, and measure
3 Brown the widest part of the plastigage.
Green Green! Brown Black

4 Brown Connecting Rod Bearing-to-Journal Oil Clearance
Green! Brown Black Blackl (0.0013-0.0025 in.)
5 Brown Blue
Brown Black Black! Blue
6 Blue
r
Smaller Smaller
main bearing
journal (Thicker)
7-8 BACK
8. If the plastigage measures too wide or too narrow, Rod Bearing Selection
remove the upper half of the bearing, install a new,
complete bearing with the same color code(s), and 1. Inspect each connecting rod for cracks and heat
recheck the clearance. Do not file, shim, or scrape damage.
the bearings or the caps to adjust clearance.
Connecting Rod Big End Bore Code Locations
9. If the plastigage shows the clearance is still
incorrect, try the next larger or smaller bearing (the 2. Each rod has a tolerance range from 0 to 0.024 mm
color listed above or below the current one), and (0.0009 in.), in 0.006 mm (0.0002 in.) increments,
check clearance again. If the proper clearance depending on the size of its big end bore. It's then
cannot be obtained by using the appropriate larger stamped with a number or bar (1, 2, 3, or 4/1, II, III,
or smaller bearing, replace the crankshaft and start or 1111) indicating the range. You may find any
over. combination of numbers and bars in any engine.
(Half the number or bar is stamped on the bearing
cap, the other half is on the rod.)
If you can't read the code because of an
accumulation of oil and varnish, do not scrub it
with a wire brush or scraper. Clean it only with
solvent or detergent.
Normal Bore Size: 51.0 mm (2.01 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 7-9
Engine Block
Connecting Rod Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Connecting Rod Journal Code Location 4. Use the big end bore codes and rod journal codes
to select appropriate replacement bearings from
3. The connecting rod journal codes are stamped on the following table.
the crankshaft in either location.
NOTE: The color code is on the edge of the bearing.
Big end -------l~

bore
code
Rod
journal
code ---I.~ Smaller bearing (Thicker)
A Red Pink Yellow Green
B Pink Yellow Green Brown
c Yellow Green Brown Black
D Green Brown Black Blue
Smaller Smaller
rod bearing
journal (Thicker)
7-10 BACK
Oil Pan Removal
Special Tools Required 10. Attach the subframe adapter (A) to the subframe
Front subframe adapter VSB02e000016 and hang the belt of the subframe adapter over the
(Available through American Honda Tool and front of the subframe, then secure the belt with its
Equipment Program, 1-888-424-6857) stop.
1. Ifthe engine is out ofthe vehicle, go to step 14.
2. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
3. Drain the engine oil (see page 8-9).
5. Remove the splash shield (see step 25 on page 5-6).
6. Remove a bolt securing the PIS fluid line bracket,

and unclamp the PIS fluid line clamps on the front
subframe (see step 34 on page 5-6).
7. Remove the bolts securing the steering gearbox

mounting brackets (see step 35 on page 5-6).
8. Remove the two bolts at the three way catalytic

VSB02C000016
converter (lWe) front joint.
attach them with bolts securely.
12. Remove the 12 x 1.25 mm bolts (A) and

14 x 1.5 mm bolts (B), then loosen the 14 x 1.5 mm
bolts (e) on the subframe so they are about 30 mm
(1.2 in.) from the mounting surface.
9. Remove the lower torque rod (see step 45 on page

5-8).
(cont'd)
BACK 7-11
Engine Block
Oil Pan Removal (cont'd)
13. Remove the subframe adapter. 16. Remove the bolts securing the oil pan.
14. Remove the lowertorque rod bracket. 17. Using a flat blade screwdriver; separate the oil pan
from the block in the places shown.
15. Remove the torque converter cover (A) and

t
transmission mounting bolts (B).
7-12 BACK
Crankshaft and Piston Removal
1. Remove the engine assembly (see page 5-3). 9. Remove the bearing cap bolts. To prevent warpage,
unscrew the bolts in sequence 1/3 turn at a time;
2. Remove the transmission (see page 14-247). repeat the sequence until all bolts are loosened.
3. Remove the drive plate (see page 14-270).
4. Remove the oil pan (see page 7-11).
5. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-14).
7. Remove the baffle plate.
10. Using a flat blade screwdriver, separate the lower

block from the engine block in the places shown.
8. Remove the 8 mm bolts in sequence.
(cont'd)
BACK 7-13
Engine Block
Crankshaft and Piston Removal (cont'd)
11. Remove the lower block and bearings. Keep all the 15. If you can feel a ridge of metal or hard carbon
bearings in order. around the top of each cylinder, remove it with a
ridge reamer (A). Follow the reamer manufacturer's
instructions. If the ridge is not removed, it may
damage the pistons as they are pushed out.
16. Use the wooden handle of a hammer (A) to drive

out the piston/connecting rod assembly (B).
12. Remove the rod caps/bearings. Keep all caps/

bearings in order.
13. Lift the crankshaft out ofthe engine. Being careful

not to damage the journals.
17. Reinstall the lower block and bearings'on the

engine in the proper order.
18. Reinstall the connecting rod bearings and caps

after removing each piston/connecting rod
assembly.
19. Mark each piston/connecting rod assembly with its

cylinder number to make sure they are reused in
the original order.
NOTE: The ,~xisting number on the connecting rod

14. Remove the upper bearing halves from the does not indicate its position in the engine, it
connecting rods, and set them aside with their indicates the rod bore size.
respective caps.
7-14 BACK
Crankshaft Inspection
Out-of-Round and Taper Straightness
1. Remove the crankshaft from the engine block 6. Place the engine block on the surface plate.
(see page 7-13).
7. Clean and install the bearings on the No.1 and
2. Clean the crankshaft oil passages with pipe No.5 journals ot the engine block.
cleaners or a suitable brush.
8. Lower the crankshaft into the block.
3. Clean the keyway and threads.
9. Measure runout on all main journals. Rotate the
4. Measure the out-ot-round at the middle of each rod crankshaft two complete revolutions. The
and main journal in two places. The difference difference between measurements on each journal
between measurements on each journal must not must not be morethan the service limit.
be more than the service limit.
Crankshaft Total Runout
Journal Out-of-Round Standard (New): 0.02 mm (0.0008 in.) max.
Standard (New): 0.004 mm (0.0002 in.) max. Service Limit: 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.1
EB
5. Measure the taper at the edges of each rod and

main journal. The difference between
measurements on each journal must not be more
than the service limit.
Journal Taper
BACK 7-15
Engine Block
Block and Piston Inspection
1. Remove the crankshaft and pistons (see page 7-13). 4. Measure the wear and taper in direction X and Y at
three levels in each cylinder as shown. Ifthe
2. Check the piston for distortion or cracks. measurements inany cylinder are beyond the
Oversize Bore Service limit, replace the block. If
3. Measure the piston diameter at a point 10 mm the block is being rebored, refer to step 7 after
(0.4 in.) from the bottom of the skirt. There are two reboring.
standard-size pistons (J (slash) and B). The letter is
stamped on the top of the piston. letters are also Cylinder Bore Size
stamped on the block as cylinder bore sizes. Standard (New):
A or I: 86.010-86.020 mm
Piston Diameter (3.3862-3.3866 in.)
Standard (New): B or II: 86.000-86.010 mm
I (slash): 85.980-85.990 mm (3.3858-3.3862 in.)
(3.3850-3.3854 in.) Service limit: 86.070 mm (3.3886 in.)
B: 85.970-85.980 mm
(3.3846-3.3850 in.) Oversize
Service limit: 0.25: 86.250-86.260 mm (3.3957-3.3961 in.)
I (slash): 85.930 mm (3.3831 in.)
B: 85.920 mm (3.3827 in.) Reboring limit: 0.25 mm (0.01 in.) max.
Oversize Piston Diameter Bore Taper

0.25: 86.230-86.240 mm (3.3949-3.3953 in.) limit: (Difference between first and third
measurement) 0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
10 mm (0.4 in.)
~
.. SKIRT DIAMETER
l . .
6 mm (0.2 in.)
IE .
First Measurement
Second Measurement
t -,
6 mm (0.2 in.)
Third Measurement
.
No.1' No.4
7-16 BACK
5. Scored or scratched cylinder bores must be honed. 7. Calculate the difference between the cylinder bore
diameter and the piston diameter. If the clearance
6. Check the top of the block for warpage. Measure is near or exceeds the service limit, inspect the
along the edges, and across the center as shown. piston and cyrinder bore for excessive wear.
Engine Block Warpage Piston-to-Cylinder Bore Clearance

Standard (New): 0.07 mm (0.003 in.) max. Standard (New): 0.020-0.040 mm
Service Limit: 0.10 mm (0.004 in.) (0.0008-0.0016 in.)
_ SERVICE LIMIT·
0.05 mm (0.002 in.)
PRECISION STRAIGHT EDGE
BACK 7-17
Engine Block
Cylinder Bore Honing
Only a scored or scratched cylinder bore must be htmed.
1. Measure the cylinder bores' (see page 7-16).

Ifthe block is to be reused, hone the cylinders, and
remeasure the bores.
2. Hone the cylinder bores with honing oil and-a fine

(400 grit) stone in a60 degree cross-hatch pattern
(A). Use only a rigid hone with 400 grit or finer'
stone such as Sunnen, Ammco, or equivalent. Do
not use stones that are worn or broken.
x
3. When honing is complete, thoroughly clean the

engine block of all metal particles. Wash the
cylinder bores with hot soapy water, then dry and
oil them immediately to prevent rusting. Never use
solvent, it will only redistribute the grit on the
cylinder walls.
4. If scoring or scratches are still present in the

cylinder bores after honing the engine block to the
service limit, rebore the engine block. Some light
vertical scoring and scratching is acceptable if it is
not deep enough to catch your fingernail, and does
not run the full length ofthe bore.
7-18 BACK
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement
Disassembly 4. Heatthe piston and connecting rod assembly to

about 158 'f (70 "C), then remove the piston pin.
1. Remove the piston from the engine block (see page
7-13).
2. Apply new engine oil to the piston pin snap rings

(A), and turn them in the ring grooves until the end
gaps are lined up with the cutouts in the piston pin
bores (8).
NOTE: Take care not to damage the ring grooves.
3. Remove both snap rings. Start at the cutout in the

piston pin bore. Remove the snap rings carefully so
they do not go flying or get lost. Wear eye
protection.
(cont'd)
BACK 7-19
En,gin~ Block
Piston, Pin, and Connecting Rod Replacement (co nt'd)
Inspection 3. Check the difference between the piston pin

diameter and piston pin hole diameter in the piston.
NOTE: Inspect the piston, piston pin, and connecting
rod when they are at room temperature: Piston Pin-to-Piston Clearance
Standard (New): -0.005 to +0.002 mm
1. Measure the diameter of the piston pin. (-0.00020 to +0.00008 in.)
Service Limit: 0.005 mm·(0.0002 in.)
Piston Pin Diameter
Standard (New): 21.962--:21.965 mm
(0.8646-0.8648 in.1
4. Measure the piston pin-to-connecting rod clearance.
Piston Pin-to-Connecting Rod Clearance

2. Zero the dial indicator to the piston pin diameter. . Standard (New): 0.005-0~014 mm
(0.0002-0.0006 in.) ..
7-20 BACK
Reassembly 4. Assemble the piston (A) and connecting rod (B)
with the arrow (C) and the embossed mark (0) on
1. Install a piston pin snap ring (A). the same side. Install the piston pin (E).
2. Coat the piston pin bore in the piston, the bore in

the connecting rod, and the piston pin with new
engine oil.
3. Heat the piston to about 158 "F (70 "C).

E
\
'~~
I
F
5. Install the remaining snap ring (F).
6. Turn the snap rings in the ring grooves until the

end gaps are positioned at the bottom of the piston.
BACK 7-21
Piston Ring Replacement
1. Remove the piston from the engine block'(see page 4. Using a piston that has its rings removed, push,a .
7,13h .' new ring (A) into the cylinder bore 15-20 mm
(0.6-0.8 in.) from the bottom.
2. Using a ring expander (A), remove the old piston
rings (B).
B/~ A
5. Measure the piston ring end-gap (B) with a feeler

gauge:
• If the gap is too small, check to see if you have

3. Clean all ring grooves thoroughly with a squared- the proper rings for your engine.
off broken ring or ring groove cleaner with a blade • If the gap is too large, recheck the cylinder bore
that fits th.e piston grooves. diameter against the wear limits (see page 7-16).
The top ririg groove is 1.5 mm (0.06 in.) wide. The If the bore is beyond the service limit, the engine
2nd ring groove is 1.2 mm (0.05 in.) wide. The oil block must be rebored.
ring groove is 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) wide.
File down a blade if necessary. Piston Ring End-Gap
Do not use a wire brush to clean the ring grooves,
or cut the ring grooves deeper with the cleaning Top Ring:
tools. Standard (I\,iew): 0.20-0.30 mm
(0.008-0.012 in.)
NOTE: If the piston is to be separated from the Service Limit: 0.60 mm (0.024 in.)
connecting rod, do not install new rings yet.
Second Ring:
(0.016-0.020 in.)
Oil Ring:
(0.004-0.012 in.)
7-22 BACK
6. Install the top ring and the second ring as shown. 8. Position the ring end gaps as shown:
The top ring (A) has a 1N mark and the second ring
(8) has a 2N mark. The manufacturing marks (C) About90·
must be facing upward. OIL RING GAP. SECOND RING GAP
TOP RING GAP EXPANDER GAP
PISTON PIN
A
~8--eC
9. After installing a new set of rings, measure the
ring-to-groove clearances.
Top Ring Clearance

Standard (New): 0.045-'"0.090 mm
(0.0018-0.0035 in.)
/~~
c Second Ring Clearance
Standard (New): 0.040~0.065 mm
~
(0.0016.-0.0026 in.)
Oil Ring Clearance

Standard (New): 0.020""",0.050 mm
. (0.0008-0.0020 in.)
Piston Ring Dimensions:
Top Ring (Standard):

A: 3.1 mm (0.12 in.)
B: 1.5 mm (0.06 in.)
Second Ring (Standard):
A: 3.4 mm (0.13 in.)
A B: 1.2 mm (0.05 in.)
7. Rotate the rings in their grooves to make sure they

do not bind.
BACK 7-23
Engine Block
Piston Installation
If the Crankshaft is Already Installed 7. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with
, plastigage (see page 7-8).
1. Set the crankshaft to bottom dead center (BDC) for
each cylinder as its piston is installed. 8. Inspect the connecting rod bolts (see page 7-25).
2. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the 9. Install the rod caps with bearings. Torque the bolts
ring compressor. Check that the bearing is securely to 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 Ibf·ft).
in place.
10. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90 0.
3. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the

ring compressor, and the cylinder bore, then attach NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you
the ring compressor to the piston/connecting rod tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
assembly. back to step 8 of the procedure. Do not loosen it
back to the specified angle.
4. Position the mark (A) to face the cam chain side of
the engine.
90 0
5. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in

using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
Push down on the ring,compressor (B) to prevent
the rings from expanding before entering the
cylinder bore.
6. Stop after the ring compressor pops free, and

check the connecting rod-to-crank journal
alignment before pushing the piston into place.
7-24 BACK
Connecting Rod Bolt Inspection
If the Crankshaft is Not Installed 1. Measure the diameter of each connecting rod bolt
at point A and point B.
1. Remove the connecting rod caps, then install the
ring compressor, and check that the bearing is
securely in place.
2. Apply new engine oil to the piston, inside of the

ring compressor, and thecylihder bore, then attach
the ring compressor tothe piston/connecting rod
assembly.
3. Position the mark (A) to face the cam chain side of

the engine.
2. Calculate the difference in diameter between point

A and point B.
A
Point A-Point B =Difference in Diameter
Difference in Diameter
Specification: 0-0.1 mm (0-0.004 in.)
3. If the difference in diameter is out of specification,

4. Position the piston in the cylinder, and tap it in replace the connecting rod bolt.
using the wooden handle of a hammer (A).
Push down on the ring compressor (B) to prevent
the rings from expanding before entering the
cylinder bore.
5. Position all pistons at top dead center (TDC).
BACK 7-25
Engine Block
Crankshaft Installation
Special Tools Required 11. Tighten the connecting rod bolts to 29 N·m
• Driver 07749-0010000 (3.0 kgf·m, 22 Ibf·ft) .
• Oil seal driver attachment, 96 mm 07ZAD-PNAA100
12. Tighten the connecting rod bolts an additional 90 0.
1. Check the connecting rod bearing clearance with
plastigage (see page 7-8). NOTE: Remove the connecting rod bolt if you
tightened it beyond the specified angle, and go
2. Check the main bearing clearance with plastigage back to step 7 of the procedure. Do not loosen it
(see page 7-6). back to the specified angle.
3. Install the bearing halves in the engine block and

connecting rods.
90 0
4. Apply a coat of new engine oil to the main bearings

and rod bearings.
5. Hold the crankshaft so that rod journal No.2 and

rod journal No.3 are straight up, and lower the
crankshaft into the block.
6. Apply new engine oil to the thrust washer surfaces.

Install the thrust washers (A) in the No.4 journal of
the engine block. 13. Remove all of the old liquid gasket from the lower
block mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes.
14. Clean, and dry the lower block mating surfaces.

08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine
block mating surface of the lower block. Install the
gasket.
NOTE:
component must be installed within 4 minutes .
7. Inspectthe connecting rod bolts (see page 7-25). residue, then reapply new liquid gasket.
8. Apply engine oil to the threads of the connecting

rod bolts.
9. Seat the rod journals into connecting rod No.1 and

connecting rod No.4. Line up the mark (8) on the
connecting rod and cap, then install the caps and
bolts finger-tight.
10. Seat the journals into connecting rod No.2 and

connecting rod No.3. Line up the mark on the
connecting rod and cap, then install the caps and
bolts finger-tight.
7
Apply liquid gasket
7-26 BACK
16. Put the lower block on the engine block. 20. Tighten the 8 mm bolts, in sequence, to 22 N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft).
17. Apply new engine oil to the threads ofthe bearing
cap bolts.
18. Tighten the bearing cap bolts, in sequence, to

29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m,22 Ibf·ft)..
@ ® ® CD ® (j) ®
seal squarely into the block to the specified
installed height.
017$0010000 .~
~
19. Tighten the bearing cap bolts an additional 67 0.
07ZAD-PNAA100
(cont'd)
BACK
Engine' Block
Crankshaft Installation (cont'd)
22. Measure the distance between the engine block (A) 24. Install the oil pump (see page 8~19).
and oil seal (8).
Oil Seal Installed Height: 0.2-1.2 mm
(0.001-0.047 in.) 26. Install the cylinder head (see page 6-50).
~ . ----0.2-1.2 mm 27. Install the drive plate (see page 14-270).

10.001-0.047 in.)
28. Install the transmission (see page 14-258).
29. In'stall the engine assembly (see page 5-11).
NOTE: Whenever any crankshaft or' connecting rod

bearing is replaced, it is necessary after
reassembly to run the engine at idle speed until it
reaches normal operating temperature, then
continue to running itfor about 15 minutes.
23. Install the baffle plate.

~6x1.0mm
~ 12N·m
11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ib(.ft)
7-28 BACK
Oil Pan Installation
1. Remove all ofthe old liquid gasket from the oil pan 5. Tighten the bolts in two or three steps. In the final
mating surfaces, bolts, and bolt holes. step, tighten all bolts, in sequence, to 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft). Wipe off the excess liquid
2. Clean, and dry the oil pan mating surfaces. gasket on the each side of crankshaft pulley and
drive plate.
3. Apply liquid gasket, P/N.08717-0004, 08718-0001,
08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine NOTE:
block mating surface of the oil pan,and to the inside • Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
edge of the bolt holes. Install the component within with oil.
5 minutes of applying the liquid gasket. • Do not run the engine for at least 3 hours after
installing the oil pan.
NOTE:
• If you apply liquid gasketP/N 08718-0012, the @@
component must be install within 4.;minutes .
Q 0 o
o @ (j) ® ® ® @
o o o
6. Install the transmission mounting bolts (A) and
Apply liquid gasket
torque converter cover (8).
4. Install the oil pan.
A
12x 1.26mm
64N·m
(6.5 kgf.m,
47Ibf·ft)
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
>.•
(cont'd)
BACK 7-29
Engine Block
Oil Pan Installation (cont'd)
7. Install the lower torque rod bracket. 10. Lower the vehicle on the lift.
11. Loosen the upper torque rod mounting bolt (see

13. Tighten the lower torque rod mounting bolts (see

step 18 on page 5-1~).
15. Tighten the upper torque rod mounting bolt (see

74N·m
7
12x 1.25 mm
17. Using the new gasket (A), then tighten the two bolts
at the three way catalytic converter (lWC) front
joint.
Replace.
8. Ifthe engine is still in the vehicle, do the following

steps.
9. Tighten the 14 x 1.5 mm bolts (A), then tighten the

12 x 1.25 mm bolts (8) and new 14 x 1.5 mm bolts
(C).
...............Sx 1.25mm
~ 22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
18. Install the bolts securing the steering gearbox

mounting brackets (see step 23 on page 5-15).
V
AI \ 19. Install the power steering (PIS) fluid line bracket,
and secure the hose with the hose clamps (see step
B
12x1.25mm 24 on page 5-15).
54N·m
(5.5 kgf·m, 40 Ibf·ft) 20. Install the splash shield (see step 30 on page 5-16).
A
14x1.5mm
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76Ibf·ft) 21. Install the front wheels.
22. Refill the engine with engine oil (see step 4 on page
8-9).
7~30 BACK
Transmission End Crankshaft Oil Seal Installation - In Car ..
Special Tools Required 5. Measure the distance between the engine block (A)
• Driver 077 49-0010000 and oil seal (8) .
• Oil seal driver attachment, 96 mm 07ZAD-PNAA100
Oil Seal hlStalied Height: 0.2-1.2 mm
1. Remove the transmission (see page 14-247). (0.001-0.047 in.)
2. Remove the drive plate (see page 14-270). - ----0.2-1.2mm

(0.001-0.047 in.1
3. Clean, and dry the crankshaft oil seal housing.

seal squarely into the block to the specified
installed height.
~A
6. Install the drive plate (see page 14-270).
7. Install the transmission (see page 14-258).
BACK 7-31
Engine Block
Sealing Bolt Installation
NOTE: When installing the sealing bolt, always use a

new washer.
28x 1.5mm
83N·m
20x1.0mm (8.5 kgf·m, 61 Ibf·ft)
34N·m
7-32 BACK
Engine Mechanical·
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools ................................................................. 8-2
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............................... 8-4
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram ............... 8-5
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting (Open) ............................................ 8-6
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit
Troubleshooting (Short) ............................................ 8-7
Oil Pressure Switch Test .............................................. 8-8
Oil Pressure Switch Replacement ............................... 8-8
Oil Pressure Test ........................................................... 8-9
Engine Oil Replacement .............................................. 8-9
Engine Oil Filter Replacement ..................................... 8-10
Oil Filter Base Replacement ........................................ 8-11
Oil Jet Replacement ..................................................... 8-12
Oil Jet Inspection .......................................................... 8-12
Oil Pump Overhaul ....................................................... 8-13
Oil Pump Chain Replacement ..................................... 8-21
BACK
Engine Lubrication
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Description Clty

CD 07 AAA-PLLA 100 Oil Filter Wrench 1
® 07 AAK-STKA 120 RDX Engine Support Mount Pads 2
CD
8-2 BACK
/DRAINBOLT
/'
/
~OILPAN
Removal, page 7-11
/ Installation, page 7-29
OIL PUMP
OIL CHAIN TENSIONER Overhaul, page 8-13
O-RING
OIL JETS
Removal, page 8-12
OIL CONTROL ORIFICE
OIL FILTER
CHAIN GUIDE
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH OIL FILTER BASE

Circuit Diagram, page 8-5 Replacement, page 8-11
Test, page 8-8
Oil Pressure Test, page 8-9
BACK 8-3
Engine Lubrication

Excessive engine oil 1. Check to see it the engine oil filler cap, oil drain
consumption bolt, or oil filter is loose.
2. Check for oil leaks.
3. Check for worn valve guide(s) (see page 6-43) or
worn valve stem seal(s) (see page 6-43).
4. Check for damaged or worn piston ring(s)
(see page 7-22).
5. Check for damaged or worn engine internal parts
(cylinder wall, pistons, etc.) (see page 7-16).
Low oil pressure indicator does 1. Do the low oil pressure indicator circuit An open in the wire
not come on with the ignition troubleshooting (Open) (see page 8-6). between the
switch ON (II) 2. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). powertrain control
module (PCM) and the
oil~pressure switch
Low oil pressure indicator stays 1. Check the engine oil level. A wire shorted to
on 2. Do the low oil pressure indicator circuit ground between the
troubleshooting (Short) (see page 8-7). powertrain control
3. Test the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). module (PCM) and the
4. Check the engine oil pressure (see page 8-9). oil pressure switch
5. Check the oil filter for clogging.
6. Check the oil screen for clogging.
7. Check the relief valve (see page 8-13).
8. Testthe oil pump (see page 8-15).
8-4 BACK
low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Diagram

BATIERY
No.1I100AI No.2 150 Ai
IGI HOT in ON (II)

and START (III)
No.l0 UNDER-DASH
(7.5 A) FUSE/RELAY BOX
BRN
I
r-- ~ CPU
I
I
1 'DRIVER
l ~
I 'lY
LOW 011
PRESSURE
INDICATOR
WHT RED
A36 A37 PCM

CANH CANL
5V
12V
PSW
87
VEURED
011 PRESSURE SWITCH

(Closed: Lost pressurel
BACK 8-5
Engine Lubrication
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Open)
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). terminal B7 and the oil pressure switch connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). OIL PRESSURE PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
SWITCH CONNECTOR
11-229). OPSW
(VEL/RED)
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present,

diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing
with this test.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select PGM-FI, and Terminal side of female terminals
check the OIL PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA
LIST with the HDS.
Is "ON" indicated?
YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
22-284).. ;; good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
NO-Go to step 6. PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252).•
6. Check the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8). NO-Repair an open in the wire between the oil
. pressure switch and the PCM .•
Is the oil pressure switch OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8) .

•
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and jump the SCS
line with the HDS, then turn the ignition switch OFF.

from damage.
8. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P) and the oil

pressure switch connector.
8-6 BACK
Low Oil Pressure Indicator Circuit Troubleshooting (Short)
1. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and jump the SCS
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). line with the HDS, then turn the ignitionswitch OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NOTE: This step must be done to protect the PCM
from damage.
and the powertrain control.module (PCM). If it 11. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P) and the oil
doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page pressure switch connector.
11-229).
12. Check for continuity between the oil pressure
4. Check for DTCs (see page 11-3). If a DTC is present, switch connector an~ body ground.
diagnose, and repair the cause before continuing
with this test.
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR
5. Start the engine, select PGM-FI, and check the OIL

PRESSURE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is "OFF" indicated?
YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page

22~284) .•
NO-Go to step 6.
Terminal side of female terminal
7. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector. Is there continuity?
8. Start the engine, and check the OIL PRESSURE YES-Repair a short in the wire between the oil
SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS. pressure switch and the PCM .•
Is "OFF" indicated? NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
YES-Go to step 9. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe
NO-Go to step 10. PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252).•
9. Check the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8).
Is the oil pressure switch OK?
YES-Do the oil pressure test (see page 8-9).
NO-Replace the oil pressure switch (see page 8-8) .

•
BACK 8-7
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pressure Switch Test Oil Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Remove the oil pressure switch connector (A) from 1. Disconnect the oil pressure switch connector, then
the engine oil pressure switch (B). remove the oil pressure switch.
18N·m
B 11.8 kgf·m, 13Ibf·ft)
2. Check for continuity between the pressure switch 2. Remove any old liquid gasket from the switch and
terminal and the engine (ground). There should be switch mounting hole.
continuity with the engine stopped. There should
be no continuity with the engine running. 3. Apply a very small amount of liquid gasket to the
oil pressure switch threads, then install the oil
pressure switch.
NOTE: Using too much liquid gasket may cause

liquid gasket to enter the oil passage or the end of
the new oil pressure switch.
8-8 BACK
Oil Pressure Test Engine Oil Replacement
NOTE: If the oil pressure warning light stays on with the 1. Warm up the engine.
engine running, check the engine oil level. Ifthe oil
level is correct: 2. Remove the drain bolt (A), and drain the engine oil.
1. Remove the engine oil pressure switch, and install

an oil pressure gauge (A).
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 Ibf·ft)

Do not overtighten.
3. Reinstall the drain bolt with a new washer (B).
2. Start the engine. Shut it off immediately if the 4. Refill the engine with the recommended oil
gauge registers no oil pressure. Repairthe problem (see page 3-2).
before continuing.
NOTE: Always use Mobil 1· PIN 5W-30-MB1-000 or
3. Allow the engine to reach operating temperature an equivalent oil that meets the ACURA HTO-06
(fan comes on at least twice). The pressure should standard. Not all synthetic oil will meet this
be: standard.
Engine Oil Temperature: 176"F (80 'C) Capacity

Engine Oil Pressure: At Oil Change: 4.5 L (4.8 US qt)
At Idle: 70 kPa (0.7 kgf/cm2 , 10 psi) min. At Oil Change including Filter: 4.7 L (5.0 US qt)
At 3,000 rpm: 300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm 2, 44 psi) min. After Engine Overhaul: 5.8 L (6.1 US qt)
4. If the oil pressure is out of specifications, inspect

these items:
• Replace the oil filter (see page 8-10).

• Inspect the oil pressure relief valve (see page
8-13).
• Check the oil screen for clogging.
• Check the oil pump (see page 8-15).
(cont'd)
BACK 8-9
Engine Lubrication
Engine Oil Replacement (cont'd) Engine Oil Filter Replacement
5. If the maintenance minder required to replace the Special Tools Required

engine oil, reset the maintenance minder (see page Oil filter wrench 07AAA-PLLA100
3-4) and this procedure is complete. If the
maintenance minder did not require to replace the 1. Remove the oil filter with the special oil filter
engine oil, go to step 6. wrench.
6. Connect the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) to the 2. Inspect oil filter sealing surface and be sure all of
data link connector (DLC) (see step 2 on page 11-3). the rubber seal is removed.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Inspect the threads (A) and rubber seal (B) on the
new filter. Clean the seat on the filter base, then
8. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter
and the powertrain control module (PCM). If it rubber seal. Use only filters with a built-in bypass
doesn't, troubleshootthe DLC circuit (see page system.
11-229).
9. Select the BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.
10. Select the ADJUSTMENT in GAUGE MENU with

the HDS.
11. Selectthe RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER

with the HDS.
12. Selectthe RESETTING THE ENGINE OIL LIFE with

the HDS.
13. Run the engine for more than 3 minutes, then check B
for oil leaks.
8-10 BACK
Oil Filter Base Replacement
4. Install the oil filter by hand. 1. Remove the oil filter (see page 8-10).
5. After the rubber seal.seats, tighten the oil filter to 2. Remove the oil filter base (A).
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft).
B
~
= ~~r-==e:--'+----.
~
07 AAA-PLLA 100
6. After installation, fill the engine with oil up to the

specified level, run the engine for more than
3 minutes, then check for oil leakage.
3. Clean the O-ring grooves and mating surfaces with
the filter base, then install the oil filter base with
new O-rings (8).
4. Install the oil filter (see page 8-10).
BACK 8-11
Engine Lubrication
Oil Jet Replacement Oil Jet Inspection
1. Remove the oil pump (see page 8-14'). 1. Remove the oil jet, and inspect it as follows.
2. Remove the baffle plate (see step 7 on page 7-13); • Make sure that a 1.1 mm (0.04 in.) diameter drill
will go through the nozzle hole (A) (1.2 mm
3. Remove the oil jet bolt (A), then remove the oil jet (0.05 in.) diameter) .
(8). • Insert the other end of a 1.1 mm (0.04 in.) drill
into the ofl intake (1.2 mm (0.05 in.) diameter).
A Make sure the check,ball (8) moves smoothly and
8xO.75mm
16 N·m (1.6 kgf·m, 12Ibf·ft) has a stroke of approximately 4.0 mm (0.16 in.).
'~ • Check the oil jet operation with an air nozzle. It
should take at least 200 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2, 28 psi)
to unseat the check ball.
NOTE: Replace the oil jet assembly if the nozzle is

damaged or bent.
1.2 mm (0.05 in.)

1.2mm
(0.05 in.)
"
4. Carefully install the oil jet, and tighten the oil jet
bolt.
5. Install the baffle plate (see step 23 on page 7-28). 2. Carefully install the oil jet. The mounting torque is
critical.
6. Install the oil pump (see page 8-16).
Torque: 16 N·m (1.6 kgf·m, 12Ibf·ft)
8-12 BACK
Oil Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
8x 1.25 mm 6x 1.0mm
30N·m 12N·m
(3.1 kgf·m, 22lbf·ftl + 30 0 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
y
Apply engine oil to
6 x 1.0 mm the bOlt\threadS'
12N·m
"'2kgf,~, it{ i
UPPER BALANCER
6x1.0mm 10x 1.25mm SHAFT HOLDER
12N·m 44N·m
(1'2kgf,~
~~~~
,~~ G G~.
~ .
~AR BALANCER SHAFT
~.
~~BALANCERSHAFT
BALANCER SHAFT
BEARINGS
SEALING BOLT
54N·m
(5.5 kgf.m, 40 Ibf·ftl
RELIEF VALVE OUTER ROTOR

Valve must slide freely
in housing bore.
Replace if scored. lOWER BALANCER
SHAFT HOLDER
(cant'd)
BACK 8-13
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Oil Pump Removal 6. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the oil pump
chain auto-tensioner (B), then insert a 1.5 mm
1. Turn the crankshaft pulley so its top dead center (0.06 in.) diameter pin (C) into the holes. Turn the
(TDC) mark (A) lines up with the pointer (B). crankshaft clockwise to secure the pin.
B
3. Loosely install the crankshaft pulley. 7. Remove the oil pump chain auto-tensioner.
4. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert a 6 mm pin

punch (A) into the maintenance hole in the balancer
shaft holder and through the rear balancer shaft.

the oil pump chain auto-tensioner,
8-14 BACK
8. Loosen the oil pump sprocket mounting bolt. Oil Pump Inspection
1. Remove the pump housing.
2. Check the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance

9. Remove the oil pump sprocket (A), then remove the between the inner rotor (A) and outer rotor (8). If
oil pump (8). the inner-to-outer rotor radial clearance exceeds
the service limit, replace the oil pump.
Inner Rotor-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance

(cont'd)
BACK 8-15
Engine Lubrication
. 3. Check the housing-to-rotor axial clearance between Balancer Shaft Inspection

the rotor (A) and lower balancer shaft holder (B). If
the housing-to-rotor axial clearance exceeds the 1. Seat the balancer shaft by pushing it away from the
service limit, replace the oil pump. oil pump sprocket end ofthe oil pump.
, .
Housing-to-Rotor Axial Clearance 2. Zero the dial indicator against the end of the
Standard (New): 0.030-0.075 mm balancer shaft, then push the balancer shaft back
(0.0012-0.0030 in.) and forth and read the end play.
Balancer Shaft End Play
(0.0024-0.0055 in.)
4. Check the housing-to-outer rotor radial clearance

between the outer rotor (A) and lower balancer
shaft holder (B). Ifthe housing-to-outer rotor radial
clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the oil
pump.
3. Remove the upper balancer shaft holder (with
Housing-to-Outer Rotor Radial Clearance bearings) (A), then remove the front balancer shaft
Standard (New): 0.035-0.090 mm (B) and rear balancer shaft (C).
\'
(0.0014-0.0035 in.)
I'"~
8-16 BACK
4. Measure the inner diameter of the No.1 bearing for 5. Measure the diameters of the No.1 journals on the
the front balancer shaft hole and the rear balancer front balancer shaft and rear balancer shaft.
shaft hole.
Journal Diameter
Bearing Inner Diameter Front:
Front: Standard (New): 19.938-19.950 mm
Service Limit: 20.03 mm (0.789 in.) Rear:
Rear: Standard (New): 23.938-23.950 mm
Front
Front
Rear
Rear
(cont'd)
BACK 8-17
Engine Lubrication
6. Clean both balancer shaft No.2 journals and 10. Align the punch mark on the rear balancer shaft in
bearing halves with a clean shop towel. the center of the two punch marks onthe front
balancer shaft, then install the balancer shafts on
7. Place one strip of plastigage across each No.2 the lower balancer shaft holder.
journal.
8. Reinstall the bearings and upper balancer shaft

holder, then torque the bolts.
NOTE: Do not rotate the balancer shafts during'

inspection.
9. Remove the upper balancer shaft holder and

bearings again, and measure the widest part with
the plastigage. If the balancer shaft No.2 journal oil
clearance is out-of-tolerance, install new bearings,
and recheck. If it is still out-of-tolerance, replace the
balancer shafts.
No.2 Journal Oil Clearance

(0.0024-0.0047 in.) 11. Apply engine oil to the threads of the 8 mm bolts
Service Limit: 0.15 mm (0.006 in.) (A).
8.7Ibf·ft)
12. Install the upper balancer shaft holder (8).
8-18 BACK
.. ~
13. Install the pump housing. .' Oil Pump Installation
1. Make sure the No.1 piston top dead center (TOe)

mark (A) lines up with the pointer (8).
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
2. Align the dowel pin (A) on the rear balancer shaft

with the mark (8) on the oil pump.
(cont'd)
BACK 8-19
Engine Lubrication
3. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert a 6 mm pin 8. Install the oil pump chain auto-tensioner.
driver (A) into the maintenance hole in the lower
balancer shaft holder and through the rear balancer
shaft.
~A
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
9. Remove the pin from the oil pump chain auto-

tensioner.
4. Apply engine oil to the threads of the'10x 1.25 mm
oil pump mounting bolts (A).
10x 1.25mm
44N·m
14.5 k~·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
~~
C~
22N·m 10x1.25mm
12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft) 44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
5. Loosely install the oil pump (8), then install the oil
pump sprocket (e).
6. Remove the pin driver (D).
7. Tighten the oil pump mounting bolts.
BACK
Oil Pump Chain Replacement
Special Tools Required 7. Install.the crankshaft pulley.

• Engine support hanger, A and Reds AAR-T-12566 * 8. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert the 6 mm pin
* : Available through AmeriCan Honda Tool and punch (A) into the maintenance hole in the balancer
Equipment Program, 1-888-424-6857 shaft holder and through the rear balancer shaft.
NOTE: Keep the oil pump chain away from magnetic

fields.
Removal
2. Remove the cam chain (see page 6-13).
3. Remove the power steering (PIS) pump. Do not

disconnect the PIS hoses from the pump (see step
21 on page 5-5).
4. Attach the universal eyelet to the drive belt auto-

tensioner (see step 54 on page 5-10). 9. Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise to compress
the oil pump chain auto-tensioner.
5. Remove the top corner clip (A) from the front grill
on both sides. Place the engine support mount 10. Align the holes on the lock (A) and the oil pump
pads over the hood edge cushions (B), and align chain auto-tensioner(B), then insert a 1.5 mm
the pins with the clip hole (C). Remove the lids from (0.06 in.) diameter pin (C) into the holes. Turn the
both side ofthe cowl cover. Install the engine crankshaft clockwise to secure the pin.
support hanger (AAR-T-12566), theRattach the
hook to the universal eyelet. Tighten the wing nut
(D) by hand to lift and support the enginel
AAR-T-12566
c B
(cont'd)
BACK 8-21
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Chain Replacement (cont'd)
11. Remove the oil pump chain auto-tensioner. 14. Loosen the oil pump sprocket mounting bolt.
12. Remove the crankshaft pulley. 15. Remove the oil pump chain.
13. Remove the oil pump chain guide.
8-22 BACK
Installation 3. Install the oil pump chain on the oil pump chain
sprocket with the punch mark (A) aligned with the
1. Set the crankshaft to top dead center (TOe). Align center of the three colored link plates (8).
the TOe mark (A) on the crankshaft sprocket with
the pointer (8) on the cylinder block. A
2. Install the oil pump chain on the crankshaft 4. To hold the rear balancer shaft, insert the 6 mm pin
sprocket with the center of the two colored link punch (A) into the maintenance hole in the balancer
plates (A) aligned with the TOe mark (8) on the oil shaft holder and through the rear balancer shaft,
crankshaft sprocket. then tighten the oil pump sprocket mounting bolt
(8).
A
B
10x1.25mm
44N·m
14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ftl
(cont'd)
BACK 8~23
Engine Lubrication
Oil Pump Chain Replacement (cont'd)
5. Install the oil pump chain guide. 7. Remove the pin from the oil pump chain auto-
tensioner.
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 S.7Ibf·tt)
9. Support the engine with a jack and a wood block

6. Install the oil pump chain auto-tensioner. under the oil pan.
10. Remove the special tools from the engine and

vehicle.
12. Install the PIS pump (see step 38 on page 5-17).
13. Install the crankshaft pulley (see page 6-12).
8-24 BACK
Engine Mechanical
Intake Manifold and Exhaust System

Intake Manifold Removal and Installation ................. 9-2
Charge Air Cooler Removal and Installtion ................ 9-7
Turbocharger Bypass Control Valve Replacement ... 9-10
Turbocharger Bypass Control Valve Inspection ........ 9-10
Turbocharger and Exhaust Manifold
Removal and Installtion ........................................... 9-11
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement ..................... 9-23
BACK
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
5xO.8mm THROTTLE BODY
~\
3.4N·m
(0.35 kgf·m, 2.5 Ibf·tt)
I R'PI'~ ~",.g-::-:-/L}I...<J...:J
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Replace if cracked or
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE /
PRESSURE (MAP)
l7\\t'l~\::~~r)::::: ~"I--::::-...(.l""..,el' d,m'ged.
SENSOR
O-RING
Replace.
O-RING
Replace.
~;:~L
~
__ ~~-----t-----TEMPERATURE (lAT)
INTAKE MANIFOLD
SENSOR
INTAKE MANIFOLD BRACKET
9-2 BACK
Removal 5. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A), then
disconnectthe fuel feed hose (see page 11-372).
3. Remove the fuel injector cover.
6. Remove the ground cable (A), vacuum hoses (8),

brake booster vacuum hose (e), and turbocharger
bypass control solenoid valve bracket mounting
bolt (D).
4. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and

wire harness clamps from the intake manifold.
• Four fuel injector connectors

• Throttle actuator connector
• Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor
connector
• Intake manifold temperature (lAT) sensor
connector
• Turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve
connector
(cont'd)
9-3
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)

i 10. Remove the harness clamp (A) and connector (8),
hose (A) and water bypass line bracket mounting then remove the intake manifold bracket (e).
bolt (8).
11. Remove the intake manifold.

8. Remove the water bypass hoses·(e),then plug the
water bypass hoses. .
9. Remove the positive crankcase ventilation (peV)

hose (A) and harness holder (8).
9-4
Installation 3. Install the pev hose (A) and harness holder (B).
1. Install the intake manifold (A) with a new gasket (B),

and tighten the bolts and nuts in a crisscross
pattern in two orthree steps, beginning with the
inner bolt.
4. Install the water bypass hoses (A), EVAP canister

hose (B), and water bypass line bracket mounting
bolt (el.'
2. Install the intake manifold bracket (A), then install

the harness clamp (B) and connector (e).
c
C
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·tt)
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·tt)
(cont'd)
9-5
Intake Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
5. Install the ground cable (A), vacuum hoses (B), 7. Connect the engine wire harness connectors, and.
brake booster vacuum hose (C), and turbocharger install the wire harness clamps to the intake
bypass control solenoid valve bracket mounting manifold.
bolt (0).
• FOLJr fuel injector connectors
• Throttle actuator connector
• MAP sensor connector
• IAT sensor connector
connector
8. Install the fuel injector cover.
6. Connect the fuel feed hose (see page 11-372), then

install the quick-connect fitting cover (A).
10. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
11. After installation, check that all tubes, hoses, and

connectors are installed correctly.
12. Inspect for fuel leaks: Turn the ignition switch

ON (II) (do not operate the starter) so the fuel pump

valve open (see step 6 on page 10-7)...
9-6
Charge Air Cooler Removal and Installation
Exploded View
5xO.8mm
O-RING
Replace.
3.4N·m
(0.35 kgf,~.
,2.5Ibf·ft)
• . ~
j
~ CHARGE AIR COOLER
COVER BRACKET
6 x 1.0 mm
12 N·m
0° ____---::-..-""''''- / IkW.m.8.7~~
CHARGE AIR COOLER
TURBOCHARGER BYPASS
CONTROL VALVE
GASKET
Replace.
GASKET AIR BYPASS OUTLET PIPE

Replace.
6x 1.0mm
12N·m TURBOCHARGER BYPASS
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft) CONTROL VALVE JOINT
(cont'd)
Charge Air Cooler Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Removal 3. Remove the charge air cooler.
1. Remove the charge air cooler cover.
!:f:::~:::~:::~:::~:::~~:::~-:'~-:'r!Jr~
-~~~v~~~~~~~~- -----_
_
-
--------
~----
-----------
-- --
---- ...
........ -
2. Disconnect the turbocharger boost sensor

connector (A), then remove the vacuum hoses (8)
and air bypass outlet connecting tube (C).
c
9-8
Installation 3. Install the charge air cooler cover.
1. Install the charge air cooler (A), and set the intake
air ducts (charge air cooler inlet hose and charge ---_ ----
i~~-------------------~\\
--~----------:-
-------
------ ------ --
.........
------
_-
air cooler outlet tube), then tighten the hose bands
until the edge (B) of the hose band align with the
-----------
-.......... ........ ........
mark (C) on the hose band.
NOTE: If the hose band edge exceeds the mark,

replace the hose band.
6x1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ib(.ft)
2. Install the vacuum hoses (A) and air bypass outlet

connecting tube (B), then connect the turbocharger
boost sensor connector (C).
9-9
Turbocharger Bypass Control Valve Turbocharger Bypass Control Valve

Replacement Inspection
1. Remove the charge air cooler cover (see step 1 on Special Tools Required
page 9-8). Vacuum'pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A or
equivalent, commercially available
2. Disconnect the turbocharger boost sensor
connector (A). 1. Remove the turbocharger bypass control valve
(see page 9-10).
2. Connect a commercially available vacuum pump/

. . . . . . . . sx 1.0 mm gauge, 0-30 in.Hg. Apply vacuum to the
~ 12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, turbocharger bypass control 'valve. Make sure the
8.7Ibf·ftl turbocharger bypass control valve moves. If the
valve does not move, replace the turbocharger
bypass control va,lve.
3. Remove the vacuum hose (8) and air bypass outlet

connecting tube (C), then remove the turbocharger
bypass control valve (D).
4. Install the turbocharger bypass control valve with a

new gasket (E).
5. Install the vacuum hose and intake air duct, then

connect the turbocharger boost sensor connector.
6. Install the charge air cooler cover (see step 3 on

page 9-9).
9-10
Turbocharger and Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation
Exploded View
8x1.25mm INTAKE AIR DUCT

22N·m ITUjCHARGl;R OUTLET PIPEI
(2.2"f.~1
GASKET CHARGE AIR

'" Replace. COOLER BRACKET
INTAKE AIR DUCT

(TURBOCHARGER INLET PIPE)
.GASKET
Replace.
12N·m
/
6x1.0mm
10x1.25mm
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf.ft) 44N·m
WARM UPCATALVTIC
CONVERTER
(cant'd)
9-11
Turbocharger and Exhaust Manifold Removal and Installation (cont'd)
6x1.0mm SELF-LOCKING NUT

12N·m 10x 1.25 mm
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) 44N·m
WATERBYPASSP~
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf.ft)
Replace.
~~
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
10x 1.25 mm
34N·m
@·..",r----t---+---=~WASHERS
Replace.
TURBOCHARGER
ASSEMBLY
r/
TURBOCHARG/E.
.
BRACKET
GASKET
R.p'''''. V . 10x 1.25 mm
44N·m
,>
GASKET
Replace.
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m OIL RETURN PIPE
9-12
Removal 7. Remove the master cylinder reservoir (A) from the
bracket, then remove the bracket (8).
2. Remove the cowl cover and under-cowl panel

(see page 20-163).

(see page 11-394).
5. Remove the warm up catalytic converter (see page

11-440).
6. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box from the

bracket.
8. Remove the heater hoses (A), then open the cable

clamp, and remove the heater valve cable (8).
9. Remove the heater valve mounting bolt (e).
(cont'd)
9-13
Intake'Manifold and Exhaust System
10. Remove the air bypass outlet pipe (A). 12. Remove the intake air ducts (charge air cooler inlet,
hose/turbocharger outlet pipe assembly).

hose (A), then remove the intake air duct
(turbocharger inlet pipe) (B).
13. Remove the breather hose (A) and water bypass
hose (B), then remove the water bypass line
mounting bolt (C).
9-14
14. Disconnect the turbocharger wastegate control 17. Remove the water bypass hose (A) and vacuum
solenoid valve connector and turbocharger boost hoses (8).
control solenoid valve connector.
B
15. Remove the vacuum hose (A), vacuum line
mounting bolt (8), and solenoid valve bracket
mounting bolt (e), then loosen the solenoid valve
bracket mounting bolt (D), and remove the solenoid
valve bracket (E).
E 18. Remove the water bypass pipe from the

turbocharger.
16. Remove the charge air cooler bracket.
(cont'd)
9-15
19. Remove the intake air duct (turbocharger inlet 22. Remove the turbocharger bracket.
connecting tube).

21. Remove the oil return pipe (A), then remove
16 x 1.5 mm bolt (B) atthe oil feed pipe. 24. Remove the oil feed pipe.
9-16
25. Remove the turbocharger assembly, then seal the Insta lIation
air inlet, air outlet, oil line hole, andwater line hole
with tape. 1. Install the water bypass pipe (A) with a new O-ring
(8), then install the water bypass hose (C).
NOTE: Use care when handling the turbocharger
assembly. Do not turn the actuator rod adjusting
nut, or touch the impeller. H
, 0
~ox
44N.m
1.25 m~ ~,
IIIV
14.5 kgf·m, G
33Ibf·ft) 10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft)
26. Remove the water bypass hoses (A), then remove 2. Install the exhaust manifold (D) with a new gasket
the exhaust manifold (8). (E) and new self-locking nuts (F) and bolts (G), and
tighten the bolts and nuts in a crisscross pattern in
two orthree steps, beginning with the inner bolt.
3. Install the water bypass hoses (H).
27. Remove the water bypass pipe (C) and water

bypass hose (D) from the exhaust manifold.
(cont'd)
9-17
4. Pour new engine oil into turbochargeroilline. 6. Check the oil feed pipe (A) for clogs. If it is clogged,
clean or replace the pipe; Install the oil feed pipe
5. Install the turbocharger assembly (A) with a new with new washers (8), and loosely tighten the 10 x
gasket (8). 1.25 mm nut (C).
NOTE: Use care when installing the turbocharger

assembly. Do not turn the actuator rod adjusting A
nut, or touch the impeller.
8. Install the turbocharger bracket.
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m 14.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibf·ft)
9-18
9. Check the bolt (A) and oil return pipe (8) for clogs. If 12. Tighten the 10 x 1.25 mm nut.
they are clogged, clean or replace the bolt and/or
pipe. 10x 1.25mm
34N·m
(3.5kgf·m,
25Ibf·ft)
~ 13. Raise the vehicle on the lift to full height.
6x1.0mm ~D
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
14. Tighten the 16 x 1.5 mm bolt.
10. Loosely tighten the 16 x 1.5 mm bolt with new

washers (C), then install the oil return pipe with
new gaskets (D).
16x1.5mm
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
9-19
.'~
Intake ;Manifold and Exhaust System
15. Lower the vehicleonthe·lift. 18. Install the water bypass hose (A) and vacuum
hbses(B).
16. Install.the intake air duct (turbocharger inlet
connecting tube). B
17. Install the waterbypass pipe (A) with new gasket

(B). 19. Install the charge air cooler bracket.
7 •.
6X1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibf·ft) .
6x1.0mm
--------
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
9-20
20. Install the solenoid valve bracket (A) and vacuum 23. Install the intake air ducts (charge air cooler inlet
hose (8), then install the vacuum line mounting bolt hose/turbocharger outlet pipe assembly) (A) with
(C). new gasket (8).
C 8x 1.25 mm
6x 1.0mm 22N·m
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf.ftl {22 kgf~{bf·ftl
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
21. Connect the turbocharger wastegate control 24. Install the intake air duct (turbocharger inlet pipe)
solenoid valve,ponnector and turbocharger boost (A), then install the evaporative emission (EVAP)
control solenoid valve connector. canister hose (8).
22. Install the breather hose (A) and water bypass hose
(8), then install the water bypass line mounting bolt
(C). '
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
(cont'd)
9-21
25. Install the air bypass outlet pipe (A) .• 28. Install the bracket (A); then install the master
cylinder reservoir (B).
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
26. Install the heater valve mounting bolt (A).

6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
29. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box to the bracket.
6x1.0mm ,
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
27. Install the heater cable (B), and lock the clamp, then
install the heater hoses (e).
30. Install the warm up catalytic converter (see page
11-440).

11-394).
33. Install the cowl cover and under-cowl panel

(see page 20-163).

air from the cooling system with the heater valve
open (see step 6 on page 10-7).
9-22
Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Replacement
NOTE: Use new gaskets and self-locking nuts when reassembling.
MUFFLER HEAT SHIELD

8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
.•
Tighten the bolts in steps,
em"';\tO~;d.'
/ ./G~
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
l·OO~PI~.
~
SELF-LOCKING NUT
10x 1.25mm
33 N·m (3.4 kgf·m, 25 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F)

SENSOR
44N·m
(4.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibf·ft)
10x 1.25mm GASKET

44N·m Replace.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC

CONVERTER (TWC)
ASSEMBLY
7J.'/
SECONDARY HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR
(SECONDARY H02S)
44 N·m
Replace.
WARM UP
\
CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
'Z
10 x 1.25 mm
44 N·m
8 x 1.25 mm
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
Tighten the bolts in steps,
alternating side-to-side.
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft) BRACKET
9-23
Engine Cooling
Cooling System
Radiator Cap Test ......................................................... 10-3
RadiatorTest ................................................................. 10-3
Fan Motor Test .............................................................. 10-4
Thermostat Test ........................................................... 10-4
Water Pump Inspection ............................................... 10-5
Water Pump Replacement ........................................... 10-6
Coolant Check ............................................................... 10-7
Coolant Replacement ........................•.......................... 10-7
Thermostat Replacement ............................................ 10-9
Water Passage Replacement ....................................... 10-10
Water Outlet Removal and Installation ...................... 10-12
Fan, Fan Motor, Shroud Removal and Installation .... 10-16
Radiator Replacement .................................................. 10-19
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 10-24
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting ... 10-25
Cooling System
Component location Index
WATER OUTLET
Rep'lacement,
page 10-12
WATER PUMP
Inspection, RADIATOR
page 10-5 Replacement, page 10-19
Replacement,
page 10-6
SHROUD
Removal and Installation,
page 10-16
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

(ECT) SENSOR 2
THERMOSTAT
Test, page 10-4
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY
AIC CONDENSER FAN page 10-16
ASSEMBLY Fan Motor Test, page 10-4
page 10-16
Fan Motor Test, page 10-4
10-2 BACK
Radiator Cap Test Radiator Test
1. Remove the radiator cap (A). Wetthe seal with 1. Wait until the engine iSCQol, then carefully remove
engine coolant, then install it on a commercially the radiator cap, and fill the radiator with engine
available pressure tester (B). coolant to the top of the filler neck.
B 2. Attach a commercially available pressure tester (A)

to the radiator, and apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa
(0.95-1.25 kgf/cm2, 14-:18 psi).
2. Apply a pressure of 93-123 kPa (0.95-

1.25 kgf/cm2, 14-18 psi).
3. Check for a drop in pressure.
4. If the pressure drops, replace the cap.
3. Inspect for engine coolant leaks, and a drop in

pressure.
4. Remove the tester, then reinstall the radiator cap.
BACK 10-3
Cooling System
Fan Motor Test Thermostat Test
1. Disconnect the 2P connectors fr:om.the radiator fan Replace the thermostat if it ,is open at room
motor and condenser fan motor. temperature.
To test a closed thermostat:
1. Suspend the thermostat (A) in a container of water.

Do not let the thermometer (8) touch the bottom of
the hot container.
B 0
Terminal side of
male terminals
2. Test the m.otor by connecting battery power to

terminal No.2 and ground to terminal No.1.
3. If the motor fails to run, or does not run smoothly,

replace it.
2. Heat the water, and check the temperature with a

thermometer. Check the temperature where the
thermostat first opens, and where it is fully open.
3. Measure the lift height of the thermostat when it is

fully open. If the thermostat is not within the
specification, replace it.
Standard Thermostat
Lift Height: Above 8.0 mm (0.31 in.)
Starts Opening: 169-176 Cf (76 -80 "C)
Fully Open: 194 Cf (90 "C)
10-4 BACK
Water Pump Inspection
Special Tools Required 4. Turn the water pump pulley counterclockwise.

AlC clutch holder, Robinair 10204 or Kent-Moore Check that it turns freely. If it doesn't, replace the
J37872, or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, water pump (see page 10-6).
NOTE: When you check the water pump, you may
1. Remove the splash shield (see step 25 on page 5-6). see a small amount of "weeping" from the bleed'
holes (A). This is normal.
3. Hold the water pump pulley using the AlC clutch

holder (A), and remove the water pump pulley
mounting bolts (B), then remove the water pump
pulley.
B
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
--
5. Install the water pump pulley.
BACK 10-5
Water Pump Replacement
Special Tools ,Required 5. Remove the water pump (A) by removing the six
Ala,clutcli'holder, Robinair 10204 or Kent"Moore bolts. "
J37872, or Honda Tool and EquipmeAt KMT.,J33939,
11. Ora'in the engii'lecoolant (see page, 10,·:7) .•,"
4. Hold the water pump pulley using the AlC clutch

holder (A), and remove'the water pump pulley
mounting bolts (B), then remove the water pump
pulley.
B
6x1.0mm
----.=:::===7t1~~'i ~:Ni:mT"
B
::z11.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibf·tt) \
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·lTI, 8.7 Ibf·tt)
6. Inspect, and cleant~e O-ring groove and the

matingsurfaceof.the engine block.
7. Install the water pump with a new O-ring (B) in the

reverse order of roemoval.
8. Clean up any spilled engine coolant.
9. Install the water pump pulley.
12. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, then bleed

the air from the cooling system (see step 6 on page
10-7).
10..6 BACK
Coolant Check Coolant Replacement
1. Look at the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. 1.. Start the engine.-Set the heater temperature control
Make sure it is between the MAX mark (A) and MIN dial to maximum heat, then turn off the ignition
mark (B). switch. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool
to the touch.
2. Removethe radiator cap,
3. Loosefi·the drain plug (A), and dtain the coolant.
B
A
2. If the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is at or

below the MIN mark, add coolant to bring it up to
the MAX mark, and inspect the cooling system for
leaks.
4. After the coolant has drained, tighten the radiator
drain plug.
5. Remove the coolant reservoir, and drain the

coolant. Reinstall the coolant reservoir.
6. Fill the coolant reservoir to the MAX mark (A) with

Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
(P/N OL999-9001).
(cont'd)
BACK
Cooling System
Coolant Replacement (cont'd)
7. Pour Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 8. Loosely install the radiator cap.
(P/N OL999-9001) into the radiator up to the base of
the filler neck. 9. Start the engine, and let it run until it warms up (the
radiator fan comes on at least twice).
NOTE:
• Always use Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant 10. Turn off the engine. Check the level in the radiator
Type 2 (P/N OL999-9001). Using a non-Honda and add Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
coolant can result in corrosion, causing the if needed.
cooling system to malfunction orfail.
• Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 is a 11. Put the radiator cap on tightly, then run the engine
mixture of 50 % antifreeze and 50 % water. Do again, and check for leaks.
not add water.
Engine Coolant Capacities (Including the reserve

tank capacity of 0.7 L (0.18 US gal))
At Coolant Change: 6.5 L (1.72 US gal)
After Engine Overhaul: 8.4 L (2.22 US gal)
10-8 BACK
Thermostat Replacement
2. Remove the condenser fan shroud (see page 10-16).
3. Remove the lower hose, then remove the thermostat.
HARNESS CLAMP
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) THERMOSTAT LOWER RADIATOR HOSE
4. Install the thermostat with a new O-ring, then install the lower hose.
5. Install the condenser fan shroud (see page 10-17).
6. Refill the radiator with engine coolant, and bleed the air from the cooling system with the heater valve open (see
BACK 10-9
Coolin'g System
Water Passage Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-7). 9. Remove the water passage.
2. Remove the intake manifold (see page 9-3).
3. Remove the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page

4-33).
4. Remove the alternator (see page 4-34).
5. Remove the condenser fan shroud assembly.
6. Remove the Ale compressor without disconnecting

the Ale hoses (see step 38 on page 5-7).
7. Remove the bolt (A) securing the connecting pipe.
10. Remove the thermostat housing.
8. Remove the lower radiator hose (B), connecting

pipe (e), water bypass hose (D), and harness clamp
(E).
11. Remove the water pump (see page 10-6).
10-10 BACK
.- ,'1,,'
12. Install the water pump (see page 10-6). 16. Install the water passage (A) with a new O-ring (8).
13. Install the thermostat housing (A) with a new O-ring NOTE:
(8). • Wait at least 30 minutes before filling the engine
with oil.
installing the water passage.
"7m.
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
s.71hl·ftl
14. Clean, and dry the water passage mating surfaces.
15. Apply liquid gasket, PIN 08717-0004,08718-0001,

08718-0003, or 08718-0009, evenly to the engine 17. Install the connecting pipe (A) with a new O-ring (8),
block mating surface ofthe water passage. Install then tighten the bolt (C).
liquid gasket. ' .' c
6x 1.0 mm
NOTE:
-----....
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
E

A
18. Install the lower radiator hose (D), water bypass

hose (E), and harness clamp (F).
19. Tighten the bolt (G) securing the connecting pipe.
Apply liquid gasket

(cont'd)
BACK 10-11
Cooling System
Water Passage Replacement Water Outlet Removal and

(cont'd) Installation
20. Install the Ale compressor (see step 36 on page Removal

5-16) ..
21. Install the condenser fan shroud assembly.
2. Remove the air cleaner housing (see page 11-394).
22. Install the alternator (see page 4-35).
23. Install the drive belt auto-tensioner (see page 4-33).
4. Remove the air bypass outlet pipe (A).
24. Install the intake manifold (see page 9-5).

valve open (see step 6 on page 10~7).
5. Remove the ignition coil cover (A) and fuel feed

pipe mounting bolt (8).
10-12 BACK
6. Remove the engine wire harness connectors and 9. Remove the harness holder bracket (A), upper
wire harness clamps from the cylinder head. radiator hose (B), and water bypass hose (C), then
. remove the upper water outlet (0).
• Camshaft position (CMP) s~nsor A (Intake)
connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B (Exhaust)
connector
7. Remove the ha rness holder from the bracket.
10. Remove the heater hose (A) and water bypass

hoses (B), then remove the lower water outlet (C).
8. Remove the EVAP canister purge valve mounting

bracket from the cylinder head.
(cont'd)
BACK 10-13
Water Outlet Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation 3. Install the EVAP canister purge yalve mounting'

bracket.
1. Install the lowerwater outlet (A) with a new O-ring
(8), then install the water bypass hoses (C) and
heater hose (0).
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m
"~~~J-_~", 11
.2 S" . 71bt·fIl
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
, '," ~
4. Install the harness holder.

2. Install the upper water outlet (A) with a new O-ring
(8), then install the upper radiator hose (C), water
bypass hose (0), and harness holder bracket (E).
6x1.0mm' , '.
~ 12 N·m (1.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibf·ftl
5. Install the engine wire harness connectors and wire

harness clamps to the cylinder head.
------
B
connector
6x 1.0mm • Camshaft position (CMP) sensor 8 (Exhaust)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ftl connector
BACK
6. Install the ignition coil cover (A) and.fuel·feed pipe
mounting bolt (8).
_ _ _ 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
B
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
7. Install the air bypass outlet pipe.
9. Install the air cleaner housing (see page 11-394).

BACK 10-15
Cooling System
Fan, Fan Motor, Shroud Removal and Installation
Removal 4. Remove the clips (A), then remove the support rod
clamp bracket (B).
2. Disconnect the fan motor connectors (A), and

remove the harness clamps (B).
B A
5. Remove the condenser fan shroud assembly (A),

then remove the radiator fan shroud assembly (B)
from the condenser fan shroud side.
3. Remove the clip (A), then remove the coolant

10-16 BACK
6. Disassemble the fan shrouds. Installation
1. Assemble the fan shrouds.
6N·m
(0.6 kgf·m. 4 Ibf·ttl
4N·m
2. Install the radiator fan shroud assembly (A). then

install the condenser fan shroud assembly (8).
(cont'd)
BACK 10-17
Cooling System
Fan, Fan Motor, Shroud Removal and Installation (cont'd)
3. Install the support rod clamp bracket (A), then 5. Connect the fan motor connectors (A), and install
install the clips (B). the harness clamps (B).
6x 1.0mm B A
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf.ft)
~
4. Install the coolant reservoir.
10-18 BACK
Radiator Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-7). 8. Remove the intake air duct cover (A) and the four
clips (8), then remove the upper radiator brackets
2. Remove the condenser fan shroud assembly and (C).
radiator fan shroud assembly (see page 10-16).
3. Remove the upper radiator hose (A).
9. Pull up the radiator, then remove the radiator cap

(A), ECT sensor 2 (8), and drain plug (C).
B
6x 1.0mm
E c 12N·m
(1.2
4. Clean any dirt off the quick connector (8), radiator,
and lower radiator hose.
5. Pull out the lock (C) by hand, then wiggle the quick
connector loose, and remove it from the radiator.
Do not use any tools to remove the quick connector.
6. Remove the automatic transmission fluid (ATF)

cooler hoses (D), then plug the hose and the line.
7. Disconnect the engine coolant temperature (ECT)

sensor 2 connector (E).
10. Reassemble the radiator with new O-rings (D).
11. Install the radiator. Make sure the lower cushions

(E) are set securely.
(cont'd)
BACK 10-19
Cooling System
Radiator Replacement (cont'd)
12. Install the upper radiator brackets (A), then install 13. Check the quick connector (A) and set ring (8) for
the intake air duct cover (8) and the four clips (C). cracks or damage. If the connector and/or set ring
are cracked or damaged, repla'ce the connector.
E A
14. Make sure the set ring is in place inside the quick
connector. If the set ring is displaced or not '
properly seated in the connector, replace the quick
connector.
15. Replace the O-ring (C) in the quick connector.
16. Check the lock (D). If the lock is damaged or

deformed, replace it. When installing the new lock
to the connector, slide it straight down along the
groove.
17. Install a new lower radiator hose on the quick

connector, and install the clamp.
18. Clean the connecting surface ofthe radiator (E),

then apply clean engine coolant around the
connecting surface.
10-20 BACK
.m
19. Push down the lock (A), then push the quick
connector (8) onto the radiator until you hear it
click.
E
20. Install the upper radiator hose (C).
21. Install the ATF cooler hoses (0), and connect the
ECT sensor 2 connector (E).
22. Install the condenser fan shroud assembly and

radiator fan shroud assembly (see page 10-17).
23. Refill the radiator with engine I::oolant,and bleed

the airfrom the cooling system with the heater
BACK
Fan'C,ohtrols
AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-64
RADIATOR FAN RELAY
Test, page 22-64
FAN CONTROL RELAY
. Test, page 22-64

AIC CONDENSER FAN ASSEMBLY (ECT) SENSOR 1
Motor Test, page 10-4 Replacement, page 11-249
RADIATOR FAN ASSEMBLY ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
Motor Test, page 10-4 (ECT) SENSOR 2
10-22 BACK
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for

Engine overheats 1. Check the coolant level.
2. Check for any engine coolant leakage (from
gaskets, hoses, O-rings, etc.).
3. Check for dirt, leaves, or insects on radiator
and condenser.
4. Check for deteriorated coolant.
5. Check for a damaged or deformed fan shroud.
, 6. Inspect the fan motors (see page 10-4) or fan
relays (see page 22-64).
7. Check the radiator cap (see page 10-3).
8. Check the thermostat (see page 10-4).
9. Inspect the water pump (see page 10-5).
10. Check for a plugged or deteriorated radiator
hoses.
11. Check for plugged heater core or hoses .
12. . Check for a damaged cylinder head gasket.
The radiator fan runs at low speed, Radiator fan high speed circuit troubleshooting Cleanliness and
but it does not run at high speed (see page 10-25). tightness of all
when the engine coolant connectors
temperature is above 199 "F
(93 "C)
With the AlC off and the engine Remove the fan control relay, and test. Cleanliness and
coolanttemperature at 199 "F , • If the relay is faulty, replace it. tightness of all
(93 "C) or below, the AlC • If the relay is OK, check for a short inthe wire connectors
condenser fan runs at high speed between fan control relay 5P socket terminal No.1
and the radiator fan does not run. and condenser fan motor 2P connector terminal
When the engine coolant No.1.
(93 "C), both fans run at high
speed
The radiator fan and the AlC . Check for a short in the wire between radiator fan Cleanliness and
condenser fan run at high speed relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and PCM connector tightness of all
with the ignition switch ON (11), terminal A5. connectors
the AlC off, and the engine
coolant temperature below 194 "F
(90 "C)
Both the radiator fan and the AlC Check for a short in the wire between AlC condenser Cleanliness and
condenser fan run at low speed fan relay 4P socket terminal No.4 and PCM connector tightness of all
with the ignition switch ON (II) terminal A4. connectors
and the AlC off
Both the radiator fan and the AlC Radiator and AlC condenser fans low speed circuit Cleanliness and
condenser fan do not run at low troubleshooting (see page 21-65). tightness of all
speed with the AlC on connectors
The AlC condenser fan does not AlC condenser fans high speed circuit Cleanliness and
run at all. The radiator fan does troubleshooting (see page 21-70). tightness of all
not run at low speed, but it runs at connectors
high speed
Both the radiator fan and the AlC Check for an open in the wire between radiator fan Cleanliness and
condenser fan do not run at high relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and PCM connector tightness of all
speed when the engine coolant terminal A5. connectors
(93 "C)
BACK 10-23
Fan Controls
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAYBOX IGNmON SWITCH

ATTERY
+
No.1 {100AI No2{50AI
No.11 {15AI
PGM-A
SUB RELAY
@- IG2
IG2 HOT in ON {III

~
No.6 130 AI No.7 {3D AI

L f-o-lu
,,
No.15 {7.5AI
ov"\.....O--
No.36
r-O"" {10AI
A/C DIODE B
~
~ A~ UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY
BOX
~
1 4 1 5 1 3
If--------
RADIATOR
FAN
RELAY
i '.;------ FAN
CONTROL
RELAY
~r --- -- --------~ A/C
CONDENSER
FAN RELAY
2 3 14 2 3 2 4
BLU BlK GRY RED BRN
~-~
2
A/C
FAN M CONDENSER
MOTOR FAN MOTOR
1 1
BlK PUR RED
1 ...lL.
-
G201 G202
PCM A5 A4 A21
FANH FANl SUBRlY
5V
ECTI SG2 SG6 ECT2
..
B23 B33 A9 A33
~.
BLK RED
1 2
ENGINE COOLANT
~ ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
{Een SENSOR 1 {Een SENSOR 2
10-24 BACK
Radiator Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No.6 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood 4. Connect radiator fan relay 4P socket terminals
fuse/relay box, and the No. 15 (7.5 A) fuse in the No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire.
under-hood fuse/relay box.
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse(s) and recheck .• ffi==:J JUMPER WIRE
2. Remove the radiator fan relay from the under-hood

fuse/relay box and test it (see page 22-64). E0
Is the relay OK?
Terminal side offemale terminals
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the radiator fan relay.• Does the radiator fan run at high speed?
3. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P YES-Go to step 5.

socket terminal No.1 and body ground.
NO-Repair open in the wire between radiator fan
RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and radiator fan
motor 2P connector terminal No.2 .•
6. Measure the voltage between radiator fan relay 4P

socket terminal No.4 and body ground.
= RADIATOR FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
1
2
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box.•

=
YES-Repair open in the wire between radiator fan

relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and the powertrain
control module (PCM) (A5) .•
NO-Check the AlC diode B in the under-hood fuse/

relay box. If the diode is OK, replace the under-
hood fuse/relay box.•
BACK 10-25
Fuel and Emissions
Fuel and Emissions Systems Idle Control System .
Special Tools ................................................... 11-2 Component Location Index ........................... 11-322
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 11-3 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-323
DTCTroubleshooting Index .......................... 11-10 AlC Signal Circuit Troubleshooting .............•·11-332
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 11-14 Alternator FR Signal Circuit
System Description ........................................ 11-17 Troubleshooting ......................................... 11-333
HowtoSetReadinessCodes ........................ 11-76 PSP Switch Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting .............................. ,.......... 11-334
PGM;.FI System Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit
Component Location Index ........................... 11-79 Troubleshooting ......................................... 11-336
DTC Troubleshooting .... ,................................ 11-81 Idle Speed Inspection ,...................................... 11-338
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting ..................... 11-213 PCM Idle Learn Procedure ..•.....•.......•............ 11-339
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 11-228
DLC Circuit Troubleshooting ......................... 11-229 Fuel Supply System
Injector Replacement ..................................... 11-243 Component Location Index ........................... 11-340
AlF Sensor Replacement ....................• ~ ...... ~ .. 11-245 DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-342
Secondary H02S Replacement ..................... 11-245 · Fuel Pressure Relieving ................................. 11-362
CMP Sensor B Replacement ......................... 11-246 Fuel Pressure Test .......................................... 11-365
CKP Sensor Replacement ........,.............. ,....... 11-24f? Transfer Fuel Pump Test ................................ 11-366
MAP Sensor Re'placement ............................. 11-247 · Fuel Tank Draining ......................................... 11-367
MAF Sensor/IAT Sensor 1 Replacement ..... , 11-247 Fuel Line Inspection ....................................... 11-368
IAT Sensor 2 Replacement ........................... .' 11-248 Fuel Line/Quick-'ConnectFitting
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement ........................... 11-249 Precautions ............. ~ .................................... ' 11-370
ECT Sensor 2 Replacement ....... :................... 11-250 Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting
Knock Sensor Replacement ................. :........ 11"250' Removal ....................................................... 11-372
ELD Replacement ..................................•........ 11-251 Fuel Line/Quick·Connect Fitting
PCM Replacement .......................................... 11-252 Installation ................................................... 11-374
· Fuel Pulsation Damper Replacement ........... 11-377
Electronic Throttle Control System' Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement ......... 11-378
Component Location Index ........................... 11-254 Fuel Pressure Regulator Base
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-255 Replacement ................................................ 11-379
APP Sensor Signal Inspection ....................... 11-294 Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation ............ 11-380
Accelerator Pedal Module Fuel Filter Replacement .................................. 11·382
Removal/Installation .................................. 11-295 Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
Replacement ............................................... 11-382
VTEC/VTC Secondary Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
Component Location Index ........................... 11-296 Removal/Installation .................................. 11-383
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-297 Fuel Tank Replacement ................................. 11-385
VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation ................ 11-387
Removal/Test/lnstallation .......................... 11-319 Fuel Pump Control Module
CMP Sensor A Replacement ......................... 11-320 Replacement ............................•...,.....,........... 11-388
Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test ...................... 11-389
Removal/Installation .................................. 11-321 Secondary Fuel Gauge Sending Unit
Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Test ............................................................... 11·390
Removal/Installation .................................. 11-321 '. Low Fuel Indicator Test .................................. 11-391
Intake Air System EVAPSystem
Component Location Index ... ;.• ,.................... 11"392 Component Location Index ..........••.... ;.......... 11.-446
Throttle Body Test .............. ,........................... 11-393. .', DTCTroubleshooting ........•.....................•...... 11-447
Throttle Body Cleaning ...................,..•........... 11-394 . Fuel Cap Warning Message System .
Air Cleaner Removal/Installation .................. 11-394 Troubleshooting ..............................•....::.,;: "1-483
Air Cleaner Element EVAP Canister Replacement ... ;... ,... :.:;., .......~11-485
Inspection/Replacement .............•.............. 11-395 FTP Sensor Replacement ........... :::;............... 11-485
Resonator Removal/Installation .:....•.•.........•. 11-395 EVAP Canister Purge Valve ,-'.
Throttle Body Removal/Installation ...•........•. 11-396 Replacement .......................••.........•.;........... 11-486
EVAP Canister Purge Nozzle
Turbocharger Control System Replacement ............................•.....•.."./.......... 11-486
Component Location Index ........................... 11-397 EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve .
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-398 Replacement ............................................... 11-487
Turbocharger Bypass Control EVAP Canister Filter Replacement ................ 11-487
Solenoid Valve Inspection ......................... 11-431 Non-return Valve NB
Turbocharger Bypass Control Inspection/Replacement ............................ 11-488
Solenoid Valve Replacement ..................... 11-432
Turbocharger Wastegate Control
Solenoid Valve Inspection ......................... 11-433
Turbocharger Wastegate Control
Turbocharger Boost Control
Solenoid Valve Inspection ......................... 11-435
Turbocharger Boost Control
Turbocharger Boost Sensor
Replacement ............................................... 11-436
Catalytic Converter System

Component Location Index ........................... 11-437
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 11-438
Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter
Removal/Installation .................................. 11~40
Under-floor Three Way Catalytic Converter
Removal/Installation .................................. 11-443
PCVSystem
Component Location Index ........................... 11-444
PCV Valve Inspection ..................................... 11-445
PCVValve Replacement ................................ 11-445
Fuel and Emissions Systems
Special Tools

CD 07 AAA-SOXA 100 . Fuel Sender Wrench 1
® 07AAJ-S6MA 150
..
Fuel Pressure Gauge Attachment Set 1
® 07JAZ-001000B Vacuum/Pressure Gauge, 0-4 in.Hg 1
@ 07NAJ-P07010A Pressure Gauge Adapter 1
® 07ZAJ-S5AA200 Oil Pressure Hose 1
®-1 07406-0020201 AfT Pressure Hose 1
®-2 07406-0070301 ·:AfT Low Pressure Gauge W/Panel 1
®-3 07MAJ-PY4011A AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 1
®-4 07MAJ-PY40120 AfT Pressure Hose, Adapter 1
(j) 07406-004000B Fuel Pressure Gauge 1
e
~.
~
~
CD ® ®
® ®-1,®-2,®-3,®-4
11-2 BACK
General Troubleshooting Information
Intermittent Failures 2. If the MIL stays on, connect the HDS to the data link
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may of the dashboard.
have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) on the dash does not
come on, check for poor connections or loose pins at all
connectors related to the circuit that you are
troubleshooting. If the MIL was on but then went out,
the original problem may have been intermittent.
Opens and Shorts

"Open" and "short" are common electrical terms. An
open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is
an accidental connection of a wire to ground or to
another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means
A
something won't work at all. With complex electronics
(such as PCMs) this can sometimes mean something 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
works, but not the way it's supposed to.
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
How to Use the HDS (Honda Diagnostic it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
System) (see page 11~229).
H the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) has come on 5. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it.
Also check the freeze data and/or on-board
1. Start the engine, and check the MIL (A). snapshot data, and download any data found. Then
refer to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and
NOTE: If the ignition switch is turned ON (II), and begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
the engine is not started, the MIL stays on for
15-20 seconds (see page 11-76). NOTE:
• Freeze .data indicates the engine conditions when
the first malfunction, misfire, or fuel trim
malfunction was detected.
• The HDS can read the DTC, freeze. data, on-board
snapshot, current data, and other powertrain
control module (PCM) data.
• For specific operations, refer to the user's
manual that came with the HDS.
6. If no DTCs are found, go to MIL troubleshooting

(see page 11-228).
Ifthe MIL did not stay on

If the MIL did not stay on but there is a driveability
problem, do the symptom troubleshooting.
If you can't duplicate the DTC

Some of the troubleshooting requires you to reset the
PCM and try to duplicate the DTC. If the problem is
intermittent and you can't duplicate the code, do not
continue through the procedure. To do so will only
result in confusion and possibly, a needlessly replaced
PCM.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-3
General Troubleshooting Information (cont'd)
HOS Clear Command PCM Reset
The PCM stores various specific data to correct the 1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is
system even ifthere is no electrical power such as stopped.
when the battery negative terminal or No. 19 FI MAIN
(15 A) fuse are disconnected. Stored data based on 2.· Turn the ignition switch OFF.
failed parts should be cleared by using the "CLEAR
COMMAND" of the HDS, if parts are replaced. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for
30 seconds.
The HDS has three kinds of clear commands to meet
this purpose. They are DTC clear, PCM reset, and crank 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnectthe
(CKP) pattern clear. DTC clear command erases all HDS from the DLC.
stored DTC codes, freeze data, on-board snapshot, and
readiness codes. This must be done with the HDS after 5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
reproducing the DTC during troubleshooting.
The PCM reset command erases all stored DTC codes, Crank (CKP) Pattern Clear/Crank (CKP)
freeze data, on-board snapshot, readiness codes, and Pattern Learn
all specific data to correct the system except crank
(CKP) pattern. If the crank (CKP) pattern data in the PCM Clear/Learn Procedure (with the HOS)
was cleared, you must do the crank (CKP) pattern learn
procedure. The crank (CKP) pattern clear command 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
erases only crank (CKP) pattern data. This command is (A) located under the driver's side ofthe dashboard.
for repair of a misfire or the CKP sensor.
Scan Tool Clear Command
If you are using a generic scan tool to clear commands,

be aware that there is onlyone setting for clearing the
PCM, and it clears all commands at the same time
(crank (CKP) pattern learn, idle learn, readiness codes,
freeze data, on-board snapshot, and DTCs). After you
clear all commands, you then need to do these
procedures, in this order: PCM idle learn procedure
(see page 11-339); crank (CKP) pattern learn procedure;
test-drive to set readiness codes to complete (see page
11-76).
OTC Clear A
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS while the engine is 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
stopped.
3. Make sure the HDS communiCates with the PCM. If
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-229).
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for
30 seconds. 4. Select CRANK PATTERN in the ADJUSTMENT
MENU with the HDS.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the
HDS from the DLC. 5. Select CRANK PATTERN LEARNING with the HDS,
and follow the screen prompts.
11-4 BACK
Learn Procedure (without the HDS) How to End a Troubleshooting Session
(required after any troubleshooting)
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the 1. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on.
2. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
2. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road: Decelerate
(with the throttle fully closed) from an engine speed 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
of 2,500 rpm down to 1,000 rpm with the
transmission in S position 1st or 2nd gear. 4. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
3. Repeat step 2 several times. NOTE: The PCM is part of the immobilizer system.
If you replace the PCM, it will have a different
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. immobilizer code. In order for the engine to start,
you must rewrite the immobilizer code with the
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait for HDS.
30 seconds.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-5
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM 3. When diagnosis/troubleshooting is done at the

Connectors PCM connector, use the terminal test port (A) above
the terminal you need to check.
NOTE: The PCM overwrites data and monitors the EVAP
system for up to 30 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the
ignition switch OFF cancels this function. Disconnecting
the PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS
line first, can damage the PCM.
2. Disconnect the PCM connectors A. B, and C.
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols

(A=O, B=.6., C=O) embossed on them for
identification.
4. Connect one side of the patch cord (A) terminals to
a commercially available digital multimeter (B),
and connect the other side of the patch cord
terminals to a commercially available banana jack
(Pomona Electronics Tool No. 3563 or equivalent)
(C).
c A
5. Gently contact the pin probe (male) at the terminal

test port from the terminal side. Do not force the
tips into the terminals.
INOTICEI
• For accurate results, always use the pin
probe (male).
• To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
they can damage the terminals. Damaged
terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement.
• Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
11-6 BACK
Updating the PCM 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), but do not start the
engine.
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) 2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
• Honda interface module ·(HIM) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
• HDS pocket tester
NOTE:
• Use this procedure when you need to update the PCM
in a troubleshooting procedure.
• Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
, version.
• Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in
the vehicle is fully charged.
• Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
If there is a problem with the update, leave the
ignition switch ON.
• To prevent PCM damage, do not opera~eanything
electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, AlC,
power windows, moonroof (if equipped), door locks,
etc.) during the update. A
• To ensure the latest program is installed, do an PCM
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
• You cannot update an PCM with a program it already it doesn't, go to the DLC ci rcuit troubleshooti ng
has. It will only accept a new program. (see page 11-229). If you are returning from the
• High temperature in the engine compartment might DLe circuit troubleshooting, skip step 4 to 5 and
cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If clean the throttle body after updating the PCM
the engine has been running before this procedure, (see page 11-394).
open the hood and cool the engine compartment.
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module 4. USA, Canada models: Select the INSPECTION
(HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) lamp came on or MENU with the HDS.
was flashed during the update, leave the ignition
switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the 5. USA, Canada models: Select the ETCS TEST, then
HIM from the data link connector (DLC). This will select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the HDS
prevent PCM damage. screen prompts.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,

continue this procedure.
6. Exit the Honda diagnostic system (USA, Canada

models). Select the update program, and follow the
screen prompts to update the PCM.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-7
7. If the software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect Substituting the PCM
the HOS/HIM from the OLC, and go backtothe
procedure that you were doing. If the software in Special Tools Required
the PCM is not the latest, follciwthe instructions on o Honda diagnostic system (HOS)
the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI o Honda interface module (HIM)
system or the AfT system, make sure you update o HOS pocket tester
both.
NOTE: Use this procedure when you need to substitute
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to a known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures.
cool the PCM, follow the instructions on screen. If
you run into a problem during the update 1. Connect the HOS to the data link connector (OLC)
procedure, (programming takes over 15 minutes, (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
status bar goes over 100 %, Oor immobilizer light
flashes, HOS tablet freezesi.etc.), follow these steps
to minimize the chance of damaging the PCM:
o Leave the ignition sWitch in the ON (II) position.
o Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a
battery charger).
o Shut down the HOS.
o Oisconnect the HOS from the OLC.
o Reboot the HOS.
o Reconnect the HOS to the OLC, and try the
update procedure again.
8. USA, Canada models:lfthe TPPOSITION,CHECK

failed in step 6, clean the throttle body.(see page
11-394).
A
9. 00 the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
2.' Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
10. 00 the CKP pattern learn procedure.
3. Make sure the HOS communicates with the PCM. If
it'doesn't, go to the OLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-229). If you are returning from OLC
circuit troubleshooting, skip .step 4 to 8,and clean
the throttle body after substituting the PCM
(see page 11-394).
4. USA, Canada models: Select the INSPECTION

MENU with the HOS.
5. USA, Canada models: Select the ETCS TEST, then

select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the
screen prompts.
NOTE: Ifthe TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILEO,

7. Jump the SCS line with the HOS.
11-8 BACK
8. Disconnect the PCM connectors A, B, and C. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or
(A=D, B=~, C=O) embossed on them for Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not
identification. been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and
13. Manually input the VIN to the PCM with the HDS.
14, Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

software.
15. Selectthe IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
16; Enter the immobilizer code using the PCM

replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you
to start the engine.
17. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
18. USA, Canada models: Ifthe TP POSITION CHECK

failed in step 5, clean the throttle body (seepage
11-394).
9. Remove the bolts (D), then remove the PCM 20. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure.
assembly (E).
OBDStatu5
10.' Remove the cover (A) and the bracket (B) from the
,PCM (C). The OBD status shows the current system status of
each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the repair was successfully completed.
The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are displayed
as:
r'
• ,PASSED: The on board diagnosis is successfully

9.8N·m finished.
11.0 kgf·m, • FAILED: The on board diagnosis has finished but
7.2Ibf.ftl
failed.
~-~ • EXECUTING: The vehicle is in enable criteria
conditions for the DTC and the on board diagnosis is
running.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
• OUT OF CONDITION: The vehicle has stayed out of
the enable conditions for the DTC.
11. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal.
BACK 11-9
DTe Troubleshooting Index

DTe Two Drive Cycle Detection Item MIL Note
(MIL indication ") Detection
P0010 (56) -- Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) Oil Control Solenoid Valve ON (see page 11-297)
Malfunction
P0011 (56) 0 Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) System Malfunction ON (see_page 11-300)
P0034 (194) Turbocharger Bypass Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Low Voltage ON (see oage 11-398)
P0035 (194) Turbocharger Bypass Control Solenoid Valve Circuit High Voltage ON (see oage 11-402)
P0045 (172) Turbocharger Boost Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction ON (see oage 11-403)
P0096 (10) -- Intake Temperature (lAT) Sensor 2 Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 11-81)
Problem
P0097 (10) -- Intake Air Temoerature (lAT) Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-82)
P0098 (10) -- Intake Air Temoerature (lAT) Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-84)
P0101 (50) 0 Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-87)
P0102 (50) -- Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see oage 11-89)
P0103 (50) -- Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see oage 11-92)
P0107 (3) -- Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see oage 11-94)
P0108 (3) -- Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see oage 11-96)
P0112 (125) Intake Air Temoerature (lAT) Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see oage 11-99)
P0113 (125) -- Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-101)
P0116 (86) 0 Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Range/ ON (see page 11-104)
Performanbe Problem
P0117 (6) -- Engine Coolant Temoerature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see oage 11-105)
P0118 (6) -- Engine Coolant Temoerature (ECT) Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage ON (see oage 11-107)
P0122 (7) -- Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage ON . (see oage 11-255)
P0123 (7) -- Throttle Position (TP) Sensor A Circuit High Voltage ON (see oage 11-257)
P0125 (86) 0 Engine Coolant Temperature tECT) Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow
, ON ·.(see'page 11-110)'
Resoonse
P0128 (87) 0 Cooling System Malfunction . . ON . (see oage 11-111)
P0133 (61) 0 Air Fuel Ratio (AIF) Sensor (Sensor 1) Malfunction/Slow Response ON (see page 11-113)
P0134 (41) 0 Air Fuel Ratio (M) Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater System Malfunction ON (see page 11-114)
P0135 (41) -- Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater Circuit Malfunction ON (see~alle 11-115)
P0137 (63) 0 Secondary Heated oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Sensor 2») ON (see page 11-120)
Circuit Low Voltage
P0138 (63) 0 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S(Sensor 2» ON (s~e page 11-122)
Circuit High Voltage ' ,
P0139 (63) 0 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)) ON (see page 11-125)
Slow Response
P0141 (65) -- Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)) (see page 11-126)
, ON ,
Heater Circuit Malfunction
P0171 (45) 0 Fuel System Too Lean ON (see oage,11.-130)
P0172 (45) 0 , Fuel System TOo Rich ON (see oage 11-130)
P0222 (7) -- Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage ON (see oage 11-260)
P0223 (7) -- Throttle Position (TP) Sensor B Circuit High Voltage ON (see oage 11-263)
P0234 (26) 0 Turbocharger Oyerboost Problem ON (see oage 11-407)
P0236 (171) 0 Turbocharger Boost Sensor Circuit Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-409)
P0237 (171) -- Turbocharger Boost Sensor Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-411)
P0238 (171) -- Turbocharger Boost Sensor Circuit High Voltage ON (see oage 11-413)
P0243 (193) -- TurbocharclerWastegate Control Solenoid Va lye Circuit Malfunction ON (see oage 11-416)
P0299 (26) 0 Turbocharger Underboost Problem ON (see oage 11-420)
P0300(75) 0 Random Misfire Detected ON (see page 11-132)
any combination
ofthe following
P0301 (71)
P0302 (72)
P0303 (73)
P0304(74)
':
P0301 (71) 0 No.1 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see oage 11-135)
P0302 (72) 0 No.2 Cvlinder Misfire Detected ON (see oaQe 11-135)
P0303 (73) 0 No.3 CYlinder Misfire.oetected ON (see oage 11-135)
P0304(74) 0 No.4 Cylinder Misfire Detected ON (see palle 11-135)
NOTE: The above DTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected in the HDS. Some automatic transmission DTCs cause the MIL to
come on. If the MIL is on and no DTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the AfT system, and check the automatic transmission DTCs.
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
11-10 BACK
NOTE: The above OTCs are indicated when the PGM-FI system is selected in the HOS. Some automatic transmission OTCs cause the MIL to
come on. If the MIL is on and no OTCs are indicated in the PGM-FI system, select the AfT system, and check the automatic transmission OTCs .
• 1: These OTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HOS.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-11
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
DTe Two Drive Cycle Detection Item MIL Note
(MIL indication ·'1 Detection
P0720 (1221. 2 -- Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 11-167)
P1009 (56) -- Variable Valve Timing Control (VTC) Advance Malfunction ON (see page 11-308)
P1109(13) -- Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Out of Range High ON (see page 11-168)
Performance Problem
P1128 (5) 0 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Lower Than ON (see page 11-170)
Expected
P1129 (5) 0 Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor Signal Higher Than ON (see page 11-171)
Expected
P1157j48) Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Sensor, 1) AFS Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-173)
P1172 (61) 0 Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Out of Ran~1:! High ON (see page 11-176)
P1233 (171) 0 Turbocharger Boost Sensor/Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor ON (see page 11-423)
Incorrect Correlation
P1234 (171) 0 Turbocharger Boost Sensor/Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) ON (see page 11-423)
Sensor Incorrect Correlation
P1297 (20) Electrical Load Detector (ELD) Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-177)
P1298 (20) Electrical Load Detector (ELDI Circuit High Voltage OFF (see page 11-179)
P1454 (90) 0 Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor Range/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-475)
P145A(90) 0 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Incorrect Purge Flow Detected ON (see page 11-478)
P145B (90) 0 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Purge Line Non-return Valve A ON (see page 11-482)
Stuck Open
P145C (90) 0 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Purge Flow Malfunction ON (see page 11-482)
. (Vacuum Purge)
P145D (90) 0 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) System Purge Flow Malfunction (Jet ON (see page 11-482)
, ..- Purge)
P1549 (34) Charging System High Voltage OFF (see page 11-181)
P1658 (40) -- Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay ON ON (see page 11-266)
Malfunction
P1659 (40) -- Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Control Relay OFF ON (see page 11-268)
Malfunction
P1683 (40) -- Throttle Valve Default Position Spring Performance Problem ON (see page 11-272)
P1684 (40) -- Throttle Valve Return Spring Performance Problem ON (see page 11-273)
P16BB (116) Alternator B Terminal Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-182)
P16BC (116) Alternator FR Terminal Circuit/IGP Circuit Low Voltage OFF (see page 11-183)
P2101 (40) Electronic Throttle Control System (ETCS) Malfunction ON (see page 11-274)
P2118 (40) -- Throttle Actuator Current RaQg.,,/Performance Problem ON (see page 11-276)
P2122 (37) -- Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-278)
Sensor D) Circuit Low Voltage
P2123 (37) -- Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor A (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-281)
Sensor D) Circuit High Voltage
P212T(37) -- Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-283)
Sensor E) Circuit Low Voltage
P2128 (37) Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor B (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-286)
Sensor E) Circuit High Voltage
P2135 (7) -- Throttle Position (TP) SensorA/B Incorrect Volt~e Correlation ON (see page 11-288)
P2138 (37) -- Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor NB (Throttle Position (TP) ON (see page 11-290)
Sensor D/E) Incorrect Voltage Correlation
P2176 (40) -- Throttle Actuator Control System Idle Position Not Learned ON (see page 11-292)
Performance Problem
P2184 (192) -- Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage ON (see page 11-188)
P2185 (192) -- Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage ON (see_p_age 11-190)
P2195 (48) 0 Air Fuel Ratio (NF) Sensor (Sensor 1) S~nal Stuck Lean ON (see~1!ge 11-193)
P2199 (125) 0 Intake Air Temoerature (lAT) Sensor 1 2 Incorrect Correlation ON (see page 11-195)
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when the SCS line is jumped with the HDS.
* 2: The 0 indicator and MIL may come on at the same time.
11-12 BACK
DTC Two Drive Cycle . Detection Item MIL Note
(MIL indication "1 Detection
P2227 (13) 0 Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 11-196)
Problem
P2228 (13) Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Low Voltag~ ON (see Daae 11-197)
P2229 (13) Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor Circuit Hiah Voltaae ON (see oaae 11-197)
P2238 (48) -- Air Fuel Ratio (A!F) Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS+ Circuit Low Voltaae ON (see oaae 11-198)
P2252 (48) -- Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 11 AFS- Circuit Low Voltage ON (see oage11-200)
P2261 (194) 0 Turbocharger BVDass Control Valve Stuck Closed ON (see oage 11-424)
P2263 (26) 0 Turbocharaer Boost Svstem Performance Problem ON (see oage 11-426)
P2270(63). 0 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)) ON (see page 11-202)
Circuit Signal Stuck Lean
P2271 (63) 0 Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)) ON (see page 11-202)
Circuit Signal Stuck Rich
P2422 (117) 0 Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Canister Vent Shut Valve Stuck Closed ON (see page 11-475)
Malfunction
P2610 (132) -- Powertrain Control Module (PCM) Ignition Off Internal Timer ON (see page 11-203)
Malfunction
P2646 (22) -- Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit Low Voltage ON (see oaae11-309)
P2647 (22) Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch Circuit High Voltage ON (see oage 11-312)
P2648 (21) -- Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit Low Voltage ON (see oage 11-315)
P2649 (21) -- Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid Circuit High Voltage ON (see page 11-317)
P2AOO (61) 0 Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Range/Performance ON (see page 11-204)
Problem
U0028 (126) -- F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF) ON (see page 11-205)
U0114 (126) -- F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-SH-AWD OFF (see page 11-206)
Control Unit)
U0122 (126) -- F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-VSA OFF (see page 11~208)
Modulator-Control Unit) ...
U0155 (126) F-CAN Malfunction (Powertrain Control Module (PCM)-Gauge ON (see page 11-210)
Control Module)
U0300 (131) -- PGM-FI Svstem and AfT Svstem Proaram Version Mismatch ON (see page 11-212)
* 1: These DTCs are indicated by a blinking MIL when theSCS line is jumped with the HDS.
BACK 11-13
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check fora dlagnostic trouble code (DTC) wifhthe HDS. If there is no
DTC, dothe diagnostlc procedure for the !>ymptom, in the sequence listed!,until you find the cause. " ,
L' • , I
Symptom Diagnosticprocedure" Also check for

Engine will not start 1. Test the battery (see page 22-63). '. Low compression ,
(MIL works OK, no PTCs set) .r , 2.
~
Testthestarter. ,<s~e page 4-8). • No ignition'spark
3. Check the fueJpressure (see pa'ge 11-365). • Intake air leaks'
~ ,
,-
.,
! "
• Locked up engine ,
I
• Broken cam chain
• Contaminated fuel
Engine will not start Troubleshoot the MIL cir,cuit (see page 11-228).
(MIL comes on and stays on, d,
,
or never comes on at all, no " \.
.f, .
DTCs set) .
MIL comes on and stays on, Troubleshoot the MIL circuit (see page 11-228). ~: '
I
or never comes on at all, no ;
DTCsset " ,, ' ,',
Engine will not start Check the immobilizer system.

(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays ",) 'i " ' ;
"
on or flashes)
Check the immobilizer system, "
Engine startS'but stalls
immediately
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set,
immobilizer indicator stays "
on or flashes)
1. Testthebat1;ery(see,page 22-63). '
' .. '. Low compression
Engine is hard to start
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-365). • Intake air leaks
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-394). • Contaminated fuel
• Weak sR.,ark
Cold fast idle too low 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the idle speed (see page 11-338).
3. Clean the throttle body (see page 11-394).
Cold fast idle too high 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
3. Do the throttle position learning check (see page
11-393).
Idle speed fluctuates 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). Intake vacuum leaks
3. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-393).
After warming up, idle speed 1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit
is below specification without (see page 11-333).
load 2. Do the carbon accumulation check (see page 11-393).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 3. Troubleshoot the AlC signal circuit (see page 11-332).
After warming up, idle speed 1. Troubleshoot the alternator FR signal circuit
is above specification without (see page 11-333).
load 2. Inspect the APP sensor (see page 11-294).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 3. Troubleshoot the AlC siQnal circuit (see page 11-332).
11-14 BACK
,. Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for
Afterwarming up, idle speed 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). Powersteeri ng
drops when steering wheel is 2. Troubleshoot the PSP switch signal circuit system
turning (see page 11-334).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 3. Do the carbon accumulation,check (see page
;:;,; 11-393).
Low power __ 1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-365). • Low compression
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Checkthe turbocharger wastegate control solenoid • Incorrect camshaft
valve (see page 11-433). timing
3. Check the turbocharger wastegate control actuator • Incorrect engine oil
control line. level
4. Check the turbocharger wastegate control actuator • Turbocharger
(see page 9-11) .. - wastegate control
5. Check the turbocharger boost control solenoid actuator stuck
valve (see page 11-435). _ open
6. Check the turbocharger boost control actuator • Turbocharger
control line. boost control
7. Check the turbocharger boost control actuator actuator stuck
open
8. Check the turbocharger bypass control solenoid • Turbocharger
valve (see page 11-431). bypass va Ive stuck
9. Check the turbocharger bypass control line. closed
10. Check the turbocharger bypass control valve (see • Turbocharger
page 9-11). bypass valve stuck
open
Engine stalls 1. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). • Intake air leaks
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-365). • Faulty harness and
3. Check the idle speed (see page 11-338). sensor
4. Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal connections
Abnormal sound during 1. Check the turbocharger bypass control solenoid Turbocharger bypass
deceleration with fuel cut valve (see page 11-431). valve stuck closed
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) 2. Check the turbocharger bypass valve control line.
3. Check the turbocharger bypass valve (see page
9-11).
Fuel cut happens during 1. Check the turbocharger wastegate control solenoid Turbocharger
acceleration with throttle valve (see page 11-433). wastegate control
widely open 2. Check the turbocharger wastegate control actuator actuator stuck closed
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) control line.
3. Check the turbocharger wastegate control actuator
(see pa.~e 9-11).
(cont'd)
BACK 11-15

Difficult to refuel 1. Check the fuel vent tube between the EVAP canister Malfunctioning gas
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set) and the fuel tank. station filling nozzle.
2. Check the fuel tank v~por recirculation tube between
the fuel pipe and the fuel tank.
3. Replace the fuel tank unit (see page 11-380).
..
4. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-385).
Fuel overflows during 1. Replace the fuel tank unit (see page 11-380); . Malfunctioning gas
refueling 2. Replace the fuel tank (see page 11-385). station filling nozzle.
(No DTCs set)
HDS does not communicate Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-229).
with the PCM or the vehicle
Fuel cap warning message Troubleshoot the fuel cap warning message system
comes on and stays on (see page 11-483).
(MIL works OK, no DTCs set)
11-16 BACK
System Description
Electronic Control System
The functions of the fuel and emission control systems are managed by the powert.rain control module (PCM).
Self-diagnosis
The PCM detects a failure of a signal from a sensor or from another control unit and stores a Temporary DTC or a DTC
in erasable memory (RAM). Depending on the failure, a DTC is stored in either the first or the second drive cycle (for
DTC P0457, the DTC is set in the beginning of the third drive cycle). When a DTC is stored, the PCM turns on the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) by sending a command to the gauge control module .
• One Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the PCM stores a DTC for the
failure in the RAM and turns on the MIL immediately .
• Two Drive Cycle Detection Method

When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit i,n the first drive cycle, the PCM
stores a Temporary DTC for the failure in RAM. The MIL does not come on at this time. If the failure continues in the
second drive cycle, the PCM stores a DTC in erasable memory and turns on the MIL.
Fail-safe Function
When an abnormality occurs in the signal from a sensor or from another control unit, the PCMJgnores that signal and
substitutes a pre-programmed value for them that allows the engine to continue running. This causes a DTC to be
stored and the MIL to come on.
MIL Bulb Check and Readiness Code Condition

When the ignition switch is turned ON (11), the PCM supplies ground to the MIL circuit for about 15 to 20 seconds to
check the bulb condition. If any readiness codes are not set to complete, the MIL flashes.five times. If all readiness
codes are set to complete, the MIL goes off.
Self Shut Down (SSD) Mode

After the ignition switch is turned OFF, the PCM stays on (up to 30 minutes). If the PCM connector is disconnected
during this time, the PCM may be damaged. To cancel this mode, disconnect the negative cable from the battery or
jump the SCS line with the HDS after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-17
System Description (cont'd)
PCM Electrical Connections
IGNITION COIL
® RELAY
®
r-------, r---Q--o~
® 'W,
ELD
..
<3~1 ~~- Q - - - - - , PGM·FlMAIN
~
RELAY 2 {FUEL PUMPI
"'--'®
r-<Y' A/C COMPRESSOR ~+--------+------~~~~~~
CLUTCH RELAY
~
"V.l V"
~
PGM·FlMAIN
r 'W C
RELA;.:.Y....:1_ _-,
RADIATOR
FAN RELAY ~
((1:
1
.'
~lO-
.~r-W~li1l0 B
B~TTERY A/C CONDENSER (j) -I
.1
FAN RELAY·
® I IG~ ~
.--+-+-+--+-+--+---t-t-......-+--t.......<J'""'~ .-----+-I-'OG~/···
••
+B
ST
To D
COOUNG IGNmON
FAN CONTROL SWITCH
RELAY
T I IG1 HOT in ON (III
and START (1111
UNDER·HOOD STARTER CUT
I
RELAY {ST CUTI
FUSE/RELAV BOX:
NO.1 MAIN FUSE (100 AI
23 No. 19 FI MAIN (15 AI
4 No. 21G MAIN (50 AI
No. 17 VACUUM PUMP
(15AI @
@No. 12 STOP & HORN ~+-~~---+~~
(15A)
@No. 181G COIL (15 AI
UNDER·DASH
FUSE/RELA V BOX:
I J ®J .... )-O~
..:r--
PCM
NO. 3 IG1 ACG (15 AI
~8 No.2 FUEL PUMP (20 AI
9 No. 36 IG2 HAC (A/CI
........ A81GP IMOFPRA150---+_-I
PGM·FI
SUBRELAY
(10AI
PG1 836 o---+_"""
N
UNDER·HOOD
1
FUSE/RELAV BOX: C361G1 PG2B1
0 No. 15 OIL LVL (7.5 AI
II No. 11 LAF (15 AI @
I No. 21 DBW (THROTTLE
MRLYA6 >-- ~ ~ ~oJ
ACTUATOR CONTROL
A23 ELD
~,
(15A) SUBRLY A21
A14ACC ETCSRLY A20 J ETCSCONTRO L

RELAY
r1
A5FANH PGMETCSC2
0
A4FANL IG1ETCSC1
11-18 BACK
.../
G MAP SENSOR
No.1 INJECTOR
, ,VCC1 C13
I-W C5INJ1 MAPC11

+1=
SG1 C14
No. 2 INJECTOR
IrW' C61NJ2
~
. ....
No. 3 INJECTOR
NMB17 .L
~
Ir W
C71NJ3
"
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
No. 4 INJECTOR
IrW r CSINJ4
SG2833
VG+830
T MAFSENSOR
.--
'.
VG- 832
L....-
IAT1 C28
....
"""
IATSENSOR 1
ECTSENSOR1
ECT1823 ....
"
BAROSENSOR
(Built into
thePCM)
KNOCK SENSOR
KSC42 --- ... _--._----._._._--

---~---!iD
0 C31 CMPB
I , P
--
CMPSENSORB
VCC2B18
NCC43
1~ ~]
Q OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFTl
--'""-'" SPEED SENSOR
C32CKP
" .~ -
IATSENSOR2
CKPSENSOR
....
...J. ...
-
IAT2 B31
"I
R
-
(cont'd)
BACK 11-19
PCM Electrical Connections (cont'd)
J
---l::- --:::::::= ~
F N
.,
EVAP CANISTER AFSHTCC9

PURGE VALVE
I 'W
B3PCS
AFS+C29
AFS-C30
hl '" 'I
"
J
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE A/FSENSOR
(SENSOR 1)
Ir w A10 VSV
R
... ....
SH02SC27 ----.---. ------ ------- ------------_._._------ --"" 'I
S02SHTCB4
," J
SECONDARY
M S P H02S
ALTERNATOR (SENSOR 2)
r-
P.
@,
~~,
B42ALTL LG1 C40
B43ALTF LG2 C44
B41 ALTC
'-
-
CMP SENSOR A
K CMPAC41
0
~A:-
1
~
T
S C151GPLS1 -
PLUG ICM I VTC OIL CONTR OL
SOLENOID VALVE
No.1 IGNITION COIL
VTCC23 'W]
~~.:K r-'~
PLUG
~'CM I
C161GPLS2
1- ROCKER ARM
OILPRESSUR E
SWITCH
No.2 IGNITION COIL ._----
VTPSWC22
I
~
To-
SPARK
1
C171GPLS3
PLUG ICM I
"
No.3 IGNITION COIL ROCKER ARM
- OIL CONTROL
SOLENOID
To-
SPARK
PLUG
--'.!!'
~ ICM I
C181GPLS4 VTSB34 ·w.,
No.4 IGNITION COIL
"
..........
-
1-
To
S-NET5V A44 MICU
11-20 BACK
r
FTPSENSOR
~
A1SVCC6 D
I~i
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
A26FTP
ASSG6 BKSWA40 ~.:=oJ

;
BKSWNCA3S
........ I
V'
...
ECTSENSOR2 VSSOUTA29 To
MOONROOF
X. CONTROL UNIT,
-;?nYY A33ECT2 NAVIGATION UNIT
AUDIO UNIT,
POWER MIRROR
CONTROL UNIT
tJ
A/C PRESSURE
A16ACPD
SENSOR
U V
OPSWB7
1 • • a ____
I
I J
OIL PRESSURE --
SWITCH
~~RK PIN SWITCH ....

..
A2PPIN
PSPSWITCH
PSPSWA22
........ I
v--
~
-
TP SENSOR AlB
_....... _._----.----.------------- C12VCC3
[h '1
,J . C20TPSA VCC4A25
.. -------------------------------.
C21 TPSB
C3SSG3
APSAA17
SG4A35
Q
~
C4ETCSM+ VCCSA24 -
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
THROTTLE
BODY
C3ETCSM- APSBA1S
SG5A34 9
APP SENSOR AlB
(cont'd)
BACK 11-21
'-
0 S
~
•
I!
.~
.
.
:- ,-
B13ATPP
ATFTB27
-~~ J
ATFTEMPERATURESENSOR
.. B14ATPR
J. 4Ulf'
'~ -.l
~,
SHAB11
/::'.
4· .:.....
: 0
J
..r-
B12 ATPN
B21 ATPD
SHBB26
T
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
J. rmf'
J
I
J...
-
'"
S B1SATPS
1 J -l.
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEB -
SHCB20 J- 4Ulf' .1
I I J...
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEC -
SHDB24
J. rmf' I
1
SHIFT SOLENOID
J J...
-
1
VALVED
TRANSMISSION W
RANGE SWITCH
B28ATPFWD
-
B22ATPRVS
2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID LSAB44 J
A/T CLUTCH
PRESSURE
PRESSURE SWITCH
1 ~ CONTROL
J. ~ 1 BBOP2SW -b
SOLENOID
VALVE A
J- l LSBB3S (/TCLUTCH
PRESSURE
- 3RDCLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID 1 ~ CONTROL
SOLENOID
PRESSURE SWITCH
-b VALVEB
J ~l B90P3SW LSCB2S' J
A/T CLUTCH
......
-
l
4TH CLUTCH
1 ~
PRESSURE
CONTROL
SOLENOID
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
-b
-
VALVEC
1 ~l C380P4SW
J- L J
-
To
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
AZisLS
I
........
11-22 BACK
~
FUEL PUMP
CONTROL MODULE

VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL
UNIT
~~:R
SRSUNIT A36CANH FPCDA38
STEERING ANGLE S
YAW RATE-LATERA
ACCELERATION SE { ,,:::: ;::::--,-::::::::::::::::::::::: A37CANL FPCA43
TPMS CONTROL UN
:! .
i
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT
NAVIGATION UNIT
ACURALINK CONTR
rl..UMT" i 1-
10
B T
ro:
~.--------.---
FUEL PUMP
A42WEN
------------------.
I
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR r- A31 SCS
SRSUNIT
- ...!..
VSA MODULATOR- -
{
CONTROL UNIT STEERING WHEEL
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT UPSHIFT 1+) SWITCH
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
AUDIO UNIT
MICU
SUPPB16
SDNPB40 >---
I
T
---II
STEERING WHEEL
DOWNSHIFT 1-) SWITCH
---~I
1
I
.......
-
/'
*1: with NAVIGATION
*2: USA with NAVIGATION
(cont'd)
BACK 11-23
ELECTRIC A ../ W Q
VACUUM PUMP ~
8lf
ELECTRIC
-
..
I
P3C10
TURBOCHARGER
BOOST SENSOR
11=
VACUUM PUMP
RELAY 2 VACUUM
PUMP
7.SA
Lo- A13
r~ VPMPRLYD E 'H
A12 i'
VPMPRLY
TURBOCHARGE R
WASTEGATE CONTROL
ELECTRIC SOLENOID VALV E
VACUUM PUMP ),
RELAY 1 WGSC19
~
Lel
'W
TURBOCHARGE R
BOOST CONTRO L
SOLENOID,VALVE
J,
VFTC26 'VV
-..=
- TURBOCHARGER
BYPASS CONTR OL
SOLENOID VALVE
U V ABVC25 ),~
,
BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE SENSOR
I~ ~ B5PBMPA
/r------------------------------------------------------------------------------~,
PCM A (0) (44P) PCM B (£:I.) (44P) PCM C (0) (44P)

Ir II II II II II
1/ 2 1/ 41516 / 8 91. 1 1 / 3 415V 7 8 91 11 2 3 41516 7 8 91
10 V 12 13114115116 17181 191 IL 1112 13jJ4\1~6 1718 Ll UO 111213jJ4\1~6171811~
20 21 22 :::::::=-<
2324 251 : 120 2122 >< 2324 2~ L20121 22 ~ 231L12~
~ 126 27 V 9VI31 V 3334 351 ~26 27~ 1L130~31l32 3334 35~ ~ R6J?7jg§J29~30~31l321L lL':1L1
136 37 38 39140V 42 43 44L 1136 IlL' ~~40141 42 43 44~ 136 IlL' 38 39140141 42 43 44~
'--------J '--------J
TERMINAL LOCATIONS
11-24 BACK
Vacuum/Pressure Hose Routing
THROTTLE BODY
NON-RETURN
VALVE A
To
BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE
To REGULATOR
TURBOCHARGER
BYPASS CONTROL
VALVE BASE
----.. To EVAPORATIVE
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
CANISTER PURGE VALVE CANISTER PURGE NOZZLE
(cant'd)
BACK 11-25
Vacuum/Pressure Hose Routing (cont'd)

FRONT VIEW
TURBOCHARGER
BYPASS CONTROL VALVE
TURBOCHARGER
BYPASS CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
From
CANISTER .PURGE NOZZLE
REAR VIEW
TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
TURBOCHARGER
BOOST CONTROL ACTUATOR
TURBOCHARGER
BYPASS CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
TURBOCHARGER
TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE
CONTROL ACTUATOR
'\ ______ INTAKE AIR DUCT
~ ~ (TURBOCHARGER
INLET CONNECTING TUBE)
11-26 BACK
Vacuum/Pressure Distribution
CD AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1) @ TURBOCHARGER WASTEGATE CONTROL ACTUATOR
® SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR @ TURBOCHARGER WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(SECONDARY H02S) (SENSOR 2) @TURBOGHARGERBOOSTCONTROLACTUATOR
® MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR .. @ TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
(!) INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (lAT) SENSOR 2 @ TURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL VALVE
® ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR 1 @ TURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
® CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR @ CHARGER AIR COOLER
(j) KNOCK SENSOR @ .TURBOCHARGER,BOOST SENSOR
® CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR A ® POSIJIVE CRANKCASE VEN"FILATION (PCV) VALVE
® CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR B @ WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (WU-TWC)
@ THROTTLE BODY @ UNDER FLOOR THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
® INJECTOR @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVA!,) CANISTER PURGE VALVE
@ FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR ® NON-RETURN VALVE A
@ FUEL FILTER ® NON-RETURN VALVE B
@ FUEL PUMP @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER PURGE NOZZLE
@ FUEL TANK @. EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP) CANISTER
@ AIR CLEANER @ EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
@ MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR/ CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (lA"n SENSOR 1 ® FUEL TANK PRESSURE (FTP)SENSOR
@ TURBOCHARGER . ® FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
(cont'd)
BACK 11-27
" I'
Fuel"and Emissions Systems

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (0) (44P)
Terminal side offemale-t~rminals

NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about 12 V.
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Signal

number
2 LTGRN PPIN (PARK PIN SWITCH) Detects park pin switch With ignition switch ON (II) in P position:
signal battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II) in any position other
than P position: about 0 V
4 PUR FANL (RADIATOR FAN Drives radiator fan relay With radiator fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) With radiator fan stopped: battery voltage
5 GRY FANH (RADIATOR FAN DrivesAlC condenser fan With AlC condenser fan running: about 0 V
CONTROL) relay With AlC condenser fan stopped: batterv voltage
6 GRN MRLY (PGM-FI MAIN Drives PGM-FI main relay 1 With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
RELAY 1) Power source for DTC With ignition switch OFF: battery voltage
memory
8 ORN IGP (POWER SOURCE) Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
circuit
9 BLK SG6 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
10 ORN VSV (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister vent With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
EMISSION (EVAP) shut valve
CANISTER VENT SHUT
VALVE)
12 . - WHT VPMPRLY (VACUUM PUMP Drives electric vacuum With electric vacuum pump OFF: about 0 V
RELAY) pumprEilay With electric vacuum pump ON: about 14.0 V
13 ' PNK VPMPRLYD (VACUUM Detects electric vacuum At idle with electric vacuum pump OFF: about 2.3 V
, PUMP RELAY SIGNAL pump signal load With electric-vacuum pump ON: about 14.0 V
'.' LOAD) -
14 RED ACC (Ale COMPRESSOR Drives AlC compressor With compressor ON: about 0 V
CLUTCH RELAY)' clutch relav With compressor OFF: battery voltage
15 BRN IMOFPR (IMMOBILIZER Drives PGM-FI main relay 2 About 0 V for 2 seconds after turning ignition switch
FUEL PUMP RELAY) (FUEL PUMP) ON (II) then battery voltage
16 LTGRN ACPD (AIC PRESSURE Detects AlC pressure With AlC switch ON: about 1.7-4.8 V
SENSOR) sensorsign-al (depending on AlCpressure)
17 YEL APSA(ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor A signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
,-
PEDAL POSITION (APP) pressed: about 4.7 V
SENSOR A) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
,
released: about 1.0 V
18 PUR APSB(ACCELERATOR Detects APP sensor B signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
SENSOR B) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
11-28 BACK
Terminal side of.female terminals
Terminal Wire color' Terminal name Description Signal

number
19 RED VCC6 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltaQe .,
"
20 YEL ETCSRLY (ELECTRONIC Drives electronic throttle With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
THROTTLE CONTROL control system (ETCS)
SYSTEM (ETCS) CONTROL control relay ,~
RELAY)
21 RED SUBRLY (PGM"FI Drives PGM-FI subrelay With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SUBRELAY) ,
22 BRN PSPSW (POWER STEERING Detects pSP switch signal At idle~ith steeringwheel in straight ahead
PRESSURE SWITCH - position: about 0 V
SIGNAL) At idle with steering wheel at full lock:
battery voltage
23 ORN El,D (ELECTRICAL LOAD Detects ELD signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1-4.8 V
DETECTORjELD)) , (d~endinaon electrical load)
24 GRY VCC5 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference Wi~1.l ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltllge
25 BRN VCC4 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltaQe
26 LTGRN FTP (FUEL TANK Detects FTP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II) and fuel fill cap
PRESSURE (FTP) SENSOR) removed: about 2.5 V
27 PNK SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in P position, brake
SOLENOID) pedal pressed, and accelerator released:
aboutOV
29 BLU VSSOUT (VEHICLE SPEED Sends vehicle speed signal Depending on vehicle speed: pulses
SIGNAL OUTPUT)
31 ORN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With service check signal shorted using the HDS:
SIGNAL) aboutOV
With service check siQnal ooened: about 5.0 V
33 RED ECT2 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 2 signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1-4.8 V
TEMPERATURE (ECT) (depending on engine coolanttemperature)
SENSOR 2)
34 LTBLU SG5 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
35 BLU SG4 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
36 WHT CANH(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V (pulses)
COMMUNICATION SIGNAL signal
HIGH)
37 RED CANL(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V (pulses)
LOWi
(confd)
BACK 11-29
Fuel, and Emissions Systems
Terminal Wire color Terminal name Description Sigllal

number
38 BLU FPCD (FUEL PUMP Detects fuel pump control With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
CONTROL MODULE diagnosis At idle: about 10.0 V
DIAGNOSIS)
39 BRN BKSWNC (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal released: battery voltage
With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
pressed: about 0 V
40 LTGRN BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: about 0 V
, .POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake ~edal dJessed: battery voltage
42 VEL WEN (WRITE ENABLE' Detects write enable signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SIGNAL)
43 GRN FPC (FUEL PUMP Detects fuel pump control With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
CONTROL) signal With ianition switch OFF: about 0 V
44 PNK S-NET5V (SERIAL Sends serial With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
COMMUNICATION FOR communication signal With ignition switch OFF: about 5.0 V
IMMOBILIZER)
11-30 BACK
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (.6.) (44P)

number
1 BLK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuitfor PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
3 YEL/BLU PCS (EVAPORATIVE Drives EVAP canister purge With engine running, engine coolant below 140 'f
EMISSION (EVAP) valve (60 "C): battery voltage
CANISTER PURGE VALVE) With engine running, engine coolant above 140 'f
(60 "C): ~contro"ed
4 BLK/WHT S02SHTC (SECONDARY Drives secondary H02S With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR heater (sensor 2) With fully warmed up engine running:
(SECONDARY H02S) duty controlled
HEATER CONTROL
(SENSOR 2))
5 GRN/BLK PBMPA (BRAKE BOOSTER Detects brake booster With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
PRESSURE) pressure sensor si!Jnal released: about 2.0 V
7 YEL/RED OPSW (OIL PRESSURE Detects engine oil pressure With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SWITCH) signal With el}Rine runnimI: batt~ry voltajle
8 BLU/RED OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH Detects 2nd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID trclnsmission fluid pressure Without 2nd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch input With 2nd clutchJ~ressure: about 0 V
9 BLU/WHT OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH Detects 3rd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure Without 3rd clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch in~ut With3rd clutch..Q!"essure: about 0 V
11 BLU/yEL SHA (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in R, and 0 or S position (in
VALVE A) valve A 2nd and 3rd gears): battery voltage
With engine running in P, N position, and 0 or S
position (in 1st 4th and 5th gears): about 0 V
12 RED/BLK ATPN (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In N position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH NEUTRAL) switch N position signal In any position other than N: about 5.0 V
input
13 BLU/BLK ATPP (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In P position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH PARK) switch P position signal In any position other than P: battery voltage
i~ut
14 WHT ATPR (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R) switch R position signal In any position other than R: battery voltage
input
15 RED ATPS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In S position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH S) switch S position signal In any position other than S: battery voltage
input
(cont'd)
BACK 11-31

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (..6.) (44P)
Terminal ~ide of female terminals

number
16 WHT/BLU SUPP (UPSHIFT SWITCH) Detects steering wheel With steering wheel upshift switch (+) pressed:
.upshift switch (+) signal aboutOV
"'1 .. ' '.
With steeringwheel'upshift switch (+) not pressed:
battery voltage
17 RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V or about 5.0 V
(MAINS HAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor With engine idling in N position:
,..
'. SENSOR) sjgnal about 2.5 VThulses)
18 YEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltaae
20 GRN SHC (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in D or S position (in 1st, 3rd
VALVE C) valve C and 5th gears): battery voltage
With engine running in P, R, N positions, and D or S
position (in 2nd and 4th gears): about 0 V
21 YEL, ATPD (TRANSMISSION· Detects transmission range In D position: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D) switch D position signal In any position other than D: batt~ry voltage
il}Put ...
22 RED/WHT ATPRVS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In Rposition: aboulO V
RANGE SWITCH R) switch R position signal In any position other than R: battery voltage
input
23 RED/WHT ECT1 (ENGINE COOLANT Detects ECT sensor 1 signal With ignition sVliitchON (II): about 0.1 4.8 V
TEMPERATURE (ECT) (deperiding on engine ~oolant temperature)
SENSOR 1)
24 YEL SHD (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid valve With engine running in N or D position (during lock-
VALVED) D up condition): battery voltage
With engine runningin P, R or D position (no lock-
I UD condition): about OV
25 GRN/RED LSC (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure . With ignition switch ON (11): current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C
SOLENOID VALVE C) ,
26 GRN/WHT SHB (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid With engine running in P, R, N position, and D or S
VALVE B) valve B position(in 1st, 2nd and 5th gears): battery voltage
With engine running iri D or S position (in 3rd and
4th-.flears): about 0 V .
27 BLU/YEL ATFT(ATFTEMPERATURE Detects ATF temperature With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.2-4.0 V
SENSOR) signal·: (about 1.8 V at operating temperature)
(depending on ATF temperature)
28 BLU/YEL ATPFWD (TRANSMISSION. Detects transmission range In D or S positions: about 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D and S switch D and S positions In any other position: battery voltage
POSITION) signal
11-32 BACK
PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (.6.) (44P)

number
30 RED/GRN VG+ (MASS AIR FLOW Detects MAF sensor signal At idle: 1.1 1.6V
(MAF) SENSOR +SIDE) (between VG+ terminal and VG- terminal)
31 REDIYEL IAT 2 (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT 2 sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.0V
TEMPERATURE (lAT) 2
SENSOR)
32 BLK/RED VG- (MASS AIR FLOW Ground for MAF sensor
(MAF) SENSOR -SIDE) sianal
33 GRNIYEL SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor around Less than 1.0 V atall times
34 GRNIYEL VTS (ROCKER ARM OIL Drives rocker arm oil At idle: about 0 V
CONTROL SOLENOID) control solenoid I
35 BRN/WHT LSB (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): currentcontrolled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B)
36 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
40 BRN/WHT SDNP (DOWNSHIFT Detects steering wheel. With steering wheel downshift switch ( ) pressed:
SWITCH) downshift switch (-) signal aboutOV
With steering wheel downshift switch (-) not
pressed: about 5.0 V
41 WHT/GRN ALTC (ALTERNATOR Sends alternator control With fully wllrmed up engine running: 5.0 V
CONTROL) signal (d~endi~ on electrical load)
42 WHT/BLU ALTL(ALTERNATOR L Detects alternator L signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SIGNAL) With el}9jne runnirrn; batt~volt~e
43 WHT/RED ALTF (ALTERNATOR FR Detects alternator FR signal With engine running: about 2.6-3.4 V
SIGNAL) (d~endi~on electrical load)
44 RED LSA (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (11): current controlled
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve A
SOLENOID VALVE A)
(cont'd)
BACK 1,1-33

PCM Inputs and Outputs at Connector C (0) (44P)

number
1 VEI./GRN IG1ETCS(lGNITION Detects ignition 'signal' With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
SIGNAL ETCS)
2 BLK PGMETCS (POWER Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
GROUND ETCS) circuit
3 GRN ETCSM- (THROTTLE Ground for throttle actuator With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
ACTUATOR -SIDE)
4 BLU ETCSM+ (THROTTLE Drives .throttle actuator With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
ACTUATOR +SIDE)
5 BRN INJ1 (No. 1 INJECTOR) Drives No.1 iniector At idle: duty controlled '
6 RED INJ2 (No.2 INJECTOR) Drives No.2 iniector With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
7 BLU INJ3 (No. 3 INJECTOR) Drives No.3 iniector
8 VEL INJ4 (No. 4 INJECTOR) Drives No.4iniector
9 GRN AFSHTC (AIR FUEL RATIO Drives A/F sensor heater With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
(A/F) SENSOR HEATER (sensor 1) With fullywarmed up engine running:
CONTROL (SENSOR 1)) duty controlled
10 GRN P3 (TURBOCHARGER Detects turbocharger bobst At idle: about 0 V
.
BOOST SENSOR) sensor
11 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.0 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE· At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
(MAP) SENSOR)
12 BLU ' VCC3 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
'. volta~e
13 VEI./RED· VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
,/:, : 'voltage
14 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
15 YEI./GRN IGPLS1 (No. 1 IGNITION' Drives No.1 ignition coil With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
COIL PULSE) With engine running: pulses
16 BLU/RED IGPLS2 (No.2 IGNITION Drives No.2 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
17 WHT/BLU IGPLS3 (No. 3 IGNITION Drives No.3 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
18 BRN IGPLS4 (No. 4 IGNITION Drives No.4 ignition coil
COIL PULSE)
19 RED/WHT WGS (TURBOCHARGER Drives turbocharger With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
WASTEGATE CONTROL wastegate control solenoid With engine running: duty controlled
SOLENOID VALVE) valve
20 RED/BLK TPSA (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor A signal With throttle fully open: about 1.8 V
POSITION (TP) SENSOR A) With throttle fully closed: about 0.9 V
21 RED/BLU TPSB (THROTTLE Detects TP sensor B signal With throttle fully open: about 4.1 V
POSITION (TP) SENSOR B) With throttle fullv closed: about 1.7 V
11-34 BACK
Terminal side of femaJe terminals

number
22 BLU/BLK VTPSW (ROCKER ARM OIL Detects rocker arm oil With engine at low speed: about 0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) pressure switch signal With el1Qine at high ~~eed: batt~voltaae
23 BLU/WHT VTC (VTC OIL CONTROL Drives VTC oil control With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
SOLENOID VALVE) solenoid valve
25 BLU/YEL ABV(TURBOCHARGER Drives turbocharger bypass With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
BYPASS CONTROL control solenoid valve With engine running: duty controlled
SOLENOID VALVE)
26 YEL/RED VFT(TURBOCHARGER Drives turbocharger boost With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
BOOST CONTROL control solenoid valve . With engine running: duty controlled
SOLENOID)
27 WHT/RED SH02S (SECONDARY Detects secondary H02S With throttle fully opened at idle and fully warmed
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (sensor 2) signal i."
. - up engine: about 0.6 V
(SECONDARY H02S) With throttle quickly closed: below 0.4 V
(SENSOR 2)
28 RED/YEL IAT1 (INTAKE AIR Detects IAT sensor 1 signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.1 4.0 V
TEMPERATURE (lAT)
SENSOR 1)
29 RED AFS+ (AIR FUEL RATIO Detects NF sensor
(NF) SENSOR (SENSOR 1) (sensor 1) signal
+SIDE)
30 RED/YEL AFS (AIR FUEL RATIO Detects NF sensor
(NF) SENSOR (SENSOR 1) (sensor 1) signal
-SIDE)
31 GRN CMPB (CAMSHAFT Detects CMP sensor B With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CMP) SENSOR signal
B)
32 BLU CKP (CRANKSHAFT Detects CKP sensor signal With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CKP) SENSOR)
36 BLK/YEL IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal Withignition switch ON (II): battery voltaae
38 BLU/YEL OP4SW (4TH CLUTCH Detects 4th clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure without 4th clutch pressure: about 5.0 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch inout With 4th clutch..m-essure: about 0 V
(cont'd)
BACK 11-35

NOTE: Standard battery voltage is about 12 v.

number
39 GRN SG3 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
40 BRNNEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
41 BLU/WHT CMPA (CAMSHAFT Detects CMP sensor A With engine running: pulses
POSITION (CMP) SENSOR signal' '
A) ,
42 RED/BLU KS (KNOCK SENSOR) Detects knock sensor signal With engine knocking: pulses
43 BLK/BLU NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II): pulses
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor With vehicle moving: about 5.0 V (pulses)
SENSOR) signals
44 BRNNEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
11-36 BACK
PGM-FI System Camshaft Position (CMP)·Sensor B
CMP sensor B detects the position of the No.1 cylinder
The programmed fuel injection (PGM-FI) system is a as a reference for sequential fuel injection to each
sequential multiportfuel injection system. cylinder.
Air Conditioning (A/C) Compressor Clutch Relay

When the PCM receives a demand for cooling from the
AlC system, it delays the compressor from being
energized, and enriches the mixture to assure smooth
transition to the AlC mode.
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor

The AlF sensor operates over a wide air/fuel range. The
AlF sensor is installed upstream of the warm up three
way catalytic converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals
to the PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection
accordingly.
ZIRCONIA SENSOR Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor

ELEMENT TERMINALS The CKP sensor detects crankshaft speed and is used by
the PCM to determine ignition timing and timing for
fuel injection of each cylinder as well as detecting
engine misfire.
MAGNET
HEATER
TERMINALS
Barometric Pressure (BARO) Sensor

The BARO sensor is inside the PCM. It converts
atmospheric pressure into a voltage signal that
modifies the basic duration of the fuel injection
discharge. O-RING
(cont'd)
BACK 11-37
Fuefand Emissions Systems
Engine Coolant Temperature (ECT) Sensors 1 and 2 Ignition Timing Control

ECT sensors 1 and 2 are temperature dependent The PCM contains the memory for basic ignition timing
resistor (thermistor). The'resistance decreases as the at various engine speeds and manifold absolute
engine coolant temperature increases. pressure. It also adjusts the timing according to engine
ECT sensors 1 is installed to the cylinder head, and ECT coolant temperature and intake air temperature.
sensor 2 is installed to the radiator.
Injector Timing and Duration
ECTsensor 1 The PCM contains the memory for basic discharge
duration at various engine speeds and manifold
pressures. The basic discharge duration, after being
read out from the memory, is further modified by
signals sent from various sensors to obtain the final
discharge duration.
By monitoring long term fuel trim, the PCM detects long
term malfunctions in the fuel system and sets a
diagnostic trouble code (DTC).
Knock Sensor
The knock control system adjusts the ignition timing to
O-RING minimize knock.
ECT sensor 2
PIEZO
CERAMIC
ELEMENT
Manifold Absolute Pressure (MAP) Sensor

O-RING The MAP sensor converts manifold absolute pressure
into electrical signals to the PCM.
11-38 BACK
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIl) Indication (In relation Mass Air Flow (MAF) Sensor/Intake Air Temperature
to Readiness Codes) (lAT) Sensor 1
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part The mass air flow (MAE) sensor/intake air temperature
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. (lAT) sensor contains a hot wire and a thermistor. It is
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone located in the intake air passage. The resistance of the
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has hot wire and thermistor change due to intake air flow
been reset, these codes are reset. In some states, part and air temperature. The control circuit in the MAF
of the emissions testing is to make sure these codes are sensor controls the current to keep the hot wire at a set
set to complete. If all of them are not set to complete, temperature. The current is converted to voltage in the
the vehicle may fail the test, or the test cannot be control circuit, then output to the PCM.
finished.
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete,

turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15-20 seconds. If it
then goes off, the readiness codes are complete. If it
flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are not
HOT WIRE
complete. To set each code, drive the vehicle or run the
engine as described in the procedures (see page 11-76). Y IATSENSOR 1
(THERMISTOR)
Intake Air Temperature (lAT) Sensor 2

The JAT sensor 2 is a temperature dependent resistor
(thermistor). The resistance of the thermistor decreases
as the intake air temperature increases.
O-RING
(cont'd)
BACK 11-39
Secondary Heated Oxygen Sensor (Secondary H02S) Electronic Throttle Control System
The secondary H02S detects the oxygen content in the
exhaust gas downstream of the warm up three way The throttle is electronically controlled by the electronic
catalytic.converter (WU-TWC), and sends signals to the throttle control system. Refer to the system diagram to
PCM which varies the duration of fuel injection see the functional layout of the system.
accordingly. To stabilize its output, the sensor has an
internal heater. The PCM compares the H02S output Idle control: When the engine is idling, the PCM
with the A/F sensor output to determine catalyst controls the throttle actuator to maintain the proper idle
efficiency. The secondary H02S is located on the speed according to engine loads.
WU-TWC.
Acceleration control: When the accelerator pedal is
SENSOR pressed, the PCM opens the throttle valve depending
TERMINALS on the accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor signal.
Cruise control: The PCM controls the throttle actuator to

maintain set speed when the cruise control is operating.
The throttle actuator takes the place of the cruise
control actuator.
Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) Sensor

As the accelerator pedal position changes, the sensor
varies the signal voltage to the PCM.
HEATER
TERMINALS
11-40 BACK
Throttle Body Fuel Supply System
The throttle body is a single-barrel side draft type. The
lower portion of the throttle valve is heated by engine Fuel Cutoff Control
coolant from the cylinder head to prevent icing of the During deceleration with the throttle valve closed,
throttle plate. current to the injectors is cut off to improve fuel
economy at engine speeds over 850 rpm. Fuel cutoff
THROTTLE VALVE control also occurs when the engine speed exceeds
6,900 rpm, regardless of the position of the throttle
valve, to protect the engine from over-revving. When
the vehicle is stopped, the peM cuts the fuel at engine
speeds over 5,000 rpm. Engine speed of fuel cut is
lower on a cold engine.
Fuel Pump Control

When the ignition is turned on, the peM grounds
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) which feeds current
to the fuel pump (fuel pump control module) for
2 seconds to pressurize the fuel system. With the
engine running, the PCM grounds PGM-FI main relay 2
(FUEL PUMP) and feeds current to the fuel pump (fuel
THROTTLE POSITION pump control module). When the engine is not running
(TP) SENSOR and
THROTTLE ACTUATOR and the ignition is on, the PCM cuts ground to PGM-FI
main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) which cuts current to the fuel
Idle Control System pump (fuel pump control module).
When the engine is cold, the Ale compressor is on, the PGM-FI Main Relay 1 and 2
transmission is in gear, the brake pedal is pressed, the PGM-FI main relay 1 is energized whenever the ignition
power steering load is high, or the alternator is switch is ON (II) to supply battery voltage to the PCM,
charging, the peM controls current to the throttle power to the injectors, and power for PGM-FI main
actuator to maintain the correct idle speed. relay 2 (FUEL PUMP). PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL
PUMP) is energized to supply power to the fuel pump
Brake Pedal Position Switch (fuel pump control module) for 2 seconds when the
The brake pedal position switch signals the peM when ignition switch is turned ON (11), and when the engine is
the brake pedal is pressed. cranking or running.
Power Steering Pressure (PSP) Switch Transfer Fuel Pump

The PSP switch signals the peM when the power The fuel in the right side of the fuel tank is drawn over
steering load is high. to the left side by the transfer fuel pump.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-41
VTEC/VTC
o The i-VTEC has a variable valve timing control (VTC) mechanism on the intake camshaft in addition to the usual
VTEC.
This mechanism improves fuel efficiency and reduces exhaust emissions at all levels of engine speed, vehicle speed,
and engine load.
o The VTEC mechanism changes the valve lift and timing by using more than one cam profile.
o The VTC changes the phase of the intake camshaft via oil pressure. It changes the intake valve timing continuously.
HIG
r ~W~ED 8><___ H_I_G_H_S_P_EE_D_CA_M
___ --,>
ENGINE
LOAD
1 CD
LOW~====~~ ________________________________ ~ ___
LOW+--- ENGINE SPEED ~HIGH
Driving Condition VTCControl Description

CD Light-load Base Position For stable combustion the cam angle is retarded, and
reduces the entry of exhaust gas into the cylinder.
® Medium/high-load .Advance Control Cam phase angle is controlled to optimize valve
timing, improving fuel efficiency and reducing
emissions.
® High speed Advance-Base Position To reduce the pumping loss, the intake valve is
closed quickly. This helps the entry of fuel air mixture
by the charging effect, and maximizes engine power.
11-42 BACK
VTCSystem
• The VTC system makes continuous intake valve timing changes based on operating conditions.
• Intake valve timing is optimized to allow the engine to produce maximum power.
• Cam angle is advanced to obtain EGR effect and reduce pumping loss. The intake valve is closed quickly to reduce
the entry of the air/fuel mixture into the intake port and improve the charging effect.
• The system reduces the cam advance at idle, stabilizes combustion, and reduces engine speed.
• If a malfunction occurs, the VTC system control is disabled and the valve timing is fixed at the fully retarded position.
TDC
MAXIMUM VTC ADVANCE 35 0 MAXIMUM VTC ADVANCE 35 0
EX
...t---t.~lI SHORT OVERLAP

l.....
I
I I
1"'I:"'t---1.~1 LONG OVERLAP
VTECSystem
• The VTEC system changes the one side of the intake side cam profile to correspond to the engine speed. It
maximizes torque at low engine speed and output at high engine speed.
• The low lift cam is used by one side of the intake valves at a low engine speed. At high engine speed, both intake
valves uses the high lift cam.
LOW SPEED VALVE TIMING HIGH SPEED VALVE TIMING
(cont'd)
BACK 11-43
System Description (co nt' d)
VTEC/VTC
System Diagram
INTAKE
CAMSHAFT
_______
~--------- BlK/VEl -_I--VEL - -........ From No.3
IG1 ACG
---.... ,~I BRN/VEl --, I (15 Al FUSE
7 -L L . - BLU/WHT
CMP SENSOR A - BlU/WHT VARIOUS
SENSORS
PCM
VANE GRN/VEL
BlU/BlK
BlK
VTCA~
VA~ / 71 1
/
HOUSING
~~ .?Il CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE 1..:::==11'-~===--W---- BlK ~
BRN/VEl - - - , ~
BlK
~
/ROCKER
ARM Oil ~
PRESSURE
SWITCH
ROCKER ARM
Oil CONTROL
SOLENOID
SPOOL
VALVE
.1
From
VTC STRAINER
Oil PUMP
Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor A

CMP sensor A detects camshaft angle position for the VTC system.
11-44 BACK
Catalytic Converter System Positive Crankcase Ventilation (PCV) System
Warm Up Three Way Catalytic Converter (WU·TWC) The PCV valve prevents blow-by gasses from escaping
and Three Way Catalytic Converter (TWC) into the atmosphere by venting them into the intake
The WU-TWCrrwC converts hydrocarbons (HC), carbon manifold. The PCV valve opens at idle, low load, and
monoxide (CO), and oxides of nitrogen (NOx) in the decelerating with the throttle valve fully closed.
exhaust gas to carbon dioxide (C0 2 ), nitrogen (N 2 ), and
water vapor.
WU-TWC (ATTACHED TO THE TURBOCHARGER)
WARMUP
THREE WAY
CATALYST
_ : BLOW-BY VAPOR
<=: FRESH AIR .
TWC (UNDER THE FLOOR)
(cont'd)
BACK 11-45
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Fuel Tank Pressure (FTP) Sensor

System The FTP sensor converts fuel tank absolute pressure
into an electrical input to the PCM during the EVAP leak
Refer to the system diagram to see the functional layout check.
ofthe system.
SENSOR UNIT
EVAP Canister
The EVAP canister temporarily stores fuel vapor from
the fuel tank until it can be purged back into the engine
and burned (refer to the system diagram to see the·
functional layout of the system).
EVAP Canister Purge Valve

When the engine coolant temperature is below 140 "F
(60 OCI, the PCM turns off the EVAP canister purge valve
which cuts vacuum to the EVAP canister.
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve

The EVAP canister vent shut valve is on the EVAP
canister.
The EVAP canister vent shut valve controls the venting
ofthe EVAP canister.
O-RING
11-46 BACK
Fuel Cap Warning Message Information display model
The PCM will detect a loose or missing fuel fill cap as an

evaporative system leak and alerts the driver by
showing a warning message in the gauge display.
First drive cycle Shows "CHECK FUEL CAP"

The first time a leak is detected a "TIGHTEN FUEL CAP" in the gauge display.
(multi-information display model) ("CHECK FUEL CAP"
(information display model)) message in the gauge
display (A). To scroll to another message, press the
select/reset button. The "TIGHTEN FUEL CAP","CHECK
FUEL CAP" message will appear each time you restart
the engine until the system turns the message off. Tu.rn
the engine off then replace or tighten the fuel fill cap
until it clicks at least once. The message should go off
after several days of normal driving after the fuel fill
cap has been tightened or replaced.
Multi-information display model
To make the message go off (With the HOS)

Procedure
Shows ''TIGHTEN FUEL CAP" 1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
in the gauge display.
2. Clear the Temporary OTC with the HOS.
3. Verify there is no leak by doing the EVAP

FUNCTION TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HOS.
To make the message go off (Without the

HOS)
Procedure
1. Tighten the fuel fill cap until it clicks.
2. The message should go off after severval days of

normal driving.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-47
Electronic Throttle Control System Diagram
The electronic throttle control system consists ofthe throttle actuator, throttle position (TP) sensor AlB, accelerator
pedal position (APP) sensor AlB, the electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control relay, and the PCM.
APP From
SENSOR A I - Q . - - BRN - - - ¢ <:>------ YEL - - - -...... 4l1li.. ETCS CONTROL
~ I - Q . - - YEL - - - ¢
RELAY
1 - - < > - - BLU - - - 0
APP Jl-i
~SENSORS
VARIOUS
SENSORB I - Q . - - GRY - - - ¢
~ ~--- PUR - - - ¢
I--¢-- LT BLU
PCM
lBLK
0 - - - - - - BLU - - - - - - < ; >
0 - - - - - - GRN - - - - - - < ; >
THROTTLE
ACTUATOR
_______ .... _______ . GRN ===..,.,.,.,.,.,.,.,j~...¢
<:>---- RED/BLK ----II---f----¢ TP

SENSOR A
0 - - - - - RED/BLU ----II---f----¢
------------------ BLU ===""".,.,.,.,.,j~...¢

TP
SENSORB
11-48 BACK
Evaporative Emissions (EVAP) Control System Diagram
The EVAP control system minimizes the fuel vapor escaping to the atmosphere. Vapor from the fuel tank is
temporarily stored in the EVAP canister until it can be purged from the canister into the engine and burned. The purge
amount and timing is duty controlled by the PCM by operating the EVAP canister purge valve. This system is operated
whenever the engine coolant temperature is above 140 "F (60 "C). For this turbo engine model, there are two different
purge flow passages, because the intake manifold pressure can be positive (boost pressure) or negative (vacuum
pressure).
Purge to the throttle body

When the engine is under a low load condition, the pressure inside the intake manifold is negative (vacuum pressure).
The vacuum pressure of the intake manifold opens non-return valve A and closes non-return valve B. Under this
condition, the purge air flows from the EVAP canister through the EVAP canister purge valve and non-return valve A,
into the throttle body.
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
SENSOR
EVAP CANISTER
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE NOZZLE
NON-RETURN
r;:::.==================~ VALVE B (CLOSE)
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
¢ INTAKE AIR (ATMOSPHERE PRESSURE)
¢ INTAKE AIR (VACUUM PRESSURE)
+ PURGE AIR
(cont'd)
BACK 11-49
Purge to the intake air duct (turbocharger inlet pipe)

When the engine load increases, the pressure after the turbocharger changes to positive pressure due to turbocharger
operation. The boost pressure at the throttle body closes non-return valve A, and due to the boost pressure at the
charge air cooler, some part of the compressed air flows through the passage from the air bypass valve base to the
intake air duct (turbocharger inlet pipe). When the speed of that compressed air increases at the EVAP canister purge
nozzle, it draws the purge air from the EVAP canister side. The non-return valve 8 opens by this vacuum pressure, and
the purge air flows from the EVAP canister through the EVAP canister purge valve and non-return valve 8, into the
intake air duct (turbocharger inlet pipe).
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
FUEL TANK
FTPSENSOR
ATMOSPHERE
+-====:=::::::;~,
EVAP CANISTER
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE NOZZLE NON-RETURN
~::::::.:::::::3II..=:::::=-.==~VALVE B (OPEN)
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
¢ INTAKE AIR (VACUUM PRESSURE)
+ INTAKE AIR (BOOST PRESSURE)

INTAKE AIR DUCT
(TURBOCHARGER
INLET PIPE) + PURGE AIR
11-50 BACK
Purge to the both intake air duct (turbocharger inlet pipe) and the throttle body
When the engine is under a mid load condition, the pressure after the turbocharger is positive due to the turbocharger
operation, but the pressure at the intake manifold is negative because the throttle valve is nearly closed. Under this
condition, both non-return valves A and B open and the purge air flows from the EVAP canister through the EVAP
canister purge valve and non-return valves A and B, into the throttle body and the intake air duct (turbocharger inlet
pipe).
EVAP CANISTER
VENT SHUT VALVE
FUEL TANK
FTPSENSOR
ATMOSPHER;;:E_===~~'[
EVAP CANISTER
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE NOZZLE NON-RETURN
~:=.:=:3II~===-,==~VALVE B (OPEN)
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
¢INTAKE AIR (ATMOSPHERE PRESSURE)

¢INTAKE AIR (VACUUM PRESSURE)
+ PURGE AIR
(cont'd)
BACK 11-51
Turbocharger Control System Turbocharger Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve

This solenoid valve controls pressure to the
Refer to the system diagram to see the functional layout turbocharger wastegate control actuator. The solenoid
of the system. itself is controlled by the PCM. The following
information describes the ports on the valve and where
Turbocharger Boost Sensor the pressure flows when the solenoid switches the
This sensor converts charge air cooler pressure into an valve on and off.
electrical signal that is received by the PCM.
• Port A -To the intake air duct
(turbocharger inlet connecting tube)
• Port B -To the turbocharger wastegate control actuator
• Port C -To the intake air duct
(turbocharger outlet pipe)
TERMINAL PORTB
PORTA
SOLENOID PORT
CONTROL A B C
ON
(DUTY MAX) 0 D
OFF
(DUTY MIN} 0 0
11-52 BACK
Turbocharger Bypass Control Solenoid Valve Turbocharger Boost Control Solenoid Valve
This solenoid valve controls pressure to the This solenoid valve controls pressure to the
turbocharger bypass control valve. The solenoid itself is tubocharger boost control valve. The solenoid itself is
controlled by the PCM. The following information controlled by the PCM. The following information
describes the ports on the valve and where the pressure describes the ports on the valve and where the pressure
flows when the solenoid switches the valve on and off. flows when the solenoid switches the valve on and off.
• Port A-To the charge air cooler • Port A -To the intake air duct
• Port B-To the turbocharger bypass control valve (turbocharger inlet connecting tube)
• Port C-To the intake manifold • Port B-To the turbocharger boost control actuator
• Port C -To the intake air duct
(turbocharger outlet pipe)
MOVING CORE
SOLENOID PORT TERMINAL PORTA

CONTROL A B C
SOLENOID PORT
ON 0 0 CONTROL A B C
ON
OFF 0 0 (DUTY MAX) 0 0
OFF
(DUTY MIN) 0
(cont'd)
BACK 11-53
Turbocharger Control System Diagram

The turbocharger control system controls the boost pressure and the response of the turbocharger. The PCM controls
the turbocharger wastegate control solenoid valve (duty controlled), the turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve
(on/off controlled), and the turbocharger boost control valve (duty controlled). The boost pressure is monitored by the
turbocharger boost sensor.
INTAKE AIR DUCT

(TURBOCHARGER AIR BYPASS
INLET PIPE) OUTLET PIPE
~d=:::;o==:::"'<:v.' ~URBOCHARGER TURBOCHARGER
IISNT=A=K=EA'3IIR DUCT
,l....\
~
BOOST SENSOR
""-..~
I /
~
!fi~f:g~===========~
(TURBOCHARGER INLET """
CONNECTING TUBE) !.i-.1i~F==~=======;C~
TURBOCHARGER ~ I ~
WASTEGATE CONTROL ------... TURBOCHARGER
SOLENOID VALVE ~ BYPASS CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
dI n ~t
I~~
TURBOCHARGER
TURBOCHARGER \7
BOOST CONTROL U:D ~ ;n
lu
SOLENOID VALVE
TURBOCHARGER~
BOOST CONTROL
ACTUATOR
------------~....~.~;--\
TURBOCHARGER
BOOST CONTROL
VALVE
TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE
CONTROL
ACTUATOR
TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE CONTROL
VALVE ¢ INTAKE AIR (ATMOSPHERE PRESSURE)
INTAKE AIR (BOOST PRESSURE)
+ EXHAUST GAS
11-54 BACK
Turbocharger Wastegate Control System
This system controls the wastegate control solenoid to prevent the turbo from exceeding maximum boost pressure.
This system is duty controlled by the PCM. The descriptions A and 8 are the two conditions of duty. Condition A
(maximum duty) and condition 8 (minimum duty). At other times, the turbocharger wastegate control solenoid
controls both the passages from the intake air duct (turbocharger inlet connecting tube), and the intake air duct
(turbocharger outlet pipe) to the turbocharger wastegate control actuator.
Condition A (maximum duty):

When the turbocharger boost sensor signal is lower than the upper limit, the PCM turns on (maximum duty) the
turbocharger wastegate control solenoid valve, and opens the passage between the intake air duct (turbocharger inlet
connecting tube) and the turbocharger wastegate control actuator and closes the passage from the intake air duct
(turbocharger outlet pipe) and the turbocharger wastegate control actuator. The pressure at the turbocharger
wastegate control actuator is freed to the intake air duct (turbocharger inlet connecting tube), and the spring in the
turbocharger wastegate control actuator closes the turbocharger wastegate control valve. In this condition, all of the
exhaust gas flows to the turbine. This increases the rpm of the turbine, increasing boost pressure.
TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR
r-L------'t-\\-~ ~TI
TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE
CONTROL
ACTUATOR

TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE CONTROL + INTAKE AIR (BOOST PRESSURE)
+
VALVE
EXHAUST GAS
(cont'd)
BACK 11-55
Condition B (minimum duty):

When the turbocharger boost sensor signal reaches the upper limit, the PCM turns off (minimum duty) the
turbocharger wastegate control solenoid valve, and opens the passage between the intake air duct (turbocharger
outlet pipe) and the turbocharger wastegate control actuator and closesthe passage from the intake air duct
(turbocharger inlet connecting tube) and the turbocharger wastegate control actuator. The boost pressure from the
intake air duct (turbocharger outlet pipe) pushes the turbocharger wastegate control actuator and opens the
turbocharger wastegate control valve. In this condition, only a portion of the exhaust gas flows through the bypass
passage bypassing the turbocharger wastegate control valve, and the amount of exhaust gas to the turbocharger
decreases. This decreases the rpm of the turbine decreasing boost pressure.
TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE
CONTROL
ACTUATOR
TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE CONTROL
VALVE
. . EXHAUST GAS
11-56 BACK
Turbocharger Bypass Control System
This system improves the boost response of acceleration immediately after deceleration. This system also protects
the turbocharger from the negative effects of compressor surge during high boost. The descriptions A and B are the
two conditions of the turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve on and off. Condition A (on) and conditon B (off).
Condition A (Solenoid Valve ON):

When the vehicle is in cruise or accelerating, the PCM turns on the turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve, and
opens the passage between the charge air cooler and the turbocharger bypass control valve and closes the passage
between the intake manifold and the turbocharger bypass control valve. The boost pressure from the charge air cooler
pushes the turbocharger bypass control valve, and closes the passage between the charge air cooler and the intake air
duct (turbocharger inlet pipe). By doing this, all compressed air is routed to the intake manifold.
TURBOCHARGER
~---~
------....~ta==~:===~
~
:~~==IJ-~
+ EXHAUST GAS
(cont'd)
BACK 11-57
Condition B (Solenoid Valve OFF):

Durnig the deceleration with the throttle valve closed, the PCM turns off the turbocharger bypass control solenoid
valve and opens the passage between the intake manifold and the turbocharger bypass control valve and closes the
passage between the charge air cooler and the turbocharger bypass control valve. The vacuum pressure from the
intake manifold pulls the turbocharger bypass control valve and opens the passage between the charge air cooler and
the intake air duct (turbocharger inlet pipe). By doing this, the compressed air flows from the charge air cooler to the
intake air duct (turbocharger inlet pipe) to keep the turbine spinning. This improves the acceleration response of the
turbocharger after deceleration.
AIR BYPASS TURBOCHARGER

OUTLET PIPE BYPASS CONTROL VALVE
~ INTAKE AIR (VACUUM PRESSURE)

+ EXHAUST GAS
11-58 BACK
Turbocharger Boost Control System
This system controls the exhaust gas passage to the turbine by changing the variable flap angle. The variable flap is
moved by the turbocharger boost control actuator, and it is duty controlled by the PCM depending on the driving
condition.
VARIABLE FLAP VARIABLE FLAP VARIABLE FLAP

FULLV CLOSED HALF OPEN FULLVOPEN
~Rre_s_p_on_s_e __________________________ ~ _____________________________ H_i9_h~~

When the variable flap is fully closed, all exhaust gas flows to the inner scroll of the turbocharger. Under this condition,
the exhaust gas speed is accelerated, and the turbocharger response is improved. When the variable flap is fully
opened, the exhaust gas flows through both the outer and the inner scroll of the turbocharger. Under this condition,
the exhaust gas is efficiently used to improve the maximum boost. Because of this system, the turbocharger functions
both as a quick responding small size turbocharger, and high capacity turbocharger.
The description A and B are the two conditions of duty. Condition A (maximum duty) and condition B (minimum duty).
At other times, the turbocharger boost controls both the passages from the intake air duct (turbocharger inlet
connecting tube), and the intake air duct (turbocharger outlet pipe) to the turbocharger boost control actuator.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-59
Condition A (maximum duty):

Under a low engine speed/low load condition (with only a small amount of exhaust gas), the PCM turns on (maximum
duty) the turbocharger boost control solenoid valve and opens the passage between the intake air duct (turbocharger
inlet conneeting tube) and the turbocharger boost control actuator and closes the passage between the intake air duct
(turbocharger outlet pipe) and the turbocharger boost control actuator. The pressure at the turbocharger boost control·
actuator is freed to the intake air duct (turbocharger inlet connecting tube), and the spring inside the turbocharger
boost control actuator closes the variable flap. With the variable flap closed, the exhaust gas flows at high speed
through the inner scroll of the turbocharger improving the turbo response.
CHARGE AIR COOLER
TURBOCHARGER
BOOST CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
TURBOCHARGER
BOOST CONTROL
ACTUATOR
+ EXHAUST GAS
11-60 BACK
Condition B (minimum duty):
Under a mid or high load conditions (with large amount of exhaust gas), the PCM turns off (minimum duty) the
turbocharger boost control solenoid valve and opens the passage between the intake air duct (turbocharger outlet
pipe) and the turbocharger boost control actuator and closes the passage between the intake air duct (turbocharger
inlet connecting tube) and the turbocharger boost control actuator. The boost pressure from intake air duct
(turbocharger outlet pipe) pushes the turbocharger boost control actuator which opens the variable flap. With the
variable flap opened, the exhaust gas flows through both the innerandthe outer scroll for efficient turbo operation at
mid and high engine speed.
CHARGE AIR
COOLER TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR
TURBOCHARGER
BOOST CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
TURBOCHARGER
BOOST CONTROL
VALVE'

VARIABLE FLAP
HALF OPEN
VARIABLE FLAP
FULLY OPEN + EXHAUST GAS
/'
(cont'd)
BACK 11-61
PCM Circuit Diagram
PCM
I
~22
,,,
24P JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
"
23 18 19 20 211
I
VEUBlK
1
,VEl/BlK
C5 21
t-:1::":'NJ~l---BRN
*~M
No.1 INJECTOR
1
VEl/BlK
C6 21
t-:1~NJ~2---RED
ORN No.2 INJECTOR
~ VEl/BlK
1
~C;.;.7_ _ _ BLU 21
INJ3
No.3 INJECTOR
1
VEl/BlK
C8 2J
t-:1::":'NJ~4---VEl
No.4 INJECTOR
5V -
VEl/BlK --2.
C31 1
I-C";'M--P--B--'GRN
BRN/VEl -.!.
- CMPSE NSORB
-
VEl/BlK ..........l.
C32 2
I-C~KP~--BlU
BRN/VEl --2.
- CKPSE NSOR
~C;;;2;;;.2_ _ _ BLU 1
/BlK BLU/BlK
VTPSW 2
BRN/VEl
ROCKER ARM
Oil PRESSURE
SWITCH
11-62 BACK
12V
::::::~~~~~~~~----------------------------------r----------:~:/VEL ~~
834
;;;,
ROCKER ARM
OIL CONTROL
-=- SOLENOID
B17 RED_tF-=
_ - _ ~=:G101~g§ VEL/RED
2
NM
GRN/WHT 3
INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
C13
VCC1
VEL/RED
VEL/RED~~
GRN/RED
2
GRN/WHT 3
cn
GRN/RED MAP SENSOR
MAP
C14
RN/WHT
SG1
C43
NC
BLK/BLU
VEL/BLU
g§
~
OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
C42
KS......... -RED/BLU ===========r-======= ____~C102 --RED/BLU 4~
uuuu---uu------u.---.~~.!~~.~----u.---u---.u-uu---~~uU,...1
Jr KNOCK SENSOR
o
C23
VTC BLU/WHT --------------------------------------------------- BLU/WHT
IBLK
1n-l
1 ~
..b.. VT
SC OIL CONTROL
OLENOID VALVE
G101
(cont'd)
BACK 11-63
PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
B31
GRN/VEl ...Lf~
RED/VEL ---------------------f-~-REO/VEl .l...l~
IAT2
IAT SENSOR 2
12P JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
GRN/VEl
B33
SG2
GRN/VEl ----------1
GRN./VEl4~
REO/WHT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - R E O / W H T ~~
Ecn
ECTSENSOR 1
B36
BlK
PG1
B1
BlK
PG2
C2
PGMETCSBlK--------------------------~
....
G101
C40
BRN/VEl
lG1
BRN/VEl
BlK BlK
BRN/VEl
\l G101
C41
CMPA
BlU/WHT
BRN/VEl
~
BlK/VEl
BlU/WHT
BRN/VEl t§ CMPSENSORA
C104~
12
BRN
~ J
11-64 BACK
F
C102
B30 3
RED/GRN - - - - - - - - - - - - t - - . . . . ; ; . 6 - i RED/GRN
VG+ MAF
832 BlK/RED SENSOR
BlK/RED
VG- BlK/VEl
GRN/VEl I---"~...... IAT

RED/VEL
1-_ _--1 SENSOR 1
BlK/VEl
C28
IAT1
~C~1~0~---------------~-------------VE~:~U~~
P3 L-------------GRN/VE~~
TURBOCHARGER
BOOST SENSOR
r------:~~:e~ =±[§
C19
WGS
TURBOCHARGER
WASTEGATE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
r;C2=6_____________________________ M
VEL/RED
VFT ....._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ BlK/VEl
TURBOCHARGER
BOOST CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
~C2~5~----------------_+-----------
ABV BlU/VEl
~-r----------- BlK/VEl
TURBOCHARGER
BVPASS CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
I
f Iff C104
181 21 I
BlK/VEl BlK/VEl VEL VEL
~ ~ ~ ~
(cant'd)
BACK 11-65
Fuelaiid Emissions Systems
PCM Circuit Diagram (cont'dJ
TI LL""m' Bf3
L-____________ :~~~~:~ :
BLK/VEL
BLK/YEL 5
L-----------__-4_BLK/VEL 2
12PJUNCTION
CONNECTOR
B3 r-----+--------WHT/BLK ----1.f~
VEL/BLU - - - - - - - - . j - - - - - - I - - - - - - - - - - V E L / B L U --1{~
PCS
EVAP CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
C102
AS
~"'/~'
11
BLK/VEL
B42 10 3
WHT/BLU - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WHT/BlU WHT/BlU
ALTL
WHT/RED
WHT/GRN
8
9
WHT/RED
WHT/GRN
4
2 @
B43
WHT/RED - - -...
ALTF
24P JUNCTION ALTERNATOR
CONNECTOR
B41
ALTC
WHT/GRN - - - -.......
I
t t t I
13 15 16 17 14
~~'O
C15
BLK/WHT ...l..
• -- SPARK
IGPLS1 VEL /GRN
VEl/GRN -2. ~ PLUG
2
BLK
No.1 IGNITION COIL
:~~::: i
8§~*~'
C16
IGPLS2 BLU /RED
2
BLK
No.2 IGNITION COIL
C17
IGPLS3
WHT/BLU :=~~~~ j: 2
;---BLK
C18
IGPLS4
BRN ~'~ @~*~~'
BRN 1
IBLK 2
No.4 IGNITION COIL
BLK/WHT
1f-b
I C104
~
13
BLU BLK
~ 1
G101
11-66 BACK
(cont'd)
BACK 11-67
28P JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
Cl04
B13
BLU/BLK
ATPP
10
BLU/WHT BLK
B14
WHT 4
ATPR BLU/BLK BLU/WHT P
8 3
WHT BLU R
3 8
B12 RED/BLK PNK N
ATPN 9 2
VEL RED/BLK D
4 7
RED WHT S
B21
ATPD
B15
6
ATPS ....-------IBLU/VEL
2
....------RED/WHT BRN--"';"';
6
VEL/RED
TRANSMISSION
RANGE SWITCH
B28
ATPFWD Gl0l
B22
ATPRVS
2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
~B~8_ _ _ _ _ _ _ +-___________________IBLU/RED ~L:---:-:-:u_+-_-,
~ ~c 1
3RDCLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
B9
OP3SW BLU/WHT-l{E---:-:-:u 1
4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
~~~8~------i-------------------IBLU/VEL
OP4SW - l { E---:-:-:u I 1
11-68 BACK
:::/~YL
GRN
:~ 4
WHT/BLK 3
A/FSENSOR
(SENSOR 1)
- WHT/RED
BLK/WHT
1[~
~~~~~~ ~
~~~~~~~~~~~~~===-PUR
-----------_LT BLU
EBLK
:±[g
PSPSWITCH
G401
(cant'd)
BACK 11-69
A33
ECTSENSOR2
ECT2
A9
BlK
RED=±[~
BlK2
SG6
.m~8:J
A19
VCC6
A16
ACPD lTGRN :
BlK
A/C PRESSURE
SENSOR
~~~
12
RED
A26 9
lTGRN lTGRN :
FTP 10
BlK BlK
FTPSENSOR
A10 11
ORN
VSV
ORN=1rn
8
cf""
PUR
EVAP CANISTER
C201 VENT SHUT VALVE
~
2
r--------------lTGRN Brake pedal pressed: closed
-:-::- Brake pedal released: open
r----------WHT
....----YEl --~ Brake pedal pressed: open
3 ••••••• Brake pedal released: closed
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
C203
3
PNK~rn
A27
r-
PNK
SlS
SHIFT lOCK
SOLENOID
AA
A2
PPIN
lTGRN
4
CTG.Nl
AB
11-70 BACK
S ~____
JUNCTION BOX
1- A42 K rB BRN
f--?-i---! ~VEL - lL-,.--I------------ BRN 11

LTGRN 16
A36
"CANH"'"WHT "='j
A37 '
C203
' - 1-1.:.;7_ _ _ _ _-'
5
Ir----------- VEL 8
~RED ~ : """'"- 1 - 6 = - - - - - - -....

A29 , ' r-- 1-1= - - - - - - - - - + - + - - - - - - - - - -
~I_ ~BLU:~-I:~~: -~~~~~_~~ ~ ~~~_~~~~~~~~~~~~_ ::DT

: I I:
, L.. I
--
12P
JUNCTION
CONNECTOR
LTBLU
18
LTBLU
To AUDIO UNIT AD 8
BLU
------:1
To AUDIO UNIT J r - - - ORN
r-
BRN
21
6
10
LTGRN
15
"- To POWER MIRROR BLU ~
CONTROL UNIT ~-~~~T.----_i_i~~~~~I___t-_t- ~
~~~URATOR- LTBLU
To MOON ROOF BLU --L....r
CONTROL
UNIT
~ CONTROL UNIT ---"L
AT AF ~~~AVIGATION BLU ...1....[
-
-'
r-- AI AG AH
2
~
1
iE5J
3
~
4 LT GRN f!-. BLU
~ 5--------- -----------.
*ro
I-- .£BLK * V E L
6----------------~
12P
JUNCTION
L- 7
I PARK PIN SWITCH
r- ---------- G503 28P CONNECTOR
.~r-"'~""~"'-"'_-".-".~"'~."~""~,.,-"'--".-,,.-"'-.,,~,.,,~;: ~
CONNECTOR
8
~
9 ,
l- 10- - - - - - - - --, ----- , ----
i- 11----------' ----- , - -
i- SRSUNIT
12 - - - - - - - -,
.---~-~~~ ~ ----m-~~~~~~~l,:;, ~~rfD'"

'-- --------,
-
RED WHT - SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT
O
11 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WHT
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - RED ----
LT BLU 7
~-~1-
20P CONNECTOR
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WHT
- - - - - - - - - - - RED =to'" GAUGE CONTROL

MODULE
(cant'd)
BACK 11-71
AC AE AD AI
WHT RED
5
L....--I-------- BRN
- ~-----P-------- ORN
9
r-!-------. DATA
~ ~------------- -------------------------- LINK
~ ~----------- - '------ - --- ----------- CONNECTOR
;~
.. - . ~--------
_ .. _ .. _ .. _ ---- :-----------
.. _ .. r"-"-", 16
~ ~ : ~::.:..:. ::.:.:::~:::.:..i' ,-.~ - -;::~-;
6
• L- : , I'::
i: 4
1..= . r=-~' .. .. - -"l, I " I

12P 7 i' : , I, :
~~~~~OR"'" II ---------: r -' i: ,
~ g----------r'j------: ' l ---~--, -------,---- G501
~ 10'---- ---~I' ,.------~, ,------ --~
~
;"- .:..:.~:.:·~.:.:·~-=-~·H .l.:':.~':':.~...J, !- - ~
.
~.: ~ ~::::::;=-=, f'F~ ~ , :!: 4P CONNECTOR
L':':: ~::=-::.7-:; ~ 'i

:10
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - WHT - - - -
- i: .! ~ _____________________ . RED __ 2_
. !
i YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR
!
!
!
i mmnnmmnmnmn -,"" n!10 5P CONNECTOR
! ----------------------------------·RED .--~
!' ! STEERING
ANGLE SENSOR
! !
! L._ . _. _. _. _ . _. _. _ . _ . _. _. _. _. _ . _. _ . _ . _ . _ . _ . :2 .. !
,!
i
I. mn nmn mnnmmnnnmnW", __ !fOCONNECTOR
i
!,
-------------------------------------------·RED .--~
! !L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _=i NAVIGATION UNIT
i
:L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _~ .. --;
i
;------ ----------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --L-------- - - - ----"- - - - -:---;·10
C212 20P CONNECTOR
i
ACURALINK CONTROL
UNIT (XM RECIEVERJ
!
j
-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-'
*1: with NAVIGATION
*2: USA with NAVIGATION
11-72 BACK
CD
L~e5]~
W
9
GRN
-
CONTROL
RELAY
~C204
~e5]N'
1
CONDENSER
AZO FAN RELAY
.ETCSRLY
......--
AS
~~OO."N'
IGP
A4
FANL --L~ ....--I
FAN CONTROL
RELAY
A6 YEL
MRLY ORN
1--1!!... ~
PUR:-2.... L::!.I LI
A5
I
e5]'-'.'
~,
FANH -r---- GRNI---!!....

AZ1 ---+----GRY ---1!. FAN RELAY
~S~U~BRRL~Y,--t-----+------RED ---1!.
,.,.~
A14 - - - - + - - - - P U R ----1!!.,
® l..:J.f -,
DAUC~C------~----'RED ~ - CD
------'GRN ---Lj
- .--r-I ~
..- '-- e5]~Mn~ COIL

RELAY
'-
®
I >-~m""'A
--1__
MAIN
RELAY 1
]
C1
iG1ETCS ~~'ri
-----BLU
PUR 31- --I
---I -,
':-e5]-"
'---l
®~
SUBRELAY
~e5]
Q
r1------'WHT~
1 ®,,- A/C COMPRESSOR
1 CLUTCH RELAY
BRN~
S
......----WHT4 ~
CDA.
- :lI
n·ll.
®,.. ®~
-
..::....c f- ..
3
PNK .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..t-.. .. .. .. .. _ .. _7
1 !
!
_l~ ELD
!j
t- .. "-' - .. .. .. .. .. ' - .. .. .. .. .. ..
~ BATTERY
(cont'd)
BACK 11-73
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX
~E§~~m CUTRELAV
(STCUT)
-,
r- @)
......li. VEL
~~~-+--r-~-+----PNK ....L
L--4--~~-+~~+----BRN -1!!.
~--~--+-~~~+-~----ORN ....ll.
L-+--+---LT BLU .ll. @
=-E§
BKSW 24
~~-+----~-+---- VEL
~----+--+----+--+---UGR N30
25
LTGR N-;; 0
29 -
~-- ___ WHT
~--------~"""-----------LT BLU
-- L-
"---'-
PGM·FIMAIN
RELAV2
(FUEL PUMP)
~~~P-----------------::;1
@
16
~
20
- WHT
~
~------------------------ORN
~--------------------------UBL U 8
9 @
~------------------------------BRN
..!{
~~R----------------------:::
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX:
IG1
BLU
-1
:1
IG2 4
CDNo. 21 DBW (THROTTLE +B ORN
ACTUATOR CONTROL) (15 AI
ST
®No. 181G COIL (15 AI VEL
@No. 19 FI MAIN (15 AI
®No.11 LAF (15AI IGNITION SWITCH
@No. 15 OILLVL (7.5 AI MICU
IG1 HOT in ON Ull
@No. 2 IG MAIN (50 AI and START UII)
0No. 12 STOP & HORN (15 AI
®No. 17 VACUUM PUMP (15 AI
®No. 1 MAIN FUSE (100 AI
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX:

@)No.3 IG1 ACG (15 AI
@No. 2 FUEL PUMP (20 AI
@No. 361G2 HAC (A/CI (10 AI
@No. 10 METER (7.5 AI
11-74 BACK
::~D BlU
!-:;:A:;;;43::...._ _ _ GRN ~I
t
5 . _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ __
GRN
BlU
3
5
GRN
FPC FUEL PUMP
8 CONTROL MODULE
C201 BLK
1
G601
VEL
6
7
WHT
FUEL PUMP
AUXILIARY
PNK UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
~A1,;,;3~___~- PNK ..r

VPMPRlYD
-ORN J~
rI VACUUM
PUMP
(7.5A)
~A,;,;12~___- - WHT
VPMPRlY
~ORN
-3
WHT
BlK
2
4
3
-I
1"""1
-w
V"'
1
ELECTRIC
VACUUM
PUMP
RELAY 2
~O~3 ~j~
PNK
ELECTRIC
VACUUM
PUMP
WHT 4
-w 1 RELAY 1
BlK 3
BLK
1.-
-
G201 1
WHT
lr---------BlK
ELECTRIC
VACUUM PUMP
G401
L--~--------RED
B5 +-_______________
GRN/BlK ---.....:2'-1CH 1=2;....____ PNK
~-.&----i ] PBMPA
1..._______________ BlK
C104
BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE SENSOR
BACK 11-75
How to Set Readiness Codes
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Indication Catalytic Converter Monitor and Readiness
(In relation to Readiness Codes) Code
The vehicle has certain "readiness codes" that are part NOTE:
of the on-board diagnostics for the emissions systems. • Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
Ifthe vehicle's battery has been disconnected or gone procedure.
dead, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the PCM has • All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
been reset, these readiness codes are resetto disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
incomplete. In some states, part of the emissions PCM is reset with the HDS.
testing is to make sure these codes are set to complete. • Low ambient temperatures or excessive stop-and-go
If all of them are not set to complete, the vehicle may traffic may increase the drive time needed to switch
fail the emission test, or the test cannot be finished. the readiness code from incomplete to complete.
• The readiness code will not switch to complete until
To check if the readiness codes are set to complete, all the enable criteria are met.
turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the • If a fault in the secondary H02S system caused the
engine. The MIL will come on for 15-20 seconds. If it MIL to come on, the readiness code cannot be set to
then goes off, the readiness codes are set to complete. complete until you correct the fault.
If it flashes five times, one or more readiness codes are
not set to complete. To set readiness codes from Enable Criteria
incomplete to complete, do the procedure for the
appropriate code. • Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) at
158 "F (70 'C) or more.
To check the status of a specific DTC system, check the • Intake air temperature (IAT SENSOR 1) at 20 "F
OBD status in the DTC MENU with the HDS (see page (-7 "C) or more.
11-9). This screen displays the code, the current data list • Vehicle speed (VSS) above 25 mph (40 km/h).
ofthe enable criteria, and the status ofthe readiness
testing. Procedure
1. Connect the HDS to the vehicle's data link

connector (DLC), and bring up the READINESS
CODEs screen for Catalyst in the DTCs MENU.
2. Start the engine.
3. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions

with short periods of steady cruise. After about
5 miles (8 km), the readiness code should switch to
complete.
4. If the readiness code is still not set to complete,

check for a Temporary DTC with the HDS. If there is
no DTC, one or more of the enable criteria were
probably not met; repeat the procedure.
11-76 BACK
Evaporative Emission (EVAP) Control Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Monitor and
System Monitor and Readiness Code Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery NOTE:
is disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the • Do not turn the ignition switch off during the
PCM is reset with the HDS. procedure .
• All readiness codes are cleared when the battery is
Enable Criteria disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
PCM is reset with the HDS.
• Battery voltage is more than 10.5 V.
• Engine at idle. Enable Criteria
• Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1 and 2)
between 176 "F (80 ee) and 212 "F (100 ee). Engine coolant temperature (ECT SENSOR 1) at 140 "F
• Vehicle speed (VSS) 0 mph (0 km/h). (60 ee) or more.
• Intake air temperature (lAT SENSOR 1) between 32 "F
(0 ee) and 212 "F (100 ee). Procedure
Procedure 1. Start the engine.
1. Connectthe HDS to the DLC. 2. Test-drive the vehicle under stop-and-go conditions
with short periods of steady cruise. During the
2. Start the engine. drive, decelerate (with the throttle fully closed) for
5 seconds. After about 3.5 miles (5.6 km), the
3. Select EVAPTEST in the INSPECTION MENU with readiness code should switch from incomplete to
the HDS, then selectthe FUNCTION TEST in the complete.
EVAPTESTMENU.
3. Check the readiness codes screen for the AIR FUEL
• If the result is normal, readiness is complete. RATIO (A/F) SENSOR in the DTCs MENU with the
• If the result is not normal, go to the next step. HDS.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC. If there is no DTC, one • If the screen shows complete, readiness is
or more of the enable criteria were probably not complete.
met; repeat the procedure. • If the screen shows not complete, go to the next
step.
4. Check for a Temporary DTC.lfthere is no DTC, the

enable criteria was probably not met. Select the
DATA LIST MENU. Check the ECT SENSOR 1 in the
ALL DATA LIST with the HDS.lf ECT SENSOR 1 is
less than 140 "F (60 ee), run the engine until it is
more than 140 "F (60 ee), then repeat the procedure.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-77
How to Set Readiness Codes (cont'd)
Air Fuel Ratio (A/F) Sensor Heater Monitor

Readiness Code
NOTE: All readiness codes are cleared when the battery

is disconnected, if the DTCs have been cleared, or if the
PCM is reset with the HDS.
Procedure
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 1 minute. The

readiness code should switch from incomplete to
complete.
2. If the readiness code is still not set to complete,

check for a Temporary DTC.lfthere is no DTC,
repeat the procedure.
Misfire Monitor and Readiness Code
• This readiness code is always set to available

because misfiring is continuously monitored.
• Monitoring pauses, and the misfire counter resets, if
the vehicle is driven over a rough road.
• Monitoring also pauses, and the misfire counter
holds at its current value, if the throttle position
changes more than a predetermined value, or if
driving conditions fall outside the range of any
related enable criteria.
Fuel System Monitor and Readiness Code
• This readiness code is always set to available

because the fuel system is continuously monitored
during closed loop operation.
• Monitoring pauses when the catalytic converter,
EVAP control system, and A/F sensor monitors are
active.
• Monitoring also pauses when any related enable
criteria are not being met. Monitoring resumes when
the enable criteria is again being met.
Comprehensive Component Monitor and

Readiness Code
This readiness code is always set to available because

the comprehensive component monitor is continuously
running whenever the engine is cranking or running.
11-78 BACK
PGM-FI System
CRANKSHAFT POSITION . CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP)

(CKP) SENSOR SENSOR B (EXHAUST SIDE)
Replacement, page 11-246 Replacement, page 11-246

(ECT) SENSOR 1
IGNITION
COILRELAV
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
General
Troubleshooting
Information,
page 11-3
Update,
page 11-7
Substitution,
page 11-8
Replacement,
page 11-252
ELECTRICAL LOAD
DETECTOR (ELD)
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
(lAT) SENSOR 2 MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR/INTAKE
AIR TEMPERATURE (lAT) SENSOR 1
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR (ECT) SENSOR 2
(cont'd)
BACK 11-79
PGM-FI System
SECONDARY HEATED OXYGEN

AIR FUEL RATIO (A/F) SENSOR (SENSOR 1) SENSOR (SECONDARY H02S) (SENSOR 2)
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2

(FUEL PUMP)
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)

General Troubleshooting Information, page 11-3
Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-229
11-80 BACK
DTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0096: IAT Sensor 2 Circuit Rangel 12. Check IAT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the
Performance Problem HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does IAT SENSOR 2 change 58 OF (32 °C) or
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general more?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
ECT sensors 1/2 and IAT sensor 2. at IAT sensor 2 and the PCM .•
Are the connections and terminals OK? NO-Go to step 13.
YES-Go to step 2. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to 14. Replace IAT sensor 2 (see page 11-248).
step 15.
2. Remove the IAT sensor 2 (see page 11-248).
3. Allow IAT sensor 2 to cool to ambient temperature.
4. Note the ambient temperature.
18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
5. Connect the IAT sensor 2 to the 2P connector, but
do not install the sensor onto the intake manifold. Is DTC P0096 indicated?
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at IAT sensor 2 and the PCM, then go to
7. Note the value of IAT SENSOR 2 quickly in the step 1.
DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
8. Compare the value of IAT SENSOR 2 and the Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
ambient temperature. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
Does the value of IAT SENSOR 2 differ 5.4 OF

(3 °C) or more?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Disconnect IAT sensor 2 from its 2P connector.
10. Using a heat gun, blow hot air on IAT sensor 2 for a
few seconds. Do not apply the heat longer than a
few seconds or you will damage the sensor.
11. Connect IAT sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not

install the sensor onto the intake manifold.
BACK 11-81
PGM-FI System
DTe Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0097: IAT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between IAT sensor 2P
connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general IAT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
2. Check IAT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
~~AT2(REDJYEU
Is about 356 of (180°C) or more, or 0.08 V or less

indicated?
YES-Go to step 3. Wire side of female terminals
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Is there continuity?
at IATsensor 2 and the PCM .•
YES-Repair short in the wire between IATsensor
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2 and the PCM (B31), then go to step 13.
4. Disconnect IAT sensor 2 2P connector. NO-Go to step 18.
6. Check IAT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the 12. Replace IAT sensor 2 (see page 11-248).
HDS.
13. Reconnect all connectors.
indicated? 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Go to step 7. 15. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 11. 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Is DTC P0097 indicated?
9. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). YES-Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at IAT sensor 2 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
11-82 BACK
19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

good PCM (see page 11-8).
Is DTC P0097 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at IAT sensor 2 and the PCM. If the PCM
was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was
substituted, go to step 1.
NO-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
BACK 11-83
PGM-FI System
OTe Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0098: IAT Sensor 2 Circuit High Voltage 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 9. Remove the jumper wire from IAT sensor 2 2P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general connector.
11. Measure voltage between IAT sensor 2 2P
2. Check IAT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
HDS.
IAT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
Is about -40 OF (-40°C) or less, or 4.90 V or
more indicated?
~
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this r:ip'AT2 (..D/YEU

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at IATsensor 2 and the PCM .•
=
4. Disconnect IAT sensor 2 2P connector.
5. Connect IAT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No.1 Is there about 5 V?

and No.2 with a jumper wire.
YES-Go to step 12.
IAT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 16.
SG2 (GRN/VEl)
~
U IAT2 (RED/VEL)
JUMPER WIRE

HDS.

more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20
11-84 BACK
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
13. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
14. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P). 18. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P).
15. Check for continuity between IAT sensor 2 2P 19. Check for continuity between IAT sensor 2 2P
connector terminal No.1 and PCM connector connector terminal No.2 and PCM connector
terminal 833. terminal 831.
IAT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR IAT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals

PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
Q Q
Terminal side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
Is there continuity? Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 27. YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(833) and IAT sensor 2, then go to step 22. (831) and IAT sensor 2, then go to step 22.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-85
PGM-FI System
21. Replace IAT sensor 2 (see page 11-248).
Is OTC P0098 indicated?
YES-Check for poor con~ections or loose

terminals atlATsensor 2 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

TemporaryDTCs ot DTCs are indicated, go to the


terminals at IAT sensor 2 and the PCM. If the PCM
(see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
NO-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

11-86 BACK
Ole P0101: MAF Sensor Circuit Rangel 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Performance Problem
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 6. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general HDS.
• If DTC P2228 and/or P2229 are stored at the same Is there about 0.2 gmls or 0.5 V?
time as DTC P0101, troubleshootthose DTCs first,
then recheck for DTC P0101. YES-Go to step 7.
1. Check for poor connections or damage to these NO-Go to step 13.

parts:
• PCV hose
• Air cleaner 8. Vary the engine speed between 2,000 rpm and
• Intake air duct (air flow tube) 3,000 rpm.
• Intake manifold
• Purge (PCS) line 9. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
• Brake booster HDS.
• Brake booster hose
• Turbocharger Does the reading change?
• Intake air duct (turbocharger inlet tube and pipe)
• Intake air duct (turbocharger outlet pipe) YES-Go to step 10.
• Charge air cooler
• Intake air duct (charge air cooler inlet hose) NO-Go to step 13.
• Intake air duct (charge air cooler outlet tube)
• Turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve 10. Hold the engine speed at 3,000 rpm without load (in
• Pressure regulator (vacuum hose line) Park or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on,
then let it idle.
Are the parts OK?
11. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
YES-Go to step 2. range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
NO-Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go • ENGINE SPEED

to step 15. • VSS
• MAP SENSOR
2. Check for damage or looseness at the air duct in • MAFSENSOR
the air cleaner.
12. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0101 in the
Is it OK? DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 3. Does the screen indicate FAILED?
NO-Reconnect or replace the air duct in the air YES-Go to step 13.
cleaner, then go to step 15.
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
3. Check for a dirty air cleaner element. failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAF
Is it dirty? sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 11 and recheck.
YES-Replace the air cleaner element (see page
11-395), then go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 4.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-87
PGM-FI System
14. Replace MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 (see page

11-247).

range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• MAP SENSOR
• MAFSENSOR

terminals at the MAF sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
NO-Go to step 20.

DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 19,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

connections or loose terminals at the MAF sensor
and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 18.
11-88 BACK
DTC P0102: MAF Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 7. Measure voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1
5P connector terminal No.5 and body ground.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 1 5P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait 2 seconds.
2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is about 0 gm/s, or 0.1 V or less indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
at the MAF sensor and the PCM .• Is there battery voltage?
3. Check the No. 31G1 ACG (15 A) fuse in the under- YES-Go to step 8.
dash fuse/relay box.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 31G1
Is the fuse OK? ACG (15 A) fuse and the MAF sensor, then go to
step 20.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Repair short in the wire between the MAF
sensor and the No. 31G1 ACG (15 A) fuse. Also 9. Measure resistance between MAF sensor/IAT
replace the No. 31G1 ACG (15 A) fuse, then go to sensor 1 5P connector terminal No.3 and body
step 20. ground.

MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 1 5P CONNECTOR
5. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 5P

connector.
Is there 190-210 kQ?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-89
PGM-FI System
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 13.. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 1 5P connector terminal No.3 and PCM
11. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P). connector terminal 830.
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 1 5P CONNECTOR
terminal 830 and body ground. A

11121314151
I VG+ (RED/GRN)
J[ -'I
11 V 3 4 1 5 V 7 8J 9 1 PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
• V 11 12 13114]15116 17 18V -'r . JI
• 120 21 22 >< 232425
11/3415V7891
126 27 2B 1/130 131132 33 34 35 • Q
136 / 1 / 1/40141 42 431441
"V 11 12 13J14J15J16 17 1~1/J •
~ 120 21 22 >< 23241251
VG+ (RED/GRN) 126 27 2B /130 131132 33 341351 •
136 VI/ VII40 141 42 43 441
Q ·IVG+ (RED/GRN)
= Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 26.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(830) and the MAF sensor, then go to step 21. NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(830) and the MAF sensor, then go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 13.
11-90 BACK
14. Substitute a known-good MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 26. Reconnect all connectors;
(see page 11-247).
15. Reconnect all connectors. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
17. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
2,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral). YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the MAFsensor/IAT sensor 1 and the
19. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM
Is DTC P0102 indicated? was substituted, go to step 1.
YES-Go to step 27. NO-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

NO-Replace the original MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
(see page 11-247), then go to step 20. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting. II
Is DTC PO 102 indicated?

terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 and the
PCM, then go to step 1.

BACK 11-91
PGM-FI System
DTC P0103: MAF Sensor Circuit High Voltage 7. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 1 5P connector terminal No.4 and PCM
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data connector terminal B32.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
A
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 2 seconds. 1112131415
IVG- (BLK/RED)
2. Check the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the Wire side of female terminals
HDS.
Is about 202 gmls, or 4.89 V or more indicated? II
11I. /' 3 4151/ 7 8 9/

Q
YES-Go to step 3. 1/ 1112 13/14/15 16 17 18 1/
~ 2021 22 >< 2324 25,
2627 2B /130131 32 3334 35
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this /36V 1/ V/401 ~ 42 43 441
at the MAF sensor and the PCM .•
I VG- (BLK/RED)
YES-Go to step 8.
connector. NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B32) and the MAF sensor, then go to step 15.
11-92 BACK
8. Reconnect PCM connector B(44P). 19. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
9. Connect MAF sensor/lAT sensor 1 5P connector Is OTCP0103 indicated?

terminals No.3 and No.4 with a jumper wire.
NO-Troubleshooting is oomplete.lf any other

Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
VG+ (RED/GRN) VG- (BLK/RED)
indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•

JUMPER WIRE
Wire side offemale terminals 22. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
10. Turn the ignition svvitch ON (II).
23. Check for Temporary OTCsor OTCs with the HOS.
11. Clear the OTC with the HOS.
Is OTC PO 103 indicated?
12. Check for Tempor~ry OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
Is OTC P0103 indicated? terminals at the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 and the
PCM. If tbe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
YES-Go to step 20. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-252). Ifany other
14. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 (see page Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
11-247). indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
17. Reset the PCM with the HOS.
BACK 11-93
PGM-FI System
DTC P0107:MAP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Is there about 5 V?
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data YES-Go to step 16.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). NO-Go to step 8.
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS,
HDS.
10. Disconnect PCM connectqr C (44P).
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 Vor
less indicated? 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C13 and MAP sensor 3P connector
YES-Go to step 3. terminal No.1.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

at the MAP sensor and the PCM .•
VCC1 (VEL/RED) Wire side of
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Q female terminals
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
6. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 Vor

less indicated? Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 12. Is there continuity?
NO-Go to step 7. YES-Go to step 23.
7. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
connector terminals No.1 and No.3. (C13) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18.
VCC1 SG1
(VEL/RED) (GRN/WHT)
11-94 BACK
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF .. 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
13. Jump the SCS line with theHDS. Is DTe P0107 indicated?
14. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
15. Check for continuity between MAP sensor 3P to step 1.
MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the

good PCM (see page 11-8)..
Wire side of female terminals Is DTe P0107 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections. or loose

Is there continuity? terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was
(C11) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 18. substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 23. NO-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
17. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-247). indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
BACK 11-95
PGM-FI System
DTC Troubleshooting (cont'd)
DTC P0108: MAP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 7. Check the MAP SENSORinthe DATA LIST with the
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general HDS.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 4.49 V or more indicated?
2. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the YES-Go to step 8.
'HDS.
NO-Go to step 18.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or
4.49 V or more indicated? 8. Remove the jumper wire from the MAP sensor 3P
connector.
YES-Go to step 3.
9. Measure voltage between MAP sensor 3P
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this connector terminals No.1 and No.3.
at the'MAP sensor and the PCM.• MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
4. Disconnect the MAP sensor 3P connector.
5. Connect MAP sensor 3P connector terminals No.2 VCC1 SG1

(VEL/RED) (GRN/WHT)
MAP ~
(GRN/RED)
23
SG1
IGRN/WHT)
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 14.
JUMPER WIRE NO-Go to step 10.
11-96 BACK
12. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 16. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector 17. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C14 and MAP sensor 3P connector terminal C11 and MAP sensor 3P connector
terminal No.3. terminal No.2.
MAPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR MAP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

A.
\1 \2131
MAP IGRN/RED? WI" ,Ide of
Q female termin als
SG1 (GRN/WHT) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) MAP(GRN/RED) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)

II II
11 2 3 41516 7 8 I 9 1
10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19 I
• 20 2122 ::::>< 23 V25
I
26 2728 29130131132 VVV
136V 36 39140 141 42 431441
Terminal side of female terminals Terminal sIde of female terminals
(C14) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 20. (C11) and the MAP sensor, then go to step 20.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-97
PGM-FI System
19. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-247).
Is DTC P010B indicated?

terminals atthe MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.

Temporary DTCs orDTCs are indicated, go to the

Is DTC P010B indicated?

terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM. If the

indicated DTC's troubleshooting. II
11-98 BACK
DTC P0112: IAT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 1 5P connector terminal No.2 and body
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data ground.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 1 5P CONNECTOR

HDS.

indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
at IAT sensor 1 and the PCM .• Is there continuity?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES-Repair short in the wire between the IAT
sensor 1 and the PCM (A28), then go to step 13.
connector. NO-Go to step 18.
6. Check the IAT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the 12. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 (see page
HDS. 11-247).
Is about 356 OF (180°C) or more, or 0.08 V or less 13. Reconnect all connectors.
indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 11.
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
terminals at the IAT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go
to step 1.

(cont'd)
BACK 11-99
PGM~FI System


PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM

11-100 BACK
DTC P0113: IAT Sensor 1 Circuit High Voltage 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 9. Remove the jumper wire from the MAF sensor/IAT
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general sensor 1 5P connector.
11. Measure voltage between MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1
2. Check IAT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the 5P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
HDS.
Is about - 40 OF (- 40°C) or less, or 4.90 V or
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.

at IAT sensor 1 and the PCM .•

connector.
Is there about 5 V?
5. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 5P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire. YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Go to step 16.
SG2 (GRN/YEL) IAT1 (RED/VEl)
JUMPER WIRE

HDS.

more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 20
(cont'd)
BACK 11-101
PGM-FI System
14. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 18. DisconnectPCMconnector C (44P).
15. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT 19. Check for continuity between MAF sensor/IAT
sensor 1 5P connector terminal No.1 and PCM sensor 1 5P connector terminal No.2 and PCM
connector terminal 833. connector terminal C28.
MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 1 5P CONNECTOR MAF SENSOR/IAT SENSOR 1 5P CONNECTOR

A. A.
11 2131415 11121314151
SG2 (GRN/VELI IIAT1 (RED/VELI
PCM CONNECTOR B (44PI PCM CONNECTOR C (44PI

II II
111/ 3 4151/ 7 8 91 11 2 3 41516 7 8 91

Q
1/ 1112 13114115116 17 18 1/ Q 110111121311411511617 18 191 •
~ 20 21 22 >< 23 24 25 120121 22 ::::::>< 23 / 251
26 27 28 /130131132 33 3435 • ~ 12612728 29130131132V /1/1 I
1361/ 1/ 1/140141 I.¢ 43 441 136 VI$ 39140141 42 43 441
SG2 (GRN/VELI 1 IIAT1 (RED/VELI

YES-Go to step 27. YES-Go to step 27 ..
(833) and IAT sensor 1, then go to step 22. (C28) and IAT sensor 1, then go to step 22.
11-102 BACK
20 .. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
21. Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 (see page

11-247).
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). ' 'J.,


Temporary OTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the



BACK 11-103
PGM-FI System
DTC P0116: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Rangel 10. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
Performance Problem HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 OF (10°C) or
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general more?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM .•
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. NO-Go to step 11.
Is about 176 OF (80°C) or more, or 0.78 V or less 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
indicated?
12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-249).
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST
with the HDS. 15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. Is DTC P0116 indicated?
5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the YES-Check for poor connections or loose
HDS. terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
Does ECT SENSOR 1 change 18 OF (10 °C) or
more? NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Go to step 11.
6. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST

with the HDS.
8. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for 3 hours.
11-104 BACK
DTC P0117: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR

HDS.

indicated?

YES-Repair short in the wire between ECT
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. sensor 1 and the PCM(B23), then go to step 13.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector. NO-Go to step 18.
6. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the 12. Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-249).
HDS.
Is about 356 of (180 °C) or more, or 0.08 V or less
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Is OTC P0117 indicated?
9. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). YES-Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

indicated DTC's troubleshooting.•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-105
PGM-FI System

good PCM (see page 11-8). .
20. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
Is DTe P0117 indicated?

terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. Ifthe PCM

Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated,. go to the
11 .. 106 BACK
DTC POl18: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit High 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Is about -40 OF (-40°C) or less, or 4.90 Vor
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
HDS. NO-Go to step 20
Is about -40 OF (-40°C) or less, or 4.90 V or 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
more indicated?
9. Remove the jumper wire from the ECT sensor 1 2P
YES-Go to step 3. connector.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM .• 11. Measure voltage between ECT sensor 1 2P
ECT SENSOR 1 2PCONNECTOR
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 1 2P connector.
5. Connect ECT sensor 1 2P connector terminals No.1

ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR
ECT1
(RED/WHT) ~ 2
SG2
(GRN/YEL)
Is there about 5 V?
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Go to step 16.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-107
PGM-FI System
13. Jump.the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
14. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P). 18. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P).
15. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P 19. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 1 2P
terminal 833. terminal 823.
ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR ECT SENSOR 1 2P CONNECTOR

A
11,121 '
I SG2 IGRN/YEL)
Wire side of fe·male terminals Wire side of female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR B 144PI PCM CONNECTOR B 144P)
If .1.
11 /3 4161/ 7 8 91
~ 11 12 13114116116 17 18 1/
Q Q
1/
~ 20 2122 >< 23 24 26
I
26 2728 /130131132 3334 85
136 1/1/ 1/140141 1'* 481441
SG2IGRN/YEL) 1 ECT1 IRED/WHT)

(833) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22. (823) and ECT sensor 1, then go to step 22.
11'-108 BACK
21. ReplaceECT sensor 1 (see page 11-249).

-. ,
25. Do the PCM idle. learn procedure (see page 11-339).
26. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HOS.
Is DTC P0118 indicated?·

step 1.


29. Check for Temporary DTCs or OTCs with the HOS.

terminals at ECT sensor 1 and the PCM. If the PCM

complete. Ifthe PCM was substituted, replace the
BACK 11-109
PGM-FI System
DTC P0125: ECT Sensor 1 Malfunction/Slow 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Response
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Start the engine, and let it idle for 5 minutes or
more. 13. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
2. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the 14. Allow the engine to cool to ambient temperature.
HOS.
15. Start the engine, and let it idle for 20 minutes.
Is about - 1 of ( - 18°C) or less indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.
Is DTC PO 125 indicated.?
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Allow the engine to cool to 104 'f (40 "C) or less. terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
PCM, then goto step 1.
4. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR
2 in the DATA LIST with the HOS. NO-Go to step 17.
5. Start the engine, and let it idle. 17. Monitor the OBO STATUS for OTC P0125 in the
OTCs MENU with the HOS.
6. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up
49 'f (27 "C) or more from the recorded Does the screen indicate PASSED?
temperature.
7. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST Temporary OTCs or OTCs were indicated in step 16,
with the HOS. go to the indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
8. Compare ECT SENSOR 2 and the recorded NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
temperature. connections or 'loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
Did ECT SENSOR 2 change 17 OF (9.5 °C) or screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 14.
more?

at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM .•
NO-Check the thermostat (see page 10-4). If the

thermostat is OK, go to step 9. If the thermostat is
faulty, replace the thermostat (see page 10-9), then
go to step 11.
11 .. 110 BACK
DTC P0128: Cooling System Malfunction 11. Compare the recorded value of ECT SENSOR 2 and
the presentvalue of ECT SENSOR 2.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general Did temperature rise 14 of (8°C) or more?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM .•
NO-Test the thermostat (see page 10-4), then go
3. Turn the blower switch OFF. to step 12.
4. Check the FAN CTRL in the DATA LIST with the 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
HDS.
Is it OFF?
14. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is
YES-Go to step 5. between 21 'f (--6 "C) and 104 'f (40 "C).
NO-Wait until the FAN CTRL is off, then go to step 15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
5.
16. Test-drive at a steady speed between 15-75 mph
5. Check the radiator fan operation. (24-120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
Does the radiator fan keep running? 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with theHDS.
YES-Check the radiator fan circuit (see page Is DTC P0128 indicated?
10-25), and the radiator fan relay (see page 22-64).
Ifthe circuits and the relay are OK, go to step 19. YES-Check the cooling system, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 6. NO-Go to step 18.
6. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is 18. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P0128in the
104'f (40 "C) or less. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
7. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR Does the screen indicate PASSED?
2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 17,
9. Let the engine idle until ECT SENSOR 1 goes up
41 'f (23 "C) or more from the recorded NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check the
temperature. cooling system, then go to step 1. If the screen
HDS.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-111
, ":~
PGM-FI System
19. Update the PCM ifitdoesnothavethe latest

software (see page 11-7J; or'substitute a known-
20. Let the engine cool until the coolant temperature is

between 21 'f (~"C) and 104 'f(40 "C).

radiator fan comes on, then let itidle.

(24-120 km/h) for 10 minutes.
23. Check for TemporaryDTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC PO 128 indicated? '

terminals at ECTsensor 1, ECT senso(2; and the
PCM.lfthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 20. If the
PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Goto step 24.

YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is

go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.•

connections or loose terminals at ECT sensor 1,
ECT sensor 2, and the PCM; If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then
go to step 20. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOTCOMPLETED, go to
step 20.
11-112 BACK
. .r;jJ
DTC P0133: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) 10. Do the PCM idle learn proced'ure (see page 11-339).
Malfunction/Slow Response
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3);
12. Test-drive underthese conditions:
• ECTSENSOR 1, above 158 "F (70 'C)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. • Transmission in D position
• Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the 26-81 mph (41-130 km/h).
4. Test-drive under these conditions: .
/s DTe P0133 indicated?
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158. "F (70 'C)
• Transmission in D position YES-Check for poor connections or loose
• Drive the vehicle at 25 mph (40 km/h) or less for terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
5 minutes, then drive at a steady speed between then go to step 1.
26-81 mph (41-130 km/h).
NO-Go to step 14.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 inthe
DTCs MENU with the HDS. 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0133 in the,
Does the screen indicate FA/LED?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.•
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck. screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. CONDITION, go to step 11.
7. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page

11-245).
BACK 11-113
PGM~F·I System
DTC P0134: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater 10. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
System Malfunction
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and YES-Check for poor connections or loose
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). subrelay, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
• If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled
before this OTC was stored, refuel and clear the OTC NO-Go to step 11.
with the HOS.
11. Monitor the OBO STATUS for OTC P0134 in the
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). OTCs MENU with the HOS.
2. Clear the OTC with the HOS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
or neutral) for at least' 1. minute. Temporary OTCs or OTCs were indicated in step 10,
go to the indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
Is DTC P0134 indicated? connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM, then
YES-Go to step 5. go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay,
and the PCM .•

11-245).
7. Turn the. ignition switch ON (II).
11-114 BACK
DTC P0135: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Heater 7. Test the PGM-FI subrelay (E) in the under-hood
Circuit Malfunction fuse/relay box (see page 22-64).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record al\ freeze data


Is ore P0135 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is the PGM-FI sub relay OK?
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals YES-Go to step 8.
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM~FI subrelay,
and the PCM .• NO-Replace the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step
27.
8. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
6. Check the No. 11 LAF (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box. 9. At the sensor side, measure resistance between A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No.3 and
Is the fuse OK? No.4.
YES-Go to step 7.
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 11 4P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 20.
+8
Terminal side of male terminals
Is there 2.0- 2. 7 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 25.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-115
PGM-FI System
10. At the sensor side, check for continuity between 13. Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector
A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector terminals No.2 terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper wire.
and No.3, and between terminals No.2 and No.4
individually. A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1)4P CONNECTOR
1 2
AFS-
3 4
AFSHTC (GRN)
JUMPER WIRE
=

terminal C9 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
YES-Go to step 25. AFSHTC (GRN)
NO-Go to step 11.

=
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (Cg)

and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step 26.
11-116 BACK
15. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (E) from the under- 17. Check for continuity between PGM-FI subrelay 4P
hood fuse/relay box. connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
PGM-FI SUBRELAV 4P CONNECTOR
16. Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector YES-Go to step 18.

terminal No.3 to body ground with a jumper wire.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the A/F .
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR sensor (Sensor 1) and the PGM-FI subrelay, then go
to step 26.
r---1
1 2
3 4
+B (WHT/BLK) .
JUM PER WIRE
-'-
=
Wire side offemale terminals
(cont'd)
BACK 1.1-117
PGM-FI System
19. Check for continuity between PGM-FI subrelay 4P 21. Disconnect the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector.
connector terminal No.3 and PCM connector
terminal A21. 22. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
3" SUBRLY 23. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
1J2 ~
?
connector.
7
'-- 24. Check for continuity between A/F sensor (Sensor 1)
Terminal side of female terminals 4P connector terminal No.3 and body ground.
SUBRLV (RED) PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

II -II A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
1/ 2 / 4 I 5 I 6 / 8 9 I.
12 13114116116 17 18 19
" 10
20 2122 >< 23 24 26 •
• 1 2
~ 26 27/ 29V131 V 33 34 35
1136 37 38 39140 1/1 42 43 441 3 4
YES-Go to step·32. Wire side of female terminals
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(A21) and the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step 26. Is there continuity?
20. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (E) from the under- YES-Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI
hood fuse/relay box. subrelay, the EVAP canister purge valve, the EVAP
canister vent shut valve, and the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1). Also replace the No. 11 LAF (15 A) fuse,
then go to step 26.
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box

(see page 22-61), then go to step 26.
11-118 BACK
25. Replace the A/F sensor,(Sensor 1) (see page 35. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
11-245).
27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI
subrelay, and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
28. Reset the PCM with the HDS. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then
29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). 1.
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO-Go to step 3,6.
Is DTC P0135 indicated? 36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 in the
terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI Does the screen indicate PASSED?
subrelay, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO-Go to step 31. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0135 in the Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 35,
DTCs MENU with the HDS. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
Does the screen indicate PASSED? NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other (Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM.lf
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30, the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 34. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes
connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor on.
(Sensor 1), the PGM-FI subrelay, and the PCM, then
go to step 1. If the Screen indicates NOT

34. Start the engine, and let it idle.
BACK 11-119
PGM-FI System
DTC P0137: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 12. Check fOr continuity between secondary H02S
Circuit Low Voltage (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR

1 2
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3 4
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the Q
=
4. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals
Does the voltage stay at 0.29 V or less?

YES~Go to step 5.
NO"""'lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this (C27) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals to step 15.
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 23.
6. Disconnect the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector. 14. Replace the secondary H02S(Sensor 2) (see page
11-245).
8. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. I,

Does the voltage stay at 0.29 V or less?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 13.
19. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
11-120 BACK
20. Test-drive under these conditions: 23. Reconnect all connectors.
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 "F (70 "C) 24. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
• Transmission in D position software (seepage 11-7), or substitute a known-
• Engine speed between 1,500-3,000 rpm good PCM (see page 11-8).
• Maintain a steady speed about 1 minute or more
21. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
Is DTC POt37 indicated? 26. Test-drive under these conditions:
YES-Check for poor connections or loose • ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 "F (70 "C)
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and • Transmission in D position
the PCM, then go to step 1. • Engine speed between 1,500-3,000 rpm
NO-Go to step 22.
DTCs MENU with the HDS. Is DTC POt37 indicated?
Does the screen indicate PASSED? YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 21, known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
go to the indicated DTC'stroubleshooting .• 25. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor NO-Go to step 28.
connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0137 in the
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until DTCs MENU with the HDS.
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 19. Does the screen indicate PASSED?


H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-8), then go to step 25. Ifthe PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. Ifthe screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 25.
BACK 11-121
PGM-FI System
OTC P0138: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Circuit High Voltage
9. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general Does the voltage stay at 1.25 V or more?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 19.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the 11. Remove the jumper wire from the secondary H02S
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. (Sensor 2) 4P connector~
4. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 12. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
Does the voltage stay at 1.25 V or more?
SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 5.

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 1 2
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM .• 3 4
JUMPER WIRE

connector. =
7. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
14. Check the H02S S2 in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
JUMPER WIRE
Does the voltage stay at 1.25 V or more?
SH02S SG2 YES-Go to step 15.

(WHT/RED) (GRN/YEL)
1 2 NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B33) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go
3 4 to step 21.
11-122 BACK
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 25. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
26. Test-drive under.these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 'f (70 'C)
18. Check for continuity between PCM connector • Transmission in 0 position
terminal C27 and body ground. • Engine speed between 1,500-3,000 rpm

the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 28.
= 28. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0138 in the

Terminal side of female terminals DTCs MENU with theHDS.
Is there continuity? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES-Go to step 29. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
(C27) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go
to step 21. NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
20. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
11-245). CONDITION, go to step 25.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-123
PGM-FI System

or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on, then let
it idle.
32. Test-drive under these conditions:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 "F (70 "C)

• Transmission in D position
• Engine speed between 1,500-3,000 rpm

the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
31. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 34.

DTCsMENU with the HDS.


H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-8), then go to step 31. If the PCM was substituted,
go to step 1. Ifthe screen indicates EXECUTING,
keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 31.
11-124 BACK
OTC P0139: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) Slow 12. Test-drive under these conditions:
Response
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 'f (70 "C)
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data • Transmission in D position
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general • Vehicle. speed at 35 mph (56 km/h) or more
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Drive 20 seconds or more
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Is DTC P0139 indicated?
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at YES-Check for poor connections or loose
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the terminals atthe secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. the PCM, then go to step 1.
4. Test-drive underthese conditions: NO-Go to step 14.
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 'f (70 "C) 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 in the
• Transmission in D position DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Vehicle speed at 35 mph (56 km/h) or more
• Drive 20 seconds or more Does the screen indicate. PASSED?
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0139 in the YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
DTCs MENU with the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
Does the screen indicate FAILED?
YES-Go to step 6. connections or loose terminals at the secondary
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then goto step 1. If
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
poor connections or loose terminals at the CONDITION, go to step 11.
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
result comes on. If the s~reen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck.
7. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page

11-245).

BACK 11-125
PGM-FI System
DTC P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 8. At the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, measure
Heater Circuit Malfunction resistance between secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P
connector terminals No.3 and No.4.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
Is ore P0141 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES-Go to step 5.
Is there 5.4- 7.3 Q at room temperature?
at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 22.
9. At the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) side, check for
6. Check the No. 31G1 ACG (15 A) fuse in the under- continuity betWeen body ground and secondary
dash fuse/relay box. H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No.3 and
No.4 individually.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair short in the wire between the

secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the No. 31G1 ACG
(15 A) fuse. Also replace the No. 31G1 ACG (15 A)
fuse, then go to step 23.

connector.
= =
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Go to step 10.
11-126 BACK
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 15. Check for continuity between PCM connector
11. Measure voltage between secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4. PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
I S02SHTC (BLK/WHT)
III II
111/34151/76191
1/11 12 1311411511617 161/
~ 202122 >< 232425
262726VI30131132333435 •
1361/:/1/14014142431441
.Q
=
Is there battery voltage? YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(84) and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to
YES-Go to step 12. step 23.
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Measure voltage between secondary H02S
(Sensor 2) 4P connector terminal No.3 and body
13. Jump theSCS line with the HDS. ground.
14. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). SECONDARY H02S (SENSOR 2) 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 17.

secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the No. 31G1 ACG
(15 A) fuse, then go to step 23.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-127
PGM'!'FI System
17. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 22. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-245).
24. Tlu;n the ignition switch ON (II).
20. Connect secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 4P connector
terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper wire. 25. Reset the PCM with the HDS.


S02SHTC (BLK/WHT)
JUMPER WIRE the PCM, then go to step 1.
= NO-Go to step 28.

-Wire side of female terminals
terminal B4 and body ground. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

I S02SHTC (BLK/WHT) Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 27,
III II go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.•
111/34151/78191
V 11 121311411511617 18VI NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
• 120 21 22 >< 2324251 connections or loose terminals at the secondary
12627 28V130131 132 33 34 351 •
H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
I36V:/VI40141 42 431441
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
until a result comes on.
Q
=
YES-Go to step 29.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (B4)

and the secondary H02S (Sensor 2), then go to step
23.
11-128 BACK


the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a
NO-Go to step 33.


Temporary DTCs or DTCswe~e indicated in step 32,

H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the PCMwas
go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
BACK 11-129
,':, .
PGM~FI System
OTC P0171: Fuel System Too Lean 3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
OTC P0172: Fuel System Too Rich radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
NOTE: 4. Check for these conditions:

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general • ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 "F (70 'C)
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Transmission in Park or neutral
• If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the • All electrical loads off
same time as DTC P0171 and/or P0172, troubleshoot
those DTCs first, then recheck for P0171 and/or P0172. 5. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED inthe DATA LIST with
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass airflow (MAF) sensor the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm.
P0133, P1172, P2AOO: Air fuel ratio (NF) sensor Once the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator
(Sensor 1) pedal steady for more than 10 seconds.
P0139: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
P0141: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) heater Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm from
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system 2,500 rpm?
1. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-365). YES-Repeat step 5.
Is the fuel pressure OK? NO-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to step 2. 6. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, check
the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
NO-Repair the cause, then go to step 7.
Is there about 7.8- 11.2 gm/s?
2. Check for vacuum or air leaks at these parts:
YES-Check the engine valve clearances and adjust
• PCVvalve if necessary (see page 6-9). Ifthe valve clearances
• PCV hose are OK, replace the injectors (see page 11-243),
• EVAP canister purge valve then go to step 7.
• Throttle body
• Intake air duct (air flow tube) NO-Replace the MAF sensor/lAT sensor 1
• Intake manifold (see page 11-247), then go to step 7.
• Turbocharger
• Intake air duct (turbocharger outlet pipe)
• Intake air duct (charge air cooler inlet hose)
• Brake booster
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Repair or replace parts with leaks, then go to

step 7.
11-130 BACK

• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 "F (70 'C)

• Drive at a steady speed between 15-75 mph
(20-120 km/h)
NOTE: DTC P0171 and/or P0172 may take upto

80 minutes of test driving to set. Using the HDS,
monitor the air fuel feed back average (AF FB AVE).
If the air fuel feed back average stays within 0.80-
1.25, there is no problem at this time.
12. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with theHDS.
Is DTC P0171 or P0172 indicated?
YES-Go to step 1.

BACK 11-131
PGM-FI System
DTC P0300: Random Misfire and Any 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Combination of the Following:
DTC P0301: No.1 Cylinder Misfire Detected
DTC P0302: No.2 Cylinder Misfire Detected or neutral).
DTC P0303: No.3 Cylinder Misfire Detected 4. Monitor the OBDSTATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
DTC P0304: No.4 Cylinder Misfire Detected
• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A YES-Go to step 9.
• AfT low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301
• AfT pressure hose 07406-0020201 NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, goto step 5. If
• AfT pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
• AfT pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120 a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
• Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200 CONDITION, wait for several minutes, then recheck.
NOTE: 5. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general for 10 minutes with the HDS.
• If the misfire is frequent enough to trigger detection Does the CyLt MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
of increased emissions during two consecutive MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire
driving cycles, the MIL will come on, and DTC P0300 counts?
(and some of the combination of P0301 through
P0304) will be stored. YES-Go to step 9.
• If the misfire is frequent enough to damage the
catalyst, the MIL will flash whenever the misfire NO-Go to step 6.
occurs, and DTC P0300 (and some of the combination
of P0301 through P0304) will be stored. When the 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
misfire stops, the MIL will remain on. range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the
same time as the random misfire DTCs, troubleshoot • ENGINE SPEED
those DTCs first, then recheck for random misfire • VSS
DTCs (Because parts can sometimes fail without • REL TP SENSOR
setting DTCs, you should also do a physical • CLV (calculated load value)
inspection of the systems listed below.): • APPSENSOR
P0101, P0102, P0103: Mass air flow (MAF) sensor 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0171, P0172: Fuel system P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
P0365, P0369: Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B
P0506, P0507: Idle control system Does the screen indicate FAILED?
P2646, P2647, P2648, P2649: VTEC system
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If

a result comes on. if the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.
11-132 BACK
8. Check the CYl1 MISFIRE, CYl2 MISFIRE, CYl3 14. Check the fuel pressure (see page 11-365).
MISFIRE, and/or CYl4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
for 10 minutes with the HDS. Is the fuel pressure OK?
Does the CyLt MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 YES-Go to step 15.
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire
counts? NO-Repair the faulty part(s), then go to step 24.
YES-Go to step 9. 15. Start the engine; Hold the engine speed at
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
time .•
16. Check for these conditions:
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF ..
10. Check the fuel quality. • Transmission in Park or neutral
• All electrical loads off
Is the quality good?
17. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with
YES-Go to step 11. the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm.
Once the engine speed is met, hold the accelerator
NO-Drain the tank and fill with a known-good fuel, pedal steady for more than 10 seconds.
then go to step 24.
Did the engine speed vary more than 100 rpm from
11. Inspect the spark plugs (see page 4-22). If the spark 2,500 rpm?
plugs are fouled or worn, replace them.
YES-Repeat step 17.
12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutesin the
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: NO-Go to step 18.
• ENGINE SPEED 18. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, check
• VSS the MAF SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
• REl TP SENSOR
• ClV (calculated load value) Is there about 7.8- 11.2 gm/s?
• APPSENSOR
YES-Go to step 19.
13. Check the CYl1 MISFIRE, CYl2 MISFIRE, CYl3
MISFIRE, and/or CYl4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1
for 10 minutes with the HDS. (see page 11-247), then go to step 24.
Does the CYLt MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3

counts?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 24.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-133
PGM-FI System
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 24. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
20. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A), and 25. Reset the PCM with the HOS.
install the special tools as shown, then install the
rocker arm oil pressure switch on the pressure 26. Clear the CKP pattern with the HOS.
gauge attachment (B).
NOTE: Install the rocker arm oil pressure switch in
the reverse order of removal with a new O-ring. 28. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
07406-0070301 07406-0020201 or 29. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
07MAJ-PY4011A and
07MAJ-PY40120 range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
A • REl TP SENSOR
22N·m • ClV (calculated load value)
(2.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft) • APPSENSOR
/s DTe P0300, P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304

indicated?
YES.,....Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at the ignition coil, the injector, and the
PCM, then go to troubleshooting DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 (see page 11-135).
NO-Go to step 31.
21. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch2P 31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
connector. P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
22. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Does the screen indicate PASSED?
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. YE$-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
23. Check the oil pressure at engine speeds of go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.•
1,000 rpm and 2,000 rpm.
NO-If the screen indicates FAilED, go to step 1
/s the oil pressure be/ow 49 kPa (0.5 kgflcrrf, and recheck. If the screen indicates EXECUTING,
7 psi)? keep driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 29 and
YES-Check for air in the fuel line, then go to step recheck.
24.
NO-Inspect the VTEC system, then go to step 24.
11-134 BACK
OTe P0301: No.1 Cylinder Misfire Detected 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
OTe P0302: No.2 Cylinder Misfire Detected
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 8. If
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. for 10 minutes with the HDS.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park Does the CYU MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
or neutral). MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire
counts?
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,
P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS. YES-Go to step 9.
Does the screen indicate FAILED? NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for loose wires or poor connections in
YES-Go to step 9. the fuel system circuit.•
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 5. If 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
the screen indicates EXECUTING, let the engine
idle until a result comes on. Ifthe screen indicates 10. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7), and
OUT OF CONDITION, wait for several minutes, and the injector cover, then reinstall the charge air
recheck. cooler.
5. Check the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 11. Start the engine, and listen for a clicking sound at
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST the injector of the problem cylinder.
for 10 minutes with the HDS.
Does the injector click?
Does the CYU MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire YES-Go to step 12.
counts?
NO-Go to step 42 ..
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 6.

• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• REL TP SENSOR
• CLV (calculated load value)
• APPSENSOR
• GEAR POSITION
(cont'd)
BACK 11-135
PGM~FI System
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 20. Check the CYl1 MISFIRE, CYl2 MISFIRE, CYl3
MISFIRE, and/or CYl4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
13. Exchange the ignition coil from the problem for 10 minutes with the HDS.
cylinder with one from another cylinder.
Does the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
14. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire
range ofthese recorded freeze data parameters: counts?
• ENGINE SPEED YES-Go to step 21.

• VSS
• REL TP SENSOR NO-Intermittent misfire due to spark plug fouling
• ClV (calculated load value) (no misfire at this time) .•
• APPSENSOR
• GEAR POSITION 21. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
15. Check the CYl1 MISFIRE, CYl2 MISFIRE, CYl3 Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the
MISFIRE, and/or CYl4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST spark plug was exchanged?
YES-Replace the faulty spark plug, then go to step
Does the CYL 1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3 60.
counts? NO-Go to step 22.
NO-Intermittent misfire due to poor contact at the 23. Exchange the injector from the problem cylinder
ignition coil connector. (no misfire at this time). with one from the another cylinder.
Make sure the coil connections are secure .•
24. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes.
16. Determine which cylinder had the misfire.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
ignition coil was exchanged?
• ENGINE SPEED
YES-Replace the faulty ignition coil (see page • VSS
4-20), then go to step 60. • REl TP SENSOR
• ClV (calculated load value)
NO-Go to step 17. • APPSENSOR
• GEAR POSITION
26. Check the CYl1 MISFIRE, CYl2MISFIRE, CYl3
18. Exchange the spark plug from the problem cylinder MISFIRE, and/or CYl4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST
with one from another cylinder. for 10 minutes with the HDS.
19. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the Does the CYL1 MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire
counts?
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS YES-Go to step 27.
• REl TP SENSOR
• ClV (calculated load value) NO-Intermittent misfire due to bad contact at the
• APPSENSOR injector connector (no misfire at this time). Check
• GEAR POSITION for poor connections or loose terminals at the
injector.•
11-136 BACK
27. Determine which cylinder had the misfire. 32. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the misfire occur in the cylinder where the 33. Check for continuity between ignition coil 3P
injector was exchanged? connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
YES-Replace the faulty injector (see page 11-243), IGNmON COil 3P CONNECTOR
then go to step 60.
NO-Go to step 28. GND (BlK)

2
28. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 3
29. Disconnect the ignition coil 3P connector from the
problem cylinder. Q
31. Measure voltage between ignition coil 3P
IGNmON COil 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 34.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ignition

coil and G101 (see page 22-18), then go to step 60.
YES-Go to step 32.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ignition

coil and the ignition coil relay, then go to step 60.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-137
PGM-FI System
34. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 38. Check for continuity between appropriate ignition
coil 3P connector terminal No.1 and the
35. Jump the SCS linewith theHDS. appropriate PCM connector terminal of the
problem cylinder (see table). '
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE
37. Check for continuity between body ground and the CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
appropriate PCM connector terminal of the No.1 P0301 C15 YELJGRN
problem cylinder (see table). No.2 P0302 C16 BLU/RED
No.3 P0303 C17 WHT/BLU
PROBLEM DTC PCM WIRE No.4 P0304 C18 BRN
CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 P0301 C15 YELJGRN IGNITION COIL 3P CONNECTOR
No.2 P0302 C16 BLU/RED IGPLS
No.3 P0303 C17 WHT/BLU
No.4 P0304 C18 BRN 2
3
IGPLS2(BLU/RED) IGPLS3(WHT/BLU) Wire side of female terminals
IGPLS1 (VEL/GRN) IGPLS4(BRN) , PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
IGPLS2.(BLU/RED) .'
IGPLS3(WHT/BLU)
,
IGPLS1 (VEL/GRN) IGPLS4 (BRN)

1112 3 415~6 rr 8191
I" 10 11 121311411511617 18 191 I
20 2122 >< 231/251

~ 2627 2il 291301311321/1/1/1 I,
1361/ 36 39140 141 42 431441
nn nn Terminal side of female terminals
Terminal side offemale terminals Is there continuity?
Is there continuity? YES-Go to step 39.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
and the ignition coil, then go to step 60. the ignition coil, then go to step 60.
NO-Go to step 38.
11-138 BACK
39. Reconnect all connectors •. 46. Measure voltage between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal of the
40. Do an engine compression and a cylinder leakdown problem cylinder (see table).
test (see page 6-6).
Did the engine pass both tests? CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 P0301 C5 BRN
YES-Go to step 41. No.2 P0302 C6 RED
No.3 P0303 C7 BLU
NO-Repair the engine, then go to step 60. No.4 P0304 C8 VEL
41. Do the VTEC rocker arm test (see page 6-7). PCM'CONNECTOR C 144PI
.--_ _ _ _-:I:.:.;N:=;J2=-I:;..:R=ED::.;1 INJ31BLUI
Did the engine pass the test? INJ11BRNI
YES-Go to step 42.
NO-Repair the VTEC rocker arm (see page 6-38),

then go to step 60.
44. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). Terminal side of female terminals
45. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 54.
NO-Go to step 47.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-139
PGM-FI System
47. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 52. Check for continuity between body ground and the
appropriate PCM connector terminal of the
48. Disconnect the injector 2P connector from the problem cylinder (see table).
problem cylinder.
49. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 P0301 C5 BRN
50. Measure voltage between injector 2P connector No.2 P0302 C6 RED
terminal No.1 and body ground .. No.3 P0303 C7 BLU
No.4 P0304 C8 VEL
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
INJ2 (RED)
INJ1 (BRN)
Is there battery voltage? Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Repair open in the wire between the injector YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
and PGM-FI main relay 1 (C), then go to step 60. and the injector, then go to step 60.
51. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO-Go to step 53.
11-140 BACK
53. Check for continuity between appropriate injector 54. At the injector side, measure resistance between
2P connector terminal No.2 and the appropriate injector 2P connectorfermiilals No.1 and No.2.
PCM connector terminal ofthe problem cylinder
(see table). INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR

CYLINDER TERMINAL COLOR
No.1 P0301 C5 BRN
No.2 P0302 C6 RED
No.3 P0303 C7 BLU
No.4 P0304 C8 VEL
INJECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
Is there 10- 13 Q ?
YES-Go to step 55.
PCM NO-Replace the injector (see page 11-243), then

CONNECTOR
C(44P) go to step 60.
55. Substitute a known-good injector into the problem

cylinder.
Terminal side offemale terminals 56. Reconnect all connectors.
Is there continuity? 57. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes.
YES-Go to step 54. 58. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and
the injector, then go to step 60. • ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• REl TP SENSOR
• ClV (calculated, load value)
• APPSENSOR
• GEAR POSITION
(cont'd)
BACK 11-141
PGM-FI System
59. Check the CYl1 MISFIRE, CYl2 MISFIRE, CYl3 69. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P030.1, P0302,
MISFIRE, and/or CYl4 MISFIRE in the DATA LIST P0303, or P0304 in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the CYLt MISFIRE, CYL2 MISFIRE, CYL3
MISFIRE, and/or CYL4 MISFIRE show misfire YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
counts? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 68,
YES-Go to step 70.
NO-If the screen indicates FAilED, check for poor
NO-Replace the original injector (see page 11-243), connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil,
then go to step 60. the injector, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
60. Turn the ignition switch OFF. result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
CONDITION, go to step 67.
62. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
64. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS. range ofthese recorded freeze data parameters:
65. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). • ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
66. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4). • REl TP SENSOR
67. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the • APPSENSOR
range of these recorded freeze data parameters: • GEAR POSITION
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
• REl TP SENSOR
• APPSENSOR
• GEAR POSITION
Is DTC P0301, P0302, P0303,or P0304

indicated?

PCM, then go to troubleshooting DTC P0300, P0301,
P0302, P0303, or P0304 (see page 11-132).
NO-Go to step 69.
11-142 BACK
Is ore P0301, P0302, P0303, or P0304

indicated?

NO-Go to step 73.
73. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0301, P0302,



connections or loose terminals at the ignition coil,
the injector, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
1.lfthe screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
OF CONDITION, go to step 71.
BACK 11-143
PGM-FI System
DTC P0325: Knock Sensor Circuit Malfunction 10.' Check for continuity between PCM connector
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general PCM CONNECTOR C 144P)
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed between

4. Hold the engine speed between 3,000-4,000 rpm =

for at least 10 seconds. Terminal side of female terminals
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there continuity?
Is DTC P0325 indicated? YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(C42) and the knock sensor, then go to step 14.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 11.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 11. Connect the knock sensor 1P connector terminal to
at the knock sensor and the PCM .• body ground with a.jumper wire.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. KNOCKSENSOR1PCONNECTOR
8. Disconnect the knock sensor 1P connector

(see page 11-250). LpKS IRED/BLUI
9. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). }'UMPER WIRE
=
11-144 BACK
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 20. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0325 in the
terminal C42 and body ground. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) Does the screen indicate PASSED?


connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
= 21. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

Terminal side of female terminals software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
22. Hold the engine speed between 3,000-4,000 rpm
YES-Go to step 13. for at least 10 seconds.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM 23. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
(C42) and the knock sensor, then go to step 14.
13. Replace the knock sensor (see page 11-250).
14. Reconnect all connectors. terminals at the knock sensor~and the PCM. If the
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (see page 11-8), then go to step 22. Ifthe PCM was
NO-Go to step 24.
18. Hold the engine speed between 3,000-4,000 rpm DTCs MENU with the HDS.
for at least 10 seconds.
Is DTC P0325 indicated? complete. Ifthe PCM was substituted, replace the
YES-Go to step 21. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 23,
NO-Go to step 20.
connections or loose terminals at the knock sensor
and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 1.1-8), then go to step
22. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 22.
BACK 11-145
PGM-FI System
DTC P033S: CKP Sensor No Signal 9. Measure voltage between CKP sensor 3P connector
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general CKPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. =
Is DTC P0335 indicated? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 5.
Is there about 5 V?
at the CKP sensor and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 11.
10. Measure voltage between CKP sensor 3P connector
6. Disconnect the CKP sensor 3P connector. terminals No.1 and No.3.
7. Turn tl:leignition switch ON (II). CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

8. Measure voltage between CKP sensor 3P connector
CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR IGP (VEL/BLK) LG (BRN/VEL)
= Is there battery voltage?
Wire side of female terminals YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CKP

Is there battery voltage? sensor and G101 (see page 22-18), then go to step
19.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the CKP

sensor and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 19.
11-146 BACK
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 16. Check for continuity between PCM connector
13. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). -,\
1\ 1 \ 2 3 4 \s \ 6 7 8 9\
terminal C32 and body ground. " \
10 \11
~ I20121
1213\14\15\16 17 18 19 I
22 ::::>< 23 1/ 25
I
I26127 28 29130 131132 1/ 1/ 1/
1136 1/ 38 39140 141 42 43 441
CKP (BLU)
Q
=
YES-Go to step 26.

=
Terminal side of female terminals NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(C32) and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19.
(C32) and the CKP sensor, then go to step 19. 18. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-246).
NO-Go to step 15. 19. Reconnect all connectors.
15. Connect CKP sensor 3P connector terminal No.2 to 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
CKP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
22. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
CKP (BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
=
(cont'd)
BACK 11-147
PGM-FI System
24. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (seepage 11-4).

terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.


YES-Check for poor connections br loose

terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM. If the

11-148 BACK
DTC P0339: CKP Sensor Intermittent 8. Remove the cam chain case (see page 6-13), and
Interruption check for damage on the CKP sensor pulser plate.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is the pulser plate damaged?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Replace the CKP sensor pulser plate
NO-Go to step 9.
3. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
10. Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-246).
4. Check the CKP NOISE count in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Are 0 counts indicated? 12. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 7. 13. Clear the CKP pattern with the HDS.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 15. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11,4).
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
6. Check the CKP NOISE count in the DATA LIST with Is DTe P0339 indicated?
the HDS.
Are 0 counts indicated? terminals at the CKP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
atthe CKP sensor and the PCM .•
7. Check for poor or loose connections and terminals

at these locations:
• CKP sensor
• PCM
• Engine ground
• Body ground
Are the connections and terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to

step 11.
BACK 11-149
PGM-FI System
DTC P0365: CMP Sensor B No Signal 9. Measure voltage between CMP sensor B 3P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general CKP SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR
4. Check for Temporary DTCsor DTCs with the HDS. =

/s DTC P0365 indicated? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 5.
/s there about 5 V?
at CMP sensor B and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 11.
10. Measure voltage between CMP sensor 3P
6. Disconnect the CMP sensor B 3P connector. connector terminals No.2 and No.3.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). CKP SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR
8. Measure voltage between CMP sensor B 3P

CKP SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR
= /s there battery voltage?
NO-Repair open in the wire between CMP sensor

/s there battery voltage? Band G101 (see page 22-18), then go to step 18.
YES-Go to step 9.

Band PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 18.
11-150 BACK
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Check for continuity between CMP sensor B 3P
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. terminal C31.
13. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). CMP SENSOR B 3P CONNECTOR

PCM CONNECTOR C (44PI
Ir II
11 2 3 41616 7 8191 .Q
10 11 121311411511617 18 19 I
20 21 22 >< 23V 25
• 26 27 28 29130131132VV V I
, 136 V 38 39140 41 42 431441
CMPB(GRNI
Terrninal side of female terminals
.Q
Terminal side of female terminals YES-Go to step 23.
Is there continuity? NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(C31) and CMP sensor B, then go to step 18.
(C31) and CMP sensor B, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 15.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-151
PGM-FI System
17. Replace CMP sensor B (see page 11-246).
20. Reset the PCM with the HDS ..

terminals at CMP sensor B and the PCM, then go to
step 1.



terminals at CMP sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM

11-152 BACK
DTC P0369: CMP Sensor B Circuit Intermittent 8. Check for damage on the CMP sensor B pulser
Interruption plate (see page 6-34).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record aU freeze data Is the pulser plate damaged?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Replace the CMP sensor B pulser plate
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Replace CMP sensor B (see page 11-246).
4. Check the CMP NOISE B COUNT in the DATA LIST
with the HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Are acounts indicated? 12. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 7. 13. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
NO-Go to step 5. 14. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at CMP sensor B and the PCM, then go to
6. Check the CMP NOISE B COUNT in the DATA LIST step 1.
with the HDS.
Are acounts indicated? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
YES-Go to step 7.

at CMP sensor B and the PCM .•

at these locations:
• CMP sensor B
• PCM
• Engine ground
• Body ground
YES-Go to step 8.

step 11.
BACK 11-153
PGM-FI System
DTC P050A: Cold Start Idle Air Control 6. Let the engine cool until-the value of ECT SENSOR
System Performance Problem 1 is 122 "F (50 "C) or less.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record a" freeze data 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 8. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds or more.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON ("). 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the
Are any Temporary OTCs or OTCs other than
P050A indicated? YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen
NO-Go to step 3. indicates EXECUTING, let the engine idle until a
3. Check for poor connections or blockage at the air CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.
intake duct.
10. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
Is it OK? the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4. Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL

VALVE normal?
NO-Reconnect or repair the air intake duct, then
go to step 20. YES-Go to step 11.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing. NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-396),
then go to step 20.
Is it OK?
YES-Go to step 5, 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
NO-Replace the air cleaner housing (see page
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element.
Is it dirty?
YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove

the debris (see page 11-395), then go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 6.
11-154 BACK
12. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with 20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
the HDS, and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm
for at least 30 seconds. 21. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
13. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, check 22. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
23. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
Is there about 7.8-11.2 gm/s? 1 is 122 'f (50 "C) or less.
YES-Go to step 14. 24. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds or
more.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1
(see page 11-247), then go to step 20. 25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DrCs with the HPS.
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is DTC P050A indicated?
15. Allow the engine to cool to ambient temperature. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT
16. Note the ambient temperature. sensor 1, and the PCM, then go to step,1.
17. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO-Go to step 26.
18. Note the value of IAT SENSOR quickly in the DATA 26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050A in the
LIST with the HDS. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
19. Compare the value ofthe IAT SENSOR and the Does the screen indicate PASSED?
ambient temperature.
Does the value of the IAT SENSOR differ 5.4 OF Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 25,
(3°C) or more? go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
YES-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
(see page 11-247), then go to step 20. connections or loose terminals at the throttle body,
the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1, and the PCM, then go
NO-Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the to step 1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
throttle bore. If there is dirt or carbon, clean the idling until a result comes on. If the screen
throttle body (see page 11-394), then go to step 20. indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 23.
If there is damage in the throttle bore, replace the
throttle body (see page 11-396), then go to step 20.
BACK 11-155
PGM-FI System
DTC P050B: Cold Start Ignition Timing 6. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
Control System Performance Problem 1 is 122 "F (50 "C) or less.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 8. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds or more.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs other than
P050B indicated? YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
NO-Go to step 3. . indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
3. Check for poor connections or blockage at the air CONDITION, go to step 6 and recheck.
intake duct.
10. Inspect the ignition timing (see page 4-19).
Is it OK?
Is the ignition timing OK?
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Reconnect or repair the air intake duct, then
go to step 25. NO-Go to step 11.
4. Check for damage at the air cleaner housing. 11. Check for damage at the CKP sensor (see page
11-246) and the CKP sensor pulser plate (see page
Is it OK? 6-26).
YES-Go to step 5. Is the CKP sensor and/or the CKP sensor pulser
plate damaged?
NO,-Replace the aireleaner housing (see page
11-394), then go to step 25. YES-Replace the CKP sensor (see page 11-246)
and/or the CKP sensor pulser plate (see page 6-26),
5. Check for dirt or debris in the air cleaner element. then go to step 26.
Is it dirty? NO-Go to step 32.
YES-Replace the air cleaner element or remove

the debris (see page 11-395), then go to step 25.
NO-Go to step 6.
11-156 BACK
12. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with 24. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
the HDS. ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
SENSOR 2 and the ambient temperature
Is the THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL individually.
VALVE normal?
Does either sensor differ more than 5.4 of (3°C)
YES-Go to step 13. from the ambient temperature?
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-396), YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than
then go to step 25. 5.4 ~ (3 OC) from the ambient temperature, then go
to step 25.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the NO-Check and repair any problems with the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. following items, then go to step 25.
14. Monitor the ENGINE SPEED in the DATA LIST with • Engine compression and cylinder leakdown
the HDS,and hold the engine speed at 2,500 rpm • VTEC system
for at least 30 seconds. • Engine oil
• AlC system
15. While holding the engine speed at 2,500 rpm, check • Power steering
Is there about 7.8- 11.2 gmls?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Replace the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1·
(see page 11-247), then go to step 25. 28. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
1 is 122 ~ (50 OC) or less.
29. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds or more.
17. Drain the coolant (see page 10-7).
18. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-249), and ECT
sensor 2 (see page 11-250). Is DTC P050B indicated?
19. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
20. Note the ambient temperature. MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1, ECT sensor 1, ECT
sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
21. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, and ECT
sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do not install them NO-Go to step 31.
on the engine or the radiator.
23. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR

2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-157
PGM-FI System
31. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the 36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P050B in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Temporary DTCs or DTCswere indicated in step 30, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.• original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor,
the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1, NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED,checkforpoor
ECT sensor 1, ECTsensor 2, and the PCM, then go connections or loose terminals at the CKP sensor,
to step 1.lfthe screen indicates EXECUTING, keep the throttle body, the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1,
idling until a result comes on. If the screen ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM. If the
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 28. PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
(see page 11-8), then go to step 33. Ifthe PCM was
32. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If
good PCM (see page 11-8). the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to
step 33.
33. Let the engine cool until the value of ECT SENSOR
1 is 122 "F (50 "C) or less.
34. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 seconds or more.
Is DTe P050B indicated?

terminals at the CKP sensor, the throttle body, the
MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1, ECT sensor 1, ECT
sensor 2, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
1.
NO-Go to step 36.
11-158 BACK
DTe P0562: Charging System Low Voltage 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: 8. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
• If any high current load accessories are installed, this 10. Start the engine.
DTC can be set.
• If DTC P16BB and/or P16BC is stored atthe same time 11. Check under these conditions:
as DTC P0562, troubleshoot DTC P16BB and/or P16BC
first, then recheck for DTC P0562. • AlC on
• Temperature control at maximum cool
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Blower fan at maximum speed
• Rear window defogger on
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. • Headlights on high beam
3. Start the engine. 12. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or
neutral) for 1 minute.
4. Check under these conditions:
• AlC on
• Temperature control at maximum cool Is DTC P0562 indicated?
• Blower fan at maximum speed
• Rear window defogger on YES-Check for poor connections or loose
• Headlights on high beam terminals at the alternator and the under-hood
fuse/relay box, then go to step 1.
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or
neutral) for 1 minute. NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), then

goto step 7.

at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
and check the battery performance (see page
22-63) .•
BACK 11-159
PGM~FI System
Ole Troubleshooting (cont'd)

DTC P0563: PCM Power Source Circuit 10. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
Unexpected Voltage A6 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data PCM CONNECTOR A (44PI
and any on"board snapshot, and review the general MRLV.(GRN) I
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). C", II. II
1/ 2 / 4 1 5 1 6 , / 8191.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10V 12 13114115116 17 18 191
20121
22 >< 23 241251 •
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. ~ 26127/29V131V33 341351'
136 37 38 39140V 42 43 441
4. Wait 10 seconds.
=
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Terminal side of female terminals
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there battery voltage?
Is DTC P0563 indicated? YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Go to step 7. NO-Go to step 11.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) from the under-
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals hood fuse/relay box.
at PGM-FI main relay 1 and the PCM .•
11-160 BACK
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 14. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
terminal A6 and body ground. A8 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

MRLY(GRN} I IGP(ORN}
If II
V2/41516/8191.
• 110V 1213114/15/1617 18 191
120121 22 >-S 23 24 25/
~ 126127/291/131)/ 33 34 351 I
1136 37 36 391401/42 431441
Q
= =
Is there continuity? Is there battery voltage?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
(A6) and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step 16. the PCM(A8) and PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to
step 16.
NO-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 15.
13. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) from the under-
hood fuse/relay box. 15. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-64).
Is PGM~FI main relay 10K?
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 1, then go to step

16.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-161
" ,':1
PGM-FI System
19. Do the PCM Jdlelearn procedure (see page 11-339).
21. Wait 10 seconds.

terminals at PGM-FI main relay 1 and the PCM, then
go to step 1.



terminals at PGM-FI main relay 1 and the PCM. If
the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was

11-162 BACK
DTC P0602: PCM Programming Error DTC P0606: PCM Processor Malfunction
NOTE: NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• This DTC is indicated when a PCM update is not 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
completed.
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before
completion, the PCM can be damaged. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Do the PCM update procedure (see page 11-7). 4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 5. Wait 40 seconds.
Is DTC P0602 indicated? 6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-252). Is DTC P0606 indicated?
• YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Update is complete.•
time .•

10. Wait 40 seconds.
11 .. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-


BACK 11-163
PGM-FI System
DTC P060A: PCM (AfT system) Internal DTC P062F: PCM Internal Control Module
Control Module Malfunction Keep Alive Memory (KAM) Error
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record al\ freeze data. NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record al\ freeze data
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (I\). 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Is OTC P060A indicated? Are any Temporary OTCs or OTCs indicated?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time .• time .•
4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest 4. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8). good PCM (see page 11-8).
Is OTC P060A indicated? Is OTC P062F indicated?
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM
was substituted, go to step 1. was substituted, go to step 1.
NO-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is NO-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
11-164 BACK
DTC P0630: VIN Not Programmed or 8. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
Mismatch
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and YES-Go to step 9.
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
troubleshooting information (see page. 11-3). NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
• This OTC is stored only when the PCM does not have time.•
the VIN information ofthe vehicle. Use the HOS to
inputthe missing VIN information. 9. Update thePCM if it does not have the latest
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). good PCM (see page 11-8).
2. Check the VIN with the HOS. 10. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
Does the HDS show the vehicle's VIN? Is DTC P0630 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5. YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-

NO-Go to step 3. was substituted, go to step 1.
3. Input the VIN to the PCM with the HOS. NO-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Does the screen show COMPLETE? original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
Temporary OTCs or OTCsare indicated, go to the
YES-Go to step 5. indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check for OTCs with the HOS.
YES-Go to the OTC P0603 troubleshooting.•
NO-Go to step 9.

5 seconds.
BACK 11-165
PGM-FI System
DTC P0685: PCM Power Control Circuit! 9. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Internal Circuit Malfunction software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 10. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds .
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF .
• If the problem doesn't return after you clear the DTC,
or if this DTC is stored intermittently, check for loose 12. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds.
terminals atthe IGP line connectors before replacing
the PCM. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
3. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds. Is orc P0685 indicated?
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 10. Ifthe
5. Start the engine, then let it idle for 30 seconds. PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
Is orc P0685 indicated?
YES-Go to step 9.

time.•
11-166 BACK
OTe P0720: Output Shaft (Countershaft) 6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the AT
Speed Sensor Circuit Malfunction SYSTEM menu with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is DTC P0722 indicated?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0722 in the AT
system (see page 14-107).
NO- If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
2. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the AT good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 4. If the
SYSTEM menu with the HDS. PCM was substituted, check for poor connections
or loose terminals at the output shaft (countershaft)
Is DTC P0722 indicated? speed sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0722 in the AT 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0720 in the
system (see page 14-107). DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 3. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
3. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
good PCM (see page 11-8). original PCM (see page 11-252).•
4. Test-drive under these conditions: NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the output shaft
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 176 "F (80 "C) (counters haft) speed sensor and the PCM. Ifthe
• Transmission in D position PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
• ENGINE SPEED between 2,000-4,500 rpm (see page 11-8), then go to step 4. If the PCM was
• Drive for several minutes, then decelerate (with substituted, go to step 1. Ifthe screen indicates
throttle fully closed) for 5 seconds or more NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4.
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI

SYSTEM with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 7.
BACK 11-167
PGM-FI System
DTC P11 09: BARO Sensor Circuit Out of DTC P1116: ECT Sensor 1 Circuit Rangel
Range High Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data NOTE:

and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
troubleshooting information (see page'11-3). anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
1. Reset the PCM with the HDS. • If DTC P0111 is stored at the same time as DTC P1116,
troubleshoot DTC P0111 first, then recheck for DTC
2. Start the engine. P1116.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2.
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 2.
time.• NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to
step 27.
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with theHDS.
Are orc P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same
Is orc P1109 indicated? time?
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- YES-Go to step 15.
was substituted, go to step 1. NO-Go to step 4.
NO-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 4. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes.
original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other 5. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the HDS.
Is about 127 of (53°C) or less indicated?
YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-249), then

go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 6.
8. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-249).
9. Allow ECT sensor 1 to cool to ambient temperature.
11-168 BACK
11. Connect ECT sensor 1 to its 2P connector, but do 19. Turn the ignition.switch OFF.
not install it on the engine.
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-249) and ECT
13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 quickly in the sensor 2 (see page 11-250).
22. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature.
14. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
ambient temperature. 23. Note the ambient temperature.
Does the value of ECT SENSOR 1 differ 5.4 of 24. Connect ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 their 2P
(3°C) or more? connector, but do not install them on the engine or
the radiator.
go to step 27. 25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR
2 quickly in the'DATA LIST with the HDS.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 26. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the
at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM.• ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
15. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes. individually.
16. Check ECT SENSOR 1 in the DATA LIST with the Does one of the sensors differ more than 5.4 of
HDS. (3°C) from the ambient temperature?
Is about 127 of (53°C) or lessindicated? YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than
5.4"F (3 "C) from the ambient temperature.
YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (seepage 11-249), then
go to step 27. • ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-249)
• ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-250)
NO-Go to step 17.
NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK atthis
17. Letthe engine idle 10 minutes. time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM.•
HDS.
Is about 124 of (51°C) or less indicated?

go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 19.
(conrd)
BACK 11-169
':,-
PGM-FI System
27. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DTC P1128: MAP Sensor Si.gnal LowerThan
Expected
NOTE:
29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11~339). • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
• Before starting this troubleshooting check for poor
Is DTC P1116 indicated? connections or blockage at the. air intake duct.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
PCM, then go to step 1. 2. Compare the value of the MAP SENSOR and the
TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR in the DATA
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other LIST with theHDS.
Tempor..ary DTCs or DTCs are indicated; go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• Does the value differ more than 26.7 kpa
(7.9 in.Hg, 200mmHg)?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Note the value of MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST

with the HDS.
5. Check the. MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Does the MAP SENSOR change 0.67 kpa

(0.2 in.Hg, 5 mmHg) or more?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 10.
7. Startthe engine. Hold the engine speed at

(,
• Engine speed above 1,750 rpm

• REL TP SENSOR above 22 deg
• Drive 5 seconds or more
11-170 BACK
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1128 in the DTC P1129: MAP Sensor Signal Higher Than
DTCs MENU with the HDS. Expected
Does the screen indicate FAILED? NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data.
YES-Go to step 10. and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP 1. Check for vacuum or air leaks in these parts:
sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 7 and recheck. • PCVvalve
• PCV hose
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. • EVAP canister purge valve
• Throttle body
11. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-247). • Intake air duct (air flow tube)
• Intake manifold
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Brake booster
13. Reset the PCM with the HDS. • Turbocharger
14. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). • Intake air duct (turbocharger outlet pipe)
15. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at • Intake air duct (charge air cooler inlet hose)
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the • Intake air duct (charge air cooler outlet tube)
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for • Turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve
10 seconds. • Pressure regulator
16. Test-drive under these conditions: Are there any vacuum or air leaks?
• Engine speed above 1,750 rpm YES-Repair or replace parts with vacuum or air
• Transmission in D position leaks, then go to step 9.
• Drive 5 seconds or more NO-Go to step 2.
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Is ore P1128 indicated? 3. Compair the value of the MAP SENSOR and
YES-Check for poor connections or loose TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR in the DATA
terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go LIST with the HDS.
to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18. Does the value differ more than 26.7 kPa
(7.9 in.Hg, 200 mmHg)?
DTCs MENU with the HDS. YES-Go to step 11.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? NO-Go to step 4.

connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
(cont'd)
BACK 11-171
PGM-FI System
4. Note the value of MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
with the HDS.
12. Replace the MAP sensor (see page 11-2(7).
6. Check the MAP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. 14. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
Does the MAP SENSOR change 0.67 kpa 15. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
(0.2 in.Hg, 5 mmHg) or more?
YES-Go to step 7. 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
NO-Go to step 11,.
8. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at • Transmission in D position
3000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the • REL TP SENSOR above 22 deg
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. • Drive 5 seconds or more
9. Test-drive under these conditions: 18. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• Engine speed above 1,750 rpm Is DTC P1129 indicated?

• REL TP SENSOR above 22 deg YES-Check for poor connections or loose
• Drive 5 seconds or more terminals at the MAP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1.
10. Monitor the OBDSTATUSforDTC P1129 inthe
DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO-Go to step 19.
Does the screen indicate FAILED? 19. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1129 in the
YES-Go to step 1.
NO....,...lfthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system is OK atthis time. Check for YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
poor connections or loose terminals at the MAP Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 18,
sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting••
connections or loose terminals at the MAP sensor
11 .. 172 BACK
OTC P1157: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS Circuit 9. Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector
Malfunction terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data . A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. AFS+ (RED) AFS- (RED/VEL)
1 2
3. Start the engine, and wait 1 minute.
3 4
YES-Go to step 5. 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector

terminals C29 and C30.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals PCM CONNECTORC (44P)
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM .•
YES...,....Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Remove the jumper wire from the A/F sensor

(Sensor 1) 4P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-173
PGM-FI System
12. Connect A/F sensor (Sensor 1) 4P connector 14. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
terminal No.1 to body ground with a jumper wire. 11-245).
A/F SENSOR (SENSOR 1) 4P CONNECTOR 15.. Reconnect all connectors.
1 2 17. Reset the PCM with the HDS.

3 4
JUMPER WIRE
= Is DTC P1157 indicated?

terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
13. Check for continuity between PCM connector then go to step 1. If the connector and terminal fits
terminal C29 and body ground. are OK, go to step 21.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) NO-Go to step 20.


= NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

Terminal side of female terminals connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
Is there continuity? screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
YES-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(C30) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
15.

15.
11-174 BACK

NO-Go to step 24.


NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If

PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 22. If the PCM
NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes
on.
BACK 11-175
PGM-FI System
DTC P1172: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit Out 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
of Range High
/s DTC P1172 indicated?
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general YES-Check for poor connections or loose
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 12.
12; Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1172 in the
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at DTCs MENU with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1172 in the YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
DTCs MENU with the HDS. Temporary DTCsor DTCs were indicated in step 11,
Does the screen indicate FA/LED?
YES-Go to step 5. connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1land the PCM, then go to step 1. Ifthe
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F CONDITION, go to step 10.
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If the screen
indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF CONDITION,
keep idling until a result comes on.

11-245).

11-176 BACK
DTC P1297: ELD Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A23 and body ground.
. ,
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data -,
.. PCM.CONNECTOR A I~)
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is 72 A or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Terminal side of female terminals
at the ELD and the PCM.•
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector. (A23) and the ELD,.thengo to step13.
6. Check the ELD in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is 72 A or more indicated? 12. Replace the ELD (see page 11-251).
YES-Go to step 7. 13. Reconnect all connectors.
NO-Go to step 11. 14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 16. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 17. Start the engine, and let it idle.
18. Turn on the headlights.

terminals at the ELD and the PCM, then go to step
1.

(cont'd)
BACK 11-177
PGM-FI System
21. Update the PCM if it does not havethe latest

good PCM (seepage 11-8).
23. Turn on the headlights.
Is OTe P1297 indicated?

terminals at the ELD and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-8), then go to step 22. If the 'PCM was substituted,
go to step 1.

11-178 BACK
DTC P1298: ELD Circuit High Voltage 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 8. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 9. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connrctor
terminal No.3 and PCM connector terminal A23.
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
II
2. Check the ELD in the DATA LlSTwith the HDS.
11 121 3
Is 0;2 A or less indicated? IELD lORN)
YES-Go to step 3.
PCM CONNECTOR A 144P)
NO-Intermittent failure, the syStem is OK at this If II
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 1/1 2 / 41516 / 8 9 I. Q
atthe ELD andthe PCM .• 10V 12 131141151161 718 19 ,
20 21 22 :::::><::: 2324 25,
~ 2627 V 29V131 V 34 35
1361 37 36 39140V 4 43 441
4. Disconnect the ELD 3P connector. ELD lORN)

6. Measure voltage between ELD 3P connector
terminal No.1 and body ground. YES-Go to step 10.
ELD 3P CONNECTOR NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM

(A23) and the ELD, then go to step 12.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check the No. 31G1 ACG (15 A) fuse in the

under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair
open in the wire between the No. 31G1 ACG (15 A)
fuse and the ELD, then go to step 12.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-179
PGM-FI System
10. Check for continuity between ELD 3P connector 17. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
terminal No.2 and body ground. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page .11-8).
ELD 3P CONNECTOR
Is DTC P1298 indicated,?
~
<!p GND 181.11.1
terminals at the ELD and the PCM. If the PCM was
11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go
to step 1.
Wire side of female terminals NO-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
complete. Ifthe PCM was substituted; replace the
Is there continuity? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting ••
YES-Go to step 11.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the ELD and

G202 (see page 22-22), then go to step 12.
11. Replace the ELD (see page 11-251).
14. Resetthe PCM with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 17.

11-180 BACK
DTC P1549: Charging System High Voltage 9. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
NOTE: 10. Start the engine.

anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 11. Check under these conditions:
• If a high voltage battery (24 V, etc.) is connected to • AlC off
the vehicle, this DTC can be stored. • Headlights off
• Rear window defogger off
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. neutral) for 1 minute.
3. Start the engine. 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
4. Check under these conditions: Is DTC P1549 indicated?
• AlC off YES-Check for poor connections or loose

• Headlights off terminals at the alternator and the under-hood
• Rear window defogger off fuse/relay box, then go to step 1.
5. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
neutral) for 1 minute. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the

goto step 7.

at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay
box.•
BACK 11-181
PGM-FI System
OTC P16BB: Alternator B Terminal Circuit 8. Check for an open in the wire (+B line) between
Low Voltage the alternator and under-hood fuse/relay box.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is the harness OK?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Replace the alternator (see page 4-34), then
go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire (+B line) between the
2. Clear the DTC with HDS. alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box, then
goto step 9.
• AlC on
• Temperature control at maximum cool 11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
• Rear window defogger on 12. Start the engine.
• Headlights on high beam
neutral) for 1 minute. • AlC on
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. • Blower fan at maximum speed
Is DTC P16BB indicated? • Headlights on high beam
YES-Go to step 7. 14. Hold the engine speed at 2,000 rpm (in Park or
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
at the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box,
and check the battery performance (see page Is DTC P16BB indicated?
22-63) .•
7. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at terminals at the alternator and the under-hood
the alternator and the under-hood fuse/relay box fuse/relay box, then go to step 1.
(+B line).
Are the connections and terminals OK? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
YES-Go to step 8.

step 9.
11-182 BACK
DTC P16BC: Alternator FR Terminal Circuit! 8. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
IGP Circuit Low Voltage
Is DrC P16BC indicated?
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general YES-Go to step 9.
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
the alternator 4P connector. at the alternator.•
Are the connections and terminals OK? 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES-Go to step 2. 10. Disconnect the alternator 4P connector.
NO-Repair the connector or terminals, then go to 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
step 18.
12. Measure voltage between alternator 4P connector
2. Check the alternator mounting surface for terminal No.1 and body ground.
corrosion.
ALTERNATOR4PCONNECTOR
Is the mounting surface corroded?
YES-Remove the alternator (see page 4-34). Clean

all mounting surfaces, reinstall the alternator, then
go to step 18. 3 4
NO-Go to step 3.

=
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 13.
• AlC on
• Temperature control at maximum cool NO-Repair open in the wire between the
• Blower fan at maximum speed alternator (IG1line) and the No. 31G1 ACG (15 A)
• Rear window defogger on fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box, then go to
• Headlights on high beam step 18.
7. Hold the engine speed 2,000 rpm (in Park or

(cont'd)
BACK 11-183
PGM-FI System
13. Measure voltage between alternator 4P connector 17. Check for continuity between alternator 4P
terminal No.4 and body ground. connector terminal No.4 and PCM connector
terminal B43.
ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR ALTERNATOR 4P CONNECTOR
ALTF (WHT/RED)
ALTF (WHT/RED) PCM.CONNECTOR B (44P)
= Q
Is there about 5 V?
go to step 18. Is there continuity?
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(B43) and the alternator, then go to step 18.
• AlC on
• Blowerfan at maximum speed
11-184 BACK
Is DTC P16BC indicated?

terminals at the alternator and the PCM, then go to
step 1.
NO.,-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


• NCon

Is DTC P16BC indicated?

terminals atthe alternator and the PCM. Ifthe PCM

BACK 11-185
P,GM-FI System
OTC P2183: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Rangel 11. Connect ECT sensor 2 to its 2P connector, but do
Performance Problem not install it in the radiator.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 13. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 2 quickly in the
1. Check for poor connections or loose terminals at
ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2. 14. Compare the value of ECTSENSOR 2 and the
ambient temperature.
OoesEeT SENSOR 2 differ 5.4 OF (3 °e) or
YES-Go to step 2. more?
NO-Repair the connectors or terminals, then go to YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-250), then
step 27. go to step 27.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM .•
Are OTe P1116 and P2183 indicated at the same 15. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes.
time?
YES-Go to step 15. HDS.
NO-Go to step 4. Is about 127 OF (53 °e) or less indicated?
4. Start the engine, and let it idle 10 minutes. YES-Replace ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-249), then
go to step 27.
Is about 124 OF (51 °e) or less indicated? 17. Let the engine idle 10 minutes.
YES-Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-250), then 18. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the
go to step 27. HDS.
NO-Go to step 6. Is about 124 OF (51 °e)or less indicated?
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES....,.Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-250), then
go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 19.
8. Remove ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-250).
9. Allow ECT sensor 2 to cool to ambient temperature.
11-186 BACK
20. Drain the coolant (see page 10-7). 28. Reset the PCM with the. HDS.
21. Remove ECT sensor 1 (see page 11-249) and ECT 29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
sensor 2 (see page 11-250).
22. Allow the sensors to cool to ambient temperature.
/sDTC P2183 indicated?
24. Connect ECT sensor 1 and ECT sensor 2 to their 2P terminals at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the
connector, but do not install them on the engine or PCM, then go to step 1.
the radiator.
25. Note the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and ECT SENSOR Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
26. Compare the value of ECT SENSOR 1 and the

ambient temperature, and the value of ECT
individually.
Does one of the sensors differ more than 5.4 OF

(3°C) from the ambient temperature?
YES-Replace the sensor that differed more than

5.4"F (3 OC) from the ambient temperature .

After replacing the sensor, go to step 27.

at ECT sensor 1, ECT sensor 2, and the PCM,.
BACK 11-187
PGM-FI System
DTC P2184: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit Low Voltage 10. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
troubleshooting information'(see page 11-3)..

HDS.
Is, about 356 of (180°C) or more, orO;08 Vor less

indicated? =

YES-Repair short in the wire between ECT sensor
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2 and the PCM (A33), then go to step 13.
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector. NO-Go to step 18.
6. Check ECT SENSOR 2 in the DATA LIST with the 12. Replace ECT sensor 2 (see page 11-250).
HDS.
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). YES-Check for poor connections or loose

step 1.

BACK



BACK 11-189
PGM-FI System
DTC P2185: ECT Sensor 2 Circuit High 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Voltage
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Is about - 40 OF (- 40°C) or less, or 4.90 Vor
more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
Is about -40 OF (-40°C) or less, or 4.90 V or 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
more indicated?
9. Remove the jumper wire from the ECT sensor 2 2P
YES-Go to step 3. connector.
at ECT sensor 2 and the PCM .• 11. Measure voltage between ECT sensor 2 2P
4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2 2P connector.
5. Connect ECT sensor 2 2P connector terminals No.1

=
~
ECT2(RED) ~SG6(BLK)
Is there about 5 V?
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Go to step 16.
11-190 BACK
14. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 18. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
15. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P 19. Check for continuity between ECT sensor 2 2P
terminal A9. terminal A33.
ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR ECT SENSOR 2 2P CONNECTOR
A
11 121
I SG6(BLK)
W 'ce ,'d, off,m", "~'",I:~ Wire side of female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) SG6(BLK)
II II
VI 2 / 41516 / 8 9J.
Q
101/ 12 13114115116 17 1819
20 21 22 >< 23 2425 •
~ 2627 / 29V131 V 33 3435 •
136137 38 39140V 42 431441

YES-Go to step 27.
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A9)
and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22. NO-Repair open in the wire between thePCM
(A33) and ECT sensor 2, then go to step 22.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-191
PGM-FI System

step 1.




11-192 BACK
DTC P2195: NF Sensor (Sensor 1) Signal 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Stuck Lean
7. Reinstall the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
NOTE: 11-245).
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• If the vehicle was out of fuel and the engine stalled 9. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
before this DTC was stored, refuel and clear the DTC
with the HDS. 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
• If DTC P2101, P2118, P2135, P2138, P2176 or a
combination ofP2122 and P2127, P2122 and P2138, 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
or P2127 and P2138 is stored at the same time,
troubleshoot them first, then recheck for DTC P2195. Is DTC P2195;ndicated?
1. Check the installation of the A/F sensor (Sensor 1). YES-Check for poor connections or loose
Is the AlF sensor loose or disconnected from the then go to Step 1.
warmup TWC?
NO-Go to step 12.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 2. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Does the screen indicate PASSED?
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
4. Start the engine, and let it idle for 2 minutes. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.•
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Is DTC P2195 indicated? (Sensor 1) and.thePCM, then go to step 1.lfthe
screen indicated NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
YES-Check for poor connections or loose until a result comes on.
then go to step 13.

at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. If any
other Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to
the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-193
PGM-FI System



terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM.
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
NO-Go to step 16.
16. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P2195 in the

DTCs MENU with theHDS.

original PCM (see page 1'1-252). If any other

(Sensor 1.) and the PCM.lfthePCM was updated,
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep
idling until a result comes on.
11-194 BACK
DTC P2199: IAT Sensor 1,2 Incorrect 10. Replace the sensor that differed more than 34 "F
Correlation (19 'C) from the ambient temperature .
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data • MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 (see page 11-247)
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general • IAT sensor 2 (see page 11-248)
2. Remove MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 (see page
11-247). 13. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
3. Remove IAT sensor 2 (see page 11-248). 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. Cool the sensors to ambient temperature. 15. Open the hood, and let the engine cool for more
than 6 hours.
6. Connect MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 5P connector
and IAT sensor 2 2P.connector. 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCswiththe HDS.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). fs DTC P2199 indicated?
8. Note the value of IAT SENSOR 1 and IAT SENSOR YES-Check for poor connections or loose
2 quickly in the DATA LIST with the HDS. terminals at IAT sensor 1, IAT sensor 2, and the
PCM, then go to step 1;
9. Compare the value of IAT SENSOR 1 and IAT
SENSOR 2 to the ambient temperature. NO-Go to step 18.
Does the vafue of fAT SENSOR 1 or fAT SENSOR 18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2199 in the
2 differ 34 OF (19°C) or more? DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 10. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 17,
at IATsensor 1, IATsensor 2, and the PCM .• go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•

connections or loose terminals at IAT sensor 1, IAT
sensor 2, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
BACK 11-195
PGM-FI System
DTC P2227: BARO Sensor Circuit Rangel 7. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Performance Problem software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 8. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 3,000 rpm without load (in Park neutral) until the
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. • Engine speed above 1,750 rpm
Is about 101 kPa (29.9 in.Hg, 760 mmHg), or about • REL TP SENSOR above 22 deg
2.9 Vat sea level indicated? • Drive 5 seconds or more
YES-Go to step 3. 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 7. Is DTC P2227 indicated?
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals atthe PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the go to step 8. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go to step
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 1.
5. Test-drive under these conditions: NO-Go to step 11.
• Engine speed above 1,750 rpm 11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 in the
• Transmission in D position DTCs MENU with the HDS.
• Drive 5 seconds or more Does the screen indicate PASSED?
6. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2227 in the YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
DTCs MENU with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Does the screen indicate FAILED? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 10,
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent connections or loose terminals at the PCM. If the
failure, the system isOK at this time. If the screen PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 4 and (see page 11-8), then go to step 8. Ifthe PCM was
recheck. substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
NOT COMPLETED, go to step 8.
11-196 BACK
OTC P2228: BARD Sensor Circuit Low Voltage OTC P2229: BARD Sensor Circuit High
Voltage
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general
2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. 2. Check the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
15 about 53 kPa (15.6 in.Hg, 397 mmHg), or 1.58 V
or less indicated? 15 about 160 kPa (47.2 in.Hg, 1,200 mmHg), or
4.5 V or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 3.
time .• NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time .•
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- 3. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
good PCM (see page 11-8). software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
15 DTC P2228 indicated?
15 DTC P2229 indicated?
terminals at the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated, YES-Check for poor connections or loose
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then terminals at the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then
recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the NO-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other complete. Ifthe PCM was substituted, replace the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• Temporary DTCs or DTCs'are indicated, go to the
BACK 11-197
PGM-FI System
DTC P2238: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS+ 9. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
Circuit Low Voltage 11-245).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 10. Reconnect all connectors.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 12. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
Is OTC P2238 indicated? Is OTC P2238 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4. YES-Check for poor connections or loose

NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this then go to step 1. If the connector and terminal fits
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals are OK, go to step 16.
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 15.

=

10.
NO-Go to step 9.
11-198 BACK


screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling
until a result come on.

YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-

good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 17. Ifthe
NO-Go to step 19.



NOT COMPLETED, keep idling idle until a result
comes on.
BACK 11-199
PGM-FI System
DTC P2252: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) AFS- 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Circuit Low Voltage terminal C30 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data PCM CONNECTOR C (44PI
IF 'IT
11 2 3 4 1 6 1 6 7 8 91
10 11 1213114115116 17 18 19 I
~ 20 2122 ::::>< 23 1/ 25 I
26 2728 29130131132 1/ 1/ V
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 1136 1/ 3639 40 141 42 43 441
AFS- (RED/VELI
Q
=
Is DTC P2252 indicated? Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals (C30) and the A/F sensor (Sensor 1), then go to step
at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM .• 11.
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Replace the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) (see page
11-245).

then go to step 1. If the connector and terminal fits
are OK, go to step 17.
NO-Go to step 16.
11-200 BACK




NO-Go to step 20.



PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 18. Ifthe
screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling idle
BACK 11-201
PGM~cFI System
OTC P2270: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Circuit Signal Stuck Lean
OTC P2271: Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
Circuit Signal Stuck Rich 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Start the engine, and let it idlewithout load (inPark
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on.
··ECTSENSOR 1 above 158 'f (70 "C)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. • Vehicle speed at 35 mph (56 km/h) or more for at
least 25 seconds
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
4. Test-drive under these conditions: /s DTC P2270 or P2271 indicated?
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 'f (70 'C) YES-Check for poor connections or loose
• Vehicle speed at 35 mph (56 km/h) or more for at terminals at the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and
least 25 seconds the PCM, then go to step 1.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270 or P2271 NO-Go to step 14.
in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2270 or P2271
Does the screen indicate FA/LED? in the DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated instep 13,
poor connections or loose terminals at the go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
secondary H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM. If the
screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a NO-If the screen indicates FAILED,.check for poor
result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF connections or loose terminals at the secondary
CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck. H02S (Sensor 2) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If
the screen indicates EXECUTING; keep driving.until
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. a result comes on. Ifthescreen indicates OUTOF
CONDITION, goto step 11.
7. Replace the secondary H02S (Sensor 2) (see page
11-245).
11-202 BACK
DTC P2610: PCM Ignition Off Internal Timer
Malfunction
YES-Go to step 4.

time .•



BACK 11-203
PGM-FI System
DTC P2AOO: A/F Sensor (Sensor 1) Circuit 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
Range/Performance Problem
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data . 3000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 'radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. • Transmission in D position.
• Vehicle speed between 25-55 mph (40-
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 88 km/h) for 5 minutes.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the • Drive at a steady speed between 55-75 mph
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. (88-120 km/h) for 10 seconds.
4. Test-drive under these conditions: 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 "F (70 "C) Is DTC P2AOO indicated?
• Vehicle speed between 25 -55 mph (40- YES-Check for poor connections or loose
88 km/h) for 5 minutes. terminals at the A/F sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM,
• Drive at a steady speed between 55 -75 mph then go to step 1.
(88-120 km/h) for 10 seconds.
NO-Go to step 14.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2AO.0 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. 14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2AOO in the
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13,
failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for goto the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
poor connections or loose terminals at the A/F
sensor (Sensor 1) and the PCM. Ifthe screen NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result connections or loose terminals at the A/F sensor
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF (Sensor 1) and the PCM, then go to step 1. Ifthe
CONDITION, go to step 3 and recheck. screen indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. CONDITION, go to step 11.

11-245).
11-204 BACK
OTC U0028: F-CAN Malfunction (BUS-OFF)
Is OTC U0028 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.

time .•

6. Check for Temporary DTCs or OTCs with the HDS.


BACK 11-205
PGM-FI System
DTC U0114: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM- 7. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
SH-AWD Control Unit) connector terminals A10 and A20.
NOTE: SH·AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)

troubleshooting information (see page 11-3) .
• If DTC U002a is stored at the same time as DTC
U0114, troubleshoot DTC U002a first, then recheck
for DTC U0114.

Is DTC U0114 indicated? Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 4. YES-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control

unit, then go to step 16 and recheck. If DTC U0114
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this is not indicated, replace the original SH-AWD
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals control unit, then go to step 16.
at the gauge assembly, the SH-AWD control unit,
and the PCM .• NO-Repair open in the wire between the SH-AWD
control unit (A10 (A20)') and the PCM (A36 (A37)'),
4. Check for SH-AWD system DTCs with the HDS. then go to step 16.
Is SH-AWD system DTC 41 and/or 77 indicated? *: CANL line
YES-Go to step 5. a. Check for a poor connection at SH-AWD control

unit connectors A (20P) and B (ap).
NO-Go to step a.
Are the connections OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
6. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P)
(see page 15-71). NO-Repair the poor connection at SH-AWD
control unit connectors A (20P) and B (ap), then go
to step 16.

(see page 15-71).
11-206 BACK
12. Measure voltage betweenSH-AWD control unit
connector terminal A7 and body ground. SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
Q
=
=
Is there battery voltage? YES-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control

unit, then go to step 16 and recheck. If DTC U0114
YES-Go to step 13. is not indicated, replace the original SH-AWD
control unit, then go to step 16.
NO-Check the No.1 IG1 SH-AWD (7.5 A) fuse in
the under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, NO-Repair open in the wire between the SH-AWD
repair open in the wire between the No.1 IG1 control unit and G601, then go to step 16.
SH-AWD (7.5 A) fuse and the SH-AWD control unit,
then go to step 16. 16. Reconnect all connectors.
14. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector 8 (8P). 18. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
15. Check for continuity between body ground and 19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
SH-AWD control unit connector terminals 82 and
83 individually, and between SH-AWD control unit 20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
connector terminal A9 and body ground.
Is OTe U0114 indicated?
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)
terminals atthe gauge control module, the
SH-AWD control unit, and the PCM, then go to step
1.

= =
BACK 11-207
PGM-FI System
DTC U0122: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-VSA) 7. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector terminals No. 38 and
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data No. 39.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
Is DTC U0122 indicated?
YES-Go to step 4.
atthe gauge control module, the VSA modulator- Is there continuity?
control unit, and the PCM .•
YES-Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-
4. Check for VSA system DTCs in the DTCs MENU control unit, then go to step 15 and recheck. If DTC
with the HDS. U0122 is not indicated, replace the original VSA
modulator-control unit, then go to step 15.
Is VSA DTC 86 indicated?
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
YES-Go to step 5. modulator-control unit (No. 39 (No. 38)') and the
PCM (A36 (A37)'), then go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 8.
* : CANL line.
8. Check for poor connections at the VSA modulator-
6. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P control unit 46P connector.
connector (see page 19-137).
Are the connections OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair the poor connection(s), then go to step

15.
11-208 BACK
10. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P . 14. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
connector (see page 19-137). control unit 46P connectorterminal No. 43, No. 46
and body ground individually.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
12. Measure voltage between VSA modulator-control
unit 46P connector terminal No. 40 and body
ground.
8 101112 16
m293D 84
=
Wire side of female terminals YES-Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-
control unit (see page 19-137), then go to step 15
and recheck. If DTC U0122 is not indicated, replace
Is there battery voltage? the original VSA modulator-control unit (see page
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Check the No.4 ABS VSA (7.5 A) fuse in the modulator-control unit and body ground (G402),
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, repair then go to step 15.
open in the wire between the No.4 ABS VSA (7.5 A)
fuse and the VSA modulator-control unit, then go to 15. Reconnect the VSAmodulator-control unit 46P
step 15. connector.
17. Resetthe PCM with the HDS.
Is ore U0122 indicated?

terminals at the gauge control module, the VSA
modulator-control unit, and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

BACK 11-209
PGM-FI System
DTC U0155: F-CAN Malfunction (PCM-Gauge 10. Connect gauge control module 36P connector
Control Module) terminal No. 28 to body ground with a jumper wire.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 36P CONNECTOR
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CANH(WHT)
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. JUMPER WIRE
=
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals terminal A36 and body ground.
at the gauge control module and the PCM .•
4. Check for body electrical DTCs with the HDS. II 11
Is DTC 81168,81169, and/or 81178 indicated? VI2 L 4J5J 6 / SleL

101/ 12 13114115116 17 lS 19
20 21 22 >< 23 2425 •
YES-Go to step 5. 2627 1/ 291/1311/ 33 3435 •
1361 37 36 391401/ 42 431441
NO-Do the gauge control module input test
(see page 22-282) .• ~NH(wHTI
=
6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. Terminal side of female terminals
7. Remove the gauge control module (see page Is there continuity?

22-284).
YES-Go to step 12.
8. Disconnect the gauge control module 36P
connector. NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(A36) and the gauge control module, then go to
9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). step 14.
11-210 BACK
12. Connect gauge control module 36P connector 14. Reconnect all connectors.
terminal No. 29 to body ground with a jumper wire.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 36P CONNECTOR

CANL (RED)
Is OTe U0155 indicated?
JUMPER WIRE
= terminals at the gauge control module and the PCM,
Wire side of female terminals then go to step 1.

13. Check for continuity between PCM connector Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
terminal A37 and body ground. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
II II
1/1 2 / 41516 /' 819 L

10/ 12 13114115116 17 18 191 I
20 21 22 >< 2324 251
• 26 27/ 29VI31 V 33 34 351
136137 36 39140VI
42 431441
~ANLIREDI
=
YES-Substitute a known-good gauge control

module (see page 22-284), then go to step 14 and
recheck. If no DTCs are indicated, replace the
original gauge control module (see page 22-284),
then go to step 14.

(A37) and the gauge control module, then go to
step 14.
BACK 11-211
PGM-FI System
DTC U0300: PGM-FI System and AfT System

Program Version Mismatch
NOTE:
• Do notturn the ignition switch OFF while updating
the PCM. If you turn the ignition switch OFF before
completion, the PCM will be damaged.
1. Do the PCM update procedure (PGM-FI system)

(see page 11-7).
2. Do the PCM update procedure (NT system)

(see page 14-8).
Is DTC VD3DD indicated?
YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-252).

•
NO-The update is complete. If any other
11-212 BACK
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part 1)
NOTE: Information marked with an asterisk (') applies 8. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector
to the CANL line. (see page 19-82).
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
4P connector (see page 19-135).
2. Jump the SCS line with theHDS.
10. Disconnect TPMS control unit 20P connector
3. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P), then disconnect (see page 18-90).
the HDS.
11. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit connector A
4. Measure resistance between PCM connector (20P) (see page 15-71).
terminals A36 and A37.
12. With navigation system: Disconnectthe navigation
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) unit connector A (20P) (see page 23-190).
13. With AcuraLink system: Disconnect the AcuraLink

control unit (XM receiver) connector A (20P)
(see page 23-108).

Is there about 85- 103 Q ((with AcuraLink

navigation system), 88- 107 Q (with non-
AcuraLink navigation system), or 91-111 Q
(without navigation system))?
YES-Go to "F-CAN Circuit Trouble shooting

(Part 2)" (see page 11-224).
NO-Go to step 5.
connector (see page 22-284). YES-Repair short in the wires between PCM
connector terminals A36 and A37' .•
6. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector (see page 19-37). NO-Go to step 15.
7. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) (see step 12

on page 24-23).
(cont'd)
BACK 11-213
PGM-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part 1) (cont'd)
15. Connect PCM connector terminal A36 to body 17. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
ground with a jumper wire. control unit 46P connector terminal No. 39 and
body ground.
II II VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR

1/2/41616/891.
101/121311411611617181191
2012122 >< 23 241261 •
~ 26127 /29VI31V33 341361 • 8 1D 1112 16
136 37 36 39140V 42 431441 312980 34 888940
CANH(WHT) CANH(WHT)
JUMPER WIRE Q
-~
= =
Terminal side of female terminals Wire side of female terminals
16. Check for continuity between gauge control

module 36P connector terminal No. 28 and body Is there continuity?
ground.
YES-Go to step 18.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE l6P CONNECTOR
(A36) and the VSA modulator-control unit.•
=
YES-Go to step 17.

(A36) and the gauge control module .•
11-214 BACK
18. Check for continuity between SRS unit connector A 20. Check for continuity between yaw rate-lateral
(28P) terminal No. 11 and body ground. acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No.3
and body ground.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
YAW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR4PCONNECTOR
CANH
(WHT)
Q
=
YES-Go to step 19.
YES-Go to step 21.
(A36) and the SRS unit.• NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(A36) and the yaw rate-lateral acceleration
19. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor sensor.•
21. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR 20P connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
=
Q
=
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM YES-Go to step 22.
connector (A36) and the steering angle sensor..
(A36) and the TPMS control unit.•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-215
PGM-FI System
22. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 24. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control
connector A (20P) terminal No. 10 and body ground. unit (XM receiver) connector A (20P) terminal No.6
and body ground.
ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER)
CONNECTOR A (20P)
Q
Q
=
Wire side of female terminals =
YES-
• With navigation system: Go to step 23. YES-Go to step 25.
• Without navigation system: Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A36) and the AcuraLink control unit (XM
(A36) and the SH-AWD control unit.• receiver) .•
23. Check for continuity between navigation unit 25. Remove the jumper wire from PCM connector A
connector A (20P) terminal No.8 and body ground. (44P).
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
=
YES-
• With AcuraLink system: Go to step 24.
• Without AcuraLink system: Go to step 25.

(A36) and the navigation unit.•
11-216 BACK
26. Connect PCM connector terminal A37 to body 28. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
ground with a jumper wire. control unit 46P connector terminal No. 38 and
body ground.
11 VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR

,V 2V 4 I 5 I 6 /' 819 I.
• 110 V 12 13114116116 17 18 191
120 21 22 >< 23 24 261 I
• 126 27 VI 291/131 V 33 34 361 8101112 15
&12980 888B.tI
1361 37 38 391401/ 42 431441
CANL(RED) CANL(RED)
JUMPER WIRE Q
--
=

module 36P connector terminal No. 29 and body Is there continuity?
ground.
YES-Go to step 29.
(A37) and the VSA modulator-control unit.•
=
YES-Go to step 28.

(A37) and the gauge control module .•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-217
PGM-FI System
29. Check for continuity between SRS unit connector A 31. Check for continuity between yaw rate-lateral
(28P) terminal No. 12 and body ground. acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No.2
and body ground.
SRS UNIT CONNECTOR A (28P)
CANL(RED) SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR'
~~~~ CANL (RED)
Q
Q
=
Wire side of female terminals =
YES-Go to step 30.
YES-Go to step 32.
(A37) and the SRS unit.• NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(A37) and the yaw rate-lateral acceleration
30. Check for continuity between steering angle sensor sensor.•
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Go to step 31.

connector (A37) and the steering angle sensor.•
11-218 BACK
32. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 34. Check for continuity navigation unit connector A
20P connector terminal No. 11 and body ground. (20P) terminal No. 18 and body ground.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
11
= =
Wire side offemale terminals Wire side of female terminals
Is there continuity? . Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 33. YES-

• With AcuraLink system: Go to step 35 .
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM • Without AcuraLink system: Go to step 36.
(A37) and the TPMS control unit..
33. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit (A37) and the navigation unit.•
connector A (20P) terminal No. 20 and body ground.
35. Check for continuity between AcuraLink control
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) unit (XM receiver) connectorA(20P) terminal
No. 16 and body ground.
ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER)

CONNECTOR A (20P)
=
=
Is there continuity? Wire side of female terminals
YES-
• With navigation system: Go to step 34. Is there continuity?
• Without navigation system: Go to step 36.
YES-Go to step 36.
(A37) and the SH-AWD control unit.• NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(A37) and the AcuraLink control unit (XM
receiver) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-219
PGM~FI System
36. Reconnect the gauge control module 36P connector. 40. Measure resistance between PCM connector
37. Measure resistance between PCM connector
terminals A36 and A37. PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
Terminal side of female terminals Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ ?
Is there about 108-132 kQ ? YES-Go to step 41.
YES-Go to step 38. NO-'Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-

control unit (see page 19-137) and reconnect PCM
NO-Substitute a known-good gauge control connector A (44P). If the HDS identifies the vehicle,
module (see page 22-284) and reconnect PCM replace the original VSA modulator-control unit
connector A (44P). Ifthe HDS identifies the vehicle, (see page 19-137) .•
replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22"284) .•

connector (see page 22-284) and PCM connector A.
39. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P

connector.
11-220 BACK
41. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P 46. Measure resistance between PCM connector
connector (see page 19-137) and PCM connector A terminals A36 and A37.
(44P).
PCM CONNECTOR A (44PI
42. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (28P).

Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ ?
YES-Go to step 47.
Terminal side of female terminals NO-Substitute a known-good TPMS control unit

(see page 18-90) and reconnect PCM connector A
Is there about 2.34-2.86 kQ ? (44P). If the HDS identifies the vehicle,replace the
original TPMS control unit (see page 18-90).•
YES-Go to step 44.
47. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector
NO-Substitute a known-good SRS unit (see page (see page 18-90) and PCM connector A (44P).
24-161) and reconnect PCM connector A (44P).lf
the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the original 48. Reconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P).
SRS unit (see page 24-161) .•
44. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) (see step 12

on page 24-23) and PCM connector A (44P).
45. Reconnect TPMS control unit 20P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-221
PGM-FI System
49. Measure -resistance between PCM connector 52. Measure resistance between PCM connector
terminals A36 and A37. terminals A36 and A37.
Is there about 2.34~2.86 kQ ? Is there about 2.34-2.86 kQ ?
YES- YES-
• With navigation system: Go to step 50. • With AcuraLink system: Go to step 53 .
• Without navigation system: Update the PCM if it • Without AcuraUnk system: Update the PCM if it
does not have the latest software (see page 11-7), does not have the latest software (see page 11-7),
or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8),
then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away with a known-good PCM, replace the away with a known-good PCM, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-252).• original PCM (see page 11-252) .•
NO-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control NO-Substitute a known-good navigation unit

unit (see page 15-71) and reconnect PCM connector (see page 23-190) and reconnect PCM connector A
A (44P). If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace (44P). If the HDS identifies the vehicle, replace the
the original SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71). original navigation unit (see page 23-190) .•
• 53. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P)
50. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P) (see page 23-190) and PCM connector A (44P).
and PCM connector A (44P).
54. Reconnect the AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver)
51. Reconnect navigation unit connector A (20P). connector A (20P).
11-222 BACK
Is there about 2.34- 2.86 kQ ?

good PCM (see page 11-8),then recheck. lfthe
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252) .•
NO-Substitute a known-good AcuraLink control

unit (XM receiver) (see page 23-108) and reconnect
PCM connector A (44P). If the HDS identifies the
vehicle, replace the original AcuraLink control unit
(XM receiver) (see page 23-108) .•
BACK 11-223
PGM-FI System
F-CAN Circuit Troubleshooting (Part 2)
1. Disconnect the gauge control module 36P 10. Check for continuity between PCM connector
connector (see page 22-284). terminals A36 and body ground.
2. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

If 11
11/1 21/ 41516 / 819L
3. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) (see step 14 10 / 12 13114115116 17 1819
on page 24-23). 20 21 22 >< 23 2A- 25 •
• 26 27 1/ 291/1311/ 33 3435 •
4. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector ,1361 37 38 391401/ 42 431441
~CANHmHn
(see page 19-134).
5. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor

4P connector (see page 19-135).
=
6. Disconnect TPMS control unit 20P connector Terminal side of female terminals
(see page 18-90).
(see page 15-71). YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal A36 and the gauge control
8. With navigation system: Disconnect navigation unit module, the VSA modulator-control unit, the SRS
connector A (20P) (see page 23-190). unit, the steering anglesensor, the yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor, the TPMS control unit, the
9. With ACURALINK system: Disconnect ACURALINK SH-AWD control unit, the navigation unit, the
control unit (XM receiver) connector A (20P) ACURALINK control unit (XM receiver), or the
(see page 23-108). DLC.•
NO-Go to step 11.
11-224 BACK
11. Check for continuity between PCM connector 12. Reconnect all connectors.
13. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3).
14. Disconnectthe gauge control module 36P
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and read the HDS.
Does the HDS identify the vehicle?
YES-Replace the gauge control module (see page

22-284) .•
= NO-Go to step 16.

17. Reconnect the gauge control module 36P connector.
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal A37 and the gauge control. 18. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
module, the VSA modulator-control unit, the SRS connector (see page 19-137).
unit, the steering angle sensor, the yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor, the TPMS control unit, the 19. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and read the HDS.
SH-AWD control unit, the navigation unit, the
ACURALINK control unit (XM receiver), or the Does the HDS identify the vehicle?
DLC .•
.-YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit
NO-Go to step 12. (see page 19-137) .•
NO-Go to step 20.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-225
PGM-FI System
21. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P 29. Reconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector.
connector.
22. Disconnect SRS unit connector A (28P) (see step 14 4P connector (see page 19-135).
on page 24-23).
31. Turn the ignitipn switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HOS identify the vehicle?
YES-Replace the yaw rate-lateral acceleration
YES-Replace the SRS unit (see page 24-161) •• sensor (see page 19-135) .•
25. Reconnect SRS unit connector A (28P). 33. Reconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor.
26. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector 34. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector
(see page 19-134). (see page 18-90).
27. Turn the ignition sWitch ON (II), and read the HDS. 35. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
Does the HOS identify the vehicle? Does the HOS identify the vehicle?
YES-Replace the steering angle sensor (see page YES-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page
19-134).• 18-90) .•
37. Reconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.

(see page 15-71).
11-226 BACK
39. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS. 44. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the HOS identify the vehicle? 45. Reconnect navigation .unit connector A (20P).
YES-Replace the SH-AWD control unit (see page 46. Disconnect the ACURALINK control unit (XM
15-71) .• receiver) connector A (20P) (see page 23-108).
NO- 47. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
• With navigation system: Go to step 40.
• Without navigation system: Update the PCM if it Does the HOS identify the vehicle?
does not have the latest software (see page 11-7),
or substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), YES-Replace the ACURALINK control unit (XM
then recheck. If the symptom/indication goes receiver) (see page 23-108) .•
away with a known-good PCM, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-252) .• NO,-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
40. Turn the ignition switch OFF. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe
41. Reconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P). PCM, replace the original PCM (see .page 11-252).•
42. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P)

(see page 23-190).
43. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and read the HDS.
YES-Replace the navigation unit (see page 23-190).

•
NO-
• With ACURALINK system: Go to step 44.
• Without ACURALINK system: Update the PCM if
it does not have the latest software (see page
11-7), or substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-8), then recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away with a known-good PCM, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-252).•
BACK 11-227
PGM-FI System
MIL Circuit Troubleshooting
2. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
22-258). PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
1\ 1\
Does the MIL indicator flash?
1/1 2 / 41516 / 819L
10 1/ 12 13114115116 17 18 19 •
YES-Go to step 3. 20 21 22 >< 2324 25 •
• 26 27 1/ 291/1311/ 3334 35
NO-Substitute a known-good gauge control 1361 37 36 39140 / 42 431441
module, and recheck. If the MIL circuit is OK,
SCS(ORN)
replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22-284) .• Q
3. Connectthe HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). =
4. Check the SCS in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is a short indicated?
YES-Go to step 5. (A31) and the SRS unit, or the DLC .•
NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252) .• PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252) .•
6. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P), then disconnect

the HDS.
11-228 BACK
OLC Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: Make sure,the HDS operates normally and the 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
DLC cable is in good condition.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and watch the VSA
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. indicator.
2. Connect the HDS to the DLC (seepage 11-3). Does the VSA indicator stay on?
NOTE: Make sure the HDS is properly connected to YES-Go to the VSA system's general
the DLC. troubleshooting information (see page 19-83).•
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and read the HDS. NO-Go to step 9.
Does the HDS identify the vehicle? 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES-Go to step 4. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the
SH-AWD indicator.
NO-Go to step 23.
Does the SH-AWD indicator stay on?
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs in the PGM-FI
system with the HDS. YES-Go to the SH-AWD system's general
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4) .•
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Go to step 5.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and watch the
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. TPMS indicator.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and watch the SRS Does the TPMS indicator stay on?
indicator.
YES-Go to the TPMS general troubleshooting
Does the SRS indicator stay on? information (see page 18-53).•
YES-Go to the SRS system's general NO-Go to step 13.

troubleshooting information (see page 24-24) .•
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-229
PGM-FI System
OLC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 20. Continue to check for continuity between DLC
terminal No.7 and body ground, while
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and watch the disconnecting these parts, one at a time:
immobilizer indicator.
• SRS unit connector A (28P)
Does the immobilizer indicator stay on or flash? • VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
• SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P)
YES-Check symptoms for the immobilizer • TPMS control unit 20P connector
system .• • Immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P connector
• Audio unit 17P connector
NO-Go to step 15. • Under-dash fuse/relay box (Q) (16P) connector
15. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page Does continuity go away when one of the above
22-258). components is disconnected?
16. Check for 8-CAN system DTCs without the HDS YES-Replace the part that caused an open when it
(see page 22-93). was disconnected .•
Are any 8-CAN DTCs indicated? NO-Repair short in the wire between the DLC
(K-line) and the VSA modulator-control unit, the
YES-Goto the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• SRS unit, the SH-AWD control unit, the TPMS
control unit, the immobilizer-keyless control unit,
NO-Go to step 17. the audio unit, or the under-dash fuse/relay box.•
18. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
19. Check for continuity between DLC terminal No.7

and body ground.
=
Is there 5 Q or less?
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 21.
11-230 BACK
21. Connect DLC terminal No.7 to body ground with a 23. Do the gauge self-diagnostic function (see page
jumper wire. 22-258).
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) 24. Check for B"CAN system DTCs without the HDS
(see page 22-93).
Is OTC 81168,81169, and/or 81178 indicated?
YES-Go to step 37.
NO-Go to step 25.

JUMPER WIRE
=
Terminal side of female terminals 26. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
27. Measure voltage between DLC terminal No. 16 and

22. Check for continuity between body ground and body ground.
these connector terminals:
Connector Terminal
SRS unit A (28P) No. 24 (LT BLU)
VSA modulator-control unit No. 15 (LTBLU)
46P
SH-AWD control unit A No.5 (LT BLU)
(20P)
TPMS control unit (20P) No.7 (LT BLU)
Immobilizer-keyless control No.5 (LT BLU)
unit7P
Audio unit 17P No.6 (LT BLU) =
Under-dash fuse/relay box No.8 (LT BLU) Terminal side of female terminals
(Q) (16P)
Is there continuity between the OLC terminal and Is there battery voltage?
each of the terminals in the chart?
YES-Go to step 28.
YES-Replace the unit which cannot communicate
with the HDS .• NO-Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal
No. 16 and the No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse in the
NO-Repair open in the wire between the DLC under-hood fuse/relay box.•
(K-Iine) and the appropriate connector..
(cont'd)
BACK 11-231
PGM-FI System
28. Measure voltage between DLC terminals No.4 and 34. Check for continuity between PCM connector
No. 16. terminal A36 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A I44P)

DATA LINK CONNECTOR IDLC)

=
Is there battery voltage? Is there continuity?
NO-Repair open in the wire between DLC terminal NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
No.4 and body ground (G501) (see page 22-28) .• (A36) and DLC terminal No.6.•
29. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 11-3). 35. Connect DLC terminal No. 14 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
32. Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
33. Connect DLC terminal No.6 to body ground with a

jumper wire.
CANLIRED)
JUMPER WIRE
=
JUMPER WIRE
11-232 BACK
36. Check for continuity between PCM connector 37. Try to start the engine.
Does the engine start and idle smoothly?
YES-Go to F-CAN circuit troubleshooting (Part 1)
(see page 11-213).•
NO-Go to step 38.
39. Check the No.2 IG MAIN (50 A) fuse in the under-

hood fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse OK?

YES-Repair open in the wire between the No.2 IG
Is there continuity? MAIN (50 A) fuse and the ignition switch. If the wire
is OK, go to step 40.
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- NO-Repair short in the wire between the No.2 IG
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the MAIN (50 A) fuse and the under-hood fuse/relay
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good box. Also replace the No.2 IG MAIN (50 A) fuse .•

(A37) and DLC terminal No. 14.•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-233
PGM~FI System
40. Inspectthe No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse in the under- 43. Check for continuity between body ground and
hood fuse/relay box. PGM-FI main relay 1 4P connector terminals No.1
and No.3 individually.
Is the fuse OK?
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4PCONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 47.
+8
NO-Go to step 41.
41. Remove the blown No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) fuse from

the under-hood fuse/relay box.
42. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) from the under- Q

YES-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box

(see page 22-61h Also replace the No. 19 FI MAIN
(15 A) fuse .•
NO-Go to step 44.
11-234 BACK
44. Disconnect each of the following components; or 46. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1
the connectors from the components, one at a time, 4P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
and check for continuity between PGM-FI main
relay 1 4P connector terminal No.2 and body PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
ground.
• PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)

• PCM connector A (44P)
• Each injector 2P connector
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B 3P connector
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor 3P connector
• Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control
relay
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Repair short in the wire between PGM-FI

main relay 1 and each item. Also replace the No. 19
FI MAIN (15 A) fuse .•
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 1. Also replace the

No. 19 FI MAIN (15A) fuse .•
47. Inspectthe No.2 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box.
Does continuity go away when one of the above
components is disconnected? Is the fuse OK?
YES-Replace the component that made the short YES-Go to step 54.
to body ground go away when disconnected. If the
item is the PCM, update the PCM if it does not have NO-Go to step 48.
the latest software (see page 11-7), or substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If 48. Remove the blown No.2 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse
the symptom/indication goes away with a known- from the under-dash fuse/relay box.
good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page
11-252). Also replace the No. 19 FI MAIN (15 A) 49. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
fuse .•
NO-Go to step 45.
45. Disconnect the connectors from these components:
• PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP)

• PCM connector A (44P)
• Injectors
• Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B
• Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor
• Electronic throttle control system (ETCS) control
relay
(cont'd)
BACK 11-235
PGM-FI System
terminal C36 and body ground. terminal C36 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
= =
YES-Go to step 52. YES-Repair short in the wire between the No.2
FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the PCM (C36),
NO-Replace the No.2 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse, between the No.2 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and
and update the PCM if it does not have the latest PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP), or between the
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- No.2 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the immobilizer
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the control unit. Also replace the No.2 FUEL PUMP
symptom/indication goes away with a known-good (20 A) fuse .•
NO-Go to step 54.
52. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover
(see page 20-102), then remove PGM-FI main relay 54. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay
box. 55. Disconnect PCM connectors A (44P) and C (44P).
11-236 BACK
57. Measure voltage between PCM connectorterminal 60. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) from the under-
C36 and body ground. hood fuse/relay box.
=
YES-Go to step 58.

61. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.2 connector terminal No.3 and body ground.
FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse and the PCM (C36) .•
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
58. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal
A6 and body ground. +8
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) 2
MRLY(GRN) I
If 11
L/I 2 V 4 15 16 / 8 9 I.
101/121311411511617181191 •
20 21 22 >< 23 241251
• 26 27V 29V131 V 33 341351 • =
136 137 38 39140 1/142 43 441

=
YES-Go to step 62.
Is there battery voltage? NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box

(see page 22-61) .•
YES-Go to step 63.
NO-Go to step 59.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-237
PGM-FI System
62. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 63. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4P connector terminal No.4 and PCM connector
terminal A6. 64. Remove PGM-FI main relay 1 (C) from the under-
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-64). If 65. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 1 4P
the relay is OK, update the PCM if it does not have connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR
the symptom/indication goes away with a known-
good PCM, replace the original PCM (see page
11-252).•

and PGM-FI main relay 1.•
=
YES-Go to step 66.

(see page 22-61) .•
11-238 BACK
66. Check for continuity between PGM-FI main relay 1 68. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P).
terminal A8. 69. Check for continuity between body ground and
PCM connector terminals 81, 836, C2, C40, and C44
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 1 4P CONNECTOR individually.
PCM CONNECTORS
Terminal side of
_ female terminals
B (44P)
IGP
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) IGP(ORN)

=
C(44P)
YES-Go to step 67.

and PGM-FI main relay 1.•
67. Test PGM-FI main relay 1 (see page 22-64). Q
Is PGM-FI main relay 10K? = =

YES-Go to step 68.
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 1.•
YES...,.Go to step 70.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (81,

836, C2, C40, C44) and G101 (see page 22-18) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-239
PGM-FI System
OlC Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
70. Check for continuity between PCM connector· 72. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal C13 and body ground. terminal 818 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)

VCC1 (VEL/RED) VCC2 (VEL/BLU) , - - - - - ,
,If 11
111 2341616 7 8 191

~ 110111121311411611617 18 191 •
12012122 >< 23/1261
~ 12612728 29130131J321( LlLL I
I 136 1/ 36 39140 141 42 431441
.Q .Q
= =
71. Continue to check for continuity between PCM 73. Continue to check for continuity between PCM
connector terminal C13 and body ground, while connector terminal 818 and body ground, while
disconnecting these parts, one at a time: disconnecting these parts, one at a time:
• MAP sensor 3P connector • Turbocharger boost sensor 3P connector

• Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 3P • Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor 3P
connector connector
Does continuity go away when one of the above Does continuity go away when one of the above
components is disconnected? components is disconnected?
YES-Replace the part that caused an open when it YES- Replace the part that caused an open when it
was disconnected .• was disconnected .•
NO-Repair short in the wire between the PCM NO-Repair short in the wire between the PCM
(C13) and the MAP sensor or the input shaft (818) and the turbocharger boost sensor or the
(mainshaft) speed sensor.• output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor..
11-240 BACK
terminal C12 and body ground. terminal A25 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44PI PCM CONNECTOR A (44PI

VCC3 (BLUI
II II
11 2 3 4 1 6 1 6 7 8 1 9 1
110111121311411611617 18 191 • VCC4
(BRNI
120 121 22 ::::::><:: 23 VI261
~ 12612728 29130131 132 V VVI I
:136JL 36 39140141 42 431441
Q Q
= Terminal side of female terminals Terminal side of female terminals
=
75. Continue to check for continuity between PCM 77. Continue to check for continuity between PCM
connector terminal C12 and body ground, while connector terminal A25 and body ground, while
disconnecting the throttle body 6P connector. disconnecting the APP sensor 6P connector.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM YES-Repair short in'the wire between the PCM
(C12) and the throttle body.• (A25) and APP sensor A .•
NO-Replace the throttle body (see page 11-396).• NO-Rep.iace the accelerator pedal module
(see page 11-295) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 11-241
PGM-fl System
terminal A24 and body ground. terminal A19 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44PI PCM CONNECTOR A (44PI

VCC5(GRYI VCC6(REDI
Q Q

=
NO-Go to step 80. NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
79. Continue to check for continuity between PCM good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
connector terminal A24 and body ground, while symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
disconnecting theAPP sensor6P connector. PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252) .•
Is there continuity? 81. Continue to check for continuity between PCM

connector terminal A 19 and body ground, while
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM disconnecting these parts, one at a time:
(A24) and APP sensor B.•.
• AlC pressure sensor 3P connector
NO-Replace the accelerator pedal module • FTP sensor 3P connector
(see page 11-295).• • Brake booster pressure sensor 3P connector
Does continuity go away when one of the above

components is disconnected?
YES-Replace the part that caused an open when it

was disconnected .•
NO-Repair short in the wire between the PCM

(A19) and the AlC pressure sensor, the FTPsensor
or the brake booster pressure sensor.•
11-242 BACK
Injector Replacement
1. Relieve fuel pressure (see page 11-362).
3. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector, then remove the injector cover (A).
4. Disconnect the connectors (B) from the injectors, then remove the harness holder (C) from the fuel rail (D).
5. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (E).
6. Remove the fuel rail mounting nuts (F), then remove the fuel rail.
7. Remove the injector clip (G) from the injector.
8. Remove the injector from the fuel rail.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-243
PGM-FI System
Injector Replacement (cont'd)
9. Coat the new O-ring (black) (A) with clean engine oil, then insert the injectors (8) into the fuel rail (C).
10. Install the injector clip (0).
11. Coat the new O-ring (green) (E) with clean engine oil, then install the fuel rail and injectors in the injector base (F).
12. Install the fuel rail mounting nuts (G).
13. Connect the connectors on the injectors, and install the harness holder on the fuel rail.
14. Connect the quick-connect fitting.
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), but do not operate the starter. After the fuel pump runs for about 2 seconds, the
fuel rail will be pressurized. Repeat this two or three times, then check for fuel leakage.
NOTE: Some OTCs will be stored because some connectors are disconnected at this time. Clear the OTC with the
HOS after this procedure is completed.
16. Reinstall the injector cover and connect the throttle body 6P connector.
17. Reinstall the charge air cooler (see page 9-9).
11-244 BACK
A/F Sensor Replacement Secondary H02S Replacement

02 sensor socket wrench, Snap-on S6154, or equivalent, 02 sensor socket wrench, Snap-on YA8875, SP Tools
commercially available 93750, or equivalent, commercially available
1. Disconnect the A/F sensor 4P connector (A), then 1. Remove the WU-TWC stay (A).
remove the A/F sensor (B).
A
B
«N·m
' - - - - - - ( 4 . 5 kgf·m,
33Ibf·tt)
44N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33Ibf·tt)
2. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
2. Disconnect the secondary H02S 4P connector (A),
then remove the secondary H02S (B).
B
44N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33Ibf·tt)
BACK 11-245
PGM-FI System
CMP Sensor B ·Replacement CKP Sensor Replacement

1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-394). 1. Disconnect the eKP sensor connector (A).
2. Remove the air bypass outlet pipe (see page 9-7).
3. Disconnect the eMP sensor 8 connector (A).

A
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m.
8.7Ibf·ft)
~~()
'~
12N·m \
11.2 kgf·m. B C
8.7Ibf·ft)
2. Remove the eKP sensor (8).
A 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal

with a new O-ring (e).
4. Do the eKP pattern c1ear/eKP pattern learn

4. Remove eMP sensor 8 (8). procedure with the HDS (see page 11-4).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal

11-246 BACK
MAP Sensor Replacement MAF SensorfiAT Sensor 1
Replacement
1. Disconnect the MAP sensor connector (A).
A 1. Disconnect the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 connector

(A).
2. Remove the MAP sensor (8).

with a new O-ring (C).
2. Remove the screws (8).
3. Remove the MAF sensor/IAT sensor 1 (C).

with a new O-ring (D).
BACK 11-247
PGM-FI System
IAT Sensor 2 Replacement
1. Remove the charge air cooler cover (see page 9-8).
2. Disconnect the IAT sensor 2 connector (A).
3. Remove the IAT sensor 2 (8).

11-248 BACK
ECT Sensor 1 Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-7). 7. Disconnect th~ EeT sensor 1 connector (A).
2. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-394).
4. Remove the ignition coil cover (A) and bolt (8).
8. Remove EeT sensor 1 (8).

with a new O-ring (e), then refill the radiator with
F engine coolant (see page 10-7).
5. Disconnect the ignition coil connectors (e), eMP

sensor A connector (D), eMP sensor 8 connector
(E), and the EVAP canister purge valve connector
(F).
6. Remove the harness holder (G).
NOTE: 8e careful not to damage the EeT sensor 1

harness.
BACK 11-249
PGM-FI System
Eel Sensor 2 Replacement Knock Sensor Replacement
1. Drain the engine coolant (see page 10-7). 1. Disconnect the knock sensor connector (A).
2. Remove the splash shield. A
3. Disconnect the EeT sensor 2 connector (A), then

remove EeT sensor 2 (8).
B
32N·m
13.2 kgf·m,
23lbf·ttl
B
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ttl 2. Remove the knock sensor (8).
4. Install EeT sensor 2 with a new O-ring (e).
5. Install the splash shield.
6. Refill the radiator with engine coolant (see page

10-7).
11-250 BACK
ELD Replacement
1. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page 4. Turn the housing over again. Using two flat-tip
22-61). screwdrivers, release the tabs (A), and pry up the.
fuse/relay box base (6) from the fuse/relay box
2. Remove the screw (A). housing (e).
~A
NOTE: Make sure the terminals (D) are not bent or
damaged.
A
3. Turn the housing over, then remove the screw (A).
5. Remove the ELD (A).
BACK 11-251
PGM-FI System
PCM Replacement
NOTE: 7. USA, Canada models: Selectthe REPLACE PCM

• Make sure the HDS is loaded with the latest software MENU, then READ DATA and follow the screen
version. prompts.
• If you are replacing the PCM after substituting a
known-good PCM, reinstall the original PCM, then do NOTE:
this procedure. • Doing this step copies (READS) the engine oil life
• During the procedure, if any READ DATA, WRITE data from the original PCM so you can later
DATA, or other data checks fail, note the failure, then download (WRITES) it into the new PCM.
continue. • If READ DATA indicates FAILED, continue with
this procedure.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side ofthe dashboard. 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C.
NOTE: PCM connectors A, B, and C have symbols

(A=D, B=.6., C=O) embossed on them for
identification.

it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-229). If you are returning from DLC
D
circuit troubleshooting, skip steps 4 through 7,16 B 9.8N·m
through 18, and 21 through 22, and do the (1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
following procedures after replacing the PCM (USA,
Canada models); A
• Replace the engine oil (see page 8-9) and the

engine oil filter (see page 8-10). 11. Remove the bolt (D), and remove the PCM
• Clean the throttle body (see page 11-394). assembly (E) .
4. USA, Canada models: Select the PGM-FI system

with the HDS.
5. USA, Canada models: Select the INSPECTION

MENU with the HDS.
6. USA, Canada models: Select the ETCS TEST, then

select the TP POSITION CHECK, and follow the
screen prompts.
NOTE: Ifthe TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,

continue with this procedure.
11-252 BACK
12. Remove the cover (A), and the bracket (B) from the 19. Select IMMOBI system with the HDS.
PCM (C).
20. Enter the immobilizer code with the PCM
replacementprocedure in the HDS; it allows you to
start the engine.
21. USA, Canada models: Ifthe TP POSITION CHECK

failed in step 6, clean the throttle body (see page
22. USA, Canada models: If the READ DATA failed in

step 7 or the WRITE DATA failed in step 18, replace
the. engine oil (see page 8-9) and engine oil filter
23. Select PGM-FI system and resetthe PCM with the

HDS.

software (see page 11-7).
13. Install the PCM in the reverse order of removal. 25. Do the PCM idle learnprocedure (see page 11-339).
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 26. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
NOTE: DTC P0630 "VIN Not Programmed or

Mismatch" may be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and
16. USA, Canada models: Ifthe READ DATA (engine oil

life) failed in step 7, go to step 19. Otherwise, go to
step 17.
17. USA, Canada models: Select the PGM-FI system

with the HDS.
18. USA, Canada models: Selectthe REPLACE PCM

MENU, then WRITE DATA and follow the screen
prompts.
NOTE: Ifthe WRITE DATA indicates FAILED,

continue with this procedure.
BACK 11-253
Electronic Throttle Control System
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL
MODULE IPCM)
Update,
page 11-7
Substitution,
page11-B
Replacement,
page 11-252
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
CONTROL SYSTEM IETCS)
THROTTLE ACTUATOR and CONTROL RELAY
THROTTLE POSITION ITP) SENSOR
~ACCELERATOR PEDALMODU"
ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION lAPP) SENSOR

Signal Inspection, page 11-294
11-254 BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0122: TP Sensor A Circuit Low Voltage 9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is there about 0.3 V or less?

YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there continuity?

at the throttle body and the PCM .• YES-Repair short in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (C20), then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.
Are DTC PO 122 and P0222 indicated at the same
time? 10. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
YES-Go to step 10.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
8. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). =

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-255
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 17. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-396).
13. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 18. Reconnect all connectors.
14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
15. Check for continuity between PCM connector 20. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
terminal C12 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No.2. 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

Wire side of
Q female terminals YES-Check for poor connections or loose
VCC3 (BLU) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
terminals atthethrottle bodyand the PCM, then go
to step 1.

lemporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the


Is there continuity? software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (C12), then go to step 18. Is DTC PO 122 indicated?

terminals at TP sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM

11-256 BACK
DTC P0123: TP Sensor A Circuit High Voltage 8. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P
3. Check TP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
=
Is there about 4.8 V or more?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there about 5 V?

at the throttle body and the PCM .• YES-Go to step 18.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO-Go to step 9.
Are DTC P0123 and P0223 indicated at the same 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
time?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 5.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-257
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
terminal C20 and throttle'body 6P connector
terminal No.1. 14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.

terminal C39 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No.4.
TPSA (RED/BLK) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

Terminal side of female terminals PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
Q
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire betweenthe throttle

YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the throttle

11-258 BACK
19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-396).

terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then go
to step 1.


good PCM (seepage 11-8).


BACK 11-259
DTC P0222: TP Sensor B Circuit Low Voltage 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 6. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 9. Check for continuity between throttle body 6P
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
HDS. THROTTLE BODY SP CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 4.

at the throttle body and the PCM .•

Are DTC PO 122 and P0222 indicated at the same
time?
YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Repair short in the wire between the throttle
NO-Go to step 5. body and the PCM (C21), then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 23.
11-260 BACK
10. Measure voltage between throttle body 6P 15. Check for continuity between PCM connector
connector terminal No.2 and body ground. terminal C12 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No.2.,
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

Is there about 5 V?
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NO-Repair open in the wire between the throttle
(cont'd)
BACK 11-261

to step 1.




11-262 BACK
DTC P0223: TP Sensor B Circuit High Voltage 8. Measure voltage between throttle body SP .
3. Check TP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
=
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there about 5 V?

at the throttle body and the PCM .• YES-Go to step 18.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. NO-Go to step 9.
Are OTe PO 123 and P0223 indicated at the same 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
time?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 5.
S. Disconnect the throttle body SP connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11~263
terminal C21 and throttle body 6P connector terminal C39 and throttle body 6P connector
terminal No.3. terminal No.4.
THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR THROTTLE BODY 6P CONNECTOR

A. A
ll12131415 61 11 2131415 61
I TPSB (RED/BLU) ISG3(GRN)
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
II II If II
Q J
II 2 3 4 I 5 I 6 7 8 J9J 11 2 3 41516 7 8 91
Q
10 1112 13114115116 17 18 19 I ~ 10111 12 13114115116 17 181191 I
20 2122
~ 26
>< 23 1/ 25 2012122 2:< 23L'1 25 1.
28 29130131132 1/1/ / • ~ 2612728 29130 131 I321,/VVI
1361/ 38 39140 141 42 43 441 136 1/ 38 39 140 141 42 431441
TPSB (RED/BLU) I SG3 (GRN)
NO-Repair open in the wire between the throttle NO-Repair open in the wire between the throttle
body and the PCM (C21), then go to step 20. body and the PCM (C39), then go to step 20.
11-264 BACK

to step 1.



terminals at TP sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM

BACK 11-265
EI'ectronic Throttle Control System
DTC P1658: Electronic Throttle Control 5. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-64).
System (ETCS) Control Relay ON Malfunction
Is the.ETCScontrol relay OK?
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace theETCS control relay, then go to
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). step 13.
2. Dothe ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with 6. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
the HDS.
Is the RELAY circuit OK?
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this terminal A20 and body ground.
at the ETCS control relay and the PCM .• PCM CO"'N~CTOR A (44P)
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. ETCSRL~Y~t1~~~~~~~~

(YEll 1-
4. Remove the ETCS control relay (F) from the under-
Q
=

(A20) and the ETCS control relay, then go to
step 13.
NO-Go to step 9.
F
11-266 BACK
9. Oisconnect PCMconnector C (44P). 17. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is OTC P1658 indicated?
11. Measure voltage between PCM connector terminal YES-Check for poor connections or loose
C1 and body ground. terminals at the ETCScontrol relay and the PCM; ,
then go to step 1.
PCM CONNECTOR C 144P)
IIG1ETCS IVEL/GRN) NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
II Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
111 2 3 4 1516 7 8 9 1 1 indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
• 110111 121311411511617 18 19 I
12012122 >< 23V 25 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
• 12612728 29130131132V /L I
, 136 1/ 36 39140 141 42 431441

= good PCM (see page 11"8).
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
the PCM (C1) and the ETCS control relay, then go to YES-Check for poor.connections.or loose
step 12. terminals atthe ETCS control relay and the PCM. If
NO-Goto step 18. PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was
13. Reconnect all connectors. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
BACK 11-267
Dle P1659: Electronic Throttle Control· 7. Test the ETCS control relay (see page 22-64).
System (ETCS) Control Relay OFF
Malfunction Is the ETCS control relay OK?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). NO-Replace the ETCS control relay, then go to
step 23.
2. Clear the DTCwith the HDS.
9. Measure voltage between ETCS control relay 4P
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. connector terminal No.4 and body ground.
Is DTC P1659 indicated? ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 4. IGP

4
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 2 1
at the ETCS control relay and the PCM .•
5. Check the No. 21 DBW (THROTTLE ACTUATOR =

CONTROL)(15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay Terminal side of female terminals
box.
Is the fuse OK? Is there battery voltage?
NO-Go to step 17. NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box

6. Remove the ETCS control relay (F) from the under-
11-268 BACK
10. Measure voltage between ETCS control relay 4P 14. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P
connector terminal No.4 and body ground. connector terminal No.2 and PCM connector
terminal C1.
ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
r--
+8 4 ~..,....---.
2 1 ~ 2 1
3 l-r-~
- IIG1ETCS
r-------'
~erminal side of female terminals
IG1ETCS
(YEL/GRN)·
~
Q .
II II
Terminal side of female terminals I 1· 23 4 I 5 I 6 7 8 I 9 I
10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19 I
202122 >< 23/25
Is there battery voltage? • 262728 29130131132/ / / I
I36V 38 39140141 42 43 441
YES-Go to step 11. Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C1)
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. and the ETCS control relay, then go to step 23.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-269
15. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 17. Remove the ETCS control relay (F) from the under-
16. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P
terminal A20.
ETCS CONTROL RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
-
4
S
f---'
2 1
3
TETCSRLY

Q II II F
1/1 2 / 4 15 I 6 / 8191.
10V 12 13114116116 17 181 191
20 21 22 >< 23241 261 I
ETCSRLY
(YE L)
2627 V1 VI V
29 31 3334 351
1361 37 363940V 42 43144J
YES-Go to step 28. terminal C1 and body ground.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
(A20) and the ETCS control relay, then go to step IG1ETCS (YEL/GRN)
23. Ir 11
11 12 3 41516 7 8 91
10 11
1213114115116 17 18 19 •
2021
~ 2627
22 >< 23 / 25
I
28 29130131132 / / /
1361/ 36 39140 141 42 43 441
Q

(C1) and the ETCS control relay, then go to step 23.
NO-Go to step 21.
11-270 BACK
21. Check for continuity between ETCS control relay 4P 28. Reconnect all connectors.
ETCS CONTROL RELAV 4P CONNECTOR
software (see 'page 11-7), or substitute a known-

terminals at the ETCS control relay and the PCM. If
= PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
Terminal side of female terminals substituted, go to step 1.

Is there continuity? complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
YES-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
(see page 22-61), then go to step 23. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Go to step 28.

terminals at the ETCS control relay and the PCM,
then go to step 1.

BACK 11-271
DTC P1683: Throttle Valve Default Position 9. Push the throttle valve closed as shown.
Spring Performance Problem
ACAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle
body when you turn-the ignition switch ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve
is activated.

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Release the throttle valve.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Does the throttle valve return?
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-394),
then go to step 12 and recheck. If DTC P1683 is
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds. indicated, go to step 11.
6. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 11. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-396).
Is DTC P1683 indicated? 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 14. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
at the throttle body and the PCM .• 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
8. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7) and 17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
intake air duct (charge air cooler outlet tube)
(see page 9-11). Is DTCP1683 indicated?

to step 1.

11-272 BACK
OTe P1684: Throttle Valve Return Spring 9. Push the throttle valve open as shown.
Performance Problem
ACAUTION
body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or
will seriously injure your fingers ifthe throttle valve
is activated.

2. Clear the OTC with the HOS. 10. Release the throttle valve.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at Does the throttle valve return?
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-394),
then go to step 12 and recheck. If OTC P1684 is
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds. indicated, go to step 11.
6. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS. 11. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-396).
Is DTC P1684 indicated? 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Go to step 7. 13. Hesetthe PCM with the HOS.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 14. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
at the throttle body and the PCM .• 15. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
8. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7) and 17. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
(see page 9-11). Is DTC P1684 indicated?

to step 1.

BACK 11-273
DTC P2101:Electronic Throttle Control 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

System (ETCS) Malfunction
8. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7) and
, i~~ake air duct (charge air cooler outlet tube)
ACAUTION (see page 9-11'),
body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
will seriously injure your fingers if the throttle valve 10. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
is activated.
11. Dothe ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 12. Visually check the throttle valve operation.
Does the throttle valve operate smoothly?
YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-394),
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. then go to step 22 and recheck. If DTC P2101 is
indicated, go to step 19.
3. Do the ETCS TEST inthe INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS. NO.,....Go to step 13.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs orDTCs with the HDS. 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is DTC P2101 indicated? 14. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
YES-Go to step 7. 15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 5. 16. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 17. Connect throttle body 6P connector terminals No.5
range ofthese recorded freeze data parameters: and No.6 with a jumper wire.
• ENGINESPEED THROTTLE BODV 6P CONNECTOR

• VSS
• APP SENSOR A

ETCSM- ETCSM+
Is DTC P2101 indicated? (GRN) (BLU)
YES-Go to step 7. JUMPER WIRE

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Wire side of female terminals
at the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the
throttle body (see page 11-394).•
11-274 BACK
18. Check for continuity between PCM connector 25. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
terminals C3 and C4. range of these recorded freeze data parameters:
• ENGINE SPEED
(G~CSM+
• VSS
• APP SENSOR A
ETCSM- (BLU)
III II
I1 I2 3 41516 7 8 19 I
10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19 •
• 20 2122 >< 23 V 25
I
26 272B 29130131132 V V V
136 V 38 39140 141 42 431441 YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then
clean the throttle body (see page 11-394), and go to
step 1. ..
Is there continuity? Temporary DTCs or DTC~ are indicated, go to the
YES-Go to step 27.
NO-Repair open in the wires between the throttle
body and the PCM (C3, C4), then go to step 21: 28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. good PCM (see page 11-8).
20. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-396), 29. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
• ENGINE SPEED
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • VSS
• APP SENSOR A

terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the
(see page 11-8), then go to step 29. If the PCM was

BACK 11-275
DTC P2118: Throttle Actuator Current Rangel 4. Disconnect the throttle body SP connector.
Performance Problem
5. At the throttle body side, measure resistance
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data between throttle body SP connector terminals No.5
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general and No. S with the throttle fully closed.
THROTTLE BODV 6P CONNECTOR
2. Disconnect PCM connector.C (44P).

terminals C3 and C4.
PCM CONNECTOR C I44PI
Is there about 1.0 Q or less?
YES-Go to step S.
NO-Repair short in the wires between the PCM C3

(ETCSM- line) and C4 (ETCSM+ line), then go to
Terminal side of female terminals step 7.
Is there about 1.0 Q or less? S. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-396).
YES-Go to step 4. 7. Reconnect a" connectors.
NO-Go to step 15. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (").
11-276 BACK
13. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
Is DrC P2118 indicated?

to step 1.


19. Slowly press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
Is DrC P2118 indicated?


BACK 11-277
OTe P2122: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit Low Voltage
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.

at APP sensor A and the PCM .• =
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Wire side of female terminals
4. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.

6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector (A 17) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24.
terminals No.2 and No.3.
NO-Go to step 11.
APPSENSOR6PCONNECTOR
11. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No.1 to
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
APSA(YEl)
Wire side of female terminals JUMPER WIRE
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 17.
11-278 BACK
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
16. CheckAPP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the
PCM CONNECTOR A (44PI HDS.
APSA(YELI
Ir 11 Is there about 0.2 V or less?
V2/41516 8191.
110V 12131141151161718191 YES-Go to step 29.
120121 22 >< 2324251
~ 126127 ~ 29VI31 33 34 351
V NO-Go to step 22.
136 37 38 391401/42 431441

Q

= 19. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
Is there continuity? 20. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No.3 to

YES-Go to step 13.
(A 17) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24.
13. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P).
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No.1 VCC4(BRNI

and No.3 with a jumper wire. JUMPER WIRE
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR =

APSA(YELI VCC4(BRNI
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
BACK 11-279
VCC4 good PCM (see page 11-8).
~~~~~~»h(BRN)
.Q YES-Check for poor connections or loose

terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM
= was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
Terminal side of female terminals (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was
Is there continuity? .
YES-Go to step 30. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM Temporary DTCsor DTCs are indicated, g() to the
(A25) and APP sensor A, then go to step 24. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
23. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page

11-295).

terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

11-280 BACK
DTe P2123: APP Sensor A (TP Sensor D) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). body ground with a jumper wire.
2. Check APP SENSOR A in the DATA LIST with the APPSENSOR6PCONNECTOR

HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.
SG4(BLU)
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this JUMPER WIRE
at APP sensor A and the PCM .• =

5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal A35 and body ground.

6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector
Wire side of female terminals Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 19.

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12. (A35) and APP sensor A, then go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-281

11-295).

terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM, then go to
step 1.


,.

Is OTCP2123 indicated?

terminals at APP sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM

11:282 BACK
DTC P2127: APP Sensor B (TP Sensor E) 7. Turnthe ignition switch OFF.
Circuit Low Voltage
troubleshooting information (see page 11"3).
10. Check for continuity between APP sensor 6P
1. Turn the ignition switch ONO!). connector terminal No.4 and body ground.
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.

at APP sensor B and the PCM .•.

6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector (A 18) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24.
NO-Go to step 11.
APP SENSOR6P CONNECTOR
APSB (PUR)
Wire side of female terminals JUMPER WIRE
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-283
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector 15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
16. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) HDS.
APSB(PUR)
Ir 11 Is there about 0.2 V or less?
IV2/41516/891.
" 110V 12 13114115116 17 181191 YES-Go to step 29.
120121 22 >< 23241251 •
~ 12sI27/29V131V33 341351 • NO-Go to step 22.
J36 37 36 3s140Vl42 43 441

=
Is there continuity? 20. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminal No.6 to

YES-Go to step 13.
APPSENSOR6PCONNECTOR
(A 18) and APP sensor B, then go to step 24.
14. Connect APP sensor 6P connector terminals No.4 VCC5(GRV)

and No.6 with a jumper wire. JUMPER WIRE
APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR =

APSB (PUR) VCC5(GRV)
JUMPER WIRE
11-284 BACK
21. Check for continuity between PCMconnector 29. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

terminals at APP sensor 8 and the PCM. If the PCM
= was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
Terminal side of female terminals (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was
YES-Go to step 30. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
(A24) and APP sensor 8, then go to step 24. indicated DTC's troubleshooting ••

11-295).

terminals at APP sensor 8 and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

BACK 11-285
DTC P2128: APP SensorS (TP Sensor E) 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). body ground with a jumper wire.
2. Check APP SENSOR B in the DATA LIST with the APP SENSOR 6P CONNECTOR
HDS.
YES-Go to step 3.
SG5 (LTBLU)
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this JUMPER WIRE
at APP sensor B and the PCM .• =
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Wire side offemale terminals

5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal A34 and body ground.
6. Measure voltage between APP sensor 6P connector PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

=
YES-Go to step 19.

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 12. (A34) and APP sensor. B, then go to step 14.
NO-Goto step 7.
11-286 BACK

11-295).

terminals at APP sensorB and the PCM, then go to
step 1.



terminals at APP sensor B and the PCM. If the PCM

BACK 11-287
OTe P2135: TP Sensor AlB Incorrect Voltage 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Correlation
ACAUTION 11. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).

body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you terminals C20 and C21.
is activated. PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
TPSB (RED/BLU)
3. Do the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

the HDS. Terminal side of female terminals
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there continuity?
Is DTe P2135 indicated? YES-Go to step 13.

at the throttle body and the PCM .•
6. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7) and

(see page 9-11).
8. Visually check the throttle valve operation while

you clear the DTC with the HDS.
Does the valve temporarily move to its fully

closed position?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 9.
11 ..288 BACK
13. Oisconnect the throttle body 6P connector. 22. Reconnect all connectors.
14. Check for continuity between PCM connector 23. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
terminals C20 and C21. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
good PCM (seepage "'-8).
?Q
TPS~(RE~/BLU)
1111234151678191
10 1 12 13114115116 17 18 19 I
20 21 22 :::::>< 23 / 25

(see· page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was

Terminal side of female terminals complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Is there continuity? Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
YES-Repair short in the wires between the PCM
C20 (TPSA line) and the C21 (TPSB line), then go to
step 17.
NO-Go to step 15.

to step 1.

BACK 11-289
DTC P2138: APP Sensor AlB (TP Sensor DIE) 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
Incorrect Voltage Correlation terminals A17 and A18.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data PCM CONNECTOR A (44PI
2. Clear the DTC with HDS.
3. Press the accelerator pedal to the floor.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs mDTCs with the HDS.
Is ore P2138 indicated? Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis YES-Go to step 10.

atthe APP sensor and the PCM .• NO-Go to step 22.
5. Check APP SENSOR A and APP SENSOR B in the 10. Disconnect the APP sensor 6P connector.
11. Check for continuity between PCMconnector
Are they the same voltage? terminals A 17 and A 18.
YES-Go to step 6. PCM CONNECTOR A (44PI
NO-Go to step 12.
YES-Repair short in the wires between PCM

connector terminals A17 (APSA line) and A18
(APSB line), then go to step 14.
NO-Goto step 13.
11-290 BACK
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs witn the HDS.
13. Replace the accelerator pedal module (see page Is DTC P2138 indicated?
11-295).
14. Reconnect all connectors. terminals at APP sensor AlB and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a· known-good PCM
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (see page 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was
17. Do the PCM idle learn procedure. (see page 11-339). complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the

terminals at the APP sensor AlB and the PCM, then
go to step 1.


good PCM (seepage 11-8)..
BACK 11-291
DTC P2176: Throttle Actuator Control System 10. Visually check the throttle valve operation while
Idle Position Not Learned doing the ETCS TEST in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
ACAUTION Does the throttle valve move to its fully closed
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle position?
body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or
while the ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, you YES-Go to step 11.
is activated. NO-Go to step 12.
11. Check for sludge or carbon.on the throttle valve.

NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Is there sludge or carbon on the throttle valve?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Clean the throttle body (see page 11-394),
• If DTC P2135 is stored at the same time as DTC P2176, then go to step 21.
P2176. NO-Go to step 18.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 13. Disconnect the throttle body 6P connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 14. Jumpthe SCS line with the HDS.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 15. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
10 seconds.
16. Connectthrottle body 6P connector terminals No.5
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. and No.6 with a jumper wire.
Is DTC P2176 indicated? THROTTLE BODV6PCONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 6.

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals ETCSM- ETCSM+
at the throttle body and the PCM, then clean the (GRN) (BLU)
throttle body (see page 11-394) .•
JUMPER WIRE
7. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7) and Wire side of female terminals
(see page 9-11).
11-292 BACK
17. Check for continuity between PCM connector 26. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
terminalsC3 and C4.
PCM CONNECTOR C 144P)
terminals at the throttle body and the PCM, then
clean the throttle body (see page 11-394), and go to
step 1.

Terminal side of female terminals 28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Is there continuity? good PCM (see page 11-8).
YES-Go to step 27. 29. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCs with the HOS.
NO-Repair open in the wires between the throttle Is DTC P2176 indicated?
body and the PCM (C3, C4), then go to step 20.
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the
19. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-396). (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the PCM was
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
22. Reset the PCM with the HOS. Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, go to the
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait

10 seconds.
BACK 11~293
APP Sensor Signal Inspection

NOTE: 4. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,
• This procedure checks the APP sensor in its fully then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
closed position. In any other position, the APP sensor the HDS.
stores DTCs which are covered in other
troubleshooting procedures. • If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
• Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS • If it is not 0 %, update the PCM if it does not have
before doing this procedure. If any DTCs are the latestsoftware (see page 11-7), or substitute
indicated, troubleshoot them first, then do this a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to
procedure. step 5.
• Press the accelerator pedal several times, to check its
operation. If it does not operate smoothly, check the 5. Make sure the accelerator pedal is not pressed,
pedal. If you find a problem, replace the accelerator then check the APP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
pedal module (see page 11-295). the HDS.
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) • If it is 0 %, the APP sensor is OK.
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. • If it is not 0 %, replace the accelerator pedal
module (see page 11-295), then go to step 1.

(see page 11-229).
11-294 BACK
Accelerator Pedal Module Removal/Installation
1. Disconnect the accelerator pedal module 6P

connector (A).
2. Remove the accelerator pedal module (8).
NOTE: The APP sensor is not available separately.

Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal module.
BACK 11 ..295
VTEC/VTC
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL VALVE

ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
Removal/Installation, page 11-321. .
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR A (INTAKE SIDE)

Replacement. page 11-320
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL MODULE
(PCM)
Update,
page 11-7
Substitution,
page 11-8
Replacement,
page 11-252
VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE

Removal(Test/lnstallation, page 11-319
VTC STRAINER
11-296 BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
Ole P0010: VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve 8. Measure resistance between VTC oil control
Malfunction solenoid valve 2P connector terminals No.1 and
No.2.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR

4. Do the VTC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with Terminal side of male terminals
the HDS.
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Is there 6.75- 8.25 Q at room temperature?
Is Dre POO1O indicated? YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis

at the VTC oil control solenoid valve and the
PCM .•
7. Disconnect the VTC oil control solenoid valve 2P

connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-297
VTEC/VTC
9. Check for continuity between VTC oil control 13. Check for continuity between VTC oil control
solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.1 and solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and
body ground. PCM connectorterminal C23.
VTC OIL CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR

/"-.
\1 \2\
I VTC (BLU/WHT)

II II Q
Il 2 3 41516 7 8191
= 10 11 12 13114115116 1.7 18 19 I
20 21
~ 2627
22 >< 23/ 25
28 29130131132 IV /
Wire side of female terminals 136 1/ 36 39140 141 I ~ 431441
VTC (BLU/WHT)
Is there continuity? . Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Repair open in the wire between the VTC oil YES-Go to step 22.
control solenoid valve and G101 (see page 22-18),
then go to step 15. NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
(C23) and the VTC oil control solenoid valve, then
10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. go to step 15.
11. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 14. Replace the VTC oil control solenoid valve
(see page 11-319).
terminal C23 and body ground. 15. Reconnect all connectors.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
19. Do the VTC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

the HDS.
=

(C23) and the VTC oil control solenoid valve, then
go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 13.
"'-298 BACK
20. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0010 in the
terminals at the VTC oil control solenoid valve and YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
the PCM, then go to step 1. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO-Go to step 21. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 25,
DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the VTC oil
Does the screen indicate PASSED? control solenoid valve and the PCM. If the PCM was
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 11-8), then go to step 24. If the PCM was substituted,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 20, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• COMPLETED, go to step 24.

control solenoid valve and the PCM, then go to step
1. If the screen indicates NOT COIYIPLETED, go to
step 19.

software (see page 11-7)~ or substitute a known-

the HDS.

terminals at the VTC oil control solenoid valve and
NO-Go to step 26.
BACK 11-299
VTEC/VTC
DTC P0011: VTC System Malfunction 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0011 in the
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general Does the screen indicate FAILED?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. failure, the system is OK at this time. ,If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 5 and
3. Start the engine. recheck.
4. Watch the low oil pressure indicator with the 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
engine running.
Is the low oil pressure indicator on? 4-33).
YES-Check the oil pressure (see page 8-9), then go 11. Remove theVTC strainer (A), and check it for
to step 15. clogging.
NO-Go to step 5.

the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 9.

7. Check the VTC STATUS in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Is the strainer OK?
Does it indicate ON?
YES-Go to step 12.
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Clean the VTC strainer, replace the engine oil
NO-Go to step 6 and recheck. filter and the engine oil, then go to step 14.
12. Testthe VTC oil control solenoid valve (see page

11-319).
Is the VTC oil control solenoid valve OK?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Replace the VTC oil control solenoid valve

11-300 BACK
13. Inspect the VTC actuator (see page 6-8).
Is the VTC actuator OK?
YES-Check the VTC system oil passages, then go

to step 14.
NO-Replace the VTC actuator (see page 6-35),

then go to step 14.
18. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).

the HDS.

NO-Go to step 21.



1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 19.
BACK 11-301
VTEC/VTC
DTC P0340: CMP Sensor A No Signal 9. Measure voltage between CMP sensor A 3P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general CMP SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. =

Is DTe P0340 indicated? Wire side of female terminals .
YES-Go to step 5.
Is there about 5 V?
at CMP sensor A and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 11.
10. Measure voltage between CMP sensor A 3P
6. Disconnect the CMP sensor A 3P connector. connector terminals No.2 and No.3.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). CMP SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR
8. Measure voltage between CMP sensor A 3P

CMP SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR
= Is there battery voltage?

Is there battery voltage? A and G101 (see page 22-18), then go to step 18.
YES-Go to step 9.

A and the No. 31G1 ACG (15 A) fuse, then go to
step 18.
11 ..302 BACK
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 15. Check for continuity between CMP sensor A 3P
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. terminal C41.
13. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). CMP SENSOR A 3P CONNECTOR

.6-
14. Check for continuity between PCM connector l11213J
terminal C41 and body ground. I CMPA (BLU/WHTI
PCM CONNECTOR C (44PI PCM CONNECTOR C (44PI
JL ~
l112 3 41516 7 8 19 J
.Q I" [10 11 12 13114jl5J16 17 18 19 I
I" [20 2122 z.<:: 23 V 25
I
J26 272B 29130131J32 IL V V
U JL.
36 38 39140141 42 43144~
I CMPA(BLU /WHTI
=

(C41) and CMP sensor A,then go to step 18.
(C41) and CMP sensor A, then go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 15.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-303
VTEC/VTC
17. Replace CMP sensor A (see page 11-320).
19. Turn the ignition sI/Vitch ON (II).

terminals at CMP sensor A and the PCM, then go to
step 1.

Temporary OTCs or OTCs are indicated, goto the


terminals at CMP sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM

11-304 BACK
DTC P0341: CMP Sensor A and CKP Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0341 in the
incorrect Phase Detected DTCs MENU with the HOS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the screen indicate FAILED?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Go to step 9.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
failure, the system isOK at this time. Check for
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. poor connections or loose terminals at the VTC oil
control solenoid valve and the PCM. If the screen
3. Test-drive at a steady speed between 19-38 mph indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step 6 and
(30-60 km/h) for 10 minutes. recheck.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is DTC P0341 indicated? 10. Test the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see page
11-319).
YES-Go to step 9.
Is the VTC oil control solenoid valve OK?
NO-Go to step 5.
YES- Go to step 11.
the HDS. NO-Replace the VTC oil control solenoid valve
(see page 11-319), thengo to step 14.
Is the result OK?
11. Check the camshaft timing (see step 5 on page
YES-Go to step 6. 6-13).
NO-Go to step 9. Is the camshaft timing OK?
6. Test-drive at a steady speed between 19-38 mph YES-Go to step 12.

NO-Reset the camshaft timing (see page 6-13),
7. Check the VTC STATUS in the DATA LIST with the then go to step 14.
HDS.
12. Check for damage or stretch at the cam chain
Does it indicate ON? (see page 6-24).
YES-Go to step 8. Is the cam chain damaged?
NO-Go to step 6 and recheck. YES-Replace the cam chain and auto-tensioner
NO-Goto step 13.
13. Inspect the VTC actuator (see page 6-8).
Is the actuator OK?
YES-Go to step 14.

then go to step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-305
VTEC/VTC
18. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page. 11-4).

(30-60 km/h) for 10 minutes,
YES-Check for poor connections or loose .

NO-Go to step 21.



connectiQnsor loose terminals at the VTC oil.
1. If the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to
step 19.
11-306 BACK
DTC P0344: CMP Sensor ACircuit 8. Check for damage to the CMP sensor A pulser plate
Intermittent Interruption (see page 6-34).
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is the pulser plate damaged?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3.). YES-Replace the CMP sensor A pulser plate
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Turn the ignition switch.OFF.
10. Replace CMP sensor A (see page 11-320).
4. Check the CMP NOISE A count in the DATA LIST
with the HDS. 11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Are 0 counts indicated? 12. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 7. 13. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
NO-Go to step 5. 14. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
• ENGINE SPEED
• VSS YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at CMP sensor A and thePCM, then go to
6. Check the CMP NOISE A count in the DATA LIST step 1.
with the HDS.
NO,....Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
Are 0 counts indicated? Temporary DTCs or DTCs are indicated, go to the
YES-Go to step 7.

at CMP sensor A and the PCM .•

at these locations:
• CMP sensor A
• PCM
• Engine ground
• Body ground
YES-Go to step 8.

step 11.
BACK 11-307
VTEC/VTC
DTC P1009: VTC Advance· Malfunction 8. Test the VTC oil control solenoid valve (see page'
11-319).
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and Is the valve OK?
• If DTC P0341 is stored at the same time as DTC P1009,
troubleshoot DTC P1 009 first, then recheck for DTC NO-Replace the VTC oil control solenoid valve
P0341. (see page 11-319), then go to step 10.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Inspectthe VTC actuator (see page 6-8).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Is the actuator OK?
3. Start the engine. YES-Check the VTC system oil passages, then go
to step 10.
Is orc P1009 indicated? then go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 5. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 11. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
time.•
4-33). 14. Do the CKP pattern learn procedure (see page 11-4).
7. Remove the VTC strainer (A), and check it for 15. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
clogging.
YES-Check the oil passages atthe VTC system,

then go to step 1.

Is the strainer OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Clean the VTC strainer, replace the engine oil

filter and the engine oil, then go to step 10.
11-308 BACK
DTC P2646:RockerArm Oil Pressure Switch 8. Check the VTEC PRES SW in the DATA LIST with
Circuit Low Voltage the HDS.
Special Tools Required Is SWITCH ON indicated?

• Pressure gauge adapter 07NAJ-P07010A
• AfT low pressure gauge w/panel 07406-0070301 YES-Go to step 16.·
• AfT pressure hose 07406-0020201
• AfT pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A NO-Go to step 9.
• AfT pressure adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
• Oil pressure hose 07ZAJ-S5AA200 9. Tumthe ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 10. Remove the charge air cooler cover (see step 1 on
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general page 9-8).
11. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A), and
1. Check the engine oil level. install the special tools as shown, then install the
rocker arm oil pressure switch on the oil pressure
Is the engine oil level OK? gauge attachment (B).
YES-Go to step 2. NOTE: Install the. switch in the reverse order of

removal with a new O-ring.
NO:-Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then
go to step 20.. 07406-0070301 07406-0020201 or
07MAJ-PY4011A and
07MAJ-PY40120
3. Clear the DTC with.the HDS.

A
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with 22N·m
the HDS. 12.2 kgf·m,
16lbf·ftl
Is the result OK?

at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker
arm oil control solenoid, and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P

connector. 12. Reconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector.
14. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

the HDS.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-309
VTEC/VTC
15. Check the oil pressure. 23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
Does the oil pressure increase to at least 392 kPa 24. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
(4.0 kgflcrri' , 56.9 psi)? the HDS.
YES-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch 25. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Inspect the VTEC system. If it is OK, replace
the rocker arm oil control solenoid (see page YES-Check for poor connections or loose
11-321), then go to step 20. terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the
rocker arm oil control solenoid and the PCM, then
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. go step 1.
17. Jumpthe SCS line with the HDS. NO-Go to step 26.
18. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P). 26. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2646 in the
terminal C22 and body ground. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
PCM CONNECTOR C (44PI YES""':Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

Ir II
11 2 3 41516 7 8 91
I" 110 11 121311411611617 18 19 •
1202122 >< 231/26
~ 12627 61291301311321/1/ / I connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
1361/ 8 39140 141 42 43 441 pressure switch, the rocker arm oil control solenoid,
and the PCM, then go to step 1. Ifthe screen
VTPSW (BLU/BLKI
Q
Terminal side of female terminals 28. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Is there continuity? good PCM (see page 11-8).
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM 29. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
(C22) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then the HDS.
go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 27.
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the
rocker arm oil control solenoid and the PCM. If the
22. Reset the PCM with the HDS. PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
NO-Go to step 31.
11-310 BACK


connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
pressure switch, the rocker arm oil control solenoid,
BACK 11-311
VTEC/VTC
OTC P2647: Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch 8. At the rocker arm oil pressure switch side, check for
Circuit High Voltage continuity between rocker arm oil pressure switch
2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
1. Check the engine oil level.
Is the engine oil level OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Adjust the engine oil to the proper level, then

go to step 17.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Is there continuity?
4. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with YES-Go to step 9.

the HDS.
NO-Replace the rocker arm oil pressure switch
Is the result OK? (see page 11-321), then go to step 16.
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the rocker 10. Measure voltage between rocker arm oil pressure
arm oil control solenoid, and the PCM .• switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
NO-Go to step 5.
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
5. Check the result of step 4.
• VTEC Switch Failure

• VTEC Switch Open
• VTEC Switch SIG Line Open
• VTEC Switch GND Line Open
Is the test result any of above?
YES-Go to step 6. =
NO-Check for poor connections or loose terminals
at the rocker arm oil pressure switch. If it is OK,
replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page Is there battery voltage?
11-321), then, go to step 15.
YES-Repair open in the wire between the rocker
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. arm oil pressure switch and G101 (see page 22-18),
then go to step 15.
7. Disconnect the rocker arm oil pressure switch 2P
connector. NO-Go to step 11.
11-312 BACK
terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the
14. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil rocker arm oil control solenoid and the PCM, then
pressure switch 2P connector terminal No.1 and go to step 1.
PCM connector terminal C22.
NO-Go to step 21.
ROCKER ARM OIL PRESSURE SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
21. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P?647 in the

VTPSW DTCs MENU with the HDS.
(BLU/BLK)
Wire side of female terminals Does the screen indicate PASSED?

Q Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 20,

VTPSW (BLU/BLK) and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
Terminal side of female terminals indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
result comes on.
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
(C22) and the rocker arm oil pressure switch, then good PCM (see page 11-8).
go to step 16.
18. Reset the PCM with the HDS. terminals at the rocker arm oil pressure switch, the
rocker arm oil control solenoid and the PCM. If the
19. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
NO-Go to step 26.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-313
VTEC/VTC



connections or loose terminals at the rocker aim oil
11-314 BACK
DTC P2648: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: 8efore you troubleshoot, record all freeze data
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 9. Check for continuity between PCM connector
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). terminal 834 and body ground.

II II
11 l/ 3 415[,,{ 7 8191
~ V 11 12 13J14115116 17 18 VI"
3. Do the VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with
the HDS.
~ 20 21 22 >< 2324 251 I
2627 28 1/130131132 3334 351
1361/ / 1/140 141 42 1441 .
Is the result OK?
VTS(G RN/VEl)
YES-Intermittent failure, the system isOK at this Q

time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals ..
at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the =
PCM .• Terminal side of .female terminals
NO-Go to step 4. Is there continuity?
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES-Repair short in ttw wire between the PCM
(834) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid, then
5. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P goto step 11.
connector.
NO-Go to step 18.
6. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between
rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P connector 10. Replace the rocker arm oil control valve (see page,
terminals No.1 and No.2. 11-321).
ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR

13. Reset the ~CM with the HDS.
15. Do the VTEC TEST in the IN~PECTION MENU with

the HDS.
Is there 14-30 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Goto step 10.
(cont'd)
BACK
VTEC/VTC
16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 22. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2648 in the
terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
the PCM, t~en go to step 1. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-252). Ifany other
NO-Go to step 17. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 21,
DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
Does the screen indicate PASSED? control solenoid and the PCM. If the PCM was
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 11-8), then go to step 20. If the PCM was substituted,
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 16, go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• COMPLETED, go to step 20.
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1

and recheck. Ifthe screen indicates NOT
COMPLETED, go to step 15.

20. Dothe VTEC TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with

the HDS.

terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and
NO-Go to step 22.
11-316 BACK
DTC P2649: Rocker Arm Oil Control Solenoid 8. Check for continuity between rocker arm oil control
Circuit High Voltage solenoid 2P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general ROCKER ARM OIL CONTROL SOLENOID 2P CONNECTOR

4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Wire side offemale terminals

YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 9.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals NO-Repair open in the wire between the rocker
at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and the arm oil control solenoid and G101 (see page 22-18),
PCM .• then go to step 13.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 9. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
6. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P 10. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
connector.
7. Atthe solenoid side, measure resistance between

rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P connector
Is there 14-30 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-317
VTEC/VTC
11. Check for continuity between PCM connector 18. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P2649 in the
terminal B34 and rocker arm oil control solenoid 2P DTCs MENU with the HDS.

NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 1
PCMCONNECTOR B (44P)
and recheck. If the screen indicates NOT
Q COMPLETED, keep idling until a result comes on.

22. ·Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Repair open in the wire 'between the PCM
(B34) and the rocker arm oil control solenoid, then YES-Check for poor connections or loose
go to step 13. terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and
12. Replace the. rocker arm oil control valve (see page known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
11-321). 21. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
13. Reconnect all connectors. NO-Goto step 23.
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P2649 in the
17. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Is DTC P2649 indicated? Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 22,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting. II
terminals at the rocker arm oil control solenoid and NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
the PCM, then go to step 1. connections or loose terminals at the rocker arm oil
control solenoid and the PCM. If the PCM was
NO-Go to step 18. updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-318 BACK
VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve Removal/Test/Installation
1. Disconnect the VTC oil control solenoid valve 2P 5. Connect the battery positive terminal to VTC oil
connector (A). control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.2.
BATTERY
6. Connect the battery negative terminal to VTC oil;

control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal NO.1.
Appearance of inner valve (A) in the port should be
at least 1/16 in. (1.2 mm).lfthe inner valve does not
open, replace it; then go to step 7.
2. Remove the bolt (8) and the VTC oil control Open
solenoid valve (C).
3. Check the VTC oil control solenoid valve strainer

1/16 in.
for clogging. If the strainer is clogged, replace the 11.2mm)
VTC oil control solenoid valve.
4. Note the amount of valve opening by observing the

position ofthepiston shoulder (A) through the
valve retard drain port. If you see the shoulder of
the piston, the valve is open and must be replaced.
Closed
A
(cont'd)
BACK 11-319
VTEC/VTC
VTC Oil Control Solenoid Valve CMP Sensor A Replacement

Removal/Test/Installation (cont'd)
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-394).
7. Coat a new O-ring (A) with engine oil, then install it. 2. Remove the air bypass outlet pipe (see page 9-7).
3. Disconnect the CMP sensor A 3P connector (A).
12N:m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
8. Clean and dry the mating surface of the valve.
9. Install the valve.
NOTE: Do not install the valve while wearing cloth

f
4. Remove CMP sensor A (B) from the intake
fibrous gloves. Be careful not to contaminate the camshaft side ofthe cylinder head.
cylinder head opening.
11-320 BACK
Rocker Arm Oil Control Valve Rocker Arm Oil Pressure Switch
Removal/Installation Removal/Installation
1. Remove the charge air cooler cover (see step 1 on 1. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve (see page
page 9-8). 11-321).
2. Remove the turbocharger cover (see step 4 on page 2. Remove the rocker arm oil pressure switch (A).
11-440).
3. Disconnect the rocker arm oil control solenoid

connector (A) and the rocker arm oil pressure
----A 22N·m
12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
switch connector (8).
c B A
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 3. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
8.7Ibf·ft) with a new O-ring (8).
F
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the water hose upper cover (e).
5. Remove the rocker arm oil control valve (D) and

cover (E).

with a new solenoid valve filter (F).
BACK 11-321
IdleCo'ntrol System
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL
MODULE
Update,
page 11-7
POWER STEERING Substitution,
PRESSURE (PSP) page 11-8
SWITCH Replacement,
Signal Circuit page 11-252
Troubleshooting,
page 11-334
AIC COMPRESSOR
CLUTCH RELAY
Signal Circuit
Troubleshooting,
page 11-332
ALTERNATOR
Signal Circuit Troubleshootiog,
page 11-333 .. AIC COMPRESSOR

Signal Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-336
11-322 BACK
DTC Troubleshooting
OTC P0506: Idle Control System RPM Lower 7. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
Than Expected bore.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general bore?
YES-If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). body (see page 11-394). Also check for damage to
the air cleaner element (see page 11-395), then go
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. to step 9. If there is damage in the throttle bore, go
to step 8.
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the NO-Check the AlC system or power steering
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. system, then go to step 9.
4. Check under these DATA LIST parameter 8. Replace the throttle body (see page 11-396).
conditions with the HDS:
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 "F (70 OC)
• IAT SENSOR above 32 "F (0 OC) 10. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
• VSS is 0 mph (0 km/h)
• ST FUEL TRIM between 0.69-1.47 11. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
• FSS is CLOSED 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. 12. Check under these DATA LIST parameter
conditions with the HDS:
YES-Go to step 6. • IAT SENSOR above 32 "F (0 OC)
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, go to step 15. • ST FUEL TRIM between 0.69-1.47
Ifthe screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling • FSS is CLOSED
until a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT
OF CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck. 13. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
6. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7) and Is ore P0506 indicated?
(see page 9-11). YES-Go to step 19.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-323
Idle Control System
14. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the 19. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
DTCs MENU with the HDS. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 13, radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
21. Check under these DATA LIST parameter
NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, go to step 19. If conditions with the HDS:
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF • ECT SENSOR 1 above 156 "F (70 "C)
CONDITION, goto step 12. • IAT SENSOR above 32 "F (0 "C)
15. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7) and • ST FUEL TRIM between 0.69-1.47
intake air duct (charge air cooler outlet tube) • FSS is CLOSED
(see page 9-11).
16. Check for dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle
bore. Is DTC P0506 indicated?
Is there dirt, carbon, or damage in the throttle YES-Check for poor connections or loose
bore? terminals at the throttle body and the PCM. If the
YES-If there is dirt or carbon, clean the throttle (see page 11-8), then go to step 20. If the PCM was
body (see page 11-394). Also check for damage to substituted, go to step 1.
the air cleaner element (see page 11-395), then go
to step 9. If there is damage in the throttle bore, go NO-Go to step 23.
to step 8.
NO-Go to step 17. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
17. Recheck with different load conditions (turn on the Does the screen indicate PASSED?
headlights, blower motor, rear window defogger
and/or AlC, change the gear position, etc.). YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
18. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0506 in the original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
DTCs MENU with the HDS. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 22,
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
time .• and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check the AlC 20. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
system and/or power steering system, then go to screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
step 1 and recheck. If the screen indicates result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
EXECUTING, keep idling until a result comes on. If CONDITION, go to step 20.
the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to
step 17.
11-324 BACK
DTC P0507: Idle Control System RPM Higher 5. Check for vacuum brair leaks atthese parts:
Than Expected
• PCVvalve
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data • PCV hose
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general • EVAP canister purge valve
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Throttle body
• Intake airduct (air flow tube)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Intake manifold
• Turbocharger
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. .• Intake air duct (turbocharger inlettube and pipe)
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at • Charge air cooler
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or'neutral) until the • Intake air duct (charge air cooler inlet hose)
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for • Intake air dudt (charge air cooler outlet tube)
20 seconds. •• Turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve
• Pressure regulator
4. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the • Brake booster hose
DTCs MENU with the HDS. • Brake booster
Does the screen indicate FAILED? Are there any leaks?
YES-Go to step 5. YES-Repair or replace the leaking part(s), then go

to step 6.
failure, the system is OK at this time. If the screen NO-Go to step 6.
indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
CONDITION, recheck with different load conditions
(electrical, AlC, gear position, etc.), then go to 7. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
step 3.
9. Start the engine. Hold the engine. speed at

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for
20 seconds.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-325
Idle Control System
11. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the 15. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0507 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. DTCs MENU with the HDS.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 10, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were. indicated in step 14,
NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, go to step 12. If go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until
a result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
CONDITION, recheck with different load conditions connections or loose terminals at the throttle body
(turn on the headlights, blower motor, or AlC; and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a
change the gear position, etc.), then go to step 9. known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
12. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest screen indicates EXECUTING, keep idling until a
software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known- result comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
good PCM (see page 11-8). CONDITION, go to step 13.

radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for
20 seconds.

NO-Go to step 15.
11-326 BACK
DTC P0532: AlC Pressure Sensor Circuit Low 9. Measure voltage between AlC pressure sensor 3P
Voltage connector terminals No.1 and No.3.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data AIC PR~SSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
2. Turn the blower switch on. VCC6(RED) SG6(BLK)
3. Turn the AlC switch on.
4. Check the AlC PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA

LIST with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals NO-Go tb step 14.
at the AlC pressure sensor and the PCM .•
5. Turn the ignition sWitch OFF.
6. Disconnect the AlC pressure sensor 3P connector.
12. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P) ..
13. Check for continuity between AlC pressure sensor
8. Check the AlC PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA 3P connector terminal No.2 and bodY!!lround.
LIST with the HDS.
AIC PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 9.

(A16) and the AlC pressure sensor, then go to step
20.
NO-Go to step 28.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-327
Idle ,Control System
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 22. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
15. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 23. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
16. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 24. Start the engine, and let it idle.
17. Check for continuity between AlC pressure sensor 25. Turn the blower switch on.
terminal A19. 26. Turn the AlC switch on.
AIC PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR 27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Wire side of female terminals YES-Check for poor connections or loose

Q terminals at the AlC pressure sensor and the PCM,
PCM CONNECTOR A (44PI then go to step 1.


Is there continuity? software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
YES-Go to step 28.
(A 19) and the AlC pressure sensor, then go to step 31. Turn the blower switch on.
20.
32. Turn the AlC switch on.
19. Replace the AlC pressure sensor (see page 21-7).
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminals at the AlC pressure sensor and the PCM.
If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good

11~328 BACK
DTC P0533: AlC Pressure Sensor Circuit High 9. Check the AlC PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA
Voltage LIST with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Is there about 4.75 V or more?
1. Start the engine, and let it idle. NO....,.Go to step 22.
2. Turn the blower switch on. 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Turn the AlC switch on. 11. Remove the jumper wire from the AlC pressure
sensor 3P connector.
4. Check the AlC PRESSURE SENSOR in the DATA
LIST with the HDS. 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Is there about 4.75 V or more? 13. Measure voltage between AlC pressure sensor 3P
connector terminal No.1 and No.3.
YES-Go to step 5.
AIC ~RESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
at the AlC pressure sensor and the PCM .•

VCC6(RED) SG6(BlK)
6. Disconnect the AlC pressure sensor 3P connector.
7. Connect AlC pressure sensor 3P connector

AlC PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
Is there about 5 V?
ITJjJ]
U
ACPD (IT GRN) SG6 (BlK)
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 18.
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
BACK 11-329
Idle Control System
14. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF,
17. Check for continuity between AlC pressure sensor 21. Check for continuity between AlC pressure sensor
3P connector terminal No.2 and PCM connector 3P connector terminal No.3 and PCM connector
terminal A16. terminal A9.
AIC PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR AIC PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
Terminal side offemale terminals Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A9)
(A 16) and the AlC pressure sensor, then go to step and the AlC pressure sensor, then go to step 24.
24.
11-330 BACK
22. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 32. Reconnect all connectors.
23. Replace the AlC pressure sensor (see page 21-7). 33. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
24. Reconnect all connectors. good PCM (see page 11-8).
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 34. Start the engine, and let it idle.
26. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 35. Turn the blower switch on.
27. Do the PCM idle leam procedure (see page 11-339). 36. Turn the AlC switch on.
28. Start the engine, and let it idle. 37. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
29. Turn the blower switch on. Is DTC P0533 indicated?
30. Turn the AlC switch on. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the AlC pressure sensor and the PCM.
31. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-good
Is DTC P0533 indicated? was substituted, go to step 1.
YES-Check for poor connections or loose NO-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
terminals at the AlC pressure sensor and the PCM, complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
then go to step 1. original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCsare indicated, go to the
NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
indicated DTC'stroubleshooting .•
BACK 11-331
Idle Control System
AIC Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 13. Momentarily connect PCM connector terminal A14
to body ground with a jumper wire several times.
2. Turn the blower switch on.
3. Turn the AlC switch on. ACC(RED)

Ir lL
4. Check the AlC CLUTCH in the DATA LIST with the VI2 / I
41 6 6 / 819 I.
HDS. I" [10 V 12 13114[15116 17 18 191 I
120 21 22
~ 126 271/
>< 2324 261
291/1311/ 3334 351
1361 37 38 391401/ 42 431441
YES-Go to step 5.
JUMPER WIRE
NO-Do the AlC system test (see page 21-109) .•
-'-
5. Check the AlC system.
Does the Ale system operate? Is there a clicking noise from the Ale compressor
clutch?
YES-The air conditioning system circuit is OK.•
NO-Go to step 6. software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
goodPCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. . symptom/indication goes,away with a known-good
8. Activate the AlC CLUTCH in the INSPECTION at the AlC compressor clutch relay and the PCM. If
MENU with the HDS. the connections are OK, check the AlC compressor
clutch relay (see page 22-64), then repair open in
Is there a clicking noise from the Ale compressor the wire between the PCM (A14) and the AlC
clutch? compressor clutch relay and the other AlC
systems.•
YES-Do the AlC system test (see page 21-109) .•
NO-Go to step 9.
11-332 BACK
Alternator FR Signal Circuit Troubleshooting,
2. Monitor the ALTERNATOR in the DATA LIST with

the HDS.
3. Check if the indicated percentage varies when the

headlight switch is turned on.
Does the percentage vary?
YES-The alternator signal circuit is OK.•
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Turn the headlight switch and ignition switch OFF.
8. Check for continuity between body ground and

PCM connector terminal 843.

(843) and the alternator.•

good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. Ifthe
BACK 11-333
Idle Control System
PSP Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Start the engine, and let it idle. 13. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P
2. Align the steering wheel straight ahead.
PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
3. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 14. Q

4. Turn the steering wheel to the full lock position. =
5. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Does it change to OFF?
YES-The PSP switch signal circuit is OK.• (A22) and the PSP switch .•
NO-Go to step 6. NO-Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If the
7. Disconnect the PSP switch 2P connector. PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252) .•
8. Start the engine. 14. Turn th~ ignition switch OFF.
9. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the 15. Disconnectthe PSP switch 2P connector.
HDS.
16. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminals No.1
Does it change to OFF? and No.2 with a jumper wire, then start the engine.
YES-Replace the PSP switch (see page 17-13).• PSP SWITCH 2P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 10.
11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. JUMPER WIRE
11-334 BACK
17. Check the PSP SWITCH in the DATA LIST withthe. 23. Check for continuity between body ground and
HDS. PCM connector terminal A22.

Does it change to ON?
YES-Replace the PSP switch (see page 17-13).•
NO-Go to step 18.
19. Remove the jumper wire from the PSP switch 2P

connector.

22. Connect PSP switch 2P connector terminal No.1 to
body ground with a jumper wire. YES-Go to step 24.

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PSP
switch and the PCM (A22) .•
24. Check for continuity between PSP switch 2P


JUMPER WIRE
=
YES- Update the PCM if it does not have the latest

good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck.lfthe
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PSP

switch and G401 (see page 22-26) .•
BACK 11-335
Idle Control System
Brake Pedal Position Switch Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8.. Checkfor.continuity between PCM connector
2. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the DATA LIST with
the HDS.
Does it indicate OFF?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Inspect the brake pedal PClsition switch

(see page 19-6).. .
3. Press the brake pedal, and check the BRAKE

SWITCH in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Does it change to ON? Terminal side of female terminals
YES-The brake pedal position switch signal circuit Is there continuity?

(BKSW line) is OK.•
NO-Go to step 4. (A40) and the No. 12 HORN, STOP (15 A) fuse.
Replace the No. 12 HORN, STOP (15 A) fuse .•
NO-Go to step 9.
6. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P

connector.
11~336 BACK
9. Connect brake pedal position switch 4P connector

4P CONNECTOR
JUMPER WIRE

=
YES-Repair open in the wire between the brake

pedal position switch and the No. 12 HORN, STOP
(15 A) fuse. Inspect the brake pedal position switch
(see page 19-6) .•

(A40) and the brake pedal position switch .•
BACK 11-337
id'ie Control System
Idle Speed Inspection
NOTE: 4. Start the engine. Hold the, engine speed at

• Before checking the idle speed, check these items: 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
- The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has not been radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
reported on, and there are no DTCs.
-Ignition timing 5. Check the idle speed without load conditions:
- Spark plugs headlights, blower fan, radiator fan, and air
- Air cleaner conditioner off.
- PCVsystem
• Apply the parking brake. Idle speed should be: 720±SO rpm
• Make sure the daytime running lights are off.
6. Let the engine idle for 1 minute with high electric
1. Disconnect the evaporative emission (EVAP) load (AiC switch on, temperature set to max cool,
canister purge valve connector. blower fan on High, and headlights on high beam).
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) Idle speed should be: 720±SO rpm
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
NOTE: If the idle speed is not within specification,
do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
If the idle speed is still not within specification, go
to symptom troubleshooting.
7. Reconnect the EVAP canister purge valve

connector.

(see page 11-229).
11-338 BACK
PCM Idle Learn Procedure
The idle learn procedure must be done so the PCM can

learn the engine idle characteristics.
Do the idle learn procedure whenever you do any of

these actions:
• Replace PCM.
• Reset PCM.
• Update PCM.
• Replace Of clean the throttle body.
NOTE: Erasing DTCs with the HDS does not require you
to do the idle learn procedure.
Procedure
1. Make sure all electrical items (AlC, audio, lights, etc.)
are off.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and wait 2 seconds.

3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) untilthe
radiator fan comes on, or until the engine coolant
temperature reaches 194 "F (90 "C).
5. Let the engine idle for about 5 minutes with the

throttle fully closed.
NOTE: If the radiator fan comes on, do not include

its running time in the 5 minutes.
BACK 11-339
Fuel Supply System
FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR

SECONDARY FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT

Test, page 11-390
FUEL TANK
Draining, page 11-367
FUEL TANK UNIT

FUEL PUMP
FUEL GAUGE SENDING UNIT
Test, page 11-389 '
FUEL FILTER
FUEL RAIL
FUEL FILL CAP
FUEL FILL PIPE

page 11-387
FUEL L1NEI
QUICK"CONNECT FITTING
FUEL Precautions, page 11-370
PULSATION Removal, page 11-372
DAMPER Installation, page 11-374
Replacement,
page 11-377 FUEL PRESSURE REGULATOR BASE
FUEL VAPOR LINE
FUEL L1NEI FUEL FEED LINE

QUICK-CONNECT FITTING
Precautions, page 11-370
Removal, page 11-372
11-340 BACK
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL
MODULE (PCM)
Update,
page.11-7
Substitution,
page 11-8
Replacement,
page 11-252
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP) FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE

BACK 11-341
Fuel Supply System
DTe Troubleshooting
OTC P0461: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge

Sending Unit) Circuit Range/Performance
Problem
NOTE:
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3) .
• Because it requires 162 miles (260 km) of driving
without refueling to complete this diagnosis, DTC
P0461 cannot be duplicated during this
troubleshooting.
1. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-389).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?

terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the
gauge control module .•
NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page


terminals at the fuel gauge sending unit and the
gauge control module, then go to step 1.

11-342 BACK
DTC P0462: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge 10. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
Sending Unit) Circuit Low Voltage
NOTE: Before you ~roubleshoot, record all freeze data
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general YES-Check the secondary fuel gauge sending unit
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). (see page 11-~83), then go to step 31.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. 12. Remove the left cargo area side trim panel (see
page 20-76), then remove the access panel from the
Is DTC P0462 indicated? left side of the floor (see page 11-380).
YES-Go to step 4. 13. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
at the gauge control module, the fuel gauge 15. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
sending unit, and the secondary fuel gauge
sending unit.• 16. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is DTC P0463 indicated?
5. Fold the rear seat down, then remove the right rear YES-Go to step 21.
side garnish (see page 20-76).
NO-Go to step 17.
6. Pull back the carpet to expose the access panel (see
step 9 on page 20-91), then remove the access 17. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
panel from the right side of the floor (see page
11-383). 18. Remove the gauge control module (see page
22-284).
7. Disconnect the secondary fuel gauge sending unit
4P connector. 19. Disconnect the gauge control module 36P
connector.
9. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-343
Fuel Supply System
20. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P 22. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P
connector terminal No.1 and body ground. connector terminal No. 3.and body ground.
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Repair shortin the wire between the gauge YES-Repair short in the wire between the fuel
control module (signal line) and the fuel gauge gauge sending unit and secondary fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 31. sending unit, then go to step 31.
NO-Go to step 23. NO-Check the fuel gauge sending unit (see page
11-389).
23. Reconnect the gauge control module 36P connector.
24. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-380) and the
secondary fuel gauge sending unit (see page
11"383)
25. Connect the fuel tank unit and secondary fuel

gauge sending unit 4P connectors.
11-344 BACK
28. Set the floats (A) to the E position. 29. Check the fuel gauge.
Fuel tank unit Does the gauge move to the empty position?
YES-Go to step 37.
NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page


E
2.2 in 34. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
(54.8mml
~----------,~------~
Secondary fuel gauge sending unit

terminals at the gauge control module, the fuel
gauge sending unit, and the secondary fuel gauge
sending unit, then go to step 1.

E
0.5 in
(13.7 mml
(cont'd)
BACK 11-345
Fuel Supply System


sending unit. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck. If
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.

11-346 BACK
DTC P0463: Fuel Level Sensor (Fuel Gauge 10. Check for continuity between fuel tank unit 4P
Sending Unit) Circuit High Voltage connector terminal No.3 and the secondary fuel
gauge sending unit 4P connector terminal No.1.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS, and wait 5 seconds.
3. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. SIGNAL-

(BLU)
SECONDARY
Is DTC P0463 indicated? FUEL GAUGE
SENDING UNIT
4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 4.
at the gauge control module, the fuel gauge
sending unit, and the secondary fuel gauge YES-Go to step 11.
sending unit.•
NO-Repair open in the wire between thefuel
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. gauge sending unit and the secondary fuel gauge
5. Fold the rear seat down, then removethe left cargo
area side trim panel (see page 20-76). 11. Remove the gauge pontrol module (se~ page
22-284).
step 9 on page 20-91), then remove the access 12. Disconnect the gauge control module 36P
panel from the left side of the floor (see page connector.
11-380).
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
8. Remove the access panel from the right side of the

floor (see page 11-383).

4P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-347
Fuel Supply System
13. Connect secondary fuel gauge sending unit 4P 15. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No.1
connector terminal No.3 to body ground with a to body ground with a jumper wire.
jumper wire.
FUEL TANK UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
SECONDARY FUEL GAUGE SENDING
UNIT 4P CONNECTOR
1 2
3 4
GND(PUR)
JUMPER WIRE
JUMPER WIRE
=

14. Check for continuity between gauge control module 36P connector terminal No. 27 and body
module 36P connector terminal No. 20 and body ground.
ground.
=
=
YES-Go to step 17.
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the gauge
NO-Repair open in the wire between the gauge control module and the fuel gauge sending unit,
control module and the secondary fuel gauge then go to step 27.
11-348 BACK
17. Disconnect the jumper wire from the fuel gauge 24. Set the floats (A) to the F position.
sending unit 4P connector.
Fuel sending unit
18. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-380).
19. Test the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-389).
Is the fuel gauge sending unit OK?
YES-Go to step 20. A
NO-Replace the fuel gauge sending unit (see page

20. Remove the secondary fuel gauge sending unit F

(see page 11-383). 5.7 in
1144.0mml
21. Test the secondary fuel gauge sending unit
(see page 11-390).
Is the secondary fuel gauge sending unit OK?

Secondary fuel sending unit
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Replace the secondary fuel gauge sending

unit (see page 11-383), then go to step 27.
22. Reconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector, the

secondary fuel gauge sending unit 4P connector,
and the gauge control module 36P connector.
F
23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9.2 in .
1233.8mml
(cont'd)
BACK 11-349
Fuel Supply System
25. Check the fuel gauge. 35. Check for Temporary OTCs or OTCswith the HOS.
Does the gauge move to the full position? Is OTC P0463 indicated?
YES-Go to step 33. YES-Check for poor connections or loose

NO-Replace the gauge control module (see page gauge sending unit, and the secondary fuel gauge
22-284), then go to step 26. sending unit. Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a
26. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
27. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. NO-If the PCM was 'updated, troubleshooting is
28. Reconnect all connectors. original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
29. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•

I



11-350 BACK
DTC P0627: Fuel Pump Control Module 8. Turn thE! ignition switch ON (11), and measure
System Malfunction voltage between fuel pump control module 10P
connector terminals No.3 and No.8 within
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 2 seconds.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR
1. Turn the ignitions~itch ON (II).
3. Turn the ignition switch to the start (III) position.
NOTE:
• If the engine starts, .release the ignition switch .
• If the engine does not start, do not keep cranking
for more than 10 seconds. Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 35.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 9.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
at the fuel pump control module, PGM-FI main
relay 2 (FUEL PUMP), the fuel pump, and the 10. Remove the drive(s dashboard under cover
PCM .• (see page 20-102), then remove PGM-FI main relay
2 (FUEL PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. box.
6. Check the No.2 FUEL PUMP (20 A) fuse in under-

Is the fuse blown?
YES-Repair short in the wire between PGM-FI

main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) and the No.2 FUEL
PUMP (20 A) fuse. Also replace the No.2 FUEL
PUMP (20 A) fuse, then go to step 79.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the fuel pump control module 10P

(cont'd)
BACK 11-351
Fuel Supply System
11. Test PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (see page 18. Connect under-dash fuse/relay box 21 P connector
22-64). terminal No.4 to body ground with a jumper wire.
Is PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP} OK? . UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX 21 P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 12. IIGP(ORN)
NO-Replace PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP),

then go to step 79.
ll1 12J314171 6 17 VI
I/I/~ 1~ 16 16 17
u
n
JUMPER WIRE
13. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2

(FUEL PUMP) 4P connector terminal No.4 and
body ground. Wire side of female terminals
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P CONNECTOR

19. Check for continuity between under-hood fuse/
relay box 1OP cohnector terminal No.5 and body
ground.
2 1
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX 10P CONNECTOR
Y..
=
Is there battery voltage? =
NO-Go to step 14.

YES-
15. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box 10P -Replace PGM-FI main relay 1.•
connector. - If needed, replace the under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-61) .•
16. Disconnect the engine wire harness 23P connector.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the under-
17. Disconnectthe under-dash fuse/relay box 21P hood fuse/relay box and the under-dash fuse/relay
connector. box.•
11;.352 BACK
20. Measure voltage between PGM-FI main relay 2 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and measur!!l
(FUEL PUMP) 4P connector terminal No.1 and voltage between fuel pump control module 1QP,
body ground. connector terminal No.3 and body ground..
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP) FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR
4P CONNECTOR
Is there battery voltage? Is there battery voltage?
NO-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box NO-

(see page 22-62) .• • Repair open in the wire between the under-dash
fuse/relay box and the fuel pump control module,
21. Turn the ignition switch OFF. then go to step 79.
• If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box
22. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P (see page 22-62), then go to step 79.
connector terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper
wire. 24. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP) 25. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
4P CONNECTOR
IG1
FUEL PUMP
JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
BACK 11-353
Fuel 'Supply System
27. Connect PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 4P 29. Remove the jumper wire.
connector terminal No.3 to body ground with a
jumper wire. 30. Reinstall PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP).
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY 2 (FUEL PUMP)

4P CONNECTOR
32. Open SCS line with the HDS.
41-....-.
2 1 33. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and measure
3 voltage between under-dash fuse/relay box 34P
connector terminal No. 10 and body ground within
IMOFPR
2 seconds.
JUMPER WIRE
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX 34P CONNECTOR
=
Terminal side of female terminals IMOFPR (BRN) ,
IJJ2'I"ill] I2'!ZIZI]] 9 10 11 ~ ~
~ []IT][] 26 7 29 QII]1J ~

IMOFPR (BRN)
Ir 11 =
V 2 / 4 1 5 6 / 8 91. Wire side of female terminals
~ 10/121311411511617181191·'
20 21 22 >< 23 241251 •
~ 26 27/ 29 V! 31 V 33 341351 • /s there battery voltage?
136 37 38 39140V 42 43 441
Q software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
= symptom/indication goes away with a known-good
Terminal side of female terminals PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252) .•
/s there continuity? NO-Go to step 34.
YES-Go to step 29.

(A15) and PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP), then
go to step 79.
11-354 BACK
34. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and measure 40. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check for
voltage between under-dash fuse/relay box 34P sound from the fuel pump within 2 seconds.
connector terminal No. 10 and body ground after
2 seconds. Does the fuel pump operate?
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX 34P CONNECTOR YES-Go to step 41.
IMOFPR (BRN) NO-Go to step 60.
[I]ZI]IT] I2I:ZIZI]] 9 10 11 ~ ~ 41. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

~ []IT][] 'lJ 29 []ITID ~

connector.
43. Check for continuity between fuel pump control

= module 10P connector terminal No.4 and body
Wire side of female terminals ground.
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 85.
NO-If needed, replace the under-dash fuse/relay

box (see page 22-62), then go to step 79.

=
36. Reconnect the fuel pump control module 10P
connector (see page 11-388). Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 44.
NO-Go to step 47.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-355
Fuel Supply System
44. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 50. Check for continuity between PCM connector
46. Check for continuity between PCM connector II II
terminal A38 and body ground. 1 / 2 / 41616 ./ 8 9 L
10/ 12 13114115116 17 18 19 •
20 21 22 >< 2324 25 •
~ 2627 / 29V131V 3334 35
136 37 36 39140V 42 43 441
~PcD'BlUJ
=
=

(A38) and the fuel pump control module, then go to
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM step 79.
step 79. 51. Remove the jumper wire from the fuel pump
control module 10P connector.
NO-Go to step 86.
52. Reconnect the fuel pump control module 10P
47. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. connector and PCM connector A (44P).
48. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 53. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
49. Connect fuel pump control module 1OP connector

FPCD(BLU)
JUMPER WIRE
=
11-356 BACK
54. Measure voltage between fuel pump control 59. Check for continuity between fuel pump control
module 10P connector terminal No.4 and body module 10P connector terminal No.7 and body
ground. ground.
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals Wire side offemale terminals
Is there about 8 V or more? Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 55. YES-Repair short in the wire between the fuel
pump control module (FP- line) and the fuel pump,
NO-Replace the fuel pump control module then go to step 79.
NO-Substitute a known-good fuel pump control
55. Turn the ignition switch OFF. module (see page 11-388), then go to step 79 and
recheck. If DTC P0627 is not indicated, replace the
56. Fold the rear seat down, then remove the left cargo original fuel pump control module (see page
area side trim panel (see page 20-76). 11-388), then go to step 79. If DTC P0627 is
indicated, go to step 85.
step 9 on page 20-91), then remove the access 60. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
panel from the left side of the floor (see page
11-380). 61. Disconnect the fuel pump control module 10P
58. Disconnect the fuel pump 4P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-357
Fuel Supply System
62. Check for continuity between fuel pump control 63. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
module 1OP connector terminal No.5 and body
ground. 64. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).

=
=
YES-Go to step 63.
NO-Go to step 66.
step 79.
NO-Go to step 86.
66. Reconnectthe fuel pump control module 10P

connector.
11-358 BACK
67. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and measure 73. Connect fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No.2
voltage between fuel pump control module 10P to body ground with a jumper wire.
connector terminal No.5 and body ground within 2
seconds.

1 2
3 4
JUMPER WIRE
=
=

module 10P connector terminal No.6 and body
Is there battery voltage? ground.
YES-Go to step 68. FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE 10P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the fuel pump control module

69. Fold the rear seat down, then remove the left cargo
area side trim panel (see page 20-76).
=
step 9 on page 20-91), then remove the access Wire side of female terminals
panel from the left side of the floor (see page
11-380).
71. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
YES-Go to step 75.
connector (see page 11-388). NO-Repair open in the wire between the fuel
pump control module (FP+ line) and the fuel pump,
then go to step 79.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-359
Fuel Supply System
75. Remove the jumper wire from the fuel tank unit 4P 78. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and measure
connector terminal No.2, then ,connect between voltage between fuel tank unit 4P connector
fuel tank unit 4P connector terminal No.4 to body terminal No.2 and body ground within 2 seconds.
ground with a jU'11per wire.
FP- (WHT)
JUMPER WIRE
=

module 10P connector terminal No.7 and body YES-Replace the fuel pump (see page 11-382),
ground. then go to step 79.

NO-Substitute a known-good fuel pump control
module (see page 11-388), then go to step 79 and
recheck. If DTC P0627 is not indicated, replace the
original fuel pump control module (see page
11-388), then go to step 79. If DTC P0627 is
, indicated, go to step 85.

=
Wire side of female terminals 81. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

83. Do the PCM idle learn proc!3dure (see page 11-339).
YES-Go to step 77.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fuel

pump control module (FP- line) and the fuel pump,
then go to step 79.
77. Remove the jumper wire from the fuel tank unit 4P
connector terminal No.4, and reconnect the fuel
pump control module 10P connector.
11 ..360 BACK

terminals at the fuel pump control module, PGM-FI
main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP), the fuel pump, and the


good PCM (see page 11-8);

terminals at the fuel pump control module, PGM-FI
main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP), the fuel pump, and the

BACK 11-361
Fuel"Supply System
Fuel Pressure Relieving

Before disconnecting fuel lines or hoses, relieve 7; Remove the ,fuel fill cap to relieve the pressure in
pressure from the system by disabling the fuel pump the fuel tank.
and then disconnecting the fuel tube/quick connect
fitting in the engine compartment. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
WiththeHDS 9. From the INSPECTION MENUofthe HDS, select

Fuel Pump OFF, thenstart'the engine, and let it idle
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the until it sta lis.
equipped). 10. Turnthe ignition switch OFF.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. NOTE:

• Do not allow the engine to idle above 1,000 rpm
3. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) or the PCM will continue to operate the fuel
(A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard. pump .
• A DTC or a Temporary DTC may be set during
this procedure. Check for DTCs, and clear them
as needed (see page 11 c 4).
11. Turn the ignition switch OFF,
12. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
13. Remove the charge air cooler cover (see step 10n
page 9-8) and intake air duct (air flow tube) (see
step 19 on page 9-16).'
14. Remove the ,quick-connect fitting ,cover (A).
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM

and other vehicle systems. If it doesn't, go to the
DLC circuit troubleshooting (see page 11-229).
1t-362 BACK
15. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and 18. After disconnecting the quick-conr.tect fitting, check
clean it if needed. it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-373).
16. Place a rag or shop'towel over the quick-connect 19. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then
fitting (A). dothis:
• Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and

the navigation system (if equipped) .
• Set the clock.
Without the HOS

equipped).
2. Remove the driver's dashboard under cover

(see page 20-102), then remove PGM-FI main relay
2 (FUE~ PUMP) (A) from the under-dash fuse/relay
box.
A
17. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the

connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the
retainer tabs (e) with the other hand to release
them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
off.
NOTE:
.• Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other.
parts.
• Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
• Do not remove the retainer from the line; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a
new one. 3. Start the engine, and let it idle until it stalls.
NOTE: If any DTCs are stored, clear and ignore

them.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-363
Fuel ,Supply System
Fuel Pressure Relieving (cont'd)
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (A): Hold the
connector (B) with one hand, and squeeze the
5. Remove the fuel fill cap. retainer tabs (C) with the other hand to release
them from the locking tabs (D). Pull the connector
6. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery. off.
7. Remove the charge air cooler cover (see step 1 on NOTE:

page 9-8) and intake air duct (air flow tube) (see • Be careful not to damage the line (E) or other
step 19 on page 9-16). parts.
• Do not use tools.
8. Remove the quick-connect fitting cover (A). • If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.
• Do not remove the retainer from the line; once
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a
new one.
E
A
9. Check the fuel quick-connect fitting for dirt, and

clean it if needed. 12. After disconnecting the quick-connectfitting, check
it for dirt or damage (see step 4 on page 11-373).
10. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect
fitting (A). 13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then
dothis:

the navigation system (if equipped).
• Set the clock.
11-364 BACK
Fuel Pressure Test
Special Tools Required, 4. Reinstall the intake air duct (air flow tube) (see step
• Fuel pressure gauge 07406-004000B 160n page 9~20). '
• Fuel pressure gauge attachment set 07 AAJ-S6MA150
• If the engine starts, go to step 7.
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the fuel • If the engine does not run, go to step 6.
pressure regulator (B), and pinch it closed with a
clamp (C). 6. Check to see if the fuel pump is running: Listen to
the fuel filler port with the fuel fill cap removed.
The fuel pump should run for 2 seconds when the
ignition switch is first tl1rhed on.
• If the pump runs, go to step 7.

• If the pump does not start, refer to the DTC
troubleshooting.
7. Read the fuel pressure gauge. The pressure should

be 320-370 kPa (3.3-3.8 kgf/cm2, 47-54 psi).
8. With the engine running, unpinch and reconnect

the vacuum hose while you watch the pressure
gauge. The pressure should fall when you
connected the hose.
• If the pressure falls,imd the fuel pressure was

OK in step 7, the test is complete.
• If the pressure did not fall, check the vacuum line
3. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting. Attach the fuel between the pressure regulator and the intake
pressure gauge set and the fuel pressure gauge. manifold. If the line is OK, replace the fuel
pressure regulator (see page 11-378).
• Ifthe pressure falls, but the fuel pressure was
lower than specified in step 7, check for a
clogged fuel filter (see page 11-382), and for
leaks in the fuel lines (see page 11·368).
• , Ifthe pressure falls, butthe fuel pressure was
higher than specified in step 7, check for a
07 AAJ·S6MA150 pinched or clogged fuel return hose or line
\ (see page'11-368).
BACK 11-365
Fuel Supply System
Transfer Fuel Pump Test
Special Tools Required 8. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-380) ...
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equivalent, commercially available 9. Connect the vacuum pump/gauge 0-30 in.Hg to
the fuel tank unit.
1. Remove the secondary fuel gauge sending unit
(see page 11-383).
2. Connect the vacuum pump/gauge 0-30 in.Hg to

the transfer tube (A).
10. Lower the fuel tank unit (A) into the fuel tank until
the pick up screen is submerged in the fuel.
4. From the INSPECTION MENU of the HDS, select

Fuel Pump ON.
5. Read the vacuum pump/gauge 0-30 in.Hg. The

vacuum·should be 4.0 kPa (1.2 in.Hg, 30 mmHg).
A
• If the vacuum is OK, the transfer fuel pump and
transfer tube is OK.
• If the vacuum is out of specification, go to step 6.
7. Install the secondary fuel gauge sending unit

(see page 11-383).
11. Connect the fuel tank unit 4P connector.
11-366 BACK
Fuel Tank Draining
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-380).
13. From INSPECTION MENU ofthe HDS, select Fuel 2. Using a hand pump, a hose, and a container
Pump ON. suitable for fuel, draw the fuel from the fuel tank.
14. Read the vacuum pump/gauge 0-30 in.Hg. The 3. Reinstall the fuel tank unit (see page 11-380).
vacuum should be 4.0 kPa (1.2 in.Hg, 30 mmHg) .
• If the vacuum is OK, replace the transfer tube,

then recheck the fuel vacuum .
• If the vacuum is out of specification, replace the
fuel tank unit (see page 11-380), then recheck the
fuel vacuum.
BACK 11-367
Fuel'Supply System
Fuel Line Inspection
Check the fuel system lines and hoses for damage; leaks. and deterioration. Replace any damaged parts.
Make sure the connections are

secure and the quick-connect
fitting covers are firmly locked in place.
11-368 BACK
Check all clamps, and retighten if necessary.
SECONDARY FUEL GAUGE

SENDING UNIT LOCKNUT
LOCKNUT PLATE Replace.
Replace.
BASE GASKET
Replace.
To EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION (EVAP)
CANISTER
PURGE VALVE
A: B:
Make sure the clamp is
PO'ltion,\own.
There should be When connecting the fuel

no clearance. When installing the fill neck tube and pipe,
fuel fill neck tube, align the mark on the
position the mark on the tube and pipe.
tube to the bottom side.
BACK 11-369
Fue[Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions
The fuel line/quick-connect fittings (A), (B), (C), (D), (E),

and (F) connect the fuel rail (G) to the fuel feed hose (H),
the fuel feed hose to the fuel pressure regulator base (I),
the fuel pressure regulator base to thEifuel feed line (J),
the fuel feed line (K) and fuel return line (L) to the fuel
tank unit (M), the fuel vapor line (0) to the EVAP .
canister (P), and the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube
(Q) to the fuel fill pi'pe (F).
When removing or installing the fuel feed hose, fuel
pressure regulator base, thiduel tank unit, the fuel tank,
or the fuel fill pipe, it is necessary to disconnect or
connect the quick-connect fittings.
Pay attention to the following:
K
• The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect
fittings are not heat-resistant; be careful not to
damage them during welding or other heat-
generating procedures.
• The fuel feed hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect
fittings are not acid-proof; do not touch them with a
shop towel that was used for wiping battery
electrolyte. Replace them if they come in contact with
electrolyte or something similar.
• When connecting or disconnecting the fuel feed
hoses, fuel line, and quick-connect fittings, be careful
not to bend or twist them excessively. Replace them
if they are damaged.
G A
11-370 BACK
A disconnected quick-connect fitting can be
reconnected, but the retainer on the mating line cannot
be reused once it has been removed from the line.
Replace the retainer when:-
• replacing the fuel rail.

• replacing the fuel line.
• replac;ing the fU\'l1 return line.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
• replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
• replacing the EVAP purge line.
• replacing the EVAP canister.
• replacing the fuel tank.
• replacing the fuel fill pipe.
• it has been removed from the line.
• it is damaged.
Location Manufacturer Retainer Line

color diameter
A Tokai Blue 0.3 in.
Green (8mm)
B Sanoh White 0.3 in.
(8 mm)
C Sanoh White 0.4 in.
(9.5 mm)
D Sanoh White 0.3 in.
(8 mm)
E Sanoh White 0.4 in.
(9.5 mm)
F Tokai Natural 0.5 in.
(12 mm)
BACK 11-371
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Removal
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings,

read the "Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions"
(see page 11-370).
2. Check the fuel quick-connect fittings (A) for dirt,

and clean them if needed.
A
A
11-372 BACK
3. Place a rag or shop towel over the quick-connect 5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
fitting. Hold the connector (A) with one hand, and cover the disconnected connector and line ends·
squeeze the retainer tabs (B) with the other hand to with plastic bags (A).
release them from the locking tabs (C). Pull the
connector off. NOTE: The retainer cannot be reused once it has
been removed from the line.
NOTE: Replace the retainer when:
• Be careful not to damage the line (D) or other • replacing the fuel rail.
parts. Do not use tools. • replacing the fuel feed line.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer • replacing the fuel return line.
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push • replacing the fuel pump.
the connector until it comes off easily. • replacing the fuel filter.
• Do not remove the retainer from the line; once • replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
removed, the retainer must be replaced with a • replacing the EVAP purge pipe.
new one. • replacing the EVAP canister.
• it has been removed from the line.
• it is damaged.
4. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage. . .
• If dirty, clean the connector with a pressure

washer, and dry it with the compressed air.
• If it is rusty or damaged, replace the fuel filter, or
fuel feed line.
A
BACK 11.;373
Fuel' Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation
NOTE: Before you work on the fuel lines and fittings, 3. Before connecting a new fuel tube/quick-connect
read the "Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Precautions" fitting assembly (A), remove the old retainer from
(see page 11-370). the mating line.
1. Check the contact area (A) of the line (B) for dirt or
damage, and clean it if needed.
2. Insert a new retainer (A) into the connector (B) if the

retainer is damaged, or after:
• replacing the fuel rail.

• replacing the fuel feed line.
• replacing the fuel return line.
• replacing the fuel pump.
• replacing the fuel filter.
• replacing the fuel gauge sending unit.
• replacing the EVAP purge pipe.
• replacing the EVAP canister.
• removing the r~tainer from the line.
• Use the same manufacturer retainer and the
same size retainer when the replacing the
retainer (see page 11-370).
11-374 BACK
4. Align the quick-connect fittings with the line (A),
and align the retainer locking tabs (B) with the
connector grooves (e). Then press the quick-
connect fittings onto the line until both retainer tabs
lock with a clicking sound.
NOTE: If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of

new engine oil on the line end.
Connection with new retainer
Reconnection to existing retainer
Connection to new fuel line
Tokai-made
(cont'd)
BACK 11-375
·'t·.-:
FUel Supply System
Fuel Line/Quick-Connect Fitting Installation (cont'd)
5. When you reconnect the connector with the old 6. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, and
retainer, make sure the connection is secure and turn the ignition switch ON (II) (but do not operate
the tabs are firmly locked into'place; check visually the starter motor). The fuel pump will run for about
and also by pulling the connector. When you 2 seconds, and fuel pressure will rise. Repeat this
replace the fuel line with a new cine, make sure you two or three times, and check that there is no
remove the ring pull upwards after you confirm the leakage in the fuel supply system.
'connection is secure.
NOTE: Before you remove the ring pull, make sure

the fuel line connection is secure. If the connection
is not secure, the ring pull could break when you try
to remove it.
Connection to new fuel line
Sanoh-made Tokai-made
rei-iii
!
L,_,,_,,---1
!~
L. _ . _ . ---1
I
11-376 BACK
Fuel Pulsation Damper Replacement
3. Remove the injector cover (see step 3 on page

11-243).
4. Disconnect the connectors from the injectors, then,

Remove the harness holder (see step 4 on page
11-243).
5. Remove the fuel pulsation damper (A) from the fuel

rail (8).

with a new sealing washer (C).
BACK 11-377
,.'"'.'
. "" '
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pressure Regulator Replacement
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (see page 11-362). 7. Make sure the fuel return pipe (A) is positioned as
shown. If needed, turn the fuel pressure regulator
2. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7). counterclockwise to line up. the pipe.
3. Remove the pressure regulator cover (A). NOTE:

• Do not turn the fuel pressure regulator clockwise .
• Do not turn the fuel pressure regulator
counterclockwise more than once complete turn.
911 0±5 °
9.8N·m
4. Disconnect the fuel return hose (8), and vacuum

hose (C).
5. Loosen the nut (A), then remove the fuel pressure 8. Tighten the nut (8) to the specified torque.
regulator (8).
9. Connect the fuel return hose and vacuum hose.
10. Install the pressure regulator cover, then install the

charge air cooler (see page 9-9).
6. Coat the new O-ring (C) with clean engine oil, and
install the fuel pressure regulator into the fuel
pressure regulator base (D) by hand until the
washer (E) is pressed between the base and the
regulator.
NOTE: Do not fully tighten the fuel pressure

regulator yet.
1.1.-378 BACK
Fuel Pressure Regulator Base Replacement
1. Remove the fuel pressure regulator (see page 4. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (A)~
11-378).
B
2. Remove the bolt (A) and nut (8), then remove the
fuel pipe protector (e).
B -----~ 5. Remove the pressure regulator base (8).

9.8N·m 9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) 6. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal.
3. Remove the quick-connect fitting covers (D).
BACK 11-379
..
, ; .....
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Tank Unit Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 8. Using the special tool, loosen the locknut (A).
Fuel sender wrench 07 AAA-SOXA 100
Removal
2. Remove the fuel fill cap.
3. Fold the rear seat down, then remove the left cargo

5. Remove the access panel (A) from the left side of

the flopr. 9. Remove the locknut (A).
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (8). 10. Remove the fuel tank unit (8), and disconnect the
transfer tube (C).
7. Disconnect the quick-connect fittings (C) from the
fuel tank unit.
11-380 BACK
Installation 5. Using the tool, tighten the fuel tank unit locknut (A).
1. Position the mark of the transfer tube (A) up,tl:len NOTE: After installation, check the base gasket.
connect the tube. visually or by hand to be sure the gasket is not
pinched.
A
70N·m
(7.1 kgf·m, 51.6 Ibf.ft)
2. Install a new base gasket (B), and locknut plate (C)

to the fuel tank (D).
3. Insert the fuel tank unit (E) into the fuel tank. Be
careful not to bend the fuel gauge sending unit.
4. Align the marks (F) on the fuel tank and the fuel
tank unit, then tighten a new locknut (G) by hand.
NOTE:
• After tightening, make sure the marks are aligned.
Check circumference of the base gasket visually
or by hand and be sure that the gasket is not
pinched .
• Do not coat the base gasket and the locknut plate
with engine oil..
BACK 11-381
Fuel' Supply System
Fuel Filter Replacement Fuel Pump/Fuel Gauge Sending

Unit Replacement
The fuel filter should be replaced whenever the fuel
pressure drops below the specified value (see page
11-365), after making sure that the fuel pump and the 1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-380).
fuel pressure regulator are OK. '.'
2. Remove the fuel level sensor (fuel gauge sending
1. Remove the fuel tank unit (see page 11-380). unit) (A) from the fuel tank unit (B).
2. Remove the fuel filter set (A).
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank

unit:
3. Check these items before installing the fuel tank • When connecting the wire harness, make sure
unit: the connection is secure and the connector (C) it
firmly locked into place .
• When connecting the wire harness, make sure • When installing the fuel gauge sending unit,
the connection is secure and the connectors (B) make sure the connection is secure and the
are firmly locked into place. . connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful
• When installing the fuel gauge sending unit (C), not to bend or twist it excessively.
make sure the connection is secure and the
connector is firmly locked into place. Be careful 4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal.
not to bend or twist it excessively.
5. Install the fuel tank unit (see page 11-380).
with new O-rings (D).
NOTE: Coat the O-rings with clean engine oil.
5. Install the fuel tank unit (see page 11-380).
,"-382 BACK
Secondary Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Remov~l/lnstaliation
Special 10,015 Required 7. Using the special tool, loosen the locknut (A).
Fuel sender wrench 07 AAA-SOXA 100
Removal
3. Fold the rear seat down, then remove the right cargo

5. Remove the access panel (A) from the right side of

the floor. 8. Remove the locknut (A).
6. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (8).
9. Remove the secondary fuel gauge sending unit (8),

then disconnect the transfer tube (C) .
. ,
(cont'd)
BACK 1.1-383
Fuel Supply System
Secondary Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Removal/Installation (cont'd)·
Installation 5. Using the tool, tighten the fuel tank unit locknut (A).
1. Position the mark of the transfer tube (A) up, then NOTE: After installation, check the base gasket
connect the tube. . visually or by hand to be sure the gasket is not
pinched.
A
70N·m
(7.1 kgf·m,51.6Ibf·ft)
2. Install a new base gasket (B), and locknut plate (C)

to the fuel tank (D).
3. Insert the secondary fuel gauge sending unit (E)

into the fuel tank. Be careful not to bend the
secondary fuel gauge sending unit.
4. Align the marks (F) on the fuel tank and the fuel
tank unit, then tighten a new locknut (G) by hand.
NOTE:
• After tightening, make sure the marks are aligned.
Check circumference of the base gasket visually
or by hand and be sure that the gasket is not
pinched .
• Do not coat the base gasket and the locknut plate
with engine oil.
11-384 BACK
Fuel Tank Replacement
1. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-367). 8. Disconnect the fuel vent tube (A).,
2. Reinstall the fuel tank unit without connecting

quick-connect fittings and fuel tank unit 4P
connector.

4P connector (see step 5 on page 11-383).
4. Remove the fuel fill pipe cover (A).
9. Remove the exhaust pipe (see page 9-23).
10. Remove the propeller shaft (see page 16-38).
: - - - - 9.8 N·m
~=@~-vr~ (1.0 kgf·m,
_ 7.2Ibf.ft)
5. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (8).
6. Lift the vehicle, and support it with jackstands.
7. Disconnect the fuel fill tube (A) from the fuel tank.
Slide back the clamp, then twist the tube as you
pull to avoid damage it.
(cont'd)
BACK
Fuet.S.upply System
Fuel Tank Replacement (cont'd)
11. Remove the fuel tank cover (A).
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.211~f.ft)
12. Place a jack or support under the fuel tank (8).
13. Remove the strap bolts and straps (C).
14. Remove the fuel tank.
11-386 BACK
. r;J1
Fuel Fill Pipe Removal/Installation
1. Drain the fuel tank (see page 11-367). 6. Remove the bolts (A), thewremove the fuel fill pipe
(8) and fuel fill tube (C) ..
3. Disconnect the fuel fill tube (A) from the fuel tank.
Slide back the clamp, then twist the tube as you
pull to avoid damage it.
A
/ 9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibf·ft)

A
4. Remove the fuel fill pipe cover (A).
5. Disconnect the quick-connect fitting (8).
BACK 11-387
Fuel Supply System
Fuel Pump Control Module Replacement
1. Fold the rear seat down, then remove the rear seat
side bolster (see page 20-138).
2. Disconnect the fuel pump control module

connector (A).
9.8N·m
3. Remove the fuel pump control module (8).
11-388 BACK
Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
NOTE: For the fuel gauge system circuit diagram, refer ,8. Remove the fuel tank unit from the fuel tank'
to the Gauges Circuit Diagram (see page 22-262) .• , (see page 11-380).
1. Check the No.1 0 METER (7.5 A) fuse in the under- NOTE: If the fuel tank is full, drain the fuel
dash fuse/relay box before testing. (see page 11-367).
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs. 9. Measure resist~nce between the No.1 andjNo. 3 '
terminals of the fuel tank unit 4P connector with the
• If no problem is found, go to step 3. float at E (EMPTY), LOW (LOW FUEL INDICATOR),
• If DTC Bl175 orBl176 is indicated, go to the and F (FULL) positions .
indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
• If you do not get the following readings, replace
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the fuel gauge sending unit (see page 11-382).
• If the fuel gauge sending unit test is OK, do the
4. Fold the rear seat down, then remove the left cargo secondary fuel gauge sending unit test (see page
area side trim panel (seepage 20-76). '. 11-390).
, ,
5. Pull backthe carpet to expose the access panel (see Float Position F LOW E
step 9 on page 20-91). 5.7 in. 3.7 in. 2.2 in.
(144.0 mm) (93.7 mm) (54.8 mm)
6. Remove the access panel (A) from the left side of Resistance ( Q ) 18to 703.6 to 772 to
the floor. 22 743 788
NOTE: Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse

from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least
30 seconds after completing troubleshooting,
otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel
gauge to indicate the correct fuel level.
~Terminal side of
~maleterminalS
7. Disconnect the fuel tank unit 4P connector (B).
BACK 11-389
Fuel Supply System
Secondary Fuel Gauge Sending Unit Test
1. Fold the rear seat down, then remove the right cargo 5. Remove the secondary fuel gauge sending unit
area side trim panel (see page 20-76). from the fuel tank (see page 11-383).
2. Pull back the carpet to expose the access panel (see 6. Measure resistance between the No.1 and No.3
step 9 on page 20-91). terminals of the secondary fuel gauge sending unit
4P connector with the float at E (EMPTY), 1/2 (HALF
3. Remove the access panel (A) from the right side of FULL), and F (FULL) positions.
the floor.
Float Position F 1/2 E
9.2 in. 5.4in. 0.5 in.
(233.8 mm) (136.8 mm) (13.7 mm)
Resistance ( Q ) 18to 402 to 772 to
22 414 788
NOTE: Remove the No. 23 BACK UP (10 A) fuse

from the under-hood fuse/relay box for at least
10 seconds after completing troubleshooting,
otherwise it may take up to 20 minutes for the fuel
gauge to indicate the correct fuel level.
~Terminal side of
~maleterminalS

4P connector (B).
11-390 BACK
Low Fuel Indicator Test
1. Do the gauge self-diagnostic test (see page 22-258).
• If the low fuel indicator flashes, go to step 2.

• If the low fuel indicator does not flash, replace
the gauge control module (see page 22-284).
2. Check for body electrical system DTCs.
• If any DTCs are indicated, do the indicated DTC's

troubleshooting.
• If no DTCs are indicated, go to step 3.
3. Do the fuel gauge sending unit test (see page

11-389), and secondary fuel gauge sending unit test
(see page 11-390),
BACK 11-391
Intake Air System
AIR CLEANER
Removel/lnstallation, page 11-394
Element Inspection/Replacement,
page 11-395
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL MODULE
(PCM)
Update, page 11-7
Substitution, page 11-8
RESONATOR
Removel/lnstallation, page 11-395
THROTTLE BODY
Test, page 11-393
Cleaning, page 11-394
11-392 BACK
Throttle Body Test
Carbon Accumulation Check Throttle Position Learning Check
NOTE: If the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been NOTE: Ifthe malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) has been
reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs). reported on, check for diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs).
1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) 1. Connectthe HDS to the data link connector (DLC)
(A) located under the driver's side ofthe dashboard. (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
A A
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If 3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting
(see page 11-229). (see page 11-229).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 5. Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST. If
needed, clean the throttle body (see page 11-394).
5. Check the REL TP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with
the HDS. The reading should be below 2.46 deg. If it
is not, clean the throttle body (see page 11-394).
BACK 11-393
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Cleaning Air Cleaner Removal/Installation
1. Remove the battery upper bracket to avoid

ACAUTION damaging the air cleaner.
body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or 2. Loosen the screw of the hose band (A).
is activated.
1. Check for damage to the air cleaner. If the air

cleaner is damaged, replace it (see page 11-395).
2. Remove the throttle body (see page 11-396). c

3. Clean off the carbon from the throttle valve and
inside the throttle body with a paper towel soaked
in throttle plate and induction cleaner.
NOTE:
o Remove the throttle body to clean it.
o Be careful not to pinch your fingers.
o To avoid removing the molybdenum coating, do
not clean the bearing area ofthe throttle shaft (A).

o Do not spray throttle plate and induction cleaner
directly on the throttle body.

o Use Honda genuine throttle plate and induction
cleaner.
3. Remove the bolts (B).
4. Remove the MAF/IAT sensor connector (C) and

harness clamps (D).
5. Remove the air cleaner (E).
NOTE: Tigthen the hose band screw (A) until the

edge of the hose band (F) goes over the paint mark
(G) upto 11 mm.
A A
4. Install the throttle body (see page 11-396).
5. Reset the PCM with the HDS (see page 11-4).

2 seconds.
11-394 BACK
Air Cleaner Element Inspection/ Resonator Removal/Installation
Replacement
1. Make sure you have anti-theft code for the audio
system and the navigation system (if equipped).
1. Loosen the bolts (A), then open the air cleaner
housing cover (B). 2. Remove the battery and battery tray.
3. Remove the under-hood sub fuse/relay box (A)

from the battery base.
D
C
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf.m, B
7.2Ibf·ftl
2. Remove the air cleaner element (C) from the air

cleaner housing (D).
3. Check the air cleaner element for damage or

clogging. Ifthere is damage or clogging, replace
the air cleaner element. A
NOTE: Do not use compressed air to clean the air

cleaner element. 4. Remove the air intake cover (B).
4. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. 5. Remove the bolts (C), then remove the resonator
Clean and remove any debris from inside the air (D).
cleaner housing.
5. Ifthe maintenance minder indicated air cleaner
replacement, reset the maintenance minder 7. Reinstall the battery, and do the these items:
(see page 3-9), and this procedure is complete. If
the maintenance minder did not indicated air • Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
cleaner replacement, go to step 6. navigation system (if equipped).
• Set the clock.
6. Select BODY ELECTRICAL with the HDS.
7. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with

the HDS.
8. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with

the HDS.
9. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 2 RESET with the

HDS.
BACK 11-395
Intake Air System
Throttle Body Removal/Installation
ACAUTION
Do not insert your fingers into the installed throttle body when you turn the ignition switch ON (II) or while the
ignition switch is ON (II). If you do, there will be serious injury to your fingers if the throttle valve is activated.
NOTE: If you are replacing or cleaning the throttle body, start at step 1. If you are removing the throttle body, start at
step 4.
1. USA, Canada models: Connect the HDS to the DLC while the engine is stopped.
2. USA, Canada models: Select the INSPECTION MENU on the HDS.
3. USA, Canada models: Do the TP POSITION CHECK in the ETCS TEST.
4. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7), then remove the intake air duct (charge air cooler outlet tube) (A).
5. Disconnect the throttle body connector (B), the water bypass hoses (C), and the vacuum hose (D).
NOTE: Plug the water bypass hoses after disconnecting them.
6. Remove the throttle body (E).
7. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal with a new gasket (F).
NOTE: When torquing the screw of the hose band (G), align the edge ofthe hose band (H) with the mark (I) painted
on the hose band. If you tighten the screw over the mark, replace the hose band.
8. Check these items .
• Do the PCM idle learn procedure after replacing the throttle body (see page 11-339) .
• Refill the radiator with engine coolant (see page 10-7).
11-396 BACK
Turbocharger Control System
TURBOCHARGER BOOST
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL MODULE
(PCM)
Update, page 11-7
TURBOCHARGERWASTEGATE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
TURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL Replacement, page 11-434
SOLENOID VALVE
Inspection, page 11-431 TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR
BACK 11-397
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0034: Turbocharger Bypass Control 7. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between
Solenoid Valve Circuit Low Voltage turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve 2P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general TURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
3. Select TURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. Terminal side of mal~ terminals

Is there 30.0 Q - 34.0 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 8.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals NO-Go to step 16.
at the turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve
and the PCM .• 8. Check the No. 31G1 ACG (15 A) fuse in the under-
Is the fuse OK?
6. Disconnect the turbocharger bypass control
solenoid valve 2P connector. YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair short in the wire between the

turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve and the
fuse. Also replace the blown fuse, then go to step
17.
11-398 BACK
10. Measure voltage between turbocharger bypass 14. Check for continuity between PCM connector
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.1 terminal C25 and body ground.
and body ground.
TURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR
ABV
1?nt~~~?~%W~(B~LU/YEL)
.Q
=
=
YES-Go to step 11. (C25) and turbocharger bypass control solenoid
valve, then go to step 17.
turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve and NO-Go to step 15.
No. 31G1 ACG fuse, then go to step 17.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-399
15. Check for continuity between turbocharger bypass 22. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.2
and PCM connector terminal C25. Is DTe P0034 indicated?
TURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the turbocharger bypass control
solenoid valve and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 23.
ABV (VEL/BLUI 23. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0034 in the
r-------~==~~~--~ DTCs MENU with the HDS.

Terminal side of female terminals go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.•
Is there continuity? NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

connections or loose terminals at the turbocharger
YES-Go to step 24. bypass control solenoid valve and the PCM, then
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM COMPLETED, go to step 21.
(C25) and turbocharger bypass control solenoid
16. Replace the turbocharger bypass control solenoid

valve (see page 11-432).
21. SelectTURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL

with the HDS.
11-400 BACK


with the HDS.

terminals at the turbocharger bypass control
solenoid valve and the PCM. If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 28.



bypass control solenoid valve and the PCM. If the
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
BACK 11 .. 401
Ole P0035: Turbocharger Bypass Control 6. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
Solenoid Valve Circuit High Voltage software (see page 11-7), or substitute a known-
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 7. Select the TURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). SOLENOID VALVE ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (I/).
SOLENOID VALVE ON in the INSPECTION MENU YES-Check for poor connections or loose
with the HDS. terminals at the turbocharger bypass control
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
Is DTC P0035 indicated? to step 1.
NO-Go to step 5. 9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0035 in the DTC
MENU with the HDS.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for P0035 in the DTC
MENU with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
Does the screen indicate PASSED? YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 8,
at the turbocharger bypass control valve and the go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
PCM .•
NO-If the screen indicate FAILED, go to step 6. If connections or loose terminals at the turbocharger
the screen indicate NOT COMPLETED, go to step 3 bypass control solenoid valve and the PCM. If the
and recheck. PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
substituted, go to step 1. Ifthe screen indicates
11-402 BACK
DTC P0045: Turbocharger Boost Control 8. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between
Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction turbocharger boost control solenoid valve 2P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL

4. Test-drive under these conditions: Terminal side of male terminals
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 'f (70 "C)

• Transmission in D position Is there 22.0 Q - 26.0 Q at room temperature?
• REL TP SENSOR above 59 deg YES-Go to step 9.
• Driveat least 2 seconds
NO-Go to step 17.
9. Check the No.3 IG 1 ACG (15 A) fuse in the under-
Is DTC P0045 indicated? dash fuse/relay box.
YES-Go to step 6. Is the fuse OK?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Go to step 10.

at the turbocharger boost control solenoid valve NO-Repair short in the wire between the
and the PCM .• turbocharger boost control solenoid valve and
No. 31G1 ACG (15 A) fuse. Also replace the blown
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. fuse, then go to step 18.
7. Disconnect the turbocharger boost control solenoid

valve 2P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-403
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 14. Disconnect the PCM connector C (44P).
11. Measure voltage between turbocharger boost 15. Check for continuity between PCM connector
and body ground.
TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL

,r iT
SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR 111 12 3 4 151 6 1 8 19 I
10 11 1213114116116 1118 19 I
2021 22 ::::>< 23 1/ 25 1
~ 2621 2B 29130 131132 1/1/1/
1136 1/ 36 39140 141 42 431441
VFT (VEL/RED)
Q
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM (C26)
YES-Go to step 12. and turbocharger boost control solenoid valve,
then go to step 18.
turbocharger boost control solenoid valve and NO-Go to step 16.
No.3 IG 1 ACG fuse, then go to step 18.
11·404 BACK
16. Check for continuity between turbocharger boost 23. Test-drive under these conditions:
control solenoid valve 2P connector terminal No.2
and PCM connector terminal C26. • ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 'f (70 "C)
TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE 2P CONNECTOR • Engine speed above 3,800 rpm
• Drive at least 2 seconds
Wire side of VFT (VEL/RED) 24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) Is DTe P0045 indicated?

terminals at the turbocharger boost control
Q
NO-Go to step 25.

Is there continuity? Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES-Go to step 26. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.•
(C26) and turbocharger boost control solenoid
valve, then goto step 18. NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
17. Replace the turbocharger boost control solenoid boost control solenoid valve and the PCM, then go
valve (see page 11-436). to step 1. Ifthe screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. If the screen
18. Reconnect all connectors. indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 22.

(cont'd)
BACK 11-405



• Transmission in 0 position

terminals at the turbocharger boost control
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 31.



boost control solenoid valve and the PCM. If the
PCM was updated, substitute a known good PCM
(see page 11-8), then go to step 28. If PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. If the screen indicates
EXECUTING, keep driving until a result comes on. If
step 28.
BACK
DTC P0234: Turbocharger Overboost 7. Check for poor connections, blockage, or damage
Problem at these parts:
NOTE: • Hose (A) between the turbocharger wastegate

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and control solenoid valve and the turbocharger
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general wastegate control actuator
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). • Hoses (B) and pipe (C) between the turbocharger
• If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the wastegate control solenoid valve and
same time as DTC P0234, troubleshoot those DTCs turbocharger
first, then recheck for P0234. • Turbocharger port (D)
P0107, P0108, P1128, P1129: Manifold absolute
pressure (MAP) sensor.
P0236, P0237, P0238: Turbocharger boost sensor.
3. Select the TURBOCHARGER WASTE GATE

CONTROL SYSTEM TEST in the INSPECTION
MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?

time .•
A
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Select TURBOCHARGER WASTE GATE CONTROL *: This view is from the rear of the engine compartment.
with the HDS. Are the parts OK?
Do you hear the solenoid operating? YES-Go to step 8.
YES-Go to step 5. NO-Repair or replace any damaged parts, then go

to step 9.
NO-Replace the turbocharger wastegate control
solenoid valve (see page 11-434), then go to step
10.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-407
8. Inspect the turbocharger wastegate control

solenoid valve (see page 11-433).
Is the solenoid valve OK?
YES-Check the turbocharger (see page 9-11) and

turbocharger wastegate control actuator (see page
9-11), make any necessary repairs, then go to step
9.

solenoid valve (see page 11-434), then go to step 9.
9. Reinstall the charge air cooler (see page 9-9).


• Transmission in 0 position
YES-Make sure the turbocharger waste gate

control solenoid valve, connecting hose, and port
are OK, then go to step 1.

11-408 BACK
OTC P023S: Turbocharger Boost Sensor 8. Monitorthe OBD STATUS for DTC P0236 in the
Circuit Range/Performance Problem DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the screen indicate FAILED?
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). NO-Ifthe screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
2. Check the TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR and poor connections or loose terminals at the
the BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. turbocharger boost pressure sensor and the PCM. If
Is the difference in value between the sensors a result come on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
26.7 kPa (7.9 in Hg, 200 mmHg) or more? CONDITION, go to step 4.
YES-Go to step 9. 9. Replace the turbocharger boost sensor (see page

11-436).
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Note the value of TURBOCHARGER BOOST
SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS. 11. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
4. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 12. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. radiator fan comes on.
5. Hold the engine speed at 4,500 rpm without load. 13. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the
range of recorded freeze data parameters:
6. Check the TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR in
the DATA LIST with the HDS. • ENGINE SPEED
• VSS
Does the TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR • REL TP SENSOR
change 0.67 kPa (0.2 in Hg, 5 mmHg) or more? • CLV (calculated load value)
• APPSENSOR
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 9.
range of recorded freeze data parameters: YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the turbocharger boost sensor and the
• ENGINE SPEED PCM, then go to step 1.
• VSS
• REL TP SENSOR NO-Go to step 15.
• CLV (calculated load value)
• APPSENSOR
(cont'd)
BACK 11-409



boost sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
CONDITION, go to step 12.
11-410 BACK
DTC P0237: Turbocharger Boost Sensor Is there about 5 V?
Circuit Low Voltage
YES-Go to step 16.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general NO-Go to step 8.
the DATA LIST with the HDS. 10. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 Vor 11. Check for continuity between PCM connector
less indicated? terminal B18 and turbocharger boost sensor 3P
YES-Go to step 3.
TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
at the turbocharger boost sensor and the PCM .•
Wire side of
female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
4. Disconnect the turbocharger boost sensor 3P
connector.

the DATA LIST with the HDS. Terminal side offemale terminals
Is about 3 kPa (1.0 in.Hg, 26 mmHg), or 0.23 Vor Is there continuity?

less indicated?
YES-Go to step 23.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 7. (B18) and the turbocharger boost sensor, then go to
step 18.
7. Measure voltage between turbocharger boost
sensor 3P connector terminals No.1 and No.3.
TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
VCC2 SG2
(YEL/BLU) (GRN/YEL)
(cont'd)
BACK 11-411
15. Check for continuity between turbocharger boost PCM, then go to step 1.
sensor 3P connector terminal No.2 and body
ground. NO- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR 3PCONNECTOR indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•


Is there continuity? PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a known-
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
(C10) and the turbocharger boost sensor, then go to
step 18. NO-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO-Go to step 23. original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
17. Replace the turbocharger boost sensor (see page

11-436).
11·412 BACK
DTC P023S: Turbocharger Boost Sensor 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
7. Check the TURBO BOOST SENSOR inthe DATA
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data LIST with the HDS.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or
4.49 V or more indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
the DATA LIST with the HDS. NO-Go to step 18.
Is about 160 kPa (47.1 in.Hg, 1,197 mmHg), or 8. Remove the jumper wire from the turbocharger
4.49 V or more indicated? boost sensor 3P connector.
YES-Go to step 3. 9. Measure voltage between turbocharger boost

sensor 3P connector terminals No.1 and No.3.
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
at the turbocharger boost sensor and the PCM .•
4. Disconnect the turbocharger boost sensor 3P

connector. VCC2 SG2
(YEL/BLU) (GRN/YEl)
5. Connect turbocharger boost sensor 3P connector

TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals
~
Is there about 5 V?
U
P3 (GRN) SG2 (GRN/YEl)
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 10.

JUMPER WIRE
(cont'd)
BACK 11-413
12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). 16. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
terminal B33 and turbocharger boost sensor 3P terminal C10 and turbocharger boost sensor 3P
connector terminal No.3. connector terminal No.2.
TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
SG2 (GRN/VELI
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) P3 (GRN) PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)

YES-Go to step 25.
YES-Go to step 25.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (C10) and the turbocharger boost sensor, then go to
(B33) and the turbocharger boost sensor, then go to step 20.
step 20.
11-414 BACK
19. Replace the turbocharger boost sensor (see page

11-436).




PCM.lfthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
good PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck.lfthe PCM

BACK 11-415
Ole P0243: Turbocharger Wastegate Control 8. At the solenoid side, measure resistance between
Solenoid Valve Circuit Malfunction turbocharger wastegate control solenoid valve 2P
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general TURBOCHARGER WASTEGATE CONTROL

4. Test-drive under these conditions: Terminal side of male terminals

• Transmission in D position Is there 22.0- 26.0 Q at room temperature?
• REL TP SENSOR above 59 deg YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 17.
9. Check the No. 31G1 ACG (15 A) fuse in the under-
Is DTC P0243 indicated? dash fuse/relay box.
YES-Go to step 6. Is the fuse OK?

at the turbocharger wastegate control solenoid NO-Repair short in the wire between the
valve and the PCM .• turbocharger wastegate control solenoid valve and
No. 31G1 ACG (15 A) fuse. Also replace the blown
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. fuse, then go to step 18.
7. Disconnect the turbocharger wastegate control

solenoid valve 2P connector.
11-416 BACK
11. Measure voltage between turbocharger wastegate 15. Check for continuity between PCM connector
and body ground.
WGS (RED/WHTI
TURBOCHARGER WASTEGATE CONTROL
If II
,I 1 I 2 3 41616 7 8 91
10 11 12 13114116116 17 18 19 I
20 2122
~ 26 272B
>< 23 1/ 26,
29130131132 1/ 1/ 1/
1136 1/ 38 39140 141 42 43 441
= .Q

/s there continuity?
/s there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 12. (C19) and turbocharger wastegate control solenoid
turbocharger wastegate control solenoid valve and NO-Go to step 16.
No. 31G1 ACG (15 A) fuse, then go to step 18.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-417
16. Check for continuity between turbocharger 17. Replace the turbocharger wastegate control
wastegate control solenoid valve 2P connector solenoid valve (see page 11-434).
terminal No.2 and PCM connectorterminal C19.
TURBOCHARGER WASTEGATE CONTROL

Terminal side of female terminals • ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 'f (70 "C)
Is there continuity? • Engine speed above 3,800 rpm
YES-Go to step 26. • Drive at least 2 seconds
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM 24. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
(C19) and the turbocharger wastegate control
solenoid valve, then go to step 18. Is DTC P0243 indicated?

terminals at the turbocharger wastegate control
NO-Go to step 25.


NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

wastegate control solenoid valve and the PCM,
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates
step 22.
11-418 BACK


• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 "F (70 'C)

• REl TP SENSOR above 59 deg

terminals at the turbocharger wastegate control
solenoid valve and the PCM, If the PCM was
go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 31.



wastegate control solenoid valve and the PCM. If
PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step 28. Ifthe PCM
step 28.
BACK 11-419
DTC P0299: Turbocharger Underboost 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

Problem
8. Remove the charge air cooler cover (see step 1 on
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data page 9-8).
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 9. Check for poor connections, blockage, or damage
at these parts.
1. Inspect the air cleaner element (see page 11-395).
• Hose (A) between the turbocharger bypass
Is the air cleaner element clogged? control solenoid valve and the turbocharger
bypass control valve
YES-Replace the air cleaner element (see page • Hose (B) between the turbocharger bypass
11-395), then go to step 18. control solenoid valve and the turbocharger
bypass control valve base
NO-Go to step 2. • Turbocharger bypass control valve base port (C)
2. Check for leak or damage at these parts.

• Intake air duct (charge air cooler inlet hose)
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Repair or replace the damaged parts, then go

to step 18.
5. Select the TURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL

SYSTEM TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the Are the parts OK?
HDS.
YES-Go to step 10.
Is the result OK?
NO-Repair or replace any damaged parts, then go
YES- Go to step 11. to step 18.
NO-Go to step 6.

with the HDS.
Do you hear the solenoid operating?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the turbocharger bypass control

18.
11-420 BACK
10. Inspect the turbocharger bypass control solenoid 16. Check for blockage or clogging at these parts:
• Hose (A) between the turbocharger wastegate
Is the solenoid valve OK? control solenoid valve and intake air duct
(turbocharger inlet connecting tube)
YES-Inspect the turbocharger bypass control • Intake air duct (turbocharger inlet connecting
valve (see page 9-10). tube) port (B)

solenoid va Ive (see page 11-432), then go to step
18.
11. Selectthe TURBOCHARGER WASTEGATE

MENU with the HDS.
Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 13.

B
12. Check for clogging or damaged in these parts:
• Turbocharger (see page 9-11)

• Warm up TWC (see page 11-440)
• Under-floor TWC (see page 11-443) *: This view is from the rear of the engine compartment.
• Exhaust pipe (see page 9-23)
Are the parts OK?
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 17.
time .• NO-Repair or replace any damaged parts, then go
to step 18.
to step 18. 17. Inspect the turbocharger wastegate control
solenoid valve (see page 11-433).
13. SelectTURBOCHARGER WASTEGATE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE ON in the INSPECTION MENU Is the solenoid valve OK?
with the HDS.
YES-Check the turbocharger (see page 9-11) and
Do you hear the solenoid operating? turbocharger wastegate control actuator (see page
9-11). Repair or replace any faulty parts, then go to
NO-Replace the turbocharger wastegate control NO-Replace the turbocharger wastegate control
solenoid valve (see page 11-434), then go to step solenoid valve (see page 11-434), then go to step
18. 18.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-421


YES-Check the turbocharger bypass control

solenoid valve, turbocharger wastegate control
solenoid valve, and its connecting hose and port,
then go to step 1.

11-422 BACK
DTC P1233: Turbocharger Boost Sensor/
BARD Sensor Incorrect Correlation
DTC P1234: Turbocharger Boost Sensor/MAP
Sensor Incorrect Correlation
NOTE:
• If DTC P1233 is indicated alone, do the
troubleshooting for DTC P0236 and P2227 using
freeze data from P1233. If DTC P1234 is indicated
alone, do the troubleshooting for DTC P0236, P1128,
and P1129 using freeze data from P1234.
• If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the
same time as DTC P1233 and/or P1234, troubleshoot
those DTCs first, then recheck for P1233 and/or P1234.
P0236: Turbocharger boost sensor

P1128, P1129: Manifold absolute pressure (MAP)
sensor
P2227: Barometric pressure (BARO) sensor
BACK 11-423
DTC P2261: Tu rbocharger Bypass Control 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Valve Stuck Closed
6. Check for clogging at the air bypass outlet pipe
Special Tools Required (see page 9-7).
or equivalent, commercially available Is the pipe OK?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). NO-Repair the pipe, then go to step 10.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Disconnect the vacuum/pressure hose (A) from the
turbocharger bypass control valve (B), then
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. connectthe vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, as
shown.
SYSTEM TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the
HDS.
Is the result OK?

time .•
NO-Go to step 4.

with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5. 8. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at

NO-Go to step 9. radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
Is there vacuum?
YES-Inspect the turbocharger bypass control

NO-Go to step 9.
11-424 BACK
9. Replace the turbocharger bypass control solenoid
10. Turn the ignition switch ON(II).

• Accelerate with throttle fully open, then
decelerate with throttle fully closed at least
3 seconds
YES-Check the turbocharger bypass control

solenoid valve and its connecting hose, then go to
step 1.

BACK 11-425
Ole P2263:Turbocharger Boost System 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Performance Problem
4. Check the TURBOCHARGER BOOST SENSOR and
NOTE: BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general Does the value of TURBOCHARGER BOOST
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). SENSOR and BARO SENSOR differ 6.8 kPa
• If DTC P0229 is stored at the same time as DTC P2263, (2.0 in.Hg, 50 mmHg) or more?
P2263. YES-Replace the turbocharger boost sensor
1. Inspect the air cleaner element (see page 11-395).
NO-Go to step 5.
Is the air cleaner element clogged?
YES-Replace the air cleaner element (see page

NO-Go to step 2.
2. Check for leak or damage at these parts.

• Intake air duct (charger air cooler inlet hose)
• Intake air duct (charger air cooler outlet tube)
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 3.

to step 26.
11-426 BACK
5. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Check for poor connections, blockage, or damage
at these parts.
SYSTEM TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the • Hose (A) between the turbocharger bypass
HDS. control solenoid valve and the turbocharger
bypass control valve
Is the result OK? • Hose (B) between the turbocharger bypass
control solenoid valve and the turbocharger
YES-Go to step 12. bypass control valve
• Turbocharger bypass control valve base port (C)
NO-Go to step 7.

with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 8.

26.

page 9-8).
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 11.

to step 26.
11. Inspect the turbocharger bypass control solenoid

YES-Inspect the turbocharger bypass control

valve (see page 9-10). Ifthe turbocharger bypass
control valve is faulty, replace the turbocharger
bypass control valve, then go to step 26. If the
turbocharger bypass control valve is OK, go to step
12.

26.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-427
12. Select the TURBOCHARGER WASTE GATE 16. Check for blockage or clogging at these parts.
MENU with the HDS. • Hose (A) between the turbocharger wastegate
control solenoid valve and Intake air duct
Is the result OK? (turbocharger inlet connecting tube)
• Intake air duct (turbocharger inlet connecting
YES-Go to step 18. tube) port (B)
NO-Go to step 13.
13. Select the TURBOCHARGER WASTE GATE

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ON in the
INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 14.

26.
B
*: This view is from the rear of the engine compartment.
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 17.

to step 26.
17. Inspect the turbocharger wastegate control

solenoid valve (see page' 1-433).
YES-Check the turbocharger (see page 9-11), and

turbocharger wastegate control actuator (see page
9-11). If the turbocharger or the turbocharger
wastegate control actuator is faulty, replace the
faulty parts, then go to step 26. If the turbocharger
and the turbocharger wastegate actuator are OK,
go to step 18.

26.
11-428 BACK
18. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 24. Check for blockage or clogging at these parts .
19. Select the TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL • Hose (A) between the turbocharger boost control
SYSTEM TEST in the INSPECTION MENU with the solenoid valve and intake air duct (turbocharger
HDS. inlet connecting tube)
• Intake air duct (turbocharger inlet connecting
Is the result OK? tube) port (B)
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 21.
20. Check for clogging or damaged in these parts.
• Turbocharger (see page 9-11).

• Warm up TWC (see page 11-440).
• Under-floor TWC (see page 11-443).
• Exhaust pipe (see page 9-23). A
Are the parts OK?
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this B

time .•

to step 26.
21. Select TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE ON in the INSPECTION MENU Are the parts OK?
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 25.
YES-Go to step 22. to step 26.
NO-Replace the turbocharger boost control 25. Inspect the turbocharger boost control solenoid
solenoid valve (see page 11-436), then go to step valve (see page 11-435).
26.
YES-Check the turbocharger (see page 9-11), and
23. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7). turbocharger boost control actuator (see page 9-11).
Replace the turbocharger or turbocharger boost
control actuator if they are faulty, then go to step
26.
NO-Replace the turbocharger boost control

26.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-429
. Turbocharger Control System
26. Reinstall all parts.


• Accelerate for 2 seconds or more (under half
throttle) at least 10 times
YES-Check the turbocharger boost sensor, the

turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve, the
turbocharger wastegate control solenoid valve, the
turbocharger boost control solenoid valve, and its
connecting hose and port, then go to step 1.

11-430 BACK
Turbocharger Bypass Control Solenoid Valve Inspection
Special Tools Required 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then remove the
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A vacuum pump/gauge from the turbocharger
or equipment, commercially available bypass control solenoid valve.
1. Remove the charge air cooler cover (see step 1 on 8. Connect the vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg (A)
page 9-8). to the turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve
(B) as shown.
2. Disconnect the hoses (A) from the turbocharger
bypass control solenoid valve (B), and connect the
vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg (C) to the
solenoid valve as shown.
9. Apply vacuum to the port.
• If it holds vacuum, replace the turbocharger

bypass control solenoid valve (see page 11-432).
3. Apply vacuum to the port. • If it doesn't hold vacuum, go to step 10.
• If it holds vacuum, release the vacuum, then go 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
to step 4.
• If it doesn't hold vacuum, replace the 11. Select TURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL
turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve SOLENOID VALVE ON in the INSPECTION MENU
(see page 11-432). with the HDS.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 12. Reapply vacuum to the port.
5. Select TURBOCHARGER BYPASS CONTROL • If it holds vacuum, the turbocharger bypass

SOLENOID VALVE ON in the INSPECTION MENU control solenoid valve is OK.
with the HDS. • If it doesn't hold vacuum, replace the
turbocharger bypass control solenoid valve
6. Reapply vacuum to the port. (see page 11-432).

bypass control solenoid valve (see page 11-432).
• If it doesn't hold vacuum, go to step 7.
BACK 11-431
Turbocharger Bypass Control Solenoid Valve Replacement

page 9-8).
2. Disconnect the hoses (A).
3. Disconnect the turbocharger bypass control

solenoid valve connector (8).
4. Remove the turbocharger bypass control solenoid

valve (C).
11-432 BACK
Turbocharger Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve Inspection
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A vacuum pump/gauge from the turbocharger
or equipment, commercially available wastegate control solenoid valve.
1. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7). 8. Connect the vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg (A)
to the turbocharger wastegate control solenoid
2. Disconnect the hoses (A) from the turbocharger valve (B) as shown.
wastegate control solenoid valve (B), and connect
the vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg (C) to the B
B rt'\
A

3. Apply vacuum to the port. wastegate control solenoid valve (see page
11-434).
• If it holds vacuum, release the vacuum, then go • If it doesn't hold vacuum, go to step 10.
to step 4.
• If it doesn't hold vacuum, replace the 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
turbocharger wastegate control solenoid valve
(see page 11-434). 11. Select TURBOCHARGER WASTEGATE CONTROL
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). with the HDS.
5. Select TURBOCHARGER WASTEGATE CONTROL 12. Reapply vacuum to the port.

with the HDS. • If it holds vacuum, replace the turbocharger
wastegate control solenoid valve (see page
6. Reapply vacuum to the port. 11-434).
• If it doesn't hold vacuum, the turbocharger
• If it holds vacuum, replace the turbocharger wastegate control solenoid valve is OK.
wastegate control solenoid valve (see page
11-434).
BACK 11-433
Turbocharger Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve Replacement
2. Disconnect the breather hose (A).
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
F
B
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
D
3. Loosen the nut (8), and disconnect the
turbocharger boost control solenoid valve
connector (e).
4. Disconnect the hoses (D), and the turbocharger

wastegate control solenoid valve connector (E).
5. Remove the turbocharger wastegate control

solenoid valve (F).
11-434 BACK
Turbocharger Boost Control Solenoid Valve Inspection
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A vacuum pump/gauge from the turbocharger boost
or equipment, commercially available control solenoid valve.
1. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7). 8. Connect the vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg (A)
to the turbocharger boost control solenoid valve (B)
2. Disconnect the hoses (A) from the turbocharger as shown.
boost control solenoid valve (B), and connect the
vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg (C) to the
B
A

3. Apply vacuum to the port. boost control solenoid valve (see page 11-436).
• If it holds vacuum, release the vacuum, then go
to step 4. 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• If it doesn't hold vacuum, replace the
turbocharger boost control solenoid valve 11. Select TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL
(see page 11-436). SOLENOID VALVE ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
12. Reapply vacuum to the port.
5. Select TURBOCHARGER BOOST CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE ON in the INSPECTION MENU • If it holds vacuum, the turbocharger boost
with the HDS. control solenoid valve is OK.
• If it doesn't hold vacuum, replace the
6. Reapply vacuum to the port. turbocharger boost control solenoid valve
(see page 11-436).
boost control solenoid valve (see page 11-436).
BACK 11-435
Turbocharger Boost Control Turbocharger Boost Sensor

Solenoid Valve Replacement Replacement
1. Remove the charge air cooler (see page 9-7). 1. Remove the charge air cooler cover (see step 1 on
page 9-8).
2. Disconnect the turbocharger wastegate control
solenoid valve connector (A). 2. Remove the charge air cooler cover stay (A).
3. Disconnect the hoses (8), and the turbocharger

boost control valve connector (C). 3. Disconnect the turbocharger boost sensor
connector (8).
4. Remove the turbocharger boost control solenoid
valve (D). 4. Remove the turbocharger boost sensor (C).
5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal. 5. Install the parts in the reverse order of removal
with a new O-ring (D).
11-436 BACK
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL MODULE
(PCM)
Update, page 11-7
WARM UP THREE WAY

CATALYTIC CONVERTER
ENGINE REAR VIEW
WARMUP
THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
UNDER-FLOOR
THREE WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER
BACK 11-437
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0420: Catalyst System Efficiency Below 7. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 in the
Threshold DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Does the screen indicate FA/LED?

anyon-board snapshot, and review the general YES-Go to step 8.
• Poor quality fuel may cause this DTC. NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). indicates EXECUTING, keep driving until a result
comes on. If the screen indicates OUT OF
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CONDITION, go to step 4 and recheck.
3. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
radiator fan comes on, then let it idle. 9. Replace the WU-TWC (see page 11-440).
4. Test-drive under these conditions: 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
• ECT SENSOR 1 above 158 "F (70 "C) 11. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
• Vehicle speed between 45-75 mph (72- 12. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
120 km/h) for 5 minutes or more with cruise
control set 13. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed at
• Maintain the vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
for 5 minutes or more with cruise control set radiator fan comes on, then let it idle.
5. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0420 in the 14. Test-drive for about 10 minutes, varying the vehicle
DTCs MENU with the HDS. speed.
Does the screen indicate EXECUTING? 15. Check the CATA MONITOR CONDITION in the
YES-Go to step 6.
/s the temperature OK?
NO-If the screen indicates OUT OF CONDITION,
go to step 4 and recheck. If the screen indicates YES-Go to step 16.
PASSED, intermittent failure, the system is OK at
this time. If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step NO-Go to step 13 and recheck.
8.
6. Continue test driving until a result comes on.
• Vehicle speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) for 5 minutes
or more with cruise control set
11-438 BACK
Does the screen indicate EXECUTING?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Go to step 16 and recheck.
18. Continue test-driving until a result comes on.
Are any Temporary DTCs or DTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 20.

YES-Troubleshooting is complete .•
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check the fuel

quality. If the screen indicates EXECUTING, keep
driving until a result comes on. If the screen
indicates OUT OF CONDITION, go to step 13 and
recheck.
BACK 11-439
Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation
1. Remove the charge air cooler cover. 6. Remove the water hose upper cover (A).
2. Remove the charge air cooler cover bracket (A).
B C
44N·m
C 14.5 kgf·m,
33Ibf·ft)
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
7. Remove the bolts (8) and nut (C).

3. Remove the power steering feed hose stay (8), then
move the hose (C) in the direction of the arrow. 8. Raise the vehicle all the way up on a lift.
4. Remove the bolts (A), then remove the 9. Remove the under-floor TWC (see page 11-443).
turbocharger cover (8).
10. Remove the secondary H02S (see page 11-245).
A
12 N·m 11.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibf.ft)
11. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-177).
12. Remove the intermediate shaft (see page 16-21).
13. Remove the PIS heat shield (see step 22 on page

17-32).
5. Remove the A/F sensor (see page 11-245).
11-440 BACK
14. Disconnect the engine oil pressure switch 17. Remove the WU-TWC bracket (A), then remove the
connector (A), the right front wheel sensor WU-TWC (B) and gasket (C) from the turbocharger.
connector (B), and the CKP sensor connector (C),
then remove harness clamp (D).
c
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf.tt)
18. Lower the WU-TWC.

15. Remove the water hose lower cover (E).
16. Remove the torque rod mounting bolts (A) from the
oil pan.
~( A
64N·m
16.5 kgf.m, 47 Ibf·ttl
Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-441
Warm Up TWC Removal/Installation (cont'd)
19. Turn the under-floor TWC side of the WU-TWC 21. Remove the converter cover (A).
upward as shown.
20. After the turbocharger side of the WU-TWC came

out, turn the under-floorTWC side ofthe WU-TWC
downward, and take it out by turning it.

with new gaskets (turbocharger side and under-
floor TWC side). Also, replace the bolts and nut that
attach the WU~TWC to the turbocharger.
23. Refill the ATF (see page 14-239).
11-442 BACK
Under-floor TWC Removal/Installation
,. Remove the under-floor TWC (A).
33N·m
(3.4kgf·m,
~ 25Ibf.ft)
22N·m
(2.2kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
2. Remove the converter cover (8).

with new gaskets (C).
BACK 11-443
PCVSystem
PCVVALVE
11-444 BACK
PCV Valve Inspection PCV Valve Replacement
1. Check the PCV valve (A), hoses (8), and 1. Disconnect the PCV hose.
connections for leaks or restrictions.
2. Remove the PCV valve (A).
B

2. At idle, make sure there is a clicking sound from the with a new washer (8).
PCV valve when the hose between the PCV valve
and intake manifold is lightly pinched (A) with your
fingers or pliers.
If there is no clicking sound, check the PCV valve
washer for cracks or damage. If the washer is OK,
replace the PCV valve and recheck.
BACK 11-445
EVAPSystem
NON-RETURN VALVE B
POWERTRAIN
CONTROL MODULE
(PCM)
Update, page 11-7

CANISTER PURGE NOZZLE
NON-RETURN VALVE A Replacement, page 11-486
Inspection, page 11-488 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION (EVAP)
Replacement, page 11-488 CANISTER PURGE VALVE

CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
FUEL TANK VAPOR CONTROL VALVE
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
(EVAP) CANISTER
Replacement, page 11-485 FUEL FILL CAP

CANISTER FILTER
11-446 BACK
DTC Troubleshooting
DTe P0443: EVAP Canister Purge Valve 7. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the purge
Circuit Malfunction valve (B) in the engine compartment, and connect a
vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the EVAP
Special Tools Required canister purge valve.
or equivalent, commercially available



8. Install the intake air duct (air flow tube) (see step 16
Is OTe P0443 indicated? on page 9-20).
YES-Go to step 5. 9. Start the engine, and let it idle.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there vacuum?

atthe EVAP canister purge valve and the PCM .• YES-Go to step 10.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and allow the engine NO-Go to step 16.
to cool below 140 "F (60 'C).
6. Remove the intake air duct (air flow tube) (see step
19 on page 9-16). 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
12. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P

connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-447
EVAPSystem
13. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge 16. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
2P CONNECTOR 18. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
20. Measure voltage between EVAP canister purge

= EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE

2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 39. =

14. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P). Wire side of female terminals
15. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge

valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. Is there battery voltage?

YES-Go to step 34.
2P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 21.
PCS (VEL/BLU)
YES-Repair short in the wire between the EVAP

canister purge valve and the PCM (83), then go to
step 40.
NO-Go to step 46.
11-448 BACK
21. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 25. Connect EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector
22. Check the No. 11 LAF (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box. EVAP CANISTER PURGE VALVE
2P CONNECTOR
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 23.

+B (WHT/BLK)
NO-Go to step 29.
JUMPER WIRE
23. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (E) from the under-
26. Check for continuity between PGM-FI subrelay 4P

PGM·FI SUBRELAY 4P CONNECTOR
24. Test the PGM-FI subrelay.

Is the PGM-FI subrelay OK?
NO-Replace the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step YES-Go to step 27.

40.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the EVAP
canister purge valve and the PGM-FI subrelay, then
go to step 40.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-449
EVAPSystem
27. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). 29. Remove the PGM-FI subrelay (E) from the under-
28. Check for continuity between PGM-FI subrelay 4P
terminal A21.
SUBRLY (RED) PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
Terminal side of female terminals 30. Disconnect the EVAP canister purge valve 2P
connector.
YES-Go to step 46.
32. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM connector.
(A21) and the PGM-FI subrelay, then go to step 40.
11-450 BACK
33. Check for continuity between EVAP canister purge 34. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2P CONNECTOR 36. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P).

terminal 83 and EVAP canister purge valve 2P

2P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between the PGM-FI

subrelay, the EVAP canister purge valve, the EVAP
canister vent shut valve, and the A/F sensor
(Sensor 1). Also replace the No. 11 LAF (15 A) fuse,
then go to step 40. Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box Is there continuity?

YES-Go to step 38.

canister purge valve and the PCM (83), then go to
step 40.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-451
EVAPSystem
38. At the valve side, measure resistance between 44. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
EVAP canister purge valve 2P connector terminals
No.1 and No.2. Is DTC P0443 indicated?

2P CONNECTOR terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
NO-Go to step 45.

Terminal side of male terminals YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

Is there about 20 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 46. connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
purge valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
NO-Go to step 39. screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF
CONDITION, keep idling until a result comes on.
39. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page
11-486). 46. Reconnect all connectors.
40. Reconnect all connectors. 47. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
41. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). good PCM (see page 11-8).
42. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 48. Start the engine, and let it idle.
43. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). 49. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.

terminals at the EVAP canister purge valve and the
NO-Go to step 50.
11-452 BACK


connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
purge valve and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
1. If the screen indicates EXECUTING or OUT OF
CONDITION, keep idling until a result comes on.
BACK 11-453
EVAPSystem
DTC P0451: FTP Sensor Circuit Rangel 11. Check for Temporary DTCs or OTCs with the HDS.
Performance Problem
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and YES-Check for poor connections or loose
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). to step 1.
• If DTC P2422 is stored at the same time as DTC P0451 ,
troubleshoot DTC P2422 first, then recheck for DTC NO-Go to step 12.
P0451.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). DTCs MENU with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
3. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
or neutral) until the radiator fan comes on. Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 11,
DTCs MENU with the HDS. NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
Does the screen indicate FAILED? and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
YES-Go to step 5. result comes on.

poor connections or loose terminals at the FTP
sensor and the PCM.lfthe screen indicates NOT
6. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-485).
11-454 BACK
DTC P0452: FTP Sensor Circuit Low Voltage 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is about -7.3 kPa (- 2.16 in.Hg, - 55 mmHg) or
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 0.3 Vor more indicated?
4. Remove the fuel fill cap. YES-Go to step 20.
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 14. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector
HDS. terminal No.1 and body ground.
Is about - 7.3 kPa (- 2.16 in.Hg, - 55 mmHg), or FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

0.3 V or less indicated?
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Install the fuel fill cap.
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0452 in the Wire side of female terminals
Does the screen indicate FAILED? Is there about 5 V?
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent NO-Go to step 15.

sensor and the PCM. If the screen indicates NOT
(cont'd)
BACK 11-455
EVAPSystem
18. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No.1 to 23. Check for continuity between FTP sensor 3P
body ground with a jumper wire. connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR FTPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
VCC6(RED)
JUMPER WIRE
= =
19. Check for continuity between PCM connector Is there continuity?

terminal A 19 and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) (A26) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
VCC6(RED)
11 NO-Go to step 32.
1/12/41516/891.
" 110/121311411511617 181191
120 2122 >< 23 241251 •
~ 126 27/ 29 VI 31 V 33 341351 •
136 37 38 39140VI42 43 441
Q
=
YES-Go to step 32.

(A 19) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 26.
11-456 BACK
24. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 32. Reconnect a" connectors.
25. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-485). 33. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
software (see page 11-7). or substitute a known-
26. Reconnect a" connectors. good PCM (see page 11-8).
28. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 35. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
29. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). Is DTC P0452 indicated?
30. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM. If the
Is DTC P0452 indicated? PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
YES-Check for poor connections or loose substituted, go to step 1.
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1. NO-Go to step 36.
NO-Go to step 31. 36. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0452 in the
31. Monitor the OBDSTATUS for DTC P0452 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 30, Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 35,
go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, go to step 32. If NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED keep idling connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
until a result comes on. and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
BACK 11-457
EVAPSystem
DTC P0453: FTP Sensor Circuit High Voltage 12. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminals No.2
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general FTPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR

FTP SG6
(LTGRN) (BLK)
4. Remove the fuel fill cap. JUMPER WIRE

5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Wire side of female terminals
6. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the

HDS. 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V 14. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
or more indicated? HDS.
YES-Go to step 10. Is about 7.3 kPa (2.16 in.Hg, 55 mmHg), or 4.7 V
or more indicated?
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 26.
15. Measure voltage between FTP sensor 3P connector
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the terminals No.1 and No.3.
FTPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-If the screen indicates PASSED, intermittent

failure, the system is OK at this time. Check for VCC6 SG6
(RED) (BLK)
sensor and the PCM. Ifthe screen indicates NOT
11. Disconnect the FTP sensor 3P connector.

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 16.
11-458 BACK
19. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No.3 to 24. Connect FTP sensor 3P connector terminal No.2 to
body ground with a jumper wire. body ground with a jumper wire.
FTP SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR FTPSENSOR3PCONNECTOR
SG6 FTP
(BLK) (LTGRN)
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE
terminal A9 and body ground. terminal A26 and body ground.

SG6(BLK)
Q
=
=
Terminal side offemale terminals Terminal side of female terminals
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM (A9) NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM
and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28. (A26) and the FTP sensor, then go to step 28.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-459
EVAPSystem
OTe Troubleshooting (co nt'd)
26. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 34. Reconnect all connectors.
27. Replace the FTPsensor (see page 11-485). 35. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
28. Reconnect all connectors. good PCM (see page 11-8).
30. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 37. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
31. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). Is DTC P0453 indicated?
32. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM. If the
Is DTC P0453 indicated? PCM was updated, substitute a known-good PCM
YES-Check for poor connections or loose substituted, go to step 1.
terminals at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go
to step 1. NO-Go to step 38.
NO-Go to step 33. 38. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0453 in the
DTCs MENU with the HDS. Does the screen indicate PASSED?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
Temporary DTCs were indicated in step 32, go to Temporary DTCs were indicated in step 37, go to
the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor
a nd the PCM, then go to step 1. If the screen and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), then go to step
result comes on. 36. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the
11-460 BACK
DTC P0455: EVAP System Large Leak 2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe
Detected mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
DTC P0456: EVAP System Very Small Leak
Detected
INOTICEI
The fuel system is designed to allow specified
maximum vacuum and pressure conditions. Do not
deviate from the vacuum and pressure tests as
indicated in these procedures. Excessive pressure/
vacuum would damage the EVAP components or
cause eventual fuel tank failure.

NOTE: Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
anyon-board snapshot, and review the general under the cap?
• Fresh fuel has a higher volatility that will create YES-Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe,
greater pressure!vacuum. The optimum condition for then go to step 23.
testing is less than a full tank of fresh fuel. If possible,
to assist in leak detection, add 1 gallon of fresh fuel to NO-Go to step 3.
the tank (as long as it will not fill the tank), just before
starting these procedures. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "Tighten to 4. Clear the OTC with the HDS.
click"). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight, then it
clicks. 5. Select the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
tightened? Is the result OK?
YES-Go to step 2. YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this

NO- Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 23. atthe FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve, or
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 6.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-461
EVAPSystem
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 10. Disconnect the vacuum hose (purge line) (A) from
the EVAP canister purge valve (B) in the engine
7. Check for a poor connection or damage at the fuel compartment, and connect a vacuum pump/gauge,
tank vapor recirculation tube. 0-30 in.Hg, to the vacuum hose as shown.
/s the tube OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-
o Replace the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube,
then go to step 23.

o If necessary, replace the fuel tank (see page
8. Disconnect the fuel tank vapor recirculation tube

(A) from the EVAP canister (B), and plug the EVAP
canister port (C).
12. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU

with the HDS.
13. Apply vacuum to the hose until the FTP reads

1.90 V (-0.59 in.Hg, -15.1 mmHg).
c NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the pressure. If you
exceed the pressure, the FTP sensor can be
B damaged.
9. Remove the intake air duct (air flow tube) (see step 14. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LlSTfor
19 on page 9-16). 1 minute with the HDS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V

(0.1 in.Hg, 0.5 mmHg)?
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 20.
11-462 BACK
15. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU 19. Check for a loose or damaged EVAP canister purge
with the HDS. line between the EVAP canister and the EVAP
canister purge valve.
16. Disconnect the fresh air hose (A) from the EVAP
canister (B), and plug the EVAP canister port (C). Is the line OK?
C YES-Replace these parts, then go to step 22:
• FTP sensor O-ring

• EVAP canister vent shut valve case and O-ring
• EVAP canister
B NO-Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge

hose, then go to step 22.
20. Select EVAP CVS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU

with the HDS.
A 21. Check these parts for looseness or damage:
17. Apply vacuum to the EVAP system until the FTP • Fuel fill pipe
reads 1.90 V (-0.59 in.Hg, -15.1 mmHg). • Fuel vapor return pipe
NOTE: Be careful not to exceed the pressure. If you Are the parts OK?
exceed the pressure, the FTP sensor can be
damaged. YES-Check the fuel tank unit base gasket
(see page 11-381), and check the fuel tank, then go
18. Monitor the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST for to step 22.
1 minute with the HDS.
Does the voltage increase more than 0.2 V to step 22.
(0.1 in.Hg, 2.5 mmHg)?
22. Reconnect all hoses and connectors, and reinstall
YES-Go to step 19. all parts.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve, 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
then go to step 22.
26. Select the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the

Is the result OK?
YES-Troubleshooting is complete.•

at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister purge valve,
the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
BACK 11-463
EVAPSystem
DTC P0457: EVAP System Leak Detected/Fuel 5. Select the EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the
Fill Cap Loose or Missing INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record a" freeze data Is the result OK?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "Tighten to at the FTP sensor, or the EVAP canister vent shut
click"). It should turn 1/4 turn after it's tight, then it valve, and the PCM .•
clicks.
NO-Go to step 6.
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly
tightened? 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES-Go to step 2. 7. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
EVAP canister (see page 11-487).
NO-Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 19.
8. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe shut valve.
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether
cord (C) is not caught under the cap. 9. Turn the ignition switch ON (").

with the HDS.
11. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)

operation.
Is the fuel fill cap seal missing or damaged, is the

fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
under the cap?
YES-Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe,

then go to step 19.
Does the valve operate?
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Check the routing of the EVAP canister vent
3. Turn the ignition switch ON ("). tube, then go to step 18.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO-Go to step 12.
11-464 BACK
13. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve

(see page 11-487).
17. Selectthe EVAP FUNCTION TEST in the

Is the result OK?
YES- Troubleshooting is complete.•

at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut
valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
18. Reinstall the EVAP canister vent shut valve.

Is the result OK?

at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut
valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
BACK 11~465
EVAPSystem
Ole P0496: EVAP System High Purge Flow

Detected

INSPECTION MENU with the HOS.
Is the result OK?

the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Replace the EVAP canister purge valve (see page

11-486).
7. Resetthe PCM with the HOS.
9. Select the EVAP FU NCTION TEST in the

INSPECTION MENU with the HOS.
Is the result OK?

then go to step 1.
11-466 BACK
Dle P0497: EVAP System Low Purge Flow 5. Remove the intake air duct (air flow tube) (see step
Detected 19 on page 9-16).
Special Tools Required 6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
• Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0 -4 in.Hg 07 JAZ-001 OOOB canister purge valve (B) .
• Vacuum pump/gauge, 0 -30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A


A
Is the result OK?

at the FTP sensor and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check for poor connection, blockage, or damage at

the EVAP canister purge line between the throttle
body and EVAP canister.
Is the line OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge

line, then go to step 26.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-467
EVAPSystem
7. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the purge line (at 11. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
the EVAP canister side), and connect a T-fitting (A) canister purge valve (8). Connect a T-fitting (C)
from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump! from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump!
gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the hose as shown. gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the EVAP canister purge
valve as shown.
8. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of vacuum

to the hose. 12. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of vacuum
to the hose.
9. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS. 13. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
Does the vacuum release immediately?
YES-Go to step 14.
YES-Check for blockage in the vacuum hose
NO-Go to step 10. between the EVAP canister purge valve and the
EVAP canister, then go to step 26.
10. Select EVAP PCS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS. NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve
11-468 BACK
14. Connectthe vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to 18. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
the vacuum hose (A) as shown.
19. Remove the FTP sensor with its connector
connected (see page 11-485).
20. Connect a T-fitting (A) from the vacuum pump/

gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, and the vacuum pump to the
FTP sensor (8) as shown.
07JAZ-001000B
15. Reinstall the intake air duct (air flow tube). Start the
engine, and let it idle.
Is there vacuum? 21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Go to step 18. 22. Check and record the FTP SENSOR reading in the
NO-Go to step 16.
23. Slowly apply about 1.3 kPa (0.4 in.Hg, 10 mmHg) of
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF. vacuum to the hose.
17. Inspect non-return valve A (see page 11-488). 24. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the
HDS.
Is the valve OK?
Does the value change?
YES-Check for blockage at the EVAP purge line
between the throttle body and EVAP canister purge YES-Check for debris or blockage at the FTP
valve, then go to step 26. sensor port and at the EVAP canister, then go to
step 26.
NO-Replace non-return valve A (see page 11-488),
then go to step 26. NO-Go to step 25.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-469
EVAPSystem
25. Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-485).
26. Reconnect all hoses.

Is the result OK?

at the FTP sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
11-470 BACK
DTC P0498: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 9. Measure voltage between EVAP canister vent shut
Circuit Low Voltage valve 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 2P CONNECTOR

+B(PUR)

=
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 4. Is there battery voltage?
4. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU YES-Go to step 10.

with the HDS.
5. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. canister vent shut valve and the PGM-FI subrelay,
then go to step 18.
YES-Go to step 6.
11. Measure resistance between EVAP canister vent
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this shut valve 2P connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and the EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE
PCM .• 2P CONNECTOR
7. Disconnect the EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P

connector.
Is there about 25- 30 Q at room temperature?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 17.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-471
EVAPSystem
12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 16. Check for continuity between PCM connector
14. Check for continuity between PCM connector VSV(ORN)
terminal A 10 and body ground.

VSV(ORN)
Q
Q Is there continuity?
=
Is there continuity? NO-Repair open in the wire between the EVAP

canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A10), then go
YES-Repair short in the wire between the EVAP to step 18.
canister vent shut valve and the PCM (A 10), then go
to step 18. 17. Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
(see page 11-487).
NO-Go to step 15.
15. Connect EVAP canister vent shut valve 2P
connector terminal No.1 to body ground with a
jumper wire.
EVAP CANISTER VENT SHUT VALVE

2P CONNECTOR
VSV(ORN)
JUMPER WIRE
=
11-472 BACK
19. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 25. Reconnect all connectors.
20. Reset the PCM with the HDS. 26. Update the PCM if it does not have the latest
21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). good PCM (see page 11-8).
22. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU 27. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS. with the HDS.
Is DTC P0498 indicated? Is DTC P0498 indicated?
YES-Check for poor connections or loose YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals atthe EVAP canister vent shut valve and terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
the PCM, then go to step 1. the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
NO-Go to step 24. 27. If the PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
24. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0498 in the NO-Go to step 29.
Does the screen indicate PASSED? DTCs MENU with the HDS.
YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other Does the screen indicate PASSED?

go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister Temporary DTCs or DTCs were indicated in step 28,
vent shut valve and the PCM, then go to step 1. If go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
the screen indicates NOT COMPLETED, go to step
22. NO-If the screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
vent shut valve and the PCM. If the PCM was
BACK 11-473
EVAPSystem
DTC P0499: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve 8. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P0499 in the
Circuit High Voltage DTCs MENU with the HDS.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the screen indicate PASSED?
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
3. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor
with the HDS. connections or loose terminals at the EVAP canister
vent shut valve and the PCM. If the PCM was
4. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS. updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page
11-8), then go to step 6. Ifthe PCM was substituted,
Is DTC P0499 indicated? go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
YES-Go to step 5.

atthe EVAP canister vent shut valve and the
PCM .•


with the HDS.

terminals at the EVAP canister vent shut valve and
the PCM.lfthe PCM was updated, substitute a
NO-Go to step 8.
11-474 BACK
DTC P1454: FTP Sensor Range/Performance 10. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Problem
DTC P2422: EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve
Stuck Closed Malfunction 12. Remove the EVAP canister vent shut valve from the
EVAP canister (see page 11-487).
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 13. Connect the 2P connector to the EVAP canister vent
troubleshooting information (see page 11-3). shut valve.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 15. Select EVAP CVS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
16. Check the EVAP canister vent shut valve (A)
4. Remove the fuel fill cap, and wait 1 minute. operation.

HDS.
Is it between - 0.67 and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and

0.2 in.Hg, - 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 17.
8. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park Does the valve operate?
YES-Check for a blockage in the EVAP canister,
9. Monitor the OBD STATUS for DTC P1454 in the vent hoses, and drain joint, then install the EVAP
DTCs MENU with the HDS. canister vent shut valve, and go to step 23.
Does the screen indicate FAILED? NO-Replace the EVAP canister vent shut valve
YES-Go to step 10.

sensor, the EVAP canister vent shut valve, and the
PCM. Also check for a blockage in the vent hoses
and the drain joint. If the screen indicates NOT
(cont'd)
BACK 11-475
EVAPSystem
17. Disconnect the air tube (A) from the FTP sensor (8). 21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
HDS.
A B
Is it between - 0.67 kPa and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and
0.2 in.Hg, - 5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V?
YES-Check for debris or clogging at the EVAP

canister and the FTP sensor port, then go to
step 23.
NO-Replace the FTP sensor (see page 11-485),

then go to step 23.
18. Check the FTP SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the 24. Reset the PCM with the HDS.
HDS.
Is it between - 0.67 and 0.67 kPa (- 0.2 and
0.2 in.Hg, -5 and 5 mmHg), or 2.4 and 2.6 V? 26. Start the engine, and let it idle without load (in Park
YES-Check for a blockage in the FTP sensor air
tube or vent, then go to step 23. 27. Check for Temporary DTCs or DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 19. Is DTC P1454 and/or P2422 indicated.?
19. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES-Check for poor connections or loose
terminals at the FTP sensor, the EVAP canister vent
20. Remove the FTP sensor (A) from the EVAP canister shut valve, and the PCM, then go to step 1.
with its connector connected (see page 11-485).
NO-Go to step 28.
11-476 BACK

NO-Ifthe screen indicates FAILED, check for poor

connections or loose terminals at the FTP sensor,
then go to step 1. If the screen indicates NOT
BACK 11-477
EVAPSystem
DTC P145A: EVAP System Incorrect Purge 5. Check for poor connection, blockage, or damage at
Flow Detected the hose between EVAP canister purge nozzle and
turbocharger bypass valve base.
-Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0-4 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B Is the hose OK?
- Vacuum pump/gauge, 0 -30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equivalent, commercially available YES-Go to step 6.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data NO-Reconnect or repair the hose, then go to step
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general 21.
6. Remove the intake air duct (air flow tube) (see step
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 19 on page 9-16).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 7. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
canister purge valve (B).
Is the result OK?

at the FTP sensor and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 4.
A
4. Check for poor connection, blockage, or damage at
the EVAP canister purge line between the EVAP
canister purge nozzle and EVAP canister purge
valve.
Is the hose OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Reconnect or repair the EVAP canister purge

line, then go to step 21.
11-478 BACK
8. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the purge line (at 12. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
the EVAP canister side), and connect a T-fitting (A) canister purge valve (8). Connect a T-fitting (C)
from the vacuum gauge and the vacuum pump/ from the vacuum gauge the vacuum pump/gauge,
gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the hose as shown. 0-30 in.Hg, to the EVAP canister purge valve as
shown.
07JAZ-001000B
9. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of vacuum

to the hose. 13. Apply about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg, 15 mmHg) of vacuum
to the hose.
with the HDS. 14. Select EVAP PCS ON in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 15.
YES-Check for blockage in the vacuum hose
NO-Gotostep 11. between the EVAP canister purge valve and the
EVAP canister, then go to step 21.
11. Select EVAP PCS OFF in the INSPECTION MENU
with the HDS. NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve
(cont'd)
BACK 11-479
EVAPSystem
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 18. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
canister purge nozzle (B), and connect the vacuum
16. Disconnect the hose (A) from the turbocharger pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the vacuum hose as
bypass control valve base (B), and connect the shown.
vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to the pressure
hose as shown.
B A
19. Apply vacuum to the hose.
Dose it hold vacuum?

17. Apply vacuum to the hose.
YES-Go to step 20.
Does it hold vacuum?
NO-Check for debris or clogging at the EVAP
YES-Repair the hose between the turbocharger canister purge nozzle port and the turbocharger
bypass control valve base and the EVAP canister bypass control valve base port, then go to step 21.
purge nozzle, then go to step 21.
NO-Go to step 18.
11-480 BACK
20. Inspect non-return valve B (see page 11-488).
Is the valve OK?
YES-Repair the EVAP canister purge line between

the EVAP canister purge nozzle and EVAP canister
purge valve, then go to step 21.
NO-Replace non-return valve B, then go to step

21.
21. Reconnect all hoses, and reinstall all parts.

Is the result OK?
NO-Check the EVAP purge control solenoid valve,

the EVAP canister purge nozzle and its hose, and
the EVAP canister purge line (jet purge line), then
go to step 1.
BACK 11-481
EVAPSystem
DTC P145B: EVAP System Purge Line Non- DTC P145C: EVAP System Purge Flow
return Valve A Stuck Open Malfunction (Vacuum Purge)
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data DTC P145D: EVAP System Purge Flow
and anyon-board snapshot, and review the general Malfunction (Jet Purge)
NOTE:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and
2. Select the EVAPTEST in the INSPECTION MENU troubleshooting information (see page 11-3).
with the HDS. • If DTC P145C is indicated alone, do the
troubleshooting for DTC P0496 and P0497 using
Is the result OK? freeze data from P145C.lf DTC P145D is indicated
alone, do the troubleshooting for DTC P0496 and
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this P145A using freeze data from P145D.
time .• • If DTC P0497, P145A, P145C, and P145D stored at the
same time, check for poor connection, blockage, or
NO-Go to step 3. damage at the EVAP canister purge line between the
EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP canister.
3. Replace non-return valve A (see page 11-488). Also check for a stuck closed EVAP canister purge
valve.
4. Reset the PCM with the HDS. • If any of the DTCs listed below are indicated at the
same time as DTC P145C and/or P145D, troubleshoot
5. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339). those DTCs first, then recheck for P145C and/or
P145D.
INSPECTION MENU with the HDS. P0496, P0497, P145A: EVAP system purge flow
Is the result OK?
NO-Check the EVAP canister purge line, then go

to step 1.
11 .. 482 BACK
Fuel Cap Warning Message System Troubleshooting
Special Tools Required 3. Reinstall and tighten the fuel fill cap.
-Vacuum/pressure gauge, 0-4 in.Hg 07JAZ-001000B
- Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A 4. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
When the fuel cap warning message does not go off 3,000 rpm without load (in Park or neutral) until the
after fuel cap tightened, or the message turned on radiator fan comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
frequently, do this troubleshooting procedure.
6. Test drive at 45 mph (72 km/h) for 1 minute or more.
1. Check the fuel fill cap (the cap must say "Tighten to
click"). It should turn 1/4 after it's tight, then it clicks. Does the fuel cap warning message comes on?
Is the correct fuel fill cap installed and properly YES-Go to step 7.
tightened?
YES-Go to step 2. time .•
NO-Replace or tighten the cap, then go to step 13. 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Check the fuel fill cap seal (A) and the fuel fill pipe 8. Remove the intake air duct (air flow tube) (see step
mating surface (B). Verify that the fuel fill cap tether 19 on page 9-16).
cord (C) is not caught under the cap.
9. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from the EVAP
canister purge valve (B) in the engine compartment,
and connect a T-fitting (C) from the vacuum gauge
and the vacuum pump/gauge 0-30 in.Hg, to the
EVAP canister purge valve as shown.
Is the fuel fill cap seal misSing or damaged, is the

fuel fill pipe damaged, or is the tether cord caught
under the cap?
YES-Replace the fuel fill cap or the fuel fill pipe, A

then go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 3.
(cont'd)
BACK 11-483
EVAPSystem
Fuel Cap Warning Message System Troubleshooting (cont'd)
11. Apply vacuum to the hose about 2 kPa (0.6 in.Hg,

15 mmHg).

with the HDS.
YES-Check for blockage the vacuum hose

between EVAP canister purge valve and the EVAP
canister, then go to step 13.
NO-Replace the EVAP canister purge valve

17. Start the engine. Hold the engine speed 3,000 rpm
without load (in Park or neutral) until a radiator fan
comes on, then let it idle for 1 minute.
18. Test drive at 45 mph (72 km/h) for 1 minute or more.
Does the fuel cap warning message comes on?
YES-Go to step 1 and recheck.
NO-Troubleshooting is complete .•
11-484 BACK
EVAP Canister Replacement FTP Sensor Replacement
1. Disconnect the hoses (A), the FTP sensor 3P 1. Disconnect the FTP sensor connector (A).
connector (B), and the EVAP canister vent shut
valve 2P connector (C). c
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ft) 2. Disconnect the hose (B), then remove the FTP
sensor (C).
2. Remove the EVAP canister assembly D).
3. Reinstall the parts in the reverse order of removal
3. Remove the EVAP canister bracket (A) and the with a new O-ring (D) and a new retainer (E).
EVAP canister cover (B) from the EVAP canister (C).
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
BACK 11-485
EVAPSystem
EVAP Canister Purge Valve EVAP Canister Purge Nozzle

Replacement Replacement
NOTE: DTC P0443 may be stored ifthe EVAP canister 1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-394).
purge valve connector is removed within 15 seconds
after ignition switch is turned OFF. 2. Remove the air bypass outlet pipe (see page 9-7).
1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-394). 3. Disconnect the hoses (A).
2. Remove the air bypass outlet pipe (see page 9-7). o

3. Disconnect the CMP sensor 8 3P connector (A).
o
6N·m
A
(0.6 kgf·m,
4.4Ibf·ft)
c
B
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the bolts (8), then remove the EVAP

canister purge nozzle (C).

4. Disconnectthe hoses (8), and EVAP canister purge with a new O-ring (D).
valve 2P connector (C).
5. Remove the screws (D), then remove the EVAP

canister purge valve (E).
11-486 BACK
EVAP Canister Vent Shut Valve EVAP Canister Filter Replacement
Replacement
1. Disconnect the hoses (A).
A
1. Remove the EVAP canister (see page 11-485).
2. Pry the lock tabs outward (A), then remove the

EVAP canister vent shut valve (B).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the lock tabs.
2. Remove the EVAP canister filter (B).

NOTE: Do not coat the O-ring with oil.
BACK 11-487
EVAPSystem
Non-return Valve A/B Inspection/Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Connectthe vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to

Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, Snap-on YA4000A the non-return valve as shown. Note the direction
or equivalent, commercially available of the arrow on the valve.
Inspection --- -,-,...-,

IIi'
----'J
...... I
1. Remove the non-return valve.
2. Connect the vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to

the non-return valve as shown. Note the direction
of the arrow on the valve.
~------
ftl~ " \
\:~..1 ____ --.'
5. Apply vacuum to the valve .
• If it holds vacuum, replace the non-return valve .

• If it doesn't hold the vacuum, the non-return
valve is OK.
3. Apply vacuum to the valve .
• If it holds vacuum, go to step 4.

• If it doesn't hold the vacuum, replace the non-
return valve.
11-488 BACK
Non-Return Valve A Replacement Non-Return Valve B Replacement
1. Remove the charge air cooler cover (see step 1 on 1. Remove the air cleaner (see page 11-394).
page 9-8).
2. Remove the air bypass outlet pipe (see page 9-7).
2. Disconnect the hoses, then remove the non-return
valve A. 3. Disconnect the hoses, then remove the non-return
valve B.
A

4. Install the parts in the reverse order of the removal.
NOTE: Make sure the arrow on the valve points in
the correct direction. NOTE: Make sure the arrow on the valve points in
the correct direction.
BACK 11-489
Transaxle
Automatic Transmission .................................. 14-1
Rear Differential ............ .................................... 15-1
DrivelinelAxle ................................................... 16-1

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If automatic transmission maintenance is
required)
or side collision, all SRS service work must be performed by an authorized Acura dealer.
caused by unintentional deployment of the airbags and/or side airbags.
• Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors when the ignition switch is ON (II),
airbags may deploy.
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission AIT Gear Position Indicator
Special Tools ................................................... 14-2 Component Location Index ........................... 14-288
General Troubleshooting Information ......... 14-4 Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-289
DTC Troubleshooting Index .......................... 14-11 Transmission Range Switch Test ................. 14-290
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ................. 14-14 Transmission Range Switch
System Description ........................................ 14-26 Replacement ............................................... 14-292
DTC Troubleshooting ..................................... 14-80 Paddle Shifter +(Upshift Switch)
Road Test ........................................................ 14-209 * Circuit Troubleshooting ............................. 14-295
Stall Speed Test .............................................. 14-211 *Test .............................................................. 14-299
Pressure Test .................................................. 14-212 * Replacement ............................................... 14-300
Shift Solenoid Valve Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch)
Test and Replacement ......................•......... 14-216 * Circuit Troubleshooting ............................. 14-297
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness * Test .............................................................. 14-301
Replacement ............................................... 14-216 * Replacement ............................................... 14-302
A{f Clutch Pressure Control A{f Gear Position Indicator Panel
Solenoid Valve A Replacement ............................................... 14-281
Test ............................................................... 14-220
Replacement ............................................... 14-226 AIT Interlock System
A{f Clutch Pressure Control Component Location Index ........................... 14-303
Solenoid Valve B Circuit Diagram ............................................... 14-304
Test ............................................................... 14-223 Shift Lock System Circuit
Replacement ............................................... 14-226 Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-305
A{f Clutch Pressure Control * Key Interlock System Circuit
Solenoid Valve C Troubleshooting ......................................... 14-310
Test ............................................................... 14-228 Shift Lock Solenoid Test ................................ 14-311
Replacement ............................................... 14-231 Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement ................. 14-312
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Shift Lock Stop, Shift Lock Stop Cushion
Replacement ............................................... 14-233 Replacement ............................................... 14-313
Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed Sensor Shift Lock Release and Release Spring
Replacement ............................................... 14-233 Replacement ............................................... 14-313
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Park Pin Switch Test ....................................... 14-314
Switch Replacement ................................... 14-234 Park Pin Switch Replacement ....................... 14-315
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure
Switch Replacement ................................... 14-235 Transmission Housing
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Reverse Idler Gear Removal/Installation ..... 14-322
Switch Replacement ................................... 14-236 Reverse Idler Gear
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement ....... 14-237 Disassembly/Inspection/Reassembly ....... 14-322
ATF Level Check ............................................. 14-238 Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap
ATF Replacement ........................................... 14-239 Removal ....................................................... 14-323
Transfer Assembly Fluid Replacement ........ 14-241 Installation ................................................... 14-323
Transfer Assembly Inspection ...................... 14-242 Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap,
Transfer Assembly Removal ......................... 14-243 Feed Pipe Replacement .............................. 14-324
Transfer Assembly Installation ..................... 14-245 ATF Filter
Transfer Breather Hose Replacement .......... 14-246 Removal/Inspection/Installation ................ 14-324
Transmission Removal .................................. 14-247 Mainshaft Bearing
Transmission Installation .............................. 14-258 Removal ....................................................... 14-325
Drive Plate Removal and Installation ........... 14-270 Installation ................................................... 14-325
ATF Cooler Cleaning ...................................... 14-271 Intermediary Shaft Bearing Replacement ... 14-326
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement ..................... 14-273 Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement ........ 14-326
ATF Cooler Replacement ............................... 14-274 Selector Control Shaft Bearing
Shift Lever Removal ....................................... 14-275 Replacement ............................................... 14-327
Shift Lever Installation ................................... 14-276 Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal
Shift Lever Disassembly/Reassembly .......... 14-277 Replacement ............................................... 14-327
Shift Lever/Shift Cable Bracket Assembly
Replacement .............................................. 14-278
Shift Lever Knob, Shift Lever Knob Cover,
and Shift Lever Button Ring
Replacement ............................................... 14-280
Shift Lever Boot Replacement ...................... 14-281
Shift Cable Replacement ............................... 14-282
Shift Cable Adjustment .................................. 14-285
Transmission Disassembly ........................... 14-316
Transmission Reassembly ............................ 14-383
BACK
Valve Body AIT Differential
Valve Body Repair .......................................... 14-328 Component location Index ............................ 14-395
Valve Body Valve Installation ........................ 14-329 Backlash Inspection ........................................ 14-395
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Differential Carrier, Final Driven Gear, and
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-330 Transfer Drive Gear Replacement ............. 14-396
ATF Pump Inspection ..................................... 14-331 Carrier Bearing Replacement ........................ 14-397
Secondary Valve Body Disassembly, Oil Seal Replacement ..................................... 14-398
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-332 Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement .... 14-399
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection ............... 14-401
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-333
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Transfer Output Shaft
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-334 Component Location Index ........................... 14-404
Shift Solenoid Valve Transfer Output Shaft Bearing
Removal and Installation ........................... 14-335 Replacement ............................................... 14-404
Oil Seal Replacement ..................................... 14-405
Torque Converter Housing Transmission Housing Bearing
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement ....................... ........................ 14-406
Replacement ............................................... 14-336 Transfer Output Shaft Installation Height
Countershaft Bearing Replacement ............. 14-337 Inspection/Adjustment ............................... 14-407
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement ....... 14-338
Intermediary Shaft Bearing Transfer Assembly
Replacement ............................................... 14-340 Inspection ........................................................ 14-408
Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement ........ 14-341 Disassembly .................................................... 14-409
Transfer Hypoid Drive Gear Bearing
Shafts and Clutches Replacement ............................................... 14-412
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, Transfer Output Shaft (Hypoid Gear)
and Reassembly ......................................... 14-342 Bearing Removal/Installation .................... 14-413
Mainshaft 4th Gear Replacement ................. 14-343 Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing
Countershaft Disassembly ............................ 14-344 Outer Race Replacement ........................... 14-414
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Transfer Cover Tapered Roller Bearing
Axial Clearance Inspection ........................ 14-346 Outer Race Removal/Installation ............... 14-416
Countershaft Reassembly ............................. 14-348 Transfer Cover Oil Seal Replacement .......... 14-417
Secondary Shaft Disassembly ...................... 14-350 Reassembly ..................................................... 14-418
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance
Inspection .................................................... 14-352
1st Gear One-way Clutch Inspection ............ 14-354
1st Clutch Hub Replacement ......................... 14-355
Secondary Shaft Reassembly ....................... 14-356
Secondary Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment ............................... 14-359
Intermediary Shaft Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly ...................... 14-361
Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear
Removal ....................................................... 14-362
Installation ................................................... 14-362
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance
Inspection .................................................... 14-363
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height
Inspection/Adjustment ............................... 14-365
Clutch Disassembly ........................................ 14-366
Clutch Inspection ............................................ 14-371
Clutch Waved-plate Phase Difference
Inspection .................................................... 14-372
Clutch Clearance Inspection .......................... 14-373
Clutch Reassembly ......................................... 14-378
BACK
Special Tools

CD 07 AAK-SNAA500 Support Bolt 1
® 07AAK-SNAA600 RDX Engine Support Eyelet 1
® 07 AAK-STKA 120 RDX Engine Support Mount Pads 2
0 07 GAB-PF50 101 Mainshaft Holder 1
® 07GAD-PG40100 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
® 07GAD-SD40101 Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 1
(j) 07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A Clutch Spring Compressor Bolt Assembly 1
® 07HAD-SG00100 Attachment, 83 mm 1
® 07JAD-PH80101 Oil Seal Driver Attachment 1
@ 07 JAD-SH301 00 Attachment, 65 mm 1
@ 07LAD-PW50601 Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 1
@ 07 LAE-PX40 100 Clutch Spring Compressor Attachment 2
@ 07MAD-PR90100 Attachment, 45 x 55 mm 1
@ 07MAF-SP0011A Tapered Bearing Race Installer 1
@ 07MAF-SP0013A Installer Shaft 1
@ 07MAJ-PY4011A AfT Pressure Hose, 2,210 mm 3
@ 07MAJ-PY40120 AfT Pressure Hose Adapter 3
@ 07NAD-PX40100 Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 1
@ 07XAA-002010A
I
Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 1
@) 07XAB-001 01 01 Companion Flange Holder 1
07HAE-PL50101 may also be used to substitute one of 07LAE-PX40100.
, / ~ ~ e
CD ® ® 0 ®
@ ~ ~ ~
©IUUJ!!!!J) ~
® (j) ® ® @
~ ~ 8 ~
o<Cl>
@ @ @ @ @
Q ~ 0 ~
@ @ @ @ @)
14-2 BACK
® 07ZAE-PRP0100 Clutch Compressor Attachment 1
@ 070AJ-0020101 Preload Inspection Tool 1
@ 07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 AfT Clutch Pressure Gauge Set/Panel 1
® 07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A Adjustable Bearing Puller, 25-40 mm 1
@ 07741-0010201 Sliding Hammer Weight 1
@ 077 46-00 10200 Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 1
@ 077 46-0010300 Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 1
@ 077 46-0010400 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
@ 077 46-00 10500 Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 1
®> 077 46-00 10600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 1
® 077 46-00 10800 Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 1
® 077 46-0030 100 Driver, 40 mm 1.0. 1
@ 077 46-0030300 Attachment, 30 mm 1.0. 1
@ 077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
@ 07936-1660101 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 12 mm 1
@ 07936-3710100 Bearing Remover Shaft Handle 1
® 07936-3710600 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 20 mm 1
@ 07936-8890300 Bearing Remover Shaft Set, 30 mm 1
@ 07936-GE00100 Bearing RemoverShaft, 10 mm 1
@ 07936-GE00200 Bearing Remover Head, 10 mm 1
® 07947-6340500 Driver Attachment 1
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A must be used with commercially available 3/8"-16 slide hammer.
,
@
~ ®
r @
[~~~)
~
@ ®
~
@@@@®>®
~ ®
e @
~ @
/ ®
,~ /
@ ® @ @
eJ ®
BACK 14·3
How to Check for DTCs with the Honda Ifthe D indicator or malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
Diagnostic System (HDS) has been reported on, or if a driveability problem is
suspected, follow this procedure:
When the powertrain control module (PCM) senses an
abnormality in the input or output system, the D 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
indicator (A) in the gauge assembly (8) will usually manual for specific instructions.)
blink.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), select AfT system,
B
and observe the DTC in the DTCs MENU on the
HDS screen.
3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs, and AfT DTCs,

and freeze data.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
(except for DTC P0700, DTC P0700 means there is
one or more AfT DTCs, and no problems were
detected in the fuel and emissions circuit ofthe
PCM).
5. Clear the DTC and data.
6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the

same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
When the Honda Diagnostic System (HDS) is connected data, and then recheck for a DTC. If the AfT DTC
to the data link connector (DLC) (A) (located under the returns, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
left end of the dash), it will indicate the diagnostic If the DTC does not return, there was an
trouble code (DTC) when the ignition switch is turned intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure
ON (II) and the appropriate menu is selected. all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
Symptom Troubleshooting Versus DTC

Troubleshooting
Some symptoms will not trigger diagnostic trouble

codes (DTCs) or cause the D indicator to blink. If the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) was reported ON or
the D indicator has been blinking, check for DTCs. If the
vehicle has an abnormal symptom, and there are no
DTCs stored, do the symptom troubleshooting. Check
the list of probable cause(s) for the symptom, in the
sequence listed, until you find the problem.
14-4 BACK
How to Check for DTCs with the SCS Mode If the D indicator and the MIL come on at the same time,
(retrieving the flash codes) or if a driveability problem is suspected, follow this
procedure:
NOTE: The preferred method is to use the HDS to
retrieve the P-code. 1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. (See the HDS user's
manual for specific instructions.)
When the PCM senses an abnormality in the input or
output system, the D indicator (A) in the gauge 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), select SCS mode,
assembly (8) will usually blink. then observe the D indicator in the gauge assembly.
Codes 1 through 9 are indicated by individual short
B
blinks. Code 10 and above are indicated by a series
of long and short blinks. One long blink equals
10 short blinks. Add the long and short blinks
together to determine the code.
Example: DTC 1-1
Short blink (once)
OFF~-·---------------------------
Example: DTC 15-5
Long blink Short blinks (five times)
When the D indicator has been reported on, connect the

HDS to the DLC (A) (located under the left end of the
OFF --=l" 10
lfUliUln'---_
5 = 15
dash). Turn the ignition switch ON (11), select SCS mode,
then the D indicator will indicate flash the DTC. 3. Record all fuel and emissions DTCs and AfT DTCs.
4. If there is a fuel and emissions DTC, first check the

fuel and emissions system as indicated by the DTC
(except DTC 70, DTC 70 means there is one or more
AfT DTCs, and no problems were detected in the
fuel and emissions circuit ofthe PCM).
5. Clear the DTC and data.
6. Drive the vehicle for several minutes under the

data, and then recheck for DTC. If the AfT DTC
returns, go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
Ifthe DTC does not return, there was an
A intermittent problem within the circuit. Make sure
all pins and terminals in the circuit are tight.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-5
How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the PCM 4. Connect one side ofthe patch cord (A) terminal to a
Connectors digital multi meter (8), and connect the other side of
the patch cord terminals to a commercially
NOTE: The PCM overwrite data and monitors the EVAP available banana jack (Pomona Electronics Tool
system for up to 30 minutes after the ignition switch is No. 3563 or equivalent) (C).
turned OFF. Jumping the SCS line after turning the
ignition switch OFF cancels this function. Disconnecting
the PCM during this function, without jumping the SCS
line first, can damage the PCM.
2. Disconnect the PCM connectors A, 8 and C.
5. Gently slide the pin probe into the inspection port

at the connector terminal side. Always use the
c A inspection port. Do not slide the probe into the
connector terminals.
INOTICEI
• For accurate result, always use the pin
probe (male).
• To prevent damage to the connector
terminals, do not insert test equipment
probes, paper clips, or other substitutes as
they can damage the terminals. Damaged
terminals cause a poor connection and an
incorrect measurement.
3. Check the connector inspection port (A) size, and • Do not puncture the insulation on a wire.
select a suitable pin probe. Punctures can cause poor or intermittent
electrical connections.
14-6 BACK
Clear AfT OTCs Procedures How to End a Troubleshooting Session
(required after any troubleshooting)
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
1. Reset the PCM with the HDS while the engine is
stopped.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and wait for

30 seconds.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and disconnect the

HDS from the DLC.
6. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it

A up to normal operating temperature (the radiator
fan comes on).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. To verify that the problem is repaired, test-drive the
vehicle for several minutes at speeds over 30 mph
3. Clear the DTC(s) on the HDS screen. (50 km/h) or under the same conditions as those
indicated by the freeze data.
NOTE: If the HDS does not communicate with the
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-229).
OBO Status
The OBD status shows the current system status of

each DTC and all of the parameters. This function is
used to see if the technician's repair was successfully
finished. The results of diagnostic tests for the DTC are
displayed as:
• PASSED: On board diagnosis is successfully finished.

• FAILED: On board diagnosis has finished but failed.
• NOT COMPLETED: The on board diagnosis was
running but is out of the enable conditions of the DTC.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-7
Updating the PCM 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), but do not start the
engine.
o Honda diagnosis system (HOS) TOSG02200 2. Connect the HOS to the OLC (A).
o Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570
o HOS pocket tester TOSS3557011401
These special tools are available through the American

Honda Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857.
Use this procedure when you have to update the PCM

during troubleshooting procedures.
NOTE:
o Make sure the HOS/HIM has the latest software
version.
o Before you update the PCM, make sure the battery in
the vehicle is fully charged.

o Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update.
Ifthere is a problem with the update, leave the A

ignition switch ON.
o To prevent PCM damage, do not operate anything
electrical (headlights, audio system, brakes, AlC, 3. Make sure the HOS communicates with the PCM. If
power windows, moonroof (if equipped), door locks, it doesn't, go to the OLC circuit troubleshooting
and whatnot) during the update. (see page 11-229). If you are returning from the
o To ensure the latest program is installed, do a PCM OLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step 4 to 5, and
update whenever the PCM is substituted or replaced. clean the throttle body after updating the PCM
o You cannot update a PCM with a program it already (see page 11-7).
has. It will only accept a new program.
o High temperature in the engine compartment might 4. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HOS.
cause the PCM to become too hot to run the update. If
the engine has been running before this procedure, 5. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
open the hood and cool the engine compartment. CHECK, and follow the HOS screen prompts.
o If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) lamp came on or NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILEO,
was flashed during the update, leave the ignition continue this procedure.
switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the
HIM from the data link connector (OLC). This will 6. Exit the HDS diagnosis system, then select the
prevent PCM damage. update mode, and follow the screen prompts to
update the PCM.
14-8 BACK
7. Ifthe software in the PCM is the latest, disconnect
the HDS/HIM from the DLC, and go back to the
procedure that you were doing. If the software in
the PCM is not the latest, follow the instructions on
the screen. If prompted to choose the PGM-FI
system or the AfT system, make sure you update
both.
NOTE: If the PCM update system requires you to

cool the PCM, follow the instructions on the screen.
If you run into a problem during the update
procedure (programming takes over 15 minutes,
status bar goes over 100 %, D or immobilizer light
flashes, HDS tablet freezes, and whatnot), follow
these steps to minimize the chance of damaging
the PCM:
• Leave the ignition switch in the ON (II) position.
• Connect a jumper battery (do not connect a
battery charger).
• Shut down the HOS.
• Disconnect the HDS from the DLC.
• Reboot the HOS.
• Reconnect the HOS to the DLC, and try the
update procedure again.
8. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION

CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts. If the
TP POSITION CHECK failed, clean the throttle body
(see page 11-394).
10. Do the CKP learn procedure (see page 11-4).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-9
Substituting the PCM 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Special Tools Required 9. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery,
• Honda diagnosis system (HDS) TDSGD2200 then disconnect the positive cable.
• Honda interface module (HIM) EQS05A35570
• HDS pocket tester TDSS3557011401 10. Disconnect PCM connectors A, B, and C, and
These special tools are available through the American remove the harness clamp from the PCM bracket.
Honda Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857.
11. Remove bracket mounting bolts, and remove the
Use this procedure when you have to substitute a PCM.
known-good PCM during troubleshooting procedures.
12. Remove the PCM cover, and remove the mounting
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the bracket from the PCM.
equipped), then write down the audio presets. 13. Install the PCM and battery cables in the reverse
order of removal.
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A).
NOTE: If DTC P0630 "VIN not Programmed or
Mismatch" will be stored because the VIN has not
been programmed into the PCM; ignore it, and

software.
17. Select the IMMOBI SYSTEM with the HDS.
18. Enter the immobilizer code using the PCM

replacement procedure in the HDS; this allows you
A to start the engine.

20. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION
5. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts. If the
it doesn't, go to the DLC circuit troubleshooting TP POSITION CHECK failed, clean the throttle body
(see page 11-229). If you are returning from the (see page 11-394).
DLC circuit troubleshooting, skip step 5 to 6, and
clean the throttle body after substituting the PCM 21. Do the PCM idle learn procedure (see page 11-339).
(see page 11-7).
22. Do the CKP learn procedure (see page 11-4).
6. Select the INSPECTION MENU with the HDS.
23. Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio system and
7. Select the ETCS TEST, then select the TP POSITION the navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
CHECK, and follow the HDS screen prompts. audio presets, and set the clock.
NOTE: If the TP POSITION CHECK indicates FAILED,

14-10 BACK
OTe Troubleshooting Index
NOTE: Record all freeze data and review General Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4) before you
troubleshoot.
DTC'I1I D MIL Detection Item Page

Indicator a
P0107 (12-7) Blinks OFF or Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor circuit (see page 14-80)
ON'I31 low voltage input
P0108 (12-8) Blinks OFF or Manifold absolute pressure (MAP) sensor circuit (see page 14-81)
ON'I31 high voltage input
P0335 (88-2) Blinks OFF or Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A no signal (see page 14-82)
ON' 131
P0339 (88-6) Blinks OFF or Crankshaft position (CKP) sensor A intermittent (see page 14-83)
ON' 131 interruption
P0365 (89-2) Blinks OFFor Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B no signal (see page 14-84)
ON' 131
P0369 (89-6) Blinks OFF or Camshaft position (CMP) sensor B intermittent (see page 14-85)
ON' 131 interruption
P0705 (5-2) '121 Blinks ON Transmission range switch (multiple shift-position (see page 14-86)
input) (short)
P0706 (6-2) '121 Not blinks ON Transmission range switch (open) (see page 14-88)
P0711 (28-5) '121 Blinks OFF ATF temperature sensor (range/performance) (see page 14-90)
P0712 (28-3)'121 Blinks OFF ATF temperature sensor (short) (seep~e 14-91)
P0713 (28-4)'121 Blinks OFF ATF temperature sensor (open) (see page 14-93)
P0716 (15-5) '121 Blinks ON Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see page 14-96)
(range/performance)
P0717 (15-3) '121 Blinks ON Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see page 14-96)
(no sigpal input)
P0718 (15-6)'121 Blinks ON Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor (see page 14-102)
(intermittent failure)
P0721 (9-5)"121 Blinks ON Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see page 14-107)
(range/performance)
P0722 (9-3) '121 Blinks ON Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see page 14-107)
(no signal input)
P0723 (9-6) '121 Blinks ON Output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (see page 14-113)
(intermittent failure)
P0731 (64-1) Blinks OFF 1st gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-118)
P0732 (64-2) Blinks OFF 2nd~ear incorrect ratio (see page 14-119)
P0733 (64-3) Blinks OFF 3rd gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-120)
P0734 (64-4) Blinks OFF 4th ~ear incorrect ratio (see page 14-121)
P0735 (64-5) Blinks OFF 5th gear incorrect ratio (see page 14-122)
NOTE:
* (1): The OTC in parentheses is the Honda code that you will see when you use the SCS mode. The first number(s)
before the - (hyphen). is the flash code the 0 indicator indicates when the data link connector (OLC) is connected
to the HOS, and in the SCS mode.
* (2): This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission.
* (3): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI system detects the same failure.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-11
DTC Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
troubleshoot.
DTC"" D MIL Detection Item Page

Indicator 0
P0741 (40-3) Not blinks ON Torque converter clutch circuit performance or (see page 14-123)
stuck OFF
P0746 (76-3) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A stuck (see page 14-124)
OFF
P0747 (76-4) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A stuck (see page 14-125)
ON
P0751 (70-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A stuck OFF (see paQe 14-126)
P0752 (70-4) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A stuck ON (see page 14-127)
P0756 (71-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B stuck OFF (see page 14-128)
P0757 (71-4) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B stuck ON (see page 14-129)
P0761 (72-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C stuck OFF (see page 14-130)
P0762 (72-4) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C stuck ON (see page 14-131)
P0766 (73-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve D stuck OFF (see page 14-132)
P0767 (73-4) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve D stuck ON (see page 14-133)
P0776 (77-3) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B stuck (see page 14-134)
OFF
P0777 (77-4) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B stuck (see page 14-135)
ON
P0796 (78-3) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C stuck (see page 14-136)
OFF
P0797 (78-4) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C stuck (see page 14-137)
ON
P0812 (65-2) Blinks ON Transmission range switch ATP R switch (see page 14-138)
P0842 (25-3) Blinks ON 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (see page 14-141)
(short or stuck ON)
P0843 (25-4) Blinks ON 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch {open (see page 14-143)
or stuck OFF)
P0847 (26-3) Blinks ON 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch {short (see page 14-146)
or stuck ON)
P0848 (26-4) Blinks ON 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (open (see page 14-148)
or stuck OFF)
P0872 (27-3) Blinks OFF 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch (short (see page 14-151)
or stuck ON)
P0873 (27-4) Blinks OFF 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch {open (see page 14-153)
or stuck ON)
NOTE:
* (1): The DTC in parentheses is the Honda code that you will see when you use the SCS mode. The first number(s)
before the - (hyphen) is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the data link connector (DLC) is connected
to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
transmission.
14-12 BACK
troubleshoot.
DTC'(11 D MIL Detection Item Page

Indicator .0
P0962 (16-3) '121 Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (open/ (see page 14-156)
short)
P0963 (16-4) '(21 Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A (see page 14-159)
P0966 (23-3)' (2) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (open/ (see page 14-161)
short)
P0967 (23-4) ,(2) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B (see page 14-164)
P0970 (29-3) ,(2) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (open/ (see page 14-166)
short)
P0971 (29-4) ,(2) Blinks ON AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (see page 14-169)
P0973 (7_3)'12) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (short) (see page 14-171)
P0974 (7_4),(2) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve A (open) (see page 14-174)
P0976 (8_3)'(2) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (short) (see page 14-177)
P0977 (8-4)' (2) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve B (open) (see page 14-180)
P0979 (22-3) '(2) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (short) (see page 14-183)
P0980 (22-4) ,(2) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve C (open) (see page 14-186)
P0982 (60-3) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve D (short) (see page 14-189)
P0983 (60-4) Blinks ON Shift solenoid valve D (open) (see page 14-192)
P16CO (99-1) Not blinks ON PCM AfT control system incomplete updated (see page 14-195)
P1717 (62-1) Blinks ON Transmission range switch ATP RVS switch (open) (see page 14-196)
P1743 (45-11) Blinks OFF Hydraulic control system (Shift valve E stuck OFF) (see page 14-199)
P1744 (45-12) Blinks OFF Hydraulic control system (Shift valve E stuck ON) (see page 14-200)
P1745 (45-13) Blinks OFF Hydraulic control system (Servo control valve or (see page 14-201)
servo valve stuck OFF)
P1780 (49-1) Blinks OFF Shift control system (transmission default mode) (see page 14-202)
P2122 (20-3) Blinks ON Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor A (throttle (see page 14-203)
position sensor D) circuit low voltage
P2123 (20-4) Blinks ON Accelerator pedal position (APP) sensor A (throttle (see page 14-204)
position sensor D) circuit high voltage
U0028 (107-1) Blinks OFFor F-CAN malfunction (F-CAN bus OFF) (see page 14-205)
ON ,(3)
U0122 (107-4) Blinks OFF F-CAN malfunction (PCM-to-VSA control unit) (see page 14-206)
U0155 (107-3) Blinks OFFor F-CAN malfunction (PCM-to-gauge control module) (see page 14-208)
ON'13)
NOTE:
* (1): The DTC in parentheses is the Honda code that you will see when you use the SCS mode. The first number(s)
before the - (hyphen) is the flash code the D indicator indicates when the data link connector (DLC) is connected
to the HDS, and in the SCS mode.
transmission.
* (3): The MIL comes on when the PGM-FI system detects the same failure.
BACK 14-13
Symptom Probable cause(s) Notes

When you turn the • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
ignition switch ON • Gauge control module defective (see page 11-213),
(11), the D indicator • PCM defective • Check indicator drive circuit in the gauge control
comes on and module by gauge control module self-diagnostic
stays on in all shift function (see page 22-258),
lever positions, or
it never comes on
at all
AfT gear position • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
indicator does not • Gauge control module defective (see page 11-213),
come on while the • PCM defective • Check indicator drive circuit in the gauge control
shift lever is in that • Transmission range switch module by gauge control module self-diagnostic
position defective function (see page 22-258),
• Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
14-290),
Shift indicator • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
does not work • Gauge control module defective (see page 11-213),
• PCM defective • Check the F-CAN communication line by gauge
• Transmission range switch control module self-diagnostic function (see page
defective 22-258),
• Check indicator drive circuit in the gauge control
module by gauge control module self-diagnostic
function (see page 22-258),
When you press A problem in the paddle shifter + +
Check the paddle shifter (upshift switch) circuit
the paddle shifter (upshift switch) circuit (see page 14-295),
+ (upshift switch)
in D and S, the
transmission does
not upshift
When you press A problem in the paddle shifter - Check the paddle shifter - (downshift switch)
the paddle shifter (downshift switch) circuit circuit (see page 14-297),
- (downshift
switch) in D and S,
the transmission
does not downshift
M indicator does • F-CAN communication line error • Check the F-CAN communication line for a DTC
not come on even • Gauge control module defective (see page 11-213),
though the paddle • PCM defective • Check indicator drive circuit in the gauge control
shifter + (upshift module by gauge control module self-diagnostic
switch) or paddle function (see page 22-258),
shifter -
(downshift switch)
is operated in
sequential
sportshift mode
14.. 14 BACK
Shift lever cannot • Accelerator pedal position sensor • Troubleshoot the shift lock system circuit
be moved from P circuit (see page 14-305).
while you are • Accelerator pedal position sensor • Test the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-311).
pressing on the defective • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
brake pedal • Brake pedal position switch circuit 14-290).
• Brake pedal position switch
defective
• Shift lock solenoid defective
• Shift lock solenoid control circuit
• Shift lock solenoid mechanism
• Throttle body defective
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch stuck OFF
• Transmission range switch ATP P
switch line opened
Ignition switch • Interlock control system circuit • Troubleshoot the key interlock system circuit
cannot be moved • Key interlock solenoid stuck ON (see page 14-310).
from ACC (I) to • Park pin switch stuck ON • Inspect the transmission range switch (see page
LOCK (0) (key is • Transmission range switch ATP P 14-290).
pushed in, shift line opened
lever in P)
HOS does not OLC circuit Troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-229).
communicate with
the PCM or the
vehicle
(cont'd)
BACK 14-15

Engine runs, but 1. Low ATF level • Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler
vehicle does not 2. Shift cable broken or out of lines for leakage and loose connections. If
move in any gear adjustment necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
3. Connection between shift cable • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
and transmission or body is the transmission control lever.
worn • Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
4. ATF pump worn or binding converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
5. Regulator valve stuck or spring The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
worn noise or a high pitched squeak.
6. ATF strainer clogged • Check the line pressure.
7. Mainshaft worn or damaged • Check the ATF strainer for debris.lfthe strainer is
8. Final gears worn or damaged clogged, find the damaged components that
9. Park mechanism defective caused the debris.
10. Transmission-to-engine • Inspect the differential pinion gears for wear. If
assembly error the differential pinion gears are worn, replace the
11. Axle disengaged differential assembly, replace the ATF strainer,
and thoroughly clean the transmission, and clean
the cooler and lines. Replace the torque
converter.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the main valve body. This will result
in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools.
• Install the main seal flush with the torque
converter housing. If you push it into the torque
converter housing until it bottoms out, it will
block the fluid return passage and result in
damage.
14-16 BACK
Sxmptom Probable cause(s) Notes
Vehicle moves in R, 1. 1st accumulator defective • Check the 1st clutch pressure.
but not in 0 or 1st 2. Idler gears worn or damaged • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold
in S 3. 1st clutch defective clutch assembly for wear and damage.
• Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
to-top-disc clearance. Ifthe clearance is out of
tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
wear and damage, and inspect the clutch waved-
plate height. If the discs and flat-plates are worn
or damaged, replace the discs and flat-plates as a
set. If the waved-plate height is out of tolerance,
replace the waved-plate. If the discs and plates
are OK, adjust the clearance with the clutch end-
plate.
Vehicle moves in 0 1. 1st-hold accumulator defective • Check the 1st-hold clutch pressure.
and R, but not in 2. 1st-hold clutch defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 1st/1st-hold
1st in S clutch assembly for wear and damage.
to-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
replace the waved-plate. Ifthe discs and plates
plate.
Vehicle moves in 0 1. 2nd accumulator defective • Check the 2nd clutch pressure.
and R, but not in 2. 2nd clutch defective • Inspect the secondary shaft and 2nd clutch
2nd in S assembly for wear and damage.
plate.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-17

Vehicle moves in D 1. Shift fork shaft stuck • Check the line pressure and 5th clutch pressure.
and S, but not in R 2. Modulator valve defective • Check for a missing shift fork bolt on the shift
(or moves forward 3. Reverse CPC valve defective fork shaft.
in R) 4. 5th accumulator defective • Check the ATF strainer for debris. Ifthe ATF
5. 5th clutch defective strainer is clogged with particles of steel or
6. Reverse gears worn or damaged aluminum, inspect the ATF pump. Ifthe ATF
pump is OK, find the damaged components that
caused the debris. If no cause for the
contamination is found, replace the torque
converter.
• Inspect the reverse selector gear teeth chamfers,
and inspect the engagementteeth chamfers of
the countershaft 5th gear and reverse gear.
Replace the reverse gears and the reverse
selector if they are worn or damaged. If the
transmission makes clicking, grinding, or
whirring noises, also replace the mainshaft 5th
gear, reverse idler gear, and countershaft 5th
gear.
• Inspect the cI utch piston, cI utch piston check
plate height. Ifthe discs and flat-plates are worn
set. Ifthe waved-plate height is out oftolerance,
plate.
Poor acceleration; 1. Low ATF level • Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler
flares when 2. Shift cable broken or out of lines for leakage and loose connections. If
starting off in D, S, adjustment necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
and R 3. ATF pump worn or binding • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
4. Regulator valve stuck or spring the transmission control lever.
worn • Check the line pressure.
5. ATF strainer clogged • Check the ATF strainer for debris. Ifthe strainer is
6. Torque converter check valve clogged, find the damaged components that
defective caused the debris.
• Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
The symptom is mostly an rpm-related ticking
noise or a high pitched squeak.
• Be careful not to damage the torque converter
housing when replacing the main ball bearing.
You may also damage the ATF pump when you
torque down the main valve body. This will result
in ATF pump seizure if not detected. Use the
proper tools.
14-18 BACK
Poor acceleration; 1. 1st accumulator defective • Check the 1st clutch pressure.
flares when 2. 1st clutch defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
starting off in D, S, valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
and R; stall speed wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
high in D to-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
plate.
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares when 2. Shift cable broken or out of connectors. Inspect the O-ri ng, a nd check the
starting off in D, S, adjustment shift solenoid valve seizure.
and R; stall speed 3. Reverse CPC valve defective • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
high in R 4. 5th accumulator defective the transmission control lever.
5. 5th clutch defective • Check the 5th clutch pressure.
• Inspectthe clutch piston, clutch piston check
plate.
Poor acceleration; 1. Shift solenoid valve D defective Check for a stuck lock-up valve in the valve body.
flares when 2. Torque converter one-way clutch
starting off in D, S, defective
and R; stall speed 3. Engine output low
low 4. Torque converter clutch piston
defective
5. Lock-up shift valve defective
Engine idle 1. Low ATF level • Adjust the engine and transmission mounts.
vibration 2. Torque converter clutch solenoid • Check the ATF level and check the ATF cooler
valve defective lines for leakage and loose connections. If
3. Drive plate defective or necessary, clean the ATF cooler lines.
transmission misassembled
4. Engine output low
5. Torque converter clutch piston
defective
6. ATF pump worn or binding
7. Lock-u~ shift valve defective
(cont'd)
BACK 14-19

Vehicle moves in N 1. Excessive ATF • Check the ATF level, and drain the ATF if
2. Foreign material in separator plate necessary.
orifice • Check all clutch pressures.
3. Relief valve defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
4. Lubrication control valve defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer
5. 1st-hold clutch defective for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-
6. 1st clutch defective plate-to-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is
7. 2nd clutch defective out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and
8. 3rd clutch defective plates for wear and damage, and inspect the
9. 4th clutch defective clutch waved-plate height. If the discs and
10. 5th clutch defective flat-plates are worn or damaged, replace the
11. Clutch end plate clearance incorrect discs and flat-plates as a set. Ifthe waved-
12. Needle bearing seized up, worn, or plate height is out oftolerance, replace the
damaged waved-plate. Ifthe discs and plates are OK,
13. Thrust washer seized up, worn, or adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
damaQed
Late shift after 1. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifting from N to 2. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid connectors.
D or S, or valve A defective • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift
excessive shock 3. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid solenoid valve for seizure.
when shifting valve B defective • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control
4. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid solenoid valve body gasket and ATF feed
valve C defective pipes for wear and damage. If the AfT clutch
5. Shift cable broken or out of pressure control solenoid valve is stuck,
adjustment inspect the CPC valves.
6. Connection between shift cable and • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever
transmission or body is worn and the transmission control lever.
7. Input shaft (mains haft) speed sensor • Check the 1st clutch pressure.
defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
8. Output shaft (countershaft) speed valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer
sensor defective for wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-
1 9. ATF temperature sensor defective plate-to-top-disc clearance. Ifthe clearance is
10. CPC valve A defective out of tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and
11. CPC valve B defective plates for wear and damage, and inspect the
12. CPC valve C stuck clutch waved-plate height. Ifthe discs and
13. Foreign material in separator plate flat-plates are worn or damaged, replace the
orifice discs and flat-plates as a set. If the waved-
14. Shift valve C defective plate height is out of tolerance, replace the
15. Shift valve E defective waved-plate. If the discs and plates are OK,
16. Servo control valve defective adjust the clearance with the clutch end-plate.
17. 1st accumulator defective
18. 1st check ball stuck
19. One-way check ball stuck
20. 1st clutch defective
14-20 BACK
Late shift after 1. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
shifting from N to 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors.
R, or excessive solenoid valve B defective • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
shock when 3. AfT clutch pressure control valve for seizure.
shifting solenoid valve C defective • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
4. Shift cable broken or out of valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
adjustment and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
5. Connection between shift cable solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
and transmission or body is • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
worn the transmission controllever.
6. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed • Check the 5th clutch pressure.
sensor defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
7. Output shaft (countershaft) valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
speed sensor defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
8. ATF temperature sensor to-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
9. Shift fork shaft stuck wear and damage, and inspect the clutch waved-
10. CPC valve C stuck plate height. If the discs and flat-plates are worn
11. Reverse CPC valve defective or damaged, replace the discs and flat-plates as a
12. Foreign material in separator set. If the waved-plate height is out of tolerance,
plate orifice replace the waved-plate. If the discs and plates
13. Shift valve E defective are OK, adjustthe clearance with the clutch end-
14. 5th accumulator defective plate.
15. 5th clutch defective
The transmission 1. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
does not shift sensor defective connectors.
2. Output shaft (countershaft) • Check the line pressure.
speed sensor defective
3. Modulator valve defective
Erratic shifting: 1. Shift solenoid valve B defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
fails to shift in D 2. Shift valve B defective connectors.
and S; starts off in • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
5th valve for seizure.
Erratic shifting: 1. Shift solenoid valve B defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
fails to shift in 2nd 2. Shift valve B defective connectors.
in S; starts off in • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
4th valve for seizure.
Erratic shifting: 1. Shift solenoid valve A defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
fails to shift in D, S, 2. Shift valve A defective connectors.
and 1st in S; starts • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
off in 3rd valve for seizure.
Erratic shifting: 1. Shift solenoid valve A defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
fails to shift in 2nd 2. Shift valve A defective connectors.
in S; starts off in • Inspect the O-ring, and check the shift solenoid
1st valve for seizure.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-21

Excessive shock or 1. AfT clutch pressure control • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on all solenoid valve A defective connectors.
upshifts and 2. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
downshifts sensor defective valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
3. Output shaft (countershaft) speed and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
sensor defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
4. ATFtemperature sensor defective • Inspect the sensor O-rings.
5. CPC valve A defective
6. Foreign material in separator
21ate orifice
Excessive shock or 1. AfT clutch pressure control • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 1-2 solenoid valve A defective connectors.
upshift or 2-1 2. AfT clutch pressure control • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
downshift solenoid valve C defective valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
3. 2nd clutch transmission fluid and damage. Ifthe AfT clutch pressure control
pressure switch defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
4. CPC valve A defective • Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
5. CPC valve C defective fluid pressure switch connector. Ifthe orifice is
6. Foreign material in separator clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
plate orifice • Check the 1st and 2nd clutch pressures.
7. 2nd accumulator defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
8. 2nd check ball stuck valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
9. 2nd clutch defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
plate.
14-22 BACK
Excessive shock or 1. Shift solenoid valve C defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
flares on 2-3 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors.
upshift or 3-2 solenoid valve B defective • Inspect the O-rings, and check the shift solenoid
downshift 3. AfT clutch pressure control valve for seizure.
solenoid valve C defective • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
4. 3rd clutch transmission fluid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
pressure switch defective and damage. If the AfT clutch pressure control
5. CPC valve B defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
6. CPC valve C defective • Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
7. Foreign material in separator fluid pressure switch connector. Ifthe orifice is
plate orifice clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
8. Shift valve C defective • Check the 2nd and 3rd clutch pressures.
9. 2nd accumulator defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
10. 3rd accumulator defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
11. 2nd check ball stuck wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
12. 2nd clutch defective to-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
13. 3rd clutch defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
set. Ifthe waved-plate height is out oftolerance,
plate.
flares on 3-4 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors.
downshift 3. AfT clutch pressure control valve for seizure.
solenoid valve A defective • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
4. 4th clutch transmission fluid valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
pressure switch defective and damage. Ifthe AfT clutch pressure control
5. CPC valve A defective solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
6. CPC valve B defective • Check for clogged orifice in the transmission
7. Foreign material in separator fluid pressure switch connector. If the orifice is
plate orifice clogged, remove it and clean the connector.
8. Shift valve C defective • Check the 3rd and 4th clutch pressures.
9. 3rd accumulator defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
10. 4th accumulator defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
11. 3rd clutch defective wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
12. 4th clutch defective to-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
set.lfthe waved-plate height is out of tolerance,
plate.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-23
Symp~om Probable cause(s) Notes

flares on 4-5 2. A!T clutch pressure control connectors.
downshift 3. A!T clutch pressure control valve for seizure.
solenoid valve C defective • Inspect the A!T clutch pressure control solenoid
4. CPC valve B defective valve body gasket and ATF feed pipes for wear
5. CPC valve C defective and damage. If the A!T clutch pressure control
6. Foreign material in separator solenoid valve is stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
plate orifice • Check the 4th and 5th clutch pressures.
7. Shift valve C defective • Inspect the clutch piston, clutch piston check
8. Shift valve E defective valve, and O-rings. Check the spring retainer for
9. Kick-down valve or kick-down wear and damage. Inspect the clutch end-plate-
short valve defective to-top-disc clearance. If the clearance is out of
10. 4th accumulator defective tolerance, inspect the clutch discs and plates for
11. 5th accumulator defective wear and damage, and inspect the clutch waved-
12. 4th clutch defective plate height. If the discs and flat-plates are worn
13. 5th cI utch defective or damaged, replace the discs and flat-plates as a
plate.
Noise from 1. ATF pump worn or binding Improper alignment of ATF pump and torque
transmission in all 2. Idler gears worn or damaged converter housing may cause ATF pump seizure.
shift lever 3. Thrust washer seized up, worn, The symptoms are mostly an rpm-related ticking
positions or damaged noise or a high pitched squeak.
Vehicle does not Torque converter one-way clutch Replace torque converter.
accelerate above defective
31 mph (50 km/h)
Vibration in all Drive plate defective or transmission • Adjust the engine and transmission mounts.
shift lever misassembled • Check the stall speed.
positions
Shift lever does 1. Transmission range switch • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
not operate defective or out of adjustment connectors.
smoothly 2. Shift cable broken or out of • Inspect the transmission range switch. If the
adjustment transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If
3. Connection between shift cable the transmission range switch is out of
and transmission or body is adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
worn • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
Transmission does 1. Shift cable broken or out of • Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
not shift into P adjustment the transmission control lever.
2. Connection between shift cable • Check the park pawl, control shaft, and park lever
and transmission or body is link for wear and damage. Check if the control
worn shaft lever pin is disengage from the manual
3. Park mechanism defective valve guide.
14-24 BACK
Torque converter 1. Shift solenoid valve 0 defective • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
clutch does not 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors.
disengage solenoid valve C defective • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
3. Torque converter clutch piston valve C body gasket for wear and damage. If the
defective AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C is
4. Lock-up shift valve defective stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
5. Lock-up control valve defective
6. Lock-up timing valve defective
cl utch does not 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors.
operate smoothly solenoid valve C defective • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
3. Lock-up clutch piston defective valve C body gasket for wear and damage. If the
4. Torque converter check valve AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C is
defective stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
5. Lock-up shift valve defective • Center all engine mounts.
6. Lock-up control valve defective
7. Lock-up timing valve defective
clutch does not 2. AfT clutch pressure control connectors.
engage solenoid valve C defective • Inspect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
3. Input shaft (mainshaft) speed valve C body gasket for wear and damage. If the
sensor defective AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C is
4. Output shaft (countershaft) speed stuck, inspect the CPC valves.
sensor defective
5. Torque converter clutch piston
defective
6. Torque converter check valve
defective
7. Lock-up shift valve defective
S. Lock-up control valve defective
AfT gear position 1. Transmission range switch • Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
indicator does not defective or out of adjustment connectors.
indicate shift lever 2. Shift cable broken or out of • Inspect the transmission range switch. If the
positions adjustment transmission range switch is faulty, replace it. If
3. Connection between shift cable the transmission range switch is out of
and transmission or body is worn adjustment, adjust it and the shift cable.
• Check for a loose shift cable at the shift lever and
the transmission control lever.
Speedometer and Output shaft (countershaft) speed Check for a stored DTC, and check for loose
odometer do not sensor defective connectors.
work
Engine does not VTEC rocker arms defective Check the engine rocker arms.
rev to high rpm,
and the
transmission
upshifts at low rpm
(engine at normal
operating
temperature)
BACK 14-25
System Description
General Operation
The automatic transmission is a combination of a three-element torque converter and a four-shaft electronically
controlled unit which provides five forward speeds and reverse. The entire unit is positioned in line with the engine.
Torque Converter, Shafts, Gears, and Clutches

The torque converter consists of a pump, turbine, and stator assembly in a single unit. The converter housing (pump)
is connected to the engine crankshaft and turns as the engine turns. Around the outside of the torque converter is a
ring gear which meshes with the starter pinion when the engine is being started. The entire torque converter assembly
serves as a flywheel, transmitting power to the transmission mainshaft. The transmission has four parallel shafts: the
mainshaft, the countershaft, the secondary shaft, and the intermediary shaft. The mainshaft is in line with the engine
crankshaft. The mainshaft includes the 4th and 5th clutches, and gears for 3rd, 4th, 5th, and reverse (reverse gear is
integral with the 5th gear). The countershaft includes gears for the final drive, 2nd, idler, 1st, 4th, 5th, and reverse (the
final drive gear is integral with the countershaft). The secondary shaft includes the 1st, 1st-hold, and 2nd clutches, and
gears for park, 2nd, idler, and 1st. The intermediary shaft includes the 3rd clutch, and gears for 3rd and 4th. The
countershaft 5th gear and the countershaft reverse gear can be locked to the countershaft at its left end, providing 5th
gear or reverse, depending with which way the selector is moved. The gears on the mainshaft, secondary shaft, and
intermediary shaft, are in constant mesh with those on the countershaft. When certain conditions of gears in the
transmission are engaged by the clutches, power is transmitted through the mainshaft, and/or to the secondary shaft,
intermediary shaft, then to the countershaft to provide drive.
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists ofthe powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and seven solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions. The PCM is located in
the engine compartment.
Hydraulic Control
The valve bodies include the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the secondary valve body, and the
accumulator body. They are bolted to the torque converter housing. The main valve body contains the manual valve,
the modulator valve, the torque converter check valve, shift valves A, B, E, CPC valve A, the relief valve, the servo
control valve, the lock-up shift valve, the lock-up timing valve, the lubrication control valve, the lubrication check valve,
and the ATF pump gears. The secondary valve body contains shift valves C, D, CPC valves Band C, the reverse CPC
valve, and the reverse control valve. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the cooler check valve, the
lock-up control valve, and the 3rd accumulator. The accumulator body contains the 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, 4th, and 5th
accumulators, shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D. Fluid from the regulator valve passes through the manual valve to
the various control valves. All the clutch receive fluid from the internal hydraulic circuit.
Shift Control Mechanism

To shift gears, the PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, and C, and automatic transmission (AfT) clutch pressure
control solenoid valves A and B, while receiving input signals from various sensors and switches located throughout
the vehicle. The shift solenoid valves shift the positions of the shift valves to switch the port to send hydraulic pressure
to the clutches. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B control the CPC valves A and B to shift
smoothly between lower and higher gear. This pressurizes a line to one of the clutches, engaging the clutch and its
corresponding gear.
Lock-up Mechanism
The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D and S positions. The pressurized fluid is
drained from the back of the torque converter through a fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be
held against the torque converter cover. As this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine
crankshaft. Together with hydraulic control, the PCM optimizes the timing and volume of the lock-up mechanism.
When shift solenoid valve D is turned on by the PCM, shift solenoid valve D pressure switches the lock-up shift valve
lock-up on and off. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, the lock-up control valve, and the lock-up timing valve
control the amount of the lock-up conditions. Shift solenoid valve D is located on the accumulator body in the
transmission, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C is mounted on the transmission housing.
14-26 BACK
Gear Selection
The shift lever has five positions; P: PARK, R: REVERSE, N: NEUTRAL, D: DRIVE 1st through 5th gear ranges, and S:
DRIVE 1st through 4th gear ranges with automatic shift mode and 1st through 5th with sequential sportshift mode.
Position Description
P: PARK Front wheels locked; park pawl engaged with park gear on countershaft. All
clutches are released.
R:REVERSE Reverse; reverse selector engaged with countershaft reverse gear and 5th
clutch engaged.
N:NEUTRAL All clutches are released.
D: DRIVE General driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd, 4th, then
(1stthrough 5th) 5th, depending on vehicle speed and accelerator pedal position.
Downshifts through 4th, 3rd, 2nd, and 1st on deceleration to stop. D-paddle
shift mode is also equipped; the transmission can be shifted manually with
the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) and paddle shifter - (downshift
switch) under certain particular conditions. The lock-up mechanism
operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5thgears.
S: DRIVE Automatic shift Used for rapid acceleration at highway speeds and general driving, up-hill
mode and down-hill driving; starts off in 1st, shifts automatically to 2nd, 3rd then
(1stthrough 4th) 4th, depending on vehicle speed and accelerator pedal position.
Downshifts through 3rd, 2nd and 1st on deceleration to stop. The lock-up
mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears.
Sequential Manual gear shift driving; vehicle can start off in 1st gear, and does not
sportshift mode upshift automatically. Vehicle can also start off in 2nd gear, and does not
(1st through 5th) upshift and downshift automatically. Downshifts automatically to 1st on
deceleration to stop. The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and
5th gears.
Starting is possible only in the P and N positions because of a slide-type neutral-safety switch.
Automatic Transmission (AfT) Gear Position Indicator

The AfT gear position indicator in the gauge control module shows which shift lever position has been selected
without having look down at the shift lever.
Shift Indicator and M Indicator

When the transmission is switched into the sequential sportshift mode, the shift indicator in the gauge control module
displays the gear selected, and the M indicator next to the shift indicator comes on. The shift indicator also displays
the gear selected in the D-paddle shift mode, but the M indicator does not come on.
Transfer Assembly
The transfer assembly consists of the transfer drive gear on the differential, the transfer output shaft in the
transmission, the transfer drive gear (hypoid gear), the transfer shaft, the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear), and the
companion flange. The transfer assembly is on the rear side of the transmission, beside the differential. The transfer
drive gear on the differential drives the transfer output shaft in the transmission. The transfer output shaft in the
transmission is connected to the transfer drive gear (hypoid gear) by splines. Power is transmitted from the transfer
drive gear on the differential to the rear differential via the transfer assembly and the propeller shaft.
BACK 14-27
Clutches and Gears
The 5-speed automatic transmission uses hydraulically-actuated clutches to engage or disengage the transmission
gears. When hydraulic pressure is introduced into the clutch drum, the clutch piston moves. This presses the friction
discs and steel plates together, locking them so they don't slip. Power is then transmitted through the engaged clutch
pack to its hub-mounted gear. Likewise, when the hydraulic pressure is bled from the clutch pack, the piston releases
the friction discs and the steel plates, and they are free to slide past each other. This allows the gear to spin
independently on its shaft, transmitting no power.
Transmission Cutaway View

INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 4TH GEAR
REVERSE IDLER GEAR

3RDCLUTCH
REVERSE IDLER INTERMEDIARY SHAFT
GEAR SHAFT
RING GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR

COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR COUNTERSHAFT 1ST GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT 2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT IDLER GEAR

DRIVE PLATE
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
4TH GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
1ST CLUTCH TRANSFER HYPOID

DRIVE GEAR/
SHAFT ASSEMBLY
TRANSFER
ASSEMBLY
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
COMPANION
FLANGE
14-28 BACK
1st Clutch
The 1st clutch engages/disengages 1st gear, and is located at the left end of the secondary shaft. The 1st clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the secondary shaft.
1st-hold Clutch
The 1st-hold clutch engages/disengages 1st-hold in 1st gear in the S position, and in the D-paddle shift mode. The 1st-
hold clutch is located in the 1st clutch drum, and is supplied hydraulic pressure by its ATF feed pipe within the
secondary shaft.
2nd Clutch
The 2nd clutch engages/disengages 2nd gear, and is located at the right end of the secondary shaft. The 2nd clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure through the secondary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
3rdClutch
The 3rd clutch engages/disengages 3rd gear, and is located at the end of the intermediary shaft. The 3rd clutch is
supplied hydraulic pressure through the intermediary shaft by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
4th Clutch
The 4th clutch engages/disengages 4th gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The 4th clutch is joined
back-to-back to the 5th clutch. The 4th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft by a circuit
connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
5th Clutch
The 5th clutch engages/disengages 5th gear, as well as reverse gear, and is located at the middle of the mainshaft. The
5th clutch is joined back-to-back to the 4th clutch. The 5th clutch is supplied hydraulic pressure through the mainshaft
by a circuit connected to the internal hydraulic circuit.
One-way Clutch
The one-way clutch is positioned between the 1st clutch hub and the secondary shaft 1st gear. The secondary shaft 1st
gear is splined to the 1st-hold clutch hub, with the 1st-hold clutch hub splined to the secondary shaft. The secondary
shaft 1st gear provides the outer race surface, and the 1st clutch hub provides the inner race surface. The one-way
clutch locks when power is transmitted from the secondary shaft 1st gear to the countershaft 1st gear. The 1st clutch
and gears remain engaged in the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gear ranges in the D or S position.
However, the one-way clutch disengages when the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, or 5th clutches and gears are applied in the D or S
position. This is because the increased rotational speed of the gears on the secondary shaft causes the one-way clutch
to free-wheel with the 1st clutch still engaged.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-29
Clutches and Gears (cont'd)
Gear Operation
Gears on the mainshaft:
• 4th gear is engages/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 4th clutch.
• 5th gear is engaged/disengages with the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
• Reverse gear is engaged/disengaged with the mainshaft by the 5th clutch.
• 3rd gear is splined with the mainshaft and rotates with the mainshaft.
Gears on the countershaft:

• Final gear is integral with the countershaft.
• 1st gear, 2nd gear, and 4th gear are splined with the countershaft, and rotate with the countershaft.
• 5th gear and reverse gear rotate freely from the countershaft. The reverse selector engages 5th gear and reverse
gear with the reverse selector hub. The reverse selector hub is splined to the countershaft so 5th gear and reverse
gear engage with the countershaft.
• Idler gear is located over the 2nd gear, and rotates freely from the countershaft.
Gears on the secondary shaft:

• 1st gear is engaged with the secondary shaft by the 1st clutch and the one-way clutch when accelerating, and 1st
gear is disengaged from the 1st clutch at the one-way clutch when decelerating. 1st gear is engaged with the
secondary shaft by the 1st-hold clutch when decelerating for engine braking.
• 2nd gear is engaged/disengaged with the secondary shaft by the 2nd clutch.
• Idler gear is splined with the secondary shaft, and rotates with the secondary shaft.
• Park gear is integral with the 2nd gear.
Gears on the intermediary shaft:

• 3rd gear is engaged/disengaged with the intermediary shaft by the 3rd clutch.
• 4th gear is splined with the intermediary shaft.
14-30 BACK
Power Flow
P Position
Hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. The countershaft is
locked by the park pawl interlocking the park gear.
N Position
Engine power transmitted from the mainshaft drives the mainshaft 3rd gear, the intermediary shaft 3rd gear, but
hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches. Power is not transmitted to the countershaft. In this position, the
position of the reverse selector differs according to whether the shift lever shifted from the D or R position:
• When shifted from the D position, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft 5th gear and the reverse
selector hub, and the 5th gear engages with the countershaft .
• When shifted from the Rposition, the reverse selector engages with the countershaft reverse gear and the reverse
selector hub, and the reverse gear engages with the countershaft.
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 3RD GEAR
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR ~
~COND~ / ;
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
IDLER GEAR
PARK GEAR
(cont'd)
BACK 14-31
Power Flow (cont'd)

o Position and S Position with Automatic Shift Mode
In the D position, the optimum gear is automatically selected from the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears; and 1st, 2nd,
3rd and 4th gears in the S position with automatic shift mode according to conditions such as the balance between the
accelerator pedal opening (engine loading) and vehicle speed.
In 1st gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.
• The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
• The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
• Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear and the transfer drive gear.
• The transfer output shaft drives the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft and the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR c=J
JS
r:g
TORQUE CONVERTER
COUNTERSHAFT
IDLER GEAR
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
14-32 BACK
In 2nd gear
o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 2nd clutch, then the 2nd clutch engages the secondary shaft 2nd gear with the
secondary shaft.
o The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
o The secondary shaft 2nd gear drives the countershaft 2nd gear and the countershaft.
o Power is transmitted to the final drive gear, which in turn drives the final driven gear and the transfer drive gear.
o The transfer output shaft drives the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft and the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
o Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 2nd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
power from 1st gear is cut off at the one-way clutch.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
MAINS HAFT
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
2ND CLUTCH
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
(cont'd)
BACK 14-33
Power Flow (cont'd)
In3rd gear
o Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 3rd clutch, then the 3rd clutch engages the intermediary shaft 3rd gear with the
intermediary shaft.
o The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the intermediary shaft 4th gear via the intermediary shaft 3rd gear and the 3rd clutch.
o The intermediary shaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft via the mainshaft 4th gear.
o Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 3rd gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT 3RD GEAR 3RDCLUTCH
INTERMEDIARY SHAFT
TORQUE CONVERTER
MAINS HAFT 3RD GEAR
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
14-34 BACK
In 4th gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 4th clutch, then the 4th clutch engages the mainshaft 4th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 4th gear drives the countershaft 4th gear and the countershaft.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 4th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
MAINSHAFT 4TH GEAR
MAINSHAFT
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
(cont'd)
BACK 14-35
Power Flow (cont'd)
In 5th gear
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft 5th gear while
the shift lever in the forward range (D and S positions).
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft 5th gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft 5th gear drives the countershaft 5th gear, which drives the reverse selector hub and the countershaft.
• Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st clutch, but since the rotation speed of 5th gear exceeds that of 1st gear,
MAINSHAFT 5TH GEAR
MAINSHAFT
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
SECONDARY SHAFT
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
14-36 BACK
Acceleration in 1st gear in 5 position with sequential sportshift mode, and in D position with D-paddle shift mode
In the S position with sequential sportshift mode, and in the D position with D-paddle shift mode under an acceleration,
hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-hold clutch. The power flow when accelerating is as follows:
o Hydraul.ic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch, then the 1st clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st gear with the
secondary shaft by the one-way clutch.

o The mainshaft 3rd gear drives the secondary shaft via the countershaft idler gear and secondary shaft idler gear.
o The secondary shaft 1st gear drives the countershaft 1st gear and the countershaft.
o Hydraulic pressure is also applied to the 1st-hold clutch, and the 1st-hold clutch engages the secondary shaft 1st
gear with the secondary shaft.

MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR
COUNTERSHAFT ,JS
1ST GEAR c:=::::J
c:g
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR

SECONDARY SHAFT
TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
(cont'd)
BACK 14-37
Power Flow (cont'd)
Deceleration in 1st gear in S Position with sequential sportshift mode, and in D position with D-paddle shift mode
The power flow in 1st gear in the S position with sequential sportshift mode, and in the D position with D-paddle shift
mode when decelerating is as fof/ows:
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 1st clutch and the 1st-hold clutch.
• RofJing resistance from the road surface goes through the front wheels to the final driven gear, then to the
countershaft idler gear.
• The one-way clutch disengages because the application of torque is reversed.
• The force conveyed to the secondary shaft idler gear turns the mainshaft 3rd gear via the countershaft idler gear. As
a reSUlt, engine braking can be obtained with 1st gear.
MAINSHAFT 3RD GEAR

COUNTERSHAFT
1ST GEAR
J.:S
c=:::J
c:g
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR
14-38 BACK
R Position
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the servo valve to engage the reverse selector with the countershaft reverse gear
while the shift lever is in the R position.
• Hydraulic pressure is applied to the 5th clutch, then the 5th clutch engages the mainshaft reverse gear with the
mainshaft.
• The mainshaft reverse gear drives the countershaft reverse gear via the reverse idler gear.
• The countershaft reverse gear drives the countershaft via the reverse selector which drives the reverse selector hub.
• The rotation direction of the countershaft is changed by the reverse idler gear.
REVERSE IDLER GEAR 5TH CLUTCH
MAINSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR
TORQUE CONVERTER
FINAL DRIVE GEAR

COUNTERSHAFT
REVERSE GEAR SECONDARY SHAFT
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

TRANSFER HYPOID
DRIVE GEAR/SHAFT
TRANSFER
OUTPUT SHAFT
(HYPOID GEAR)
BACK 14-39
Electronic Control System
Electronic Control
The electronic control system consists ofthe powertrain control module (PCM), sensors, and seven solenoid valves.
Shifting and lock-up are electronically controlled for comfortable driving under all conditions.
Functional Diagram
The PCM receives input signals from the sensors, switches, and other control units, processes data, and outputs
signals for the engine control system and AfT control system. The AfT control system includes shift control, clutch
pressure control, and lock-up control. The PCM switches the shift solenoid valves and the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valves to control shifting transmission gears and lock-up torque converter clutch.
PCM
Engine RPM Signal
~
Accelerator Pedal Position
Sensor Signal r---. PGM-FI Control System
~
Throttle Position Sensor
Signal (ETCS)
.. .
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sensor Signal r---. ., ,
~
Barometric Pressure
Sensor Signal
AIT Control System
Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal r---. Shift Control
Shift Solenoid Valve A
ATF Temperature
Sensor Signal ~
· Grade Logic Control
Shift-Hold Control Shift Solenoid Valve B
· D-position Steering
Wheel Shift Switch
~ ·
SH-AWD Control Unit Shift Solenoid Valve C
Signal Shift Control
Sequential Sportshift
Control -. Shift Solenoid Valve D
Automatic
~
VSA Control Unit Cruise Control
Signal 5-speed
Downshift Request and
Reverse
Transmission p ---+ AIT Clutch Pressure
Range Switch
R ---+ Control Solenoid Valve A
Signal
iii ---+ Clutch Pressure
Control
I AIT Clutch Pressure
Control Solenoid Valve B
I
0 ---+ I
s- ---+ AlT Clutch Pressure I
+
Paddle Shifter I - (Upshiftl
Downshift Switch) Signal r---. Lock-up Control f Control Solenoid Valve C
l Lock-up
ONIOFF
Lock-up
~ ·
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) AIT Gear Position ~
Speed Sensor Signal Condition
Indicator
Indicator Control ·· D Indicator
Output Shaft (Countershaft)
Speed Sensor Signal r---. ·
Shift Indicator
M Indicator
~
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Signal I
I Shift Lock Control I
Shift Lock Solenoid
I
~ . Self-diagnosisl
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Signal
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid

Pressure Switch Signal r---.
Fail-safe Function
• Communication and
Output function
. Vehicle Speed Signal
Data Link Connector
Brake Pedal Position

Switch Signal r---.
14-40 BACK
Electronic Control System Component Locations
PADDLE SHIFTER-
(DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
PARK PIN SWITCH SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE

FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEC
4TH CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
PRESSURE SWITCH
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE A
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVEB
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEB
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEC
SHIFT SOLENOID HARNESS SHIFT SOLENOID

CONNECTOR VALVE A
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION

FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVED
ATF TEMPERATURE TRANSMISSION
SENSOR RANGE SWITCH
(cant'd)
BACK 14-41
Electronic Control System (cont'd)
Shift Control
The PCM instantly determines which gear should be selected by various signals sent from sensors and switches, and
it actuates the shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D to control shifting transmission gear.
There are two types of shift solenoid valves:

• Shift solenoid valves A and D use the ON-OPEN/OFF-CLOSE type; the shift solenoid valve opens the port of shift
solenoid valve pressure while the shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM, and closes the port when shift
solenoid valve is OFF.
• Shift solenoid valves Band C use the ON-CLOSE/OFF-OPEN type; the shift solenoid valve closes the port of shift
solenoid valve pressure while the shift solenoid valve is turned ON by the PCM, and opens the port when shift
solenoid valve is OFF.
The combination of driving signals to shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D are shown in the table.
Position Gear position Shift solenoid valves

A B C D
Dand S Shiftinq from the N position OFF ON OFF OFF
Stays in 1st OFF ON ON OFF
Shiftinq qears between 1st and 2nd ON ON ON OFF orON
Stays in 2nd ON ON OFF OFF orON
Shiftinq Qears between 2nd and 3rd ON ON ON OFF orON
Stays in 3rd ON OFF ON OFF orON
Shifting gears between 3rd and 4th ON OFF OFF OFF orON
Stays in 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF orON
D Shiftinq qears between 4th and 5th OFF OFF ON OFF orON
Stays in 5th OFF ON ON OFF orON
Swith 1st OFF ON ON OFF orON
sequential 2nd ON ON OFF OFF orON
sportshift 3rd ON OFF ON OFF orON
mode 4th OFF OFF OFF OFF orON
5th OFF ON ON OFF orON
N Neutral OFF ON OFF OFF
R Shifting from the P and N positions OFF ON OFF ON
Stays in reverse ON ON OFF ON
Reverse inhibit control OFF ON OFF OFF
P Park OFF ON OFF ON
14-42 BACK
Shift Control - Grade Logic Control
A grade logic control system has been adopted to control shifting in the D position. The PCM compares actual driving
conditions with programmed driving conditions, based on the input from the throttle position sensor, the engine
coolant temperature sensor, the barometric pressure sensor, the brake pedal position switch signal, and the shift lever
position signal, to control shifting while the vehicle is ascending or descending a slope.
PCM
\ Engine RPM Signal

I
Engine RPM Control
J
I Transmission Range
Switch Signal
Shift Position
Control
I Accelerator Pedal
r1~
Position Sensor Fail-safe Control
Signal I
Actual
\ Throttle Position I r-
+/Drivin g
Shift Position I-
Sensor Signal
I IRead of ATF I
I Output Shaft
(Countershaft)
I
Temperature I
l!;rCompori~~ f+ Shift Solenoid Valve A
Shift Solenoid Valve B
Speed Sensor Signal I Master Target of I
with
Signals Shift Solenoid Valve C
I Input Shaft I
Shifting Position Shift Solenoid Valve D
115on~
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal I Selection of
I Sensor
ATFTemperature I Shifting mode
I Sensor
Signal
Barometric Pressure
I -- ~
Grade Logic Control
Calculation of
Signal gradient
I Temperature
~ .
Engine Coolant
I-- ~
Correction of engine
Sensor Signal coolant temperature
sensor signal data
I Switch
Brake Pedal Position
Signal
r Correction of cruise
control signal data
~
\ VSA Control by Downshift
Unit Signal Request Signal
(cont'd)
BACK 14.. 43
Ascending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is climbing a hill in the D position, the system extends the engagement
area of 2nd gear, 3rd gear, and 4th gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 2nd and 3rd
gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th and 5th gears, so the vehicle can run smooth and have more
power when needed.
NOTE: Shift commands stored in the PCM between 2nd and 3rd gears, between 3rd and 4th gears, and between 4th
and 5th gears, enable the PCM to automatically select the most suitable gear according to the magnitude of a gradient.
ASCENDING MODE: Upshift Schedule

1000/0
- - - - : FLAT ROAD MODE
: GRADUAL ASCENDING MODE

'0' 50
: MEDIUM ASCENDING MODE
: STEEP ASCENDING MODE
: HEAVY STEEP ASCENDING MODE
o
Vehicle speed
Descending Control
When the PCM determines that the vehicle is going down a hill in the D position, the shift-up speed from 4th to 5th
gear, 3rd to 4th gear, and from 2nd to 3rd (when the throttle is closed) becomes faster than the set speed for flat road
driving to widen the 4th gear, 3rd gear, and 2nd gear driving areas. This, in combination with engine braking from the
deceleration lock-up, achieves smooth driving when the vehicle is descending. There are three descending modes
with different 4th gear driving areas, 3rd gear driving areas and, 2nd gear driving areas according to the magnitude of
a gradient stored in the PCM. When the vehicle is in 5th or 4th gear and you are decelerating while applying the brakes
on a steep hill, the transmission will downshift to a lower gear. When you accelerate, the transmission will then return
to a higher gear.
DESCENDING MODE: Downshift Schedule

1000/0
1ST
1:11
C
- - - - - : FLAT ROAD MODE
1Gl
50
. - - - - - - - - - - : GRADUAL DESCENDING MODE
~
.c
- .. - .. - .. - .. - : MEDIUM DESCENDING MODE
I-
............................. : STEEP DESCENDING MODE
o
Vehicle speed
14-44 BACK
Deceleration Control
When the vehicle goes around a corner and needs to decelerate first and then accelerate, the PCM sets the data for
deceleration control to reduce the number of times the transmission shifts. When the vehicle is decelerating from
speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h), the PCM shifts the transmission from 4th to 3rd earlier than normal to cope with
upcoming acceleration.
Shift-Hold Control
When negotiating winding roads, the throttle is suddenly released and the brakes are applied, as is the case when
decelerating at the entrance of a corner, Shift-Hold Control keeps the transmission in its current (lower) ratio as it
negotiates the corner and accelerates out.
When the vehicle is driven aggressively on a winding road, the PCM will extend the engagement time of 3rd gear and
4th gear to prevent the transmission from frequently shifting between 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears. This allows the driver to
have more control for both acceleration and deceleration.
The PCM monitors the average change in vehicle speed and throttle over time. When these values exceed those for
normal driving conditions, the shift-up from 3rd to 4th gear and 4th to 5th gear is delayed. This gives more control
over power, and engine braking when the driver is driving aggressively around winding roads. The transmission will
resume the normal shift-up pattern after the PCM determines that normal driving has resumed.
/IN :Throttle released and brakes applied

..................................."""'~ ~
----~·········. V . ~~········~-cn:m--
i1it............ --.-
Operation pattern of ON
accelerator
Shift pattern of 3rd 4th

conventional --=::.::..------1
automatic transmission
4 h ",,5t~h~ __
Shift pattern of
Shift-Hold Control
_..::::.:=-______________---I\!U-
3rd .
automatic transmission
(cont'd)
BACK 14-45
Shift Control - Manual Shift Mode

The RDX transmission is provided with a D-paddle shift mode in the D position, and with a sequential sportshift mode
in the S position. Both modes are entered by pulling the paddle shifter +
(upshift switch) or paddle shifter -
(downshift switch) while driving.
D-Paddle Shift Mode

When the transmission is switched into the D-paddle shift mode by pulling the paddle shifters while driving in the D
position, the transmission can shift into a lower gear by pulling the paddle shifter - (downshift switch), and it can shift
into a higher gear by pulling the paddle shifter+ (upshift switch). When the transmission shifts into a lower gear or a
higher gear by pulling the paddle shifters, the shift indicator in the gauge control module displays the number of
currently-selected gear. This number of the gear goes off when the transmission downshifts automatically, or when
the transmission upshifts automatically while coasting.
+
The transmission stays in 5th gear if the paddle shifter (upshift switch) is pul'led when driving in 5th gear, and the
shift indicator displays "5" in 2 seconds, then goes off. The transmission stays in 1st gear ifthe paddle shifter -
(downshift switch) is pulled when driving in 1st gear, and the shift indicator displays "1" in 2 seconds, then goes off.
The transmission stays in the current gear and does not upshift to the next higher gear if the paddle shifter + (upshift
switch) is pulled while driving below the minimum allowable speed for, and the shift indicator blinks the number of
the next higher gear several times, then returns to the number of the current gear.
14.. 46 BACK
S Position Automatic Shift Mode and Sequential Sportshift Mode
The S position has two shifting modes; the automatic shift mode and the sequential sportshift mode. In the S position
automatic shift mode, the transmission upshifts and downshifts automatically from 1st through 4th gear, and the
paddle shifters are ready to be activated to switch to the sequential sportshift mode. In the automatic shift mode, the
shift indicator and the M indicator in the gauge control module do not come on.
When the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) or paddle shifter - (downshift switch) is pulled, the automatic shift mode
is canceled and the sequential sportshift mode comes into operation. The shift indicator displays the number of the
selected gear, and the M indicator comes on. In the sequential sportshift mode, the driver can shift up and down
manually from 1st through 5th gear by using the paddle shifters, much like a manual transmission. The paddle shifters
are installed on the back of the steering wheel, and the driver can shift gears by pulling the paddle shifters without
taking either hand off the steering wheel.
In the sequential sportshift mode, the transmission must be shifted up and down by pulling the paddle shifters.
However, the transmission cannot downshift and stays in the current gear if the paddle shifter - (downshift switch) is
pulled while the vehicle is coasting at a speed that would cause the engine to over-rev by downshifting the
transmission, and the shift indicator blinks the number of the selected gear several times, then returns to the number
ofthe current gear. If the vehicle speed reaches an appropriate speed while the shift indicator is blinking the number
of the selected gear, the transmission downshifts and the shift indicator displays the selected gear. The transmission
also cannot upshift and stays in the current gear ifthe paddle shifter+ (upshift switch) is pulled while driving below
an appropriate upshifting speed, the shift indicator blinks the number of the selected gear several times, then returns
to the number of the current gear. If the vehicle speed reaches an appropriate upshift speed while the shift indicator is
blinking the number of the selected gear, the transmission upshifts and the shift indicator displays the selected gear.
This mode has automatic downshifting areas so the vehicle can run smoothly with more power to cope with upcoming
acceleration. When coasting in 5th gear or 4th gear, the transmission downshifts to the next lower gear if the vehicle
slows down to the programmed speed, or by pressing the brake pedal.
When the transmission decelerates to a stop, the transmission shifts to 1st gear automatically. The transmission can
be shifted to 2nd gear by pulling the paddle shifter+ (upshift switch) while the vehicle is stopped, and the vehicle can
start off in 2nd gear.
The sequential sportshift mode is canceled when moving the shift lever to any position other than S.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-47
Clutch Pressure Control

The PCM actuates AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, 8, and C to control the clutch pressure. When shifting
between gears, the clutch pressure regulated by AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, 8, and C engages and
disengages the clutch smoothly.
The PCM receives input signals from the various sensors and switches, performs processing data, and outputs current
to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, 8, and C.
PCM
II~utShaft I
( ainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal I Actual
Driving
Shift
I Output Shaft
(Countershaft) I Position
Speed Sensor Signal I
IAccelerator Pedal I
IDecision of
shifting mode
I
Position Sensor
Signal J
I Throttle Position I ~
Sensor Signal
I AfT Clutch Pressure
r
Master Target of Current
Controlling Current f-.. feedback Control Solenoid
Valve A. B. and C
I Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor Signal
I Engine RPM Signal

.
-,-:.:..::-r
Correction of
engine torque
I Barometric Pressure I signal data
Sensor Signal
I
I 2nd Clutch Correction of
Transmission Fluid hydraulic pressure
Pressure Switch Signal application
timing
l3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid
Pressure Switch Signal Correction of
engine coolant
l4th Clutch
Transmission Fluid
I temperature
sensor signal data
I
l
Pressure Switch Signal
Engine Coolant
Temperature I Correction of ATF
temperature
Sensor Signal I sensor data
I ATFTemperature I
Sensor Signal
I
14-48 BACK
Lock-up Control
The shift solenoid valve D controls the hydraulic pressure to switch the lock-up shift valve and lock-up ON and OFF.
The PCM actuates the shift solenoid valve D and the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C ON, the condition of
lock-up starts. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C regulates and apply the hydraulic pressure to the lock-
up control valve to control the volume of the lock-up.
The lock-up mechanism operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D position, and 2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears in the S
position.
PCM
Engine Coolant Engine Coolant

Temperature I Temperature control
Sensor Signal
Shifting position
I control
Barometric Pressure I
Sensor Signal
Gradient control
by magnitude
f+
Transmission Range I Fail-safe control
Switch Signal
Accelerator Pedal I
Position Sensor Signal Actual
driving
..... -. shift
position
Throttle Position
Sensor Signal I ~ --. Current
Master Target
of Controlling
Lock-up control
Output Shaft
(Countershaftl
Speed Sensor Signal
Driving
shift
Lock-up ON/OFF
control
~ Shift Solenoid
LOCk-ur condition
Input Shaft
(Mainshaft)
Speed Sensor Signal
position
information ------ contro
Current
ValveD
feedback
A/TClutch
Pressure Control
Engine RPM Signal Solenoid Valve C
Correction of
ATF Temperature ATF .1 Lock-up condition
Sensor Signal temperature Ilearning control
sensor data
(cont'd)
BACK 14-49
PCM AfT Control System Electrical Connections
IGNmON SWITCH PCM AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONlROL

AmRY
0:, B44
SOLENOID VALVE A
+ ~
C36 16, LSA 00'
Cb
BATVIG'
SOLENOID AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE B
P2'I 835
BRAKE PEDAL SLS LSB 00'
POsmON SWITCH A/TCLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
A40 SOLENOID VALVE C
-"" BKSW 825
00'
~
LSC
BRAKEUGHTS
liT
SHIFT SOlENOID VALVE A
I
I PGM-R MAIN RELAY .,
I
AS
IGP SHA
Bll
826
00'
SHIFT SOlENOID VALVE B
SHB , UU
I
I DATA UNK CONNECTOR
I
A3'
scs
SHC
820
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
'00
PARK PIN SWITCH
~ A2 SHIFTSOLENOID VALVE D
P-PIN 824
J ~
00'
SHD
liT
I MULTIPlEX INTEGRATEO
CONTROL UNIT IMJCUI
VCC,
C13
I
I
INPUT SHAFT
B'7 IMAINSHAFTI
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE NM
SG,
C'4 I SPEED SENSOR
A36
CANH
O F CAN
1
I
Transceiver A'1/ MANIFOLD
CAN Controller CANL C"
MAP ABSOLUTE
~ PRESSURE SENSOR
I I B'8
,
VCC2
I
Sequential
Sportshlft
r- A/TGearPositlonlndieator
Driver Circuit C43 I OUTPUTSHAFT
NC ICOUNTERSHAFlJ
Mod,Shlft
B33 I
¢¢¢¢¢
Indicator SPEED SENSOR
SG2
Circuit
1M 0=0
0:0 ---I Dimming Cancel Circuit I
Am
827
ATFTEMPERATURE
SENSOR
I
1
TRANSMISSION
RANGE
SWITCH
P
R
B'3
B'4
ATPP
ATPR
P3
C,O
- J
CHARGE AIR COOlER
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
SENSOR
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION

I
N B'2
ATPN B8 ~ FLUID PRESSURE SWITCH
0 82, OP2SW
I
ATPO
S B'5
ATPS
lIS
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
flUID PRESSURE SWITCH
7h-
B28 OP3SW
ATPFWD
PADDLE SHIFTER+ IUPSHIFTSWITCHI

B22
ATPRVS
OP4SW
C38
4TH CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
~ flUID PRESSURE SWITCH
&
J RIGHTS-UP I B'6
S-UPP
B36
7h-
J- PADOLESHIFTER-IDOWNSHIFT SWITCHI
PG,
PG2
LG,
B,
C4D
I LEFTS-ON I B40
S-ONP LG2
C44
J- 7lT
PCM Hamess ConnectorTerminal Locations
Ii II
11/12 / 41616 / sI91 11,1/34151/7 sI91 IL,J23 415167 sI 91

'01/ '2 '31141'51'6 '7 'B ,9 k" 11 '2 'ai"I'61'6 17 '8V '011 '2'31"1'51'6'7'81'91
20 21 22 >< 23 24 25 20 21 22 >< 23 24 25 202'22 >< 23/1251
L- 2627 2S 2sJLll,Ji 33 34 35 I- 26 27 28 VI30 13'132 33 34 35 I- ~ 2627282913013'132/ /VI r-
11361 37 38 391401/ 42 431441 11361/ / 1/140 I., 42 431 .. 1 LL36JL 38 3914014, 42 431441
'----' '----'
AI44P1 BI44PI CI44P1
Tenninal side of female terminals
14-50 BACK
PCM AfT Control System Inputs and Outputs
PCM Harness Connector Terminal Locations
~ 21/ 415161 / 8 9-' 11 / 3 4 15V 7 8

91 11 11 2 3 41516 7 8 91
lOV 1213114115116 171819 V 11 1213114115116 1718 I 10 11 1213114115116 17 1819
2021 2 2 > < 232425 2021 22 >< 232425 2021 22
>< 23/ 25
2627 28291/131 V 3334 35 2627 28VI 30131 132 3334 35 2627 28 29130131132 II" V
136 37 38 391 40 V 42 43 441 136 V V Vi 40 141 42 43 441 136 / 38 39140141 42 43 441
A (44PI B(44PI C (44PI

Terminal Wire Color Terminal Name Description Signal
Number
A2 LTGRN P-PIN (PARK PIN SWITCH) Detects park pin switch With ignition switch ON (II):
signal • In P position: Battery voltage
• In other than P~osition: About 0 V
A8 ORN IGP (POWER SOURCE) Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
circuit With i~nition switch OFF: 0 V
A27 PNK SLS (SHIFT LOCK Drives shift lock solenoid With ignition switch ON (II), in P position, brake
SOLENOID) pedal pressed and accelerator released: About 0 V
A31 ORN SCS (SERVICE CHECK Detects service check signal With service check signal shorted with the HDS:
SIGNAL) About 0 V
With service check sional opened: About 5 V
A36 WHT CAN H(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (Ill: Pulses
HIGH)
A37 RED CAN L(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
LOW)
A40 LTGRN BK SW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: About 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake pedal pressed: Battery voltage

Number
Bl BLK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
B8 BLU/RED OP2SW (2ND CLUTCH Detects 2nd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 2nd clutch pressure: About 5 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 2nd clutchQressure: About 0 V
B9 BLU/WHT OP3SW (3RD CLUTCH Detects 3rd clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 3rd clutch pressure: About 5 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 3rd clutch pressure: About 0 V
Bll BLU/YEL SH A (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In R position, and 2nd and 3rd in D and S positions:
VALVE A) valve A Battery voltage
In P and N positions, and 1st, 4th, and 5th in D and S
positions: 0 V
(cont'd)
BACK 14-51

PCM AfT Control System Inputs and Outputs (cont'd)
V 2V 41 5 16 / 8 91 11 / 3415VI 7 8 91 11 2 3 41 5 16 7 8 91
lOV 1213114115116 171819 1/11 1213114115116 1718 II 10 11 1213114115116 17 1819
2021 22>< 232425 2021 22>< 2324 25 2021 22 >< 23V
25
2627 2829V1311! 33 34 35 2627 281/130131132 3334 35 2627 28 29130131132 VVV
136 37 36 39140 V 42 43 441 ,136 / V 1L14Oj41 42 43 441 Ii 36 / 36 39140141 42 43 44\
A (44P) B (44P) C(44P)
PCM CONNECTOR Bj.wP)

Number
B12 RED/BlK ATP N (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In N position: 0 V
RANGE SWITCH N switch N position signal In any position other than N: About 5 V
POSITION)
B13 BLU/BLK ATP P (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In P position: 0 V
RANGE SWITCH P switch P position signal In any position other than P: About 5 V
POSITION)
B14 WHT ATP R (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In R position: 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R switch R position signal In any position other than R: About 5 V
POSITION)
B15 RED ATP S (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In S position: 0 V
RANGE SWITCH S) switch S signal input In any position other than S: Battery voltage
B16 WHT/BLU S-UP P (PADDLE SHIFTER Detects paddle shifter + With ignition switch ON (II):
+
(UPSHIFT SWITCH» (upshift switch) signal • Paddle shifter + (upshift switch) pressed: About
OV
• Paddle shifter - (downshift switch) released:
Battery voltl!ge
B17 RED NM (INPUT SHAFT Detects input shaft With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V or about 5 V
(MAINSHAFT) SPEED (mainshaft) speed sensor With engine running in N position: About 2.5 V
SENSOR) signal
B18 VEL/BLU VCC2 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5 V
With ignition switch OFF: 0 V
B20 GRN SH C (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In 1st, 3rd, and 5th in D and S positions: Battery
VALVE C) valveC voltage
In P, R, and N positions, and 2nd and 4th in D and S
positions: 0 V
B21 VEL ATP D (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D position: 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D switch D position signal In any position other than D: Battery voltage
POSITION) input
B22 RED/WHT ATP RVS (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In P, R, and N positions: 0 V
RANGE SWITCH R switch p, R, and N position In any position otherthan P, R, and N: Battery
POSITION) signal voltage
B24 VEL SH D (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In N position, In D and S positions during no lock-up
VALVE D) valve D condition: 0 V
In P and R positions, and D and S positions during
lock-up condition: Battery voltage
14-52 BACK
PCM CONNECTOR B 144P)
Number
B25 GRN/RED LS C IAfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON III): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve C
SOLENOID VALVE C)
B26 GRN/WHT SH B (SHIFT SOLENOID Drives shift solenoid In P, R, and N positions, and 1st, 2nd, and 5th in D
VALVE B) valve B and S positions: Battery voltage
In 3rd and 4th in D and S positions: 0 V
B27 BLU/YEL ATFT(ATFTEMPERATURE Detects ATF temperature With ignition switch ON (II):
SENSOR) sensor signal About 0.2 - 4.0 V depending on ATF temperature
B28 BLU/YEL ATP FWD (TRANSMISSION Detects transmission range In D and S position: 0 V
RANGE SWITCH D AND S) switch D and S signal input In any position other than D and S: Battery voltage
B33 GRN/YEL SG2 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor oround Less than 1.0 V at all times
B35 BRN/WHT LS B (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve B
SOLENOID VALVE B)
B36 BLK PG1 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
B40 BRN/WHT S-DN P (PADDLE SHIFTER Detects paddle shifter - With ignition switch ON (II):
- (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH)) (downshift switch) signal • Paddle shifter - (downshift switch) pressed:
AboutOV
• Paddle shifter - (downshift switch) released:
About 5 V
B44 RED LS A (AfT CLUTCH Drives AfT clutch pressure With ignition switch ON (II): Pulses
PRESSURE CONTROL control solenoid valve A
SOLENOID VALVE A)

Number
C11 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): About 2.0 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle About 1.0 V depending on engine speed
(MAP) SENSOR)
C13 VEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): About 5 V
C14 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
C36 BLK/YEL IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): Battery voltage
With ionition switch OFF: 0 V
C38 BLU/YEL OP4SW (4TH CLUTCH Detects 4th clutch With ignition switch ON (II):
TRANSMISSION FLUID transmission fluid pressure • Without 4th clutch pressure: About 5 V
PRESSURE SWITCH) switch signal • With 4th clutch pressure: About 0 V
C40 BRN/YEL LG1 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
C43 BLK/BLU NC (OUTPUT SHAFT Detects output shaft With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V or about 5 V
(COUNTERSHAFT) SPEED (countershaft) speed sensor With driving: Pulses
SENSOR) signal
C44 BRN/YEL LG2 (LOGIC GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
BACK 14-53
Hydraulic Controls
The valve body includes the main valve body, the regulator valve body, the secondary valve body, and the
accumulator body. The ATF pump is driven by splines on the end of the torque converter which is attached to the
engine. Fluid flows through the regulator valve to maintain specified pressure through the main valve body to the
manual valve, directing pressure to each of the clutches. Shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D are mounted on the
accumulator body. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B, and C are mounted on the transmission housing.
____ AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
____ CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE B
- - - - AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE

CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE A
~ SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE D

ACCUMULATOR BODY
~ ____ SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
J--l\~~-r-DH _ _ _ SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B

o
l~-I--- SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE C
o
/
REGULATOR VALVE BODY
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C
~
~ MAIN VALVE BODV
14-54 BACK
Main Valve Body
The main valve body contains the manual valve, the modulator valve, the torque converter check valve, shift valve A.
shift valve 8, shift valve D, shift valve E, CPC valve C, the relief valve, the lock-up shift valve, the lock-up timing valve,
the lubrication control valve, the lubrication check valve, and the ATF pump gears. The primary function of the main
valve body is to switch fluid pressure on and off to control hydraulic pressure going to the hydraulic control system.
LOCK-UP SHIFT VALVE
TORQUE CONVERTER CHECK VALVE
/MANUALVALVE
/ SHIFTVALVEE
SHIFT VALVE A
SHIFT VALVE B
LUBRICATION
CONTROL VALVE
MODULATOR VALVE
LUBRICATION SERVO CPC VALVE A MAIN VALVE BODY

CHECK VALVE CONTROL VALVE
Regulator Valve Body

The regulator valve body is located on the main valve body. The regulator valve body contains the regulator valve, the
cooler check valve, the lock-up control valve, the servo valve, and the 3rd accumulator.
COOLER CHECK VALVE
LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
REGULATOR VALVE
SERVO VALVE/SHIFT FORK SHAFT
(cont'd)
BACK 14-55
Hydraulic Controls (cont'd)

Regulator Valve
The regulator valve maintains constant hydraulic pressure from the ATF pump to the hydraulic control system, while
also furnishing fluid to the lubrication system and torque converter. Fluid from the ATF pump flows through Band B'.
Fluid entering from B flows through the valve orifice to the A cavity. This pressure of the A cavity pushes the regulator
valve to the spring side, and this movement of the regulator valve uncovers the fluid port to the torque converter and
the relief valve. The fluid flows out to the torque converter and the relief valve, and the regulator valve returns under
spring force. According to the level of the hydraulic pressure through B, the position of the regulator valve changes,
and the amount of fluid from B' through the torque converter changes. This operation is continued, maintaining the
line pressure.
From ATF PUMP
To TORQUE CONVERTER
t jt To LUBRICATION
VALVE SPRING
REGULATOR VALVE
Increases in hydraulic pressure according to torque are provided by the regulator valve using stator torque reaction.
The stator shaft is splined to the stator in the torque converter, and its arm end contacts the regulator spring cap.
When the vehicle is accelerating or climbing (torque converter range), stator torque reaction acts on the stator shaft,
and the stator arm pushes the regulator spring cap in the direction of the arrow in proportion to the reaction. The
stator reaction spring compresses, and the regulator valve moves to increase the line pressure which is regulated by
the regulator valve. The line pressure reaches its maximum when the stator torque reaction reaches its maximum.
/ roRauE CONVERTER
STATOR SHAFT
REGULA~~ STATOR
REGULATOR VALVE
STATOR SHAFT ARM
REGULATOR SPRING CAP
14-56 BACK
Secondary Valve Body
The secondary valve body is on the main valve body. The secondary valve body contain shift valve C, shift valve D,
CPC valve 8, CPC valve C, the reverse control valve, and the reverse CPC valve.
SHIFT VALVE D
REVERSE CPC VALVE
SHIFTVALVEC
CPCVALVEB
REVERSE CONTROL VALVE SECONDARY VALVE BODY
Accumulator Body
The accumulator body is on the secondary valve body, and contains the 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, 4th, and 5th accumulators.
The 3rd accumulator is in the regulator valve body.
ACCUMULATOR
BODY
/
1ST ACCUMULATOR
2ND ACCUMULATOR
4TH ACCUMULATOR
BACK 14-57
Hydraulic Flow
Distribution of Hydraulic Pressure

As the engine turns, the ATF pump starts to operate. Automatic transmission fluid (ATF) is drawn through the ATF
strainer (filter) and discharged into the hydraulic circuit. Then, ATF flowing from the ATF pump becomes line pressure
that is regulated by the regulator valve. Torque converter pressure from the regulator valve enters the torque
converter through the lock-up shift valve and lock-up control valve, and it is discharged from the torque converter. The
torque converter check valve prevents torque converter pressure from rising.
The PCM controls shift solenoid valves A, B, C, and D ON and OFF, and the shift solenoid valves control shift solenoid
pressure to the shift valves. Applying shift solenoid pressure to the shift valves moves the position of the shift valve,
and switches the port of hydraulic pressure. The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A, B
and C. The AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves regulate hydraulic pressure, and apply the pressure to CPC
valves A, Band C.
When shifting between gears, the clutch is engaged by pressure from the CPC pressure mode. The PCM controls one
of the shift solenoid valves to move the position of the shift valve. This movement switches the port of CPC pressure
and line pressure. Line pressure is then applied to the clutch, and CPC pressure is released. Engaging the clutch with
line pressure mode happens when shifting is completed.
Hydraulic Pressure at the Port for use in the hydraulic circuit
Port Hydraulic pressure Port Hydraulic pressure

1 Line SC Shift solenoid valve C
2 Line SC' Shift solenoid valve C
3 Line SD Shift solenoid valve D
3' Line 10 1st clutch
3" Reverse CPC or Line 15 1st-hold clutch
3A Line 20 2nd clutch
3B ReverseCPC 30 3rd clutch
4 Line 40 4th clutch
4' Line 50 5th clutch
4" Line 51 5th clutch
4A CPCA 56 AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
4B CPCB 57 AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
4C CPCC 5R AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
5A CPCA 58 AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
5B CPCA or Line 90 Torque converter
5C CPC B or Line 90' Torque converter
5D CPCB 91 Torque converter
5E CPCC 91' Torque converter
5F CPCC 92 Torque converter
5G CPCC 93 ATFcooler
5H CPC B or Line 94 Torque converter
5J CPC B or Line 95 Lubrication
5K CPCA or Line 95' Lubrication
5L CPCAor Line 96 Torque converter
5M Line 99 Suction
5N CPCC X Drain
6 Modulator HX HiQh position drain
SA Shift solenoid valve A AX Air drain
SB Shift solenoid valve B - -
14-58 BACK
N Position
Line pressure (1) regulated by the regulator valve flows to shift solenoid valves. The PCM controls the shift solenoid
valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valves are as follows:
• Shift solenoid valve A is OFF, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA); shift valve A stays on the
left side.
• Shift solenoid valve 8 is turned ON, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve 8 pressure (S8); shift valve 8 and shift
valve E stay on the left side.
• Shift solenoid valve C is OFF, and opens the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC); shift valve C and shift valve
D move to the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve D is OFF, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD).
Line pressure (1) also flows to the modulator valve and becomes modulator pressure (6). Modulator pressure (6) flows
to the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves. The manual valve covers the port leading pressure to the clutches,
and hydraulic pressure is not applied to the clutches.
NOTE: When used, "left" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-59

Hydraulic Flow (cont'd)
D Position and S Position in Automatic Shifting Mode: 1st gear shifting from the N position
When shifting to the D position or S position from the N position, the condition of the shift solenoid valves remain the
same as in the N position. The manual valve is moved to the D position, and uncovers the port of line pressure (4)
leading to CPC valves A and C. The PCM controls the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and C, AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (56) flows to the CPC valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C pressure (58) flows to the CPC valve C. CPC valves A and C regulate line pressure (4), line pressure (4)
becomes CPC C pressure (4C) at the CPC valve C, and becomes CPC A pressure at CPC valve A. CPC C pressure (4C)
becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve D, and 1st clutch pressure flows to the 1st clutch. CPC A pressure (4A)
becomes 2nd clutch pressure (20) at shift valve B via shift valves A and C. The 1st clutch and 2nd clutch engage gently
with the CPC pressure mode.
NOTE: When used, "Ieft" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-60 BACK
D Position and S Position in Automatic Shifting Mode: Driving in1st gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift solenoid valve C covers the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure
(SC) to shift valve C, and shift valve 0 via shift valve E. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve B
remains ON. Shift valves C and 0 are moved to the left side, shift valve 0 switches the port of line pressure (4) and
CPC C pressure (4C) leading to the 1st clutch, and shift valve C switches the port of CPC A pressure (5A) releasing 2nd
clutch pressure. Line pressure (4) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve 0, and flows to the 1st clutch. The 1st
clutch is engaged securely with the line pressure mode.
1ST CLUTCHI 2ND
1ST 1ST·HOLD CLUTCH 2ND 2ND CLUTCH CLUTCH
ACCUMULATOR ACCUMULATOR ~SMISSION
PRESSURE
SWITCH
(cont'd)
BACK 14-61
D Position and S Po.sition in Automatic Shifting Mode: Shifting between 1st gear and 2nd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and shift
solenoid valve A uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) to shift valve A. Shift solenoid valves Band
C remain ON. Shift valve A is moved to the right side to uncover the port of CPC A pressure (4A) leading to the 2nd
clutch. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
A pressure (56) is applied to CPC valve A. CPC valve A regulates line pressure (4), and line pressure (4) becomes CPC A
pressure (4A). CPC A pressure (4A) flows to shift valve B via shift valves C and A, and becomes 2nd clutch pressure
(20) at shift valve B. The 2nd clutch is engaged in the CPC pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power
is transmitted because ofthe one-way clutch.
14-62 BACK
D Position and S Position in Automatic Shifting Mode: Driving in 2nd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and shift solenoid valve C uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve C
pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valves A and B remain ON. Shift valve C is moved to the right side to
switch the port of line pressure (4) and CPC A pressure (4A) leading to the 2nd clutch. CPC A pressure (5B) (5K)
changes to line pressure (5B) (5K) and 2nd clutch pressure (20) is changed to line pressure mode, and the 2nd clutch is
engaged in the line pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-
way clutch.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-63

D Position and S Position in Automatic Shifting Mode: Shifting between 2nd gear and 3rd gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift
solenoid valve C covers the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valves A and B
remain ON. Shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure (4) and CPC A pressure (4A)
leading to the 2nd clutch. Shift valve C also uncovers the port of CPC B pressure (4B) leading to the 3rd clutch. The
PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
pressure (56) is applied to CPC valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B pressure (57) is applied to
CPC valve B. CPC valve B regulates line pressure (4"), and line pressure (4") becomes CPC B pressure (4B). CPC B
pressure flows to shift valve A via shift valves C and B, and becomes 3rd clutch pressure (30) at shift valve A. The 2nd
clutch pressure (20) is changed to CPC pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged with the CPC pressure mode. The
1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
14-64 BACK
D Position and S Position in Automatic Shifting Mode: Driving in 3rd gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve 8 OFF, and shift solenoid valve 8 uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve 8
pressure (S8) to shift valve 8. Shift solenoid valves A and C remain ON. Shift valve 8 is moved to the right side to
switch the port of line pressure (5C), CPC 8 pressure (5J) leading to the 3rd clutch, and 2nd clutch pressure (20)
releasing 2nd clutch pressure. CPC 8 pressure (5J) changes to line pressure (5J) and 3rd clutch pressure (30) is
changed to line pressure mode, and the 3rd clutch is engaged with the line pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also
engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-65
D Position and S Position in Automatic Shifting Mode: Shifting between 3rd gear and 4th gear
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C OFF, and shift
solenoid valve C uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valve A
remains ON, and shift solenoid valve B remains OFF. Shift valve C is moved to the right side to switch the port of line
pressure (4) and CPC B pressure (4B) leading to the 3rd clutch. Shift valve C also uncovers the port of CPC A pressure
(4A) leading to the 4th clutch. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A pressure (56) is applied to the CPC valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B pressure (57) is applied to CPC valve B. CPC valve A regulates line pressure (4), and line pressure (4) becomes
CPC A pressure (4A). CPC A pressure (4A) flows to shift valve B via shift valves C and A, and becomes 4th clutch
pressure (40) at shift valve B. The 3rd clutch pressure (30) is changed to CPC pressure mode, and the 4th clutch is
engaged in the CPC pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because ofthe one-
way clutch.
14-66 BACK
D Position and S Position in Automatic Shifting Mode: Driving in 4th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve A OFF, and shift solenoid valve A covers the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure
(SA) to the shift valve A. Shift solenoid valves Band C remain OFF. The shift valve A is moved to the left side to switch
the port of pressure (5B), CPC A pressure (SA) (5L) leading to the 4th clutch, and 3rd clutch pressure (30) releasing 3rd
clutch pressure. CPC A pressure (5L) changes to line pressure (5L) and 4th clutch pressure (40) is changed to line
pressure mode, and the 4th clutch is engaged with the line pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no
power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-67
D Position: Shifting between 4th gear and 5th gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve C ON, and shift
solenoid valve C covers the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC) to shift valve C. Shift solenoid valve A remains
OFF, and shift solenoid valve B remains OFF. Shift valve C is moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure
(4) and CPC A pressure (4A) leading to the 4th clutch. Shift valve C also uncovers the port of CPC B pressure (4B)
leading to the 5th clutch. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A and B. AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A pressure (56) is applied to the CPC valve A, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
pressure (57) is applied to CPC valve B. CPC valve B regulates line pressure (4"), and line pressure (4") becomes CPC 8
pressure (4B). CPC 8 pressure (4B) flows to shift valve A via shift valves C and B, and becomes 5th clutch pressure (51)
at shift valve A. The 4th clutch pressure (40) is changed to CPC pressure mode, and the 5th clutch is engaged in the
CPC pressure mode. The 1st clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
14-68 BACK
D Position: Driving in 5th gear
The PCM turns shift solenoid valve B ON, and shift solenoid valve B covers the port of shift solenoid valve B pressure
(SB) to shift valve B. Shift solenoid valve A remains OFF, and shift solenoid valve C remains ON. Shift valve B is
moved to the left side to switch the port of line pressure (5H), CPC B pressure (5D) leading to the 5th clutch, and 4th
clutch pressure (40) releasing 4th clutch pressure. CPC B pressure (5H) changes to line pressure (5H) and 5th clutch
pressure (51) (50) is changed to line pressure mode, and the 5th clutch is engaged in the line pressure mode. The 1st
clutch is also engaged, but no power is transmitted because of the one-way clutch.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-69
Driving in 1st gear (engaged with 1st and 1st-hold clutches) in the sequential sportshift mode, and the D-paddleshift
mode
Line pressure (.1) regulated by the regulator valve flows to shift solenoid valves. The PCMcontrols the shift solenoid
valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions of the shift valves are as follows:
left side.
• Shift solenoid valve C is turned ON, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve C pressure (SC); shift valve C and shift
valve D stay' on the left side.
• Shift solenoid valve D is OFF, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD).
Line pressure (4) becomes 1st clutch pressure (10) at shift valve D, and flows to the 1st clutch. The 1st clutch is
engaged. The PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C pressure (58) is applied to CPC valve C via the lock-up shift valve. CPC valve C regulates line pressure (4), and
line pressure (4) becomes CPC C pressure (4C). CPC C pressure (4C) flows to shift valve 8 via shift valves D, E, and C,
and becomes 1st-hold clutch pressure (15) at shift valve 8. 1st-hold clutch pressure (15) is applied to the 1st-hold
clutch, and the 1st-hold clutch is engaged.
NOTE: When used, 'ileft" or "right" indicates direction on the hydraulic circuit.
14-70 BACK
R Position: Shifting to the R position from the P or N position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions
of the shift valves are as follows:
left side.
• Shift solenoid valve 8 is turned ON, and closes the port of shift solenoid valve 8 pressure (58); shift valve 8 and shift
o move to the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve 0 is turned ON, and opens the port of shift solenoid valve 0 pressure (SO); reverse control valve
moves to the right side.
The manual valve is moved to the R position, and line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) atthe manual valve. Line
pressure (3) passes through the reverse control valve, and becomes line pressure (3A), then flows to the servo valve.
Line pressure (3A) pushes the servo valve to the reverse position. Line pressure (3) also flows to the reverse CPC valve,
and becomes reverse CPC pressure (38) (3"). Reverse CPC pressure (3") becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at the
manual valve, and 5th clutch pressure (50) flows to the 5th clutch. The 5th clutch is engaged with reverse CPC pressure
mode.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-71
R Position: Driving in reverse gear

As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve A ON, and shift
solenoid valve A uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve A pressure (SA) to shift valve A. Shift valve A is moved to
the right side to switch the port of line pressure (3') and reverse CPC pressure.(3B) leading to the 5th clutch. Line
pressure (3) flows to the manual valve via the servo valve and shift valve A, and becomes 5th clutch pressure (50) at
the manual valve. The 5th clutch pressure (50) flows to the 5th clutch, and the 5th clutch is engaged with the line
pressure mode.
Reverse Inhibitor Control

When the R position is selected while the vehicle is moving forward at a speed over 6 mph (10 km/h), the PCM
commands shift solenoid valve D to remain OFF so that shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD) is not applied to the
reverse control valve. Line pressure (3) stops at the reverse control valve, and is not applied to the servo valve. No
power is transmitted to the reverse direction.
14-72 BACK
P Position
The PCM controls the shift solenoid valves ON and OFF. The conditions of the shift solenoid valves and the positions
of the shift valves are as follows:
left side.
o move to the right side.
• Shift solenoid valve 0 is turned ON, and opens the port of shift solenoid valve 0 pressure (SO); reverse control valve
moves to the right side.
The manual valve is moved to the P position, and line pressure (1) becomes line pressure (3) at the manual valve. Line
pressure (3) passes through the reverse control valve, and becomes line pressure (3A), then flows to the servo valve.
Line pressure (3A) pushes the servo valve to the reverse position. Line pressure (3) flows to the manual valve via the
reverse CPC valve and shift valve A, and stops at the manual valve. Hydraulic pressure is not applied the clutches.
BACK 14-73
Lock-up System
The lock-up mechanism of the torque converter clutch operates in 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th gears in the D position, and
2nd, 3rd, and 4th gears in the S position. The pressurized fluid is drained from the back of the torque converter
through a fluid passage, causing the torque converter clutch piston to be held against the torque converter cover. As
this takes place, the mainshaft rotates at the same speed as the engine crankshaft. Together with the hydraulic control,
the PCM optimizes the timing and amount of the lock-up mechanism. When shift solenoid valve D is turned on by the
PCM, shift solenoid valve D pressure switches the lock-up shift valve lock-up on and off. AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C, the lock-up control valve, and lock-up timing valve control the amount of lock-up.
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up ON (Engaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid in the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston is drained off, and
fluid entering from the chamber between the pump and stator exerts pressure through the torque converter clutch
piston against the torque converter cover. The torque converter clutch piston engages with the torque converter cover;
torque converter clutch lock-up ON, and the mainshaft rotates at the same as the engine.
I Power flow I TORQUE CONVERTER

CLUTCH PISTON
\ DAMPER SPRING
The power flows by way of:
Engine
fr'=·===::;;:zj'i;~"'--_- TURBINE
~
Drive plate
~
Torque converter cover
~
Torque converter clutch piston
COVER ------
TORQUE CONVERTER
~
Damper spring
~
Turbine
~
Mainshaft
Torque Converter Clutch Lock-up OFF (Disengaging Torque Converter Clutch)

Fluid entered from the chamber between the torque converter cover and the torque converter clutch piston passes
through the torque converter and goes out from the chambers between the turbine and the stator, and between the
pump and the stator. As a result, the torque converter clutch piston moves away from the torque converter cover, and
the torque converter clutch lock-up is released; torque converter clutch lock-up OFF.
I Power flow I TURBINE PUMP
The power flows by way of: STATOR

Engine
~
Drive plate TORQUE CONVERTER
~ COVER
Torque converter cover
~
Pump
~
Turbine
~
Mainshaft
MAINSHAFT
14-74 BACK
No Lock-up
The PCM commands shift solenoid valve 0 to remain OFF, and shift solenoid valve 0 covers the port of shift solenoid
valve 0 pressure (SO) to the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift valve is in the right side, and uncovers the port
leading torque converter pressure (92) to the left side of the torque converter. Torque converter pressure (92) from
regulator valve becomes torque converter pressure (94) at the lock-up shift valve, and enters into the left side ofthe
torque converter to disengage the torque converter clutch. The torque converter clutch is OFF.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-75
Lock-up System (cont'd)
Partial Lock-up
As the speed of the vehicle reaches the programmed value, the PCM turns shift solenoid valve D ON, and shift
solenoid valve D uncovers the port of shift solenoid valve D pressure (SD) to the lock-up shift valve. The lock-up shift
valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port of torque converter pressure (91) leading to the right side of the
torque converter to engage the torque converter clutch. The PCM also controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C, and AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58) is applied to the lock-up control valve and lock-
up timing valve. When AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58) is low, torque converter pressure
(91) from the lock-up timing valve is low. The torque converter clutch is engaged partially. AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve C pressure (58) increases, and the lock-up timing valve is moved to the left side to uncover the port
leading torque converter pressure to high. Under this condition, the torque converter clutch is engaged by pressure
from the right side of the torque converter; this condition is partial lock-up.
IGnl-lr·g·I·----· ....f - - LINE PRESSURE II)
~I+..Ib._ -__- AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C PRESSURE 158)
14-76 BACK
Full Lock-up
When the vehicle speed further increases, the PCM controls AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C to increase
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58). AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C pressure (58)
is applied to the lock-up control valve and lock-up timing valve, and the lock-up control valve and lock-up timing valve
are moved to the left side. Torque converter pressure (94) from the left side of the torque converter releases at the
lock-up control valve, and lock-up timing valve uncovers the port of torque converter pressure (91) leading to the right
side of the torque converter. Torque converter back pressure is released fully, and torque converter clutch is engaged
fully.
Il3lltit.I.I-----~-- LINE PRESSURE (11
rl~~~~I~=:F1r*..l=-- AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE C PRESSURE (581
BACK 14-77
Circuit Diagram - PCM AfT Control System
UNDER-HOOD RJS£JRELAY BOX UNDER-DASH RJSE/RElAY BOX
No.IIIGOA) No.211G)150A)
No. 12 liSA)
Fr===~~~~~~;;;;=Il35 BRN POWERTRAIN CONTROL

MODULE IPCM)
Alf Tol2V
GEAR
POSITION
INDICATOR
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
L--=-Y'~-
161 C36
BLK/VEL ---fr- GRY
ATPRVS B22
""'!!"-"''''-O=- RED/WHT - - - - - - - - - ,
ATPFWD B28
--""-'-''''-0=- BLU/VEL - - - - - - - ,
CAN ATPS BI5
CONTROLLER --=~=---REO --------,
ATPO B21
--=-~"'-'---- VEL - - - - - , STARTER
ATPN BI2 CUT RElAY
--"'-'-"-¢-=-- REO/B~
ATPR BI4
ATPP BI3
L( f1
BLU/WHT
GIOI
v~
SHifT @ RED - I r-- BRN G501
~~NOID ~ B L K + PNK--It, PNK _ _A2_7-¢---SL_S_ _ _ _--....
~K ~
~ VEL - I
BLU-I
h LTGRNT LTGRN
A2 P-PIN
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH
-I WHT I- WHT
CABLE REEL
PADOLESHIfTER+
IUPSHifT SWITCH)
:1:rn~~
S-UPP BI6WHT/BLU 16 16
A
SWITCH 2 LTGRN
B~
~ -
MULTIPLEX
INTEGRATED
BRAKE PEDAl. G503 CONTROL PADDLE SHIFlER-
POSITION SWITCH
WHT--V-- V
UNIT IMlCU) 100WNSHIFT SWITCH)
:1:rn~
LTGRN LTGRN
A40 BKSW
S-DN P B40GRN/WHT -I ORN I- ORN 17 17
MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT IMICU)
G502
PCM HamessConnectorTennrnal Locations
Ir II
I'l /3 41s V 7 8 I9 I 1111234151678191

/11 12 131'41'61'6 1718/ /10 11 12 13114!,61,6 17 18 19
2021 22 >< 23 24 25 1202122 >< 23V 25
2627 28/130131132 33 34 36 126272829130131132VI/V
,1361/1 / 1/140 141 4243 1441 ,j361/138 39140141 42 431441
'-----'
AI44P1 B144P1 CI44P1
Terminal skle of female tennfnals
14·78 BACK
AI44P) BI44PI CI44PI

Tennlnal side of female tenninals
BACK 14-79
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC P0107: Manifold Absolute Pressure 8. Monitor the OBD status for P01 07 in the DTCs/
(MAP) Sensor Circuit Low Voltage Input Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the result indicate PASSED?
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other DTCs
were indicated on step 7, go to the indicated DTC's
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) troubleshooting .•
again.
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
3. Check whether DTC P0107 is indicated in the DTCs/ connections and loose terminals at the MAP sensor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
Is DTC P0107 indicated in the PGM-FI system? the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0107 in the PGM-FI result comes on.
System (see page 11-94).•
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check whether DTC P0107 is indicated in the DTCs/

Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 5.

time.•
5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not

have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10).
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II).
7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT

Mode Menu with the HDS.
YES-Check for poor connections and loose

NO-Go to step 8.
14-80 BACK
OTC P0108: Manifold Absolute Pressure 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0108 in the DTCs/
(MAP) Sensor Circuit High Voltage Input Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) troubleshooting .•
again.
3. Check whether DTC P0108 is indicated in the DTCs/ connections and loose terminals at the MAP sensor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. and the PCM. If the PCM was updated, substitute a
Is DTe P010B indicated in the PGM-FI system? the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0108 in the PGM-FI result comes on.
System (see page 11-96).•
NO-Go to step 4.

YES-Go to step 5.

time.•

6. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II).


(see page 14-10), then recheck.lfthe PCM was
NO-Go to step 8.
BACK 14-81
DTC P0335~ Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0335 in the DTCs/
A No signal Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
2. Start the engine. troubleshooting .•
3. Check whether DTC P0335 is indicated in the DTCs/ NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the CKP sensor
Is DTC P0335 indicated in the PGM-FI system? known-good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If
the PCM was substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS
YES-Troubleshootfor DTC P0335 in the PGM-FI indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
System (see page 11-146).• result comes on.
NO-Go to step 4.

YES-Go to step 5.

time .•



NO-Go to step 8.
14-82 BACK
DTe P0339: Crankshaft Position (CKP) Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0339 in the DTCs/
A Intermittent Interruption Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
and any on-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds. troubleshooting .•
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the CKP sensor
and the PCM.lfthe PCM was updated, substitute a
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P0339 in the PGM-FI indicates NOT COMPLETED, keep idling until a
System (see page 11-149) .• result comes on.
NO-Go to step 4.

YES-Go to step 5.

time .•



NO-Go to step 8.
BACK 14-83
DTC P0365: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0365 in the DTCs/
B No signal Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
2. Start the engine. troubleshooting .•
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the CMP sensor
NO-Go to step 4.

YES-Go to step 5.

time .•



terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 8.
14-84 BACK
DTC P0369: Camshaft Position (CMP) Sensor 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0369 in the DTCs/
8 Intermittent Interruption Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. original PCM(see page 11-252). If any other DTCs
2. Start the engine, and let it idle for 10 seconds. troubleshooti ng .•
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. connections and loose terminals at the CMP sensor
and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a
Is DTe P0369 indicated in the PGM-FI system? known-good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If
NO-Go to step 4.

YES-Go to step 5.

time .•



terminals at the CMP sensor and the PCM. If the
NO-Go to step 8.
BACK 14-85
OTC P0705: Short in Transmission Range 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch Circuit (Multiple Shift-position Input)
5. Disconnect the transmission range switch
NOTE: subharness connector.
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4).
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem 7. Verify the ATP P, ATP R, ATP N, ATP D, ATP S, ATP
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the FWD, and ATP RVS inputs with the HDS in the AfT
transmission. data list.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Do any of the inputs indicate ON?
2. Start the engine. YES-Repair short in the circuitthat indicates ON:
3. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever • ATP P circuit: between PCM connector terminal
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in B13 and transmission range switch subharness
each position, and monitor the OBD status for connector terminal No.7.
P0705 in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu • ATP R circuit: between PCM connector terminal
for a pass/fail. B14 and transmission range switch subharness
Does the result indicate FAILED? • ATP N circuit: between PCM connector terminal
B12 and transmission range switch subharness
YES-Go to step 4. connector terminal No.3.
• ATP D circuit: between PCM connector terminal
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this B21 and transmission range switch subharness
time. Check for an intermittent short in the wire connector terminal No.9.
between the transmission range switch and the • ATP S circuit: between PCM connector terminal
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return B15 and transmission range switch subharness
to step 2 and recheck. connector terminal No.4.
• ATP FWD circuit: between PCM connector
terminal B28 and transmission range switch
subharness connector terminal No.5.
• ATP RVS circuit: between PCM connector
terminal B22 and transmission range switch
subharness connector terminal No.2.
Go to step 8 after repairing the circuit.
NO-Check the transmission range switch

(see page 14-290). If the transmission range switch
is OK, replace the transmission range switch
subharness, then go to step 8.
14-86 BACK
10. With the brake pedal pressed, move the shift lever
through all positions. Stop for at least 1 second in
each position.

Is ore P070S indicated?

YES-Replace the transmission range switch
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Monitor the OBD status for P0705 in the DTCs/

Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate PASSED?

DTCs were indicated on step 11, go to the indicated
DTC's troubleshooting .•

connections and loose terminals at the
transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
return to step 9 and recheck.
BACK 14-87
DTC P0706: Open in Transmission Range 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch Circuit
NOTE: connector .
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 8. Connect the transmission range switch connector
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). terminal No.6 to body ground with a jumper wire .
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and verify the ATP
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the FWD input in the AfT data list.
transmission.
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
r--
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift, make sure it is securely
supported, and allow all four wheels to rotate freely. 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10
3. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off (the light on
ATP FWD (BLK/BLU)
the VSA OFF switch comes on). Run the engine in
the D position until the vehicle speed reaches JUMPER WIRE
25 mph (40 km/h), then slow down, stop the wheels, _....
and turn the ignition switch OFF. =
4. Run the engine in the D position until the vehicle
speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h), then slow down
and stop the wheels. /sATP FWD ON?
5. Verify the ATP FWD input with the HDS in the AfT YES-Go to step 9.
data list while the shift lever is in the D and S
positions. NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM
connector terminal 828 and the transmission range
/sATP FWD ON in both D and S positions? switch, then go to step 11.

time.•
NO-Go to step 6.
14-88 BACK
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
10. Check for continuity between transmission range 12. Run the engine in the D position until the vehicle
switch connector terminal No.5 and body ground. speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h), then slow down,
stop the wheels, and turn the ignition switch OFF.
TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH CONNECTOR
13. Run the engine in the D position until the vehicle
GND (VEL/RED) speed reaches 25 mph (40 km/h),then slowdown
and stop the wheels.
1 2 345
6 7 8 9 10 Mode Menu with the HDS.

= YES-Check for poor connections and loose
Wire side of female terminals terminals at the transmission range switch and the
Is there continuity? NO-Go to step 15.
YES-Replace the transmission range switch 15. Monitor the OBD status for P0706 in the DTCs/
(see page 14-292), then go to step 11. Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail..
NO-Repair open in the wire between the Does the result indicate PASSED?
transmission range switch and ground (G101), or
repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 11. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
DTCs were indicated on step 14, goto the indicated

transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
BACK 14-89
DTC P0711: Problem in ATF Temperature 4. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR with the HDS.
Sensor Circuit
Does the ATF temperature read about the same as
NOTE: the ECT SENSOR?
anyon-board snapshot, and review General YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM .•
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the
transmission. NO-Replace the ATF temperature sensor
1. Check the ATF temperature with the HDS in the AfT
data list. 5. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Does the ATF temperature exceed the ambient-air 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
temperature? position through all five gears.
YES-Record the ATF temperature. Leave the 7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
engine off for more than 30 minutes, and go to Mode Menu with the HDS.
step 2.
NO-Record the ATF temperature. Test the stall
speed RPM (see page 14-211) three times. Go to YES-Check for poor connections and loose
step 2 after stall speed testing. terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the
2. Check the ATF temperature with the HDS.
NO-Go to step 8.
Does the ATF temperature change?
YES-Leave the engine off for more than Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
30 minutes, and go to step 3.
NO-Replace the ATF temperature sensor
(see page 14-237), then go to step 5. YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
3. Check the ECT SENSOR with the HDS. DTC's troubleshooting .•
Is the ECT SENSOR equal to the ambient-air NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
temperature? connections and loose terminals at the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
YES-Go to step 4. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
step 6 and recheck.
NO-Leave the engine off until the ECT SENSOR
reads the same as ambient-air temperature, then
goto step 4.
14-90 BACK
DTC P0712: Short inATF Temperature Sensor 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 6. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
anyon-board snapshot, and review General
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 7. Check for continuity between ATF temperature
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem sensor connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
transmission. ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
1. Check the ATF temperature sensor voltage with the

HDS in the AfT data list.
2
Is theATF TEMP SENSOR voltage 0.07 Vor ATFT (BLU/YELI
less?
Q.
'
YES-Go to step 2.
=
time. Check for an intermittent short in the ATFT Wire side offemale terminals
wire between theATF temperature sensor and the
PCM .•
2. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector
at the transmission end cover. YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
connector terminal B27 and ATF temperature
3. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR voltage with the sensor connector terminal No.2, then go to step 12.
HDS.
NO-Go to step 8.
Is theATF TEMP SENSOR voltage 0.07 Vor
less? 8. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
YES-Go to step 4. substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10).
NO-Replace the ATF temperature sensor 9. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
(see page 14-237), then go to step 12. position through all five gears.


NO-Go to step 11.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-91
11. Monitor the OBD status for P0712 in the DTCs/ 12. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
13. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
Does the result indicate PASSED? position through all five gears.
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is 14. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the Mode Menu with the HDS.
original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other DTCs
were indicated on step 10, go to the indicated DTC's Is DTe P0712 indicated?
troubleshooting .•
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the
connections and loose terminals at the ATF PCM, then go to step 1.
temperature sensor and the PCM. If the PCM was
updated, substitute a known-good PCM (see page NO-Go to step 15.
to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, 15. Monitor the OBD status for P0712 in the DTCs/
return to step 9 and recheck. Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicatePASSED?

NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, go to step 1. If

the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
step 13 and recheck.
14-92 BACK
OTC P0713: Open in ATF Temperature Sensor 6. Measure the voltage between ATF temperature
Circuit sensor connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
NOTE: ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR

~
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem
transmission. SG2 (GRN/VEU ~TFT (BLU/yELJ .
1. Check the ATF TEMP SENSOR voltage with the

Does the ATF TEMP SENSOR voltage exceed Wire side of female terminals
4.93 V?
YES-Go to step 2. Is there about 5 V?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Replace the ATF temperature sensor
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals (see page 14-237), then go to step 16.
at the ATF temperature sensor and the PCM .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. connector terminal B33 and the ATF temperature
sensor connector, then go to step 16.
3. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector
at the transmission end cover.
5. Measure the voltage between ATF temperature

sensor connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
ATF TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR
~ ~TFr (BLU/YELJ
=
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-93
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Connect the ATF temperature sensor connector.
8. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 12. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
9. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10).
10. Check for continuity between PCM connector 13. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
terminal B27 and ATF temperature sensor position through all five gears.
ATF PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
TEMPERATURE Mode Menu with the HDS.
SENSOR
CONNECTOR Is DTC P0713 indicated?

ATFT PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
(BLU/YELI
NO-Go to step 15.

Wire side of Terminal side of Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
female terminals female terminals
YES-Check for poor connections and loose complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other DTCs
PCM. If the connections are OK, go to step 11. were indicated on step 13, go to the indicated DTC's
connector terminal B27 and the ATF temperature NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
sensor, then go to step 16. connections and loose terminals at the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was
14-10), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go
to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
14-94 BACK
16. Connect the ATF temperature sensor connector.

position through all five gears.


terminals at the ATF temperature sensor and the
NO-Go to step 20.

YES- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other


connections and loose terminals at the ATF
temperature sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
BACK 14-95
OTC P0716: Problem in Input Shaft 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
OTC P0717: Problem in Input Shaft
(Mainshaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No Signal 8. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
Input)
NOTE: terminals C40 and body ground, and between C44
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and and body ground.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
transmission.
1. Clea r the DTC with the HDS.

supported, and allow all four wheels to rotate freely.
3. Check for proper input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor installation (see page 14-233). If the sensor
is installed improperly correct problem, then go to Terminal side of female terminals
step 36.
4. Start the engine, and turn the VSA off (the light on
the VSA OFF switch comes on). Run the engine in YES-Go to step 10.
the D position, and hold the vehicle at speeds over
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds. Slow NO-Repair open in the wires between PCM
down and stop the wheels. connector terminals C40, C44 and ground (G101),
or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 36.
5. Monitor the OBD status for P0716 or P0717 in the
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Does the result indicate FAILED?
YES-Go to step 6.

time. Check for loose or poor connections at the
PCM and input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connectors. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
14-96 BACK
10. Connect PCM connector C (44P). 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 15. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
sensor connector.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal C13 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No.1.
13. Measure the voltage between input shaft
PCM CONNECTOR C 144P) INPUT SHAFT
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No.1 IMAINSHAFT)
and body ground. SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
vCC1 Q
INPUT SHAFT IMAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR IVEL/RED)
L1 2 3 ~1516 7 8 91 V~IVE L/REDI
1011 1213114116116 1718 9
2021 22
>< 23V26 11 I2 I3 1
VVV
2627 28 29130131132
136 1/ 36 39140141 4243 441
Terminal side of Wire side of

= female terminals female terminals
YES-Go to step 17.

Is there about 5 V?
YES-Go to step 18. connector terminal C13 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor, then go to step 36.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-97
IVCC1 (VEL/RED) 20. Check for continuity between input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No.2
111 2 8 1141616 7 8 9\ and body ground.
1011 1218114116116 171819
2021 122 >< 28V 26
2627 28~180181182 VV/ INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
1136 / 36 89140141 4248 441
~
Q
= ~MIREDI
Is there continuity? =
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM Wire side offemale terminals
connector terminal C13 and the input shaft
NO-Check for poor connections and loose
terminals atthe PCM.lfthe connections are OK, go YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
to step 32. connector terminal B17 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
step 36.
NO-Go to step 21.
14-98 BACK
21. Check for continuity between PCM connector 22. Connect PCM connector B (44P).
terminal C14 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No.3. 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
INPUT SHAFT PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
(MAINSHAFT) 24. Measure the voltage between input shaft
SPEED SENSOR (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminals
CONNECTOR No.2 and No.3.
Q SG1
(GRN/WHT)
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
111 2 3 4 516 7 8 91 SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
SG1(G RN/WHT)
,---, 1011 1213114115116 1718 9
11 1 2 1 3 1 2021 22.>< 23/25
Ilk"
~.
2627 28129130131132
1136 1/ 36 39140141 4243 441
NM CRED'l§lSG1CGRN/WHTJ
Wire side of Terminal side of
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the input Is there about 5 V?

shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor connector and PCM
connector terminal C14, then go to step 36. YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Go to step 25.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-99
25. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 28. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
connector.
terminal B17 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed 30. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position,
sensor connector terminal No.2. and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds.
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) INPUT SHAFT
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR 31. Monitorthe OBD status for P0716 or P0717 in the
CONNECTOR DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
.Q
NM (RED) Does the result indicate FAILED?
11 / 3 415V1 8 91
~M( RED)
/11 12131141151161 718/ r YES-Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
2021 22>< 232425 11 1 2 I3 1 sensor (see page 14-233), then go to step 36.
2627 26 !/l30131Iaz 333435
!136 / !/!/14014142 43 441 NO-Go to step 32.

YES-Go to step 32.

connector terminal B17 and the input shaft
14-100 BACK
32. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 36. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 37. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position,
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 mph
33. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position, (48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds.
and hold the vehicle at speeds over 30 mph
(48 km/h) for more than 10 seconds. 38. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
Mode Menu with the HDS. Is DTC P0716 or P0717 indicated?
Is DTC P0716 or P0717 indicated? YES-Check for poor connections and loose
terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known- sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. NO-Go to step 39.
NO-Go to step 35. 39. Monitor the OBD status for P0716 or P0717 in the
DTCs/Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. Does the result indicate PASSED?
Does the result indicate PASSED? YES-Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is DTC's troubleshooting .•
complete. If the PCM was su bstituted, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other DTCs NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
were indicated on step 34, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
troubleshooting .• (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to
step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor return to step 37 and recheck.
connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
(mains haft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
substituted, go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to step 33 and recheck.
BACK 14-101
DTC P0718: Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed 6. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
Sensor Intermittent Failure connector.
NOTE: 7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and position through all five gears.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0718 in the DTCs/
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem Freeze Data in Aff Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
transmission. Does the result indicate FAILED?
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES-Go to step 9.
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0 NO-Troubleshooting is complete. If the HDS
position through all five gears. indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 7 and
recheck.
Freeze Data in Aff Mode Menu for a pass/fail. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the result indicate FAILED? 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4. 11. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
NO"';'lntermittent failure, the system is OK at this 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
time. Check for poor connections or loose terminals terminals C40 and body ground, and between C44
at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and the and body ground.
PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
to step 2 and recheck. PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
5. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed

sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact.
Are the connector terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair the connector terminals, then go to
step 6. Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in the wires between PCM

connector terminals C40, C44 and ground (G101),
14-102 BACK
14. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 18. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P).
sensor connector.
19. Check for continuity between input shaft
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No.2
and body ground.
16. Measure the voltage between input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No.1 INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
and body ground. SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT)
~
~M'REDI

=

Is there about 5 V? connector terminal 817 and the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
(cont'd)
BACK 14-103
20. Connect PCM connector 8 (44P). 23. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 24. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P).
22. Measure the voltage between input shaft 25. Check for continuity between PCM connector
(mainshaft) speed sensor connector terminal No.2 terminal 817 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
and body ground. sensor connector terminal No.2.
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) INPUT SHAFT
·INPUT SHAFT (MAINSHAFT) (MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
Q
~
NM(RED)
111 / 3 416V 7 a 91
~M( RED)
~MIREDI I I I l2l~l4~l6 17laV r
2021 22 >< 232426 11 12 I 31
627 28/130131132 333436
= 1136 V VV!40141 4243 441
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of Wire side of

Is there about 5 V? Is there continuity?
YES-Replace the input shaft (mainshaft) speed YES-Go to step 30.

sensor (see page 14-233), then go to step 34.
NO-Go to step 23. connector terminal 817 and the input shaft
14-104 BACK
28. Check for continuity between PCM connector 1VCC1 (VEL/RED)
terminal C13 and input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No.1. ill 2 3 1141516 7 6 91
1011 1213114115116 1716 9
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) INPUT SHAFT 22::>< 23V25
2021
(MAINSHAFT) 29130131132VVV
25 27 2B
SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR : 136 / 36 39140141 4243 441
vCC1 Q
(VEL/RED) Q
111 2 3 41516 7 6 91 V~(VE L/RED)
1011 1213114115116 1716 9
=
202122 >< 23V25 11 12 131 Terminal side of female terminals
627 2B~130131132
VVV
1136 / 36 39140141 4243 441 Is there continuity?
Terminal side of Wire side of YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
female terminals female terminals connector terminal C13 and the input shaft
YES-Go to step 29. terminals at the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
sensor and the PCM. If the connections are OK, go
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM to step 30.
connector terminal C13 and the input shaft
(cont'd)
BACK 14-105
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 35. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
position through all five gears. 36. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
Mode Menu with the HDS. Is DTC P0718 indicated?
Is DTC P0718 indicated? YES-Check for poor connections and loose

terminals atthe input shaft (mainshaft) speed
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- sensor and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 33. 37. Monitor the OBD status for P0718 in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. Does the result indicate PASSED?

YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is DTC's troubleshooting .•
were indicated on step 32, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
troubleshooting .• (mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go to
NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor return to step 35 and recheck.
connections and loose terminals at the input shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the PCM
14-106 BACK
DTC P0721: Problem in Output Shaft 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit
DTC P0722: Problem in Output Shaft
(Countershaft) Speed Sensor Circuit (No 8. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
Signal Input)
NOTE: terminals C40 and body ground, and between C44
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and and body ground .
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
transmission.

3. Check for proper output shaft (counters haft) speed =

sensor installation (see page 14-233). Ifthe sensor
is installed improperly correct problem, then go to Terminal side of female terminals
step 36.
4. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more YES-Go to step 10.
than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
5. Monitor the OBD status for P0721 or P0722 in the connectorterminals C40, C44 and ground (G101),
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. or repair poor ground (G101), then go to step 36.
YES-Go to step 6.

time. Check for loose or poor connections at the
PCM and the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connectors. If the HDS indicates NOT
(cont'd)
BACK 14-107
10. Connect PCM connector 8 (44P). 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
11. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed 15. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P).
sensor connector.
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal 818 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connectorterminal No.1.
13. Measure the voltage between output shaft
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) OUTPUT SHAFT
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal (COUNTERSHAFT)
No.1 and body ground. SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)

Q
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR VCC2 (YEL/BLU)
VCC2
111 / 3 41 6 JL:7 8 9J
(~BL U)
It" 11 121~1411~6 1718V
I2D 21 22>< 232426
2627 2BIVI3D131 132 333436
11 1 2 1 31
1136 V V VI4D141 4243 441

= female terminals female terminals
Wire side offemale terminals Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 17.

Is there about 5 V?
NO-Repair open inthe wire between PCM
YES-Go to step 18. connector terminal 818 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor, then go to step 36.
NO-Go to step 14.
14-108 BACK
PCM CONNECTOR B (44PI
VCC2 (VEL/BLUI 20. Check for continuity between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal
111 / 3 4151/ 7 8 91 No.2 and body ground.
V 1718V
11 1213114115116
2021 22>< 232425
2627 281/130131132 33134 35 OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFTI
1136 1/ 1/1/140141 4243 441
~
Q
= ~c (BLK/BLUI
/s there continuity? =
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM Wire side of female terminals
connector terminal 818 and the output shaft
terminals at the PCM. Ifthe connections are OK, go YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
to step 32. connector terminal C43 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
step 36.
NO-Go to step 21.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-109
21. Check for continuity between PCM connector 22. Connect PCM connector 8 (44P).
terminal 833 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No.3. 23. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
PCM CONNECTOR B (44PI OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFTI 24. Measure the voltage between output shaft
SPEED SENSOR (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminals
CONNECTOR No.2 and No.3.
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFTI

SG2 (GRN/YELI
SG2 (GRN/YELI
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the output Is there about 5 V?

shaft (countershaft) speed sensor connector and
PCM connector terminal 833, then go to step 36. YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Go to step 25.
14-110 BACK
25. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 28. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector.
terminal C43 and output shaft (countershaft) speed 30. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
sensor connector terminal No.2. with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more
than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44P) OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR 31. Monitor the OBD status for P0721 or P0722 in the
CONNECTOR DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-Replace the output shaft (countershaft)

speed sensor (see page 14-233), then go to step 36.
NO-Go to step 32.

YES-Go to step 32.

connector terminal C43 and the output shaft
(cont'd)
BACK 14-111
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 37. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position
with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more
33. Start the engine, run the vehicle in the D position than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels.
with engine speed 2,000 rpm or higher for more
than 10 seconds. Slow down and stop the wheels. 38. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
Mode Menu with the HDS. Is DTC P0721 or P0722 indicated?
Is DTC P0721 or P0722 indicated? YES-Check for poor connections and loose
terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed
NO-Go to step 35. 39. Monitor the OBD status for P0721 or P0722 in the
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. Does the result indicate PASSED?

were indicated on step 34, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
troubleshooting .• (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go
connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. If the
14-112 BACK
OTe P0723: Output Shaft (Countershaft) 6. Connect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
Speed Sensor Intermittent Failure sensor connector.
NOTE: 7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0

• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and position through all five gears .
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0723 in the DTCs/
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
transmission. Does the result indicate FAILED?
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. YES-Go to step 9.
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0 NO-Troubleshooting is complete.lfthe HDS
position through all five gears. indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 7 and
recheck.
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Does the result indicate FAILED? 10. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4. 11. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 12. Check for continuity between PCM connector
time. Check for poor connections and loose terminals C40 and body ground, and between C44
terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed and body ground.
sensor and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to step 2 and recheck. PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
5. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed

sensor connector, and inspect the connector and
connector terminals to be sure they are making
good contact.
Are the connector terminals OK?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair the connector terminals, then go to
step 6. Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 13.

connector terminals C40, C44 and ground (G101),
(cont'd)
BACK 14-113
14. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed 18. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
sensor connector.
19. Check for continuity between output shaft
15. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal
No.2 and body ground.
16. Measure the voltage between output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
No.1 and body ground. SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR
OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFT)
~
~c fBLK/BLU)
=
=

Is there about 5 V? connector terminal C43 and the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor connector, then go to
14-114 BACK
22. Measure the voltage between output shaft 25. Check for continuity between PCM connector
(countershaft) speed sensor connector terminal terminal C43 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
No.2 and body ground. sensor connector terminal No.2.
PCM CONNECTOR C (44PI OUTPUT SHAFT

OUTPUT SHAFT (COUNTERSHAFTI (COUNTERSHAFTI
SPEED SENSOR CONNECTOR SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR
~
4C IBlX/BLUI
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of Wire side of

Is there about 5 V? Is there continuity?
YES-Replace the output shaft (countershaft) YES-Go to step 30.

speed sensor (see page 14-233), then go to step 34.
NO-Go to step 23. connector terminal C43 and the output shaft
(cont'dl
BACK 14-115
PCM CONNECTOR B (44PI
28. Check for continuity between PCM connector VCC2 (VEL/BLUI
terminal 818 and output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector terminal No.1. 111 / 3 4J5V1 7 8 91
,111 1213114115116 1718/
PCM CONNECTOR B (44PI OUTPUT SHAFT
(COUNTERSHAFTI
2021 22 >< 232425
2627 28 1\30\31\32 333436
SPEED SENSOR 1136 / 1/1/140141 4243 441
CONNECTOR
.----iQ )----,
VCC2 (YEL/BLUI Q
91
11/3 415V7 8
V 1112131141161161718,1 =
20 21 22 ><:::: 23 24 26 Terminal side of female terminals
26 27 28 /130131132 33 34 35
136 / / VI40141 42 43 441 Is there continuity?
Terminal side of Wire side of YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
female terminals female terminals connector terminal 818 and the output shaft
(counters haft) speed sensor, then go to step 34.
YES-Go to step 29. terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor and the PCM. If the connections are OK, go
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM to step 30.
connector terminal 818 and the output shaft
(counters haft) speed sensor, then go to step 34.
14-116 BACK

terminals at the output shaft (countershaft) speed

were indicated on step 32, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
troubleshooting .• (countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM, then go
connections and loose terminals at the output shaft
(countershaft) speed sensor and the PCM. Ifthe
BACK 14-117
OTC P0731: Problem in 1st Clutch and 1st 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0731 in the DTCs/
Clutch Hydraulic Circuit Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data Does the result indicate FAILED?
Troubleshooting Information (see page-14-4). YES-Repair the 1st clutch, or replace the
transmission, then go to step 9.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis
time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the· to step 7 and recheck.
proper level, and check for fluid leaks.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-239) through a
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or 10. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
excessive clutch material. same conditions as those indicated by the freeze
data, or drive in 1st gear in the sequential sportshift
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive mode in the S position at speeds over 10 mph
clutch material? (16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow down and stop the
wheels.
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 9.
NO-Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-239), Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
then go to step 4.
4. Measure the line pressure (see page 14-212).
Is the line pressure within the service limits?
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 1
YES-Go to step 5. and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
NO-Repair the ATF pump and the regulator valve,
or replace the transmission, then go to step 9.
5. Measure the 1st clutch pressure (see page 14-212).
Is the 1st clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves Band C are stuck. Repair these

valves and hydraulic circuit, or replace the
7. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under the

data, or drive in 1st gear in the sequential sportshift
mode in the S position at speeds over 10 mph
(16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow down and stop the
wheels.
14-118 BACK
DTC P0732: Problem in 2nd Clutch and 2nd 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0732 in the DTCs/
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-Repair the 2nd clutch, or replace the
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the to step 7 and recheck.
data, or drive in 2nd gear in the sequential
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive sportshift mode in the S position at speeds over
clutch material? 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow down and
stop the wheels.
then go to step 4.
5. Measure the 2nd clutch pressure (see page 14-212).
Is the 2nd clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, and C are stuck. Repair

these valves and the hydraulic circuit, or replace
the transmission, then go to step 9.

data, or drive in 2nd gear in the sequential
sportshift mode in the S position at speeds over
10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow down and
stop the wheels.
BACK 14-119
OTC P0733: Problem in 3rd Clutch and 3rd 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0733 in the DTCs/
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-Repair the 3rd clutch, or replace the
temperature (the radiatorfan comes on). NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
data, or drive in 3rd gear in the sequential
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive sportshift mode in the S position at speeds over
clutch material? 10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow down and
stop the wheels.
then go to step 4.
YES":'" Troubleshooting is complete.•
YES-Go to step 5. and recheck. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
5. Measure the 3rd clutch pressure (see page 14-212).
Is the Srd clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, and C are stuck. Repair


data, or drive in 3rd gear in the sequential
sportshift mode in the S position at speeds over
10 mph (16 km/h) for 20 seconds. Slow down and
stop the wheels.
14-120 BACK
DTC P0734: Problem in 4th Clutch and 4th 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0734 in the DTCs/
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). YES-Repair the 4th clutch, or replace the
data, or drive in 4th gear in the sequential sportshift
wheels.
then go to step 4.
NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 1
5. Measure the 4th clutch pressure (see page 14-212).
Is the 4th clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, C, and D are stuck. Repair


wheels.
BACK 14-121
DTe P0735: Problem in 5th Clutch and 5th 8. Monitor the OBD status for P0735 in the DTCs/
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14"4). YES-Repair the 5th clutch, or replace the
wheels.
then go to step 4.
5. Measure the 5th clutch pressure (see page 14-212).
Is the 5th clutch pressure within the service

limits?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Shift valves A, B, C, and D are stuck. Repair


wheels.
14-122 BACK
DTC P0741: Torque Converter Clutch 8. Test-drive the vehicle on a level road with a steady
Hydraulic Circuit Stuck OFF throttle at 55 mph (88 km/h) for 2 minutes.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 9. Monitor the OBD status for P0741 in the DTCs/
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). YES-Repair the faulty torque converter clutch
mechanism, torque converter clutch hydraulic
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the circuit, lock-up shift valve, or lock-up control valve,
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. or replace the transmission, then go to step 11.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-239) through a NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
excessive clutch material. to step 8 and recheck.
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive 10. Inspect AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
clutch material? C (see page 14-228).
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. Does AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
work properly?
NO-Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-239),
then go to step 4. YES-Repair the hydraulic system related to the
lock-up shift valve, lock-up control valve, and lock-
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. up timing valve, or replace the transmission, then
go to step 11.
5. Choose Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that the shift solenoid valve D NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
operates with the HDS. valve C, then go to step 11.
Is a clicking sound heard? 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 6. 12. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes under the
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page data.
6. Run the engine until the engine coolant Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
temperature reaches 176 'f (80 "C).
7. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid C
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch YES-Troubleshooting is complete .•
pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
Is the result NORMAL? and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS

by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
the cause ofthe failure, go to step 10. If any part is
replaced, go to step 11.
BACK 14-123
DTC P0746: AfT Clutch Pressure Control 9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A
Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General Is the result NORMAL?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). to step 9 and recheck.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the NO-Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. by the test reSUlt, but if the HDS has not determined
the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If any part is
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-239) through a replaced, go to step 11.
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or
excessive clutch material. 10. Inspect AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
A (see page 14-220).
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive
clutch material? Does AlT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
work properly?
YES-Repair the hydraulic system related with shift
NO-Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-239), valve A, or replace the transmission, then go to
then go to step 4. step 11.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A (see page 14-226), then go to step 11.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the 0 position through all
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
12. Test-drive the vehicle in the 0 position through all
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the 0 position five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop. 13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the 0 position
through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph
7. Monitor the OBD status for P0746 in the DTCs/ (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. down to a stop.
Does the result indicate FAILED? 14. Monitor the OBD status for P0746 in the DTCs/
YES-Go to step 8.
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return YES-Troubleshooting is complete .•
to step 5 and recheck.
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
14-124 BACK
OTe P0747: AfT Clutch Pressure Control 9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A
Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General Is the result NORMAL?
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). to step 9 and recheck.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the NO-Follow the instructions indicated on the HDS
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If any part is
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-239) through a replaced, go to step 11.
excessive clutch material. 10. Inspect AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
A (see page 14-220).
clutch material? Does AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
work properly?
YES-Repair the hydraulic system related with shift
NO-Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-239), valve A, or replace the transmission, then go to
then go to step 4. step 11.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for 11. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
down to a stop. 13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
7. Monitor the OBD status for P0747 in the DTCs/ (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. down to a stop.
Does the result indicate FAILED? 14. Monitor the OBD status for P0747 in the DTCs/
YES-Go to step 8.
time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return YES-Troubleshooting is complete .•
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
BACK 14-125
OTC P0751: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve A
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record .all freeze data operates with the HDS.
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Is a clicking sound heard?
1.. Warm up the engine to normal operating YES-Go to step 10.

temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the 14-216), then go to step 13.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-239) through a five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
excessive clutch material.
11. Test-drive the vehicle again in the 0 position
Does the strainer have metal debris or excessive through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph
clutch material? (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
then go to step 4..
YES-Repair shift valve A, or replace the
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all transmission, then go to step 13.
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop. NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the 0 position to step 10 and recheck.
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow 13. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the aBD status for P0751 in the DTCs/ five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
Does the result indicate FAILED? 15. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
YES-Go to step 8. (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the aBO status for P0751 in the DTCs/
to step 5 and recheck. Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
8. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Does the result indicate PASSED?

and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
14-126 BACK
DTC P0752: Shift Solenoid Valve A Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve A
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data operates with the HDS.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating YES-Go to step 10.

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
11. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve A, or replace the
6. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position to step 10 and recheck.
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD status for P0752 in the DTCs/ five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
down to a stop.
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the OBD status for P0752 in the DTCs/

BACK 14-127
Ole P0756: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid 8 in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve 8
NOTE: 8efore you troubleshoot, record all freeze data operates with the HDS.

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve 8 (see page
down to a stop.
12. Monitor the 08D status for P0756 in the DTCs/
NO-Replace the ATF (see step 5 on page 14-239), Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu fora pass/fail.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve 8, or replace the
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow 13. Clearthe DTC with the HDS.
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the 08D status for P0756 in the DTCs/ five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
down to a stop.
time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the 08D status for P0756 in the DTCs/

14-128 BACK
DTC P0757: Shift Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve B

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve B (see page
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve B, or replace the
down to a stop.
down to a stop.
time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the OBD status for P0757 in the DTCs/

and recheck. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
BACK 14-129
DTC P0761: Shift Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve C, or replace the
down to a stop.
down to a stop.

14-130 BACK
Ole P0762: Shift Solenoid ValveC Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve C

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
cfutch material? (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve C, or replace the
more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop. NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OKatthis
down to a stop.
YES-Go to step 8. (20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds,then slow
down to a stop.
time. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the OBD status for P0762in the DTCs/

BACK 14-131
DTC P0766: Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck OFF 9. Choose Shift Solenoid D in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve D

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
down to a stop.
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve D, or replace the
down to a stop.
down to a stop.
time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return 16. Monitor the OBD status for P0766 in the DTCs/

14-132 BACK
DTC P0767: Shift Solenoid Valve D Stuck ON 9. Choose Shift Solenoid 0 in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and check that shift solenoid valve 0

NO-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
down to a stop.
12. Monitor the OBO status for P0767 in the OTCs/
then go to step 4.
YES-Repair shift valve 0, or replace the
time. If the HOS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow 13. Clear the OTC with the HDS.
down to a stop.
down to a stop.
8. Clear the DTC with the HOS. Does the result indicate PASSED?

and recheck. If the HOS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
BACK 14-133
DTC P0776: AfT Clutch Pressure Control 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Solenoid Valve B Stuck OFF
9. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid B
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
Is the result NORMAL?
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-239) through a by the test result, but ifthe HDS has not determined
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or the cause of the failure, go to step 10. If any part is
excessive clutch material. replaced, go to step 11.
clutch material? B (see page 14-223).
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. Does AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
work properly?
then go to step 4. YES-Repair the hydraulic system related with shift
valve B, or replace the transmission, thengo to
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. step 11.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for valve B (see page 14-226), then go to step 11.
through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph 12. Test-drive the vehicle in the D position through all
(20 km/h) for more than 20 seconds, then slow five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for
down to a stop. more than 20 seconds, then slow down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD status for P0776 in the DTCs/ 13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph
Does the result indicate FAILED? down to a stop.
YES-Go to step 8. 14. Monitor the OBD status for P0776 in the DTCs/
time. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return Does the result indicate PASSED?

14-134 BACK
OTe P0777: AfT Clutch Pressure Control 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Solenoid Valve B Stuck ON
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-239) through a by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
clutch material? B (see page 14-223).
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. Does AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
work properly?
valve B, or replace the transmission, then go to
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for valve B (see page 14-226), then go to step 11.

BACK 14-135
DTC P0796: AfT Clutch Pressure Control 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Solenoid Valve C Stuck OFF
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS.
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-239) through a by the test result, but if the HDS has not determined
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. Does AlT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
work properly?
valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to
five gears at speedsover 12 mph (20 km/h) for valve C (see page 14-231), then go to step 11.

14-136 BACK
DTC P0797: AfT Clutch Pressure Control 8. Clear the OTC with the HDS.
Solenoid Valve C Stuck ON
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General pressure control solenoid valve C with the HOS.
time. Ifthe HOS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-239) through a by the test result, but if the HOS has not determined
YES-Replace the transmission, then go to step 11. Does AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
work properly?
valve C, or replace the transmission, then go to
4. Clear the OTC with the HOS. step 11.
5. Test-drive the vehicle in the 0 position through all NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
five gears at speeds over 12 mph (20 km/h) for valve C (see page 14-231), then go to step 11.
through all five gears at speeds over 12 mph 12. Test-drive the vehicle in the 0 position through all
7. Monitor the OBO status for P0797 in the DTCs/ 13. Test-drive the vehicle again in the D position
YES-Go to step 8. 14. Monitor the OBD status for P0797 in the OTCs/
time. Ifthe HOS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return Does the result indicate PASSED?

BACK 14-137
DTC P0812: Open in Transmission' Range 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch ATP R Switch Circuit
NOTE: connector.
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 5. Check for continuity between transmission range
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). switch connector terminal No.5 and body ground .
TRANSMISSION RANGE
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the SWITCH CONNECTOR
transmission.
GND (VEL/RED)
1 234 5
2. Shift to the R position, and verify the AfT R SWITCH
signal with the HDS in the AfT data list. 6 7 8 9 10
Is the AfT R SWITCH ON?
YES-I ntermittent failure, the system is OK at this

time .•
=
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair open in the wire between transmission

range switch connector terminal No.5 and ground
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to
step 13.
14-138 BACK
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Check for continuity between transmission range
switch connector terminals No.3 and No.5 while
7. Measure the voltage between transmission range the shift lever is in the R position, and when the
switch connector terminals No.3 and No.5. shift lever is shifted to any position other than R.
TRANSMISSION RANGE TRANSMISSION RANGE

SWITCH CONNECTOR . SWITCH CONNECTOR
GND (VEL/RED)
.---.-t---L-f--......--,
1 234 5 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10
Wire side of female terminals Terminal side of male terminals
Is there voltage? Is there continuity while the shift lever is in the R

position, and no continuity when the shift lever is
YES-Go to step 8. shifted to any position other than R?
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM YES-Check for poor connections and loose
connector terminal B14 and the transmission range terminals at the transmission range switch, the
switch, then go to step 13. subharness connector, and the PCM. lfthe
connections are OK, go to step 9.
NO-Replace the transmission range switch

(cont'd)
BACK 14-139
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 14. Test-drive the vehicle in the R position at speeds
below 3 mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds,
10. Test-drive the vehicle in the R position at speeds then increase the speed and test-drive at speeds
below 3 mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds, over 3 mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds. Slow
then increase the speed and test-drive at speeds down and stop the wheels.
over 3 mph (5 km/h) for more than 2 seconds. Slow
down and stop the wheels. 15. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT

terminals at the transmission range switch and the
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known- PCM, then go to step 1.

were indicated on step 11, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the
troubleshooting .• transmission range switch, the subharness
connector, and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 14
connections and loose terminals at the and recheck.
transmission range switch, the subharness
connector, and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10),
then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
14-140 BACK
Ole P0842: Short in 2nd Clutch Transmission 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 7. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
ON pressure switch connector.
NOTE: 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

anyon-board snapshot, and review General 9. Check the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). HDS in the AfT data list .
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the Is the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
transmission.
YES-Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. pressure switch (see page 14-234), then go to step
18.
2. Check the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
HDS in the AfT data list when not in 2nd gear. NO-Go to step 10.
Is the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF? 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Go to step 6. 12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
3. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal 13. Check for continuity between PCM connector
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). terminal B8 and body ground.
4. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the sequential PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
sportshift mode in the S position for more than OP2SW (BLU/REDIj
5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and drive in 3rd
gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow down and stop 111 / 3 416V 7 8 91
the wheels. lL 11 12. 13114115116 1718V
j2.O 2.1 2.2.~ 2.3242.6
12.62.7 2BVI30131 132. 3334 35
U36 V 1/ VI40141 42.43 441
Does the result indicate FAILED? Q

YES-Go to step 6. =
time. Check the OP2SW (BLU/RED) wire for an Is there continuity?
intermittent short to ground between the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step connector terminal 88 and the 2nd clutch
4 and recheck. transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step
18.
NO-Goto step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-141
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 19. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the sequential
sportshift mode in the S position for more than
15. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the sequential 5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and drive in 3rd
sportshift mode in the S position for more than gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow down and stop
5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and drive in 3rd the wheels.
gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow down and stop
the wheels. 20. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT

terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- pressure switch and the PCM, then go to step 1.

YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is DTC's troubleshooting.•
were indicated on step 16, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
troubleshooting .• transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM,
then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor COMPLETED, return to step 19 and recheck.
connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch and the PCM. If
14·142 BACK
DTC P0843: Open in 2nd Clutch Transmission 5. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the sequential
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 2nd Clutch sportshift mode in the S position for more than
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and drive in 3rd
OFF gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow down and stop
the wheels.
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 6. Monitor the OBD status for P0843 in the DTCs/
anyon-board snapshot, and review General Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem Does the result indicate FAILED?
transmission. YES-Go to step 7.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time. Check for poor connections and loose
2. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). pressure switch and the PCM. If the HDS indicates
NOT COMPLETED, return to step 5 and recheck.
3. Shift the shift lever into the S position while
pressing the brake pedal, upshift to 2nd gear by
+
pulling the paddle shifter (upshift switch), and
verify with the HDS in the AfT data list that the
SHIFT COMMAND indicates 2nd.
4. Check the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the

Is the 2nd PRESSURE SWITCH ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-143
8. Disconnectthe 2nd clutch transmission fluid 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
10. Measure the voltage between the 2nd clutch terminal B8 and the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
transmission fluid pressure switch connector pressure switch connector terminal.
terminal and body ground.
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) 2ND CLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
2ND CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
PRESSURE SWITCH CONNECTOR SWITCH CONNECTOR
OP2SW
(BLU/RED)

Wire side of female terminals female terminals female terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 2nd clutch transmission fluid terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch (see page 14-234), then go to step pressure switch and the PCM. If the connections
19. are OK, go to step 15.
NO-Go to step 11. NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal B8 and the 2nd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch, then go to step
19.
14-144 BACK
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 20. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the sequential
16. Drive the vehicle in 2nd gear in the sequential 5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and drive in 3rd
5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and drive in 3rd the wheels.

terminals at the 2nd clutch transmission fluid

were indicated on step 17, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
connections and loose terminals at the 2nd clutch
BACK 14-145
OTC P0847: Short in 3rd Clutch Transmission 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 7. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
NOTE: 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) .

anyon-board snapshot, and review General 9. Check the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the Is the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
transmission.
YES-Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
1. Clearthe DTC with the HDS. pressure switch (see page 14-235), then go to step
18.
2. Check the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
HDS in the AfT data list when not in 3rd gear. NO-Go to step 10.
Is the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH OFF? 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Go to step 6. 12. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). terminal B9 and body ground.
4. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the sequential PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
sportshift mode in the S position for more than OP3SW (BLU/WHT)
5 seconds, then upshift to 4th gear, and drive in 4th
the wheels.

Does the result indicate FAILED? Q

YES-Go to step 6. =
time. Check the OP3SW (BLU/WHT) wire for an Is there continuity?
intermittent short to ground between the 3rd clutch
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step connector terminal B9 and the 3rd clutch
18.
NO-Go to step 14.
14-146 BACK
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 19. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the sequential
15. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the sequential 5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and drive in 3rd
5 seconds, then upshift to 4th gear, and drive in 4th the wheels.
/s DTC P0847 indicated? YES-Check for poor connections and loose

terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid

were indicated on step 16, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
BACK 14-147
OTC P0848: Open in 3rd Clutch Transmission 5. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the sequential
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 3rd Clutch sportshift mode in the S position for more than
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 5 seconds, then upshift to 4th gear, and drive in 4th
the wheels.
NOTE:
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4) .
2. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). pressure switch and the PCM. Ifthe HDS indicates
NOT COMPLETED, return to step 5 and recheck.
pressing the brake pedal, upshift to 3rd gear by
+
SHIFT COMMAND indicates 3rd.
4. Check the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the

Is the 3rd PRESSURE SWITCH ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
14-148 BACK
8. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
10. Measure the voltage between the 3rd clutch terminal 89 and the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) 3RDCLUTCH
TRANSMISSION FLUID
3RD CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
OP3SW
(BLU/WHT)
=
Wire side of female terminals female terminals female terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 3rd clutch transmission fluid terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch (see page 14-235), then go to step pressure switch and the PCM. If the connections
NO-Gotostep 11. NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal 89 and the 3rd clutch
19.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-149
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 20. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the sequential
16. Drive the vehicle in 3rd gear in the sequential 5 seconds, then upshift to 3rd gear, and drive in 3rd

terminals at the 3rd clutch transmission fluid

were indicated on step 17, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
then go to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor COMPLETED, return to step 20 and recheck.
connections and loose terminals at the 3rd clutch
14-150 BACK
OTe P0872: Short in 4th Clutch Transmission 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 7. Disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid
NOTE: 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

anyon-board snapshot, and review General 9. Check the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the Is the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH OFF?
transmission.
YES-Replace the 4th clutch transmission fluid
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. pressure switch (see page 14-236), then go to step
18.
2. Check the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the
HDS in the AfT data list when not in 4th gear. NO-Go to step 10.
Is the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH OFF? 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Go to step 6. 12. Disconnect PCM connector C (44P).
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). terminal C38 and body ground.
4. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the sequential PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
5 seconds, then upshift to 5th gear, and drive in 5th i L1 2 3 4J516 7 8 91
gear for more than 5 seconds. Slow down and stop 1011 1213114115116 1718 9
the wheels. ><
2021 22 23V25
VVV
2627 28i2B130131 132
5. Monitor the OBD status for P0872 in the DTCs/ , 136 / 36 39140141 4243 441
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. OP4SW(B

LUNE~
YES-Go to step 6.
time. Check the OP4SW (BLU/yEL) wire for an Is there continuity?
intermittent short to ground between the 4th clutch
the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step connector terminal C38 and the 4th clutch
18.
NO-Go to step 14.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-151
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 19. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the sequential
15. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the sequential 5 seconds, then upshift to 5th gear, and drive in 5th

terminals atthe 4th clutch transmission fluid

were indicated on step 16, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the 4th clutch
connections and loose terminals at the 4th clutch
substituted, go to step 1.lfthe HDS indicates NOT
14-152 BACK
DTC P0873: Open in 4th Clutch Transmission 5. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the sequential
Fluid Pressure Switch Circuit, or 4th Clutch sportshift mode in the S position for more than
Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Stuck 5 seconds,then upshift to 5th gear, and drive in 5th
the wheels.
NOTE:
2. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal at the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure switch
operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on). and the PCM. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
pressing the brake pedal, upshift to 4th gear by
+
SHIFT COMMAND indicates 4th.
4. Check the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH signal with the

Is the 4th PRESSURE SWITCH ON?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-153
8. Disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid 12. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
10. Measure the voltage between the 4th clutch terminal C38 and the 4th clutch transmission fluid
4TH CLUTCH PCM CONNECTOR C (44P)
TRANSMISSION FLUID
4TH CLUTCH TRANSMISSION FLUID PRESSURE
OP4SW
(BLU/VEL)
=
Wire side of Terminal side of
Wire side offemale terminals female terminals female terminals
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the 4th clutch transmission fluid terminals atthe 4th clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch (see page 14-236), then go to step pressure switch and the PCM. Ifthe connections
NO-Go to step 11. NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM

connector terminal C38 and the 4th clutch
19.
14-154 BACK
15. Update the NT software in the PCM if it does not 19. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 20. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the sequential
16. Drive the vehicle in 4th gear in the sequential 5 seconds, then upshift to 4th gear, and drive in 4th
sportshift mode in the S position for more than gear for morethan 5 seconds. Slow down and stop
the wheels. 21. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in NT
17. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in NT

terminals at the 4th clutch transmission fluid
Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail. Does the result indicate PASSED?

original PCM (see page 11-252). If any.other DTCs NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
were indicated on step 17, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the 4th clutch
connections and loose terminals at the 4th clutch
PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck.lfthe PCM was
substituted, go to step 1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
BACK 14-155
DTe P0962: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Control Solenoid Valve A Circuit
7. Disconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
NOTE: valve A connector .
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 8. Measure the resistance between AfT clutch
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). pressure control solenoid valve A connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals No.1 and No.2.
transmission. AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
2. Check that DTC P0962 recurs.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Choose Clutch Pressure Control (Linear) Solenoid A
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS. Is there 3- 10 Q ?
Is the result NORMAL? YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 4. NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

NO-Go to step 6.
4. Choose Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Control

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and command AfT
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A at 1.0 A
with the HDS.

YES-Go to step 6.

terminals at AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and the PCM. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
14-156 BACK
9. Check for continuity between AfT clutch pressure 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
control solenoid valve A connector terminal No.2
and body ground. 11. Measure the voltage between AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A connector terminals No.1
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL and No.2.
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
~
~
~NDIBLKl
LS A IREDI ~ND IBLKl
=

YES-Go to step 10. Is there voltage?
NO-Repair open in the wire between AfT clutch YES-Go to step 12.
pressure control solenoid valve A and ground
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to NO-Repair open or short in the wire between PCM
step 16. connector terminal 844 and AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A, then go to step 16.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-157

YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 15. 19. Monitorthe OBD status for P0962 in the DTCs/
Does the result indicate PASSED? YES- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other DTCs NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
were indicated on step 14, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at AfT clutch
troubleshooting .• pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM,
connections and loose terminals at AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
14-158 BACK
DTC P0963: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 8. Measure the resistance between AfT clutch
Control Solenoid Valve A pressure control solenoid valve A connector
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL
anyon-board snapshot, and review General SOLENOID VALVE A CONNECTOR
transmission.
Is OTe P0963 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES-Go to step 6.
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 9.
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
pressure control solenoid valve A with the HDS. valve A (see page 14-226), then go to step 14.
Is the result NORMAL? 9. Check for continuity between AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve A connector terminal No.2
YES-Go to step 4. and body ground.
NO-Go to step 6. AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL

~
clutch pressure control solenoid valve A at 0.2 A
with the HDS.
~NDIBLK)
=
YES-Go to step 6.

terminals at AfT clutch pressure control solenoid YES-Go to step 10.
valve A and the PCM. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to step 3 and recheck. NO-Repair open in the wire between AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve A and ground
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. (G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to
step 10.
valve A connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-159
10. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 14. Clea r the DTC with the HDS.

YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1.
13. Monitor the OBD status for P0963in the DTCs/

original PCM (see page 11-252). If any otherDTCs NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
troubleshooting .• pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM,
pressure control solenoid valve A and the PCM. If
14-160 BACK
DTC P0966: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Control Solenoid Valve B Circuit
7. Disconnect the A!f clutch pressure control solenoid
NOTE: valve B connector .
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 8. Measure the resistance between A!f clutch
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). pressure control solenoid valve B connector
SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A!f clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS. Is there 3- 10 Q ?
YES-Go to step 4. NO-Replace A!f clutch pressure control solenoid

valve B (see page 14-226), then go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 6.

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and command A!f
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B at 1.0 A
with the HDS.

Freeze Data in A!f Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-Go to step 6.

terminals at A!f clutch pressure control solenoid
valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
(cont'd)
BACK 14-161
control solenoid valve B connector terminal No.2
control solenoid valve B connector terminals No.1
AfT CLUTCH PRESSURE CONTROL and No.2.
~
~
~NDIBLKJ
LS B IBRN/WHTI ~ND IBLKJ

pressure control solenoid valve B and ground
step 16. connector terminal B35 and AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve B, then go to step 16.
14-162 BACK
12. Update the All software in the PCM if it does not 16. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
position through all five gears. 18. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in All
14. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in All

terminals at All clutch pressure control solenoid
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1.
Freeze Data in All Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Freeze Data in All Mode Menu for a pass/fail. Does the result indicate PASSED?

were indicated on step 14, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at All clutch
troubleshooting .• pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM,
connections and loose terminals at All clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
BACK 14-163
DTC P0967: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 8. Measure the resistance between AfT clutch
Control Solenoid Valve B pressure control solenoid valve B connector
NOTE:
anyon-board snapshot, and review General SOLENOID VALVE B CONNECTOR
transmission.
Is DTC P0967 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES-Go to step 6.
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 9.
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test AfT clutch NO-Replace AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
pressure control solenoid valve B with the HDS. valve B (see page 14-226), then go to step 14.
Is the result NORMAL? 9. Check for continuity between AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve B connector terminal No.2

~
clutch pressure control solenoid valve B at 0.2 A
with the HDS.
~ND'BlKJ
=
YES-Go to step 6.

terminals at AfT clutch pressure control solenoid YES-Go to step 10.
valve B and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to step 3 and recheck. NO-Repair open in the wire between AfT clutch
pressure control solenoid valve B and ground
step 14.
valve B connector.
14-164 BACK

YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve B and the PCM, then Go to step 1.
good PCM (see page 14-10),then recheck. Ifthe

troubleshooting .• pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM,
pressure control solenoid valve B and the PCM. If
BACK 14-165
DTC P0970: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Control Solenoid Valve C Circuit
7. Disconnect the Aff clutch pressure control solenoid
NOTE: valve C connector.
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 8. Measure the resistance between Aff clutch
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). pressure control solenoid valve C connector
SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Go to step 3.
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test Aff clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS. Is there 3- 10 Q ?
YES-Go to step 4. NO-Replace Aff clutch pressure control solenoid

valve C (see page 14-231), then go to step 16.
NO-Go to step 6.

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and command Aff
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C at 1.0 A
with the HDS.

Freeze Data in Aff Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-Go to step 6.

terminals at Aff clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
14-166 BACK
control solenoid valve C connector terminal No.2
control solenoid valve C connector terminals No.1
andNo.2.
cBfJ
~
~NDIBLKI
LS C IGRN/REDIl§ND IBLK)

pressure control solenoid valve C and ground
step 16. connector terminal 825 and AfT clutch pressure
control solenoid valve C, then go to step 16.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-167
14. Check for DTC{s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT

YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1.
Does the result indicate PASSED? YES- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other
YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is DTC's troubleshooting.•
troubleshooting .• pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM,
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
14-168 BACK
DTC P0971: Problem in AfT Clutch Pressure 8. Measure the resistance between A(f clutch
Control Solenoid Valve C pressure control solenoid valve C connector
NOTE:
anyon-board snapshot, and review General SOLENOID VALVE C CONNECTOR
transmission.
Is DTC P0971 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES-Go to step 6.
Is there 3- 10 Q ?
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 9.
in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and test A(f clutch NO-Replace A(f clutch pressure control solenoid
pressure control solenoid valve C with the HDS. valve C (see page 14-231), then go to step 14.
Is the result NORMAL? 9. Check for continuity between A(f clutch pressure
control solenoid valve C connector terminal No.2

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu, and command A(f
clutch pressure control solenoid valve C at 0.2 A
with the HDS.

dIfJ
~NDIBlKJ
Freeze Data in A(f Mode Menu for a pass/fail.

YES-Go to step 6.

terminals at A(f clutch pressure control solenoid YES-Go to step 10.
valve C and the PCM. If the HDS indicates NOT
COMPLETED, return to step 3 and recheck. NO-Repair open in the wire between A(f clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C and ground
step 14.
7. Disconnect the A(f clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-169
10. Update theA/T software in the PCM if it does not 14. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
position through all five gears. 16. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T
12. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in A/T

terminals at A/T clutch pressure control solenoid
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1.
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
Freeze Data in A/T Mode Menu for a pass/fail. Does the result indicate PASSED?

were indicated on step 12, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch
troubleshooting .• pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM,
connections and loose terminals at A/T clutch
pressure control solenoid valve C and the PCM. If
14-170 BACK
DTC P0973: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve A 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Disconnect PCM connectors B (44P) and C (44P).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 10. Measure the resistance between PCM connector
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals B11 and C40 or C44.
transmission. PCM CONNECTORS
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. , - - - , r=S::-::H-::A-------{Q~------,
(BLU/VELI B (44PI ~~~~~~C~(~44~P~'

2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D 111 3416V7891 1123416167891
position through all five gears. / 111213114115~61718 / 10 1112131141161161718 9
202122 >< 232426 202122 >< 23/26
3. Check that DTC P0973 recurs. 2627 28VI30131 132 33 34 36 26 27 28~130131132 / /V
1136 /V Vl40141 42 43 441 136 / 38 39140141 42 43 441
Is DTe P0973 indicated? LG1 (BRN/VELI I LG2 .L
'----------lQ (BRNI
VEL)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Is there less than 12 Q ?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the HDS. YES-Go to step 11.
Is a clicking sound heard? NO-Go to step 14.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Test-drive the vehicle forseveralminutes in the D


YES-Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH A wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve A and the
(cont'd)
BACK 14-171
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 14. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
12. Check for continuity between PCM connector substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10).
terminals B11 and C40 or C44.
PCM CONNECTORS position through all five gears.
SHA Q 16. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT

(BLU/YEl) B (44P) C(44P) Mode Menu with the HDS.
111 3415V 7 8 91 'II 2 3 41516 7 8 91
III 112 13114115116 17181/ 1011 1213114115116 171819 Is DTC P0973 indicated?
~ 2122 >< 232425
25 2725 Vl30131 132 333435
2021 2 2 > < 231/25
2627 2B 29130131132Vi/I YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
1136 c/'V VI40141 4243 441 V 36 39140141 4243 441 good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. Ifthe
Q
1136
LG1 (BRN/YEl) I LG2
(BRN/
L PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
VEl)
NO-Go to step 17.
Is there continuity? Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM Does the result indicate PASSED?
connector terminal B11 and the shift solenoid
harness connector, then go to step 18. YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO-Go to step 13. original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other DTCs
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve A (see page 14-216). troubleshooting .•
Is shift solenoid valve A OK? NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
YES-Go to step 14. valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve A or the shift then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
solenoid harness (see page 14-216), then go to step 1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
18. step 15 and recheck.
14-172 BACK



terminals at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 21.

YES- Troubleshooting is complete. If any other

NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor

valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to step 19 and
recheck.
BACK 14-173
DTC P0974: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve A 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. SHA

Q
(BLU/VELI B (44PI C (44PI
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D 34161/1 7 8 91
11 111 2 3 4161 6 7 8 91
position through all five gears. V 1112 13114116116 1718/ 1011 1213114116116 1718 9
202122 >< 232426 20 21 22>< 23V26
3. Check that DTC P0974 recurs. 262728 /130131132 333436 VV/
2827 28129130131132
11381/ /1/140141 4243 441 1138 1/ 38 39140141 4243 441
Q
LG1 (BRN/VEl) I LG2
(BRN/
L
VEl)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Is there 12- 25 Q ?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid A in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve A with the HDS. YES-Go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
14-174 BACK
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 13. Remove the shift solenoid harness (see page
14-216).
terminal B11 and shift solenoid harness connector 14. Check for continuity between shift solenoid
terminal No.3. harness connector terminal No.3 and the shift
solenoid valve A connector terminal.
SHIFT SOLENOID PCM CONNECTOR B 144P)
HARNESS SHIFT SOLENOID HARNESS CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
Q
SH A IBLU/YELI
SH A
IBLU/YEL) 11 3 4J5_V 7 6 9J
rh VI 112 13114115116 1716/
11121314V1 ~ 2122 >< 232426
~ 2726 1130131 132 3313<135

136/ 1/140141 4243 441
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE A
Wire side of Terminal side of CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve A (see page
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM 14-216), then go to step 19.
harness connector, then go to step 19. NO-Replace the shift solenoid harness (see page
(cont'd)
BACK 14-175
position through all five gears. 21. Check for DTC(s) inthe DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT

terminals at shift solenoid valve A and the PCM,
YES-If the PCM was updated, substitute a known- then go to step 1.

were indicated on step 17, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
troubleshooting .• valve A and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
NO~lf the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor recheck.
valve A and the PCM. If the PCM was updated,
1. Ifthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
14-176 BACK
DTC P0976: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve B 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
• Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data and 9. Disconnect PCM connectors B (44P) and C (44P) .
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
B (44P) C(44P)
111 / 3 41SV 1 8 91 11 2 3 41s16 1 8 91
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D /11 2 13114115~6 1118/ 1011 12 13114115~6 1118 9
position through all five gears. 2021 ~>< 232425 12021 ~>< 23/25
26 127 28VI30131132 3334 35 126 27 28~130131132 //V
3. Check that DTC P0976 recurs. II· ~I/ VV!40141 42 43 441 136 / 36 39140141 42 43 441
1/ SH B (GRN/WHT) ILG1 LG2
(BRNI (BR NI
Is DTC P0976 indicated? ~fr\\
.Q
VEL) VEL )
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS. YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH B wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve B and the
(cont'd)
BACK 14-177
terminals 826 and C40 or C44.
PCM CONNECTORS
B 144P) C I44P)
111 / 3 4161/ 7 8 91 .11 2 3 41616 7 8 91 Mode Menu with the HDS.
1/11 1213114116116 1718V 1011 1213114116/16 1718 9
~21 22>< 232A26 202122>< 231/26 Is DTC P0976 indicated?
2627 281/130131132 333436 2627 28~130/31132Ill/II
11< / 1/1/140141 4243 441 1136 1/ 36 39140141 4243 441 YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
II SH B IGRN/WHT) ILG1 LG 2
IBRN/ IBRN/
~ VELI VE LI PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
Q
NO-Go to step 17.
17. Monitor the 08D status for P0976 in the DTCs/
connector terminal 826 and the shift solenoid
harness connector, then go to step 18. YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve 8 (see page 14-216). troubleshooting .•
Is shift solenoid valve B OK? NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
YES-Go to step 14. valve 8 and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve 8 orthe shift then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
14-178 BACK


Is Dre P0976 indicated?

terminals at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 21.


DTC's troubleshooting.•

valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
recheck.
BACK 14-179
DTe P0977: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve B 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
B (44P) C (44P)
111 / 3 4151/ 7 6 91 ,11 2 3 41516 7 6 91
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D 1112 13114115116 1716V 10 11 1213114116116 1716 9
position through all five gears. 2021 2 2 > < 232425 2021 22::::::-< 23V25
2627 26V130131 132 333436 ~627 26 29130131 /32 VV/
3. Check that DTC P0977 recurs. II / VVI40141 4243 441 1136 / 36 39140141 4243 441
SH B (GRN/WHT) ILG1 LG2
(BRN/ (BRN/
Is OTe P0977 indicated? ~ VEl) VEL)
Q
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Is there 12- 25 Q ?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid B in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve B with the HDS. YES-Go to step 15.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
14-180 BACK
14-216).
terminal 826 and shift solenoid harness connector 14. Check for continuity between shift solenoid
solenoid valve 8 connector terminal.
SHIFT SOLENOID PCM CONNECTOR B (44PI
CONNECTOR
SHB
(GRN/WHTI
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVE B
YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve 8 (see page
(cont'd)
BACK 14-181

terminals at shift solenoid valve B and the PCM,

were indicated on step 17, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
troubleshooting .• valve B and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor recheck.
valve B and the PCM.lfthe PCM was updated,
1. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
14-182 BACK
Ole P0979: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve C 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
8. Jump the SCSline with the HDS.
NOTE:
• This code is caused by an electrical circuit problem terminals B20 and C40 or C44 .
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Q

SHC(GRN) B (44P) C (44P)
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D 11 / 3 4151/ 7 8 91 111 2 3 41616 7 8 9\
position through all five gears. 1112 131141151161718V 1011 1213114116116 1718 9
~21 22 ...><. 232426 2021 22..::><::. 23V 26
3. Check that DTC P0979 recurs. 2726 /130131 132 33~35 VVV
2627 26 29130131132
136 V /V140141 4243 441 1136 V 36 39140141 4243 441
Q
LG1 (BRN/YEL) I LG2
(BRN/
L
YEL)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HDS. YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH C wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve C and the
(cont'd)
BACK 14-183
PCM CONNECTORS
Q 16. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
SHC(GRNI B (44PI C(44PI Mode Menu with the HDS.
11 / 3 4L5V 7 8 9J 111 2 3 41516 7 8 91
1112 13114115116 1718V 1011 1213114115116 171819 Is DrC P0979 indicated?
120 21 ~>< 232425 ~21 22 >< 23/25
~f2; 28 /130131132 33~35 !Ze 27 28 29130131132 I I )
/V VI40141 4243 441 1136 V 36 39140141 4243 441 good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. Ifthe
L
! 136
LG1 (BRN/YELII LG2 PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
Q (BRN/
YELl
NO-Go to step 17.
harness connector, then go to step 18.. YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
NO-Go to step 13. .original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other DTCs
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve C (see page 14-216). troubleshooting .•
Is shift solenoid valve C OK? NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
YES-Go to step 14. valve C and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve C or the shift then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
14-184 BACK



terminals at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 21.



valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1.lfthe HDS
recheck.
BACK 14-185
DTe P0980: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve C 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 10. Measure the resistance between PCMconnector
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.

SHC(GRN) B (44P) C(44P)
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0 '11 / 3 415JL 7 8 91 11 2 3 41616 7 8 91
position through all five gears. 1112 13114116116 1718V 1011 1213114115116 1718 9

22><
20 21 232425 2021 22>< 23V 25
2627 28 1130131132 333435 2627 28 29130131132 IV/
1136 / /V140141 4243 441 136 V 38 39140141 4243 441
/s DTC P0980 indicated?
Q
LG1 (BRN/VEL) I LG2
(BRNI
L
VEL)
YES-Go to step 7.
Terminal side .of female terminals
NO-Go to step 4.
/s there 12- 25 Q ?
4. Choose Shift Solenoid C in the Miscellaneous Test
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve C with the HDS. YES-Go to step 15.
/s a clicking sound heard? NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0


Does the result indicate FA/LED?
YES-Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
14-186 BACK
14-216).
solenoid valve C connector terminal.
SHIFT SOLENOID . PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
CONNECTOR
r----IQ}------,
SHC (GRN)
SHC(GRN)
Terminal side of
male terminals
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVEC
YES-Go to step 13.
YES~Replace shift solenoid valve C (see page
NO-Repair open in the wire between PCM 14-216), then go to step 19 .
.connector terminal 820 and the shift solenoid
(cont'd)
BACK 14-187
15. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 19.· Clear the OTC with the HOS.
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 20. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0
position through all five gears. 21. Check for OTC(s) in the OTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
Mode Menu with the HOS.
17. Check for OTC(s) in the OTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
Mode Menu with the HOS. Is DTC P0980 indicated?

terminals at shift solenoid valve C and the PCM,
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known- then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 18. 22. Monitor the OBO status for P0980 in the OTCs/
18. Monitor the OBO status for P0980 in the OTCs/

OTCs were indicated on step 21, go to the indicated
YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is OTC's troubleshooting .•
original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other OTCs NO-If the HOS indicates FAILED, check for poor
were indicated on step 17, go to the indicated OTC's connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
troubleshooting .• valve C and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HOS
NO-If the HOS indicates FAILED, check for poor recheck.
valve C and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
1. If the HOS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
14-188 BACK
OTC P0982: Short in Shift Solenoid Valve D 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
SH D (VEL)
B (44P) C(44P)
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D '11 / 3 415V 7 91 11 2 3 41516 7 8 91
V ll 1213\14\15\1617 / 1011 1213\14\15\16 1718 9
izo21 ~>< 23 25 izo21 22 >< 23V25
3. Check that DTC P0982 recurs. !2S27 28 V\30I31 132 33 35 2627 28 es\30131 \32 VVV
1136 / VV\4O\41 42 43 44\ V 36 39140141 4243 44\
\36
LG1 (BRN/YEl) I LG2
(BRNI
L
Q VEL)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve D with the HDS. YES-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Goto step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

time. Check the SH D wire for an intermittent short
to ground between shift solenoid valve D and the
(cont'd)
BACK 14-189
11. Disconnect the shift solenoid harness connector. 14. Update the AfT software in the PCM jfit does not
PCM CONNECTORS
SH D (YEll·
.Q 16. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
B (44P) C (44P) Mode Menu with the HDS.
11 / 3 415V' 7 91 111 2 3 41616 7 8 91
/11 121311411511617 / 1011 1213114115116 1718 9 Is DTC P0982 indicated?
2021 22>< 23 2426 2021 22>< 23/26
I2B 27 28 1130131132 33 3436 ~27 28129130131132 //1
136 lL L1LI40141 42 43 441 1136 1/ 36 39140141 4243 441 good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the
LG1 (BRN/YEL)
'
I LG~ L
(BRNI
.Q YEll
NO-Go to step 17.
harness connector, then go to step 18. YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
13. Inspect shift solenoid valve 0 (see page 14-216). troubleshooting .•
Is shift solenoid valve 0 OK? NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
YES-Go to step 14. valve 0 and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
NO-Replace shift solenoid valve 0 or the shift then recheck. If the PCM was substituted, go to step
14-190 BACK

20. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in NT


terminals at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM,
then go to step 1.
NO-Go to step 21.



valve D and the PCM, then go to step 1. Ifthe HDS
recheck.
BACK 14-191
DTC P0983: Open in Shift Solenoid Valve D 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit
NOTE:
PCM CONNECTORS
transmission.
SHD (VEL)
B(44P) C (44P)
111 / 3 41SVi7 91 11 2 3 41516 7 8 91
position through all five gears. v'11 121311411s116 17 V 1011 121311411SJ16 1718 9

~21 22 >< 23 2425 ><
j2021 i22 23v 25
2s 27 281J30l31132 33 3435 .~ 2728 29130131132 v/v'
1136 1/ 1/1/140141 42 43 441 1136 / 36 39140141 4243 441
Q
LG1 (BRN/VEL) I LG2
(BRN/
L
VEL)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Go to step 4.
Is there 12- 25 Q ?
Menu, and test shift solenoid valve D with the HDS. YES-Go to step 15.
Is a Clicking sound heard? NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.


YES-Go to step 7.

at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM. If the HDS
recheck.
14-192 BACK
14-216).
solenoid valve D connector terminal.
PCM CONNECTOR B (44PI SHIFT SOLENOID
CONNECTOR
SH D (YELl
SH D (YEll
Terminal side of
male terminals
SHIFT SOLENOID
VALVED
Terminal side of Wire side of CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Replace shift solenoid valve D (see page
(cont'd)
BACK 14-193
Mode Menu with the HDS. Is DrC P0983 indicated?
Is DrC P0983 indicated? YES-Check for poor connections and loose

terminals at shift solenoid valve D and the PCM,

original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other DTCs NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
were indicated on step 17,go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at shift solenoid
troubleshooting .• valve D and the PCM, then go to step 1. If the HDS
NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor recheck.
valve D and the PCM. Ifthe PCM was updated,
1.lfthe HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED, return to
14-194 BACK
DTC P16CO: PCM AfT Control System
Incomplete Updated
NOTE:
• This code is indicated when PCM updating is
incomplete.
1. Update the AfT software in the PCM (see page 14-8).
2. Check whether DTC P16CO is indicated in the DTCs/

Is DTC P16CO indicated?
YES-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-252).

•
NO-PCM updating is complete.•
BACK 14-195
OTe P1717: Open in Transmission Range 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch ATP RVS Switch Circuit
NOTE: connector.
anyon-board snapshot, and review General 6. Check for continuity between transmission range
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4) . switch connector terminal No.5 and body ground.
TRANSMISSION RANGE
and cannot be caused by a mechanical problem in the SWITCH CONNECTOR
transmission.
GND (VEL/RED)
1 234 5
2. Shift to the R position, and check the A{f R SWITCH
signal with the HDS in the A{f data list. 6 7 8 9 10
Is theAlT R SWITCH ON?
Q
YES-Go to step 3.
=
NO-Check for proper transmission range switch Wire side of female terminals
installation (see page 14-292), adjust the shift cable
(see page 14-285), then recheck .• Is there continuity?
3. Check the REVERSE SWITCH signal with the HDS. YES-Go to step 7.
Is the REVERSE SWITCH ON? NO-Repair open in the wire between transmission
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this (G101), or repair poor ground (G101), then go to
time .• step 14.
NO-Go to step 4.
14-196 BACK
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Check for continuity between the No.5 and No.9
terminals at the transmission range switch.
8. Measure the voltage between transmission range
switch connector terminals No.5 and No.9. TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
1 2
123 6 7
678
ATP RVS (BRN1L-_ _---'

Is there continuity when the shift lever is in the P,
R, and N positions, and no continuity when the
Is there voltage? shift lever is in the D and S positions?
YES-Go to step 9. YES-Check for poor connections and loose

NO-Repair open in thewire between PCM PCM. If the connections are OK, go to step 10.
switch, then go to step 14. NO-Replace the transmission range switch
(cont'd)
BACK 14-197
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). 15. Start the engine, and shift the shift lever slowly into
the P and R positions, then into the N position.
11. Start the engine, and shift the shift lever slowly into
the P and R positions, then into the N position. 16. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT

YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known- PCM, then go to step 1.

original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other DTCs NO-If the HDS indicates·FAILED, check for poor
were indicated on step 12, go to the indicated DTC's connections and loose terminals at the
troubleshooting .• transmission range switch and the PCM, then go to
transmission range switch and the PCM. If the PCM
14-198 BACK
DTC P1743: Problem in Shift Control System; 10. Test-drive the vehicle again for several minutes in
Shift Valve E Stuck OFF the D position through all five gears, then slow
down to a stop.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General 11. Monitor the OBD status for P1743 in the DTCs/
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating Does the result indicate PASSED?
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 8
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-239) through a return to step 9 and recheck.

clutch material?

then go to step 4.

position through all five gears, then slow down to a
stop.
6. Test-drive the vehicle again for several minutes in

the D position through all five gears, then slow
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD status for P17 43 in the DTCs/

YES-Repair shift valve E in the main valve body

(see page 14-330), replace the main valve body, or
replace the transmission, then go to step 8.


stop.
BACK 14-199
DTC P1744: Problem in Shift Control System; 10. Test-drive the vehicle again for several minutes in
Shift Valve E Stuck ON the 0 position through all five gears, then slow
down to a stop.
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General 11. Monitor the OBD status for P1744 in the DTCs/
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). Freeze Data in NT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
1. Warm up the engine to normal operating Does the result indicate PASSED?
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the
proper level, and check for fluid leaks. NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 8
3. Drain the ATF (see step 3 on page 14-239) through a return to step 9 and recheck.

clutch material?

then go to step 4.

stop.

the 0 position through all five gears, then slow
down to a stop.
7. Monitor the OBD status for P17 44 in the DTCs/

YES-Repair shift valve E in the main valve body

(see page 14-330), replace the main valve body, or


stop.
14-200 BACK
DTC P1745: Problem in Shift Control System; 9. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the 0
Servo Control Valve Stuck OFF or Servo position through all five gears, then slow down to a
Control Valve Stuck ON stop.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data 10. Test-drive the vehicle again for several minutes in
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General the 0 position through all five gears, then slow
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). down to a stop.
1. Warm upthe engine to normal operating 11. Monitor the OBD status for P17 45 in the DTCs/
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
2. Make sure that the transmission is filled to the Does the result indicate PASSED?
strainer. Inspect the strainer for metal debris or NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, return to step 8
excessive clutch material. and recheck. If the HDS indicates NOT COMPLETED,
clutch material?

then go to step 4.

stop.

the 0 position through all five gears, then slow
down to a stop.

YES-Repair the servo control valve in the main

valve body (see page 14-330), servo valve in the
regulator valve body (see page 14-333), or replace
the main valve body, the regulator valve body, or

BACK 14-201
DTC P1780: Problem in Shift Control System 5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
have the latest software (see page 14-S), or
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, record all freeze data substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 6. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. stop.
2. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in the D 7. Test-drive the vehicle again for several minutes in
position through all five gears, then slow down to a the D position through all five gears, then slow
stop. down to a stop.
3. Test-drive the vehicle again for several minutes in S. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
the D position through all five gears, then slow Mode Menu with the HDS.
down to a stop.
4. Check for other DTCs indicated simultaneous with
the code P17S0. YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
NOTE: DTC P17S0 means there is one or more AfT PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
DTCs about the shift control system.
NO-Go to step 9.
Are there other DTCs?
9. Monitor the OBD status for P17S0 in the DTCs/
YES-Troubleshoot a problem as indicated by the Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
DTC.•
NO-Go to step 5.
were indicated on step S, go to the indicated DTC's
NO-Ifthe HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor

connections and loose terminals at the PCM. If the
14-202 BACK
Ole P2122: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) 5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
Sensor A (Throttle Position Sensor D) Circuit have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
Low Voltage Input substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
3. Check whether DTC P2122 is indicated in the DTCs/ good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. Ifthe
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
Is DTC P2122 indicated in the PGM-FI system? NO-Go to step 8.
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC P2122 in the PGM-FI 8. Monitor the OBD status for P2122 in the DTCs/
System (see page 11-278).• Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO-Go to step 4. Does the result indicate PASSED?
4. Check whether DTC P2122 is indicated in the DTCs/ YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Is DTC P2122 indicated? were indicated on step 7, go to the indicated DTC's
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this connections and loose terminals at accelerator
time .• pedal position sensor A and the PCM. If the PCM
BACK 14-203
OTC P2123: Accelerator Pedal Position (APP) 5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
Sensor A (Throttle Position Sensor D) Circuit have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
High Voltage Input substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10).
Troubleshooting Information (see page 14-4). 7. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT
3. Check whether DTC P2123 is indicated in the DTCs/ good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. If the
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. PCM was substituted, go to step 1.
Is DTe P2123 indicated in the PGM-FI system? NO-Go to step 8.
YES-Troubleshootfor DTC P2123 in the PGM-FI 8. Monitor the OBD status for P2123 in the DTCs/
System (see page 11-281).• Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu for a pass/fail.
NO-Go to step 4. Does the result indicate PASSED?
4. Check whether DTC P2123 is indicated in the DTCs/ YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS. complete. If the PCM was substituted, replace the
Is DTe P2123 indicated? were indicated on step 7, go to the indicated DTC's
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this connections and loose terminals at accelerator
time .• pedal position sensor A and the PCM. Ifthe PCM
14-204 BACK
DTe U0028: F-CAN Communication Circuit 5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
Error (F-CAN Bus OFF) have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Mode Menu with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DTe U0028 indicated?
3. Check whether DTC U0028 is indicated in the DTCs/ YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. 1ft he
Is DTe U0028 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
NO-Go to step 8.
YES-Troubleshoot for DTC U0028 in the PGM-FI
System (see page 11-205).• 8. Monitor the OBD status for U0028 in the DTCs/
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check whether DTC U0028 is indicated in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS. YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Is DTe U0028 indicated? original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other DTCs
YES-Go to step 5. troubleshooting .•
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
time .• connections and loose terminals at the PCM and
the connectors on the F-CAN circuit. Ifthe PCM was
BACK 14-205
DTC U0122: Lost Communication with VSA 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Control Unit
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General 7. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. connector.
terminal A36 and VSA modulator-control unit
3. Check that DTC U0122 recurs. connector terminal No. 39, and between A37 and
terminal No. 38.
YES-Go to step 4.

time .•
4. Check whether any DTC is indicated in the DTCs/

Freeze Data in VSA Mode Menu with the HDS.
VSA MODULATOR-
Is any DTC indicated in the VSA? CONTROL UNIT
CAN-L (RED) CONNECTOR
YES-Troubleshoot for the indicated DTC in the
VSA system (see page 19-83).•
l . . -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _----' CAN-H (WHT)
NO-Go to step 5. Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Go to step 14.
14-206 BACK
10. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not 14. Check the communication line between the VSA
have the latest software (see page 14-8), or modulator-control unit and the gauge control
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 14-10). module with the HDS.
11. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there malfunction in the F-CAN line between the
VSA modulator-control unit and the gauge control
12. Check for DTC(s) in the DTCs/Freeze Data in AfT module?
YES-Repair open in the wires between the VSA
Is DTC U0122 indicated? modulator-control unit connector and the CAN
communication lines .•
good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. Ifthe NO-Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-
PCM was substituted, go to step 1. control unit (see page 19-137), then recheck. If the
NO-Go to step 13. VSA modulator-control unit, replace the original
VSA modulator-control unit.•
13. Monitor the OBD status for U0122 in the DTCs/


connections and loose terminals at the VSA
modulator-control unit and the PCM. If the PCM
BACK 14-207
DTC U0155: Lost Communication with Gauge 5. Update the AfT software in the PCM if it does not
Control Module have the latest software (see page 14-8), or
and anyon-board snapshot, and review General 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Mode Menu with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is Dre U0155 indicated?
3. Check whether DTC U0155 is indicated in the DTCs/ YES-Ifthe PCM was updated, substitute a known-
Freeze Data in PGM-FI Mode Menu with the HDS. good PCM (see page 14-10), then recheck. Ifthe
Is Dre U0155 indicated in the PGM-FI system?
NO-Go to step 8.
YES-Troubleshootfor DTC U0155 in the PGM-FI
System (see page 11-210) .• 8. Monitor the OBD status for U0155 in the DTCs/
NO-Go to step 4.
4. Check whether DTC U0155 is indicated in the DTCs/
Freeze Data in AfT Mode Menu with the HDS. YES-If the PCM was updated, troubleshooting is
Is Dre U0155 indicated? original PCM (see page 11-252). If any other DTCs
YES-Go to step 5. troubleshooting .•
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this NO-If the HDS indicates FAILED, check for poor
time .• connections and loose terminals at the gauge
control module and the PCM. If the PCM was
14-10), then recheck. Ifthe PCM was substituted, go
keep idling until a result comes on.
14-208 BACK
Road Test
1. Warm upthe engine to normal operating 5. Prepare the HDS to take a HIGH SPEED SNAPSHOT
temperature (the radiator fan comes on). (refer to the HDS user's guide for more details if
needed):
2. Apply the parking brake, and block both rear
wheels. Start the engine, then shift to the D position • Select High Speed icon.
while pressing the brake pedal. Press the • Select these parameters:
accelerator pedal, and release it suddenly. The - VSS veh speed
engine should not stall. - Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed
-Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed (rpm)
3. Repeat step 2 in all shift lever positions. - RPM engine speed
- Relative TP Sensor
4. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the AfT - APP Sensor A
data list. Ifthe HDS does not communicate with the - ATF Temp sensor
PCM, troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page - Battery voltage
11-229). - Shift control
- Brake Switch
• Setthe Trigger Type to Parameter.
• Adjust the Parameter setting to APP Sensor A
above 0.75 V.
• Set the recording time to 60 seconds.
• Set the Trigger point to -30 seconds.
6. Find a suitable level road. When you are ready to

do the test, press OK on the HDS.
7. Monitor the HDS and accelerate quickly until the

APP Sensor A reads 0.75 V. Maintain a steady
throttle until the transmission shifts to 5th gear,
then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
A 8. Save the snapshot if the enti re event was recorded

or increase the recording time setting as necessary
and repeat step 7.
9. Adjust the Parameter setting to 2.25 V. Test-drive

the vehicle again. While monitoring the HDS,
accelerate quickly until the APP Sensor A reads
2.25 V. Maintain a steady throttle until the
transmission shifts to 5th gear (or reasonable
speed), then slow the vehicle and come to a stop.
10. Save the snapshot if the entire event was recorded

or increase the recording time setting as necessary
and repeat step 9.
11. Accelerate quickly until the accelerator pedal is to

the floor. Maintain a steady pedal until the
transmission shifts to 3rd gear, then slow to a stop,
and save the snapshot.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-209
Road Test (cont'd)
12. Review each snapshot individually, and compare Downshift· D Position (reference)
the Shift Command, the APP Sensor A voltage, and Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
the Vehicle Speed to the table below. 0.75 V
Lock-up OFF 45-48 mph (72-77 km/h)
UIpSh"ft
I : D PoSition
"" 5th-4th 33-36 mQh (53-58 km/h)
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage: 4th-3rd 15-18 mph (24-29 km/h)
0.75 V 2nd-1st 5-8 mph (8-13 km/h)
1st-2nd 8-10 mph (13-16 km/h) Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
2nd-3rd 14-16 mph (23-26 km/h) 2.25 V
3rd-4th 22-26 mph (35-42 km/h) Lock-up OFF 72-77 mph (116-124 km/h)
4th-5th 39-43 mph (63-69 km/h) 5th-4th 68-71 mph (109-114 km/h)
Lock-up ON 48-51 mph (77-82 km/h) 4th-3rd 45-48 mph (72-77 km/h)
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage: 3rd-2nd 22-25 mph (35-40 km/h)
2.25 V 2nd-1st 5-8 mph (8-13 km/h)
1st-2nd 25-28 mph (40-45 km/h) Fully-opened throttle
2nd-3rd 48-52 mph (77-84 km/h) Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
3rd-4th 68-72 mph (109-116 km/h) 4.5 V
4th-5th 90-94 mph (145-151 km/h) 4th-3rd 81-86 mph (130-138 km/h)
Lock-up ON 76-80 mph (122-129 km/h) 3rd-2nd 51-55 mph (82-86 km/h)
Fully-opened throttle 2nd-1st 27-30 mph (43-48 km/h)
Accelerator pedal position sensor voltage:
4.5 V 13. Drive the vehicle in 4th or 5th gear in the sequential
1st-2nd 34-38 mph (55-61 km/h) sportshift mode in the S position, then downshift to
2nd-3rd 63-67 mph (101-108 km/h) 2nd gear. The vehicle should immediately begin to
3rd-4th 101-106 mph (163-171 km/h) slow down from engine braking.
14. Shift to the R position, accelerate from a stop at full

throttle, and check for abnormal noise and clutch
slippage.
15. Park the vehicle on a slope (about 16 degrees),

apply the brake, and shift into the P position.
Release the brake; the vehicle should not move.
NOTE: Always use the brake to hold the vehicle,

when stopped on an incline in gear. Depending on
the grade of the incline, the vehicle could roll
backwards if the brake is released.
14-210 BACK
Stall Speed Test
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the 8. If the measurements are out of the service limit, the
proper level (see page 14-238). possible problems and probable causes are listed
in the table.
2. Apply the parking brake, and block all four wheels.
Problem Probable causes
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the AfT Stall speed rpm high • ATF pump output
data list. If the HDS does not communicate with the in the Dand R low
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page positions • Regulator valve stuck
11-229). • Slipping clutch
Stall speed rpm high Slippage of 5th clutch
in the R position
Stall speed rpm low • Engine output low
inthe D and R • Engine throttle valve
positions closed
• Torque converter
one-way clutch
slipping
4. Make sure the AlC switch OFF.
5. After the engine has warmed up to normal

operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on),
shift to the D position.
6. Firmly press the brake pedal and accelerator pedal

for 6 to 8 seconds, and note engine speed. Do not
move the shift lever while raising engine speed.
7. Allow 2 minutes for cooling, then repeat the test in

the R position.
NOTE:
• Do not test stall speed for more than 10 seconds
at a time.
• Stall speed tests should be used for diagnostic
purposes only.
• Stall speed should be the same in the D and R
positions.
• Do not test stall speed with the AfT pressure
gauges installed.
Stall Speed rpm

Specification: 1,950 rpm
Service Limit: 1,800-2,100 rpm
BACK 14-211
Pressure Test
Special Tools Required 6. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the line pressure
• AfT clutch pressure gauge set inspection port (A). Do not allow dust or other
07406-0020400 or 07406-0020401 foreign particles to enter the hole while connecting
• AfT pressure hose, 2,210 mm 07MAJ-PY4011A the gauge.
• AfT pressure hose adapter 07MAJ-PY40120
AfT OIL PRESSURE
GAUGE SET W fPANEL
1. Make sure the transmission fluid is filled to the 07406-0020400 or
proper level (see page 14-238). 07406-0020401
2. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is securely

supported.
3. Allow all four wheels to rotate freely. AfT PRESSURE AfT PRESSURE
HOSE, 2,210 mm HOSE ADAPTER
07MAJ-PY4011A 07MAJ-PY40120
4. Remove the splash shield. (4 required) (4 required)
Q ~
5. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the AfT
data list. If the HDS does not communicate with the
11-229).
7. Start the engine, and warm it up to normal

operating temperature (the radiator fan comes on).
8. Measure the line pressure at the line pressure

inspection port (A) in the P or N position while
holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
NOTE: Higher pressure may be indicated if

measurements are made in the shift lever position
other than P or N.
Pressure Fluid Pressure

Standard Service Limit
Line (A) 950-1,010 kPa 900 kPa
(9.7-10.3 kgf/cm2, (9.2 kgf/cm2,
140-146 psi) 130 psi)
14-212 BACK
9. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil 13. Start the engine, and shift into the S position.
pressure gauge from the line pressure inspection
port. 14. Shift into 1st gear by pulling the paddle shifter +
(upshift switch), and measure the 1st clutch
10. Install the sealing bolt to the line pressure pressure at the 1st clutch pressure inspection port
inspection port with a new sealing washer, and (8) and 1st-hold clutch pressure at the 1st-hold
tighten the bolts to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf.m, 13Ibf·ft). Do clutch pressure inspection port (C) while holding
not reuse the old sealing washer. the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
11. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 1st clutch 15. Upshift to 2nd gear by pulling the paddle shifter +
pressure inspection port (8) and the 1st-hold clutch (upshift switch), and measure the 2nd clutch
pressure inspection port (C). pressure at the 2nd clutch pressure inspection port
(D) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.

1st clutch 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
(8) (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm 2, (9.1 kgf/cm2,
2nd clutch 140-148 psi) 130 psi)
(D)
c
1st-hold 760-830 kPa 710 kPa
clutch (C) (7.7-8.5 kgf/cm2, (7.2 kgf!cm 2,
110-120 psi) 100 psi)
16. Turn the engine off, remove the air cleaner housing
and air intake duct, then disconnect the oil pressure
gauges from the 1st clutch pressure, 1st-hold clutch
pressure, and 2nd clutch pressure inspection ports.
12. Remove the air cleaner housing and the air intake 17. Install the sealing bolts in the 1st clutch pressure,
duct, and connect the oil pressure gauge to the 2nd 1st-clutch hold clutch pressure, and 2nd clutch
clutch pressure inspection port (D). Then pressure inspection ports with new sealing
temporarily install the air cleaner housing and the washers, and tighten the bolts to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m,
air intake duct. 13Ibf·ft). Do not reuse the old sealing washers.
18. Install the air cleaner housing and the air intake
duct.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-213
Pressure Test (cont'd)
19. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 3rd clutch 21. Start the engine, and shift to the S position.
pressure inspection port (E) and the 5th clutch
pressure inspection port (G). 22. Upshift to 3rd gear by pulling the paddle shifter +
(upshift switch), and measure the 3rd clutch
pressure at the 3rd clutch pressure inspection port
G
(D) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
23. Upshift to 4th gear, and measure the 4th clutch

pressure inspection port (E) while holding the
engine speed at 2,000 rpm.
24. Upshift to 5th gear, and measure the 5th clutch

pressure at the 5th clutch pressure inspection port
(F) while holding the engine speed at 2,000 rpm.

3rd clutch 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
(E) (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm2, (9.1 kgf/cm 2,
4th clutch 140-148 psi) 130 psi)
(F)
5th clutch
(G)
20. Connect the oil pressure gauge to the 4th clutch 25. Bring the engine back to an idle, then apply the
pressure inspection port (F). brake pedal to stop the wheels from rotating.
26. Shift to the R position, then release the brake pedal.

Raise the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and measure
5th clutch pressure at the 5th clutch pressure
inspection port (G).

5th clutch 940-1,020 kPa 890 kPa
(G)inR (9.6-10.4 kgf/cm 2, (9.1 kgf/cm2,
140-148 psi) 130 psi)
27. Turn the engine off, then disconnect the oil

pressure gauges from the 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch
pressure inspection ports.
28. Install the sealing bolts in the 3rd, 4th, and 5th
clutch pressure inspection holes with new sealing
washers, and tighten the bolts to 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m,
13Ibf·ft). Do not reuse the old sealing washers.
14-214 BACK
29. If the measurements are out of the service limit, the
possible problems and probable causes are listed
in the table.
Problem Probable causes

No or low line • Torque converter
pressure • ATF pump
• Regulator valve
• Torque converter
check valve
• Low fluid level
• Clogged ATF strainer
No or low 1st clutch • 1st clutch
pressure • O-rings
No or low 2nd clutch • 2nd clutch
No or low 3rd clutch • 3rd clutch
No or low 4th clutch • 4th clutch
No or low 5th clutch • 5th clutch
No or low 5th clutch • Servo valve
pressure in the R • 5th clutch
position • O-rings
No or low 1st-hold • 1st-hold clutch
clutch pressure • O-rings
BACK 14-215
Shift Solenoid Valve Test, Replacement, and Shift Solenoid Wire Harness
Replacement
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 9. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket
(A).
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
F ----....~ G
2. Choose Shift Solenoid A, 8, C, and D in the

Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.

11-229).
3. Check that shift solenoid valves A, 8, C, and D

operate with the HDS. A clicking sound should be
heard .
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valves are OK.

The test is complete, disconnect the HDS. 10. Remove the spring clip/washer (8) and control pin
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 4, and (C), then separate the shift cable end (D) from the
test the solenoid valves. control lever (E).
4. Make sure you have the audio system and 11. Check the synthetic resin bushing (F) in the shift
navigation system (if equipped) anti-theft codes, cable end for a proper fit and wear. If the bushing is
and write down the audio presets. loose or worn, replace the shift cable (see page
14-282).
5. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery,
then disconnect the positive terminal.
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and

remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray.
7. Remove the battery base.
8. Remove the intercooler cover, air cleaner housing,

and air intake duct.
14-216 BACK
12. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 15. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
sensor connector (A), output shaft (countershaft) valve A and B, ATF pipes (e), and gasket (D).
speed sensor connector (B), 3rd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch connector (e),
and ATF temperature sensor connector (D).
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
16. Replace the gasket and O-rings (E) with new ones
when installing the AfT clutch pressure control
solenoid valve A and B.
17. Remove the solenoid valve cover (A), dowel pins

13. Disconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid (B), and gasket (e).
valve A connector (A), solenoid valve B connector
(B), shift solenoid harness connector (e).
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft) 18. Replace the gasket with new one when installing
the solenoid cover.
14. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (D).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-217
Shift Solenoid Valve Test, Replacement, and Shift Solenoid Wire Harness
Replacement (cont'd)
19. Disconnect the connectors from shift solenoid 22. Remove the shift solenoid wire harness connector
valve A, shift solenoid valve 8, shift solenoid valve (A), and replace it. Install a new O-ring (8) on the
C, and shift solenoid valve D. shift solenoid harness connector, and install the
connector in the transmission housing, then go to
c step 29.
23. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the

solenoid valves.
20. Measure the resistance of each shift solenoid valve

between the connector terminal and body ground.
Standard: 12-25 Q
• If the resistance is out of standard, go to step 23

and replace shift solenoid valve.
• If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
21 and check solenoid valve for a clicking sound.
21. Connect a jumper wire from the positive battery

terminal to each solenoid valve terminal
individually.
• If a clicking sound is heard, go to step 22 and

replace the shift solenoid harness.
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 23 and
replace shift solenoid valve.
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
14-218 BACK
24. Install new O-rings (two O-rings per solenoid valve) 29. Connect the VEL harness terminal to shift solenoid
(E) on the reused solenoid valves. valve A, the GRN harness terminal to shift solenoid
valve C, the RED harness terminal to shift solenoid
NOTE: A new solenoid valve comes with new valve B, and the ORN harness terminal to shift
O-rings. If you install a new solenoid valve, use the valve D.
O-rings provided on it.
30. Install the shift solenoid valve cover, dowel pins,
25. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) by and a new gasket.
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure
the mounting bracket contacts the accumulator 31. Install the new solenoid valve body gasket on the
body. solenoid valve cover, and i.nstall the ATF pipes with
their filter side into the transmission housing.
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve by the Install the new O-rings over the ATF pipes.
connector when installing the solenoid valve. Be
sure to hold the solenoid valve body. 32. Install the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and B.
26. Install shift solenoid valve A (black connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure 33. Secure the harness cover with the bolt.
the mounting bracket contacts the accumulator
body. 34. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or
repair if necessary, then connectthe connectors
27. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by securely.
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure
the mounting bracket contacts the bracket of shift 35. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the
solenoid valve A. synthetic resin bushing in the shift cable end, and
attach the shift cable end to the control lever, then
NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve C before insert the control pin into the control lever hole
installing shift solenoid valve A. If shift solenoid through the shift cable end, and secure the control
valve C is installed before installing shift solenoid pin with the spring clip/washer.
valve A, it may damage the hydraulic control
system. 36. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts.
28. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by 37. Install the air intake duct, air cleaner housing, and
holding the shift solenoid valve body; make sure intercooler cover.
the mounting bracket contacts the accumulator
body. 38. Install the battery base.
39. Install the battery tray, battery, battery cover, and

battery hold-down bracket, then connect battery
terminals.
40. Enter the audio system and navigation system (if

equipped) anti-theft codes, then enter the audio
presets, and set the clock.
41. Do the power window control unit reset procedure

(see page 22-213).
BACK 14-219
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A). 9. Disconnect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A connector.

in the Miscellaneous Test Menu on the HDS.

11-229).
10. Measure AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
3. Test AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A A resistance at the connector terminals.
with the HDS.
Standard: 3-10 Q
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete.
Disconnect the HDS. • If the resistance is out of standard, replace AfT
• Ifthe valve does nottest OK, follow the clutch pressure control solenoid valve A
instructions on the HDS. (see page 14-226).
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does • If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
not determine the cause, go to step 4. 11.
4. Make sure you have the audio system and 11. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
navigation system (if equipped) anti-theft codes, terminal to the solenoid valve A connector terminal
and write down the audio presets. No.2, and connect another jumper wire from the
positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
5. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, No.1.
• If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. parts.
• If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 12.

14-220 BACK
12. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket 15. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
(A). sensor connector (A), output shaft (countershaft)
speed sensor connector (8), 3rd clutch
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) transmission fluid pressure switch connector (C),
F -------® @

valve A connector (A), solenoid valve 8 connector
(8), and shift solenoid harness connector (C).
13. Remove the spring clip/washer (8) and control pin

(C), then separate the shift cable end (D) from the
control lever (E).
14. Check the synthetic resin bushing (F) in the shift

cable end for a proper fit and wear. If the bushing is
loose or worn, replace the shift cable (see page
14-282).
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 14-221
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A Test (cont'd)
18. Remove the AIT clutch pressure control solenoid 21. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check
valve A and B, ATF pipes (C), gasket (D), and valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body
O-rings (E). mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
replace the AIT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and B.
22. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of

the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.
23. Install the new solenoid valve body gasket on the

solenoid valve cover, and install the ATF pipes with
the filter end in the transmission housing. Install
the new O-rings over the ATF pipes.
24. Install the AIT clutch pressure control solenoid

valve A and B.
25. Secure the harness cover with the bolt.
26. Check the connectors for rust, dirt, or oil, clean or

6x1.0mm repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
securely.
19. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for 27. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the
contamination. synthetic resin bushing in the shift cable end, and
20. Connect ajumper wire from the negative battery insert the control pin into the control lever hole
terminalto AIT clutch pressure control solenoid through the shift cable end, and secure the control
valve A connector terminal No.2, and connect pin with the spring clip/washer.
another jumper wire from the positive battery
terminal to the connector terminal No.1. Make sure 28. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts.
AIT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A moves.
29. Install the air intake duct, air cleaner housing, and
intercooler cover.
30. Install the battery base.

terminals.

A 33. Do the power window control unit reset procedure

(see page 22-213).
14-222 BACK
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test
valve B connector.


11-229).
3. Test AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B 10. Measure AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
with the HDS. B resistance at the connector terminals.
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. Standard: 3-10 Q

Disconnect the HDS.
• Ifthe valve does not test OK, follow the • If the resistance is out of standard, replace AfT
instructions on the HDS. clutch pressure control solenoid valve B
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does (see page 14-226).
not determine the cause, go to step 4. • Ifthe resistance is within the standard, go to step
11.
4. Make sure you have the audio system and
navigation system (if equipped) anti-theft codes, 11. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
and write down the audio presets. terminal to the solenoid valve B connector terminal
No.2, and connect another jumper wire from the
5. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
then disconnect the positive terminal. No.1.
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and • If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
parts.
7. Remove the battery base. • If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 12.

(cont'd)
BACK 14-223
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve B Test (cont'd)
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) transmission fluid pressure switch connector (C),
F ------....® 6
A

13. Remove the spring clip/washer (8) and control pin (8), and shift solenoid harness connector (C).
control lever (E).

14-282).
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
14-224 BACK
18. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 21. Disconnect one ofthe jumper wires and check
valve A and B, ATF pipes (C), gasket (D), and valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body
O-rings (E). mounting surface. Ifthe valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoid valve does not operate,
replace the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve A and B.
22. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of

the solenoid valve body and solenoid valve cover.

24. Install the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

valve A and B.

6x1.0mm repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
12 N·m 11.2 kgf.m,8.7Ibf·ftl
securely.
19. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for 27. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the
contamination. synthetic resin bushing in the shift cable end, and
20. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery insert the control pin into the control lever hole
terminal to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid through the shift cable end, and secure the control
valve B connector terminal No.2, and connect pin with the spring clip/washer.
terminal to the connector terminal No.1. Make sure 28. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts.
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve B moves.
intercooler cover.

terminals.


B
(see page 22-213).
BACK 14-225
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve A and B Replacement
1. Make sure you have the audio system and 9. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed
navigation system (if equipped) anti-theft codes, sensor connector (A), output shaft (countershaft)
and write down the audio presets. speed sensor connector (8), 3rd clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch connector (C),
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, and ATF temperature sensor connector (D).


6. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket

(A).
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
F ~
10. Disconnect the A(f clutch pressure control solenoid
(8), and shift solenoid harness connector (C).

control lever (E). ~B
o
loose or worn, replace the shift cable (see page 6x 1.0 mm
14-282). 12 N·m 11.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibf·ftl
14-226 BACK
12. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 21. Install the battery base.
valve A and B, ATF pipes (C), gasket (D), and
O-rings (E). 22. Install the battery tray, battery, battery cover, and
terminals.


(see page 22-213).
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
13. Check the fluid passage ofthe AfT clutch pressure

control solenoid valve for dust or dirt, and clean the
passage.


valve A and B.

repair if necessary, then connect the connectors
securely.
18. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole ofthe

synthetic resin bushing in the shift cable end, and
insert the control pin into the control lever hole
through the shift cable end, and secure the control
pin with the spring clip/washer.
19. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts.
intercooler cover.
BACK 14-227
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test
valve C connector.


11-229). 10. Measure AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
C resistance at the connector terminals.
3. Test the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve
C with the HDS. Standard: 3-10 Q
• If the valve tests OK, the test is complete. • If the resistance is out of standard, replace AfT
Disconnect the HDS. clutch pressure control solenoid valve C
• If the valve does not test OK, follow the (see page 14-231).
instructions on the HDS. • If the resistance is within the standard, go to step
• If the valve does not test OK, and the HDS does 11.
not determine the cause, go to step 4.
11. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
4. Make sure you have the audio system and terminal to the solenoid valve C connector terminal
navigation system (if equipped) anti-theft codes, No.2, and connect another jumper wire from the
and write down the audio presets. positive battery terminal to the connector terminal
No.1.
then disconnect the positive terminal. • If a clicking sound is heard, the valve is OK.
Reconnect the connector, and install all removed
6. Remove the battery hold-down bracket, and parts.
remove the battery cover, battery, and battery tray. • If no clicking sound is heard, go to step 12.

14-228 BACK
12. Remove the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 15. Connect a jumper wire from the negative battery
valveC. terminal to AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
valve C connector terminal No.2, and connect
terminal to the connector terminal No.1. Make sure
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C moves.
16. Disconnect one of the jumper wires and check

valve movement at the fluid passage in valve body
mounting surface. If the valve binds or moves
sluggishly, or if the solenoiq valve does not operate,
replace the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid
varve C.
13. Remove the ATF joint pipes, O-rings, ATF pipe, and 17. Clean the mounting surface and fluid passage of
gasket. the solenoid valve body and transmission housing.
14. Check the fluid passage of the solenoid valve for

contamination.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-229
AfT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Test (cont'd)
18. Install the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the 20. Install the new gasket (A) on.the transmission
filter end into its mounting hole (8). housing, and install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF joint pipe
(8) with the filter end into the transmission housing
A and 8 x 25.2 mm ATF pipe (D).
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
19. Check the height (A) of the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint

pipe (8) between the top (C) of the pipe and
solenoid valve body mounting surface (D). The
height is about 7 mm (0.3 in.). If the height is over
7 mm (0.3 in.), push the pipe until it bottoms in the
accumulator body.
21. Install the new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.
22. Install Aff clutch pressure control solenoid valve C.
23. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then

connect the connector securely.
intercooler cover.

terminals.


(see page 22-213).
14-230 BACK
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement
1. Make sure you have the audio system and 10. Install the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the
navigation system (if equipped) anti-theft codes, filter end into its mounting hole (B).
and write down the audio presets.
A



valve C connector.

pipe (B) between the top (C) of the pipe and
7 mm (0.3 in.), push the pipe until it bottoms in the
accumulator body.
7. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve

C.
8. Remove the ATF joint pipes, O-rings, ATF pipe, and
gasket.
9. Clean the mounting surface and the fluid passage

of the solenoid valve body and transmission
housing.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-231
AIT Clutch Pressure Control Solenoid Valve C Replacement (cont'd)
12. Install the new gasket (A) on the transmission

housing, and install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF joint pipe
(8) with the filter end into the transmission housing
and 8 x 25.2 mm ATF pipe (D).
6x1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
13. Install the new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes.

valveC.

intercooler cover.

terminals.


(see page 22-213).
14-232 BACK
Input Shaft (Mainshaft) Speed Output Shaft (Countershaft) Speed
Sensor Replacement Sensor Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking 1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
2. Remove the splash shield. 2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Disconnect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed 3. Disconnect the output shaft (countershaft) speed
sensor connector, and remove the input shaft sensor connector, and remove the output shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor. (countershaft) speed sensor.
6x1.0mm
12N\......,..7IbI·ftJ
A B
4. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new input shaft 4. Install the new O-ring (A) on the new output shaft
(mainshaft) speed sensor (S), then install the input (countershaft) speed sensor (S), then install the
shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor and sensor washer output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor in the
(C) in the transmission housing. transmission housing.
5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then 5. Check the connector for rust, dirt, or oil, then
connectthe connector securely. connect the connector securely.
6. Install the splash shield. 6. Install the splash shield.
BACK 14-233
2nd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Make sure you have the audio system and 7. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid
navigation system (if equipped) anti-theft codes, pressure switch connector, and remove the switch.



6. Remove the air intake duct (A).
8. Install the new 2nd clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch (A) and a new sealing washer (8),
and tighten the switch.
9. Make sure there is no water, oil, dust, or foreign

particles inside the connector.
10. Connect the connector securely.
11. Install the air intake duct, and secure it with the
clips. Install the hose in the clamp on the air intake
duct.
intercooler cover.

terminals.


(see page 22-213).
14-234 BACK
3rd Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking

brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported.
2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Disconnect the 3rd clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch connector, and remove the switch.
A
20N·m
B 12.0 kgf·m, 14Ibf·ft)
4. Install the new 3rd clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch (A) and a new sealing washer (8),

6. Cqnnect the connector securely.
BACK 14-235
4th Clutch Transmission Fluid Pressure Switch Replacement
1. Make sure you have the audio system and 13. Enter the audio system and navigation system (if
navigation system (if equipped) anti-theft codes, equipped) anti-theft codes, then enter the audio
and write down the audio presets. presets, and set the clock.
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, 14. Do the power window control unit reset procedure
then disconnect the positive terminal. (see page 22-213).


6. Disconnect the 4th clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch connector, and remove the switch.
A
20N·m
(2.0 kgf·m,
14Ibf·ft)
7. Install the new 4th clutch transmission fluid

pressure switch (A) and a new sealing washer (B),

9. Connect the connector securely.
intercooler cover.

terminals.
14-236 BACK
ATF Temperature Sensor Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle up on a lift, or apply the parking 5. Disconnect the ATF temperature sensor connector
brake, block the rear wheels, and raise the front of (A), then remove the connector from the connector
the vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. bracket (8).
2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic

transmission fluid (ATF).
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·tt)
\
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer
(8).
6. Remove the harness clamp (C) from its bracket (D).
7. Remove the ATF temperature sensor, and replace

the sensor.
8. Install the new O-ring (E) on the new ATF

temperature sensor (F), and install the ATF
temperature sensor.

10. Install the harness clamp on its bracket.
11. Refill the transmission with ATF (see step 5 on page

14-239).
BACK 14-237
ATF Level Check

NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out of the transmission. 6. If the level is below the lower mark, check for fluid
leaks at the transmission, and hose and line joints.
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground. If a problem is found, fix it before filling the
transmission.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn NOTE: Ifthe vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
the engine off. Do not allow the engine to warm up below the lower mark:
longer than the time it takes for the radiator fan to • Transmission damage will result.
come on twice. • Vehicle does not move in any gear.
• Vehicle accelerates poorly, and flares when
NOTE: Check the fluid level within 60-90 seconds starting off in the D and R positions.
after turning the engine off. Higher fluid level may • The engine vibrates at idle.
be indicated if the radiator fan comes on twice or
more. 7. Ifthe level is above the upper mark, drain the ATF
to proper level (see step 3 on page 14-239).
3. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop) (A) from the
dipstick guide tube, and wipe it with a clean cloth. NOTE: If the vehicle is driven when the ATF level is
above the upper mark, the vehicle may creep
forward while in the N position, or have shifting
problem.
8. If necessary, fill the transmission with the ATF

through the dipstick guide tube opening (A) to
bring the fluid level midway between the upper
mark and lower mark of the dipstick. Do not fill past
the upper mark. Always use Honda ATF-Z1
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
4. Insert the dipstick into the guide tube.
5. Remove the dipstick and check the fluid level. It

should be between the upper mark (A) and lower
mark (8).
9. Insert the dipstick back into the dipstick guide tube.

I A
14·238 BACK
ATF Replacement
NOTE: Keep all foreign particles out ofthe transmission. 5. Refill the transmission with the recommended fluid
into the filler hole (A). Always use Honda ATF-Z1
1. Park the vehicle on the level ground. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF). Using a non-
Honda ATF can affect shift quality.
temperature (the radiator fan comes on), and turn Automatic Transmission Fluid Capacity:
the engine off. 3.3 L 13.5 US qt) at change
7.8 L 18.2 US qt) at overhaul
3. Remove the ATF filler bolt and drain plug (A), and
drain the automatic transmission fluid (ATF).
NOTE: If a cooler cleaning is done, referto ATF

Cooler Cleaning (see page 14-271).
6. Install the ATF filler bolt (B) and a new sealing

washer (C).
(B). 7. Check that the fluid level is between the upper mark
and lower mark on the dipstick (see page 14-238).
8. If the maintenance minder required to replace the

ATF, reset the maintenance minder (see page 3-9),
and this procedure is complete. Ifthe maintenance
minder did not require to replace the ATF, go to
step 9 and reset the ATF life with the HDS.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-239
ATF Replacement (cont' d)
9. Connect the HDS to the DLC (A), and go to the

BODY ELECTRICAL. If the HDS does not
communicate with the PCM, troubleshoot the DLC
10. Select ADJUSTMENT in the GAUGES MENU with

the HDS.
11. Select RESET in the MAINTENANCE MINDER with

the HDS.
12. Select MAINTENANCE SUB ITEM 3 RESET, and

reset the ATF life with the HDS.
14-240 BACK
Transfer Assembly Fluid Replacement
1. Bring the transmission up to normal operating 5. Remove the filler plug (A) and sealing washer (B).
2. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the

engine off.
.
A
20x1.5mm
N~Rm. 331b1·ftl
3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the transfer

fluid (hypoid gear oil).
g :::::---- B
A~
20x 1.5mm
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ftl 6. Refill the transfer assembly with the recommended
fluid (hypoid gear oil) through the filler hole (C)
4. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer until the fluid flows out. Use a SAE 90 or SEA 80W-
(B). 90 viscosity hypoid gear oil, API classified GL4 or
GL50nly.
Viscosity
SAE 90: Above 0 "F ( -18 'Cl
SAE 80W-90: Below 0 "F ( -18 'Cl
Transfer Fluid (Hypoid Gear Oi\) Capacity:

0.43 L (0.45 US qtl at fluid change
7. Install the filler plug with a new sealing washer.
BACK 14-241
Transfer Assembly Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 7. Ifthe measurement is out of standard, remove the
securely. transfer assembly, and adjust the transfer gear
backlash (see page 14-418).
2. Shift the transmission into the N position.
8. Check for fluid leaks between the mating faces of
3. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller the transfer assembly and transmission.
shaft (8) and the transfer companion flange (C).
9. If there is a leak, remove the transfer assembly,
~10x1.25mm remove the transfer cover, and replace the O-ring.
~ 72 N·m (7.3 kgf·m, 53 Ibf·ttl
10. Check for leaks between the transfer companion

flange and transfer oil seal.
11. If there is a leak, remove the transfer assembly

from the transmission, and replace the transfer oil
seal and O-ring on the transfer output shaft (hypoid
gear). If oil seal and O-ring replacement is required,
you will need to check and adjustthe transfer gear
tooth contact, transfer gear backlash, the tapered
A roller bearing starting torque, and the total starting
torque (see page 14-418). Do not replace the oil seal
with the transfer assembly on the transmission.
4. Separate the propeller shaft from the transfer

companion flange.
5. Set a dial indicator (A) on the transfer companion

flange (8); position dial indicator tip (C) on the
direct extension of the bolt hole center (D).
D c
\ A
6. Measure the transfer gear backlash.
Standard: 0.06-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in.)
14-242 BACK
Transfer Assembly Removal
,. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 6. Remove the bolt securing the transfer breather
securely. hose bracket (A), and disconnect the breather hose
(8) from the breather pipe (C) on the transfer
2. Shift the transmission into the N position. assembly.
3. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic

transmission fluid (ATF).
2·m ,.m.:. .
A
18x1.5mm
15.0 . . ·ftl
@ ?i
7. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller
shaft (8) and the transfer companion flange (C).

(B).
5. Remove the three-way catalytic converter.

companion flange.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-243
Transfer Assembly Removal (cont'd)
9. Remove the transfer assembly from the

transmission.
14-244 BACK
Transfer Assembly Installation
1. Clean the areas where the transfer assembly 4. Secure the transfer breather hose bracket (A) on
contacts the transmission with solvent or the transfer assembly with the bolt, and install the
carburetor cleaner, and dry with compressed air. breather hose (8) over the breather pipe (C) with
Then apply transmission fluid to the contact area. the dot (D) facing out.
2. Install the dowel pin (A) in the transmission, and

install the transfer assembly (8) on the
transmission.
5. Install the three-way catalytic converter (A) with the

new self-locking nuts and new gaskets (8) (C).
3. Install the propeller shaft (A) to the transfer

companion flange (8) by aligning the reference
mark (C).
.______10 x 1.25 mm
i] 72 N·m
(7.3 kgf.m, 53 Ibf·ftl
A
\
\
10x 1.25 mm
33N·m
(3.4 kgf·m,
25lbf·ftl
8x1.25mm Replace.
22N·m
(2.2 kgf.m, 16lbf·ftl A c
6. Refill the transfer assembly with transfer fluid
(hypoid gear oil), if necessary (see page 14-241).

14-239).
BACK 14-245
Transfer Breather Hose Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle, and make sure it is supported 4. Disconnect the breather hose (A) from the transfer
securely. breather pipe (8), and remove the breather hose
from the hose clips (e).
2. Remove the transfer breather (A) from its bracket
(8), and disconnect the breather hose (e) from the
breather.
5. Install the breather hose over the breather pipe

with the dot (D) facing out.
6. Align the other dots with the clips, then push the
hose into the clips. Make sure the dots face out.
3. Remove the breather hose (A) from the hose clamp 7. eonnectthe breather hose over the pipe ofthe
(8) (located near the ATF filler plug). breather with facing the dot up, and install the
breather on its bracket.
14-246 BACK
Transmission Removal
Special Tools Required 9. Remove the drain plug (A), and drain the automatic
• RDX engine support eyelet 07 AAK-SNAA600 transmission fluid (ATF).
• Support bolt 07 AAK-SNAA500
• RDX engine support mount pads 07AAK-STKA120 A
18x1.5mm
.. \0 'gI·m. 361b1.. ,
* These special tools are available through the
American Honda Tool and Equipment Program
1-888-424-6857.
NOTE:
• Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted
surfaces.
• Special tool engine hanger must be used with the
side engine mount installed.

audio system and navigation system (if equipped),
then write down the audio presets.
2. Secure the hood in the wide open position with the 10. Reinstall the drain plug with a new sealing washer
support rod. (B).
3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. Disconnect 11. Disconnect the transmission range switch
the negative terminal from the battery, then connector (A).
disconnect the positive terminal.


and intake air duct.

supported.
8. Remove the splash shield (see page 20-177).
12. Remove the transmission ground cable terminals

(B).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-247
Transmission Removal (cont'd)
transmission fluid pressure switch connector (C),
A

control lever (E).
15. Check the synthetic resin bushing (F) in the shift valve A connector (A), solenoid valve 8 connector
cable end for a proper fit and wear. If the bushing is (8), solenoid valve C connector (C), 4th clutch
loose or worn, replace the shift cable (see page transmission fluid pressure switch connector (D),
14-282). and shift solenoid harness connector (E).
18. Remove the bolt securing the harness cover (F).
14-248 BACK
19. Disconnect the ATF cooler hoses (A) from the ATF 21. Remove the bolts securing the harness ciampi
lines (B). Turn the end of the ATF cooler hoses up to junction box bracket from the transmission housing.
prevent ATF from flowing out, then plug the hoses
and lines.
20. Remove the cooler by-pass hoses (A) from the

clamps (B), and remove the bolt securing the clamp
bracket (e).
22. Remove the hose (A) from the clamp on the intake
air duct, and remove the intake air duct (B).
B
(cont'd)
BACK 14-249
23. Attach the engine support eyelet (07AAK- 25;', Remove both lids-for the front damper flange nuts
SNAA600) to the cylinder head with the support from the cowl cover. Use the adapter (A) between
bolt (07 AAK-SNAA500). Tighten the bolt by hand. the cross arm foot (B) and body when positioning
the engine support hanger.
24. Remove the top corner clip (A) from the front grille
on both sides. Place the engine support mount
pads (07AAK-STKA120) over the hood edge
cushions (B), and align the pins with the clip hole 07 AAK-SNAA600
(C).
26. Carefully position the engine support hanger (AAR-
T-12566) on the vehicle, and attach the hook to the
slotted hole in the engine support eyelet (07 AAK-
SNAA600). Tighten the wingnut (C) by hand to lift
and support the engine/transmission assembly.
NOTE: Use care when working around the

windshield.
14-250 BACK
27. Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (A) in the top of the ball 30. Remove the bolt securing the transfer breather
joint pin (B), and remove the nuts (C), then separate hose bracket (A), and disconnect the breather hose
the stabilizer link (D) from the stabilizer (E). (B) from the breather pipe (C) on the transfer
assembly.
B C

shaft (B) and the transfer companion flange (C).
28. Remove the nuts (Hand bolt (G) securing the lower
arm (H) and ball joint (I), and separate the lower
arms from the ball joints.
29. Remove the three-way catalytic converter.

companion flange.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-251
33. Remove the bolts securing the ATF cooler line at 35. Remove the bolt securing the power steering fluid
the front of the subframe. line clamp bracket at the right front of the subframe.
36. Remove the power steering fluid hose from the

hose clamps.
34. Remove the torque converter cover (A) and

I
remove the drive plate bolts (8) (8) while rotating

the crankshaft pulley.
14-252 BACK
37. Remove the steering gearbox bracket mounting 39. Remove both steering gearbox stiffener mounting
bolts. bolts.
38. Remove the steering gearbox bracket mounting 40. Place a jack under the engine, raise it just enough
bolts. to take it off of the mount, and remove the lower
torque rod bolts.
o<
41. Remove the jack.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-253
42. Remove the propeller shaft protector. 44. Attach the front subframe adapter (VSB02C000016)
to the subframe by looping the strap over the front
of the subframe, then secure the strap.
43. Make reference marks on the body across the

marks (A) (B) on the edge of the subframe.
tighten the bolts.
46. Remove the lower arm bracket mounting bolts (A).
47. Remove the six bolts (B) (C) securing the front
subframe (0), and lower the subframe.
48. Hang the steering gearbox to the body with a strap.
14-254 BACK
49. Disconnect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid 51. Remove the intermediate shaft heat shield (A).
50. Remove the driveshafts from the differential and

intermediate shaft.
52. Remove the intermediate shaft (8).
53. Coat all precision machined surfaces with clean

engine oil, then put plastic bags over driveshaft
ends and intermediate shaft ends.
54. Remove the upper transmission housing mounting

bolts.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-255
Transmission Removal (co nt'd)
55. Place a jack under the transmission, raise it just 58. Remove the rear transmission housing mounting
enough to take it off of the mount, and remove the bolts.
transmission mount bracket bolt and nuts.
59. Lower the transmission by loosening the wing nut

on the engine support hanger, and tilt the engine
just enough for the transmission to clear the side
56. Remove the jack. frame.
57. Remove the front transmission housing mounting 60. Place a jack under the transmission.
bolts.
61. Remove the lower transmission housing mounting
bolts.
62. Slide the transmission away from the engine to

remove it from the vehicle.
14-256 BACK
63. Install the propeller shaft protector. 66. Remove the clamp bracket from the transmission.
64. Remove the torque converter and dowel pins.
67. Remove the transfer assembly from the

transmission.
65. Inspect the drive plate, and replace it if it's

damaged.
BACK 14-257
Transmission Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Install the clamp bracket.

• ROX engine support eyelet 07 AAK-SNAA600
• Support bolt 07 AAK-SNAA500
• ROX engine support mount pads 07 AAK-STKA 120
* These special tools are available through the
American Honda Tool and Equipment Program
1-888-424-6857.
NOTE: Use fender covers to avoid damaging painted

surfaces.
1. Clean the ATF cooler (see page 14-271).
2. Install the dowel pin (A) in the transmission, and

install the transfer assembly (B) on the
transmission.
4. Install the torque converter (A) on the mainshaft (B)

with the new O-ring (C).
5. Install the 14 x 20 mm dowel pins (0) in the torque

converter housing.
6. Place the transmission on the jack, and raise the

transmission to the engine level.
14-258 BACK
7. Attach the transmission to the engine, and install 9. Install the front transmission housing mounting
the lower transmission housing mounting bolt, and bolts.
tighten the bolts.
12 x 1.25 mm
64N·m
8. Install the rear transmission housing mounting

bolts.
10. Install the upper transmission housing mounting

bolt.
12x1.25mm
64N·m
(!Q,dmm~ 64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 14-259
Transmission Installation (cont'd)
11. Secure the transmission mount bracket on the 12. Install the new set ring (A) on the intermediate shaft
transmission housing with the nuts and the new (B).
mounting bolt.
8x 1.25mm
22N·m
10x 1.25 mm
39N·m
(4.0 kgf·m,
29Ibf·ft)
13. Clean the areas where the intermediate shaft
contacts the transmission (differential) with solvent,
and dry with compressed air. Apply ATF to
intermediate shaft splines (C), then install the
intermediate shaft, be sure not to allow dust or
other foreign particles to enter the transmission.
14. Install the intermediate shaft heat shield (D).
14-260 BACK
15. Install the new set ring (A) on the left driveshaft (8). 19. Remove the propeller shaft protector.
16. Clean the areas where the left driveshaft contacts 20. Connect the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
the transmission (differential) with solvent, and dry switch connector.
with compressed air. Then install the left drives haft,
be sure not to allow dust or other foreign particles
to enter the transmission. Turn the steering knuckle
fully outward, and slide the driveshaft into the
differential until you feel its set ring fully engage
the side gear.
17. Apply the recommended grease to the right

driveshaft inboard-joint splines.
18. Slide the right driveshaft over the intermediate

shaft splines until you feel the driveshaft fully
engage the intermediate shaft set ring.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-261
21. Support the front subframe with the front subframe 23. Loosely install the new subframe mounting bolts
adapter (VSB02C000016) and a jack. (A), and new lower arm bracket mounting bolts (B).
VSB02C000016
~---A
B
12x 1.5 mm
59N·m
16.0 kgf.m,
22. Lift the subframe up to the body while aligning the 14x1.5mm 43lbf·ftl
steering gearbox stiffener tab (A) in the subframe, 103N·m Replace.
and loosely install the mounting bolts. (10.5 kgf·m, 75.9 Ibf·ftl
Replace.
24. Align all reference marks (A) on the front subframe

(B) with the body, then tighten the mounting bolts
on the subframe to the specified torque.
5-0 8
------- ~ 12 x 1.25 mm
54N·m
15.5 kgf·m,
40lbf·ftl
14-262 BACK
25. Secure the lower torque rod with the new bolts. 27. Loosely install the steering gearbox bracket bolts.
o<
12x 1.25mm
64 N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·tt)
ReplaCe.
10x1.25mm
26. Install the propeller shaft protector. 74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 54Ibf·tt)
28. Loosely install the steering gearbox bracket bolts.
10X1.25mm
/ 74N·m
29. Secure the steering gearbox bracket with

tightening the bolts to the specified torque.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-263
Transmission Installation (co nt'd)
30. Secure the power steering fluid line clamp bracket 32. Secure the ATF cooler line with the bolts;
with the bolt.
6x1.0mm
6x 1.0mm 12N·m
9.8N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
31. Secure the power steering fluid hose with the hose
clamps.
33. Attach the torque converter to the drive plate with
eight bolts (A). Rotate the crankshaft pulley as
necessary to tighten the bolts to 1/2 of the specified
torque, then to the final torque, in a crisscross
pattern. After tightening the last bolt, check that the
crankshaft rotate freely.
O___ A
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
34. Install the torque converter cover (B).
14-264 BACK
35. Install both lower arms (A) to both ball joints (B), 38. Install the propeller shaft (A) to the transfer
and loosely install the new mounting nuts and bolts. companion flange (B) by aligning the reference
mark (C).
~ 72N·m
H 10x1.25mm
.
(Jl 17.3 kgf·m, 53 Ibf·ft)
~OX1.25mm 39. Secure the transfer breather hose bracket (A) on

B
:p. 59N·m
16.0kgf·m, the transfer assembly with the bolt, and install the
. • 43lbf·ft) breather hose (B) over the breather pipe (C) with
_ _oi"'o@~{v.;IMQnl·
Replace. the dot (0) facing out.
C D
10x1.25mm 10x1.25mm
59 N·m 16.0 kgf'm, 43 Ibf·ft) 59N·m
Replace. 16.0 kgf·m, 43 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
36. Tighten the nuts and bolts to 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m,

43 Ibf·ft) in the following order; the nut on the front
(C), the nut on the rear (0), then the bolt (E).
37. Install the stabilizer links (F) to the stabilizer, and

install the nuts (G). Insert a 6 mm Allen wrench (H)
in the ball joint pin (I), and tighten the nuts.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-265
Autc)matic Transmission
40. Install the three-way catalytic converter (A) with the 43. Install the intake air duct (A), and secure it with the
new self~lockingriuts and new-gaskets (B). (C). clips (B). Install the hose (e) in the clamp (0) on the
intake air duct.
\10x1.25mm
33N·m
\ (3.4kgf·m,
25Ibf·ft)
,
8x1.~5mm
~~ Replace.
22N·m A C 44. Secure.the harness ciampI junction box bracket on
(2.2 kgf·m, . thetransmission/,)ousing with the bolts.
16Ibf·ft)
6x1.0mm
41. Remove the engine support hanger and support 12 N·m (1.2·kgf.m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
. mount pads from the vehicle.
42. Remove the support bolt (07 AAK-SNAA500) and

engJne support eyelet (07AAK-SNAA600) from the
cyli'nder head. ;
14-266 BACK
45. Secure the clamp bracket (A) with the bolt, and 47. Connect the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor
install the coolant by-pass hoses (B) in the clamps connector (A), output shaft (countershaft) speed
(C). sensor connector (B), 3rd clutch transmission fluid
pressure switch connector (C), and ATF
temperature sensor connector (D).
46. Connect the ATF cooler hoses (A) to the ATF cooler
lines (B), and secure the hoses with the clips (C)
(see page 14-273).
48. Connect the AfT clutch pressure control solenoid

valve A connector (A), solenoid valve B connector
(B), solenoid valve C connector (C), 4th clutch
transmission fluid pressure switch connector (D),
and shift solenoid harness connector (E).
6x 1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·tt)
49. Secure the harness cover (F) with the bolt.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-267
50. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole ofthe 52. Connect the transmission range switch connector
synthetic resin bushing (A) in the shift cable end (B), (A), and install the transmission ground cable
and attach the shift cable end to the control lever terminal (B).
(C), then insert the control pin (D) into the control
lever hole through the shift cable end, and secure
the control pin with the spring clip/washer (E).
6x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ft}
--------~
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
A G 11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft}
\ e2

14-239).
54. Install the intake air duct, air cleaner housing,

intercooler cover, and the front grille clips.

51. Secure the shift cable bracket (F) with the nuts. terminals.
57. Setthe parking brake. Start the engine, and shift

the transmission through all positions three times.
58. Check the shift lever operation, AfT gear position

indicator operation, and shift cable adjustment.
59. Check and adjust the front wheel alignment

(see page 18-5).
61. Start the engine in the P or N position, and warm it

up to normal operating temperature (the radiator
fan comes on). Turn off the engine, and check the
ATF level (see page 14-238).
14-268 BACK
62. Enter the audio system and navigation system (if 68. Loosen the lower torque rod bolt (A).

(see page 22-213).
64. Do the road test (see page 14-209).
65. After the road test, raise the vehicle on a hoist, and
o<
make sure it is securely supported.
66. Loosen the upper torque rod bolt (A).

A
A
B 93N·m
64N·m 19.5 kgf·m,
16.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ftl 69lbf·ftl
69. Loosen the lower torque rod bolts (8), then

retighten the bolts (8) to the specified torque.
70. Tighten the lower torque rod bolt (A) to the

specified torque.
71. Tighten the upper torque rod bolt (A) to the

specified torque.
67. Loosen the transmission mount bracket bolt (A)

and nuts (8), then retighten them to the specified
torque.
B
83 N·m 18.5 kgf·m, 61 Ibf.ftl
BACK 14-269
Drive Plate Removal and Installation
1. Remove the transmission assembly (see page

14-247).
2. Remove the drive plate (A) and washer (8) from the
engine crankshaft.
12x 1.0mm
74 N·m (7.5 kgf.m, 54lbf·ft)
3. Install the drive plate and washer on the engine

crankshaft, and tighten the eight bolts in a
crisscross pattern in two or more steps.
4. Install the transmission assembly (see page 14-258).
14-270 BACK
ATF Cooler Cleaning
Special Tools Required 2. Plug the cooler cleaner into a 110 V grounded
• ATF cooler cleaner GHTITCF6H electrical outlet.
• Magnetic Nonbypass Spin-on Filter GTHGNBP2
These special tools are available through the American INOTICE I
Honda Tool and Equipment Program 1-888-424-6857. Make sure the outlet has no other appliances
(light fixtures, drop lights, extension cords)
Before installing an overhauled or remanufactured plugged into it. Also, never plug the cooler
automatic transmission, you must thoroughly clean the cleaner into an extension cord or drop light;
ATF cooler to prevent system contamination. Failure to you could damage the unit.
do so could cause a repeat automatic transmission
failure.
The cleaning procedure involves heated ATF-Z1

delivered under high pressure (100 psi). Check the
security of all hoses and connections. Always wear
safety glasses or a face shield, along with gloves and
protective clothing. If you get ATF in your eyes or on
your skin, rinse with water immediately.
~WARNING
• Improper use of the ATF cooler cleaner can result
in burns and other serious injuries .
• Always wear eye protection and protective
clothing, and follow all instructions in this 3. Flip the HEAT toggle switch to ON; the green
manual. indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Wait
1 hour for the cooler cleaner to reach its operating
temperature. (The cooler cleaner is ready to use
1. Check the fluid in the cooler cleaner tank. (The fluid when the temperature gauge reads 140 °to 150 ~.)
level should be 4.5 inches from the top of the filler
neck.) Adjust the level if needed; do not overfill. NOTE: If the red indicator above the HEAT toggle
Use only Honda ATF-Z1; do not use any additives. switch comes on, the fluid level in the tank is too
Rv
~
FILLER/BREATHER
TUBE
low for the tank heater to work (see step 1 of this
procedure).
FILLER
NECK 4. Select the appropriate pair of fittings, and attach
them to the radiator, to the hoses, or to the banjo
bolts for flow through the ATF cooler cleaner.
TO HOSE TO BANJO BOLT
~u~ V
~
@
-
QVEH'=
.~
COOLER CLEANER
(cont'd)
BACK 14-271
ATF Cooler Cleaning (cont'd)
5. Connect the red hose to the cooler outlet line (the 12. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON, and let the
line that normally goes to the external filter on the pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running,
transmission). open and close the air purge valve periodically.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the
6. Connect the blue hose to the cooler inlet line. 5-minute cleaning period, leave the air purge valve
open.
7. Connect a shop air hose (regulated to 100 to
125 psi) to the air purge valve. NOTE: While the pump is running with the air
purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming
INOTICE I from the filler/breather tube vents.
The quick-connect fitting has a one-way
check valve to keep ATF from entering your 13. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR
shop's air system. Do not remove or replace toggle switch to OFF. Leave the air purge valve
the fitting. Attach the coupler provided with open for at least 15 seconds to purge the lines and
the cooler cleaner to your shop air line if hoses of residual ATF, then close the valve.
your coupler is not compatible.
14. Disconnectthe red and blue hoses from the ATF
8. Flip the MOTOR toggle switch to ON; the green cooler lines.
indicator above the toggle switch comes on. Let the
pump run for 5 minutes. While the pump is running, 15. Connect the red and blue hoses to each other.
open and close the air purge valve periodically to
cause agitation and improve the cleaning process. 16. Disconnect the shop air from the air purge valve.
Always open the valve slowly. At the end of the Disconnect and stow the coupler if used.
5-minutes cleaning period, leave the air purge
valve open. 17. Disconnect and stow the fittings from the ATF
cooler inlet and outlet lines.
NOTE: While the pump is running with the air
purge valve open, it is normal to see vapor coming 18. Unplug the cooler cleaner from the 110 V outlet.
from the filler/breather tube vents.
Tool Maintenance
Follow these instructions to keep the ATF cooler cleaner

working properly:
• Replace the two magnetic non bypass spin-on filters
once a year or when you notice a restriction in the
ATFflow.
• Check the level and condition of the fluid in the tank
before each use.
• Replace the ATF in the tank when it looks dark or dirty.
9. With the air purge valve open, flip the MOTOR

toggle switch to OFF; the green indicator goes off.
Leave the air purge valve open for at least
15 seconds to purge the lines and hoses of residual
ATF, then close the valve.
10. Disconnect the red and blue hoses from the ATF
cooler. Now connect the red hose to the cooler inlet
line.
11. Now connect the blue hose to the cooler outlet line.
14-272 BACK
ATF Cooler Hose Replacement
1. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (A) over the ATF cooler 5. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (A) over the ATF cooler
lines (8) until the hose ends contact with the bulge lines (8) until the hose ends contact with the bulge
(C) of the ATF cooler line, and secure the hoses (C) of the ATF cooler lines, and secure the hoses
with the clip (D) at 2-4 mm (0.1-0.2 in.) (E) from with the clips (D) at appropriate points.
the hose end.
o
2. Slide the ATF cooler hoses (F) over the ATF cooler
o
lines (G) until the hose ends contact to the white
dot (H) on the ATF cooler line, and secure the hose
with the clips (I) at 6-8 mm (0.2-0.3 .in.) (J) from
the hose end.
3. Secure the ATF cooler hose (K) with the clamp (L) at
the white line (M) on the hose.
4. Slide the ATF cooler outlet hose (N) over the ATF
cooler outlet line (0) until the hose end contacts
with the bulge (P) of the outlet line, and secure the
hose with the clip (Q) at 6-8 mm (0.2-0.3 in.) (R)
from the hose end.
BACK 14-273
ATF Cooler Replacement
1. Remove the bumper assembly (see page 20-146). 3. Remove ATF cooler hoses (A) and mounting
brackets (8).
2. Remove the harness clamps,.disconnect the ATF
cooler hoses from the ATF cooler, and remove the 6x1.0mm
12N·m
ATF cooler (A) and cooler joint line (8). (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
6x1.0mm
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf.ft) ----....~
/
4. Install the mounting bracket on the new ATF cooler

(C).
5. Slide the ATFcooler hoses over the ATF cooler

lines until the hose ends contact to the white dot (D)
on the ATF cooler lines, and secure the hose with
the clips (E) at 6-8 mm (0.2-0.3 in.) (F) from the
hose end.
6. Secure the ATF cooler hose with the clamp (G) at

the white line (H) on the hose.
7. Install the joint line and ATF cooler on the body,

and install the harness clamp on the bracket.
8. Connect the ATF cooler hoses to the ATF cooler

lines, and secure the hose with the clips (see page
14-273).
9. Install the bumper assembly (see page 20-146).
14-274 BACK
Shift Lever Removal
1. Remove the center console panel (see page 20-92), 5. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector (A)
and driver's center console lower cover (see step 4 and park pin switch/AfT gear position indicator
on page 20-93). panel light connector (8).
2. Shift the transmission to the R position.
3. Remove the nut securing the shift cable end.
4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (8) a

quarter turn; the tab (C) on the socket holder will be
in the opening (D) of the shift cable bracket (E). 6. Remove the mounting bolts, then remove the shift
Then slide the holder to remove the shift cable lever assembly.
from the bracket. Do not remove the shift cable by
twisting the shift cable guide (F).
BACK 14-275
Shift Lever Installation
1. Install the shift lever assembly.
8x1.25mm
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
2. Connect shift lock solenoid connector (A) and park

pin switch/AfT gear position indicator panel light
connector (8).
3. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust

the shift cable (see step 5 on page 14-285).
14-276 BACK
Shift Lever Disassembly IReassembly
~ ~SHIFTLEVER
~ BUTTON RING
SHIFT LEVER ROD
SCREW
3N·m
(0.3 kgf·m,
2Ibf·ft)
AfT GEAR POSITION

INDICATOR PANEL
LIGHT BULB
SHIFT LOCK
LOCK
RELEASE
A/TGEAR
POSITION
INDICATOR
PANEL
PARK PIN SWITCH
3N·m
~ kgf·m, 2Ibf·ft)
HARNESS BAND
CONNECTOR CLAMP
SHIFT LOCK
~ SOLENOID
PLUNGER SPRING
SILICONE GREASE SHIFT LOCK
SOLENOID CONNECTOR
PLUNGER CLAMP
BACK 14-277
Shift Lever/Shift Cable Bracket Assembly Replacement
NOTE: Refer to the Shift Lever Disassembly and 6. Remove the NT gear position indicator panel light
Reassembly (see page 14-277) as needed during the from the indicator panel, and remove the NT gear
following procedures. position indicator panel/shift lever boot assembly.
1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-275). 7. Remove the shift lock release and release spring.
2. Grasp the shift lever boot ring, and slip it out of the 8. Remove the shift lock solenoid connector and park
shift lever knob cover. pin switch/NT gear position indicator panel light
connector.
9. Remove the harness bands, and remove the park

pin switch and NT gear position indicator panel
light.
10. Release the lock tabs retaining the shift lock

solenoid using thin blade screwdrivers.
3. Remove the shift lever button ring (A).
'8 3N·m
(0.3 kgf·m,2 Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the screws (8), then remove the shift lever

knob (C).
5. Remove the shift lever knob cover (D).
14-278 BACK
11. Insert a 6 mm pin (A) into the guide hole (8), and 20. Route the park pin switch harness and indicator
push the shift lock· solenoid (C) out. panel light harness, and'secure the harnesses with
the band (A); tie the indicator panel light harness at
the white tape (8) with the band.
12. Remove the shift lock solenoid plunger (D), plunger

spring (E), and shift lock stop and stop cushion (F).
13. Replace the shift lever/shift cable bracket assembly.

21. Secure the harnesses with the band (C).
14. Install the shift lock stop and stop cushion.
22. Install the shift lock release and release spring.
15. Apply silicone grease to joint of the shift lock ., _:, ' ~.: {i
solenoid plunger and shift lock stop, if necessary. 23. Install the AfT gear position indicator panel/shift
lever boot assembly.
16. Install the shift lock solenoid plunger and plunger
spring in the shift lock solenoid. 24. Install the indicator panel light in the indicator
panel.
17. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of
the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the 25. Install the shift lever knob cover over the shift lever
shift lock stop, then push the shift lock solenoid into boot ring.
the shift lever securely.
26. Install the shift lever knob, and secure the shift
18. Install the park pin switch, and secure the switch lever knob with the screws.
with the new screw.
27. Install the shift lever button ring.
19. Install the shift lock solenoid connector and park
pin switch/AfT gear position indicator panel light 28. Install the shift lever (see page 14-276),.,
connector.
BACK
Shift Lever Knob, Shift Lever Knob Cover, and Shift Lever Button Ring
Replacement
1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-275). 6. Replace the shift lever knob or knob cover.
2. Grasp the shift lever'boot ring, and slip it out of the 7. Install the shift lever knob cover over the shift lever
shift lever knob cover. boot ring.
8. Install the shift lever knob, and secure the shift

lever knob with the screws.
9. Install the shift lever button ring.
10. Install the shift lever (see page 14-276).
3. Remove the shift lever button ring (A). If the shift

lever button ring is only replaced, skip steps 4 thru
8 and go to step 9.
c~
fJ'.
'B 3N·m
(0.3 kgf·m,
2Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the screws (B), then remove the shift lever

knob (e).
5. Remove the shift lever knob cover (D).
14-280 BACK
Shift Lever Boot and AfT Gear Position Indicator Panel Replacement
1. Remove the shift lever knob, shift lever knob cover, 5. Install the AfT gear position indicator panel/shift
and shift lever button ring (see page 14-280). lever bootassembly.
2. Remove the AfT gear position indicator panel light 6. Install the indicator panel light socket in the panel.
bulb from the panel, and remove the AfT gear
position indicator panel/shift lever boot assembly. 7. Install the shift lever knob, shift lever knob cover,
and shift lever button ring (see page 14-280).
3. Release the lock tabs retaining the shift lever boot
using a screwdriver.
4. Replace the shift lever boot or AfT gear position

indicator panel, and install the boot in the indicator
panel.
BACK 14-281
Shift Cable Replacement
1. Raise the vehicle up ona lift, or apply the parking 10. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the· shift cable (B) a
brake, block rear wheels, and raise the front of the quarter turn; the tab (CIon the socket holder will be
vehicle. Make sure it is securely supported. in the opening (D) of the shift cable bracket (E).
Then slide the holder to remove the shift cable
2. Make sure you have the audio system and from the bracket.
navigation system (if equipped) anti-theft codes,



7. Remove the center console panel (see page 20-92),

and driver's center console lower cover (see step 4
on page 20-93).
14-282 BACK
11. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket 14. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket.
(A).
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf·m.
7.2Ibf.ft)
c
15. Remove the nut securing the shift cable bracket (A).
12. Remove the spring clip/washer (B) and control pin

control lever (E).
13. Remove the heat shield from under the body.
16. Remove the shift cable grommet (B), and pull out
the shift cable (C).
17. Insert the new shift cable through the grommet

hole (D), and install the grommet in its hole. Do not
bend the shift cable excessively.
18. Make sure that the transmission is in the R position

at the transmission control lever.
(cont'd)
BACK
14-283
Shift Cable Replacement (cont'd)
19. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the 22. Install the intake air duct, air cleaner housing, and
synthetic resin bushing (A) in the shift cable end (B), intercooler cover.
and attach the shift cable end to the control lever
(e), then insert the control pin (D) into the control 23. Install the battery base.
lever hole through the shift cable end, and secure
the control pin with the spring clip/washer (E). 24. Install the battery tray, battery, battery cover, and
6x1.0mm terminals.
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
A --------~ @

(see page 22-213).
20. Secure the shift cable bracket (F) with the nuts.
21. Install the shift cable on the shift lever, and adjust
the shift cable (see step 5 on page 14-285).
14-284 BACK
Shift Cable Adjustment
1. Remove the center console panel (see page 20-92), 5. Push the shift cable (A) until it stops, then release it.
and driver's center console lower cover (see step 4 Pull the shift cable one step so that the shift
on page 20-93). position is in R. Do not hold the shift cable guide (8)
to adjust the shift cable.
••
•
R
•
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and verify that the
R position indicator comes on.
4. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (8) a

quarter turn; the tab (C) on the socket holder will be
in the opening (D) of the shift cable bracket (E).
Then slide the holder to remove the shift cable
from the bracket. Do not remove the shift cable by
twisting the shift cable guide (F).
(cont'd)
BACK
14-285
Shift Cable Adjustment (cont'd)
8. Place the shift lever in the R position, then insert a 10. Rotate the socket holder (A) on the shift cable (B) to
6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin (A) through the guide hole (B) place the tab (e) on the holder opposite the
on the mounting bracket, through the positioning opening (D) in the shift cable bracket (E). Align the
hole, and into the positioning hole on the shift lever holder (F) with the opening in the bracket, then
bracket. Use only the 6.0 mm pin. slide the holder into the bracket. Install the shift
cable end (G) over the mounting stud (H) by
aligning its square hole (I) with the square fitting (J)
at the bottom of the stud. Rotate the holder a
quarter turn until the holder stops to secure the
shift cable. Do not install the shift cable by twisting
the shift cable guide (K).
H J
9. Verify that the shift lever is secured in the R

position.
14-286 BACK
11. Verify that the shift cable end is properly installed 14. Remove the 6.0 mm (0.24 in.) pin that was installed
on the mounting stud. to hold the shift lever.
Improperly installed: 15. Turn th~ ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
Cable end Cable end Properly to each position, and verify that the A{f gear
positions rides on the installed: position indicator follows the transmission range
out ofthe bottom ofthe
mounting stud. moynting stud. switch.
16. Shift to the P position, and check that the shift lock
works properly. Push the shift lock release, and
verify that the shift lever releases, and also check
that the shift lever locks when it is shifted back to
the P position.
17. Reinstall the center console panel (see page 20-92),

and driver's center console lower cover (see step 4
on page 20-93).
12. If the cable end is out of position on the mounting

stud, remove the shift cable from the bracket, and
reinstall the shift cable. Do no install the shift cable
end on the mounting stud while the shift cable is on
the bracket.
If the cable end rides on the bottom on the
mounting stud, rotate the stud and align the square
fitting with the hole.
13. Install and tighten the nut on the shift cable end.
BACK 14-287
AIT Gear Position Indicator
AfT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR

F-CAN Communication Circuit Troubleshooting, page 11-213
Gauge Control Module Self-diagnostic Function
Indicator Drive CIrcuit Check, page 22-259
Communication Line Check, page 22-260
PADDLE SHIFTER + (UPSHIFT SWITCH)

Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-295
Test, page 14-299
PADDLE SHIFTER - (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) AfT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR PANEL

Circuit Troubleshooting, page 14-297 Replacement, page 14-281
Test, page 14-301
Replacement, page 14-302 DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
\ TRANSMISSION RANGE SWITCH

Test, page 14-290
14-288 BACK
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BDX UNDER-DASH RJSEJRELAY BOX
No. 11100 Al No. 21lG1 150 AI
No. 14175 Al
MUlTIPlEJ(INlEGRAlBl
CONTROL UNIT IMlCUl
A/TGEAR
PosmoN
INDICATOR
PANElLIGIIT
c£ -I-IJ:= BLK
RED 4
GRY
RED --I> MUlnPLEXINl1!GRAlBl

CONTROL UNIT IMICUI
rr==l~~17 BAN POWBmIAIN CONTROl

MODULE IPCMl
To12Y
AfT
GEAR IIlI C36
POSmDN BlKIYEl - - - { } - GRY
INDICATOR
DRIVER ATPRVS B22
-"=~""-- RED/WIIT
CIRCUIT ATPFWD B28
--""-'-9>-"''-- BLU/YEl - - - - - - - - - ,
ATPS B15
--=.~""'---RED----___,
CAN ATPD 821
--"'-'~=--V!;l---__, STARTER
CONnRDlLER ATPN BI2
-~~~'--REDmLK
CUT RELAY
~[1
ATPR B14
ATPP B13
BlU/WIIT
DATA lINK
CONNECTOR
<1-- G501 A31 SCS
ORN - - - ORN ---0---,.--+-\
IDlCl
PADDLE SHIrnII+
r------ BI.K _--"B3",6-¢!I'G",1,--, CABL£REB. IUPSlDFT SWITCH)
-1 I- WIlT
:~:m~
S-UPP BI6WIITmLU WIlT 16 16
r----- BI.K _ _B",I-¢!PG2=--.,
PADDLE SlIlFlER-
BRN/YEl _"'C40"-<>-'l"'GI'----, IOOWNSHIFT SWITCH)
I- ORN
:~:m~
S-DN P B40GRN/WIIT -1 ORN 17 17
BRN/YEl _",C44"-<>-,L,,G2,_--,
~BLK
Glin
G502
PCM Harness Conn«tor Terminal Loc:atIons
AI44P) BI44P! CI44P1

Tennlnal slcleoffemaletermlnals
BACK 14-289
A/T'Gear Position Indicator
Transmission Range Switch Test
1. Make sure you have the audio system and 7. The transmission range switch test is finished if the
navigation system (if equipped) anti-theft codes, test results are OK.
and write down the audio presets. Ifthere is no continuity between any terminals, go
to step 8.
2. DiscQnnect the negative terminal from the battery,
then disconnect the positive terminal. 8. Disconnect the transmission range switch
connector.
5. Disconnect the transmission range switch harness

connector.
Terminal side of
male terminals
9. Check for continuity between terminals at the

switch connector. There should be continuity
between the terminals indicated in the following
table for each switch position.
Transmission Range Switch Connector
Connector Terminal/Signal
c
0
;e 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
III
0
6. Check for continuity between terminals at the a.. - D R P GND ATP
FWD
S ATP ATP
N RVS NP
harness connector. There should be continuity
between the terminals indicated in the following
P 0 k>
,.....,
0- -0
table for each switch position. R
9- . '--" 9_
Transmission Range Switch Harness Connector
N 0 0 ~ -0
D 0 0- ~
c
Connector Terminal/Signal S 0 ~ -0
.2 7
.t= 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10
III
0
a.. ATP ATP N S ATP GND P R D -
NP RVS FWD
P 0 -0 0,....., ~
R 0 ~ -Q
N 0 -0 k> 0
D 0 -0 0
S 0 V -0
14-290 BACK
10. If the transmission range switch continuity check is
OK, replace the faulty transmission range switch
harness. If there is no continuity between any
terminals, check the transmission range switch
installation. Ifthe switch installation is OK, replace
the switch (see page 14-292).

connect the connectors securely.

battery hold-down bracket, then connect the
battery terminals.


(see page 22-213).
BACK 14-291
AIT Gear Position Indicator
Transmission Range Switch Replacement
1. Make sure you have the audio system and 9. Disconnect the transmission range switch
navigation system (if equipped) anti-theft codes, connector.
10. Pry the lock tab ofthe lock washer (A) on the
2. Disconnect the negative terminal from the battery, control lever (B), and remove the nut (C), lock
then disconnect the positive terminal. washer, spring washer (D), and control lever.


6. Remove the nuts securing the shift cable bracket

(A).
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
F --------~ G
11. Pry the lock tabs of the lock washer (E) on the
transmission range switch (F), hold the control
shaft (G) with a 6.0 mm wrench, and loosen the
locknut (H).
12. Remove the locknut and lock washer, then remove

the transmission range switch (two bolts).
13. Set the new transmission range switch (A) to the N

position. The transmission range switch clicks in
the N position, and the control shaft hole (B) aligns
with the N position line (C).
c
/
7. Remove the spring clip/washer (B) and control pin
control lever (E).

cable end for a proper fit and wear. If the bushing is B
14-282).
14-292 BACK
14. Set the control shaft to the N position by turning 16. Install the new lock washer (A) over the control
the control shaft with a 6.0 mm wrench. shaft (8) with aligning the projection (e) of the lock
washer with the N positioning line (0) on the
transmission range switch (E), and install the
locknut (F).
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
15. Install the transmission range switch (A) gently

over the control shaft (8), and install the bolts
loosely.
o
17. Push the locknut against the transmission housing

to seat the transmission range switch into the
control shaft, and tighten the locknut to 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft) while holding the control shaft
with a 6.0 mm wrench, then bend the lock tabs (G)
against the locknut.
18. Tighten the bolts to 12 N·m (1.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibf·ft)

securing the transmission range switch.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-293
AfT Gear Position Indicator
Transmission Range Switch Replacement (cont'd)
19. Install the control lever (A), spring washer (B), lock 29. Enter the audio system and navigation system (if
washer (C), and locknut (D) on the control shaft (E). equipped) anti-theft codes, then enter the audio

(see page 22-213).
20. Apply molybdenum grease to the bore hole of the

synthetic resin bushing in the shift cable end, and
insert the control pin into the control lever hole
through the shift cable end, and secure the control
pin with the spring clip/washer.
21. Secure the shift cable bracket with the nuts.
22. Install the intake air duct, air cleaner housing, and
intercooler cover.

terminals.
25. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Move the shift lever
through all positions, and check the transmission
range switch synchronization with the AfT gear
position indicator.
26. Check that the engine will start in the P and N

positions, and will not start in any other shift lever
position.
27. Check that the back-up lights come on when the

shift lever is in the R position.
28. Allow all four wheels to rotate freely, then start the
engine, and check the shift lever operation.
14-294 BACK
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch)Circuit.Troubleshooting
SRS components are located in this area. Review.the 4. Check for continuity between paddle shifter +
SRS component locations (see page 24-12), and the (upshift switch) connector terminals while pressing
precautions and procedures tsee page 24-14) in the SRS the paddle shifter + and when the paddle shifter +
before doing repair or service. is released.
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22). PADDLE SHIFTER + (UPSHIFT SWITCH) CONNECTOR
2. Check for continuity between steering switch
harness 20P connector terminals No. 16 and No.8
while pressing paddle shifter +
(upshift switch)
and when the paddle shifter +
is released.
"
STEERING$WITCH HARNESS 20P CONNECTOR
Is there continuity while pressing the paddle

shifter + and no continuity when the paddle
shifter + is released?
YES-Replace the steering switch harness.•

NO-Replace the paddle shifter + (upshift switch)
(see page 14-300).•
shifter + (upshift switch) and no continuity when 5. Remove the cable reel (see page 24-158).
the paddle shifter,+ is released?
6. Check for continuity.cable reel20P connector
YES-Go to step 5. terminal No.5 and body ground.
NO-Go to step 3. CABLE REEL 20P CONNECTOR
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter + (upshift switch)

connector.
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between cable reel

20P connector terminal No.5 and ground (G101), or
repair poor ground (G101) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 14-295
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Check for continuity'between cable reel 20P 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector terminal No. 16 and body ground.
CABLE REEL 20P CONNECTOR

terminal 816 and cable reel 20P connector terminal
No. 16.
, ,
CABLE REEL20P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Repair short in the wire between cable reel

20P connector terminal No. 16 and PCM connector
terminal 816.•
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and shift to the S
position. Is there continuity?
9. Measure the voltage between cable reel 20P YES-Check for loose or poor connections at PCM
connector terminal No.5 and No. 16. connector terminal 816. If the connection is OK,
substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.•
connector terminal 816 and the cable reel20P
connector.•
YES-Replace the cable reel (see page 24-158).•
NO-Go to step 10.
14-296 BACK
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Circuit Troubleshooting
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Check for continuity between paddle shifter -
SRS component locations (see page 24-12), and the (downshift switch) connector terminals while
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) in the SRS pressing the paddle shifter - and when the paddle
before doing repair or service. shifter - is released.
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22). PADDLE SHIFTER - (DOWNSHIFT SWITCH) CONNECTOR
2. Check for continuity between steering switch

harness 20P connector terminals No. 17 and No.8
while pressing paddle shifter - (downshift switch)
and when the paddle shifter - is released.
STEERING SWITCH HARNESS. 20P CONNECTOR

shifter - and no continuity when the paddle
shifter - is released?
YES-Replace the steering switch harness.•

NO-Replace the paddle shifter - (downshift
. switch) (see page 14-302).•
Is there continuity while the pressing paddle
shifter - (downshift switch) and no continuity 5. Remove the cable reel (see page 24-158).
when the paddle shifter - is released?
6. Check for continuity',cable reel 20P connector
YES-Go to step 5. terminal No.5 and body ground.
NO-Go to step 3. CABLE REEL 20P CONNECTOR
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter - (downshift switch)

connector.
Q
=
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between cable reel

20P connector terminal No.5 and ground (G101), or
repair poor ground (G101) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 14-297
AlT. Gear Position Indicator
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
7. Check for continuity between cable reel20P 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector terminal No. 1Tandbody ground.
11. Jumpthe SCS line with the HDS.

terminal 840 and cable reel 20P connectbr terminal
No. 17.
Is there continuity? ,PCM CONNECTOR

B(44(;.P)~~~~~~
YES-Repair short in thewire between cable reel
20P connector terminal No. 17 and PCM connector
terminal 840.•
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and shift to the S

position.
9. Measure the voltage between cable reel 20P
connector terminal No.5 and No. 17. YES-Check for loose or poor connections at PCM
connector terminal 840. Ifthe connection is OK,
CABLE REEL 20P CONNECTOR substitute a known-good PCM and recheck.•

connector terminal 840 and the cable reel 20P
connector.•
Is there about 5 V?
YES-Replace the cable reel (see page 24-158) .•
NO-Go to step 10.
BACK
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the +

4. Remove paddle shifter (upshift switch)
SRS component locations (see page 24-12), and the connector from its holder, and disconnect the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) in the SRS connector.
before doing repair or service.
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22).
2. Check the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) for

continuity between steering switch harness 20P
connector terminals No. 16 and No.8. There should
be continuity while pressing the paddle shifter+
(upshift switch), and no continuity when the paddle
+
shifter is released.
5. Check the paddle shifter + (upshift switch) for

+
continuity between the paddle shifter (upshift
switch) connector terminals while pressing the
paddle shifter+ and when the paddle shifter is +
released.
There should be continuity while pressing the
paddle shifter+, and no continuity when the
+
paddle shifter is released.
+
6. Replace the paddle shifter (upshift switch) ifthe
+
paddle shifter works incorrectly.
7. Replace the steering switch harness if the switch is

OK.
+
3. The paddle shifter (upshift switch) test is finished
if the test result is OK.
+
If the paddle shifter works incorrectly at the 20P
+
connector, test the paddle shifter at the
connector.
BACK 14-299
Paddle Shifter + (Upshift Switch) Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Install the new paddle shifter + (upshift switch) on
SRS component locations (see page 24-12), and the the steering wheel.
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) in the SRS
before doing repair or service. 5. Connect the paddle shifter + (upshift switch)
connector securely, and install the connector in the
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22). connector holder.
2. Remove the four screws (A) securing the steering 6. Install the steering wheel rear cover, and secure the
wheel rear cover (B), then remove the steering rear cover with the screws.
wheel rear cover.
7. Install the steering wheel (see page 17-24).
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter+ (upshift switch)

connector. Remove the screw securing the paddle
+
shifter (upshift switch), and remove the paddle
+
shifter (upshift switch).
14-300 BACK
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Test
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Remove paddle shifter - (downshift switch)
SRS component locations (see page 24-12), and the connector from its holder, and disconnect the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) in the SRS connector.
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22).

Terminal side of
male terminals
2. Check the paddle shifter - (downshift switch) for
continuity between steering switch harness 20P
connector terminals No. 17 and No.8.
paddle shifter - (downshift switch), and no
continuity when the paddle shifter - is released.
5. Check the paddle shifter - (downshift switch) for

continuity between the paddle shifter - (downshift
switch) connector terminals while pressing the
paddle shifter - and when the paddle shifter - is
released.
paddle shifter -, and no continuity when the
paddle shifter - is released.
6. Replace the paddle shifter - (downshift switch) if

the paddle shifter - works incorrectly.
7. Replace the steering switch harness if the switch is

OK.
3. The paddle shifter - (downshift switch) test is

finished if the test result is OK.
If the paddle shifter - works incorrectly at the 20P
connector, test the paddle shifter - at the
connector.
BACK 14-301
Paddle Shifter - (Downshift Switch) Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 4. Install the new paddle shifter - (downshift switch)
SRS component locations (see page 24-12), and the on the steering wheel.
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) in the SRS
before doing repair or service. 5. Connect the paddle shifter - (downshift switch)
connector securely, and install the connector in the
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22). connector holder.
2. Remove the four screws (A) securing the steering 6. Install the steering wheel rear cover, and secure the
wheel rear cover (8), then remove the steering rear cover with the screws.
wheel rear cover.
3. Disconnect the paddle shifter - (downshift switch)

connector. Remove the screw securing the paddle
shifter - (downshift switch), and remove the
paddle shifter - (downshift switch).
14-302 BACK
AIT Interlock System
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC) @j
PARK PIN SWITCH -------- SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID
Key Interlock System Circuit Shift Lock System Circuit
Troubleshooting, page 14-310 Troubleshooting, page 14-305
Test, page 14-314 Test, page 14-311
. STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY
KEY INTERLOCK SOLENOID
Key Interlock System Circuit
Troubleshooting, page 14-310
BACK 14-303
AIT Interlock System
Circuit Diagram
UNDER- HOOD FUSE/RElAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RElAY BOX
N~'5AI
BATlBIY
+
I No.lllOOA) No.2 (lGII50 AI BAT~IGI No.2~OAI
IGNITION SWITCH
l No. 10 0.5 A)
..cr'.
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE GRY WHT
j
~BRN
[-®- POWERTRAIN CONTROL
AfT
GEAR
POSITION
H>- MODULEiPCMI BRAKE
PEDAL
POSITION
,
INDICATOR
DRIVER
f-®- Tl
IGI C36
SWITCH
CIRCUIT
H>- BLKJYEL
Hv- 1-
~~f --[::> CONNECTOR
~
SCS A31 DATAUNK
CAN ORN - - ORN LTGRN
CONTROLLER -I DIMMING CANCEL CIRCUIT
A36 CANH
IDLCI
SEOUENmAL i VCC4 A25 3

SPORTSHIFT
MO:O BRN
r%
MODE SHIFT APSI All I
INDICATOR
CIRCUIT
U WHT
CANJ
'j SG4 A35
YEL
2
~
BLU ACCELERATOR
JLJ~ RED PEDAL
F-CAN
TRANSCEIVER [I ~
r i vccs
APS2
A24
AI8
GRY
PUR
6
4
POSITION
SENSOR
SG 20
'j SGS A34
LTBLU
5
~1
PG
BKSW A40
LTGRN
Y
~~tN~
~
-
ATPRVS B22
SHIFT RED/WHT
M--r.~~
LOCK ATPFWD 828
A21 SLS BLU/YEL
SOLENOID
u-f' ATPS BI5
RED LTGRN
A2 P-PIN l ATPD 821
YEL STARTER
q[~1;"~~'--l ,,~
ATPN BI2 CUT RELAY
11
RED/BLK -
~:
ATPR BI4
:t.' «-1 •
B36 PGI
~
ATPP BI3
WHT-
BL~tLK 8
L( Jf1-
;r
I
BI PG2 BLUkLK
t r r
BLU/WHT
~ I 3 9 4 5 2 6 GIOI
C40 LGI
BRN/YEL
C44 LG2 .J. T
BL~rHT 3
TRETLK TBfLUT
:~K ;'f
:~N 10
T
~LfED
U
BRN/YEL
- ),.
2 6
G503 -
~~-
FWD RVS ST E
rn: ·
GIOI MULTIPIfX
LTGRN- P-PIN ATPP
INTEGRATED
CONTROL
UNITIMICUI
r--- PUR FUSE/RELAY BOX
KEY
INTERlOCK
SOLENOID l-BRN
---<J "'-- No. 35 0.5 A)
KEY SOL
~ITION
[[~~ ~ IG KEY SW
BKSW
SWITCH 2 _
"--BLK -
G502 PCM HamessConnector Terminal Locations
AI44PI BI44PI CI44P1

14-304 BACK
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Connect the HDS to the DLC. 7. Shift the shift lever into the P position, and press
the brake pedal. Do not press the accelerator.
2. Choose Shift Lock Solenoid Test in the
Miscellaneous Test Menu, and check that the shift 8. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid
lock solenoid operates with the HDS. connector terminals No.1 and No.2 while pressing
the brake pedal.
PCM, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
11-229).
Does the shift lock solenoid work properly?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Go to step 3.
~
1G1 IBRN) ~LS IPNK)
3. Remove the driver's center console lower cover

4. Disconnect the shift lock solenoid connector.
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there battery voltage?
6. Measure the voltage between shift lock solenoid YES-Go to step 9.

NO-Go to step 10.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
~
4G1IBRN)
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Check for a blown No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the

under-dash fuse/relay box. Ifthe fuse is OK, repair
open or short in the wire between the shift lock
solenoid connector and the under-dash fuse/relay
box.•
(cont'd)
BACK 14-305
AfT Interlock System
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Release the brake pedal, and measure the voltage 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
between shift lock solenoid connector terminals
No.1 and No.2. The shift lever must be in the P 11. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
position.
SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID CONNECTOR
terminal A27 and shift lock solenoid connector
terminal No.2.
~
SHIFT LOCK PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
SOLENOID
IG, IBRNI ~LS {PNOI CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals SLS (PNK)
YES-Repair short in the wire between PCM Wire side of Terminal side of
connector terminal A27 and the shift lock female terminals female terminals
solenoid .•
NO-Check the shift lock mechanism. If the
mechanism is OK, replace the shift lock solenoid YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and
(see page 14-312) .• recheck.•

connector terminal A27 and the shift lock solenoid
connector .•
14-306 BACK
14. Press the brake pedal. 19. Check for continuity between PCM connector
terminal A40 and brake pedal position switch 4P
Are the brake lights ON? connector terminal No.2.
BRAKE PEDAL PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
YES-Go to step 14. POSITION SWITCH
4P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair faulty brake light circuit .•
18. Measure the voltage between PCM connector

terminal A40 and body ground while pressing the Wire side of Terminal side of
brake pedal and when the brake pedal is released. female terminals female terminals
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) Is there continuity?
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and

recheck .•

connector terminal A40 and the brake pedal
position switch .•
Is there battery voltage while the brake pedal is

pressed, and no voltage when the pedal is
released?
YES-Go to step 20.
NO-Go to step 19.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-307
Shift Lock System Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
20. Connect PCM connector A (44P). 24. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
21. Disconnect the transmission range switch 25. Disconnect PCM connector 8 (44P).
connector.
22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). terminal 813 and body ground.
23. Measure the voltage between transmission range PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)
switch connector terminals No.4 and No.5. I ATP P (BLU/BLK)
111 / 3 1141sVI 7 8 91
TRANSMISSION RANGE /11 121311411s116 17181,;"
SWITCH CONNECTOR
2021 22 >< 232425
2627 2BVI30131 132 333435
1135 1/ 1/1/140141 4243 441
ATI"'P_P--,(~BL_U-+/_W_H+T--1)--r-..J.G.::;ND (VEL/RED) Q
2 3 4 5
=
6 7 8 9 10 Terminal side of female terminals

Is there about 5 V? connector terminal 813 and the transmission range
switch connector .•
YES-Go to step 28.
NO-Go to step 27.
NO-Go to step 24.
terminal 813 and transmission range switch
PCM CONNECTOR B (44P) TRANSMISSION RANGE
SWITCH CONNECTOR
Q
ATP P (BLU/BLK)
ATP P (BLU~T)
111 / 3 4151/ 7 8 91
/11 12 13114115\16 1718V 1 2 3 4 5
021 22 >< 23Z425
2627 2BVi30131 132 333435 6 7 8 9 10
1135 / 1/ 1/140141 4243 441

YES-Go to step 28.

switch connector.•
14-308 BACK
28. Check for continuity between transmission range 29. Test the transmission range switch (see page
switch connector terminal No.5 and body ground. 14-290).
TRANSMISSION RANGE Is the switch OK?

SWITCH CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 30.

GND (YEL/RED)
NO.....,Replace the transmission range switch

1 234 5 (see page 14-292) .•
6 7 8 9 10
30. Connect the HDS to the DLC.
Q 31. Check the accelerator pedal position sensor 1 in the

data list with the HDS. Do not press the accelerator.
=
Wire side of female terminals Is the accelerator pedal position sensor 1 opening
11 % and above, or the sensor 1 voltage 0.90 V
Is there continuity? and above?
YES-Substitute a known-good PCM and YES-Check the APP sensor (see page 11-294).•
recheck.•
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM and recheck .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between transmission
(G101), or repair poor ground (G101) .•
BACK 14-309
Key Interlock System Circuit Troubleshooting
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 8. Check for continuity between park pin switch/NT
SRS component locations (see page 24-12), and the gear position indicator panel light connector
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) in the SRS terminal No.1 and body ground.
PARK PIN SWITCHI
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC (I). The shift lever AfT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
must be in the P position. PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR
2. Disconnect the steering lock assembly connector.
3. Check if the ignition switch can be turned to the

LOCK (0) position.
Can the ignition switch be turned the LOCK (0)

position?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Replace the ignition key cylinder/steering lock Is there continuity?

assembly (see page 22-66) .•
YES-Repair short in the wire between park pin
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. switch/NT gear position indicator panel light
connector terminal No.1 and the MICU.II
5. Move the shift lever out of the P position.
NO-Go to step 9.
6. Check for continuity between steering lock
assembly connector terminal No.3 and body 9. Shift the shift lever into the P position.
ground.
10. Check for continuity between park pin switch/NT
STEERING LOCK ASSEMBLY CONNECTOR gear position indicator panel light connector
terminals No.1 and No.2. Do not push the shift
lever button.
PARK PIN SWITCHI

AfT GEAR POSITION INDICATOR
PANEL LIGHT CONNECTOR
YES-Repair short in the wire between the key
interlock solenoid and the MICU .•
NO-Go to step 7.
YES-Replace the park pin switch (see page
7. Remove the driver's center console lower cover 14-315).•
NO-Go to step 11.
14-310 BACK
Shift Lock' Solenoid Tesf' '," "
11. Oisconnectthe F (34P)connectorfromthe under- 1. Connect the HOS to the OLC (A).
13. Measure the voltage between under-dash fuse/

relay box F (34P) connectorterminal No. 27 and
body ground.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY
BOX F (34P) CONNECTOR
IZIZlIIIJ lZIZl2'III 9 10 11 .~ ~
~ []D][] 26Z1 26 ~ ~
2. Choose Shift Lock Solenoid Test inthe

Miscellaneous Test Menu, and-check that the shift
Wire side of female terminals lock solenoid operates with the HOS.
NOTE: If the HOS does not communicate with the

Is there about 5 V when the shift lever is in any PCM, troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page
position other than the P position, and no voltage 11-229).
when the shift lever is in the P position?
3. Make sure that the shift lever can be moved out of
YES-Substitute a known-goodMICU and the P position when Shift Lock Solenoid: ON. Move
recheck.• the shift lever back in the P position, and make sure
it locks with Shift Lock Solenoid: OFF.
NO-Repair open or short in the wire between
MICUand the transmission range switch: • 4. Make sure that the shift lock releases when the shift
lock release is pushed, and make sure it locks when
the shift lock release is released.
5. If the shift lock solenoid does not work properly,

troubleshoot shift lock system (see page 14-305).
BACK
,·i';
"
AII,lnterlock System
Shift Lock Solenoid Replacement
1. Remove the shiftlever(see page 14c275). 4. Inserta 6 mm pin (A) into,the guide hole (B), and
push the shift lock solenoid (C) out.
2. Remove the shift lock solenoid connector.
3. Release the lock tabs retaining the shift lock

solenoid using thin blade screwdrivers.
c:::
or ~---'c
F
~I~~
5. Replace the shift lock.solenoid, solenoid plunger
(0), and plunger spring (E) assembly.
6. Apply silicone grease to the tip (F) of the shift lock

stop and solenoid plunger.
7. Install the shift lock solenoid by aligning the joint of

the shift lock solenoid plunger with the tip of the
shift lock stop, then push the shift lock solenoid into
the shift lever securely.
8. Install the shift lock solenoid connector.
9. Install the shift lever (see page 14-276).
14-312 BACK
Shift Lock Stop, Shift Lock Stop Shift Lock Release and Release
Cushion Replacement Spring Replacement
1. Remove the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-312). 1. Remove the center console panel (see page 20-92).
2. Remove the shift lock stop (A) and stop cushion (B), 2. Remove the shift lock release (A) and release
and replace the shift lock stop or stop cushion. spring (B).
3. Install the shift lock release and release spring on

the shift lever.
3. Install the shift lock stop cushion on the shift lock
stop. 4. Install the center console panel (see page 20-92).
4. Apply silicone grease to the pin (C) on the shift

lever bracket base, and install the shift lock stop
over the pin.
5. Install the shift lock solenoid (see page 14-312).
BACK 14-313
All I,nterlock System
Park Pin Switch Test
1. Remove the driver's center console lower cover

2. Disconnect park pin switch/AfT gear position

t'
indicator panel light connector.
3. Shift the shift lever into the P position, and check

for continuity between park pin switch/AfT gear
position indicator panel light connector terminals
No.1 and No.2.
There should be no continuity.
4. Shift out of the P position, and check for continuity

between connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
There should be continuity.
5. Ifthe park pin switch tests OK, connect the

connector and install the console lower cover (see
If the park pin switch fails the test, replace the park
pin switch (see page 14-315).
14~314 BACK
Park Pin Switch Replacement
1. Remove the shift lever (see page 14-275). 7. Route the park pin switch harness and indicator
panel light harness, and secure the harnesses with
2. Move the AfT gear position indicator panel up from the band (A); tie the indicator panel light harness at
the shift lever, and remove the AfT gear position white tape (S) with the band.
indicator panel light bulb socket (A) from the
indicator panel (S).
8. Secure the harnesses with the band (C).
9. Install the indicator panel light socket (0) in the

indicator panel, and install the harness in the clamp
(E).
3. Remove the park pin switch/AfT gear position 10. Install the indicator panel on the shift lever.
indicator panel light connector (C), then remove the
connector clamp (0) from the connector. 11. Install the shift lever (see page 14-276).
4. Remove the harness bands (E), and remove the

park pin switch (F) and AfT gear position indicator
panel light bulb socket.
5. Install the park pin switch, and secure the switch

with the new screw (G).
6. Install the connector clamp on the park pin switch/

AfT gear position indicator panel light connector,
and install the connector on the shift lever.
BACK 14-315
Transmission Disassembly

Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101
1. Remove the ATF dipstick (A) and the dipstick tube (B).
2. Disconnect the transmission range switch harness connector, and remove the transmission range switch harness
(C).
3. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve A and B (D) (six bolts), ATF feed pipes (E) (three), O-rings
(three), and gasket.
4. Remove the solenoid valve cover (F) (seven bolts), dowel pins (two), and gasket.
5. Disconnect the solenoid valve connectors, then remove the solenoid harness connector (G).
6. Remove AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve C (H) (four bolts), ATF feed pipes (I) (three), O-rings (two), and
gasket.
14-316 BACK
7. Pry up the lock tabs of the lock washer (K) on the 17. Cut the lock tab (A) off the mainshaft locknut (8)
transmission range switch (L), hold the selector using a chisel (C).
control shaft (M) with a 6.0 mm wrench, and loosen
the locknut (N). NOTE: keep all of the chiseled particles out of the
transmission.
8. Remove the locknut and lock washer, then remove
the transmission range switch (two bolts).
9. Remove the input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor

(0), output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor (P),
and sensor washer (Q).
10. Remove the ATF temperature sensor connector

from the connector bracket (R) and the harness
clamp from the clamp bracket, then remove the
ATF temperature sensor (S).
11. Remove the connector bracket (R) and 6.0 mm bolt

(T), then remove the line bolts (U), ATF cooler lines
(V), and sealing washers (W).
18. Remove the locknut (A) from the mainshaft (8).
12. Remove the end cover (X) (three bolts), snap ring
cap (V) (two bolts), sealing plug (Z), and washer
(AA).
13. Remove the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch (88) and sealing washer.
14. Remove the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure B

switch (CC) and sealing washer.
15. Remove the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure

switch (DD) and sealing washer.
16. Slip the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft.
19. Pry the lock washer (C), and remove it.
07GAB-PF50101
(cont'd)
BACK 14-317
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
20. Remove the transmission housing mounting bolts (23 bolts), special bolt (A), transmission hanger (8) and bolt (e),
and ground terminal bracket (D).
6x 1.0 mm
W
J' ' ' / p
14-318 BACK
21. While expanding the snap ring ofthe countershaft 28. Remove the park pawl stop (K), park paINI (L), pawl
bearing using the snap ring pliers, lift the spring (M), and pawl shaft (N).
transmission housing.
29. Remove the mainshaft (0), countershaft (P), shift
fork (J), and secondary shaft (Q) together, and
remove the needle bearing (R) from the torque
converter housing.
p
J
22. Release the pliers, and remove the transmission

housing (E), two dowel pins (F), and gasket.:
23. Remove the ATF feed pipes (G) (four) from the
accumulator body.
24. Remove the ATF feed pipes (H) (two) from the
torque converter housing.
25. Remove the mainshaft holder from the mainshaft.
26. Pry the lock tab of the lock washer (I) on the shift
fork (J), then remove the bolt and lock washer. R
27. Unlock the detent spring from the detent arm. 30. Remove the selector control shaft and park lever
link (S).
31. Remove the baffle plate (T).
32. Remove the differential assembly (U).
33. Remove the transfer output shaft (V).
34. Remove the baffle plate (W).
35. Remove the intermediary shaft (X).
(cont'd)
BACK
14-319
Transmission Disassembly (cont'd)
36. Remove the ATF strainer (A) (one bolt).
14-320 BACK
37. Remove the accumulator body (8) (11 bolts), dowel 49. Clean the inlet opening (A) ofthe ATF strainer (8)
pins (two), detent arm (C), arm shaft (D), and thoroughly with compressed air, then check that it
separator plate (E). is good condition and that inlet opening is not
clogged.
38. Remove the ATF feed pipe (F) from the main valve
B
body.
39. Remove the secondary valve body (G) (one bolt),

dowel pins (two), and separator plate (H). Do not let
the check balls (I) (two) fall out.
40. Remove the regulator valve body (J) (seven bolts),

stator shaft (K), stator shaft stop (L), dowel pins
(two), and separator plate (M).
41. Remove the main valve body (N) (8 mm: three bolts,
6 mm: seven bolts). Do not let the lubrication check
valve (0) fall out.
A
42. Remove the torque converter check valve (P) and
valve spring (Q). 50. Test the ATF strainer by pouring clean ATF through
the inlet opening, and replace if it is clogged or
43. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft (R), then damaged.
remove the ATF pump gears (S).
44. Remove the dowel pins (two) and main separator

plate (T).
45. Remove the ATF passage pipe (U).
46. Remove the ATF magnet (V), clean it; then reinstall.
47. Remove the O-ring (W) from the ATF strainer, and
replace the new O-ring when reassembling the
transmission.
48. Remove the O-ring (X) from the stator shaft, and
replace the new O-ring when reassembling the
transmission.
BACK 14-321
Transmission Housing
Reverse Idler Gear Removal/ Reverse Idler Gear Disassembly/

Installation Inspection/Reassembly
1. Remove the reverse idler gear assembly (A) from 1. Remove the snap ring (A), then remove the thrust
the transmission housing. washer (8), reverse idler gear (C), needle bearings
(D), and thrust washer (E) from the reverse idler
gear shaft/holder (F).
2. Install the reverse idler gear assembly with the two 2. Inspect the reverse idler gear and gear shaft for
dowel pins (8) in the transmission housing. excessive wear and damage.
3. Inspect the needle bearings for galling and rough

movement.
4. Install the thrust washer and needle bearings over·

the gear shaft.
5. Install the reverse idler gear in the· direction shown.
6. Install the thrust washer, then install the snap ring

to secure the idler gear.
14-322 BACK
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap
1. Cover the tip of the 1st-hold clutch ATF feed pipe 1. Install the new O-rings (A) on the ATF feed pipe cap
with a shop rag. (8).
2. Apply air pressure to the ATF feed pipe hole of the

1st-hold clutch pressure circuit, and remove the
ATF feed pipe cap from the transmission housing.
2. Install the ATF feed pipe cap in the transmission

housing. Do not pinch the O-rings.
BACK 14-323
Secondary Shaft ATF Feed Pipe Cap, ATF Filter Removal/Inspection/

Feed Pipe Replacement Installation
1. Remove the ATF feed pipe cap from the 1. Remove the three 6.0 mm bolts securing the ATF
transmission housing (see page 14-323). filter cover (A) and ATF pipe (B).
2. Remove the snap ring (A) from the feed pipe cap F
6x1.0mm E
(B), then remove the feed pipe guide (C), O-rings 12 N·m 11.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibf.ft) 6x1.0mm
(0) (E), and 1st clutch ATF feed pipe (F). 12N·m
2. Remove the ATF pipe from the ATF filter cover, and
remove the ATF filter (C) from the cover.
3. Replace the 1st clutch ATF feed pipe or 1st-hold
clutch ATF feed pipe/ATF feed pipe cap assembly. 3. Clean the ATF filter, then check that it is in good
The 1st-hold clutch ATF feed pipe/ATF feed pipe condition, and is not clogged. Replace the ATF filter
cap is not available separately. if it is clogged or damaged.
4. Install the new O-ring (0) over the 1st clutch ATF 4. Install the ATF filter with the new O-ring (0) in the
feed pipe, then install the feed pipe over the 1st- filter cover, and install the ATF pipe in the cover,
hold clutch ATF feed pipe (G) while aligning the then install them in the transmission housing.
feed pipe tabs (H) with the guide in the cap.
5. Secure the ATF filter cover with the two bolts (E),
5. Install the new O-ring (E) in the cap and feed pipe then secure the ATF pipe with the bolt (F).
guide, then secure the guide with the snap ring.
14-324 BACK
Mainshaft Bearing Removal Mainshaft Bearing Installation

• Driver 07749-0010000 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 • Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
1. To remove the mainshaft bearing, expand the snap 1. Install the bearing in the direction shown.
ring with the snap ring pliers, then push the bearing
out. Do not remove the snap ring unless it's
f
necessary to clean the groove in the housing.
077~"'.'"
.7NAD.P~
07NAD-PX40100
2. Expand the snap ring with the snap ring pliers, and
insert the bearing part-way into the housing.
3. Release the pliers, then push the bearing down into

housing until the snap ring snaps in place around it.
4. After installing the bearing, verify that the snap ring

(A) is seated in the bearing and housing groove,
and that the ring end gap (B) is 0-7 mm (0-0.28 in.).
B
BACK 14-325
Intermediary Shaft Bearing Park Lever Shaft Bearing


• Bearing remover shaft set, 20 mm 07936-3710600 • Bearing remover shaft, 10 mm 07936-GE00100
• Bearing remover shaft handle 07936-3710100 • Bearing remover head, 10 mm 07936-GE00200
• Sliding hammer weight 077 41-0010201 • Sliding hammer weight 07741-0010201
• Driver 07749-0010000 • Driver 077 49-0010000
• Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200 • Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746 c0010800
1. Remove the intermediary shaft bearing from the 1. Remove the park lever shaft bearing from the
transmission housing using the bearing remover transmission housing using the bearing remover
shaft set (20 mm), the bearing shaft handle, and the head (10 mm), the bearing remover shaft (10 mm),
sliding hammer weight. and the sliding hammer weight.
07741-0010201 07936·GE00100
07936-GE00200
2. Install the new bearing until it bottoms in the 2. Install the new bearing until it bottoms in the
transmission housing using the driver and the transmission housing using the driver and the
attachment (37 x 40 mm). attachment (22 x 24 mm).
14-326 BACK
Selector Control Shaft Bearing Selector Control Shaft Oil Seal
.'-.

• Bearing remover shaft, 10 mm 079~6-GE00100 • Driver 07749-0010000
• Bearing remover head, 10 mm 07936-GE00200 • Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
• Sliding hammer weight 077 41-0010201
• Driver 07749-0010000 1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing.
• Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
1. Remove the control shaft bearing from the

transmission housing using the bearing remover
head (10 mm), the bearing remover shaft (10 mm),
and the sliding hammer weight.
2. Install the new oil seal in the transmission housing

using the driver and the attachment (22 x 24 mm).
2. Install the new bearing in the transmission housing

using the driver and the attachment (22 x 24 mm).
07749-0010000 ~
BACK 14-327
Valve Body
Valve Body Repair
NOTE: Valve body repair is only necessary if one or 6. Coat the valve with ATF, then drop it into its bore. It
more of the valves in a valve body do not slide should drop to the bottom of the bore under its
smoothly in their bores. Use this procedure to free the own weight. If not, repeat steps 4 and 5, then retest.
valves. If the valve still sticks; replace the valve body.
1. Soak a sheet of # 600 abrasive paper in ATF for

about 30 minutes.
2. Carefully tap the valve body so the sticking valve

drops out of its bore. It may be necessary to use a
small screwdriver to pry the valve free. Be careful
not to scratch the bore with the screwdriver.
3. Inspect the valve for any scuff marks. Use the ATF-
~
I ' .', .
all
soaked # 600 paper to polish off any burrs that are
on the valve, then wash the valve in solvent and
dry it with compressed air.
4. Roll up half of the ATF-soaked #600 paper and

insert it in the valve bore ofthe sticking valve. Twist
the paper slightly, so that it unrolls and fits the bore
tightly, then polish the bore by twisting the paper
as you push it in and out. 7. Remove the valve, and thoroughly clean it and the
valve body with solvent. Dry all parts with
NOTE: The valve body is aluminum and doesn't compressed air, then reassemble using ATF as a
require much polishing to remove any burrs. lubricant.
5. Remove the # 600 paper. Thoroughly wash the

entire valve body in solvent, then dry it with
compressed air.
14-328 BACK
Valve Body Valve Installation··
1. Coat all parts with ATF before assembly.
2. Install the valves and springs in the sequence

shown for the main valve body (see page 14-330),
secondary valve body (see page 14-332), regulator
valve body (see page 14-333), and accumulator
body (see page 14-334). Refer to the following
valve cap illustrations, and install each valve cap so
the end shown facing up will be facing the outside
of the valve body, then secure the valve cap with
the valve cap clip.
3. Install the valve (A) and valve spring (B) in the valve
body. Push the valve spring in with a screwdriver,
then install the spring seat (C).
BACK 14-329
Vallte;:Body
Main Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly· ~
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaher, and dry them with compressed air. Blowout all
passages.
2. Inspect the main valve body for scoring and damage.
3. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, referto valve body repair (see page 147328).
4. Coat all parts with ATF during assembly.
5. Replace the filter with new one, and install it and the lubrication check valve in the direction shown.
RELEIF VALVE
K \
J(
~y~
V
@~ I\
~ H
MODULATOR
VALVE
LOCK-UP
TIMING VALVE
~ ~l : ~~'~G
SHIFT
VALVEB
MAIN VALVE BODY
LUBRICATION ~
CONTROL VALVE SERVO \J CPC VALVE A
CONTROL VALVE
VALVE SPRINGS SPECIFICATIONS

Valve Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.) -'
Wire Diameter 0.0. Free Length No. of Coil
A Torque converter check valve spring 1.1 (0.043) 8.6 (0.339) 35.0 (1.378) 12.6
B Lock-up shift valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 6.6 (0.260) 35.5 (1.398) 18.2
C Shift valve E spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6(0.260) 42.4 (1.669) 17.6
D Shift valve A spring 0.9 (0.035) 6.6 (0.260) 50.5 (1.988) 23.3
E Shift valve B spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
F Modulator valve spring 1.6 (0.063) 10.4 (0.409) 33.5 (1.319) 9.8
G CPC valve A spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
H Servo control valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 9.6 (0.378) 30.2 (1.189) 8.4
I Lubrication control valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 8.7 (0.343) 25.0 (0.984) 7.2
J Lock-up timing valve spring 0.6 (0.024) 6.6 (0.260) 30.8 (1.213) 11.1
K Relief valve spring 1.0 (0.039) 9.6 (0.378) 28.1 (1.106) 7.7
14.;;330 BACK
ATF Pump Inspection
1. Install the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B), 2. Measure the side clearance of the ATF pump drive
and ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) in the main gear (A) and driven gear (B).
valve body (D). Lubricate all parts with ATF, and
install the ATF pump driven gear with its grooved ATF Pump Gears Side (Radial) Clearance
and chamfered side facing up. Standard (New):
ATF Pump Drive Gear
c--- o 0.210-0.265 mm (0.0083-0.00104 in.)
ATF Pump Driven Gear
0.070-0.125 mm (0.0028-0.0050 in.)
3. Remove the ATF pump driven gear shaft. Measure

the thrust clearance between the ATF pump driven
gear (A) and the valve body (B) with a straight edge
(C) and a feeler gauge (D).
ATF Pump Drive/Driven Gear Thrust (Axial)

Clearance
c
BACK 14-331
Valve Body
Secondary Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Clean all parts thoroughly in solvent or carburetor cleaner, and dry them with compressed air. Blowout all
passages.
2. Do not use a magnet to remove the check balls, it may magnetize the check balls.
3. Inspect the secondary valve body for scoring and damage.
4. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to valve body repair (see page 14-328).
i LJ
CPCVALVEC SHIFTVALVED
\ \ B REVERSECPCVALVE
A", ~~ \~~~ SHIFTVALVEC

,,/~or V ~v \I D
CHECK BALL ~
\:~~ /~~
C
~v
\I lJ
<&)\\\v·
REVERSE
CONTROL VALVE
~~~
F~')
' " CPCVALVE.
E
@~,;./
SECONDARY VALVE BODY
\I
Valve Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
A CPC valve C spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
B Shift valve D spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.4 (1.669) 17.6
C Reverse CPC valve spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.1 (0.240) 24.4 (0.961) 14.6
D Shift valve C spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
E CPC valve B spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.1 (0.240) 17.8 (0.701) 7.9
F Reverse control valve spring 0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 49.1 (1.933) 21.7
14-332 BACK
Regulator Valve Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.
2. Inspect the regulator valve body for scoring and damage.
3. Hold the regulator spring cap in place while removing the stop bolt. The regulator spring cap is spring loaded.
Once the stop bolt is removed, release the spring cap slowly so it does not pop out.
4. Check all valves for free movement. If any fail to slide freely, refer to valve body repair (see page 14-328).
6. Align the hole in the regulator spring cap with the stop bolt hole, then press the spring cap into the valve body,
and tighten the stop bolt.
7. Install the servo valve with the new O-ring, and 3rd accumulator piston with the new O-ring.
ACCUMULATOR COVER ~.i..---:7' 6 x 1.0 mm

~ ~ / '~ 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
~ ~ ~l/VALVESPRINGCAP
3RD ACCUMULATOR A """ ~ B
PISTON "'" ~ I' /
Fl ~/" /COOLERCHECKVALVE
~~
6x1.0mm
O-RING
Repl~
§ !;i / "
t)
£~~
~----
____
____ VALVE CAP
VALVECAPCLlP
12N·m ---- ,
(1.2 kgf.m, 8.7 Ibf·tt) /~ \
/\ VALVE SLEEVE
LOCK-UP CONTROL VALVE
o
"":~O ~--'~AIRCHECKVALVES
~o ~ 20 N.m (2.0 kgf.m, 14Ibf.ft)

'- - - - - - SEALING WASHER
"'" Replace.
~ R,GULATORVALV'
SERVO VALVEI
-------.. ~D
SHIFT FORK SHAFT
~~E
/
O-RING
,f1 F
Replace. U---- REGULATOR SPRING CAP

Valve Springs Standard (New)-Unit: mm (in.)
A 3rd accumulator spring 3.1 (0.122) 19.6 (0.772) 41.4 (1.630) 5.5
B Cooler check valve spring 0.9 (0.035) 6.7 (0.264) 31.5 (1.240) 14.2
C Lock-up control valve spring 0.7 (0.028) 6.6 (0.260) 42.9 (1.689) 14.2
0.8 (0.031) 6.6 (0.260) 44.3 (1.744) 25.5
D Regulator valve spring B 1.4 (0.055) 8.8 (0.346) 44.0 (1.732) 12.0
E Regulator valve spring A 1.85 (0.073) 14.7 (0.579) 86.9 (3.421) 16.2
F Stator reaction sprinQ 5.5 (0.217) 37.4 (1.472) 30.3 (1.193) 2.1
BACK 14-333
Valve Body
Accumulator Body Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
passages.
2. Inspect the accumulator body for scoring and damage.
4. Replace the O-rings with new ones.
______ SNAP RING
O-RING
Replace.
~_ SPRING CAP
SPRING SEAT
~....
~~,
-A
~ _____ 4TH ACCUMULATOR PISTON
D
~.~
/
~
1ST-HOLD ACCUMULATOR PISTON
ACCUMULATOR BODY
E--:I
1 :
~ : I __ B
F-----..~ 1 :--
U ~ ~ 2ND ACCUMULATOR PISTON

A
5THACCUMULAT~~ ~~C O-RING
~------ Replace.
~-D O---SNAP RING
U "'---1ST ACCUMULATOR PISTON
~
O-RING /
Replace.
SNAP RING ~O-RING
Replace.
0-- SNAP RING

Valve Springs Standard: (New)-Unit mm (in.)
A 4th accumulator spring 3.3 (0.130) 19.6 (0.772) 39.1 (1.539) 5.8
B 2nd accumulator spring 3.1 (0.122) 19.6 (0.772) 53.4 (2.102) 7.5
C 1st accumulator spring A 2.3 (0.091) 19.6 (0.772) 60.8 (2.394) 9.5
D 1st accumulator spring B 2.5 (0.098) 12.8 (0.504) 46.0 (1.811) 9.5
E 5th accumulator spring A 2.4 (0.094) 19.6 (0.772) 65.5 (2.579) 12.0
F 5th accumulator spring B 2.4 (0.094) 13.2 (0.520) 50.5 (1.988) 10.1
G 1st-hold accumulator spring 2.0 (0.079) 13.1 (0.516) 42.9 (1.689) 9.8
14-334 BACK
Shift Solenoid Valve Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not hold the solenoid valve connector to 5. Install shift solenoid valve C (brown connector) by
remove and install the solenoid valve. Be sure to hold holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure to
the solenoid valve body. position the mounting bracket on top ofthe bracket
of shift solenoid valve A.
1. Remove the mounti ng bolts, then remove the
solenoid valves by holding the solenoid valve body. NOTE: Do not install shift solenoid valve C before
installing shift solenoid valve A. If shift solenoid
2. Install the new O-rings (E) on each solenoid valves. valve C is installed before installing shift solenoid
valve A, it may damage to hydraulic control system.
NOTE: If you are installing a new solenoid valve, it
comes with new a-rings already installed. 6. Install shift solenoid valve B (brown connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure the
D mounting bracket contacts the accumulator body.
6 x 1.0 mm 6 x 1.0 mm
12 N.m 0 12 N·m
~~'~~-~I
~~-------' "E
3. Install shift solenoid valve D (black connector) by
holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure to
install mounting bracket contacts to the
accumulator body.
4. Install shift solenoid valve A (black connector) by

holding the shift solenoid valve body; be sure to
install mounting bracket contacts to the
accumulator body.
BACK 14-335
Torque Converter Housing
Mainshaft Bearing and Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush to the housing using
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm the driver and the attachment (72 x 75 mm).
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 07746-0010600
1. Remove themainshaft bearing and oil seal using

the adjustable bearing puller (25-40 mm) and a
commercially available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
2. Install the new mainshaft bearing until it bottoms in

the housing using the driver and the attachment
(62x68 mm).
01746-0010500 017 49-0010000
14-336 BACK
Countershaft Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the bearing (A) in the housing using the
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm driver and the attachment (78 x 80 mm); install
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A bearing outer notch-cut (B) in depth (e) of
• Driver 07749-0010000 0-0.03 mm (0-0.001 in.) below the housing
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100 surface (D) ..
1. Remove the countershaft bearing from the torque

converter housing using the adjustable bearing
puller (25-40 mm) and a commercially available
3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A) into the housing,

then install the new bearing (B) in the direction
shown.
BACK
14-337
Tor.que Converter Housing
Secondary Shaft Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required· 3. Remove the ATF guide collar from the torque
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm converter housing.
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
• Bearing remover shaft· set, 30 mm 07936-8890300
• Bearing remover shaft handle 07936-371'0100
• Sliding hammer weight 07741-0010201
• Driver 077 49-0010000
• Attachment, 37 x 40 mm 07746-0010200
• Attachment, 62 x 68 mm 07746-0010500
1. Remove the bolt, then remove the lock washer (A)

and bearing set plate (B).
4. Remove the 29 x 39 x 9.5 mm secondary shaft

bearing from the torque converter housing using
. the bearing remover shaft set (30 mm), the bearing
remover shaft handle, and the sliding hammer
weight.
07741-0010201
2. Remove the secondary shaft bearing from the

torque converter housing using the adjustable
bearing puller (25-40 mm) and a commercially
available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
07936-8890300
14-338
BACK
5. Install the 29 x 39 x 9.5 mm bearing into the torque 7. Install the bearing in the direction shown in the
converter housing using the driver and the housing using the driver and the attachment
attachment (37 x 40 mm). (62x68 mm).
077 49-001 0000
077 46-0010500
6. Install the new O-rings (A) on the ATF guide collar 8. Check that the bearing groove aligns with the set
(8), then install the guide collar in the torque plate mounting surface, then install the set plate (A)
converter housing. by aligning it with the bearing groove.
9. Install the new lock washer (8) and bolt, then bend
the lock tab of the lock washer against the bolt head.
BACK 14-339
Torque Converter Housing
Intermediary Shaft Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Drive the bearing into the housing using the driver
• Adjustable bearing puller, 25-40 mm and the attachment (52 x 55 mm).
07736-A01000B or 07736-A01000A
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400
1. Remove the intermediary shaft bearing from the

torque converter housing using the adjustable
bearing puller (25-40 mm) and a commercially
available 3/8 "-16 slide hammer (A).
07746·0010400
2. Install the ATF guide plate (A), then install the new
bearing (B) in the housing.
14-340 BACK
Park Lever Shaft Bearing Replacement

• Bearing remover shaft set, 12 mm 07936-1660101
• Sliding hammer weight 07741-0010201
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Attachment, 22 x 24 mm 07746-0010800
1. Remove the park lever shaft bearing from the

torque converter housing using the bearing
remover shaft set (12 mm) and the sliding hammer
weight.
07741-0010201
07936-1660101
2. Install the new bearing until it bottoms in the

housing using the drive and the attachment
(22 x 24 mm).
07749-0010000 07746-0010800
BACK 14-341
Shafts and Clutches
Mainshaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the thrust needle bearing (A), mainshaft 2. Inspectthe condition ofthe sealing rings (I). If the
5th gear (8), needle bearing (C), thrust needle sealing rings are worn, distorted, or damaged,
bearing (D), mainshaft 5th gear collar (E), 4th/5th remove the set ring (J) and needles bearing (K),
clutch (F), and O-rings (G) from the mainshaft (H). and replace the sealing rings with new ones.
3. Inspect the thrust needle bearing and needle

bearing for wear and rough movement.
4. Inspect the splines for excessive wear and damage.
5. Inspect the 4th gear for wear and damage, and

inspect 4th gear bearing for wear and rough
rotation.
6. Replace the mainshaft 4th gear (L) if the 4th gear is

worn or damaged, or the bearing is worn or
damaged.
7. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and

excessive wear.
L 8. Lubricate all parts with ATF during reassembly.
9. Wrap the shaft splines with tape to prevent O-ring

damage, install the new O-rings on the mainshaft,
then remove the tape.
10. Install the 4th/5th clutch.
11. Install the mainshaft 5th gear coiler, thrust needle

bearing, needle bearing, mainshaft 5th gear, and
thrust needle bearing .
• ____ K
~
-----J
14-342 BACK
Mainshaft 4th Gear Replacement '~-~ '.
Special Tools Required 2. Slide the new mainshaft 4th gear (A) over the
Driver, 40 mm to.
,:
07746-0030100
,
mainshaft (B), then press it into place using the
driver (40 mm 1.0.> and the press.
1. Remove the mainshaft4thgear (A) with the press.
Place a shaft protector (B) between the press and
mainshaft (C) to prevent damaging the mainshaft.
"
BACK
Shafts~and Clutches
Countershaft Disassembly
Exploded View
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)
167 N·m (17.0 kgf·m, 123Ibf·ft)
Left-hand threads
. 'P~l'~..CON~
~ SPRING
~~~~NEEDLEBEARING~.p
_______ ~ Replace.
WASHER
REVERSE GEAR )W
~ REVERSE ~
JLS SELECTOR "
BALL BEARING
COLLAR, 50.8 mm
WASHER,61 mm
Selective p~
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
'@ IDLER GEAR
NEEDLE BE~..-:fAll!IIIIl1i:b.
THRUST NEEDLE/
BEARING / " ,
2ND GEAR ~ COTTERS, 40.5 mm
14-344 BACK
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the 3. Place the countershaft 5th gear (A) on press bases
following procedure. (B), and place a shaft protector (C) between the
countershaft (D) and the press to prevent damaging
1. Cut the lock tab (A) off the countershaft locknut (B) the countershaft.
using a chisel (C).
NOTE: Keep all of the chiseled particles out of the

countershaft.
4. Press the counters haft out of the press-fitted

bearing (E) and the press-fitted reverse selector
2. Hold the countershaft with a wrench anda vise hub, and remove the countershaft while holding
securely, loosen the locknut, and remove it. The the underside of the countershaft. The countershaft
locknut has left-hand threads. falls down when pressing the countershaft out of
the press-fitted reverse selector hub. Some reverse
selector hubs are not press-fitted, and the
countershaft falls down when pressing the
countershaft out of press-fitted bearing.
5. Remove the remaining parts from the countershaft.
6. Inspect the bearing for galling and rough

movement.

excessive wear, and check the shaft splines for
excessive wear and damage.
8. Check the idler gear axial clearance and 4th gear

axial clearance (see page 14-346).
BACK 14-345
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Idler Gear and 4th Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
1. 'Install the 40;5 mm cotters (A), 2nd gear (B), thrust 3. Set the dial indicator (A) on the idler gear (B).
needle bearing (C), needle bearing (D), idler gear
(E), thrust needle bearing (F), 61 mm washer (G),
1st gear (H), 4th gear (I), 50.8 mm collar (J),
50.8 mm washer (K), 42.2 mm cotters (L), cotter
retainer (M), and snap ring (N) on the countershaft
(0). Install the 40.5 mm cotters, idler gear, 1st gear,
and 4th gear in the direction shown.
4. Measure the idler gear axial clearance in at least

three places while moving the idler gear. Use the
average as the actual clearance.
Standard: 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.)
2. Insert a feeler gauge blade (A) asthick as possible

between the 50.8 mm collar (B) and 50,8 mm 5. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
washer (C). 61 mm washer and measure its thickness.
B
/ \ C
14..346 BACK
6. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the 8. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
clearance. 50.8 mm washer and measure its thickness.
WASHER, 61 mm 9. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the

No. Part Number Thickness clearance.
A 90582~RJF-TOO 1.525 mm (0.0600 in.)
B 90583-RJF-TOO 1.505 mm (0.0593 in.) WASHER, 50 8 mm
C 90584-RJ F-TOO 1.485 mm (0.0585 in.) No. Part Number Thickness
D 90585-RJF-TOO 1.465 mm (0.0577 in.) A 90519-RJ F-TOO 1.91 mm (0.0752 in.)
E 90586-RJF-TOO 1.445 mm (0.0569 in.) B 90520-RJF-TOO 1.93 mm (0.0760 in.)
F 90587-RJF-TOO 1.425 mm (0.0561 in.) C 90521-RJF~TOO 1.95 mm (0.0768 in.)
G 90588-RJF-TOO 1.405 mm (0.0553 in.) D 90522-RJF-TOO 1.97 mm (0.0776 in.)
E 90523-RJ F-TOO 1.99 mm (0.0783 in.)
7. Measure the clearance between the 50.8 mm collar F 90524-RJF-TOO 2.01 mm (0.0791 in.)
(A) and the 50.8 mm washer (B) with a feeler gauge G 90525-RJ F-TOO 2.03 mm (0.0799 in.)
(C) in at least three places. Use the average as the H 90526-RJ F-TOO 2.05 mm (0.0807 in.)
actual clearance. I 90527 -RJ F-TOO 2.07 mm (0.0815 in.)
J 90528-RJ F-TOO 2.09 mm (0.0823 in.)
Standard: 0.005-0.040 mm (0.0002-0.0016 in.) K 90529-RJF-TOO 2.11 mm (0.0831 in.)
L 90530-RJF-TOO 2.13 mm (0.0839 in.)
M 90531-RJ F-TOO 2.15 mm (0.0846 in.)
N 90532-RJF-TOO 2.17 mm (0.0854 in.)
0 90533-RJ F-TOO 2.19 mm (0.0862 in.)
p 90534-RJF-TOO 2.21 mm (0.0870 in.)
Q 90535-RJF-TOO 2.23 mm (0.0878 in.)
R 90536-RJF-TOO 2.25 mm (0.0886 in.)
S 90537-RJF-TOO 2.27 mm (0.0894 in.)
T 90538-RJF-TOO 2.29 mm (0.0902 in.)
U 90539-RJ F-TOO 2.31 mm (0.0909 in.)
V 90540-RJF-TOO 2.33 mm (0.0917 in.)
W 90541-RJ F-TOO 2.35 mm (0.0925 in.)
X 90542-RJF-TOO 2.37 mm (0.0933 in.)
y 90543-RJF-TOO 2.39 mm (0.0941 in.)
Z 90544-RJ F-TOO 2.41 mm (0.0949 in.)
AA 90545-RJF-TOO 2.43 mm (0.0957 in.)
AB 90546-RJF-TOO 2.45 mm (0.0965 in.)
A
/ \ B
------c
BACK 14-347
Shafts and Clutches
Countershaft Reassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Slide the reverse selector hub (A) over the
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 countershaft (B), then press it into place using the
driver 40 mm I.D. and the press.
1. Install the 40.5 mm cotters (A), 2nd gear (B), thrust
needle bearing (C), needle bearing (D), idler gear NOTE: Some reverse selector hubs are not press-
(E), thrust needle bearing (F), 61 mm washer (G), fitted, and can be installed without using the
1st gear (H), 4th gear (I), 50.8 mm collar (J), special tool and a press.
50.8 mm washer (K), 42.2 mm cotters (L), cotter
retainer (M), and snap ring (N) on the countershaft
(0). Install the 40.5 mm cotters, idler gear, 1st gear,
and 4th gear in the direction shown. h .. 03·,··
4. Install the reverse selector, reverse gear collar,

needle bearing, and reverse gear over the reverse
selector hub.
2. Install the thrust washer (P), needle bearing (Q),

and 5th gear (R).
14-348 BACK
5. Install the ball bearing (A) over the countershaft, 7. Hold the countershaft securely with a wrench and a
then press it into place using the driver (40 mm I.D.) vise, and tighten the locknut to 167 N·m
and the press. (17.0 kgf·m, 123Ibf·ft).
~ ." .......,..
NOTE:
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
----- not use an impact wrench.

• The locknut has left-hand threads.
6. Install the conical spring washer (A) in the direction

shown, and install the new locknut (B).
8. Stake the locknut into its shaft in depth (A) of

0.7-1.3 mm (0.03-0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch
(B).
BACK 14-349
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Disassembly
Exploded View
LOCKNUT (FLANGE NUT)

178 N·m (18.2 kgf·m, 132Ibf·ft)
Left-hand threads
Replace.
THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
\ . / 1ST/1ST-HOLD
.,. CLUTCH
/2NDGEARI
~ PARK GEAR
NEEDLE BEARING
-
/
. / THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
~THRUST NEEDLE
BEARING
~:k~~~~ ~1ST-HOLD
CLUTCH HUB
~2NDCLUTCH SECONDARY SHAFT

~~ SNAP RING, 32 mm
SEALING RINGS, 29 mm
14-350 BACK
Special Tools Required 4. Place the idler gear (A) on press bases (B), and
Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 07XAA-002010A place a shaft protector (C) between the secondary
shaft (D) and the press to prevent damaging the
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the secondary shaft.
following procedure.
1. Cut the lock tab (A) off the secondary shaft locknut
(B) using a chisel (C).
NOTE: Keep all ofthe chiseled particles out ofthe

secondary shaft.
5. Press the secondary shaft out of the press-fitted

bearing (E), and remove the secondary shaft while
2. Place a V-block (A) on a vise (B), and put the holding the underside ofthe secondary shaft. The
secondary shaft (C) on the V-block and vise. secondary shaft falls down when pressing the
secondary shaft out of the press-fitted bearing.
6. Remove the 1st/1st-hold clutch, 52 mm washer,

thrust needle bearing, 1st gear assembly, needle
bearings, 1st gear collar, thrust needle bearing, and
idler gear.
7. Remove the 32 mm snap ring, and remove the 2nd

clutch, splined washer, thrust needle bearing,
needle bearing, 2nd gear/park gear, and thrust
needle bearing.
\ A
8. Inspect the bearings for galling and rough
movement.

excessive wear, and check shaft splines for
B excessive wear and damage.
3. Attach the wrench (40 x 42 mm) onto the 1st clutch 10. Check the 1st gear axial clearance (see page
guide, and secure the wrench (40 x 42 mm) with the 14-352), 1st gear one-way clutch (see page 14-354),
vise to hold the secondary shaft. Loosen the and secondary shaft installation height (see page
locknut, and remove it. Remove any burrs from 14-359).
splines on the shaft and splined washer.
BACK 14-351
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft 1st Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
Special Tools Required 2. Install the ball bearing (A) over the 1st/1st-hold
• Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 clutch guide using the driver (40 mm 1.0.), the
• Attachment, 30 mm I.D. 07746-0030300 attachment (30 mm I.D.), and the press.
~"'0030100
1. Install the idler gear (A), thrust needle bearing (B),
1st gear collar (C), needle bearings (D), 1st gear
assembly (E), thrust needle bearing (F), 52 mm
washer (G), and 1st/1st-hold clutch (H) on the
secondary shaft (I). Install the idler gear and 52 mm
washer in the direction shown. Do not install the
O-rings during inspection.
A
F -_ _
3. Install the splined washer with the marked side up
over the ball bearing in the same manner as
installing the ball bearing using the driver (40 mm
I.D.), the attachment (30 mm I.D.), and the press.
4. Install the old locknut and tighten it to 29 N·m

(3.0 kgf·m, 22 Ibf·ft).
j§). 5. Set the dial indicator (A) on the 1st clutch hub (B).
14-352 BACK
6. Measure the 1st gear axial clearance in at least 8. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the
three places while moving the 1st gear. Use the clearance.
WASHER, 52mm
Standard: 0.100-0.145 mm (0.004-0.006 in.) No. Part Number Thickness
A 90502-RWE-000 2.705 mm (0.107 in.)
B 90503-RWE-000 2.680 mm (0.106 in.)
C 90504-RWE-000 2.655 mm (0.105 in.)
D 90505-RWE-000 2.630 mm (0.104 in.)
E 90506-RWE-000 2.605 mm (0.103 in.)
F 90507 -RWE-OOO 2.580 mm (0.102 in.)
G 90508-RWE-000 2.555 mm (0.101 in.)
H 90509-RWE-000 2.530 mm (0.100 in.)
I 90510-RWE-000 2.505 mm (0.099 in.)
J 90511-RWE-000 2.480 mm (0.098 in.)
K 90512-RWE-000 2.455 mm (0.097 in.)
L 90513-RWE-000 2.430 mm (0.096 in.)
M 90514-RWE-000 2.405 mm (0.095 in.)
7. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the

washer and measure its difference.
BACK 14..353
Shafts and Clutches
1st Gear One-way Clutch Inspection
1. Hold the 1st-hold clutch hub (A), and turn the 1st
gear (8) in the direction shown to be sure it turns
freely. Also make sure the 1st gear locks in the
opposite direction. .
2. If any problem occurs on the 1st gear one-way

clutch, replace the 1st clutch hub (C). The 1st gear
one-way clutch is not available separately from the
1st clutch hub.
3. Also check the 1st gear and the 1st-hold clutch hub
for wear and damage. If the 1st gear and 1st-hold
clutch hub are worn or damaged, replace the
damaged part, refer to 1st Clutch Hub Replacement
(see page 14-355).
14-354 BACK
1st Clutch Hub Replacement
Special T 0015 Required 3. Install the new 1st clutch hub (A) over 1st gear (B),
• Driver 07749-0010000 and install the 1st-hold clutch hub (C) in 1st gear.
• Driver attachment 07947-6340500
• Attachment, 78 x 90 mm 07GAD-SD40101
1. Remove the 1st-hold clutch hub (A) from 1st gear

(B) using the driver, the driver attachment, and the
press.
~on49""OOOO
4. Install the 1st-hold clutch hub (A) in 1st gear (B)

using the driver, the attachment (78 x 90 mm), and
the press.
2. Remove the 1st clutch hub (C) from 1st gear.
BACK 14-355
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Reassembly
Special Tools Required 4. Install the idler gear (A) in the direction shown,
• Driver, 40 mm 1.0.07746-0030100 thrust needle bearing (8), 1st gear collar (C), needle
• Attachment, 30 mm I.D. 07746-0030300 bearings (D), 1st gear assembly (E), thrust needle
• Wrench, 40 x 42 mm 07XAA-002010A bearing (F), and 52 mm washer (G) in the direction
shown on the secondary shaft (H).
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A), needle bearing
(8), 2nd gear/park gear (C), thrust needle bearing
(D), and splined washer (E) in the direction shown J
on the secondary shaft (F).
5. Wrap the shaft splines with tape, and install the

new O-rings (I) in 1st/1st-hold clutch O-ring grooves,
2. Wrap the shaft splines with tape, and install the then remove the tape.
new O-rings (G) in the 2nd clutch O-ring grooves,
then remove the tape. NOTE: To prevent damage to the O-rings, be sure
to install the O-rings after installing the 1st gear
NOTE: To prevent damage to the O-rings, be sure collar and 52 mm washer.
to install the O-rings after installing the splined
washer. 6. Install the 1st/1st-hold clutch (J).
3. Install the 2nd clutch (H) on the secondary shaft,

and secure the 2nd clutch with the snap ring (I).
14-356 BACK
7. Install the ball bearing (A) over the 1sV1st-hold 9. Install the new locknut.
clutch guide (B) using the driver (40 mm I.D.), the
attachment (30 mm I.D.), and the press.
10. Place a V-block (A) on a vise (B), and put the

secondary shaft (e) on the V-block and vise.
07XAA-002010A
8. Install the new splined washer (A) with the marked

side (B) up over the ball bearing using the driver
(40 mm I.D.), the attachment (30 mm I.D.), and the
press.
11. Attach the wrench (40 x 42 mm) onto the top of the
B 1st clutch guide, and secure the wrench
(40 x 42 mm) with the vise to hold the secondary
shaft. Tighten the locknut to 178 N·m (18.2 kgf·m,
132 Ibf·ft) with the torque wrench (D).
NOTE:
• Use a torque wrench to tighten the locknut. Do
not use an impact wrench .
• The locknut has left-hand threads.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-357
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
12. Stake the locknutto a depth (A) of 0.7-1.3 mm

(0.03-0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch (8).
14-358 BACK
Secondary Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
1. Install the thrust needle bearing (A) in the torque 3. Measure the height (8) of the secondary shaft
converter housing (8) in the direction shown, and installation between the surface (C) of the gasket
install the secondary shaft assembly (C). and the top ofthe ball bearing outer race (D), then
note the measurement.
Secondary Shaft Cutaway View:
D ---.--------".<"'9
2. Install the neW gasket (A) on the torque converter

housing.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-359
Shafts and Clutches
Secondary Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment (cont'd)
4. Remove the 65 mm thrust shim (A) from the 6. Select the 65 mm thrust shim from the following
transmission housing, and measure its thickness. table.
THRUST SHIM 65 mm
I
No. Part Number Thickness

OA 90460-RDK-000 0.80 mm (0.031 in.)
A 90461-RDK-010 0.84 mm (0.033 in.)
B 90462-RDK-010 0.88 mm (0.035 in.)
C 90463-RDK-010 0.92 mm (0.036 in.)
A 0 90464-RDK-010 0.96 mm (0.038 in.)
E 90465-RDK-010 1.00 mm (0.039 in.)
F 90466-RDK-010 1.04 mm (0.041 in.)
G 90467-RDK-010 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
H 90468-RDK-010 1.12 mm (0.044 in.)
I 90469-RDK-010 1.16 mm (0.046 in.)
J 90470-RDK-010 1.20 mm (0.047 in.)
K 90471-RDK-010 1.24 mm (0.049 in.)
L 90472-RDK-010 1.28 mm (0.050 in.)
M 90473-R OK-010 1.32 mm (0.052 in.)
N 90474-RDK-010 1.36 mm (0.054 in.)
0 90475-RDK-010 1.40 mm (O.055 in.)
5. Calculate the thickness ofthe 65 mm thrust shim p 90476-RDK-010 1.44 mm (0.057 in.)
using the formula. Q 90477-RDK-010 1.48 mm (0.058 in.)
R 90478-RDK-010 1.52 mm (0.060 in.)
Formula: S 90479-RDK-010 1.56 mm (0.061 in.)
65 mm Thrust Shim Thickness T 90480-RDK-010 1.60 mm, (0.063 in.)
= Secondary Shaft Installation Height Standard U 90481-R OK-000 1.64 mm (O~065 in.)
- Measurement V 90482-RDK-000 1.68 mm (0.066 in.)
W 90483-RDK-000 1.72 mm (0.068 in.)
Secondary Shaft Installation Height X 90484-RDK-000 1.76 mm (0.069 in.)
Standard: y 90485-RDK-000 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
228.04-228.13 mm (8.9779-8.9815 in.) Z 90486-RDK-000 1.84 mm (0.072 in.)
AA 90487-RDK-000 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
AB 90488-RDK-000 1.92 mm (0.076 in.)
AC 90489-RDK-000 1.96 mm (0.077 in.)
AD 90490-RDK-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
AE 90491-R OK-000 2.04 mm (0.080 in.)
AF 90492-RDK-000 2.08 mm (0.082 in.)
AG 90493-RDK-000 2:12 mm (0.083 in.)
AH 90494-RDK-000 2.16 min (0.085 in.)
AI 90495-RDK-000 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
AJ 90496-RDK-000 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
AK 90497 -RDK-OOO 2.28 mm (0.090 in.)
AL 90498-RDK-000 2.32 mm (0.091 in.)
7. Install the thrust shim in the transmission housing.
14-360 BACK
Intermediary Shaft Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
1. Remove the 26.5 mm washer, snap ring, cotter 4. Check the shaft bearing surfaces for scoring and
retainer, and cotters from the third shaft. excessive wear, and check the shaft splines for
excessive wear and damage.
______ WASHER, 26.5 mm
______ .Selective part
5. Check the se~ling rings. for excessive wear and
COTTERS 0'> ~SNAP RING
19.~§~COTTERRETAINER damage.
~ -@4THGEAR 6. Check the 3rd gear axial clearance (see page

14-363), and intermedi~ry shaft installation height
(see page 14-365). .
7. Before installing the O-rings, wrap the shaft splines

with tape to prevent damage to the O-rings.
8. Lubricate all parts with ATF, and reassemble the

shaft and gears.
I__-----NEEDLE BEARING 9. Install the press-fitted 4th gear using the driver
(40 mm I.D.) and the press (see page 14-362) in the
direction shown.
- - - - - - - O-RING
Replace.
INTERMEDIARY
SHAFT
SEALING RINGS,
35mm
2. Remove the intermediary shaft 4th gear using the

press (see page 14-362), and disassemble the shaft
and gears.
3. Inspect the bearings for galling and rough

movement.
BACK 14-361
shafts and Clutches
Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear Intermediary Shaft 4th Gear
1. Place 4th gear (A) on press bases (8), and place a Special Tools Required
shaft protector (e) between the intermediary shaft Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
(D) and the. press to prevent damaging the
intermediary shaft. 1.YVrap the shaft splines with tape, and install the
new O-rings in the 3rd clutch O-ring grooves, then
remove the tape.
2. Install the 3rd clutch, 53 mm splined washer, thrust

needle bearing, needle bearing, 3rd gear, thrust
- needl~ bearing on the intermediary shaft.
3. Install 4th gear (A) using the driver (40 mm I.D.) and
the press.
2. Press the intermediary shaft out of the press-fitted

4th gear, and remove the intermediary shaft while
holding the underside of the intermediary shaft.
The intermediary shaft falls down when pressing
the intermediary shaft out of the press-fitted gear.
3. Remove the remaining parts from the intermediary

shaft.
4. Install the 19.8 mm cotters, cotter retainer, and

snap ring.
5. Install the 26.5 mm washer on the top ofthe

intermediary shaft.
14-362 BACK
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection
Special Tools Required 2. Install 4th gear (H) using the driver (40 mm I.D.) and
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 the press.
1. Install the 3rd clutch (A), 53 mm splined washer (8),

thrust needle bearing (e), needle bearing (D), 3rd
gear (E), and thrust needle bearing (F) on the
intermediary shaft (G). Do not install the O-rings
during inspection.
3. Install the cotters (I), cotter retainer (J), and snap

ring (K).
4. Setthe dial indicator (A) on 4th gear (8).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-363
Shafts and Clutches
Intermediary Shaft 3rd Gear Axial Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
5. Measure the 4th gear axial clearance in at least

three places while moving 4th gear. Use the
Standard: 0.005-0.045 mm (0.0002-0.0018 in.)

splined washer and measure its thickness.
7. Select and install a new splined washer, then

recheck the clearance.
SPLINED WASHER, 53 mm
A 90546-RDK-000 3.995 mm (0.1573 in.)
B 90547-RDK-000 4.015 mm (0.1581 in.)
C 90548-RDK-000 4.035 mm (0.1589 in.)
D 90549-RDK-000 4.055 mm (0.1596 in.)
E 90550-RDK-000 4.075 mm (0.1604 in.)
F 90551-RDK-000 4.095 mm (0.1612 in.)
G 90552-RDK-000 4.115 mm (0.1620 in.)
H 90553-RDK-000 4.135 mm (0.1628 in.)
I 90554-RDK-000 4.155 mm (0.1636 in.)
J 90555-RDK-000 4.175 mm (0.1644 in.)
K 90556-RDK-000 4.195 mm (0.1652 in.)
L 90557-RDK-000 4.215 mm (0.1659 in.)
M 90558-RDK-000 4.235 mm (0.1667 in.)
N 90559-RDK-000 4.255 mm (0.1675 in.)
14-364 BACK
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height InspectionlAdjustment
1. Install the intermediary shaft (A) in the torque 4. If the measurement is out of standard, remove the
converter housing, and install the 26.5 mm washer 26.5 mm washer and measure its thickness.
(B) on the intermediary shaft.
5. Select and install a new washer, then recheck the
installation height.
WASHER 26 5 mm
I

A 90564-RDK-000 1.05 mm (0.041 in.)
B 90565-RDK-000 1.13 mm (0.044 in.)
C 90566-RDK-000 1.21 mm (0.048 in.)
D 90567-RDK-000 1.29 mm (0.051 in.)
E 90568-RDK-000 1.37 mm (0.054 in.)
F 90569-RDK-000 1.45 mm (0.057 in.)
F G 90570-RDK-000 1.53 mm (0.060 in.)
H 90571-RDK-000 1.61 mm (0.063 in.)
o I 90572-RDK-000 1.69 mm (0.067 in.)
J 90573-RDK-000 1.77 mm (0.070 in.)
K 90574-RDK-000 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
E L 90575-RDK-000 1.93 mm (0.076 in.)
M 90576-RDK-000 2.01 mm (0.079 in.)
N 90577-RDK-000 2.09 mm (0.082 in.)
2. Install the new gasket (C) on the torque converter

housing.
3. Measure the height (D) ofthe intermediary shaft

installation between the surface (E) ofthe gasket
and the surface of the 26.5 mm washer (F).
Intermediary Shaft Installation Height

Standard:
137.285-137.385 mm (5.40491-5.40885 in.)
Intermediary Shaft Cutaway View:
I.--n-r-----.,--- F
BACK 14-365
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the 1st clutch end plate (A), 1st clutch discs
• Clutch spring compressor attachment (8) (5), 1st clutch waved-plates (C) (5), disc spring
07LAE-PX40100 or 07HAE-PL50101 (D), 1st-hold clutch plate 8 (E), 1st-hold clutch discs
• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly (F) (3), 1st-hold clutch waved-plates (G) (2), and 1st-
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A hold clutch flat-plate (H) from the 1st/1st-hold
clutch drum (I).
1. Remove the snap ring (A) with a screwdriver (8).
3. Make reference marks on the clutch waved-plates.
14-366 BACK
4. Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (8) (7), 8. Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (8) (5),
clutch waved-plates (e) (3), and clutch flat-plates clutch waved-plates (e) (2), clutch flat-plates (D) (3),
(D) (4) from the 2nd clutch drum (E). and disc spring (E) from the 4th clutch drum (F).
a---c
___ c
--0
--0
--0
9. Make reference· marks on the clutch waved-plates.
--0
10. Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (8) (5),
clutch waved-plates (e) (2), clutch flat-plates (D) (3),
and disc spring (E) from the 5th clutch drum (F).
6. Remove the clutch end plate (A), clutch discs (8) (5),
clutch waved-plates (e) (2), clutch flat-plates (D) (3),
and disc spring (E) from the 3rd clutch drum (F).
...___c
--0
F ___ --0 11. Make reference marks on the clutch waved-plates.
--0
(cont'd)
BACK 14-367
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
12. Install the clutch spring compressor attachments 14. If either end of the clutch spring compressor
and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly. attachment is set over an area ofthe spring retainer
that is unsupported by the return spring, the
07LAE·PX40100
retainer may be damaged.
07LAE·PX40100 or 15. Set the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) on

07HAE·PL50101
the spring retainer (B) of the 3rd and 5th clutches so
07GAE·PG40200 or the clutch spring compressor attachment works on
07GAE-PG4020A the clutch return spring (e).
13. Be sure the clutch spring compressor attachment

(A) is adjusted to have full contact with the spring
retainer (B) on the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches.
14-368 BACK
16. If either end ofthe clutch spring compressor 18. Remove the snap ring with the snap ring pliers.
attachment is not set over the clutch return spring
end (A), the retainer may be damaged.
19. Remove the clutch spring compressor attachments

and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly.
17. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can
be removed. 20. Remove the snap ring (A), spring retainer (8), and
return spring (C).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-369
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Disassembly (cont'd)
21. Wrap a shop rag around the clutch drum, and apply 23. Remove the 1st-hold clutch piston (A) from the 1st
air pressure to the fluid passage to remove the clutch piston (8), and remove the O-rings from the
piston. Place a finger tip on the other passage while 1st-hold clutch piston.
applying air pressure.
24. Remove the clutch piston, and remove the O-rings

from the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th clutch pistons.
22. Remove the 1st/1st-hold clutch piston (A) from the

clutch drum (8), and remove the O-rings from the
1st clutch piston.
._______8
14-370 BACK
Clutch Inspection
1. Inspectthe clutch pistons and clutch piston check 8. If the clutch end plate is worn, damaged, or
valves (A). discolored, inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc
clearance, then replace the clutch end plate.
A
2. If the clutch piston check valve is loose or damaged,

replace the clutch piston.
3. Check the spring retainer for wear and damage.
4. If the spring retainer is worn or damaged, replace it.
5. Inspect the clutch discs, clutch plates, and clutch

end plate for wear, damage, and discoloration.
Clutch Discs
Standard Thickness: 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
Clutch Flat-plates and Clutch Waved-plates

Standard Thickness
1st clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
1st-hold clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
2nd clutch: 1.8 mm (0.071 in.)
3rd clutch: 2.0 mm (0.079 in.)
4th clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
5th clutch: 1.6 mm (0.063 in.)
6. Ifthe clutch discs are worn or damaged, replace

them as a set. Ifthe clutch discs are replaced,
inspect the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance.
7. If any plate is worn, damaged, or discolored,

replace the damaged plate with a new plate, and
inspect the other waved-plates for a phase
difference. Ifthe clutch plate is replaced, inspect
the clutch end-plate-to-top-disc clearance.
BACK 14-371
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Waved-plate Phase Difference Inspection
1. Place the clutch waved-plate (A) on a surface plate, 5. Rotate the waved-plate of the 1st, 1st-hold, 2nd, 4th,
and set a dial indicator (8) on the waved-plate. and 5th clutches about 60-degrees, and the 3rd
clutch waved-plate about 54-degrees or 72-degrees.
The dial indicator should be at the bottom of a
phase difference (F and H), and zero the dial
indicator.
6. Measure the phase difference at the other two tops

(G and I) of the waved-plate by following steps 3
thru 5.
7. Ifthe two values ofthe three measurements are

within the standard, the waved-plate is OK. If the
two values ofthe three measurements are out of
the standard, replace the waved-plate.
2. Find the bottom (D) of a phase difference of the

waved-plate, zero the dial indicator and make a
reference mark on the bottom of the waved-plate.
3. Rotate the clutch waved-plate of the 1st, 1st-hold,

2nd, 4th, and 5th clutches about 60-degrees while
holding the waved-plate by its circumference, and
rotate the 3rd clutch waved-plate about 72-degrees
or 54-degrees while holding the waved-plate by its
circumference. The dial indicator should be at the
top (E) of a phase difference. Do not rotate the
waved-plate while holding its surface, always
rotate it by holding its circumference.
4. Read the dial indicator. The dial indicator reads the

phase difference (C) of the waved-plate between
the bottom and top.
Standard Phase Difference

1st clutch: 0.17-0.3 mm (0.007-0.012 in.)
1st-hold clutch: 0.1-0.2 mm (0.004-0.008 in.)
2nd clutch: 0.11-0.21 mm (0.004-0.008 in.)
3rd clutch: 0.1-0.2 mm (0.004-0.008 in.)
4th clutch: 0.1-0.2 mm (0.004-0.008 in.)
5th clutch: 0.12-0.22 mm (0.005-0.009 in.)
14-372 BACK
Clutch Clearance Inspection
Special Tools Required 3. Install the 1st-hold clutch flat-plate (A), alternately
Clutch compressor attachment 07ZAE-PRP0100 install the clutch discs (8) (3) and the 1st-hold clutch
waved-plates (C) (2), then install 1st-hold clutch
1. Inspect the clutch piston, discs, plates, and end plate 8 (0) with the flat side down in the direction
plate for wear and damage (see page 14-371), and shown.
inspect the clutch waved-plate phase difference
(see page 14-372), if necessary.
2. Install the 1st-hold clutch piston in the 1st clutch

piston, and install 1st/1st-hold clutch piston (A) in
the 1st/1st-hold clutch drum (B). 00 not install the
O-rings on the clutch pistons during inspection.
---8 4. Measure the 1st-hold clutch plate B-to-top-disc

clearance with a feeler gauge (A) while pressing the
1st-hold clutch plate 8 down. Take measurements
in at least three places, and use the average as the
actual clearance.
1st-hold Clutch Plate B-to-Top-Disc Clearance

Service Limit: 0.6-1.0 mm (0.024-0.039 in.)
5. Ifthe clearance is out of standard, replace the 1st-

hold clutch plates and discs as a set, and recheck.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-373
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
6. Install the disc spring (A) on 1st-hold clutch plate 8 8. Starting with the 2nd clutch flat-plate, alternately
in the direction shown. Starting with the 1st clutch install the flat-plates (A) (4) and discs (8) (4) in the
waved-plate, alternately install the waved-plates 2nd clutch drum (e), and alternately install the
(8) (5) and discs (e) (5) in the 1st clutch 'drum (0), waved-plates (0) (3) and discs (8) (3). Install the
then install the clutch-end-plate (E) with the flat side clutch-end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the
down. top disc.
7. Install the clutch pistons in the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and

5th clutch drums. 00 not install the O-rings on the
clutch pistons during inspection.
9. Install the disc spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum (8)
in the direction shown. Starting with the 3rd clutch
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (e) (3)
and discs (0) (3), and alternately install the waved-
plates (E) (2) and discs (0) (2). Install the clutch-end-
plate (F) with the flat side down on the top disc.
14-374 BACK
10. Install the disc spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum (8) 12. Install the snap ring with a screwdriver to secure
in the direction shown. Starting with the 4th clutch the clutch-end-plate.
13. Set a dial indicator-tAl on the clutch-end-plate (8).
11. Install the disc spring (A) in the 5th clutch drum (8)
in the direction shown. Starting with the 5th clutch
plates (E) (2) and discs (0) (2). Install the clutch~end
14. Zero the dial indicator with the clutch-end-plate

lifted up to the snap ring (e).
(cont'd)
BACK 14~375
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Clearance Inspection (cont'd)
15. Release the clutch-end~plate to lower the clutch- 18. If the clearance is out oftheservice limit, select a
end-plate, then put the clutch compressor new clutch-end-plate from the following table.
attachment on the end-plate (A).
07ZAE-PRP0100
A
E
1ST CLUTCH END PLATES

Plate Part Number Thickness
No.
1 22551-RDK-003 3.1 mm (0.122 in.)
16. Press the clutch compressor attachment down with 2 22552-RDK-003 3.2 mm (0.126 in.)
150-160 N (15-16 kgf, 33-35Ibf) (8) using a 3 22553-RDK-003 3.3 mm (0.130 in.)
force gauge, and read the dial indicator (C). 4 22554-RDK-003 3.4 mm (O.134 in.)
5 22555-RDK-003 3.5 mm (O.138 in.)
17. The dial indicator reads the cI~arance (D) between 6 22556-RDK-003 3.6 mm{O.142 in.)
the clutch-end-plate and top disc (E). Take 7 22557 -RDK-003 3.7mm (O.146 in.)
measurements in at least three places, and use the 8 22558-RDK-003 3.8 mm (M50 in.)
average as the actual clearance. 9 22559-RDK-003 3.9 mm (O.154 in.)
Clutch End-Plate-to-Top"Disc Clearance 2ND CLUTCH END PLATES

Service Limit: Plate Part Number Thickness
1st clutch: 1.15-1.35 mm (0.045-0.053 in.) No.
2nd clutch: 1.05-1.25 mm (0.041-0.049 in.) 1 2256.1-RDK-003 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
3rd clutch: 0.8-1.0 mm (0.031-0.039 in.) 2 22562-RDK-003 2.2 mm (O.087 in.)
4th clutch: 0.75-0.95 mm (0.030-0.037 in.) 3 22563-RDK-003 2.3 mm (O.091 in.)
5th clutch: 0.75-0.95 mm (0.030-0.037 in.) . 4 22564-RDK-003 2.4 mm (O.094 in.)
5 22565-RDK~003 2.5 mm (O.098 in.)
6 22566-RDK-003 2.6 mm (O.102 in.)
7 22567-RDK-003 2.7 mm (O.106 in.)
8 22568-RDK-003 2.8 mm (O.11 0 in.)
9 22569-RDK-003 2.9 mm (O.114 in.)
14-376 BACK
3RD CLUTCH END PLATES
Plate. Part .Number Thickness
No.
1 22591-RJ8-E01 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22592-RJB-E01 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22593-RJ8-E01 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22594-RJ8-E01 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22595-RJ8-E01 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22596-RJ8-E01 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22597-RJB-E01 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22598-RJ 8-EO 1 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22599-RJ8-E01 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
4TH CLUTCH END PLATES

No.
1 22571-RJ8-E01 2.1 mm (0.083 in.)
2 22572-RJ8-E01 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22573-RJ8-E01 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 22574-RJB-E01 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 22575-RJ8-E01 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 2257 6-RJ 8-EO 1 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22577-RJ8-E01 2.7mm (0.106 in.)
8 22578-RJ8-E01 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22579-RJ8-E01 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
5TH CLUTCH END PLATES

No.
1 22571-RJ8-003 2.1mm (0.083 in.)
2 22572-RJ 8-003 2.2 mm (0.087 in.)
3 22573-RJ 8-003 2.3 mm (0.091 in.)
4 2257 4-RJ B-003 2.4 mm (0.094 in.)
5 2257 5-RJ 8-003 2.5 mm (0.098 in.)
6 22576-RJ 8-003 2.6 mm (0.102 in.)
7 22577 -RJ 8-003 2.7 mm (0.106 in.)
8 22578-RJ 8-003 2.8 mm (0.110 in.)
9 22579-RJ8-003 2.9 mm (0.114 in.)
19. Install the new clutch-end-plate, and recheck the

clearance. If the thickest clutch-end-plate is
installed, but the clearance is still over the service
limit, replace the clutch discs and plates.
BACK 14-377
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new O-rings (A) on the '1st clutch piston
• Clutch spring compressor attachment (8), and install the 1st/1st-hold clutch piston in the
07 LAE-PX40 100 or 07HAE-PL50101 1st/1st-hold clutch drum (C) while applying
• Clutch spring compressor bolt assembly pressure and rotating to ensure proper seating. Do
07GAE-PG40200 or 07GAE-PG4020A not pinch the O-ring.
1. Soak the clutch discs thoroughly in ATF for a

minimum of 30 minutes. __ 8
2. Install the new O-rings (A) on the 1st-hold clutch

piston (8), and install the 1st-hold clutch piston in
the 1st clutch piston (C). A
...-:-c
._____A
A
.4. Install the O-rings (A) on the 2nd; 3rd, 4th and 5th
clutch piston (8).
~c
5. Install the clutch pistons in the clutch drums (C)

while applying pressure and rotating to ensure
proper seating. Do not pinch the O-ring.
14-378 BACK
6. Install the return spring (A) and spring retainer (B), 8. Be sure the clutch spring compressor attachment
and position the snap ring (e) on the spring retainer. (A) is adjusted to have full contact with the spring
retainer (B) on the 1st, 2nd, and 4th clutches.
C
B
9. If either end ofthe clutch spring compressor

attachment is set over an area ofthe spring retainer
7. Install the clutch spring compressor attachments that is unsupported by the retumspring, the
and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly. retainer may be damaged.
07LAE-PX40100
o~
07LAE-PX40100 or
07HAE-PL50101
07GAE-PG40200 or
07GAE-PG4020A
--------
(cont'd)
BACK 14-379
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
10. Set the clutch spring compressor attachment (A) on 12. Compress the return spring until the snap ring can
the spring retainer (8) of the 3rd and 5th clutches so be installed.
the clutch spring compressor attachment works on
the clutch return spring (C).
13. Install the snap ring with the snap ring pliers.
11. If either end of the clutch spring compressor

attachment is not set over the clutch return spring
end (A), the retainer may be damaged.
14. Remove the clutch spring compressor attachments

and the clutch spring compressor bolt assembly.
14-380 BACK
15. Install the 1st-hold clutch flat-plate (A), alternately 17. Starting with the 2nd clutch flat-plate, alternately
install the clutch discs (8) (3) and the 1st-hold clutch install the flat-plates (A) (4) and discs (8) (4) in the
waved-plates (e) (2) in the 1st/1st-hold clutch drum 2nd clutch drum (e), and alternately install the
(0), then install 1st-hold clutch plate 8 (E) with the waved-plates (0) (3) and discs (8) (3). Install the
flat side down in the direction shown. clutch-end-plate (E) with the flat side down on the
top disc.
16. Install the disc spring (F) on 1st-hold clutch plate 8

in the direction shown. Starting with the 1st clutch 18. Install the disc spring (A) in the 3rd clutch drum (8)
waved-plate, alternately install the waved-plates in the direction shown. Starting with the 3rd clutch
(G) (5) and discs (H) (5), then install the clutch-end- flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (e) (3)
plate (I) with the flat side down on the top disc. and discs (0) (3), and alternately install the waved-
(cont'd)
BACK 14-381
Shafts and Clutches
Clutch Reassembly (cont'd)
19. Install the disc spring (A) in the 4th clutch drum (B) 21. Install the snap ring with a screwdriver to secure
in the direction shown. Starting with the 4th clutch the clutch-end-plate.
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (C) (3)
20. Install the disc spring (A) in the 5th clutch drum (B)
in the direction shown. Starting with the 5th clutch
flat-plate, alternately install the flat-plates (C) (3)
14-382 BACK
Transmission Reassembly
Exploded View
Bolt Tightening Torque
6 x 1.0 mm: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
8 x 1.25 mm: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13Ibf·ft)
~ 6 x 1.0 mm, One Bolt
o ~ 6 x 1.0 mm, Seven Bolts
6x 1.0 mm,
11 Bolts O-RING REGULATOR VALVE BODY
Replace.
~
~/O-RING
o V Replace.
____ STATOR SHAFT
SECONDARY
VALVE BODY
I
CHECK BALLS,
TWO~ .~
SECONDARY
SEPARATOR PLATE
DOWEL PINS,
Two Pins
6 x 1.0 mm, One Bolt

ATF PASSAGE PIPE TORQUE CONVERTER HOUSING
(cant'd)
BACK 14-383
Transmission Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tool Required 5. Ifthe ATF pump drive gear and ATF pump driven
Mainshaft holder 07GAB-PF50101 gear shaft do not move smoothly, loosen the main
valve body bolts. Realign the ATF pump driven
1. Make sure that the ATF magnet is cleaned and gear shaft, and retighten the bolts to the specified
installed in the torque converter housing. Clean torques, then recheck. Failure to align the ATF
and install the ATF magnet, if necessary. pump driven gear shaft correctly will result in a
seized ATF pump drive gear or ATF pump driven
2. Install the main separator plate and the two dowel gear shaft.
pins on the torque converter housing. Then install
the ATF pump drive gear (A), driven gear (B), and 6. Install the lubrication check valve, cooler check
ATF pump driven gear shaft (C). Install the ATF valve and cooler check valve spring in the main
pump driven gear with its grooved and chamfered valve body. Install the lubrication check valve in the
side facing down. direction shown in the exploded view.
7. Install the secondary separator plate and the two

dowel pins on the main valve body, and install the
secondary valve body (one bolt).
8. Install the two check balls in the secondary valve

body.
9. Install the accumulator separator plate and the two

dowel pins on the secondary valve body.
10. Position the detent arm on the accumulator

separator plate, and install the detent arm shaft into
the detent arm through the separator plates to the
Illain valve body.
3. Install the torque converter check valve spring and
valve in the torque converter housing. 11. Install the 8 x 62 mm ATFfeed pipes inthe main
valve body, and install the accumulator body
4. Install the main valve body (seven 6 mm bolts and (11 bolts).
three 8 mm bolts). Make sure the ATF pump drive
gear (A) rotates smoothly in the normal operating 12. Install the regulator separator plate and the two
direction, and the ATF pump driven gear shaft (C) dowel pins on the main valve body.
moves smoothly in the axial and normal operating
direction. 13. Install the stator shaft with the new O-ring, and
install the regulator valve body (eight bolts).
14. Install the stator shaft stop in the main valve body.
15. Install the ATF strainer with the new O-ring (two
bolts).
16. Install the ATF passage pipe (one bolt) in the torque
converter housing.
14-384 BACK
17. Install the intermediary shaft (A) into the main 24. Install the needle bearing (A) on the secondary
valve body, and install the 26.5 mm washer (8) on shaft roller bearing in the torque converter housing.
the top of the intermediary shaft.
E
6x1.0mm
12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m,8.7Ibf·ft)
c
~
H
F \ /
\
18. Install the transfer output shaft (C) in the torque 25. Turn the shift fork shaft (8) so the large chamfered
converter housing, and install the thrust shim (D) hole is facing the fork bolt hole of the shift fork.
on the top of the transfer output shaft.
26. Engage the shift fork (C) with the reverse selector
19. Install the differential assembly (E) in the torque on the countershaft, and join the mainshaft (D),
converter housing. countershaft (E), and secondary shaft (F), then
install them in the torque converter housing and
20. Install the baffle plate (F), and make sure the shift fork on the shift fork shaft.
differential is clear ofthe baffle plate.
21. Install the baffle plate (G), and make sure the
intermediary shaft is clear ofthe baffle plate.
22. Install the selector control shaft and the park lever
link (H).
23. Assemble the mainshaft, countershaft, and

secondary shaft.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-385
Transmission Reassembly (co nt'd)
27. Secure the shift fork (A) to the shift fork shaftwith 29. Align the control lever pin with the manual valve
the lock bolt and the new lock washer (8), then guide.
bend the lock tab of the lock washer against the
bolt head.
30. Hook the detent arm spring to the detent arm.
6x1.0mm
14 N·m 11.4 kgf·m, 10 Ibf·ftl
28. Install the park pawl shaft (A), pawl spring (8), park
pawl (e), and park pawl stop (D).
14-386 BACK
31. Install the 8 x 85 mm ATF feed pipe (A), the 8 x 33. Install the two dowel pins (A) and the new gasket
151.5 mm pipes (8), and the 8 x 40 mm pipe (C) in (8) on the torque converter housing (C).
the accumulator body.
___ A
32. Install the 8 x 57.5 mm ATF feed pipe (A) and the 34. Place the transmission housing (0) on the torque
10 x 123 mm pipe (8) in the torque converter converter housing.
housing.
35. Wrap a screwdriver tip with tape to prevent
damage to the reverse idler gear teeth. Engage the
reverse idler gear with reverse gears by rotating
the idler gear using the screwdriver.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-387
36. While expanding the snap ring of the countershaft 39. Install and tighten the special bolt (E) to 64 N·m
bearing using snap ring pliers, install the (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·ft).
transmission housing onto the bearing part-way.
Then release the snap ring pliers, and push down 40. Install the mainshaft holder onto the mainshaft.
on the housing until it bottoms and the snap ring
snaps into place in the transmission housing snap
ring groove.
41. Install the new lock washer (A) with the marked
side (8) up over the mainshaft (C), and apply ATF to
surfaces of the lock washer and old locknut (D).
37. Install the transmission housing mounting bolts
(21 bolts) and the bolt (A) along with the A
transmission hanger (B) and the transmission
ground terminal bracket (C), and tighten the bolts in
two or more steps in a criss-cross pattern to 44 N·m
(4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ft).
A o
10x 1.25mm 10x 1.25 mm B
44N·m 39N·m
14.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ftl 14.0 kgf·m, 29 Ibf·ftl
B---.....O~~
2 Bolts
C ~~~~~~
\
42. Install the old locknut, and tighten it to seat the lock
washer to 178 N·m (18.2 kgf·m, 132Ibf·ft), then
remove the old locknut.
10x 1.25mm
21 Bolts
38. Install and tighten the two mounting bolts (D) to

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 Ibf·ft). Keep the mounting
bolts free of grease or oil.
14-388 BACK
43. Install the new locknut and tighten it to 176 N·m 47. Install the new O-ring (E) on the solenoid harness
(18.2 kgf·m, 132 Ibf·ft), then stake the locknut to a connector (F).
depth (A) of 0.7-1.3 mm (0.03-0.05 in.) using a
3.5 mm punch (B).
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf.ftl
RED
48. Route the solenoid harness through the

44. Install the end cover (A), dowel pin (B), and new transmission housing, and install the solenoid
O-ring (C). harness connector.
F
49N·m 49. Connect the GRN harness connector to shift
solenoid valve C.
50. Connect the VEL harness connector to shift

solenoid valve A.
51. Connect the RED harness connector to shift

solenoid valve B.
52. Connect the ORN harness connector to shift

B
solenoid valve D.
53. Secure the solenoid harness connector with the

bolt on the transmission housing.
45. Install the snap ring cap (D) with the new O-ring (E).
46. Apply thread lock sealant to the threads of the

sealing plug (F), and install the sealing plug and the
new sealing washer (G).
(cont'd)
BACK 14-389
54. Install the solenoid valve cover (A) with the two 57. Install the 8 x 53 mm ATF joint pipe (A) with the
dowel pins (8) and the new gasket (C), and secure it filter side into its mounting hole (8).
with the seven bolts.
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf.ft)

B pipe (8) between the top (C) of the pipe and the
7 mm (0.3 in.), install the pipe securely until it stops
the accumulator body.
55. Place the new gasket (A) on the solenoid valve

cover, then install the 8 x 105.8 mm ATF feed pipes
(8) and the 8 x 58.3 mm pipes (C) with their filter
side into the transmission housing.
~E
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
56. Install the new O-rings (D) over the ATF feed pipes,
and install A{f clutch pressure control solenoid
valves A and 8 (E).
14-390 BACK
59. Install the new gasket (A) on the transmission 63. Set the transmission range switch (A) to the N
housing. Install the 8 x 34.5 mm ATF pipe (8) with position. The transmission range switch clicks in
the filter end in the transmission housing, and the N position, and the selector control shaft hole
install the 8 x 25.5 mm ATF pipe (0). (8) aligns with the N positioning line (e).
a ~ c
~
A
'6x1.0mm
B12N·m 112 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
64. Install the transmission range switch gently over
60. Install new O-rings (E) over the ATF joint pipes. the selector control shaft (0), and install the bolts
loosely.
61. Install. AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valve e.
65. Install the new lock wasner (A) over the selector
62. Set the control shaft to the N position by turning control shaft (8) by, aligning the projection (e) ofthe
the selector control shaft with a 6.0 mm wrench. lock washer with the N positioning line (0) onthe
transmission range switch (E), and install the
locknut (F).
F
12N·m
D 11.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
\ ~A
B
(cont'd)
BACK 14-391
66. Push the locknut against the transmission housing 69. Install the :new O-ring (A) on the input shaft
to seat the range switch into the selector control (mainshaft) speed sensor (8), and install the input
shaft, and tighten the locknut to 12 N·m(1.2 kgf·m, shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor.
8.7 Ibf·ft) while holding the selector control shaft
with a 6 mm wrench, then bend the lock tabs
against the locknut.
70. Install the new O-ring (C) on the output shaft

(countershaft) speed sensor (0), and install the
output shaft (countershaft) speed sensor and the
67. Tighten the range switch mounting bolts to 12 N·m sensor washer (E).
(1.2 kgf.m, 8.7Ibf·ft).
71. Install the 4th clutch transmission fluid pressure
68. Install the control lever (A), spring washer (8), lock switch (A) with the new sealing washer (8). Tighten
washer (C), and locknut (0) on the selector control the switch with the metal part.
shaft (E).
A
Q .------ 20N·m
/D ... B 12.0 kgf·m,
,- 6x1.0mm .
C ~ 12 N·m 11.2 kgf·m, 14Ibf·ft)
-------(F§ 8.7Ibf·ft)
B-----..@
14-392 BACK
72. Install the 3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure 76. Install the 2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure
switch (A) with the new sealing washer (B). Tighten switch (A) with the new sealing washer (B). Tighten
the switch with the metal part. the switch by the metal part.
6x1.0mm E G
12N·m 28N·m 6x1.0mm
11.2 kgf·m, (2.9 kgf·m, 12N·m
8.7Ibf.ft) 21Ibf.ft) (1.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
~ F 6x1.0mm
E
o
I f
/ 12N·m
(1.2 kgf.m,
8.7Ibf·ft)
H
I
D
77. Install the ATF dipstick tube (A) with the new O-ring
(B).
73. Install the ATF cooler lines (C) with the new sealing
washers (D) and the line bolts (E).
74. Install the connector bracket (F), and secure the

ATF lines with the 6.0 mm bolt (G) on the
transmission housing. Tighten the bolts to 12 N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf.ft).
75. Install the ATF temperature sensor (H) with the new
O-ring (I). Install the connector on the connector 78. Install the ATF dipstick (C) in its tube.
bracket and the harness clamp on the bracket.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-393
..' ;":: '
'.,:, 1'1
, " .
79. Connect the transmission range switch harness

connector (A), and install the harness clamp (8) on
the clamp bracket (e).
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m, S.7Ibf·tt)
80. Install the harness connector (0) on the connector

bracket'(E). If the connector bracket was removed,
install the connector bracket, then install the
connector on the bracket.
14~394 BACK
AfT Differential
Component Location Index Backlash Inspection
1. Remove the final driven gear and transfer drive

/N"'~~ _ _ _ _ THRUST SHIM, 85 mm
Preload Inspection, gear from the differential carrier.
page 14-401
2. Install both axles into the differential assembly (A),
and place the axles on V-blocks (8).
FINAL DRIVEN GEAR

~<==~~ 00 _ _ _ _ _ B
DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER
Backlash Inspection,
page 14-395 3. Measure the backlash of the pinion gears (e) with a
Replacement, page 14-396 dial indicator (0).
"~~?;m~~~
-----
TRANSFER DRIVE GEAR
4. If the backlash is out of standard, replace the

differential carrier.
------ CARRIER BEARING
A\rn,~'k Replacement, page 14-397
5. Install the final driven gear and transfer drive gear
""'-_v ------ BEARING OUTER RACE on the differential carrier (see page 14-396).
BACK 14-395
AIT Differential
Differential Carrier, Final Driven Gear, and Transfer Drive Gear Replacement
NOTE: Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever

the carrier is replaced.
1. Remove the final driven gear (A) and transfer drive

gear (B) from the differential carrier (e).
NOTE: The final driven gear bolts have left-hand

threads.
~125.0N.m
" (12.75 kgf.m, 92.22 Ibf·tt)
, 14 Bolts
-@
2. Install the final driven gear with the chamfered side

on the inner bore facing the differential carrier.
3. Install the bolts through the differential carrier to

the transfer drive gear.
4. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in a

crisscross pattern.
14-396 BACK
Carrier Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the new carrier bearings using the
Attachment, 45 x 55 mm 07MAD-PR90100 attachment (45 x 55 mm) and the press.
NOTE: NOTE:
• The bearing and outer race should be replaced as a • Press the bearing on until it bottoms.
set. • Use the small end ofthe attachment
• Inspect and adjust the bearing preload whenever the (45 x 55 mm) to install the bearings.
bearing is replaced. • Press the bearing on securely so there is no
• Check the bearing for wear and rough rotation. If the clearance between the bearing and the
bearing is OK, removal is not necessary. differential carrier.
1. Remove the carrier bearing (A) with a commercially

available bearing puller (8), bearing separator (C), J. ~ ,7MAD-PR901.0
and stepped adapter (D).
o
BACK 14-397
AfT Differential
Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Install the new oil seal flush to the transmission
• Driver 07749-0010000 housing using the drive and the oil seal driver
• Oil seal driver attachment 07GAD-PG40100 attachment.
• Oil seal driver attachment 07JAD-PH80101
1. Remove the oil seal from the transmission housing.
07GAD-PG40100
4. Install the new oil seal to the torque converter

housing using the drive and the oil seal driver
2. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter attachment.
housing.
14-398 BACK
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the 85 mm thrust shim (A), spacer (8), and
• Driver 07749-0010000 outer race (C) in the transmission housing (D).
• Attachment, 83 mm 07HAD-SG00100
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
NOTE:
• Replace the bearing with a new one whenever the
outer race is replaced.
• Do not use shim(s) on the torque converter housing A
side.
• Adjust the preload after replacing the bearing and the
outer race.
• Coat all parts with ATF during installation.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), spacer (8), and

85 mm thrust shim (C) from the transmission
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212 'f
(100 "C) with a heat gun (E). Do not heatthe
housing more than 212 'f (100 'C).
3. Using the driver and the attachment (83 mm), drive
the outer race securely in the housing so there is no
clearance between the outer race, spacer, shim,
and housing.
07HAD-SG00100
(cont'd)
BACK 14-399
AIT Differential
Carrier Bearing Outer Race Replacement (cont'd)
4. Remove the plate (A), and remove the bearing

outer race (8) and spacer (C) from the torque
converter housing (D).
6x1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m, 8.7 Ibf·ft)
-------
c
5. Install the spacer and the new outer race in the

torque converter housing.
6. Drive the bearing outer race securely in the

housing using the driver and the attachment
(78x80 mm).
07NAD-PX40100
7. Install the plate over the outer race in the torque

converter housing.
14-400 BACK
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection
Special Tools Required 4. Install the 85 mm thrust shim (A) in the

• Driver 077 49-0010000 transmissipn housing (8). If you replace the 85 mm
• Attachment, 83 mm 07HAD-SG00100 thrust shim with a new one, use the same thickness
• Preload inspection tool 070AJ-0020101 shim as the old one.
NOTE: If the transmission housing, torque converter

housing, differential carrier, tapered roller bearing,
bearing outer race, or thrust shim were replaced, the
bearing preload must be adjusted.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A), spacer (8), and

85 mm thrust shim (C) from the transmission A
housing (D) by heating the housing to about 212 "F
(100 "C) with a heat gun (E). Do not heat the
housing more than 212 "F (100 "C).
NOTE: Let the transmission housing cool to room

temperature before adjusting the bearing preload.
5. Install the spacer (C), and the bearing outer race (D)
in the transmission housing.
6. Drive the outer race securely in the housing using

the driver and the attachment (83 mm) so there is
no clearance between the outer race, spacer, shim,
and housing.
2. Replace the tapered roller bearing when the outer

race is to be replaced.
3. Do not use a shim on the torque converter housing

side.
07HAD-SG00100
(cont'd)
BACK 14-401
AfT Differential
Carrier Bearing Preload Inspection (cont'd)
7. Install the differential assembly (A) in the torque 9. Rotate the differential assembly in both directions
converter housing (B), and install the gasket (e) and to seat the bearings.
the two dowel pins (0) on the housing.
10. Measure the starting torque ofthe differential
assembly with the preload inspection tool, a torque
wrench (A), and a socket (B). Measure the starting
torque at normal room temperature in both
directions.
Standard
New bearings:
3.9-5.1 N·m (40-52 kgf·cm, 35-45 Ibf·in.)
Reused bearings:
3.6-4.8 N·m (37-49 kgf·cm, 32-43 Ibf·in.)
070AJ·0020101

8. Install the transmission housing (E), and install the thrust shim and measure its thickness.
mounting bolts (24 bolts) with the transmission
hangers (F) and the ground terminal bracket (G),
then tighten the bolts.
14-402 BACK
12. Select a new thrust shim. To increase the starting THRUST SHIM, 85 mm (cont'd)
torque, increase thickness of the thrust shim. To No. Part Number Thickness
decrease the starting torque, decrease the AA 41466-RGR-000 2.000 mm (0.0787 in.)
thickness of the thrust shim. AB 41467-RGR-000 2.025 mm (0.0797 in.)
Changing the shim to the next size will increase or AC 41468-RGR-000 2.050 mm (0.0807 in.)
decrease the starting torque about 0.5-0.6 N·m AD 41469-RGR-000 2.075 mm (0.0817 in.)
(5-6 kgf·cm, 5-5 Ibf·in.). AE 41470-RGR-000 2.100 mm (0.0827 in.)
AF 41471-RGR-000 2.125 mm (0.0837 in.)
THRUST SHIM, 85 mm AG 41472-RGR-000 2.150 mm (0.0846 in.)
No. Part Number Thickness AH 41473-RGR-000 2.175 mm (0.0856 in.)
A 41440-RGR-000 1.350 mm (0.0531 in.) AI 41474-RGR-000 2.200 mm (0.0866 in.)
B 41441-RGR-000 1.375 mm (0.0541 in.) AJ 41475-RGR-000 2.225 mm (0.0876 in.)
C 41442-RGR-000 1.400 mm (0.0551 in.) AK 41476-RGR-000 2.250 mm (0.0886 in.)
D 41443-RGR-000 1.425 mm (0.0561 in.) AL 41477-RGR-000 2.275 mm (0.0896 in.)
E 41444-RGR-000 1.450 mm (0.0571 in.) AM 41478-RGR-000 2.300 mm (0.0906 in.)
F 41445-RGR-000 1.475 mm (0.0581 in.) AN 41479-RGR-000 2.325 mm (0.0915 in.)
G 41446-RGR-000 1.500 mm (0.0591 in.) AO 41480-RGR-000 2.350 mm (0.0925 in.)
H 41447-RGR-000 1.525 mm (0.0600 in.)
I 41448-RGR-000 1.550 mm (0.0610 in.) 13. Install the new thrust shim, then recheck the
J 41449-RGR-000 1.575 mm (0.0620 in.) starting torque.
K 41450-RGR-000 1.600 mm (0.0630 in.)
L 41451-RGR-000 1.625 mm (0.0640 in.)
M 41452-RGR-000 1.650 mm (0.0650 in.)
N 41453-RG R-OOO 1.675 mm (0.0659 in.)
0 41454-RGR-000 1.700 mm (0.0669 in.)
p 41455-RGR-000 1.725 mm (0.0679 in.)
Q 41456-RGR-000 1.750 mm (0.0689 in.)
R 41457-RGR-000 1.775 mm (0.0699 in.)
S 41458-RGR-000 1.800 mm (0.0709 in.)
T 41459-RGR-000 1.825 mm (0.0719 in.)
U 41460-RGR-000 1.850 mm (0.0728 in.)
V 41461-RGR-000 1.875 mm (0.0738 in.)
W 41462-RGR-000 1.900 mm (0.0748 in.)
X 41463-RGR-000 1.925 mm (0.0758 in.)
y 41464-RGR-000 1.950 mm (0.0768 in.)
Z 41465-RGR-000 1.975 mm (0.0778 in.)
BACK 14-403
Transfer Output Shaft
Component Location Index Transfer Output Shaft Bearing

Replacement
.---- THRUST SHIM, 28.5 mm
~
o Adjust Installation Height,
page 14-407 Special Tools Required
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100
1. Remove the transfer output shaft bearing (A) with a

commercially available puller (8), bearing
separator (e), and shaft protector (D). Place a shaft
protector between the transfer output shaft and the
~TRANSFER
puller to prevent damaging the shaft.
OUTPUT SHAFT
' " TRANSFER OUTPUT

SHAFT BEARING
2. Install the new bearing (A) on the transfer output

shaft (8) using the driver (40 mm I.D.) and the press.
~.7746-.03.1O.
14-404 BACK
Oil Seal Replacement

• Driver 077 49-0010000
• Attachment, 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100
1. Remove the oil seal from the torque converter

housing.
2. Install the new oil seal flush to the torque converter

(65mm).
07749-0010000
07JAD-SH30100
BACK 14-405
Transfer Output Shaft
Transmission Housing Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the new bearing in the housing in the
• Driver 07749-0010000 direction shown .
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 077 46-0010600
1. Remove the transfer output shaft bearing (A) from

the transmission housing (8) by heating the
housing to about 212 "F (100 "C) with a heat gun (C).
Do not heat the housing more than 212 "F (100 "C).
3. Drive the new bearing until it bottoms in the

(72x75 mm).
077 49-0010000
",0
077 46-0010600
14-406 BACK
Transfer Output Shaft Installation Height Inspection/Adjustment
NOTE: If the transfer output shaft, transfer output shaft 4. If the measurement is outof standard, remove the·
bearing, transfer output shaft transmission housing 28.5 mmthrList shim and measure its thickness.
bearing, transmission housing, or.torque converter
housing were replaced, adjust the transfer output shaft 5. Select and install a new thrust shim, then recheck
installation height with the 28.5 mm thrust shim. the installation height.
1. Install the transfer output shaft (A) in the torque THRUSTSHIM, 28,5 mm
converter housing, and install the 28.5 mm thrust No. • Part Number Thickness
shim (B) on the top of the shaft. If you replace the A 29031-RDK-000 1.82mm (0.0717 in.)
28.5 mm thrust shim with a new one, use the same B 29032-RDK-000 1.84 mm (0.0724 in.)
thickness shim as the old one. C 29033-RDK-000 1.86 mm (0.0732 in.)
D 29034-RDK-000 1.88 mm (0.0740 in.)
E 29035-RDK-000 1.90 mm (0.0748 in.)
.F 29036-RDK-000. 1.92 mm (0.0756 in.)
G 29037 -RDK-OOO 1.94 mm (0.0764 in.)
H 29038-RDK-000 1.96 mm (0.0772 in.)
I 29039-RDK-000 1.98 mm (0.0780 in.)
J 29040-RDK-000 2.00 mm (0.0787 in.)
K 29041-R DK-000 2.02 mm (0.0795 in.)
L 29042-RDK-000 2.04 mm (0.0803 in.)
M 29043-RDK-000 2.06 mm (0.0811 in.)
N 29044-RDK-000 2.08 mm (0.0819 in.)
0 29045-RDK-000 2.10 mm (0.0827 in.)
p 29046-RDK-000 2.12 mm (0.0835 in.)
Q 29047-RDK-000 2.14 mm (0.0843 iii.)
R 29048-RDK-000 2.16 mm (0.0850 in.)
S 29049-RDK-000 2.18 mm (0.0858 tn.)
T 29050-RDK-000 2.20 mm (0.0866 in.)
2. Install the new gasket (C) on the torque converter U 29051-RDK-000 2.22 mm (0.0874 in.)
housing. V 29052-RDK-000 2.24 mm (0.0882 in.)
W 29053-RDK-000 2.26 mm (0.0890 in.)
3. Measure the height (D) of the transfer output shaft X 29054-RDK-000 2.28 mm (0.0898 in.)
installation between the surface (E) of the gasket y 29055-RDK-000 2.30 mm (0.0906 in.)
and the top (F) of the 28.5 mm thrust shim in at Z 29056-RDK-000 2.32 mm (0.0913 in.)
least th ree places. Use the average as the actua I AA 29057-RDK-000 2.34 mm (0.0921 in.)
height.
Standard: 46.31-46.35 mm (1.823-1.825 in.)
Transfer Output Shaft Cutaway View:
E_.-----------d
D
BACK 14-407
Transfer Assembly
Inspection
NOTE: To preventdamage to the transfer housing, Total Starting Torque Measurement

always use soft jaws or equivalent materials between
the transfer housing and a vise. 3. Rotate the transfer companion flange several times
to seat the tapered roller bearings.
Transfer Gear Backlash Measurement
4. Measure the staring torque at the companion
1. Set a dial indicator (A) onthe transfer'companion flange (A) using a torque wrench (8) and a socket
. flange (8); position dial indicator tip (C) on the (C).
direct extension ofthe bolt hole canter (0).
Standard: 2.75-4.65 N·m (28.0-47.4 kgf·cm,
24.3-41.1Ibf·in.l
2. Measure the transfer gear backlash.
Standard: 0.06-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in.l
5; -.If the measurements are out of standard,

disassemble the transfer assembly and repair it.
14..408 BACK
Disassembly
Exploded View
(\\ TRANSFER OUTPUT

~~ . ~ . SHAFT (HYPOID GEAR)
'" THRUST SHIM, 40 mm

TAPERED ROLLER BEARING "" Selective part
OUTER RACE
o \ TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
OUTER RACE
COMPANION FLANGE .
TAPERED ROLLER THRUST WASHER
BEARING
CONICAL SPRING \
WASHER
Replace.
~~"'~
~£\:: (J ~ ~TRANSFERHOUSING
'"
'" \ TAPERED ROLLER BEARING
!1
~~Y1\ OUTER RACE
OIL SEAL
o RING Replace.
BACK-UP :.;~ace.
LOCKNUT
22x1.25mm
(cont'd)
BACK 14-409
Transfer Assembly
Disassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 5. Cut the lock tab on the locknut usihg a chisel.
Companion flange holder 07XAB-0010101
1. Remove the transfer cover (A) from the transfer

housing (B).
6. Securethe transfer housing in a bench vise with

soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
materials between the transfer housing and the
vise.
7. Installthecompanion flange holder on the

companion flange, then loosen the locknut.
B
2. Remove the transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft

assembly' (C), 25 mm thrust shim (D), and tapered
roller bearing (E),
3. Remove the O-ring (G) from the cover.
4. Drain the transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil) from the

transfer housing.
8. Remove the companion flange holder.
14-410 BACK
9. Remove the, locknut .(A)i conical spring washer (B), 11. Remove the oil seal (A) and tapered roller bearing
back-up ring (C), O-ring (D), and companion flange (B) from the transfer housing.
(E) from the transfer output shaft (hypoidgear) (F).
10. Remove the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (A)

from the transfer housing (B), then remove the
thrust washer (C) and transfer spacer (D) from the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear).
BACK 14-411
Transfer Assembly
Transfer Hypoid Drive Gear Bearing Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the new bearing on the transfer hypoid drive
• Driver 07749-0010000 , gear using the driver, the attachment (40 x 50 mm),
• Attachment, 42 x 47 mm 07746-0010300 and the press.
• Attachment, 40 x 50 mm 07LAD-PW50601
1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) from the

07749~1
transfer hypoid drive gear (8) using the driver, the
attachment (42 x 47 mm), bearing separator (C) and
the press.
~077"""_
14-412 BACK
Transfer Output Shaft (Hypoid Gear) Bearing Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Install the 40 mm thrust shim (A) over the transfer
Driver, 40 mm I.D. 07746-0030100 output shaft (hypoid gear).
1. Remove the tapered roller bearing (A) from the

transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (8) with a
bearing separator (e) and the press. Place a shaft
protector (D) between the transfer output shaft and
the press to prevent damaging the shaft.
3. Install the tapered roller bearing over the transfer

output shaft (hypoid gear) using the driver (40 mm
I.D.) and the press.
BACK 14-413
Transfer Assembly
Transfer Housing Tapered Roller Bearing Outer Race Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the press-fitted bearing.outer race (A) from
• Driver 07749-0010000 the transfer housing (B) by heating the housing to
• Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07746-0010400 about 212 "F (100 "C) with a heat gun (C). Do not
• Attachment, 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100 heatthe housing more than 212 "F (100 "C).
• Tapered bearing race installer A 07MAF-SP0011A
• Installer shaft 07MAF-SP0013A
NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one whenever

the outer race is replaced.
1. Remove the 52 mm bearing outer race (A), 75 mm

outer race (B), and 65 mm outer race (C) from the
transfer housing (D).
NOTE: Some bearing outer races (52 mm, 65 mm,

and 75 mm) are press-fitted in the housing and
must be removed by heating the housing.
3. Install the 52 mm bearing outer race (A) until it

bottoms in the transfer housing using the driver
and the attachment (52 x 55 mm).
~'''OO
14-414 BACK
4. Install the 75 mm bearing outer race (A) and 65 mm
outer race (8) in the transfer housing (C), set the
attachment (65 mm) and the tapered bearing race
installer A over the races, and install the installer
shaft through the attachment and the installer.
07 JAD·SH301 00
\
07MAF·SP0013A
5. Tighten the installer shaft nut (D) to install the races

(A) (8) into the transfer housing (C) securely.
B A
D
\
07 JAD·SH301 00
07MAF·SP0013A
BACK 14-415
Transfer Assembly
Transfer Cover Tapered Roller Bearing Outer Race Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Install the 80 mm thrust shim (A) and bearing outer
• Driver 07749-0010000 race (8) in the transfer cover (C) .
• Attachment, 78 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
NOTE: Replace the bearing with a new one whenever

the outer race is replaced.
1. Remove the bearing outer race (A) and 80 mm

thrust shim (8) from the transfer cover (C). If the
bearing outer race is press-fitted, remove the outer
race by heating the cover to about 212 "F (100 "C)
with a heat gun (D). Do not heat the cover more
than 212 "F (100 "C).
3. Drive the outer race securely in the cover using the

driver and the attachment (78 x 80 mm) so there is
no clearance between the outer race, thrust shim,
and cover.
f- 07749-00'000'
14-416 BACK
Transfer Cover Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Install the new oil seal (A) in the transfer cover (8)
• Driver 07749-0010000 in height (C) of 0-1 mm (0-0.04 in.) above the
• Attachment, 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100 cover surface using the driver and the attachment
(65 mm).
1. Remove the oil seal from the transfer cover.
BACK 14-417
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly

EXAMPLE
o Driver, 40 mm 1.0. 07746"0030100, ..
C: EXISTING 40 mm X: REPLACEMENT 40 mm
o Driver 07749-0010000 THRUST SHIM THRUST SHIM
o Attachment, 65 mm 07JAD-SH30100 Thickness: C=1.05 mm Thickness: X=? ? mm
o Companion flange holder 07XAB-0010101
o Attachment, 72 x 80 mm 07NAD-PX40100
B
NOTE:
o While reassembling the transfer assembly:
- Check and adjust the transfer gear tooth contact.

- Measure and adjust the transfer gear backlash.
- Check and adjust the tapered roller bearing starting A: EXISTING TRANSFER B: REPLACEMENT
torque. . OUTPUT SHAFT TRANSFER
o Coat all parts with transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil)
(HYPOID GEAR) OUTPUT SHAFT
Number: A=+2 (HYPOID GEAR)
during reassembly. - Number: B=-1
A B
o Replace the tapered roller bearing and the bearing X= 100 - 100 +C
outer race as a set if either part is replaced. 2 -1
o Replace the transfer hypoid drive gear and the = 100 - 100 +1.05
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) as a set if either =0.02+0.01+1.05=1.08 (mm)
part is replaced. . Select No. M 40 mm thrust shim of 1.08 mm (0.043 in.).
1. Select the 40 mm thrust shim if the transfer output THRUST SHIM, 40 mm

shaft (hypoid gear) is replaced. Calculate the Shim Part Number Thickness
thickness of the 40 mm thrust shim using the No.
formula below, and select the shim from the A 29361-RDK-000 0.72 mm (0.028 in.)
following table. B 29362-RDK-000 0.75 mm (0.030 in.)
C 29363-RDK-000 0.78 mm (0.031 in.)
FORMULA: 1~0 -1~0 +C = x 0 29364-RDK-000 0.81 mm (0.032 in.)
E 29365-RDK-000 0.84 mm (0.033 in.)
A: Number on the existing transfer output F 29366-RDK-000 0.87 mm (0.034 in.)
shaft (hypoid gear)
G 29367-RDK-000 0.90 mm (0.035 in.)
B: Number on the replacement transfer output
shaft (hypoid gear) H 29368-RDK-000 0.93 mm (0.037 in.)
C: Thickness of the existing 40 mm thrust shim I 29369-RDK-000 0.96 mm (0.038 in.)
X: Thickness needed for the replacement 40 mm J 29370-RDK-000 0.99 mm (0.039 in.)
thrust shim K 29371-RDK-000 1.02 mm (0.040 in.)
NOTE: The number on the transfer output L 29372-RDK-000 1.05 mm (0.041 in.)
shaft (hypoid gear) is shown in 1/100 mm. M 29373-RDK-000 1.08 mm (0.043 in.)
N 29374-RDK-000 . 1.11 mm (0.044 in.)
0 29375-RDK-000 1.14 mm (0.045 in.)
2. Select the 40 mm thrust shim if the tapered roller

bearing on the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) is
replaced. Measure the thickness of the replacement
bearing and the existing bearing, and calculate the
difference of the bearing thickness. Adjust the
thickness of the existing 40 mm thrust shim by the
amount of difference in bearing thickness, and
selectthe replacement 40 mm thrust shim.
14-41-8 BACK
3. Install the 40 mm thrust shim (A) on the transfer 6.· Install the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (A) in
output shaft (hypoid gear) (8), then install the the transfer housing (8). Do not install the thrust
tapered roller bearing (C) using the driver (40 mm washers and transfer spacer on the transfer output
I.D.) and the press. shaft.
077 46-00301 00
~-
B 7. Install the companion flange (A), conical spring

washer (8) in the direction shown, and locknut (C)
4. Place the tapered roller bearing on the bearing on the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) (D). Do
outer race ofthe companion flange side ofthe not install the O-ring and back-up ring on the
transfer housing. transfer output shaft.
5. Install the new oil seal on the transfer housing

using the driver, the attachment (65 mm), and the
press. A
t. 07749-0010000
/ C \
07 JAD-SH301 00
(cont'd)
BACK 14-419
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
8. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B) 10. Apply Prussian Blue to both side ofthe transfer
with soft jaws, then install the companion flange hypoid drive gear teeth lightly and evenly.
holder on the companion flange. To prevent
damage to the transfer housing, always use soft 11. Install the tapered roller bearing (A), 25 mm thrust
jaws or equivalent materials between the transfer shim (B), and transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft
housing and the vise. assembly (C) in the transfer housing (D).
9. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting

torque of the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) so
the starting torque is within 1.15-1.71 N·m (11.7-
17.4 kgf·cm, 10.2-15.1Ibf·in.).
NOTE: Do not stake the locknut in this step.
Starting Torque:
1.15-1.71 N·m
(11.7-17.4 kgf·cm, 10.2-15.1Ibf·in.)
A
12. Install the transfer cover (E) and the bolts, and
tighten the bolts. Do not install the O-ring on the
transfer cover.
13. Rotate the companion flange several times to seat

the tapered roller bearings.
14-420 BACK
14. Set a dial indicator (A) on the transfer companion 17. Ifthe measurement ofthe backlash is out of the
flange (B); position dial indicator tip (C) on the standard, adjust the transfer gear backlash with the
direct extension of the bolt hole center (D). 40 mm thrust shim and recheck. Do not use more
than two 40 mm thrust shims to adjust the transfer
gear backlash.
18. Ifthe transfer gear tooth contact is incorrect, adjust

the transfer gear tooth contact with the 25 mm or
40 mm thrust shim. Do not use more than two
shims of each thrust shim to adjust the tooth
contact. .
• Toe Contact
Use a thinner 40 mm thrust shim to move the
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) away from the
transfer hypoid drive gear. Because this
movement causes the transfer gear backlash to
change, movethe transfer hypoid drive gear
15. Measure the transfer gear backlash. toward the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) to
adjust the transfer gear backlash as follows:
Standard: 0.06-0.16 mm (0.002-0.006 in.) - Reduce the thickness of the 25 mm thrust shim.
-Increase the thickness of the 80 mm thrust
16. Remove the transfer cover, transfer hypoid drive shim by amount of reduce thickness of the
gear/shaft assembly, and check the transfer hypoid 25 mm thrust shim.
drive gear tooth contact pattern. • Heel Contact
Use a thicker 40 mm thrust shim to move the
CORRECT TOOTH CONTACT PATTERN
transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) toward the
transfer hypoid. drive gear. Because this
movement causes the transfer backlash to
change, move the transfer hypoid drive gear
away from the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)
INCORRECT TOOTH CONTACT PATTERN to adjust the transfer gear backlash as follows:
- Increase the thickness of the 25 mm thrust
~ TOE CONTACT shim.
- Reduce the thickness of the 80 mm thrust shim
by the amount of increase thickness of the
25 mm thrust shim.
• Flank Contact
~ HEEL CONTACT Use a thicker 25 mm thrust shim to move the

transfer hypoid drive gear away from the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear).
Flank contact must be adjusted within the limits
of the transfer gear backlash. If the backlash
exceeds the limits, adjust as described under
FLANK CONTACT Heel Contact.
• Face Contact
Use a thinner 25 mm thrust shim to move the
transfer hypoid drive gear toward the transfer
output shaft (hypoid gear).
~ FACE CONTACT Face contact must be adjusted within the limits of
the transfer gear backlash. If the backlash
exceeds the limits, adjust as described under Toe
Contact.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-421
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
THRUST SHIM, 25 mm 20. Secure the transfer housin'g (A) in a bench vise (B)
Shim Part Number Thickness with softjaws, then install the. companion flange
No. holder on the companion flange. To prevent
1.70 . 29411-P1C-OOO 1.70 mm (0.067 in.) damage to the transfer housing, always use soft
1.73 29412-P1 C-OOO 1.73 mm (0.068 in.) jaws or equivalent materials between the transfer
1.76 29413-P1 C-OOO 1.76 mm (0.069 in.) housing and the vise.
1.79 29414-PlC-OOO 1.79 mm (0.070 in.)
1.82 29415-P,1 C.,.OOO 1.82 mm (0.072 in.)
1.85 29416-P1 C-OOO 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
1.88 29417 -P1 C-OOO 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
1.91 29418-P1 C-OOO 1.91 mm (0.075 in.)
1.94 29419-P1 C-OOO 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
1.97 29420-P1 C-OOO 1.97 mm (0.078 in.)
2.00 29421 "P1C-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
2.03 29422-P1 C-OOO 2.03 mm (0.080 in.)
2.06 29423-P1 C-OOO 2.06 mm (0.081 in.)
2.09 29424-P1 C-OOO 2.09 mm (0.082 in.)
2.12 29425-Pl C-OOO 2.12 mm (0.083 in.)
2.15 29426-P1 C-OOO 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
2.18 29427-Pl C-OOO 2.18 mm (0.086 in.)
2.21 29428-P1 CeOOO 2.21 mm (0.087 in.)
2.24 29429-P1 C-OOO 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
19. Remove the transfer cover (A), transfer hypoid 21. Remove the locknut (A), conical spring washer (B),
drive gear/shaft assembly (B), 25 mm thrust shim and companion flange (C) from the transfer output
(C), and tapered roller bearing (D) from the transfer shaft (hypoid gear) (D).
housing (E) after adjusting the transfer gear
backlash or transfer gear tooth contact.
A \
22. Remove the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear)

from the transfer housing.
14-422 BACK
23. Install the thrust wash.er (A) and the new transfer 26. Secure the·transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
spacer (B) on the transfer output shaft (hypoid. with soft jaws, then install the companion flange
gear) (C) in the direction shown,. and install them in holder on the companion flange. To prevent
the transfer housing (D). damage to the transfer housing, always use soft
jaws or equivalent materials between the transfer
housing and the vise.
A
24. Coat the threads of the locknut and transfer output

shaft (hypoid gear) with transfer fluid (hypoid gear
oil).
27. Tighten the locknut while measuring the starting
25. Install the companion flange (A), new O-ring (B), torque of the transfer output shaft (hypoid gear) so
back-up ring (C), new conical spring washer (D), the starting torque is within 1.15-1.71 N·m (11.7-
and new locknut (E) on the transfer output shaft 17.4 kgf·cm, 10.2-15.1Ibf.in.).
(hypoid gear) (F). Install the conical spring washer
in the direction shown. Tightening Torque:
108-294N·m
(11.0-30.0 kgf·m, 79.6-217Ibf·ft)
Starting Torque:
1.15-1.71 N·m
(11.7-17.4 kgf·cm, 10.2-15.1Ibf·in.)
NOTE:
• Rotate the companion flange several times to
seat the tapered roller bearings, then measure
the starting torque.
• Ifthe starting torque exceeds 1.71 N·m
(17.4 kgf·cm, 15.1 Ibf·in.), replace the transfer
spacer and reassemble the parts. Do not adjust
the torque with the locknut loose.
• If the tightening torque exceeds 294 N·m
(30.0 kgf·m, 217 Ibf·ft), replace the transfer spacer
D and reassemble the parts.
28. Remove the companion flange holder.
(cont'd)
BACK 14-423
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
29. Stake the locknut to a depth (A) of 0.7-1.2 mm 32. Secure the transfer housing (A) in a bench vise (B)
(0.03-0.05 in.) using a 3.5 mm punch (B). with soft jaws. To prevent damage to the transfer
housing, always use soft jaws or equivalent
materials between the transfer housing and the
vise.
30. Install the tapered roller bearing (A), 25 mm thrust

shim (B), and transfer hypoid drive gear/shaft
assembly (C) in the transfer housing (D).
33. Rotate the transfer companion flange (C) several
times to seat the tapered roller bearings.
34. Measure the starting torque at the companion

flange using a torque wrench (D);and a socket (.E).
Total Starting Torque:

2.75-4.65 N·m
(28.0-47.4 kgf·cm, 24.3-41.1 Ibf·in.)
31. Temporally install the transfer cover (E) without the

O-ring. Install and tighten the bolts.
14-424 BACK
35. Remove the transfer cover. 37. Measure the thickness of removed 80 mrri thrust
shim, and select the new 80 mm shim.
bearing outer race (A) and 80 mm thrust shim (B) THRUST SHIM , 80 mm '
from the transfer cover (e). If the bearing outer race Shim Part Number Thickness
is press-fitted, remove the bearing outer race by No.
heating the cover to about 212 "F (100 'C) with a A 41401-RDK-000 1.52 mm (0.060 in.)
heat gun (D). Do not heat the cover more than B 41402-RDK-000 1.55 mm (0.061 in.)
212"F (100 'C). e 41403-RDK-000 1.58 mm (0.062 in.)
D 41404-RDK-000 1.61 mm (0.063 in.)
If the measurement is within the standard, go to E 4140&-RDK-000 1.64 mm (0.065 in.)
step 41. F 41406-RDK-000 1.67 mm (0.066 in.)
G 41407-RDK-000 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
H 4,1408-RDK-000 1.73 mm (0.068 in.)
I 41409-RDK-000 1.76 mm (0.069 in.)
J 41410-RDK-000 1.79 mm (0.070 in.)
K 41411-RDK-000 1.82 mm (0.072 in.)
L 41412-RDK-000 1.85 mm (0.073 in.)
M 41413-RDK-000 1.88 mm (0.074 in.)
N 41414-RDK-000 1.91 mm (0.075 in.)
0 41415-RDK-000 1.94 mm (0.076 in.)
p 41416-RDK-000 1.97 mm (0.078 in.)
Q 41417-RDK-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
R 41418-RDK-000 2.03 mm (0.080 in.)
S 41419-RDK-000 2.06 mm (0.081 in.)
T 41420-RDK-OOO 2.09 mm (0.082 in.)
U 41421-RDK-000 2.12 mm (0.083 in.)
V 41422-RDK-000 2.15 mm (0.085 in.)
W 41423-RDK-000 2.18 mm (0.086 in.)
X 41424-RDK-000 2.21 mm (0.087 in.)
y 41425-RDK-000 2.24 mm (0.088 in.)
Z 41426-RDK-000 2.27 mm (0.089 in.)
AA 41427-RDK-000 2.30 mm (0.091 in.)
AB 41428-RDK-000 2.33 mm (0.092 in.)
Ae 41429-RDK-000 2.36 mm (0.093 in.)
AD 41430-RDK-000 2.39 mm (0.094 in.)
AE 41431-RDK-000 2.42 mm (0.095 in.)
AF 41432-RDK-000 2.45 mm (0.096 in.)
'AG 41433-RDK-000 2.48 mm (0.098 in.)
AH 41434-RDK-000 2.51 mm (0.099 in.)
AI 41435-RDK-OOO' 2.54 mm (0.100 in.)
AJ 41436-RDK-OOO 2.57 mm (0.101 in.)
AK 41437 -RDK-OOO 2.60 mm(0.102 in.)
AL 41438-RDK-000 2.63 mm (0.104 in.)
AM 41439-RDK-000 2.66 mm (0.105 in.)
(cont'd)
BACK 1,4-425
Transfer Assembly
Reassembly (cont'd)
38. Install the 80 mm trust shim (A) and bearing outer 41. Install the new O-ring (A) on the transfer cover (8),
race (8) in the transfer cover (C). If you heated the then install the cover on the transfer housing (C).
cover, let it cool to room temperature before
installing the thrust shim.
39. Drive the outer race securely in the cover using the
driver and the attachment (72 x 80 mm) so the~e is
. no clearance between the outer race, thrust shim,
and cover.
.. 07749-0010000
.~ 42. Remove the filler plug (A), then refill the transfer
assembly with transfer fluid (hypoid gear oil). Use a
SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity hypoid gear oil,
API ciassifiedGL4 or GL5 only.
Viscosity
SAE 90: Above 0 "F (-18 'C)
SAE 80W-90: Below 0 "F (-18 'C)
Hypoid Gear Oil Capacity: 0.45 L (0.48 US qt)
40. After replacing the 80 mm thrust shim, recheck and

make sure that the total starting torque is within the
specification.
B
43. Install the filler plug with a new sealing washer (8).
14~426 BACK
Rear Differential
Rear Differential
Special Tools ................................................................. 15-2
General Troubleshooting Information ....................... 15-4
DTC Troubleshooting Index ........................................ 15-8
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ..... ,......................... 15-9
System Description ...................................................... 15-10
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 15-20
DTC Troubleshooting ................................................... 15-22
Symptom Troubleshooting ......................................... 15-66
SH-AWD Function Test ................................................ 15-68
Rear Differential Fluid
Inspection and Replacement ................................... 15-69
Rear Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor
Replacement ...............................................,.............. 15-70
SH-AWD Control Unit Replacement ............ ~ .............. '15-71
SH-AWD Relay Replacement ...................................... 15-71
Rear Differential Mount Replacement ........................ 15-72
Rear Differential Removal ...................................... ~ ..... 15-73
Rear Differential Installation ........................................ 15-74
Rear Differential Disassembly/Reassembly ............... 15-76
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement ............................. 15-77
Side Case Oil Seal Replacement ................................. 15-85
Center Case Replacement ............................................ 15-86
Side Case Replacement ............................................... 15-88
BACK
Rear Differential
Special Tools

CD 070AD-STK0110 Oil Seal Driver A 1
® 070AD-STK0120 Oil Seal Driver B 1
® 070AD-STKO 130 Oil Seal Driver C 1
CD 070AJ-SJAA101 Adapter, Torque Wrench 1
® 07SAZ-001000A Backprobe set 2
@ 07XAB-001A101 Companion Flange Holder 1
(J) 07 AAD-S3VAOOO Driveshaft Remover 1
® 07747-0010100 Fork Seal Driver Weight 1
I CD ®
Q B
® @
(J) ®
15-2 BACK
VEHICLE STABILITY SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT

ASSIST (VSA) Replacement, page 15-71
MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
POWERTRAINCONTROL REAR DIFFERENTIAL

MODULE (PCM) FLUID TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
Replacement,
page 15-70
SH-AWD RELAY
Test, page 22-64
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
Inspection and Replacement,
page 15-69
REAR DIFFERENTIAL ASSEMBLY

Removal, page 15-73
Disassembly/Reassembly, page 15-76
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement, page 15-77
Side Case Oil Seal Replacement, page 15-85
Center Case Replacement, page 15-86
Side Case Replacement, page 15-88
BACK 15-3
Rear Differential
SH-AWD Indicator
The SH-AWD indicator comes on under certain conditions even if the AWD system is working normally. Here are some
examples:
• When you use high-powered wireless equipment such as a CB or Ham radio in the vehicle.
• When you keep spinning the rear wheels while the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, snow, etc.
• When the battery voltage suddenly drops below 10 volt.
After the SH-AWD indicator comes on, it stays on until you turn the ignition switch off.
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
• The SH-AWD control unit can memorize up to eight different DTCs. The system displays the DTCs by blinking the
SH-AWD indicator. Multiple DTCs are displayed in the order they occured, beginning with the most recent.
• If the same DTC is detected more than once, the most recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, when the
same problem is detected more than once, it is memorized as a single DTC.
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM (non-volatile memory). Therefore, the memorized DTCs are not cleared
when the battery is disconnected or the SH-AWD control unit is disconnected.
• If there is a problem in the central processing unit (CPU) of the SH-AWD control unit, the SH-AWD indicator comes
on, but no DTC is memorized.
Self-diagnosis
When a problem is detected by self-diagnosis, the system does the following:
• Turns the SH-AWD indicator on.

• Memorizes the DTC.
• Stops AWD control and puts the vehicle back in FWD.
• Reduces engine torque to suit the driving conditions when the abnormality was detected.
15-4 BACK
How to Check for Diagnostic Trouble Codes How to Troubleshoot Circuits at the SH-AWD
(DTCsl Control Unit
When the SH-AWO control unit senses an abnormality Special Tools Required
in the input or output systems, the SH-AWO indicator in Backprobe set 07SAZ-001000A (two required)
the gauge assembly will usually come on, anq the
malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), theD5 indicator, and/ 1. Remove the rear left side trim panel cover (A).
or the ABS indicator may also come on.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HOS to

the data link connector (OLC) (A) behind the driver's
dashboard lower cover.
2. Loosen the SH-AWO control unit mounting bolts (A),

then remove the SH-AWO control unit (B).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and follow the E

prompts on the HOS to display the OTC(s) on the
screen. After determining the OTC(s), refer to the
OTC Troubleshooting.
NOTE: See the HOS help menu for specific

instruction.
3. Ifthere are fuel and emission OTCs, AfT OTCs, and

VSA system OTC's at the same time, troubleshoot
the fuel and emission OTCs first. 3. Inspect the circuit on the SH-AWO control unit
according to the OTC Troubleshooting using the
4. After recording the OTCs, clear all OTCs. special tools and a digital multimeter or an analog
circuit tester.
5. Test-drive the vehicle for several minutes in AWO
mode, and check for OTCs. If the OTC returns, refer 4. Connect the backprobe adapters (C) to the stacking
to the OTC Troubleshooting. If the OTC does not patch cords (0), and connect the cords to the
return, there was an intermittent problem within multimeter or an analog circuit tester (E). Using the
the circuit. Make sure all connectors and terminals wire insulator as a guide for the contoured-tip of
in the circuit are tight. the backprobe adapter, gently slide the tip into the
connector from the wire side until it comes in
contact with the terminal end of the wires.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-5
Rear Differential
Updating the SH-AWD Control Unit 1. Select the update program, and follow the screen
prompts to update the SH-AWD control unit.
• Honda diagnostic system (HDS) 2. If the software in the SH-AWD control unit is the
• Honda interface module (HIM) latest, disconnect the HDS/HIM from the DLe, and
• HDS pocket tester go back to the procedure that you were doing. If the
software in the SH-AWD control unit is not the
NOTE: latest, follow the instructions on the screen.
• Use this procedure when you need to update the
SH-AWD control unit in a troubleshooting procedure. 3. Do the SH-AWD control unit initialization.
• Make sure the HDS/HIM has the latest software
version. 4. Do the SH-AWD differential clutch torque
• Before you update the SH-AWD control unit, make memorization.
sure the battery in the vehicle is fully charged.
• Never turn the ignition switch OFF during the update. 5. Do the yaw rate-lateral acceleration neutral
If there is a problem with the update, leave the position memorization.
ignition switch ON.
• To prevent SH-AWD control unit damage, do not
operate anything electrical (headlights, audio system,
brakes, Ale, power windows, moonroof (if equipped),
door locks, etc.) during the update.
• To ensure the latest program is installed, do an
SH-AWD control unit update whenever the SH-AWD
control unit is substituted or replaced.
• You cannot update an SH-AWD control unit with a
program it already has. It will only accept a new
program.
• If you need to diagnose the Honda interface module
(HIM) because the HIM's red (# 3) lamp came on or
was flashed during the update, leave the ignition
switch in the ON (II) position when you disconnect the
HIM from the data link connector (DLe). This will
prevent SH-AWD control unit damage.
15-6 BACK
SH-AWD Differential Clutch Torque 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to
Memorization the 16P DLe (A) behind the driver's dashboard
lower cover.
Whenever the right or left clutch side case is replaced,
the differential clutch torque memorization must be
done.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to

the 16P DLe (A) behind the driver's dashboard
lower cover.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and follow the

prompts on the HDS screen.
NOTE: See the HDS help menu for specific

instructions.
A
SH-AWD Control Unit Initialization
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and follow the Whenever the SH-AWD control unit is replaced, it must
prompts on the HDS screen. initialized.
NOTE: See the HDS help menu for specific 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to
instructions. the 16P DLe (A) behind the driver's dashboard
lower cover.
Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration Neutral
Position Memorization
Whenever the yaw rate sensor or the lateral

acceleration sensor is replaced, its neutral position
memorization must be done.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and follow the

prompts on the HDS screen.
NOTE: See the HDS help menu for specific

instructions.
BACK 15-7
Rear Differential
OTe Troubleshooting Index
DTC' SH-AWD Detection Item Page

Indicator
Light
12-1 ON Lateral Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-22)
12-2 ON Lateral Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (see.Q.aJte 15-22)
12-3 ON Lateral Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-22)
16-3 ON SteerinQ AnQle Sensor Neutral Position Incorrect (see.Q."!Re 15-22)
33-2 ON Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-23)
33-3 ON Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction (see.Q."!Re 15-23)
41-1 ON Lost of Communication with PCM (see page 15-24)
41-2 ON Lost of Communication with VSA Modulator-Control Unit (see.Q.aJte 15-25)
41-4 ON Lost of Communication with AfT Control Unit (see page 15-27)
41-5 ON Lost of Communication with Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration (see page 15-28)
Sensor
41-6 ON Lost of Communication with Steering Angle Sensor (see.Q.aile 15-30)
42-1 ON Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor (Short to Power) (see.Q."!Re 15-31)
42-2 ON Differential Fluid Tem.Q.erature Sensor (Open/GND Short) (see.Q.cme 15-32)
43-1 ON Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-35)
44-11 ON SH-AWD Control Unit (see J!age 15-36)
44-12 ON SH-AWD Relay Stuck ON . (see.Q.~e 15-37)
44-32 ON SH-AWD Control Unit Power Supply Stuck ON (see page 15-38)
44-41 ON SH-AWD Control Unit Power Su~ Stuck OFF (see.Q.~e 15-38)
44-50 ON SH-AWD Control Unit Power Supply Voltage Low (see page 15-39)
49-1 ON SH-AWD Control Unit (PG Line O.Q.en) (see~l:IRe 15-41)
52-3 ON Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Current Malfunction (see page 15-42)
53-1 ON LeftClutch Electromagnetic Coil Malfunction (see.Q.~e 15-45)
53-2 ON Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil (Short) (see page 15-47)
53-3 ON Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Malfunction (see.Q."!Re 15-45)
56-3 ON Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Current Malfunction (see page 15-49)
57-1 ON Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil Malfunction (see.Q.l:IRe 15-52)
57-2 ON Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil (Short) (see page 15-54)
57-3 ON RiQht Clutch Electroml:lRnetic Coil Malfunction (see.Q.l:IRe 15-52)
76-1 ON Rear Differential Fluid Overheats (see page 15-56)
77-1 ON Communication Error with the Power Control Module (see.Q.l:IRe 15-57)
77-2 ON Communication Error with the VSA Modulator-Control Unit (see page 15~57)
77-4 ON Communication Error with the Automatic-Transmission Control (see page 15-58)
Unit
77-5 ON Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration Sensor Malfunction (see J!"!Re 15-59)
77-6 ON Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction (seepage 15-59)
78-xx ON SH-AWD Control Unit Self-diagnostic Malfunction (see J!"!Re 15-60)
81-1 ON Left Search Coil Sensor Malfunction (see page 15-60)
82-1 ON Right Search Coil Sensor Malfunction (seeJ!ajte 15-63)
91-1 ON SH-AWD Control Unit Programming Error (see page 15-65)
*: DTCs are indicated by the SH-AWD indicator when the 16P data link connector (DLC) is connected to the HDS.
15-8 BACK
NOTE: Most problems in the unit are to be diagnosed by identifying noises from the gears or bearings. Care should be'
taken during diagnosis not to confuse differential noises with those from other drivetrain components.
Symptom Diagnostic Procedure Also check for
The SH-AWD indicator Symptom troubleshooting (see page 15-66).

does not go off, and no
DTCs are stored
The SH-AWD indicator Symptom troubleshooting (see page 15-67).

does not come on
Gear or bearing noises o Fluid level too low. o Add fluid

o Incorrect or worn out fluid. o Drain and fill the differential
o Damaged or chipped gears. o Replace the differential
o Incorrect side case clearance. carrier assembly
o Incorrect tire size (rolling circumference). o Side case clearance
adjustment
Rear differential o Fluid level too low. o Add fluid

overheats o Incorrect fluid type. o Drain and fill the differential
o Incorrect tire size (rolling circumference).
Rear differential leaks o Fluid level too high. o lower to proper level
fluid o Clogged breather hose. o Clean or replace
o Worn or damaged oil seal. o Replace the oil seal
o Damaged sealing washer. o Replace the sealing washer
o Loose mounting bolts or inadequate sealing. o Recheck torque or apply
sealant
Rear differential o Fluid level too low. o Add fluid

screeches, whines, o Incorrect or worn out fluid. o Drain and fill the differential
moans, or squeaks o Incorrect tire rolling circumference. o Adjust tire pressure or
o Damaged oil pump. replace tires
o Replace the differential
carrier assembly
Noise during acceleration, o Incorrect side case clearance. o Side case clearance
or when accelerating o Incorrect pre-load. adjustment
from a full stop o Incorrect of backlash of hypoid gear. o Pre-load adjustment
o Damaged or chipped gears. o Replace the differential
o Incorrect tire size (rolling circumference). carrier assembly
o Replace the differential
carrier assembly
HDS does not Troubleshooting the DLC circuit (see page 11-229).
communicate with the
SH-AWD control unit or
the vehicle
BACK 15-9
Rear Differential
System Description
SH-AWD System
Outline
This vehicle is equipped with a Super Handling All-wheel Drive (SH-AWD) rear differential system. This system uses
electromagnetic clutches and the SH-AWD control unit to control front to rear torque distribution and independent left
to right rear torque distribution. This allows the system to function as a limited slip differential and as a torque
distribution system to improve standing start performance, straight-line stability, climbing, and cornering ability.
SH-AWD features include

• Independent torque distribution to the front and rear wheels, and to the left and right wheels for neutral handling
when cornering.
• Controls differential (inside/outside) wheel speed in a turn to increase cornering stability.
• Limited slip differential function for better acceleration.
Operation
In a normal turn the radius ofthe front wheels is shorter than the radius that the rear wheels travel. If the front and rear
wheels are driven at the same speed, full power is not transmitted. The SH-AWD system monitors the speed of the
front wheels and increases the speed of the outside rear wheel proportionally around the larger radius. This improves
stability and steering response. On slippery surfaces this provides the improved traction of a 4-wheel drive system.
FRONT WHEEL RADIUS
TURNING MOMENT
DIRECT ELECTROMAGNETIC
CLUTCH SYSTEM
~ REAR WHEEL RADIUS
15-10 BACK
Construction
1. The differential assembly has a conventional hypoid ring and pinion gear set.
2. The direct electromagnetic clutch system consists of the coils, the planetary gear sets, and the multi-plate clutches
that are installed in the side cases on either side ofthe differential carrier. When driving straight ahead, both rear
wheels rotate at the same speed.- When turning, current is applied tothe appropriate outside wheel main coil to
engage the clutch. The amount of current passed through the electromagnetic clutch controls the amount of
driving force to the outside wheel.
PLANETARY GEAR
RIGHT SIDE COIL
HYPOID RING GEAR
(cont'd)
BACK 15-11
· ""il:II'" I::
RearD:ifferential
SH-AWD 4WD Control System
Control System
The SH-AWD control system consists of a SH-AWD control unit, the PCM, the VSA modulator-control unit, along with
various sensors and switches that detect the steering angle, the lateral G force, the yaw, and the vehicle speed. A fluid
temperature sensor is located on in the rear differential. The control units exchange information via the CAN
communication lines. TheSH-AWDcontrol unit hasa self-diagnostic function. If a malfunction is detected, the
SH-AWD control unit turns on the'SH-AWDindicator in the gauge assembly and the system goes into fail-safe mode.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle disables the SH-AWD differential. The vehicle defaults to front wheel drive,
reduces engine torque to suit the driving conditions.
Driving Force Control

The driving force control distributes the power based onthe driver's inputs. It distributes torque to the front and rear
wheels based on the throttle opening and the available engine torque output. When turning, torque is applied to the
rear wheels independently based on the lateral G input and the direction ofthe turn. This generates an inward yaw
movement to help steer the vehicle around the turn.
Steering angle sensor 1-----41>--""---
Yaw rate·lateral
acceleration sensor
Left clutch
Right clutch
15-12 BACK
Electromagnetic Clutch System
Construction
The electromagnetic clutch system is-incorporated into the side case assemblies on both sides of the differential case.
The system consists ofthe multi-plate clutches, the planetary gears, the pressure guides, the solenoid coil assembly
(the search coil and the main coil), the armature assembly (the slider and the armature), and the yoke.
Components Purpose
Multi-plate clutches Convert thrust into torque, absorb wheel speed differences
Planetary gears Magnify and convey clutch torque
Pressure guides ·ReduceflLlctuations iii pressure
Search coils Detect magnetic flux
Main coils Generates magnetic fields
Slider Centers the armature
Armature Generates magnetic flux to generate thrust
Yoke Generates magnetic flux to clamping force
PRESSURE GUIDE
MAIN COIL
YOKE
ARMATURE
(cont'd)
BACK 15-13
Etear\' D,ifferential
Operation
The SH-AWD control unit receives inputs from the PCM and the VSA modulator-control unit on the driving conditions
via the CAN. The SH-AWD control unit sends signals to the main coils, which engage the electromagnetic clutches that
connect the planetary gear set. This increases the torque applied to the rear wheels. The amount of current sent to the
clutch is continuously varied as. driving conditions change.
t
FRONT
(Propeller shaft)
MULTI·PLATE CLUTCHES
PRESSURE GUIDE
MAIN COIL
ARMATURE
YOKE
WHEN THERE IS NO THRUST WHEN THRUST IS GENERATED
15-1:4 BACK
Search Coil Detection System
As the clutch disks wear, the air gap between the pressure guides and the multi-plate clutches increases. The increase
in air gap changes the magnetic field generated by the main coil and the yoke. The search coil detects these changes
in the magnetic field. The SH-AWD control unit uses predetermined maps to compensate for the changes to maintain
precise control and smooth clutch engagement.
THRUST
ARMATURE
YOKE
(cont'd)
BACK 15-15
Rear Differential
Electric Control System
SH·AWD Control Unit Electrical Connections·
BAmRY
30A
+
SH-AWDCONTROLUNIT
IGNmON SWITCH.
1G1 1G1
FSR
,
,,,
i - --
: SH-AWD
,, : ~LAV
YAW RATE-LATERAL ,- .,
ACCafJIAT10N SENSOR
PWR
GAUGE
CONTROL
~I' --~-t-O-----r--,--,
MODUl! REAR DIFFERENTIAL
!sii=AiWIt----I~
~ n,.., RCH
r-1",:__~-o-L~___~-.
VSA
MODULATOR
CONTROL La.
UNIT
CANL
CANH
TOH
TOL
RFH
RR.
LA.
DATA
UNK K-UNE
CONNECTOR
WEN
PG
LGl
LG2
15-16 BACK
SH-AWD Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
The SH-AWD control unit terminal voltages and the measuring conditions for the SH-AWD control system.·
SH·AWD Control Unit Connector Terminal Locations
Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring

number color Conditions/Terminal Voltage
Al LTGRN z LFH Detects left search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(positive)
A3 GRN ..
RFH Detects right search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(positive)
A5 LTBLU K-UNE Communication line SH-AWD With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V or battery .
control unit-to-DLC voltage
A7 LTGRN IG1 Power supply for SH-AWD With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
control unit
A8 WHT TOL Detects differential fluid With ignition switch ON (II): about 0.2 V to 4.7 V
temperature sensor (negative) (Depending on ATF temperature)
A9 BLK LG1 Unit Qround With iQnition switch ON (II): 0 V
Al0 WHT CANH CAN communication signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V or
3.5V
All VEL LFL Detects left search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(neQative)
A12 RED RFL Detects right search coil signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V
(neQative)
A17 ORN FSR Drives SH-AWD relay With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V or battery
voltage
A18 GRV TOH Power supply for differential With ignition switch ON (II): about 4.7 V to 5 V
fluid temp_erature sensor
A19 VEL WEN Detects write enable signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
A20 RED CANL CAN communication signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V or
1.5V
(cont'd)
BACK 15-17
Rear Differential
SH-AWD Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
The SH-AWD control unit terminal voltages and the measuring conditions for the SH-AWD control system.
SH-AWD Control Unit Connector Terminal Locations
BI8P)
Terminal Wire Signal Description Measuring

number color Conditions/Terminal Voltage
81 PUR PWR Power supplyfor SH-AWD With engine running: battery voltage
actuator
82 8LK PG Actuator grouhd With ignition switch ON ("): 0 V
83 8LK LG2 Unit ground With ignition switch ON ("): 0 V
84 GRN LCH Drives left clutch With clutch off: 0 V
electromagnetic coil (positive) . With clutch on: battery voltage
85 8LU LCL Drives left clutch With ignition switch ON ("): 0 V
electromagnetic coil (negative)
86 WHT RCH Drives right clutch With clutch off: 0 V
electromagnetic coil (positive) With clutch on: battery voltage
87 VEL RCL Drives left clutch With ignition switch ON (II): 0 V
electromagnetic coil (negative)
15-18 BACK
BACK 15-19
Rear Differential
Circuit Diagram
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.1 {30A}
WHT-------------------------------------------,
IGNITION SWITCH
WHT~
BATTERY
No.1 {BAnl100 A} No2 {SO A}
+ f}. BLU --1--(J"\...Jr--+-'
~ WHT
SH-AWD
RELAY
G601 G601
BLK LTGRN ORN PUR
B2 A7 A17 B1
PG IG1 FSR PWR
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT
-...::-
-
Ii
'II- ~ A H
CANH CANL K-UNE WEN
A10 A20 AS A19
WHT RED
RED WHT RED WHT RED WHT WHT RED WHT RED WHT RED LTBLU VEL
J IA37
I" I. I" I. )
129 128 12 14 12 13 139 138 A36
~~-om INDICATOR
I DATA LINK CONNECTOR
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE ABSOLUTE STEERING YAW RATE-LATERAL VSA MODULATOR- PCM
ANGLE SENSOR ACCELERAnON CONTROL UNIT
SENSOR
15-20 BACK
RCH RCL RFH RR. TOH TOl lGl lGZ
B6 B7 A3 A1Z A18 A8 A9 B3
WHT VEL GRN RED GRY WHT
C751 U 13 16 11 I, I C752
1 1 1 1 1 1
WHT VEL GRN RED GRY WHT
RIGHT SOLENOID I
Iz 11 I, 13
I U
BLK BLK
~
4P CONNECTOR
I
RED
I
BLK
I
BlU/YEl
I
GRN/WHT BLU GRN
I ~1
RIGHT CLUTCH
~3
RIGHT
I ~
DIFFERENTIAL FLUID
ELECTROMAGNETIC SEARCH COIL TEMPERATURE
COil SENSOR
G601
BACK 15-21
.Rear Differential
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 12-1, 12-2, 12-3: Lateral Acceleration DTC 16-3: Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Sensor Malfunction Position Incorrect
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general NOTE:
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). • Before you troubleshoot, review the general
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). • Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
• Check for installation of the steering angle sensor.
2. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS.
Are any Lateral Acceleration sensor OTCs
indicated? 2. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS.
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• Are any steering angle sensor OTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 3. YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
3. Test-drive the vehicle with an assistant in a left and NO-Go to step 3.

right zig-zag pattern at about 13 mph (20 km/h) and
check the LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in 3. Start the engine.
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
4. Check the STEERING ANGLE SENSOR in the DATA
Does the sensor value change when turning? LIST with the HDS.
YES-Go to step 4. When the steering wheels is turned slowly, does

the value change?
NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
have the latest software (see page 15-6), or YES-Go to step 5.
substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit, have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/ substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
unit (see page 15-71).• troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom!
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
4. Park the vehicle on a level surface. control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15-71).•
5. Check the LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in
the DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is there 0.1 G or less?

time. If the DTC returns, replace the SH-AWD
control unit (see page 15-71) .•
NO-Do the Yaw rate-lateral acceleration neutral

position memorization (see page 15-7). Ifthe DTC
returns, replace the SH-AWD control unit (see page
15-71).•
15-22 BACK
5. Test-drive the vehicle in a straight line at 19 mph DTC 33-2, 33-3: Yaw Rate Sensor Malfunction
(30 km/h) or more.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
6. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and center the troubleshooting information (see page 15-4).
steering wheel.
7. Check the STEERING ANGLE SENSOR in the DATA
LIST with the HDS. 2. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS.
It is within ±25 deg of center? Are any YAW rate sensor OTCs indicated?
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
time. If the DTC returns, replace the SH-AWD
control unit (see page 15-71).• NO-Go to step 3.
NO-Do the steering angle neutral position 3. Test-drive the vehicle with an assistant in a left and
memorization (see page 19-135). Ifthe DTC returns, right zig-zag pattern at about 13 mph (20 km/h) and
replace the SH-AWD control unit(see page 15-71). check the YAW RATE SENSOR inthe DATA LIST
• with the HDS .
Does the sensor value change when turning?
YES-Go to step 4.

recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication
goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
4. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
5. Check the YAW RATE SENSOR in the DATA LIST

with the HDS.
Is there 3.5 degls or less?

time. Ifthe DTC returns, replace the SH-AWD
control unit (see page 15-71).•
NO-Do the yaw rate-lateral acceleration neutral

position memorization (see page 15-7).lfthe DTC
returns, replace the SH-AWD control unit (see page
15-71).•
BACK 15-23
Real"" Differential
DJe 41-1: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Communication with Power Control Module
(PCM)) NOTE: This step must be done to prevent PCM
damage.
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). 8. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 9. Connect PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 36
and terminal No. 37 to body ground with a jumper
2. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS. wires.
Are there any PGM-FI DTCs indicated? PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)

V 2V 41 6 1 8 / 8 9 I
110 V
12 13 114116118 17 18 VI
NO-Go to step 3. 2021 22 >< ZSVi 261
128 27 28 ZSV!SlV SS34 86 1
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 1 38 ~ 38 as 140 Vi 42 4S 441
JUMP ER JUMPER
4. Start the engine. WIRE WIRE
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. -1--I-
Is DTC 41-1 indicated? Terminal side of male terminals
YES-Go to step 6. 10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P).

time. Check for intermittent open between the
SH-AWD control unit connector terminals No. A10
. and A20 and the PCM connector terminals No. A36
andA37 .•
15-24 BACK
11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit DTC 41-2: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost
20P connector A terminal No. 10 and terminal Communication with VSA)
No. 20 to body ground.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) troubleshooting information (see page 15-4).
2. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
Are there any PGM-FI orcs indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
Is there continuity? 4. Start the engine.
YES-Go to step 12. 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Repair open in the wires between the Is orc 41-2 indicated?

SH-AWD control unit and the PCM .•
YES-Go to step 6.
12. Reconnect all connec~ors.
13. Turn the igniton switch ON (II). time. Check for intermittent open between SH-AWD
control unit connector terminals No. A 10 and A20
14. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS. and VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
terminals No. 39 and No. 38 .•
Are there any F-CAN communication failure orcs
between the VSA and PGM-FI system indicated? 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES-Update the PCM if it does not have latest

software (see page 11-7). Ifthe PCMwas updated,
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with
a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM
(see page 11-252).•

(cont'd)
BACK 15-25
Rear Differential
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
20P connector A terminal No. 10 and terminal
NOTE: This step must be done to prevent PCM No. 20 to body ground.
damage.
8. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector.
9. Connect VSA modulator"control unit 46P connector

terminals No. 39 and No. 38 to body ground with a
jumper wires.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT '46P CONNECTOR
8 101112 16
1B2B80
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair an open in the wires between the

Wire side of female terminals SH-AWD control unit and the VSA modulator-
control unit.•
10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P). 12. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS.
Are there any F-CAN communication failure orcs

between the VSA and PGM-FI system indicated?
YES-Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-

control unit and recheck (see page 19-83). Ifthe
VSA modulator-control unit, replace the original
SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71).•

have the latest software (see page 15"6), or
15-26 BACK
Dle 41-4: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Communication with AfT Control Unit)
NOTE: This step must be done to prevent PCM
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general damage.
9. Connect PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 36
2. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS. and terminal No. 37 to body ground with a jumper
wires.
Are there any PGM-FI DTCs indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
l/l z VI 4 15 18 / 8 9 1
10 V /I
1Z 13114116118 17 18
2Jl Z1 22 >< 23/251
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. Z8 Z1 Z8 zsVI31 Vas 34 361
las ~ aslS8I~I~~ ~ ~I
JUMPER JUMPER
WIRE WIRE
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is DTC 41-4 indicated?

YES-Go to step 6.
10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P).
SH-AWD control unit connector terminals No. A 10
and A20 and the PCM (44P) connector terminals
No. A36 and A37 .•
(cont'd)
BACK 15-27
Rear Differential
11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit DTC 41-5: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost
connector terminals A10 and A20 to body ground. Communication with Yaw Rate-lateral
Acceleration Sensor)
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A, (20P)
Are any yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor

OTCs or F-CAN indicated?
'Wire side offemale terminals YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair an open in the wires between the
SH-AWD control unit and the PCM .• 5. Check for DTCs with the, HDS.
12. Check for DTCs in the gauge control module with Is OTC 41-5 indicated?
the,HDS.
YES~Go to step 6.
Are there any F-CAN communication failure OTCs
between the VSA and PGM-FI system indicated? NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
time.Check'for intermittent open between the
YES-Update the PCM if it does not have latest SH-AWD control unit connector terminals No. A 10
software (see page 11-7). Ifthe PCM was updated, and A20 and the yaw rate-lateral acceleration
substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), and sensor 4P connector terminals No.2 and No.3 .•
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away with
a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
(see page 11-252) .•

recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication
15-28 BACK
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS; 11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals A10and A20 to body ground.
NOTE: This step must be done to preventPCM
damage. .'SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR' A (20P)
8. Disconnectthe yaw rate~lateral acceleration sensor

4P connector.
9. ConQect yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 4P

connector terminal No.3 and terminal No. 2to
body ground with jumper wires .
.YAW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION
SENSOR4PCONNECTOR =
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE YES- Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
'i'
= recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication
goes away with the updated SH-AWDcontrol unit,
Wire side of female terminals troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P). control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
NO-Repair open in the wires between the

SH-AWD control unit and the yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor.•
BACK 15-29
Rear Differential
DTC 41-6: F-CAN Malfunction (Lost 7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
Communication with Steering Angle Sensor)
NOTE: This step must be done to prevent PCM
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general damage.
8. Disconnect the steering angle sensor 5P connector.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON-(lI).
9. Connect steering angle sensor 5P connector
2. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS. terminal No.4 and terminal No.2 to body ground
with a jumper wires.
Are any steering angle sensor OTCs of F-CAN
indicated? STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
NO-Go to step 3.
JUMPER WIRE JUMPER WIRE

Is OTC 41-6 indicated?
YES-Go to step 6. 10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P).

SH-AWD control unit connector terminals No. A 10
and A20 and steering angle sensor 5P connector
terminals No.2 and No.4.•
15-30 BACK
11. Check·for continuity between SH-AWD control unit· OTC 42-1: Differential Fluid Temperature
20P connector A terminal No. 10 and terminal· Sensor (Short to Power)
No. 20 to body ground.
NOTE:
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20PI • Before you troubleshoot, review the general
troubleshootingoinformation (see page 15-4) .
• Whentroubleshooting after the vehicle was driving,
let the rear differential cool for more than one hour
before doing this troubleshooting.
2. Clear the DTC with theHDS.

= 3. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Wire side offemaleterminals
YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
have the latest software (see page 15~6), or time.•
recheck (see page 15-71). 1fthe symptom/indication 4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/ 5. Disconnect the rear differentia1 fluid tempeliature
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD sensor 2P connector and SH-AWD connector A
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control (20P).
unit (see page 15-71).. ,.
6. Check for continuity between rear differential fluid
NO-Repair open in the wires between the temperature sensor 2P connector terminals No; 1
SH-AWD control unit and the steering angle , andNo;2.
sensor.•
REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
TOL(WHTI
Wire side of male terminals
YES-Repair short in the wire between rear

differential fluid temperature sensor 2P connector
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
BACK 15~31
Rear Differential
7. Connect the rear differential fluid temperature DTC 42-2: Differential Fluid Temperature
sensor 2P connector. Sensor (Open/GND Short)
8. Measure the differential housing temperature with NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
an infrared temperature gauge near the mounting troubleshooting information (see page 15-4).
location of the rear differential fluidtemperature
sensor. The.temperature should be below 176 "F 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) .
. (80 "C) before proceeding to the next step.
9. Measure resistance between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals A8 and A18. 3. Raise the VehiCle, make sure it is securely
4. Startthe engine and turn the VSA off (the light on
the VSA OFF switch comes on). Run the engine in
the D position until the vehicle speed reaches
35 mph (56 km/h) and keep running for 10 minutes,
then slow down and stop the wheels.
Is OTe 42-2 indicated? ,

YES-Go to step 6..
.Is there 260 Q :ormore? NOrlntermittentfailure, the system is OK atthis

., ! .
time .•..
YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
have the latest software (see page 15-6), or 6. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
recheck (seepage 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication 7. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P).
goes away with the updated SH-AWD cont~ol unit,
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/ 8. Connect SH-AWD control unit 20P connector
indication goes away with a known~good SH-AWD terminal A 18 to body ground with jumper wire.
control unit, replace the:original SH~AWD control
unit (see page 15-71).• SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
NO-Replace the rear differential fluid temperature

sensor (see page 15-70).. .
JUMPER WIRE
15-32 BACK
9. Disconnect the rear differential fluid temperature 11. Connect SH-AWD control unit 20P connector
sensor 2P connector. terminal A8 to body ground with jumper wire.
10. Check for continuity between rear differential fluid SH·AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No.1 to
body ground.

SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
=
= 12. Check for continuity between rear·differential fluid

Wire side of male terminals temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No.2 to
body ground.
Is there continuity? REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE

SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 11.
NO--:Repair open in the wire between SH-AWD

control unit connector A and the rear differential
fluid temperature sensor connector.• TOL(WHT)
=
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Repair open in thewire between SH-AWD

fluid temperature sensor connector.•
(cont'd)
BACK 15-33
Rear Differential
13. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 15. Reconnect all connectors.
connectorter-minals A9 and,A18.
16. Measure resistance between SH-AWD control unit
SH-AWDCONTROUINIT CONNECTOR A (20P) connectorterminals A8 and A18.

YES-Repair short in the wire between SH-AWD Is there 12.67 kQ or less?

fluid temperature sensor connector.• YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
NO-Go to step 14. substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication
14. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
connector terminals AS and A9. troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
NO-Replace the rear differential fluid temperature

sensor (see page 15-70).•
YES-Repair short in the wire between SH-AWD

fluid temperature sensor connector.•
NO-Go to step 15.
15-34 BACK
OTC 43-1: Differential Fluid Temperature 10. Disconnect the rear differential fluid temperature
Sensor Malfunction sensor 2P connector.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general 11. Check for continuity between rear differential fluid
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). temperature sensor 2P connector terminals No.1
and No.2.
2. Check for DTCs with the HDS. SENSOR2PCONNECTOR
Is OTe 42-1 or 42-2 indicated?

TOL(WHT)
NO-Go to step 3.
4. Start the engine. Wire side of male terminals
5. Let the engine idle 1 minute.

6. Test-drive the vehicle for 5 minutes.
YES-Repair short in the wires between rear
7. Check for DTCs with the HDS. differential fluid temperature sensor 2P connector
terminals No.1 and No.2 .•
Is OTe 43-1 indicated?
NO-Goto step 12.
YES-Go to step 8.
time .• 13. Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not have
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. known-good SH-AWD control unit (see page 15-71).
9. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P). 14. Start the engine.
15. Letthe engine idle 1 minute.
Is OTe 43-1 indicated?
YES-Replace the rear differential fluid

temperature sensor (see page 15-70).•
NO-Replace the original SH-AWD control unit

(see page 15-71) .•
BACK '·5-35
Rear Differential
DTC 44-11: SH-AWD Control Unit



time .•
15-36 BACK
DTC 44-12: SH-AWD Relay Stuck ON 9. Measure voltage between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminal A 17 and body ground.
troubleshooting information (see PClge, 15-4). SH·AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (ZOP)
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. Wire side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this the SH-AWD control unit and the SH-AWD relay
time.• (FSR line) .•
6. Remove the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71), than 10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P).
test the SH-AWD relay (see page 22-64) .•
11. Measure voltage between SHcAWD control unit
Is the SH-AWD relay OK? connector terminals B1 and B2.
YES-Go to step 7. SH·AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BP)
NO-Replace the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71) .

•


the SH-AWD control unit and the SH-AWD relay
(PWR line) .•

recheck {see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication
BACK 15-37
Rear Differential
DTC 44-32: SH-AWD Control Unit Power DTC 44-41: SH-AWD Control Unit Power
Supply Stuck ON Supply Stuck OFF
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
3. Start the engine. 3. Start the engine.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is OTC 44-32 indicated? Is OTC 44-41 indicated?
YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
have the latest software (see page 15-6), or have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unitand substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication
goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit, goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe symptom/ troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15"71) .• unit (see page 15-71).•
time.• time .•
15-38 BACK
OTC 44-50: SH-AWD Control Unit Power 9. Measure voltage between SH-AWD relay 4P
Supply Voltage Low connector terminal No.1 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general SH·AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
1. Make sure the battery is fully changed and the

charging system is working properly.
3. Check the No.1 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/

relay box.
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 4. Is there battery voltage?
NO-Replace the blown fuse and recheck. If the YES-Go to step 10.
No.1 (30 A) fuse blows again, repair short to
ground in the wire between the fuse and the NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.1
SH-AWD relay, then replace the fuse and fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and the·
recheck.• SH-AWD relay .•
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 10. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P)
and connector B (SP).
11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
6. Check for DTCs with the HDS. connector terminal B1 and SH-AWD relay 4P
Is DTe 44-50 indicated?
SH·AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 7.

time .•
S. Remove the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71), then

test the SH-AWD relay (see page 22-64).
Is the SH-AWD relay OK?
YES-Go to step 9. SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 18P)

, Wire side of female terminals
NO-Replace the SH-AWD relay (see page 15-71).
• Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Repair open in the wire between SH-AWD

control unit connector B and the SH-AWD relay
connector .•
(cont'd)
BACK 15-39
Rear Differential
12. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 14. Check for continuity between SH-AWD relay 4P
connector terminal A17 and SH-AWD relay 4P connector terminals No.2 and No.3 to body
connector terminal No.3. ground.
SH-AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals SH-AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR
FSR(ORN)
YES-Repair short inthe wire between SH-AWD
Is there continuity? relay and body ground .•
YES-Go to step 13. NO-Check for loose connector terminals at the

SH-AWD control unit. If the connections are OK,
NO-Repair open in the wire between SH-AWD update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not have
control unit connector A and the SH-AWD relay the latest software (see page 15-6), or substitute a
connector.• known-good SH-AWD control unit and recheck
(see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication goes
13. Check for continuity between SH-AWD relay 4P away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
connector termin.al No.4 and body ground. troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
SH-AWD RELAY 4P CONNECTOR control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15-71) .•
GND (BLK)
1 2
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the SH-AWD

relay and body ground .•
15-40 BACK
DTC 49-1: SH-AWD Control Unit (PG Line 6. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
Open) connector terminal B2 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)

Q

time .• In there continuity?
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
5. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P). substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and

control unit connector B and body ground or poor
ground .•
BACK 15-41
Rear Differential
DTC 52-3: Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil 8. Connect a jumper wire between SH-AWD control
Current Malfunction unit connector terminals 84 and B5. Disconnect the
left solenoid 4P connector, then check for
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general continuity between left solenoid 4P connector
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). terminals No.1 and No.2.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BP)
3. Do the clutch function test with the HDS (see page

15-68).
Is DTC 52-3 indicated? JUMPER WIRE

time .•
LEFT SOLENOID 4P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect SH~AWD control unit connector B (8P).
7. Check for continuity between SH-AWDcontrol unit

connector terminal B2 and body ground ..
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BP) Q
Q YES-Go to step 9.
= NO-Repair open in the wires between the
Wire side of female terminals SH-AWD control unit and the left clutch
electromagnetic coil..
Is there continuity? 9. Remove the jumper wire from SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals 84 and 85.
YES-Go to step 8.

control unit connector 8 and body ground or poor
ground (G601) .•
15-42 BACK
10. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 11. Check for.continuity between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals 82 and 84, then check for connector terminals 84 and 85.,
continuity between SH-AWD control unit connector
terminals 82 and 85. SH·AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)
SH·AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)

YES-Repair short in the wires between the SH-

AWD control unit and the left clutch
NO-Go.to step 12.
12. Measure voltage between SH-AWDcontrol unit

YES-Repair short to ground in the wire(s) between

the SH-AWD control unit and the left clutch
NO-Go to step 11.

the SH-AWD control unit and the left clutch
NO-Go to step 13.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-43
Rear Differential
13. Measure voltage between SH-AWDcontrol unit

SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 18P)

the SH-AWD control unitterminal 84 and the left
clutch electromagnetic coil..
NO-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control

unit and recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/
control unit, replace the rear differential left side
case.•
15-44 BACK
OTC 53-1, 53-3: Left Clutch Electromagnetic 8. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
Coil Malfunction connector terminal B5 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot; review the general SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)

" '

15-68). .


time.•
NO--Repair open in the wires between the SH-
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. AWD control unit and the left clutch
electromagnetic coil ••
6. Disconnect SH~AWD control unit connector B (8P)
and the left solenoid 4P connector. 9. Remove the jumper wire from the left solenoid 4P
7. Connect a jumper wire betWeen left solenoid 4P
connector,terminal No.1. 10. Connect a jumper wire between left solenoid 4P
JUMPER WIRE
JUMPER WIRE

(cont'd)
BACK 15-45
.;:
Rear D,ifferential
11. Checkfot continuity between SH-AWD. control unit 17. Disconnect the left solenoid 4P connector ..
connector terminal 84 and body ground.
18. Measure resistance between left solenoid 4P
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (BP) connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
LCL (RED)
=

YES-Go to step 12. Is there 1.8 Q or more?
NO-Repair open in the wires between the SH- YES-Replace the rear differential left side case
AWD control unit and the left clutch (see page 15-88).•
electromagnetic coil.. " , ..
12. Remove:the jumper wire from the left solenoid 4P have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
connector terminal No.1. substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
13. Reconnect all connectors .. goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
14. Turn the ignition switch ON ((II). indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
control unit, replace the ori'ginal SH~AWD control
15. Check the REAR DiFFERENTIAL FLUID unit (see page 15-71).•
TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST is above 68 "F
(20 "C) with theHbS before proceeding to the next
step. If the temperature is below 68 "F (20 "C), drive
the vehicle to warm up the rear differential until the
fluid temperature becomes above 68 "F (20 "C).
15-46 BACK
OTC 53-2: Left Clutch Electromagnetic Coil 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(Short)
9. Measure voltage between SH-AWD control unit
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general connector terminal B4 and body ground.
SH-AWD CONtROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)

15-68).

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there battery voltage?

time.•
YES-Repair short to power in the wires between
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. SH-AWD control unit connector terminal B4 and left
clutch electromagnetic coil..
6. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P)
and the left solenoid 4P connector. NO-Go to step 10.
7. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
connector terminals B4 and B5.
YES-Repair short in the wires between SH-AWD

control unit connector terminals B4 and B5.
NO-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-47
Rea'r Differential
13. Check the REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID

(20 'C) with theHDS before proceeding to the next
step. If the temperature is below 68."F (20 'C), drive
fluiq temperature becomes a~(:lVe 68."F (29 'C).
15. Disconnect the left solenoid 4P connector.
16. Measure resistance between left solenoid 4P

Wire side of male terminals·
Is there 0.45 Q or less?
YES-Replace the rear differential left side case "1", 'i,
(see page 15-88) .•

..,.
recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication
unit (see page 15-71).• ','.' .
15-48 BACK
DTC 56-3: RightClutch Electromagnetic Coil 8. ,Connect a jumper wire between SH-AWD control
Current Malfunction unit connector terminals B4 and B5. Disconnect the
right soienoid4P connector, then check for
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general continuity between right solenoid 4P connector
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). terminals No.1 and No.2.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P)

15-68).
Is DTC 56-3 indicated? JUMPER WIRE
NO-Intermittentfailure,the system'is'OK atthis

time .•
RIGHT SOLENOID 4P CONNECTOR
6. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector B (8P). RCL (YEL)
7. Check for continuity betweenSH-AWD control unit

connector terminal B2 and body ground.
Q YES-Go to step 9.
= NO-Repair open in the wires between the SH-
Wire side of female terminals AWD control unit and the right clutch
Is there continuity? 9. Remove the jumper wire from SH-AWD control unit
YES-Go to step 8.

control unit connector B and body ground or poor
ground (G601) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 15-49
Rear Differential
1O.Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 11. Check for continuity betweenSH-AWD control unit
connector terminals 82 and 86, then check for connector terminals 86 and 87.
continuity between SH-AWD control unit connector
terminals 82 and 87. SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 18P)

YES-Repair shortinthe wires between the SH-

SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 18P) AWD control unit and the right clutch
NO-Go to step 12.

connector terminals 82 and .87.
YES-Repair short to ground in the wire(s) between

the SH-AWD control unit and the right clutch
electromagnetic coil .•
NO-Go to step 11.

the SH-AWD control unit and the right clutch
electromagnetic coil. •
. NO~Go to step 13.
15-50 BACK

the SH-AWD control unit connector terminal 86 and
left clutch electromagnetic coil..

recheck (see page 15-71 ).If the .symptom/indication
troubleshooting is.complete. If the .symptom!
indication goes away with a known~good SH-AWD
unit (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication
does not goes away, replace the rear differential
right side case (see page 15-88) .•
BACK 15-51
, i"
Rear Differential
OTC 57-1, 57-3: Right Clutch Electromagnetic 8. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
Coil Malfunction connector terminal B7 and body ground.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (SP)

15-68).
=

time .•
NO-Repair open in the wires between the SH-
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. AWD control unit and the right clutch
and the right solenoid 4P connector. 9. Remove the jumper wire from the right solenoid 4P
7. Connect a jumper wire between right solenoid 4P
connector terminal No.1. 10. Connect a jumper wire between right solenoid 4P
3 4
JUMPER WIRE
JUMPER WIRE
=
=
15-52 BACK
11. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 16. Disconnect the right solenoid 4P connector.
connector terminal 86 and body ground.
17. Measure resistance between right solenoid 4P
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (8P) . connector terminals No.1 and No.2.
RIGHT SC;>LENOID 4P CONNECTOR
RCL(BLK)

YES-Go to step 12. Is there 1.8 Q or more? ,
NO-Repair open inthe wires between the SH- YES-Replace the rear differential right side case
AWD control unit and the right clutch (see page 15-88).•
12. Remove the jumper wire from the rightsolenoid 4P have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
connector terminal No.1. substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
13. Reconnect all connectors. goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
14. Turn the ignition switch ON ((II). indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
15. Check the REAR DIFFERENTIAL FLUID unit (see page 15-71) .•
(20 'C) with the HDS before proceeding to the next
step. If the temperature is below 68 "F (20 'C), drive
fluid temperature becomes above 68 "F (20 "C).
BACK 15-53
Rear Differential
DTC 57-2: Right Clutch Electromagnetic Coil 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
(Short)
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general connector terminal B6 and body ground.

15-68).

YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this Is there battery voltage?

time.•
YES-Repair short to power in the wires between
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. SH-AWD control unit connector terminal B6 and
right clutch electromagnetic coil..
and the right solenoid 4P connector. NO-Go to step 10.
7. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
YES-Repair short in the wires between SH-AWD

control unit connector terminals B6 and B7.
NO-Go to step 8.
15-54 BACK
TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST is above 68 'f
(20 "C) with the HDS before proceeding to the next
step. If the temperature is below 68 'f (20 "C), drive
fluid temperature. becomes above 68 'f (20 "C).
15. Disconnect the right solenoid 4P connector.
16. Measure resistance between right solenoid 4P

Is there 0.45 Q or less?
YES-Replace the rear differential right side case

(see page 15-88).•

BACK 15-55
Rear Differential
DTC 76-1: Rear Differential Fluid Overheats 8. Check for rear brake drag.
NOTE: Are the rear brakes OK?

• Before you troubleshoot, review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 15-4). YES-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
• When the temperature of the rear differential fluid is have the latest software (seepage 15-6), or
abnormally high, the SH-AWD indicator comes on. substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
This is not necessarily a problem, but DTC 76-1 will recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication
be stored. goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
• Check the rear differential fluid level (see page 15-69). troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
If it's low, refill it, clear the DTC, and recheck. indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). unit (see page 15-71).•
2. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS. NO-Repair the rear brakes (see page 19-3) .•
Are any VSA System OTCs indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting.
NO-Go to step 3.
5. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h).
6. Check for WHEEL SPEED in the DATA LIST with the

HDS.
Are al/ wheel speed the same?

time .•
NO-Go to step 7.
15-56 BACK
OTC 77-1: Communication Error with the OTC 77-2: Communication Error with the VSA
Power Control Module (PCM) Modulator-Control Unit
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general
troubleshooting information (see page 15-41. troubleshooting information (see page 15-4).
3. Start the engine. 3. Start the engine.
Is OTC 77-1 indicated? Is OTC 77-2 indicated?
time .• time.•
5. Check for DTCs in the PGM-FI system with the HDS. 5. Check for DTCs in the VSA system with the HDS.
Are any PGM-FI system OTCs indicated? Are any VSA system OTCs indicated?
YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .• YES-Go to the indicated DTC's troubleshooting .•
NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit if it does not
have the latest software (see page 15-61, or have the latest software (see page 15-6), or
substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and substitute a known-good SH-AWD control unit and
recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/indication recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication
goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit, goes away with the updated SH-AWD control unit,
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/ troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control control unit, replace the original SH-AWD control
unit (see page 15-71) .• unit (see page 15-71).•
BACK 15-57
Rear Differential
DTC 77-4: Communication Error with the

Automatic-Transmission Control Unit
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (").
2. Clear the DTC with the HOS.
YES-Go to step 5.

time .•
5. Check for DTCs in the AfT system with the HDS.
Are any AlT system DTCs indicated?
NO-Update the SH-AWD control unit ifit does not

goes away with the updated SH-AWDcontrol unit,
troubleshooting is complete. ·If the symptom/
.indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWD
15-58 BACK
DTC 77-5: Yaw rate-Lateral Acceleration DTC 77-6: Steering Angle Sensor Malfunction
Sensor Malfunction
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general troubleshooting information (see page 15-4).
2. Clearthe DTC with the HOS.
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the. system is OK at this time ... ·
time .•
5. Check for OTGs in the VSA system with the HOS.
5. Check for OTCs in the VSA system with the HOS.
Are any steering angle sensor OTCs indicated?
Are any yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
OTCs indicated? YES-Go to· the indicated OTC's troubleshooting .•
YES-Go to the indicated OTC's troubleshooting .• NO-Update the SH-AWO control unit if it does not
NO-Update the SH-AWO control unit if it does not substitute a known-good SH-AWO control unit and
have the latest software (see page 15-6), or recheck (see page 15-71).lfthe symptom/indication
substitute a known-good SH-AWO control unit and goes away with the updated SH-AWO control unit,
recheck (see page 15-71). Ifthe symptom/indication troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe symptom/
goes away with the updated SH-AWO control unit, indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWO
troubleshooting is complete. If the symptom/ control unit, replace the original SH-AWO control
indication goes away with a known-good SH-AWO unit (see page 15-71).•
control unit, replace the original SH-AWO control
BACK 15-59
Rear' Differential
OTC 78-xx: SH-AWD Control Unit Se.lf- OTC 81-1: Left Search Coil Sensor (Open or
Diagnostic Malfunction Short)
: ~J
NOTE: Before you troubleshooti·review the general NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general,
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 1. Disconnect SH-AWD control unit connector A (20P).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
connectorterminals A 1 and A 11.
j" \
Is DTC 78-xx indicated?

have the latest software (see page 15-6); or
recheck (see page 15~71), Ifthe symptom/indication
goes away with the updated SH-AWD control !unit,
indication goes away with a known~good SH~AWD
unit (see page 15·71) .• Wire side of female terminals

time .• Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.

TEMP.ERATURE in the DATA LIST is above 68 Of
(20 "C) with the HDS before proceeding to the next
step. If the temperature is below 68 Of (20 "C), drive
the vehicle tovvarm up the rear differential until the
fluid temperature becomes above 68 Of (20 "C).
15-60 BACK
4. Measure resistance between SH-AWD control unit 5.' Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals A 1 and A 11. connector terminal A 1 and body ground;
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P) SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR.A (20P)
=
Is there 2.0 Q or more? Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 5. YES-Repair short in the wire between SH-AWD

control unit connector terminal A 1 and body
NO-Go to step 7. .. ground .•
NO-Check for loose connector terminals at the

SH-AWD control unit and repair if necessary. If the
connections are OK, update the SH-AWD control
unit if it does nbt.have the latest softWare (see page
15-6), or substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
unit and recheck (see page 15-71). If the symptom/
indication goes away with the updated SH-AWD
control unit, troubleshooting is complete. Ifthe
SH-AWD control unit, replace the original SH-AWD
control unit(see page 15-71) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 15-61
Rear Differential
6. CQnnect a jumper wire between SH-AWD cantral 7. Disconnect the left salenaid 4P connector,·
unit cannectar terminals A 1 and A 11. Discannect
the left salenaid 4P can nectar, then check far 8. Check for continuity between left solenoid 4P
cantinuity between left salenaid 4P con nectar connector terminals No.3 and No.. 4.
terminals No.. 3 and No.4.
SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20PI
LFL (YELl
JUMPER WIRE

YES-Repair short in the wires between the SH-
AWD control unit can nectar A and the left search
cail cannectar.•
NO-Replace the rear differential left side case

LFL (YEll (see page 15-88) .•
YES-Replace the rear differential left side case

(see page 15-88) .•
NO-Repair apen in the wire between left salenoid

4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4.•
15-62 BACK
DTC 82-1: Right Search Coi,l Sensor (Open or 4. Mea~ure ,resistance between SH-AWD control unit
Short) connector termin~ls A3a,nd A12.
NOTE: Before you troubleshoot, review the general , SH·AVVD CQNTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)

,
2. Check for continuity between SH-AWD control unit
connector terminals A3 and A12.

·Wire side of female terminals
Is there 2.0 Q or more?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Check for <;ontinuity between SH-AWD control unit

Wire side of female terminals connector terminal A3and body'ground.
SH-AWD CONTROl,. UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)

YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 6.

TEMPERATURE in the DATA LIST is above 68 "F =
(20 '{:) with the HDS before proceeding to the next Wire side of female terminals
step. If the temperature is below 68 "F (20 '{:), drive
fluid temperature becomes above 68 "F (20 '{:). Is there continuity?
YES-Repair short in the wire between SH-AWD

control unit connector terminal A3 and body
ground.•
NO-Check for loose connector terminals at the

SH-AWD control unit and repair if necessary. If the
connectios are OK, update the SH-AWD control unit
if it does not have the latest software (see page
15-6), or substitute a known-good SH-AWD control
indication goes away with the updation SH-AWD
control unit, troubleshooting is complete. If the
SH-AWD control unit, replace the original SH-AWD
control unit (see page 15-71).•
(cont'd)
BACK 15..63
Rea",':DifferentiaJ
6.' ;C6nnect a:juriiper:witebetiNeenSH-AWD control 7. Discon'necttherighfsolenoid 4P connector, then'

unit connector terminals A3 and A 12,. Disconnect check for continuity between right solenoid 4P
the right solenoid 4P connector, then check for connector terminals No.3 and No.4.
continuity, between right solenoid4'Pcohnector
terminals No.3 and No.4. RIGHT SOLENOID 4P CONNECTOR
SH-AWP CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
RFL (RED) RFH(GRN)
JUMPER WIRE Wire side offemale terminals

YES-Repair short to ground in the wires between

RI(;HT SOLEN~iD4P CONNECTOR SH-AWD control unit connector A and the right
search coil sensor connector;'.
NO-Replace the rear differential right side case

(see page 15-88) .•
YES-Replace the rear differential right side case

(seepag~ 15-'88).•
NO-Repair open in the wires between right

solenoid 4P connector terminals No.3 and No.4.•
!;.
i'
BACK
. ," .
DTC 91-1: SH-AWD Control Unit

Programminng Error
NOTE:
• DTC 91-1 is stored when the SH-AWD system update
is not completed.
• Do not turn the ignition switch OFF while updating
the SH-AWD system. If you turn the ignition switch
OFF before completion, the SH-AWD system can be
damaged.
1. Do the SH-AWD system update procedure

(see page 15-7).
Is ore 91-1 indicated?
YES-Substitute a known-good SH-AWD control

unit (see page 15-71) .• , ';'.
NO-Update is complete.•
BACK ,15-65
"',; ..
Rear· Differential
The SH-AWO indicator does not go off, and

no OTCs are stored
NOTE:
• Make sure the No.1 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box is OK.
• Make sure there are no loose connector terminals at
the SH-AWD control unit.
• Make sure the charging system is OK.
• Make sure the PGM-FI system and the AfT system is
not in the middle of updating.
1. Test the battery (see page 22-63). Charge or replace

the battery if necessary.
2. Check the COMPLETE MEMORIZATION in the

Does the data list show "complete"?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Do the SH-AWD system memorization

procedure (see page 15-7), then go to step 3.
Are any steering angle sensor orcs indicated?
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Check the SH-AWD indicator value with the HDS.
Is the SH-AWO indicator value OFF?
YES-Go to the gauge control system DTC

troubleshooting (see page 22-269).

15-66 BACK
The SH-AWD indicator does not come on

2. Check the SH-AWD indicator.
Does the SH-AWD indicator come on and go off?

time .•
NO-Go to step 3.

and B (8P).
6. Check the SH-AWD indicator.
Does the SH-AWD indicator come on?

unit (see page 15-71) .•
NO-Go to the gauge control system

BACK 15-67
Rear Differential
SH-AWD Function Test
Special Tools Required 7. Install a torque wrench on the special tool as

Torque Wrench Adapter 070AJ-SJAA101 shown on the HOS. Write down the torque value
while slowly rotating the rear hub with the torque
Direct Electromagnetic Clutch Test wrench as shown. (Turn the hub no more than
90 degrees in 7 to 10 seconds).
NOTE:
• No OTC was detected. NOTE: Use a torque wrench capable of measuring
• The shift lever is in N. up to 80 kg·m (580 Ibf·ft) such as a commercially
• The SH-AWO control unit had been initialized. available Snap-on torque wrench TE352FUE.
• The tire pressures are at the specified value.
• Tire size and wear are the same between the left and
right tires.
1. Check that the differential fluid temperature is over

68 "F (20 "e) with the HOS. If it is below 68 "F
(20 "e), raise the temperature by driving the vehicle
in circles or by constantly turning.

supported.
3. Remove the rear wheels.
4. Connect the HOS to the OLC.
5. 00 the direct electromagnetic clutch test with the

HOS.
8. Enter the torque value into the HOS, and wait for
6. Install the torque wrench adapter on the rear wheel the test to finish.
hub.
• If the result shows the clutch driving force is
normal, the clutch assembly is OK .
• Ifthe result shows the clutch driving force is
abnormal, replace the differential fluid, and
070AJ-SJAA101 retest. If the result still shows the clutch driving
~«t
force is abnormal, replace the right and left
differential side case (see page 15-88).
15-68 BACK
Rear Differential Fluid Inspection and Replacement
Inspection Replacement
1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the 1. Park the vehicle on level ground, and turn the
ignition switch to LOCK (0). ignition switch to LOCK (0).
2. Use solvent and a brush to wash any oil and dirt off 2. Remove the filler plug (A) and the sealing washer
the differential fluid inspection oil filter plugs. (8).
3. Remove the filler plug (A) and the sealing washer Fluid Capacity
(8), then check the condition of the fluid, and make 2.53 L (2.67 US qt, 2.23 Imp qt) at fluid change
sure the fluid is at the proper level (C). 2.77 L (2.93 US qt, 2.44 Imp qt) at overhaul
Recommended fluid: Honda ATF-Z1
A c
/
4. The fluid level must reach up the bottom of the
filler plug hole. If it is below the hole, add the
recommended fluid until it runs out, then reinstall
the filler plug with a new sealing washer.
3. Remove the drain plug (C) and the sealing washer

(D), and drain the fluid.

(D).
5. Add fluid until it reaches the bottom of the filler

plug hole.
6. Reinstall the filler plug with a new sealing washer.
BACK 15-69
;l.~
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Fluid Temperature Sensor Replacement
1. Drain the differential fluid (see page 15-69).
2. Remove the differential fluid temperature sensor

cover (A) and the differential fluid temperature
sensor harness stay (8), then disconnect the
differential fluid temperature sensor connector (e).

(D).
4. Install the differential fluid temperature sensor with

a new O-ring (E) in the reverse order of removal.
5. Refill the differential fluid (see page 15-69).
15-70 BACK
SH-AWD Control Unit Replacement SH-AWD Relay Replacement
NOTE: The SH-AWD control unit must be initialized 1. Remove the rear left side trim panel (see page
(see page 15-7). after replacement, otherwise the 20-76).
SH-AWD system will not function. 2. Remove the SH-AWD relay (A).
1. Remove the rear left side trim panel cover (A). A
3. Install the SH-AWD relay in the reverse order of

2. Loosen the SH-AWD control unit mounting bolts (A), removal.
then remove the SH-AWD control unit.
A
6x1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m,
8.9Ibf·ft)
3. Disconnect the SH-AWD control unit connectors (C).
4. Install the SH-AWD control unit in the reverse order

of removal.
BACK 15-71
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Mount Replacement
14x 1.5 mm
~74N.m
~ (7.5 kgf·m, 53.5Ibf·ft)
Replace.
10x 1.25 mm
~38N.m
~ (3.9 kgf·m, 28 Ibf·ft)
14x1.5mm
74N·m
(7.5 kgf·m, 53.5 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
15.. 72 BACK
Rear Differential Removal
Special Tools Required 5. Place the transmission jack (A) under the rear
Driveshaft remover 07 AAD-S3VAOOO differential (B).
1. Drain the dfferential fluid (see page 15-69). 6. Using the driveshaft remover and the hammer, and
remove the left inboard joint (C) from the rear
2. Remove the right rear driveshaft (see page 16-26). differential.
3. Remove the exhaust pipe (A). 07 AAO-S3VAOOO
7. Remove the rear differential mounting bolt (D) and

nuts (E).
8. Lower the rear differential a little on the

4. Make a reference mark (A) across the propeller transmission jack, then remove the left rear
shaft (B) and rear differential companion flange (C). driveshaft inboard joint from the rear differential.
Separate the propeller shaft from the rear
differential. NOTE: Make sure not to over extend the harness
and the tube.
9. Disconnect the right clutch solenoid 4P connector

(A) and the fluid temperature sensor 2P connector
(B), then remove the harness clip (C).
B
B
10. Disconnect the breather tube (D) from the rear

differential.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-73
Rear Differential
Rear Differential Removal (cont'd) Rear Differential Installation
11. Lower the rear differential a little on the 1. Raise the rear differential with the tansmission jack.
transmission jack.
2. Ifthe original differential is being reinstalled,
NOTE: Make sure not to over extend the harness. replace the set rings.
12. Disconnect the left clutch solenoid 4P connector (A), 3. Raise the rear differential a little on the
then remove the harness clip (8). transmission jack.
4. Connect the ground cable (A) to the rear differential.
6x1.0mm
12.0N·m
(12.0 kgf·m. 8.9Ibf·ft)
13. Disconnect the ground cable (C) from the rear

differential.
14. Lower the rear differential on the transmission jack.

5. Connect the left clutch solenoid 4P connector (8),
then install the harness clip (C).
6. Raise the rear differential a little on the

transmission jack.
7. Connect the breather tube (A) to the rear

differential.
8. Connect the right clutch solenoid 4P connector (8)

and the fluid temperature sensor 2P connector (C),
then install the harness clip (D).
15-74 BACK
9. Install the left rear driveshaft inboard joint (A) to 14. Attach the propeller shaft (A) to the rear differential
the rear differential. (8) by aligning the reference marks (C) you made
during the removal procedure.
B
14x 1.5mm
74N·m
(7.5 kgf·m,
54.2 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
\ 10x 1.25mm
72N·m
(7.3 kgf·m,
53lbf·ftl
o
14x 1.5 mm.
74N·m
(7.5 kgf·m,
55Ibf·ft)
Replace.
C
10x 1.25 mm B
38N·m
(3.9 kgf·m, 28Ibf.ft)
15. Install the new exhaust pipe gasket (A) and exhaust
pipe (8).
10. Raise the rear differential to the mounting level,
then hand tighten the new rear differential rear
mounting bolt (8) and rear differential front
mounting nuts (C).
11. Loosen the differential front mounting bolts (D).
12. Tighten the new rear differential rear mounting bolt

then tighten the rear differential front mounting
nuts.
13. Tighten the rear differential front mounting bolts.

A
10x 1.25 mm
33N·m
Replace.
16. Install the right rear driveshaft (see page 16-35).
18. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if

necessary (see page 18-5).
BACK 15-75
,~, "
Rea'r D'ifferential
Rear Differential DisassemblyIReassembly
A A
CD REAR DIFFERENTIAL CARRIER ASSEMBLY ® BREATHER BRACKET
® REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS . @ DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR COVER
® BREATHER HOSE ® REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET A
® REAR DIFFERENTIAL FRONT MOUNTING BRACKETS @ REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET B
® DIFFERENTIAL FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR @ REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET C
® FILLER PLUG ® REAR DIFFERENTIAL HARNESS BRACKET D
47 N·m (4.8 kgf·m. 35 Ibf·ft) @O-RING
tJ) DRAIN PLUG Replace.
47 N·m (4.8 kgf~m. 35 Ibf·ft)
® SEALING WASHER A:6x1.0mm
Replace. 12.0 N·m 11.2 kgf.m. 8.9Ibf·ft)
B: 14x 1.5 mm
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m. 54.2Ibf·ft)
15-76 BACK
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required. 4. Removethe left side case (A), the right side case (8),
• Companion Flange Holderc07XA8-001AJ01 . the Four 10x 12 mmdowelJ>ins (C) .
• Oil seal driver C 070AO-STK0130
• Fork seal driver weight 07747-0010100
1. Remove the rear differential (see page 15-73).
2. Remove the rear differential front mounting

brackets (A) from the rear differential (8).
5. Remove the mounting bolts (A) in a crisscross

pattern in several steps; then remove the bearing
set plate (8) and the 83 mm shim (C).

cover (A), differential fluid temperature (8), O-ring
(C), and rear differential harness bracket (0).
(cont'd)
BACK 15~77
"i' ,:'-"
,Rear, Differential
Center Case Oil Seal Replacement (cont'd)
'6. Remove the six inounting bolts (A) in a crisscross 8. Raise the locknut tab (A) from the groove of the
pattern in several 's1teps, then remove the input shaft, makihg sure that the tab completely
differential housing assembly (B) and dowel pins clears the groove to prevent damaging the input
(C). shaft.
9. Install the companion flange holder on the

companionflange. Loosen the 27 mm locknut (left-
hand threads).
7. Remove the ring gear assembly (A), bearing outer

races (B), 75 min shim (C) and the 8 x 14 dowel pins
(D).
15-78 BACK
10. Loosen the locknut (A) clockwise so that its tab (B) 13. Remove the 27 mm locknut (A), the 27 mm spring
comes out from the groove (e) in the input shaft. washer (B), the 28 mm back-up ring (e), and the
28 mm O-ring (0).
11. Tighten the locknut (A) until its tab (B) aligns with
the goove (e).
14. Make a reference mark (A) across the input shaft

(B) and companion flange (e), then remove the
companion flange.
12. Remove any dirt from inside of the groove in the

input shaft, then loosen the locknut.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-79
Rear Differential
15. Remove the~rive pinion (A), pinion spacer (B) and 17. Apply ATFto the tapered roller bearing (A), then
the thrust vvasher(e) by tapping 011 the drive pinion install the new front case oil seal (B) withtheoil
with a plastic hammer. .. seal driver e and fork seal driver weight.
NOTE: Support it by hand not to damage the drive

pinion.
18. Apply ATF to the tapered roller bearing (A), then

install the drive pinion (B), pinion spacer (e) and
the thrust washer (D) into the differential carrier (E).
NOTE: Be sure to install the pinion spacer in the

16. Remove the front case oil seal (A) with a direction showf'.
commercially available tool.
NOTE: Remove the oil seal with care so you do not

damage the inside surface of the differential carrier
seal surface.
15-80 BACK
19. Install the companion flange (A) on the input shaft 21. Install the companion flange holder the companion
(8) by aligning the reference mark (C). flange, then tighten the locknut (left-hand threads).
20. Apply ATF to the new 28 mm O-ring (A), then install 22. Rotate the drive pinion several times to assure
the new 28 mm O-ring, the 28 mm backup ring (8), proper tapered roller bearing contact. Measure the
the 27 mm spring washer (C), and the new 27 mm drive pinion turning torque.
locknut (D).
• If the drive pinion turning torque exceeds the
standard, replace the pinion spacer.
• If the drive pinion turning torque is less than the
standard, adjust by tightening the locknut a little
at a time, but keep the torque within
186-353 N·m (19.0-36.0 kgf·m, 137-260 Ibf.ft).
If this is not possible, replace the pinion spacer.
Turning Torque:
93.2-181.4 N·m (9.5-18.5kgf·cm, 69.0-134.0 Ibf·in)
(cont'd)
BACK 15-81
Rear Differential
23. Stake the locknut tab (A) into the groove in the 25. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surfaces ..
input shaft. Apply liquid gasket (PIN 08718~0001) to the sealing
surface. Make sure you seal the entire
circumference of the bolt holes to prevent oil
leakage.
NOTE:
• You must assemble the housings within do in
5 minutes after applying the liquid gasket. If not,
the sealing surface must be cleaned, and the
liquid gasket reapplied .
• Allow it to cure at least 30 minutes after
assembly before filling the differential with fluid.
24. Apply ATF to the tapered roller bearings, then

Install the ring gear assembly (A), bearing outer
races (8), 75 mm shim (e) and the 8 x 14 dowel pins
(D).
6x1.Omm
12N·m
. (1:2 kgf·m, 8.7Ibf·ft)
B
._.-0_0- Apply liquid gasket along the broken
line and around all bolt holes.
15-82 BACK
26. Install the dowel pins (A), the differential housing 30. Removethedirt and oil from the sealing surfaces.
assembly (8) and the six mounting bolts (C). Apply liquid gasket (PIN 08718-0001) to the sealing
surface, Make sure you seal the entire
c circumference of the bolt holes to prevent oil
.. 10x125mm leakage.
44N·m
(4;5kgf·m,
32Ibf·ft) NOTE:
• You must assemble the housings within do in
5 minutes after applying the liquid gasket. If not,
B
Left side case/Right side case
27. Tighten the six mounting bolts in a crisscross

pattern in several steps.
28. Install the 83 mm shim (A), the bearing set plate (8)
and the six mounting bolts (C). ..-.~.-.- Apply liquid gasket along the broken
line and around all bolt holes.
NOTE: Install the bearing set plate, check to
identification marks (D) as shown.
c
ax 1.25 mm
27N·m (2.a kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ft)
I D
29. Tighten the six mounting bolts in a crisscross

pattern in several steps.
(cont'd)
BACK 15-83
Rear Differentia'
31. Install the 8 x .12 mm dowel pins (A), the rear 34. Install the rear differential front mounting brackets
differential right side case (B), the rear differential (A) on the rear differential (B).
left side case (C) and the mounting bolts (0).
NOTE: Install a lower surface of the guide (C)
D
8x 1.25 mm horizontally as shown, then tighten the rear
27N·m differential front mounting bracket bolts (0).
12.8 kgf.m, 20 Ibf.tt)
/'
D
14x 1.5 mm
32. Tighten the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern 74N·m .
in several steps. . 17.5 kgf·m, 55 Ibf·tt)
Replace.
33. Install the differential fluid temperature sensor

cover (A), differential fluid temperature (B), new 35. Install the rear differential (see page 15-74).
a-ring (C), and rear differential harness bracket (0).
6x 1.0mm
12N·m
11.2 kgf·m,
8.7Ibf.tt)
-----
15-84 BACK
Side Case Oil Seal Replacement
Special Tools Required 5. Install the new 34.7 x 54 x 9 mm oil seal (A) into the
-Oil seal driver A 070AD-STK0110 rear differential side case (B) with the fork seal
-Oil seal driver'B 070AD-STK0120 driverweight(C) and oil seal driver A (D).,
- Fork seal driver weight 07747-0010100
1. Remove the rear differential (see page 15-73).
2. Remove the 40 x 55 x 7.5 mm dust seal (A) with a

commercially available toot,
D
070AD·STK0110 A
6. Installthethrustwasher (A),then install the new

40 x 55 x 7.5 mm dust seal (B) with the fork seal
driver weight (C) and oil seal driver B(D).
3. Remove the thrust washer.
4. Cut a slit at each position (4 place, 90 degrees

apart) (A) on the 34.7 x 54 x 9 mm oil seal (B), then
install 6 mm screw (C) (PIN 93901-16580) into the
oil seal at each location. Remove the seal with
pliers (D) and screw driver (E) as shown.
NOTE: Do not thread the 6 mm screws into the oil

seal more than 5 mm (0.197 in.)
7. Insta!1 the rear differential (see page 15-74).
BACK 15-85
Rear Differential
Center Case Replacement
1. Remove the rear differential (see page 15-73). 4. Remove the rear differential left side case (A), the
rear differential right side case (B), the 10 x 12
2. Remove the rear differential front mounting dowel pins (C) from the rear differential center case
brackets (A) from the rear differential (B). (D).
3. Remove the differential fluid temperature sensor 5. Replace the rear differential center case.
cover (A), differential fluid temperature (B), O-ring
(C), and rear differential harness bracket (D).
15-86 BACK
6. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surfaces. 7. Install the 8 x 12 mm dowel pins (A), the rear
Apply liquid gasket (PIN 08718-0001) to the sealing differential right side case (B), the rear differential
surface. Make sure you seal the entire left side case (C) and the mounting bolts (0) on to
circumference of the bolt holes to prevent oil the rear differential center case (E).
leakage.
D
8x1.2Smm
NOTE: 27N·m
• You must assemble the housings with you do in (2.8 kgf·m, 20 Ibf.ftl
5 minutes after applying the liquid gasket. If not, /'
Left side case fRight side case
8. Tighten the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern

in several steps.
.. _._._.- Apply liquid gasket along the broken 9. Install the differential fluid temperature sensor
line and around all bolt holes. cover (A), differential fluid temperature (B), new
O-ring (C), and rear differential harness bracket (0).
6x1.0mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
..-----
8.7Ibf·ftl
(cont'd)
BACK 15-87
Rear Differential
Center Case Replacement (cont'd) Side Case Replacement
10. Install the rear differential front n'lountirigbrackets 1. Remove the rear differeritiaUsee page 15-69).
(A) on the rear differential (B) ..
2. Remove the rear differential front mounting
NOTE: Install a lower surface of the guide (C) brackets·(A) from the rear differential (B) ..
horizontally as shown, then tighten the rear
differential front mounting bracket bolts (D)~

cover (A), differential fluid temperature (B), O-ring
D (C), and rear differential harness bracket (D).
14x 1.5 mm
74N·m
(7.~kgf.m, 55Ibf·ft)
11. Install the rear differential (see page 15-74).
, ;;
15-88 BACK
4. Remove the rear differential left side case (A) or the 7. Measure distance CD between the end of the rear
rear differential right side case (B), the 10 x 12 differential side case (A) and 60.2 mm shim contact
dowel pins (C) from the rear differential center case area of planet/:lry gear (B) with a straight edge (C)
(0). and depth gauge (0).
Measure at three locations, and average the
reading.
NOTE:
• Carry out the measurement at normal room
temperature.
• Clean all the parts thoroughly before measure.
5. Replace the rear differential left side case or the

differential right side case.
6. Remove the ring gear (A), needle bearing (B), and B

the 60.2 mm shim (C) from the differential side case
(0).
8. Measure distance CD between the end of the rear
differential center case (A) and ring gear contact
A area of tapper roller bearing (B) with a straight
edge (C) and depth gauge (0).
reading.
NOTE:
• Carry out the measurement at normal room
temperature.
D
D.
A B
(cont'd)
BACK 15-89
Rear: Differential
Side Case Replacement (cont'd)
9. Measure the distance ® between the needle· Select the 1.60 mm shim from the table.
bearing (A) and tapper roller bearing contact area
of ring gear (8) with a depth gauge (C). ~ 60.2mmshim
Measure at three locations, and average the Part Number Thickness
reading. A 48701-RWG-000 1.10 mm (0.043 in.)
8 48702-RWG-000 1.20 mm (0.047 in.)
NOTE: C 48703-RWG-000 1.30 mm (0.051 in.)
• Carry out the measurement at normal room D 48704-RWG-000 1.40 mm (0.055 in.)
temperature. E 48705-RWG-000 1.50 mm (0.059 in.)
• Clean all the parts thoroughly before measure. F 48706-RWG-000 1.60 mm (0.063 in.)
G 48707 -RWG-OOO 1.70 mm (0.067 in.)
H 48708-RWG-000 1.80 mm (0.071 in.)
I 48709-RWG-000 1.90 mm (0.075 in.)
J 48710-RWG-000 2.00 mm (0.079 in.)
K 48711-RWG-000 2.10 mm (0.083 in.)
A L 48712-RWG-000 2.20 mm (0.087 in.)
Shim Selection Formula
10. Selectthe proper 60.2 mm shim from the table.

Follow the example below, and use the
measurements you made in step 7 to 9.
(Basic Formula)
CD + ® - ( ® + =
0.19) shim thikness
0.19 mm (0.007 in.): middle oUhe clearance.
standard.
Clearance Standard:
0.14-0.24 mm (0.006-0.009 in.)
(For example)
CD =6.12 mm (0.241 in.)
® =15.3 mm (0.602 in.)
® =19.56 mm (0.770 in.)
6.12 +15.3 - (19.56 + 0.19) =1.67 mm
15-90 BACK
11. Place one strip of plastigage (A) on 60.2 mm shim. 12. Install the 8 x 12 mm dowel pins (A), the rear
contact area of planetary gear (B) ... differential right side case (B) or the rear
Install the 60.2 mm shim (C), needle bearing (0) differential left side case (C) and the mounting bolts
and the ring rear (E). (0).
reading. D
8x 1.25 mm
27N·m
NOTE: (2.8 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ftl
• Carry out the measuement at normal room /'
temperature .
13. Tighten the mounting bolts in a crisscross patten in

several steps.
14. Remove the rear differential left side case (A) or the
rear differential right side case (B), the 10 x 12 mm
dowel pins (C) from the rear differential center case
(0).
(cont'd)
BACK 15-9.1
R'ear.Differential
15. Remove the ring gear (A), needle bearing (B), and 18. Install the 60.2 mm shim (A), needle bearing.(B)
the 60.2 mm shim (e) from the differential side case and the ring gear (C) onto the rear differential side
(D). case (D).
8-----"0
c ----00 0
16. Measure the widest part ofthe plastigage.
Clearance Standard:
0.1'4-0.24 mm (0.006-0.009in.)
17. If the clearance is more than the standard, go to

step 7. If the clearance measured in step 16 is
within the standard, go to step 18.
"5-92 BACK
19. Remove the dirt and oil from the sealing surfaces. 20. Install the 8 x 12 mm dowel pins (A), the rear
Apply liquid gasket (PIN 08718-0001) to the sealing differential right side, case (S) or the rear
surface. Make sure you seal the entire differential left side case (C) and the mounting bolts
circumference of the bolt holes to prevent oil (0) onto the rear differential center case (E).
leakage.
D·
8x1:25mm
NOTE: 27N·m
• You must assemble the housings with you do in 12.8 kgf·m, 20 Ibf·ftl
5 minutes after applying the liquid gasket. If not, /
Left side case/Right side case
21. Tighten the mounting bolts in a crisscross pattern

in several steps.
.. _._._.- Apply liquid gasket along the broken 22. Install the differential fluid temperature sensor
line and around all bolt holes. cover (A), differential fluid temperature (S), new
O-ring (C), and rear diffrential harness bracket (0).
6x 1.0 mm
12N·m
(1.2 kgf·m,
.------
8.7Ibf·ftl
(cont'd)
BACK 15-93
Rear Differential
23. Install the rear differential front mounting brackets

(A) on the rear differential (B).
NOTE: Install a lower surface of the guide (C)

horizontally as shown, then tighten the rear
differential front mounting bracket bolt!) (D).
D
14x1.5mm
74N·m
24. Install the rear differential (see page 15-74).
15-94 BACK
· '.
DrivelinelAxle
Special Tools ............................. ~ ................................... 16-2

Driveshaft Inspection .................................................... 16-4
Front Driveshaft Removal ............................................ 16-4
Boot Band Removal ..................................................... 16-6
Front Driveshaft Disassembly..................................... 16-7
Dynamic Damper Replacement .................................. 16-10
Boot Band Installation .................................................. 16-11
Front Driveshaft Reassembly ...................................... 16-14
Front Driveshaft Installation ........................................ 16-19
Intermediate Shaft Removal ........................................ 16-21
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly................................. 16-22
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly ................................... 16-23
Intermediate Shaft Installation .................................... 16-25
Rear Driveshaft Removal ............................................. 16-26
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly ...................................... 16-29
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly ....................................•:: 16~31
Rear Driveshaft Installation ......................................... 16::35
Propeller Shaft Inspection ........................................... 16:':37
Propeller Shaft Removal .............................................. 16-38
Propeller Shaft Installation .......................................... 16-39
,·11
BACK
DrivelinelAxle
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Descr!m:ion Qty

CD 07 AAD-S3VAOOO Driveshaft Remover 1
® 07 JAD-PL90 100 Oil Seal Driver 1
® 07NAD-P200100 Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 1
CD 07NAF-SR30101 Half Shaft Base 1
® 07XAC-001010A Threaded Adapter, 22 x 1.5 mm 1
@ 07XAC-001020A Threaded Adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 1
(j) 07947-4630100 Driver 1
® 077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
® 07946-MBOOOOO Inner Handle;~9 mm 1
@ 07947-SB00100 Oil Seal Driver 1
'"
CD ®
®,@ (j)
", -;
® ®
16-2 BACK
DYNAMIC DAMPER
Replacement, page 16-10,
I
BOOT BAND
Removal, page 16-6
InStallation, page 16-11
REAR DRIVESHAFT
Removal, page 16-26
Disassembly, page 16-29
PROPELLER SHAFT Reassembly, page 16-31
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT Inspection, page 16-37 Installation, page 16-35
Removal, page 16-21 Removal, page 16-38
Disassembly, page 16-22 Installation, page 16-39
Reassembly, page 16-23 FRONT DRIVESHAFT
Installation, page 16-25 Insp~ction, page 16-4
,Removal, page 16-4
Disassembly, page 16-7
Rt;lassembly, page 16-14
BACK 16~3
Driveline/Axle
Driveshaft Inspection Front Driveshaft Removal
1. Check the inboard boot (A) and the outboard boot 1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-7).
(B) on the driveshaft (C) for cracks, damage, leaking
grease, and loose boot bands (D). If any damage is 2. Remove the front wheels.
found, replace the boot and boot bands.
3. Lift up the locking tab (A) on the spindle nut (B),
then remove the nut.
2. Turn the driveshaft by hand, and make sure the

splines (E) and joint are not excessively loose.
3. Make sure the driveshaft is not tw.isted or cracked;

if it is, replace it. 4. Before you remove the left driveshaft, drain the
transmission fluid (see page 14-239). It is not
necessary to drain the transmission fluid if you
remove the right driveshaft.
5. loosen the driveshaft outboard joint from the front

wheel hub using a plastic hammer.
16-4 BACK
6. Remove the nuts and bolt, then separate the lower 8. Left driveshaft: Install the prybar through the
arm with a prybar. reference hole (A) of the front subframe, and pry
the inboard joint (8) from the differential case with
a prybar.
Right dr.iveshaft: Drive the inboard joint off the

intermediate shaft with a drift and hammer.
Remove the driveshaft as an assembly. Do not pull
on the drives haft (e), because the inboard joint may
come apart. Pull the driveshaft straight out to avoid
damaging the oil seal.
Left driveshaft
7. Pull the knuckle outward, and remove the

driveshaft outboard joint from the front wheel hub.
Right drives haft
BACK 16-5
DrivelinelAxle
Boot Band Removal
NOTE: When removing the boot bands, be careful not Low Profile Type
to damage the boot and dynamic damper.
1. Pinch the boot band using commercially available
Welded Type boot band pliers (A), then remove the boot band.
1. Cut the boot band (A), then remove the boot band.
Ear Clamp Type·
Double loop type 1. Lift up the three tabs (A) with a screwdriver, then
remove the boot band.
1. Lift up the band end (A), then push it into the clip
(B), then remove the boot band.
A
16-6 BACK
Front Driveshaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Make a mark (A) on each roller (B) and inboard joint
• Threaded adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 07XAC-001020A (C) to identify the locations of rollers and grooves
• Slide hammer, 5/8" x 18 UNF, commercially available in the inboard joint. Then remove the inboard joint
on the shop towel (D). Be careful not to drop the
Inboard Joint Side rollers when separating them from the inboard
joint.
1. Remove the set ring (A) from the inboard joint ..
c
2. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage 4. Make marks (A) on the rollers (B) and spider (C) to
the boot and dynamic damper (see page 16-6). identify the locations of the rollers on the spider,
then remove the rollers.
5. Remove the circlip (D).
6. Mark the spider and drives haft (E) to identify the

position of the spider on the shaft.
7. Remove the spider.
NOTE:
• Do not engrave or scribe mark on the rolling
surface .
• If necessary, use a commercially available puller.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-7
DrivelinelAxle
Front Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
8. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape Outboard Joint Side
(A) to prevent damaging to the boot.
1. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage
the boot and dynamic damper (see page 16-6).
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard

joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot.
9. Remove the inboard boot. Be careful not to damage

the boot.
10. Remove the vinyl tape.
16-8 BACK
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and 8. Remove the stop ring (A) from the driveshaft.
the outboard joint inner race.
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same

position of the outboard joint end (C).
A
9. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft with vinyl tape

(A) to prevent damaging to the boot.
5. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise.
10. Remove the outboard boot. Be careful not to

damage the boot.

6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the threaded
adapter and a commercially available 5/8" x 18
UNF slide hammer (B).
7. Remove the driveshaft from the vise.
BACK 16-9
DrivelinelAxle
Dynamic Damper Replacement
1. Remove the inboard joi"nt (see page 16-7). 5. Adjust the position of the new dynamic damper to
the figure follow.
2. Remove the dynamic damper bands. Be careful not
to damage the dynamic damper (see page 16-6). 255.5-260.5 mm (10.1-10.3 in.)
3. Wrap the splines on the·driveshaft with vinyl tape

(A) to prevent damaging to the dynamic damper.
6. Install the dynamic damper band (see page 16-11).
7. Install the inboard joint (see page 16-15).

4. Remove the dynamic damper. Be careful not to
damage the dynamic damper.
16-10 BACK
Boot Band Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Thread the free end of the band through the nose
• Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent, commercially section of the commercially available boot band
available tool KD-3191 or equivalent (A), and into the slot on
• Boot band pliers, Kent-Moore J-35910 or equivalent, the winding mandrel (B) .
c
Double Loop Type
1. Fit the boot ends onto the driveshaft and the

inboard joint, then install the new double loop band
(A) onto the boot.
NOTE: The edge of the band is wound around the

driveshaft in the forward direction of rotation.
5. Place a wrench on the winding mandrel of the boot

band tool, and tighten the band until the marked
spot (C) on the band meets the edge of the clip.
6. Lift up the boot band tool to bend the free end of

the band 90 degrees to the clip. Center-punch the
clip, then fold over the remaining tail onto the clip.
2. Pull up the slack in the band by hand.
3. Mark a position (A) on the band 10-14 mm

(0.4-0.6 in.) from the clip (B).
{cant' d)
BACK 16-11
:DrivelinelAxle
Boot Band Installation (cont'd)
7. Unwind the boot band'tool, and cut off the excess Ear Clamp Type
free end·ofthe band to leave a, 5-10 tnm
(0.2-0.4 in.) tail prot,ruding from the clip. 1. Close the ear portion (A) of the band with
commercially available boot band pliers Kent-
Moore J-35910 or equivalent (B).
8. Bend the band end (A) by tapping it down with a

hammer.
NOTE:
• Make sure the band and clip do not interfere with A
anything on the vehicle and the band does not
'. move. 2. Check the clearance between the closed ear portion
., Remove any grease remaining on the of the band. If the clearance is not within the
surrounding surfaces. standard, close the ear portion ofthe band farther.
A
6.0mm
(0.24 in.) MAX.
3.0 mm (0.12 in.) MAX.
16-12 BACK
Low Profile Type
1. Install the new low profile band (A) onto the boot
(8), then hook the tab (C) of the band.
2. Close the hook portion of the band with

commercially available boot band pliers (A), then
hook the tabs (8) of the band.
BACK 16-13
. ..
'
DriveUnelAxle
Front Driveshaft Reassembly
Exploded View
DOUBLE LOOP BANDS

(Boot band replacement only)
SET RING Replace.
(Left drive shaft only)
Replace. ()
INBOARD JOINT ROLLER
\
,r»
~~
I CIRCLIP
RePlace .•
I
r,~L _tSAD~
I
....
/ D"""""
.
/ .-
I @)- ~ / INBOARD BOOT
",.., .., .
/
.-
/~
Use the grease included
Right driveshaft ",.J in the inboard boot set.
LOW PROFILE BANDS

Replace.
DRIVESHAFT
STOP,RING
Replace.
DYNAMIC DAMPER
/
EAR CLAMP BANDS
Replace.
OUTBOARD JOINT
/
OUTBOARD BOOT (TPE)
~
Use the grease included
in the outboard boot set.
16-14 BACK
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during' 3. Install the spider (A) onto the driveshaft by alignihg
this procedure. the marks (B) you made on the spider and the end
of the drives haft.
Inboard Joint Side
, ' . i~
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent B C
damage to the inboard boot.
2. Install the inboard boot onto the driveshaft, then

'remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the
inboard boot. 4. Install a new circlip(C) into the driveshaft groove.
Rotate the circlip in its groove to make sure it is
fully seated.
5. Fit the rollers (A) onto the spider (B) with the high
shoulders facing outward, and note these items:
• Reinstall the rollers in their original positions on

the spider by aligning the marks (C) you made .
• Hold the driveshaft'pointing up to prevent the
rollers from falling off.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-15
Driveline/Axle
Front Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Pack the inboardjoint with the joint grease 8.~•. Fit the
boot ends (A) onto the driveshaft (B) on the
included in the new driveshaftset. inboard joint (C), then install the new boot band
onto the boot (see page 16-11).
Grease quantity
Inboard joint: 15~-160 9 (5.3-5.6 oz)
~
Use the grease included in the
inboard bqotset.
7. Fit the inboard joint ontothe drives haft, and note

these items: .
• Reinstall the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by 9. Repeat stepS for the band on the other end of the
aligning the marks (A) you made on the inboard boot, then go to step 10.
joint and the rollers.
• Hold the driveshaft so the inboard joint is' 10. Install the new set ring (A) into the inboard joint
pointing up to prevent it from falling off. groove (B) ofthe left driveshaft. The right
driveshaft does not have a set ring.
A . \
16-16 BACK
Outboard Joint Side 4, Insert the driveshaft (A) into the outboard joint (B)
until the stop ring (C) is closed.
1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damage to the outboard boot.
2. Install the new ear clamp bands (B) and outboard 5. To completely seat the outboard joint, pick up the
boot, then remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to driveshaft and joint, and tap them from about
damage the outboard boot. 10 cm (4 in.) onto a hard surface. Do not use a
hammer as excessive force may damage the
3. Install the new stop ring (A) into the driveshaft driveshaft. Be careful not to damage the threaded
groove (B). section (A) ofthe outboard joint.
10cm
(4 in.1
(cont'd)
BACK 16-17
ol
DrivelinelAxle
Front Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
6. Check the alignment of the paint markO(A) withthe 8. Fit the boot (A) ends onto the driveshaft (8) and
outboard joint end (8). outboard joint (C).
7. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the joint grease

included in the new joint boot set.
Grease quantity 9. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to these

Outboard joint: 0 140~ 1509(4.9--5.3 oz) measurements, then adjust the boots to halfway
between full compression and full extension. Make
sure the ends of the boots seat in the groove of the
driveshaft and joint. Doing this prevents a vacuum
or too much air in the boot, preventing itfrom
compressing or extending properly.
Right driveshaft: 462-467 mm (18.2-18.4 in.)
A
outboard boot set. Left driveshaft: 509-514 mm (20.0-20.2 in.)
.. ..
10. Install the new ear clamp band onto the boot
(see page 16-11).
11. Repeat step 10 for the band on the other end of the
boot.
16-18 BACK
Front Driveshaft Installation
1. Apply grease to the contact area (A) of the outboard 3. Apply 0.5-1.0 g ;(0.02-0.04 oz) of grease to the
joint and front wheel bearing. whole splined surface (A) ofthe right driveshaft.
After applying grease, remove the grease from the
NOTE: The grease helps prevent noise and splined grooves at intervals of 2-3 splines and
vibration. from the set ring groove (8) so that air can bleed
from the intermediate shaft.
B
A
4. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the

differential thoroughly with solvent or brake
2. Install a new set ring (A) onto the set ring groove cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Insert the
(8) of the left driveshaft. The right driveshaft does inboard end (A) of the driveshaft into the
not have a set ring. differential (8) or intermediate shaft (C) until the set
ring (D) locks in the groove (E).
\ B
~
E
C D
\ I
r :[}J..
(cont'd)
BACK 16-19
DrivelinelAxle
Front Driveshaft Installation (cont'd)
5. Install the outboard joint (A) into the front hub (B). 7. Install a new spindle nut (A), then tighten the nut. .
After tightening, use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder (B) against the driveshaft.
. i..
A
B 26x 1.5 mm
328N·m
~.5 ...·m. 2421b1·ftl
108N·m
(11.0 kgf·m,
6. Install the knuckle (A) onto the lower arm (B). Then 80Ibf·tt)
tighten the nuts and bolt (C) to the lower torque
specification.
8. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
front wheel, then install the front wheels.
9. Turn the front wheels by hand, and make sure there

is no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts.
10. Refill the transmission with recommended

transmission fluid if you reinstalled the right
driveshaft.
11. Check the front wheel alignment, and adjust it if

A
~@
I~ necessary (see page 18-5).
C
12x 1.25 mm
52N·m
16-20 BACK
Intermediate Shaft Removal
1. Remove the right driveshaft (see page 16-4). 5. Remove the intermediate shaft (A) from the,
differential. Hold the intermediate shaft horizontally
2. Remove the secondary H02S from the exhaust until it is clear of the differential to prevent
pipe (see page 11-245). damaging the differential oil seal (8).
3. Remove the heat shield (A).
4. Remove the flange bolt (A) and the two dowel bolts
(8).
BACK 16-21
Drivelinel Axle
Intermediate Shaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the internal snap ring (A) from the bearing
• Oil seal driver·07947~SB00100 support (B) .
• Half shaft base .07NAF-SR30101
1. Remove the set ring (A), outer seal (B), and external
snap ring (C).
o\
4. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) out ofthe
0" A
bearing support (B) using the oil seal driver, the
half shaft base, and a press.
. PRESS
2. Press the intermediate shaft (A) out of the
intermediate shaft bearing (B) using a press. Be
careful not to damage the metal rings (C) on the
intermediate shaft during disassembly.
07NAF-SR30101
16-22 BACK
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly
Exploded View
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT RING FLANGE BOLT

10x1.25mm
/
DOWEL BOLTS . 39N·m·
10x 1.25mm 14.0 kgf·m,29 Ibf·ftl
39N·m
14.0 kgf~m, 29 Ibf·ftl
BEARING SUPPORT RING
/
INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
Pack the interior

of the outer seal.
INTERMEDIATE
SHAFT BEARING
Replace.
BEARING SUPPORT
OUTER SEAL
Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK
16-23
DrivelinelAxle
Intermediate Shaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 4. Press the intermediate shaft (A) into the shaft
- Oil seal driver 07JAD-PL90100 bearing (8) using the driver and a press.
-Attachment, 52 x 55 mm 07NAD-P200100
- Driver 07749-0010000
PRESS
- Driver 07947-4630100
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during A

this procedure.
1. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry

them with compressed air. Do not wash the rubber
B
parts with solvent.
2. Press the intermediate shaft bearing (A) into the

07947-4630100
bearing support (8) using the driver, 52 x55 mm
attachment, and a press.
PRESS
5. Install, then seat the external snap ring (A) into the
groove of the intermediate shaft (8).
3. Install, then seat the internal snap ring (A) into the
groove ofthe bearing support (8).
o\ A
16-24 BACK
Intermediate Shaft Installation
6. Install a new outer seal (A) into the bearing support 1. Use solvent or brake cleaner to thoroughly clean
(8) using the oil seal driver and a press. the areas where the intermediate shaft (A) contacts
*
the transmission (differential),' and dry with
PRESS compressed air. Insert the intermediate shaft
assembly into the differential. Hold the
07JAD-PL90100 A intermediate shaft horizontally to prevent damage
to the differential oil seal (8).
Pack the interior

ofthe outer seal.
7. Install a new set ring (A) onto the set ring groove
(8) of the intermediate shaft.
2. Install the flange bolt (A) and the two dowel bolts
(8).
A
10x1.25mm
39
(4.0
B L -_ _ _ _ _ ~~\
10x1.25mm
39N·m
(4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·tt)
(cont'd)
BACK 16-25
DrivelinelAxle
Intermediate Sbaft·lnstallation Rear Driveshaft Removal
(cont'd)
Spe~ialTools Required
Driveshaft remover 07 AAD-S3VAOOO
3. Install the heat shield, and tighten the three bolts.
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the brake hose, sensor,
and harness.
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-7).
3. Lift up the Jocking tab (A) on the spindle nut (S),

then remove the nut.
8x1.2Smm
22N·m
4. Install the secondary H02S in the exhaust pipe

(see page 11-245).
5. Install the right driveshaft (see page 16-19).
16-26 BACK
4. Remove lower arm A. 6. Loosen the rear driveshaft outboard jointfromthe
rear wheel hub using a plastic hammer.
5. Remove the flange bolt (A) and separate the

knuckle from lower arm B.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-27
Drivel'inelAxle
Rear Driveshaft Removal (cont'd)
7. Pull the knuckle (A) outward, and, remove the rear 9. Remove the rear driveshaft.
driveshaft outboardjoint(B).
NOTE: When removing the outboard joint, the

knuckle is supported. Make sure not to over extend
the brake hose.
8. Use a hammer to wedge the driveshaft remover

between the inboard joint (A) and the differential
(B).
07 AAD-S3VAOOO
16-28 BACK
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the snap ring (A).

Threaded adapter, 24 x 1.5 mm 07XAe-001020A
F
Inboard Joint Side
1. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage

the boot (see page 16-6).
2. Remove the circlip (A).
5. Make a mark (B) on the bearing retainer (e), the

bearing race (0), and driveshaft (E) to identify the
position of the bearing retainer and the bearing
race on the shaft.
D c A 6. Remove the bearing race and the steel ball

bearings (F).
3. Make a mark (B) on the bearing retainer (e) and 7. Wrap the splines on the driveshaft (A) with vinyl
inboard joint (0) to identify the locations of the ball tape (B) to prevent damage to the boot.
bearings and the grooves in the inboard joint. Then
remove the inboard joint on a shop towel (E). Be
careful not to drop the ball bearings when
separating them from the inboard joint.
8. Remove the inboard boot (e). Be careful not to

damage the boot.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-29
.'
Dr-ivanne/Axle
Rear Driveshaft Disassembly (cont'd)
Outboard Joint Side 5. Carefully clamp the driveshaft in a vise.
1. Remove the boot bands. Be careful not to damage 6. Remove the outboard joint (A) using the threaded
the boot (see page 16-6). adapter and a commercially available 5/8"x 18
UNF slide hammer (B).
2. Slide the outboard boot (A) partially to the inboard
joint side. Be careful not to damage the boot. 07XAC-001020A
A·
\~
\
A
7. Remove the driveshaft from the vise.
3. Wipe off the grease to expose the driveshaft and 8. Remove the stop ring (A) from the driveshaft
the outboard joint inner race. groove (B).
4. Make a mark (A) on the driveshaft (B) at the same

position of the outboard joint end (C).
16-30 BACK
Rear Driveshaft R ---------
eassembl"
Exploded V·lew Y
,< '
~ () DOUBLE LOOP
U,oth
in the, ,i~,g"rea
_
, '",'"dod
..
oard boot set. ~
' .... ba.d
Rep"".
BANDS
'aplaoement ••lyl
rI ,SNAPRING
~GRETPJNER W
~~
BEAR'NGRACE
STEELBALL
reo /
Vi'
CIRCLIP
Replace.
INBOARD BOOT
~
in the ing~~~~ebincIUded
Use the
, , . ;, oot set.
STOP RING
DOUBLELO
(Boot band OP BANDS
Replace. replacement only)
7'"
\.
~
Use
in the ou~bease
the included
oard boot set.
OUTBO
/ ARDJOINT
(cont'd)
BACK 16-31
D,riveline/Axle
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 3. Install the steel balls (A) and the bearing retainer
Boot band tool, KD-3191 or equivalent, (B) onto the bearing race (C) by aligning the marks
commercially available (D) you made on the bearing retainer and the
bearing race.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View, as needed, during
this procedure.
Inboard Joint Side

1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damaging to the inboard boot.
4. Install the bearing onto the driveshaft (E) by

aligning the marks you made on the bearing and
the driveshaft.
5. Install the snap ring (F).
6. Pack the inboard joint with the joint grease

2. Install the inboard boot on the driveshaft,th'en included in the new driveshaft set.
remove the vinyl tape. Be careful not to damage the
inboard boot. Grease quantity
Inboard joint: 85-105 9 (3.0-3.7 oz)
~
inboard boot set.
16-32 BACK
7. Install the inboard joint onto the driveshaft by· Outboard Joint 'Side
aligning the marks (AI you made on the inboard
joint and driveshaft. 1. Wrap the splines with vinyl tape (A) to prevent
damaging to the outboard boot.
8. Install the circlip (B).

2. Install the outboard boot and the new low profile
9. Adjust the length of the driveshafts to the figure as band on the driveshilft, then remove the vinyl tape.
shown, then adjust the boots to halfway between Be careful not to damage the outboard boot
full compression and full extension. Make sure the (see page 1.6-11).
ends of the boots seat in the grooves of the
driveshaft and joint. Doing this prevents vacuum or 3. Install the newstop ring (A) in the driveshaft
too much air in the boot, preventing it from groove (B). ..'
compressing or extending properly.
Left driveshaft: 536.3-541.3 mm (21.1-21.3 in.)

Right driveshaft: 546.3-551:3 mm (21.5-21.7 in.)
I~ -=::1
t[[CJID---------j~
\)
inboard joint, then install the new boot band onto
the boot (see page 16-11).
11. Install the boot band on the other end of the boot,
and repeat step 10.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-33
D:fiveUne/Axle
Rear Driveshaft Reassembly (cont'd)
4. Pack about half ofthe greaseJncluded inthe new 6. Checkithe alignment ofth.e paint mark (A) with the
joint boot set into the driveshaft hole in the outboard joint end (B) ..
outboard joint. Insert the driveshaft (A) into the
outboard joint (B) until the stop ring (C) is closed.
7. Pack the outboard joint (A) with the remaining joint

.:, grease included in the new joint boot set.
5. To completely seat the outboardjoint, pick up the Grease quantity (total) .

driveshaft and joint, and tap them on a hard surface. Outboard joint: . 75-:95 9 (2.6-3.4 oz)
Do not use a hammer as excessive' force may
damage the drives haft. Be careful notto damage
the threaded section (A) ofthe outboard joint.
A
A outboard boot set.

outboard joint, then install the new low profile
band onto the boot (see page 16-11).
10cm
(4 in.) 9. Install the boot band on the other end ofthe boot,
and repeat step 8.
16-34 BACK
Rear Driveshaft Installation
NOTE: Before starting the installation, make sure the 4. Pull the knuckle (A) outward, and install the rear
mating surfaces of the joint and the splined section are drive shaft outboard joint (B) into the rear hub.
free of dirt or dust.
NOTE: When installing the outboard joint support,
1. Apply 1.5'""""2.0 g (0.05-0.07 oz) of grease to the the knuckle. Make sure not to over extend the brake
whole splined surface (A). After applying grease, hose.
remove the grease from the splined grooves at
intervals of2-3 splines and from the set ring
groove (B) so that air can bleed from the differential.
5. Install the flange bolt (A) onto lower arm B.
2. Replace the new set ring (A) in the set ring groove
of the differential.
12x 1.25 mm
103N·m
(10.5 kgf.m,
c 76Ibf·ft)
3. Clean the areas where the driveshaft contacts the

differential thoroughly with solvent or brake
cleaner, and dry with compressed air. Insert the
inboard end (B) of the driveshaft into the
differential (C) until the set ring locks in the groove
(D).
(cont'd)
BACK 16-35
Drivelinel Axle
Rear Driveshaft Installation (cont'd)
6. Install lower arm A. 8. Clean the mating surfaces of the brake disc and the
rear wheel, then install the rear wheels.
9. Turn the rear wheel by hand, and make sure there

is no interference between the driveshaft and
surrounding parts.
10. Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if

14x 1.5mm
103 N·m
(10.5 kgf.m,
··.A 76Ibf·ft)
7. Install a new spindle nut (A), then tighten the nut.

After tightening,. use a drift to stake the spindle nut
shoulder (8) against the driveshaft.
A
24x 1.5mm
245N·m
~.o _.'·m, ,., Ibf·ftl
12x1.5mm
108N·m
(11.0 kgf·m,
80Ibf·ft)
"6-36 BACK
Propeller Shaft Inspection
Universal Joint and Boots Propeller Shaft Runout
1. Set the parking brake, and shift the transmission to 6. Install a dial indicator with its needle on the center
the N position. of the No.1 propeller shaft or the No.2 propeller
shaft.
2. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-7).
7. Turn the other propeller shaft slowly and check the
3. Check the center support bearing (A) for excessive runout. Repeat this procedure for the other
play or rattle. If the center support has excessive propeller shaft.
play or rattles, replace the propeller shaft assembly
(see page 16-38). No. 1 Propeller Shaft Runout
4. Check the rubber portion of the mount (8) for

damage and deterioration. Ifthe boots are No.2 Propeller Shaft Runout
damaged or deteriorated, replace the propeller
shaft assembly (see page 16-38).
5. Check the universal joints for excessive play or

rattle. If the universal joints have excessive play or
rattle, replace the propeller shaft assembly
(see page 16-38).
8. If the runout on either propeller shaft exceeds the

service limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly
(see page 16-38).
BACK 16-37
DrivelinelAxle
Propeller Shaft Removal
1. Raise the vehicle on a lift (see page 1-7). 5. Remove the center support bearing mounting bolts.
2. Remove the propeller shaft protector.

shaft (8) and rear differential companion flange (C).
shaft (8) and transfer companion flange (C).
c
7. Separate the propeller shaft from the rear
4. Separate the propeller shaft from the transfer differential, then remove the propeller shaft.
assembly.
16-38 BACK
Propeller Shaft Installation
1. If you are installing a new propeller shaft, go to 5. Install the center support bearing mounting bolts.
step 2. Make sure you use new bolts.
If you reinstalling the original propeller shaft, go to
step 3.
2. Install the new propeller shaft (A) onto the rear

differential (8), by aligning the reference mark (C)
on the new propeller shaft with the factory
reference mark (D) on the companion flange (E). Do
not use the marks you made on the companion
from the removal procedure. If there are no factory
marks on the companion flange, go to step 4.
\ 10x 1.25mm
39N·m
(4.0 kgf·m, 29 Ibf·ttl
6. Install the propeller shaft (A) onto the transfer

companion flange (8) by aligning the reference
mark (C). Make sure you use new mounting bolts.
10x 1.25mm
72N·m
3. Reinstall the propeller shaft (A) to the rear

differential (8) by aligning the reference marks (C)
you made during the removal procedure.
4. Attach the propeller shaft to the rear differential

with new mounting bolts. Tighten the bolt to the
specified torque.
(cont'd)
BACK 16-39
Drive.linelAxle
Propeller Shaft Installation (cont'd)
7. Install the propeller shaft protector.
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
.12.2 kgf.m, 16lbf·ftl
8. If you installed a new propeller shaft, test-drive the

vehicle at 55 mph (88 kph) and check for noise or
vibration .
• If there is no noise or vibration, the repair is

complete .
• If there is a noise or vibration, go to step 9.
9. Remove the mounting bolts from the propeller

shaft at the rear differential companion flange.
Note the current alignment of the propeller shaft to
rear differential companion flange.
10. Rotate the propeller shaft 180 degrees from its

current alignment with the rear differential
companion flange.
11. Install new mounting bolts and tighten them to the

specified torque.
16-40 BACK
BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If steering maintenance is required)
• Improper service procedures, including incorrect removal and installation ofthe SRS, could lead to personal injury
caused by unintentional deployment ofthe airbags and/or side airbags.
• Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors when the ignition switch is ON (11),
airbags may deploy.
BACK
Steering
Power Steering
Special Tools ................................................................. 17-2
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Check ....................... 17-7
Power Assist Check ........................................... ........... 17-7
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection ................. 17-8
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-0010001 ........... 17-9
Pump Pressure Test with T/N 07406-001000A
orT/N 07406-001A101 .............................................. 17-10
Fluid Leakage Inspection ............................................. 17-11
Fluid Replacement ........................................................ 17-12
Power Steering Hose, Line, and
Pressure Switch Replacement ................................. 17-13
Pump Replacement ...................................................... 17-14
Pump Overhaul ............................................................. 17-15
* Steering Wheel Removal ............................................. 17-22
Steering Wheel Disassembly/Reassembly ................ 17-23
* Steering Wheel Installation ......................................... 17-24
* Steering Column Removal and Installation ............... 17-25
Steering Column/Tilt Telescopic Inspection .............. 17-28
Steering Lock Replacement ......................................... 17-28
Rack Guide Adjustment ............................................... 17-29
Steering Gearbox Removal ......................................... 17-30
Steering Gearbox Overhaul ......................................... 17-35
Steering Gearbox Installation ..................................... 17-51
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement .......................... 17-56
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement ...................... 17-57
Power Steering
Special Tools

CD 07HAG-SF1020A or 07HAG-SF10200 Piston Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
® 07 JAF-SH20330 Bushing Base 1
® 07LAG-SM40100 Piston Seal Ring Guide 1
CD 07LAG-SM40300 Cylinder End Seal Slider 1
® 07MAA-SL00100 Locknut Wrench, 40 mm 1
® 07MAC-SLOA202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
(j) 07NAG-SR3090A Valve Seal Ring Sizing Tool 1
® 07TAF-SZ50100 Cylinder End Seal Remover Attachment 1
® 07YAG-S2XO 100 Sleeve Seal Ring Guide 1
@ 07ZAB-S5A0100 Pulley Holder 1
® 07ZAG-S5AO 100 Sleeve Seal Ring Sizing Tool, 36 mm 1
@ 07ZAK-S7CA 100 PIS joint Adapter (Pump) 1
@ 07ZAK-S7CA200 PIS joint Adapter (Hose) 1
® 07406-001 0001·or 07406-001 OOOA PIS Pressure Gauge 1
or 07406-001A101
@ 077 49-00 10000 Driver 1
@ 07946-1870100 Attachment, 28 x 30 mm 1
tJ (j ~
CD ® ® CD ®
~ ® ~ tj ® (j) ® ® @
U ~I etJ
® @ @ ® @
~ @
17-2 BACK
DRIVER'S AIRBAG
Replacement,
page 24-146
POWER STEERING FLUID RESERVOIR
Fluid Leakage Inspection, page 17-11
Fluid Replacement, page 17-12
Power Steering Hose, Line, and
Pressure Switch Replacement, page 17-13
POWER STEERING PUMP

Drive Belt Inspection, page 4-31
Pump Pressure Test
with T/N 07406-0010001, page 17-9
Pump Pressure Test
with T/N 07406-001000A or 07406-001A101,
page 17-10 STEERING WHEEL
Pump Replacement, page 17-14 Steering Wheel Removal,
Pump Overhaul, page 17-15 page 17-22
Steering Wheel
Disassembly/Reassembly,
page 17-23
Steering Wheel
STEERING COLUMN
Steering Column Removal and Installation,
page 17-25 .
Steering Column/Tilt Telescopic Inspection/
Adjustment, page 17-28
Steering Lock Replacement, page 17-28
POWER STEERING GEARBOX

Rack Guide Adjustment, page 17-29
Steering Gearbox Removal, page 17-30
Steering Gearbox Overhaul, page 17-35
Steering Gearbox Installation, page 17-51
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement, page 17-56
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement, page 17-57
BACK 17-3
. ",1> .. ,
Power'Steering
Find the symptom in the chart below, and do the related procedures in the order listed until you find the cause.
Symptom Procedure(s) Also check for

Hard steering Troubleshoot the system (see page 17-6). • Modified suspension
• Damaged suspension
• Tire sizes, tire varieties,
and air pressure
Assist Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-29). Front wheel alignment
(excessively (see page 18-5)
light stee~ing
at high speed)
Shock or 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-29).
vibration when 2. Check the drive belt for slippage (see page 4-31).
the steering 3. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with TIN 07406-
wheel is 0010001 (see page 17-9) or TIN 07406-001000A or TIN 07406-
turned to full 001A101 (see page 17-10).
lock 4. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see page 17-35).
Steering 1. Check cylinder lines for deformation.
wheel will not 2. Check the ball joints for binding.
return 3. Check wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
smoothly 4. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see step 2 on page 17-36) ..
Uneven or 1. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-29).
rough steering 2. Check the drive belt (see page 4-31).
3. Check for low or erratic engine idle speed (see page 11-338).
4. Check for. air in the powE1r steering system due to air entering
inlet side of pump.
5. Check for low fluid level in the power steering reservoir due to
possible leaks in system (see page 17-12).
6. Overhaul the steering gearbox (see step 2 on page 17-36).
Steering 1. Check the drive belt (see page 4-31).
wheel kicks 2. Check the power steering pump fluid pressure with TIN 07406-
back during 0010001 (see page 17-9) or TIN 07406-001000A or TIN 07406-
wide turns 001A101 (see page 17-10).
Humming 1. Check when the noise occurs: Pump pressure
noise from the • Ifthe noise is heard 2-3 minutes after starting the engine in
power cold weather, this is normal.
steering • If the noise is heard when the wheel is turned with the vehicle
system stopped, this is normal due to the fluid pulsation.
2. Check for the high-pressure hose touching the subframe or body.
3. Check for automatic transmission .converter noise (AfT).
4. Check for air bubbles in the power steering fluid, leak on inlet
side of pump.
5. Check for particle contamination of fluid andrestricted filter in
the reservoir;
Power 1. Check for loose steering components (tie-rod and ball joints).
steering rack Tighten or replace as necessary.
rattle or 2. Check the steering column shaft for wobbling. If the steering
chattering column wobbles, replace the steering column assembly
(see page 17-25).
3. Check the rack guide adjustment (see page 17-29).
4. Check the power steering pump pulley:
• Ifthe pulley is loose, tighten it (see step 46 on page 17-21).
• Ifthe pump shaft is loose, replace the Qump (see page 17-14).
17-4 BACK
Symptom : ! ' Procedure(s) Also check for
Hissing from the • Check the fluid level. If low, fill the reservoir to the proper level Air in the PIS fluid
power steering and check for leaks (see page 17-11).
system/foaming • Check the reservoir for leaks.
fluid • Check for crushed inlet hose or loose hose clamp allowing airintd
the suction side ofthe system (see page 17-11).
• Check the power steering pump shaft oil seal for leaks.
Noise from the • Compare the pump noise at normal operating temperature to • PIS pump pressure
power steering another· like vehicle (pump noise for 2-3 minutes after starting • Air in the PIS fluid
pump the engine in cold weather is normal).
• Remove and inspect the pump for wear and damage (see page
17-14). .' , ','
Squeaking from Check the drive belt (see page 4-31).

the power
steeri~g pumJ:>.-
Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks from the top of the valve body'unit. Overhaul the valve
the steering body unit (see step 19 on page 17-39).
gearbox • Fluid leaks from the driver's side boot. Replace the valve oil seal
on the pinion shaft. Replace the cylinder end seal on the gearbox'
side.
• Fluid leaks from the passenger's side boot. Replace the cylinder
end seal on the cylinder side.
• Fluid leaks from pinion shaft near the lower steering joint bolt.
Overhaul the' valve body unit (see step 19 on page 17-39).
• Fluid leaks from the steering damping valve covers orithe valve
body unit. Replace the valve housirtg.
Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks,from the cylinder line connections (flare riuts). Tighten
the power the connection and retest (see page 17-13).
steering line • Fluid leaks from a damaged cylinder line. Replace the cylinder line
(seepage 17-13).
• Fluid leaks from the pump outlet hose or return line fitting on the
valve body unit (flare nuts); Tighten the fitting and retest. If it still
leaks, replace the hose, the line, or valve body unit as necessary.
Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks from the front oil seal. Replace the front oil seal.
the'power • Fluid,leaks from the power steering pump housing. Replace the
steering pump leaking O-rings or seals (see page 17-11), and if necessary replace
the power steering pump (see page 17-14). -
Fluid leaks from • Fluid leaks from around the reservoir cap because fluid level is too
the power high. Drain the reservoirto the proper level. If the fluid is aerated
steering check for an air leak on the inlet side of the pump.
reservoir • Fluid leaks from reservoir. Check for the reservoir for cracks and
replace as necessary. ';
Fluid leaks from • Check the fitting for loose bolts. If t!'le bolts are tight, replace the
the power fitting O-ring.
steering pump • Fluid leaks at the swagged joint. Replace the pump outlet hose.
outlet hose
(high-QI"essure)
Fluid leaks from Check the hose for damage, deterioration, or improper assembly. !
the power Replace or repair as necessary.

steering pump
inlet hose
(low-pressure)
BACK 17-5
Power Steering
Hard Steering 7. Adjusfthe rack guide (see page 17-29), and retest.
1. Check the power assist (see page 17-7). Is the steering OK?
Is the initial turning load more than 29 N (3.0 kgf, YES-Repair is completed~.
6.6Ibf) ? NO-Faulty gearbox.•
YES...,..Go to step 2. 8. Check the outlet and return hoses and lines
NO-Power assist is OK.• between the pump,and the gearbox for clogging
and deformation.
2. Connectthe special tools and PIS pressure gauge
TIN 07406-0010001 (see page 17-9), or TIN 07406- Are the lines clogged or deformed?
001000AorT/N 07406c001A101 (see page 17-10) to
the pump. YES-Repair or replace the lines.•
NO-Faulty valve body unit..
3. Measure steady-state fluid pressure from the pump
at idle. 9. Disassemble the pump (see page 17-15).
Is the pressure 1,470 kPa (15 kgflcni, 213 psi) or 10. Check the pressure control valve for smooth
less? movement and leaks (see step 16 on page 17-17).
YES-Go to step 4. Is the pressure control valve OK?

NO-Go to step 8.
YES-Faulty pump assembly.•
4. Measure the pump relief pressure at idle. NO-Faulty pressure control valve .•
Is the pressure 8,150- 8,B50kPa (83-e90 kgflcni, 11. Check the cylinder lines for deformation (see page
1,180- 1,280 psi) or more? 17-13).
YES-Go to step 5. Are any of the lines deformed?

NO-Go to step 9.
, YES-Replace the deformed line .•
5. With a spring scale, measure the.power assist in NO-Go to step 12.
both directions, to the left and to the right.
.\
12. Check for a bent rack shaft or misadjusted ra.ck
Are the two measurements within 5.0 N (0.51 kgf, guide (too tight).
1.12Ibf) of each other?
Is the.rack shaft bent or the rack guide adjusted
YES-Go to step 6. too tight?
NO-Go to step 11.
YES-Replace the rack shaft, or readjust the rack
6. Measure the fluid pressure with both pressure guide.•
gauge valves open (if so equipped), while turning NO-Faulty valve body unit..
the steering wheel fully to the left and fully to the
right.
Is the pressure 8,150- 8,850 kPa (83- 90 kgflcni,

1,180- 1,280 psi) or more?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Faulty gearbox.•
17-6 BACK
Steering Wheel Rotational Play Power Assist Check
Check
NOTE: This test should be done with original equipment
tires and wheels at the correct tire pressure.
1. Turn the front wheels to the straight ahead position.
1. Check the power steering fluid level (see page
2. Measure how far you can turn the steering wheel 17-12).
left and right without moving the front wheels.
2. Start the engine, let it idle, and turn the steering
• Ifthe play is within the limit, the gearbox and wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to warm up
linkages are OK. the fluid.
• If the play exceeds the limit, adjust the rack guide
(see page 17-29). Ifthe play is still excessive after 3. Attach a commercially available spring scale to the
rack guide adjustment, inspect the steering steering wheel. With the engine idling and the
linkage and gearbox (see page 17-8). vehicle on a clean, dry floor, pull the scale as
shown and read it as soon as the tires begin to turn.
Rotational play: 0-10 mm (0-0.39 in.)
• If the scale reads no more than the specification,
the gearbox and pump are OK.
• If the scale reads more than the specification,
troubleshoot the steering system (see page 17-6).
Initial turning load: 29 N (3.0 kgf, 6.6 Ibf)
BACK 17-7
Power 'Steering
Steering Linkage and Gearbox Inspection
STEERING COLUMN
Inspect for loose
mounting hardware.
DUST SEAL
Inspect for damage
and deterioration.
STEERING GEARBOX
Inspect for loose mounting hardware. STEERING JOINTS
GEARBOX MOUNT CUSHION Check for loose joint bolt,
Inspect for damage and deterioration. or faulty movement.
BOOT
Inspect for damage and deterioration.
TIE-ROD LOCKNUT
Check for loose locknut.
BALL JOINT BOOT

Inspect for damage
and deterioration.
TIE-ROD END BALL JOINT

Inspect for faulty movement and damage.
GEARBOX BRACKETS .
17-8 BACK
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 07406·0010001
Special Tools Required 5. Fully open the shut-off valve (A).

• PIS joint adapter (pump) 07ZAK-S7CA100
• PIS joint adapter (hose) 07ZAK-S7CA200
• PIS pressure gauge 07406-0010001
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.
B
17-12).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the

pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the PIS joint adapter (pump) on the pump
outlet (8) with the PIS joint outlet plate.
6. Fully open the pressure control valve (8).
7. Start the engine and let it idle.
8. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several

times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
158 "F (70 "C).
9. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the

engine is idling. Ifthe pump is in good condition,
the gauge should read no more than 1,470 kPa
6x 1.0mm
11 N·m (15 kgf/cm 2, 213 psi).
(1.1 kgf·m, If it reads high, check for:
8.0Ibf·ftl
• Clogged or deformed feed or return line between
the pump and the gearbox .
• Clogged valve body unit.
10. Close the shut-off valve, then close the pressure

control valve gradually until the pressure gauge
3. Connect the PIS joint adapter (hose) to the PIS needle is stable. Read the pressure.
pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose
to the PIS joint adapter (hose). INOTICE I
Do not keep the shut-off valve closed more
4. Install the PIS pressure gauge to the PIS joint than 5 seconds or the pump could be
adapter (pump). damaged by overheating.
11. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully.

Ifthe pump is in good condition, the gauge should
read at least 8,150-8,850 kPa (83-90 kgf/cm2,
1,180-1,280 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
BACK .17-9
Power Steering
Pump Pressure Test with TIN 07406·001000A or TIN 07406·001A101'
Special Tools Required 5. Open the shut-off valve (A) fully.

• PIS joint adapter (pump) 07ZAK-S7CA 100
• PIS joint adapter (hose) 07ZAK-S7CA200
• PIS pressure gauge 0740S-001000A or 0740S-001A101
Check the fluid pressure as follows to determine

whether the trouble is in the pump or gearbox.

17-12).
2. Disconnect the pump outlet hose (A) from the

pump outlet with care so as not to spill the power
steering fluid on the frame and other parts, then
install the PIS joint adapter (pump) on the pump
outlet (8) with the PIS joint outlet plate.
S. Start the engine and let it idle.
7. Turn the steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several

times to warm the fluid to operating temperature at
158 "F (70 "C).
8. Measure steady-state fluid pressure while the

engine is idling. If the pumpis in good condition,
the gauge should read no more than 1,470 kPa
(15 kgf/cm2, 213 psi).
If it reads high, check for:
•. Clogged or deformed feed or return line between

the pump and the gearbox.
• Clogged valve body unit.
9. Close the shut-off valve gradually and read the

pressure.
'07ZAK-S7CA100
INOTICE I
Do not keep the shut"off valve closed more
3. Connect the PIS joint adapter (hose) to the PIS than 5 seconds or the pump could be
pressure gauge, then connect the pump outlet hose damaged by overheating.
to the PIS joint adapter (hose).
10. Immediately open the shut-off valve fully.
4. Install the PIS pressure gauge to the PIS joint Ifthe pump is in good condition, the gauge should
adapter (pump). read at least 8,150-8,850 kPa (83-90 kgf/cm2,
1,180-1,280 psi). A low reading means pump
output is too low for full assist. Repair or replace
the pump.
17-10 BACK
Fluid Leakage Inspection
PUMP ASSEMBLY GEARBOX and VALVE BODY UNIT

Check for leaks at the pump Check for leaks at the mating surface
"",, ;Ole~d outletflttio9" and flare nut connections.
HOSES and LINES

Inspect hoses for damage, leaks, interference and twisting.
Inspect fluid lines for damage, rusting and leakage.
Check for leaks at hose and line joints, and connections.
BACK 17-11
Power Steering
Fluid Replacement
Check the reservoir (A) at regular intervals, and add the 1. Remove the reservoir from its holder. Raise the
recommended fluid as necessary. Always use Acura reservoir, then disconnect the return hose (A) to
Power Steering Fluid. Using any other type of power drain the reservoir. Take care not to spill the fluid
steering fluid or automatic transmission fluid can cause on the body and parts. Wipe off any spilled fluid at
increased wear and poor steering in cold weather. once.
NOTE: Ifthe fluid is contaminated, the screen in the NOTE: Inspect the reservoir screen for any debris. If
reservoir may be partially blocked. Replace the the reservoir screen is clogged, replace the
reservoir if necessary. reservoir.
System capacity:
0.9 L (0.96 US. qt) at disassembly
Reservoir capacity:
0.30 L (0.32 US. qt)
2. Connect a hose (8) of suitable diameter to the

disconnected return hose, and put the hose end in a
suitable container.
3. Start the engine, let it run at idle, and turn the

steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several times.
When fluid stops running out of the hose, shut off
the engine. Discard the fluid.
4. Reinstall the return hose on the reservoir.
5. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (C).
6. Start the engine and run it at fast idle, then turn the
steering from lock-to-Iock several times to bleed air
from the system.
7. Recheck the fl uid level and add some if necessary.

Do not fill the reservoir beyond the upper level line.
8. Ifthe fluid is contaminated, dark, or discolored,

repeat the procedure as necessary.
17-12 BACK
Power Steering Hose, Line, and Pressure Switch Replacement
Note these items during installation:

• Connect each hose to the corresponding line'securely until it contacts the stop on the line. Install the clamp or
adjustable clamp at the specified distance from the hose end as shown.
• Check all clamps for deterioration or deformation; replace the clamps with new ones if necessary.
• Add the recommended power steering fluid to the specified level on the reservoir and check for leaks.
ADJUSTABLE HOSE CLAMP (AI HOSE CLAMP (BI
2.5-5.5mm
(0.10-0.22 in.1
2.5-5.5mm 2.0-4.0mm
(0.10-0.22 in.1 (0.08-0.16 in.1
POWER STEERING
11 N·m PRESSURE SWITCH
(1.1 kgf·m. 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m. 8.7 Ibf·ttl
8.0Ibf·ttl
RETURN LINE JOINT

17x 1.5 mm
28 N·m (2.9 kgf·m. 21 Ibf·ttl
CYLINDER LINES
34N·m
INLET LINE
RETURN HOSE
BACK 17-13
Power Steering
Pump Replacement
1. Place a suitable container under the vehicle. 9. Tighten the pump mounting bolts to the specified
torque.
2. Drain the power steering fluid from the reservoir
(see page 17-12). 10. Install the drive belt (A).
3. Remove the drive belt (A) from the pump pulley Note these items during belt installation:
(see page 4-31). • Make sure that the belt is properly positioned on
the pulleys (B).
" 11 ~.m 11.1 kgf·m, 8.0 Ibf·tt)
• Do not get power steering fluid or grease on any
1~ ~B parts around the power steering pump, drive belt,
or pulley faces. Clean off any fluid or grease
before installation.
l B
4. Cover the auto-tensioner, alternator, andAiC

compressor with several shop towels to protect
them from spilled power steering fluid. Disconnect
the pump inlet hose (B) and pump outlet hose (C)
from the pump (D), and plug them. Take care not to
spill the fluid on the body or parts. Wipe off any 11. Fill the reservoir to the upper level line (see page
spilled fluid at once. Do not turn the steering wheel 17-12).
with the pump removed.
5. Remove the pump mounting bolts (E).
6. Cover the opening of the pump with a piece of tape

to prevent foreign material from entering the pump.
7. Connectthe pump inlet hose and pump outlet hose

onto the new pump with new O-ring (F).
8. Loosely install the pump in the pump bracket with

the mounting bolts, then tighten the pump fittings
securely.
17-14 BACK
I-g·'
Pump Overhaul
Exploded View
Replace the pump as an assembly if the parts indicated with asterisk (*) are worn or damaged.
8x 1.25 mm
20N·m 13x 1.9 mm
(2.0 kgf·m, 14 Ibf·ft) O-RING ------ 6 x 1.0 mm
Rep~ 11 N·m (1.1 kgf·m, 8.0 Ibf·ft)
'" ------ INLET JOINT
RUBBER SEAL
(Black color)
Replace.
*VANES
/ (11 plates)
*PUMPCOVER
'3X,.t
O-RING
Replace.
rl(
! 1/
* PUMP HOUSING CAP
fJvI~~:~o~!~L
Replace.
29N·m . *ROLL PIN
(3.0 kgf·m, 22 Ibf·ft) *CAMRING
~e * ROTOR
DRIVESHAFT
BALL BEARING
PULLEY NUT
VALV~
64N·m
(6.5 kgf·m,
* PRESSURE CONTROL 47Ibf·ft)
VALVE SPRING
C---'.PRESSURE CONTROL /
.__________0
167 x 18 mm O-RING
Re'p Iace'.
~--* 49
~
PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE CAP
N·m (5.0 kgf·m, 36 Ibf·ft)
(cant'd)
BACK 17-15
Power'Steering
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the inlet joint and O-ring.

• Attachment, 28 x 30 mm 07946-1870100
• Driver 07749-0010000 5. Remove the pressure control valve cap, O-ring,
• Pulley holder 07ZAB-S5A0100 valve spring, and pressure control valve.
Disassembly 6. Remove the pump housing cap, O-ring, and pump

preload spring.
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during the
following procedure. 7. Remove the pump cover, O-ring, and pump cover
seals.
1. Drain the fluid from the pump (see page 17-12).
8. Pull out the roll pin.
2. Remove the power steering pump (see page 17-14).
9. Remove the outer case, cam ring, rotor, vanes, and
3. Hold the steering pump (A) in a vise with soft jaws side plate.
(B), hold the pulley (e) with the pulley holder (D),
and remove the pulley nut (E) and pulley. Be careful 10. Remove the rubber seal and slipper seal from the
notto damage the pump housing with the jaws of outer case.
the vise.
11. Remove the O-rings from the bottom of the
housing.
12. Remove the. 40 mm internal snap ring, then remove

the drives haft by tapping the shaft end with a
plastic hammer.
13. Remove the seal from the pump housing.
17~16 BACK
Inspection 17. Attach a hose (A) to the end ofthe pressure control
valve (8) as shown. Then submerge the pressure
14. Check the pressure control valve for wear, burrs, control valve in a container of power steering fluid
and other damage to the edges of the grooves in or solvent (C), and blow in the hose.
the valve.
• If air bubbles leak through the valve at less than
98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14.2 psi), replace the pump
as an assembly. The pressure control valve is not
available separately .
• If the pressure control valve is OK, set it aside for
reassembly later.
d1J~ooffiDJ
c
-~ -~-:--- B
- 0-
15. Inspect the bore of the pressure control valve on
the pump housing for scratches and wear. - -
16. Slip the pressure control valve back in the pump

housing, and check that it moves in and out
smoothly. If OK, go to step 17; if not, replace the
pump as an assembly. The pressure control valve 18. Inspectthe ball bearing by rotating the outer race
is not available separately. slowly. If you feel any play (axial or radial) or
roughness, remove the faulty ball bearing (A), and
install a new one (8).
19. Inspect each part shown with an asterisk in the

Exploded View; if any of them are worn or
damaged, replace the pump as an assembly.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-17
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul (cont'd)
Reassembly 23. Coat the new 23.8 mm D-ring (A) with power
steering fluid, then position it on the bottom (B) of
20. Install the new pump seal (A) (with its grooved side the pump housing.
facing in) intothe pump housing (B) by hand, then
drive it in using the driver until the seal is fully
seated in the pump housing. Do not apply more
than 1,370 N (140 kgf, 3081bf) of pressure.
07749-0010000
07946-1870100
24. Coat the new cover seals (A) and new 13.0 mm
D-ring (B) with power steering fluid, then position
them into the grooves on the cover (C).
NDTE: Be careful not to install the inlet joint D-ring

because they are same size.
21. Position the pump driveshaft (A) in the pump
housing, then press it in with the appropriate size
socket wrench (B) as shown.
22. Install the 40 mm internal snap ring (C) with its

radiused edge facing out.
17-18 BACK
25. Install the outer case (A) by aligning the slot (B) 28. Install the cam ring (A) by aligning the slot (B) with
inside the outer case with the cover roll pin hole (e). the slot (e) in the outer case.
Be sure that the tapered side (0) of outer case is
facing up.
D
A
29. Insert the roll pin (0) into the slots between the cam
ring and outer case, then push the roll pin into the
26. Apply power steering fluid to the rubber seal (E) set hole (E).
(black), and install it in the slot (F) of the outer case.
30. Install the rotor (A) in the cam ring (B).
27. Apply power steering fluid to the slipper seal (G)
(white), and install it on top of the rubber seal you
just installed.
B
D
31. Set the 11 vanes (e) in the grooves in the rotor.

Make sure that the gold color ends (0) of the vanes
are in contact with the sliding surface of the cam
ring.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-19
Power Steering
Pump Overhaul (cont'~)
32. Place the side plate.(A) on the cam ring,. and align 35. Align the bolt holes in the cover (A) with the
the roll pin set hole (B) with the roll pin (C). threaded holes in the pump housing. Install the
flange bolts loosely first, then torque the flange
bolts in a criss-cross pattern in two or more steps.
8x 1.25mm
20N·m
33. Coat the new O-ring (0) with power steering fluid,
then position it into the groove on the side plate.
36. Push in the cam ring (A) from the pump housing
34. Install the pump housing (A) over the cover cap hole (B) with a flat-tip screwdriver to make sure
assembly (B). the cam ring is fully seated against the outer case.
17-20 BACK
37. Install the pump preload spring (A) in the pump 44. Coat the new O-ring (A) with power steering fluid,
housing. and install it on the inlet joint (B).
B
i A
~' .~
f;!I~~9N.m (3.0 kgf·m, 22 Ibf·ft)
38. Coat the new 12.7 mm O-ring (B) with power

steering fluid, and install it on the pump housing
cap (e). 45. Install the inlet joint on the pump housing.
39. Install the pump housing cap on the pump housing, 46. Install the pulley (A), then loosely install the pulley
and tighten it to the specified torque. nut (B). Hold the steering pump in a vise with soft
jaws (C). Be careful not to damage the pump
40. Install the pressure control valve spring (A) in the housing with the jaws of the vise.
pump housing.
B
64N·m
(6.5 kgf.m,
471bf·ftl
D
49N·m
(5.0 kgf·m,
36lbf·ftl
47. Hold the pulley with the pulley holder, and tighten
41. Coat the pressure control valve (B) with power the pulley nut to the specified torque.
steering fluid, and install it in the pump housing.
48. Check that the pump turns smoothly by turning the
42. Coatthe new 16.7 mm O-ring (e) with power pulley. If it turns hard, loosen the four flange bolts
steering fluid, and install it on the pressure control on the cover, then retighten them as in step 35, and
valve cap (D). check the pump again.
43. Install the pressure control valve cap on the pump

housing, and tighten it to the specified torque.
BACK 17-21
Power 'Steering
Steering Wheel Removal
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Install a commercially available steering wheel
SRS component locations (see page 24-12),and the puller (A) on the steering wheel (8). Free the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before steering wheel from the steering column shaft by
doing repairs or service. turning the pressure bolt (e) ofthe puller.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the Note these items when removing the steering
audio and the navigation system (if equipped), then wheel:
write down the audio presets. • Do not tap on the steering wheel or the steering
column shaft when removing the steering wheel.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then • If you thread the puller bolts (D) into the wheel
disconnect the negative cable from the battery. hub more than five threads, the bolts will hit the
cable reel and damage it. To prevent this, install
3. Align the front wheels straight ahead, then remove a pair of jam nuts five threads up on' each puller
the driver's airbag from the steering wheel bolt.
(see page 24-146).
4. Disconnect the cable reel subharness connector (A).
A
7. Remove the steering wheel puller, then remove the
5. Loosen the steering wlleel bolt (8). steering wheel bolt and steering wheel from the
steering column.
17-22 BACK
Steering Wheel DisassemblyIReassembly
AUDIO REMOTE CABLE REEL

SUBHARNESS STEERING WHEEL
SWITCH / DOWNSHIFT (-I SWITCH
~ STEERING WHEEL
. UPSHIFT (+1 SWITCH
/
STEERING WHEEL
REAR COVER
/
STEERING WHEEL
TRIM
~WHEEL~ .
ACCESS PANEL
MULTI-INFORMATION
LID SWITCH·
BACK 17-23
Steering Wheel Installation
1. Before installing the steering wheel, make sure the 3. Install the steering wheel bolt (A), and tighten it to
front wheels are aligned straight ahead, then center the specified torque. Connect the cable reel
the cable reel (A). Do this by first rotating the cable subharness connector (B). Make sure the wire
reel clockwise until it stops. Then rotate it harness is routed and fastened properly.
counterclockwise about three full turns. The arrow
mark (B) on the cable reel label should point
straight up.
B A
A
39N·m
(4.0 kgf·m,
29lbf·ft,
4. Install the driver's airbag, and confirm that the

system is operati~g properly (see page 24-146).
5. Finish the installation, and note these items:
2. Position the two tabs (A) of the turn signal o Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator
canceling sleeve (B) as shown. Install the steering should come on for about 6 seconds and then go
wheel on to the steering column shaft, making sure off.
the steeringWheel hub (C) engages the pins (D) of . o Enter the anti-theft code for the audio and the
the cable reel and tabs ofthe turn'signal canceling navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
sleeve. Do not tap on the steering wheel or steering audio presets.
column shaft when installing the steering wheel. o Set the clock.
o Verify cruise control, audio remote, navigation
D guide and turn signal switch operation.
o Make sure the steering wheel is centered.
17-24 BACK
Steering Column Removal and Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. Remove the steering joint cover (A).
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before
doing repairs or service.
Removal
INOTICE I
Be careful not to pull the bracket (A) on the front side of
steering column out of its normal position.
If the bracket accidentally comes out, replace the
steering column as an assembly.
Normal position
7. Release the tilt/telescopic lock lever, and adjust the

steering column to the full tilt up position, and to
the full telescopic in position.
8. Tighten the tilt/telescopic lock lever.
9. Hold the lower slide shaft (A) on the column with a

piece of wire (B) between the joint yoke (e) of the
lower slide shaft and joint yoke (0) of the upper
Out of position shaft to prevent the slider shaft from pulling out.

audio and the navigation system (if equipped), then
write down the audio presets.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then

disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
3. Remove the driver's airbag assembly and the 10. Release the tilt/telescopic lock lever, and adjust the
steering wheel (see page 17-22). steering column to the full telescopic out position,
then tighten the tilt/telescopic lock lever.
(see page 20-102). NOTE: Do not release the tilt/telescopic lock lever
when removing the steering column from the
5. Remove the column covers (see page 20-107). frame.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-25
Power Steering
Steering Column Removal and Installation (co nt'd)
11. Disconnect the wire harness connectors from the combination switch assembly and cable reel (A).
\ B
8x 1.25mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf.ft)
12. Remove the combination switch assembly from the steering column shaft by removing the three screws (B).
13. Disconnect the connectors from the ignition switch, and release the wire harness clips from the steering column.
14. Remove the steering joint bolt (e), then disconnect the steering joint (D) from the pinion shaft.
15. Remove the steering column (E) by removing the attaching nuts and bolts. Ifthe lower slide shaft (F) is removed,
slip it into the upper shaft (G) by aligning the paint or stamped marks (H).
16. Remove the center guide (I) (if equipped), and discard it. The center guide is for factory assembly only.
17-26 BACK
Installation 4. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the
groove (B) around the pinion shaft, and loosely
1. Install the steering column in the reverse order of install the joint bolt (C). Be sure that the joint bolt is
removal, and note these items: securely in the groove in the pinion shaft. Pull on
the steering joint to make .sure that the steering
o Make sure the wires are not caught or pinched by joint is fully seated. Tighten the steering jointbolt
any parts. to the specified torque.
o Take care not to let the sliding capsules fall out of
position during column installation. B
A
2. Center the steering rack within its stroke in steering
joint connection.
3. With the rack in the straight ahead driving position,

cut the wire (A) and slip the lower end of the
steering joint onto the pinion shaft (B) in the range C
shown. 8x 1.25mm
28N·m
(2.9 kgf·m, 21 Ibf.ftl
5. Install the steering joint cover (A).
7. Install the column covers (see page 20-107).
8. Install the driver's dashboard undercover (see page

20-102).
9. Connect the negative battery cable.
o Turn the ignition switch ON (II); the SRS indicator

should come on for about 6 seconds and then go
off.
o Enter the anti-theft code for the audio and the
navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
audio presets.
o Set the clock.
o Verify cruise control, audio remote, navigation
guide, and turn signal switch operation.
o Make sure the steering wheel is centered.
BACK 1'7-27
Power Steering
Steering Column/Tilt/Telescopic Steering Lock Replacement

Inspection
1. Remove the steering column (see page 17-25).
• Check the steering column ball bearing (A) and the 2. Center-punch each ofthe two shear bolts, and drill
steering joint bearings (B) for play and proper the heads ofthe bolts off with a 5 mm (3/16 in.) drill
movement. If any bearing is noisy or has excessive bit. Be careful not to damage the switch body when
play, replace the steering column as an assembly. removing the shear bolts.
• Check the lower side shaft (C) for smooth movement
in and out. If the lower slide shaft is removed, slip it
into the upper shaft by aligning the paint or stamped
marks (D). If it sticks or binds, replace the steering
column as an assembly.
• Check the sliding capsules (E) for distortion or
breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace
the steering column as an assembly.
• Check the tilt mechanism and telescopic mechanism
for movement and damage.
• Check the absorbing plates (F) for distortion or
breakage. If there is distortion or breakage, replace
the steering column as an assembly.
3. Remove the shear bolts from the switch body.
4. Install the switch body without the key inserted.
5. Loosely tighten the new shear bolts.
6. Insert the ignition key, and check for proper

operation of the steering wheel lock and that the
ignition key turns freely.
7. Tighten the shear bolts (A) until the hex heads (B)
twist off.
LJI]lllllllm
B
!
8. Register the immobilizer control unit-receiver
(see page 22-341), and make sure the immobilizer
system works properly.
17-28 BACK
Rack Guide Adjustment
Special Tools Required 4. Tighten the rack guide screw (A) to 25 N·m
Locknut wrench, 40 mm 07MAA-SL00100 (2.5 kgf·m, 18Ibf·ft), then loosen it.
1. Set the wheels in the straight ahead position. 15°±5°
2. Loosen the rack guide screw locknut (A) with the

locknut wrench, then remove the rack guide screw
(B).
B
25N·m
(2.5 kgf·m,
18Ibf·ft)
5. Retighten the rack guide screw to 8 N·m (0.8 kgf·m,

6 Ibf·ft), then back it off to the specified angle.
Specified return angle: 15 0±5 °
6. Hold the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench,

and tighten the locknut (B) by hand until it's fully
3. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw seated.
(A), and apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or
Loctite 5699) to the middle of the threads (B). 7. Install the locknut wrench on the locknut, and hold
Loosely install the rack guide screw on the steering the rack guide screw stationary with a wrench.
gearbox. Tighten the locknut to the specified torque.
8. Check for unusual steering effort through the

complete turning range.
9. Check the steering wheel rotation play (see page

17-7) and the power assist (see page 17-7).
\ B
BACK 17-29
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Removal
Special Tools Required 9. Remove the steering joint bolt (A), and disconnect
Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SLOA202 the steering joint by moving the steering joint (B)
toward the column. Hold the lower slide shaft (C)
Note these items during removal: on the column with a piece of wire (D) between the
• Using solvent and a brush, wash any oil and dirt off joint yoke (E) on the lower slide shaft to the joint
the valve body unit, its lines, and the end of the yoke on the upper shaft (see step 9 on page 17-25).
gearbox. Blow dry with compressed air.
C
• Be sure to remove the steering wheel before
disconnecting the steering joint. Damage to the cable
reel can occur.
o
1. Drain the power steering fluid (see page 17-12).

3. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF, then

disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
4. Raise the front of vehicle, and support it with safety

stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
5. Remove the front wheels. 10. Remove the center guide (A) (if equipped), and
discard it. The center guide is for factory assembly
6. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22). only.
A
7. Remove the driver'S dashboard undercover
(see page 20-102).
8. Remove the steering joint cover (A).
17-30 BACK
11. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the 12 mm nut (B), 15. Loosen the adjustable hose clamp (A), and
and loosen the nut. disconnect the return hose (B).
E
12. Separate the tie-rod ball joint and knuckle using the
ball joint remover (see page 18-11). 16. Remove the inlet line clamp bolt (C).
13. Remove the air cleaner housing (A) (see page 17. Loosen the 18 mm flare nut (D), and disconnect the
11-394). inlet line (E).
18. Remove the 10 mm flange bolt (A) from the driver's

side ofthe steering gearbox.
14. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay box (B)

(see page 22-61).
(cont'd)
BACK 17-31
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Removal (cont'd)
19. Disconnect the return line holder (A), and remove 22. Remove the PIS heat shield (A).
the return line clamp bolt (B).
23. Remove the 10 mm flange bolt (A) and washer (B)

from the driver's side ofthe steering gearbox.
20. Remove the pump outlet hose clamp (A) from the
steering gearbox.
24. Remove the flange bolts (C), then remove the

21. Disconnect the return hose clips (B). stabilizer bar bushing holder (D) (see page 18-22).
17-32 BACK
I· g.'
25. Remove the 10 mm flange bolts (A) and washer (B) 28. Remove the gearbox brackets (A).
from the passenger's side of the steering gearbox.
29. Move the steering gearbox toward the front, and

26. Remove the flange bolts (e), then remove the remove the pinion shaft grommet (A) from the top
stabilizer bar bushing holder (D) (see page 18-22). of the valve housing.
27. Remove the steering gearbox bracket mounting

bolts (A) from the both sides of the subframe.
A A
30. Apply vinyl tape (B) to the splines on the pinion

shaft.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-33
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Removal (cont'd)
31. Carefully move the steering gearbox and tie-rods

as an assembly toward the front side until the
pinion shaft (A) clears the wheelwell opening on
the frame.
32. Remove the steering gearbox (A) through the

wheelwell opening on the driver's side.
33. After removing the steering gearbox, make sure

that no power steering fluid gets on the gearbox
mount cushions, gearbox housing, surface of the
front subframe. Wipe off any spilled fluid at once.
17-34 BACK
Steering Gearbox Overhaul
Exploded View
FLANGE NUTS
25N·m
(2.5 kgf·m,
18lbf·ftl
SNAP RING
/RePlace. .
FLANGE NUTS
34N·m SLEEVE SEAL RINGS
(3.5 kgf·m, 25 Ibf·ftl ~RePlace.
CYLINDER LINE B
~
:::l SLEEVE
VALVE HOUSING .
~~
~
V VALVE OIL SEAL

Replace.
~
VALVE OIL SEAL ~
Replace. ~ WAVE WASHER
~-----VALVE SEAL RING
ROLLER BEARING
~--- Replace.
CYLINDER END SEAL
PINION SHAFT
<::=>---- O-RING
Replace.
Replace. BACKUP RING
~
~PI'" GEARBOX
~\~
HOUSING " RACK GUIDE
o \ ~~:~\ m ~~~ LOCKNUT
15
~ ~~~CKGUIDESCREW
fl'~~~~o ~ ~ DISCWASHER
SPRING
GEARBOX MOUNT CUSHIO~S .
/Cl@@ GEARBOX MOUNT CUSHIO~S .

Inspectfor damage and deterioration.
CYLINDER END /
69N·m
(7.0 kgf·m,
51Ibf.ft)
CYLINDER END SEAL
/o~~
Replace.
STEERING RACK
O-RING
Replace. PISTON SEAL RING
Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-35
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Overhaul (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 3. Unbend the lock washers (A).

• Cylinder end seal remover attachment
07TAF-SZ501 00
• Valve seal ring sizing tool 07NAG-SR3090A
• Sleeve seal ring guide 07YAG-S2X0100
• Sleeve seal ring sizing tool, 36 mm 07ZAG-S5A0100
• Attachment, 28 x 30 mm 07946-1870100
• Driver 07749-0010000
• Piston seal ring guide 07LAG-SM40100
• Piston seal ring sizing tool 07HAG-SF1020A
or 07HAG-SF10200
• Cylinder end seal slider 07LAG-SM40300
• Pincers Oetiker.1098 or equivalent, commercially
available
NOTE: Refer to the Exploded View as needed during

this procedure. 4. Hold the flat surface sections (A) of the steering
rack (B) with a wrench, and unscrew both rack ends
Removal (C) with another wrench. Be careful not to damage
the rack surface with the wrench.
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-30).
Disassembly
2. Remove the boot bands (A) and tie-rod clips (B).

Pull the boot away from the ends of the steering
gearbox.
5. Remove the lock washer (D) and stop rubber (E).
17-36 BACK
6. Loosen the locknut (A), then remove the rack guide 10. Remove the two flange bolts, then remove the
screw (B). valve body unit (A).from the gearbox (B). Remove
the O-ring (C).
7. Remove the spring (C), rusc washer (D) and the rack
guide (E) from the gearbox housing. 11. Drill a 3 mm (0.12 in.) diameter hole about
2.5-3.0 mm (0.10-0.12 in.) in depth in the staked
8. Remove the cylinder lines (A) and return line joint point (A) on the cylinder. Do not allow metal
(B) from the gearbox. shavings to enter the cylinder side on the gearbox
housing. After removing the cylinder end (B),
remove any burr;s at the staked point.
9. Drain the fluid from the cylinder fittings by slowly

moving the steering rack back and forth.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-37
Power"Steering
12. Hold the gearbox housing usingaC-clamp 16. Carefully pry the piston seal ring.(A).and O"ring (B)
(commerciaJlyavailable) (A):and the wooden off the rack piston. Be careful not to damage the
blocks (B) as shown. Do not clamp the cylinder part inside of the seal ring groove and piston edges
ofthe gearbox housing in the vise. Then remove when removing the seal ring.
the cylinder end (C).
B
17. Turn the cylinder end seal remover attachment so it
13. Install a commercially available bearing separator will fit through the rack guide hole ofthe steering
(A) in the gearbox housing as shown. gearbox, then position the seal remover on the
cylinder end seal (A). Make sure that the seal
remover is securely positioned on the seal edges .
. Jt;: A
14. Place an appropriate size deep, socket wrench (B)

on the steering rack (C).
15. Set the steering gearbox in a press so the gearbox

housing side points upward, then press the
cylinder end seal (D) and steering rack out of the
gearbox. Hold the steering rack to keep it from
falling when pressed clear. Be careful not to
damage the inner surface of the cylinder side on
the gearbox housing with the tool.
11-38 BACK
18. Insert 24 "long, 3/8" drive extension (A)' on the 19. Before removing the valve housing (Al, apply vinyl
cylinder end seal remover attachment. Place the tape (B) to the splines on the pinion shaft.
steering gearbox in a press, then remove the
cylinder end seal (B) from the gearbox by pressing
on the 24 "long 3/8" drive extension.
Note these items when pressing the cylinder end

seal:
• Keep the tool straight to avoid damaging the
cylinder wall. Check the tool angle, and correct it
if necessary, when removing the cylinder end
seal.
• Use a press to remove the cylinder end seal. Do
not try to remove the seal by striking the tool;
striking the tool would brake the cylinder end
seal, and the seal would remain in the gearbox.
20. Separate the valve housing from the pinion shaft!

valve using a press.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-39
· ,.
,',"
Power Steering
21; With your finger, check the inner wallofthe valve 23. Remove the snap ring (A) and sleeve (B) from the
housing where the seal ring slides. If there is a step pinion shaft.
in the wall, the housing is worn. Replace it.
NOTE: There may be sliding marks from the seal

ring on the wall ofthe valve housing. Replace the
valve housing only if the wall is stepped.
24. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut and

remove the four seal rings from the sleeve. Be
careful not to damage the edges of the sleeve
grooves and outer surface when removing the seal
rings.
22. Check for wear, burrs, and other damage to the
edges ofthe grooves in the sleeve.
NOTE: The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precision

matched set. If either the pinion shaft or sleeve
must be replaced, replace both parts as a set.
17-40 BACK
I-!"
25. Using a cutter or an equivalent tool, cut the valve 27. Remove the valve oil seal (A) and roller bearing (B),
seal ring (A) and O-ring (B) at the cutting groove out of the valve housing using a hydraulic press
position (C) in the pinion shaft. Remove the valve and an appropriate size socket wrench.
seal ring and O-ring. Be careful not to damage the
edges of the pinion shaft groove and outer surface
when removing the valve seal ring and O-ring.
28. Clean the disassembled parts with solvent, and dry

them with compressed air. Do not dip rubber parts
26. Remove the valve oil seal (A) and wave washer (B) in the solvent.
from the pinion shaft.
Note these items during disassembly:

• Inspect the ball bearing (C) by rotating the outer
race slowly. If there is any excessive play or wear,
replace the pinion shaft and sleeve as an
assembly. "-
• The pinion shaft and sleeve are a precise fit; do
not intermix old and new pinion shafts and
sleeves.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-41
"~i.
Power Steering
Reassembly 34. Remove the tape, and apply power steering fluidto
the surface of the valve seal ring (A).
29. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the stepped portion ·ofthe
07NAG~SR3090A
pinion shaft, and coat the surface of the vinyl tape
with power steering fluid. /
30. Installthe'wave washer (8). 35. Apply power steering fluid to the inside of the valve
seal ring sizing tool. Set the larger diameter end of
31. Coatthe inside surface of the newvalve oil seal (C) the sizingtool over the valve seal ring, and move
with power steering fluid, and install the seal with the sizing tool up and down several times to make
its grooved side facing opposite the bearing, then the valve seal ring fit in the pinion shaft groove.
slide it over the pinion shaft, being careful not to
damage its sealing lip (0). 36. Remove the sizing tool, turn it over, slide the
smaller diameter end over the valve seal ring.
32. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the splines and stepped Move it up and down several times to make the
portion ofthe shaft, and coat the surface ofthe valve seal ring fits snugly in the pinion shaft groove.
vinyl tape with power steering fluid.
33. Fit the new O-ring (8) in the groove of the pinion
shaft. Then slide the new valve seal ring (C) over
the shaft and in the groove on the pinion shaft.
17-42 BACK
37. Apply power steering fluid to the surface ofthe 41. Apply power steering fluid to the surface of the
sleeve seal ring guide. Slip two new seal rings (A) pinion shaft (AI.:Slide the sleeve (BI onto the pinion
over the ring guide from the smaller·diameter end, shaft by aligning the locating pin (C) on the inside
and expand them. Install only two rings at a time ofthe sleeve with the cutout (D) in the shaft. Then
from each end of the pinion shaft sleeve (B). install the new snap ring (1;)' securely inthe pinion
shaft groove. Be careful not to damage the valve
Note these items when installing the seal ring: seal ring when inserting the sleeve .
• Do not over-expand the seal ring. Install the resin
seal rings with care so as not to damage them. D
After installation, make sure you contract the seal
rings using the sizing tool.
• There are two types of sleeve seal rings; black
and brown. Do not mix the different types of
rings as they are not compatible.
A
ii
B
42. Apply power steering fluid to the seal ring lip of the
new valve oil seal (AI, then install the seal in the
valve nousing(B) using a hydr-aulicpress and
driver. Install the seal with its grooved side facing
the too/.
07946·1870100
38. Align the ring guide with each groove in the sleeve,
and slide a sleeve seal ring into each groove. After
installation, compress the seal rings with your A
fingers temporarily.
39. Apply power steering fluidto the seal rings on the

sleeve, and to the entire inside siJrface of the sleeve c
seal ring sizing tool, then slowly insert the sleeve
into the sizing too/.
43. Press the roller bearing (C) into the valve housing
07ZAG-S5A0100 with a hydraulic press and attachment.
40. Move the sleeve back and forth several times to

make the seal rings fit snugly in the sleeve. Make
sure the seal rings are not twisted.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-43
Power Steering
44. Apply vinyl tape (A) to the pinion shaft, then coat 47. Press the pinion shaft/sleeve into the valve housing
the vinyl tape with power steering fluid. with a hydraulic press. Check that the pinion shaft/
sleeve turns smoothly by hand after installing it.
48. Coat the piston seal ring guide with power steering
fluid, then slide it onto the rack, big end first.
45. Insert the pinion shaft into the valve housing (B). Be 49. Position the new O-ring (A) and new piston seal
careful not to damage the valve seal rings (C). ring (B) on the ring guide, then slide them down
toward the big end of the tool.
46. Remove the vinyl tape from the pinion shaft, then
remove any residue from the tape adhesive. Note these items during reassembly:
• Do not over expand the resin seal rings. Install
the resin seal rings with care so as not to damage
them. After installation, make sure you contract
the seal ring using the sizing tool.
• Replace piston's O-ring and seal ring as a set.
i
/ 07LAG-SM40'OO
50. Pull the O-ring off into the piston groove, then pull
the piston seal ring off into the piston groove on
top of the O-ring.
17-44 BACK
51. Coat the piston seal ring (A)'and the inside ofthe 53. Coat the sliding surface of the cylinder end seal
piston seal ring sizing tool with power steering fluid, slider (A) and new cylinder end seal (8) with power
then carefully slide the tool onto the rack and over steering fluid. Place the seal on the special tool with
the piston seal ring. its grooved side (C) facing opposite the special tool.
A
07LAG-SM40300
/
c
I
07HAG-SF1020A or
07HAG-SF10200
52. Move the sizing tool back and forth severaHimes to 54. Coat the surface of the steering rack (A) with power
make the piston seal ring fit snugly in the piston. steering fluid. ,
07LAG-SM40300 c
55. Install the cylinder end seal (8) onto the steering
rack with its grooved side (C) toward the piston (D).
56. Separate the cylinder end seal from the cylinder

end seal slider, then remove the seal slider.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-45
Power Steering
57. Install the new backup ring (A) on the steering rack, 59. Insert an appropriate size socket wrench (A) onto
then place the backup ring and cylinder end seal (B) the steering rack as shown.
against the piston (C).
58. Apply steering grease to the steering rack teeth,

then insert the steering rack into the gearbox 60. Install the cylinder end seal (B) into the bottom of
housing. Be careful not to damage the inner the cylinder by pressing on the tool with a press.
surface of the cylinder wall with the rack edges. Do not push on the tool with excessive force as it
may damage the cylinder end seal.
61. Remove the tool, and center the steering rack.
62. Coat the sliding surface of the cylinder end seal
\
slider (A) and new cylinder end seal (B) with power
steering fluid. Place the seal on the seal slider with
its grooved side (C) facing opposite the seal slider.
.
A
~ 07LAG-SM40300
(08C35-B0534l) /
17-46 BACK
63. Coat the inside surface of the cylinder end seal 67. Coat the inside surface of the cylinder end (A) with
slider and steering rack with power steering fluid, power steering fluid, then install the cylinder end
then install the cylinder end seal (A) onto the by screwing it into the cylinder (B). Tighten the
steering rack with its grooved side toward the cylinder end to the specified torque.
cylinder.
~ 69 N·m (7.0 kgf·m, 51 Ibf·ttl

68. Stake the point of the cylinder shown (opposite
from where the stake was removed during
disassembly).
64. Separate the cylinder end seal from the seal slider,
then remove the seal slider.
65. Push in the cylinder end seal with your finger. Be

careful not to damage the face of the seal with the
threads and burrs at the staked position of the
cylinder housing.
66. Hold the gearbox housing using a C-clamp

(commercially available) (A) and the wooden
blocks (B). Do not clamp the cylinder part of the
gearbox housing in the vise.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-47
Power Steering
69. Coat the new O-ring (A) with steering grease, and 73. Apply steering grease to the sliding surface of the
carefully fit it on the valve housing. rack guide (A), and install it onto the gearbox
housing.
~o
rlr~d4..= 20 N·m
~ (2.0 kgf·m,
<. 14 Ibf·ft)
'0~~ (08C3S·BOS34L)
74. Remove the old sealant from the rack guide screw
70. Apply steeringgrease:to the needle bearing CB) in (B), then apply new sealant (Three Bond 1215 or
the gearbox housing, then install the valve,body Loctite 5699) to the middle of the threads. Install
unit (C) by engaging the gears. Note the valve body the disc washer (C) with its convex side facing the
unit installation position (direction of the line rack guide, the spring (0), rack guide screw and
connections). locknut (E).
71. Tighten the flange bolts (0) to the specified torque. 75. Adjust the rack guide screw (see page 17-29). After
adjusting, check that the rack moves smoothly by
72. Install the cylinder lines (A) and return line joint (B). sliding it right and left.
Note these items during reassembly: 76. Install a new stop rubber (A) and a new lock washer
• Thoroughly clean the joints of the cylinder lines. (B). Align the lock washer tabs (C) with the slots (0)
The joints must be free of foreign material. on the rack end (E) while holding the lock washer in
• Install the cylinder lines by tightening the flare place. Repeat this step for the other side of the rack .
nuts by hand first, then tighten the flare nuts to
the specified torque.
34N·m
(3.5 kgf·m,
25lbf·ftl 93N·m
(9.5 kgf·m,
69lbf·ft)
77. Hold the flat surface sections (F) of the steering rack
with a wrench, and tighten both rack ends. Be
careful not to damages the rack surface with the
wrench.
17-48 BACK
78. Bend the lock washer (A) back against the flat spots 82. Clean off the any grease or contamination from the
on the rack end joint housing. boot installation grooves (A) around on the
gearbox housing. Install the boots (B) on the rack
ends with the tie-rod clips (C), and fit the boot end
in the installation grooves in the housing properly.
79. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the circumference of

the rack end joint housing (A).
83. After installing the boots, wipe the grease off the
threaded section (0) of the rack end.
84. Install the new boot bands by aligning the tabs (A)
with the holes (B) on the band.
'" ~~
(PIN 08798-9013)
80. Apply a light coat of silicone grease (PIN 08798-

9013) to the boot grooves (B) on the rack end.
81. Center the steering rack within its stroke.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-49
85, Close the ear portion (A) of the band (B) with,
commercially available pincers, Oetiker 1098 or
equivalent (C).
86. Slide the rack right and left to be certain that the
boots are not deformed or twisted.
87. Reinstall the steering gearbox (see page 17-51);
17-50 BACK
Steering Gearbox Installation
1. Before installing the steering gearbox, make sure 5. Remove the vinyl tape from pinion shaft, and install
that no power steering fluid is on the mating the pinion shaft grommet (A). Align the slot in the
surface of the gearbox and the front subframe. To pinion shaft grommet with the lug portion (B) on
prevent the gearbox mounting bolts from the valve housing.
loosening after the installation, remove the power
steering fluid from the mount cushions and bolt
holes.
2. Slide the steering gearbox (A) between the front

subframe and body from the driver's side. Place the
gearbox in position on the front subframe.:.
3. Rotate the steering gearbox so the pinion shaft (A)

points downward.
4. Continue moving the gearbox toward the

passenger's side until the steering gearbox is in
position. Make sure the power steering return line
and feed line are routed above the gearbox.
(cont'd)
BACK 17-51
Power., Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation (cont'd)
6. Install the gearbox brackets (A) .. 8. Loosely install the gearbox mounting bolts (A) and
washer (B).
A
. 10x 1.25 mm
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·in
(2.2 kgf·m,
16lbf·ft)
9. Install the stabilizer bar bushing holder (C)

7. Tighten the steering gearbox bracket mounting (see page 18-22).
bolts (A) to the specified torque.
10. Loosely install the gearbox mounting bolts (A) and
washer (B).
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf.m,
16lbf·ft)
A A c
10x 1.25 mm 10x1.25mm
74N·m 74N·m
17.5 kgf·m, 54lbf·ft} (7.5 kgf·m, 54 Ibf·ft)
11. Install the stabilizer bar bushing holder (C)

(see page 18-22).
17-52 BACK
12. Install the PIS heat shield (A). 15. Connect the return line holder (A), and install the
return line clamp bolt (B).
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) B
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf.ft)
A
EEBi~~~3;=:::::Ajg
13. Install the pump outlet hose clamp (A) on the
steering gearbox.
16. Loosely install the gearbox mounting bolts (A).
14. Connectthe return hose clips (B).
(cont'd)
BACK 17-53
Power Steering
Steering Gearbox Installation (cont'd)
17. Tighten the gearbox mounting bolts to the 21. Install the under-hood fuse/relay box (A) (see page
specified torque in the sequence shown. 22-61).
10x1.25mm
59N·m
18. Connect the inlet line (A), and tighten the 18 mm 22. Install the air cleaner housing (B) (see page 11-394).
flare nut to the specified torque.
23. Wipe off any grease contamination from the ball
D
6x 1.0mm joint tapered section and threads. Reconnect the
9.8 N·m (1~0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) tie-rod ends (A) to the steering knuckles. Install the
12 mm nut (B), and tighten it.
C
6x1.0mm
/ 3N·m
(0.3 kgf·m,
2Ibf·ft)
I~~~--A
18x1.5mm
47N·m
(4.8 kgf·m,
35Ibf·ft)
....- - 8
19. Connect the return hose (B) securely, and tighten 12x 1.25mm
54N·m
the adjustable hose clamp (C) (see page 17-13). (5.5 kgf·m,
40Ibf·ft)
20. Install the inlet line clamp bolt (D).
24. Install the new cotter pin (C), and bend it as shown.
25. Center the steering rack within its stroke in steering

joint connection.
17-54 BACK
26. With the rack in the straight ahead driving position, 28. Install the steering joint cover (A).
cut the wire (A) and slip the lower end of the
steering joint onto the pinion shaft (B) in the range
shown.
29. Install the driver's dashboard undercover (see page

20-102).
30. Install the front wheel, then set the wheels in the
straight ahead position.
32. Connectthe negative.battery cable.

27. Align the bolt hole (A) on the steering joint with the
groove (B) around the pinion shaft, then loosely • Enter the anti-theft code for the audio and the
install the joint bolt (C). Be sure that the joint bolt is navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
securely in the groove in the pinion shaft. Pull on audio presets.
the steering joint to make sure that the steering • Set the clock.
joint is fully seated. Tighten the steering joint bolt • Verify cruise control, audio remote, navigation
to the specified torque. guide, and turn signal switch operation.
• Make sure the steering wheel is centered.
33. Fill the system with power steering fluid, and bleed
A air from the system (see. page 17-12).
34. After installation, do the following checks:
• Start the engine, allow it to idle, and turn the

steering wheel from lock-to-Iock several times to
warm up to the fluid. Check the gearbox for leaks
(see page 17-11).
C • Do the front toe inspection (see page 18-7).
8x 1.25mm
28N·m • Check the steering wheel spoke angle.
12.9 kgf·m, 21 Ibf·ftl If steering spoke angles to the right and left are
not equal (steering wheel and rack are not
centered), correct the engagement of the joint!
pinion shaft serrations, then adjust the front toe
by turning the tie-rod ends, if necessary.
BACK 17-55
:,'j'
pbwea-' Steering
Tie-rod Ball Joint Boot Replacement
Special Tools Required 6. Install the new beat (A) using the bushing base~
Bushing base 07JAF-SH20330 The boot must not have a gap atthe boot
instaHatior:l.sections (8). After installing the boot,
1. Remove the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle (see check the ball pin tapered section for grease .
step 11 on page 17-31). contamination, and wipe it if necessary.
,. ; "
2. Remove the tie-rod erid from the rack end.

07JAF-SH20330
3. Remove the boot from the tie~rod end, and wipe the
old grease off the ball pin.
4. Pack the lower area ofthe ball pin (A) with fresh A
multipurpose grease.
B~... . "", "
'--'~
--- B
7. Install the tie-rod end to the rack end.
8. Install the tie-rodeball joint to the knuckle (see step

23 on page 17-54).
A
9. Check thE;! wheel alignment, and adjust it if
necessary (see p.age 18-5).
5. Pack,the interior of the new boot (B) and lip (C) with
fresh multipurpose grease.
Note these items when installing new grease:

• Keep.grease' off the boot mounting area (D) and
the tapered section (E) of the ball pin .
• Do not allow dust, dirt, or other foreign materials
to enter the boot. '
17-56 BACK
Gearbox Mount Cushion Replacement
1. Remove the steering gearbox (see page 17-30). 4. Apply a mild soap and water solution to the new
gearbox mount cushion surface (A), then place it on
2. Position the 34 mm socket wrench (A) on the flange the gearbox mounting cushion hole.
part of the gearbox housing with a washer (8),
10 x 105 mm flange bolt (e) and the 10 mm nut (D)
as shown.
5. Position the 34 mm socket wrench on the flange

part ofthe gearbox housing with a washer, flange
bolt, and the nut as shown.
6. Install the gearbox mount cushion by tightening the

A
flange bolt until the mount cushion edges (8)
properly fit on the gearbox flange surface.
7. Install the steering gearbox (see page 17-51).

3. Hold the nut with a wrench, and tighten the flange
bolt with another wrench. Remove the gearbox
mount cushion (E).
BACK 17-57
BACK
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension

Special Tools ............. :.. ~ ................................................ 18-2
Wheel Alignment .......................................................... 18-5
Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection ............................ 18-8
Wheel Runout Inspection ............................................ 18-9
Wheel Bolt Replacement ............................................. 18-10
Ball Joint Removal ....................................................... 18-11
Front Suspension
Knuckle/HubIWheel Bearing Replacement ................ 18-12
Lower Ball Joint Replacement .................................... 18-18
Ball Joint Boot Replacement ....................................... 18-19
Lower Arm Removal/Installation ................................ 18-19
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation ........................... 18-22
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ........................ ~, ....•.......... 18-22
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation .................. 18-23
Damper/Spring Disassembly,
Inspection, and Reassembly .................................... 18-27
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement .................... 18-31
\1 ~
Upper Arm Removal/Installation ................................ 18-36
Lower Arm A Removal/Installation ............................. 18-38
Lower Arm B Removal and Installation ...................... 18-39
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation .............................. 18-41
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation ........................... 18-42
Stabilizer Bar Replacement ......................................... 18-42
Damper Replacement .................................................. 18-43
Spring Replacement ..................................................... 18-47
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) ...... 18-51

Special Tools

CD 07 AAA-SVAA 100 Strut Nut Adapter 1
® 07GAF-SD40100 Hub Dis/Assembly Tool 1
® 07GAF-SE00200 Attachment, 40 mm 1
@ 07 MAC-S LOA 102 Ball Joint Remover, 32 mm 1
@ 07MAC-SLOA202 Ball Joint Remover, 28 mm 1
@ 071AF-S3VAOOO Ball Joint Thread Protector, 14 mm 1
(J) 077 46-0010600 Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 1
® 077 49-0010000 Driver 1
® 07948-SB00101 Attachment, 96 mm 1
®l 07965-S D90 100 Support Base 1
~
CD
aJ
®
)
®
~ 8 @,@ @
0 ~ §
I (J) ® ® ®l
18-2 BACK
Front Suspension
DAMPER/SPRING
Removal, page 18-23
/ Installation, page 18-25
Disassembly/lnspection/
Reassembly! page 18-27
r<E5".,...,....-\9I.
KNUCKLEI
HUBI
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
STABILIZER LINK
LOWER ARM
WHEEL BOLT
(cont'd)
BACK 18-3
Rear Suspension
DAMPER
Removal, page 18-44
STABILIZER BAR
Replacement,
/ page 18-42
STABILIZER LINK
page 18-42
LOWERARMB
Removal, page 18-39
LOWER ARM A
page 18-38
KNUCKLEI
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Hub Bearing Unit
Knuckle Replacement,
page 18-34
TRAILING ARM
18-4 BACK
Wheel Alignment
The suspension can be adjusted for front camber, front Caster Inspection
toe, and rear toe. However, each ofthese adjustments
are related to each other. For example, when you adjust Use commercially available computerized four wheel
camber, the toe will change. Therefore, you must adjust alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
the front wheel alignment whenever you adjust camber (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
or toe. equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Pre-Alignment Checks Check the caster angle.
For proper inspection and adjustment of the wheel Caster angle: 2 057 ' ±1 0
alignment, do these checks: .
• If the measurement is within specifications, measure
1. Release the parking brake-to avoid an incorrect the camber angle.
measurement. • If the measurement is not within specifications, check
for bent or damaged suspension components.
2. Make sure the suspension is not modified.
Camber Inspection
3. Check the tire size and tire pressure.
Use commercially available computerized four wheel
Tire size: alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
Front/Rear: P235/55R18 99V M+S (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
Tire pressure:
Front/Rear: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi), cold Check the camber angle.
4. Check the runout of the wheels and tires (see page Camber angle:
18-9). Front: 0 010' ±45'
(Maximum difference between the front right and
5. Check the suspension ball joints. (Hold a tire with left side: 0 030 ')
your hands, and move it up and down and right and Rear: -1 000 '±45'
left to check for wobbling.)
• If the measurement for the front camber is outside
the specification, go to front camber adjustment.
• If the measurement for the rear camber is outside the
specification, check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
6. Bounce the vehicle up and down several times to

settle the suspension.
(cont'd)
BACK 1,8-5
Wheel Alignment (cont'd)
Front Camber Adjustment 6. Measure the camber angle.
The front camber can be adjusted by exchanging one or • If the measurement is within specification,
both of the damper pinch bolts with a smaller diameter measure the toe-in.
adjusting bolt. The difference between the adjusting • If the measurement is not within specification, go
bolt diameter and the pinch bolt hole diameter allows to step 7.
for a small range of adjustment.
7. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
Damper pinch bolt Adjusting bolt: 8. Remove the front wheels.

PIN 90119·STK·A01
9. Replace the damper pinch bolts with the adjusting
bolts (A), and adjust the camber angle.
~i--. ----1J-ID-'U.ll.U1
\ \\ \
\ J J \J J
\ .\ L \L 1\~ ~~I- JLWII
\ J\
\\\lllLLLLlI\\\\\\@
NOTE:
• The camber angle can be adjusted up to ±25 '
(center of tolerance) by replacing one damper
pinch bolt with the adjusting bolt.
• The camber angle can be adjusted up to 50' by
replacing both damper pinch bolts with the
adjusting bolts.
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1·7).
2. Remove the front wheels. L A

16X1.5mm
152N·m
(15.5 kgf·m,
.;:---- _ _112Ibf·ftl
3. Loosen the flange bolts (A), and adjlist the camber'
by moving the bottom of the damper within the
range ofthe damper pinch boltfree play.
A
8+ 16x 1.5 mm
152 N~m
(15.5 kgf·m,
1121bf·ftl
10. Tighten the adjusting bolts to the specified torque

value.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground, and bounce the

4. Tighten the damper pinch bolts to the specified front ofthe vehicle up and down several times to
torque. settle the suspension.
5. Reinstall the front wheels. Lower the front of the 13. Measure the camber angle. If the camber angle is
vehicle to the ground, and bounce the front of the not within specification, repeat steps 7 through 12
vehicle up and down several times to settle the to readjust the camber angle. If the camber
suspension. measurement is correct, measure toe-in, and adjust
it if necessary.
18-6 BACK
Front Toe Inspection/Adjustment Rear Toe Inspection/Adjustment
Use commercially available computerized four wheel Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment
(caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the (caster, camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. equipment manufacturer's instructions.
1. Center the steering wheel spokes, and install a 1. Release the parking brake to avoid an incorrect
steering wheel holder tool. measurement.
2. Check the toe with the wheels pointed straight 2. Check the toe.
ahead.
Rear toe-in: 2.5±2 mm (O.10±O.08 in.)
Front toe-in: O±2 mm (O±O.08 in.)
• If adjustment is required, go to step 3.
• If adjustment is required, go to step 3. • If no adjustment is required, remove the
• If no adjustment is required, go to rear toe alignment equipment .
inspection/adjustment.
3. Hold the adjusting bolt (A) on lower arm 8, and
3. Loosen the tie-rod locknuts (A) while holding the remove the self-locking nut (C).
flat surface sections (8) of the tie-rod end with a
B
wrench, and turn both tie-rods (C) until the front toe
is within specifications.
A
14x 1.5mm
44N·m
14.5 kgf.m, 33 Ibf·tt)
C
12x 1.25mm
59N·m A
B c
4. After adjusting, tighten the tie-rod locknuts. 4. Replace the self-locking nut with a new one, and
Reposition the rack-end boot if it is twisted or lightly tighten it.
displaced.
NOTE:
5. Go to rear toe inspection/adjustment. • Always use a new self-locking nut whenever it
has been loosened.
• Reassemble the adjusting bolt and camplate with
the eccentric facing up.
5. Adjust the rear toe by turning the adjusting bolt

until the toe is correct.
6. Tighten the new self-locking nut while holding the

adjusting bolt.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-7
Wheel Alignment (cont'd) Wheel Bearing End Play Inspection

Turning Angle Inspection, 1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands
in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
Use commercially available computerized four wheel
alignment equipment to measure wheel alignment 2. Remove the wheels.
(caster; camber, toe, and turning angle). Follow the
equipment manufacturer's instructions. 3. Install suitable flat washers (A) and the wheel nuts.
Tighten the nuts to the specified torque to hold the
1. Turn the wheel right and left while applying the brake disc or disc/drum securely against the hub.
brake, and measure the turning angle of both
wheels. Front
Turning angle:
Inward wheel: 35 024 ' ±2 0
Outward wheel: 30 030 ' (reference)
108N·m
(11.0 kgf.m, 79.6Ibf·ft) A
Rear
2. If the turning angle is not within the specifications,

check for bent or damaged suspension
components.
108 N·m
(11.0 kgf.m, 79.6Ibf·ft)
4. Attach the dial gauge. Place the dial gauge against

the hub flange.
5. Measure the bearing end play by moving the disc

or disc/drum inward and outward.
Front/Rear:
Standard: 0-0.05 mm (0-0.002 in.)
6. If the bearing end play measurement is more than

the standard, replace the wheel bearing or hub
bearing unit.
18-8 BACK
Wheel Runout Inspection
NOTE: When measuring the front wheel runout, turn 5. If the wheel runout is not within the specification,
the back side of the wheel. slowly by hand. check the wheel bearing end play (see page 18-8),
and make sure the mating surfaces on the brake
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety stands disc or disc/drum and the inside of the wheel are
in the proper locations (see page 1-7). clean.
2. Check for bent or deformed wheels. 6. Ifthe bearing end play is within the specification
but the wheel runout is more than the service limit,
3. Set up the dial gauge as shown,and measure axial replace the wheel.
runout by turning the wheel.
Front and rear wheel axial runout:

Standard: 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.)
Service limit: 2.0 mm (0.08 in.)
4. Reset the dial gauge to the position shown, and

measure the radial runout.
Front and rear wheel radial runout:

Standard: 0-0.7 mm (0-0.03 in.)
BACK 18-9
~ -,',
front and Rear Suspension
Wheel Bolt Replacement
INOTICEI" 3. Insert the new wheel bolt into the hub while
• Do not use a hammer or air,orelectric impact: ' aligning the splined surfaces on the hub hole with
tools to remove and instal/the wheel bolts. the wheel bolt.
• Be careful not to damage the threads ofthe
wheel bolts. NOTE:
• Degrease all around the wheel bolt and the
1. Remove the front hub or rear hub bearing unit: threaded section of the nut.
front (see page 18-13),rear (see page 18-32l. • Make sure the wheel bolt is installed vertically in
relation to the hub disc surface.
2. Separate the wheel bolt (A) from the hub (B) using
a hydraulic press. Support the hub with hydraulic 4. Press the wheel bolt using a hydraulic press.
press attachments (e) or equivalent tools. Support the hub with hydraulic press attachments
or equivalent tools.
NOTE:
• Before installing the new wheel bolt, clean the 5. Install the front hub or rear hub bearing unit: front
mating surface on the bolt and the hub. (see page 18-13), rear (see page 18-32).
• The illustration shows a front hub.
NOTE: If you can not tighten the wheel nut to the
Press specified torque value when installing the wheel,
replace the front hub or rear hub bearing unit as an
assembly.
18-10 BACK
Ball Joint Removal
Special Tools Required 3. Loosen the pressure bolt (A), and install the ball .
• Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07 MAC-S LOA 102 joint remover as shown. Insert the jaws carefully,
• Ball joint remover, 28 mm 07MAC-SLOA202 making sure not to damage the ball joint boot.
Adjust the jaw spacing by turning the adjusting bolt
INOTICEI (B).
Always use a ball joint remover to disconnect a ball
joint. Do not strike the housing or any other part of NOTE: Fasten the safety chain (C) securely to a
the ball joint connection to disconnect it. suspension arm or the subframe (D). Do not fasten
it to a brake line orwire harness.
07MAC-SLOA102 or 07MAC-SL0A202
/;~.~.:~D
1. Install a hex nut (A) or ball jointthread protector
onto the threads of the ball joint (B). Make sure the
nut is flush with the ball joint pin end to prevent
damage to the thread end of the ball joint pin.
i //
,-----"'---'L--{Yi-~
C
07MAC-SLOA102 or
07MAC-SL0A202
4. After adjusting the adjusting bolt, make sure the

head ofthe adjusting bolt is in the position shown
to allow the jaw (E) to pivot.
5. With a wrench, tighten the pressure bolt until the

2. Apply grease to the ball joint remover on the areas ball joint pin pops loose from the ball joint pin hole.
shown (A). This will ease installation of the tool and If necessary, apply penetrating type lubricant to
prevent damage to the pressure bolt (B) threads. loo~en the ball joint pin.
NOTE: Do not use pneumatic or electric tools on

the pressure bolt.
6. Remove the ball joint remover, then remove the

nut from the end of the ball joint pin, and pull the
ball joint out of the ball joint pin hole. Inspect the
ball joint boot, and replace it if damaged.
07MAC·SLOA102 or
07MAC-SL0A202
BACK 1·8-11
Fro'nt Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement
Exploded View .
.........- DAMPER PINCH BOLT

~ Replace.
, 16x1;5mm
152N·m
(15.5 kgf·m,
112Ibf·ft)
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Replace.
/
SELF-LOCKING NUT /
Replace. SNAP RING
?HGUARD
0 /
5xo.smm
6N·m
(0.6 kgf·m,
4Ibf·ft)
KNUCKLE
Check for deformation and
damage.
FLATSCREW
6x 1.0 mm
/ 9.SN·m .
FRONT HUB
Check for damage and
cracks.
SPINDLE NUT
BRAKE DISC Replace.
Check for wear and 26x 1.5mm
rust. 329N·m (33.5 kgf·m, 242 Ibf·ft)
71
Apply a small amount of engine oil
to the seating surface of the nut.
18-12 BACK
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (B).
• Hub dis/assembly tool 07GAF-SD40100 Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
• Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAe-SLOA 102
6x1.0mm
• Ball joint remover; 28 mm 07MAe-SLOA202 . 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf.ft)
• Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VAOOO
• Attachment, 72 x 75 mm 01746-0010600
• Driver 0774-9-0010000
• Attachment, 96 mm 07948-SB00101
• Support base 07965-SD90100
Knuckle/Hub Replacement

safety stands inthe proper locations (see page 1-7).
2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and the front wheel.

A
108N·m
(11.0 kgf·m, 79.6 Ibf·ft)
6. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B).
B
26x1.5mm
329N·m
(33.5 kgf·m,
242Ibf·ft)
Replace.
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (A).

A
. / 8x1.25mm
/
/' 22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m.
16Ibf·ft)
B
~c
14x1.5mm
137N·m
(14.0 kgf·m. 101Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the brake caliper bracket mounting bolts

(B), and remove the caliper assembly (e) from the
knuckle. To prevent damage to the caliper
assembly or brake hose, use a short piece of wire
to hang the caliper assembly from the
undercarriage. Do not twist the brake hose
excessively.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-13
Front-Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
7. Remove the 6 mm brake disc flat screws (A). 12. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower ball joint (8)
then remove the castle r;'Iut (C).
NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin after

tightening the new castle nut.
A C
6X1.0mm B 14X2.0mm
9.8N·m 59-69N·m
/ (1.0 kgf·m, . /. (6.0-7.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft) ____ ~. 43-51Ibf.ft)
Replace.
\
A
8x1.25mm.
8. Remove the brake disc (8) from the hub.
NOTE: If the brake disc has clung to the hUb. Screw

two 8 x 1.25 mmbolts (C)into the brake discto
push it away from the hub. Turn each bolt 071AF-S3VAOOO
90 degrees at a time to prevent the brake disc from
binding. 13. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the knuckle.
9. Check the front hub for damage and cracks.
10. Remove the cotter pin (A) from the tie-rod end ball
joint, then remove the nut (8).
NOTE: During installation, install the new cotter pin

after tightening the nut, and bend its end as shown.
11. Disconnect the tie-rod ball joint from the knuckle

using the ball joint remover (see page 18-11).
18-14 BACK
14. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and the self- 16. Install the knuckle/hub in the reverse order of
locking nuts (B) from the damper. removal, and note these items:
NOTE: During installation, install the new damper • Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
pinch bolts and the new self-locking nuts. installing the knuckle.
• Before connecting the lower ball joint to the
A knuckle, degrease the threaded section and
i
B
~~:~:~mm tapered portion of the ball joint pin, the knuckle
(15.5 kgf·m, connecting hole, the threaded section, and
112Ibf·ft) mating surface of the castle nut.
_"'----.~---
II. . _ Replace.
• First install all the components, and lightly
tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
before fully tightening to the specified torque
E
values.
• Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
• Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
specification, then tighten it only far enough to
align the slot with the ball joint pin hole. Do not
align the castle nut by loosening it.
• Use a new spindle nut during reassembly.
15. Remove the driveshaft outboard joint (C) from the • Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
knuckle (D) by tappingthe driveshaft end (E) with a amount of engine oil to the seating surface ofthe
plastic hammer while drawing the hub outward, nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
then remove the knuckle. spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
• Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating
NOTE: surface of the front hub and the inside of the
• Do not pull the driveshaft end outward. The inner brake disc .
driveshaft joint may come apart. • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
• During installation, apply grease to the mating surface ofthe brake disc and the inside ofthe
surface of the wheel bearing and the driveshaft wheel.
outboard joint (see page 16-19). • Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
(cont'd)
BACK 18-15
Front Suspension
Knuckle/Hub/Wheel Bearing Replacement (cont'd)
Wheel Bearing Replacement 3. Remove the splash guard .(A) and the snap ring (B)
from the knuckle (C).
1. Separate the hub (A) from the knuckle (B) using the
hub dis/assembly tool anda hydraulic press.
Support the knuckle with press blocks (C) from the
hydraulic press or equivalent tool. Be careful not to
deform the splash guard. Hold onto the hub to keep
it from falling when pressed clear.
07GAF-SD40100
Press
5xO.8mm
B
4. Press the wheel bearing (A) alit of the knuckle (B)

using the driver, the 72 x 75 mm attachment and a
press.
2. Press the wheel bearing inner race (A) off of the

hub (B) using the hub dis/assemblytool, a
commercially available bearing separator (C), and a
press.
Press
18-16 BACK
5. Wash the knuckle and hub thoroughly in high flash- 7. Install the snap ring (A) securely in the knuckle (B).
point solvent before reassembly.
6. Press a new wheel bearing (A) into the knuckle (B)

using the old bearing (C), a steel plate (D), the
96 mm attachment, the support base, and a press.
NOTE:
• Install the wheel bearing with the wheel sensor
magnetic encoder (E) (brown color), toward the
inside of the knuckle.
• Remove any oil, grease, dust, metal debris, and
other foreign material from the encoder surface.
• Keep all magnetic tools away from the encoder
surface.
• Be careful not to damage the encoder surface
when you insert the wheel bearing. 8. Install the splash guard (C), and tighten the screws
(D) to the specified torque value.
9. Install the hub (A) onto the knuckle (B) using the
driver, the 72 x 75 mm attachment, the support
base, and a hydraulic press. Be careful not to
distort the splash guard (C).
Press 07749.0010000
-.. . . .--__ 0
07948-5800101
'"'------"',
07965.5090100
"- 8
8
07965-5090100
BACK 18-17
Front Suspension
Lower Ball Joint Replacement
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the lock pin (A) from the lower ball joint (B)
• Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SLOA 102 them remove the castle nut (C) .
• Ball joint thread protector, 14 mm 071AF-S3VAOOO
1. Remove the front wheel (see page 18-13). tightening the new castle nut.
2. Remove the flange bolt and flange nuts from the 8

lower arm (A). C
A 14x2.0mm
59-69N·m
NOTE: During installation, loosely install the new 16.0-7.0 kgf·m,
43-51 Ibf·ft)
flange bolt and new flange nuts. Then tighten them Replace.
in the following order; the nut on the front (B), the
nut on the rear (C), then the bolt (D).
D
12x1.25mm
52N·m
15.3 kgf·m,
38Ibf·ft)
R'PI~
07MAC-SLOA102
C~
-----
~ '8 .12x1.25mm
52 N·m 15.3 kgf.m, 38Ibf·ft)
D
071AF-S3VAOOO
12 x 1.25 mm Replace. 5. Install the ball joint thread protector (D).

52 N·m 15.3 kgf·m, 38 Ibf·ft)
Replace. 6. Disconnect the lower ball joint from the knuckle
using the ball joint remover (see page 18-11), then
3. Disconnect the lower ball joint (E) from the lower remove the lower ball joint.
arm.
7. Install the lower ball joint in the reverse order of
removal, and note these items:
• First install all the components, and lightly

tighten the bolts and nuts, then tighten the lower
ball joint to the lower arm to the specified torque.
Raise the suspension to load it with the vehicle's
weight before fully tightening the lower ball joint
to the knuckle to the specified torque values.
torque values.
• Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
wheel.
• Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
18-18 BACK
Ball Joint Boot Replacement Lower Arm Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required Removal/Installation·

Attachment, 40 mm 07GAF-SE00200
1. Raise the front ofthe vehicle, and support it with
1. Remove lower ball joint (see page 18-18). safety stands inthe proper locations (see page 1-7).
2. Remove the boot. 2. Remove the front wheel.
3. Pack the interior and lip (A) of a new boot with 3. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing holder
grease. Keep the grease off' of the boot-to-Iower (8).
ball housing mating surfaces (8).
~~-+---=-A
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
'.. (2.2 kgf·m,
\ ~ 16 Ibf.ft)
B
4. Wipe the grease off the tapered portion ofthe pin

(C), and pack fresh grease into the base (D). Do not
let dirt or other foreign materials get into the boot.
5. Install the boot on the ball joint, then squeeze it

gently to force out any air.
6. Press the boot with the attachment (40 mm) until

the bottom seats on the lower ball housing all the
way around.
Press
~
07GAF-SE00200
7. After installing the boot, wipe any grease off the

exposed portion ofthe ball joint pin.
8. Install lower ball joint (see page 18-18).
(cont'd)
BACK 18-19
Front Suspension
Lower Arm Removal/Installation (cont'd)
4. Remove the flange bolt and flange nuts from the 8. Install the lower arm in the reverse order of
lower arm (A). removal, and note these items:
NOTE: During installation, loosely install the new • First install all the components, and lightly
flange bolt and new flange nuts. Then tighten them tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the
in the following order; the nut on the front (B), the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
nut on the rear (C), then the bolt (D). before fully tightening to the specified torque
values ..
o torque values.
12x 1.25mm
52N·m • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
(5.3 kgf·m, surface of the brake disc and the inside of the
38lbf·ttl
wheel.
R.PI~ • Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
c-----
12x 1.25mm
'B
12x1.25mm
Replace. Replace.
5. Disconnect the lower ball joint (E) from the lower

arm.
6. Remove the lower arm mounting bolt (A).
NOTE: During installation, install a new mounting

bolt.
A
I
14x1.5mm
103N·m
(10.5 kgf·m.
75.9 Ibf.ttl
Replace.
B
12x 1.25mm
Replace.
7. Remove the lower arm mounting bolts (B), then

remove the lower arm (C) from the front
suspension subframe.
NOTE: During installation, install new mounting

bolts.
18-20 BACK
•
Bushing Replacement 3. Align the angle of the lower arm (A) and the tab
portion (8) of the bushing (e). Press in the bushing
1. Press out the lower arm (A) with the suitable socket by hand first.
wrench and a hydraulic press, and remove the
lower arm from the bushing (8). NOTE: The installed bushing's tab portion points
upward and downward to the installed lower arm.
Press
4. Press in the bushing with a suitable socket wrench

2. Apply a mild solution of soap and water to the new and a hydraulic press.
bushing surface.
5. Adjust the distance between the top of the lower
arm and the bushing surface to the dimension
shown.
BACK 18-21
Front Suspension
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation Stabilizer Bar Replacement
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
2. Remove the front wheel. 2. Removethe front wheels.
3. Remove the flange nuts while holding the 3. Disconnect both stabilizer links from the stabilizer
respective joint pin (A) with a hex wrench (B), then bar (see page 18-22).
remove th~ stabilizer link (C).
4. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing
holders (B), then remove the bushings (C).
NOTE: During installation, align the point marks (D)
/ on the stabilizer bar with the sides of the bushings.

A
/ /I~:~:~mm
12x 1.25 mm
78N·m
(8.0 kgf.m,
58lbf·ttl
J (2.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ftl
Replace.
B 12 x 1.25 mm
78N·m
(8.0 kgf·m,
58lbf·ttl
A Replace.
4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (D) and

the damper (E) with the joint pins set at the center
of their range of movement.
NOTE: The stabilizer link has a paint mark (H). Align

the paint mark on the stabilizer link facing inward.
5. Disconnect both tie-rod ball joints from the knuckle
5. Install the new flange nuts and lightly tighten them. (see step 10 on page 18-14).
6. Tighten the flange nuts to the specified torque 6. Remove the stabilizer bar (E) through the wheelwell
value while holding the respective joint pin with a opening on the passenger's side.
hex wrench.
7. Reinstall all removed parts and test-drive the

vehicle.
NOTE: Before installing the wheel, clean the mating

surface of the brake disc and the inside ofthe
wheel.
18-22 BACK
Damper/Spring Removal and
Installation
•
7. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
Removal
• Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
bar. 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
• Align the paint marks on the stabilizer bar with safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
the sides of the bushings.
• Note the fore/aft direction of the bushing. 2. Remove the front wheel.
• Referto stabilizer link removal/installation to
connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page 3. Remove the wheel sensor harness clip (A), the wire
18-22). guide (B) and the brake hose bracket (C) from the
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating damper (D). Do not disconnect the wheel sensor
surface of the brake disc and the inside of the connector.
wheel, then install the front wheels.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-23
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation (cont'd)
4. Disconnect the stabilizer link from the damper 6. Remove the lid (A).
(see page 18-22).
5. Remove the damper pinch bolts (A) and self-

locking nuts (B) from the damper.
7. Remove the flange nuts (B) from the top of the

damper.
NOTE: Damper springs are different, left and right.

Mark the springs Land R before you continue.
8. Remove the damper assembly (A).
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body.
18-24 BACK
Installation 3. Loosely install the new damper pinch bolts (A) and
new self-locking nuts (B) to the damper (C).
1. Install the damper assembly (A) onto the frame.
A
16x1.5mm
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the body. 152N·m
(15.5 kgf·m,
122Ibf·ft)
Replace.
4. Connect the stabilizer link to the damper (see page

18-22).
2. Loosely install the new flange nuts.
NOTE: Install the lid (C) after tightening them to the

specified torque value beginning with the flange
nut A and the flange nut B.
B
10x 1.25mm
44N·m
(4.5 kgf·m,
33Ibf.tt)
Replace.
A
10x1.25mm
44 N·m (4.5 f·m, 33 Ibf·tt)
Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-25
Front.~Suspension
Damper/Spring Removal and Installation (cont'd)
5. Install the wheel sensor harness clip (A), the wire

guide (B), and the brake hose bracket (C) to the
damper (D).
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m· D
12.2.. kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft)
.~ B
6. Raise the front suspension with a floor jack to load

the suspension with the vehicle's weight.
7. Tighten the damper pinch bolts and the self-locking

nuts to the specified torque value.
8. Tighten the flange nuts on top of the damper to the

specified torque value beginning with the flange
nut A and the flange nut B.
9. Install the lid.
10. Clean the mating surface ofthe brake disc and the
inside of the wheel, then install the front wheel.
11. Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if

18-26 BACK
DamperISpring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly
Exploded View
~V
"
~
' .. CAP
SELF-LO,CKING NUT
·12x1.25mm
44N·m "
, (4.5 kgf·m, 33 Ibf·ftl ,
DAMPER MOUNTING BASE t!) , Replace. '
•.
~~
, ' ,. BUMP STOP
~ ~ Check for weakness and damage.
S ./'
~.
DAMPER MOUNTING BEARING
Ch." fo, soy ploy 0' mugh,es,.
/ UPPER SPRING SEAT
UPPER SPRING MOUNTING CUSHION

Check for deterioration and damage.
8
DAMPER SPRING .
Check for weakened
compression and damage.
DAMPER UNIT
' Check for oil leaks, gas leaks,
/ . and smooth operation.
. ,
LOWER SPRING SEAT

Check for deterioration and damage.
(cant'd)
BACK 18-27
Front Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and ~eassembly .(cont'd)
Special Tools Required Inspection

Strut nut adapter 07AAA-SVAA 100
1. Reassemble all the parts, exceptfor the upper
NOTE: When compressing the damper spring, use a spring mounting cushion, the bump stop, and the
commercially available strut spring compressor damper spring.
(Branick MST-580A or Model 7200, or equivalent)
according to the manufacturer's instructions. 2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and
check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
Disassembly both compression and extension. The damper
should extend smoothly and constantly when
1. Remove the cap (A) from the top of the damper. compression is released. If it does not, the gas is
leaking and the damper should be replaced.
2. Compress the damper spring, then remove the self-

locking nut with the strut nut adapter (A) and
17 mm deep socket (B), while holding the damper
shaft with a hex wrench (C). Do not compress the 3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, or binding
spring more than necessary to remove the nut. during these tests. .
C,
3. Release the pressure from the strut spring

compressor, then disassemble the damper as
shown in the Exploded View.
18-28 BACK
•
Reassembly 4. Align the bottom ofthe damper spring (A) with the
stepped part (B) of the lower spring seat.
1. Install the damper spring (A) on the upper spring
mounting cushion (B), then align the upper end (C)
ofthe damper spring with the cushion stop (D).
B
D
5. Align the damper bracket (A) and the damper
mounting base (B) so that" L::;." stamp (C) points
toward outside.
Left: Right:
2. Compress the damper spring. FRONT FRONT
3. Install all the parts except the damper mounting

t t
I
washer and self-locking nut onto the damper unit
(A) by referring to the Exploded View. A--.....
c
.?........st;;
. . .,
B
10 0±3 0
6. Align the angle of the stud bolt (D) on the damper

bracket as shown.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-29
F.-dot 'Suspension
Damper/Spring Disassembly, Inspection, and Reassembly (cont'd)
7. Install a neW self-locking nut (A)~ .
A
12x 1.25mm
Replace.
8. Hold the damper shaft using a hex Wrench (B)iand

tighten the new self-locking nut using the strut nut
adapter (e) and 17 mm deep socket (D) to the
specified torque value.
9. Install the cap.
18-30 BACK
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
Exploded View
KNUCKLE
Check for deformation and damage.
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
/
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
ASSEMBLY
HUB BEARING UNIT

(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Check for faulty
movement and wear.
BRAKE DISC/DRUM
Check for wear and rust.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-31
· i
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 5. Remove the two washers (A).

Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SLOA102
Hub Bearing Unit Replacement
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with

2. Remove the wheel nuts (A) and rear wheel.
6. Raise the stake (A), then remove the spindle nut (B).
B
24X1.5mm
245N·m
/ (25kgf.m,
108N·m 1811bf·ftl
(11.0 kgf·m, 79.6 Ibf·ftl Replace.
3. Remove flange nuts (A), then remove the brake

hose mounting bracket.
B
12x 1.25 mm
108N·m A
(11.0 kgf·m,
79.6Ibf·ftl
4. Remove the caliper mounting bolts (B), and hang

the caliper assembly (C) to one side. To prevent
damage to the caliper assembly or brake hose, use
a short piece of wire to hang the caliper from the
undercarriage.
18-32 BACK
7. Release the parking brake, and remove the brake 10. Install the hub bearing unit in the reverse order of
disc/drum (A) from the hub bearing unit. removal, and note these items:
NOTE: • Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified

• Remove the access plug (B), then, if necessary, torque values.
turn the adjuster bolt (C) with a flat-tip • Use a new spindle nut during reassembly.
screwdriver until the shoes become loose if • Before installing the spindle nut, apply a small
necessary. amount of engine oil to the seating surface of the
• If the brake disc/drum has clung to the hub nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
bearing unit. Screw two 8 x 1.25 mm bolts (D) spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft.
into the brake disc/drum to push it away from the • Before installing the brake disc/drum, clean the
hub bearing unit. Turn each bolt 90 degrees at a mating surface of the hub bearing unit and the
time to prevent cocking the brake disc/drum. inside of the brake disc/drum.
• After installation, press the brake pedal several • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
times to make sure the brakes work if adjusted to surface ofthe brake disc/drum and the inside of
loosen the shoes. the wheel.
D
8x1.2Smm
8. Remove the hub bearing unit (A).
9. Check the rear hub bearing unit for damage and

cracks.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-33
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Replacement (cont'd)
Knuckle Replacement 5. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball
joint (8), and loosen the castle nut (C).
1. Remove the hub bearing unit.
2. Remove the parking brake cable (A) from the tightening the new castle nut.
trailing arm (8).
07MAC-SLOA 102
C
14x1.Smm
137N·m
114 kgf·m, 101Ibf·ft)
8x1.2Smm
22N·m
A 12.2 kgf·m, 16 Ibf·ft)
3. Remove the flange nuts (C), then remove the

backing plate (D). 6. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the
knuckle using the ball joint remover, 32 mm
NOTE: To prevent damage to the backing plate or (see page 18-11),
parking brake cable, use a short pice of wire to
hang the backing plate from the undercarriage. Do
not twist the parking brake cable excessively.
4. Remove the wheel sensor (A) from the knuckle (8).

Do not disconnect the wheel sensor connector.
NOTE: During installation, apply mUltipurpose

grease to inside of the hole (C) on the knuckle.
)~\
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
18-34 BACK
•
7. Remove the self-locking nut (B), the washer (C), and 8. Remove the self-locking nuts (A), and separate the
the flange bolt (D), then remove lower arm A knuckle from the trailing arm (B).
NOTE: During installation, install a new self-locking NOTE: During installation, install the new self-
nut, a new washer, and a new flange bolt. locking nuts.
B A
12x1.25mm 12x1.25mm
132N·m 118 N·m (12.0 kgf.m, 86.8Ibf·ftl
(13.5 kgf.m, 97.6Ibf·ftl Replace.
Replace.
14x 1.5 mm
103 N·m (105 kgf·m, 75.9Ibf·ftl
Replace. 9. Position a floor jack under the lower arm B.
A
12x1.25mm
103N·m
(10.5 kgf.m,
75.9 Ibf·ftl
Replace.
10. Remove the flange bolt (A), then remove the

knuckle (C).
NOTE: During installation, install a new flange bolt.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-35
Rear Suspension
Knuckle/Hub Bearing Unit Upper Arm Removal/Installation

Ball joint remover, 32 mm 07MAC-SLOA102
11. Install the knuckle in the reverse order of removal,
and note these items: 1. Raisethe rear of the vehicle, and support it with
safety stand~ in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
o Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
installing the knuckle. 2. Remove the rear wheel.
o Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values. 3. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of the
o Before connecting the lower ball joint to the lower arm B and the knuckle.
knuckle, degrease the threaded section and
tapered portion ofthe ball joint pin, the knuckle
connecting hole, the threaded section, and
mating surface ofthe castle nut.
o First install all the components, and lightly
tighten the bolts and nuts, then raise the
suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
values.
o Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
o Use a new spindle nut during reassembly.
o Before installing the spindle nut, apply asmall 4. Remove the lock pin (A) from the upper arm ball
amount of engine oil to the seating surface ofthe joint (B), and loosen the nut (C).
nut. After tightening, use a drift to stake the
spindle nut shoulder against the driveshaft. NOTE: During installation, install the lock pin after
o Before installing the brake disc, clean the mating tightening the new castle nut.
surface of the front hub and the inside of the
brake disc. 07MAC-SLOA102
o Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface of the brake disc and the inside ofthe
wheel.
o Check the wheel alignment, and adjust it if
C
12x 1.25 mm
54-64N·m
(5.5-6.5 kgf.m,
40-47 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
B
5. Disconnect the upper arm ball joint from the

knuckle using the ball joint remover (see page
18-11).
18-36 BACK
6. Remove the flange bolt (A), then remove the upper 7. Install the upper arm in the reverse order of
arm (B) from the vehicle. removal, and note these items:.
NOTE: During installation, install a new flange bolt. o Be careful not to damage the ball joint boot when
installing the knuckle.
A o Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
12x1.25mm
103 N·m (10.5 kgf.m, 75.9Ibf·ft) torque values.
Replace. o First install all the components and lightly tighten
the flange bolt and the castle nut, then raise the
B suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight
values.
o Torque the castle nut to the lower torque
o Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface ofthe brake disc and the inside ofthe
wheel.
o Check the wheel alignment, and adjust if
BACK 18-37
Rear Suspension
Lower Arm A Removal/Installation
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 6. Install the lower arm A in the reverse order of
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). removal, and note these items:
2. Remove the rear wheel. . .• Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
torque values.
3. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of the • First install all the components and lightly tighten
lower arm B and the knuckle. the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to
load it with the vehicle's weight before fully
tightening to the specified torque values.
• Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surface on the brake disc/drum and the inside of
the wheel.
4. Remove the self-locking nut (B), the washer (C), and

the flange bolt (D).
NOTE: During installation, install a new self-locking

nut and a new flange bolt.
B
12x 1.25 mm
132N·m
(13.5 kgf·m, 97.6Ibf·tt)
Replace.
14x 1.5 mm
103 N·m (105 kgf·m, 75.9Ibf.tt)
Replace.
5. Remove the lower arm A from the vehicle.
18-38 BACK
1.11
Lower Arm B Removal and Installation
Removal 7. Lower the floor jack gradually.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 8. Remove the spring (A) and the lower spring
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). cushion (C).
2. Remove the rear wheel.
3. Position the floor jack at the connecting point of

lower arm B and the lower damper mount. D
4. Disconnect the stabilizer link from the lower arm B

(see page 18-42).
A
12x1.25mm
Replace.
~
B 9. Mark the cam positions of the adjusting bolt (D) and
adjusting cam (E), then remove the self-locking nut
(F), adjusting cam, and adjusting bolt. Set aside the
self-locking nut and control arm mounting nut, then
C remove the lower arm B.
12x 1.25 mm
Replace.
5. Remove the flange bolt (A) that connects the lower

arm B and the knuckle.
6. Remove the flange bolt (C) that connects the lower

arm B and the damper.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-39
Rear Suspension
Lower Arm B Removal and Installation (cont'd)
Installation 3. Position the floor jack at the connecting point of the

lower arm B and the lower damper mount.
1. Position the lower arm B, and loosely install the
new adjusting bolt (A), adjusting cam (C), and the
new self-locking nut (D).
D
C 12x1.25mm
59N·m
~
W=~k:>--iA Replace.
\,~-~
~~7>..\--fIlD
B
-~~~?~
A
Replace.
C
12x 1.25mm
103 N·m
(10.5 kgf·m,
75.9 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
4. Slowly raise the floor jack until you can align the
B bolt hole with the holes in the lower arm B and the
knuckle, then install the new flange bolt (A) loosely.
5. Compress the damper by hand until you can align

the bolt hole with the holes in the lower arm Band
the damper, then install the new flange bolt (C)
loosely.
6. Connect the stabilizer link to the lower arm B

(see page 18-42).
7. Raise the rear suspension with the floor jack until

the vehicle just lifts off the safety stands, then
tighten the flange bolts and the self-locking nut to
the specified torque values.
8. Clean the mating surface of the brake disc/drum

and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
wheel.
2. Install the spring (E), and lower spring cushion (F).
Align the bottom of the spring and the lower spring 9. Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
cushion with the lower arm B as shown. necessary (see page 18-5).
18-40 BACK
Trailing Arm Removal/Installation
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 9. Install the trailing arm in the reverse order of
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). removal, and note these items:
2. Remove the rear wheel. • First install all the components and lightly tighten
the bolts and nuts, then raise the suspension to
3. Remove the parking brake shoe (see page 19-31). load it with the vehicle's weight before fully
tightening to the specified torque values.
4. Remove the parking brake cable from the backing • Tighten all mounting hardware to the specified
plate (see page 19-39). torque values.
• Check the brake hose and line joint for leaks, and
5. Remove the parking brake cable (A) from the tighten if necessary.
trailing arm (B). • Check the brake hose for interference and
twisting.
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m(2.2 kgf·m. 16Ibf·ft) • Before installing the wheel, clean the mating
surfaces on the brake disc/drum and the inside of
-----111 the wheel.
• After installation, check for leaks at the line joint,
and retighten if necessary. Check the rear wheel
alignment, and adjust it if necessary (see page
18-5).
6. Remove the brake hose mounting bracket from the

trailing arm (see step 3 on page 18-32).
7. Position a floor jack at the connecting point of the

lower arm and the knuckle.
8. Remove the self-locking .nuts (A) and the flange

bolts (B) from the trailing arm.
NOTE: During installation, install the new self-

locking nuts and the new flange bolts.
A
12x 1.25mm
118N·m
(12.0 kgf·m.
86.8 Ibf.ft)
Replace.
B
14x1.5mm
103 N·m (10.5 kgf.m. 75.9Ibf·ft)
Replace.
BACK 18-41
Rear Suspension
Stabilizer Link Removal/Installation Stabilizer Bar Replacement
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
2. Remove the rear wheel. 2. Remove the rear wheels.
3. Remove the self-locking nut (A) and the flange nut 3. Disconnect both stabilizer links from the stabilizer
(8) while holding the respective joint pin (C) with a bar (see page 18-42).
hex wrench (D), then remove the stabilizer link (E).
4. Remove the flange bolts (A) and the bushing
holders (8), then remove the bushings (C) and the
stabilizer bar (D).
10x1.25mm
40N·m
14.1 kgf.m,
30lbf·ttl
Replace.
D
/7
1 A
10X1.25mm
39N·m
(4.0 kgf·m,
29 Ibf·ft)
10x1.25mm
39N·m
14.0 kgf·m, 29 Ibf·ttl
Replace.
4. Install the stabilizer link on the stabilizer bar (F) and

trailing arm (G) with the joint pins set at the center
oftheir range of movement. 5. Install the stabilizer bar in the reverse order of
NOTE: The stabilizer link has a paint mark (H). Align
the paint mark on the stabilizer link facing inwards. • Note the right and left direction of the stabilizer
bar.
5. Install a new self-locking nut and a new flange nut, • The stabilizer bar has a paint mark (E) on the
and lightly tighten them. center facing downwards.
• Refer to stabilizer link removal/installation to
6. Place the floor jack under the trailing arm, and raise connect the stabilizer bar to the links (see page
the suspension to load it with the vehicle's weight. 18-42).
• Check the wheel alignment, and adjustit if
7. Tighten the self-locking nut and the flange nut to necessary (see page 18-5).
the specified torque values while holding the
respective joint pins with a hex wrench.
8. Reinstall all removed parts and test-drive the

vehicle.
9. After 5 minutes of driving, tighten the self-locking

nut again to the specified torque value.
10. Clean the mating surface ofthe brake disc/drum

and the inside of the wheel, then install the rear
wheel.
18-42 BACK
Damper Replacement
Exploded View
".
d;
.
. SELF LOCKING NUT
~ (3.0 kgf·m, 22Ibf.ft)
10X1.25mm
~~m
'
DAMPER MOONTING'WASHER .
'
7;
.' ~ Check for.bending and damage.,
~.
~
DAMPER MOUNTING CUSHION
Check for weakness.
____ DUST COVER

...-- Check for bending and damage.
~ DAMPER UNIT
Check for oil leaks,
gas leaks, and smooth
operation.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-43
Rear Suspension
Damper Replacement (cont'd)
Removal 6. Remove the self-locking nut (A) while holding the

damper shaft (B) with a hex wrench (C).
A
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). 10x1.25mm
Replace.
2. Remove the rear wheel. D
3. Position the floor jack at the conn,ect,ing,[loint of the

lower arm B and the knuckle. Raise the floor jack E c
until the suspension begins to compress.
A
12x 1.25 mm
Re~ -""-~~~~~~ 7. Remove the damper mounting washer (D) and the
damper mounting cushion (E) from the top of the
B damper.
8. Compress the damper unit (A) by hand, and

remove it from the vehicle. Be careful not to
4. Remove the flange bolt (A) from the bottom ofthe damage the body.
~m~~ :
5. Remove the lid (A) from the cargo area side trim
panel.
....-A
~A
18-44 BACK
111
Inspection Installation
1. Install the 10 mm flange nut on the damper shaft 1. Install the damper mounting cushion (A) onto the
end, and set the socket wrench and T-handle on the damper unit (B). Compress the damper by hand,
nut. and move it into position.
2. Compress the damper assembly by hand, and NOTE: Be c~reful,not to damage the body.
check for smooth operation through a full stroke,
both compression and extension. The damper
should extend smoothly and constantly when
compression is released. If it does not, the gas is
leaking and the damper should be replaced.
2. Position the floor jack under the lower arm B to

support the suspension.
3. Check for oil leaks, abnormal noises, and binding

during these tests.
A-----
12x 1.25 mm
103N·m
(10.5 kgf·m, 75.9Ibf·ftl
Replace.
3. Slowly raise the floor jack until you can align the
bolt hole with the holes in the lower arm B and the
damper, then install the new flange bolt (A) loosely.

tighten the flange bolt to the specified torque value.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-45
Rear Suspension
Damper Replacement (cont'd)
5. Install the damper mounting cushion (A), the 7. Install the lid (A) to the cargo area side trim panel.
damper mounting washer (8), and a new self-
locking nut (C) on the damper shaft.
I
iii1
e.
10x1.2Smm
29N·m
. (3.0 kgf·m, 22 Ibf·ttl
~ Replace.
0~
o B
~A

and the inside ofthe wheel, then install the rear
wheel.
6. Tighten the self-locking nut (A) to the specified 9. Check the wheel alignment; and adjust it if
torque value while holding the damper shaft (8) necessary (see page 18-5).
with a hex wrench (C).
A
10x 1.2Smm
29N·m
(3.0 kgf·m,
22lbf·ttl .
18-46 BACK
Spring Replacement
Exploded View
~
____ SPRING MOUNTING CUSHION
---
Check for weakness
and damage.
tt.
G> ___
___
SPRING
Check forMOUNT.
and damage.
~8x1.25mm
22N·m
ING COLLAR
weakness
_ _ _ SPRING
Check for weakened compression
and damage.
~
~
_ _ _ SPRING LOWER CUSHION
Check for deterioration
and damage.
(cant'd)
BACK 18-47
Rea,r Suspension
Spring Replacement (cont'd)
Removal 7. Lower the floor jack gradually.
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 8. Remove the spring (A) and the lower spring
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). cushion (B).
2. Remove the rear wheel. ______ E
3. Position the floor jack at the connecting point of

lower arm B and the lower damper mount.
4. Disconnect the stabilizer link from the lower arm B

(see page 18-42).
A
12 x 1.25 mm
Rep~
10x1.25 mm B
9. Remove the flange bolt (C) that connects to the
Replace. body, and remove the spring mounting collar (D)
and the spring mounting cushion (E) if necessary.
C
12x 1.25 mm
Replace.
5. Remove the flange bolt (A) that connects the lower

arm B and the knuckle.
6. Remove the flange bolt (C) that connects the loWer

arm B and the bottom of the damper.
18-48 BACK
•
Installation 3. Position the floor jack at the connecting point of the
lower arm B and the knuckle.
1. Install the spring mounting cushion (A), the spring
mounting collar (C), and tighten the flange bolt (D)
to the specified torque value. A
12x 1.25 mm
103N·m
_____ A 110.5 kgf·m, 75.9Ibf·ftl
Replace.
C--.... D
---------....
WVsx1.25mm
I, 22N·m
12.2 kgf·m,
~~~~
16lbf·ftl 10x 1.25 mm
39N·m
14.0 kgf·m, C
_____ E 29lbf·ftl 12 x 1.25 mm
Replace. 103N·m
(10.5 kgf·m,
75.9 Ibf·ftl
Replace .
....--F 4. Slowly raise the floor jack until you can align the
bolt hole with the holes in the lower arm B and the
knuckle, then install the new flange bolt (A) loosely.
5. Compress the damper by hand until you can align

the bolt hole with the holes in the lower arm Band
the damper, then install the new flange bolt (C)
loosely.
6. Connect the stabilizer link to the lower arm B

(see page 18-42).

tighten the flange bolts and the self-locking nut to
the specified torque values.

and the inside ofthe wheel, then install the rear
2. Install the spring (E) and the lower spring cushion wheel.
(F). Align the bottom ofthe spring and the lower
spring cushion with the lower arm B as shown. 9. Check the rear wheel alignment, and adjust it if
BACK 18-49
BACK
Suspension
Front and Rear Suspension 18-2
Front Suspension ........ .............. ....................... 18-12
Rear Suspension ............... I............. I................. 18-31
TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor ID ................... 18-56
DTCTroubleshooting Index ........................................ 18-57
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 18-64
TPMS Control Unit Replacement ................................ 18-90
Initiator Replacement ................................................... 18-91
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement ............................ 18-92
BACK
TPMS
RIGHT-REAR INITIATOR
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR

LEFT-REAR INITIATOR
Replacement,
RIGHT-FRONT page 18-91
INITIATOR
Replacement, DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
page 18-91
LEFT-FRONT INITIATOR
TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR Replacement, page 18-91
Replacement,
page 18-92
TPMS CONTROL UNIT

18-52 BACK
System Indicator Location Ifthe system is OK, the TPMS indicator (LED indicator
type) and the low pressure indicator should come on
The system has six indicators.. when you turn the ignition switch ON (II), and then go
off 2 seconds later. If they don't, there is a problem with
• The low pressure indicator (A) the system.
• The TPMS indicator (8)
• The right-front (RF) tire indicator (C) If the system detects low pressure in any of the four
• The left-front (LF) tire indicator (D) tires, the low pressure indicator and the appropriate tire
• The right-rear (RR) tire indicator (E) indicator(s) will come on, and the control unit will set
• The left-rear (LR) tire indicator (F) one or.more of these codes:
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17. When the tire pressure returns to
normal, the control unit will turn off the indicators and
store the DTC(s). However, if the control unit detects a
problem in the system during an indication of low tire
pressure, it will turn off the low pressure indicator and
tire indicators, store the DTC(s), and turn on the TPMS
indicator.
NOTE: Tire pressures will increase slightly as the

temperature in the tires rises during driving at highway
speeds. Pressures will also increase or decrease
slightly with changes in outside air temperature.
A temperature change of about 18 "F (10 "C) will change
tire pressure by about 10 kPa (0.1 kgf/cm2, 1.5 psi).lfthe
temperature drops, tire pressure could decrease just
enough to turn on the low pressure indicator and tire
indicator(s), but later as tire temperature increases
enough to turn them off. To resolve a complaint of such
intermittent indications, confirm and clear the stored
F E B DTC(s) and check the tire pressures. Then explain to the
customer how temperature changes can affect the
system, especially when tire pressures are near the low
How TPMS Works end of the TPMS normal range - 168 to.220 kPa (1.7 to
2.2 kgf/cm2,24 to 32 psi).
The TPMS (tire pressure monitoring system) has many
indicators; four tire indicators (shown on the multi- If a problem is detected in the system, the TPMS
information display), a low pressure indicator (LED indicator will come on and stay on until the system
indicator), and a TPMS indicator (With navigation: On returns to normal with most DTCs. If DTC 45,61,63,65,
the multi-information display, Without navigation: LED 67,81, 83, or 85 is set, the TPMS indicator will go off
indicator). When the TPMS control unit detects low only when the ignition switch is turned off.
pressure in a tire, or a problem in the system, it turns on
the appropriate indicator(s). If a flat tire is replaced with the spare tire, and the flat
tire is stored in the trunk area or the cabin, the low
• If low tire pressure is detected, the low pressure pressure indicator will stay on but the appropriate tire
indicator and the appropriate tire indicator(s) come indicator will go off. This prevents the customer from
on. thinking there is a problem with the spare tire. When
• If a problem in the system is detected, the TPMS the flat tire is taken out of the vehicle for repair, the
indicator comes on. TPMS indicator will come on (DTC 32, 34, 36, or 38)
• If low tire pressure and a problem in the system are because the system is no longer receiving the signal
detected, only the TPMS indicator comes on. from the tire's transmitter.
(cont'd)
BACK 18-53
TPMS
Problems That Are Not System Faults How to Troubleshoot DTCs
• Tire Sealant DTC troubleshooting procedures assume the cause of

Fluid sealant used to repair a punctured tire can the problem is still present and the TPMS indicator is
damage the tire pressure sensor mounted on each still on. (NOTE: The TPMS indicator comes on for DTCs
wheel. It can prevent the system from detecting the 11,13,15, and 17 only ifthe low tire pressure indication
correcttire pressure, which sets a DTC 11, 13, 15, or is false, caused by a problem in the system.) Do not use
17 even though the system is normal. a troubleshooting procedure unless the system has set
• Cold Weather the DTC listed for it.
When the weather is extremely cold - about -40 "F
(-40 "C) or colder -the output of the lithium battery 1. Ask the customer to describe the conditions when
in each tire pressure sensor may drop far enough that the indicator came on, and try to reproduce the
the control unit sets a DTC for/ow battery voltage (31, same conditions for troubleshooting. Find out if the
33,35, or 37) even though the system is normal. customer checked and/or adjusted tire pressures
• Non-TPMSWheels since the indicator came on.
Vehicles equipped with TPMS must use wheels made
for the system. Every TPMS wheel has an exclusive 2. If an indicator does not come on during the test-
mark; do not use any other type of wheel. drive, check for loose terminals, poor contact due
to damaged terminals, etc. before you start
How a Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) is Set troubleshooting.
• When the system detects a problem, the TPMS ", 3. After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs, and test-
control" unit sets a code, but shifts to fail-safe mode,· drive the vehicle. Make sure no indicators come on.
and will not alert the driver to low tire pressures.
• If the TPMS control unit loses power, or fails, the 4. Check for other unit DTCs which are connected via
TPMS indicator will come on, but no DTC will be set. F-CAN, if there are DTCs that are related to F-CAN,
• The memory can hold all the DTCs that could the most likely cause was that the ignition switch
possibly be set. However, when the same DTC is was turned ON (II) with the TPMS control unit
detected more than once, the most recent one connector disconnected. Clear the DTCs. Check for
overwrites the previous one, so only the latest DTC of PGM-FI and TPMS codes, and troubleshoot those
each type is stored .. first.
• DTCs are indicated in ascending order, not in the
order they occurred.
• Set DTCs are stored in the EEPROM (nonvolatile
memory), they cannot be cleared by disconnecting
the battery. To clear a DTC, connect the HDS (Honda
Diagnostic System) to the data link connector (DLC),
and follow the screen prompts ..'
18-54 BACK
How to Retrieve DTCs How to Clear DTCs
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HDS to
(Honda Diagnostic System) to the data link the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the
connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side dash on the driver's side of the dashboard.
of the dashboard.
A
A

3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't,
and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-229).
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-229).
4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the on the HDS.
DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC Troubleshooting. NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions.
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific
instructions. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
BACK 18-55
TPMS
Memorizing the Tire Pressure Sensor 10
Memorizing a Tire Pressure Sensor 10 Memorize the 10 with the HOS
When a tire pressure sensor is replaced, the sensor 10 The HOS can memorize the 10 of a new tire pressure
must be memorized by the TPMS control unit. sensor or a previously memorized 10.
NOTE: To ensure the control unit memorizes the correct 1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HOS to
10, the vehicle with the new sensor must be at least 10 ft the data link connector (OLC) (A) located under the
(3 m) from any other TPMS pressure sensor not driver's side of the dashboard.
installed on that vehicle.
Memorizing a Sensor 10 Automatically
After rotating the tires or replacing a tire pressure

sensor, drive the vehicle for at least 40 seconds at a
speed of 15 mph (24 km/h) or more, and all the sensor
lOs will be memorized automatically.
NOTE:
• When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the HOS
to memorize lOs .
• After the lOs are memorized, reduce the pressure in
all four tires to less than the appropriate specification,
and check to see that the four tire .indicators come on. A
3. Make sure the HOS communicateswith the vehicle

and the TPMS control unit. If it doesn't,
troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-229).
4. Memorize the 10 of the tire pressure sensor by

following the screen prompts on the HOS.
NOTE:
• See the HOS Help menu for specific instructions.
• When replacing the TPMS control unit, use the
HOS to memorize lOs.
• After the lOs are memorized, reduce the pressure
in all four tires to less than the appropriate
specification, and check to see that the four tire
indicators come on.
18-56 BACK
DTC Troubleshooting Index
DTC Detection Item Troubleshooting

11 Right-front low.tire pressure . (see paQe 18-67)
13 Left-front low tire pressure (see page 18-67)
15 Right-rear lowtire~ressure (see paQe 18"67)
17 Left-rear low tire pressure . (see page 18-67)
21 RiQht-front abnormally hiQh tire sensor temperature '. (see page 18-68)
22 Left-front abnormally high tire sensor temperature (see page 18-68)
23 RiQht-rear abnormally hiQh tire sensor temperature. (see page 18-68)
24 Left-rear abnormally high tire sensor temperature (see page 18-68)
31 Right-front tire Rressure sensor low battelY voltaQe (see page 18-68)
32 Right-front tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-69)
33 Left-fronttire pressure sensor low battery voltage (seepa9.-e 18-68)
34 Left-front tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-69)
35 Right-rear tire pressure sensor low battery voltage (seepa9.-e 18-68)
36 Right-rear tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-69)
37 Left-rear tire pressure sensor low battery volta9.-e (see paQe 18-68)
38 Left-rear tire pressure sensor transmitting failure (see page 18-69)
41 Abnormal signal reception error (see paQe 18-73)
45 Initiator circuit short detection (see page 18-74)
51 Right-front initialization status ofTPMS control unit is not-completed (see page 18-76)
53 Left-front initialization status of TPMS control unit is not-completed (see page 18-76)
55 Right-rear initialization status ofTPMS control unit is not-completed (see page 18-76)
57 Left-rear initialization status ofTPMScontrol unit is not-completed (see page 18-76)
61 Right-front initiator circuit open detection (seepaue 18-80)
63 Left-front initiator circuit open detection (see page 18-80)
65 Right-rear initiator circuit open detection (seepa9.-e 18-80)
67 Left-rear initiator circuit open detection (see page 18-80)
81 TPMS control unit failure check (see page 18-83)
83 No VSP siQnal (see page 18-83)
85 CAN data error (see page 18-84)
91 Ri9.-ht-front tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-85)
93 Left-front tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-85)
95 RiQht-rear tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-85)
97 Left-rear tire pressure sensor internal error (see page 18-85)
BACK 18-57
TPMS·

HOS does not communicate with the Troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-229)
TPMS control unit or the vehicle
Low pressure indicator does not come on, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-86)
and no OTCs are stored
Low pressure indicator does not go off, Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-87)
and no OTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not come on, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-87)
OTCs are stored
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no Symptom Troubleshooting (see page 18-88)
OTCs are stored
18-58 BACK
System Description
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs 20P Connector
Terminal Wire color Terminal sign Description Signal

number (Tew:minal name) Terminal Conditions Voltage'
1 WHT CAN H (CAN Sends the -- Ignition switch Pulses
communication communication ON (II)
signal high) signal
4 BlK GND (Ground) Ground for the 4-:-GND At all times less than 0.1 V
TPMs control unit
5 ORN IF lFsiG. Detects the signal 5-GND For the first 5- PulsesO-2V
(IF low from the left-front 16 seconds after
frequency .initiator turning the
signal) ignition switch
ON (II)
0 With ignition less than 0.1 V
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
6 GRY RF IF sIG., Detects the signal 6-GND For the first 5- PulsesO-2V
(RF low', from the right-front 16 seconds after
frequency initfator turning the
signal) , ignition switch
ON (II)
With ignition less than 0.1 V
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
7 lTBLU K-LiNE (Data link Communications -- -- --
connector) with the HDs
8 BRN IG1 (Ignition Power source for 8-GND Ignition switch Battery voltage
switch ,1) activating the ON (II)
system Ignition switch less than 0.1 V
OFF
10 RED +B (Battery Power source for 10-GND At all times Battery voltage
positive) the TPMs control
unit
(cont'd)
BACK 18-59
TPMS
TPMS Control Unit Inputs and Outputs 20P Connector
Wire side .offemale terminals
Terminal Wire color . Terminal sign Description Signal

number .(Terminal name) Terminal.· .,Conditions Voltage
11 RED CAN L(CAN Sends the -- 19nition switch Pulses
communication communication ON (II)
signal low) signal
15 GRN LFGND Ground for the 15-GND Ignition switch Less than 0.1 V
(LFlow initiators ' I· ON (II)
frequency
ground)
16 PNK LR LFSIG. Detects the signal 16-GND For the first 5- PulsesO-2V
(LR low from the left-rear 16 seconds after
frequency initiator turning the
ON (II)
With ignition Less than 0.1 V
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
17 WHT RR LF SIG. Detects the signal 17-GND For the first 5- PulsesO-2V
(RR low from the right-rear 16 seconds after
frequency initiator turning the
ON (II)
With ignition Less than 0.1 V
switch ON (II) for
more than 5-16
seconds
20 BLU LFPWR. Power source for 20-GND For 5 seconds About 7 V
(LF low the initiators with ignition
frequency switch ON (II)
power) After 5 seconds --
with ignition
switch ON (II)
18-60 BACK
System Structure
Whenever the engine is running, the TPMS control unit continuously monitors all four tires and the system. If it detects
low pressure in a tire, it alerts the driver by turning on the low pressure indicator and the appropriate tire indicator. If it
detects a problem inthe system, it turns on the TPMS indicator.
Initiators
Mounted on each wheel well, each initiator sends a start/stop signal to the tire pressure sensor in the tire below it.
Control unit
Mounted back ofthe driver's side ofthe lower dash, the control unit sends signals to the initiators and receives signals
from them to verify pressure sensor IDs every time the engine starts. It also receives signals from the transmitters in
the tire pressure sensors, and it continuously monitors and controls the system.
Indicators
All indicators are in the gauge control module: The low pressure indicator (LED indicator), four tire indicators (on the
multi-information display) to show which tire is affected, and the TPMS indicator (With navigation: On the multi-
information display, Without navigation: LED indicator) that comes on only if there's a problem with the system. When
two or more tire pressures are low, the low pressure indicator comes on about 5 seconds before the appropriate tire
indicator. Once low pressure is detected, the system scans all four pressure sensors to ensure that it turns on the
correct tire indicator.
Initiator Initiator
(low frequency) Vehicle (low frequency)
Gauge Control Module
Indicators
(LED and multi-
-------- ~Tire
information
display drive) Pressure Sensor
Tire Pressure Sensor
(sensor-transmitter) (sensor-transmitter)
Wheel Control Unit

~ Wheel
(TPMStype) (with radio (TPMStype)
frequency antenna)
.~
--------
(sensor-transmitter)
(sensor-transmitter)
/
Wheel
Initiator
(low frequency)
Initiator
(low frequency)
Wheel
(TPMStype) (TPMStype)
(cont'd)
BACK 18-61
Tire pressure sensor

Each sensor is an integrated unit made up of the tire valve stem, a pressure sensor, and a transmitter. The unit is
attached to the inside of thewheel, around the valve stem. The sensor transmits the internal tire information one time
every 60 sEiconds to the control unit. When TPMS control unit receives tire pressure is less than 175 kPa (1.8 kgf/cm 2,
25 psi), the control unit then turns on the low pressure indicator and the appropriate tire(s) indicator. When that tire's
pressure is increased to more than 198 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm 2, 29 psi), the transmitter sends tire pressure to the control unit,
and then the control unit turns the indicators off.
Wheels
TPMS will not work unless TPMS type wheels are installed on the vehicle. The original equipment wheels have a
"STK" stamp (A) on the back of theiNheel anda TPMS mark (B) on the wheel rim periphery, and a couhterweights (e)
cast into the-opposite side of the spoke to balance the weight of the tire pressure sensor (D).
NOTE: The vehicle is equipped with either wheel as shown.
18-62 BACK
System Communication
• When the vehicle is running, an RF (radio frequency) band wave signal is continuously transmitted from each tire
pressure sensor to the control unit.
• When the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the~initiators send an LF (low frequency) band wave signal to the tire
pressure sensors, switching them from sleep mode to normal function mode. When the ignition switch is turned
OFF, the sensors switch from normal function mode back to sleep mode to extend their battery life.
• Each tire pressure sensor has its own ID to prevent jamming by similar systems on other vehicles. After memorizing
all the sensor IDs, the control unit receives only those specific signals. .
• An ID can be memorized manually or automatically. Each initiator is hardwired to the control unit. Every time the
ignition is turned ON (II), the control unit asks each initiator for a sensor ID. The initiators then transmit the sensor
IDs, and the control unit receives and memorizes them. The control unit then knows which ID belongs to each tire
location. This recurring ID confirmation prevents any confusion in the system as a result of normal tire rotation.
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the brackets on the TPMS control unit and front initiators: Misalignment of the control
unit and initiators could interfere with sending and receiving signals.
Control Unit
(with Radio Frequency Antenna)
Initiator Tire Pressure Sensor

(Low Frequency Initiator) (Sensor-transmitter)
BACK 18-63
TPMS
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
+ UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER·DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
No..11100A} No. 4 150 AI K1 G18 No. 20 17.5 AI ..,R3

0<1' WHT RED------
LJ
IGNmON SWITCH
..,09
~BLU
No.2IS0AI H1 3 IGI 6 D2 No. 1017.5 AI
0<1' WHT BRN------
LJ
IG1 HOT In ON III} and START 1111}
..., POWER CIRCUIT
LOW PRESSURE INDICATOR

28
"'"
'<J r-- WHT - - -....- - - - - W H T - - - - - -
INDICATOR
DRIVER
[TPMS INDICAT<)iil *2 CIRCUIT
. "'" . r--
29
RED ----+-...- - - - R E D - - - - - -
L .. _":":'_ .. ..J
,Jr
:··_··_··_··1*1
L@ TPMS INDICATOR :
•• _ •• _ •• _ •• ....l
@ LF TIRE INDICATOR
@ RF TIRE INDICATOR
@ LR TIRE INDICATOR
@ RR TIRE INDICATOR
MULTI·INFORMATION DISPLAY
+
*1: With navigation
*2: Without navigation
PCM
--'~
WHT---'"
R E D - - -....- ..
L..-_ _ _ :
- 6
WHT---01
~14~ _ _ _ _ _ RED _ _ _ _ _.....
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR IDLC)
~------LTBLU-------------------
_I------BLK -----1'=
G501
18-64 BACK
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
~1~O~
----------------------------------------------------------RED __________+B ~. .P_----------------..--~
__________________________________________________________ BRN __________~8~
IGI
------------------------------------------------WHT--------~~
CANH
CAN
CONTROLLER
----------------------------------------------------------RED __________ ~1~1~

CANL
INITIATOR
LEFT-FRONT
~20~ ~------------------~
1
BLU BLU __________
LFPWR. LFPWR.
I LFSIGNAL
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
~ 2 ORN __________....;;5...(
LFLFSIG.
3
GRN
LFGND
RIGHT-FRONT
1
BLU
ILFSIGNAL
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
~
LFPWR.
2 GRV __________....;;6...(
RF LFSIG.
3
GRN
LFGND
LEFT-REAR
1
BLU
LFPWR.
ILFSIGNAL
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
~ 2 PNK ___________1;;;6~
LRLFSIG.
3
GRN
LFGND
RIGHT-REAR
1
BLU
ILFSIGNAL
DRIVER
CIRCUIT
~
LFPWR.
2
WHT
RRLFSIG.
17
3 15
GRN GRN
LFGND LFGND
7
LTBLU
K-LiNE
4
BLK
1
G503
GND
....... : 12V
-0- :5V
(cont'd)
BACK 18-65
TPMS
Circuit Diagram (cont'd)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (16P) UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR R (20P)
8
9 16
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
PCM CONNECTOR A (44P) DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC)
If 11
VI2 vl 4 1516 / 8 I 9 1.
~. 10L(' 12 13114J15116 17 18 19
20 21 22 >< 23 24 25 •
- ~ 2627 /29V131V 33 34 35 • r-
136137 38139140V 42 43 1441
18-66 BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Low Tire Pressure 7. Check and monitor the value of the appropriate tire
pressure with the HOS.
NOTE: If low tire pressure is detected, the control unit
will set one or more of these OTCs, and turn on the low NOTE: If not defined is shown on the HDS, turn the
pressure indicator and the appropriate tire indicator(s). ignition switch OFF, rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then
If the low pressure and tire indicators come on due to turn the ignition switch ON (II), and,try again. If not
true low tire pressure, and the customer corrects it defined is still shown, repeat the procedure in the
before bringing the vehicle in, the OTCs will have been previous sentence until NORMAL is shown.
stored, but all the indicators will be off.
. Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 40 kPa (004 kgflcrrf, 6 psi) of the actual tire
pressure?
2. Check which tire indicator is on.
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor
NOTE: If no tire indicators are on, retrieve the DTCs connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
with the HDS. substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-90), and recheck .•
Ole Tire location
11 Right-front NO-Check that the tire-pressure sensor is properly
13 Left-front mounted. Replace the appropriate tire pressure
15 Right-rear sensor (see page 18-92).•
17 Left-rear
4. Check the pressure of the indicatedtire.
Is there 175 kPa (1.8 kgf/Crrf, 25 psi) or less?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Check for and repair the cause of air loss; and then
inflate the tire (see page 18-5).
Do the tire indicators go off within one minute?
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC

with the HDS .•
NO-Go to step 7.
BACK 18-67
TPMS
DTC 21, 22, 23, 24: Abnormally High Tire DTC 31, 33, 35, 37: Tire Pressure Sensor Low
Sensor Temperature Battery Voltage
1. Make sure the tires have cooled down. NOTE: This problem occurs when the temperature
around the sensor is -40 'f( -40 "C) or less. Note that
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). the diagnosis must be made in a place where ambient
temperature is -4 'f ( -20 "C) or more.
3. Check the tire indicated by the DTCs you retrieved.
NOTE: An abnormal rise in the internal temperature
ofthe tires can be caused by Does the TPMS indicator go off within one
• Excessive braking minute?
• Failure to release the parking brake (rear tires
only) YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC
• Leaving the vehicle running while parked with the HDS.•
• Improper assembly of a wheel and tire
NO-Go to step 2.
DTC Tire location
21 Right-front 2. Check the FR, FL, RR, or RL in the TPMS DATA LIST
22 Left-front with the HDS.
23 Right-rear
24 Left-rear NOTE: If not defined is shown on the HDS, turn the
ignition switch OFF, rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). turn the ignition switch ON (II), and try again. If not
defined is still shown, repeat the procedure in the
Does the TPMS indicator go off within one previous sentence until NORMAL is shown.
minute?
DTC Tire location
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the DTC 31 Right-front
with the HDS .• 33 Left-front
35 Right-rear
NO-Go to step 5.. 37 Left-rear
5. Read the internal temperature of the tire with the Is LOW indicated?
HDS.
YES-Replace the appropriate tire pressure sensor
NOTE: If not defined is shown on the HDS, turn the (see page 18-92).•
turn the ignition switch ON (II), and try again. If not NO-Check for loose terminals and poor
defined is still shown, repeat the procedure in the connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
previous sentence until NORMAL is shown. substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
Is 176 OF (80 °C) or more indicated?

(see page 18-92).•
NO-Check for loose terminals and poor

connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
18-68 BACK
DTC 32, 34, 36, 38: Tire Pressure Sensor 8. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Transmitting Failure
Is DTC 85 indicated?
NOTE: Inspect for an aftermarket device interfering with
the RF signal from the sensors when turning the YES-Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page
ignition switch ON (II). 18-84) .•
1. Check the indicated location to make sure the NO-Check for loose terminals and poor
wheel is a TPMS type with the tire pressure sensor. connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
DTC Tire location (see page 18-90), and recheck .•
32 Right-front
34 Left-front 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Is a TPMS type wheel with a tire pressure sensor 11. With the HDS, check the indicated tire for the tire
mounted on the vehicle? sensor status changing to normal.
YES-Go to step 10. NOTE: If not defined is shown on the HDS, turn the
NO-Go to step 2. turn the ignition switch ON (11), and try again. If
status does not change to normal, repeat the
2. Install a known-good TPMS wheel. procedure in the previous sentence until NORMAL
is shown.
3. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or DTC Tire location
memorize the ID with the HDS (see page 18-56). 32 Right-front
34 Left-front '
4. Test-drive the vehicle. 36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
5. Check the VSP in the TPMS DATA LIST with the
HDS. Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the
tire?
Is the vehicle speed indicated?
YES-The system is OK atthis time. Clear the DTC
YES-Go to step 9. with the HDS .•
(cont'd)
BACK 18-69
12. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 20. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
13. Install a wheel with a known-good tire pressure 21. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
sensor on the vehicle. 20P connector terminal No. 20 and the appropriate
initiator 3P connector terminal No~ 1.
14. To memorize the sensor ID, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or DTC Initiator location
memori·ze the ID with the HDS (see page 18-56). 32 Right-front
34 Left-front
15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
17. With the HDS, check the indicated tire for a normal
pressure sensor signal.
NOTE: If not defined is shown on the HDS, turn the

turn the ignition switch ON (II), and try again. If not
defined is still shown,repeat the procedure in the
previous sentence until NORMAL is shown.
DTC Tire location

32 . Right-front
1 2 3 RIGHT-
34 Left-front '-..,.!.~;..JREAR
36 Right-rear
38 Left-rear
Q
Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the
tire?
~~;:,J RIGHT-FRONT
YES-Replace the tire pressure sensor on the
customer's wheel (see page 18-92) .• LF PWR. (BLU)
NO-Go to step 18.

INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
19. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector. Is there continuity?
DTC Initiator location YES-Go to step 22.

32 Right-front
34 Left-front NO-Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
36 Right-rear control unit and the appropriate initiator.•
38 Left-rear
18-70 BACK
22. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 23. Check for continuity between the TPMS control unit
20P connector terminal No. 15 and appropriate 20P connector appropriate terminal and
initiator 3P connector terminal No.3. appropriate initiator 3P connector terminal No.2
(see table).
DTC Initiator location
32 Right-front DTC TPMS control Initiator location
34 Left-front unit terminal
36 Right-rear 32 No.6 Right-front
38 Left-rear 34 No.5 Left-front
36 No. 17 Right-rear
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 38 No. 16 Left-rear
LEFT·FRONT RIGHT·FRONT
TPMS CONTROL UNIT

20P CONNECTOR
LEFT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
LEFT-REAR
LFGND(GRN)
RIGHT-REAR
LEFT·REAR RIGHT·REAR
Is there continuity? INITIATOR 3P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 23.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
control unit and the appropriate initiator.. YES-Go to step 24.

control unit and the appropriate initiator.•
(cont'd)
BACK 18-71
TPMS
24. Check for continuity between body ground and the 25. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
TPMS control unit 20P connector appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector appropriate
terminal (see table). terminal (see table).
DTC TPMS control unit terminal DTC TPMS control unit terminal
32 No.6 32 No.6
34 No.5 34 No.5
36 No.17 36 No. 17
38 No.16 38 No. 16
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
LF LF SIG. lORN) RF LF SIG. IGRV) LF LF SIG. lORN) RF LF SIG. IGRV)
Q Q
= = = = = =
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
between the TPMS control unit and the appropriate the TPMS control unit and the appropriate
initiator.. initiator.•
NO-Go to step 25. NO-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page

18-91).•
18-72 BACK
DTC 41: Abnormal Signal Reception Error 7. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NOTE: Inspect for an aftermarket device interfering with 8. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
the RF signal from the sensors when turning the
ignition switch ON (II). Is DTC 85 indicated?
1. Check all four wheels to make sure they are the YES-Go to the DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page
TPMS type with the tire pressure sensor. 18-84).•
Is each wheel a TPMS type with a tire pressure NO-Check for loose terminals and poor
sensor mounted on the vehicle? connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
YES-Go to step 10. (see page 18-90), and recheck .•
NO-Go to step 2. 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Install known-good TPMS wheel(s). 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. To memorize the sensor ID(s), drive the vehicle 11. Check TPMS DATA LIST for LF, RF, LR, RR sensor
above 15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, status changing to "NORMAL".
or memorize the ID(s) with the HDS (see page
18-56). NOTE: If not defined is shown on the HDS, turn the
4. Test-drive the vehicle. turn the ignition switch ON (II), and try again. If not
defined is still shown, repeat the procedure in the
5. Check the VSP in the TPMS DATA LIST with the previous sentence until NORMAL is shown.
HDS.
Is the vehicle speed indicated? tire?
YES-Go to step 9. YES-The system is OK at this time. Clearthe DTC

with the HDS .•
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
BACK 18-73
TPMS·
DTC 45: Initiator Circuit Short Detection 9. Check for continuity between body ground and the
TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No. 20.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn the ignition

switch ON (II) again.
YES-Go to step 5. =
NO-The system is OK at this time .•
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there continuity?
6. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the TPMS control unit and the initiators .•
7. 'Check for continuity between body ground and the
TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No. 20. NO-Go to step 10.
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 10. On each individual initiator, check for continuity
between body ground and the initiator 3P
NOTE: Check the initiators when mounted on the

vehicle.
YES-Go to step 8.
=
NO-Go to step 11. Terminal side of male terminals
8. Disconnect all four the initiator 3P connectors.

YES-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page

18-91) .•

18-74 BACK
11. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 14. On the initiator side, check for continuity betwe(1)l
20P connector terminal No. 15 and No. 20. all four initiator 3P connector terminals No.1 and
No.3 individually.
Wire. side of female terminals

YES-Go to step 12.
YES-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page
NO-Go to step 15. 18-91) .•
12. Disconnect all four initiator 3P connectors. NO-Check for loose terminals and poor .,
connections at theTPMS control unit. If necessary,
13. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
20P connector terminal No. 15 and No. 20. (see page 18-90), and recheck .•

TPMS CONTROL UNIT20P CONNECTOR
16. Measure the voltage between body ground and

TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No. 15.
LF GND (GRN) LF PWR. (BLU)

YES-Repair short in the wire between TPMS

control unit 20P connector terminals No. 15 (LF
GND line) and No. 20 (LF PWR. line) .• Wire side of female terminals
NO-Go to step 14.


the TPMS control unit and the initiators .•

BACK 18-75
TPMS·
DTC 51, 53, 55,57: Initialization Status of 6. With the HOS, check the indicated tire for the'"
TPMS Control Unit is Not-completed normal sensor signal.
1. Check the indicated location to make sure the NOTE: If not defined is shown on the HOS, turn the
wheel is a TPMS type with the tire pressure sensor. ignition switch OFF, rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then
turn the ignition switch ON (II), and try again. If not
DTC . Tire location defined is still shown, repeat the procedure in the
51 Right-front previous sentence until NORMAL is shown.
53 Left-front
55 Right-rear DTC Tire location
57 Left-rear 51 Right-front
53 Left-front
Is a TPMS type wheel with a tire pressure sensor 55 Right-rear
mounted on the vehicle? 57 Left-rear
YES-Go to step 7. Is NORMAL indicated within one full turn of the

tire?
NO-Go to step 2.
YES-The system is OK at this time. Clear the OTC
2. Install a known-good TPMS wheel. with the HOS .•
3. To memorize the sensor 10, drive the vehicle above NO-Go to step 12.
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or
memorize the 10 with the HOS (see page 18-56). 7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
4. TUrn the ignition switch OFF. 8. Install a wheel with a known-good tire pressure
sensor on the vehicle.
9. To memorize the sensor 10, drive the vehicle above
15 mph (24 km/h) for 40 continuous seconds, or
memorize the 10 with the HOS (see page 18-56).
18-76 BACK
12. With the HDS, check the indicated tire for a normal 15. Disconnect the:TPMS control. unit 20P connector.
pressure sensor signal.
NOTE: If not defined is shown on the HDS, turn the 20P conn~ctor terminal No. 20 and appropriate
ignition switch OFF, rotate the tire 1/4 turn, then initiator 3P connectorterminal No.1.'
turn the ignition switch ON (11), and try again. If not . ,",
defined is still shown, repeatthe procedure in the DTC. f l'

Initiator location
previous sentence until NORMAL is shown. 51 ii', .. Right-front
53 Left-front
DTC Tire location 55 Right-rear
51 'Right-front 57 . Lett-rear
53
55
' . Left-front
, RIght-rear TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
Left-rear Wire side of female terminals
57

tire?', :, " t~
YES-Replace the tire pressure sensor on the

customer's wheel (see page. 18-92l.•
NO-Go to step 13.

"
13. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1 2 3 RIGHT·
REAR
~,.;::.L;"-
14. Disconnect the appropriateil1itiator 3P connector.

51 Right-front
53 Left-front
55 Right-rear .. -...:,.L~;"- RIGHT·FRONT
,57 Left-rear
YES-Go to step 17.

(cont'd)
BACK 1'8~77
..".'
TPMS';
17. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 18. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit
20Pconnectorterminal No.15 and appropriate 20P connector appropriate terminal and
(see table).
51 Right-front DTC "TPMS control, Initiator location
53 Left-front ,c. unit1terminal'
55 Right-rear 51 .' No;6 Right-front
57 Left-rear 53 No.5 Left-front
55 No. 17 Right·rear
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 57 ' ,-- No. 16 Left-rear
Wire'side of female terminals
LEFT·FRONT RIGHT·FRONT
'TPMS CONTROL UNIT

20P CONNECTOR
LEFT·FRONT
LEFT·REAR
LFGND(GRN)
RIGHT·REAR
INITIATOR 3PCONNECTOR
Wire side of female terrniriais
LEFT·REAR RIGHT·REAR
YES-Go to step 18.
control unit and the appropriate initiator.• YES-Go to step 19.

18-78 BACK
19. Check for continuity between body ground and the 20. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
TPMS control unit 20P connector appropriate TPMS control unit 20P connector appropriate
terminal (see table). terminal (see table).
DTC TPMS control unit terminal DTC TPMS control unit terminal
51 No.6 51 No.6
53 No.5 53 No.5
55 No. 17 55 No. 17
57 No.16 57 No. 16
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
LF LF SIG. (ORN) RF LF SIG. (GRV) LF LF SIG. (ORN) RF LF SIG. (GRV)
Q Q
= = = = = = =
Wire side of female terminals Wire side offemale terminals
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
between the TPMS control unit and the appropriate the TPMS control unit and the appropriate
initiator.• initiator.•
NO-Go to step 20. NO-Repair the appropriate initiator (see page

18-91).•
BACK 18-79
TPMS
DTC 61, 63, 65, 67: Initiator Circuit Open 8. Check for continuity between TPMScontro\ unit
Detection 20P connector terminal No. 20 and appropriate
initiator 3P connector terminal No.1.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 61 Right-front
63 Left-front
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn the ignition 65 Right-rear
switch ON (II) again. 67 Left-rear
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS, and note the TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
indicated DTC(s). Wire side of female terminals
Is DTC 61,63,65, and/or 67 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
6. Disconnect the appropriate initiator 3P connector.

61 Right-front
63 Left-front
65 Right-rear
67 Left-rear
"=!,~'-' RIGHT-FRONT
7. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
LF PWR. (BLU)
YES-Go to step 9.

18-80 BACK
9. Check for continuity between TPMS control unit 10. Check for continuity between TPMS control. unit
20P connector terminal No.15 and appropriate 20P connector appropriate terminal and
(see table).
OTC Initiator location
61 Right-front OTC TPMS control Initiator location
63 Left-front unit terminal
65 Right-rear 61 No.6 Right-front
67 Left-rear 63 ,No.5 Left-front
65 No. 17 Right-rear
TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR 67 No.16 Left-rear
LEFT-FRONT RIGHT-FRONT
LFGND(GRN)
TPMSCONTROL UNIT
20P CONNECTOR
. Wire side of female terminals
LEFT-FRONT
RIGHT-FRONT
LEFT-REAR
LFGND(GRN)
RIGHT-REAR
LEFT-REAR RIGHT-REAR
YES-Go to step 10.
control unit and the appropriate initiator.• YES-Go to step 11.

(cont'd)
BACK 18-81
TPMS
11. Check for noted DTC(s) in step 4. 17. Check for DTCs with the HDS, and compare the
indicated DTC with the noted DTC(s) in step 4.
Were DTC 61,63,65, and 67 indicated at the
same time? DTC Initiator location
61 Right-front
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor 63 Left-front
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, 65 Right-rear
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit 67 Left-rear
Does the indicated DTC change between the
NO-Go to step 12. initiators that were rep/aced in step 12?
12. Replace the initiator indicated by the DTC with YES-Replace the appropriate initiator (see page
another initiator with no DTC (it may be a known- 18-91).•
good initiator) (see page 18-91).
DTC Initiator location connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
61 Right-front substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
63 Left-front (see page 18-90), and recheck .•
65 Right-rear
67 Left-rear
16. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn the ignition
18-82 BACK
OTC 81:TPMS Control Unit Failure (RAMI OTC 83: No VSP Signal.
ROM/ADC/EEPROM/ALU) Check
NOTE: Low battery voltage can cause this DTC. Make
sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition. 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.·
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II).
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) Is DTG 83 indicated?
again.
YES-Go to step 5.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS ..
IsDTG 81 indicated?
YES-Replace the TPMS control uriit (see page
18-90).• Is DTG 85 indicated?
NO-The system is OK at this time .• YES-Go to DTC 85 troubleshooting (see page

18-84).•
NO-Go to step 6.
6. Test-drive the vehicle.
7. Check the VSP in the TPMS DATA LISTwith,the

HDS.
Is the vehicle speed indicated?

connections at the TPMS control unit. If, necessary,
{see page 18-90), and recheck.•
NO-Goto step 8.
8. Check the speedometer.
Does the speedometer register speed?
YES-Replace the TPMS control unit (see page

18-90).•
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page

11-252), and retest. If no codes are shown, replace
the original PCM .•
BACK 18-83
.'t;-; .
TPMS
DTC 85: CAN Data Error 10. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 11. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 12. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P).
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn the ignition 13. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
4. Wait about 5 seconds. 20P connector terminals and PCM connector A
(44P) terminals individually. (see table).
Terminal TPMS control PCMA
Is ore 85 indicated? name unit terminal terminal
CAN L No.11 No. 37
YES-Go to step 6. CANH No.1 No. 36
NO-The system is OK at this time.• TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
CANH(WHT)
Does the speedometer work?
YES-Go to step 10.
7. Turn the ignition switch 'OFF.

Q Q
8. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. PCM CONNECTOR A(44P)
Does the speedometer work?

connections atthe TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit .
NO-Turn the ignition switch OFF, and reconnect
all connectors, then check and troubleshoot the fuel
and emissions systems (see page 11-3).• Is there continuity?

NO--Repair open in the wire between the TPMS

control unit and the PCM .•
18-84 BACK
DTC 91, 93, 95, 97: Tire Pressure Sensor
Internal Error
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)

again.
4. Wait about 1 minute.
NOTE: The tire pressure sensor of the appropriate

wheel is shown.
DTC Tire location

91 Right-front
93 Left-front
95 Right-rear
97 Left-rear
Is OTe 91,93,95 or 97 indicated?

(see page 18-92).•
BACK 18-85
TPMS
Low pressure indicator does not come on, 7. Wait about 5 seconds with the ignition switch
and no OTCs are stored turned ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Check for gauges DTC with the HDS (see page 22~6).
2. Check the low pressure indicator for several Is any gauge DTC indicated?
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
YES-Troubleshoot the indicated gauge DTC.•
Did the indicator come on and then go off?
NO-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 7.
10. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
11. Measure the voltage between TPMS control unit 20
4. Check the pressure in all four tires. P connector terminals No.4 and No.8.
Is the tire pressure 175 kPa (1.8 kgflcrrf, 25 psi)

or less? TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 5.
GND(BLKI IG1 (BRNI
6. Check the TIRE PRESSURE in the TPMS DATA LIST

with the HDS, and compare with measured actual
tire pressure. Wire side of female terminals
NOTE: If not defined is shown on the HDS, turn the

ignition switch OFF, rotate the appropriate tire 1/4 Is there battery voltage?
turn, then turn the ignition switch ON (II), and try
again. If not defined is still shown, repeat the YES-Repair short to power in the wire between
procedure in the previous sentence until NORMAL the TPMS control unit and the No. 100.5 AI fuse in
is shown. the under-dash fuse/relay box.•
Is the indicated tire pressure on the HDS within NO-Check for loose terminals and poor
40 kPa (0.4 kgflcrrf, 6 psi) of the actual tire connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
pressure? substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-90), and recheck.•
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the tire pressure sensor (see page

18-92) .•
18-86 BACK
Low pressure indicator does not go off, and TPMS indicator does not come on, and no
no DTCs are stored DTCs are stored
2. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. 2. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.
4. Check the low pressure indicator for several 4. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds
seconds when the ignition switch is turned ON (II). when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Did the indicator come on and then go off? Did the indicator come on and then go off?
YES-Check for loose terminals and poor YES-Check for loose terminals and poor
connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary, connections at the TPMS control unit. If necessary,
substitute a known-good TPMS control unit substitute a known-good TPMS control unit
(see page 18-90), and recheck.• (see page 18-90), and recheck.•
NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control
module (see page 22-258). If necessary, substitute a module (see page 22-258). If necessary, substitute a
known-good gauge control module (see page known-good gauge control module (see page
22-284), and recheck .• 22-284), and recheck .•
BACK 18-87
TPMS
Symptom Troubleshooting (cont'd)
TPMS indicator does not go off, and no DTCs 7. Measure the voltage between body ground and
are stored TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No. 10.
NOTE: Check for gauges DTCs with the HDS(see page

22-6). If gauges DTCs are stored, troubleshoot those TPMs CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
DTCsfirst.
+B(RED)
2. Check the TPMS indicator for several seconds

when the ignition switch is turned ON (II).
Did the indicator come on and then go off?
YES-The system is OK at this time .• Wire side of female terminals

=
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Go to step 8.
4. Check the No. 20(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box. NO-Repair open in the wire between the TPMS
control unit and the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
Is the fuse blown? dash fuse/relay box .•
YES-Replace the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse, and 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
recheck .•
NO-Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 5. TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No.8.
5. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash

fuse/relay box. TPMS CONTROL UNIT 20P CONNECTOR
Is the fuse blown? IG1 (BRN)
YES-Replace the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse, and

recheck.•
NO-Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 6.
6. Disconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector. =

YES-Go to step 10.

control unit and the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-
dash fuse/relay box.•
18-88 BACK
11. Reconnect the TPMS control unit 20P connector.

TPMS control unit 20P connector terminal No.4.
GND (BlK)
= Wire side of female terminals
Is there 0.1 V or more?
YES-Repair open or high resistance in the wire

between the TPMS control unit and body ground
(G503) .•
NO-Do the troubleshooting for the gauge control

module (see page 22-258). Ifthe gauge control
module is OK, check for loose terminals and poor
substitute a known-good TPMS control (see page
18-90), and recheck.•
BACK 18-89
TPMS
TPMS Control Unit Replacement
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit mounting

bracket is not bent or twisted as this may affect its
communication with the initiators and the tire pressure
sensors.

(see page 20-102).
2. Disconnect the TPMS control unit connector (A).
NOTE: The TPMS control unit is located under the

steering column.
3. Remove the TPMS control unit (8) from the bracket

(C).
NOTE: While separating the TPMS control unit

from the bracket, release the hook (D) on the TPMS
control unit using a flat-tipped screwdriver (E), and
push up to release it from the bracket.
4. Install the TPMS control unit in the reverse order of

removal.
NOTE: Make sure the TPMS control unit is properly

installed. You will hear a click when the TPMS
control unit is securely mounted on the bracket.
5. Connect the HDS and memorize the pressure

sensor IDs (see page 18-56). Do not memorize the
IDs automatically.
18-90 BACK
Initiator Replacement
Front Rear
, ,.j
NOTE: Make sure the initiator mounting bracket is not 1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
bent or twisted as this may affect its communication safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
with the TPMS control unit and the tire pressure sensor.
2. Remove the rear wheel.
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). 3. Remove the cover (A) with the initiator (8), and
disconnectthe initiator connector (e).,
2. Remove the front wheel.
3. Remove the front inner fender (see page 20-176).
4. Disconnect the initiator connector (A).
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
4. Separate the cover and the initiator.

6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) 5. Install the initiator in the reverse order of removal.
5. Remove the initiator (8) from the inner side of the

wheel well.
6. Install the initiator in the reverse order of removal.
BACK 18-91
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement
Removal 5. Position the wheel so the tire machine (A) and tire
iron (8) are next to the valve stem (e) and will move
1. Raise the vehicle, and support it with safety. stands . away from it when the machine starts. Then
in the proper locations (see page 1-7). I' remove the tire fromthe wheel.·
2. Remove the wheel with the faulty sensor.
3. Remove the.tirevalve.capand the valve core,and

let the tire deflate.· .
4. Remove any balance.weights, and then break the

bead loose from the wheel with a commercially
available tire changer (A) ..
INOTICE I
Note these items to avoid damaging the tire
pressure sensor:
• Do the outside of the wheel ~i rst.
• Position the wheel as shown so the valve
stem (8) is 90 degrees from the bead
breaker (e) as shown. 6. Remove the valve stem nut (A) and washer (8),
• Do not position the bead breaker of the tire then remove the tire pressure sensor with valve
changer too closeJo the rim. stem (e) from the wheel.
_____ A
~
OUTSIDE'
18-92 BACK
7. Remove and discard the valve.stem grommet (A), Installation
from the tire pressure sensor (B).
NOTE:
NOTE: o Use only wheels that have a "STK" stamp (A) on
o The valve stem grommet might stay in the wheel; . them.,

make sure you remove it. o This vehicle may be equipped with either type 1 or
o Always use a new valve stem grommet type 2 wheels. ; ,

whenever the tire pressure sensor has been
removed from the wheel. When only removing a TYPE 1
tire from the wheel, replace the valve stem
grommet if it is possible.
TYPE 2
(cont'd)
BACK 18-93
Tire Pressure Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
1. Before installing the tire pressure sens()r, clean the 4. lube,the tire bead, and position the wheel so the
mating surfaces on the sensor and the wheel. tire machine (A) and tire iron (B) are next to the
valve stem (C) and will move away from it when
2. Install the tire pressure sensor (A) 'and the washer the machine starts. Then install the tire onto the
(B) to the wheel (C), and tighten the valve stern nut wheel. ' d'
(D) finger tight. Make sure the pressure:sensor is' i', '
resting on the wheel.
"
WHEEL CENTER B
5. Inflate the tire to 300 kPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 psi) to seat

the tire bead to the rim, then adjust the tire
3. Tighten the valve stem nut to the specified torque pressure to 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2, 32 psi).
while holding the tire pressure sensor.
NOTE: Make sure the tire bead is seated on both
NOTE: Do not use air or electric impact tools to sides of the rim uniformly.
tighten a valve stem nut.
6. Check the valve stem nut tightening torque, then
install the valve stem cap.
7. Check and adjust the wheel balance, then install the

wheels on the vehicle. Torque the wheels to
specifications.
8. Remove the jack stands, and lower the vehicle.
9. Connect the HDS and memorize the pressure

sensor ID(s) (see page 18-56).
18-94 BACK
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components

Special Tools ................................................................. 19-2
Brake System Inspection and Test .............................. 19-4
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch
Adjustment ................................................................ 19-6
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment ................. 19-7
Brake System Bleeding ................................................ 19-9
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram .................... 19-10
Parking Brake Switch Test ........................................... 19-11
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test ...................................... 19-11
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement ........... 19-12
Front Brake Disc Inspection ......................................... 19-15
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul ...................................... 19-16
Master Cylinder Replacement ..................................... 19-17
Master Cylinder Inspection .......................................... 19-19
Brake Booster Test ....................................................... 19-20
Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance Adjustment ......... 19-21
Brake Booster Replacement ........................................ 19-22
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement ............ 19-24
Rear Brake Disc Inspection .......................................... 19-27
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul ....................................... 19-28
Parking Brake Inspection ............................................. 19-29
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement ............................... 19-31
Parking Brake Shoe Lining Break-in ........................... 19-34
Brake Pedal Replacement ............................................ 19-35
Brake Hose and Line Inspection .................................. 19-36
Brake Hose Replacement ............................................. 19-37
Parking Brake Cable Replacement .............................. 19-39
Electric Vacuum Pump System 19-41
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)

System Components .................................... 19-81
Special Tools
Ref. No. Tool Number Descr~tion Qty

Q) 07AAE-SEPA101 Brake Caliper Piston Compressor 1
® 070AB-SJA0100 Booster Piston Holder 1
Q)
19-2 BACK
BRAKE BOOSTER
Test, page 19-20
Push rod Clearance Adjustment, page 19-21
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

Circuit Diagram, page 19-10
Parking Brake Switch Test, page 19-11
Brake Fluid Level Switch Test, page 19-11
PARKING DRUM BRAKE

Inspection,
page 19-29
Shoe Replacement,
page 19-31
Shoe Lining Break-in,
page 19-34
REAR DISC BRAKE

Pad Inspection and
Disc Inspection, rage 19-27
Caliper Overhau ,page 19-28
PARKING BRAKE
MASTER CYLINDER Inspection and Adjustment, page 19-7
Brake System Cable Replacement, page 19-39
Bleeding, page 19-9
Replacement, page 19-17 BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection, page 19-19 Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position
Switch Adjustment, page 19-6
FRONT BRAKE
Pad Inspection and
Disc Inspection, page 19-15
Caliper Overhaul, page 19-16
BACK 19-3
Brake System Inspection and Test
Inspect the brake system components listed. Repair or replace any parts that are leaking or damaged.
Comp_onent nspect·Ions:
Component Procedure Also check for
Master Cylinder Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging seat at reservoir cap. This is a
• Reservoir, subreservoir, or master cylinder sign of fluid contamination.
body.
• Lines, reservoir hose and grommets, and
their joints.
• Between master cylinder and booster.
Brake Hoses Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Bulging, twisted, or bent lines.
• Line joints and banjo bolt connections.
• Hoses and lines, also inspect for twisting or
damage.
Caliper Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at: Seized or sticking caliper pins.
• Piston seal.
• Banjo bolt connections.
• Bleed screw.
VSA Modulator- Look for damage or signs of fluid leakage at:
control Unit • Line joints.
• Modulator-control unit.
Brake System Test
Brake pedal sinks/fades when braking
1. Set the parking brake, and start the engine, then turn off the AlC switch. Allow the engine to warm up to normal
operating temperature (radiator fan comes on twice).
2. Attach a 50 mm (2 in.) piece of masking tape along the bottom of the steering wheel, and draw a horizontal
reference mark across it.
3. With the transmission in P or N position, press and hold the brake pedal lightly (about the same pressure needed
to keep an AfT-equipped vehicle from creeping), then release the parking brake.
4. While still holding the brake pedal, hook the end of the tape measure behind the brake pedal, then pull the tape up
to the steering wheel. Note the measurement between the brake pedal and the reference mark on the steering
wheel.
5. Apply steady pressure to the brake pedal for 3 minutes.
6. Watch the tape measure .
• If the measurement increases 10 mm (3/8 in.) or less, the master cylinder is OK .

• Ifthe measurement increases more than 10 mm (3/8 in.), replace the master cylinder.
NOTE: When the electric vacuum pump motor operates, the brake pedal pressing force will be changed. In this
case, the master cylinder is not faulty.
19-4 BACK
Rapid brake pad wear, vehicle vibration 6. Loosen the hydraulic lines at the master cylinder,
(after a long drive), or high, hard brake pedal then spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper,pins are installed Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
correctly.
The upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin A are YES-Go to step 7.
different.lfthe pins are installed in the wrong location,
it will cause, vibration, uneven or rapid brake pad wear, NO-Replace the master cylinder (see page 19-17).
and possibly uneven tire wear. For proper caliper pin
location (see page 19-16).
•
7. Loosen the bleed screws at each caliper, then spin
1. Check the electric vacuum pump system (see page the wheels to check for brake drag.
19-43). Make sure the indicator is not turned on.
Is there brake drag at any of the wheels?
2. Drive the vehicle until the brakes drag or until the
pedal is high and hard. This can take 20 or more YES-Disassemble and repair the caliper on the
brake pedal applications during an extended test- wheel(s) with brake drag .•
drive.
NO-Look for and replace any damaged brake lines.
3. With the engine running, raise the vehicle on a lift, If all brake lines are OK, replace the VSA
and spin all four wheels by hand. modulator-control unit (see page 19-137).•
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Look for other causes ofthe pad wear, high

pedal, or vehicle vibration .•
4. Turn the engine off, pump the brake pedal to

deplete the vacuum in the brake booster, and then
spin the wheels again to check for brake drag.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the brake booster (see page 19-22).•
5. Without removing the brake lines, unbolt and

separate the master cylinder from the booster, then
spin the wheels to check for brake drag.
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Check the brake pedal position switch

adjustment and pedal free play (see page 19-6) .•
BACK 19-5
Brake Pedal and Brake Pedal Position Switch Adjustment
Pedal Height Brake Pedal Position Switch Clearance
1. Turn the brake pedal position switch (A) 4. Using one hand, lift up on the brake pedal, while
counterclockwise, and pull it back until it is no doing step 4. Push in the brake pedal position
longer touching the brake pedal. switch until its plunger is fully pressed (threaded
end (A) touching the pad (B) on the pedal arm).
Then, turn the switch 45 0 clockwise to lock it. The
gap between the brake pedal position switch and
the pad is automatically adjusted to 0.7 mm
(0.028 in.) by locking the switch. Make sure the
brake lights go off when the pedal is released.
A
0.7 mm (0.028 in)

2. Pull back the carpet and find the cutout (B) in the
insulator. Lift up the insulator cutout and measure
the pedal height (C) at the center of the pedal pad
(D) to the floor without the insulator.
Standard pedal height (with carpet removed):

165 mm (61/2 in.) 5. Check the brake pedal free play.
3. Loosen the pushrod locknut (A), and screw the

pushrod (B) in or out with pliers until the standard
pedal height from the floor is reached. After
adjustment, tighten the locknut firmly. Do not
adjust the pedal height with the pushrod pressed.
BACK
Parking Brake Inspection and
Adjustment
Pedal Free Play
1. With the engine off, inspect the pedal free play (A) Inspection
on the pedal pad (B) by pushing the pedal by hand.
If the brake pedal free play is out of specification, 1. Press the parking brake pedal (A) with 294 N (30 kgf,
adjustthe brake pedal position switch (e). Ifthe 661bf) of force to fully apply the parking brake. The
brake pedal free play is insufficient, it may result in parking brake pedal should be locked within the
brake drag. specified number of clicks.
Free play: 1-5 mm (1/16-3/16 in.1 Pedal locked clicks: 6 to 7
A
Pressed with
294N
(30 Kgf, 66 Ibf)
./
2. Adjust the parking brake if the pedal clicks are not

within the specification.
NOTE: Minor parking brake pedal adjustments

(1 to 2 clicks) can be made with the adjusting nut. If
a larger adjustment is required, follow the major
adjustment procedure using the adjuster at the
parking brake drum.
After installing new parking brake shoes and/or
new brake disc/drum, make sure you drive the
vehicle for "break-in" (see page 19-34).
(cont'd)
BACK 19-7
Parking Brake Inspection and Adjustment (cont'd)
Minor Adjustment Major Adjustment (to be done when

replacing parking brake shoes)
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support itwith
safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7). 1. Raise the· rear'ofthe vehicle, and support it with
2. Release the parking brake pedal fully.
2.. Release the parking brake pedal fully.
3. Press the parking brake pedal 1 click.
3. Back off the parking brake adjusting nut (A) in the
4. Tighten the parking brake adjusting nut (A) until the parking brake pedal.
parking brakes drag slightly when the rear wheels
are turned.
5. Release the parking brake pedal fully, and check 5. Remove the access plug (A).
that the parking brakes do notdrag when the rear
wheels are turned. Readjust if necessary.
6. Make sure the parking brakes are fully applied

when the parking brake pedal is pressed all the way.
6. Turn the ratchet teeth on the adjuster nut (B) with a

flat-tip screwdriver (C) until the shoes lock against
the parking brake drum. Then back off the adjuster
8 clicks, and install the access plug.
7. Install the rear wheels.
8. Do the minor adjustment procedure.
19-8 BACK
Brake System Bleeding
NOTE: 4. Attach a length of clear drain tube (A) to the bleed

• Do not reuse the drained fluid. Use only clean Acura screw (B), then, loosen the bleed screw to allow air
DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. to escape from the system. Then tighten the bleed
Using a non-Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion screw securely.
and shorten the life of the system.
• Do not mix different brands of brake fluid; they may NOTE: Do not loosen the special bolt (C) on the rear
not be compatible. caliper.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter is allowed
to contaminate the brake fluid. Front
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle, it may damage
the paint; if brake fluid does contact the paint, wash it
off immediately with water.
• The reservoir connected to the master cylinder must
be at the MAX (upper) level mark at the start of the
bleeding procedure and checked after bleeding each
brake line. Add fluid as required.
1. Make sure the brake fluid level in the reservoir (A)

is at the MAX (upper) level line (B).
B I Rear
B
9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 7 Ibf·ft)
2. Have someone slowly pump the brake pedal

several times, then apply steady pressure.
3. Start the bleeding at the driver's side of the front A

brake system.
NOTE: Bleed the calipers or the wheel cylinders in

the sequence shown.
BLEEDING SEQUENCE:
® Front Right ® Rear Right 5. Refill the master cylinder reservoir to the MAX
(upper) level line.
6. Repeat the procedure for each brake line until no

air bubbles are in the fluid.
CD Front Left G) Rear Left
BACK 19-9
Brake System Indicator Circuit Diagram
~WHT-r
INDICATOR DRIVER CIRCUIT
I BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

J!-RED-{
VSA MODULATOR-
CONTROL UNIT
(EBD INDICATOR)
I I
22 23
PNK LTBLU
BRAKE FLUID PARKING BRAKE

LEVEL SWITCH SWITCH
CLOSED: Float down CLOSED: Applied
OPEN: Float up OPEN: Released
1
BLK
1.-
G451
19-10 BACK
Parking Brake Switch Test Brake Fluid Level Switch Test
NOTE: If both the ABSNSA indicator andthe brake Check for continuity between the terminals (1) and (2)
system indicator come on at the same time, check the with the float in the down position and in the up
VSA system first (see page 19-83). position.
1. Disconnect the parking brake switch connector (A) NOTE:

from the parking brake switch (B). • Remove the brake fluid completely from the reservoir.
With the float down, there should be continuity.
• Fill the reservoir with brake fluid to the MAX (upper)
level (A). With the float up, there should be no
c continuity.
• If both the ABSNSA indicator and the brake system
indicator come on at the same time, check the VSA
system first (see page 19-83).
• Ifthe parking brake switch and fluid level switch are
OK, but brake system indicator does not function,
B
check the VSA system (see page 19-83).
2. Check for continuity between the positive terminal

(C) and body ground.
2
• With the parking brake pedal pressed, there
should be continuity .
• With the parking brake pedal released, there
should be no continuity.
NOTE: If the parking brake switch and fluid level

switch are OK, but the brake system indicator does
not function, check the VSA system (see page
19-83).
BACK 19-11
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Special Tools Required Replacement

Brake caliper piston compressor 07 AAE-SEPA 101
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
ACAUTION 2. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust; regardless of safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health . 3. Remove the front wheels.
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake 4. Remove the flange bolt (A) while holding the
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum caliper pin (B) with a wrench. Be careful notto
cleaner. damage the pin boot, and pivot the caliper (C) up
out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for
damage and deterioration.
Inspection

3. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and

outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:

Standard: 11.5-12.2 mm (0.45-0.48 in.)
Service limit: 1.& mm (0.0& in.)
5. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (B).
4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service

limit, replace the front brake pads as a set.
19-12 BACK
6. Remove the pad retainers (A), 11. Mount the brakecaHper piston compressor (A)'on
the caliper body (B).
7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove

any rust, and check for grooves and cracks.
12. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston
8. Check the brake disc for damage and cracks. compressor so the caliper will fit over the brake
pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (PIN prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
08798-9010) to the retainers,.on their mating down.
surfaces (indicated by the arrows) againsUhe'
caliper bracket. NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston;
brakeJluid might overflowfromthe master
10. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly cylinder's r e s e r v a i r . ,
paste offthe.retainers. Keep any assembly paste
off the discs and pads. 13. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor.
";i
" ')
(cont'd)
BACK 19-13
Front Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
14. Apply athin coat of M-77 assembly paste (PIN 16. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the
08798-9010) to the pad side ofthe shims (A), the flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque
back of the brake pads (B) and the other areas while holding the caliper pin (B) with a wrench. Be
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly careful not to damage the pin boot.
paste off the pad shims and brake pads.
Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce A
stopping ability. Keep grease and assembly paste
~10x1.0mm
50N·m
off the brake discs and brake pads. (5.1 kgf.m, 37 Ibf·tt)
17. Press th&'brake pedal several times to make sure

the brakes-work.
15. Install the brake pads\and pad shims correctly. NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal
Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
the upper inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, replaced asa set. Several applications ofthe brake
always rei nsta Irthe brake pads in their original pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking
efficiency. 18. Add brake fluid as needed.
19. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line

joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks
(see page 19-36).
19-14 BACK
Front Brake Disc Inspection
Runout" Thickness·and ParaUelisril
1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with 1. Raise the front of the vehicle, and support it with
2. Remove the front wheels. 2. Remove the front wheels.
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-12). 3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-12).
4. Inspect the brake disc surface for damage and 4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc
cracks. Clean the brake disc thoroughly, and thickness at eight points, about 45 °apart and
remove all rust. 10 mm (3/8 in.) in from the outer edge ofthe brake
disc. Replace the brake disc if the smallest
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts (B), measurement is less than the max. refinishing limit.
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque
to hold the brake disc securely against the .hub: Brake disc thickness:
. Standard: 27.8-28.1 mm (1;09-1.11 in.)
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in.)
Brake disc parallelism: 0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference

between the th ickness measu remen~s.
B
108N·m
(11.0 kgf.m, 79.6'bf·tt)
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc as

shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in.)
from the outer edge of the brake disc.
Brake disc runout:

7. Ifthe brake disc is beyond the service limit, refinish 5. If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
the brake disc with an on-car brake lathe. The parallelism, refinish the brake disc with an on-car
Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way Manufacturing brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way
Co. and the "Front Brake Disc Lathe" offered by Manufacturing Co. and the '.'Front Brake Disc
Snap-on Tools Co. are approved forthis operation. Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved
for this operation.
Max. refinishing limit: 26.0 mm (1.02 in. I
NOTE: If the brake disc is beyond the service limit
NOTE: . for refinishing, replace it (see page 18-13).
• If the brake disc is beyond the service limit for
refinishing, replace it (see page 18-13) .
• A new brake disc should be refinished if its
runout is greater than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.).
BACK 19-15
Front Brake Caliper Overhaul
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation ofbrake pad dust; regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health .
• Avoid breathing dust particles .
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
NOTE: Make sure that the caliper pins are installed correctly. Upper caliper pin B and lower caliper pin Aare different.
If the these caliper pins are installed in the wrong location, it will cause vibration, uneven or rapid pad wear, and
possibly uneven tire wear.
• Do not spill brake fluid on thevehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off .
immediately with water. .
• To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blowout all passages with compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets on the brake discs or pads.
• When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-
Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
• Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
• Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and caliper bores with clean brake fluid.
• Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
~ : Honda silicone grease (PIN 08C30-B0234MI CALIPER PIN PIN BOOT
Replace.
WEAR INDICATOR
0
Install inner brake pad with
INNER PAD SHIM A its wear indicator upward.
\ BRAKE PADS
INNER~. HIM B O
. ____
~ OUTER PAD SHIM
CALIPER PIN B
4
BANJO BOLT
34N·m
BRAKE HOSE
\
BLEED SCREW
9N·m
(0.9 ksf·m, 7 Ibf·ftl
~
/ CALIPER PIN A
(3.5 kgf.m'2~ .. 7J
.@(j 0......-~)~~_
~
CALIPER
BRACKET
.-----
PAD RETAINERS
SEALING WASHERS
Replace .
.
10x1.0mm
50N·m
(5.1 kgf.m,
37lbf·ftl
19-16 BACK
Master Cylinder Replacement
4. Disconnect the brake fluid level switch connector

INOTICEI (A).
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may
B
damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, 6x 1.0 mm
wash it off immediately with water. 9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
• Be careful not to damage or deform the brake
lines during removal and inspection.
• To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and
cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel
or equivalent.
1. Open the air cleaner housing cover (see page

11-394).
2. Release the hooks (A), and move the under-hood

fuse/relay box (B) aside. Do not disconnect the
connectors.
A
5. Remove the reservoir mounting bolt (B).
6. Remove the reservoir stay (A) with the under-hood

fuse/relay box stay (B).
3. Remove the reservoir cap and brake fluid from the

master cylinder reservoir with a syringe.
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 19-17
Master Cylinder Replacement (cont'd)
7. Disconnect the brake lines (A) from the master 12. Install the master cylinder in the reverse order of
cylinder (B). To prevent spills, cover the line joints removal, and note these items:
with rags or shop towels.
• Check the brake booster push rod clearance
B 0 (see page 19-21).
• Coat the new O-ring with the silicone oil
(Shin-Etsu KF54).
• Check the brake pedal height and free play after
Ott
;-.
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it if
necessary (see page 19-6) .
~/
. 13. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
14. Spin the wheels to check for brake drag.

C
13N·m
(1.3 kgf·m,
9.4Ibf·ftl
A
22N·m
8. Remove the master cylinder mounting nuts (C).
9. Remove the brake booster pressure sensor (D) with

the stay, and move it aside. Do not damage the
sensor and the wire harness.
10. Remove the master cylinder from the brake booster

(E). Be careful not to bend or damage the brake
lines when removing the master cylinder.
11. Remove the O-ring (F) from the master cylinder.
NOTE: Replace the O-ring whenever the master

cylinder is removed.
19-18 BACK
Master Cylinder Inspection
1. Inspect and note these items: 2. If the reservoir hose was disconnected, install the
reservoir (A) and the reservoir hose (B) to the
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free subreservoir (C).
of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Do not try to disassemble the master cylinder NOTE:
assembly. Replace the master cylinder assembly • Align the rib plates (D) on the reservoir and
with a new part if necessary. subreservoir with the paint marks (E) on the hose.
• Do not allow dirt or foreign matter to • Position the direction of the clamp (F).
contaminate the brake fluid.
D F
RESERVOIR CAP
~
~ Check for blockage
of vent holes. .
~
. STRAINER .
RESERVOIR B Re~ove accumulated
SEAL sediment.
Check for
damage and SUBRESERVOIR
deterioration. Check for leaks,
and damage.
RESERVOIR
\
Check for damage.
O-RING
MASTER CYLINDER Replace.
Check for leaks,
rust, and damage.
BACK 19-19
Brake Booster Test
NOTE: The brake boost system on this vehicle is Leak Test

assisted by a electric vacuum pump. When electric
vacuum pump system indicator comes on, check the 1. Press the brake pedal with the engine running, then
electric vacuum pump system (see page 19-43) first. But stop the engine. The brake pedal height should not
the indicator may come on when testing the brake vary while pressed for 30 seconds. If the pedal
booster. In this case, it is not a fail of electric vacuum height rises go to step 6. If it does not rise go to
pump system. Check for DTC with the HDS,and clear step 2.
the DTCs (see page 19-46)..
2. Start the engine and let it idle for 30 seconds. Turn
Functional Test the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds. Press
the brake pedal several times using normal
1. With the engine off, press the brake pedal several pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should
times to deplete the vacuum reservoir, then press be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal
the brake pedal hard, and hold it for 15 seconds. If height should gradually rise. Does the pedal rise on
the brake pedal sinks, either the master cylinder is each consecutive application? If it rises the booster
leaking internally, or the brake system is leaking. is OK. If it does not go to step 3.
Inspect the brake hoses and lines (see page 19-36).
3. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose (A)
2. Start the engine with the brake pedal pressed. If the from the 3-way joint (B). The check valve (intake
brake pedal sinks slightly, the vacuum booster is manifold) (C) is built into the hose.
operating normally. If the brake pedal height does
not vary, do the leak test.
3. Do the brake system test (see page 19-4).
4. Start the engine, and let it idle. There should be

vacuum available. If no vacuum is available, the
check valve (intake manifold) is not working
properly. Replace the brake booster vacuum hose
and check valve (intake manifold), and retest. If
vacuum is found, go to step 5.
19-20 BACK
Brake Booster Pushrod Clearance',
Adjustment
5. With the engine off, reconnect the vacuum hose to
the 3-way joint.
Special Tools Required'
6. Start the engine, and then pinch the brake booster Booster piston holder 070AB-SJA0100
vacuum hose between the 3-way joint and the
booster. NOTE:
• Brake booster push rod to piston clearance must be
7. Turn the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds. checked and readjusted before installing a new
Press the brake pedal several times using normal master cylinder.
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should • The master cylinder assembly comes with,a tool that
be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal must be used to adjust the clearance between the
height should gradually rise. brake booster push rod and the master cylinder piston.
• Use only the tool that comes with the new master
• If the pedal position does not vary go to step 8. cylinder to check the pushrod clearance. Do not use
• If the pedal position varies, replace the brake any other tool.
booster vacuum hose/check valve (intake • Make sure to discard the tool supplied with the
manifold) assembly. master cylinder after its use.
• The brake booster must be installed on the vehicle
8. Start the engine, and pinch off the booster vacuum before doing the pushrod clearance adjustment.
hose between the 3-way joint and electric vacuum • If the booster is removed, check the pushrod length
pump. (A) as shown. Ifthe length is incorrect, loosen the
pushrod locknut (B), and turn the yoke (C) in or out to
9. Turn the ignition switch off, and wait 30 seconds. adjust, then install the master cylinder.
Press the brake pedal several times using normal
A
pressure. When the pedal is first pressed, it should 116 mm (4.6 in.)
be low. On consecutive applications, the pedal
height should gradually rise.
• If the pedal position does not vary inspect the

seal between the master cylinder and booster. If
the seal is OK, replace the brake booster.
• If the pedal positions varies, inspect the vacuum
hose between the 3-way joint and the electric
vacuum pump check valve. If the hose is OK,
replace the vacuum hose/check valve (vacuum
pump).
B
26N·m
(cont'd)
BACK 1.9-21
Brake Booster Push rod Clearance Brake Booster Replacement

Adjustment (cont'd)
1. Removethe air cleaner (see page 11-394).
1. Measure the clearance between the plate (A) 2. Remove the master cylinder (see page 19-17).
supplied with master cylinder and brake booster
push rod (8). Make sure that the tool is lying flat 3. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and the brake
against the surface (C) of the brake booster, and booster pressure sensor hose (8) from the brake
that the tip of the tool contacts the push rod. If the booster (C).
tool will not lie flat (D) or there is a gap (E) between
the tool and the push rod, go to step 2 to adjust the
push rod in or out.
4. Remove the brake lines (A) from the clamp (8).
B
Omm (0 in.)
2. If the clearance is incorrect, use the booster piston

holder to hold the push rod (A), and turn the
adjusting screw (8) clockwise to increase clearance
or counterclockwise to decrease clearance.
3. Install the master cylinder (see page 19-17).
19-22 BACK
5. Remove the heater hose (A) from the clamp (B). 10. Pull the brake booster (A) forward, then move the
brake booster to the front side while turning it.
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf.ft)
11. Remove the brake booster upward from the engine

6. Remove the water valve mounting bracket (C). Do compartment.
not disconnect the heater hoses.
7. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover INOTICE I

(see page 20-98). • Be careful not to damage the booster
surfaces and threads of the booster stud
8. Remove the lock pin (A) and the joint pin (B), then bolts.
disconnect the yoke from the brake pedal. • Be careful not to bend or damage the
brake lines.
12. install the brake booster in the reverse order of

• Adjust the pushrod length before installing the

brake booster.
• Always use a new lock pin.
• Install the master cylinder after installing the
brake booster (see page 19-17).
• Check the brake pedal height and free play after
installing the master cylinder, and adjust it
A (see page 19-6).
• Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
C
8x1.25mm
13 N·m (1.3 kgf.m, 9.4Ibf.ft)
9. Remove the brake booster mounting nuts (C).
BACK 19-23
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement
Special Tools Required Replacement

Brake caliper piston compressor 07 AAE-SEPA 101
1. Remove some brake fluid from the master cylinder.
ACAUTION 2. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with

Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
material composition, coul~ be hazardous to your
health . 3.. Remove the rear wheels.
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake 4. Remove the flange bolt (A) while holding the
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum caliper pin (B) with a wrench. Be careful not to
cleaner. damage the pin boot, and pivot the caliper (C) up
out of the way. Check the hose and pin boots for
damage and deterioration.
Inspection

~. Check the thickness (A) of the inner pad (B) and

outer pad (C). Do not include the thickness of the
backing plate.
Brake pad thickness:

Standard: 8.3-9.0 mm (0.33-0.35 in.)
5. Remove the pad shims (A) and brake pads (8).
C
4. If the brake pad thickness is less than the service
limit, replace the rear brake pads as a set.
19-24 BACK
6. Remove the pad retainers (A). 11. Mount the brake caliper piston compressor (A) on
the caliper body (B).
NOTE: The upper and lower pad retainers are
B
different. During installation, make sure the pad
retainers are in proper positions.
A
07AAE-SEPA101
12. Press in the piston with the brake caliper piston

7. Clean the caliper bracket (B) thoroughly; remove compressor so the caliper will fit over the brake
any rust, and check for grooves and cracks. pads. Make sure the piston boot is in position to
prevent damaging it when pivoting the caliper
8. Check the brake disc/drum for damage and cracks. down.
9. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (P/N NOTE: Be careful when pressing in the piston;
08798-9010) to the retainers on their mating brake fluid might overflow from the master
surfaces (indicated by the arrows) against the cylinder's reservoir.
caliper bracket.
13. Remove the brake caliper piston compressor.
10. Install the pad retainers. Wipe excess assembly
paste off the retainers. Keep any assembly paste
off the discs and pads.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-25
Rear Brake Pad Inspection and Replacement (cont'd)
14. Apply a thin coat of M-77 assembly paste (PIN 16. Pivot the caliper down into position. Install the
08798-9010) to the pad side of the shims (A), the flange bolt (A), and tighten it to the specified torque
back of the brake pads (B) and the other areas while holding the caliper pin (B) with a wrench. Be
indicated by the arrows. Wipe excess assembly careful not to damage the pin boots.
paste off the pad shims and brake pads.
Contaminated brake discs or brake pads reduce A
8x 1.0mm
stopping ability. Keep grease and assembly paste 23 N·m 12.3 kgf·m, 17 'bf·tt)
off the brake discs and brake pads.
17. Press the brake pedal several times to make sure

the brakes work.
15. Install the brake pads and pad shims correctly. NOTE: Engagement may require a greater pedal
Install the brake pad with the wear indicator (C) on stroke immediately after the brake pads have been
the bottom inside. If you are reusing the brake pads, replaced as a set. Several applications of the brake
always reinstall the brake pads in their original pedal will restore the normal pedal stroke.
positions to prevent a momentary loss of braking
efficiency. 18. Add brake fluid-as needed.
19. After installation, check for leaks at hose and line

joints or connections, and retighten if necessary.
Test-drive the vehicle, then check for leaks
(see page 19-36).
19-26 BACK
Rear Brake Disc Inspection
Runout Thickness and Parallelism
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with 1. Raise the. rear of the vehicle, and support it with
2. Remove the rear wheels. 2. Remove the rear wheels.
3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-24).. 3. Remove the brake pads (see page 19-24).
4. Inspect the brake disc/drum surface for damage 4. Using a micrometer, measure the brake disc/drum
and cracks. Clean the brake disc/drum thoroughly, thickness at eight points, about 45 °apart and
and remove all rust. 10 mm (3/8 in.) in from the outer edge of the brake
disc/drum. Replace the brake disc/drum if the
5. Install suitable flat washers (A) and wheel nuts (B), smallest measurement is less than the max.
and tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque refinishing limit.
to hold the brake disc/drum securely against the
hub. Brake disc/drum thickness:
Standard: 8.9-9.1 mm (0.35-0.36 in.)
Max. refinishing limit: 7.5 mm (0.30 in.)
Brake disc/drum parallelism:
0.015 mm (0.0006 in.) max.
NOTE: This is the maximum allowable difference

between the thickness measurements.
B
108N·m
(11.0 kgf.m, 79.6Ibf·ft)
6. Set up the dial gauge against the brake disc/drum

as shown, and measure the runout at 10 mm (3/8 in.)
from the outer edge of the brake disc/drum.
Brake disc/drum runout:

7. Ifthe brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit,

refinish the brake disc/drum with an on-car brake
lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by Kwik-Way
Manufacturing Co. and the "FrontBrake Disc 5. If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit
Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are approved for parallelism, refinish the brake disc/drum with an
for this operation. on-car brake lathe. The Kwik-Lathe produced by
Kwik-Way Manufacturing Co. and the "Front Brake
Max. refinishing limit: 7.5 mm (0.30 in.) Disc Lathe" offered by Snap-on Tools Co. are
approved for this operation.
NOTE:
• If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service limit NOTE: If the brake disc/drum is beyond the service
for refinishing, replace it (see page 18-32). limitfor refinishing, replace it (see page 18-32).
• A new brake disc/drum should be refinished if its
runout is greater than 0.04 mm (0.0016 in.).
BACK 19-27
Rear Brake Caliper Overhaul
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health .
Remove, disassemble, inspect, reassemble, and install the caliper, and note these items:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
immediately with water.
• To prevent dripping brake fluid, cover disconnected hose joints with rags or shop towels.
• Clean all parts in brake fluid and air dry; blowout all passages with compressed air.
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of dirt and other foreign particles.
• Replace parts with new ones as specified in the illustration.
• Make sure no dirt or other foreign matter gets in the brake fluid.
• Make sure no grease or oil gets onthe brake discs or pads.
• When reusing brake pads, always reinstall them in their original positions to prevent loss of braking efficiency.
• Do not reuse drained brake fluid. Use only clean Acura DOT 3 Brake Fluid from an unopened container. Using a non-
Acura brake fluid can cause corrosion and shorten the life of the system.
• Do not mix different brands of brake fluid as they may not be compatible.
• Coat the pistons, piston seal grooves, and caliper bores with clean brake fluid.
• Replace all rubber parts with new ones whenever disassembled.
• After installing the caliper, check the brake hose and line for leaks, interference, and twisting.
~ : Honda silicone grease (PIN 08C30·B0234MI

8x 1.0mm
23 N·m BLEED SCREW
(2.3 kgf.m, 9 N·m
BRAKE HOSE 17 Ibf·ftl (0.9 kgf.m, 7 Ibf·ftl
::~~~ BOLT \ I /
PISTON BOOT
R'eplace.
(3'5kgf.m'2~~@l~~~ ~)s:~
~
,
/0
:® Do not loosen
~ SEALING " 1Ji))

~
this bolt.
WASHERS
~ 0
! \~
Replace. PISTON
INNER PAD SHIM B _______ J!![

~\
\
tJ_______41_A tl
PAD SPRING
~
CALIPER
BODY
PISTON SEAL
~m ~~p1~c~.BOOT
CALIPER PIN B
INNER PAD SHIMA ~ ~o ~
\
, .. ~ WEAR INDICATOR \) - - - - OUTER PAD SHIM
Install inner brake pad with
~~~
its wear indicator downward.
~ BRAKE PADS
UPPER PAD RETAINER
CALIPER PIN A~
~---- LOWER PAD RETAINER

108N'm
/
12x1.25mm
CALIPER BRACKET
"9-28 BACK
Parking Brake Inspection
ACAUTION
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health .
• Avoid breathing dustparticles.
, '
1. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with safety stands in the proper locations (see page 1-7).
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear brake caliper and brake disc/drum (see page 18-32).
14x 1.Smm '

137N·m
(14.0 kgf·m, 101 Ibf·ft)
\ WAVE WASHER
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
Marked left and right.
U·CLlP
-------~~
Replace. UPPER RETURN SPRING
Checkforvveakness
12x1.2Smm
98.1 N·m'
(10.0 kgf·m,
/,
\ and damage.
ROD SPRING
Check for vveakness
72.3 Ib(.ft) and damage.
TENSION PIN
. . - - PIVOT PIN
BRAKE SHOE BOSSES

Check for deep
grooves and rust.
BRAKE SHOE
()Ja:)J,~~ RETAINER SPRING
If brake shoes are Check for vveakness
to be reused, mark and damage.
and reassemble in /
the same position. CONNECTING ROD B CONNECTING ROD A
LOWER RETURN SPRING

Check for vveakness ADJUSTER NUT
and damage. Check ratchet teeth
for vvear and damage.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-29
Parking Brake Inspection (cont'd)
4. Check the parking brake linings (A) for cracking, 8. Measure the inside diameterpfthe parking brake
glaiing, wear, and contamination~ drum with inside vernier calipers. ..
Parking brake drum inside diameter:

Standard: 199.9-200.0 mm (7.870-7.874 in.)
5. Measure the parking brake lining thickness (8).

Measurement does not include brake shoe
thickness. 9. If the inside diameter of the parking brake drum is
more than service limit, replace the brake disci
Parking brake lining thickness: drum.
Standard: 3.2'mm(O.126 in.)
Service limit: 1.0 mm (0.04 in.) 10. Check the parking brake disc/drum for scoring,
grooves, and cracks.
6. Ifthe parking brake lining thickness is less than the
service limit, replace all the parking brake shoes as
a set.
7. Check the hub (C) for smooth operation. If it

requires servicing, replace the hub bearing unit
(see page 18-32).
19-30 BACK
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement
6. Remove the tension pins (A) by pushing the

ACAUTION respective retainer spring (8) and turning the pin.
Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of
B
material composition, could be hazardous to your
health .
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake
assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum
cleaner.
B
Disassembly
,. Raise the rear of the vehicle, and support it with
3. Release the parking brake, and remove the rear

brake caliper and brake disc/drum (see page 18-32).
7. Remove the adjuster assembly (e) by moving
4. Disconnect and remove the brake spring A and the forward brake shoe (D).
upper return spring (8).
8. Remove the rearward brake shoe by disconnecting
the parking brake cable (A) from the parking brake
lever (8).
5. Disconnect and remove the lower return spring (A).
(cont'd)
BACK 19..31
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement (cont'd)
9. Disconnect the rod spring (A), and remove the strut Reass~mbly
(8).
1. Apply Molykote 44MA grease,to the sliding surface
ofthe pivot pin (A), arid insert the pin into the
rearward brake shoe (8) from the outside.
10. Remove the parking brakeshoes (C) ..
11. Remove the U-clip (A), wave washer (8), parking

brake lever (C), and pivot pin (D) from the brake 2. Install the parking brake lever (C) and wave washer
shoe (E). . (D) on the pivot pin, and secure with a new U-clip
(E) .
• Install the wave washer with its convex side

facing out.
• Pinch the U-clip securely to prevent the parking
brake lever coming out from the brake shoe.
3. Position the parking brake shoes (A), then hook the

rod spring (8) on the strut (C) first with the spring
end (D) pointing downward. Then hook the rod
spring to the parking brake shoe, and install the
strut on the parking brake shoes.
19-32 BACK
4. Apply a thin coat of Molykote 44MA grease to the 6. Install the tension pins (C) and retainer springs (D).
brake shoe ends and strut ends (A), the sliding Make sure the tension pin does not contact to the
surfaces of the parking brake shoe (B), and the parking brake lever.
pivot of the parking brake lever (C) as shown. Wipe
off any excess. Keep grease off the brake linings.
Greasing symbols:
. .® Brake shoe ends and strut ends 7. Install connecting rods A and B on the adjuster nut
': ~'o Sliding surfaces of the shoe (E).
¢ . Pivot of parking brake lever
NOTE:
5. Connect the parking brake cable (A) to the parking • Clean the threaded portions of connecting rod A
brake lever (B). Apply silicone grease to the cable and the sliding surface of connecting rod B, then
contact surface (C) on the backing plate. coat them with rubber grease.
• Shorten connecting rod A by fully turning the
adjuster nut.
8. Position the brake shoe adjuster assembly (F) on

the parking brake shoes.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-33
Con"entional Brake Components
Parking Brake Shoe Replacement Parking Brake Shoe Lining BlI'eak-in

(cont'd)
9. Install the lower return spring (A).
NOTE:
• Do brake lining surface break-in when replacing
shoes with new brake linings and/or new rear brake
disc/drum .
• Check the number of parking brake lever clicks.
Adjust the parking brake before lining surface break-
in (see page 19-8).
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface.
2. Release the parking brake pedal.
3. Press the parking brake pedal 4 clicks.

10. Install the upper return spring (8) and the brake
spring A. 4. Drive the vehicle for 1/4 mile (400 m) at about
31 mph (50 km/h).
/ 5. Stop the vehicle, and release the parking brake for

5-10 minutes to allow the brake disc/drum to cool.
6. Repeat steps 3 through 5 again.
7. Check the parking brake pedal adjustment

(see page 19-7).
11. Install the rear brake disc/drum and rear brake

caliper (see page 18-32).
12. Do the major parking brake adjustment (see page

19-8).
19-34 BACK
Brake Pedal Replacement

(see page 20-102).
2. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch

connector (A).
E
8x 1.25 mm
13 N·m 11.3 kgf·m, 9.4Ibf·ft)
3. Remove the lock pin (8) and joint pin (C).
NOTE: Use a new lock pin whenever installing.
4. Remove the brake pedal bracket mounting bolt (D)

and nuts (E).
5. Remove the brake pedal with bracket (F).
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
7. Do the brake pedal and brake pedal position switch

adjustment (see page 19-6).
BACK 19-35
Brake Hose and Line Inspection
1. Inspect the brake hoses for damage, deterioration, leaks, interference, and twisting.
2. Check the brake lines for damage, rusting, and leaks. Also check for bent brake lines.
3. Check for leaks at hose and line joints and connections, and retighten if necessary.
4. Check the master cylinder and the VSA modulator-control unit for damage and leaks.
Connection Component Connected to Specified Torque Value Note

Point
A Front brake caliper Brake hose 34 N·m (3.5 kQf·m, 25 Ibf·ft) Banio bolt
Bleed screw 9 N·m (0.9 kgf.m, 7 Ibf·ft)
B Rear brake caliper Brake hose 34 N·m (3.5 kaf·m, 25 Ibf·ft) Banio bolt
Bleed screw 9 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 7 Ibf·ft)
C Brake hose Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kaf·m, 11Ibf·ft) Flare nut
D Master cylinder Brake line 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft) Flare nut
E VSA modulator-control unit Brake line 22 N·m (2.2 kgf.m, 16Ibf·ft) Flare nut
(12 mm nut)
Brake line 15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 Ibf·ft) Flare nut
(10 mm nut)
19-36 BACK
Brake Hose Replacement
NOTE: Installation-Front
• Before reassembling, check that all parts are free of
dirt and other foreign particles. ' 1. Install the brake hose (A) with the mounting bolt (B).
• Replace parts with new ones whenever specified to
do so.
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage
" A
the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off

• To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and
cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or
equivalent material.
Removal-Front C
10x1.0mm
34N·m
1. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose (3.5 kgf.m. 25 Ibf·ftl
(B), then remove the brake hose clip (C). B
8x1.25mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf.m. 16lbf·ftl
2. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with the

banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
B
3. Install a new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hose
(B) on the bracket, then connect the brake line (C).
Do not twist the brake hose.
C
10x 1.0mm
15N·m
(1.5 kgf.m. 11 Ibf·ftl
B
2. Remove the banjo boll(A), and disconnect the
brake hose (B) from the caliper.
C
8x1.25mm
B 4. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake

5. Do the following checks:
tighten if necessary .
• Check the brake hoses for interference and
twisting.
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (C), then
remove the brake hose.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-37
Brake Hose Replacement (cont'd)
Removal-Rear Installation-Rear
1. Disconnect the brake line (A) from the brake hose 1. Install the brake hose (A) with the mounting bolt (8).
(8), then remove the brake hose clip (C).
B
8x 1.25 mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf.ft)
A
C
10x1.0mm
34N·m
13.5 kgf.m,
25Ibf·ft)
2. Remove the banjo bolt (A), and disconnect the 2. Connect the brake hose to the caliper with the
brake hose (8) from the caliper. banjo bolt (C) and new sealing washers (D).
3. Install a new brake hose clip (A) to the brake hose

(8) on the bracket, then connect the brake line (C).
Do not twist the brake hose.
C
8x1.25mm
A C
10x1.0mm
A 15N·m
11.5 kgf·m,
11Ibf.ft)
B
3. Remove the brake hose mounting bolt (C), then
remove the brake hose.
4. After installing the brake hose, bleed the brake

5. Do the following checks:
tighten if necessary .
• Check the brake hoses for interference and
twisting.
19-38 BACK
Parking Brake Cable Replacement
Exploded View
Ch./, ,,,'ty
PARKING BRAKE CABLE A
mov.m.nt.
LEFT PARKING BRAKE CABLE

Check for faulty movement.
\~
PARKING BRAKE
PEDAL ASSEMBLY
8x1.2Smm
22N·m
8x1.2Smm (2.2 kgf·m,
22N·m 16Ibf·ft)
(2.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
6x 1.0mm Multipurpose grease
9.8N·m (Sliding surface)
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Check for smooth operation.
RIGHT PARKING BRAKE CABLE
Check for faulty movement.
(cant'd)
BACK 19-39
Parking Brake Cable Replacement (cont'd)
NOTE:
• The parking brake cable must not be bent or distorted.
This will lead to stiff operation and premature cable
failure .
• Refer to the Exploded View as needed during this
procedure.
1. Loosen the parking brake cable adjusting nut

(see page 19-8).
2. Remove the parking brake shoes, and disconnect

the parking brake cable from the parking brake
lever (see page 19-31).
3. Remove the parking brake cable mounting bolts

from the backing plate (A).
6x1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
4. Pull the parking brake cable (B) and remove it from

the backing plate.
5. Reinstall the parking brake cable in the reverse

order of removal, and note these items:
• Be careful not to bend or distort the cable.

• Connect the parking brake cable to the brake
lever, and install the brake shoes and disc/drum
(see page 19-31).
• Do the parking brake adjustment (see page 19-7).
Apply the parking brake firmly 10 times then
adjust it again.
19-40 BACK
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components ................... 19-1
Electric Vacuum Pump System

DTC Troubleshooting Index ........................................ 19-47
Circuit Diagram ............................................................. 19-54
Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Replacement ........... 19-78
Electric Vacuum Pump Replacement ......................... 19-79
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)

System Components .................................... 19-81
BACK
VACUUM HOSE 3·WAYJOINT

Check valve
(intake manifold) included
VACUUM HOSE
Check valve (vacuum pump) included
BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE SENSOR
Replacement,
page 19·78
I ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP

PCM
UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
19-42 BACK
System Indicator Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
This system has an electric vacuum pump system • The memory can hold any number of DTCs. However,
indicator (A). when the same DTC is detected more than once,the
more recent DTC is written over the earlier one.
• When the system detects a problem, the electric Therefore, when the same problem is detected
vacuum pump system indicator stays on. repeatedly, it is memorized as a single DTC.·
• When the system is normal, the electric vacuum • The DTCs are indicated in the order they occur .
pump system indicator comes on after turning the • The DTCs are memorized in the PCM.
ignition switch ON (II), then it goes off under these • The electric vacuum pump system DTCs are shown
conditions: independently, and are treated as additional internal
- Before starting the engine. data by the PCM. Therefore, the electrical vacuum
- After starting the engine. pump system DTCs are canceled by disconnecting
- Pressing the brake pedal for the first time after the battery.
starting the engine.
Self-diagnosis
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories:

-Initial diagnosis: Done when the ignition switch is
turned ON (II), and until the electric vacuum pump
system indicator goes off.
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial
diagnosis, until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
• When the system detects a problem, the system
shifts to a fail-safe mode.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-43
El'ectric Vacuum Pump System
Pump Motor Relationship of the Fuel and Emissions

Systems
The electricvacuum pump operates as needed. You can
hear the motor function at times, this is normal. The electric vacuum pump system is a part of the brake
The pump motor operates under these conditions: systems. Operation relies on information from sensors
in the Fuel and Emission systems. Review general
• The system detects if the brake booster vacuum troubleshooting in Fuel and Emissions systems
becomes low while the engine is running. (see page 11-3).
• After cold starting the engine, or the outside
temperature is very cool.
• At high altitude.
The pump motor turns off when the system detects the
brake booster vacuum is sufficient enough. If the
system detects a fault, the system shifts to fail-safe
mode, and turns on the electric vacuum pump system
indicator.
19-44 BACK
: ' '
"
How to Troubleshoot DTCs' Intermittent Failures

The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause The term "intermittent failure" means a system may
ofthe problem is still present and the electric vacuum have had a failure, but ,it checks OK now. If the electric
pump system indicator is still on. Following the vacuum pump system indicator on the dash does not
procedure when the electric vacuum pump system come on, check for poor connections or loose terminals
indicator does not come on can result in incorrect at all connectors related to the circuit that you are
diagnosis. troubleshooting. If the indicators were on but then went
When a client has driven the vehicle abnormally, these out, the original problem may have been intermittent.
DTCs are might been stored:
• DTC P15BC: Drive the vehicle and apply/release the

brake pedal repeatedly for 1 minute or more .
• DTC POS71:
- Both the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal are
pressed at the same time for 5 minutes, and vehicle
speed is 12 mph (20km/h) or more.
- Stop the vehicle speed from 24 mph (40 km/h)
without pressing brake pedal (using only parking
brake etc.) continuously 3 times or more.
1. Ask the customer about the conditions when the

problem occurred and the electric vacuum pump
system indicator came on, such as during braking,
acceleration when vehi.cle was travelling at a
certain speed, etc.
2. When the electric vacuum pump system indicator

does not come on during the test-drive, but
troubleshooting is done based on the DTC, check
for loose connectors, poor contact of the terminals,
etc.
3. After troubleshooting or repairs are done, clear the

DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the DTC was originally set.
Make sure the electric vacuum pump system
indicator does not come on.
4. Check for DTCs in other systems that are connected

via the F-CAN. If there are DTCs that are related to
the F-CAN, the most likely cause was that the
ignition switch was turned ON (II) while the PCM
connectors were disconnected.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-45
How to Use the HOS (Honda Diagnostic How to Retrieve orcs

System)
1. If the electricvacuum pump system indicator stays the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
; on, connect the HDS to the data link connector side of the dashboard.
(DLC) (A) located uhderthe driver's side ofthe
dashboard. 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Make sure theHDS communicates with the PCM. If

it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
11-229).
4. Follow the prompts on the HDS to display the

DTC(s) on the screen. After determining the DTC,
refer to the DTC troubleshooting.
How to Clear orcs
NOTE: Check for fuel and emissions systems DTCs and

A write down the codes indicated.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connectthe HDS to

2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). the data link connector (DLC) under the driver's
side of the dashboard.
it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
11-229).
3.. Make sure the HDS communicates with the PCM. If
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (DTC) and note it. it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page
Also check the on-board snapshot data, and 11-229).
download any data found. Then refer to the
indicated DTC's troubleshooting, and begin the 4. Clear the DTC(s) by following the screen prompts
appropriate troubleshooting procedure. ontheHDS.
NOTE: 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF~

• The HDS can read the DTC, freeze data, snapshot,
current data, and other system data .
• For specific operations, refer to the Help menu
that came with the HDS.
19-46 BACK
DTe Troubleshooting Index . -,i
DTe Detection Item ' ,', Elect,ric Vacuum Note

Pump System
Indicator
P0555 Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 19-57)
P0556 Brake Booster Pressure Sensor,CircuitRange/Periormance ON, ,(see page 19-60)
Problem
P0571 Brake Pedal Position Switch Circuit ON (see page 19-63) ,
P1131 Electric Vacuum Pump System, Related PGM-FI Se,nsor ON (see page 19-64)
Signal Malfunction,; , {~
"
P15B9 Check Valve (Intake Manifold) Leak Detected " ON (see page 19-64)
P15BA Check Valve (Intake Manifold}-Stuck Closed "
.-
ON (see page 19-65),
P15BB Brake Booster System Leak Detected:., ON (see page 19,66)
P15BC ElectricVacuumPump OQerating Time Exceeded ON (see page 19-67)
P16D9, Powertrain Control Module (PCM)'lnternal. Circuit ON (see page 19-64)
Malfunction -',
P16DA Electric Vacuum Pump Relay 1 Stuck OFF

"
ON (see page 19-71)

P16DB Electric Vacuum Pump Relay 1/2 Signal Circuit Malfunction ON (see page 19-74)
P16DC Electric Vacuum Pump Relay 2 Stuck ON ON (see page 19-76)
P16DD ElectricVacuum Pump,Relav 1 Stuck ON ON (see page 19-77)
NOTE: If the electric vacuum pump system indicator and MIL come on at the same time, selectthe PGM-FI system with
the HDS, and check the fuel and emissions system DTCs first (see page 11-3).
BACK 19-47

--
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (DTC) with the HDS. If there is no
DTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure .

HOS does not communicate with the PCM Troubleshootthe'OLC circuit (see page 11-229).
or the vehicle
Electric vacuum pump system indicator 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see.page 22-258).
does not come on 2. Update the PCM(see.page 11-7) or substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-8), then recheck, If it is OK and substituted,
replace the originalPCM (see page 11-252).
Electric vacuum pump system indicator 1. Press the brake pedal several times.
does not go off, and no OTCs are stored 2. Start the engine.
3. Check the F-CAN lines between the PCM and the. gauge control·
module, and troubleshoot the gauge control module OTC "
(see page 22-3).

4. Check for fuel and emission systems OTCs with the HOS, and
troublesh00t the system (see. page 11-3).
, . 5. Update the PCM(see pagelF7) or substitute a known-good
PCM (see page 11-8), the.!l,recheck.oIf the syste.m is OK with the
substituted PCM, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252).
Brake assist is reduced, and no OTCs are Check the conventional brake system.
stored , ..
19-48 BACK
System Description
PCM (Electric Vacuum Pump System) Inputs and Outputs at Connector A (0) (44P)

number
6 GRN MRlY (PGM-FI MAIN Drives PGM-FI main relay 1 With ignition switch ON (II): about 0 V
RELAY .1) (C) (C) With ignition switch OFF: battery voltage
Power source for DTC
memory
8 ORN IGP (POWER SOURCE) Power source for PCM With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltage
circuit
9 BlK SG6 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensol"Qround Less than 1.0 V at all times
12 WHT VPMPRl¥ (VACUUM PUMP -Drives vacuum pump relay With electric vacuum pump OFF: about 0 V
RELAY) With electric vacuum pump ON: about 14.0 V
13 PNK VPMPRLYD Detects vacuum pump At idle with electric vacuum pump OFF: about 2.3 V
signal load At idle with electric vacuum pump ON: about 14.0 V
17 YEL APSA(ACCElERATOR Detects APP sensor A signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
SENSOR A) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
18 PUR APSB(ACCElERATOR Detects APP sensor B signal With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
SENSOR B) With ignition switch ON (II) and accelerator pedal
19 RED VCC6 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
24 GRY VCC5 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor F!lference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
volt~e
25 BRN VCC4 (SENSOR VOLTAGE) Provides sensor reference With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
voltage
34 LTBLU SG5 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
35 BLU SG4 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
36 WHT CAN H(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V (pulses)
HIGH)
37 RED CAN L(CAN Sends communication With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.5 V (pulses)
LOW}
40 LTGRN BKSW (BRAKE PEDAL Detects brake pedal With brake pedal released: about 0 V
POSITION SWITCH) position switch signal With brake pedal pressed: battery voltaae
(cont'd)
BACK 19-49

PCM (Electric Vacuum Pump System) Inputs and Outputs at Connector B (.6.) (44P)
Ir 11
111 t/ 314151/ 7 8 I 9 1.11
L• / 11 12 13114115116 17 18 V
L- ~
20 21 22 >< 23
26 27 28 VI30131 132 33
24 25
34 35
I
1-
1361/ / '1/14OJ41 42 43 1441
Terminal Wire color Terminal name ,. Description Signal

number
1 BLK PG2 (POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
,
circuit
5 GRN/BLK PBMPA (BRAKE BOOSTER Detects brake booster With ignition switch ON (II) and brake pedal
PRESSURE) pressure sensor signal released: about 2.0 V
36 BLK PG1(POWER GROUND) Ground circuit for PCM Less than 1.0 V at all times
circuit
PCM (Electric Vacuum Pump System) Inputs and Outputs for Connector C (0) (44P)
"
I 1123141516178191
"
~. 10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19 JI
20 21 22 >< 231/25 I
-~ 262728 29130131132/V/ If-
1361/ 38139140 141 142 431441

number
11 GRN/RED MAP (MANIFOLD Detects MAP sensor signal With ignition switch ON (II): about 2.0 V
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE At idle: about 1.0 V (depending on engine speed)
(MAP)'SENSOR)
13 VEL/RED VCC1 (SENSOR VOlTAGE) Provides sensor voltage With ignition switch ON (II): about 5.0 V
14 GRN/WHT SG1 (SENSOR GROUND) Sensor ground Less than 1.0 V at all times
36 BLK/YEL IG1 (IGNITION SIGNAL) Detects ignition signal With ignition switch ON (II): battery voltaoe
19-50 BACK
System Necessity
• Starting cold engine: The fuel and emissions systems will retard timing to.:help heat up the catalytic converter and
turbocharger with high exhaust temperature. In this case, the vacuum pressure inthe intake manifold is reduced .
• When the turbocharger system supercharges the intake air, the intake manifold vacuum pressure will be reduced.
To compensate for vacuum loss, the electric pump is required, especially in high altitude areas where low
atmospheric density conditions create long warm up condition.
System Control
The electric vacuum pump controls the target vacuum of the brake booster compared to atmosphere pressure.
Target Vacuum Pressure of the Brake Booster
BRAKE BOOSTER ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
HIGHLAND CONTROL NORMAL CONTROL

(Absolute pressure cantrall (Relative pressure cantrall
PRESSURE DIFFERENCE
for PUMP ON
. ______ . : Vehicle speed at

, 6.2 mph (10 km/hl or less
: Vehicle speed at
- - - 18.6 mph (30 km/hl or more
ON/OFF: Electric vacuum pump function
NOTE: On vehicle sptiled between 6.2 mph
(10 km/h) and 18.6 mph (30 km/h), the
target vacuum pressure of the brake booster
is.a conntrolled va liable, and may not
agree with the chart line.
L----------~---------~-~~ATMOSPHEREPRESSURE
ALTITUDE ...~-----------------------
(cont'd)
BACK 19-51
,Electric Vacuum Pump System
System Electrical Structure
The system has a brake booster pressure sensor, a ,electric vacuum pump, a electric vacuum pump system indicator in
the gauge control module, and the PCM with fuel and emissions systems sensors.
Electric vacuum pump

Brake booster pressure sensor
• Sends the pump motor power
supply control signal through
the electric vacuum pump relays .
• Sends the brake

booster absolute
pressure.
• Sends the intake

manifold absolute
pressure.
<-------'
• Sends the accelerator
pedal position signal.
Manifold absolute
pressure (MAP) sensor
<-------'
• Sends the brake pedal
Accelerator pedal
position (APP) sensor
position signal.
• Sends the indicator
drive signal via F-CAN PCM <.---------'
(atmosphere pressure sensor included)
Brake pedal
position switch
• Monitor the vehicle speed.

·Monitor the atmospheric pressure.
Electric vacuum pump system indicator

lin the gauge control module)
19-52 BACK
System Air Flow
The brake system includes: A brake booster pressure sensor, a electric vacuum pump with a filter, a check valve
(vacuum pump), and a 3-way joint on the conventional brake system booster vacuum hoses. '
r . - . - . - ..- ..- . - ..- . - . - . - . - . - . -----.----.. --.-.. -.---.-----.-.. - . ~-.---- . -.'.-.-~--!
: i
! CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM !
Intake manifold i
i
Brake booster
t Check valve (intake manifold) i
i
.. _ .. _--_ .. _ .. __ ._.:_ .. _ .. _-----_._j
I-------rr-------i---~ I 3-way joint
.__ .. _ .. _ .. _. __ .. _ .. _ .. j
i
Brake booster
l------:.-_p_r_e_ssu_re_s_e_n_so_r----l ~
I Check valve (vacuum pump)
i
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _. _____ .. j
i Electric vacuum
pump
Electric Vacuum Pump

The electric vacuum pump has a motor and a rotor with five sliding vanes. The motor rotates the rotor, and generates
the vacuum.
The motor function is controlled by the PCM.
Brake Booster Pressure Sensor

The brake booster pressure sensor converts brake booster absolute pressure into electrical signals to the PCM.
BACK 19-53
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
,I
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH
, IGNITION SWITCH FUSElRELAY BOX
No.1 (100A) No.2 (50 A) H1 '~ D21 No. 9~F_24_____ GRY _______________________
L-~. .~~o------a~~i_-------WHT~BlU
IG1 HOTin ON (II) and START (III)
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
No: 12 (15A) D8 1 ~"'1-2_ _ _ __
WHT ------------~~ lTGRN------------
No.n (15 A) J3 Closed: Brake pedal pressed
, -,~
AUXIUARY UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
2
PNK
No. 31 (7.5A)
ORN
2
PNK .~;::
ELECTRIC ORN
VACUUM
PUMP 4
RELAY 1 WHT -------~I--~---------WHT-------------
3
BlK
ORN ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP
ELECTRIC WHT
VACUUM
PUMP 4
RELAY 2 WHT
3
BlK
BlK
~
G201 G503
28'
ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP WHT
SYSTEM INDICATOR
29
@ RED -
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DlC)
E-
14
4
--~~~--------------WHT-------------
RED ----~---------------RED-------------------
.~~
G501
19-54 BACK
peM
e36
GRY • BLKNEL
IGl
A8
l~~
ORN
PGM-F/MAIN IGP
RELAY 1 (e) A6
GRN
MRLV
,A40
LTGRN
BKSW
RED
·FTPSENSOR
• Ale PRESSURE SENSOR
<]--BLK-
BRAKE BOOSTER
PRESSURE SENSOR ECT SENSOR 2 < ] - - B L K -
1 RED __________A_19~ ~----~
VCC6
2 B5
PNK GRN/BLK - -.....P~BM..;P;,,;,A-i 1------+--4
3 BLK ________A;.;9~
SG6
A13
-------------------------PNK---W-M-~-L-VD~ ~-----~
------------------------------WHT _______~A;.;12~ VPMPRLV
INPUT SHAFT ~VEL/RED
1
(MAINSHAFT)
SPEED SENSOR
MAP SENSOR ~GRN/WHT -
1 e13
VEL/RED ----..;;.;.;._i
VCCl
* 2
3
ell
GRN/RED ----..;~_i I------~H
MAP
e14
GRN/WHT---------~
SGl
ATMOSPHERE
APP SENSOR A/B PRESSURE SENSOR
3 A25
A BRN-----------~
I VCC4
I I
r-- 1
2
VEL
BLU-----~~
APSA
A35
A17
SG4
6 A24
B GRy-..:...~__~~
I VCCS
I I
r-- 4
5
PUR
A18
-------1
APSB
LT BLU ----~~_i
A34
~----M
SG5
A36
CANH
A37
CANL
836
PGl
Bl
PG2
___ : 12V
Gl0l
-o-:5V
(cant'd)
BACK "9-55
UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (34P)

CONNECTOR J (4P)
~
~
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION APP SENSOR AlB BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE MAP SENSOR
SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR 6P CONNECTOR SENSOR3P CONNECTOR 3P CONNECTOR
I1T2l
~
GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 36P CONNECTOR ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP
2P CONNECTOR
PCM CONNECTOR A (0) (44P) PCM CONNECTOR B'(.6.) (44P)

Ir 11 Ir 11
1/1 2 1/
4 15·16 / 8 9I I. I 1l/ 31415 V 7 8 9I I.
~' 10
/12 13114115116 17 18 19 ~' ,/ 11 12 1311411511617 18 /'.
20 21 22 >< 23 24 25 • 20 21 22 >< 23 24 25 •
- ~ 26 27 1/
291/1311/ 33 34 35 • ,.... ' - ~ 26 27 28/130131132 33 34 35 -
1361 37 38 39140 V42 43 1441 136V / VI
40 141 42 43 1441
PCM CONNECTOR C (0) (44P) AUXILIARY UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
j[ JI
R=1~
1112314151678191
~.10 11 12 13114115116 17 18 19 J.
20 21 22 ><
,-. 26 27 28 29J30 131132
23 V
25 •
/V / \-
00 t±j
1361/ 38 39140 141 42 431441
19-56 BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC P0555: Brake Booster Pressure Sensor 9. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P).
Circuit Malfunction
10. Check for continuity between body ground and
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). brake booster pressure sensor 3P connector
terminal No.2.
2. Check the BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR
in the DATA LIST with the HDS. BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
Is it between 0.19 and 4.8 V?

time. Check for loose terminals between the brake
booster pressure sensor 3P connector, and PCM
~ rtjBMPA IPNKl
connector A (44P)/B (44P). Reler to intermittent
failures troubleshooting (seepage 19-45) .• =
NO-If 0.19 V or less is indicated, go to step 3. If
4.8 V or more is indicated, go to step 13. Wire side of female terminals

4. Disconnect the brake booster pressure sensor 3P
connector. YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire
between the brake booster pressure sensor and the
5. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). PCM .•
6. Check the BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR NO-Check for loose terminals in the brake booster
in the DATA LIST with the HDS. pressure sensor 3P connector, and PCM connector
A (44P)/B (44P), then update the PCM if it does not
Is 0.19 V or less indicated? have the latest software, or substitute a known-
good PCM, then go to step 1 and recheck. If no
YES-Go to step 7. DTCs are indicated, and the PCM was substituted,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-252).•
NO-Go to step 11.
8. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-57
11. Measure the voltage between brake booster 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
pressure sensor 3P connector terminals No.1 and
No.3. 14. Disconnect the brake booster pressure sensor 3P
connector.
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR
15. Connecthrake booster pressure sensor3P
connector terminals No.2 and No.3 with a jumper
wire.
VCC6 (RED)
~
LwJ SG6 (BLK) BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR

~
U
P8MPA fPNK} SGB fBLK]
Is there about 5 V? JUMPER WIRE
YES-Replace the brake booste~ pressure sensor Wire side of female terminals
(see page 19-78).•
NO-Go to step 12. 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
12. Measure the voltage between body ground and 17. Check the BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR
brake booster pressure sensor 3P connector in the DATA LIST with the HDS.
" terminal No.1.
Is 4.8 V or more indicated?
),.
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Replace the brake booster pressure sensor

(see page 19-78).•
18. Disconnect the jumper wire from the brake booster

pressure sensor.
=
Is there 0.1 V or less?
YES-Repair open in the wire between the brake

booster pressure sensor and the PCM .•
NO-Check for loose terminals in the brake booster

pressure sensor 3P connector, and PCM connector
A (44P)/B (44P), then update the PCM if it does not
have the latest software, or substitute a known-
good PCM, then go to step 1 and recheck. If no
DTCs are indicated, and the PCM was substituted,
replace the original PCM (see page 11-252) .•
19-58 BACK
19. Measure the voltage between body ground and 23. Check for continuity between brake booster
brake booster pressure sensor 3P connector pressure sensor 3P connector terminal No.2 and
terminal No.2. PCM connector B (44P) terminal No.5.
BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR 3P CONNECTOR Wire side of female terminals
~.
ripPBIIIPA (PNKJ
Is there about 5 V? PCM CONNECTOR B (44P)

YES-Repair open in the wire (SG6 line) between
the brake booster pressure sensor and the PCM.• Is there continuity?
NO-Go to step 20. YES-Check for loose terminals in the brake

booster pressure sensor 3P connector, and PCM
20. Turn the ignition switch OFF. connector A (44P)/B (44P), then update the PCM if it
does not have the latest software, or substitute a
21. Short the SCS line with the HDS. known-good PCM, then go to step 1 and recheck. If
no DTCs are indicated, and the PCM was
22. Disconnect PCM connector B (44P). substituted, replace the original PCM (see page
11-252).•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the brake

booster pressure sensor and the PCM .•
BACK 19-59
DTC P0556: Brake Booster Pressure Sensor 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Circuit Range/Performance Problem
6. Check for vacuum leaks or clogging up at these
Special Tools Required parts:
Vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in. Hg, Snap-on YA4000A
or equivalent, commercially available • Brake booster pressure sensor hose.
• Brake booster vacuum hoses and their joints.
NOTE: If DTC P0556 is stored at the same time as DTC • Check valve (intake manifold).
P0571, troubleshoot DTC P0571 first, then recheck for • Check valve (vacuum pump) and filter.
DTC P0556. • Brake booster.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Are the parts OK?
2. Disconllectthe vacuum hose (A) forthe brake YES-Go to step 7.

booster pressure.~ensor (B) from the brake booster,
and connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to NO-Repair or replace the leaking or clogged up
the brake booster pressure sensor hose. part(s) .•
7. Check the brake pedal position switch signal circuit

(see page 11-336).
Is the circuit OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch

signal circuit.•
8. Reconnect the vacuum hose on the brake booster

pressure sensor to the brake booster.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 10. Note the BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE in the DATA
LIST with the HDS.
in the DATA LIST with the HDS before and after 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
applying vacuum to the hose using the vacuum
pump/gauge. 12. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio
and the navigation system (if equipped) then write
Does the indicated value change? down the audio presets. Disconnect the negative
cable from the battery, and wait several seconds.
YES-Go to step 5.
13. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then
NO-Replace the brake booster pressure sensor do this procedure after the troubleshooting:
(see page 19-78) .•
• Enter the anti-theft code for the audio and the
audio presets.
• Set the clock.
19-60 BACK
14. Check the BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR 18. Remove th~ No. 17 (15 A) fuse from the under-hood
in the DATA LIST with the HDS when the electric fuse/relay box.
vacuum pump runs while youturn the ignition
switch ON (II). Do not start the engine. 19. Remove the No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse from the auxiliary
Does the indicated value chfjnge wh en th e
motor r u n s ? ' , 20. Check for continuity between electric vacuum
pump relay :2 terminal No.2 and No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK atthis in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box terminal
time. Check for loose terminals between the No.1.
electric vacuum pump relay 2 4P connector, the
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
electric vacuum pump 2P connector, the brake
pedal position switch 4P connector, and PCM ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP RELAY 2
connector A (44P). Refer to intermittent failures
troubleshooting (see page 19-45).•
NO-If the pump does not run, go to step 15. If the

pump runs, turn the ignition switch OFF, then
repeat steps 12 to 14 again. If you still get the same
brake booster pressure sensor value, replace the
electric vacuum pump (see page 19-79) .•
No. 31 (7.5 Al FUSE
16. Check the connection and terminal fits of the electric
vacuum pump 2P connector. Is there continuity?
Is the connector properly connected? YES-Go to step 2.1.
YES-Go to step 17. NO-Repair open in the wire between electric

vacuum pump relay 2 and the No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse
NO-Connectth'e electric vacuum pump2P in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box.•
connector properly. If necessary, repair or replace
the connector.• 21. Remove electric vacuum pump relay 1.
17. Remove electric vacuum pump relay 2, and check 22. Install the No. 17 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
it (see page 22-64). ' fuse/relay box.
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Replace electric vacuum pump relay 2.•
(cont'd)
BACK 19-61
23; Connect electric'vacuum pump relay 2 connector 24. Disconnect the electric vacuum pump2P connector.
terminals No.1 and No.2, and electric vacuum
pump relay 1 connector terminals No.1 and No.2 25. Measure the voltage between body ground and
with a jumper wire. electric vacuum pump 2P connector terminal No.1.
ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP 2P CONNECTOR
. ELECTRIC VACUUM ELECTRIC VACUUM
PUMP RELAY 2 P.UMPRELAY ~
1-++---, JUMPER
1-++--' WIRE
= ., , ,

Does electric vacuum pump motor run? Is there battery voltage?
YES-Check for loose terminals in the electric YES-Go to step 26.

vacuum pump relay 2 4Pconnector, the electric
vacuum pump 2P connector, the brake pedal NO-Repair open in the wire between the electric
position switch 4P connector, and PCM connector A vacuum.pump relay 2 and the electric vacuum
(44P), then update the PCM if it does not havethe pump.•
latest software, or substitute a known-good PCM,
then go to step 1 and recheck. If no DTCs are 26. Check for continuity between body ground and
indicated, and the PCM was substituted, replace the electric vacuum pump 2P connector terminal No.2.
original PCM (see page 11-252) .•
NO-Go to step 24.
=
YES-Replace the electric vacuum pump (see page

19-79) .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the electric

vacuum pump and body ground (G503).D
19-62 BACK
.... ,
DTC P0571: Brake Pedal Position Switch 7. Disconnectthe brake pedal position switch4P
Circuit connector. '.
NOTE: DTC P0571 may be stored when both the brake 8. Check the brake pedal position switch (see page.
pedal and the accelerator pedal are pressed at the same 22-180).
time for 5 minutes, and vehicle speed is 12 mph
(20 km/h) ormore. Is the switch OK?
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES~Repair open. in the,wire between the, brake
pedal position switch and the PCM .•
2. Check brake pedal position switch adjustment
(see page 19-6). NO-Replace the brake pedal position switch
(see page 19-6) .•
Is the switch adjustment OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
10. Disconnectthe brake pedal position switch 4P
NO-Adjust the brake pedal position switch connector.
(see page 19-6) .•
11. Check the brake peda I position switch (see page
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 22-180).
4. Check the BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH in the Is the switch OK?
DATA LIST with the HDS when the brake pedal is
not pressed. YES-Repair short in the wire between the brake
pedal position switch and the PCM .•
Is OFF indicated?
NO-Replace the brake pedal position switch
YES-Go to step 5. (see page 19-6) .•
NO-Go to step 9.
5. Check the BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH in the

DATA LIST with the HDS when the brake pedal is
pressed.
Is ON indicated?

pedal position switch 4P connector, and PCM
NO-Go to step 6.
BACK 19-63
Electr'ic Vacuum Pump System
DTC P113hElectric,Vacuum Pump System, DTC P15B9: Check Valve (Intake Manifold) "
Related PGM-FI Sensor Signal Malfunction Leak Detected
DTC P16D9: PCM Internal Circuit Malfunction 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: This DTC is stored when there is a problem in 2. Check for vacuum leaks at the check valve (intake
the fuel and emission systems. Checldorfuel and manifold) between the brake booster and the intake
emission systems DTCs with the HDS, and go to the manifold (see page 19-20).
indicated DTC'stroobleshooting(see page 11~3); ,
Is the check valve OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the brake booster vacuum hose.

. ,,-'
(The check valve is inside the hose) .•
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the brake

booster.
5. Check the BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR,

and BARO SENSOR in the DATA LIST with the HDS,
, then compare the two pressure values.
'.,' ,,'
Is the BRAKE BOOSTER PRESSURE SENSOR

8.67 kPa (2.56 in.Hg, 65 mmHg), more than the
, '
BARO SENSOR?
YES-Replace the brake booster pressure sensor

(see page 19-78) .•

'time~.
19-64 BACK
DTC P15BA: Check Valve (Intake Manifold) 5. Turnthe ignition switch OFF.
Stuck Closed
6. Check for vacuum leaks or clogging up at these
Special Tools Required parts:
or equivalent, commercially available • Brake booster pressure sensor hose.
NOTE: If DTC P15BA is stored at the same time as DTC • Check valve (intake manifold).
P0571, troubleshoot DTC P0571 first, then recheck for • Check valve (vacuum pump) and filter.
DTC P15BA. • Brake booster.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Are the parts OK?
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) for the brake YES-Go to step 7.
booster pressure sensor (B) from the brake booster,
and connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in.Hg, to NO-Repair or replace the leaking or clogged up
the brake booster pressure sensor hose. part(s).

(see page 11-336).
Is the circuit OK?

NO-Troubleshootthe brake pedal position switch

signal circuit.•

in the DATA LIST with the HDS before and after
pump/gauge.
Does the indicated value change?
YES-Go to step 5.

(see page 19-78).•
BACK 19-6.5
DTC P15BB: Brake Booster System Leak

Detected
NOTE: If DTC P15BB is stored at the same time as DTC

P0571, troubleshoot DTC P0571 first, then recheck for
DTC P15BB.
2. Check for vacuum leaks or clogging at these parts:
• Brake booster pressure sensor hose.

• Check valve (intake manifold).
• Check valve (vacuum pump) and filter.
• Brake booster.
Are the parts OK?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Repair or replace the leaking or clogging up

part(s).

(see. page 11-336).
Is the circuit OK?

NO-Troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch

signal circuit..
19.-66 BACK
OTC P15BC: Electric Vacuum Pump Operating 6. Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) for the brake
Time Exceeded booster pressure sensor (B) from the brake booster,
and connect a vacuum pump/gauge, 0-30 in. Hg,
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. to the brake booster pressure sensor hose.
2. Make sure you have anti-theft codes for the audio

and the navigation system (if equipped), then write
down the audio presets. Disconnect the negative
cable from the battery, and wait several seconds.
3. Reconnect the negative cable to the battery, then

do this procedure after the troubleshooting:

audio presets .
• Set the clock.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Do not start the

engine.
Does electric vacuum pump motor run?
YES-Go to step 5. in the DATA LIST with the HDS before and after
NO-Go to step 21. pump/gauge.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Does the indicated value change?
YES-Go to step 9.

(see page 19-78) .•
10. Reconnect the vacuum hose to the brake booster.
11. Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from

the intake manifold (see step 6 on page 9-3).
NOTE: Cap the brake booster vacuum hose

connector on the intake manifold to prevent a
vacuum leak, or dust entering the system.
12. Deplete the booster vacuum by pressing the brake

pedal several times until the brake pedal becomes
hard.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-67
14. Check the ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP RELAY inthe 19. Check the ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP RELAY in the
, DATA LIST with the HDS, and start the engine while DATA LIST with the HDS, and start the engine while
pressing the brake pedal lightly. pressing the brake pedal lightly.
NOTE: Do not press the brake pedal hard, press the NOTE: Do not press the brake pedal hard, press the
pedal gently until the brake lights turn on. pedal gently until the brake lights turning on.
Does the pump run and shut off within 8 seconds? Does the pump function finish within 8 seconds?
YES-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Replace the original vacuum hose between
time. Check for loose terminals between the brake the electric vacuum pump and 3-way joint
booster pressure sensor 3P connector, the electric (see page 19-42) .•
vacuum pump relay 2 4Pconnector, the electric
vacuum pump 2P connector, and PCM connector B NO-Go to step 20.
(44P). Refer to intermittent failures troubleshooting
(see page 19-45) .• 20. Check for vacuum leaks or clogging at these parts:
NO-Go to step 15. • Brake booster pressure sensor hose.

15. Turn the ignition switch OFF. • Check valve (intake manifold).
• Brake booster.
16. Substitute the known-good or new vacuum hose
between the electric vacuum pump and 3-way joint. Are the parts OK?
17. Deplete booster vacuum by pressing the brake YES-Replace the electric vacuum pump (see page
pedal several times until the brake pedal becomes 19-79).•
hard.
NO-Repair or replace the leaking or clogging
18. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). part (s) .•
19-68 BACK
22. Check the connection and pin fit of the electric 26. Check for continuity between electric vacuum
vacuum pump 2P connector. pump relay 2 terminal No.2 and No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse
in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box terminal
/s the connector properly connected? No.1.
YES-Go to step 23.
ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP RELAY 2
NO-Connect the electric vacuum pump 2P
connector properly. If necessary, repair or replace
the harness.•
23. Remove electric vacuum pump relay 2, and check

the relay (see page 22-64).
/s electric vacuum pump relay 2 OK?

No. 31 1:7.5 A) FUSE
YES-Go to step 24.
24. Remove the No. 17 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box. YES-Go to step 27.
25. Remove the No. 31 0.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary NO-Repair open in the wire between the electric
under-hood fuse/relay box. vacuum pump relay 2 and No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box.•
27. Remove electric vacuum pump relay 1.
28. Install the No. 17 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-69
29. Connect electric vacuum pump relay 2 connector· 30. Disconnect the electric vacuum pump2P connector.
terminals No.1 and No.2, and electric vacuum
pump relay 1 connector terminals No.1 and No.2 31. Measure the voltage between body ground and
with a jumper wire. electric vacuum pump 2P connector terminal No.1.
ELECTRIC VACUUM 'ELECTRIC VACUUM
PUMP RELAY 2 PUMP RELAY 1
1-++--, JUMPER
1-++--'-' WIRE
=
Does electric vacuum pump motor run? Is there battery voltage?
YES-Check for loose terminals in the brake YES-Go to step 32.

booster pressure sensor 3P connector, the electric
vacuum pump relay 2 4P connector; the electric NO"""Repair open in the wire between the electric
vacuum pump 2P connector, and PCM connector B vacuum pump relay 2 and the electric vacuum
(44P), then update the PCM if it does not have the pump.•
then go to step 1and recheck. If no DTCs are 32. Check for continuity between body ground and
indicated, and the PCM was substituted, replace the electric vacuum pump 2P connector terminal No.2.
origin·al PCM (see page 11-252).•
NO-Go to step 30.
YES-Replace the electric vacuum pump (see page

19-79).•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the electric

vacuum pump and body ground (G503) .•
19-70 BACK
DTC P16DA: Electric Vacuum Pump Relay 1 4. Measure the voltage between body ground and
Stuck OFF electric vacuum pump relay 1 ter.minal No.2.
2. Check the No. 17 (15 A)fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box. PNK
/5 the fuse blown?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the electric

vacuum pump relay 1 and the No. 17 (15 A) fuse in
the under-hood fuse/relay box. Replace the No. 17
(15 A) fuse, and recheck.•
=
NO-Reinstall the fuse, then go to step 3. Terminal side of female terminals
3. Remove electric vacuum pump relay 1, and check Is there battery voltage?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is electric vacuum pump relay 10K?
NO-Repair open in the wire between electric
YES-Go to step 4. vacuum pump relay 1 and the No. 17 (15 A) fuse in
the under-hood fuse/relay box.•
5. Remove the No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary
(cont'd)
BACK 19-71
6. Check fo(eontinuity between electric vacuum 7. Check for continuity between body ground and
pump relay 1 terminal No.1 and No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse electric vacuum pump relay 1 terminal No.3.
inthe auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box terminal
No.1. . AUXILIARY UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
ELECTRIC VACUr=U""MC'-:-_ _--,

AUXILIARY UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX PUMP RELAY 1 Bl.K
Q
=
YES-Go to step 8.
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Repair open in the wire between electric vacuum
vacuum pump relay 1 and No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse in the
. . pump relay 1 and body ground (G201) .•
auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box.• 8. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
19-72 BACK
10. Check for continuity between electric vacuum
pump relay 1 terminal No.4 and PCM connector A
(44P) terminal No. 12.

ELECTRIC VACUUM
Q PUMP RELAY 1
VPMPRLY (WHTI

YES-Check for loose terminals in the electric

vacuum pump relay 1 4P connector, the electric
vacuum pump 2P connector, and PCM connector A
(44P), then update the PCM if it does not have the
then go to step 1 and recheck. If no DTCs are
indicated, and the PCM was substituted, replace the

vacuum pump relay 1 and the PCM .•
BACK 19-73
DTC P16DB: Electric Vacuum Pump Relay 1/2 4. Check for continuity between electric vacuum
Signal Circuit Malfunction pump relay 1 terminal No.1 and No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse
in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box terminal
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. No.1.
2. Check the No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under- AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
hood fuse/relay box. ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMP RELAY 1
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Repair short in the wire between the electric

vacuum pump relay 1/2 and the No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse
in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box. Replace
the No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse and recheck.•
NO-Remove the fuse, then go to step 3. No. 31 (7.5 AI FUSE
3. Remove electric vacuum pump relay 1. Terminal side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 5.

vacuum pump relay 1 and No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box.•
19-74 BACK
7. Check for continuity between No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse ih
the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box terminal
No.2 and PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 13.
AUXILIARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY' BOX
~
.R=l ~
tij

YES-Check for loose terminals in PCM connector

A (44P), then update the PCM if it does not have the
then go to step 1 and recheck. If no DTCs are
indicated, and the PCM was substituted, replace the
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 31

(7.5 A) fuse in the auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay
box and the PCM .•
BACK 19-75
'E,lectric Vacuum Pump System
DTC P16DC: Electric Vacuum Pump Relay 2 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Stuck ON
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 12.
2. Remove electric vacuum pump relay 2, and check PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
VPMPRLY (WHT)
Is electric vacuum pump relay 2 OK?
V 2 41 51 6 c::.. 8 J.
9
YES-Go to step 3. 10V 12 1311411611617 181191
20121 22 ~ 23 2~2~ •
i"26 27V 29V131V 33 341361 •
NO-Replace electric vacuum pump relay 2.• U36 37 36 39U40JL 42 43 44U
3. Remove the No. 17 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood

fuse/relay box. =
4. Disconnect the electric vacuum pump 2P connector.
5. Check for continuity between electric vacuum Is there any voltage?

pump relay 2 terminals No.1 and No.2.
the electric vacuum pump relay 1/2 and the PCM .•

software, or substitute a known-good PCM, then go
to step 1 and recheck. If no DTCs are indicated, and
the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM
(see page 11-252) .•
YES-Repair short in the wires between electric

vacuum pump relay 2 (+8 line) and (pump motor
line) .•
NO-Go to step 6.
19-76 BACK
DTC P16DD: Electric Vacuum Pump Relay 1 7. Turn the ignition svvitch ON (II). ,
Stuck ON
1. Turn the ignition switch .OFF. PCM connector A (44P) terminaL No. 13.
2. Remove electric vacuum pump relay 1, and check PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
VPMPRLVD (PNK)
LJ[ JL
Is electric vacuum pump relay 10K?
L/ 2 / 4 /5/6 / 8 9J.
YES-Go to step 3. 10V 12 13/14115116 17 181 191
2021 22 ~ 23 24125J
2627 VI 29V131 V 33 34/ 351
NO-Replace electric va'cuum pump relay 1.• U36 37 36 39/40V 42 43 44J
3. Remove the No. 17 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood Y.

fuse/relay box, and the No. 31 (7.5 A) fuse in the
auxiliary under-hood fuse/relay box. Terminal side of female terminals
,
4. Check for continuity between electric vacuum
pump relay 1 terminals No.1 and No.2. Is there 3.0 V or more?
AU~ILlARV UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAV BOX
ELECTRIC VACUUM PUMPRELAV1 the No. 31 (7,.5, A) fuse inthe auxiliary under-hood
fuse/relay box and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 9.
9. Measurethe voltage between body ground and

PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 12.
VPMPRLY (WHT)
Terminal side of female terminals If :::Jl
L/2 4/516 /' 8 9 I.
Is there continuity? 10\L 12 13J14115U16 1718 191
2021 22 ::::>< 23 241 251
~ 26 27 LJ 291Ll31 V 33 34/ 35/
YES-Repair short in the wires between electric 136 37 36 39140~ 42 43 44U
vacuum pump relay 1 (+8 line) and (VPMPRLYD
line) .• Y.
NO-Go to step 5.
=

Is there any voltage?
electric vacuum pump relay 1/2 and the PCM .•

software, or substitute a known-good PCM, then go
to step 1 and recheck. If no DTCs are indicated, and
the PCM was substituted, replace the original PCM
(see page 11-252).•
BACK "9-77
Ele,ctric Vacuum Pump System
Brake Booster Pressure Sensor Replacement
1. Open the air cleane~'h0using'cover (see page 4. Disconnect the brake booster pressure ;sensor
11-394). connector (A).
2. Release the hooks (A), arid move the under-hood

fuse/relay box (B) aside. Do not disconnect the
connectors.
5. Remove the brake booster pressure sensor (B),

3. Remove the under-hood fuse/relay'box stay (A). then disconnect the sensor hose (C).
NOTE: Check for damage and deterioration of the

A the sensor hose.
6. Install the brake booster pressure sensor in the

reverse order of removal.
7. Start the engine, and check that the electric vacuum

pump system indicator goes off (see page 19-43).
---6x1.0~m
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7;2Ibf·ft)
19-78 BACK
Electric Vacuum Pump Replacement
1. Disconnect the electric vacuum pump connector (A).
6x 1.0 mm
. . - - - - 9.8 N·m
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
~ D
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
2. Disconnect the vacuum pump hose (8) from the electric vacuum pump (e).
3. Remove the pump from the bracket (D).
NOTE: Do not disassemble the electric vacuum pump.
4. Replace the pump bracket if necessary.
5. Install the electric vacuum pump in the reverse order of removal.
6. Start the engine, and check that the electric vacuum pump system indicator goes off.
BACK 19-79
BACK
Brakes
Conventional Brake Components 19-1
Electric Vacuum Pump System ....................... 19-41
VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) System Components

DTC Troubleshooting Index ...................... ,................. 19-86
System Description ....................................................... 19-89
Circuit Diagram ................................ ~ ............................ 19-98
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement ......................... 19-134
Steering Angle Sensor Center Point Writing ............. 19-135
Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration Sensor
Replacement ............................................................. 19-135
VSA Off Switch Test ..................................................... 19-136
VSA Modulator-Control Unit
Removal and Installation ......................................... 19-137
Wheel Sensor Replacement ...................... ............ ...... 19-139
BACK
VSA System Components
VSA MODULATOR- YAW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR

CONTROL UNIT Replacement, page 19-135
page 19-137
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
RIGHT-REAR
WHEEL SENSOR
Replacement,
page 19-140
HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
LEFT-REAR WHEEL SENSOR

HUB BEARING UNIT
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
RIGHT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR

WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
Replacement, page 18-12 LEFT-FRONT WHEEL SENSOR
WHEEL BEARING
(MAGNETIC ENCODER)
19-82 BACK
System Indicator ABS indicator
This system has four indicators: The ABS indicator comes on when the ABS function is
not working. The brakes still work like a conventional
• ABS indicator (A) system.
• Brake system indicator (BRAKE) (B)
• VSA indicator (C) Brake system indicator
• VSA activation indicator (D)
The brake system indicator comes on when the EBD
(electronic brake distribution) function is not working,
when the parking brake is applied, and/or when the brake
c fluid level is low.
VSA indicator
The VSA indicator comes on when the VSA function is

not working.
VSA activation indicator
The VSA activation indicator blinks when the VSA

function is activating. The VSA activation indicator comes
on when the VSA switch is;turned off or when the VSA
When the system detects a problem, it will turn the function is lost.
appropriate indicators on. Depending on the failure, the
VSA modulator-control unit determines which Each indicator will go off after a problem goes away,
indicators are turned on. but the timing which the VSA modulator-control unit
When the system is OK, each indicator corneson for turns off,the indicators varies between DTCs.
about 2 seconds after turning the ignition switch ON (II),
then goes off. • DTC 61 or 62:
The indicators go off automatically when the system
returns to normal.
• DTC 11, 13, 15, 17,25,26,27',31,32,33,34,35,36,
37,38,54,66; 68, 81,83,84,86,87,88,91",113,114
121,122,123,124,131',132,133, 134,137, or 138
The indicators stay on until the ignition switch is
turned OFF, whether or not the system returns to
normal.
* : There are some cases that the indicators stay on
until the vehicle is driven after the system returns to
normal.
* *: There are some cases thatthe indicators go ()ff
automatically when the system returns to normal.
• DTC 12, 14, 16, 18,21,22,23,24,51,52, or 53:
The indicators stay on until the vehicle is driven after
the system returns to normal.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-83
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) How to Troubleshoot DTCs
• The memory can hold 10 DTCs. However, when the The troubleshooting procedures assume that the cause
same DTC is detected more than once, the more ofthe problem is still present and the ABS and/or VSA
recent DTC is written over the earlier one. Therefore, indicator is still on. Following a troubleshooting
when the same problem is detected repeatedly, it is procedure for a code that has been cleared and does
memorized as a single DTC. not reset can result in incorrect diagnosis.
• The DTCs are indicated in the order they occur.
• The DTCs are memorized in the EEPROM. Therefore, 1. Question the customer about the conditions when
the memorized DTCs cannot be canceled by the problem occurred, and try to reproduce the
disconnecting the battery. Do the specified same conditions fortroubleshooting. Find out
procedures to clear the DTCs. when the ABS and/or VSA indicator came on, such
as during control, after control, when the vehicle
Self-diagnosis was traveling at a certain speed, etc.
• Self-diagnosis can be classified into two categories: 2. When the ABS or VSA indicator does not come on
-Initial diagnosis: Done right after the ignition switch during the test-drive, but troubleshooting is done
is turned ON (II) and until the ABS and VSA based on the DTC, check for loose connectors, poor
indicators go off. contact of the terminals, etc. before you start
- Regular diagnosis: Done right after the initial troubleshooting.
diagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
• When the system detects a problem, the VSA 3. After troubleshooting, or repairs are done, clear the
modulator-control unit shifts to fail-safe mode. DTCs, and test-drive the vehicle under the same
conditions that originally set theDTCs. Make sure
Kickback the ABS and VSA indicators do not come on.
The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator- 4. Check for other unit DTCs when connected via
control unit is functioning, and the fluid in the reservoir F"CAN, if there are DTCs that are related to F-CAN,
is forced out to the master cylinder, causing kickback at the most likely cause was that the ignition switch
the brake pedal. was turned ON (II) with the VSA modulator-control
unit connector disconnected. Clear the DTCs. Check
Pump Motor for PGM-FI, SH-AWD, and VSA codes, and
troubleshoot those first.
• The pump motor operates when the VSA modulator-
control unit is functioning. Intermittent Failures
• The VSA modulator-control unit checks the pump
motor operation during regular diagnosis when the The term "intermittent failure" means a system may
vehicle is driven over 10 mph (15 km/h) the first time have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the
after the ignition switch is turned ON (II). You may indicator(s) of the system does not come on, check for
hear the motor operate at this time, but it is normal. loose connectors, poor contact of the terminals related
to the circuit that you are troubleshooting. If the
Brake Fluid Replacement/Air Bleeding indicators were on but then went out, the original
problem may have been intermittent.
Brake fluid replacement and air bleeding procedures
are identical to the procedures used on vehicles not
equipped with the VSA system (see page 19-9).
19-84 BACK
How to Use the HDS (Honda DiagnoStic How to Retrieve DTCs
System)
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect the HOS to
1. If the system indicators stays on, connect the HOS the data link connector (OLC) under the driver's
to the data link connector (OLC) (A) located under side of the dashboard.
the driver's side of the dashboard.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (11).
3. Make sure the HOS communicates with the vehicle

and the V/$A mO,dulator-contrQfuni,. I~ it doesn't,
4. Follow the prom~ts .()O t~e HOS to display the

OTC(s) on the screen. AfteJ determining the OTC,
refer to the OTC troubleshooting~
,·1
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF:'
How to Clear DTCs

A 1. With the ignition switch OFF~ c~~nect the HOS to
the data link connector (OLC) under the driver's
3. Make sure the HOS communic~tes with the vehicle
and the VSA modulator-control' unit. If it doesn't, 3. Make sure the HOS communicates'with the vehicle
troubleshoot the OLC circuit: (see page 11-229). and the VSAmodulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
4. Check the diagnostic trouble code (OTC) and note it.
Also check the on-board snapshot data, and 4. Clear the OTC(s) by following the screen prompts
download any data found. Then refer to the on the HOS.
indicated OTC's troubleshooting, and begin the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure. 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE:
• The HOS can read the OTC, the current data, and
other system data.
• For specific operations, refer to the Help menu
that came with the HOS.
BACK 19-85
VSA. .S;ystem Components
DTe Detection Hem ABS Brake VSA VSA Note

Indicator System Indicator Activation
Indicator Indicator
11 - Right-front wheel sensbr ON ON or OFF· ON ON (see page 19-101)
(oDel1/short to body around/short to Dower) 'I' "
12 Right-front wheel sensor ,", ' ON ON or OFF" ON ON (see page 19-106)

(electrical noise/intermittent interruDtion)
13 Left-front wheel sensor ON ON or OFF· ON ON (see page 19-101)
(oDeJJLshort to bod.'LQrouridlshort to Itower)
14 Left-front wheel sensor ON ON or OFF· ON ON (see page 19-106)
Jelectrical noi~e/intermittent interruDtion)
15 Right-rear wheel sensor ON ON or OFF· ON ON (see page 19-101)
(opeJJLsho'rttd bo\:ItLgrourLd/short'to Dower)
16 Right-rear wheel sensor' I . ON ON orOFF· ON ON (see page 19-106)
(electrical noiselintermittent interruDtion)
17 Left~rear whe~1 s~ns~r , _, ON ON or OFF· ON ON (see page 19-101)
-CoDen/short to'bodv around/short to Dower)
18 \ - Left':'rear wheel sensor '. ON ON or OFF" ON ON (see page 19-106)
(electrical noise/intermittent interruDtion),
21 Right-front mao netic encoder malfunction ON ON or OFF" ON ON (see Daoe 19-107
22 Left-front mao netic encoder malfunction ON ON or OFF" ON ON (see Daae 19-107)
23 Rioht rear maonetic encoder malfunction ON ON or OFF· ON ON (see Daae 19-107
24 Left-rear magnetic encoder malfunction ON ON or OFF· ON ON (see Daoe 19-107
25 Yaw rate sensor (sensor unit) OFF OFF ON ON see Daoe 19-107
26 Lateral acceleration sensor (sensor unit) OFF OFF ON ON see Daoe 19-107
27 Steering anole sensor (hardware) OFF OFF ON ON see Daoe 19-108
31 '( 'ABS solenoid , , '
ON ON ON ON see Daoe 19-108
,..
"
32 ABS solenoid. - ON ON ON ON (see Dage 19-108)

33 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON Jsee Dage 19-108
34 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON (see Daoe 19-108
35 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON see Daoe' 19-108
36 ABS solenoid '- .. ON ON ON ON see Daoe 19-108
37 ABS solenoid ON ON ON ON see Daoe 19-108
38 ABS solenoid ON 'ON ON ON see Daoe 19-108
*: ."
Brake system indicator turns ON when 3 or more wheels'fall."
, , ., ; ,- : '. j ! • ( ; ~ l _
BACK
DTC Detection Item ASS Brake VSA VSA Note
Indicator System Indicator Activation
Indicator Indicator
51 Motor locked ON ON ON ON (see Pllge 19-109L
52 Motor stuck OFF ON ON ON ON (see paae 19-109)
53 Motor stuck ON ON ON ON ON (see paae 19-111)
54 Valve relav ON ON or OFF ON ON (see paae 19-112)
61 IG1 voltaae low ON ONorOFF ON ON (seepaae 19--113
62 IG1 voltaae hiah ON ON . ION ON (see paae 19-114
66 VSA pressure sensor (hardware) ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-114
68 Brake pedal position switch stuck ON (hardware) ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-1'15
81 Central processing unit (CPU) ONorOFF ONorOFF ON orOFF ON orOFF (see page 19-116)
83 PCM communication error OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-116)
84 Steering angle sensor No center point writing OFF OFF OFF ON (see page 19-117)
86 F-CAN communication ONorOFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-117)
87 Current flow into wheel sensor input amplifier ON OFF ON ON (see paae 19-122)
88 Difference in wheel speed ON ONorOFF ON ON (see page 19-122)
91 VSAsystem ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-123)
113 Yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor (power supply) OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-123)
114 Yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor installation OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-.,24)
problem
121 VSA selenoid ON ON ON ON. (see page 19-124)
122 VSA selenoid ON ON ON ON (see page 19-.124)
123 VSA selenoid ON ON ON ON (see page 19-124)
124 VSA selenoid ON ON ON ON jseepMe 19-124
131 Yaw rate sensor (software) OFF OFF ON ON (see paae 19-125
132 Lateral acceleration sensor (software) OFF OFF ON ON (see paae 19-126
133 Lateral acceleration sensor (ioint failure) OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-126
134 Steering angle sensor (software) OFF OFF ON ON (see page 19-127
137 VSA pressure sensor (software) ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-128)
138 Brake pedal~osition swiy~h stuck OFF (software) ON OFF ON ON (see page 19-129)
*: Brake system indicator turns ON when 3 or more wheels fall.
BACK 19-87
When the vehicle has one of these symptoms, check for a diagnostic trouble code (OTC) with the HOS. If there is no
OTC, do the diagnostic procedure for the symptom, in the sequence listed, until you find the cause.
Symptom Diagnostic procedure

HOS does not communicate with the VSA Troubleshoot the OLC circuit (see page 11-229).
modulator-control unit or the vehicle
VSA activation indicator does not come on 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-258).
at start-up (bulb check) 2. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit, then
recheck. If it is OK, replace the original VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-137).
VSA activation indicator does not go off, 1. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 19-131).
and no OTCs are stored 2. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-258).
3., Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit, then
recheck. If it is OK, replace the original VSA modulator-control
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and 1. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-258).
VSA indicator do notcome on at the same 2. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit, then
time' recheck. If it is OK, replace the original VSA modulator-control
ASS indicator, brake system indicator, and 1. Symptom troubleshooting (see page 19-132).
VSA indicator do not go off at the same 2. Do the gauge control module troubleshooting (see page 22-258).
time 3. Substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control unit, then
recheck. If it is OK, replace the orig,inal VSA modulator-control
"
19-88 BACK
System Description
VSA Modulator-control Unit Inputs and Outputs for 46P Connector
Terminal Wire Terminal Description Measurement (Disconnect the VSA modulator-control

number color sign unit 46P connector)
Terminal Conditions Voltage
8 WHT RR-GND Detects right-rear -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
10 RED RL-GND Detects left-rear -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
11 VEL RL+B Detects left-rear -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
12 ORN FL+B Detects left-front -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
15 LT K-UNE Communicates with -- -- --
BLU HDS
(cont'd)
BACK 19-89
VSA':System Components
Terminal Wire Terminal Description Measurement (Disconnect the VSA modulator-control

number color sign unit 46P connector)
Terminal Conditions Voltage
28 PNK FR-GND Detects right-front -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
29 GRN FR+B Detects right-front -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
30 LT RR+B Detects right-rear -- -- --
GRN wheel sensor signal
34 GRY FL-GND Detects left-front -- -- --
wheel sensor signal
38 RED CAN-L F-CAN -- -- --
communication
circuit
39 WHT CAN-H F-CAN -- -- --
communication
circuit
40 GRN IG1 Power source for 40-GND Ignition switch ON (II) Battery
activating the system voltage
43 BLK GND2 Ground for the VSA 43-GND At all time Continuity to
modulator-control ground
unit
44 WHT +BSOL Power source for the 44-GND At all time Battery
valve relay voltage
45 RED +BMOT Power source for the 45-GND At all time Battery
motor relay voltC!ge
46 BLK GND1 Ground for the pump 46-GND At all time Continuity to
motor ground
19-90 BACK
System Outline
This system is composed of the VSA modulator-control unit, the wheel sensors, the steering angle sensor, and the·
yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor, and the system indicators in the gauge control module. The VSA modulator-
control unit controls the ABS, EBD, TCS, VSA. and brake assist with the brake pressure of each wheel and the engine
torque.
BRAKE BRAKE
VSA PARKING PEDAL
OFF FLUID
BRAKE LEVEL POSITION
SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH
SWITCH
I I I I
I PCM
I
AI ... • VSA off switch sillnal
• Parkin!! brake switch signal
.oil ... • VSA control enable/disable
• Throttle open angle signal
• TPMS ondicator signal • Engine revolution signal
• Gear position signal
·In dicator drive signal

·Buzzer request signal
I YAWRATE·LATERAL
ACCELERATION
SENSOR
I • Brake pedal tosition switch signal
• Service chec signal
• Yaw rate signal

• Lateral acceleration signal I WHEEL SENSORS
I
Wheel rotation pulse signals
I
!,. -""""'"
I Il ~
STEERING ANGLE
SENSOR
I SH·AWD
CONTROL
UNIT
TPMS
CONTROL
UNIT
.... ,."l
• Engine torque control request
• Control mode signal
....
,. V w-t l"
speed
sIgnals .
low press
sig·nal
..,e
I CONTROL UNIT
I
• Solenoid control
• Motor control
~ U~Q'~· sIgnal
VSA MODULATOR·
CONTROL UNIT
MODULATOR UNIT
I I
. . . - Communication via F·CAN
(cont'd)
BACK 19-91
ABS Features
Anti-lock control
Without ABS, when the brake pedal is pressed while driving, the wheels sometimes lock before the vehicle comes to a
stop. In such an event, the maneuverability of the vehicle is reduced if the front wheels are locked, and the stability of
the vehicle is reduced if the rear wheels are locked, creating an extremely unstable condition. With ABS, the system
precisely controls the slip rate of the wheels to ensure maximum grip force from the tires, and it thereby ensures
maneuverability and stability of the vehicle. The ABS calculates the slip rate of the wheels based on the four wheel
speeds, then it controls the brake fluid pressure to reach the target slip rate.
Grip force of tire and road surface

COEFFICIENT OF
FRICTION
ROTATIONAL
DIRECTION
SLIP RATE
Main Control
The control unit detects the wheel speed based on the wheel sensor signals it received, then itcalculates the vehicle
speed based on the detected wheel speed. The control unit detects the vehicle speed during deceleration based on the
rate of deceleration.
The control unit calculates the slip rate of each wheel, and transmits the control signal to the modulator unit solenoid
valve when the slip rate is high.
The hydraulic control has three modes: Pressure intensifying, pressure reducing, and pressure retaining.
'-==-====-...Jj
l.._ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. j
19-92 BACK
EBD Features
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) feature helps control vehicle braking by adjusting the rear brake force in
accordance with the rear wheel load before the ABS operates. Based on the wheel sensor signals, the control unit uses
the modulator to control the rear brakes individually. When the rear wheel speed is less than the frontvvheel speed,
the VSA modulator-control unit retains the current rear brake fluid pressure by closing the inlet valve in the modulator.
As the rear wheel speed increases and approaches the front wheel speed, the VSA modulator-control unit increases
the rear brake fluid pressure by momentarily opening the inlet valve. This whole process is repeated very rapidly.
While this is happening, kickback is felt at the brake pedal.
With EBD under HEAVY LOAD

REAR WHEEL at REAR WHEEL
BRAKE PRESSURE
With EBD under UGHT LOAD

at REAR WHEEL
--- -_ ... -
WithoutEBD
FRONT WHEEL BRAKE PRESSURE
(cont'd)
BACK 19-93
,c.t. L
TCS Features
When a drjve wheel loses traction .on a slippery road, surface and stClrts to spin, the VSA .I1lodulator-:control unit applies
brake pressure to the spinning wheeland sends,l:mgine torque contr(.>1 reql:lest to the PCM to slow the spinning wheel
andke~p traction.
, !:
v ._' f '." .' • "!.
DRIVING POWER
TOTAL TRACTION
TOTAL TRACTION
11 "
u~ ,,, ,,,
BRAKE FORCE
,,
y ,, ,,
I,
"
NORMAL ROAD SURFACE

\
SLIPPERY ROAD SURFACE
19-94 BACK
VSA System Features
Oversteer control
Applies the brake to the front and rear outside wheels
withVSA
The brake makes the yaw rate opposite

to the turning direction
Understeer control
• Applies the brake to the front and rear inside wheels
• Controls the engine torque when accelerating
withoutVSA
The brake increases the yaw rate toward
the turning direction
The throttle control effect;
withVSA • reduces vehicle speed
• increases cornering force
(cont'd)
BACK 19-95
VSASystem Components
Brake Assist Features
Brake assist helps ensure that any driver can achieve the full braking potential of the vehicle by increasing brake·
system pressure in a panic situation, bringing the vehicle into a full ABS stop.
Each time the ignition switch is turned ON (II), the VSA modulator-control unit learns the current driver's normal
braking characteristics by monitoring the brake pressure sensor and the brake pedal position switch at each stop.
Using these inputs and their values, the VSA modulator-control unit is able to learn the driver's normal braking habits,
and then determine the difference between a normal stop and a panic stop for the individual driver of the vehicle. If
during a panic stop the VSA modulator-control unit determines that the brake system pressure increases above a
learned threshold in less than a learned amount of time, the VSA modulator-control unit engages brake assist.
Because the brake system pressure crossed the threshold before the time threshold had expired, the VSA modulator-
control unit goes into brake assist mode.
Brake Pedal
I effort reduced
:~
Panic Stop with Brake Assist
Pressure
I
Brake Assist I I
Be9ins~ :. __ ~~,!i~ ~~I? ~i!~~~t_~r.?~! !':.s!~s~ ___ !

~~:~~d h-~~~7'~~-----------------------------~-
Normal Stop
Time
Threshold Time
19-96 BACK
Modulator Unit
The modulator unit consists of the inlet solenoid valve, the outlet solenoid valve, the VSA NO (normally open)
solenoid valve, the VSA NC (normally closed) solenoid valve, the reservoir, the pump, the pump motor, and the
damping chamber.
The hydraulic control has three modes at ABS action; pressure intensifying, pressure retaining, and pressure reducing.
And pressure adding mode is combined at TCS, VSA, and brake assist action.
The hydraulic circuit is an independent four channel type; one channel for each wheel.
MASTER CYUNDER
FL RR RL FR
MODULATOR UNIT
i
i
i
i
i
i
i
! RESERVOIR RESERVOIR i
1.._ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. --'
IN: INLET SOLENOID VALVE (NORMALLY OPEN)
OUT: OUTLET SOLENOID VALVE (NORMALLY CLOSED)
Mode VSANO VSANC Inlet Outlet Brake Fluid

Valve Valve Solenoid Solenoid
Valve Valve
Pressure open closed open closed Master cylinder fluid is pumped out to
intensifying the caliper.
mode
Pressure open closed closed closed Caliper fluid is retained by the inlet
retaining and outlet valves.
mode
Pressure open closed closed open • Caliper fluid flows through the
reducing outlet valve to the reservoir.
mode • The motor pumps the reservoir fluid
through the damping chamber to
the master cylinder.
Pressure closed open open closed • Master cylinder fluid is pumped out
adding by pump with motor through VSA
mode NC valve to the caliper.
• Caliper fluid pressure exceed
master cylinder pressure.
BACK 19-97
.'
','I
Circuit Diagram
BATTERY
UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX
No.3 (20 A)
No.3 (40 A)
C1
WHT----------------------------WHT------
RED - ....- - - - - - -.... -----------------RED -----
IGNITION SWITCH UNDER·DASH
IG1 HOT in ON (II) and START (III) FUSE/RELAY BOX
h F16
WHT~BLU
No.1 (100 A) No.2 (50 A) D1 D2 No.4 (7.5 A)
-s> i-J~;;"'--------- GRN -----
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH L- hLR;,;.1;,;;8_____________________ GRN ___________
Closed: Brake pedal pressed - i.l"
L _____N_O_.(l1r"12.J(1,.5_A_)____-+;,;.F3,;.1~_ ~ ~
WHT --u- L _ _ _ _-.l A40
LT GRN - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - LT GRN -='-'""1
A36
WHT
VSA OFF SWITCH
A37
SMALL RELAY I>--- GRY RED ------"LJ
GAUGE CONTROL
MODULE
...16_____ RED : s ;.
=J:
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR
ABS
@
INDICATOR
13
!------ORN
28
r
-------------WHT
G501
BLK
---4~.....- -...- - - - - - W H T -----

@
VSA
INDICATOR RED --------------RED ----.....~-__1I__....- - - - - R E D - - - - -
@
VSA ACTIVATION
INDICATOR
PNK----------------~ LTBLU-----
@
PNK
LTBLU
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR (DLC)
6
WHT
14
RED
2
PARKING
~re:CJ~'#~H
Closed: Lclwfluid,
, BRAKE SWITCH
Closed: Parking
LTBLU
brake applied
16
GRN ------(j+B
4
G451
I =
"'1 G501
19-98 BACK
VSA MODULATOR·CONTROL UNIT
CONTROL UNIT • MODULATOR UNIT
44
------WHT---------------------------------- WHT
+8S0L
45
----RED RED
+8 MOT
40
------GRN---------------------------------- GRN
IG1
STEERING
ANGLE SENSOR 7Ii-
5
------GRN--------.------------------------- GRN
4
WHT
VAWRATE·
LATERAL
ACCELERATION RED
SENSOR
GRN
fBLK
r_----WHT
G502
RED
fBLK
-----WHT -'~_+----------...__II_--
G503 39
WHT
CAN·H
38
------RED----~----------------------~--- RED
CAN·L
IG1
MICU
_ _Q_8+_ _ _ -Ih F14 LTBLU
15
-LTBLU ~
K·UNE
12
ORN
FL+8
34
GRV IG1
+Y
FL·GND
2 29
GRN
FR+8
1.J..,;.-2--
WHEEL SENSOR ] 1 28
I$ I PNK
VEL
FR·GND
11 7Ii-
J1 RED
RL+8
10
RL-GND OIl
GND
JtN--4
30
LTGRN
RR+8
8
WHT
RR-GND
46
cr=k' BLK
GND1
43
GND2
G402 ..... :12V

-Q-:5V
(cant'd)
BACK 19-99
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX BRAKE PEDAL POSITION BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SWITCH
CONNECTOR C (2P) . SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR 2P CONNECTOR
f1i2l
~
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH VSA OFF SWITCH STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
1P CONNECTOR 5P CONNECTOR 5P CONNECTOR
1112£14151
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (34P)
WHEEL SENSOR
Urw119l 2P CONNECTOR
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR R (20P) YAW RATE-LATERAL

ACCELERATION SENSOR
4P CONNECTOR
r 121,~_,~W~~I" l/1
1
19-100 BACK
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 11, 13, 15, 17: Wheel Sensor (Open/Short 7. Check for loose terminals between the wheel
to Body Ground/Short to Power) sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector.
Are their connections OK?
YES-Go to step 8.
Is DTC 87 indicated with DTC 11,13,15, and/or 17
at the same time? NO-Reconnectthe connector and retest..
YES-Go to step 9. 8. Check the appropriate wheel sensor is properly

mounted (see page 19-139).
NO-Go to step 3.
DTC Appropriate Wheel Sensor
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 11 Riaht-front
13 Left-front
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) 15 Riaht-rear
again. 17 Left-rear
5. Check for DTCs with the HOS. Is the wheel sensor installation OK?
Is DTC 11, 13, 15, and/or 17 indicated? YES-Go to step 10.
YES-Go to step 6. NO-Reinstall the wheel sensor, andcheck the

mounting position (see page 19-139).•
time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector. Refer to intermittent 10. Oisconnectthe VSA modulator-control unit 46P
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-84) .• connector.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 11. Start the engine.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-101
12. Measure the voltage between body ground and the 13. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals
of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector 14. Check for continuity between body ground and the
individually (see table). appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals
of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
DTC Appropriate Terminal individually (see table).
+8 GND
11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND: DTC Appropriate Terminal
No. 29 No. 28 +8 GND
13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND: 11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND:
No. 12 No. 34 No.29 No. 28
15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND: 13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND:
No. 30 No.8 No.12 No. 34
17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND: 15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND:
No.11 No.10 No. 30 No.8
17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND:
No.11 No.10
=
Is there 0.1 V or more? Wire side offemale terminals
YES-Repair short to power in the wire between Is there continuity?

the VSA modulator-control unit and the appropriate
wheel sensor.• YES-Go to step 15.
19-102 BACK
15. Disconnect the appropriate wheel sensor 2P 17. Measure resistance between the appropriate VSA
connector. modulator-control unit 46P connector wheel sensor
+B and GND terminals (see table), then Measure
16. Check for continuity between body ground and the resistance between the same terminals and reverse
appropriate wheel sensor +B and GND terminals the positive and negative tester probes.
of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
individually (see table). DTC· Appropriate Terminal
+8 • GND
DTC Appropriate Terminal 11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND:
+8 GND No. 29 No. 28
11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND: 13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND:
No. 29 No. 28 No.12 No. 34
13 {Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND: 15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND:
No.12 No. 34 No. 30 No.8
15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND: 17 (Left-rear) RL+B: RL-GND:
No. 30 No.8 No.11 No. 10
17 (Left-rea r) RL+B: RL-GND:
No.11 No.10 VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals Is the resistance infinity at both directions?
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire NO-Go to step 20.

between the VSA modulator-control unit and the
appropriate wheel sensor.•
NO-Replace the appropriate wheel sensor

(see page 19-139) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 19-103
18. Disconnect the appropriate wheel sensor 2P 20. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA
connector. modulator-control unit 46P connector wheel sensor
+B and GND terminals (see table), then check for
19. On the sensor side, measure resistance between continuity between the same terminals and reverse
appropriate wheel sensor 2Pconnector terminals the positive and negative taster probes.
No.1 and No.2, then measure resistance between
the same terminals and reverse the positive and DTe Appropriate Terminal
negative tester probes. +8 GND
11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND:
WHEEL SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR No. 29 No. 28
13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND:
No.12 No. 34
15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND:
No. 30 No.8
No.11 No.10
VSA MODULATOR·CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
Is the resistance infinity at both directions?
YES-Replace the appropriate wheel sensor

(see page 19-139).
NO-Repair open in the wire between the Wire side of female terminals
appropriate wheel sensor and the VSA modulator-
control unit..
Is there continuity in both directions?
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Check for loose terminals in the VSA

modulator-control unit 46P connector. If necessary,
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-137) and resest.•
19-104 BACK
21. Disconnect the appropriate wheel sensor 2P
connector.
22. Check for continuity between the appropriate VSA

modulator-control unit 46P connector wheel sensor
+B and GND terminals (see table), then check for
continuity between the same terminals and reverse
the positive and negative tester probes.
DTe Appropriate Terminal

+8 GND
11 (Right-front) FR+B: FR-GND:
No.29 No.28
13 (Left-front) FL+B: FL-GND:
No. 12 No. 34
15 (Right-rear) RR+B: RR-GND:
No. 30 No.8
No.11 No. 10
RL +B (VEL)
FL+B(ORN)
16
FL-GND (GRY)
Is there continuity in both directions?
YES-Repair short in the wires between the VSA

modulator-control unit and the appropriate wheel
sensor.•
NO-Replace the appropriate wheel sensor

(see page 19-139) .•
BACK 19-105
DTC 12, 14, 16, 18: Wheel Sensor (Electrical 7. Substitute an appropriate known-good front wheel
Noise/Intermittent Interruption) bearing (see page 18-12), or rear hub bearing unit
(see page 18-32).
NOTE: If the ABS and other indicators come on because
of electrical noise, the indicators will go off when you 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
test-drive the vehicle speed at 10 mph (15 km/h) or
more and noise is gone. 9. Test-drive the vehicle speed at 10 mph (15 km /h) or
more.
1. Check the appropriate wheel sensor and magnetic
encoder on the front wheel bearing (see page 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
18-12) or magnetic encoder on the rear hub bearing
unit (see page 18-32). Is DrCs 12, 14, 16, and/or 18 indicated?
Ole Appropriate Wheel Sensor YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
12 RiQht-front modulator-control unit 46P connector. If necessary,
14 Left-front substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
16 Right-rear unit (see page 19-137) and retest..
18 Left-rear
NO-Replace the original front wheel bearing or
Are they installed correctly and in good condition? rear hub bearing unit:
YES-Go to step 2. • Front: Replace the front wheel bearing (see page
18-12).•
NO-Reinstall or replace the appropriate wheel • Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page
sensor, front wheel bearing, or rear hub bearing 18-32).•
unit, and recheck by test-driving .•
2. Substitute an appropriate known-good wheel

sensor (see page 19-139).
5. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km /h) or more.
Is DrCs 12, 14, 16, and/or 18 indicated?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the original wheel sensor (see page

19-139).
19-106 BACK
OTC 21, 22, 23, 24: Magnetic Encoder OTe 25: Yaw Rate Sensor (Sensor Unit)
Malfunction
OTC 26: Lateral Acceleration Sensor (Sensor
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Unit)
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS .. 1. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor.
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 31 mph (50 km/h) or more.
Is OTC 21,22, 23,andlor 24 indicated?
4. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 19 mph
YES-Go to step 5. (30 km/h)or more, and go a distance of
984 ft (300 m) or .more.
time. Check for loose terminals between the wheel 5. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
sensor 2P connector and the VSA modulator-
control unit 46 P connector. Refer to intermittent Is OTC 25 or 26 indicated?
failures troubleshooting (see page 19-84).
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
5. Inspect the appropriate magnetic encoder for modulator-control unit 46P connector. If necessary,
debris or cracks. substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-137) and retest .•
DTC Appropriate Note
Magnetic NO-Replace the original yaw rate-lateral
Encoder acceleration sensor.•
21 Right-front Remove the
22 Left-front driveshaft
outboard joint
from the
appropriate
wheel hub
(see page 18-13).
23 Right-rear Remove the hub
24 Left-rear bearing unit
(see paQe 18-31).
Is the magnetic encoder surface OK?

unit (see page 19-137) and retest.•
NO- Replace the front wheel beari ng or the rear

hub bearing unit:
• Front: Replace the front wheel bearing (see page

18-12).•
• Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit (see page
18-32) .•
BACK 19·,107
OTC 27: Steering Angle Sensor (Hardware) OTC 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 38: ABS
Solenoid
2. Chear the DTC with the HDS.
Is DTC 86 indicated with DTC 27 at the same
time? 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again.
YES-Do the DTC 86 troubleshooting (see page
19-117) .• 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
NO-Check the installation of the steering angle Is DTC 31,32,33,34,35,36,37, and/or 38

sensor (see page 19-134), and for looseterminals at indicated?
the steering angle sensor 5P connector, then
recheck. If necessary, replace the steering angle YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
sensor (see page 19-134) .• modulator-control unit 46P connector. If necessary,
unit (see page 19-137) and retest..

time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA
modulator-control unit 46P connector. Refer to
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
19-84).•
19-108 BACK
~
,
,I.
DTC51: Motor Locked DTC 52: Motor Stuck OFF

2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Check.theNo. 3 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood fusel
relay box.
3. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 10 mph
(15 km/h) or more, and the engine speed is Is the fuse blown?
2500 rpm ormore.
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 5.
Is OTe 51 indicated?
3. Disconnectthe VSA modulator-control unit 46P
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA connector.
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control 4. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
unit (see page 19-137) and retest.• control unit 46P connector terminal No. 45 and
body ground.
time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
19-84) .•
=
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire

between the No.3 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the VSA modulator-control
unit.•
NO-Install a new No.3 (40 A) fuse, then go to

step 6.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-109
5. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P 7. Reconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector. connector.
6. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator- 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
control unif46P connector terminal No. 45 and
body ground. 9. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR 10. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 10 mph
(15 km/h) or more, and the engine speed is
2500 rpm or more.
Is DTe 52 indicated?

= modulator-control unit 46P connector. If necessary,
Wire side of female terminals unit (see page 19-137) and retest..

Is there battery voltage? time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA
YES-Go to step 7. intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
19-84) .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.3
(40 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and
the VSA modulator-control unit..
19-110 BACK
Ole 53:Motor Stuck ON 7. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 8. Test-drive the vehicle. Drive the vehicle at 10 mph
(15 km/h) or more, and the engine speed is
Is the pump motor working? 2500 rpm or more.
YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
(see page 19-137).•
NO-Go to step 2.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF. , modulator-cor:1trol unit 46P connector. If necessary,
3. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P unit.(see page 19-137) and retest••
connector.
4. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- time., Check for loose terminals at the VSA ,,'
control unit 46P connector terminal No. 46 and modulator-control unit 46P connector. Refer to
body ground. intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
19-84).•
YES-Go to step 5.

modulator-control unit and body ground (G402) .•

connector.
BACK 19-111
DTC 54: Valve Relay. 5. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P
connector.
6. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator-
2. Check the No.3 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood control unit 46P cohnectorterminal No. 44 and
fuse/relay box. body ground.
Is the fuse blown? VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Reinstallthe checked fuse, then go to step 5.
3. Disconnect the VSAmodulator-control unit 46P

connector.
4. Check for continuity between VSAmodulator- =

control unit 46P connector terminal No,44and
body ground. Wire side of female terminals

YE~-Go to step 7.
NO"";~epair open in the wire between the No. 3

(20A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and
the VSAmodulator-control unit.•
=

between the No.3 (20 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and the VSA modulator-control
unit.•
NO-Install a new No.3 (20 A) fuse, then go to

step 6.
19-112 BACK
DTC 61: IG1 Voltage Low
connector. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 2. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
9. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 3. Test-drive the vehicle at 2 mph (2 km/h) or more.
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) 4. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
again.
Is OTC 61 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
YES-Check for loose terminals inthe VSA time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA
modulator-control unit 46P connector. If necessary, modulator-control unit 46P connector. Refer to
substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
unit (see page 19-137) and retest .• 19-84).•
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 5. Test the battery and check the connections.
modulator-control unit 46P connector. Refer to Is the battery OK?
19-84) .• YES-Check for a poor connection at the battery
terminals, and alllG1 circuit connections between
the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector
terminal No. 40 and the under-dash fuse/relay box
No.4 (7.5 A) fuse. If the connections are good, go to
the Alternator and Regulator Circuit
Troubleshooting (see page 4-28) .•
NO-Replace or charge the battery (see page

22-63) .•
BACK 19-113
DTC 62: IG1 Voltage High DTC 66: VSA Pressure Sensor (Hardware)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) •. 1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
3. Test-drive the vehicle at 2 mph (2 km/h) or more. 3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II)
again.
YES-Check for a poor connection. at the battery
terminals. If the connection are good, go to the YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
Alternator and Regulator Circuit Troubleshooting modulator-control unit 46P connector. If necessary,
(see page 4-28) .• substitute a know-good VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-137) and retest..
time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
modulator-control unit 46P connector. Refer to time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page modulator-control unit 46P connector. Refer to
19-84) .• intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
19-84).•
19-114 BACK
DTC 68: Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck 7. Turn the ignition sliVitch OFF.
ON (Hardware)
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). connector.
2. Clear for DTCs with the HDS. 9. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page
22-180).
Is DTC 86 indicated with DTC 68 at the same
time? Is the switch OK?
YES-Do the DTC 86 troubleshooting (see page YES-Check the fuel and emissions systems and
19-117). troubleshoot the brake pedal position switch signal
circuit (see page 11-336).•
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Check the BRAKE SWITCH in the VSA DATA LIST (see page 19-6) .•
with the HDS while moving the brake pedal.
Does it indicate ON when the pedal is pressed,

and OFF when pedal is released?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 7.
5. Test-drive the vehicle at 10 mph (15 km/h) for,

60 seconds or more.
6. Check for DTCs with the HOS.

substitute a know-good VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-137) and retest .•

modulator-control unit 46Pconnector. Refer to
19-84).•
BACK 19-115
DTC 81: Central Processing Unit (CPU) DTC 83: PCM Communication Error
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 2. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) Is orc 86 indicated with orc 83 at the same
again. time?
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. YES-Do the DTC 86 troubleshooting .• (see page
19-117).
Is orc 81 indicated?
NO-Go to step 3.
YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-137).• 3. Check for the fuel and emissions system DTCs with
the HDS (see page 11-3).
NO-I ntermittentfail ure, the system is OK atthis
time .• Are any orcs indicated?
YES-Do the applicable troubleshooting for the

PCM .•
NO-Go to step 4.

again.
Is orc 83 indicated?

substitute a know-good VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-137) and retest..
NO-Intermittent failure, system is OK at this time.

Check for loose terminals between the PCM
connector A (44P), and the VSA modulator-control
unit 46P connector. Refer to intermittent failures
19-116 BACK
DTC 84: Steering Angle Sensor No Center DTC 86: F..CAN Communication
Point Writing
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. (II).
Are any fuel and emissions system DTCs
indicated with DTC 84 at the same time? 4. Start the engine.
YES-Troubleshoot fuel and emissions system 5. Wait at least 5 seconds.

DTCs, and recheck.• .-.-.
NO-Go to step 3.
3. Do the steering angle sensor center point writing
with the HDS (see page 19-135). YES-Go to step 7.
4. Clear the DTC with the HDS. NO-Intermittentfailure, the system is OK atthis
time .•
again. 7. Check for the fuel and emissions system DTCs with
the HDS (see page 11-3).
Are any DTCs indicated?
YES-Do the applicable troubleshooting for the
YES-Replace the steering angle sensor (see page PCM .•
19-134), then do the steering angle sensor center
point writing (see page 19-135).• NO-Go to step 8.
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
time. Check for loose terminals between the
steering angle sensor 5P connector and the VSA
19-84).•
(cont'd)
BACK 19-117
.!.'
VSAS'ystem Components
9. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 13. Check for continuity between yaw rate-lateral
4P connector. acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No.4
and body ground.
SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
11. Measure the voltage between yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor 4P connector terminal No.1
and body ground.
SENSOR4PCONNECTOR
IG1 (GRN)
.---THl-i
=
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the yaw rate-
/s there battery voltage? lateral acceleration sensor and body ground
(G503) .•
YES-Go to step 12.
'';'.
NO-Repair open in the wire between No.4 (7.5 A)

fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the yaw
rate-lateral acceleration sensor.. -,'
19'::118 BACK
14. Check for continuity between DLC terminals No.6, 1S. Disconnect the steering angle sensor SP connector.
No. 14 and yaw rate-Iateralacceleration sensor4P
connector terminals No.3, No.2 individually. 16. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Terminal side, of female terminals
17. Meas~re the voltage between steeri~g angle
sensor SP connector terminal No. S and body
ground.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR
YAW RATE-LATERAL ACCELERATION Wire side of female terminals

SENSOR4PCONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 1S. YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair open in the wire between DLC and the NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.4
yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor.• (7.S A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
the steering angle sensor.•
(cont'd)
BACK 19'·'119
19. Check for continuity between steering angle'sensor 20. Check for continuity between' DLC terminals No.6,
5P connector terminal No.1 and body ground. No. 14 and steering angle sensor 5P connector
terminals No.2, No.4 individually.
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR.5P CONNECTOR DATA LINK CONNECTOR IDLC)
Is there continuity? STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 5P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 20.·
NO-Repair open in the wire between the steering
angle sensor and body ground (G502) .•. YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Repair open in the wire between OLC and the

steering angle sensor.•
19-120 BACK
21. Check for continuity between VSA modulator- 22. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
control unit 46P connector terminals No. 38, No. 39
and DLC terminals No. 14, No.6 individually. 23. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT 46P CONNECTOR 24. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8 101"> 25. Start the engine.
CAN-L(RED) CAN-H (WHT) 26. Wait at least 5 seconds.
Q 27. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit

(see page 19-137).•
DATA LINK CONNECTOR (DLC) NO-The system is OK at this time.•

YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Repair open in the wire between VSA

modulator-control unit and DLC.•
BACK 19-121
DTC 87: Current Flow into Wheel Sensor, DTC 88: Difference in Wheel Speed
Input Amplifier
1. Check the a II four ti res.
Are all four tires the correct size and properly
2. Clear the DTC with the HDS. inflated? '
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) YES-Go to step 2.
again.
NO-Install the correct tires or set the tires to the
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. correct pressure, and retest by test-driving .•
Is DTC 87 indicated? 2. Check the RF, LF, RR, LR, WHEEL SPD in the VSA
YES-Do the DTC11, 13, 15, and/or 17
troubleshooting (see page 19-101) .• Are all four the same indicated value?

modulator-control unit 46P connector. Refer to NO-Reinstall or replace the wheel sensor(s)
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page (see page 19-139), and recheck by test-driving.•
19-84) .•
3. Check the all magnetic encoders on the front wheel
bearings (see page 18-12) or magnetic encoders on
the rear hub bearing units (see page 18-32).
Are they installed correctly and good condition?

NO-Replace the front wheel bearing(s) or the rear

hub bearing unit(s), and recheck by test-driving:
• Front: Replace the front wheel bearing(s)

(see page 18-12).•
• Rear: Replace the rear hub bearing unit(s)
(see page 18-32) .•
19-122 BACK
DTC 91: VSA System DTC 113: Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration
Sensor (Power Supply)
1. Check the brake system for leaks or mechanical
problems. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is the brake system OK? (no brake fluid leakage, 2. Disconnect the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor
air trapped in the brake system, brake pads worn 4P connector.
out)
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Repair the brake system, then recheck.• yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 4P connector
terminal No.1.
3. Clear the DTC with the HDS. SENSOR 4P CONNECTOR
4. Test-drive the vehicle in a straight line. Accelerate

the vehicle up to 6 mph (10 km/h), and stop, then
accelerate up to 6 mph (10 km/l.
Is OTe 91 indicated? =
YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA Wire side of female terminals
unit (see page 19-137) and retest .• Is there battery voltage?
NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this YES-Replace the yaw rate-lateral acceleration
time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA sensor (see page 19-135).
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.4
19-84). (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor.•
BACK 19-123
DTC 114: Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration DTC 121, 122, 123, 124: VSA Solenoid
Sensor Installation Problem
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON (II) again.
again.
Is DTC 121, 122, 123, and/or 124 indicated?
YES-Replace the yaw rate-lateral acceleration modulator-control unit 46P connector. If necessary,
sensor (see page 19-135). substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
time. Check for loose terminals at the yaw rate- NO-Intermittent failure, the system is OK at this
lateral acceleration sensor 4P connector. Refer to time. Check for loose terminals at the VSA
intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page modulator-control unit 46P connector. Refer to
19-84) .• intermittent failures troubleshooting (see page
19-84).•
19-124 BACK
DTC 131: Yaw Rate Sensor (Software) 8. Clear the OTe with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON. 9. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
2. Check for DTCs with,the HDS. 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
Is ore 91 indicated with ore 131 at the saine Is ore 131 indicated?
time?
YES-Go to step 11.
19-123). NO-Intermittent failure; the most probable cause
is that the vehicle has been driven orian extremely
NO-Go to step 3. canted road. The system is OK at this time.•
4. Check the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor is 12. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral
properly mounted (see page 19-135). acceleration sensor (see page 19-135).
Is the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 13. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) .
installation OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
15. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
NO-Reinstall the yaw rate-lateral acceleration
sensor, and recheck by test-driving .• 16. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
5. Put the vehicle on a level surface. Is ore 131 indicated?
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). YES-Check for loose terminal in the VSA
7. Check the YAW RATE S inthe VSADATA LIST with substitute a known-good VSAmodulator-control
the HDS. unit (see page 19-137) and retest.•
Is the indicated value within ±5°/s? NO-Replace the original yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor (see page 19-135).•
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the yaw rate-lateral acceleration

sensor (see page 19-135).
BACK 19-125
"
., 1',1;
"SA'.System Components
DTC 132: Lateral Acceleratjon SensoJ. 8. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
(Software)
;", '. 9. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
DTC 133: Lateral Acceleration Sensor (Joint
Failure) 10. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is DTC 132 or 133 indicated?
2. Check for DTCs with the HDS. YES-Go to step 11.
Is DTC 91 indicated with DTC 132 or 133 atthe NO-Intermittent failure; the most probable cause
same time? is that the vehicle has been driven on an extremely
canted road. The system is OKat this time.•
19-123).• 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
NO-Go to step 3. 12. Substitute a known-good yaw rate-lateral

acceleration sensor (see page 19-135).
4. Check the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor is
properly mounted (see page 19-135). 14. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
Is the yaw rate-lateral acceleration-sensor 15. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
installation OK?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is DTC 132 or 133 indicated.?
NO-Reinstall the yaw rate-lateral acceleration
sensor, and recheck by test-driving .• YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
5. Put the vehicle. on a level surface. substitute a known.good VSA modulator-control
unit (see page 19-137) and retest.
NO-Replace the original yaw rate-lateral
7. Check the LATERAL ACCELERATION SENSOR in acceleration sensor (see page 19-135) .•
the VSA DATA LIST with the HDS.
Is it indicated within ± 1 m/s?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the yaw rate-lateral acceleration

sensor (see page 19-135).•
19-126 BACK
DTC 134: Steering Angle Sensor (Software) 6. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 7. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Check for DTCs with the HDS. 8. Test-drive the vehicle around a number of corners.
Is OTe 86 indicated with OTe 134 at the same 9. Check for DTCs with the HDS.
time?
19-117).• YES-Replace the VSA modulator-control unit
(see page 19-137).•
NO-Go to step 3.
NO- The system is OK at this time .•
3. Put the vehicle on a level surface, and center the
steering wheel spokes.
4. Check STEERING ANGLE in the VSA DATA LIST

with the HDS.
With steering wheel in the straight ahead position,

is STEERING ANGLE within± 5~
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Check for installation of the steering angle

sensor. If installation is good, do the steering angle
sensor center point writing (see page 19-135).•
5. Check the wheel alignment (see page 18-5).
Is the wheel alignment within the specification?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Make sure the suspension is not modified,

and adjust the wheel alignment correctly, and
recheck by test-driving .•
BACK 19-127
DTC 137: VSA Pressure Sensor (Software) 8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF (II). 9. Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).
2. Disconnect the brake pedal position switch 4P 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
connector.
11. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
3. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page
22-180). 12. Test-drive the vehicle at 8 mph (12 km/h) for
60 seconds or more.
Is the switch OK? .
YES-Go to step 4.
(see page 19-6).• YES-Check for loose terminals in the VSA
4. Short the SCS line with the HDS. substitute a known-good VSA modulator-control
5. Disconnect the PCM connector A (44P).
NO-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-252).•
7. Measure the voltage between PCM connector

A (44P) terminal No. 40 and body ground.
=
Is there battery voltage when the brake pedal

released?

the brake pedal position switch and the PCM .•
NO-Go to step 8.
19-128. BACK
OTC 138: Brake Pedal Position Switch Stuck 5. Short the SCS line with the HDS.
OFF (Software)
6. Disconnect the PCM connector A (44P).
7. Check for continuity between brake pedal position
2. Check the No. 12 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood switch 4P connector terminal No.2 and PCM
fuse/relay box. connector A (44P) terminal No. 40.
/s the fuse OK? Terminal side offemale terminals
YES-Reinstall the fuse, and go to step 3.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. 1ft he fuse is

blown, check for a short to body ground in the fuse
circuit.•

connector.
4. Measure the voltage between brake pedal position

switch 4P connector terminal No.1 and body
ground.
BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR BRAKE PEDAL POSITION SWITCH 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the PCM and

the brake pedal position switch .•
=
YES-Go to step 5.

(15 A) fuse in the under-hood fuse/relay box and
the brake pedal position switch .•
(cont'd)
BACK 19-129
8. Do the brake pedal position switch test (see page

22-180).
Is the switch OK?
YES-Go to step 9.

(see page 19-35). '
9. Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8).
10. Start the engine, thEm press the b~ake pedal slowly
and hard.
Is DTe 138 indicated?

substitute a known:'goodVSA modulator-control
NO-Replace the original PCM (see page 11-252).•
19.;130 BACK
VSA activation indicator does not go off, and 7., Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P
no DTes are stored connector terminal No.2 and body ground.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and watch the VSA VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
activation indicator.
Does VSA activation indicator go off within

2 seconds?
YES-The system is OK at this time .•
NO-Go to step 2.

=
3. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector.
4. Check the VSA OFF switch (see page 19-136). Is there continuity?
Is the VSA OFF switch OK? YES-Repair short to body ground between the
gauge control module and the VSA OFF switch .•
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Substitute a known-good gauge control
NO-Replace the VSA OFF switch (see page module, then go to step 1 and recheck. If it is OK,
19-136). replace the original gauge control module
(see page 22-284).
5. Remove the gauge control module (see page
22-284).
6. Disconnect the gauge control module (36P)

connector.
BACK 19-131
ABS indicator, brake system indicator, and· 7. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
VSA indicator do not go off at the same time control unit 46P connector terminal No. 43 and
body ground.
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT46P CONNECTOR
2. Check the No.4 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
fuse/relay box.
Is the fuse blown?
YES-Install a new No.4 (7.5 A) fuse, and

recheck.•
NO-Reinstall the checked fuse, then go to step 3.
3. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P Wire side of female terminals
connector.
4. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Is there continuity?
5. Measure the voltage between VSA modulator- YES-Go to step 8.

control unit 46P connector terminal No. 40 and
body ground. NO-Repair open in the wire between the VSA
modulator-control unit and body ground (G402) .•
connector.
8 1 1112 16
282930
IG1 (GRN)
':i.
=
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No.4

(7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
the VSA modulator-control unit..
19-132 BACK
9. Check for continuity between VSA modulator-
control unit 46P connector terminal No. 38, No. 39
and gauge control module 36P connector No. 29,
No. 28 individually.
8 101112 16
CAN·L IRED)
CAN-H IWHT)

Wire side of female t!lrminals

NO-Repair open in the wire between the gauge

control module and the VSA modulator-control
unit.•
BACK 19-133
Steering Angle Sensor Replacement
NOTE: Do not damage or drop the combination switch as the steering angle sensor is sensitive to shock and vibration.
1. Remove the steering wheel (see page 17-22) and steering column cover (see page 20-107).
2. Remove the combination switch assembly (see page 17-25).
3. Remove the cable reel (see page 24-158).
4. Remove the combination light switch (A) and the wiper/washer switch (B).
5. Replace the combination switch body complete (C).
6. Install the combination switch in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: Do not remove the steering angle sensor from the combination switch body.
7. After installation, do the steering angle sensor center point writing (see page 19-135).
19-134 BACK
Steering Angle Sensor Center Point Yaw Rate-Lateral Acceleration
Writing Sensor Replacement
NOTE: Before doing the steering angle sensor center NOTE:

point writing, park the vehicle on a flat level surface, • Do not damage or drop the sensor as it is sensitive.
and turn the steering wheeltothe straight ahead • Do not use air or electric impact tools.
position while moving the vehicle.
1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
the date link connector (DLC) (A) under the driver's 2. Remove the center console (see page 20-95).
4P connector (A).

and the VSA modulator-control unit. If it doesn't,
troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-229).
4. Do the steering angle sensor center point writing in

the VSA ADJUSTMENT with the HDS.
4. Remove the sensor mounting bolts, and remove
NOTE: See the HDS Help menu for specific the yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor (B).
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Verity DTC 84 clears and does not return. If DTC 84

is indicated, do the appropriate troubleshooting.
BACK 19-135
VSA Off Switch Test'
1. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 5. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P
connector terminal No.4 and No.5. There should
2. Remove the VSA OFF switch (A) from the switch be continuity at all times.
panel.
vSA OFF SWITCH 5P, CONNECTOR
3. Disconnect the VSA OFF switch 5P connector.
4. Check for continuity between VSA OFF switch 5P

connector terminal No.1 an,dNo. 2. There should
be continuity whentheswitch is pushed.
VSA OFF SWITCH 5P CONNECTOR
19-136 BACK
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation
NOTE:
• Do not spill brake fluid on the vehicle; it may damage the paint; if brake fluid gets on the paint, wash it off
• Be careful not to damage or deform the brake lines during removal and installation.
• To prevent the brake fluid from flowing, plug and cover the hose ends and joints with a shop towel or equivalent
material.
Removal
2. Disconnect the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector (A) by pulling up the lock (B); the connector disconnects
itself.
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,16Ibf.ftl
o
(@):----.-
J
8N·m
~---_.L ~ (0.8 kgf.m, 6lbf·ftl
6xl.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibf·ftl
3. Disconnect the six brake lines from the VSA modulator-control unit.
NOTE: Brake lines are connected to the master cylinder (C) and to the right-front (D), the left-rear (E), the right-rear
(F) and the left-front (G) brake systems.
4. Remove the VSA modulator-control unit (H) with the bracket (I) from the body.
5. Remove the locknuts (J), then remove the VSA modulator-control unit from the bracket.
(cont'd)
BACK 19-137
VSA Modulator-Control Unit Removal and Installation (cont'd) .
Installation
1. Install the VSA modulator-control unit on the bracket, then install the new locknuts.
2. Install the bracket with the VSA modulator-control unit.
3. Reconnect the six brake lines, then tighten the flare nuts to the specified torque.
4. Align the connecting surface of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector to the VSA modulator-control unit.
5. Lower the lock of the VSA modulator-control unit 46P connector, then confirm the connector is fully seated.
6. Bleed the brake system (see page 19-9).
7. Start the engine, and check that the ABS and the VSA indicators go off.
8. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS, and the VSA indicators do not come on.
NOTE: If the brake pedal is spongy, there may be air trapped in the modulator and then induced into the normal
brake system during modulation. Bleed the brake system again, (see page 19-9).
19-138 BACK
Wheel Sensor Replacement
Front
2. Release the connector holding clamps (A), then disconnect the wheel sensor connector (B).
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
c
3. Remove the clips, the bolt and the wheeLsensor (e).
4. Install the wheel sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires .

• If the wheel sensor comes in contact with the wheel bearing, it is faulty.
6. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS and the VSA indicators do not come on.
(cont'd)
BACK
Wheel Sensor Replacement (cont'd)
Rear
2. Disconnect the wheel sensor connector (A).
3. Remove the clips, the bolt and the wheel sensor (B).
4. Install the wheel sensor in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Apply mUltipurpose grease to the O-ring (e) ..

• Install the sensor carefully to avoid twisting the wires.
• If the wheel sensor comes in contact with the hub bearing unit, it is faulty.
6. Test-drive the vehicle, and check that the ABS and the VSA indicators do not come on.
19-1·40 BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If body maintenance is required)
The RDX SRS includes a driver's airbag in the steering wheel hub, a passenger's airbag inthe dashboard abov~ the
curtain airbags in the sides of the roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information'necessary to safely service
the SRS is included in this Service Manual, Items marked with an asterisk ( * ) on the contents page include or are
tools, and should be done only by an authorized Acura dealer. . , .'
airbags may deploy.
column, front console, dashboard, dashboard lower panel, in the dashboard above the glove box,in the front seats,
BACK
Body
Doors Interior Trim
Component Location Index-Front Door .... 20-2 Component Location Index ....................... 20-65
Component Location Index-Rear Door ..... 20-4 * Trim Removal/Installation-Door Areas ..... 20-66
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation ..... 20-6 * Trim Removal/Installation-Pillar Areas ..... 20-69
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement .... 20-8 * Trim Removal/Installation
Front Door Latch Replacement ................. 20-11 -Rear Side Area ....................................... 20-76
Front Door Glass and Regulator Trim Removal/Installation-Cargo Area :.... 20-78
.Replacement ............................................ 20-13 Trim Removal/Installation
Front Door Sash Inner Trim -Tailgate Area .......................................... 20-80
Replacement ........ ................ .................... 20-14 Sunvisor Removal/Installation .................. 20-82
Outer Corner Front Door Trim Grab Handle Removal/Installation ............ 20-83
Replacement ............................................ 20-15 * Headliner Removal/Installation ................. 20-85
Front Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip * Carpet Replacement ................................... 20-89
Replacement ............................................ 20-15
Lower Front Door Sill Seal Consoles
Replacement ............................................ 20-16 * Center Console Removal/Installation ....... 20-92
Front Door Weatherstrip Center Console Armrest
Replacement ............................................ 20-16 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-94
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation ...... 20-17 Armrest Lock Replacement ....................... 20-94
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement ..... 20-19 Center Console
Rear Door Latch Replacement ................... 20-21 Disassembly/Reassembly ...................... 20-95
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Center Console Beverage Holder
Replacement ............................................ 20-23 Replacement ............................................ 20-97
Rear Door Sash Inner Trim
Replacement .................... :....................... 20-25 Dashboard
Rear Door Rear Sash Trim Dashboard Side Trim
Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip Left Driver's Dashboard Panel
Lower Rear Door Sill Seal Passenger's Dashboard Trim Panel
Rear Door Weatherstrip Replacement ...... 20-27 Right Driver's Dashboard Panel
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment ... 20-28 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-99
Front and Rear Door Position Center Panel Trim Removal/Installation ... 20-100
Adjustment .............................................. 20-29 Instrument Panel Removal/Installation .... 20-100
Front and Rear Door Striker Center Panel Removal/Installation ............ 20-101
Adjustment .............................................. 20-30 Driver's Dashboard Undercover
Removal/Installation ............................... 20-102
Mirrors Driver's Switch Panel
Component Location Index ....................... 20-31 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-102
Power Mirror Replacement ....................... 20-32 Dashboard Side Vent
Mirror Holder Replacement ....................... 20-33 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-103
Rearview Mirror Replacement .................. 20-34 Passenger's Dashboard Undercover
Removal/Installation ............................... 20-103
Glass Glove Box Removal/Installation ................ 20-104
Component Location Index ....................... 20-35 Glove Box Damper Replacement .............. 20-104
Windshield Replacement ........................... 20-37 Glove Box Striker Replaceme·nt ................ 20-105
Rear Window Replacement ....................... 20-42 Center Upper Dashboard Panel
Quarter Glass Replacement ....................... 20-47 Removal/Installation .............................. 20-105
* Upper Dashboard Panel
Moonroof Removal/Installation .............................. 20-106
Component Location Index ....................... 20-53 * Column Cover Removal/Installation ......... 20-107
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 20-54 * Dashboard Replacement ........................... 20-108
Glass Height Adjustment ........................... 20-55 * Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam
Glass Replacement ..................................... 20-55 Removal/Installation ............................... 20-111
Wind Deflector Replacement ..................... 20-56
Drain Channel Replacement ...................... 20-57
Sunshade Replacement ............................. 20-58
Motor Replacement .................................... 20-59
* Frame and Drain Tube Replacement ........ 20-60
Drain Channel Slider and Cable
Assembly Replacement .......................... 20-62
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check .. , 20-64
Seats Fuel Fill Door
Component Location Index ....................... 20-116 Adjustment .................................................. 20-159
Front Seat Active Headrest Inspection ..... 20-117 Fuel Cap Adapter Replacement ................. 20-160
* Front Seat Removal/Installation ................ 20-118
Front Seat Frame Replacement ... ,.....•....... 20-121 Exterior Trim
* Front Seat-back Cover/Pad Front Grille Replacement' ........................... 20-161
Replacement ......................................•..... 20-126 Hood Molding Replacement ...................... 20-162
* Front Seat Cushion Cover/Pad Front Fender Trim Replacement ............... 20-162
Replacement .........• ~ .....••.......................... 20-131. A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement ............ 20-163
Rear Seat Armrest Replacement ............... 20-135 Cowl Cover Replacement, ........................... 20-163
Rear Seat Armrest Beverage Holder Door Molding Replacement ....................... 20-165
Replacement ..................... :.................n~·:. 20-136 Lower Front Fender Panel
Rear Seat Removal/Installation ................. 20-137 Replacement ............................................ 20-168
Rear Seat Cushion Link End Mounting Roof Molding Replacement ....................... 20-169
Bracket Replacement .............................. 20-138 Tailgate Hinge Cover Replacement .......... 20-171
Rear Seat-back Striker Replacement ........ 20-139 Tailgate Spoiler Trim Replacement .......... 20-172
Rear Seat-back Cover/Pad . Rear License Trim Replacement ............... 20-173
Replacement ............................................ 20-139 Tailgate Lower Trim Replacement ............ 20-174
Rear Seat Lock Replacement· ..................... 20-143 Emblem/Sticker Replacement ................... 20-175
Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover
Replacement ........................................... 20-143 Fenderwell
Rear Seat Cushion,Cover/Pad . Front Inner Fender Replacement .............. 20-176
Replacement ............................................ 20-144 Front Splash Shield Replacement ............. 20-177
Front Fender Fairing Replacement ........... 20-178
Bumpers .... Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement .............. 20-179
Front Bumper Removal/Installation .......... 20-146 Rear Fender Cover Replacement .............. 20-179
Front Bumper Rear Wheel Arch Protector
Disassembly/Reassembly ...................... 20-148 Replacement ...................................: ........ 20-180
Upper Front Bumper Grille Rear Door Wheel Arch Seal
Replacement ........................................~ .... 20-149 Replacement ............................................ 20-180
Lower Front Bumper G r i l l e ' Rear Strake Replacement .......................... 20-181
Replacement ............................................ 20-149 Rear Air Outlet Replacement ..................... 20-181
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation ........... 20-150
Rear Bumper Reflector Replacement ....... 20-152 Openers
Component Location Index ....................... 20-182
Hood Hood Opener Cable Replacement ............. 20-183
Adjustment .................................................. 20-153 Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable .
Hood Seal Replacement ............................. 20-154 Replacement .......................... ,...:............... 20-184
Hood Insulator Replacement ...................:. 20-155 . Fuel F.iII Door Opener Replacement .......... 20-186
Charge Air Cooler Air Duct _ Hood Latch Replacement ........................... 20-187
Removal/Installation ............................... 20~155 Hood Release Handle Replacement .......... 20-188
Tailgate Latch Replacement ...................... 20-188
Tailgate
Adjustment .................................................. 20-156 Frame
Tailgate Support Strut Replacement ........ 20-157 Rear Damper Gusset Replacement ........... 20-190
Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement ......... 20-158 Subframe Replacement .......................... ;.. 20-191
Frame Repair Chart .................................... 20-194
Doors
Component Location Index - Front Door
DOOR CENTER OUTER TRIM
DOOR
DOOR WEATHERSTRIP Position Adjustment, page 20-29
Replacement,
page 20-16 DOOR GLASS OUTER
WEATHERSTRIP
HINGE
/
PLASTIC COVER ~~
HINGE
~
DOOR GLASS
INNER WEATHERSTRIP
Passenger's
ARMREST
POWER WINDOW SWITCH DOOR PANEL

POWER WINDOW SWITCH PANEL page 20-6
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
20-2 BACK
GLASS
/ GLASS RUN CHANNEL
FRONT LOWER CHANNEL
CENTER LOWER CHANNEL
OUTER HANDLE PROTECTOR
REGULATOR
____________ PROTECTOR ROD

RETAINER
\ INNER HANDLE CABLE
STRIKER
Adjustment,
page 20-30
"
~@
~
LATCH PROTECTOR
LATCH
LATCH CABLE
Replacement, page 20-11 ? <T

INNER HANDLE CAP
• ~ INNER HANDLE
BACK 20-3
Doors
Component Location Index - Rear Door
DOOR
I
QUARTER INNER TRIM Position Adjustment, page 20-29
DOOR ROOF OUTER TRIM
DOOR GLASS OUTER

. WEATHERSTRIP
. Replacement, page 20-26
REAR DOOR SASH INNER TRIM
~~~
. ~ \\_____
% ~DOORCENTER OUTER TRIM
~~HINGE
W~
@ ~OOOR
~ - ~. CHECKER
;:~
® HINGE
~SPEAKER
DOOR GLASS
INNER WEATHERSTRIP
LOWER REAR DOOR SILL SEAL

SWITCH PANEL
POWER WINDOW SWITCH

DOOR PANEL
20-4 BACK
GLASS
/ GLASS RUN CHANNEL
REGULATOR
CENTER LOWER CHANNEL OUTER HANDLE

/ INNER HANDl£ CABl£
OUTER HANDLE
PROTECTOR
~
~
STRIKER
0'" D crJI"
o \
LATCH CABLE ? '"
INNER HANDLE CAP
INNER HANDLE
Adjustment,
page 20-30
!
CHILHCAP
LATCH
LATCH PROTECTOR
BACK 20-5
Doors
Front Door Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Using the appropriate trim tool, pry out on the
• KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * upper portion of the front door cap (A) to release
• Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, the hooks (B, e). Then remove the cap and the
commercially available screw.
* Available through the American Honda Tool and
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
~I
NOTE:
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to
avoid damage when prying components .
• Take care not to scratch the door and related parts.
1. Raise the glass fully.
2. Using the appropriate trim tool, pry out on the c

lower portion of the inner handle cap (A) to release
the hooks (B, e).
A
c
B
3. Remove the screw (A, B) from the inner handle (e).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 2 B ~ : Screw, 1
~ ~ c
20-6 BACK
5. Remove the front door tweeter (see page 23-103). 7. While holding the door panel away from the door,
remove the inner handle (A) from the door panel by
6. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as' detaching the hooks (8). Remove the door panel.
possible to avoid creasing or breaking it.
Fastener Locations
-1 Start at the bottom edge of the door panel, [>: Clip, 3
~
release the clips with a commercially available
trim pad remover.
-2 Detach the upper clips.
-a Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
-4 Disconnect the power window switch
connector.
NOTE: The inner handle cable and latch cable

are connected to the inner handle. Do not pull
the door panel up too far, or these cables will
be damaged.
Fastener Locations
8. If necessary, disconnect the inner handle cable (A)

and the latch cable (8) from the inner handle (C),
then remove the handle .
...!I Detach the inner handle cable fastener (D) with

a flat-tip screwdriver, then disconnect the inner
handle cable from the cable fastener (E).
-2 Disconnect the latch cable from the cable
fastener (F).
NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened

cable fasteners.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-7
Doors
Front Door Panel Removall Front Door Outer Handle
Installation (cont'd) Replacement
9. Install the door panel in the reverse order of NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
whitened, and if necessary, replace them with 2. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6).
new ones.
• Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new 3. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector
ones. (A).
• The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable
fastener (8) with the latch in lock position as
shown.
• Make surethe power window switch connector is
plugged in properly, and the cable is connected
securely.
• Make sure the window and power door lock
operate. properly.
A \ 49 mm 11.9 in.)
\rm-r-m--.
4. Remove the plug caps (8), then remove the plastic
cover (C); as needed.
5. Detach the rod fastener (A).
20-8 BACK
6. Remove the maintenance seal (A). 9. Driver's door: Pull both side flanges (A) of the
retainer (8) outward, and pull the middle flange
portion (e) of the outer casing cover (D) out, then
disconnect the door lock cylinder cable (E) from the
latch (F).
A NOTE: It may necessary to loosen the latch

assembly mounting hardware to remove the door
\ lock cylinder cable from the latch.
7. With a clip remover, disconnect the outer handle

rod (8).
8. Remove the bolt, and free the center lower channel F

(A).
Fastener Location
~: Bolt, 1
10. Remove the bolt, then remove the spacer (A) by

avoiding the projection ofthe handle.
A ---
Fastener Location
~: Bolt,1
.1 .~
(Q) 0
~ r' ,
~ -----A '
- - - - - - 6 x 1.0 mm
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf.m. 7.2Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-9
Doors·
Front Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
11. Remove the bolt securing the outer handle 13. If necessary, remove the special screws, then
protector (A). Loosen the mounting nut and remove separate the door lock cylinder (A) and outer
the support bar (8). Remove the protector by handle protector (8). If the retainer (C) is damaged,
releasing the hook (C). release the hooks (D), and replace it.
Fastener Location NOTE: If removed, the special screws must be

replaced.
Fastener Locations
6x1.0mm
.-lr--.
14. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle
9.8N·m (8), then replace it with a new one.
12. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the

handle fronithe holes in the door panel. Take care
not to scratch the door.
15. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,

and note these items:
• Make sure the door lock cylinder cable and each

rod is connected securely.
• Make sure the door key cylinder/door locks
operate properly.
• Make sure the door handle works properly.
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
plastic cover is installed properly and sealed
around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
• Check for water leaks.
20-10 BACK
Front Door Latch Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 7. Disconnect the door lock cylinder cable from the
latch (see step 9 on page 20-9).
8. Remove the screws (A, B) securing the latch (e),
2. Remove the door panel and inner handle (see page then remove the latch through the hole in the door.
20-6). Take care not to bend the outer handle rod (D),
latch cable (E), and inner handle cable (F).
3. Remove the plastic cover, as needed (see step 3 on
page 20-8). Fastener Locations
A" : Screw, 3 B" : Screw, 1
4. Detach the rod fastener (see step 5 on page 20-8).
@:nmm> Q))mm
5. Disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer o
handle (see step 6 on page 20-9).
6. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed, and

remove the bolt, then remove the center lower
channel (B) by pulling it downward.
6x1.0mm
Fastener Location 6N·m
.. : Bolt, 1
~
~ A
A
(cont'd)
BACK 20-11
Doors
Front Door latch Replacement (cont'd)
9. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector 11. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
(A) by releasing the hook (8). note these items:
Fastener Location ,
• Make sure the actuator connector is plugged in
~:Screwr1 properly and each rod is connected securely.
A
• Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
B around its outside perimeter to seal out water.
10. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle
cable (8) from 'the latch (C).
20-12 BACK
Front Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands. 5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the regulator (8).
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). Fastener Locations

C~:Bolt,4 D~:Bolt,1
2. Disconnect the power door lock actuator connector
(A), and remove the plug caps (8). @rrm @rrnrrn I
3. Detach the connector clip (C), and pass the

harnesses (D) through the slits (E) in the plastic A
cover (F), then remove the plastic cover.
4. Carefully raise the glass (A) until you can see the 6. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolt (D), then
bolts, then remove them. Carefully pull the glass remove the regulator through the hole in the door.
out through the window slot. Take care not to drop
the glass inside the door. 7. Apply mUltipurpose grease to all the sliding
surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown.
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt, 2
(Q)n-i A
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-13
Doors
Front Door Glass and Regulator Front Door Sash Inner Trim
Replacement (cont'd) Replacement
8. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
of removal, and note these items:
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6).
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves
freely without binding. 2. Using the clip remover, detach the clip fastening
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the the front door sash inner trim (A).
glass and glass run channel when the glass is
Fastener Location
closed.
[> : Clip, 1
@
• Adjustthe position ofthe glass as necessary
~~I
(see page 20-28).
• Reset the power window control unit (see page
~~
22-213).
around its outside perimeter to prevent water B
leaks.
• Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-28).
• Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles.
• Make sure the power door locks, windows, and
power mirror operate properly.
3. Pull the door glass opening side of the trim back to

release the hooks (8) from the door glass opening
flange of the door sash.
4. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:

whitened, and if necessary, replace them with
new ones .
• Push the hooks into place securely.
20-14 BACK
Outer Corner Front Door Trim Front Door Glass Outer
Replacement Weatherstrip Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the door. NOTE:

• Put on gloves to protect your hands.
1. Remove the front door speaker (see page 23-102). • Take care not to scratch the door.
2. From inside the door, remove the screws. 1. Remove these items:
3. Pull up the outer corner front door trim (A) to • Cornerfront door trim (see page 20-15)
release the hooks (B), then remove it from the door. • Door panel (see page 20-6)
• Plastic cover (see step 3 on page 20-8)
Fastener Locations • Front door glass (see page 20-13)
~ : Screw, 2
~
2. Release the front hook (A) from inside of the door,
then pull up the front door glass outer weatherstrip
(B).
4. Install the corner front door trim in the reverse

order of removal.
3. Starting at the front, release the hook (C) the clips

(D) and pull up the door glass outer weatherstrip
from the front.
4. Release the rear hook (E) out from inside of the

door, then remove the weatherstrip.
5. Install a new weatherstrip in the reverse order of

removal, and push it into place securely.
BACK 20-15
Doors
Lower Front Door Sill Seal Front Door Weatherstrip
NOTE: NOTE:
o Put on gloves to protect your hands. o Put on gloves to protect your hands.
o Take care not to scratch the door. o Take care not to scratch the door.
o Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Remove the lower sill seal (A) by pulling it.
1. At the A-pillar, remove the door checker mounting
bolt (A).
Fastener Locations
A~: Bolt, 1 B [>: Clip, 1 C [> : Clip, 16
D [>: Clip, 1
at ~I
J\\!J E
2. Install the lower sill seal in the reverse order of

removal, and these items: ..
C
o Make sure there are no wrinkles in the seal.
o Make sure the lower sill seal is installed in the
door flange. C 8x1.2Smm
29N·m
2. Detach the clips (8, C, D), then remove the door

weatherstrip (E).
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of

o Check ifthe clips are damaged or stress-

new ones.
o Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the
holder (F) securely.
o Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to
door checker mounting bolt before installation.
o Check for water leaks.
20-16 BACK
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Remove the screw.

• KTe trim tool set SOJATP20"4 *
• Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, Fastener Location
commercially available ~ : Screw, 1
~
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the door and related parts.
2. Using the appropriate trim tool, pry out on the

lower portion of the inner handle cap (A) to release
the hooks (B, e).
c
5. Pull out the rear edge on the quarter inner trim (A)
to detach the clip, then release the hooks (B) and
remove it.
NOTE: When installing the trim, first attach the

hooks into the door panel properly.
Fastener Locations
3. Remove the screws (A, B) from the inner handle (e).
Fastener Locations
A ~: Screw, 2 B ~: Screw, 1
~ ~I
(cont'd)
BACK 20-17
Doors·
Rear Door Panel Removal/Installation (cont'd)
6. Remove the door panel (A) with as little bending as 7. While holding the door panel away from the door,
possible to avoid creasing or breaking .it. remove the inner handle (A) from the door panel by
detaching the hooks (8). Remove the door panel.
-1 Start at the bottom edge of the door panel,
Fastener Locations
release the clip (8) with a commercially
available trim pad remover. 1>: Clip, 3
-2 Detach the upper clips.
-a Starting at the rear, pull the door panel upward.
-4 Disconnect the power window switch
AJ
connector.
NOTE: The inner handle cable and latch cable

are connected to the inner handle. Do not pull
the door panel up too far, or these cables will
be damaged.
Fastener Locations
l> : Clip, 7
~J A
8. If necessary, disconnect the inner handle cable (A)

and the latch cable (8) from the inner handle (C),
then remove the handle.
-1 Detach the inner handle cable fastener (D) with

a flat-tip screwdriver, then disconnect the inner
handle cable from the cable fastener (E).
-2 Disconnect the latch cable from the cable
fastener (F).
NOTE: Check for damaged or stress-whitened

cable fasteners.
20-18 BACK
Rear Door Outer Handle
Replacement
9. Install the door panel in the reverse order of
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
whitened, and if necessary, replace them with 1. Raise the glass fully.
new ones.
• Replace any damaged cable fasteners with new 2. Remove the door panel (see page 20-17).
ones.
• The latch cable (A) should be fixed to the cable 3. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the
fastener (8) with the latch in lock position as power door lock actuator connector (8).
shown.
• Make sure the power window switch connector is
plugged in properly, and the cable is connected
securely.
• Make sure the window and power door lock
operate properly.
c
A c
49 mm 11.9 in.)
4. Remove the plug caps (C), then remove the plastic

cover (D), as needed.
5. Remove the screws and nut securing the latch (see

6. Lower the latch (A).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-19
Doors
Rear Door Outer Handle Replacement (cont'd)
7. Detach the rod fastener (A). 9. Remove the maintenance seal (A). Remove the
bolts securing the outer handle protector (8), then
remove it.
Fastener Locations
8. With a clip remover, disconnect the outer handle 6x 1.0mm

rod (A) from the outer handle (8). 9.8N·m
10. While pulling the outer handle (A), remove the

handle from the holes in the door panel. Take care
not to scratch the door.
20-20 BACK
Rear Door Latch Replacement
11. Remove the rod fastener (A) from the outer handle NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
(8), then replace it with a new one.
3. Remove the plastic cover, as needed (see step 3 on

page 20-19).
4. Remove the screws and nut securing the latch (A).
Fastener Locations
~: Screw, 3
12. Install the handle in the reverse order of removal,

o Make sure the outer handle rod is connected

securely.
o Make sure the door handle works properly.
o Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
o When installing the door panel, make sure the
o Check for water leaks.
6x 1.0 mm
6N·m
6x 1.0 mm
6N·m
5. Detach the rod fastener (see step 7 on page 20-20).
6. Disconnect the outer handle rod from the outer

handle (see step 8 on page 20-20).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-21
Doors
Rear Door Latch Replacement (cont'd)
7. Detach the latch cable (A) and inner handle cable 9. Detach the latch cable (A) and the inner handle
(8) from the holder (C), and lower the latch (D). cable (8) from the latch (C).
Remove the latch out from between the rear lower
channel (E) and the door. Take care not to bend the
outer handle rod, latch cable, and inner handle
cable.
8. Remove the screw, then remove the latch protector

(A) by releasing the hook (8).
B
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
10. Insta" the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly,

and each rod is connected securely.
B • Make sure the door locks and opens properly.
20 ...22 BACK
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement
NOTE: PU\ on gloves to protect your hands. 5. Remove the maintenance cap (A); Remove the bolt
and nut from the rear lower channel (8).
Fastener Locations
~ : Bolt, 1 • : Nut, 1
2. Detach the harness clip (A), and disconnect the
power door lock actuator connector (8). Remove
the plug caps (C).
(@n @)
A
D
B
3. Pass the harness (D) through the slit (E) in the
plastic cover (F), then remove the plastic cover. 6. Pull the glass run channel (A) away as needed. Pull
the rear lower channel (8) forward from the door,
4. Carefully lower the glass (A) until you can see the and release the channel from the glass (C) by
bolts, then remove them. Carefully lower the glass pulling the channel up.
into the door. Take care notto drop the glass inside
the door.
Fastener Locations
~: Bol1,2
@-Im/ A
7. Twist the rear lower channel to pass it through the

gap between the door panel and the rear sash, then
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m pull the channel up to remove it.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-23
Doors
Rear Door Glass and Regulator Replacement (cont'd)
8. Remove the rear lower channel (A) from the glass 10. Oisconnectthe connector (A) from the regulator (B).
channel (B).
Fastener Locations
C ~ : Bolt, 4 D ~ : Bolt, 1
@TID @nmn I
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
9. Carefully remove the glass (A) out through the

window slot. Take care not to drop glass inside the
door.
B A
11. Remove the bolts (C), and loosen the bolt (0), then
remove the regulator through the hole in the door.
12. Apply mUltipurpose grease to all the sliding

surfaces of the regulator (A) where shown.
20-24 BACK
Rear Door Sash Inner Trim
Replacement
13. Install the glass and regulator in the reverse order
NOTE: Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Roll the glass up and down to see if it moves
freely without binding. 1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-17).
• Make sure that there is no clearance between the
glass and glass run channel when the glass is 2. Using the clip remover, detach the clip fastening
closed. the rear door sash inner trim (A).
• Adjust the position of the glass as necessary
Fastener Location
(see page 20-28).
• When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the ~: Clip, 1
~~I
around its outside perimeter to prevent water
leaks.
• Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-28).
• Test-drive and check for wind noise and rattles.
• Make sure the power door locks, windows, and
power mirror operate properly.
3. Pull the door glass opening side of the trim back to

release the hooks (8) from the door glass opening
flange of the door sash.

note these items:
• Check if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened,

and if necessary, replace it with a new one .
• Push the hooks into place securely.
BACK 20-25
Doors.--
Rear Door Rear Sash Trim Rear Door Glass Outer Weatherstrip
NOTE: Put ongl-oves to protect your hands. NOTE:

• Put on gloves to protect your hands .
1. Lower the glass fully. • Take care not to scratch the door.
2. Remove the qU8rterinner trim (see step 501'1 page 1. Remove these items:
20-17).
• Door panel (see page 20-17)
3. From inside the door, remove the screw. • Plastic cover (see step 3 on page 20-19)
• Rear door glass (see page 20-23)
4. Pull up on the rear sash trim (A) with the rear of the
door glass outer weatherstrip (8) to release the 2. Starting at the rear, release the hooks (A) the clips
hooks (C), then remove it from the door and the (8) and pull up the rear door glass outer
weatherstrip. Do not remove the weatherstrip at weatherstrip (C) from the rear.
this time, and take care not to damage the
weatherstrip.
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1 .
o
3. Release the front hook (D) out from inside of the

5. Install the rear sash trim in the reverse order of door, then remove the weatherstrip.
removal.
4. Install a new weatherstrip in the reverse order of
6. Push the rear portions of the door glass outer removal, and push it into place securely.
weatherstrip into place securely.
20-26 BACK
Lower Rear Door Sill Seal Rear Door Weatherstrip
NOTE: NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Put on gloves to protect your hands .
• Take care not to scratch the door. • Take care not to scratch the door.
• Use a clip remover to remove the clips.
1. Remove the lower sill seal (A) by pulling it.
1. At the B-pillar, remove the door checker mounting
bolt (A).
Fastener Locations
A ~: Bolt, 1 B [>: Clip, 2 C [> : Clip, 15
~ ~
2. Install the lower sill seal in the reverse order of

• Make sure there are no wrinkles in the seal.

• Make sure the lower sill seal is installed in the
door flange. 8x 1.25mm
29N·m
2. Detach the clips (B, C, D), then remove the door

weatherstrip (E).
3. Install the weatherstrip in the reverse order of


new ones.
• Make sure the weatherstrip is installed in the
holder (F) securely.
• Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to
door checker mounting bolt before installation.
BACK 20-27
Doors
Front and Rear Door Glass Adjustment
NOTE: Check the weatherstrips and glass run channel 5. Check that the glass moves smoothly.
for damage or deterioration, and replace them if
necessary. 6. Raise the glass fully, and check for gaps. Also check
that the glass (A) contacts the glass run channel (B)
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface. evenly.
2. Remove these items:
• Door panel, front door (see page 20-6), rear door

(see page 20-17)
• Plastic cover, front door (see step 3 on page 20-8),
rear door (see step 3 on page 20-19)
3. Carefully move the glass (A) .until you can see the
glass mounting bolts (B), then loosen them.
Front
7. Check for water leaks. Run water over the roof and
on the sealing area as shown, and note these items:
• Use a 12 mm (1/2 in.) diameter hose (A).

• Adjust the rate of water flow as shown (B).
• Do not use a nozzle.
c • Hold the hose about 300 mm (12 in.) away from
the door (C).
'''l1\Y;~~~
B
6x 1.0 mm 12 mm (1/2 in.)
9.8N·m
~
1'1 0.5 m (19 in.)
Rear
~----B
A
A
300 mm (12 in.'

c
B
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
8. Attach the plastic cover making sure it is sealed
around its outside perimeter to seal out water, then
4. Push the glass against the channel (C), then tighten install the door panel:
the glass mounting bolts.
• Front door (see page 20-6)
• Rear door (see page 20-17)
20-28 BACK
Front and Rear Door Position Adjustment
SRS components are located in the center pillar bottom Front door
area. Review the SRS component locations (see page
24-12), ~nd the precautions and procedures (see page
o
8x 1.25 mm
24-14) before doing repairs or service. 29N·m
(3.0 kgf.m, 22 Ibf·ttl
NOTE: Check for a flush fit with the body, then check for
equal gaps between the front, rear, and bottom door
edges and the body. Check that the door and bOdY
edges are parallel. Before adjusting, replace the
mounting bolts. F
8x 1.25 mm
29N·m
1. Place the vehicle on a firm, level surface when (3.0 kgf.m, 22 Ibf·ttl
adjusting the doors.
""'"~~D
8x 1.25mm
2. Adjust at the hinges (A): 29N·m
A (3.0 kgf·m, 22 Ibf·ttl
• Pad a floor jack (B) with shop towels (C), then use
the jack to support the door to prevent damage to Rear door
the door while adjusting it. F
• On the front door: Remove the front inner fender 8x 1.25 mm
(see page 20-176). Loosen the hinge mounting 29N·m
bolts (D) slightly, and move the door backward or
forward, up or down as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
• On the rear door: Loosen the hinge mounting
bolts (E) slightly, and move the door backw~rd or
forward, up or down,as necessary to equalize the
gaps.
F
8x 1.25 mm
E 29 N·m (3.0 kgf.m, 22 Ibf·ttl
8x1.25mm
3. If necessary, replace the door mounting bolts with

the adjusting bolts (PIN 90102-SFA-305) made
specifically for door adjustment, then adjust at the
door: Loosen the door mounting bolts (F) slightly,
and move the door up or down as necessary to
equalize the gaps, and move it in or out until it's
flush with the body.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-29
Doors
Front and Rear Door Position Front and Rear Door Striker
Adjustment (cont'd) Adjustment
4. Check thatthe door and body edges are parallel. If Make sure the door latches securely without slamming
necessary, adjust the door cushions (A) to make the it. If necessary, adjust the striker (A): The striker nuts
rear of the doors flush with the body. are fixed, but the striker can be adjusted slightly up or
down, and in or out. .
1. Loosen the screws (8).
5. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts,

and around the hinges. B
8x 1.25 mm
18 N·m 11.8 kgf·m, 13Ibf·ft)
6. Check for water leaks (see step 7 on page 20-28).
2. Wrap the striker with a shop towel, then adjust the
striker by tapping it with a plastic hammer (C). Do
not tap the striker too hard.
3. Lightly tighten the screws.
4. Hold the outer handle out, and push the door

against the body to be sure the striker allows a
flush fit. If the door latches properly, tighten the
screws and recheck.
20-30 BACK
Mirrors
POWER MIRROR
/
MIRROR HOLDER
~
MOUNT
\REARVIEW MIRROII
BACK 20-31
Mirrors
Power Mirror Replacement
1. Raise the door glass fully. 5. While holding the mirror (A), detach the clip (8),
then remove the mirror, and pull the harness (e)
2. Remove these items: out through the hole in the door. Take care not to
scratch the door.
• Door panel (see page 20-6)
• Plastic cover, as needed (see step 3 on page 20-8) A
3. Disconnect the connector (A), and detach the

harness clip (8).
6. Install the mirror in the reverse order of removal,

4. Remove the nuts. • Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.

Fastener Locations • When reinstalling the door panel, make sure the
.:Nut,3
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
20-32 BACK
Mirror Holder Replacement
NOTE: When prying with a flat-tipped screwdriver, . 6. Before reinstalling the mirror holder to the inner
wrap it with protective tape to prevent damage. holder (A) of the actuator, check the actuator rods
(B) and the actuator boots (C):
1. Adjust the mirror fully to the inward position.
• If each rod is off the actuator hole, insert it
2. Insert a long, thin flat-tipped screwdriver in the securely.
opening between the lower edge ofthe mirror • The whole of each rod should be covered with
holder (A) and the mirror housing (B). Slide the tip the bQot. If not, adjust the boot into proper
of the screwdriver betWeen the mirror holder and position.
the inner holder (C) ofthe actuator.
3. Quickly twist the screwdriver to separate the mirror

holder from the mirror actuator.
4. Insert the screwdriver further under the mirror

holder and twist it again.
NOTE: Do not pry up on the mirror holder to

separate the two parts, as this can cause either the
mirror glass or actuator to break.
5. Separate the mirror holder (A) from the actuator (B)

by slowly pulling the mirror apart while separating c
the adhesive (C), and release the hooks (D).
Disconnect the mirror defogger connectors from
the heater pad terminals.
7. Reconnect the mirror defogger connectors.

A
8. Reattach the hooks of the mirror holder to the
actuator, then position the mirror holder on the
actuator. Carefully push on the clip portions of the
mirror holder until the mirror holder locks into
place.
9. Check the actuator operation.
BACK 20-33
Mirrors
Rearview Mirror Replacement
1. Release the hooks (A), then pull the mirror base 3. Fit the mirror base (A) over the mount (8), and
cover (8) down. secure the rearview mirrorwith the spring (C) and
hook (0).
2. Pull the hook (A) down to release it from the mount 4. Install the mirror base cover (E) on the mirror base
(8), and slide the mirror base (C) rearward, then securely.
remove the rearview mirror (0).
20-34 BACK
Glass
WINDSHIELD MOLDING
IJ UPPER RUBBER DAM
CLlP '2
~
~~~~
~ SIDE RUBBER DAM
WINDSHIELD
/ MOLDING QUARTER SEAL
UPPER CLIP
/REARCUP
~
FRONT SEAL
LOWER CLIP
--------c&
(cont'd)
BACK 20-35
Glass,
UPPER RUBBER DAM
SIDE RUBBER DAM, 2
;,~ @
~ \
SUL ~ LOWER RUBBER DAM
REAR WINDOW
LOWER FASTENER, 2 \ Replacement, page 20-42
(Self-adhesive-type, glass side)
FASTENER,2
(Self-adhesive-type, tailgate side)
20-36 BACK
Windshield Replacement
NOTE: 3. Ifthe old windshield will be reinstalled, make

o Put on gloves to protect your hands. alignment marks (A) across the glass and body with
o Wear eye protection while cutting the glass adhesive a grease pencil.
with a piano wire.
o Use seat covers to avoid damaging the seat. A
o When replacing a broken windshield, a commercially
available windshield cutter can be efficiently used for

cutting the adhesive. For details, follow the
instruction of the tool manufacturer.
o Windshield wiper arms (see page 22-247)

o Cowl covers (see page 20-163)
o Rearview mirror (see page 20-34)
o A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-69) .
o Roof moldings (see page 20-169)
2. Remove the molding (A) from the upper edge of the 4. Pull down the front portion of the headliner
windshield (8). If necessary, cut the molding with a (see page 20-85). Take care not to bend the
utility knife. headliner excessively, or you may crease or break
it.
5. Apply protective tape along the edge of the

dashboard and body. Using an awl, make a hole
through the rubber dam and adhesive from inside
the vehicle at the corner portion of the windshield.
Push a piece of piano wire through the hole, and
wrap each end around a piece of wood.
B 6. With a helper on the outside, pull the 'piano wire (A)

back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
wire as close to the windshield .(8) as possible to
prevent damage to the body and dashboard.
Carefully cut through the rubber dam and adhesive
(C) around the entire windshield .
.....-----_/
(cont'd)
BACK 20-37
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
Cutting positions 11. Attach the upper rubber dam (A), side rubber dam
(B), and clips (C) with adhesive tape to the inside
A B
face of the windshield (D) as shown:
\ • Be sure the rubber dam and clips line up with the

alignment marks (E).
• Be sure the convex portion (F) of the left and right
clips toward left.
• Be careful not to touch the windshield where
adhesive will be applied.
Rubber dams adhesive tape:

Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.)
A
-- ------ -:-- ------~ --, --' Width 3.5 mm (0.14 in.)
Clips adhesive tape:
c Width 10 mm (0.39 in.)
7. Carefully remove the windshield. E
8. With a knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth to a

thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the bonding
surface around the entire windshield opening
flange:
.• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the

, body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding.
• Remove the rubber dam and clips from the body. 13.5 mm (0.53 in. )
/~ 13.CCJl
/ -
9. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge
dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
grease and water from getting on the clean surface. A: c
! ~ (0.53 in. )
D
Inside
10.lfthe old windshield will be reinstalled, use a putty
knife to scrape off the old adhesive, the. clips and B
the rubber dam from the windshield. Clean the 16 mm (0.63 in. )
BS~
inside face and the edge ofthe windshield with
alcohol where neW adhesive will be applied. Make
sure the bonding surface is kept free of water, oil,
and grease. !
D 1~.~".'___\ 2tj~D
8.. D
Inside
20-38 BACK
12. Attach the molding (A) with adhesive tape (B) to the 14. Set the windshield in the opening, and center it.
upper edge of the windshield (C). Be careful not to Make alignment marks (A) across the windshield
touch the windshield where the adhesive will be and body with a grease pencil atthe four points
applied. shown. Make sure both clips (B) contact with the
edge of the body holes. Be careful not to touch the
Molding adhesive tape:Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.) windshield where adhesive will be applied.
Width 4 mm (0.16 in.)
8 mm (0.31 in. I
~t::::=:-;;;::::=~f=~~~
Cf . ,
13. Apply primer to the molding (A), then attach the
molding upper seal (B) with adhesive tape to the 15. Remove the windshield.
inside surface of the molding as shown.
_ :Apply primer here.
A
A
B~n~d'
1/1/
(cont'd)
BACK 20-39
Glass
Windshield Replacement (cont'd)
16. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer 17. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body
around the edge of the windshield (A) between the primer to any exposed paint or metal around the
dams (B) and molding (C) as shown, then lightly flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the
wipe it off with gauze or cheesecloth: primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
• Apply glass primer to the molding. • Do not apply body primer to any remaining
• Do not apply body primer to the windshield, and original adhesive on the flange.
do not get body and glass primer sponges mixed • Be careful not to mix up the body and glass
up. primer sponges.
• Nevertouch the primed surfaces with your hands. • Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the • Mask off the dashboard before painting the
windshield properly, causing a leak after the flange.
windshield is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away _ :Apply body primer to exposed paint shown.
from primed surfaces ..
20 mm (0.79 in. )
_
vc
:Apply glass primer here.
c
13.5m
B~~
\ Inside A
B
B~
A
20-40 BACK
18. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) as shown. 20. Use suction cups to hold the windshield over the
opening, align it with the alignment marks made in
step 14, and set it down on the adhesive. Lightly
push on the windshield until its edges are fully
seated on the adhesive all the way around.
NOTE: Do not open or close the doors until the

adhesive is dry.
21. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty

knife or towel. To remove adhesive from apainted
surface or the windshield, wipe with a soft shop
towel dampened with alcohol.
8 mm (0.31 in. ,
22. After the adhesive has dried, then spray water over
the windshield and check for leaks. Mark leaking
19. Putthe cartridge in a caulking gun, and run a bead areas, and let the windshield dry, then seal with
of adhesive (A) around the edge of the windshield sealant:
(8) between the dams (C) and molding (D) as
shown. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after • Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours after
applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker windshield installation. If the vehicle has to be
bead at each corner. used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
2 mm (0.08 in. , • Keep the windshield dry for the first hour after
-t-i-
installation.
I~.....-A
13mm
(0.51 in.' a
1-1 23. Reinstall all remaining removed parts. Install the
8 mm (0.31 in. , rearview mirror after the adhesive has dried
3.5mm 0
thoroughly.
(0'14~.n.,
/
y B NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following

things for 2 to 3 days:
1r~l::::J~~~~~ ~Inside • Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up.
• Twist the body excessively (such as when going
in and out of driveways at an angle or driving
c over rough, uneven roads).
c
B
/
A
A\ \~/B
In"de~
1 mm (0.04 in. ,
BACK 20-41
Glass.
Rear Window Replacement
NOTE: 4. Ifthe old rear window is to be reinstalled, make

• Put on gloves to protect your hands. alignment marks (A) across the glass and body with
• Wear eye protection when removing the glass with a grease pencil.
piano wire.
• Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
• Do not damage the rear window defogger grid lines
and terminals.
• Tailgate lower trim panel (see step 4 on page

20-81)
• Tailgate spoiler Trim (see page 20-172)
• Rear window wiper arm (see page 22-249)
2. Remove the lower rubber dam (A) from the edge of

the rear window; If necessary, cut the rubber dam
with a utility knife.
5. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside
edges of the tailgate. Using an awl, make a hole
through the adhesive from inside the vehicle at the
corner portion of the rear window. Push the piano
A
wire through the hole, and wrap each end around a
piece of wood.
6. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A)

back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano
wire as close to the rear window (8) as possible to
prevent damage to the tailgate, and carefully cut
through the adhesive (e) around the entire rear
window.
3. Disconnect the rear window defogger connectors

(A).
20-42 BACK
Cutting positions 11. Attach the clips (A), fasteners (B), upper rubber
dam (C), and side rubber dams (D) with adhesive
tape to the inside face of the rear window (E) as
shown. Before installing the upper and side rubber
dams, apply primer to the inside face of the rear
window.
• Be sure the clips, fasteners, and upper rubber

dam line up with alignment marks (F).
• With the printed dots (G) on the rear window as a
guide, attach the side rubber dam to both side
portions of the rear window.
• Be careful not to touch the rear window where
B
7. Carefully remove the rear window.
8. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth

to a thickness of about 2 mm (0.08 in.) on the
bonding surface around the entire rear window
opening flange:
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the

body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
bonding
• Remove the fasteners from the tailgate.
9. Clean the tailgate bonding surface with a sponge

dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
grease and water from getting on the surface.
10. If the old rear window is to be reinstalled, use a

putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, the
fasteners and the rubber dams from the rear
window. Clean the inside face and the edge of the
rear window with alcohol where new adhesive is to
be applied. Make sure the bonding surface is kept
free of water, oil and grease.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-43
Glass
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
Clips adhesive tape: 12. Apply primer to the edge of the rear window (A)
Thickness 0.4 mm (0.016 in.) where the lower rubber dam adhesive tape will be
Width 10 mm (0.39 in.) attached as shown. Attach the lower rubber dam
Fasteners adhesive tape: (B) with adhesive tape (e) along the edge ofthe
Thickness 0.6 mm (0.024 in.) rear window:
Width 7.5 mm (0.30 in.)
Upper rubber dam adhesive tape: • After installing the rubber dam, cut the ends (0)
Thickness 0.16 mm (0.006 in.) of the rubber dam as shown.
Width 3 mm (0.12 in.) • Be careful not to touch the windshield where
Side rubber dam adhesive tape: adhesive will be applied.
Width 3 mm (0.12 in.) Lower rubber dam adhesive tape:
Width, lower portions 6 mm (0.24 in.)1
side portions 7 mm (0.28 in.)
F
D
D
4S.4mm
(1.79 in.)
A
\ 'n.'" L
\
~ E
A
D
B
E
Ii ,. '::J:A
E
F
l:'~7n;:.) InsJ
10mm
(0.39 in. ) / c
B
20-44 BACK
13. Glue the fasteners (A) with adhesive tape to the 16. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer
tailgate as shown. around the edge of the rear window (A) and along
the rubber dams (B) as shown, then lightly wipe it
Fasteners adhesive tape: off with gauze or cheesecloth:
Width 9.5 mm (0.37 in.) • Do not apply body primer to the rear window,
and do not get tailgate and glass primer sponges
Fastener Locations mixed up.
!> : Fastener, 2 • Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
~I
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the rear
window properly, causing a leak after the rear
window is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from the primed surface.
_ :Apply glass primer here.
12mm B~A
,,0.47 in. )
I B
: I,nsid,e /
14. If a new glass is used set the rear window (A) in the : 1_ A
opening, and center it. Make alignment marks (B)
across the rear window and body with a grease '---~-----------E5~
! •
~\\\
pencil at the four points shown. Be careful no to -~\\
~~\\
touch the rear window where adhesive will be \\
\ \
applied. B "I'
I "
---1'---- B 11 mm
~;,;~,~~A l1~
,
I
15. Remove the rear window.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-45
Glass
Rear Window Replacement (cont'd)
17. With a sponge, apply a light coat of body primer to 19. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets
the original adhesiveremaining.around the rear to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a
window opening flange. Let the body primer dry for caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) on the
at least 10 minutes: glass primer trace (B) along the rubber dams (e) as
shown.
• Do not apply body primer to any remaining Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after
original adhesive on the flange. applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker
• Be careful not to mix up the body and glass bead at each corner.
primer sponges.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. --t-t- 2 mm (O.OS in. )
_ :Apply body primer here.

l:5~rn.) I~.--- A
1-1
Smm
(0.31 in.) C
2mm B
(O.OS in.)
Inside
A
20mm
(0.79 in. ) A
I
I.
=
18. Before filling a cartridge, cut a "V" in the end of the C Inside
nozzle (A) as shown.
~~A
\ ~
I~Side*\
2mm
Be B
(O.OSi: )
S mm (0.31 in. )
20-46 BACK
Quarter Glass ·Replacement
20. Use suction cups to hold the rear window over the NOTE:
opening, align it with the alignment marks you· • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
made in step 14, and set it down on the adhesive. • Wear eye protection when removing the glass with
Lightly push on the rear window until its edges are piano wire.
fully seated on the adhesive all the way around. • Use seat covers to avoid damaging any surfaces.
NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for 1. Remove these items.
about an hour until the adhesive is dry.
• Cargo area side trim panel (see page 20-78) .
21. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty • Quarter pillar trim (see page 20-75).
knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
surface or the rear window, use a soft shop towel 2. Remove the front seal (A) and molding quarter seal
dampened with alcohol. (B) from the front edge of the quarter glass (C). If
necessary, cut the seals with a utility knife.
22. After the adhesive has dried, sptay water over the
rear Window and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
areas, let the rearwindow dry, then seal with '
sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours
after rear window installation. If the vehicle has to
be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
23. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following

• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up .
over rough, uneven roads).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-47
Glass ...
Quarter Glass Replacement (cont'd)
3. Apply protective tape along the inside and outside 6. With a putty knife, scrape the old adhesive smooth
edges of the body. Using an ·awl, make a hole to a thickness of about 2 mm(O.OB in.) on the
through the adhesive from inside the vehicle. Push bonding surface around the entire quarter glass
a piece of piano wire through the hole, and wrap opening .flange:
each end around a piece of wood.
• Do not scrape down to the painted surface of the
4. With a helper on the outside, pull the piano wire (A) body; damaged paint will interfere with proper
back and forth in a sawing motion. Hold the piano bonding .
wire as close.to the quarter glass (B) as possible to • Remove the clips and fastener from the body.
prevent damage to the body, and carefully C.ut
through the adhesive (C) around the entire quarter 7. Clean the body bonding surface with a sponge
glass. dampened in alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil,
grease and water from getting on the surface.
B. Ifthe old quarter glass is to be reinstalled, use a

putty knife to scrape off all of the old adhesive, and
clips from the quarter glass. Clean the inside face
and the.edge of the quartergJass with alcohol
where new adhesive is to be applied. Make sure the
bonding surface is kept free of water, oil and
grease.
Cutting positions
5. Carefully remove the quarter glass.
20-48 BACK
9. Setthequarter glass (A) in the opening, and center 11. Attach the upper clip (A), lower clip (B), and rear
it. From inside the vehicle, make an alignment mark clip (e) with adhe&ive tape to the inside face of the
(B) to the quarter glass where the rear clip will be quarter glass (D) as shown.
installed with a grease pencil. Be careful not to
touch the glass where adhesive will be applied. • Align the center of the rear clip with the
alignment marks (E) you made in step 9.
• Be sure the clips line up with the alignment
marks (F).
• Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where
Upper clip adhesive tape:

Lower clip adhesive tape:
Rear clip adhesive tape:
Width 7.5 mm (0.30 in.)
26mm
(1.0 in. I
A
10. Remove the quarter glass.
14 mm (0.55 in. I
(cont'd)
BACK 20-49
Glass J,
12. Apply primer to the edge of the quarter glass (A) 13. Attach the molding quarter seal (B) and front seal
where the molding quarter seal adhesive tape and (e) with adhesive tape to the inside face of the
front seal adhesive tape will be attached as shown. quarter glass.
Be careful not to touch the quarter glass where
adhesive will be applied. • First glue the molding quarter seal to the rear
corner portion ofthe quarter glass, then glue the
upper and lower portions of the seal around the
B edge of the quarter glass. Be sure the upper end
and lower end ofthe molding quarter seal
contacts the front seal.
• Be careful not to touch the seals where adhesive
B will be applied.
c
Molding quarter seal adhesive tape:
Front seal adhesive tape:
17mm Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
(O.67in.) Width 6 mm (0.24 in.)
~ C
20-50 BACK
14. With a sponge, apply a light coat of glass primer 15. With a sponge, carefully apply a light coat of body
along the edge of the front seal (A) and molding (B) primer to any exposed paint or metal around the
as shown, then lightly wipe it off with gauze or flange where new adhesive will be applied. Let the
cheesecloth: primer dry for at least 10 minutes:
• With the printed dots (C) on the quarter glass (D) • Do not apply body primer to any remaining
as a guide, apply the glass primer to the front original adhesive on the flange.
portion of the quarter glass. • Be careful not to mix up the body and glass
• Do not apply body primer to the quarter glass, primer sponges.
and do not get body and glass primer sponges • Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands.
mixed up.
• Never touch the primed surfaces with your hands. ~ :Apply body Primer here.
If you do, the adhesive may not bond to the
20mm
quarter glass properly, causing a leak after the (0.79 in.)
quarter glass is installed.
• Keep water, dust, and abrasive materials away
from primed surfaces.
_ :Apply glass primer here.
~
\~D c
12mm Smm
(0.47 in. ) (0.24 in. )
--;::±::::=:3;'79
Inside .
12mm 16. Cut a "V" in the end of the nozzle (A) on the
(0.47 In. )
adhesive cartridge as shown.
,~
I ,
B D
D A
8 mm (0.31 in. )
(cont'd)
BACK 20-51
Glass
17. Pack adhesive into the cartridge without air pockets 18. Use suction cups (A) to hold the quarter glass (8)
to ensure continuous delivery. Put the cartridge in a over the opening, align it with the clips (C) and set it
caulking gun, and run a bead of adhesive (A) along down on the adhesive. Lightly push on the quarter
the seals (8) as shown. With the printed dots on the glass until its edges are fully seated on the
quarter glass (C) as a guide, apply the adhesive to adhesive all the way around.
the upper and lower corner portions of the quarter
glass. Apply the adhesive within 30 minutes after NOTE: Do not open or close any of the doors for
applying the glass primer. Make a slightly thicker about an hour until the adhesive is dry.
bead at each corner.
2mm
(0.08 in.)
A
- A
l:~'rn.)IV
I-l c
8mm
B~~(0'31:-c
2mm 2mm
(0.08 in.. ) B (0.08 in. )
Inside / \ ~~
A
19. Scrape or wipe the excess adhesive off with a putty

knife or towel. To remove adhesive from a painted
A surface or the quarter glass, use a soft shop towel
I Inside
dampened with alcohol.
~
20. After the adhesive has dried, spray water over the
c quarter glass and check for leaks. Mark the leaking
B areas, letthe quarter glass dry, then seal with
C B sealant. Let the vehicle stand for at least 4 hours
after quarter glass installation. If the vehicle has to
be used within the first 4 hours, it must be driven
slowly.
21. Reinstall all remaining removed parts.
NOTE: Advise the customer not to do the following

• Slam the doors with all the windows rolled up .
over rough, uneven roads).
20-52 BACK
Moonroof
GLASS
Height Adjustment, page 20-55
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check, page 20-64
DRAIN CHANNEL
/
~""'--.......
:
"'-I
? CABLE ASSEMBLY
WIND DEFLECTOR o / CABLE TUBE

Replacement, page 20-56 ~~~~:J'..o.... ~ REAR BRACKET
SUNSHADE ~~~ MOTOR

Replacement, Replacement,
page 20-58 page 20-59
SLIDE STOP
~
~DRAIN
FRAMESEALB
~
CHANNEL SUDER
FRAME SEAL A
6~ /REARDRAINTUBE
/ Replacement,
page 20-60
FRONT DRAIN TUBE

FRONT DRAIN VALVE

)
REAR DRAIN VALVE
BACK 20-53
Moonroof
Symptom Diagnostic procedure

Water leaks from moonroof 1. Check for a clogged drain tube.
2. Check for a gap between the glass weatherstrip and the roof panel.
3. Check for a defective or an improperly installed glass weatherstrip or drain
channel.
4. Check for a gap between the drain seal and the roof panel.
5. Adjust the moonroof height.
Wind noise from moonroof 1. Check for excessive clearance between the glass weatherstrip and the roof
panel.
2. Adjust the moon roof height.
Motor noise from moon roof 1. Check for a loose motor.
2. Check for a worn gear or bearing.
3. Check for a deformed cable assembly.
Moonroof glass does not move, 1. Check for a defective gear or inner cable.
but motor turns 2. Check for foreign matter stuck between the guide rail and the slider.
3. Check for a loose inner cable.
4. Make sure the cable assembly is attached properly.
Moonroof glass does not move 1. Check for a blown fuse.
and motor does not turn (glass 2. Check for a faulty moon roof switch.
can be moved with moonroof 3. Check for a run down battery.
wrench) 4. Check for a defective motor control unit.
Moonroof glass does not stop at 1. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-291).
proper flush closed position 2. Check glass height adjustment.
Moonroof glass moves in a Reset the moon roof control unit (see page 22-291).
jerking motion (moves 40 mm
(1.57 in.), stops for 0.4 seconds,
and reReats)
During auto close operation, Check for dirt and debris in the track. Reset the moon roof control unit (see page
moonroof glass reverses when 22-291).
no object is trapped
Moonroof glass moves, but Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-291).
there is no AUTO function
20-54 BACK
Glass Height Adjustment Glass Replacement
The roof panel (A) should be even with the glass 1. Close the glass fully.
weatherstrip (B), to within 0+1/-1 mm
(0+0.04/-0.04 in.) all the way around, and should be to 2. Slide the sunshade all the way back.
length of between the roof panel and glass, to within
13.5+1/-1 mm (0.55+0.04/-0.04 in). If not, make the 3. Pry out the lid (AI, rernove the screws (B), and
following adjustment: release the hooks (C), then remove both bracket
covers (D). With a T25 TORX bit, remove the bolts
13.5+11-1 mm (E) from both glass brackets (F).
(0.55+0.04/-0.04 in.1
B Fastener Locations
B~:Bolt,2 E~:Bolt,6
0+11-1 mm
(0+0.04/-0.04 in.1
1. Remove the bracket cover.
2. Adjust the glass (A).

5xO.8mm
-1 Using a T25 TORX bit, slightly loosen the bolts. 3.9N·m
-2 Move the glass up or down and forward or 4 Front
rearward.
-a Tighten all bolts securely.
4. Remove the glass (A) by lifting it up. Do not
Fastener Locations damage the roof panel.
~: Bolt, 6
5xO.8mm
~I
3.9N·m
5. Install the glass in the reverse order ofthe removal,

4 Front and adjust the glass height alignment.
6. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-291).
3. If necessary, repeat on the opposite side. 7. Check for water leaks. Use free-flowing water from
a hose without a nozzle. Do not use high-pressure
water.
NOTE: It is normal for some water to seep past the

moonroof into the moonroof frame, and exit
through the drains.
BACK 20-55
Moonroof
Wind Deflector Replacement
1. Open the glass fully. 4. Pry up on the deflector bases (A) and release the
hooks (8), then remove the bases with springs (C)
2. Remove the links (A) from both sides. from both sides by sliding the base forward.
3. Remove the wind deflector (A).
A
5. Install the deflector in the reverse order of removal.
6. Reset the moonroof control unit (see page 22-291).
20-56 BACK
Drain Channel Replacement
1. Remove the glass (see page 20-55). 4. Pull the rear edge of the drain channel (A) up while
pushing both clips (B), and release the channel
2. With the moonroof wrench, move both glass from both hooks (C) ofthe drain channel slider by
brackets (A) to the position where the moonroof pulling it rearward.
normally tilts up and disconnect the drain channel
rods (B) on both sides.
3. Slide the drain channel (A) forward.
A 5. Remove the drain channel.
6. Install the channel in the reverse order of removal,

o Push the clip portions into place securely.

o Check the glass height adjustment (see page
20-55).
o Reset the moonroof control unit (see page
22-291 ).
7. Check for water leaks. Let the water run freely from
a hose without a nozzle. Do not use a high-pressure
spray.
BACK 20-57
M'oonroof
Sunshade Replacement
1. Remove the drain channel (see page 20-57). 4. While lifting the front portion of the sunshade (A),
move the sunshade forward until you can see both
2. Slide the sunshade (A) until you can see both sunshade rear hooks (8). Do not damage the
sunshade slider spacers (8). sunshade and hooks.
Fastener Locations Fastener Locations
~: Screw, 4 ~: Screw, 4
~ ~
3. Remove the screws, then remove both spacers.

5. Remove the screws, then remove both hooks.
20-58 BACK
Motor Replacement
6. Remove the sunshade (A). 1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-85).
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the

connector (A), and remove the screws, then
remove the motor (8).
Fastener Locations
~: Screw, 3
B
0))111))))))) I A
7. Remove both front sunshade base sliders (A) and

both rear sunshade base sliders (8).
6x1.0mm
9N·m
3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure the connector is plugged in properly.

• Reset the moonroof control unit (see page
22-291).
• Check the motor operation.
8. Install the sunshade in the reverse order of removal,
and check the glass height adjustment (see page
20-55).
spray.
BACK 20-59
Moonroof
Frame and Drain Tube Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 5. With an assistant holding the frame (A), remove the
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the bolts, starting at the rear, and release the rear
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before hooks (8) by moving the frame forward.
Fastener Locations
1. Remove these items: ~: 801t,9
• Headliner (see page 20-85)

• Moonroof glass (see page 20-55)
~I
2. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Disconnect the
motor connector (A).
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
6. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the

frame through the front door opening. Take care
not to scratch the interior trim and body, or tear the
seat covers.
7. To remove a front drain valve (A) from the body,

remove the kick panel, left or right (see step 3 on
3. Disconnect the drain tubes (A). page 20-67), and the driver's dashboard
undercover (see page 20-102) or passenger's
dashboard undercover (see page 20-103).
Remove the drain tube by pulling it down out of the
A-pillar.
4. Remove the interior harness (8) by detaching the

harness clips (e).
20'-60 BACK
8. To remove a rear drain valve (A) from the body, 10. Install the frame and drain tube in the reverse order
remove these parts: of removal, and note these items:
o Cargo area floor (see page 20-78) o Before installing the frame, clear the drain tubes
o Quarter pillar trim panel (see page 20-75) and drain valves using compressed air.
o Cargo area side trim panel (see page 20-76) o When installing, tie a string to the top end of the
new drain tube and pull it up into the roof.
B o Check the frame seal.
o Clean the surface of the frame.
o When installing the frame, first attach the rear
hooks into the body holes.
o Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly.
When connecting the drain tube, slide it over the
B ~---L:..!IM
o
frame nozzle at least 10 mm (0.39 in.).

o Install the tube clip (A) on the drain tube (B) as
shown.
Upward
9. Detach the clips (B), then remove the tube (C) by

B
pulling it down out ofthe pillar.
spray.
BACK 20-61
Moonroof
Drain Channel Slider and Cable Assembly Replacement
1. Remove the frame (see page 20-60). 4. Turn both cable tube side brackets (A) up to release
the hooks (B) from the holes in both sides of the
2. Remove these parts from the frame: frame .
• Sunshade (see page 20-58)

• Moonroof motor (see page 20-59)
3. Put on gloves to protect your hands. Remove the

screws (A, B) securing the slide stops (C), and cable
tube rear brackets (D), cable tube side bracket
mounting bolts (E) and the cable tube mounting
screws (F) from both sides ofthe frame (G).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 2 B ~: Screw, 2 E ~: Bolt, 2
F ~: Bolt, 2
5. Pivot the glass brackets (C) down by sliding the link

lifters (D) back, then slide both glass brackets back
with the link lifters.
6. Slide the cable assembly (E) half-way.
20-62 BACK
7. Remove the slide stops (A) and the drain channel 9. Install the slider and cable assembly in the ~everse
sliders (B) from both sides. order of removal, and note these items:
• Damaged parts should be replaced.

• Apply mUltipurpose grease to the glass bracket
(A) and guide rail portion ofthe frame (B)
indicated by the arrows.
• Before reinstalling the motor, make sure both
link lifters are parallel, and in the fully closed
position.
• Before reinstalling the motor, install the frame
and glass, then check the opening drag (see page
20-64).
• After reinstalling the motor, reset the moonroof
control unit (see page 22-291).
8. Slide the cable assembly (A) and both glass

brackets (B) back, remove the deflector sliders (e)
from both glass brackets, then remove them from
the frame (D).
..~
JXIM
.. ~
BACK 20-63
M:oonroof
Closing Force and Opening Drag Check
1. Remove the headliner (see page 20-85). 4. Opening drag check: Protectthe leading edge ofthe
glass with a shop towel (A). Measure the effort
2. Closing force check: required to open the glass using a spring scale (B)
as shown.
~ With a shop towel (A) on the leading edge of the
glass (B), attach a spring scale (C) as shown.
• Have an assistant hold the switch to close the
glass while you measure the force required to
stop it.
• Read the force as soon as the glass stops moving,
then immediately release the switch and spring
scale.
Closing force: 200-290 N (20-30 kgf, 44-66 Ibf)
5. Ifthe load is over 40 N (4 kgf, 9 Ibf), check:
• The side clearance and glass height adjustment

(see page 20-55) .
• For broken or damaged sliding parts. If any
sliding parts are damaged, replace them.
3. If the force in not within specification, remove the

moon roof motor (see page 20-59), then check:
• The gear portion and the inner cable for breakage

and damage. If the gear portion is broken,
replace the motor. If the inner cable is damaged,
remove the frame (see page 20-60), and replace
the cable (see page 20-62).
• The moon roof control unit input test (see page
22-293). If the motor fails to run or doesn't turn
smoothly, replace it.
• The opening drag. Go to step 4.
20-64 BACK
Interior Trim
KICK PANEL
Removal/Installation, step 3 on page 20-67
HEADLINER
A-PILLAR TRIM
FRONT DOOR OPENING SEAL
B-PILLARUPPER TRIM
REAR DOOR OPENING SEAL
GRAB HANDLE .. ...~
Removal/Installation, page 20'-83
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM
QUARTER PILLAR TRIM
page 20-75
TAILGATE UPPER
TRIM PANEL
page 20-80
CARGO AREA SIDE
TRIM PANEL
FRONT DOOR SILL TRIM Removal/Installation,
page 20-66
TAILGATE SIDE TRIM
FRONT SIDE OUTER TRIM Removal/Installation,
page 20-66
REAR SIDE OUTER TRIM CARGO AREA COVER
Removal/Installation, Removal/Installation,
page 20-68 step 2 on page 20-76
REAR DOOR SILL TRIM TAILGATE LOWER
Removal/Installation, TRIM PANEL
page 20-68 Removal/Installation,
step 3 on page 20-81
CARGO AREA LID
Removal/Installation, REAR TRIM PANEL
page 20-79 Removal/Installation,
page 20-78
CARGO AREA FLOOR
Removal/Installation, page 20-78 SIDE FLOOR SPACER
BACK 20-65
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas
Special Tools Required Passenger's side

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
* Available through the American Honda Tool and Fastener Locations
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 F [> : Clip, 2 G [> : Clip, 3 [>: Clip, 3
. (Gray)
SRS components are located in this area. Review the

precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before E
Front Door Sill Area
NOTE:
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when removing components.
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels.
1. Detach the hooks (A) and tabs (B) from the kick
panel (C) and B-pillar lower trim (D), and pull the
front door sill trim (E) up by hand to detach the
clips IF, GI, then remove it..
Driver's side A
2. If necessary, pull the front side outer trim (H) up to
Fastener Locations
detach the clips (I), then remove the trim.
F [>: Clip, 1 G [> : Clip, 3
(Gray)
V =t
H
20-66 BACK
3. Remove the driver's side kick panel (A) or the 4. Pull out the front door opening seal (A) from the
passenger's side kick panel (8). trim hooks (8) and around the front door opening
flange, then remove the seal.
-1 Pull out the door opening seal (C) as needed
A
from the kick panel hooks (0) and the door
opening flange.
-2 Pull the kick panel back by hand to detach the
clips then remove it.
Driver's side
Fastener Locations
I> : Clip, 2
iJ
note these items:

new ones .
• Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
Passenger's side
Fastener Locations
1>: Clip, 2
_iJ
BACK 20-67
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Door Areas (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 4. Pull out the rear door opening seal (A) from the
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * trim hooks (B) and around the front door opening
* Available through the American Honda Tool and flange, then remove the seal.
Rear Door Sill Area
NOTE:
A
avoid damage when prying components.
1. Tip the front of the rear seat up.
2. Detach the hook (A) and tab (B) from the B-pillar
lower trim (C), and pull the rear door sill trim (D) up
by hand to detach the clips (E, F), then remove it. B
Fastener Locations
E t> : Clip, 3 F t>: Clip, 2 H t> : Clip, 2
(Gray)
~ " vi o
note these items:

new ones .
B C
3. If necessary, pull the rear side outer trim (G) up to

detach the clips (H), then remove the trim.
20-68 BACK
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas
Special Tools Required 1. Pull the front door opening seal away from the
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * A-pillar as needed (see step 4 on page 20-67).
Equipment Program; call 888-424c6857 2. Hit the upper clip A-pillar trim (A) with a rubber
mallet. The clip is under the point (B) where the
A-Pillar Trim triangle mark (e) on the edge of the trim indicates.
Hitting the clip breaks the shoulder (D) on the
SRS components are located in this area. Review the grommet (E) and pushes the pin (F) and grommet
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the against the body (G).
doing repairs or service. NOTE: The clip must be replaced with a new one
when the A-pillar trim is reinstalled.
NOTE:
• Follow the A-pillar trim installation procedure
carefully; improper installation:could cause the side
curtain airbags to deploy improperly and possibly
cause injury.
• Take care not to scratch the trim and panels.
• The upper clip in the A-pillar trim (A) consists of a
resin grommet (B) and a metal pin (e). The groove (D)
in the grommet secures it to the body panel (E). The
shoulder (F) on the grommet is broken during
removal, so the clip must be replaced with a new one
when the trim is reinstalled.
-- +
F -----E
(cont'd)
BACK 20-69
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (co nt'd)
3. Pull the top of the A-pillar trim (A) back by hand to 5. Remove the grommet from the body.
remove the pin (8) from the grommet (C) remaining
in the body (D). NOTE: The upper clip must be replaced with a new
one because the grommet is damaged during
removal.
6. Ifthe side curtain airbag has been deployed,

replace the A-pillar trim with a new one.
7. Ifthe side curtain airbag has not been deployed,

check the A-pillar trim (A):
• To prevent the side curtain airbags from

deploying improperly and possibly causing
injury, inspect the A-pillar trim and replace. it if it
has any of these types of damage:
B - Any cracks, deformations, or stress-whitenings
- Any cracks or stress-whitened in the clip and
pin seating surfaces (8)
- Damaged top of the upper clip pin (C)
--+ • Replace the upper clip with a new one because it

was damaged during removal.
• Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips (D),
and replace them with new ones.
C A
4. Remove the A-pillar trim (A) by hand to detach the

remaining clips, then pull the trim up from the
dashboard (8).
Fastener Locations
!>: Clip, 2
(Gray)
20-70 BACK
8. Before installing the A7pillar trim (A), carefully 11. Reinstall the A-pillar trim (A).
remove the grommet (B) from the pin (C) on the
new upper clip. -1 Insert the bottom of the trim into the
a-"
dashboard (B).
-2 Place the trim over the A-pillar (C), and fit its
upper clip (D) and the other clips (E) into holes
(F) in the A-pillar, then lightly push the trim into
place.
c----.... I NOTE:
• Make sure the side curtain airbag isn't tucked
down under the clips and ribs .
• Push lightly on the upper clip. If you push too
hard, the clip will be damaged, and itwill not
hold the trim properly.
Fastener Locations
E !>: Clip, 2
C
9. Check the overlap between the headliner and
A-pillar trim, and if necessary, adjust it (see page
24-144). j[J A
10. Carefully reinstall the grommet (A) on the pin (B)

and seat them on the A-pillar trim (C) as shown. ~
A
D \
c~
12. Reinstall the front door opening seal.
BACK 20-71
Intetl'or Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the B-pillar lower trim (A).

KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
* Available throughthe American Honda Tool and -1 Pull the upper portion of the trim back to
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 release the upper hooks (B).
-2 Detach the lower clips by pulling the bottom of
B-Pillar Upper/Lower Trim the trim back by hand.
SRS components are located in this area. Review the Fastener Locations
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the !> : Clip, 2
~
NOTE:
• Front door sill trim (see page 20-66)

• Rear door sill trim (see page 20-68)
• Front door opening seal, as needed (see step 4
on page 20-67)
• Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 4 on
page 20-68) A
• Remove the lower anchor bolt (see step 3 on
page 20-118)
2. Slide the front seat forward fully. 4. Pull the bottom of the B-pillar upper trim (A) back
by hand to detach the lower hooks (B). Release the
upper pin (e) by pulling the top of the B-pillar upper
trim.
5. Pull the trim down to release the upper hooks (D).
20-72 BACK
6. Pass the front seat belt (A) lower anchor out 8. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and
through a hole in the slider (B)' then remove the B- note these items:
pillar upper trim (C).
• Replace any damaged clips (A) with new ones.
• If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace
the B-pillar upper and lower trim and all clips on
the trim with new ones (see page 24-143).
• To prevent the side curtain airbags from
injury, inspect the trim and replace it if it has any
of these types of damage:
- Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar
upper trim (B) and the upper hooks (C), and
any stress-whitened clips in the upper part of
the trim
- Any cracks or deformations in the B-pillar
lower trim (D), and any breakages in the part
(E) fitted with the B-pillar upper trim
- Any cracks or stress-whitened clips in the
seating surface (F)
• Replace any damaged parts with new ones.
• Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the
headliner correctly (see page 24-144).
• Make sure the pin (G) on the front seat belt
shoulder anchor adjuster (H) and the hole (I) on
the back of the slider are engaged when
7. Remove the slider (A) from the B-pillar upper trim installing the B-pillar upper trim.
(B). • Make sure the trim hook is installed into the side
curtain airbag B-pillar bracket securely.
• Push the clip and hooks into place securely.
• Before installing the anchor bolt, make sure there
are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
~D
(cont'd)
BACK 20-73
I,nterior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Pillar Areas (cont'd)
Slider engagement with shoulder anchor adjuster
20-74 BACK
Special Tools Required 3. Install the trim in the reverse order of removal, and
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * note these items:
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 o Replace any stress-whitened or damaged clips
(A) with new ones.
Quarter pillar Trim o If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace
the quarter pillar trim and all clips on the trim
SRS components are located in this area. Review the with new ones (see page 24-143).
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the o To prevent the side curtain airbags from
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before deploying improperly and possibly causing
doing repairs or service. injury, inspect the trim and replace it if it has any
NOTE: - Any cracks or deformations in the quarter pillar
o Put on gloves to protect your hands. trim (B) and the upper hook (C), and any stress-
o Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to whitened areas in the upper part of the trim
avoid damage when prying components. - Any cracks or stress-whitened areas in the clips
o Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. seating surface (D)
o Replace any damaged parts with new ones.
1. Remove these items: o Make sure the top of the trim overlaps with the
headliner correctly (see page 24-144).
o Cargo area side trim panel (see page 20-76) o Push the clip and hooks into place securely.
o Tailgate weatherstrip, as needed (see page
20-158)
o Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 4 on
page 20-68)
2. Remove the quarter pillar trim (A).
-1 Detach the clips (B, C) and pin (D) by pulling

the trim back.
-2 Lower the trim to release the upper hooks (E).
Fastener Locations
B 1>: Clip, 1 C 1>: Clip, 4 01>: Pin, 1
(Gray) (Gray)
~ ~ ~I
E
BACK 20-75
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Rear Side Area
Special Tools Required 3. Open the lid (A) and remove the screw (8), then
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * remove the cargo hook (C) (two places).

NOTE:
• Tailgateweatherstrip, as needed (see page

20-158)
• Rear door opening seal, as needed (see step 4 on
page 20-68)
• Rear door sill trim (see page 20-68)
• Rear trim panel (see page 20-78)
• Cargo area floor (see page 20-78)
• Seat side bolster (see page 20-138)
• Cargo area lid (see page 20-79)
2. Remove the hook (A) of the cover from the pin (8)
of the tailgate each side trim, then pull out the
cargo area cover (C) to release the lock (D) and
remove the cover.
~----.J~
20-76 BACK
4. Remove the cargo area side trim panel (A). Passenger's side
Fastener Locations
-1 Using the appropriate trim tool, pry out the lid
D ~ : Bolt, 2 F 1>: Clip, 3 G[>:Clip,5
(8) from the cargo area side trim panel (C) then
~I
remove the bolts (D) of the rear side hanger (E).
-2 Remove the clips (F), then remove the trim
panel back by hand to detach the clips (G).
-a Pull out the upper edge of the panel back to
release the upper hooks (H) from the quarter
pillar trim (I).
-4 Pull the rear seat belt out through the slit in the
seat belt retractor cover then remove the cargo
area side trim panel.
-6 Driver'S side: Disconnect the cargo area light
connector (J).
Driver's side
Fastener Locations
D ~ : Bolt, 2 F 1>: Clip, 3 G 1>: Clip, 5
6x1.0mm
d~r I 5. Remove the screws and release the hooks (A) from
B
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ft) the panel, andremove the seat belt retractor cover
(8) and side trim hanger (C).
Fastener Locations
~:Screw.2
_b
A

note these items:
o Check if the clips are damaged or stress-

new ones.
o Make sure the cargo area light connector is
plugged in properly.
o When installing the panel, make sure there are
no pinches in the seat belt.
o Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
BACK 20-77
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Cargo Area
Special Tools Required Cargo Area Floor

* Available through the American Honda Tool and 1. Remove the cargo area floor (A).
NOTE:
Rear Trim Panel
1. Remove the cargo area floor.
2. Remove the tailgate weatherstrip, as needed

(see page 20-158).
3. Detach the clips (A, 8, C) by pulling the rear trim

panel (D). 2. Install the floor in the reverse order of removal.
Fastener Locations
A C> : Clip, 2 B C> : Clip, 2 C C> : Clip, 2
(Green) (Gray)
~ ~

note these items:
• Check ifthe clips are damaged or stress-

new ones .
• Push the clips into place securely.
20-78 BACK
Cargo Area Lid Side Floor Spacer
1. Fold both rear'seats down. 1. Remove the cargo area sidetrim panel, as needed
(see page 20-76).
2. Remove the cargo area cover and floor.
2. Remove the side floor spacers (A).
3. Lift up the cargo area lid (A) to detach the clips
(B, C).
Fastener Locations
t>: Clip, 1 t>: Clip, 3
•
B C
;,1 A
3. Install the spacers in the reverse order of removal.
4. Install the lid in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:

new ones .
BACK 20-79
Interior Trim
Trim Removal/Installation - Tailgate Area
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the tailgate side trim (A).

KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
* Available through the American Honda Tool and -1 Disengage the hook (B) and tab (e) from the
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 tailgate lower trim panel (D).
-2 Pull the tailgate side trim back by hand to
NOTE: detach the clips (E, F) and hooks, then remove
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. it.
avoid damage when prying components. Fastener Locations
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. E [>: Clip, 1 F [>: Clip, 1
(Gray)
1. Remove the tailgate upper trim panel (A).
-1 Disengage the hooks (B) and tabs (e) from the

left tailgate side trim (D) and right tailgate side
<if i 81
A
I
trim (E).
-2 Pull the tailgate upper trim panel by hand to
detach the clips, then remove it.
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 4
~
B
D
20-80 BACK
3. Remove the tailgate lower grip (A). 4. Pull the tailgate lower trim panel (A) back by hand,
and detach the clips (B, C), then remove it.
-1 Using a trim tool to release the hooks (B) and
Fastener Locations
tabs (C), pull and remove the tailgate lower
grip caps (0) from the lower grip. B [> : Clip, 14 C [> : Clip, 2
(Gray) (Black)
-2 Remove the screws and remove the tailgate
~ <4
lower grip from the tailgate lower trim panel
(E).

note these items: '

new ones .
BACK 20-81
Interio'r Trim
Sunvisor Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required " 3. Remove the sunvisor (A).

KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *'
* Available through the American Honda Tool and -1 Using aT25 TORXbit, remove the self-tapping
Equipment Program; call 888-424~6857 ETscrews.
-2 Remove the sunvisor from, the body and holder
NOTE: (8).
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. -a Disconnect the vanity mirror light connector
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool set to (e).
• Take care not to bend or scratch the trim and panels. Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
1. From both sides, using a trim tool, release the tabs
(A) from the bracket (8). @)lOiiiiUJ!C I
5xO.8mm
3.4 N·m (0.35 kgf·m, 2.5 Ibf·ft)
4. Using a flat-tip screwdriver, push the hook (A), and

turn the holder (8) 90 0, then pull it out.
2. Remove the sunvisor cap (A) from the bracket (8).
Turn the cap, and remove it.
-------
B
20-82 BACK
Grab Handle Removal/Installation
5. Install the sunvisor in the reverse order of removal, Special Tools Required
and note these items: KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
• If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
the sunvisor with a new one (see page 24-143).
• To prevent the side curtain airbags from NOTE: Use the appropriate tool from the KTe trim tool
deploying improperly and possibly causing set to avoid damage when prying components.
injury, inspect removed pieces and replace them
if they have any of these types of damage: 1. Lower the grab handle (A), then pull out the stops
- Any cracks in the sunvisor stay base (A) (8).
- Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft
(8)
- Any cracks in the sunvisor base (e)
- Any cracks or breakages in the vanity mirror
base (D)
• If the threads on a visor screws are worn out, use
an oversized self-tapping ET screw, PIN
90137-S30-003, made specifically for this
application.
D
\ c
(cont'd)
BACK 20-83
Interior Trim
Grab Handle Removal/Installation (cont'd)
2. While pinching the clips (A), release the hooks (8), 3. Using a pair of pliers, remove all ofthe clips (A) by
then remove the grab handle (C). pinching its hooks.
4. If the side curtain airbag has deployed, replace the

grab handle with a new one (see page 24-143).
5. If the side curtain airbag has not deployed, to

prevent the side curtain airbags from deploying
improperly and possibly causing injury, inspect
removed pieces and replace them if they have any
• Any cracks or breakages in the grab handle (A) .

• Any cracked or stress-whitened in the stops (8).
20-84 BACK
Headliner Removal/Installation
6. Install the clips (A) to the grab handle (B), then Special Tools Required
install the stops (C) fully into the clips. KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
A Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857

NOTE:
avoid damage when prying components ..
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft codes for the

c audio and the navigation system (if equipped), then
7. Position the grab handle (A) on the bracket (B), and
push on the grab handle until the clips (C) snap into 2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and
place securely. wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
• A-pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-69)

• Ceiling light (see page 22-197)
• B-pillar lower trim (see page 20-72)
• B-pillar upper trim, both sides (see page 20-72)
• Quarter pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-75)
• Sunvisors, both sides (see page 20-82)
• Grab handles, four places (see page 20-83)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-85
Interior Trim
Headliner Removal/Installation (cont'd)
4. Remove the roof console (A). 5. Lower the headliner (A).
-1 Detach the clip (B) and release the hooks (C) by -1 Remove the front door inner seals (B), and rear
pulling the map light assembly (D). door inner seals (C) from each roof portion.
-2 Disconnect the front individual map light -2 Release the rear clips from the headliner.
connector (E) and the moonroof switch -3 Lower the headliner.
connector (F), then remove the map light
assembly. Fastener Locations
-3 Remove the bolts (G), and remove the roof 1>: Clip, 3
~
console.
Fastener Locations
B I> : Clip, 1 G ~ : Bolt, 4
f= @Pm
A 6. With the help of an assistant, pull the headliner (A)

out through the tailgate opening. Do not bend the
liner. Bending the liner will crease and damage it.
5xO.8mm
5N·m
(0.5 kgf·m,
4Ibf.ft)
20-86 BACK
7. If necessary, remove the side curtain airbag 8. Install the headliner in the reverse order of removal,
mounting bolt (A) and grab handle bracket and note these items:
mounting bolts (8), clips (C), then remove the grab
handle bracket (0) from each side by releasing the • Ifthe side curtain airbag has deployed, replace
hooks (E). the headliner and removed trim pieces with new
ones (see page 24-143).
Front • To prevent the side curtain airbags from
Fastener Locations injury, inspect removed pieces and replace them
A, B .. : Bolt, 4 C I> : Clip, 2 if they have any of these types of damage:
~ TI 5xo.8mm
- Any crease or tears in the headliner (A)
- Any cracks or breakages in the grab handle (8)
- Any damages around the grab handle holes (C)
or sunvisor holes in the headliner
/ 5N·m
(0.5 kgf·m, 4 Ibf·ft) - Any cracks in the sunvisor stay base (0)
A - Any bends or cracks in the sunvisor stay shaft
(E)
- Any cracks in the sunvisor base (F)
A - Any cracks or breakages in the vanity mirror
base (G)
- Any Velcro fasteners (H) and clip bases (I)
which have come off the headliner
• When installing the grab handle, push on the
handle against the bracket (J) until the clips (K)
snap into place securely.
• Check for damaged or stress-whitened clips, and
D
if necessary, replace them with new ones.
• Check that both sides of the headliner are
Rear securely attached to the trim.
• Make sure the headliner overlaps the trim pieces
Fastener Locations correctly (see page 24-143).
A": Bolt, 1 C 1>: Clip, 2 • When reinstalling the headliner through the
~ TI •
•
tailgate opening, be careful not to fold or bend it.
Also, be careful not to scratch the body.
Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
Set the clock.
D audio presets.
• Check for any OTCs that may have been set
during repairs, and clear them.
6x 1.0mm
"N·m E
(1.1 kgf·m, 8.0 Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-87
Interior Trim
.
I/Installatlon (cont'd)
Headliner Remova Grab handle
Headliner
K A
B
Sunvisor
20-88 BACK
Carpet Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Detach the clips, then remove the footrest (A).
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 1>: Clip, 2
~
NOTE:
• Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the carpet.
• Be careful not to damage the dashboard or other
interior trim pieces.

3. Detach the clip, then remove the rear heater joint
• Front seats, both sides (see page 20-118) (A).
• Rear seat cushion (see page 20-137)
Fastener Location
• Front door sill trim, both sides (see page 20-66)
• Rear door sill trim, both sides (see page 20-68)
• Kick panels, both sides (see step 3 on page 20-67)
• Driver's dashboard undercover (see page 20-102)
• Passenger's dashboard undercover (see page
20-103)
• Center console (see page 20-92)
• Steering joint cover (see step 6 on page 17-25)
• Stereo amplifier (see page 23-107)
• Navigation unit (if equipped) (see page 23-190)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-89
Interior Trim
Carpet Replacement (cont'd)
4. Disconnect the connectors inthe dashboardloiNer 7. Detach the clips and release the fastener (A), then
center sections (see step 6 on page 20-112). pull back the front carpet (B) from under the
dashboard.
5. Remove the bolts (A, B), and remove the dashboard
center brackets (C). Fastener Locations
I> :Clip, 4
T·j
8. From back of the front carpet: Release the hooks (A)

ofthe base (B) with a flat-tip screwdriver, and push
ax 1.25mm up the projections of the holder from the base to
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m, 16Ibf·ft) remove the floor mat holder (C).
ax 1.25 mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf.m, 16Ibf·ft)
6. Remove the bolts of the AfT lever bracket (A), then

separate the AfT lever bracket from ~he center
frame (B) by moving to driver's side. Do not
disconnect of the AfT shift cable.
Fastener locations
~: Bolt, 3
~I
lJ
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf.m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
20-90 BACK
9. Detach the clips, then pull up the rear carpet from
under the seat side bolster both sides. Pull back the
rear carpet (A), and remove it.
Fastener Locations
I> :Clip,2
TI A
10. Install the front carpet and rear carpet in the

reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Take care not to damage, wrinkle or twist the

front and rear carpets.
• Make sure the seat harnesses are routed
correctly.
• Slip the rear carpet under both seat side bolster.
new ones.
• Push the fasteners and clips into place securely.
BACK 20-91
Consoles
Center Console Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 2. Remove the driver's console trim (A) and
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * passenger's console trim (8).
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 -1 Detach the clips (C) by pulling up on the rear
portion ofthe trim up.
SRS components are located in this area. Review the -2 Detach the clips (D) by pulling it up from the
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the dashboard, then remove it.
doing repairs or service. Fastener locations
C [>: Clip, 2 D [>: Clip, 5
NOTE:
4 ~I
• Take care not to scratch the center console,
dashboard, and related parts.
1. Detach the hooks (A) by pulling the AT gear

position indicator cover (8) up.
3. Open the armrest (A), and detach theciips, then

remove the center console panel (8) up.
Fastener locations
20-92 BACK
4. Remove the screw (A) and clip (8), then pull out the 6. Remove the center console (A):
driver's console cover (C) to detach the clips (D).
Release the fastener (E) and hooks (F), then remove -1 Disconnect the accessory power socket
the cover. connector and console light connector.
-2 Remove the bolts (8) of the console.
Fastener Locations -a Lift the rear of the console, then detach the
A ~: Screw, 1 B l>: Clip, 1 clips (C) by pulling the console backward to
T remove.
Fastener Locations
B~: Bolt, 6
5. Detach the clips and hooks (A) by pulling the

passenger's console cover (8) out, and pull it
backward to release the pin (C) from the passenger's
dashboard undercover, then remove it.
6x1.0mm
Fastener Locations 9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf.ft)
7. Install the center console in the reverse order of


new ones .
BACK 20-93
Consoles
Center Console Armrest Removal! Armrest Lock Replacement

Installation
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the armrest and related
parts.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the armrest, center
console and related parts. 1. Remove the center console armrest (see page
20-94)
1. Remove the armrest base (A).
2. Remove the screws, then remove the armrest lock
-1 Open the armrest (8), then remove the screws (A) from the center console armrest (8).
(C).
Fastener Locations
-2 Pull out the armrest base to detach the clips (D).
~:Screw.9
Fastener Locations
C ~ : Screw. 3 0 I> . Clip 7 Onnwl
®=~ B
3. Pull out the armrest lock cover (A) to detach the

2. Remove the screws, then remove the armrest (A) hooks (8) from the armrest lock (C). If necessary,
from the armrest hinge (8). remove the key cylinder (D) by pulling out the
spring (E).
Fastener Locations
~:Screw.2
3. Install the center console armrest in the reverse

order of removal. Check ifthe clips are damaged or 4. Install the armrest lock in the reverse order of
stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them removal.
with new ones.
20-94 BACK
Center Console Disassembly1Reassembly
Special Tools ,Required 5. Remove the screws, (A, B), then remove the armrest
KTe trim tool set SOJATP2014 * - hinge (e) from the console box (D).
Equipment Program; call888-424~6857 Fastener Locations
NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. ~ .~
avoid damage when pryi'ng components.
• Take care not to scratch the center console and
related parts.
1. Remove the center console (see page 20-92).
2. Remove the center console armrest (see page

20-94). ;
3. Pull out the center console rear trim (A) to detach

the clips. c
Fastener Locations
6. Detach the hooks (A) by pulling out the latch hole

trim (B), then remove it.
4. Remove the screw (A), then pull out the passenger's

console (B) to detach the clips (e, D) and hooks (E),
then remove it.
Fastener Locations
A ~: Screw, 1 C 1>: Clip, 7 o I>:Clip, 1
~ ~I
~
'f!OA
(cont'd)
BACK 20-95
Consoles
Center Console DisassemblyIReassembly (cont'd)
7. Remove the screws (A, B), then pullout the driver's 8. Remove the screws (A, B), then remove the center
console (C) to detach the clips (0, E) and hooks (F), console rear bracket (C), center console driver's
then remove it. bracket (0) and center console bracket (E) away
from the console box (F) as shown.
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 1 B ~ : Screw,2 Fastener Locations
0rmrm> ~.
E [>: Clip, 1
9. Assemble the console in the reverse order of

removal.
20-96 BACK
Center Console Beverage Holder
Replacement
10. If necessary, remove the audio pocket (A) from the
dashboard.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the center console,
-1 Remove the screws. dashboard, and related parts.
-2 Pull out the audio pocket, and disconnect the
front accessory power socket connector (8), 1. Remove the console center panel (see step 3 on
driver's seat heater switch connector (e) and page 20-92).
front passenger's seat heater switch connector
(0). 2. Remove the screws, then remove the center
-a Remove the pocket by pushing it to the left. console beverage holder (A) from the center
console panel (8).
Fastener Locations
~:Screw,2 Fastener Locations
~: Screw, 7
00]11> I
B
B
B
11. Assemble the console in the reverse order of

removal.
3. Install the beverage holder in the reverse order of

removal.
BACK 20-97
Dashboard
Dashboard Side Trim Removal/ Left Driver's Dashboard Panel

Installation Removal/Installation

KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
* Available through the American Honda Tool and * Available through the American Honda Tool and
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
NOTE: NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
avoid damage when prying components. avoid damage when prying components.
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard, and related • Take care not to scratch the dashboard, and related
parts. parts.
1. Using a trim tool, pry up on the front bottom edge 1. Remove the dashboard side trim, left side
of the dashboard side trim (A) to release the clips. (see page 20-98)
Gently pull out the trim to detach the clips, then
remove the trim. 2. Gently pull out the left driver's dashboard panel (A)
to release the clip and hook (B), then remove the
Fastener Locations panel.
Fastener Location
A B

note these items: 3. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,
whitened, and if necessary, replace them with • Check if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened,
new ones. and if necessary, replace it with a new one.
• Push the clips into place securely. • Push the clip and hook into place securely.
20-98 BACK
Passengerl:s Dashboard Trim Panel Right Driver's Dashboard Panel
Removal/Installation Removal/Installation

NOTE: NOTE:
parts. parts.
1. Remove the dashboard side trim, right side 1. Gently pull outthe right driver's dashboard center
(see page 20-98) panel (A) to release the clip, then remove the panel.
2. Gently pull out the trim panel (A) to release the Fastener Location
clips, then remove the panel.
Fastener Locations
~J
2. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,

and note these items: • Check if the clip is damaged or stress-whitened,
and if necessary, replace it with a new one .
• Check if the clips are damaged or stress- • Push the clips into place securely.
new ones .
BACK 20-99
Dashboard
Center Panel Trim Removall Instrument Panel Removall

Installation Installation

NOTE: NOTE:
parts. parts.
1. Remove these items: 1. Remove these items:
• Right driver's dashboard panel (see page 20-99) • Right driver's dashboard panel (see page 20-99)
• Passenger's dashboard trim panel (see page • Left driver's dashboard panel (see page 20-98)
20-99)
2. Release the tilt/telescopic lock lever, and adjust the
2. Gently pull out the center panel trims (A) to release steering wheel to full tilt down position and to the
the clips, then remove the trims. full telescopic out position.
Fastener Locations 3. Remove the screws (A).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 2 C 1>: Clip, 5
~ ~I
3. Install the trims in the reverse order of removal,

B
whitened, and if necessary, replace them with 4. Gently pull out the instrument panel (8) to release
new ones. the clips (C), then remove the panel.

new ones.
20-100 BACK
Center Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 3. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * and note these items:
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 • Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
NOTE: new ones.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Push the clips into place securely.
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to • Make sure the connectors are plugged in
avoid damage when prying components. properly.
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard, and related
parts.
• Right driver's dashboard panel (see page 20-99)

• Passenger's dashboard trim panel (see page
20-99)
• Center panel trim (see page 20-100)
2. Remove the center panel (A).
-1 Remove the screws (B).

-2 Gently pull out the panel to release the clips
(C, D), then remove the panel.
-a Disconnect the climate switch connectors (E),
hazard warning switch connector (F) and audio
switch connectors (G).
Fastener Locations
B ~ : Screw, 2 C [> : Clip, 2 D [>: Clip, 1
~ ~
G
vi F
BACK 20-101
Dashboard
Driver's Dashboard Undercover Driver's Switch Panel Removal!

Removal/Installation Installation
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard, and Special Tools Required
related parts. KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
1. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover (A). Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
-1 Turn the lock knob (8) 90 0. NOTE:

-2 Gently pull down the right side edge to detach • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
the clips. • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
Fastener Locations
parts.
1. Remove the driver's switch panel (A).
-1 Pull out the bottom of the panel to release the

clips, and pull it down to release the hooks (8).
-2 Disconnect the power mirror switch connectors
(C) and VSA OFF switch connectors (D).
Fastener Locations
[>: Clip, 2
~
B
C 1i\---I--Ik.::::.1
2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of A


new ones .


new ones.
• Make sure the connectors are plugged in
properly.
20-102 BACK
Dashboard Side Vent Removal/ Passenger's Dashboard Undercover
Installation Removal/Installation
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard, and NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard, and
related parts. related parts.
1. Remove the driver's switch panel (see page 20-102). 1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover (A).
For of the right side outlet: Detach the hook of the
glove box damper and release the glove box stop -:J Gently pull down the front edge to detach the
on each side from the dashboard by pushing them clips.
inside (see step 2 on page 20-104). -2 Pull the cover away to release the pins (8) of
the cover from the holders.
2. Push the back of the dashboard side vent (A) by
hand from the driver's switch panel or glove box Fastener Locations
opening to release the hooks (8) on the side vent. 1>: Clip, 3
~
Gently pull out the side vent to remove it.
3. Install the side vent in the reverse order of removal. 2. Install the undercover in the reverse order of

new ones .
BACK 20-103
Dashboard
Glove Box Removal/Installation Glove Box Damper Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard, and NOTE: Take care not to scratch the dashboard, and
related parts. related parts.
1. Remove the bolts. 1. Remove these items:
Fastener Locations
• Glove box (see page 20-104)
~: Bolt, 2 • Dashboard side lid right side (see step 4 on page
~I
20-108)
2. Detach the clip of the glove box damper (A) by

pinching it to release from inside the dashboard,
then remove the damper.
2. Detach the hook (A) of the glove box damper. While

holding the glove box (8), push in on the stops (C)
to release them from the glove box.
3. Install the damper in the reverse order of removal.
3. Install the glove box in the reverse order of

removal.
20-104 BACK
Glove Box Striker Replacement Center Upper Dashboard Panel
Removal/Installation
NOTE: Take care notto scratch the dashboard, and
related parts.
1. Detach the hook of the glove box damper and KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 *
release the glove box stop on each side from the * Available through the American Honda Tool and
dashboard by pushing them inside (see step 2 on Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857
page 20-104).
NOTE:
2. Remove the screws, then remove the glove box • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
striker (A). • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
Fastener Locations • Take care not to scratch the dashboard, and related
~ : Screw, 3 parts.
OmJJ> I 1. Pry up on the edge of the center upper dashboard

panel (A) with a trim tool to detach the clips. Gently
pull out panel to release the clips from the
dashboard.
Fastener Locations
3. Install the striker in the reverse order of removal.


new ones .
BACK 20-105
Dashboard
Upper Dashboard Panel Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required 4. Detach the clips along the front edge ofthe upper
• KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * dashboard panel (A). Gently pull up the panel to
• Trim pad remover, Snap-on A 177A or equivalent, release the hooks from the dashboard (8) .
Fastener Locations
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 [>: Clip, 11

~
NOTE:
• Take care not to bend or scratch the dashboard, and
related parts.
A
B
• Center upper dashboard panel (see page 20-105) 5. If necessary, remove the front passenger's airbag
• Right driver's dashboard panel (see page 20-99) from the upper dashboard panel (see step 5 on
• Dashboard side trim, both sides (see page 20-98) page 24-147).
• Passenger's dashboard trim panel (see page
20-99) 6. Install the panel in the reverse order of removal,
• Center panel (see page 20-101) and note these items:
• Instrument panel (see page 20-100)
• Gauge control module (see page 22-284) • Check ifthe clips are damaged or stress-
2. Disconnect the front passenger's airbag 4P new ones.
connector and three mounting nuts of the front • Push the clips into place securely.
passenger's airbag (see page 24-147).
3. Remove the screws.
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 7
€)u~ I
20-106 BACK
Column Cover Removal/Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 3. Turn the steering wheel to the right and remove the
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the screw (D). Release the hook (E) of the upper column
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before cover is in the same as the step 2.
4. Separate the upper column cover from the lower
NOTE: column cover by puflingup it lightly. Release the
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. hooks (F) of the cover to remove it from the lower
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to column cover (G).
• Take care not to scratch the dashboard, and related 5. Remove the screws (H, I), and remove the lower
parts. column cover from the steering column.
1. Release the tilt/telescopic lock lever, and adjust the 6. Instaff the covers in the reverse order of removal,
steering wheel to fuff tift down position and to the and push the hooks into place securely.
fuff telescopic out position.
2. Turn the steering wheel to left and remove the

screw (A). Release the hook (8) of the upper
column cover (C) while pushing the cover from the
front side.
Fastener Locations
A, D~: Screw, 2 H ~: Screw, 1 ~:Screw,2
@-
BACK 20.. 107

Dashboard
Dashboard Replacement
Special Tools Required Driver's side

* Available through the American Honda Tool and 4. Using a KTC trim tool, pry up on the front bottom
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 edge of the dashboard side lid (A) to release the
clips. Gently pull out to release the hooks (8), then
SRS components are located in this area. Review the remove the lid. Repeat on the other side of the
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the dashboard.
doing repairs or service. Fastener Locations
NOTE:
• Have an assistant help you when removing and
installing the dashboard.
parts.

2. Disconnect the negative cable from the battery, and

wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
• Front seats, both sides (see page 20-118)

• Steering column (see page 17-25) 5. Remove the screws, then remove the GPS antenna
• Driver's switch panel (see page 20-102) bracket (A) (with navigation system), then push the
• Upper dashboard panel (see page 20-106) antenna out through the hole in the dashboard.
• Center panel (see page 20-101)
• Glove box (see page 20-104) Fastener Locations
• Driver's dashboard undercover (see page 20-102)
20-103)
• Gauge control module (see page 22-284)
• Audio unit (see page 23-99)
• Navigation display unit, with navigation system
(see page 23-191) A
• Audio-HVAC display unit, without navigation
system (see page 23-101)
• Front center speaker (see page 23-102)
• Audio-HVAC subdisplay unit, with navigation
system (see page 23-101)
• Sunlight sensor (see page 21-80)
• In-cartemperature sensor (see page 21-78)
• Kick panel, both sides (see step 4 on page 20-67)
20-108 BACK
Center Passenger's side
6. Detach the wire harness clip (A) from the center 8. Disconnect the antenna 2P connector (A), and
upper dashboard panel opening. detach the wire harness clips (8) from the glove
box opening.
A
7. Detach the wire harness clips (A) from center panel
opening. 9. Carefully pry the glove box light (C) from the inside
of the dashboard, and detach the wire harness clips
(D).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-109
Dashboard
Dashboard Replacement (cont'd)
10. From the front of the dashboard (A), remove the 12. Install the dashboard in the reverse order of
screws (B) and bolts (C). removal, and note these items:
Fastener Locations
• Make sure the dashboard fits onto the guide pins
B ~: Screw, 2 C ~: Bolt, 11 correctly.
~ ~I • Before tightening the. bolts, make sure the wire

harnesses are not pinched.
properly.
• Reconnect the negative cable to the battery.
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the
C
audio presets.
• Check for any DTCs that may have been set
11. Lift up on the dashboard (A) to release it from the

guide pins (B), then carefully remove the
dashboard through the front door opening.
NOTE: Lay the dashboard on its front or back. Do

not rest it on the lower console opening or you
may damage it.
A
20-110 BACK
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required Driver's side

* Available through the American Honda Tool and 4. From under the dash, disconnect the left side wire
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 harness connectors (A), engine compartment wire
harness connectors (B), are the roof wire harness
SRS components are located in this area. Review the connector (C).
NOTE:
• Have an assistant help you when removing and
installing the dashboard.
parts.


wait at least 3 minutes before beginning work.
• Front seats, both sides (see page 20-118)

• Steering column (see page 17-25) 5. From under the dash, disconnect the driver's door
• Glove box (see page 20-104) wire harness connectors (A), and the left TPMS
• Driver's dashboard undercover (see page 20-102) subharness connector (B).
20-103)
• In-car temperature sensor (see page 21-78)
• Kick panel, both sides (see step 4 on page 20-67)
• Dashboard side lid, passenger's side (see step 4
on page 20-108)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-111
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont'd)
Center 7. From under the dash, disconnectthe

HandsFreeLink control unit connector (A). Using a
6. From under the dash, disconnect the AIT gear T30 TORX bit, remove the ground bolt (8), and
position indicator panel light/park pin switch release the wire harness clips (C).
connector (A), AIT shift lock solenoid connector (8),
SRS control unit connector A (C), yaw rate-lateral
acceleration sensor connector (D), SRS wire
harness connector (E).
B
6x 1.0 mm
A 9.8N·m
Use a T30 TORX bit.
20-112 BACK
Passenger's side 10. From under the dash, disconnect the climate
control unit connector (A), and release the wire
8. From under the dash, disconnect the XM receiver harness clip (8).
connector or AcuraLink control unit connectors
B
(with navigation system) (A), engine compartment
wire harness connectors (8), antenna connector (e),
and the right side wire harness connectors (D).
11. Detach the clip, then remove the rear heater joint
(A).
Fastener Location
9. From under the dash, disconnect the right TPMS

subharness connector (A), and the front passenger's
door wire harness connectors (8).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-113
Dashboard
Dashboard/Steering Hanger Beam Removal/Installation (cont'd)
12. Remove the bolts (A, B), and remove the center 14. From the driver's side: Remove the bolt (A) from
brackets (C) from the dashboard center frame (D). brake pedal bracket, and remove the nut (B) from
the body.
Fastener Locations
A ~: Bolt, 2 B ~: Bolt, 2 15. From passenger's side: Remove the bolts (C) from
.1 D
the holes ofthe steering hanger beam.
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 1 B. : Nut, 1 C, E ~ : Bolt, 4
c @- @ ~I
F ~: Bolt, 1
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
13. Remove the bolts of the AfT lever bracket (A), then
separate the AfT lever bracket from the center
frame (B) by moving to the driver's side. Do not
disconnect of the AfT shift cable.
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt, 3
~I A
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
16. Remove the caps (D), then remove the bolts (E, F),
and lift up on the dashboard/steering hanger beam
(G) to release it from the guide pins (H) on the body.
B
NOTE: Before removing the dashboard/steering

hanger beam, make sure all the harnesses have
6x1.0mm been disconnected.
9.8N·m
17. Carefully remove the dashboard/steering hanger
beam through the front door opening or you may
damage it.
20-114 BACK
18. Install the dashboard/steering hanger beam in the
reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Reinstall the center brackets on the center frame,

and slightly tighten the mounting bolts. Reinstall
the dashboard on the body. After tightening the
dashboard mounting bolts and nut, tighten the
center bracket mounting bolts and center frame
mounting bolts.
• Make sure the dashboard/steering hanger beam
fits onto the guide pins correctly.
• Apply liquid thread lock to the bolts securing the
center bracket and the dashboard before
reinstallation.
• Before tightening the bolts, make sure the wire
harnesses are not pinched.
properly.
• Enter the anti-theft codes for the audio and the
audio presets.
BACK 20-115
Seats
REAR SEAT
Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement, page 20-136
Armrest Replacement, page 20-135
Seat-back Cover/Pad Replacement, page 20-139
Seat Side Bolster Cover Replacement, page 20-143
Seat Cushion Cover/Pad Replacement, page 20-144
Rear Cushion Link End Mounting Bracket Replacement, page 20-138
Rear Seat-back Striker Replacement, page 20-139
Rear Seat Lock Replacement, page 20-143
FRONT SEAT
(Driver's)
Front Seat Active Headrest Inspection,
page 20-117
Seat Frame Replacement, page 20-121
Seat-back CoverlPad Replacement, page 20-126
FRONT SEAT
(Passenger's)
Front Seat Active Headrest Inspection, page 20-117
Seat Frame Replacement, page 20-121
Seat-back Cover/Pad Replacement, page 20-126
20-116 BACK
Front Seat Active Headrest Inspection
NOTE: lfthe vehicle has been in a collision, always Inspection

inspect the active headrests, even if they appear
reusable, by doing the following procedure. 3. Fold the seat-back forward, then recline the seat-
back to the first lock position, and adjust the head
Resetting Headrest Position restraint to the head restraint position.
1. Push the head restraint (A) forward fully from the 4. Apply masking tape on the top of the head restraint.
locked position to return the inside inertia lock (8).
5. Make marks (A) on both sides at 250 mm (9.84 in.)
upward from the roots ofthe head restraint frame
A (8) along the back of the head restraint (e) surface.
Make a center of these points as a datum point (D).
B
c
Locked Full stroke Normal

I
~Q~Q~ 6. Push the head restraint (A) forward, and check:

With a scale, measure the level amount of the head
restraint movement. The head restraint should
B B B
move than 50 mm (2.0 in.) without resistance. If it is
2. Slowly raise the head restraint into the normal less than 50 mm (2.0 in.), or the head restraint
position. doesn't move smoothly, replace the seat-back
frame assembly:
• Passenger's seat (see page 20-121)

• Driver's seat (see page 20-122)
BACK 20-117
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation
Special Tools Required Passenger's seat


doing repairs or service. o
NOTE:
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. E
• When prying with a flat-tip screwdriver, wrap it with
protective tape to prevent damage.
• Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat
covers. 4. Remove the seat belt lower anchor bolt (A).

2. Tilt the steering wheel all the way up, and telescope
it all the way in.
3. Slide the front seat forward fully, then move it to

the lowest position (driver's seat).
Driver's seat: Carefully push in on the bottom edge
of the anchor cover (A) to release the lock tab (8)
then slide the cover up to release the hooks (C), and 5. Raise the seat fully, and slide it halfway to the rear
remove the cover. so you can access the seat mounting bolts.
Passenger's seat: Carefully pry up on the bottom
edge of the anchor cover (D) to release the hooks 6. Slide the seat all the way forward, and remove the
(E), and remove the cover. rear outer seat track end covers (A) and rear inner
seat track end covers (8).
Driver's seat
Outer seat track end cover, driver's seat rear
c
20-118 BACK
Inner seat track end cover, driver's seat rear 8. Slide the seat all the way back.
9. Passenger's seat: Remove the outer seat track end

cover (A) and inner seat track end cover (8).
Outer seat track end cover, passenger's seat front
Outer seat track end cover, passenger's seat rear
Inner seat track end cover, passenger's seat front
Inner seat track end cover, passenger's seat rear
10. Remove the bolts securing the front seat (A).

Fastener Locations
~: 801t,2
7. Remove the bolts.

Fastener Locations
@D-I
~: Bolt. 2
@-i
10X 1.2Smm

wait at least 3 minutes before removing the seat.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-119
Seats
Front Seat Removal/Installation (cont'd)
12. Lift up the front seat, then detach the harness clips 13. With the help of an assistant, carefully remove the
(A), and disconnect the side airbag connector (8), front seat through the front door opening.
the seat belt buckle tensioner connector (C), driver's
seat wire harness connector (D), ODS unit harness 14. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and
connector (E). note these items:
Passenger's seat • Apply medium strength type liquid thread lock to

the seat mounting bolts before reinstallation.
E A • Tighten the seat mounting bolts to the specified
torque in the sequence shown. Slide the seat all
the way back and tighten CD and (1), then slide it
forward and tighten ® and 0. The driver's seat is
shown; the passenger's seat is similar.
• Make sure each connector is plugged in properly.
• Tighten the bolts by hand first, then tighten them
to specification with a torque wrench.
• Enter the anti-theft code for the audio or the
navigation system, then enter the audio presets.
• Set the clock.
Fastener Locations
Driver's seat ~: Bolt, 4
@ai
10x 1.25 mm
34N·m
(3.5 kgf·m,
25Ibf·ft)
\ CD
20-120 BACK
Front Seat Frame Replacement
Passenger's Seat 4. Remove the clips, then remove the recline inner
covers (A) from the seat frame (B).
Calibrate the ODS unit after any of these actions
(see page 24-29): Fastener Locations
!>: Clip, 4
1:J
• Front passenger's seat replacement (including any A
seat components)
• Replacement of the seat weight sensors
• After a vehicle collision
NOTE:
• Apply oil to the pivot portions ofthe slide locks.
• Apply multipurpose grease to the sliding portions of
the seat tracks.
• If the side airbag has deployed, replace the seat
frame and related parts with new ones (see page
24-143).
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-118).
• Front seat-back cover (see page 20-126) S. Remove the bolts, and release the seat cushion
• Front seat cushion cover (see page 20-131) springs (A) from the hooks (B), then remove the
• ODS unit (see page 24-167) seat cushion frame (C).
3. Gently pull out the center cover (A), then detach the Fastener Locations
clip, and release the hooks (B). ~: 8011,4 8x 1.25 mm
~
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m,
Fastener Location 16Ibf·ft))
6. Remove the seat weight sensors (see page 24-165).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-121
Seats
Front Seat Frame Replacement (cont'd)
7. If necessary, remove the bushings (A. B) from the Driver's Seat

seat cushion frame (C).
Check the operation of the driver's seat position sensor
after any of these actions (see page 24-31):
• Driver's seat position sensor replacement

• Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement
NOTE:
• Apply oil to the pivot portions of the slide lock.
• Apply mUltipurpose grease to the sliding portions
and pivot portions of the seat tracks.
• Ifthe side airbag has deployed, replace the seat
frame and related parts with new ones (see page
24-143).
B 1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-118).

(White)
8. Install the new seat frame in the reverse order of 2. Remove these items:
• Front seat back cover/pad (see page 20-126)
• Make sure the ODS unit connector is plugged in • Front seat cushion cover/pad (see page 20-131)
properly. • Seat position sensor (see page 24-169)
• Check if the clips are damaged or stress- • Front seat belt buckle (see page 24-6)
new ones. 3. Remove the screw, gently pull out the center cover
• Push the clips into place securely. (A) to detach the hooks (B), and release the hook (C),
then remove the cover.
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
~ B
20-122 BACK
4. Gently pull out the outer upper rail cover (A), then 6. Remove the clips, then remove the recline inner
detach the clips, and release the hooks (B). covers (A) from the seat frame (B).
Fastener Locations Fastener Locations

~: Clip, 2
~ A
7. Separate the front seat-back flame (A) and seat

5. Gently pull out the inner upper rail cover (A) to cushion frame (B).
release the hooks (B), then remove it.
-1 Disconnect the seat wire harness connector (e).
-2 Detach the SRS wire harness connector (D)
from the frame.
-a Remove the bolts, then remove the front seat-
back frame.
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt, 4
@))nrrD[
10 x 1.25 mm
47N·m
(4.8 kgf·m,
35Ibf·ft)
C
(cont'd)
BACK 20-123
Seats
Front Seat Frame Replacement (cont'd)
8. Disconnect the recline motor connector and power 9. Remove the nuts, and remove the lumbar support
lumber support motor connector, then release the motor (A). Release the upper springs (8) and
harness bands (A). Remove the power seat cord (8). lumbar springs (C) from the seat-back frame (D),
Remove the bolt and push nut (C), then remove the then remove the front seat lumbar (E).
connecting rod (0), rod cover (E), and recline motor
(F) from the seat-back frame (G).
NOTE:
• Replace the push nut with new ones. Make sure
the push nut is installed correctly.
• Apply liquid thread lock to the motor mounting
bolt before reinstallation.
6x1.0mm
E 9.8N·m
(1.0kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
c
20-124 BACK
10. Disconnect the harness connectors and harness
band, and remove the driver's seat harness (A).
Remove the rear up-down motor (8), front up-down
motor (C), slide motor/left side gear box (D), right
side gear box (E), seat cushion frame (F), seat
position sensor (G), and harness bracket (H) from
the slide/up-down adjuster (I).
F /8X1.25mm
22N·m
(2.2 kgf·m,
16Ibf·ft)
6X1.0mm
G 9N·m
./ (0.9 kgf·m,
, / 7Ibf·ft)
~ 6x 1.0mm
• , 9N·m
(0.9 kgf·m,
7Ibf·ft)
~B
3.7N·m 8x 1.2Smm
(0.38 kgf·m, 14N·m
2.7Ibf·ft) (1.4 kgf·m,
10Ibf·ft)
11. Install the new seat frame in the reverse order of

• Make sure seat position sensor connector is

new ones.
BACK 20-125
Seats
Front Seat-back CoverIPad Replacement
Special Tools Required Driver's seat


B
A
• Check the operation of the driver's seat position
sensor after any of these actions (see page 24-31):
- Driver's seat position sensor replacement
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seat slide rail)
replacement
• Calibrate the ODS unit after any of these actions
(see page 24-29):
- Front passenger's seat replacement (including any
seat components)
- Replacement of the seat weight sensors
- After a vehicle collision
4. Detach the clips and hooks (A) by pulling the
NOTE: bottom of the back cover (8) back, then gently pull
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat down the cover to release the hooks (C) from the
covers. seat frame, and remove the panel.
• On the passenger's seat, do not touch the ODS
sensor in the seat-back pad, and keep it away from oil. Fastener Locations
Oil can corrode the sensor causing it to fail. 1>: Clip, 2
~
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-118).
2. Remove the head restraint.
3. From under the seat cushion, release the hooks (A)

from the seat cushion frame spring (8).
Passenger's seat
20-126 BACK
5. Release the fasteners (A) of the seat cushion cover. 6. Release the fastener (A) of the seat-back cover (B),
Release the hooks (B), then pull back the seat-back and pull the cover back.
cover (C).
Passenger's seat
Passenger's seat
A A
A A
\
c
B
Driver's seat
Driver's seat
A A A
(cont'd)
BACK 20-127
Seats
Front Seat-back Cover/Pad Replacement (cont'd)
7. Driver's seat: Remove the wire tie (A) and pull the Driver's seat
driver's seat wire harness (8), then disconnect the
seat heater back connector (C). A
A~--+~rJ7\ A
8. Release the hook strips (A), then loosen the seat-

back cover (8).
Passenger's seat
9. Release the front hook (A) and rear hook (8) of the
reinforcing cloth (C) from the seat-back frame (D).
c
A
D
D B
20-128 BACK
10. Passenger's: Turn over the seat-back cover (A), and 12. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (A) from the seat-
remove the ODS unit cover (8). Disconnect the ODS back frame (8).
sensor connectors (e) from the ODS unit (D), and
pull them in through the hole in the seat frame. Passenger's seat
Detach the harness clips (E, F).
Driver's seat
11. Pinch the tabs on the ends of the head restraint
guides (A), and remove them from the seat-back.
A
(cont'd)
BACK 20-129
Seats
Front Seat-back Cover/Pad Replacement (cont'd)
13. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the 14. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,
way around, and release the clips (A), then remove and note these items:
the seat-back cover.
, \
•
T
±
I.
fiJA • Reinitialize the ODS unit (see page 24-28).
• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back
cover, make sure the material is stretched evenly
over the pad before securing the clips, hooks,
and hook strips.
• Replace any clips you removed with new ones
(A).
• Make sure the side airbag harness and ODS
subharness (passenger's seat) are routed
properly.
20-130 BACK
Front Seat Cushion Cover/Pad Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Driver's seat: Remove the recline cover (A).
* Available through the American Honda Tool and ...:J Remove the screw and detach the hooks (8).
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 -2 Pull up the cover, then detach the hooks (C).
-a Disconnect the recline switch and up-down
SRS components are located in this area. Review the switch connector (D), lumbar support switch
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and the connector (E).
doing repairs or service. Driver's seat
Fastener Location
• Check the operation of the driver's seat position
~ : Screw, 1
sensor after any ofthese actions (see page 24-31):
- Driver's seat position sensor replacement
- Cover plate (front side of driver's seatslide rail)
replacement
~
• Calibrate the ODS unit after any of these actions
(see page 24-29):
- Front passenger's seat replacement (including any
seat components)
- Replacement of the seat weight sensors
- After a vehicle collision
NOTE: C
• Take care not to tear the seams of damage the seat
covers.
1. Remove the front seat (see page 20-118). 4. Passenger's seat: Remove the recline cover (A).
2. Driver's seat: Remove the screw and release the ...:J Remove the recline knob (8) and screw (C).
hooks (A) and tab (8), then remove the front cover -2 Gently pull out the cover, then detach the clip
(C). (D), and release the hooks (E), and remove it
towards the back.
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1 Passenger's seat
~ Fastener Locations
C ~ : Screw, 1 D t> : Clip, 1
~ ~I
(cont'd)
BACK 20-131
Seats
Front Seat Cushion Cover/Pad Replacement (cont'd)
5. From under the seat cushion, release the hooks (A) 6. From the under the seat, detach the harness clip (A)
from the seat cushion frame spring (8). and disconnect the seat cushion heater connector
(8). Detach the connector clip, and pull it to outside
Passenger's seat of the seat. Release the hooks (e), then pull the seat
cushion cover (D) back.
Passenger's seat
B
A
c
Driver's seat
Driver's seat
B
A
20-132 BACK
7. Release the hook strips (A) from the seat frame. 8. Remove the seat cushion/pad (A) from the seat
frame (8).
Passenger's seat
Passenger's seat
Driver's seat
Driver's seat
(cont'd)
BACK 20-133
Seats
Front Seat Cushion Cover/Pad Replacement (cont'd)
9. Pull back the edge of the seat-back cover all the

way around, and release the clips (A), then remove
the seat-back cover.
A\f)
10. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal,

• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat-back

over the pad before securing the clips, hooks,
and hook strips .
• Replace any clips you removed with new ones
(A).
20-134 BACK
Rear Seat Armrest Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the 3. Slide the armrest (A) toward the driver's side of the
seat covers. vehicle, and remove the center pin (8) from the
frame (C) by pulling back on the armrest.
1. Gently pull forward on the top edge of the armrest
center cover (A) to release the hook (8), then push
forward to remove the cover.
B
4. Install the armrest in the reverse order of removal.
2. Remove the pivot bolt, wave washer (A), washer

(8), armrest washer (C), and 6 mm bolt (D).
Fastener Location
~: Bolt, 1
~
\
~\~ ~
~ ~(
D'~
/
"~\\\\~\ B C
6x 1.0mm A
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ftl
BACK 20-135
Seats
Rear Seat Armrest Beverage Holder Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. Release the front hooks (A) from the wire (B), then
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * remove the beverage holder (C).
A
NOTE:
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat
covers.
1. Using a trim tool, push in atthe ribs (A) ofthe rear

hooks (B) to pull up the beverage holder (C), then
rele.ase the hooks from the wire (0).
3. Install the beverage holder in the reverse order of

removal. Make sure the front hooks are installed
securely to the wire, then push down on the
beverage holder and install the rear hooks into the
wire securely.
20-136 BACK
Rear Seat Removal/Installation
Rear Seats 5. Fold the seat back forward.
NOTE: 6. Remove the cargo area lid (see page 20-79).

• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat 7. Remove the nuts securing the rear seat.
covers.
• Have an assistant help you when removing and Left rear seat
installing the rear seat.
1. Remove the head restraint and the center head 10x 1.25mm
41 N·m
restraint. (4.2kgf·m.
30Ibf.ft)
2. Lift the seat cushion front end, and tilt the cushion
forward.
3. Remove the rear cushion link ends (A) from the link
bracket. With the help of an assistant, remove the
left rear cushion (B) and right rear cushion (C)
through both the rear door openings.
Right rear seat

Fastener Locations
.:Nut.2 10x 1.25 mm
~
41 N·m
(4.2kgf.m.
30Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the rear center seat belt lower anchor bolt

(A) and rear seat bolt securing the rear seat.
Fastener Location
~: Bolt. 1
@-I 8. With the help of an assistant, remove the left rear

seat and right rear seat through both the rear door
openings.
9. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Before installing the anchor belt, make sure there

are no twists or kinks in the center seat belt.
10x1.25mm • Tighten the seat bolt and nuts to the specified
41 N·m A
(4.2kgf.m. 7/16-20 UNF torque.
30Ibf·ft) 34N·m
(3.5kgf.m.
25Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-137
Seats
Rear Seat Removal/Installation Rear Seat Cushion Link End
(cont'd) Mounting Bracket Replacement
Seat Side Bolster 1. Remove the rear seat cushion.
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body or tear the seat 2. Lift up carpet and remove the mounting bolts, then
covers. remove the rear seat cushion link end mounting
bracket (A).
1. Fold the seat back forward.
Fastener Locations 10x 1.25 mm
~: Bolt, 2 38N·m
@-i
2. Remove the rear door sill trim (see page 20-68).
(3.9 kgf·m,
28lbf·ftl
3. Remove the seat side bolster mounting bolt.
4. Pull the seat belt (A) out through the slit (B) in the
seat belt guide (e).
Fastener Location
~: Bolt, 1
@})lI@ I
A
E
3. Install the bracket in the reverse order of removal.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ib(.ft)
5. Lift the seat side bolster (0) up to release the hook
(E), then remove the seat side bolster.
6. Install the seat in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:
• Before attaching the seat side bolster, make sure

there are no twists or kinks in the seat belt.
• Guide the belt over the front ofthe seat side
bolster as you install the holder.
20-138 BACK
Rear Seat-back Striker Replacement Rear Seat-back CoverIPad
Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the inner trim.
1. Remove the cargo area side trim panel (see page NOTE:
20-76). • Put on gloves to protect your hands.
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the seat-back covers.
strikers (A).
1. Remove the rear seat (see page 20-137).
Driver's side
2. Remove the rear seat armrest (see page 20-135).
Fastener Locations
~: 801t,3 3. Remove the pivot bracket (A).
@)))))mp I -1 Using a T40 TORX bit, remove the pivot bolt (8).
-2 Remove the pivot cover (C) and pivot bracket. If
necessary, remove the bushing (0) and pivot
A washer (E).
8x 1.2Smm
22N·m
Passenger's side
Fastener Locations
A
Use a T40 TORX bit.
4. Install the bracket in the reverse order of removal,

• Apply mUltipurpose grease to the moving

portions of the bushing .
• Replace any damage or stress-whitened bushing
8x1.2Smm and pivot washer with new one.
22N·m
3. Install the striker in the reverse order of removal.
(cont'd)
BACK 20.. 139

Seats
Rear Seat-back Cover/Pad Replacement (cont'd)
5. Remove the clips (A), and detach the clips (B), then 7. Pull outthe cap (A), and remove the screw.
remove the striker hole cover (e).
Fastener Locations
A [> : Clip, 2 B [> : Clip, 2
4f 91
8. Pull up the rear edge of the lock knob trim (A) to

6. Release the hooks (A), then remove the tether release, and remove trim from the hole in the seat-
anchor cover (B). back.
A
20-140 BACK
9. Remove the screws, and release the hooks (A), then 11. From behind the seat-back, release the hook (A),
remove the seat belt hole cover (B). Slip the rear and unzip the seat-back cover (B). Pull back the
center seat belt out through the slit (C) in the seat seat-back cover.
belt hole cover.
Fastener Locations
B
~:Screw,2
~ A A
12. Release the clips.
Fastener Locations
10. Pull out the armrest cover (A) to release the upper
edge of the cover, and detach the clip. Pull out the
armrest cover to release the hooks (B) from the
seat-back frame wire (C) and the hook (D).
Fastener Location
[>: Clip, 1
!fJ B
(cont'd)
BACK 20-141
Seats
Rear Seat-back Cover/Pad Replacement (cont'd)
13. Release the hooks (A) from the seat-back frame 16. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover all the
wire (8). way around, and release the clips (A) and plastic
plate (8), then remove the seat cushion cover (C).
14. Pull out the head restraint guides (A) and center
headrest guides (8) while pinching the tabs on the
ends of the guides, and remove them.

• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat

cushion cover, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the clips .
• Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ones. Install them with commercially available
D upholstery ring pliers (8).
15. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (C) from the seat- A

back frame (D), and pass the center seat belt (E) out
through a hole in the seat-back cover/pad.
20-142 BACK
Rear Seat Lock Replacement Rear Seat Side Bolster Cover
Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat NOTE: Take care not to tear the seams or damage the
covers. seat covers.
1. Remove the rear seat (see page 20-137). 1. Remove the side seat bolster (see page 20-138).
2. Remove the seat-back cover/pad (see page 20-139). 2. Remove the screws (A).
3. Remove the bolts securing the rear seat lock (A). 3. Pull out the seat belt guide (8) to detach the clip (C),
and remove the rear back side plate (0).
Fastener Locations
~: 801t.2
.\ A~;:" Cl't
Fastener Locations
A
B
"-SX1.Z5mm
o
22N·m
12.2 kgf·m.
16Ibf·ft)
4. Install the bracket in the reverse order of removal,

and make sure the rear seat locks and unlocks
properly. 4. Release the all the hook strips (A), and fold back the
seat side bolster cover (8), and release the cover
from the hooks (C).
A
5. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal. To

prevent wrinkles when installing a side bolster
over the pad before securing the hook strips and
staples.
BACK 20-143
Seats·
Rear Seat Cushion CoverIPad Replacement
NOTE: 3. Pull out the seat cushion frame (A) and cushion
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. undercover (8) from the seat cushion cover/pad (e)
• Take care not to tear the seams or damage the seat to separate them.
covers.
A
• The left seat cushion is shown; the right seat cushion
is similar.
1. Remove the rear seat cushions (see step 3 on page

20-137).
2. Release the hook strips (A) of the seat cushion

cover (8) from the seat cushion frame wire.
4. Release the hook strips (D) from the frame wire (E).
A
5. Remove the under cover (A) from the frame (8).
Take care not to damage the cover.
20-144 BACK
6. Pull back the edge of the seat cushion cover (A) all
the way around, and release the clips (B), then
remove the seat cushion cover.
B

• To prevent wrinkles when installing a seat

cushion cover, make sure the material is
stretched evenly over the pad before securing
the clips and hook strips .
• Replace any clips (A) you removed with new
ones. Install them with commercially available
upholstery ring pliers (B).
BACK 20-145
Bumpers
Front Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE: 2. Pull on the front bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas
• Have an assistant help you when removing and to release it from the hooks (8) on the side spacers
installing the front bumper. (e).
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper and body.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. (
1. Remove the screws (A, 8), and clips (e, D) securing
the front bumper (E).
NOTE: To remove the clips, pry the inner clip up at

the edge near the line (F) on its head.
Fastener Locations
C f>. Clip 7
iJ
A ~: Screw, 4 B ~: Screw, 2
_€)m>
_ __ _ ~
F F
3J F
o
F
3. With the help of an assistant, while pulling the
wheel arch portion away from the side spacer (A),
pull the front bumper to release the bumper from
the hooks (8) on the corner upper beam (e).
E
o B
20-146 BACK
4. With the help of an assistant, disconnect the front 6. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,
fog light connectors (A), then remove the front and note these items:
bumper (B).
• Make sure the front fog light connectors are
A plugged in properly.
• Make sure the front bumper engages the hooks
A (of both corner upper beams and side spacers)
on each side securely.
new ones.
5. Remove the front bumper absorber (A) from the

front bumper beam (B).
BACK 20.. 147

Bumpers
Front Bumper DisassemblyIReassembly
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the bumper faces. 3. With the help of an assistant, detach the hooks (A)
and separate the front bumper upper face from the
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-148). front bumper lower face.
2. Remove the screws (A) and the front fog lights,

then remove the bolts (B) and clips (C) securing the
front bumper upper face (D) and the front bumper
lower face (E).
Fastener Locations
A ~: Screw,S B ~: Bolt, 2 C l>: Clip, 2
~I
4. Reassemble the bumper faces in the reverse order

of removal.
20-148 BACK
Upper Front Bumper Grille Lower Front Bumper Grille
NOTE: NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the front bumper. • Take care not to scratch the front bumper .
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Put on gloves to protect your hands .
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-148). 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-148).
2. Release the hooks (A) from the front bumper upper 2. Release the hooks (A) from the front bumper lower
face (8), then remove the upper front bumper grille face (8), then remove the lower front bumper grille
(C). (C).
3. Install the upper front bumper grille in the reverse

order of removal. Push the hooks into place
securely.
3. Install the lower front bumper grille in the reverse

order of removal. Push the hooks into place
securely.
BACK 20-149
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Removal/Installation
NOTE: 3. With the help of an assistant while pulling the

• Have an assistant help you when removing and wheel arch portion away from the side spacer (A),
installing the rear bumper. pull the rear bumper to release the bumper from
• Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body. the hooks (B) on the side bracket (C).
1. Remove the caps (A). Then remove the bolts (B),

screws (C) and clips (D) securing the rear bumper
(E).
Fastener Locations
B ~ : Bolt, 4 C ~ : Screw, 4 D!>: Clip, 4
~I C
4. With the help of an assistant, pull the rear bumper

to release the bumper (A) from the hooks (B) on the
upper bracket (C).
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m 11.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft)
2. Pull on the rear bumper (A) at the wheel arch areas

to release it from the hooks (B) on the side spacers
(C).
20-150 BACK
5. Remove the hooks (A), then remove the rear 6. Install the bumper in the reverse order of removal,
bumper absorber (B) from the rear bumper beam and note these items:
(C).
• Make sure the rear bumper engages the hooks
(of both the side bracket and side spacers) on
each side securely.
new ones.
A A C
BACK 20-151
Bumpers
Rear Bumper Reflector Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body.
• Put on gloves to prevent damage.
1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-150).
2. Push out the clip (A), release the hook (B), then
remove the rear bumper reflector (C).
[1l~ A
3. Reattach the hook to the rear bumper first, and

push the clip into place securely.
20-152 BACK
Hood
Adjustment
• Front bumper (see page 20-146)

• Cowl cover (see page 20-163)
2. Slightly loosen each bolts (A).
A
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
B (1.0 kgf·m. 7.2Ibf·ft)
A
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m. 7.2Ibf·ft)
3. Adjust the hood alignment in this sequence:
• Adjust the hood right and left. as well as forward and rearward. by using the elongated holes in the hood
hinges (8).
• Turn the hood edge cushions (C). as necessary. to make the hood fit flush with the body at the front and side
edges.
4. Adjust the hood latch (0) to obtain the proper height at the forward edge, and move the hood latch right or left
until the striker (E) is centered in the hood latch.
5. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-153
Hood
Adjustment (cont'd) Hood Seal Replacement
6. Check that the hood opens properly and closes 1. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, then remove
securely. the hood seals (A). Take care not to scratch the
hood.
7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts
Fastener Locations
and around the hinges, and let the paint dry.
[>: Clip, 10
8. Apply mUltipurpose grease to the hood latch and
hood hinges as indicated by the arrows.
L
2. Install the seals in the reverse order of removal,

and check ifthe clips are damaged or stress-
whitened clips, and if necessary, replace them with
new ones.
9. Reinstall all ofthe removed parts.
20-154 BACK
Hood Insulator Replacement Charge Air Cooler Air Duct Removal
Iinstallation
1. Remove the charge air cooler air duct (see page
20-155).
1. With the help of an assistant, remove the charge air
2. Using a clip remover, detach the clips. Release the cooler air duct (A).
hooks (A), then remove the hood insulator (8). Take
Fastener Locations
care not to scratch the hood.
B ~ : Bolt, 4 C ~ : Bolt,2 • : Nut, 1
Fastener Locations
l>: Clip, 6
.1 B
3. Install the insulator in the reverse order of removal, 2. Install the air duct in the reverse order of removal.

new ones .
BACK 20-155
Tailgate
Adjustment
NOTE: 6. Adjust the tailgate (A) alignment in the following

• Have an assistant help you when adjusting the sequence:
tailgate.
• Take care not to scratch the tailgate, body and other • Adjust the tailgate hinges (8) right and left, using
related parts. the elongated holes.
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. • Turn the tailgate edge cushions (C), in or out as
necessary, to make the tailgate fit flush with the
1. Remove these items: body at the side edges.
• Adjust the fit between the tailgate and tailgate
• Quarter pillar trim, both sides (see page 20-75) opening by moving the striker (D), and adjust the
• Tailgate weatherstrip, as needed (see page striker right or left until it is centered in the
20-158) tailgate latch (E).
• Ceiling light (see page 22-197)
2. Pull down the rear portion of the headliner

(see page 20-85). Take care not to bend the
headliner excessively.
3. Remove the tailgate support strut from each side

(see page 20-157).
4. Pry up at the notch (A) to release the front hooks (8)

and pivot the cap (C) on the rear hooks (D), then
remove the cap.
8x 1.25mm
18 N·m 11.8 kgf·m, 13 bf·ft)
5. Slightly loosen the screws.
20-156 BACK
Tailgate Support Strut
Replacement
7. Tighten each bolt and nut securely.
8. Check that the tailgate opens properly and locks 1. With the help of an assistant, use a flat-tip
securely. screwdriver (A) to pry the support strut clips (8)
from each end of the support strut (C) at the tailgate
9. Reinstall the support struts securely. and body, then release the support strut from the
pivot bolts (D). Do not remove the clips from the
10. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting nuts support strut.
and around the hinges, and let the paint dry.
11. Apply multipurpose grease to the pivot portion of

the tailgate hinges (A) as indicated by the arrows .
.... A
2. Remove the bolts securing the support strut

bracket (A).
Fastener Locations
12. Reinstall all ofthe removed parts.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-157
Tailgate
Tailgate Support Strut Tailgate Weatherstrip Replacement

1. Remove the tailgate weatherstrip (A) by pulling out
on it.
3. Remove the bolts securing the support strut
bracket (A).
Fastener Locations
~: 801t,2
~I
..,FRONT
2. Locate the painted alignment mark (A) on the

A tailgate weatherstrip (8). Align the painted mark
with the alignment tab in the center of the tailgate
opening, and install the weatherstrip. Make sure it's
seated completely and facing in the direction
4. Set the clips (A) to the original position, then shown. Make sure there are no wrinkles in the
reattach the support strut (8) on the pivot bolts (C) weatherstrip.
by pushing the support strut onto the pivot.
..,FRONT A
3. Check for water leaks.
20-158 BACK
Fuel Fill Door
Adjustment
1. Release the hooks (A), then remove the lid (B). 6. Apply mUltipurpose grease to each location
indicated by the arrows.
2. Slightly loosen the hinge mounting bolts (A).

7. Apply touch-up paint to the hinge mounting bolts
and around the hinges.
A
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
3. Adjust the fuel fill door (B) in or out until it's flush
with the body, and up or down as necessary to
equalize the gaps.
4. Tighten the hinge mounting bolts.
5. Check that the fuel fill door opens properly and

locks securely, and check that the rear of the door is
flush with the body.
BACK 20-159
Fuel Fill Door
Fuel Cap Adapter Replacement
NOTE: Take carenottoscratch the body. 4. Remove the bolts, and lower the fuel filler pipe (A),
then remove it from the fuel cap adapter (8).
1. Remove the cap (A) by turning it counterclockwise,
Fastener Locations
and remove the screw.
~: Bolt, 2
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
@1II))1lI
1
Oom~ I
~I
A
!~u;r
~
2. Remove the fuel fill door adjustment lid (see step 1
on page 20-159). 5. Turn the fuel cap adapter (A), then remove it.
3. Remove the fuel pipe protector (see page 20-179).
6. Install the adapter in the reverse order of removal.
20-160 BACK
Exterior Trim
Front Grille Replacement
NOTE: 3. Remove the screw, then remove front emblem (A)

• When removing components, use the trim tools or from the front grille base (B) .
equivalent.
• Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and body. Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 2
~
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-146).
B
2. Remove the screws (A) and clips (B). Then remove
the front grille (C) from the front bumper (D) by
pulling it out. Take care not to scratch the front
bumper.
L
A
Fastener Locations
A ~: Screw, 4 B [>: Clip, 4
~ ~• C
4. Remove the screws, then release the hooks (A) and

remove the grille molding (B) from the front grille
base (C).
Fastener Locations
~: Screw, 4 C
D
B
l1
B
5. If necessary, release the hook (D), and remove the

front emblem base (E).
6. Install the grille in the reverse order of removal.
BACK 20-161
Exterior Trim
Hood Molding Replacement Front Fender Trim Replacement
Special Tools Required NOTE: Take care not to scratch the fender trim and
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * body.
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 1. Pull back the ends of hood rear seal (A), then
release the clips (B, C), and remove the front fender
NOTE: trim (D) .
avoid damage when prying components. Fastener Locations
• Take care not to scratch the hood. B t> : Clip, 1 C t> : Clip, 2
1. Using a 6 mm socket wrench, remove the special

nuts (A), and detach the clips (B) by pushing it, then
T
remove the hood molding (C). Take care not to
scratch the hood.
Fastener Locations A
B t> : Clip, 2
D~I
A • : Nut, 4
2. Install the fender trim in the reverse order of

removal:

new ones.
• Reinstall the hood seal.
2. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
new ones .
• After removing the molding, replace the nuts and
stud bolts (D) with new ones.
20-162 BACK
A-Pillar Corner Trim Replacement Cowl Cover Replacement

1. Open the front door. NOTE:

2. Apply protective tape around the body to prevent • Take care not to scratch the cowl covers and body.
damage. Carefully insert a trim tool next to the • Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to
upper clip, and detach the clip by prying on the avoid damage when removing components.
A-pillar corner trim (A). Take care not to scratch the
body and related parts. 1. Remove the these items:
Fastener Locations • Windshield wiper arms (see page 22-247) .

• Frontfender trim, both sides (see page 20-162).
2. From both sides of the cowl cover, release the

hooks (A) from the cowl cover (B) and the front
fender (C), then release the hood hinge cover (D)
from roof molding (E), then remove the covers.
A D
3. Pull the A-pillar corner trim back by hand to detach

the remaining lower clips, then remove the trim.

note these items:

new ones .
• Push the clip portions into place securely.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-163
Exterior Trim
Cowl Cover Replacement (cont'd)
3. Remove the passenger's cowl cover (A). 5. Remove the driver's cowl panel (A).
-1 Remove the hood rear seal (8) by pu lling it out. -1 Remove the clips (8).
-2 Remove the clip (C). -2 Release two front hooks (C) from the edge of
-a Release two front hooks (D) from the edge of the cover.
the cover. -a Detach the clips (0, E) by carefully pulling the
-4 Detach the clips (E, F) by carefully pulling the cover upward, then remove the cover. Take
cover upward, then remove the cover. Take care not to scratch the body.
care not to scratch the body.
Fastener Locations
Fastener Locations B [> : Clip, 2 D [> : Clip, 1 E [> : Clip, 4
,it
C [> : Clip, 1 E [> : Clip, 1 F [>: Clip, 3 (Blue) (White)
•
(Blue)
I
G

A
4. Disconnect the windshield washer tubes (G). whitened, and if necessary, replace them with
new ones.
• Make sure the washer tube is connected securely.
20-164 BACK
Door Molding Replacement
NOTE: 3. Using a utility knife, carefully cut the double-sided

• Take care not to scratch the door. adhesive tape (A) along the edge of the door
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. molding (B) .
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). Front door
2. From the front door, remove the plug cap (A), then A
remove the screw from the back of clip (B).
Fastener Location
~ : Screw, 1
Rear door
B
(cont'd)
BACK 20-165
Exterior Trim
Door Molding Replacement (cont'd)
4. With the help of an assistant, hold the side sill Rear door
panel (A). Cover the rear portion of panel with a
Fastener Locations
shop towel, then remove the panel by tapping it
with a plastic hammer. Do not tap the panel too B [>: Clip,S
hard. The clips will stay in the door panel. Turn the
clips (B, C) 45 °counterclockwise from the door
panel, and remove them.
~~(-I
Front door
Fastener Locations
B [> : Clip, 12 C [> : Clip, 1
~(- ~(- I
5. Check ifthe clips are damaged or stress-whitened,

and if necessary, replace them with new ones.
6. Install the clips on the side sill panel.
20-166 BACK
7. Scrape off the remaining double-sided adhesive 10. Holding the molding (A) up, and fit all the clips
tape from the molding and door, then clean the (8, C) into the holes in the door, then push on the
molding and door surfaces with a sponge molding until the clips snap into place.
dampened in isopropyl alcohol.
Front door
8. Rear door: Apply primer to the areas where the
Fastener Locations
panel will be applied.
B [> : Clip, 12 C [> : Clip, 1
9. Attach the double-sided adhesive tape (A) to the
molding (8), and fold the edge of each adhesive ~ ~~
backing from the double-sided adhesive tape.
Front door
Adhesive tape: Thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in.)

715 mm (28.1 in. I
I!il (S
A
B Rear door
Fastener Locations
B [>: Clip, 8
~~
Rear door
Adhesive tape: Thickness 1.2 mm (0.047 in.1

A 11. Carefully pull the adhesive backing away, and push

B
the molding into place securely.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-167
Exterior Trim
Door Molding Replacement (cont'd) Lower Front Fender Panel

Replacement
12. Install the screw into the back of clip, then reinstall
the plug cap to the front door.
NOTE:
Fastener Location
• When removing components, use the trim tools or
~ : Screw, 1 equivalent.
~
• Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the screws (A) and clips (8, C), then

remove the lower front fender panel (D).
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 3 B I> : Clip, 1 C 1>: Clip, 1
B
~•


new ones .
20-168 BACK
Roof Molding Replacement
Special Tools Required 3. Remove the windshield portion of the roof molding
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * (A).
Equipment Program; call 888-424-6857 -1 Carefully insert a trim tool remover (B) in under
the molding next to the clip (C).
NOTE: -2 Pry the outside edge of the roof molding at the
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to clip portion while pushing the molding toward
avoid damage when removing components. the outside to release the hooks (0).
• Take care not to scratch the body. -a Gradually work your way down to release each
of the clip portions, and release the molding
Removal from the hooks (E) on each clip.
• Hood hinge cover (see step 2 on page 20-163)

• Tailgate hinge cover (see page 20-171)
2. Start at the rear and working to the front, slowly

pull the roof molding (A) up to release the molding B
with the clips (B) from the stud bolts (C) on the
body, and to release the molding from the clips (0).
(cont'd)
BACK 20-169
Exterior Trim
Roof Molding Replacement (cont'd)
4. Release the hooks (A), then remove the clips Installation

(B, C, D) and the retainers (E) from the body.
5. Install the clips (A, B) on the roof molding (C).
NOTE: Replace any damaged clips and retainers.
6. Install the retainers (A) and the clip (B) on the body.
B
7. Install the tailgate hinge cover (see page 20-171).
20-170 BACK
Tailgate Hinge Cover Replacement
8. Install the roof molding (A). NOTE: Take care not to scratch the tailgate hinge cover
and body.
-1 Hold the roof molding up on the roof, and align
each clip to the stud bolts and retainers. 1. Open the tailgate. Release the inside hook (A) from
-2. Reconnect the rear end of the roof molding to the tailgate hinge (8) by pulling the rear of the
the front end of the tailgate hinge cover (8). tailgate hinge cover (C) up.
-a From the rear to the front, fit the roof molding
C
to the clips (C), and the clips (D) to the stud
bolts (E), then push on the molding until they
snap into place.
-4 From the top to the bottom, push the clips (F) in
the windshield portion of the roof molding until
they snap into place into the retainers (G).
2. Slide the tailgate hinge cover rearward to release it

from the pin (D), and to disengage it from the rear
end ofthe roof molding (E), then move the cover
F forward while lifting it. Close the tailgate, then
remove the cover.
3. Install the cover in the reverse order of removal.
9. Install the molding in the reverse order of removal,

• Check for the damaged or stress-whitened clips

and retainers, and if necessary, replace them
with new ones .
• Push the clips and retainer portions into place
securely.
BACK 20-171
Exterior Trim
Tailgate Spoiler Trim Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the tailgate spoiler trim 4. Install the trim in the revrse order of removal, and
and tailgate. note these items:
1. From inside the tailgate, remove the bolts (A). • Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
Fastener Locations
new ones.
A ~ : Bolt, 4 C I> : Clip, 1 01>: Clip,6 • Make sure the rear window wiper washer tube is
(Replace.)
connected securely, and the high mount brake
t:1 light connector is plugged in properly.
'v
A
5x1.2mm
\\ j
I
I
I
'.
I~,
(
5N·m
(0.5 kgf·m, 4 Ibf.ft) ~~A
5x1.2mm
5N·m
(0.5 kgf·m,
4Ibf.ft)
2. Remove the tailgate upper trim panel (see page

20-80).
3. Remove the tailgate spoiler trim (8).
-1 From inside the tailgate, release the clip (C).

-2 Close the tailgate, then lift the tailgate spoiler
trim to detach the clips (D).
-a Disconnect the rear window wiper washer tube
(E).
-4 Remove the grommet (F) from the tailgate,
then disconnect the high mount brake light
connector (G).
20-172 BACK
Rear License Trim Replacement
Special Tools Required 2. From inside the tailgate, push out and remove the
KTC trim tool set SOJATP2014 * clips (A).
A I> : Clip, 2 C I> : Clip, 2
~ l'~
NOTE:
I
• Use the appropriate tool from the KTC trim tool set to o
avoid damage when removing components.
1. Remove the maintenance lid (A) by prying the

hooks (8) and pulling it out.
:...-.._----'\:-;::;,B
3. Remove the rear license trim (8) .
...!l Close the tailgate, then the rear license trim (8)
to detach the clips (C).
-2 Disconnect the rear view camera connector (D).
-a Remove the grommet (E) from the tailgate.
note these items:

new ones.
• Make sure the rear view camera connector is
BACK 20-173
Exterior Trim
Tailgate Lower Trim Replacement
NOTE: 4. Pull out along the upper and lower edges on the
• Put on gloves to protect your hands. tailgate lower trim (A) to release the clips (B, C),
• Take care not to scratch the tailgate. then remove the tailgate lower trim from the
tailgate.
1. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page
20-80). Fastener Locations
2. Remove the taillights and lid taillights (see page

22-179).
B~i·· C~~r I
3. Remove the bolts securing the tailgate lower trim

(A).
Fastener Locations
G ===
~: Bolt,6
~I A

5x 1.2 mm note these items:
5N·m
(0.5 kgf·m, 4 Ibf·lt) • Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
new ones .
• Push the clips portions into place securely.
20-174 BACK
Emblem/Sticker Replacement
NOTE: When removing the emblems, take care not to scratch the body.
1. To remove the front "A" emblem, remove the front emblem base (see page 20c161).
2. Clean the body surface with a sponge dampened in isopropyl alcohol. After cleaning, keep oil, grease, and water
from getting on the surface.
3. Apply the emblem/sticker where shown. When installing the ULEV sticker on the inside surface of the left rear
door quarter glass, align the sticker with the edge of the glass mark as shown, then press the sticker into place,
and remove the application tape.
4. After installing the front "A" emblem, reinstall the front grille (see page 20-161).
FRONT "A" EMBLEM ACURA EMBLEM REAR "A" EMBLEM
RDXEMBLEM
Unit: mm lin.)
Adhesive tape: Thickness 0.8 mm (0.03 in.)
FRONT "A" EMBLEM SCREWS Edge of the taillight
RDXEMBLEM
FRONT GRILLE TAILGATE

Edge of the taillight Edge of the tailgate TURBO EMBLEM
ULEV STICKER 6.6

(0.26)
I j[~~fI]/
5 (0.2)
ACURA EMBLEM SH-AWD EMBLEM
BACK 20-175
Fenderwell
Front Inner Fender Replacement
NOTE: Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the front inner fender (A).
-1 On the back of the wheel arch, remove the screws (B, C, D).
-2 From under the front bumper (E), remove the clip (F) securing the front bumper, splash shield (G), and front
inner fender.
-a From the wheel arch, remove the clips (H) securing the front inner fender (and splash shield) to the body.
-4 Remove the front inner fender.
Fastener Locations
B ~: Screw, 1 C ~: Screw, 4 0 ~: Screw, 3 F t>: Clip, 1 H t>: Clip, 9
I
2. Install the inner fender in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them with new ones .
20-176 BACK
Front Splash Shield Replacement
1. Remove the splash shield (A).
-1 From under the front bumper (8), remove the screws (C).
~ From under the body, remove the clips (D, E).
-a Pull the splash shield out.
NOTE: To remove the clips C and D, pry the inner the clip up at the edge near the line (I) on its head.
Fastener Locations
C~:Screw,2 D[>:Clip,5
2. Install the splash shield in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them with new ones .
BACK 20-177
Fenderwell
Front Fender Fairing Replacement
1. Remove the front inner fender as needed (see page 4. Remove the front fender fairing (A).
20-176).
2. From the wheel arch, remove the clips.

Fastener Locations
t>:~ I 0\
5. Install the fender fairing in the reverse order of


new ones .
3. Open the front door. From inside the door, remove • Push the clips and hooks into place securely.
the clips securing the front fender fairing (A).
Fastener Locations
20-178 BACK
Fuel Pipe Protector Replacement Rear Fender Cover Replacement
NOTE: NOTE: Take care not to scratch the rear bumper and
• Take care notto scratch the body . body.
1. Remove the screws (A) and clip (B), then remove
1. Remove the left rear wheel (see page 18-32). the rear fender cover (C) from the rear bumper (0)
and body.
2. Remove the bolts (A) and clips (B), then remove the
fuel pipe protector (C). Fastener Locations
A ~ : Screw, 6 B I> : Clip, 1
~ ~•
Fastener Locations
A ~ : Bolt, 2 B I> : Clip, 2
o3Jmm .~ I
"
6x 1.0mm
9.8 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) 2. Install the fender cover in the reverse order of
removal.
3. Install the protector in the reverse order of removal,

new ones .
BACK 20-179
Fenderwell
Rear Wheel Arch Protector Rear Door Wheel Arch Seal

1. Remove the rear wheel arch protector (A) by NOTE:

pulling it away from the wheel arch. • When removing components, use the trim tools or
equivalent.
• Take care not to scratch the body.
1. Remove the screw securing the rear door wheel

arch seal (A).
Fastener Locations
~ : Screw, 3
B
A
2. Apply clear weatherstrip sealant (B) into the

channel ofthe wheel arch protector all the way
around.
3. To reinstall the rear wheel arch protector, align it

with the rear of the wheel arch, and then push it
into place securely.
2. If necessary, separate the rear door wheel arch seal

(A) and the rear door wheel arch seal bracket (B) by
pulling the seal from the bracket.
20-180 BACK
Rear Strake Replacement Rear Air Outlet Replacement
1. Remove the clip (A) and screw (8), then remove the 1. Remove the rear bumper (see page 20-150).
rear strake (e). Take care not to scratch the rear
bumper (D). 2. Detach the hooks (A), then remove the rear air
outlet (8). Take care not to scratch the body.
Fastener Locations
A I> : Clip, 1 B ~ : Screw, 1 Left side
Right side
2. Install the strake in the reverse order of removal.
3. Install the air outlet by pushing on the hook

portions until the hooks snap into place.
BACK 20-181
Openers
TAILGATE LATCH
Replacement,
page 20-188
FUEL FILL
DOOR LATCH
Replacement,
step 5 on page 20-185
FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER CABLE

FUEL FILL DOOR OPENER

HOOD LATCH
HOOD OPENER CABLE

20-182 BACK
Hood Opener Cable Replacement
NOTE:
• Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.
• Front bumper (see page 20-146)

• Front inner fender (see page 20-176)
• Kick panel (see step 3 on page 20-67).
2. Disconnect the hood opener cable (A) from the hood latch (8) (see page 20-187), and remove the hood release
handle (C) (see page 20-188). Take care not to kink the cable.
Fastener Locations
3. Using a clip remover, detach the clips, release the hood opener cable from the clip, and remove the grommet (D)
from the body, then remove the hood opener cable from the vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable.
4. Install the cable in the reverse order of removal, and note these items:
• Check if the clips are damaged or stress-whitened, and if necessary, replace them with new ones.
• Route the cable through the hole (I) in the body.
• Make sure the hood opens properly and locks securely.
BACK 20-183
Openers
Fuel Fill Door Opener Cable Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 3. Release the opener cable (A) from the clip (B) and
SRS component locations (see page 24-12), and the hooks (C) of the wire harness bands. Remove the
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before wire harness band (D) and cushion tape (E).
performing repairs or service.
Fastener Locations
NOTE: B 1>: Clip, 1 C 1>: Hook, 4 01>: Band, 1
~ ~ ~
• Take care not to scratch the body and related parts.
1. Remove these items: E I> : Cushion tape, 2
•
•
Rear seat cushion (see page 20-137)
Rear seat side bolster (see page 20-138) </ I
• Front door sill trim, driver's (see page 20-66)
• Kick panels, driver's sides (see step 3 on page
20-67)
• Rear door sill trim, (see page 20-68)
• Cargo area side trim panel, left side (see step 4
A
on page 20-77)
• Fuel fill door opener (see page 20-186)
2. Pull the carpet back as needed.
20-184 BACK
4. While pinching the hooks (A) from inside the 7. Install the opener cable in the reverse order of
vehicle, remove the grommet (8) from the body. removal, and note these items:
• Align the marks (A) on the opener cable (8) with

the cable clip (C), wire harness band (0) and
A cushion tapes (E) as shown .
• Replace any damaged clips, and replace the
B cushion tape.
A
5. Release the hook (A), then remove the grommet (8)

from the fuel fill door latch (C).
6. Remove the fuel fill door opener cable from the

vehicle. Take care not to kink the cable.
BACK 20-185
Openers
Fuel Fill Door Opener Replacement
1. Remove these items: 3. Disconnect the fuel fill door opener cable (A), then
remove the opener (8). Take care not to kink the
• Front seat, drive side (see page 20-118) cable .
• Front door sill (see page 20-66)
2. Remove the bolts, then remove the fuel fill door

opener (A) from the body.
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt, 2
@1l1l11J I
4. Install the opener in the reverse order of removal,

• Make sure the opener cable is connected

properly.
6x 1.0mm • Make sure the fuel fill door opens properly and
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ft) locks securely.
• Fix at the original position in the outer end of
cable on the fuel fill door opener securely.
20-186 BACK
Hood Latch Replacement
1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-146). 5. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and
note these items:
2. Detach the clips, then remove the hood lock cover
(A). • Check if the clips are damaged or stress-
Fastener Locations new ones.
!>: Clip, 2 • Apply multipurpose grease to each location of
the hood latch indicated by the arrows.
• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected
properly and hood latch switch connector is
• Adjust the hood latch alignment (see step 4 on
page 20-153).
• Make sure the hood opens properly and locks
securely.
3. Disconnect and detach the hood latch switch

connector (A).
Fastener Locations
~: Bolt, 3
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
A (1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
4. Remove the bolts, then remove the hood latch (B)

from the body, and disconnect the hood opener
cable (C) from the hood latch.
BACK 20-187
Openers
Hood Release Handle Replacement Tailgate Latch Replacement
1. Remove the kick panel (see step 3 on page 20-67). NOTE:

2. Remove the bolt, then remove the hood release • If the tailgate latch doesn't open by pulling the
handle (A) from the body. tailgate handle or using the keyless entry transmitter,
remove the maintenance lid (A) from the tailgate
Fastener Locations lower trim panel, then turn the emergency lever (8)
~ : Bolt, 2 B clockwise as shown.
©Jmni
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
3. Disconnect the hood opener cable (8) from the

hood release handle. Take care not to kink the cable.
4. Install the hood release handle in the reverse order

• Make sure the hood opener cable is connected

properly .
• Make sure the hood opens properly.
20-188 BACK
1. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see step 4 on
page 20-81).
2. Disconnect the actuator connector (A) and latch

switch connector (B), then remove the bolts.
Fastener Locations
8x 1.25 mm
22N·m
12.2 kgf.m, 16Ibf·ft)
3. Pull the tailgate latch (C) out, then remove the latch.
4. Install the latch in the reverse order of removal, and

note these items:

properly .
• Make sure the tailgate opens properly and locks
securely.
BACK 20-189
Frame
Rear Damper Gusset Replacement
• Cargo area side trim panel (see page 20-76)

• Floor side spacer (see page 20-79)
2. Remove the bolts (A) and nuts (8), then remove the
rear damper gusset (C).
B
8x 1.25 mm
A
8x1.25mm
22 N·m 12.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ftl
3. Install the gusset in the reverse order of removal.
20-190 BACK
Subframe Replacement
Front Subframe Torque
• After loosening the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones .
• When installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe with both reference holes in the body using
a screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide.
FRONT SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
REFERENCE HOLE
IBodyside)
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE HOLE
ISubframe side)
GEARBOX FRONT
STIFFENER
To body
INSTALLATION /
REFERENCE HOLE
SPECIAL BOLTS
14x1.5mm
FRONT SUSPENSION 103 N·m
SUBFRAME (10.5 kgf·m, 76lbf·ttl
Replace.
SPECIAL BOLTS
12x 1.25 mm
14x 1.5 mm 64N·m
103N·m (6.5 kgf·m, 47 Ibf·tt)
Replace.
(cont'd)
BACK 20-191
Frame
Subframe Replacement (cont'd)
Rear Subframe Torque
NOTE:
• After removing the subframe mounting bolts, be sure to replace them with new ones .
• When installing, align both installation reference holes in the subframe with the reference holes in the body using a
screwdriver or tapered punch as a guide.
~
Reference hole alignment
SUBFRAME
'/l
llJ S SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
INSTALLATION
REFERENCE HOLE
(Subframe side)
REAR SUSPENSION
SUBFRAME
SCREWDRIVER or
TAPERED PUNCH
To Body
To Body
Front of
10x 1.25mm
38N·m
(3.9 kgf·m,
28Ibf.ft)
? 10x 1.25 mm
38N·m
Replace. (3.9 kgf.m,
REAR SUBFRAME 28Ibf·ft)
FRONT BRACKET SPECIAL BOLTS REAR SUBFRAME
14x1.25mm REAR BRACKET
103 N·m (10.5 kgf.m, 75.9 Ibf·ft)
Replace.
20-192 BACK
BACK 20-193
Frame
Frame Repair Chart
Top View
Unit: mm (in.)
8: Inner diameter
a1 For front subframe mount 816 (0.63) forward

a2 For front subframe mount 814 (0.55) middle
VERTICAL LINE
a3 For front subframemount 8 16 (0 63) rearward
a4 For front subframe mount 816 (0.63) center side
b For eng in e side mount 813 (0.51)
c1 For transm ission mount 813 (0.51)
forward 0 fframeside
c2 For transm ission mount 813 (0.51)
rearward of frame side
c3 For transm ission mount 811 (0.43) 436 (17.2)
forward 0 f wheelhouse side 456 (18.0) 425 (16.7)
c4 For transm ission mount 811 (0.43) 273 (10.7) 381 (15.0)
rearward of wheelhouse side 36.1 (1.42)
jd3 d4 /n
I( L>l Cl /
----L_
/J I /e
/
II
r--.
.c,
~J
~ !J J
,g " ~
( ",. r-, ~
;;?'~ ..L "" p
/0
d \J.I
/' / /
lF~ III
/'
a1 b d~
d2
.! \2 ~r
III
a3~
M
i '"III
g
... -
~ iD M r= a4 co ..,
V[ ~ """"-
en
-
CDr -_-
~r-)
)~
CD 0
"l ,.;
~ ~
ai .,; .., -
..,~
N
CENTER
....
~ ~ ! I"---- ~ Rl ~
-
~ DO
~
CD 0 0
LINE &l 1D
~~
III
~ ...~ DO
'" DO a... ...t:: ~III
r---J::- '" ~~
IL--J
iD
... r= \ 0 L--------r I - r-
c:i
~
~ ~ 100
(3.94)
(
! c1 ~ c2
Id~
!:.l
III II
N
'" \ ~ 'L. III
'; \ =
.., '8 ::-::
~ ~
::0=
'C I'
; II \ /)<
V A rl,.D 11..0 101 L...o= '" .r
g: (3.98) ~
) IL
~ c{
6(0.24)
13 (0.51)
d1 For front damper mount 811.5 (0.45)
92(3.6)
d2 For front d amper mount 811.5 (0.45) 144 (5.67)
d3 Frontdam per center hole 874 (2.9) 178 (7.01) 775 (30.5)
230 (9.06)
e Outrigger locating hole 827.4 (1.08)
n Front floo r locating hole 850 (1.97) forward
20-194 BACK
f2 Front floor locating hole
825 10.98) rearward
g Side sill lower extension
locating hole 815 10.59)
3200 (1260)
2976 (117.2) h1 For fuel tan k strap mount
812 (0.47) Ieft side
2737 (107.8) 10
2836 (93.94) (0.39) h2 For fuel tan k strap' mount
2061 (81.14) 811 10.43) ri ghtslde .
2030 (79.92) -1 3 (0.12) i Rear floor Iocatina hole
1861 (73.27) 825 10.98) f orwar
1760 (69.29)
j1 For trailing arm mount
814.(0.55) 0 utside
814 (0.55) center side
k Rear frame extension
locating hoi e 820 (0.79)
11 For rear su bframe mount
815 10.59) f orward
1
I
r:: ....
-;t-+----l
co
N ...co...
cq ~
....
~ E
1
1
12 For rear subframe mount
815 10.59) rearward
h1
m
/ \ m For rear damper mount
824 (0.94)
n Rear spring center
88.5 (0.33)
1590 (62.60)
01 Cross-member locating hole
83511.4) left side
2220 (87.40)
2941 (115.8) 02 Cross-member locating hole
835 1.4) right side
p Rear frame locating hole
82510.98)
(cont'd)
BACK 20-195
Frame
Frame Repair Chart (cont'd)
Side View
Unit: mm (in.)
8: Inner diameter
a1 For front subframe mount 816 (0.63) forward

a2 For front subframe mount 814 (0.55) middle
a3 For front subframe mount 816 (0.63) rearward
a4 For front subframe mount 816 (0.63) center side
b For engine side mount 813 (0.51) 3-811.5 (0.45)
c1 For transmission mount 813 (0.51)
forward of frame side
rearward of frame side
\ ,6 0
c4
forward of wheelhouse side
For transmission mount 811 (0.43)
\I'
rearward of wheelhouse side r=h
[ SECTION: AA ]
c4
M10x 1.25
c3 d2
M10 x 1.25 d1
b
M12x 1.25 d4
N '<t
"tI "tI
i'1 Pi
g ~
&j
III
d1 For front damper mount 811.5 (0.45) a1

M14x 1.5
a2
d3 Front damper center hole 874 (2.9) M14x 1.5
d4 For front damper mount 811.5 (0.45) a3
VERTICAL LINE M14x 1.5
e Outrigger locating hole 827.4 (1.08)
f1 Front floor locating hole 850 (1.97) forward
20-196 BACK
f2 Front floor locating hole 12 For rear subframe mount
825 (0.98) rearward 815 (0.59) rearward
g Side sill lower extension m For rear damper mount
locating hole 815 (0.59) 824 (0.94)
h1 For fuel tank strap mount n Rear spring center
812 (0.47) left side 88.5 (0.33)
h2 For fuel tank strap mount 01 Cross-member locating hole
811 (0.43) right side 835 (1.4) left side
Rear floor locatina hole 02 Cross-member locating hole
~
825 (0.98) forwar 835 (1.4) right side
j1 For trailing arm mount p Rear frame locating hole
814 (0.55) outside 825 (0.98)
814 (0.55) center side
k Rear frame extension
locating hole 820 (0.79) [ SECTION: BB ]
11 For rear subframe mount
815 (0.59) forward
m
12
M12x 1.25
01,02
p
.- ... ...... er= .-r::."!

~
.-!:! !i...... co
~ co en ~
...
"l
!i 00 ~
c:;;
e CD ~ !:! e !i
~ en
.... ~ en
~ :g ~
'"
N
N
:;:
~ 00 1ii .... '"'" N '"
00
.r.
BACK 20-197
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If HVAC maintenance is required)
curtain airbags in the sides ofthe roof, and side airbags in the front seat-backs. Information necessary to safely service
airbags may deploy.
BACK
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and
Air Conditioning)
Special Tools ............................................... 21-2 Driver's Air Mix Control Motor Test .......... 21-83
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Climate Control Replacement ............................................ 21-83
Component Location Index ....................... 21-3 Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
AlC Service Tips and Precautions ............. 21-6 Test ........................................................... 21-84
AlC Refrigerant Oil Replacement .............. 21-6 Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor
AlC Line Replacement ................................ 21-7 Replacement ............................................ 21-85
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 21-8 Mode Control Motor Test .......................... 21-85
DTC Troubleshooting Index ....................... 21-14 Mode Control Motor Replacement ........... 21-86
Symptom Troubleshooting Index ............. 21-15 Recirculation Control Motor Test .............. 21-86
System Description .................................... 21-16 Recirculation Control Motor
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 21-24 Replacement ............................................ 21-87
DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 21-26 Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement .......... 21-87
Recirculation Control Motor Climate Control Unit
Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 21-55 Removal and Installation ........................ 21-88
Climate Control Power and Ground Climate Control Switch
Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 21-57 Removal and Installation ........................ 21-88
Navigation Communication Line Climate Control Switch Bulb
Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 21-58 Replacement ............................................ 21-89
Audio Communication Line Blower Unit Removal and Installation ...... 21-90
Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 21-60 Blower Unit Component Replacement ..... 21-91
Climate Control Switch Communication Evaporator Core Replacement .................. 21-92
Line Circuit Troubleshooting ................. 21-61 * Heater Unit/Core Replacement ................. 21-94
Radiator and AlC Condenser Fan Heater Valve Cable Adjustment ................ 21-97
Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting ...... 21-65 AlC Compressor Replacement .................. 21-98
AlC Condenser Fan High Speed AlC Compressor Clutch Check .................. 21-100
Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 21-70 AlC Compressor Clutch Overhaul ............. 21-101
AlC Compressor Clutch AlC Compressor Thermal Protector
Circuit Troubleshooting .......................... 21-73 Replacement ............................................ 21-102
AlC Signal CircuitTroubleshooting .......... 21-76 AlC Compressor Relief Valve
In-car Temperature Sensor Test ............... 21-78 Replacement ............................................ 21-102
In-car Temperature Sensor AlC Condenser Replacement ..................... 21-103
Replacement ............................................ 21-78 Receiver/Dryer Desiccant Replacement ... 21-104
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Test ...... 21-79 Refrigerant Recovery ................................. 21-105
Outside Air Temperature Sensor System Evacuation ..................................... 21-106
Replacement ............................................ 21-79 System Charging ........................................ 21-107
Sunlight Sensor Test .................................. 21-80 Refrigerant Leak Test ................................. 21-108
Sunlight Sensor Replacement ................... 21-80 AlC System Test ......................................... 21-109
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Test ...... 21-81
Power Transistor Replacement ................. 21-81
Power Transistor Test ................................ 21-82
HVAC (Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning)
Special Tools
Tool Number Descri tion

07SAZ-001000A
CD
21-2 BACK
Climate Control
I SE;RVICE VALVE
(LOW-PRESSURE SIDE)
EVAPORATOR CORE
(Located-in the heater unit)
RECEIVER/DRYER DESICCANT
A/C CONDENSER
A/C COMPRESSOR
Clutch Check, page 21-100
Clutch Overhaul, page 21-101
Thermal Protector Check, page 21-100
Thermal Protector Replacement, page 21-102
Relief Valve Replacement, page 21-102
(cant'd)
BACK 21-3
Climate Control
Component location Index (cont'd)
RADIATOR FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-64
A/CCONDENSER FAN RELAY

Test, page 22-64
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY

Test, page 22-64
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY

Test, page 22-64
A/CDIODEA
PCM
RADIATOR FAN
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

A/C PRESSURE SENSOR Test, page 21-79
21-4 BACK
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
Test, page 21-80 MODE CONTROL MOTOR
Replacement, page 21-80 Test, page 21-85
AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAV UNIT
(With navigation)
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX
EVAPORATOR CORE CONTROL MOTOR
(Located in the heater unit) Test, page 21-84
HEATER UNIT/CORE
page 21-94 RECIRCULATION CONTROL
--==-~~~ MOTOR
Test, page 21-86
DUST AND POLLEN FILTER

BLOWER UNIT
page 21-90
Component Replacement,
page 21-91
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT

page 21-88
DRIVER'S AIR MIX

CONTROL MOTOR
Test, page 21-83 EVAPORATOR AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAV UNIT
Replacement, page 21-83 TEMPERATURE (Without navigation)
SENSOR Replacement, page 23-101
Test,page 21-81
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Test, page 21-78
POWER TRANSISTOR
Test, page 21-82
DRIVER'S CLIMATE CONTROL SWITCH
Removal and Installation, page 21-88
Bulb Replacement, page 21-89
BACK 21-5
Climate Control
A/C Service Tips and Precautions A/C Refrigerant Oil Replacement

Recommended PAG oil: SP-10
AWARNING
• Compressed air mixed with the R-134a forms a • PIN 38897-P13-A01AH: 120 mL (4 fl·oz)
combustible vapor. • PIN 38899-P13-A01: 40 mL (11/3 fl·oz)
• The vapor can burn or explode causing serious
injury. Add the recommended refrigerant oil in the amount
• Never use compressed air to pressure test listed if you replace any of the following parts.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air
conditioning systems. • To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to the
container once dispensed, and never mix it with other
refrigerant oils.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap on
ACAUTION the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor absorption.
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. • Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it may
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. damage the paint; if it gets on the paint, wash it off
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. immediately.
AlC condenser
The air conditioning system uses HFC-134a (R-134a) (including Dryer
refrigerant and polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil, Desiccant) ................ 50 mL (1 2/3 fl·oz)
which are not compatible with CFC-12 (R-12) refrigerant Evaporator .............. .40 mL (1 1/3 fl·oz)
and mineral oil. Do not use R-12 refrigerant or mineral Line or hose ............. 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz)
oil in this system, and do not attemptto use R-12 Receiver/Dryer
servicing equipment; damage to the air conditioning Desiccant ................. 10 mL (1/3 fl·oz)
system or your servicing equipment will result. Leakage repair ......... 25 mL (5/6 fl·oz)
Use only service equipment that is U.L.-listed and is AlC compressor ....... Since the oil separator is
certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to equipped inside the compressor
remove R-134a from the air conditioning system. for this vehicle, oil drainage is
unnecessary at the time of
If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the compressor replacement.
work area before resuming service.
R-134a service equipment or vehicle air conditioning

systems should not be pressure tested or leak tested
with compressed air.
Additional health and safety information may be

obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant
manufacturers.
• Always disconnect the negative cable from the

battery whenever replacing air conditioning parts.
• Keep moisture and dirt out of the system. When
disconnecting any lines, plug or cap the fittings
immediately; don't remove the caps or plugs until
just before you reconnect each line.
• Before connecting any hose or line, apply a few drops
of refrigerant oil to the O-ring.
• When tightening or loosening a fitting, use a second
wrench to support the matching fitting.
• When discharging the system, use an R-134a
refrigerant recovery/recycling/charging station; don't
release refrigerant into the atmosphere.
21-6 BACK
Ale Line Replacement
A/CLINES
A/C PRESSURE
SENSOR
A/C CONDENSER
A/C COMPRESSOR
BRACKET
A/C COMPRESSOR ~--::::='- @
CD Discharge hose to the A/C compressor (6 x 1.0 mml: 9.S N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 Ibf·ftl
® Discharge hose to the A/C condenser (6 x 1.0 mml: 9.S N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
® Receiver line to the A/C condenser (6 x 1.0 mml: 9.S N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 Ibf.ftl
® A/C pressure sensor to receiver line (11 x 1.0 mml: 11.3 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, S.3 Ibf·ftl
® Receiver line to the A/C line (16x 1.5 mml: 13.3 N·m (1.4 kgf.m, 9.Slbf·ftl
® A/C lines to the evaporator (6 x 1.0 mml: 9.S N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2Ibf·ftl
(j) A/C line to the suction hose (24 x 1.5 mml: 31.9 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23.5 Ibf·ftl
® Suction hose to the A/C compressor (6 x 1.0 mml: 9.S N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 Ibf·ftl
® A/C compressor to the water passage (S x 1.25 mml: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16lbf·ftl
@ A/C compressor to the A/C compressor bracket (10 x 1.25 mml: 45 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32.5Ibf·ftl
@ A/C compressor bracket to the engine block (S x 1.25 mml: 24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 17.7 Ibf·ftl
BACK 21-7
Climate Control
How to Check for DTCs with the HDS
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (DLC) (A) located under the driver's side of the dashboard.
4. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle and the climate control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the DLC
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select DTCs in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Check for DTCs. If any DTCs are indicated, write down the DTCs, then go to the indicated DTC troubleshooting. If
no DTCs are indicated, refer to symptom troubleshooting.
NOTE:
• After troubleshooting, clear the DTCs with the HDS .
• For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HDS.
21·8 BACK
How to Use the Self-diagnostic Function with the HOS
2. Connect the HOS to the data link connector (OLC).
4. Make sure the HOS communicates with the vehicle and the climate control unit. If it doesn't, troubleshoot the OLC
5. Select HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL in the BOOY ELECTRICAL menu.
6. Select INSPECTION in the HVAC/CLIMATE CONTROL menu.
7. Select CLIMATE CONTROL SELF TEST in the INSPECTION menu.
8. Check for OTCs. If any OTCs are indicated, write down the OTCs, then go to the indicated OTC troubleshooting.
NOTE:
• After troubleshooting, clear the OTCs with the HOS .
• For specific operations, refer to the user's manual that came with the HOS.
(cont'd)
BACK 21 ..9
Climate Control
How to Use the Self-diagnostic Function without the HDS

The climate control unit has a self-diagnostic function. To run the self-diagnostic function, do the following:
2. Press and hold the OFF button.
3. While holding the OFF button, press the rear window defogger/mirror defogger button five times within
10 seconds. Release the buttons and the self-diagnostic function will begin.
NOTE:
• It may take up to 20 seconds for the self-diagnostic to begin.
• The blower motor can be run at various speeds regardless of what the panel is displaying.
• If there is any problem in the system, the driver's temperature indicator will light up the segment (A through P)
and AUTO indicator corresponding to the error. The temperature indicator will then alternate every second
between displaying "88" (all segments lit) and the error code segment (A through P) and AUTO indicator. To
determine the meaning of the DTC, refer to checking for DTCs.
• If there are no problems detected, the segments will not illuminate, and the system will appear to be turned off.
AUDIO-HVAC SUBDISPLAY (with Navigation)
AUTO INDICATOR
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY (without Navigation)
I BB AUTO AlC ON
TEUP \ AlC OFF
~ •• "
t", ,•••••••, TEUP
BB I
TEMPERATURE \ REAR WINDOW
INDICATOR DEFOGGER' TEMPERATURE
AUTO INDICATOR MIRROR DEFOGGER BUTTON INDICATOR
DRIVER'S CLIMATE
CONTROL SWITCH OFF BUTTON
Canceling the Self-diagnostic Function
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF to cancel the self-diagnostic function. After completing repair work, run the self-
diagnostic function again to make sure that there are no other DTCs.
21-10 BACK
Checking for DTCs
The temperature display indicates single or multiple DTCs. If indicator segments A, C, E and G are on at the same time,
there may be an open in the common ground wire. If no DTCs are present, the indicator remains blank.
DRIVER'S TEMPERATURE INDICATOR AUTO INDICATOR
AUTO
DTe (Driver's Detection Item

Temperature
Indicator
Segment and
AUTO
Indicator)
AandAUTO An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-29)
BandAUTO A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit (seepafle 21-31)
CandAUTO An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-32)
DandAUTO A short in the outside air temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-33)
E and AUTO An open in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-34)
FandAUTO A short in the sunlight sensor circuit (see page 21-35)
G and AUTO An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-36)
H and AUTO A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit (see page 21-38)
J and AUTO An open in the driver's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-39)
KandAUTO A short in the driver's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-40)
LandAUTO A problem in the driver's air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-41)
M and AUTO A open in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-43)
N and AUTO A short in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit (see page 21-44)
PandAUTO A problem in the passenger's air mix control linkage, door, or motor (see page 21-45)
A An open or short in the mode control motor circuit (see page 21-47)
B A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, or motor (see page 21-49)
F A problem in the blower motor circuit (see page 21-51)
G Climate control unit internal error (see page 21-26)
H Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control module (VSP/NE message)
(see page 21-26)
J Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control module (lLLMI message) (see page
21-28)
K Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control module (ECT message) (see page
21-27)
M Communication bus line error (bus-off) (see page 22-99)
(cont'd)
BACK 21-11
Climate Control
Displaying Sensor Inputs at the Climate Control Unit

The climate control unit has a mode that displays sensor inputs it receives. This mode shows you what the climate
control unit is receiving from each of the sensors, one at a time, and it can help you determine if a sensor is faulty.
Check these items before using the sensor input display mode
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the recirculation door function; press the recirculation button to switch
from FRESH to RECIRC. The air volume and sound should change slightly.
2. Set the temperature control knob to the desired test temperature. When selecting the test temperature, note these
items:
• "Lo" temperature setting will default to MAX COOL, VENT, and RECIRC.
• "Hi" temperature setting will default to MAX HOT, FLOOR, and FRESH.
• 58 through 86 "F settings will use the automatic climate control logic.
To run the sensor input display mode, follow these steps

2. Press and hold both the AUTO and REC buttons, then start the engine.
3. After the engine starts, release the buttons. The audio-HVAC display panel will flash the sensor number and then
the value for that sensor. Record the value displayed.
4. To advance to the next sensor, press the rear window defogger button.
Sensor Item Displayed Value

1 Mode Positioning BIT
2 In-car Temperature "C
3 Outside Air Temperature "C
4 Solar Radiation Sensor Value: Dark = 00, Flashlight = 04, Cloudy = 10, 10 kcal/m 2·h
Sunny =65
5 Evaporator Temperature "C
6 Driver's Air Mix Opening (Low value indicates cooler air distribution, % of opening
higher value indicates warmer air distribution)
7 Passenger's Air Mix Opening (Low value indicates cooler air % of opening
distribution, higher value indicates warmer air distribution)
8 Recirculation Opening % of opening
9 Vehicle Speed (Vehicle must be driven to display speed) 10 km/h
A Engine Coolant Temperature "C
B Vent Temperature Air Out (TAO) "C
NOTE:
• The sensor values will be displayed in degrees Celsius ("C) or an alphanumeric code. Use the chart to convert
the value to degrees Fahrenheit ("F).
• If the sensor value displays "Er", this indicates there is an open or short in the circuit or sensor. Check for DTCs
using the HDS, or refer to checking DTCs by DTC indication.
• If necessary, compare the sensor input display to a known-good vehicle under the same test conditions.
• If the sensor is out of the normal range, refer to the sensor test or substitute with a known-good sensor, and
recheck.
5. To cancel the sensor input display mode, press the AUTO button or turn the ignition switch off.
BACK
21-12
Celsius to Fahrenheit Conversion Table
"C "F "C "F "C "F "C "F "C "F
0 32 10 50 20 68 30 86 40 104
1 34 11 52 21 70 31 88 41 106
2 36 12 54 22 72 32 90 42 108
3 37 13 55 23 73 33 91 43 109
4 39 14 57 24 75 34 93 44 111
5 41 15 59 25 77 35 95 45 113
6 43 16 61 26 79 36 97 46 115
7 45 17 63 27 81 37 99 47 117
8 46 18 64 28 82 38 100 48 118
9 48 19 66 29 84 39 102 49 120
"C "F "C "F "C "F "C "F "C "F
50 122 60 140 70 158 80 176 90 194
51 124 61 142 71 160 81 178 91 196
52 126 62 144 72 162 82 180 92 198
53 127 63 145 73 163 83 181 93 199
54 128 64 147 74 165 84 183 94 201
55 131 65 149 75 167 85 185 95 203
56 133 66 151 76 169 86 187 96 205
57 135 67 152 77 170 87 188 97 207
58 136 68 154 78 172 88 190 98 208
59 139 69 158 79 174 89 192 99 210
Alphanumeric" Converslon T abl e

Display Reading "C "F %
(Alphanumeric)
A1 thru A9 -1 thru-9 30 thru 16 -1 thru-9
80thru 89 -10thru -19 14thru -2 -10thru -19
COthru C9 -20thru -29 -4thru -20 -20thru -29
DO thru 09 -30thru -39 -22thru -38 -30thru -39
EOthru E9 -40thru -49 -40thru -58 -40thru -49
FO thru F9 -- -- +100 thru +109
" Converslon Table 1M od e Posit"10m"ng)

AIIplhanumerlc
Display Reading Mode Position
(Alphanumeric)
01 OVER VENT
02 VENT
03 VENT-HEATNENT
04 HEATNENT
05 HEATNENT-HEAT
06 HEAT
07 HEAT-HEAT/DEF
08 HEAT/DEF
09 HEAT/DEF-DEF
10 DEF
11 OVER DEF
BACK 21-13
Climate Control
DTe Troubleshooting Index
Checklngt he DTCs b)y HDS

DTC Detection Item or Symptom ECU DTCtype P~ge
81200 Communication bus line error (bus-off) Climate control Loss of (see page 22-99)
unit communication
81205 Climate control unit lost communication Climate control Loss of (see page 21-26)
with gauge control module (VSP/NE unit communication
message)
with gauge control module (ECT message) unit communication
with gauge control module (lLLUMI unit communication
message)
81225 An open in the in-car temperature sensor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-29)
circuit unit
81226 A short in the in-car temperature sensor Climate control Signal error (see page 21-31)
circuit unit
81227 An open in the outside air temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-32)
sensor circuit unit
81228 A short in the outside air temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-33)
sensor circuit unit
81229 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-34)
unit
81230 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-35)
unit
81231 An open in the evaporator temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-36)
sensor circuit unit
81232 A short in the evaporator temperature Climate control Signal error (see page 21-38)
sensor circuit unit
81233 An open in the driver's air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-39)
motor circuit unit
81234 A short in the driver's air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-40)
motor circuit unit
81235 A problem in the driver's air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-41)
linkage, door, or motor unit
81236 An open in the passenger's air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-43)
motor circuit unit
81237 A short in the passenger's air mix control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-44)
motor circuit unit
81238 A problem in the passenger's air mix Climate control Signal error (see page 21-45)
control linkage, door, or motor unit
81239 An open or short in the mode control Climate control Signal error (see page 21-47)
motor circuit unit
81240 A problem in the mode control linkage, Climate control Signal error (see page 21-49)
doors, or motor unit
81241 A problem in the blower motor circuit Climate control Signal error (see page 21-51)
unit
21-14 BACK
SvmDtom Diallnostic Drocedure Also check for
Recirculation control doors do not
change between Fresh and
Recirculation control motor circuit troubleshooting
(see page 21-55)
·· HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
Blown fuse No. 36 (10 A) in the under-dash
Recirculate fuse/relay box
• Cleanliness and tiQhtness of all terminals
Blower, heater controls, and NC Climate control power and ground circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
do not work troubleshooting (see page 21-57) • Blown fuse No. 36 (10 A) in the under-dash
fuse/relay box
• Faulty blower motor relay
• Poor ground at G571 (see page 22-60)
• Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
Voice communication does not Navigation communication line circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
work troubleshootinQ (see paQe 21-58) • Cleanliness and tiQhtness of all terminals
HVAC display is not indicated Audio communication line circuit troubleshooting • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
(see paQe 21-60) • Cleanliness and tiQhtness of all terminals
Climate control switches do not Climate control switch communication line circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
work troubleshootinQ (see paQe 21-61) • Cleanliness and tiQhtness of all terminals
Both fans do not run at low speed Radiator and AlC condenser fan low speed circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
with the AlC on (but the AlC troubleshooting (see page 21-65) • Blown fuse No.7 (30 A) in the under-hood
compressor runs with the AlC on) fuse/relay box, and No. 36 (10 A) in the
under-dash fuse/relay box
• Poor ground at G201 (see page 22-60)
The AlC condenser fan does not AlC condenser fan high speed circuit • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
run at high speed (but both fans troubleshooting (see page 21-70) • Poor ground at G202 (see page 22-60)
run at low speed and the AlC • Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
compressor operates with the AlC
on)
Both fans do not run at high speed AlC pressure sensor troubleshooting: AlC pressure • Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
with the AlC on (but both fans run sensor circuit low voltage (see page 11-327), AlC • Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
at low speed and the AlC pressure sensor circuit high voltage (see page
compressor operates with the NC 11-329)
on) ECTtroubleshooting: ECTsensor 2 circuit low
voltage (see page 11-188), ECT sensor 2 circuit high
voltaQe (see page 11-190)
The AlC compressor clutch does AlC compressor clutch circuit troubleshooting • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
not engage (but both fans run with (see page 21-73) • Blown fuse No. 20 (7.5 A) in the under-hood
theAlC on) fuse/relay box, and No. 36 (10 A) in the
under-dash fuse/relay box
AlC system does not come on AlC signal circuittroubleshooting (see page 21-76) • HVAC DTCs (see page 21-8)
(both fans and the AlC AlC pressure sensor troubleshooting: AlC pressure • Powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3)
compressor do not work); heater sensor circuit low voltage (see page 11-327), AlC • Cleanliness and tightness of all terminals
isOK pressure sensor circuit high voltage (see page
11-329)
HDS does not communicate with Troubleshoot the DLC circuit (see page 11-229)
the climate control unit or the
vehicle
BACK 21-15
Climate Control
System Description
The air conditioning system removes heat from the passenger compartment by transferring heat from the ambient air
to the evaporator. The evaporator cools the air with the refrigerant that is circulating through the evaporator. The
refrigerant expands in the evaporator, becoming very cold and absorbs the heat from the ambient air. The blower fan
pushes air across the evaporator where the heat is absorbed, and then blows the cool air into the passenger
compartment.
EXPANSION VALVE
(Meters the required amount of
refrigerant into the evaporator)
BLOWER FAN
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
A/e PRESSURE SENSOR

(Triple function)
t RELIEF VALVE
(Relieves pressure at the AlC compressor
when the pressure is too high)
When the refrigerant is below
196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', 28 psi)
or above 3,140 kPa (32 kgf/cm',
455 psi), the PCM turns the
AlC compressor relay off
to protect the AlC compressor.
When the refrigerant is above
1,470 kPa (15.0 kgf/cm', 213 psi),
the AlC pressure sensor
t
switches the radiator and
AlC condenser fans to high speed.
HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR
A/C CONDENSER HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID

(Radiation of heat)
RECEIVER/DRYER iU&44i LOW PRESSURE LIQUID
DESICCANT
(Traps debris, and
removes moisture) _ _ LOW PRESSURE VAPOR
This vehicle uses HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant, which does not contain chlorofluorocarbons. Pay attention to the
following service items:
• Do not mix refrigerants CFC-12 (R-12) and HFC-134a (R-134a). They are not compatible.
• Use only the recommended polyalkyleneglycol (PAG) refrigerant oil (SP-10) designed for the R-134a AlC
compressor. Intermixing the recommended (PAG) refrigerant oil with any other refrigerant oil will result in AlC
compressor failure.
• All AlC system parts (AIC compressor, discharge line, suction line, evaporator, AlC condenser, receiver/dryer,
expansion valve, O-rings for joints) are designed for refrigerant R-134a. Do not exchange with R-12 parts.
• Use a halogen gas leak detector designed for refrigerant R-134a.
• R-12 and R-134a refrigerant servicing equipment are not interchangeable. Use only a recovery/recycling/charging
station that is U.L.-listed and is certified to meet the requirements of SAE J2210 to service the R-134a air
conditioning systems.
• Always recover refrigerant R-134a with an approved recovery/recycling/charging station before disconnecting any
AlC fitting.
21 .. 16 BACK
Oil Separator
Oil emission from the Ale compressor to the Ale line is reduced by placing the oil separator in the Ale compressor.
This results in a thinner oil film inside of the heat exchanger (Ale condenser and evaporator). Air conditioning
efficiency is increased without sacrificing engine performance.
.....
EVAPORATOR
~
EXPANSION VALVE
l t
~
,.
Ale COMPRESSOR I
lOlL SEPARATOR ~l-+ AIC CONDENSER l-
I
-+ HIGH REFRIGERANT OIL FLOW
..... LOW REFRIGERANT OIL FLOW
OUTLET SIDE
(To AlC condenser)
FROM INSIDE
AIC COMPRESSOR
INLET SIDE
(To inside
AlC compressor)
(cont'd)
BACK 21-17
Climate Control
Ale Pressure Sensor

The AlC pressure sensor converts AlC pressure into electrical signals to the PCM.
NOTE: The pressures can be monitored using the HDS PGM-FI Data List.
SENSOR UNIT
The response of the AlC pressure sensor is shown in the graph.
OUTPUT 4.575
VOLTAGE
(Vout)
0.684
0.425
0.2945
-99 o 196 3, 38 kPa

(-1) (2) (32) (kgf/cm')
[ -14] [28] [455] [psi]
Ale PRESSURE
Vcc5V Vout GND
21-18 BACK
Dual Air Mix Control System
Driver's side: HOT _ Driver's side: COOL
•• ¢=J
"
Passenger's side: COOL Passenger's side: HOT
(VENT)
(HEATNENT)
(HEAT)
(cont'd)
BACK 21-19
Climate Control
Driver's side: HOT . . Driver's side: COOL ¢=J

Passenger's side: COOL ¢=J Passenger's side: HOT . .
(HEAT/DEF)
(DEF)
21-20 BACK
i-Dual Climate Control System (With navigation system)
This system automatically controls the temperature and the vent mode of the air direction to the driver and passenger's
side, depending on the angle of the sun, and the direction of the vehicle. It calculates information such as date, time,
longitude, and latitude from the navigation system, as well as the radiant strength of the sun from the sunlight sensor,
to determine the appropriate mode position and temperature to be directed to each side.
,
,,
~
~UGHTSENSOR
~NAVIGATION SYSTEM
DATE
LONGITUDE
RADIANT STRENGTH LATITUDE
DIRECTION OF THE VEHICLE
CLIMATE CONTROL
UNIT
DUAL AIR MIX CONTROL
DRIVER'S
AIR MIX DOOR
PASSENGER'S
AIR MIX DOOR
In the event that the navigation system malfunctions, or when driving in areas where the navigation system cannot
determine the vehicle position (non-coverage areas, tunnels, etc.), the climate control system will operate the same as
a vehicle without a navigation system.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-21
Climate Control

Climate Control Unit Inputs and Outputs
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTORS
CONNECTOR A (24P) CONNECTOR B (16P)
CONNECTOR A
Cavity Wire color Signal
1 RED MODE 1 OUTPUT
2 PNK MODE2 OUTPUT
3 PUR MODE3 OUTPUT
4 BLU MODE4 OUTPUT
5 BRN AIR MIX POTENTIAL +5 V OUTPUT
6 -- -- --
7 GRN MODE DEF OUTPUT
8 WHT MODE VENT OUTPUT
9 PNK DRIVER'S AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
10 LTBLU DRIVER'S AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
11 ORN PASSENGER'S AIR MIX HOT OUTPUT
12 BRN PASSENGER'S AIR MIX COOL OUTPUT
13 PUR EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
14 YEL OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
15 WHT PASSENGER'S AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
16 GRY DRIVER'S AIR MIX POTENTIAL OUTPUT
17 BLU A/CSIGNAL OUTPUT
18 ORN SENSOR COMMON GROUND 1 INPUT
19 LTBLU RECIRCULATE INPUT
20 GRY FRESH INPUT
21 LTGRN REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY INPUT
22 RED BLOWER FEEDBACK INPUT
23 YEL POWER TRANSISTOR CONTROL OUTPUT
24 BLK GROUND (G571) OUTPUT
CONNECTORB
Cavity Wire color Signal
1 RED NAVIGATION UNIT (SO) OUTPUT
2 -- -- --
3 -- -- --
4 RED SENSOR COMMON GROUND 2 INPUT
5 -- -- --
6 GRY DRIVER'S CLIMATE CONTROL SWITCH (BUS-DATA) INPUT/OUTPUT
7 --
8 PNK B-CAN INPUT/OUTPUT
9 BLU NAVIGATION UNIT (CLK) OUTPUT
10 YEL NAVIGATION UNIT(SI) INPUT
11 LTGRN AUDIO UNIT (SI) INPUT
12 --
13 PUR SUNLIGHT SENSOR OUTPIT
14 LTBLU IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR OUTPUT
15 -- -- --
16 GRN IG 2 (POWER) INPUT
21-22 BACK
BACK 21-23
Climate Control
Circuit Diagram
UNDER·DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/llELAY BOX IGNmONSWITCH FUSE/RELAYBOX
BATTERY
I
+
No.1 IBATlll00 AI No211GI150 AI Hl
WHT
---&- 1G2
ORN
C3 No.36110 AI
~
I
Q16
GRN
PGM·R
SUB
RELAY
~AI
L-______~===-
1G2 HOTIn ON 1111 Gl'
____ BRN - - - - - - t - - t - P U R - - - - G >
N~.5AI
No.15 BN
Il.5AI
No.J130AI
2
f---o'"'.
~ AfC
DlODEB
Y No.6
~ I!OAI
AfC AlC BLOWER
Dl
RADIATOR FAN CONTROL CONDENSER COMPRESSOR MOTOR

4 FAN RElAY 1 1 RELAY 5 1 FAN RELAY r3,.._CL_UTC_H_RE_LA_Y_hl 3 RELAY
I~ --------~nl /,~------~ I I~:-----------~ II ~ -----------:111 ~ ---------:11

~4 1~2~_ _~3_~~'~_ _ _ _~4~~4~_ _ _ _~2_4~
Fll F14 Fl, F2 F7 F20 E8 Fl J2

BLU GRY RED BRN PUR RD LTGRN BLK
i
~ 2 ~CNDENSER
1
FAN
MOTOR
t 1 G202 AfC COMPRESSOR
r - - - - + ' - ' RED/BLK - B L U - - - -
AfC THERMAL
COMPRESSOR PROTECTOR
CLUTCH
A4 A14
FANLO ACCL GRN/RED
t UNDER-OASH
A5 FAN HI
CANLO
A3l
RED
-11 GAUGE
30
RED
--PNK-----------
~~~E/RElAY
~~.-~-. -"'-----
I~ I
I
A36 28
CAN HI WHT
AfC PRESSURE
SENSOR
5V ~-+--RED
VCC6 A19 ------------~~~;_l
ACPO A16
I-t----+---LTGRN -----------+-'-<
ENGINE
COOlANT
TEMPERATURE
IECTl SENSOR 2
lW2 A33
RED~BLK---,
r-...;.;SG+PIl,;;..._ BLK ---l BLK
PCM
G201
21-24 BACK
- - - - - :CANlino
------------------------------------G~I-----------~-----
B16
G>---PUR
I
WHT
~I
G~I------... IG2
AZO 1G2
I ~RECFRS
~ I AI9
GRV
LTBLU
7
FRS
REC
RECIRCULATION
CONlROL
MOTOR
BLOWER
MOTOR
IG2 4 2
RR-IlEf.lfD BW---~
GRN
7
SWIN-I YEL--......;-t
SWIN-2
B
WHT--......;-t a.;.;....t---RED
BLW·Y A22 --------..!.i===~~~1l
PASSENGER'S ~_ _BL_W_~;-AZ_l___ YEL _________-t<r~~hV;t~
CUMATE 9
SWfN.3 LTBLU--....:-t
cotm\OL
SWITCH
10
SWIN-4 PNK---~
SWOUT-3
II
ORN---~ Tam
AU
VEL~OIRN----...
~
12 OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
SWOUT-4 LTG~I----t saISOR
~ SMAll 2 Tev.
All
~R~'~---~ BLK
'-:?
r DJ.- 6
Y
$ENS-
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
r-_~CO~M~~~~_ _ RED _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _- '
~t:
~
LTBLU~RED
BlK IN-CAR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
1 ~
ORN
PUR ~ RED
No.14P5A1RJSE DASHUGHTS SUNUGHT SENSOR

Un the under-dash BRIGHTNESS
fusel ..~y boxl CONTROLtER B6
lin the gauga BUS-IlATA
COI11J<IImodule} 5Y 5Y
G502
SSV AS
B~ SSV $.COM
AI6 DRIVER'S
GRV
AIR MIX
M.fIOT AS CONTROL
PNK MOTOR
BLU M-toDL AIO
~
5Y
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ M __ _
B8 S.cOM
AI5
DRIVING AMO.p PASSENGER'S
CIRCUIT
1<Jf-------LTG~
•REAR WINDOW AIR MIX
DEFOGGER MoHOT Al1 CONTROL
AZI I-...;;:=+"'----ORN M.fIOT
RELAY RrDEFRly MOTOR
•POWER MIRROR M-COOL A12 ORN
DEFOGGER ~--r---BRN M.cOOL
RELAY
r------AU-D-ID-UMT------~I-Cl-5-------U~ Bl1
AUDIO-Si
M-VENT AS
WHT M-VENT
M-DEF IV S.CQM 7
~ M.oEF
AI4 BI 5Y
AI
~-'
~-------RED RED MODEl
MODE
AZ CONTROL
AI5 MODE 2 PNK MODE 2
MOTOR
!--------BLU
AS
MODEl PUR MODEl
~M~-----_YEL A4
BLU MODE 4
MODE 4
AlB
O~
G571 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT G571
BACK 21-25
Climate Control
DTe Troubleshooting
DTC indicator G: Climate Control Unit DTC 81205 or DTC indicator H: Climate
Internal Error Control Unit Lost Communication with
Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE message)
NOTE:
• Check the battery condition (see page 22-63) and the NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
charging system (see page 4-26). sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN system
• If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be sure to diagnosis test mode A (see page 22-88) .
follow the instructions in B-CAN system diagnosis
test mode A (see page 22-88). 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then ON (II). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then ON (II).
2. Do the self-diagnostic with the climate control unit 3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-8)
(see page 21-10). or climate control unit (see page 21-10).
3. Check for DTCs. 4. Check for DTCs.
Is ore indicator G indicated? Are ore 81205 or H indicated?
YES-The climate control unit is faulty, replace the YES-Go to step 5.

climate control unit (see page 21-88) .•
NO-The system is OK at this time, check for loose
NO-I ntermittentfail ure, the climate control unit is wires or poor connections on the gauge control
OK at this time .• module and climate control unit circuit.•
Are ore 81008,81011,81032,81906 and 81205

also indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-The climate control unit is faulty. Replace the

climate control unit.•
6. Select UNIT INFORMATION in the BODY

ELECTRICAL menu.
7. Select CONNECTED UNIT in the UNIT

INFORMATION menu.
Is gauge control module detected?

module, and recheck. If the symptom/indication
goes away, replace the gauge control module
(see page 22-284) .•
NO-Go to step 8.
21-26 BACK
8. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q DTC 81206 or DTC indicator K: Climate
(16P). Control Unit Lost Communication with
Gauge Control Module (TACH) (ECT
9. Disconnect the gauge control module 36P message)
connector.
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
10. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN system
box connector Q (16P) terminal No.6 and the diagnosis test mode A (see page 22-88).
gauge control module 36P connector terminal
No. 30. 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (16P)

2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then ON (II).
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-8)

IPNK
or climate control unit (see page 21-10).
" "
1 V 3 4 5 6 V 8
4. Check for DTCs.
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Are OTC 81206 or K indicated?
Q
YES-Go to step 5.

11 I 2 I 8 4 I 6 I 8 7 I 8I 9110111 1121181141161181171181 I wires or poor connections on the gauge control
1119120 1211221231241251281271281291 801 811321 as 1341 as 1381 module and climate control unit circuit..
IPNK

Are OTC 81008,81011,81032,81906 and 81206
Is there continuity? also indicated?
YES-Go to the gauge control module input test YES-Go to step 6.

(see page 22-282) .•
NO-The climate control unit is faulty. Replace the
NO-Repair open in the wire between the MICU climate control unit.•
and the gauge control module.•
6. Select UNIT INFORMATION in the BODY
ELECTRICAL menu.

INFORMATION menu.

(see page 22-284) .•
NO-Go to step 8.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-27
Climate Control
8. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q OTC 81207 or OTC indicator J: Climate
(16P). Control Unit Lost Communication with
Gauge Control Module (lLLUMI message)
connector. NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN system
10. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay diagnosis test mode A (see page 22-88).
box connector Q (16P) terminal No.6 and the
gauge control module 36P connector terminal 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
No. 30.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (16P)
IPNK
n
"
4. Check for DTCs.
1 / 314 5 6 1/ 8
9 10 11 112 13 14 15 16
Are DTC 81207 or J indicated?
Q YES-Go to step 5.

wires or poor connections on the gauge control
11 I 2 I 8 4 I 6 I 6 7 I 8 I 9 110111 1121181141161161171181 I module and climate control unit circuit..
I 119 120 121 122 231241261261271261291 3D 1311321331 841861881
IPNK
Wire side offemale terminals Are DTC 81008,81011,81032,81906 and 81207
also indicated?
YES-Go to step 6.
YES-Go to the gauge control module input test
(see page 22-282) .• NO-The climate control unit is faulty. Replace the
climate control unit..
NO-Repair open in the wire between the MICU
and the gauge control module .• 6. Select UNIT INFORMATION in the BODY
ELECTRICAL menu.

INFORMATION menu.

(see page 22-284) .•
NO-Go to step 8.
21-28 BACK
8. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q DTC 81225 or DTC indicator A and AUTO: An
(16P). Open in the In-car Temperature Sensor
Circuit
connector. 1. Clear the DTC with the HDS.
10. Check for continuity between under-dash fuse/relay 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then ON (II).
box connector Q (16P) terminal No. 6and the
gauge control module 36P connector terminal 3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-8)
No. 30. or climate control unit (see page 21-10).
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR Q (16P)
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81225 or A and AUTO indicated?

IPNK
n n
YES-Go to step 5.
1 / 3 4 5 6 V 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or
poor connections on the in-car temperature sensor
.Q circuit.•
11 I 2 I 3 14 I 6 I 6 7 I 8 I 9 110 1111121131141161161171181 I 6. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page

I 119 120 121122 23124126128127128129130181132133 34 136 136 1 21-78) and test it (see page 21-78).
IPNK
GAUGE CONTROl MODULE 36P CONNECTOR Is the in-car temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the in-car temperature sensor.•
YES-Go to the gauge control module input test
(see page 22-282) .• 7. Disconnect the climate control unit connector B
(16P).
NO-Repair open in the PNK wire between the
MICU and the gauge control module .•
(cont'd)
BACK
21-29
Climate Control
8. Check for continuity between the climate control 9. Check for continuity between climate control unit
unit connector B (16P) terminal No. 14 and the in- connector B (16P) terminal No.4 and the in-car
car temperature sensor 2P connector terminal temperature sensor 2P connector terminal No.2.
No.1.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16PI
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16PI Wire side of female terminals
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

YES-Go to step 9.
YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate the climate control unit connector B (16P) and atthe
control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.• in-car temperature sensor 2P connector. If the
connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit.•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate

control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.•
21-30 BACK
OTC 81226 or OTC indicator 8 and AUTO: A 8. Check for continuity between body ground and the
Short in the In-car Temperature Sensor climate control unit connector B (16P) terminal
Circuit No. 14.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81226 or 8 and AUTO indicated?

=
NO-Intermittent failure .•
6. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page between the climate control unit and the in-car
21-78) and test it (see page 21-78). temperature sensor.•
Is the in-car temperature sensor OK? NO-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 7. 9. Check for continuity between the climate control

unit connector B (16P) terminals No.4 and No. 14.
NO-Replace the in-car temperature sensor..
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P)
7. Disconnect the climate control unit connector B
(16P).
YES-Repair short in the wires between the climate

control unit and the in-car temperature sensor.•
NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit,

and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit.•
BACK 21-31
Climate Control
OTC 81227 or OTC indicator C and AUTO: An 8. Check for continuity between the climate control
Open in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 14 and the
Circuit outside air temperature sensor 2P connector
terminal No.1.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)

or climate controlunit (see page 21-10).
4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81227 or C and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
poor connections on the outside air temperature
sensor circuit..
YES-Go to step 9.
6. Remove the outside air temperature sensor
(see page 21-79) and test it (see page 21-79). NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate
control unit and the outside air temperature
Is the outside air temperature sensor OK? sensor.•
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor.•
7. Disconnect the climate control unit connector A

(24P).
21-32 BACK
9. Check for continuity between the climate control DTC 81228 or DTC indicator D and AUTO: A
unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 18 and the Short in the Outside Air Temperature Sensor
outside air temperature sensor 2P connector Circuit
terminal No.2.

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81228 or D and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
Wire side of female terminals 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Is there continuity? 6. Remove the outside air temperature sensor

(see page 21-79) and test it (see page 21-79).
the climate control unit connector A (24P) and at Is the outside air temperature sensor OK?
the outside air temperature sensor 2P connector. If
the connections are good, substitute a known-good YES-Go to step 7.
climate control unit, and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original climate NO-Replace the outside air temperature sensor.•
control unit.•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate (24P).
control unit and the outside air temperature
sensor.•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-33
Climate Control
8. Check for continuity between body ground and the DTC 81229 or DTC indicator E and AUTO: An
climate control unit connector A (24P) terminal Open in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
No. 14.

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81229 or E and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
poor connections on the sunlight sensor circuit..
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wires
between the climate control unit and the outside air 6. Testthe sunlight sensor (see page 21-80).
temperature sensor.•
Is the sunlight sensor OK?
NO-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 7.
9. Check for continuity between the climate control
unit connector A (24P) terminals No. 14 and No. 18. NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-80) .

•
7. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.

(16P).

unit connector B (16P) terminal No. 13 and the
sunlight sensor 2P connector terminal No.2.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 116P)

control unit and the outside air temperature SUNLIGHT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR
sensor..
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, YES-Go to step 10.
replace the original climate control unit..
control unit and the sunlight sensor.•
21-34 BACK
10. Check for continuity between the climate control DTC 81230 or DTC indicator F and AUTO: A
unit connector B (16P) terminal No.4 and the Short in the Sunlight Sensor Circuit
sunlight sensor 2P connector terminal No.1.

4. Check for DTCs.

Q
Is DTC 81230 or F and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
SUNLIGHT SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

6. Test the sunlight sensor (see page 21-80).
the climate control unit connector B (16P) and at the Is the sunlight sensor OK?
sunlight sensor 2P connector. If the connections are
good, substitute a known-good climate control unit, YES-Go to step 7.
replace the original climate control unit.• NO-Replace the sunlight sensor (see page 21-80) .

•
control unit and the sunlight sensor.• 7. Disconnect the sunlight sensor 2P connector.

(16P).
9. Check for continuity between body ground and the

climate control unit connector B (16P) terminal
No. 13.
CUMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B 116P)

between the climate control unit and the sunlight
sensor.•
NO-Go to step 10.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-35
Climate Control

10. Check for continuity between the climate control OTC 81231 or OTC indicator G and AUTO: An
unit connector B (16P) terminals No.4 and No. 13. Open in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Circuit

4. Check for DTCs.
Is OTe 81231 or G and AUTO indicated?

YES-Go to step 5.
Is there continuity? NO-Intermittent failure, check for loose wires or

poor connections on the evaporator temperature
YES-Repair short in the wires between the climate sensor circuit.•
control unit and the sunlight sensor.•
and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away, 6. Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see page
replace the original climate control unit.. 21-81).
Is the evaporator temperature sensor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
NO-Replace the evaporator temperature

sensor.•
21-36 BACK
7. Disconnect the climate control unit connector A 9. Check for continuity between the climate control
(24P). unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 18 and the
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector
8. Check for continuity between the climate control terminal No.1.
unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 13 and the
evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)
terminal No.2.

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2P CONNECTOR

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2PCONNECTOR Is there continuity?

Is there continuity? the climate control unit connector A (24P) and at
the evaporator temperature sensor 2P connector. If
YES-Go to step 9. the connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit, and recheck. Ifthe symptom/
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit and the evaporator temperature control unit.•
sensor.•
control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor.•
BACK 21-37
Climate Control
OTC 81232 or OTC indicator H and AUTO: A 8. Check for continuity between body ground and the
Short in the Evaporator Temperature Sensor climate control unit connector A (24P) terminal
Circuit No. 13.


4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81232 or H and AUTO indicated?

=
6. Test the evaporator temperature sensor (see page between the climate control unit and the
2h81); evaporator temperature sensor.•
Is the evaporator temperature sensor OK? NO-Go to step 9.
YES-Go to step 7. 9. Check for continuity between the climate control

unit connector A (24P) terminals No. 13 and No. 18.
NO-Replace the evaporator temperature
sensor.•

(24P).

control unit and the evaporator temperature
sensor.•

21-38 BACK
OTC 81233 or OTC indicator J and AUTO: An 12. Check for continuity between the following
Open in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor terminals of climate control unit connector A (24P)
Circuit and the driver's air mix control motor 7P connector.
24P: 7P:
1. Start the engine. No.5 No.5
No.16 No.3
2. Turn on the AlC, then set the driver's climate No. 18 No.7
control switch to max hot.
6. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-8) Q

7. Check for DTCs.
Is OTe 81233 or J and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 8. DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR

poor connections on the driver's air mix control Is there continuity?
motor circuit..
YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. climate control unit connector A (24P) and at the
driver's air mix control motor 7P connector. If the
9. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page connections are good, substitute a known-good
21-83). climate control unit and recheck. Ifthe symptom/
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK? control unit.•
YES-Go to step 10. NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the

climate control unit and the driver's air mix control
NO-Replace the driver's air mix control motor motor.•
(see page 21-83) .•
10. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P

connector.
11. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (24P).
BACK 21-39
Climate Control
DTC 81234 or DTC indicator K and AUTO: A 8. Check for continuity between body ground and
Short in the Driver's Air Mix Control Motor climate control unit connector A (24P) terminals
Circuit No.5 and 16 individually.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81234 or K and AUTO indicated?

= =
YES-Go to step 5. Wire side of femaleterminals
YES-Repair any short to body ground in the
6. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P wire(s) between the climate control unit and the
connector. driver's air mix control motor.•
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (24P). NO-Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between the terminals of

climate control unit connector A (24P) as follows.
From terminal To terminals

A5 A16,A18
A16 A18
Is there continuity between any of the terminals?
YES-Repair the short in the wires .•
NO-Go to step 10.
21-40 BACK
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same OTC 81235 or OTC indicator L and AUTO: A
terminals for voltage. Problem in the Driver's Air Mix Control
Linkage, Door, or Motor

4. Check for DTCs.

= = = Is DTC 81235 or L and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is there any voltage? NO-Intermittent failure .•
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) between 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
the climate control unit and the driver's air mix
control motor.• 6. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page
21-83).
NO-Go to step 11.
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK?
11. Test the driver's air mix control motor (see page
21-83). YES-Go to step 6.
Is the driver's air mix control motor OK? NO-Replace the driver's air mix control motor
(see page 21-83), or repair the driver's air mix
YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at control linkage or door.•
climate control unit connector A (24P) and at the
driver's air mix control motor 7P connector. If the 7. Disconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P
connections are good, check the driver's air mix connector.
control motor operation with the original climate
control unit. If the motor is not good, substitute a 8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (24P).
known-good climate control unit and recheck. Ifthe
symptom/indication goes away and the driver's air
mix control motor runs, replace the original climate
control unit.•
NO-Replace the driver's air mix control motor

(see page 21-83) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-41
Climate Control
9. Check for continuity between the following 10. Check for continuity between body ground and
terminals of the climate control unit connector A climate control unit connector A (24P) terminals
(24P) and the driver's air mix control motor 7P No.9 and No. 10 individually.
connector.
24P: 7P: CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)
No.9 No.1
No.10 No.2

YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)

between the climate control unit and the driver's air
mix control motor..
DRIVER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit
Wire side of female terminals and recheck. Ifthe symptom/indication goes away,
replace the original climate control unit..
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the

climate control unit and the driver's air mix control
motor.•
21-42 BACK
DTC 81236 or DTC indicator M and AUTO: An 12. Check for continuity between the following
Open in the Passenger's Air MixControl terminals of climate control unit connector A (24P)
Motor Circuit and the passenger's air mix control motor 7P
connector.
1. Start the engine. 24P: 7P:
No.5 No.7
2. Turn on the AlC, then set the passenger's climate No.15 No.3
control switch to max hot. No. 18 No.5
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)

or climate control unit (see page 21-10). Q
7. Check for DTCs.
Is DTe 81236 or M and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 8.
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
NO-Intermittent failure .• Wire side of female terminals
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF. Is there continuity?
9. Test the passenger's air mix control motor YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at
(see page 21-84). climate control unit connector A (24P) and atthe
passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector. If
Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK? the connections are good, substitute a known-good
climate control unit and recheck. Ifthe symptom/
YES-Go to step 10. indication goes away, replace the original climate
control unit.•
NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control motor
(see page 21-85) .• NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the
climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
10. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor control motor..
7P connector.
BACK 21-43
Climate Control
OTC 81237 or OTC indicator N and AUTO: A 8. Check for continuity between body ground and
Short in the Passenger's Air Mix Control climate control unit connector A (24P) terminals
Motor Circuit No.5 and 15 individually.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)

4. Check for DTCs.
Is DTC 81237 or N and AUTO indicated?

= =
6. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor between the climate control unit and the
7P connector. passenger's air mix control motor.•
7. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (24P). NO-Go to step 9.
9. Check for continuity between the terminals of

climate control unit connector A (24P) as follows.

A5 A15, A18
A15 A18
YES-Repair the short in the wires.•
NO-Go to step 10.
21-44 BACK
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and check the same DTC 81238 or DTC indicator P and AUTO: A
terminals for voltage. Problem in the Passenger's Air Mix Control
Linkage, Door, or Motor

4. Check for DTCs.
= = =
Is OTe 81238 or P and AUTO indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
Is there any voltage? NO-Intermittent failure .•
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) between 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
the climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
control motor.• 6. Test the passenger's air mix control motor
(see page 21-84).
NO-Go to step 11.
Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK?
11. Test the passemger's air mix control motor
(see page 21-84). YES-Go to step 6.
Is the passenger's air mix control motor OK? NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control motor
(see page 21-85), or repair the passenger's air mix
YES-Check for loose wire or poor connections at control linkage or door.•
passenger's air mix control motor 7P connector. If 7. Disconnect the passenger's air mix control motor
the connections are good, check the passenger's 7P connector.
air mix control motor operation with the original
climate control unit. If the motor is not good, 8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (24P).
substitute a known-good climate control unit and
recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away and
the passenger's air mix control motor runs, replace
the original climate control unit..
NO-Replace the passenger's air mix control motor

(see page 21-85).
(cont'd)
BACK 21-45
Climate Control
terminals of the climate control unit connector A climate control unit connector A (24P) terminals
(24P) and the passenger's air mix control motor 7P No. 11 and No. 12 individually.
connector.
24P: 7P: CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)
No.11 No.2
No.12 No.1 ORN


between the climate control unit and the
passenger's air mix control motor.•
PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit
Wire side of female terminals and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes away,
YES-Go to step 10.

climate control unit and the passenger's air mix
control motor.•
21-46 BACK
OTC 81239 or OTC indicator A: An Open or 9. Check for continuity between the following
Short in the Mode Control Motor Circuit terminals of climate control unit connector A (24P)
and the mode control motor 7P connector.
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS. 24P: 7P:
No.1 No.6
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then ON (II). No.2 No.5
No.3 No.4
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-8) No.4 No.3
or climate control unit (see page 21-10). No.18 No.7
4. Check for DTCs. CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)

Is DTC 81239 or A indicated? .--_ _ _--....,BLU

PUR
'----'P:::-:NC::K'="'
YES-Go to step 5.
RED
poor connections on the mode control motor
circuit .•
6. Test the mode control motor (see page 21-85).
Is the mode control motor OK?
YES-Go to step 7.
MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the mode control motor (see page Wire side of female terminals
21-86) .•
7. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector.
YES-Go to step 10.
climate control unit and the mode control motor.•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-47
Climate Control
10. Check for continuity between body ground and 11. Check for continuity between the terminals of
climate control unit connector A (24P) terminals climate control unit connector A (24P) as follows.
No.1, 2, 3 and 4 individually.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P) A1 A2, A3, A4, A18
BLU A2 A3,A4,A18
r-----=-PU--R=-" A3 A4, A18
PNK A4 A18
RED
YES-Repair short in the wire(s) between climate

control unit and mode control motor.•
NO-Go to step 12.
Q Q
= = =

between the climate control unit and the mode
control motor.•
NO-Go to step 11.
21-48 BACK
12. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check the same DTC B1240 or DTC indicator B: A Problem in
terminals for voltage. the Mode Control Linkage, Doors, or Motor
1. Clear the DTC with the HDS .
.--_ _--:--=;BLU
.--_---=-,PUR 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then ON (II) .
PNK
RED 3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-8)
4. Check for DTCs.
Is OTe 81240 or 8 indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.

= = = =
Wire side of female terminals 6. Test the mode control motor (see page 21-85).
Is there any voltage? Is the mode control motor OK?
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) between YES-Go to step 7.

the climate control unit and the mode control
motor.• NO-Replace the mode control motor (see page
21-86), or repair the mode control linkage or
NO-Check for loose wire or poor connections at doors.•
mode control motor 7P connector. If the 7. Disconnect the mode control motor 7P connector.
climate control unit and recheck. If the symptom/ 8. Disconnect climate control unit connector A (24P).
control unit.•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-49
Climate Control
terminals of climate control unit connector A (24P) climate control unit connector A (24P) terminals
and the mode control motor 7P connector. No.7 and No.8 individually.
24P: 7P:
No.7 No.2
No.8 No.1


MODE CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR between the climate control unit and the mode
control motor.•
Is there continuity? NO-Substitute a known-good climate control unit

YES-Go to step 10. replace the original climate control unit..

climate control unit and the mode control motor.•
21-50 BACK
DTC 81241 or DTC indicator F: A Problem in 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
the Blower Motor Circuit
10. Disconnect the jumper wire.
11. Disconnect the power transistor 4P connector.
12. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of
3. Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page 21-8) the power transistor 4P connector and body ground.
POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
4. Check for DTes.
Is OTe 81241 or F indicated? 2 BLK

I----l---I
YES-Go to step 5. 3 4

poor connections on the blower motor circuit..
Q
=
6. Check the No.9 (40 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box, and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the
under-dash fuse/relay box. Is there continuity?
Are the fuses OK? YES-Go to step 13.
YES-Go to step 7. NO-Check for an open in the BLK wire between

the power transistor and body ground. If the wire is
NO-Replace the fuses, and recheck .• OK, check for poor ground at G571 .•
7. Connect the blower motor 2P connector terminal 13. Connect the No.2 and No.4 terminals of the power
No.2 to body ground with a jumper wire. transistor 4P connector with a jumper wire.
BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
2
GRN JUMPER WIRE
3 4
JUMPER WIRE
GRN
=
Does the blower motor run?
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Go to step 25.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-51
Climate Control
14. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 19. Check for continuity between the following
terminals of the climate control unit connector A
Does the blower motor run at high speed? (24P) and the power transistor 4P connector.
24P: 4P:
YES-Go to step 15. No. 22 No.3
No. 23 No.1
NO-Repair open in the GRN wire between the
power transistor and the blower motor.• CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)

(24P).
18. Check for continuity between body ground and the

climate control unit connector A (24P) terminals
No. 22 and No. 23 individually. 2
3 4
RED
POWER TRANSISTOR 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 20.

climate control unit and the power transistor.•

between the climate control unit and the power
transistor.•
NO-Go to step 19.
21-52 BACK
20. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 27. Measure the voltage between the blower motor 2P
21. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
climate control unit connector A (24P) terminals BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
No. 22 and No. 23 individually.
=
Wire side of female terminals Is there battery voltage?
YES-Replace the blower motor.•

Is there voltage?
NO-Go to step 28.
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) .•
NO-Go to step 22.
29. Remove the blower motor relay from the under-
22. Turn the ignition switch OFF. hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page 22-64).
23. Reconnect the climate control unit connector A Is the relay OK?
(24P).
YES-Go to step 30.
24. Test the power transistor (see page 21-82).
NO-Replace the blower motor relay .•
Is the power transistor OK?

the climate control unit connector A (24P) and at
the power transistor 4P connector. If the
control unit.•
NO-Replace the power transistor.•
26. Disconnect the blower motor 2P connector.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-53
Climate Control
30. Check for continuity between the blower motor 32. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and blower motor 2P
connector terminal No.1. 33. Measure the voltage between blower motor relay
4P socket terminal No.3 and body ground.
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY 4P SOCKET
WHT
2
4 3 2

BLOWER MOTOR 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Check for an open in the wire between the
Is there continuity? blower motor relay 4P socket terminal No.4 and
body ground. If the wire is OK, check for poor
YES-Go to step 31. ground at G202 (see page 22-60) .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the blower NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 36
motor relay and blower motor.• (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
blower motor relay 4P socket..
31. Measure the voltage between the blower motor
relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body ground.
4 3
=
YES-Go to step 32.

(see page 22-61) .•
21-54 BACK
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
relay box.
6. Test the recirculation control motor (see page
Is the fuse OK? 21-86).
YES-Go to step 2. Is the recirculation control motor OK?
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse YES-Go to step 7.

blows again, check for a short in the No. 36 (10 A)
fuse circuit.• NO-Replace the recirculation control motor
(see page 21-87), or repair the recirculation control
2. Disconnect the recirculation control motor 7P linkage or door.•
connector.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). (24P).
4. Measure the voltage between the recirculation 8. Check for continuity between body ground and the
control motor 7P connector terminal No.1 and climate control unit connector A (24P) terminals
body ground. No. 19 and No. 20 individually.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24P)
=
Is there battery voltage? Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 5. YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s)

between the climate control unit and the
NO-Repair open in the wire between the No. 36 recirculation control motor.•
(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and the
recirculation control motor.• NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-55
Climate Control
Recirculation Control Motor Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check the same 11. Check for continuity between the following
terminals for voltage to body ground. terminals of the climate control unit connector A
(24P) and the recirculation control motor 7P
connector.
24P: 7P:
No. 19 No.7
No. 20 No.5

=
Is there any voltage?
YES-Repair short to power in the wire(s) between

the climate control unit and the recirculation
control motor. This short may also damage the RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR 7P CONNECTOR
climate control unit. Repair the short to power Wire side of female terminals
before replacing the climate control unit..
NO-Go to step 10.
10. Turn the ignition switch OFF. the climate control unit connector A (24P) and at
the recirculation control motor 7P connector. Ifthe
control unit..

climate control unit and the recirculation control
motor.•
21-56 BACK
Climate Control Power and Ground Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Check the No. 36 (10 A)fuse in the under-dash fuse/ 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
relay box.
Is the fuse OK? unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 24 and body
ground.
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck. If the fuse
blows again, check for a short in the No. 36 (10 A)
fuse circuit.•

(16P).
4. Measure the voltage between the climate control

=
unit connector B (16P) terminal No. 16 and body Wire side of female terminals
ground.

YES-Check for loose wires and poor connections

at the climate control unit connector A (24P). If
climate control unit and recheck. If the symptom/
control unit.•
NO-Check for an open in the wire between the

=
climate control unit and body ground. Ifthe wire is
Wire side of female terminals OK, check for poor ground at G571 (see page 22-60).
•
YES-Go to step 5.

climate control unit..
BACK 21-57
Climate Control
Navigation Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Operate the climate control system in several 6. Check for continuity between the following
modes. terminals of the climate control unit connector B
(16P) and navigation unit connector A (20P).
Is the climate control system OK? 16P: 20P:
No.1 No.14
YES-Go to step 2. No.9 No.15
No.10 No.4
NO-Do the self-diagnostic with the HDS (see page
21-8) or climate control unit (see page 21-10) .•
2. Do the Navi system link (see page 23-170).
Is the Air-Con or TALKIBACK icon red?
YES-
• If Air-con icon is red, go to step 3.
• If TALK/BACK icon is red, go to "voice control
does not work/respond" in the navigation system
symptom troubleshooting (see page 23-158) .•
NO-Go to step 9.
4. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P). NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)

(16P). Is there continuity?
YES-Go to step 7.

climate control unit and the navigation unit..
21-58 BACK
7. Check for continuity between body ground and the 10. Connect the navigation unit connector A (20P)
climate control unit connector B (16P) terminals terminals No.4, 14 and No. 15 with a jumper wire.
No.1, 9, and No. 10 individually.
NAVIGATION UNIT CONNECTOR A (20P)
JUMPER WIRE


12. Press and hold the AUTO button, then press and
YES-Repair short to body ground in the wire(s) hold the OFF button.
between the climate control unit and the navigation
unit..
NO-Go to step 8.
8. Reconnect the climate control unit connector B·

(16P).
9. Disconnect navigation unit connector A (20P).
Is the HEAT/VENT indicator solid with the

remaining icons blinking?
YES-Do the Unit check with the navigation system

(see page 23-169) .•

and recheck. If the symptom goes away, replace
the original climate control unit.•
BACK 21-59
Climate Control
Audio Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 5. Reconnect the climate control unit connector B
(16P).
(16P) and audio unit connector C (28P). 6. Disconnect the in-car temperature sensor 2P
unit connector B (16P) terminal No. 11 and the 7. Connect the climate control unit connector B (16P)
audio unit connector C (28P) terminal No. 15. terminal No. 11 and terminal No. 14 with a jumper
wire.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16PI
JUMPER WIRE
AUDIO UNIT CONNECTOR C (28P)

YES-Go to step 4. 8. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
NO-Repair open in the wire between the climate 9. Press and hold the DEF button and OFF button.
control unit connector B (16P) and the audio unit
connector C (28P) .• Is the DEF button LED blinking?
4. Check for continuity between the body ground and YES-Audio unit is faulty, replace the audio unit
the climate control unit connector B (16P) terminal (see page 23-99).
No.11.
NO-Climate control unit is faulty, replace the
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) climate control unit (see page 21-88).
=

between the climate control unit connector B (16P)
and the audio unit connector C (28P) .•
NO-Go to step 5.
21-60 BACK
Climate Control Switch Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting
1. Operate the climate control system with the 8. Disconnect the driver's climate control switch 16P
passenger's climate control switch in all modes. connector.
Does the climate control system operate? 9. Check for continuity between passenger's climate
control switch 12P conector and the driver's climate
YES-Intermittent failure .• control switch 16P connector as shown.
NO-Go to step 2. PASSENGER'S CLIMATE CONTROL SWITCH

12P CONNECTOR
2. Operate the climate control system with the driver's VEL PNK
climate control switch in all modes.
Does the climate control system operate?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 11.
4. Disconnect the passenger's climate control switch

12P connector.
6. Measure the voltage between body ground and the DRIVER'S CLIMATE CONTROL SWITCH 16P CONNECTOR
passenger's climate control switch 12P connector
terminal No.1. Is there continuity?
PASSENGER'S CLIMATE CONTROL SWITCH YES-Go to step 10.

12P CONNECTOR
NO-Repair open in the wires between the driver's
climate control switch and the passenger's climate
control switch .•
=
YES-Go to step 7.

passenger's climate control switch and the No. 36
(10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If
wires are OK, replace the under-hood fuse/relay
box (see page 22-61) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-61
Climate Control
Climate Control Switch Communication line Circuit Troubleshooting

(cont'd)
10. Check for continuity between body ground and the 11. Press and hold the FAN UP switch, then press the
passenger's climate control switch 12P connector OFF switch.
terminals as shown.
Is the REG button LEO blinking?
PASSENGER'S CLIMATE CONTROL SWITCH
12P CONNECTOR
YES-Substitute a known-good driver's climate
LTBLU control switch, and recheck the function. If the
symptom is still present, replace the climate
control unit..
NO-Go to step 12.
12. Check the driver's climate control switch LEOs.
-- -- -- -- -- -- Are the REG button and AUTO button LEOs

blinking?
YES-Oriver's climate control switch is faulty,
Is there continuity? replace the driver's climate control switch
(see page 21-88) .•
between the driver's climate control switch and the NO-Go to step 13.
passenger's climate control switch .•
13. Check the driver's climate control switch LEOs.
NO-Substitute a known-good passenger's climate
control switch, and recheck. If the symptom goes Are the REG button and OUAL button LEOs
away, replace the original passenger's climate blinking?
control switch (see page 21-88) .•
YES-Substitute a known-good driver's climate
control switch, and recheck the function. If the
symptom is still present, replace the climate
control unit.•
NO-Go to step 14.
21-62 BACK
15. Disconnect the driver's climate control switch 16P 19. Check for continuity between body ground and the
connector. driver's climate control switch 16P connector
terminal No. 14
DRIVER'S CLIMATE CONTROL SWITCH 16P CONNECTOR
17. Measure the voltage between body ground and the
driver's climate control switch 16P connector
terminal No. 11.
=
=

Is there battery voltage? driver's climate control switch and body ground. If
the wire is OK, check for poor ground at G502
YES-Go to step 18. (see page 22-60) .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the driver's

climate control switch and the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in
the under-dash fuse/relay box. If wires are OK,
replace the under-hood fuse/relay box (see page
22-61) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-63
Climate Control
Climate Control Switch Communication Line Circuit Troubleshooting

(cont'd)
20. Disconnect the climate control unit connector B 22. Check for continuity between driver's climate
(16P). control switch 16P terminal No. 13 and terminal
No.14.
21. Check for continuity between climate control unit
connector B (16P) terminal No.6 and the driver's DRIVER'S CLIMATE CONTROL SWITCH 16P CONNECTOR
climate control switch 16P connector No. 13.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR B (16P) YES-Repair short to another wire .•

NO-Substitute a known-good driver's climate
Is there continuity? control switch and recheck. If the symptom is still
present, replace the climate control unit..
YES-Go to step 22.
NO-Repair open in the wire(s) between the driver's

climate control switch and the climate control
unit..
21-64 BACK
Radiator and AIC Condenser Fan Low Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 7. Measure the voltage between the AlC condenser

• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure ifthe AlC fan relay 4P socket terminal NO.1 and body ground .
compressor is inoperative. Refer to the symptom
troubleshooting index. AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
• Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check
for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
1. Check the No.7 (30 A) fuse in the under-hood 2

under-dash fuse/relay box. 4 3
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuses, and recheck. If the fuses

blow again, check for a short in the No.7 (30 A) and
No. 36 (10 A) fuses circuit.• Is there battery voltage?
2. Remove the AlC condenser fan relay from the YES-Go to step 8.
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page
22-64). NO-Replace the under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-61) .•
Is the relay OK?
8. Connect the AlC condenser fan relay 4P socket
YES-Go to step 3. terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire.
NO-Replace the AlC condenser fan relay.• AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAY 4P SOCKET
3. Connect the HDS to the DLC (see page 21-8).

JUMPER WIRE
5. Turn on the AlC.

2
I-----.---l BRN
6. Check the FAN LOW CTRL in the PGM-FI Data List 4 3

with the HDS.
Is the FAN LOW CTRL on?
YES-Go to step 7.
Does the AlC condenser and radiator fans run on
NO-Substitute a known-good PCM (see page 11-8), low?
and retest. If the symptom/indication goes away
with a known-good PCM, replace the original PCM YES-Go to step 9.
(see page 11-252).•
NO-Go to step 18.
(cont'd)
BACK
21-65
Climate Control

(cont'd)
9. Disconnect the jumper wire. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). 13. Reinstall the AlC condenser fan relay.
11. Measure the voltage between the AlC condenser 14. Jump the SCS line with the HDS.
fan relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and body ground.
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the
AIC CONDENSER FAN RELAV 4P SOCKET powertrain control module (PCM) from damage.
2 16. Connect the PCM connector A (44P) terminal No.4

to body ground with a jumper wire.
4 PCM CONNECTOR A (44P)
IPUR
III II
1/1 2 / 41 6 1 6 ./ 8 I 91.
10V 12 13114115116 17 18 19
= 20 2122 .:::>< 232426
~ 26 27 V! 29 V! 31
V 33 34 35
136137 36 39140V 42 431441
JUMPER WIRE
YES-Go to step 12.
-'-
NO-Go to step 36. =
Do the Ale condenser and radiator fans run on

low?

PCM connector A (44P) terminal No.4. If the
PCM, and recheck. If the symptom/indication goes
away, replace the original PCM (see page 11-252) .
•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the AlC
condenser fan relay and the PCM .•
19. Reinstall the AlC condenser fan relay.
20. Disconnect the AlC condenser fan 2P connector.
21. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then set the AlC
button and fan control button ON.
21-66 BACK
22. Measure the voltage between the AlC condenser 27. Set the AlC button and fan control dial to OFF, then
fan 2P connector terminal No.2 and body ground. turn the ignition switch OFF.
AlC CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR

29. Remove the fan control relay from the under-hood

relay box, and test it (see page 22-64).
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 30.
= NO-Replace the fan control relay.•
Wire side of female terminals 30. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), then set the AlC
Is there battery voltage? 31. Measure the voltage between the fan control relay
5P socket terminal No.1 and body ground.
YES-Go to step 23.
FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET
condenser fan relay and the AlC condenser fan .• RED
23. Set the AlC button and fan control dial OFF, then 2
24. Reconnect the AlC condenser fan 2P connector.
25. Connect the AlC condenser fan 2P connector

=
AIC CONDENSER FAN 2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 32.

RED
JUMPER WIRE condenser fan and the fan control relay.•
= 32. Set the AlC button and fan control button OFF, then
26. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), then set the AlC
Does the Ale condenser fan run?
YES-Go to step 26.
NO-Replace the AlC condenser fan motor

(see page 10-16) .•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-67
Climate Control

(cont'd)
33. Disconnect the radiator fan 2P connector. 35. Check for continuity between the radiator fan 2P
34. Check for continuity between the fan control relay
5P socket terminal No.4 and the radiator fan 2P RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR
=
RADIATOR FAN 2P CONNECTOR YES-Replace the radiator fan motor (see page
Wire side of female terminals 10-16).•
Is there continuity? NO-Check for an open in the wire between the

radiator fan and body ground. If the wire is OK,
YES-Go to step 35. check for poor ground at G201 (see page 22-60) .•
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fan

control relay and the radiator fan .•
21-68 BACK
37. Remove AlC diode A from the under-hood fuse/ 40. Measure the voltage between the AlC diode A 2P
relay box. socket terminal No.2 and body ground.
38. Using the diode setting (-1+-) on a DVOM, check A/C DIODE A 2P SOCKET
for current flow in both directions between the AlC
diode A terminals No.1 and No.2.
A/C DIODE A

10 .... 02
(see page 22-65) .•
Is there current flow in only one direction?
YES-Go to step 39. (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
AlC diode A .•
NO-Replace AlC diode A .•
BACK 21-69
Climate Control
AIC Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.

• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the
radiator fan and/or the AlC compressor is inoperative. 6. Check for continuity between the fan control relay
Refer to the symptom troubleshooting index. 5P socket terminal No.2 and body ground.
• Before performing symptom troubleshooting, check
for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3). FAN CONTROL RELAY 5P SOCKET
1. Check the No. 36 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash

fuse/relay box.
BLK
2
/s the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse, and recheck.•
2. Remove the fan control relay from the under-hood

relay box, and test it (see page 22-65).
/s the relay OK? /s there continuity?
NO-Replace the fan control relay .• NO-Check for an open in the wire between the fan
control relay and body ground. If the wire is OK,
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). check for poor ground at G202 .•
4. Measure the voltage between the fan control relay

5P socketterminal No.5 and body ground.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Go to step 12.
. 21-70 BACK
7. Jump the SCS line with the HDS. 10. Reconnect PCM connector A (44P).
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the 11. Check the DTCs by selecting the DTC MENU (DTCs)
powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. from the HDS (see page 11-3).
8. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). Is DTC P0532, P0533, P2184 and/or P2185
indicated?
9. Check for continuity between the fan control relay
5P socket terminal No.3 and PCM connector A YES-
(44P) terminal No.5. • DTC P0532 indicated: Go to AlC pressure sensor
circuit low voltage troubleshooting (see page
11-327) .•
• DTC P0533 indicated: Go to AlC pressure sensor
circuit high voltage troubleshooting (see page
2 11-329).•
• DTC P2184 indicated: Go to ECT 2 sensor circuit
low voltage troubleshooting (see page 11-188).•
• DTC P2185 indicated: Go to ECT 2 sensor circuit
high voltage troubleshooting (see page 11-190) .
•
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
PCM connector A (44P). If the connections are good,
substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original PCM (see page 11-252) .•

YES-Go to step 10.
NO-Repair open in the wire between the fan

control relay and the PCM .•
(cont'd)
BACK 21-71
Climate Control
AIC Condenser Fan High Speed Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)

13. Remove Ale diode A from the under-hood fuse/ 16. Measurethe voltage between the Ale diode A 2P
relay box. socket terminal No.2 and body ground.
14. Using the diode setting (-I+e) on a DVOM, check A/C DIODE A 2P SOCKET
for current flow in both directions between the Ale
diode A terminals No.1 and No.2.
A/C DIODE A

10 1IIIIIIII 02
(see page 22-61) .•
Is there current flow in only one direction?
YES-Go to step 15. (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box and
Ale diode A..
NO-Replace Ale diode A..
21-72 BACK
AIC Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 7. Using the HDS, confirm the following values in the

• The PCM can turn the AlC compressor OFF under PGM-FI Data List at idle.
certain conditions, such as low idle, high engine
coolant temperature, or hard acceleration. TPSENSOR About 0.5 V
• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if the fans RPM 650+50-720+50
are also inoperative with the AlC on. Refer to the AlCTEMPERATURE 39-230 Degrees "F
symptom troubleshooting index. AlCSWITCH ON
• Before doing any symptom troubleshooting, check AlCCLUTCH ON
for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3). AlC PRESSURE 196-3,138 kPa
SENSOR (2-32 kgf/cm2)
1. Check the No. 20 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-hood [28-455 psi]
under-dash fuse/relay box. Are all the values within specifications?
Are the fuses OK? YES-Go to step 8.
YES-Go to step 2. NO-Troubleshoot the value that is not within the

specifications.•
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck .•
3. Check for these PGM-FI DTCs: P0117, P0118, P0506,

P0507, P0532, and P0533.
Are any of these OTCs indicated?
YES-Go to the appropriate troubleshooting

section.
NO-Go to step 4.
5. Turn on the AlC.
6. Check the AlC CLUTCH in the PGM-FI Data List with

the HDS.
Is the AlC CLUTCH on?
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Go to step 7.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-73
Climate Control
AIC Compressor Clutch Circuit Troubleshooting (cont'd)
8. Remove the AlC compressor clutch relay from the 10. Connect the AlC compressor clutch relay 4P socket
under-hood fuse/relay box, and test it (see page terminals No.1 and No.2 with a jumper wire.
22-64).
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY 4P SOCKET
Is the relay OK?
YES-Go to step 9.
JUMPER WIRE
NO-Replace the AlC compressor clutch relay.•
LTGRN
2
t----,----i
9. Measure the voltage between the AlC compressor
clutch relay 4P socket terminal No.1 and body 4 3
ground.
Does the Ale compressor clutch click?

2
YES-Go to step 11.
4 3
NO-Go to step 20.
= 12. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
13. Measure the voltage between the AlC compressor

Is there battery voltage? clutch relay 4P socket terminal No.3 and body
ground.
YES-Go to step 10.
(see page 22-61) .•
=
YES-Go to step 14.

AlC compressor clutch relay .•
21-74 BACK
15. Reinstall the AlC compressor clutch relay. Does the Ale compressor click?
16. Jump the SCS linewith the HDS. YES-Check for loose wires or poor connections at
PCM connector A (44P). If the connections are good,
NOTE: This step must be done to protect the check the PCM grounds. If the grounds are good,
powertrain control module (PCM) from damage. substitute a known-good PCM, and recheck. If the
symptom/indication goes away, replace the
17. Disconnect PCM connector A (44P). original PCM (see page 11-252).•
18. Connect the PCM connector A (44P) terminal No. 14 NO-Repair open in the wire between the AlC
to body ground with a jumper wire. compressor clutch relay and the PCM .•
PCM CONNECTOR A 144P) 20. Disconnect the jumper wire.

Ir 11
I. 21. Disconnect the AlC compressor clutch 3P connector.
V 2 / 4 516 / 8 9
• 110V 12 13114115116 11 18 191
20 21 22 :::p.< 23 24 251 • 22. Check for continuity between the AlC compressor
26 27 VI29L 131V 33 34 351 • clutch relay 4P socket terminal No.2 and the AlC
136 37 3839 40V 42 43L441 compressor clutch 3P connector terminal No.3.
RED
JUMPER WIRE
--
= LTGRN
2
4 3
AIC COMPRESSOR CLUTCH 3P CONNECTOR

YES-Check the AlC compressor clutch clearance,

AlC compressor clutch field coil, and the AlC
compressor thermal protector (see page 21-102).
Repair as needed .•

compressor clutch relay and the AlC compressor
clutch .•
BACK 21-75
Climate Control
AIC Signal Circuit Troubleshooting
NOTE: 8. Measure the evaporator temperature sensor

• Do not use this troubleshooting procedure if any of resistance between the climate control unit
the following items are operative: AlC condenser fan, connector A (24P) terminals No. 13 and No. 18.
radiator fan, AlC compressor. Refer to the symptom
troubleshooting index.
• Before doing any symptom troubleshooting, check
for powertrain DTCs (see page 11-3).
3. Turn on the AlC.
4. Check the blower motor operates at all speeds.

Does the blower motor operate at all speeds?
YES-Go to step 5. Is the resistance less than 24 kQ ?
NO-Repair the problem in the blower motor YES-Go to step 9.

circuit (see page 21-51) .•
NO-Test the evaporator temperature sensor
5. Check the AlC SWITCH in the PGM-FI Data List with (see page 21-81) .•
the HDS.
Is the AlC SWITCH on?
YES-The AlC signal is OK at this time .•
NO-Go to step 6.

(24P).
21-76 BACK
10. Measure the voltage between the climate control 12. Reconnect the climate control unit connector A
unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 17 and body (24P).
ground.
13. Set the AlC button and fan control switch to ON,
then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
14. Measure the voltage between the climate control
unit connector A (24P) terminal No. 17 and body
ground.
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR A (24PI
=
YES-Go to step 11.

control unit and the MICU ••
Is there 0.5 V or less?
YES-Replace the MICU (see page 22-62) .•
NO-Check for loose wires or poor connections at

the climate control unit connector A (24P). If the
climate control unit and recheck. If the symptom/
control unit.•
BACK 21-77
Climate Control
In-car Temperature Sensor Test In-car Temperature Sensor

Replacement
1. Remove the in-car temperature sensor (see page
21-78).
2. Test the in-car temperature sensor while holding it (see page 20-102).
in front of the dashboard center vent
2. Remove the self-tapping screw and the in-car
• Measure the resistance with the system set to temperature sensor (A) from the instrument panel
Max Cool. (B).
• Measure the resistance with the system set to
Max Hot.
3. Compare the resistance reading between the No.1

and No.2 terminals of the in-car temperature
sensor with the specifications shown in the graph;
the resistance should be within the specifications
for whatever the ambient temperature is.
IN-CAR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
12 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.

11 Be sure to connect the air hose securely.
10
9
1\
\
8
\
RESISTANCE 7
(kQ) 6 \
5
4 "-
3 1"-
2
1
r---
14 32 50 68 86 104 'F
-10 0 10 20 30 40 'C
TEMPERATURE
4. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the in-

car temperature sensor (see page 21-78).
21-78 BACK
Outside Air Temperature Sensor Outside Air Temperature Sensor
Test Replacement
1. Remove the outside air temperature sensor 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-146).
(see page 21-79).
2. Lift the tab (A) to release the lock, then remove the
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the outside air temperature sensor (8) from the front
resistance. Then pour warm water on the sensor, bumper beam. Disconnect the 2P connector (C)
and check for a change in resistance. from the outside air temperature sensor.
3. Compare the resistance reading between the No.1

and No.2 terminals of the outside air temperature
sensor with the specifications shown in the graph;
the resistance should be within the specifications.
OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
12
11
10
\ 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
9
8
\
\,
RESISTANCE 7
(kQ) 6
5
'\.
4 '"
3
2
1
'" --....
r-..
14 32 50 68 86 104 'f
-10 0 10 20 30 40 "C
TEMPERATURE
4. If the resistance is not as specified, replace the

outside air temperature sensor (see page 21-79).
BACK 21-79
Climate Control
Sunlight Sensor Test Sunlight Sensor Replacement
1. Remove the sunlight sensor (see page 21-80). 1. Remove the dashboard center upper panel
(see page 20-105). With navigation, remove the
audio-HVAC subdisplay unit (see page 23-101).
2. Remove the sunlight sensor (A) from the

dashboard, then disconnect the connector (B); Be
careful not to damage the sensor and the
dashboard.
RED PUR
2. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). Measure the
voltage between the terminals with the (+) probe
on the No.1 terminal and the (-) probe on the
No.2 terminal with the connector connected.
NOTE: The voltage readings will not change under

the light of a flashlight or a fluorescent lamp. 3. Install the sensor in the reverse order of removal.
Voltage should be:

• 3.6-3.7 V or more with the sensor out of direct
sunlight.
• 3.3-3.5 V or less with the sensor in direct
sunlight.
3. If the voltage is not as specified, replace the

sunlight sensor (see page 21-80).
21-80 BACK
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Power Transistor Replacement
Test
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover
(see page 20-103).
1. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor
(see page 21-92). 2. Remove the glove box (see page 20-104).
2. Dip the sensor in ice water, and measure the 3. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the power
resistance between its terminals. transistor (8), then remove the screws.
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
3. Then pour warm water on the sensor, and check for

a change in resistance.
4. Compare the resistance readings with the

specifications shown in the graph; the resistance
should be within the specifications.
4. Pull out the power transistor from the expansion
5 valve cover.
4
\ 5. Install the power transistor in the reverse order of
'""
RESISTANCE removal.
(kQ) 3
1
~
32 50 68 86 "F
o 10 20 30 'C
TEMPERATURE
5. Ifthe resistance is not as specified, replace the

evaporator temperature sensor (see page 21-92).
BACK 21-81
Climate Control
Power Transistor Test
1. Disconnect the 4P connector from the power 3. Carefully release the lock tab on the No.1 terminal
transistor. (YEL) (A) in the 4P connector, then remove the
terminal and insulate it from body ground.
2. Measure the resistance between the No.3 and
No.4 terminals of the power transistor. It should be
about1.5kQ .
• If the resistance is within the specifications, go to

step 3.
• If the resistance is not within the specifications,
replace the power transistor.
NOTE: Also check the blower motor. Power

transistor failure can be caused by a defective
blower motor.
POWER TRANSISTOR
(To 12V power source on vehicle)
2
4. Reconnect the 4P connector to the power transistor.
3 4
5. Make sure the YEL wire is completely isolated, then
supply 12 V to the No.1 cavity with a jumper wire.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON (11), and check that the

blower motor runs.
• If the blower motor does not run, replace the

power transistor.
NOTE: A faulty blower motor can cause the

power transistor to fail. If the power transistor is
replaced, also check the blower motor for
binding, and replace it if necessary.
• If the blower motor runs, the power transistor is

OK.
21-82 BACK
Driver's Air Mix Control Motor Test Driver's Air Mix Control Motor
Replacement
Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A
1. Remove the driver's dashboard lower cover, then
NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page remove the driver's dashboard undercover
21-8). (see page 20-102).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the driver's air 2. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the driver's
mix control motor. air mix control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping
screws and the driver's air mix control motor from
INOTICE I the heater unit.
Incorrectly applying power and ground to
the driver's air mix control motor will
damage it. Follow the instructions carefully.
2. Connect battery power to the No.1 terminal of the

driver's air mix control motor, and ground the No.2
terminal; the driver's air mix control motor should
run, and stop at Max Cool. If it doesn't, reverse the
connections; the driver's air mix control motor
should run, and stop at Max Hot. When the driver's
air mix control motor stops running, disconnect
battery power immediately.
3. Ifthe driver's air mix control motor did not run in

step 2, remove it, then check the driver's air mix
control linkage and the door for smooth movement. 3. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure the pin on the motor is properly
• If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace engaged with the linkage. After installation, make
the driver's air mix control motor (see page sure the motor runs smoothly.
21-83).
• If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
• Ifthe driver's air mix control motor runs
smoothly, go to step 4.
4. Measure the resistance between the No.5 and

No.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kQ.
5. Reconnect the driver's air mix control motor 7P

connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage

between the No.3 and No.7 terminals.
Max Cool-about 1.5 V

Max Hot-about 4.5 V
7. If either the resistance or voltage readings are not

as specified, replace the driver's air mix control
motor (see page 21-83).
BACK
21-83
Climate Control
Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Test
Special Tools Required 4. Measure the resistance between the No.5 and
Backprobe Set 07SAZ-001000A No.7 terminals. It should be between 4.2 to 7.8 kQ.
NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page PASSENGER'S AIR MIX CONTROL MOTOR
21-8).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the passenger's

air mix control motor. .--- -
INOTICEI
r-L '--
~r-
the passenger's air mix control motor will

damage it. Follow the instructions carefully. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

passenger's air mix control motor, and ground the
No.2 terminal; the passenger's air mix control
motor should run, and stop at Max Cool. If it 5. Reconnect the passenger's air mix control motor 7P
doesn't, reverse the connections; the passenger's connector, then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
air mix control motor should run, and stop at Max
Hot. When the passenger's air mix control motor 6. Using the backprobe set, measure the voltage
stops running, disconnect battery power between the No.3 and No.5 terminals.
immediately.
Max Cool-about 1.5 V
3. If the passenger's air mix control motor did not run Max Hot-about 4.5 V
in step 2, remove it, then check the passenger's air
mix control linkage and door for smooth 7. If either the resistance or the voltage readings are
movement. not as specified, replace the passenger's air mix
control motor (see page 21-85).
• If the linkage and door move smoothly, replace
the passenger's air mix control motor (see page
21-85).
• If the linkage or door sticks or binds, repair them
as needed.
• Ifthe passenger's air mix control motor runs
smoothly, go to step 4.
BACK
21-84
Passenger's Air Mix Control Motor Mode Control Motor Test
Replacement
NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page
21-8).
1. Remove the glove box. (see page 20-104).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the mode control
2. Remove the climate control unit (see page 21-88). motor.
INOTICE I
the mode control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully.

mode control motor, and ground the No.2
terminal; the mode control motor should run
smoothly, and stop at Defrost. If it doesn't, reverse
the connections; the mode control motor should
run smoothly, and stop at Vent. When the mode
control motor stops running, disconnect battery
power immediately.
MODE CONTROL MOTOR
2 3 4 5 6 7
3. Disconnect the connector (A) from the passenger's
air mix control motor, then remove the self-tapping
screws and the passenger's air mix control motor
(B) from the heater unit.
3. If the mode control motor did not run in step 2,
4. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal. remove it, then check the mode control linkage and
Make sure the pin on the motor is properly doors for smooth movement.
engaged with the linkage. After installation, make
sure the motor runs smoothly. • If the linkage and doors move smoothly, replace
the mode control motor (see page 21-86).
• If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them
as needed.
• If the mode control motor runs smoothly, go to
step 4.
4. Use a digital multi meter with an output of 1 mA or

less at the 20 k Q range. With the mode control
motor running as in step 2, check for continuity
between the No.3, 4, 5, and 6 terminals and the
No.7 terminal individually. There should be
continuity for a moment at each terminal as the
motor moves past the switch's terminal.
5. If there is no continuity for a moment at each

terminal, replace the mode control motor (see page
21-86).
BACK 21-85
Climate Control
Mode Control Motor Replacement Recirculation Control Motor Test
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-104). NOTE: Before testing, check for HVAC DTCs (see page
21-8).
2. Remove the climate control unit (see page 21-88).
1. Disconnect the 7P connector from the recirculation
3. Remove the harness clip (A), the self-tapping control motor.
screws and the passenger's heater duct (B).
INOTICEI
the recirculation control motor will damage it.
Follow the instructions carefully.

recirculation control motor, and ground the No.5
or No.7 terminals; the recirculation control motor
should run smoothly. To avoid damaging the
recirculation control motor, do not reverse power
and ground. Disconnect the No.5 or No.7 terminal
from ground; the recirculation control motor
should stop at Fresh (when the No.7 terminal is
disconnected) or Recirculate (when the No.5
terminal is disconnected). Don't cycle the
recirculation control motor for a long time.
RECIRCULATION CONTROL MOTOR
4. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the mode

control motor (B). Remove the self-tapping screws
and the mode control motor from the heater unit. 23456 7
3. If the recirculation control motor did not run in

step 2, remove it, then check the recirculation
control linkage and doors for smooth movement.
• Ifthe linkage and doors move smoothly, replace

the recirculation control motor (see page 21-87) .
• If the linkage or doors stick or bind, repair them
as needed.
5. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

sure the motor runs smoothly.
21-86 BACK
Recirculation Control Motor Dust and Pollen Filter Replacement
Replacement
1. Open the glove box. Remove the damper from the
glove box then let the glove box hang down
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-104). (see page 20-104).
2. Remove the climate control unit (see page 21-88). 2. Remove the dust and pollen filter assembly from
the evaporator case.
3. Remove the harness clip (A), the self-tapping
screws and the passenger's heater duct (8).
3. Remove the filter (A) from the housing (8), and

replace the filter.
4. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the

recirculation control motor (8). Remove the self-
tapping screws and the recirculation control motor
from the blower unit.
4. Install the filter in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure that there is no air leaking out of the
evaporator.
5. Install the motor in the reverse order of removal.

sure the motor runs smoothly.
BACK 21-87
Climate Control
Climate Control Unit Removal and Climate Control Switch Removall

Installation Installation
1. Remove the passenger's dashboard undercover 1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-101).
(see page 20-103).
2. Remove the self-tapping screws and the climate
2. Disconnect the connector (A). control switches (A).
3. Install the switches in the reverse order of removal.
3. Remove the self-tapping screws and climate

control unit (8).
4. Install the control unit in the reverse order of

removal. After installation, operate the various
functions to see whether works properly.
5. Run the self-diagnostic function to confirm that

there are no problems in the system (see page
21-10).
21-88 BACK
Climate Control Switch Bulb Replacement
1. Remove the climate control switch (see page 21-88). 3. Remove the bulb(s) with a flat-tip screwdriver.
2. Remove the screws and cover (A) from the driver's

climate control switch (8).
4. Install the bulb(s) in the reverse order of removal.

After installation, operate the various functions to
see whether it works properly.
BACK 21-89
Climate Control
Blower Unit Removal and Installation
1. Remove the glove box (see page 20-104). 5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the recirculation
control motor.
2. Remove the climate control unit (see page 21-88).
3. Remove the harness clip (A), the self-tapping

screws, and the passenger's heater duct (8).
6. Disconnect the connector (A) from the blower

motor, then remove the wire harness clip (8) and
ground terminal bolt (C).
c
4. Remove the harness clip (A), and bolts. Cut the
plastic cross brace (8) in the glove box opening
with diagonal cutters in the area shown. Retain
these parts to be reinstalled later.
Cut here.
21-90 BACK
Blower Unit Component
Replacement
7. Remove the self-tapping screws, the bolt, the
mounting nuts, and the blower unit (A).
Note these items when overhauling the blower unit:
• The recirculation control motor (A), blower motor (B)

and the dust and pollen filter (e) can be replaced
without removing the blower unit.
• Before reassembly, make sure that the recirculation
control linkage and door move smoothly without
binding.
• After reassembly, make sure the recirculation control
motor runs smoothly (see page 21-86).
A
c
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
11.0 kgf.m,
7.2Ibf.ft)
8. Install the unit in the reverse order of removal.
Make sure that there is no air leakage.
BACK 21-91
Climate Control
Evaporator Core Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ 4. Remove the stud bolt (A).
charging station (see page 21-105).
2. Remove the bolt (A).
A
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
A
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m, 7.2 Ibf·ftl
5. Remove the blower unit (see page 21-90).
6. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the evaporator

temperature sensor and the power transistor, then
3. Remove the nut, then disconnect the AlC lines (A) remove the connector clip (B). Remove the
and remove the O-rings (B) from the evaporator self-tapping screws, the expansion valve cover (C),
core. and the seal (D).
B
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
21-92 BACK
7. Carefully pull out the evaporator core (A) without 9. When the evaporator temperature sensor is re-
bending the lines, then remove the plate (B). installed, set the evaporator temperature sensor in
the fin at the left side by the previous position.
130 mm±5 mm
(5.1 in.±0.2 in.) _ ........- - - - - - _
8. Remove the clip (A) and the evaporator

temperature sensor (B).
10. Install the core in the reverse order of removal and
NOTE: The evaporator temperature sensor is note these items:
installed in the fin at the 7th fin from the left side by
the factory preset. • If you're installing a new evaporator core, add
refrigerant oil (SP-10) (see page 21-6).
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
• Immediately after using the oil, reinstall the cap
on the container, and seal it to avoid moisture
absorption.
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
contacts the paint, wash it off immediately.
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
• Charge the system (see page 21-107).
7th fin from left side

(Factory preset)
BACK 21-93
Climate Control
Heater Unit/Core Replacement
SRS components are located in this area. Review the 6. When the engine is cool, drain the engine coolant
SRS component locations (see page 24-12), and the from the radiator (see page 10-7).
doing repairs or service. 7. From under the hood, slide the hose clamps (A)
back. Disconnect the inlet heater hose (B) and the
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the outlet heater hose (e) from the heater unit. Note the
audio system and the navigation system (if orientation of the hose.
equipped), then write down the audio presets. Engine coolant will run out when the hoses are
disconnected; drain it into a clean drip pan. Be sure
2. Make sure the ignition is OFF, then disconnect the not to let coolant spill on the electrical parts or the
negative cable from the battery. painted surfaces. If any coolant spills, rinse it off
immediately.
3. Disconnect the Ale line from the evaporator core
(see page 21-92).

(see page 11-394).
5. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A),

then disconnect the heater valve cable (B) from the
heater valve arm (e). Turn the heater valve arm to
the fully opened position as shown.
21-94 BACK
8. Remove the mounting nut from the heater unit. 11. Disconnect the connector (A) from the recirculation
Take care not to damage or bend the fuel lines or control motor.
brake lines, etc.
~
A
8x 1.2Smm
12.3N·m
(1.3 kgf·m, 9.0 Ibf·ft) 12. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the climate
control unit, mode control motor, passenger's air
9. Remove the dashboard (see page 20-108). mix motor, the evaporator temperature sensor, and
the power transistor. Remove the wire harness clip
10. Disconnect the connector (A) from the blower (8).
motor. Remove the wire harness clip (8) and
ground terminal bolt (e).
(cont'd)
BACK 21-95
Climate Control
Heater Unit/Core Replacement (cont'd)
13. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the driver's air 15. Remove the self-tapping screws, the heater core
mix control motor and Ale wire harness. Remove . cover (A), the grommet (B), and carefully pull out
the connector clip (B), the wire harness clips (e), the heater core (e).
and the wire harness (D).
A
B
14. Remove the mounting bolt, mounting nuts, and

blower-heater unit (A).
A
16. Install the heater core and the evaporator core in

the reverse order of removal.
17. Install the heater unit in the reverse order of

• Do not interchange the inlet and outlet heater

hoses, and install the hose clamps securely.
• Refill the cooling system with engine coolant
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m (see page 10-7).
(1.0 kgf·m, • Make sure that there is no coolant leakage.
7.2Ibf·ft)
• Make sure that there is no air leakage.
• Refer to evaporator core replacement (see page
21-92).
audio presets.
• Set the clock.
21-96 BACK
Heater Valve Cable Adjustment
1. From under the hood, open the cable clamp (A), 5. From under the hood, turn the heater valve arm (A)
then disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the to the fully closed position as shown, and hold it.
heater valve arm (C). Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the heater valve
arm, and gently pull on the heater valve cable
housing to take up any slack, then install the heater
valve cable housing into the cable clamp (C).
2. From under the dash, disconnect the heater valve

cable housing from the cable clamp (A), and
disconnect the heater valve cable (8) from the air
mix control linkage (C).
3. Set the temperature control button to Max Cool (Lo)

with the ignition switch ON (II).
4. Attach the heater valve cable (8) to the air mix

control linkage (C) as shown in step 2. Hold the end
of the heater valve cable housing against the stop
(D), then snap the heater valve cable housing into
the cable clamp (A).
NOTE: Make sure the ring-end of the cable is

pushed all the way to the base of the pin on air mix
control linkage.
BACK 21-97
Climate Control
AIC Compressor Replacement
NOTE: Do not install an Ale compressor into a system 5. Disconnect the connector (A) from the Ale
unless you are completely sure that the system is free condenser fan motor. Then remove the upper
of contamination. Installing the Ale compressor into a mounting bolts, and the Ale condenser fan shroud
contaminated system can result in premature Ale (B). Be careful not to damage the radiator fins when
compressor failure. removing the Ale condenser fan shroud.
1. Ifthe Ale compressor is marginally operable, run

the engine at idle speed, and let the air
conditioning work for a few minutes, then shut the
engine off.
6x 1.0mm
2. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ 9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf.m,
charging station (see page 21-105). 7.2Ibf·ft)

audio system and navigation system (if equipped),
then write down the audio presets.
4. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-146) and

the alternator (see page 4-34).
21-98 BACK
6. Remove the bolt and the nut, then disconnect the 8. Install the compressor in the reverse order of
suction hose (A), discharge hose (B) and connector removal, and note these items:
(C) from the AlC compressor. After the hoses are
disconnected, remove the O-rings and plug or cap • Inspect the AlC lines for any signs of
the lines immediately after disconnecting them to contamination.
avoid moisture and dust contamination. • If you're installing a new AlC compressor, you
must calculate the amount of refrigerant oil to be
removed from it (see page 21-6). A new AlC
compressor comes with a full charge of oil.
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting,
c • Use refrigerant oil (SP-10) for HFC-134a SANDEN
spiral type AlC compressor only.
• To avoid contamination, do not return the oil to
B the container once dispensed, and never mix it
with other refrigerant oils.
6x 1.0 mm absorption.
9.8N·m • Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
may damage the paint; if the refrigerant oil
7. Remove the mounting bolts and the AlC • Charge the system (see page 21-107).
compressor (A). Be careful not to damage the • Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
radiator fins when removing the AlC compressor. navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
audio presets.
• Set the clock.
10x1.25mm
45N·m
(4.5 kgf·m, 32.5 Ibf·ft)
BACK 21-99
Climate Control
AIC Compressor Clutch Check

1. Check the armature plate for discoloration, peeling, 4. Check for continuity between the AlC compressor
or other damage. If there is damage, replace the clutch connector No.1 and No.2. If there is no
clutch set (see page 21-101). continuity, replace the thermal protector (see page
21-102).
2. Check the rotor pulley bearing play and drag by
rotating the rotor pulley by hand. Replace the NOTE: The thermal protector will have no
clutch set with a new one if it is noisy or has continuity above about 252 to 262 "F (122 to 128 'C).
excessive play/drag (see page 21-101). When the temperature drops below about 241 to
219 "F (116 to 104 'C), the thermal protector will
have continuity.
5. Disconnect the field coil connector (A). Check

3. Measure the clearance between the rotor pulley (A) resistance of the field coil. If resistance is not within
and the armature plate (8) all the way around. Ifthe specifications, replace the field coil (see page
clearance is not within specified limits, remove the 21-101).
armature plate (see page 21-101) and add or
remove shims as needed to increase or decrease Field Coil Resistance: 3.15-3.45 Q 68 "F (20 'C)
clearance.
Clearance: 0.35-0.65 mm (0.014-0.026 in.)
NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses:

0.1 mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm, and 0.5 mm.
21-100 BACK
AIC Compressor Clutch Overhaul
Special Tools Required 3. If you are replacing the field coil, remove the snap
AlC clutch holder, Robinair 10204 or Kent-Moore ring (A) with snap ring pliers, then remove the rotor
J37872, or Honda Tool and Equipment KMT-J33939, or pulley (B). Be careful not to damage the rotor pulley
commercially available and AlC compressor.
1. Remove the center nut while holding the armature

plate (A) with a commercially available AlC clutch
holder (B).
25.5N·m
(2.6kgf·m,
18.8 Ibf·tt)
4. Remove the bolt (A), then disconnect the field coil

connector (B). Remove the snap ring (C) with snap
ring pliers, then remove the field coil (D). Be careful
not to damage the field coil and AlC compressor.
2. Remove the armature plate (A) and shim(s) (B),

taking care not to lose the shim(s). If the clutch D
needs adjustment, increase or decrease the
number and thickness of shims as necessary, then
reinstall the armature plate, and recheck its
B
clearance (see page 21-100).
NOTE: The shims are available in four thicknesses:

0.1 mm, 0.2 mm, 0.4 mm, and 0.5 mm. A
1.3N·m
(0.1 kgl·m.
1.01bf.ft)
B 5. Reassemble the clutch in the reverse order of

disassembly, and note these items:
o Install the field coil with the wire side facing

down, and align the boss on the field coil with the
hole in the AlC compressor.
o Clean the rotor pulley and AlC compressor
sliding surfaces with contact cleaner or other
non-petroleum solvent.
o Install new snap rings, note the installation
direction, and make sure they are fully seated in
the groove.
o Make sure that the rotor pulley turns smoothly
after it's reassembled.
o Route and clamp the wires properly or they can
be damaged by the rotor pulley.
BACK 21 .. 101
Climate Control
AIC Compressor Thermal Protector AIC Compressor Relief Valve

1. Remove the bolt and the stay (A), and remove the 1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/
bolt and the holder (8). Disconnect the field coil charging station (see page 21-105).
connector (C), then detach the harness clip and
remove the thermal protector (D). 2. Remove the relief valve (A), and the O-ring (8). Plug
the opening to keep foreign matter from entering
the system and the AlC compressor oil from
running out.
3. Clean the mating surfaces.

7.4N·m
(0.8 kgf·m,
5.5Ibf·ft) 4. Replace the O-ring with a new one at the relief
valve, and apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil before
i nsta iii ng it.
D
5. Remove the plug, and install and tighten the relief
2. Replace the thermal protector (A) with a new one, valve.
and apply silicone sealant (8) to the bottom of the
thermal protector. 6. Charge the system (see page 21-107).
3. Install the thermal protector in the reverse order of

removal.
21-102 BACK
AIC Condenser Replacement
1. Recover the refrigerant with a recovery/recycling/ 5. Remove the bolts, then pull the bracket (A) down
charging station (see page 21-105). slightly.
2. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-146).
3. Remove the bolts, then disconnect the discharge

hose (A) from the AlCcondenser.
6x 1.0 mm
9.8N·m
4. Remove the bolt, then disconnect the receiver line

(A) from the AlC condenser.
6x 1.0mm
9.8N·m
(1.0 kgf·m,
7.2Ibf·ft)
(cont'd)
BACK 21-103
Climate Control
AIC Condenser Replacement ReceiverIDryer Desiccant

(cont'd) Replacement
6. Remove the bolts and brackets (A), then remove NOTE: Install the receiver/dryer as quickly as possible
the AlC condenser (B). Be careful not to damage the to prevent the system from absorbing moisture from
radiator and AlC condenser fins when removing the air.
the AlC condenser.
1. Remove the AlC condenser (see page 21-103).
2. Remove the bolts from the AlC condenser, then

remove the receiver/dryer (A), the bracket (B), and
the O-rings (C).
6x1.0mm
9.8N·m
7. Install the AlC condenser in the reverse order of

removal, and note these items: 3. Install the receiver/dryer in the reverse order of
removal. Replace the O-rings with new ones, and
• If you're installing a new AlC condenser, add apply a thin coat of refrigerant oil (SP-10) before
refrigerant oil (SP-10) (see page 21-6). installing them. Be sure to use the correct O-rings
• Replace the O-rings with new ones at each fitting, for HFC-134a (R-134a) to avoid leakage.
absorption.
• Do not spill the refrigerant oil on the vehicle; it
may damage the paint; ifthe refrigerant oil
• Charge the system (see page 21-107).
21-104 BACK
Refrigerant Recovery
2. Measure the amount of refrigerant oil removed

ACAUTION from the AlC system after the recovery process is
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor completed. Be sure to put the same amount of new
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. refrigerant oil back into the AlC system before
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. charging.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor.
NOTE:
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the
work area before resuming service .
• Additional health and safety information may be
manufacturers.
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery!recycling!

charging station (A) to the high-pressure service
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
shown, following the equipment manufacturer's
instructions.
BACK 21-105
Climate Control
System Evacuation
3. If the low-pressure does not reach more than

ACAUTION 93.3 kPa (700 mmHg, 27.6 in.Hg) in 15 minutes,
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor there is probably a leak in the system. Partially
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. charge the system, and check for leaks (see step 3
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. on page 21-108).
NOTE:
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the
work area before resuming service .
• Additional health and safety information may be
manufacturers.
1. When an AlC System has been opened to the

atmosphere, such as during installation or repair, it
must be evacuated using an R-134a refrigerant
recovery/recycling/charging station. If the system
has been open for several days, the receiver/dryer
should be replaced, and the system should be
evacuated for several hours.
2. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/

port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as
instructions. Evacuate the system.
21-106 BACK
System Charging
2. Evacuate the system (see page 21-106).

ACAUTION
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor 3. Add the same amount of new refrigerant oil to the
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. system that was removed during recovery. Use
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. only SP-l0 refrigerant oil.
4. Charge the system with the specified amount of
R-134a refrigerant. Do not overcharge the system;
NOTE: the AlC compressor will be damaged.
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate work
area before resuming service. Select the appropriate units of measure for your
• Additional health and safety information may be refrigerant charging station.
manufacturers. Refrigerant Capacity:
450 to 500 g
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/ 0.45 to 0.50 kg
charging station (A) to the high-pressure service 1.0to 1.11bs
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as 15.9 to 17.6 oz
instructions. 5. Check for refrigerant leaks (see page 21-108).
6. Check the system performance (see page 21-109).
!
i
i
I
i
_ ./
. /.. .. / .
/
\
"
.. ...
BACK 21-107
Climate Control
Refrigerant Leak Test
Special Tools Required 2. Open the high pressure valve to charge the system
Leak detector, Honda Tool and EquipmentYGK-H-10PM to the specified capacity, then close the supply
or commercially available valve, and disconnect the charging station fittings.
Select the appropriate units of measurement for

ACAUTION your refrigerant charging station.
• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. Refrigerant Capacity:
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. 450 to 500 g
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. 0.45 to 0.50 kg
1.0to 1.11bs
15.9 to 17.6 oz
NOTE:
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the 3. Check the system for leaks using an R-134a
work area before resuming service . refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 14 g
• Additional health and safety information may be (0.50z) per year or better.
manufacturers. 4. If you find leaks that require the system to be
opened (to repair or replace hoses, fittings, etc.), do
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery/recycling/ a recovery of the system.
port (B) and the low-pressure service port (C), as 5. After checking and repairing leaks, the system
shown, following the equipment manufacturer's must be evacuated.
instructions.
/"-'
['
\
"
.. ...
21-108 BACK
Ale System Test
Performance Test 5. Place a thermometer (B) near the blower unit's
recirculation inlet duct.
ACAUTION 6. Test conditions:

• Air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor
can irritate your eyes, nose, or throat. • Avoid direct sunlight.
• Be careful when connecting service equipment. • Open hood.
• Do not breathe refrigerant or vapor. • Open front doors.
• Set the temperature control switch to Max Cool,
the mode control switch to Vent, and the
The performance test will help determine if the AlC recirculation control switch to Recirculate.
system is operating within specifications. • Turn the AlC switch ON and the fan switch to
Max.
NOTE: • Hold the engine speed at 1,500 rpm.
• If accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate the • No driver or passengers in vehicle .
work area before resuming service.
• Additional health and safety information may be 7. After running the air conditioning for 10 minutes
obtained from the refrigerant and lubricant under the above test conditions, read the delivery
manufacturers. temperature from the thermometer in the center
vent, the intake temperature near the blower unit,
1. Connect an R-134a refrigerant recovery!recycling! and the discharge (high) and suction (low)
charging station to the high-pressure service port pressures on the AlC gauges.
and the low-pressure service port, following the
equipment manufacturer's instructions.
2. Determine the relative humidity and air

temperature.
3. Open the glove box. Remove the glove box stop on

each side, then let the glove box hang down
(see page 20-104).
4. Insert a thermometer (A) in the center vent.
(cont'd)
BACK 21-109
Climate Control
Ale System Test (cont'd)

8. Refer to the inspection data.
Inspection data
Example Intake temperature (dry): 86"F (30 "C) Humidity level 70 %
Intake temperature (wet): 81.9 "F (27.7 "C)
Delivery temperature: 55.8 "F (13.2 "C)
Intake pressure: 201 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm2) (29 psi)
Delivery pressure: 1,380 kPa (14.1 kgf/cm2) (200 psi)
Results: Within normal range
kPa
(kgf/cm2)
[psi]
HUMIDITY
LEVEL
2,000
(20.4)
[290] kPa 800/0
(kgf/cm2)
[psi] "F
(OC)
300
(3.1) 86 800/0
[44] (30) 300/0
DELIVERY
PRESSURE
1,000 200 300/0

(10.2) (2.0)
[145] [29] 800/0
INTAKE
100 68 PRESSURE
(1.0) (20)
[15]
DELIVERY
PRESSURE 0 0
INTAKE
PRESSURE 300/0
50
(10)
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE
DELIVERY
TEMPERATURE 0 -+-.>...'(J"------,----.------+-------.--------,
68 77 86 95 104 "F
(20) (25) (30) (35) (40) (OC)
INTAKE TEMPERATURE
21-110 BACK
Pressure Test
Test results Related symptoms Probable cause Remedy
Discharge (high) After stopping AlC compressor, pressure Air in system Recover, evacuate (see page 21-106), and
pressure drops to about 196 kPa (2.0 kgf/cm', recharge with specified amount
abnormally high 28 psi) quickly, and then falls gradually. (see page 21-107).
Reduced or no airflow through AlC o Clogged AlC condenser or o Clean.

condenser radiator fins 0
Check voltage and fan rpm.
o AlC condenser or radiator fan o Check fan direction.
not working properly
Line to AlC condenser is excessively hot. Restricted flow of refrigerant in Restricted lines.
system
Discharge High and low-pressures are balanced o Faulty AlC compressor Replace the AlC compressor.
pressure soon after stopping AlC compressor. discharge valve
abnormally low Low side is higher than normal. o Faulty AlC compressor seal
Outlet of expansion valve is not frosted, o Faulty expansion valve o Replace.

low-pressure gauge indicates vacuum. o Moisture in system o Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
specified amount.
Suction (low) Expansion valve is not frosted, and low- o Frozen expansion valve 0
Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
pressure pressure line is not cold. Low-pressure (Moisture in system) specified amount.
abnormally low gauge indicates vacuum. o Faulty expansion valve o Replace the expansion valve.
Discharge temperature is low, and the Frozen evaporator Run the fan with AlC compressor off,
airflow from vents is restricted. then check the evaporator temperature
sensor.
Expansion valve is frosted. Clogged expansion valve Clean or replace.
Suction pressure Low-pressure hose and check jOint are Expansion valve open too long Repair or replace.
abnormally high cooler than the temperature around
evaporator.
Suction pressure is lowered when AlC Excessive refrigerant in system Recover, evacuate, and recharge with
condenser is cooled by water. specified amount.
High and low-pressures are equalized as o Faulty gasket Replace the AlC compressor.
soon as the AlC compressor is stopped, o Faulty high-pressure valve
and both gauges fluctuate while running. o Foreign particle stuck in high-
pressure valve
Suction and Reduced airflow through AlC condenser. o Clogged AlC condenser or o Clean.
discharge radiator fins o Check voltage and fan rpm.
pressures o AlC condenser or radiator fan o Check fan direction.
abnormally high not working properly
Suction and Low-pressure hose and metal end areas Clogged or kinked low-pressure Repair or replace.
discharge are cooler than evaporator. hose parts
pressures
abnormally low Temperature around expansion valve is Clogged high-pressure line Repair or replace.
too low compared with that around
receiver/dryer.
Refrigerant leaks AlC compressor clutch is dirty. AlC compressor shaft seal Replace the AlC compressor.
leaking
AlC compressor bolt(s) are dirty. Leaking around bolt(s) Tighten bolt(s) or replace the AlC
compressor.
AlC compressor gasket is wet with oil. Gasket leaking Replace the AlC compressor.
AlC fitting is dirty. Leaking O-ring Clean the AlC fitting and replace the
O-ring.
BACK 21-111
BACK
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS) (If electrical maintenance is required)
• Do not bump or impact the SRS unit, front impact sensors, or side impact sensors when the ignition switch is ON (II),
airbags may deploy.
r--:w
~
BACK
Body Electrical
Body Electrical Horn
Special Tools ............................................... 22-2 Component Location Index ....................... 22-145
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 22-3 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-146
Horn TesVReplacement ............................. 22-147
Relay and Control Unit Horn Switch Test ........................................ 22-147
Locations ................................... 22-7
Exterior Lights
Wire Harness and Ground Component Location Index .................•..... 22-149
Locations ................................... 22-13 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-152
DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-157
Fuse/Relay Boxes ......................... 22-52 MICU Input Test .......................................... 22-163
Combination Light Switch TesV
Power Distribution ....................... 22-55 Replacement ............................................ 22-167
HID Lamp System Troubleshooting ......... 22-168
Ground Distribution ..................... 22-60 HID Bulb Replacement ............................... 22-172
HID Unit Replacement ................................ 22-173
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box Headlight Adjustment ................................ 22-174
Removal and Installation ........................... 22-61 Headlight Replacement .............................. 22-175
Bulb Replacement ...................................... 22-176
* Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box Fog Light Replacement .............................. 22-177
Removal and Installation ........................... 22-62 Fog Light Adjustment ................................. 22-178
Taillight Replacement ................................ 22-178
Battery .......................... ................. 22-63 License Plate Light Replacement .............. 22-179
High Mount Brake Light Replacement ...... 22-180
Relays .... .................. ....... .... ........... 22-64 Brake Pedal Position Switch Test .............. 22-180
* Ignition Switch Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher

Test .............................................................. 22-66 Component Location Index ........................ 22-181
Replacement ............................................... 22-66 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-182
DTC Troubleshooting .....................•........... 22-184
Multiplex Integrated Control System MICU Input Test .......................................... 22-186
Component Location Index ....................... 22-67 Hazard Warning Switch TesV
General Troubleshooting Information ...... 22-68 Replacement ............................................ 22-190
DTC Troubleshooting Index ....................... 22-71 Side Turn Signal Light Replacement ........ 22-191
System Description .................................... 22-75
Troubleshooting-B-CAN System Interior Lights
Diagnosis Test Mode A .......................... 22-88 Component Location Index ....................... 22-192
Troubleshooting-B-CAN System Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-194
Diagnosis Test Mode B ........................... 22-90 Interior Lights Switch TesV
Troubleshooting-B-CAN System Replacement ............................................ 22-196
Diagnosis Test Mode C ........................... 22-91 Front Individual Map Light
Troubleshooting-B-CAN System Replacement ............................................ 22-197
Diagnosis Test Mode D .......................... 22-92 Ceiling Light Replacement ......................... 22-197
Troubleshooting-B-CAN System Cargo Area Light TesVReplacement ......... 22-198
Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Glove Box Light TesVReplacement ........... 22-198
Mode 2 (without HDS) ............................ 22-93 Courtesy Light Replacement ..................... 22-199
Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test ................. 22-95 Vanity Mirror Light TesVReplacement ..... 22-200
Cicuit Diagram ............................................ 22-96 Console Box Light Replacement ............... 22-201
DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-99 Armbient Light Test .................................... 22-201
MICU Input Test .......................................... 22-107
Entry Lights Control System
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security Component Location Index ....................... 22-202
System Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-203
I
Component Location Index ....................... 22-110 MICU Input Test .......................................... 22-204
System Description .................................... 22-112 Ignition Key Switch Test ............................ 22-207
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-114
DTCTroubleshooting ................................. 22-118
Symptom Troubleshooting ....................... 22-126
MICU Input Test .......................................... 22-131
Door Lock Actuator Test ............................ 22-136
Door Lock Knob Switch Test ...................... 22-137
Door Lock Switch Test ................................ 22-138
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test .................. 22-139
Tailgate Release Actuator Test .................. 22-139
Tailgate Latch Switch Test ......................... 22-140
Hood Switch Test ........................................ 22-140
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch TesV
Replacement ............................................ 22-141
Keyless Buzzer TesVReplacement ............ 22-141
TransmitterTest ......................................... 22-142
Transmitter Programming ......................... 22-144
Power Windows Accessory Power Sockets
Component Location Index ....................... 22-208 Component Location Index ....................... 22-296
System Description .................................... 22-209 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-297
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-210 Front Accessory Power Socket Test/
Resetting the Power Window Replacement ............................................ 22-298
Control Unit ............................................. 22-213 Console Accessory Power Socket Test/
Master Switch Input Test ........................... 22-214 Replacement ............................................ 22-299
Front passenger's Power Window
Switch Input Test .................................... 22-217 Power Mirrors
Left Rear Power Window Switch Input Component Location Index ....................... 22-300
Test ........................................................... 22-219 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-302
Right Rear Power Window Switch Input Function Test ............................................... 22-304
Test ........................................................... 22-221 Power Mirror Control Unit Input Test ....... 22-305
Driver's and Front Passenger's Power Power Mirror Actuator Test ....................... 22-308
Window Motor Test ................................ 22-223 Power Mirror Switch Test/
Rear Passenger's Power Window Motor Replacement ............................................ 22-309
Test ........................................................... 22-224 Power Mirror Actuator Replacement ........ 22-310
Power Window Switch Replacement ....... 22-225
Seat Heaters
Wipers/Washers Component Location Index ....................... 22-311
Component Location Index ....................... 22-228 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-312
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-230 Seat Heater Test ......................................... 22-314
DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-232 Switch Test .................................................. 22-315
MICU Input Test .......................................... 22-241
Wiper/Washer Switch Test/ Power Lumbers Support
Replacement ............................................ 22-244 Component Location Index ....................... 22-316
Wiper Motor Test ........................................ 22-245 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-317
Washer Motor Test ..................................... 22-246 Switch Test/Replacement .......................... 22-318
Washer Fluid Level Switch Test Motor Test ................................................... 22-318
(Canada models) ..................................... 22-246
Wiper Motor Replacement ........................ 22-247 Power Seats
Rear Window Wiper Motor Component Location Index ....................... 22-319
Replacement ............................................ 22-249 Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-320
Washer Reservoir Replacement ................ 22-249 Switch Test/Replacement .......................... 22-321
Wiper Blade Replacement ......................... 22-250 Motor Test ................................................... 22-322
Wiper Arm/Nozzle Adjustment ................. 22-251
Washer Tube Replacement ....................... 22-253 Rear Window Defogger
Gauges Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-325
Component Location Index ....................... 22-255 Function Test ............................................... 22-326
Self-diagnostic Function ............................ 22-258 Defogger Wire Repair ................................. 22-327
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-262
DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-269 Immobilizer System
Gauge Control Module Input Test ............. 22-282 Component Location Index ....................... 22-328
Gauge Control Module Replacement ....... 22-284 System Description .................................... 22-329
Rewriting the aDO Data on a New Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-330
Gauge Control Module ........................... 22-284 DTC Troubleshooting ................................. 22-331
Multi Information Switch Test/ Symptom Troubleshooting
Replacement ............................................ 22-285 Information .............................................. 22-333
Outside Air Temperature Indicator Symptom Troubleshooting ....................... 22-335
Calibration ............................................... 22-286 System Check ............................................. 22-338
Status Log ................................................... 22-340
Reminder Systems Immobilizer Key Registration .................... 22-341
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-288
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
Input Test ................................................. 22-342 r--:'IIII
Moonroof
Immobilizer-Keyless Control Unit
Replacement ............................................ 22-344 II..!!:..IIII
Resetting the Moonroof Control Unit ....... 22-291
Circuit Diagram ........................................... 22-292
Moonroof Control Unit Input Test ............. 22-293
Moonroof Switch Test/Replacement ........ 22-295
Body Electrical
Special Tools

CD 07WAZ-001010A MPCS (MICU) Service Connector 1
CD 07TAZ-001020A Back Probe Adaptor 1
CD
22-2 BACK
r--:'I
I.!::..I
Tips and Precautions • Some connectors have a clip on their side used to
attach them to a mount bracket on the body or on
Before Troubleshooting another component. This clip has a pull type lock.
• Some mounted connectors cannot be disconnected
1. Check applicable fuses in the appropriate fuse/relay unless you first release the lock and remove the
box. connector from its mount bracket (A).
2. Check the battery for damage, state of charge, and

clean and tight connections.
INOTICE I
• Do not quick-charge a battery unless the
battery ground cable has been
disconnected, otherwise you will damage
the alternator diodes .
• Do not attempt to crank the engine with
the battery ground cable loosely
connected or you will severely damage the
wiring.
Handling Connectors
• Make sure the connectors are clean and have no • Never try to disconnect connectors by pulling on their
loose wire terminals. wires; pull on the connector halves instead.
• Make sure multiple cavity connectors are packed with • Always reinstall plastic covers.
dielectric grease (except watertight connectors).
• All connectors have push-down release type locks (A).
• Before connecting connectors, make sure the

A terminals (A) are in place and not bent.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-3
Body Electrical
• Check for loose retainer (A) and rubber seals (8). Handling Wires and Harnesses
• Secure wires and wire harnesses to the frame with
their respective wire ties at the designated locations.
A • Remove clips carefully; don't damage their locks (A).
B
• The backs of some connectors are packed with

dielectric grease. Add grease if necessary. If the • Slip pliers (A) under the clip base and through the
grease is contaminated, replace it. hole at an angle, then squeeze the expansion tabs to
release the clip.
~
(PIN 08798-9001)
• After installing harness clips, make sure the harness

• Insert the connector all the way and make sure it is doesn't interfere with any moving parts.
securely locked. • Keep wire harnesses away from exhaust components
• Position wires so that the open end of the cover faces and other hot parts, from sharp edges of brackets and
down. holes, and from exposed screws and bolts.
• Seat grommets in their grooves properly (A). Do not
leave grommets distorted (8).
22-4 BACK
r--:'I
~
Testing and Repairs Five-step Troubleshooting

• Do not use wires or harnesses with broken insulation.
Replace them or repair them by wrapping the break 1. Verify The Complaint:
with electrical tape. Turn on all the components in the problem circuit
• Never attempt to modify, splice, or repair SRS wiring. to verify the client complaint. Note the symptoms.
If there is an open or damage is SRS wiring or Do not begin disassembly or testing until you have
terminals, replace the harness. narrowed down the problem area.
• After installing parts, make sure that no wires are
pinched under them. 2. Analyze The Schematic:
• When using electrical test equipment, follow the Look up the schematic for the problem circuit.
manufacturer's instructions and those described in Determine how the circuit is supposed to work by
this manual. tracing the current paths from the power feed
• If possible, insert the probe of the tester from the wire through the circuit components to ground. If
side (except waterproof connector). several circuits fail at the same time, the fuse or a
ground is a likely cause.
Based on the symptoms and your understanding of

the circuit operation, identify one or more possible
causes of the problem.
3. Isolate The Problem By Testing The Circuit:

Make circuit tests to check the diagnosis you made
in step 2. Keep in mind that a logical, simple
procedure is the key to efficient troubleshooting.
Test for the most likely cause of failure first. Try to
make tests at points that are easily accessible.
4. Fix The Problem:

Once the specific problem is identified, make the
• Use back probe adaptor 07TAZ-001020A. repair. Be sure to use proper tools and safe
procedures.
5. Make Sure The Circuit Works:

Turn on all components in the repaired circuit in all
modes to make sure you've fixed the entire
problem. If the problem was a blown fuse, be sure
to test all of the circuits on the fuse. Make sure no
C::C=======L[----.L.._ new problems turn up and the original problem
does not recur.
• Refer to the instructions in the Honda Terminal Kit for

identification and replacement of connector terminals.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-5
Body Electrical
Wire Color Codes How to Check for DTCs with the Honda
Diagnostic System (HDS)
The following abbreviations are used to identify wire
colors in the circuit schematics: NOTE: For specific operations, refer to the user's
WHT.................................... White manual that came with the Honda Diagnostic System
YEl...................................... Yellow (HDS).
BlK...................................... Black
BlU ..................................... Blue 1. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (A)
GRN..................................... Green located under the driver's side ofthe dashboard.
RED ..................................... Red
ORN..................................... Orange
PNK..................................... Pink
BRN ..................................... Brown
GRY·.... ;................................ Gray
PUR..................................... Purple
l T BlU ................................ Light Blue
lTGRN ..................... ;......... Light Green
The wire insulation has one color or one color with

another color stripe. The second color is the stripe.
3. Make sure the HDS communicates with the vehicle,

if it doesn't, troubleshoot the DlC circuit (see page
11-229).
4. Enter the BODY ELECTRICAL then select the TEST

MODE menu.
6. If any DTCs are indicated, note them, and go to the

indicated DTC troubleshooting.
22-6 BACK
r:-:'I
Relay and Control Unit Locations I.!!:..I
Engine Compartment
A/C CONDENSER FAN RELAY

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE
CONTROL SYSTEM (ETCS) FAN CONTROL RELAY
CONTROL RELAY
BLOWER MOTOR RELAY
REAR WINDOW WIPER RELAY
ELD UNIT PGM-FI SUBRELAY
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER RELAY

PGM-FI MAIN RELAY1 IGNITION COIL RELAY
(FIMAIN)
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH RELAY
VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
ELECTRIC VACUUM
PUMPRELAY1
POWER
AUXILIARY MIRROR
UNDER-HOOD DEFOGGER
FUSE/RELAY BOX RELAY
BACK 22-7
Relay and Control Unit Locations
Dashboard
POWER
MIRROR
CONTROL
UNIT
~ERWINDOWRELAY
PGM-FI MAIN RELAY2 (FUEL PUMP)
STARTER CUT RELAY
MICU
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
I I
o DDDDDOO 0
00000000000
00000000000
DDDDDDDDDDD
View of View of
front side rear side
22-8 BACK
r--:'I
~
FOG LIGHT RELAY

[ Wire colors: VEL, WHT, ]
BlU andWHT
CONSOLE ACCESSORY POWER DRIVER'S SEAT ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT (XM RECEIVER)
SOCKET RELAY HEATER RELAY (HIGH) (USA models with navigation)
[Wire colors: VEL, GRN, ] [Wire colors: GRN, BlU,]
BlKand PUR BlKand PUR
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
FRONT ACCESSORY POWER

SOCKET RELAY FRONT PASSENGER'S
rWire colors: WHT, BlU,] SEAT HEATER RELAY (HIGH)
LBlKand PUR rWire colors: l T GRN, BlU,]
LBlKandORN
HANDSFREELINK CONTROL UNIT (With navigation)
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT
(With built-in the receiver)
DRIVER'S SEAT FRONT PASSENGER'S
HEATER RELAY (LOW) SEAT HEATER RELAY (JOW)
rWire colors: RED, BlU, ] [Wire colors: PNK, BlU,
LBlK, BlK and l T GRN BlK, BlK and GRN
(cant'd)
BACK 22-9
Dashboard (cont'd)
AUDIO-HVAC DISPLAY UNIT (Without navigation) or

NAVIGATION DISPLAY UNIT (With navigation)
SRSUNIT
AUDIO
UNIT
NAVIGATION STEREO
UNIT AMPLIFIER
(With navigation) (With ELS audio system)
22-10 BACK
Door and Seat
Driver's Door
POWER WINDOW
(Has built-in controMIunit)
ASTER SWITCH
Front Passenger's Seat
ODS UNIT
BACK 22-11
Rear and Roof
MOONROOF CONTROL
UNIT/MOTOR
SH·AWD CONTROL UNIT

SH·AWD RELAY
[ Wire colors: WHT, PUR, ]
BLKand ORN
22-12 BACK
~
Connectors and Harnesses ~
Connector Index
Identification numbers have been assigned to in-line connectors, junction connectors, and terminals. The number is preceded by the letter "C"
for connectors "G" for ground terminals or "T" for non:ground terminals.
Harness Location
Engine Compartment Dashboard Others (Floor, Door, Notes
Tailgate, and Roof)
AlC wire harness C206 (see page 22-48)
G571
Battery ground cable (-) G1 (see page 22-14)
Cable reel subharness (see page 22-49)
Dashboard wire harness C203 through C205, (see page 22-28)
(View of driver's side) C208 through C211,
C401,C402,C501,C502
G501
Dashboard wire harness C403 through C405 (see page 22-30)
(View of middle) G502 G503 G504 G506
Dashboard wire harness C302 through C307, C551, (see page 22-32)
(View of passenger's side) C552
G505
Driver's door subharness C503 (see Daoe 22-44)
Driver's door wire harness C501 C502 C503 (see Daoe 22-44)
Driver's seat subharness C702 (see paQe 22-50)
Driver's seat wire harness C701 C702 (see paQe 22-50)
Engine compartment wire harness C101, C104 C201 through C207 (see page 22-22)
(Left branch) G201 G202 G451
Engine compartment wire harness C301 C301 through C303 (see page 22-26)
(RiQht branch) G401 G402
Engine ground cable T1 G2 (see page 22-14)
Engine wire harness C102 through C107 (see page 22-18)
C101
Front DaSSenQer's door subharness C553 (see paQe 22-45)
Front passenQer's door wire harness C551 C552 C553 (see paQe 22-45)
Left rear door wire harness C601 (see paQe 22-46)
Left side wire harness C201,C202,C208,C209 C601. C751, C752, (see page 22-34)
CS01, CS02
G601 G602
Left TPMS subharness C211 (see page 22-16)
Moonroofwire harness C210 (see~e 22-42)
ODS unit harness C703 (see Daoe 22-51)
Rear differential subharness C751,C752 (see page 22-43)
T15
RiQht rear door wire harness C651 (see paQe 22-47)
Right side wire harness C301, C304, C305 C651 (see page 22-36)
G651
RightTPMS subharness C306 (see page 22-16)
Shift solenoid wire harness C107 (see page 22-1S)
SRS wire harness (Left branch) C701 (see page 22-3S)
G551
SRS wire harness (Right branch) C405 C703 (see page 22-39)
G552
Starter cable (+), C101, C102 (see page 22-16)
T3 T101 T102 T103
Tailgate subharness CS01 throuQh CS04 (see paQe 22-40)
Tailgate wire harness CS03 C804 (see page 22-40)
Transmission ground cable T2 G3 (see page 22-14)
Transmission range switch C103 (see page 22-1S)
subharness
BACK 22-13
Connectors and Harnesses
Connector to Harness Index

Battery Ground Cable
Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location Connects to Notes
(-) 3 Left side of enaine compartment Battery neaative terminal
G1 4 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via battery
around cable
Engine Ground Cable

T1 1 Right side of engine compartment Engine
G2 6 Right side of engine compartment Body ground, via engine
around cable
Transmission Ground Cable

T2 5 Left side of engine compartment Transmission housing
G3 2 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via
transmission around cable
22-14 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
BATIERY GROUND CABLE
BACK 22-15
Connector to Harness Index (cont'd)
Starter Cable
AlC compressor 1 3 Right side of engine compartment
Alternator 5 4 Right side of engine compartment
Knock sensor 7 1 Middle of engine
MAFsensor 10 5 Left side of engine compartment
Starter solenoid 9 1 Middle of engine compartment
C101 13 1 Left side of engine compartment Engine compartment wire
harness (see page 22-22)
C102 6 13 Middle of engine compartment Engine wire harness
(see Dage 22-18)
(+) 16 Middle of engine compartment Batt~ry (+) terminal
T3 8 Middle of engine compartment Starter
T101 11 Left side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-52)
T102 12 Left side of engine compartment Under-hood fuse/relay box
(see page 22-52)
T103 4 Right side of engine comoartment Alternator
Left TPMS Subharness

Left front initiator 15 3 Left side of engine compartment
C211 14 4 Under left side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see Dage 22-28)
Right TPMS Subharness

Right front initiator 2 3 Right side of engine compartment
C306 3 4 Under right side of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see Dage 22-32)
22-16 BACK
~
~
8 9 10 11 12 13
RIGHT TPMS
SUBHARNESS
LEFT TPMS
SUBHARNESS
2
15
16
STARTER CABLE
BACK 22-17
Engine Wire Harnes

ATF temperature sensor 29 2 Transmission housing
A/F sensor (sensor 1) 47 4 Right side of engine compartment
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 24 2 Transmisson housing
valve A
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 25 2 Transmission housing
valve B
AfT clutch pressure control solenoid 19 2 Transmission housing
valveC
Turbocharger boost sensor 35 3 Left side of engine
CKPsensor 44 3 Under right side of engine
CMPsensorA 9 3 Left side of engine
CMPsensor B 13 3 Left side of engine
Engine coolanttemperature (ECT) 10 2 Left side of engine
sensor 1
EVAP canister purge valve 12 2 Left side of engine
Ignition coil No.1 3 3 Middle of engine
Injector No.1 46 2 Middle of engine
Intake air temperature (IAn sensor 40 2 Middle of engine
Input shaft (mainshaft) speed sensor 30 3 Transmission Housing
MAP sensor 38 3 Middle of engine
Oil pressure switch 48 1 Under right side of engine
Output shaft (counters haft) speed 28 3 Transmission housing
sensor
PCM connector B 18 44 Left side of engine compartment
PCM connector C 17 44 Left side of engine compartment
Rocker arm oil control solenoid 1 2 Rear side engine
Rocker arm oil pressure switch 2 2 Rear side of engine
Secondary H02S (Sensor 2) 14 4 Left side of engine
TP sensor/throttle actuator (throttle 43 6 Middle of engine
body)
Turbocharger boost control solenoid 8 2 Rear side of engine
valve
Turbocharger bypass control solenoid 36 2 Middle of engine
valve
Turbocharger wastegate control 7 2 Rear side of engine
solenoid valve
VTC oil control solenoid valve 49 2 Rear side of engine
2nd clutch transmission fluid pressure 11 1 Transmission housing
switch
3rd clutch transmission fluid pressure 31 1 Transmission housing
switch
4th clutch transmission fluid pressure 21 1 Transmission housing
switch
22-18 BACK
~
I..!:!..I
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS
15
16
49 17
48
18
19
47 20
21
22
23
24
25
46
45
44
43
42
26
41
27
40
SHIFT SOLENOID
WIRE HARNESS
37
(cont'd)
BACK 22-19

Engine Wire Harness (cont'd)
C102 39 13 Middle of engine compartment Starter cable (see page
22-16)
C103 20 10 Transmission housing Transmission range switch
subharness
C104 16 23 Left side of engine Engine compartment wire
C105 (Junction connector) 34 24 Left side of engine
C106 (Junction connector) 15 12 Left side of engine
C107 32 5 Transmission housing Shift solenoid wire harness
G101 37 Middle of engine Engine ground. via engine
wire harness
Transmission Range Switch Subharness

Connector or Terminal Location Connects to
Transmission range switch Transmission housing
C103 Transmission housin ine wire harness
Shift Solenoid Wire Harness

Shift solenoid valve A 23 1 Transmission housing
Shift solenoid valve B 33 1 Transmission housing
Shift solenoid valve C 22 1 Transmission housing
Shift solenoid valve D 26 1 Transmission housing
C107 32 5 Transmission housing Engine wire harness
22-20 BACK
~
~
ENGINE WIRE HARNESS
15
16
49 17
48
18
19
47 20
21
22
23
24
25
46
45
44
43
42
26
41
27
40
SOLENOID
SUBHARNESS
37
BACK 22-21

Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Left branch)

Accelerator pedal position sensor 13 6 Under left side of dash
AlC condenser fan motor 42 2 Middle of engine compartment
Brake booster pressure sensor 26 3 Left side of engine compartment
Brake fluid level switch 11 2 Left side of engine compartment
Brake pedal position switch 14 4 Under left side of dash
Electric vacuum pump relay 1 45 4 Left side of engine compartment
Electric vacuum pump relay 2 44 4 Left side of engine compartment
Engine coolanttemperature (ECT) 40 2 Middle of engine compartment
serisor2
High horn 33 1 Behind left side of front bumper
Keyless buzzer 32 2 Behind left side of front bumper
Left fog light 34 2 Behind left side offront bumper
Left front impact sensor 37 2 Behind middle offront bumper
Left front parking/turn signal light 38 3 Behind left headlight
Left front side marker light 30 2 Behind left headlight
Left front wheel sensor 28 2 Left side of engine compartment
Left headlight (low) 35 2 Behind left headlight
Left headlight (high) 36 2 Behind left headlight
Outside air temperature sensor 39 2 Behind middle offront bumper
Parking brake switch 15 1 Under left side of dash
PCM connector A 27 44 Left side of engine compartment
Power mirror defogger relay 43 4 Left side of engine compartment
Radiatorfan motor 41 2 Middle of engine compartment
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector F 18 34 Under left side of dash
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector 19 21 Under left side of dash
G
Under-hood fuse/relay box connector 6 3 Left side of engine compartment
A (ELD unit) (see page 22-52)
B (see page 22-52)
C (see page 22-52)
D (see page 22-52)
E (see page 22-52)
F (see page 22-52)
G (see page 22-52)
H (see page 22-52)
J (see page 22-52)
K (see page 22-52)
Windshield wiDer motor 16 5 Under left side of cowl cover
22-22 BACK
r--:'I
~
5 6 7 8
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
3
18
2
19
1
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
42
41
40
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS 31
(cont'd)
BACK 22-23

Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Left branch) (cont'd)
C101 46 1 Left side of engine compartment starter cable (see page
22-16)
C104 47 23 Left side of engine compartment Engine wire harness
(see page 22-18)
C201 24 13 Under left side of dash Left side wire harness
(see page 22-34)
(see page 22-34)
(see page 22-28)
(see page 22-28)
(see page 22-28)
C206 12 12 Under left side of dash AlC wire harness (see page
22-48)
C207 (Junction connector) 17 12 Under left side of dash
G201 31 Behind left side of front bumper Body ground, via engine
compartment wire harness
G202 29 Left side of engine compartment Body ground, via engine
G451 20 Behind left kick panel Body ground, via engine
comoartment wire harness
22-24 BACK
5 6 7 8
AUXILIARY
UNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS 31
BACK 22-25

Engine Compartment Wire Harness (Right branch)
AlC pressure switch 5 3 Right side of engine compartment
Electric vacuum pump 6 2 Right side of engine compartment
Hood switch 8 2 Front of engine compartment
Low horn 13 1 Behind right side of front bumper
Power steering pressure (PSP) switch 3 2 Right side of engine compartment
Rightfront impact sensor 10 2 Behind middle of front bumper
Right fog light 12 2 Behind right side offront bumper
Rightfront parking/turn signal light 9 3 Behind right headlight
Right front side marker light 17 2 Behind right headlight
Right front wheel sensor 18 2 Right side of engine compartment
Right headlight (high) 7 2 Behind right headlight
Right headlight (low) 11 2 Behind right headlight
VSA modulator-control unit 4 46 Right side of engine compartment
Windshield/rear window washer 14 2 Behind right side of front bumper
motor
Washer fluid level switch 15 2 Behind right side of front bumper Canada
models
C301 19 2 Under right side of dash Right side wire harness
(see page 22-36)
(see page 22-32)
(see page 22-32)
G301 16 Behind right side of front bumper Body ground, via engine
G401 1 Under right side of dash Body ground, via engine
G402 2 Under right side of dash Body ground, via engine
22-26 BACK
~
~
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
WIRE HARNESS
18
9
17
10
11
16
BACK 22-27

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of driver's side)
Data link connector (DLC) 19 16 Under left side of dash
Gauge control module 16 36 Behind gauge control module
Power mirror control unit 1 24 Under left side of dash
Power mirror switch 18 13 Left side of dash
C (see page 22-54)
o (see page 22-54)
o (see page 22-54)
K (see page 22-54)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector P 7 10 Under left side of dash
(see page 22-54)
M (see page 22-54)
Q (see page 22-54)
N (see page 22-54)
R (see page 22-54)
5 (MICU) (see page 22-54)
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector T 13 34 Under left side of dash
(MICU) (see page 22-54)
VSA OFF switch 17 5 Left side of dash
C203 25 20 Under left side of dash Engine compartment wire
(see page 22-34)
(see page 22-34)
C210 23 20 Under left side of dash Moonroofwire harness
(see page 22-42)
C211 2 4 Under left side of dash Left TPMS subharness
(see page 22-16)
C401 (Junction connector) 15 12 Under middle of dash
C501 28 18 Under left side of dash Driver's door wire harness
(see page 22-44)
C502 27 16 Under left side of dash Driver's door wire harness
(see page 22-44)
G501 20 Under left side of dash Body ground, via
dashboard wire harness
22-28 BACK
~
~
3 4 8 9 10
DASHBOARD
WIRE HARNESS
BACK 22-29

Dashboard Wire Harness (View of middle)
Audio switch panel connector A 3 20 Behind audio switch panel *1
Audio switch panel connector B 9 5 Behind audio switch panel *1
Audio-HVAC display unit 7 12 Middle of dash *1
Audio-HVAC subdisplay unit 5 12 Under middle of dash *2
Audio unit connector A 15 17 Behind audio unit
Audio unit connector B 16 14 Behind audio unit
Audio unit connector C 14 28 Behind audio unit
Audio unit connector D 17 32 Behind audio unit
AfT gear position indicator panel light/ 29 6 Under middle of dash
park-pin switch
AfT shift lock solenoid 28 2 Under middle of dash
Climate control unit connector B 12 16 Under middle of dash
Console accessory power socket 23 2 Middle of dash
Console box light 26 2 Middle of dash
Driver's climate control switch 2 16 Middle of dash
Driver's seat heater switch 22 6 Middle of dash
Front accessory power socket 20 2 Middle of dash
Front center speaker 6 2 Under middle of dash *2
Front passenger's seat heater switch 19 7 Middle of dash
HandsFreeLink control unit 24 22 Under middle of dash
Hazard warning switch 8 5 Middle of dash
Navigation display unit 7 20 Middle of dash *2
Navigation service check connector 37 2 Under middle of dash *2
Navigation switch panel connector A 3 5 Behind navigation switch panel *2
Navigation switch panel connector B 9 6 Behind navigation switch panel *2
Navigation unit connector A 33 20 Under middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector B 30 14 Under middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector C 34 8 Under middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector F 31 5 Under middle of dash *2
Navigation unit connector G 32 7 Under middle of dash *2
Passenger's climate control switch 10 12 Middle of dash
SRS unit connector A 18 28 Under middle of dash
Stereo amplifier connector A 27 18 Under middle of dash
Stereo amplifier connector B 21 28 Under middle of dash *2
Stereo amplifier connector B 21 24 Under middle of dash *1
Sunlight sensor 4 2 Under middle of dash
Yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor 35 4 Under middle of dash
C405 36 20 Under middle of dash SRS wire harness (see page
22-39)
G502 1 Under middle of dash Body ground, via
* 1: WIthout navIgatIon
* 2: With navigation
22 ..30 BACK
r--:'I
t=!..I
38
BACK 22-31
Dashboard Wire Harnes.s (View of passenger's side)

AcuraLink control unit connector A 31 20 Under right side of dash *2
AcuraLink control unit connector B 32 16 Under right side of dash *2
Cable reel 41 20 Steering column
Combination light switch 1 12 steering column
Console accessory power socket relay 3 4 Under middle of dash
Driver's airbag inflator 40 4 Steering column
Driver's seat heater relay (high) 8 4 Under middle of dash
Driver's seat heater relay (low) 5 5 Under middle of dash
Fog light relay 9 4 Under middle of dash
Front accessory power socket relay 4 4 Under middle of dash
Front passenger's airbag inflator 22 4 Under middle of dash
Front passenger's seat heater relay 7 4 Under middle of dash
(high)
Front passenger's seat heater relay 6 5 Under middle of dash
(low)
Glove box light 35 2 Under middle of dash
Ignition switch 38 7 Steering column
Ignition key switch 37 6 Steering column
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 39 7 Steering column
Junction box connector A 21 6 Under middle of dash
Junction box connector B 10 6 Under middle of dash
Junction box connector C 15 14 Under middle of dash
Junction box connector D 18 6 Under middle of dash
Junction box connector E 19 18 Under middle of dash
Junction box connector F 20 10 Under middle of dash
Junction box connector G 17 14 Under middle of dash
Junction box connector H 13 10 Under middle of dash
Junction box connector J 11 22 Under middle of dash
Junction box connector K 16 14 Under middle of dash
Junction box connector L 12 10 Und.er middle of dash
Junction box connector M 14 10 Under middle of dash
Steering angle sensor 42 5 Steering column
TPMS control unit 36 20 Under middle of dash
Wiper/washer switch 2 8 Steering column
XM receiver 31 14 Under right side of dash *1
C302 27 6 Under right side of dash Engine compartment wire
C303 28 4 Under right side of dash Engine compartment wire
(see page 22-36)
(see page 22-36)
C306 26 4 Under right side of dash Right TPMS subharness
C307 (Female connector) 34 5 Under right side of dash *2
C307 (Male connector) 33 5 Under right side of dash *2
(see page 22-45)
. (see-'p_ag~ 22-4~t
G505 23 Under right side of dash Body ground, via
* 1: USA models without AcuraLlnk
* 2: With AcuraLink
22-32 BACK
~
I.!=:.J
14
6 15
13
5 16
17
18
JUNCTION BOX
23
42
41
40
30
BACK 22-33

Left Side Wire Harness

Cargo light 21 2 Left side of cargo area
Driver's door switch 4 1 Left B-pillar
EVAP canister vent shut valve 7 2 Fuel tank
Fuel gauge sending unit 8 4 Fuel tank
Fuel pump control module 25 10 Left C-pillar
Fuel tank pressure (FTP) sensor 6 3 Fuel tank
Left rear door switch 26 1 Left C-pillar
Left rear initiator 27 3 Left rear of floor
Left rear side marker light 17 2 Behind left taillight
Left rear turn signal light 18 2 Behind left taillight
Left rear tweeter 10 2 Middle of tailgate *
Left rear wheel sensor 24 2 Left rear of floor
Left taillight/brake light 16 3 Behind left taillight
Secondary fuel gauge sending unit 9 4 Fuel tank
SH-AWD control unit connector A 20 20 Behind left taillight
SH-AWD control unit connector B 19 8 Behind left taillight
SH-AWD relay 22 4 Left side of cargo area
Under-dash fuse/relay box connector E 1 42 Under middle of dash
(see page 22-54)
(see page 22-28)
(see page 22-28)
C601 5 18 Left-B-pillar Left rear door wire harness
(see page 22-46)
C751 14 6 Under rear floor Rear differential subharness
(see page 22-43)
C752 15 6 Under rear floor Rear differential subharness
(see page 22-43)
C801 11 20 Rear of roof Tailgate subharness
(see page 22-40)
C802 12 2 Rear of roof Tailgate subharness
(see page 22-40)
G601 23 Behind left rear lining Body ground, via left side
wire harness
G602 13 Right quarter panel Body ground, via left side
wire harness
*: With ELS audio system
22-34 BACK
~
I.!::.I
13
15
29
28
LEFT SIDE
WIRE HARNESS
23
BACK 22-35

Right Side Wire Harness

Passenger's door switch 11 1 Right B-pillar
Right door switch 16 1 Right C-pillar
Right rear initiator 15 3 Right side offloor
Right rear side marker light 3 2 Behind right taillight
Right rear turn signal light 2 2 Behind right taillight
Right rear tweeter 6 2 Middle oftailgate *1
Right rear wheel sensor 9 2 Right side of floor
Right taillight/brake light 1 3 Behind right taillight
Subwoofer 8 8 Middle oftailgate *1
Subwoofer 8 2 Middle of tailgate *2
Trailer lighting connector 7 6 Middle oftailgate
YOP connector (back-up sensor) 5 2 Middle oftailage
(see page 22-32)
(see page 22-32)
C651 10 18 Right B-pillar Right rear door wire
harness (see oaoe 22-47)
G651 4 Right quarter panel Body ground, via rear wire
harness
* 1:Wlth ELS audio system
* 2: Without ELS audio system
22-36 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!!!..I
14
RIGHTSIDE
WIRE HARNESS
BACK 22-37

SRS Wire Harness (Left branch)
Driver's seat belt buckle tensioner 3 4 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat belt tensioner 6 4 Left B-pillar
Driver's side airbag 1 2 Under driver's seat
Left side curtain airbag 5 2 Left C-pillar
Left side impact sensor (first) 7 4 Left B-pillar
Left side impact sensor (second) 4 2 Left C-pillar
C701 2 23 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness
(see page 22-50)
G551 8 Left side of floor Body ground, via SRS wire
harness
22-38 BACK
~
~
SRS Wire Harness (Right branch)

Front passenger's seat belt buckle 4 4 Under front passenger's seat
tensioner
Front passenger's seat belt tensioner 10 4 Right B-pillar
Front passenger's seat airbag 7 2 Under front passenger's seat
Right side curtain airbag 12 2 Right C-pillar
Right side impact sensor (first) 9 4 Right B-pillar
Right side impact sensor (second) 11 2 Right C-pillar
Roll rate sensor 5 2 Under front passenger's seat
SRS unit connector B 2 28 Under middle of dash
SRS unit connector C 3 28 Under middle of dash
C405 1 20 Under middle of dash Dashboard wire harness
(see page 22-30)
C703 8 14 Under front passenger's seat ODS unit harness (see page
22-511
G552 6 Right side of floor Body ground, via SRS wire
harness
1 2 3 4 5
SRS WIRE HARNESS
BACK 22-39

Tailgate Wire Harness
" Connector or Terminal Ref Cavities Location '.
Connects to Notes
Left back-up light 15 2 Left oftailgate
Left license plate light 12 2 Left of tailgate
Left inner taillight 16 2 Left oftailgate
Rear window defogger connector (+) 5 1 .Right to tailgate
Rear window wiper motor 10 4 Middle of tailgate
Rearview camera a 6 Right to tailgate .
*
Right back-up light 7 2 Rightto tailgate .
Right license plate light 9 2 Middle of tailgate
Right inner taillight 6 2 Right to tililgate
Tailgate latch switch 14 2 Middle of tailgate
Tailgate release actuator : 13 2 Middie of tailgate
Tailgate outer handle switch 11 3 Middle of tailgate
Ca03 1a 20 . Left of tailgate Tailgate subharness
Ca04 .. 17 1 Left of tailgate Tailgate subharness
*. With navigation
Tailgate Subharness
High mount brake light 4 2 Behind high mount brake light
Rear window defogger connector (-) 1 1 Left of tailgate,
Ca01 2 20 Rear of roof Left side wire harness
(see page 22-34)
Ca02 3 2 Rear of.roof Left side wire harness
(see page 22-34)
Ca03 1a 20 ,Left of tailgate Tailgate wire harness
Ca04 17 1 Left of tailgate TailQate wire harness
22-40 BACK
r--:'I
~
4
1
JAJl-_---- 7
10
TAILGATE
WIRE HARNESS
18 17
BACK 22-41
Moonroof Wire Harness

Ceiling light 3 3 Middle of roof
Left vanity mirror light 4 2 Left side of roof
Moonroof control unit 2 14 Middle of roof
Moonroof switch 5 7 Middle of roof
Right vanity mirror light 1 2 Right side of roof
Roof console 6 20 Middle of roof
(see paQe 22-28)
2 3
MOONROOF
WIRE HARNESS
4
5
22-42 BACK
r--:'I
~
Rear Differential Subharness

Differential temperature sensor 5 2 Rear differential
Left clutch electromagnetic coil 2 4 Rear differential
Right clutch electromagnetic coil 4 4 Rear differential
C751 6 6 Rear differential Left side wire harness
(see page 22-34)
C752 1 6 Rear differential Left side wire harness
(see DaQe 22-34)
T15 3 Rear differential
REAR DIFFERENTIAL
SUBHARNESS
BACK 22-43
Driver's Door Wire Harness

Driver's power window motor 10 6 Driver's door
Driver's door lock actuator 1 10 Driver's door
Left front speaker 8 2 Driver's door
Left power mirror 4 8 Driver's door
Left front tweeter 5 2 Driver's door
(see page 22-28)
(see page 22-28)
C503 3 23 Driver's door Driver's door subharness
Driver's Door Subharness

Driver's door courtesy light 9 2 Driver's door
Power window master switch 2 22 Driver's door
C503 3 23 Driver's door Driver's door wire harness
2 3 4 5
7
1
DRIVER'S DOOR
WIRE HARNESS
DRIVER'S DOOR
SUBHARNESS 10 9 8
22-44 BACK
~
~
Front Passenger's Door Wire Harness

Front passenger's door lock actuator 7 10 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's power window 8 6 Front passenger's door
motor
Rightfront speaker 10 2 Front passenger's door
Right power mirror 4 14 Front passenger's door
Right front tweeter 3 2 Front passenger's door
(see page 22-32)
(see page 22-32)
C553 5 14 Front passenger's door Front passenger's door
subharness
Front Passenger's Door Subharness

Front passenger's door courtesy light 9 2 Front passenger's door
Front passenger's power window 6 14 Front passenger's door
switch
C553 5 14 Front passenger's door Front passenger's door wire
harness
3 4 5 FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SUBHARNESS
10 9 8 FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR WIRE HARNESS
BACK 22-45
Left Rear Door Wire Harness

Left rear door lock actuator 1 10 Left rear door
Left rear speaker 3 2 Left rear door
Left rear power window motor 5 2 Left rear door
Left rear power window switch 2 14 Left rear door
C601 4 18 Left rear door Left side wire harness
(see oaoe 22-341
1 2
LEFT REAR DOOR

WIRE HARNESS
22-46 BACK
r--:'I
~
Right Rear Door Wire Harness

Right rear door lock actuator 4 10 Right rear door
Right rear speaker 2 2 Right rear door
Right rear power window motor 5 2 Right rear door
Right rear power window switch 3 14 Right rear door
C651 1 18 Right rear door Right side wire harness
(see Daoe 22-36)
RIGHT REAR DOOR

WIRE HARNESS
BACK 22-47
Ale Wire Harness

Blower motor 7 2 Under middle of dash
Climate control unit 9 24 Under middle of dash
Driver's air mix control motor 1 7 Under middle of dash
Evaporator temperature sensor 4 2 Under middle of dash
Mode control motor 3 7 Under middle of dash
Passenger's air mix control motor 10 7 Under middle of dash
Power transistor 5 4 Under middle of dash
Recirculation control motor 8 7 Under middle of dash
C206 2 12 Under middle of dash Engine compartment wire
harness (see oaee 22-22)
G571 8 Under middle of dash
3 4 5
22-48 BACK
r--:'I
t=!..I
Cable Reel Subharness

Audio remote switch 1 12 Steering column
Cable reel 3 20 Steering column
Cruise control combination switch 5 12 Steering column
Horn switch 7 1 Steering column
Multi-information switch 6 7 Steering column *
Steering wheel downshift switch 2 2 Steering column
Steering wheel upshift switch 4 2 Steering column
HFL-voice control switch 8 7 Steering column *
*: With navigation
1 2 3 4 5
BACK 22-49
Driver's Seat Wire Harness

Driver's power seat adjustment switch 5 12 Left side of driver's seat
Driver's power seat front up-down 11 2 Driver's seat
Driver's power seat rear up-down 3 2 Under driver's seat
Driver's power seat slide motor 6 2 Under driver's seat
Driver's seat belt buckle switch 10 3 Driver's seat
Driver's seat heater cushion 9 3 Driver's seat
Driver's seat lumbar switch 4 5 Left side of driver's seat
Driver's seat position sensor 12 2 Driver's seat
C701 8 23 Under driver's seat SRS wire harness (see page
22-38)
C702 7 6 Under driver's seat Driver's seat subharness
Driver's Seat Subharness

Driver's power lumber support motor 13 2 Driver's seat
Driver's power seat recline motor 2 2 Driver's seat
Driver's seat heater back 1 2 Driver's seat
C702 7 6 Under driver's seat Driver's seat wire harness
DRIVER'S SEAT
SUBHARNESS
22-50 BACK
~
l!::J
ODS Unit Harness

Front passenger's seat belt buckle 4 3 Front passenger's seat
switch
Front passenger's seat heater cushion 5 4 Front passenger's seat
Front passenger's weight sensor (front 3 3 Front passenger's seat
inner side)
Front passenger's weight sensor (front 7 3 Front passenger's seat
outer side)
Front passenger's weight sensor (rear 2 3 Front passenger's seat
inner side)
Front passenger's weight sensor (rear 8 3 Front passenger's seat
outer side)
ODS unit 1 18 Front passenger's seat
C703 6 14 Front passenger's seat SRS wire harness (see page
22-391,
ODS UNIT HARNESS
8
4
5
7 6
BACK 22-51
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index

Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Socket Ref Terminal Connects to Notes
A(ELD unit) 21 3 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
NC compressor clutch relay 12 4
NC condenser fan relay 15 4
B 22 1 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
Blower motor relay 2 4
C 23 2 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
0 25 8 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
Diode (for NC condenser fan) 9 --
Diode (for radiator fan) 8 --
E 24 10 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
Electronic throttle control system 14 4
(ETCS) control relay
F 17 20 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
Fan control relay 4 5
G 19 1 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
H 20 1 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
Ignition coil relay 7 4
J 16 4 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
K 18 2 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN) 13 4
PGM-FI subrelay 6 4
Radiator fan relay 3 4
Rear window defogger relay 1 4
Rear window wiDer relav 5 5
T3 10 Starter cable (see DaDe 22-16)
T101 11 Starter cable (see DaDe 22-16)
1 2 3 4 16 17
19
15 20
14
5
13
6
12 25
7
8
24
21
23
22
9
(View of front side) (View of back side)
22-52 BACK
~
~
Auxiliary Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box

Power mirror defogger relay 3 4 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
Vacuum pump relay 1 2 4 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
Vacuum pump relay 2 1 4 Engine compartment wire harness (see oaae 22-22)
1 2
uuO
3
BACK 22-53
Fuse/Relay Boxes
Connector to Fuse/Relay Box Index (cont'd)
Under-dash Fuse/Relay Box

A (Optional connector) 9 6 Not used
C 10 4 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-28)
D 4 2 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-28)
E 5 42 Left side wire harness (see page 22-34)
F 6 34 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
G 7 21 Engine compartment wire harness (see page 22-22)
H (MICU service check connector) 8 3
K 12 8 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-28)
M 13 10 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-28)
Memory erase signal connector socket 11 --
N 14 14 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-28)
0 20 4 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-28)
P 19 10 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-28)
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) 2 4
Power window relay 1 4
Q 17 16 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-28)
R 15 20 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-28)
Starter cut relay 3 4
S 16 20 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-28)
T 18 34 Dashboard wire harness (see page 22-28)
15
16
17
(View of front side) (View of back side)
22-54 BACK
r--:'I
Power Distribution I.!!!:..I
Fuse to Components Index
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box
Fuse Amps Component(s) or Circuit(s) Protected

Number
1 100A Battery, Power distribution
(BAT)
30A SH-AWD control unit (via SH-AWD relay)
(SH-AWOl
2 50A Ignition switch
(lG)
80A No.5, No.6, No.7, No. 27, No. 28, No. 29, and No. 31 fuses (in the under-dash fuse/relay box)
(OPTION)
3 40A VSA modulator-control unit
(VSA
MTR)
20A VSA modulator-control unit
(VSAFSR)
4 50A No. 18, No. 19, No. 20, and No. 21 fuses (in the under-dash fuse/relay box)
(H/L)
40A No. 24, No. 25, No. 26, No. 30, No. 32, and No. 33 fuses (in the under-dash fuse/relay box)
(P/W)
5 -- Not used
6 30A Radiator fan motor (via radiator fan relay)
7 30A AlC condenser fan motor (via AlC condenser fan relay)
8 30A Rear window defogger (via rear window defogger relay)
9 40A Blower motor (via blower motor rel~
10 15A MICU (turn sjgnal/hazard flasher circuit)
11 15A PGM-FI subrelay, EVAP canister purge valve (via PGM-FI subrelay), EVAP canister vent shut valve (via PGM-FI
subrelay), AlF sensor (Sensor 1) (via PGM-FI subrelay), No. 15 fuse (in the under-hood fuse/relay box) (via PGM-
FI subrelay)
12 15A Brake lights Horns (via MICU)
13 20A Rear up-down motor (via driver's power seat adjustment switch), Recline motor (via driver's power seat
adiustment switch)
14 20A Front up-down motor (via driver's power seat adjustment switch), Slide motor (via driver's power seat
adjustment switch)
15 7.5A Radiator fan relay (via AlC diode B)
16 -- Not used
17 15A Electric vacuum DumD (via electric vacuum~um~rell!Ys)
18 15A Ignition coil relav. Ignition coils (via ignition coil relay)
19 15A CKP sensor (via PGM-FI main relay 1), CMP sensor B (via PGM-FI main relay 1), PCM (via PGM-FI main relay 1),
ETCS control relay (via PGM-FI main relay 1), Injectors (via PGM-FI main relay 1), PGM-FI main relay 1 (FI MAIN),
PGM-FI main relay 2 (FUEL PUMP) (via PGM-FI main relay 1) Data link connector
20 7.5A AlC compressor clutch (via AlC comllressor clutch relay)
21 15A PCM (via ETCS control relCIY)
22 7.5A Power mirror control unit, Front individual map lights, Ceiling light, Vanity mirror lights, Door courtesy lights,
Ignition keyJight
23 10A Gauge control module, Navigation unit (with navigation), Navigation display unit (with navigation), AcuraLink
control unit (USA models with navigation) Audio unit MICU HandsFreeLink control uniUwith navigation)
(cont'd)
BACK 22-55
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)
22-56 BACK
r--:'I
~
Auxiliary Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box

Number
31 7.5A Electric vaccum pump (via electric vacuum pump relay 2)
32 - Not used
Iill
DD
BBD
(cont'd)
BACK 22-57
Power Distribution
Fuse to Components Index (cont'd)


Number
1 7.5A Power mirror control unit Power window master switch Moonroof control unit SH-AWD control unit
2 20A PCM Fuel pump control module (via PGM-FI main relav 2) Immobilizer-kevless control unit
3 15A Turbocharger boost control solenoid valve, Turbocharger wastegate control solenoid valve, Turbocharger
bypass control solenoid valve ELD unit SecondarY H02S (SENSOR 2) Alternator CMP sensor A
4 7.5A VSA modulator-control unit Yaw rate-lateral acceleration sensor SteerinQ anQle sensor
5 15A Seat heaters (via seat heater relavs)
6 20A FOQ IiQht relay, fog lights (via fQ~light relav)
7 7.5A Lumber support motor (via lumber support switch)
8 10A Rear window wiper motor (via rear window wiper relay) Rear window wiper relay
9 7.5A SRS unit ODS unit PassenQer's airbaQ CUTOFF indicator
10 7.5A TPMS control unit, Gauge control module, AcuraLink control unit (USA models with navigation), Shift lock
solenoid MICU
11 10A SRS unit
12 10A Right headlight (high beam)
13 10A Left headlight (high beam)
14 7.5A Audio unit light, Audio switch panel (without navigation), Cargo area light, Glove box light, Console box light,
AfT gear position console light, Interior light switch light, Ambient light, Hazard warning switch light, Climate
control switches, Power mirror switch light, Passengers' airbag CUTOFF indicator light, Navigation switch panel
(with navigation), Navigation unit (with navigation), Navigation display unit (with navigation), Seat heater switch
lights, VSA OFF switch light, Multi information switch light, Moonroof switch light, HFL-voice control switch (with
naviQation) Audio remote switch Cruise control combination switch IiQht
15 15A ParkinQ liQhts TailliQhts License plate liQhts Side marker liQhts Inner taillights
16 15A RiQht headliQht (low beam)
17 15A Left headlight (low beam)
18 20A No.12 and No. 13 fuses (in the under-dash fuse!rel~ybox) (via MICU)
19 20A No. 15 fuse (in the under-dash fuse/relav box) (via MICU)
20 7.5A TPMS control unit
21 30A No. 16 and No. 17 fuses (in the under-dash fuse/relav box) (via MICU)
22 -- Not used
23 -- Not used
24 20A Moonroof control unit/motor
25 20A Door lock actuators (via door lock circuit in the MICU)
26 20A Driver's power window motor (via power window master switch)
27 -- Not used
28 15A Console accessorY power socket (via console accessorY power socket relCIYl
29 15A Front accessorY power socket (via front accessorY power socket relav)
30 20A Front passenQer's power window motor (via front passenQer's power window switch)
31 20A Stereo amplifier Subwoofer (with naviQation)
32 20A RiQht rear power window motor (via riQht rear power window switch)
33 20A Left rear power window motor (via left rear power window switch)
34 -- Not used
35 7.5A AcuraLink control unit (USA models with navigation), HFL-voice control unit (with navigation), Front accessory
power socket relay, Console accessory power socket relay, Audio unit, Navigation display unit (with navigation),
Naviaation unit (with navigation) KtrLinterlock solenoid
36 10A Seat heaters relays (via seat heater switches), Blower motor relay, NC compressor clutch relay, NC condenser
fan relay (via NC diode A), Fan control relay (via NC diode A), Climate control switches, Climate control unit,
Recirculation control motor Left mirror (via power mirror switch)
37 7.5A MICU (daytime running lights power supplv)
38 30A Windshield wiper motor (via wiper circuit in the MICU), Windshield/rear window washer motor (via wiper circuit
intheMICU)
22-58 BACK
r--:'I
~
DDD
o c=JCJ o
[ 1
[ 1
[ 1
o D nnnn
~~~BO~
nnnnnnnnnnn
o
2324252627282930313233
uuuuuuuuuuu
nnnnnnnnnnn
1213141516171819202122
uuuuuuuuuuu
nnnnnnnnnnn
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1011
uuuuuuuuuuu
BACK 22-59
Ground Distribution
Ground to Components Index
Ground Com~onent or Circuit Grounded

G1 Battery
G2 Engine
G3 Transmission housing
G101 PCM (PG and LG2 is BLK; LG1 is BRN/YEL)
BLK: AfT clutch pressure control solenoid valves A. B, C, Ignition coils, Rocker arm oil control solenoid,
Transmission range switch, VTC oil control solenoid valve
BRN/YEL: CKP sensor, CMP sensor B, Data link connector (DLC), Immobilizer-keyless control unit,
Rocker arm oil pressure switch, Shielding between the PCM and these components have BRN/YEL
wires: Knock sensor (KS), Secondary H02S (Sensor 2)
G201 Electric vacuum pump relay 1,2, Left fog light, Left front side marker/parking/turn signal lights, Left
headlights (high/low beam), Radiator fan motor
G202 Blower motor relay, ELD unit, Fan control relay
G301 Right headlights (high/low beam), Right fog light, Right front side marker/parking /turn signal lights
G401 Electric vacuum pump, PSP switch, Washer fluid level switch (Canada models)
G402 VSA modulator-control unit (2 wires)
G451 Brake fluid level switch, Hood switch, Keyless buzzer, MICU (PG), Windshield wiper motor
G501 BLK wire: Data link connector (DLC), Driver's door lock switch, Front individual map light, Gauge
control module (2 wires), Left mirror defogger, MICU (SG), Moonroof control unit/motor, Moonroof
switch, Power mirror control unit, Power mirror switch, Power window master switch, Vanity mirror
lights (driver's and front passenger's), VSA OFF switch
BRN wire: Driver's door lock knob switch, Driver's door key cylinder switch, Driver's power window
motor, Left side turn signal light
G502 Accessory power socket relays (front and console), Audio switch panel (with premium audio system),
Audio-HVAC subdisplay unit, Cruise control combination switch, Driver's climate control switch, Driver'S
seat heater relay (high), Driver's seat heater relay (Jow) (2 wires), Front passenger's seat heater relay
(high), Ignition key switch, Interface dial, Steering angle sensor, Navigation display unit, Navigation
switch panel, Steering wheel shift switches
G503 Accessory power socket (front and console), Console box light, Front passenger's seat heater relay
(Jow) (2 wires), HandsFreeLink control unit (with navigation), Navigation unit (with navigation), Park pin
switch, Seat heater switch (driver's and front passenger's), Stereo amplifier, TPMS control unit, Yaw
rate-lateral acceleration sensor
G504 Audio unit (2 wires), Stereo amplifier
G505 AcuraLink control unit (USA models with navigation), AcuraLink tester connector ground (USA models
with navigation), Front passenger's door lock knob switch, Front passenger's door lock switch, Front
passenger's power window motor, Front passenger's power window switch, Glove box light, Right
mirror defogger, Right side turn signal light
G506 Memory erase signal (MES) connector, SRS unit (2wires)
G551 Driver's seat belt buckle switch, Driver's power seat adjustment switch (2 wires), Driver's seat heater,
Lumber support switch (2 wires)
G552 Front pasenger's seat belt buckle switch, Front passenger's seat heater, ODS unit
G571 Climate control unit, Power transistor
G601 Fuel pump control module, Left rear door lock knob switch, Left rear power window switch, MICU (PG
and SG) (2 wires), SH-AWD control unit (3 wires), SH-AWD relay
G602 Back-up lights, High mount brake light, Left rear side marker light, Left rear turn signal light, Left
taillight/brake light, License plate lights, Inner taillights, Rear differential, Rear window defogger, Rear
wiper motor
G651 Right rear door lock knob switch, Right rear side marker light, Right rear turn signal light, Right rear
power window switch, Right taillight/brake light, Subwoofer (with ELS audio system), Trailer lighting
connector
22-60 BACK
~
Under-hood Fuse/Relay Box ~
Removal and Installation
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
audio system and the navigation system (if under-hood fuse/relay box, then install the under-
equipped), then write down the audio presets. hood fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. 2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.
3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then
3 minutes. connect the negative cable to the battery.
4. Remove the screws (A) for the alternator and 4. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
battery cable terminals from the under-hood fuse/ the navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
relay box. audio presets.
5. Confirm that all systems work properly.
6. Set the clock.
5. Remove the bottom cover from the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
6. Disconnect the connectors from the under-hood

fuse/relay box.
7. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the

base ofthe relay.
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the

relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not
start.
BACK 22-61
Removal and Installation
SRS components are located in this area. Review the Installation

SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before 1. Install the relays and connect the connectors to the
performing repairs or servicing. under-dash fuse/relay box, then install the under-
dash fuse/relay box in the reverse order of removal.
Removal
2. Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the removal.
equipped), then write down the audio presets. 3. Connect the positive cable to the battery, then
connect the negative cable to the battery.
4. Register the immobilizer system with the HDS
3. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then (see page 22-341).
disconnect the positive cable, and wait at least
3 minutes. NOTE: The IMOES unit is built into the MICU which
is part of the under-dash fuse/relay box. Because of
4. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover this construction, the IMOES must be registered, or
(see page 20-102). the vehicle will not start.
5. Disconnect the connectors from the fuse side of the 5. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
under-dash fuse/relay box (A). the navigation system (if equipped), then enter the
audio presets.
6. Confirm that all systems work properly.
7. Set the clock.
6. Remove the mounting bolt, and pull the fuse/relay

box away from the body.
7. Disconnect the connectors from the back side of the

under-dash fuse/relay box, then remove the under-
8. Carefully remove the relays by prying under the

base of the relay.
NOTE: Do not use pliers. Pliers will damage the

relays, which could cause the engine to stall or not
start.
22 .. 62 BACK
r--:'I
Battery I..:!...I
Battery Test
AWARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the
proper procedure, causing serious injury to anyone
nearby. Follow all procedures carefully and keep
sparks and open flames away from the battery.
Use an EO-18™ Battery Tester, and follow the

manufacturer's procedures. If you don't have one of
these computerized testers, follow this conventional
test procedure:
1. Be sure the temperature of the electrolyte is

between 70 'f (21 'C) and 100 'f (38 'C).
2. Inspect the battery case for cracks or leaks.
• If the case is damaged, replace the battery.•

• If the case looks OK, go to step 3.
3. Check the test indicator window.
• If the test indicator window indicates the battery

is charged, go to step 4.
• If the test indicator window indicates a low
charge, go to step 7.
4. Apply a 300 amp load for 15 seconds to remove the

surface charge.
5. Wait 15 seconds, then apply a test load of 280 amps

for 15 seconds.
6. Record battery voltage.
• If voltage is above 9.6 V, the battery is OK.•

• If voltage is below 9.6 V, go to step 7.
7. Charge the battery on High (40 amps) until the test

indicator window shows the battery is charged,
plus an additional 30 minutes. If the battery charge
is very low, it may be necessary to bypass the
charger's polarity protection circuitry.

is charged within three hours, repeat steps 4
through 6. If the battery is still below 9.6 V,
replace the battery.•
is not charged within three hours, replace the
battery.•
BACK 22-63
Relays
Power Relay Test
Use this chart to identify the type of relay, then do the Normally-open type
test listed for it.
Check for continuity between the terminals.
Relq Test
AlC compressor clutch relay Normally- • There should be continuity between the No.1 and
AlC condenser fan relay open type No.2 terminals when battery positive terminal is
Blower motor relay connected to the No.4 terminal, and battery negative
Driver's seat heater relay (HIGH) terminal is connected to the No.3 terminal.
Electric vacuum pump relay 1,2 • There should be no continuity between the No.1 and
Electronic throttle control system No.2 terminals when power is disconnected.
(ETCS) control relay
Fo~light relay
Front accessory power socket-
relay
Front passenger's seat heater
EB4 2
EB
4 2
relay (HIGH)
Ignition coil relay
PGM-FI main relay 1, 2
PGM-FI subrelay
Power mirror defogger relay
Power window relay
Radiatorfan relay
88 e
3 1
e
3 1
Console accessory power socket

relay
Rear window defogger relay
SH-AWD relay
Starter cut relay
Driver's seat heater relay (LOW) Five-terminal
Fan control relay type
Front passenger's seat heater
relay (LOW)
Rear window wiper relay
22-64 BACK
~
I.!!:..I
Five-terminal type
Check for continuity between the terminals .
• There should be continuity between the No.1 and

No.2 terminals when battery positive terminal is
connected to the No.5 terminal, and battery negative
terminal is connected to the No.3 terminal.
• There should be continuity between the No.1 and
No.4 terminals when power is disconnected.
1
EB
5
~-------~
4 2 3
8
BACK 22-65
Ignition Switch
Test Replacement
SRS components are located in the area. Review the SRS components are located in the area. Review the
SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and SRS component locations (see page 24-12) and
precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before precautions and procedures (see page 24-14) before
performing repairs or servicing. performing repairs or servicing.
1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the 1. Make sure you have the anti-theft code for the
audio system and the navigation system (if audio system and the navigation system (if
equipped), then write down the audio presets. equipped), then write down the audio presets.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the steering column covers (see page 3. Remove the steering column covers (see page
20-107). 20-107).
4. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition 4. Disconnect the 7P connector (A) from the ignition
switch (8). switch (8).
ORN RED BLU A
5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each 5. Remove the two screws and the ignition switch.
switch position according to the table.
~ Terminal RED
WHT BLU ORN VEL
IACC) IBAT) (lG1) (lG2) 1ST) 7. Enter the anti-theft code for the audio system and
'"
Position
OILOCK)
audio presets.
IIACC) 0- f-o
0-
iliON) j<'Q- --0 ,...
8. Set the clock.
IIIISTART) <?- --0
6. Ifthe continuity checks do not agree with the table,

replace the ignition switch (see page 22-66).

audio presets.
8. Set the clock.
22-66 BACK
~
Multiplex Integrated Control System I.!!::.I

Input Test, page 22-282 ACURALINK CONTROL UNIT
(XM RECEIVER)
(USA models with navigation)
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT

(With built-in the receiver)
MICU HANDS FREE LINK CONTROL UNIT
(Built in the under-dash fuse/relay box) Self-diagnostic Function, page 23-197
Input Test, page 22-107 Input Test, page 23-241
BACK 22-67
Multiplex Integrated Control System
Troubleshooting CAN Circuit Related Problems
NorE: Check the PCM for DrCs and troubleshoot PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors first.
Using the HOS (Preferred method)
1. Go to 8-CAN System Diagnosis rest Mode A to check for "Connected units" and DrCs (see page 22-88).
2. If no DrCs are retrieved, go to 8-CAN System Diagnosis rest Mode C (see page 22-91) or D (see page 22-92).
Set the 8-CAN system diagnosis Test mode 1 (see page 22-93), Without HOS (Use only if the
HOS is unavailable)
1. Check for communication circuit problems using 8-CAN System Diagnostic rest (see page 22-88).
2. Check for DrCs.
3. Sort, and then troubleshoot the DrCs in the order.
-1 8attery voltage DrCs

-2 Internal error DrCs
-a Loss of communication DrCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if 81008 and 81011 are
retrieved, troubleshoot 81008 first)
-4 Signal error DrCs
4. If no DrCs are retrieved, use 8-CAN System Diagnostic rest Mode 2 to check all inputs related to failure (see step
10 on page 22-93).
22-68 BACK
~
~
How to display DTCs on the gauge control module
Set the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (see page 22-93). While in Test Mode 1, the DTCs which have been
detected and stored individually by various B-CAN (Body-controller Area Network) units, will be shown one by one on
the LCD display when the communication between the MICU and the gauge control module is normal. To scroll
through the DTCs, press the select/reset button.
With navigation Without navigation
DTC detected (the lower four

digits is a decimal number '.
representing the DTC)

DTC SERVICE
DTe PA
,
•.J •• =.c
.,,- I
81152. 50 ,-.J,_,
"
No DTCs detected
DTC SERVICE
DTe
•.,.,
ft_.
N,Q
All DTCs have been displayed

. .' .
DTC SERVICE
,-" ".J
c. .
. DTe
. END'
The unit that has stored the code can be identified by the number shown on the multi-information display.
Control Unit Control Unit I.D. Number

MICU 10
Gauge control module 50
Climate control unit 51
HansFreeLink control unit 94
Immobilizer-keyless control unit 96
AcuraLink control unit (XM receiver) 97
How to clear the DTC
Set the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 (see page 22-93). While in Test Mode 1, press and hold down the
SELECT/RESET button for more than 10 seconds.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-69
Loss of Communication OTC cross-reference chart

When an ECU is unable to communicate with the other ECUs on the CAN circuit, the other control units will set loss of
communication DTCs. Use this chart to find the control unit that is not communicating.
1. Find the Transmitting Control Unit that is in the same row as all of the loss of communication DTCs retrieved.
2. Do the input test for the transmitting control unit.
BUS OFF and Internal Error Codes

OTCtype Related Unit
MICU Gauge Climate Hands Immobilizer- AcuraLink
Control Control FreeLink Keyless Control
Module Unit Control Control Unit (XM
Unit Unit Receiver)
8USOFF 81000 81150 81200 81750 81900 82200
ECU (CPU) Error 81001
ECU (EEPROM) Error 81002 81152
ECU (Internal) Error 81792 82209
Transmitting Control Message Receiving Unit/Loss of Communication OTC

Unit MICU Gauge Climate Hands Immobilizer- AcuraLink Navigation
Control Control FreeLink Keyless Control Unit
Module Unit Control Control Unit (XM
Unit Unit Receiver)
MICU RM TX 81188
HLSW TX B1155
WIPSW TX 81156
MICU TX 81157
DOORSW TX 81159
DRLOCK TX 81160 81905
SW
Gauge Control Module VSP/NE 81011 TX 81205
AfT 81008 TX 81906
ENGTEMP TX 81206
ILLMI TX 81207
CDS (SRS) 81032 TX
PCM ENGTEMP 81168
AfT 81169
VSA VSA 81170
TPMS TPMS 81173
SRS Unit SRS MSG 81187
AcuraLink 82208 82207
TX: Transmitting unit does not set a loss communication DTC.
22-70 BACK
r--:'I
~
NOTE: Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM (see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors first,
then record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type using the DTC troubleshooting index, then troubleshoot the DTC(s) in
this order.
• 8attery voltage DTCs
• Internal error DTCs
• Loss of communication DTCs (beginning with the lowest number first; for example, if 81008 and 81011 are retrieved,
troubleshoot 81008 first).
• Signal error DTCs
MICU
DTC Description DTCtype Page
81000 Communication bus line error (8US-OFF) Loss of (see page 22-99)
communication
81001 MICU internal error (CPU error) Internal error (see page 22-100)
81002 MICU internal error (EEPROM error) Internal error (see page 22-100)
81008 MICU lost communication with gauge control module (AfT Loss of (see page 22-101)
message) communication
81011 MICU lost communication with gauge control module (VSP/NE Loss of (see page 22-101)
81026 Front passenger's door lock switch LOCK/UNLOCK signal error Signal error (see page 22-118)
81028 Rear window wiper motor (Park) signal error Signal error (see page 22-232)
81032 MICU lost communication with SRS unit (CDS message) Loss of (see page 22-102)
communication
81036 IG1 line input error Signal error (see page 22-103)
81077 Windshield wiper motor (Park) signal error Signal error (see page 22-236)
81078 Daytime running lights signal error (Canada) Signal error (see page 22-157)
81079 Daytime running lights signal error (USA) Signal error (see page 22-157)
81127 Driver's door key cylinder switch signal error Signal error (see page 22-120)
81128 Driver's door lock switch signal error Signal error (see page 22-122)
81129 Driver's door lock knob switch signal error Signal error (see page 22-124)
81275 Combination light switch OFF position circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-159)
81276 Combination light switch parking (small) position circuit Signal error (see page 22-159)
malfunction
81278 Headlight switch ON position circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-159)
81279 Headlight switch DIMMER position circuit malfunction Signal error (see~ge 22-161)
81280 Turn signal switch circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-184)
81281 Windshield wiper switch MIST position circuit malfunction Signal error (see p(Jge 22-241)
81282 Windshield wiper switch INT (AUTO) position circuit Signal error (see page 22-241)
malfunction
81283 Windshield wiper switch LOW position circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-241)
81284 Windshield wiper switch HIGH position circuit malfunction Signal error (see page 22-241)
(cont'd)
BACK 22-71
OTe Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
G auge Cont ro1Modue

I
communication
81152 Gauge control module internal error (EEPROM error) Internal error (see page 22-269)
81155 Gauge control module lost communication with the MICU Loss of (see page 22-269)
(Headlight switch message) communication
(Wiper switch message) communication
(MICU message) communication
(DOORSW message) communication
(DRLOCKSW message) communication
81168 Gauge control module lost communication with the PCM Loss of (see page 22-272)
(Engine messaRes) communication
81169 Gauge control module lost communication with the PCM (AfT Loss of (see page 22-272)
81170 Gauge control module lost communication with the VSA Loss of (see page 22-273)
modulator-control unit (VSA message) communication
81173 Gauge control module lost communication with the TPMS Loss of (see page 22-274)
control unit (TPMS message) communication
81175 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gauge sending unit) circuit open Signal error (see page 22-275)
81176 Fuel level sensor (Fuel gaURe sending unit) circuit short Signal error (see page 22-277)
81177 8attery voltage abnormal 8attery voltage (see page 22-278)
81178 F-CAN communication line error Loss of (see page 22-279)
communication
81187 Gauge control module lost communication with the SRS unit Loss of (see page 22-280)
(SRS message) communication
81188 Gauge control module lost communication with the MICU (RM Loss of (see page 22-281)
22-72 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!::..I
Climate Control Unit

communication
81205 Climate control unit lost communication with gauge control Loss of (see page 21-26)
module (VSP/NE massage) communication
(ECT message) communication
module (ILLUMI massage) communication
81225 An open in the in-car temperature sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-29)
81226 A short in the in-car temperature sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-31)
81227 An open in the outside air temperature sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-32)
81228 A short in the butside air temperature sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-33)
81229 An open in the sunlight sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-34)
81230 A short in the sunlight sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-35)
81231 An open in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit Si_gnal error (see page 21-36)
81232 A short in the evaporator temperature sensor circuit Signal error (see page 21-38)
81233 An open in the driver's air mix control motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-39)
81234 A short in the driver's air mix control motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-40)
81235 A problem in the driver's air mix control linkage, door, or motor Signal error (see page 21-41)
81236 An open in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-43)
81237 A short in the passenger's air mix control motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-44)
81238 A problem in the passenger's air mix control linkage, door, or Signal error (see page 21-45)
motor
81239 An open or short in the mode control motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-47)
81240 A problem in the mode control linkage, doors, or motor Signal error (see page 21-49)
81241 A problem in the blower motor circuit Signal error (see page 21-51)
(cont'd)
BACK 22-73
OTe Troubleshooting Index (cont'd)
HandsFreeLink Control Unit

B1750 Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF) Loss of (see page 22-105)
communication
B1775 Microphone input/output short to power/open Signal error (see page 23-231)
B1776 Microphone input/output short to ground/open Signal error (see page 23-232)
B1779 HFL switch or HFL-voice control switch (HFL talk/HFL back Signal error (see page 23-234)
buttons) circuit open/short
B1780 HFL-voice control switch (HFL talk/HFL back buttons) circuit Signal error (see page 23-236)
short
B1792 HandsFreeLink control unit internal error Internal error (see page 23-238)
mmobTI Izer-KeYless
I Cont roI U m"t
B1900 Communication bus line error (BUS-OFF) Loss of (see page 22-105)
communication
B1905 Immobilizer-keyless control unit lost communication with MICU Loss of (see page 22-331)
(DRLOCKSW message) communication
B1906 Immobilizer-keyless control unit lost communication with gauge Loss of (see page 22-332)
control module (AfT messaQe) communication
AcuraLink Control Unit (XM Receiver)

B2200 B-CAN BUS Off Loss of (see page 22-106)
communication
B2204 B-CAN communication line error Loss of (see page 23-211)
communication
B2205 F-CAN communication line error Loss of (see page 23-212)
communication
B2207 Navigation unit lost communication with AcuraLink control unit Loss of (see page 23-213)
(XM receiver) communication
B2208 HandsFreeLink control unit lost communication with AcuraLink Loss of (see page 23-216)
control unit (XM receiver) communication
B2209 AcuraLink control unit internal error Loss of (see page 23-219)
communication
B2240 XM antenna error Loss of (see page 23-219)
communication
22-74 BACK
~
~
System Description
MICU Control Functions Index
The MICU (built into the under-dash fuse/relay box) is one of the B-CAN components. The MICU controls many
systems related to the body controller area and a security system, and also works as a gateway to diagnose the other
B-CAN connected ECUs with the HDS.
Refer to each system circuit diagram for details.
System Function
Multiplex Control Sends the switch input signal information to the MICU and outputs the information. The
MICU controls the ECUs electric load and communication based upon the information
received the B-CAN.
On-Board Diagnosis The MICU has a gateway function which sends the results of the MICU internal diagnosis
and the B-CAN connected ECUs diagnosis to the HDS.
Self-Diagnosis Test mode 1 diagnoses the communication line between the MICU and B-CAN connected
unit. Test mode 2 checks the switch inputs connected to the MICU.
Interior Light(s) The MICU controls the interior lights ON, OFF and dimming based upon the information of
the related switchesand/orthe B-CAN related information.
Sleep Function The MICU has a sleep function, which it enters during the power down mode.
The MICU also controls the function of these circuits:
• Entry lights control (front individual map lights and ceiling light)
• Exterior lights control (including the daytime running lights control)
• Horn
• Interlock system
• Key-in reminder
• Keyless entry
• Lights-on reminder
• Power door locks
• Power window key-off timer
• Seat belt reminder
• Security alarm
• Turn signal/hazard flasher
• Wiper/washer
(cont'd)
BACK 22-75
Body Controller Area Network (B-CAN) and Fast Controller Area Network (F-CAN)
The body controller area network (B-CAN) and the fast controller area network (F-CAN) share information between
multiple electronic control units (ECUs). B-CAN communication moves at a slower speed (33.33 kbps) for convenience
related items and for other functions. F-CAN information moves at a faster speed (500 kbps) for "real time" functions
such as fuel and emissions data. To allow both systems to share information, the gauge control module translates
information from B-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to B-CAN.
D·: : :::::::I::::~::::::::::::
, ,
::iE:::l ::::..... I
. :,
:
:,
:
~
B-CAN
:: •- - TRANSCEIVER
" I
:
, :, I
ACURAUNK
CONTROL UNIT
-- - ---,: '
L..-_IXM_RE-..CE_IVE_R_"'_--1 _______ ~ _____ -, I UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
•
•
TPMS CONTROL UNIT
SRSUNIT
+--1
I
.. II
• VSA MODULATOR-CONTRDL UNIT
• SH·AWD CONTROL UNIT CUMATE
• YAW RATE·LATERAL CONTROL
ACCELERATION SENSOR UNIT
• STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
• DATA UNK CONNECTOR
• NAVIGATION UNIT'"
IMMOBILlZER·KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
I
IB-CAN' I
---------------------e-- HANDSFREEUNK
CONTROL UNIT'>
'I : USA models with navigation

'2: With navigation
• The single wire method is used between the units not requiring the communication to move at a fast speed .
• Using a single wire method reduces the number of the wires used on the body controller area network.
22-76 BACK
~
L=.I
Gateway Function
The gauge control module acts as a gateway to allow both systems to share information. The gauge control module
translates information from 8-CAN to F-CAN and from F-CAN to 8-CAN.
BAT IGN
~,.
-'f- -~
,
CPU (Built in CAN controller)
I I
B-CAN F-CAN
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
.AAA.
vvv
CANH CANL
B-CAN .
F-CAN
. .
..J. "-
Network "Loss of Communication" Error Checking Function

The ECUs on the CAN circuit send messages to each other. If there are any malfunctions on the network, the LCD
display on the gauge control module can indicate the error messages by entering the gauge self-diagnostic function
(see page 22-258).
(cont'd)
BACK 22-77
Self-diagnostic Function
By connecting the HOS to the data link connector (OLC), the HOS can retrieve the diagnostic results from the MICU via
a diagnostic line called K-LiNE. The K-LiNE is distinguished from the CAN line, and connected to the CAN related ECUs.
The MICU is a gateway between the HOS and B-CAN related ECUs, and sends B-CAN diagnostic results to the HOS.
When performing a function test with the HOS, the HOS sends an output signal through the K-LiNE to the MICU. The
MICU either relays the request to another ECU, or commands the function its self.

CANH CANL B-CAN
F-CAN (500 kbps) B-CAN (33.33 kbps)
PCM I
I I
VSA MODULATOR· I ~
I CONTROL UNIT K·UNE
~---- - -- -------------------- - - -- MICU - - --,
I
r
I
STEERING
I ANGLE SENSOR
I
SH·AWD
CONTROL UNIT
I
~---- - -- ------------e-------
H CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
I SRSUNIT L
~---- - --
H I
I
I
I
I
IMMOBILIZER·
KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT
------------e
I NAVIGATION UNIT" I H I
I
I
I
I
HANDSFREEUNK
CONTROL UNIT"
Y
I ACURAUNK
I
CONTROL UNIT
I
I
(XM RECEIVER)"
TPMS I
I
I
CONTROL UNIT
~---- - -- ------------+------------------------ ----e I
I
~
I
YAWRATE·LATERAL I I
I ACCELERATION
SENSOR I
I
I
I
I
K.L1NE I AUDIO UNIT
~ )
DATAUNK
CONNECTOR
lHDS
'1 : USA models with navigation
'2 : With navigation I I
22-78 BACK
~
I.!!!!!..I
Wake-up and Sleep Function
The multiplex integrated control system has "wake-up" and "sleep" functions to decrease parasitic draw on the
battery when the ignition switch is OFF.
• In the sleep mode, the MICU stops functioning (communication and CPU control) when it is not necessary for the
system to operate.
• As soon as any operation is requested (for example, a door is unlocked), the related control unit in the sleep mode
immediately wakes up and begins to function.
• When the ignition switch is turned OFF, and the driver's door is opened, then closed, there is a delay about
40 seconds before the control unit goes from the wake-up mode to the sleep mode.
• The sleep mode will not function if any door is opened or if a key is in the ignition.
• The draw is reduced from 200 mA to less than 35 mA when in the sleep mode.
NOTE: Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test (see page 22-95).
Fail-safe Function
To prevent improper operation, the MICU has a fail-safe function. In the fail-safe mode, the output signal is fixed when
any part of the system malfunctions (for example, a faulty control unit or communication line).
Each control unit has a hardware fail-safe function that fixes the output signal when there is a CPU malfunction, and a
software fail-safe function that ignores the signal from a malfunctioning control unit, which allows the system to
operate normally.
Hardware Fail-safe Control
Fail-safe function
When a CPU problem or a abnormal power supply voltage is detected, the MICU moves to the hardware fail-safe
mode, and each system output load is set to the pre-programmed fail-safe value.
Software Fail-safe Control
When any of the data from the 8-CAN circuit cannot be received within a specified time, or an unusual combination of
the data is recognized, the MICU moves to the software fail-safe mode. The data that cannot be received is forced to a
pre-programmed value.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-79

Power Supply Voltage Monitoring Function
The MICU monitors the power supply voltage (back-up voltage). Ifthe voltage goes below 10 V, the MICU sends a MICU message and will not
store DTCs.
In ut Out ut
Battery voltage MICU·
* : MICU internal circuit
The MICU controls the ceiling light ON/OFF and dimming based upon the input signals from each switch.
Input OutDut
MICU IG1 power supply Interior light
Ignition key switch
Driver's door switch
Front passenger's door switch
Left rear door switch
Right rear door switch
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK)
B-CAN Keyless LOCK signal
Lighting SYU~Rl (Headlights, Parking Lights, Side Marker Lights, Fog Lights, License Plate
Lights, and Tallhghts)
The MICU contains the relay circuits of the headlight high/low beam and taillights, and controls the lighting system ON/OFF based upon the
input signals from the combination light switch.
InDut OutDut
MICU IG1 power supply Headlights (low beam)
Headlight OFF switch Headlights (high beam)
Headlight ON switch Parking lights
Dimmer switch Side marker lights
Combination light switch (parking lights, side marker lights, License plate lights
license plate lights, and taillights) Taillights
Passing switch Lid lights
Fog light switch Fog light
Daytime Running Lights

The MICU controls the exterior lights as a daytime running lights based upon the input signals from the each switch.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Headlights (low beam)
Headlight OFF switch Headlights (high beam)
Headlight ON switch Parking lights
Dimmer switch Slide marker lights
Passing switch License plate lights
B-CAN Parkina brake switch Taillights
22-80 BACK
r--:'I
1..::.1
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher

The MICU controls the turn signal/hazard flasher based upon the input signals from the turn signal and hazard warning switches.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Turn signal lights (left/right)
Turn signal switch (left/right)
Hazard warning switch
Power Door Locks (Vehicle Speed Sense)

The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the 8-CAN and input signals.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door lock (LOCK)
Tailgate latch switch
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Left rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Right rear door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Transmission range switch (P position)
8-CAN Vehicle speed pulse
SRS (CDS) signal
Engine RPM
Power Door Locks (Normally LOCK/UNLOCK Operation)

The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch.
Input OutPut
MICU IG1 power supply Door lock actuators (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Ignition key switch
Driver's door lock switch (LOCKtUNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
8-CAN SRS (CDS) signal
Door Lock Response Operation

The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the 8-CAN signals.
Input Output
8-CAN Door lock Signals Door lock actuator (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
TailQate release actuator
Power Window Key-off Operation

The MICU controls the power windows key-off operation based upon the input signals.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Power window key-off timer
Ignition key switch
Frontl>assenger's door switch
(confd)
BACK 22-81

Keyless Entry System
The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
MICU IG1 power supply Door lock actuator (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Ignition key switch Driver's door lock actuator (UNLOCK)
Driver's door switch Tailgate release actuator
Driver's door lock knob switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
B-CAN Kevless LOCK sianal
Keyless PANIC
The MICU controls the keyless PANIC based upon the B-CAN signals.
Input Output
B-CAN Keyless PANIC signal (action, headlight low, parking light Headlights (low beam)
and horn) Parking lights
Side marker lights
License plate lights
Taillights
Horn
Security Alarm System

The MICU controls the lighting system and horn based upon the input signals of each switch and the B-CAN signals.
Input OutPut
MICU IG1 power supply Horn
Ignition key switch Headlights (low beam)
Audio switch Parking lights
Driver's door switch Side marker lights
Front passenger's door switch License plate lights
Left rear door switch Taillights
Driver'S door key cylinder switch (LOCK/UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK)
Hood switch
B-CAN Keyless LOCK signal
Door lock signal
22-82 BACK
r--:'I
l!:::..I
Key Interlock
The MICU controls the key interlock solenoid based upon the IG1, the transmission range switch, and the park-pin switch signals.
II"IPut Output
MICU Ignition switch ACC Key interlock solenoid
Transmission range switch (P position)
Park-oin switch
Answer Back Response Operation

The MICU controls the lighting system and keyless buzzer based upon the B-CAN signals.
Inout Q~ut
B-CAN Answer back signals (headlight low, keyless buzzer, parking Keyless buzzer
lights) Headlights
Parking lights
Side marker lights
License plate lights
TailliQhts
Windshield Wiper/Washer
The MICU controls the windshield wiper motor and the washer motor based upon the IG1, wiper/washer switch windshield wiper motor
signals and the B-CAN signals.
Inout Output
MICU IG1 power supply Windshield wiper motor
Windshield wiper switch (lNT and LO) Windshield washer motor
Windshield wiper switch (LO and HI)
Windshield washer switch
Windshield wiper intermittent volume
Windshield wioer motor sianal
B-CAN IG1 Dower suoolv
Rear Wiper/Washer
The MICU controls the rear wiper motor and the washer motor based upon the IG1, wiper/washer switch and the rear wiper motor signals.
Inout Outout
MICU IG1 power supply Rear wiper motor
Rear wiper switch Rear washer motor
Rear washer switch
Rear wioer motor siQnal
Collision Detection Signal (CDS)

The MICU controls the door lock actuators based upon the IG 1 and the B-CAN signals.
Input Outout
MICU IG1 Dower SUDDlv Door lock (UNLOCK)
B-CAN SRS signal (front and side)
Imoact sensors and roll rate sensor
(cont'd)
BACK 22..83
HOS Inputs and Commands

Certain inputs happen so quickly that the HDS cannot update fast enough. Hold the switch that is being tested while monitoring the Data List.
This should give the HDS time to update the signal on the Data List.
Because the HDS software is updated to support the release for newer vehicles it is not uncommon to see system function tests that are not
supported.
Make sure that the most current software is loaded.
nput:
SvstemMenu Data List Data List Indication
Gauges Cruise Control Main Switch OFF/ON
Cruise Control Set Switch OFF/ON
Cruise Control Resume Switch OFF/ON
Washer Fluid Level Switch OFF/ON
Gauge Select/Reset Switch OFF/ON
Parking Brake Switch OFF/ON
Brake Fluid Level Switch OFF/ON
Illumination Volume Plus Switch OFF/ON
Illumination Volume Minus Switch OFF/ON
km/h Mile/h Select Switch OFF/ON
Fuel Sending Unit Input 1 deg
Fuel SendiQQ Unit Input 2 VOLTAGE
ABS Indicator OFF/ON
EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Distribution) OFF/ON
Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator OFF/ON
MIL Indicator OFF/ON
Washer Fluid Level Indicator (Canada) OFF/ON
DRL Indicator OFF/ON
Low Oil Pressure Indicator OFF/ON
Charging System Indicator OFF/ON
Cruise Main Switch ON Indicator OFF/ON
Maintenance Minder Indicator OFF/ON
High Beam Indicator OFF/ON
Parking Light ON Indicator OFF/ON
Low Fuel Warning Indicator OFF/ON
Security Indicator OFF/ON
FQg light Indicator OFF/ON
Seat Belt Indicator OFF/ON
Soeed Indicator (km/h) 0-249 km/h over 250 km/h Fail
Soeed Indicator (mile/h) 0-154 mile/h over 155 mile/h Fail
AfT Gear Position Switch (R) OFF/ON
AfT Gear Position Switch (P) OFF/ON
Lighting Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Hazard Switch OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (OFF) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PARKING) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (HEADLIGHT) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (High Beam) OFF/ON
Headlight Switch (PASSING) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (LEFT) OFF/ON
Turn Signal Switch (RIGHT) OFF/ON
Fog Light Switch OFF/ON
Interior Light Command (Ignition Key Cylinder Light OFF/ON
Command)
Left Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Right Turn Signal Command OFF/ON
Headlight Command OFF/ON
Headlight High Beam Command OFF/ON
Parking Light Command OFF/ON
Fog Light Command OFF/ON
DRLCommand OFF/ON
22-84 BACK
r:-:'I
I.:!:..I
System Menu Data List Data List Indication

Door Locks Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Sw. (LOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Sw. (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Rear Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Lock Knob Sw. (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Door LOCK Command OFF/ON
Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Driver's Door UNLOCK Command OFF/ON
Keyless Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Switch OFF/ON
Passenger's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
Front Passen~er's Door Lock Sw. (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Key Cylinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Wipers Brake Pedal Position Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (LOW) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (HIGH) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (MIST) OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Switch (lNT) OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Switch OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor PARK Switch OFF/ON
Intermittent Wiper Dwell Timer 0.0-1.0 kQ/OPEN
Windshield Wiper Motor HI Command OFF/ON
Windshield Wiper Motor LO Command OFF/ON
Windshield Washer Motor Command OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Switch OFF/ON
Rear Washer Switch OFF/ON
Rear Wiper Auto StQ~ Switch OFF/ON
(cont'd)
BACK 22-85

SvstemMenu Data List Data List Indication
Security Ignition Key Cylinder Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenaer's Door Switch OFF/ON
Passenaer's Rear Door Switch OFF/ON
Tailgate Switch OFF/ON
Front Passenger's Door Lock Sw. (LOCK) OFF/ON
Radio Switch OFF/ON
Hood Switch OFF/ON
Driver's Door Kev Cvlinder Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Look Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Look Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Look Knob Switch (LOCK) OFF/ON
Driver's Door Look Knob Switch (UNLOCK) OFF/ON
Headliaht Command OFF/ON
Parkina Liaht Command OFF/ON
Horn Command OFF/ON
22·86 BACK
r--:'I
~
Function Test·
System Menu Data List Indication Data List and ~eration TIme
Door LOCK all doors Outputs LOCK si~mal 1 time (0.6 sec) to all doors
UNLOCK driver's side door Outputs UNLOCK signal 1 time (0.6 sec) to driver's
door
UNLOCK all doors Outputs UNLOCK signal 1 time (0.6 sec) to all doors
Lighting Interior Light Command Illuminates for 30 seconds.
LEFT Turn Sianal Command Blinks for 5 seconds.
RIGHTTurn Signal Command Blinks for 5 seconds.
Hazard flasher Blinks turn siRnal (left and riRht) for 15 seconds.
Headlight Command O~erates headljght (low) for 15 seconds.
Headlight HIGH Beam Command Operates headlight (hl9..h) for 15 seconds.
Fog Light Operates a relay of front fog lights for 15 seconds.
Parking Light Command Operates small lights for 15 seconds.
Keyless Trunk Lid{Tailgate Release Command Unlock trunk
Security Horn Command Operates horn for 1 second.
Wipers Windshield Wiper Motor LOW Command Operates windshield wiper motor for 5 seconds (low
speed).
Windshield Wiper Motor HIGH Command Operates windshield wiper motor for 5 seconds (high
speed).
Windshield Washer Command OJ2.erates windshield washer motor for 5 seconds.
Rear Wiper Motor Illuminate for 15 seconds.
Rear Wiper Washer Illuminate for 15 seconds.
Gauges Self Diagnostic Test
Speedometer 0 300 mph
Tachometer 0 10000 rpm
Fuel Level Gauge 0-255 litter
Engine Temperature Gauge 0-150 d~ ('C)
ABS Indicator Illuminates for 10 seconds.
EBD Indicator (Electronic Brake Distribution) Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Cruise Activation Indicator Illuminates for 10 seconds.
MIL Status Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Indicator Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Davtime Running Light Indicator (Canada) Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Charging System Indicator Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Cruise Control Main Switch Indicator Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Maintenance Required Indicator Illuminates for 10 seconds.
High Beam Indicator Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Light On Indicator Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Low fuel level Indicator Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Security Indicator Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Fog Light Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Seat Belt Indicator Lamp Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Trip Meter 0-9999.9 (mph)
AfT Gear Position Indicator (P) Illuminates for 10 seconds.
AfT Gear Position Indicator (R) Illuminates for 10 seconds.
AfT Gear Position Indicator (N) Illuminates for 10 seconds.
AfT Gear Position Indicator (D) Illuminates for 10 seconds.
AfT Gear Position Indicator (03) Iliuminatesfor 10 seconds.
AfT Gear Position Indicator (2) Illuminates for 10 seconds.
AfT Gear Position Indicator (1) Illuminates for 10 seconds.
Illumination Brightness Control (Illuminates for meter panel accordina) 30 100%
Key Alarm Chime Sound alarm for 10 seconds.
Headlight Alarm Chime Sound alarm for 10 seconds.
Seat Belt Reminder Chime Sound alarm for 10 seconds.
BACK 22-87
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM 3. From the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, select UNIT
(see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors INFORMATION, and then select CONNECTED UNIT
first, then perform this diagnosis if the symptom is listed to see if the following control units are
related to the B-CAN system. communicating with the HDS.
NOTE: Always cycle the ignition switch within • MICU

3 seconds when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting • Gauge control module
procedures in this section. • Immobilizer-keyless control unit
• Climate control unit
1. Compare the symptom with this list of B-CAN • HandsFreeLink control unit (with navigation)
related systems: • Acuralink control unit (XM receiver) (USA models
with navigation)
• Gauge control module
• Exterior lights NOTE:
• Turn signals • If a unit is communicating with the HDS, DETECT
• Entry light control will be displayed.
• Interior lights • If a unit is not communicating or the vehicle is
• Door-open and tailgate-open indicators not equipped, "Not Available" will be displayed.
• Horns (security and panic)
• Chimes (key-in, seat belt, lights-on, and parking Are al/ control units communicating with the HDS?
brake)
• Power window/moonroof timer YES-Go to step 4.
• Wiper/washer
• Security NO-If any of the control units are not
• Keyless entry communicating, go to B-CAN System Diagnosis
• Power door locks Test Mode B (see page 22-90). If all units are not
• Key interlock communicating or only the MICU is communicating,
• Dash light brightness go to DTC 81000 troubleshooting (see page 22-99).
• Immobilizer
•
Is the symptom related to the 8-CAN system?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Go to the system troubleshooting for the

system with the symptom .•
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector (A),

then turn the ignition switch ON (II).
22-88 BACK
~
I..!!!!:.I
4. Select the system that has the problem from the

80DY ELECTRICAL menu, then select DTCs.
Are any DrCs indicated?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Ifthe problem is related to one of the

following items, go to 8-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode C (see page 22-91) ifthe system does
not stop or turn off. Go to Test Mode D (see page
22-92) if the system does not run or turn on.
• Exterior lights
• Turn signals
• Entry light control
• Interior, lights
• Horn (security and panic)
• Wiper/washer
If the problem is related to one of the following

items, go to the troubleshooting for that individual
system .•
• Gauge control module

• Door-open and tailgate-open indicators
• Chimes (key-in, seat belt, lights-on, and parking
brake)
• Security
• Keyless entry
• Key interlock
• Dash light brightness
• Audio system
• Navigation (if equipped)
5. Record all DTCs, and sort them by DTC type.
6. Troubleshoot the DTC(s) in this order:
• 8attery voltage DTCs.

• Internal error DTCs.
• Loss of communication DTCs. 8egin
troubleshooting with the lowest numberfirst
(Example: if DTC 81008 and 81011 are retrieved,
begin by troubleshooting 81008).
• Signal error DTCs.
BACK 22-89
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode B
Perform this diagnosis if any of the control units are not

communicating (Not Available is displayed in the HDS)
as found by the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-88).
1. Using the HDS, select the system that has the

symptom from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu.
2. Select DTCs, and then check for loss of

communication DTCs.
Are any loss of communication orcs indicated?
YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Replace the MICU .•
3. Perform the input test for the unit not

communicating with the HDS.
Unit not communicating

MICU (see page 22-107)
Gauge control module (see page 22-282)
Immobilizer-keyless control unit (see page
22-342)
22-90 BACK
~
t=!.J
Troubleshooting - B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C
Perform this diagnosis if a componentthat is controlled 5. Check the relay, if applicable, then check for a short
by the 8-CAN system does not stop or turn off. in the wire between the relay and the component,
the relay and control unit, or the component and
NOTE: control unit.
• If the component does not turn on, go to 8-CAN
System Diagnosis Test Mode D (see page 22-92). Are the relay and the wire harness OK?
• See the 8-CAN system unit input/output index for a
list of input and output devices and the control units YES-Replace the control unit that controls the
that monitor the input and controls the output devices component that will not turn OFF.•
(see page 22-84).
• Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds NO-Replace the relay or repair the wire
when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting harness .•
procedures in this section.
6. Check the switch, then check for a short in the wire
1. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu between the switch and the control unit that
from the HDS. monitors the switch.
Are any DTCs indicated? Is the switch and wire harness OK?
YES-Go to 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A YES-Replace the control unit that monitors the
(see page 22-88) .• switch .•
NO-Go to step 2. NO-Replace the switch or repair the wire

harness .•
2. Turn off the switch that controls the malfunctioning
component.
3. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE menu, and

check the input of the switch that controls the
component.
Does the HDS indicate the switch is OFF?
YES-Go to step 4.
NO-Go to step 6.
4. In the DATA LIST, check the output signal ofthe

malfunctioning component.
Is the output signal OFF?
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Replace the control unit that controls the

device that will notturn OFF.•
BACK 22..91
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode D
Perform this diagnosis if a component that is controlled 6. Perform the function test for the malfunctioning
by the B-CAN system does not run or come on. component.
NOTE: Does the output device pass the function test?

• If the component does not turn off or stop, go to B-
CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode C (see page 22-91). YES-Go to step 7.
• See the B-CAN system unit input/output index for a
list of input and output devices and the control units NO-Replace the component..
that monitor the input and controls the output devices
(see page 22-84). 7. With the malfunctioning output device connected,
• Always cycle the ignition switch within 3 seconds connect a voltmeter between the malfunctioning
when prompted in the DTC troubleshooting output device and body ground on the wire that the
procedures in this section. control unit uses to control the output device circuit.
1. Check the fuse of the malfunctioning output device. 8. Select MISC. TEST from the TEST MODE menu,
and do the forced operation test of the
Is the fuse OK? malfunctioning component.
YES-Go to step 2. Is there a change in voltage (12 V to a Vor

a V to 12 V)?
NO-Replace the fuse and recheck.•
YES-Replace the component.•
2. Check for DTCs by selecting the TEST MODE menu
from the HDS. NO-Replace the control unit that controls the
malfunctioning component.•
Are any DTCs indicated?
9. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE menu, and
YES-Go to B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A make sure the switch signal input for the
(see page 22-88) .• malfunctioning system indicates a change when
operated.
NO-Go to step 3.
Does the switch input indicated ON when the
3. Turn ON the switch that controls the switch is ON?
malfunctioning component.
YES-Replace the control unit that controls the
4. Select DATA LIST from the TEST MODE menu, and malfunctioning component.•
check output signal for the malfunctioning
component. NO-Go to step 10.
Is there an output signal? 10. Check the switch and its ground (if applicable), then
check for an open or a short in the wire between
YES-Go to step 5. the switch and the control unit that monitors it.
NO-Go to step 9. Is the switch and the wire harness OK?
5. Check the relay and ground, then check for an open YES- Replace the control unit that monitors the
or a short in the circuit for the malfunctioning switch .•
component.
NO-Replace the switch or repair the wire
Are the relay and circuit OK? harness .•
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Replace the relay or repair the wire circuit.•
22-92 BACK
r:-:'I
~
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2
(without the HDS)
Special Tools Required 6. Check for B-CAN DTCs indicated by the gauge
MPCS (MCIC) service connector 07WAZ-001010A control module LCD display while still in Test Mode
1. Push the odometer select/reset button to display
Test Mode 1 the next code. After you get to the last code, the
display shows END. If no DTCs are stored, the
Check the PCM for DTCs and troubleshoot PCM display will read NO.
(see page 11-3) or F-CAN loss of communication errors
first, then perform this diagnosis if the HDS is not Are any OTCs indicated?
available.
YES-Go to step 7.
1. Check the No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box and No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under- NO-Go to step 10.
7. Record all DTCs and sort them.
Are the fuses OK?
8. Troubleshoot the DTCs in this order:
YES-Go to step 2.
• Battery voltage DTCs
NO-Find and repair the cause of the blown fuse .• • Internal error DTCs
• Loss of communication DTCs (begin with the
2. Remove the driver's dashboard undercover lowest number first; for example, if B1008 and
(see page 20-102). B1011 are retrieved, troubleshoot B1008 first)
• Signal error DTCs
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and move the
ceiling light switch to the middle (door) position. 9. Clear the DTCs by pressing and holding the select/
reset button for about 10 seconds. You will hear a
4. Connect the MPCS service connector (A) to the beep to confirm the code have been cleared.
MICU service check connector (B) in the under- Operate the devices that failed, and recheck for
dash fuse/relay box. codes.
Test Mode 2
10. Remove the MPCS service connector from the

under-dash fuse/relay box socket for
B 5-10 seconds, then re-insert itto enter Mode 2.
When the system enters Mode 2, the ceiling light
o
will flash two times quickly and then go off.
NOTE: If the MPCS connector is disconnected for

too short or too long of a time, or the ignition
switch is turned OFF, the system will return to Test
IJ--- A Mode 1.
D \07WAZ-001010A}
11. The following tables list the circuits that can be
5. Wait 5 seconds, and watch the ceiling light. When checked in Test Mode 2. Operate the switch that is
the ceiling light flashes quickly once, and then goes most closely related to the problem. If the circuit is
off the system is in Test Mode 1. OK, the ceiling light will blink once. If the circuit is
faulty, there will be no indication.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-93
Troubleshooting - 8-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode 1 and Test Mode 2

(without the HDS) (cont'd)
MICU Does the ceiling light work properly in all switch
Item positions?
Driver's door lock switch (UNLOCK)
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK) YES-Go to function and input test for the system
Driver's door lock knob switch (UNLOCK) related to the failure .•
Driver's door key cylinder switch (UNLOCK)' NO-Repair the open, short, or replace the faulty
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK)' switch .•
Front passenger's door lock switch (UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch
(UNLOCK)
Driver's door switch (OPEN)
Front passenger's door switch (OPEN)
Left rear door switch (OPEN)
RiQht rear door switch (OPEN)
Trunk lid/Tailgate switch (OPEN)
Audio switch
Windshield wiper HI/LO switch
Windshield wiper INT/LO switch
Windshield wiper MIST switch
Windshield washer switch (ON)
Windshield wiper intermittent dwell time
controller
Turn signal switch (LEFT)
Turn signal switch (RIGHT)
Hazard warning switch (ON)
Headlight switch (ON)
Headlight switch (OFF)
Lighting switch (ON)
Dimmer switch (ON)
Passing switch (ON)
Hood switch (OPEN)
Transmission range switch (P)
Brake switch (ON)
Fog light switch
Ignition key cylinder switch
Windshield wiper motor park switch
Rear washer switch
Rear wiper motor park switch
Rear wiper switch (ON)
Transmission range switch (R)
NC pressure switch/thermal protector
* A second key IS necessary to check the key
cylinder inputs.
Be sure to rotate the key cylinder switch two
times to each position (lock and lock, unlock and
unlock) to ensure the door lock knob switch is in
the appropriate position.
22 . .94 BACK
r:-:'I
I..!!!!..I
Sleep and Wake-up Mode Test
1. Shift to the sleep mode:

Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the key, then open and close the driver's door. If the MICU receives no
signals from the inputs listed below, it will go into sleep mode in less than 40 seconds.
Driver's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)

Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Tailgate latch switch (Tailgate closed)
Hazard warning switch (OFF)
2. Confirm the sleep mode:

Check for voltage on the B-CAN communication line (PNK wires); there should be battery voltage in the sleep
mode. Check the parasitic draw at the battery while shifting into the sleep mode; amperage should change from
about 200 mA to less than 35 mA.
3. Shift to the wake up mode:

When the ignition switch is turned ON (11), the MICU, gauge control module, immobilizer-keyless control unit-
receiver, and PCM wake up at the same time without "talking" to each other through the communication lines.
When any switch in the multiplex integrated control system is turned on, it wakes up its related control unit which,
in turn, wakes up the other units. After confirming the sleep mode, look in the following table for the switch most
related to the problem. Operate that switch and see if its control unit wakes up.
NOTE: If any control unit is faulty and will not wake up, several circuits in the system will malfunction at the same
time. In the table below, the control unit is followed by a list of the switches and input signals that can wake it up.
Door switches (door open)

Driver's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver'S door lock knob switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Driver's door key cylinder switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Front passenger's door lock knob switch (LOCK or UNLOCK)
Left rear door lock knob switch
Right rear door lock knob switch
Tailgate latch switch (Tailgate open)
Hood switch (hood open)
Hazard warning switch (ON)
Combination light switch (Parking, Headlight, Dimmer, Passing ON)
Ignition key switch (key inserted)
BACK 22-95
Circuit Diagram
UNDER·DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNmON SWITCH UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
-'9--&-
BATTERY
AI No.2 (lGI (50 AI Hl D2 No.l0(7~'
WHT WHT BW
IGl
1G1 HOT In ON (III

and START (1111
~10AI D4 G2
GRN
FRONT
INDIVIDUAL
MAP LIGHTS
Y PNK
K4
BRN GRN GRN
MICU
VBU IGl
SG PG Pl0
T34
P5
Ql
I Hl H3
L B·CAN
E6 I! I F20 E33 lOG
I
MICU I
SERVICE I
CHECK I
CONNECTOR I
BLK BLK BLK BLK PNK

.
I
(B.cANI
G501 G601 G451 G601
22-96 BACK
~
~
'1: Wrth navigation

'2 : USA models with navigation
- - - - • :CANline
JUNCTION BOX
J2
GRN -------w
I
GRN
36
I
BRN
35 GAUGE CONTROL MODULE
G9
r-----@
.-@
r ,
I ..... I ......
I~ I~
I POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
I l LCD DISPLAY
(DTC CODE DISPLAY)
I
I I I No.2 (20 A) FUSE
(UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
7
MAIN CIRCUIT
I 1 1
F-CAN GRN YEL
B-CAN
TRANSCEIVER
1
II CANH
TRANSCEIVER
CANL I
1 124 Q 1
1
1
1
+---"VVH
1 1
VBU 1G1
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
130 128 129 19 CONTROL UNIT
1 1 1
, ,
PK WHT RED BLK GND B-CAN
14
\7 \7 ,
PNK
,
PNK PNK PNK
I
1 1 I
• PCM 1 1
• TPMSCONTROLUNIT 1
• SRSUNIT
• VSA MODULATOR-CONTROL UNIT
• SH-AWD CONTROL UNIT
• NAVIGATION UNIT"
• YAW RATE-LATERAL
ACCELERATION SENSOR 1 1
BRN/VEL
• STEERING ANGLE SENSOR 1 1 1 1
_l~~
• DATAUNKCONNECTOR
• ACURAUNK CONTROL UNIT
IXM RECEIVER)"
_ _______________ _ ____ ~4
1
_.
.1 G1 185 IL9 1 L10
1
(B-CAN) J19 1 1 1 1
. ------------~K·-------------------- -e-----e--e-- ..
JUNCTION BOX
G501 G101
(cant' d)
BACK 22-97
• - - - ·:CANline
- - - - - : Other communication line
IB-CANI
®-----j
I
IB·CANI
I
®-----r-------------,
I I
I I IB-CAN)
© _____ ~-------------6--------------------------~
I I
I
I
r " - L . .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ IUSA..models
_ ..with
_ navigation)
.. , I
r " - L . .. _ .. _ .. _ (Wah
.. _ ·· navigation)
_ .. ..,
No.36110A) No. 23110 A) No. 3517.5 A) No. 10 17.5 A) No.23 110 A) No. 35 17.5 A)
FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE FUSE
IUNDER· IUNDER· IUNDER· IUNDER· (UNDER· (UNDER·
DASH HOOD DASH DASH HOOD DASH
FUSE! FUSE! FUSE! FUSE! FUSE! FUSE!
RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY RELAY
BOX) BOX) BOX) BOX) BOX) BOX)
PNK
1 PNK
111
GRN PUR BRN PNK
1 1
GRN PUR
I
I
B-CAN
B8 i B16
I
I
B·CAN
B5 A12
I
I
B-CAN
CLIMATE ACURALINK HANDSFREELINK
CONTROL CONTROL
UNIT IXM RECEIVER) I CONTROL UNIT
BUS·
DATA
I B6 A24 All
.I i. 13
:I .i
:I .i
I
GRY
, BLK
D
I
DRIVER'S
CLIMATE
CONTROL
SWITCH
1 G571
L .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _
G505 !
:i
:
:I .i
.. .J L .. _
I
.. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. ..J
G503
22-98 BACK
r--:'I
t=!..I
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 81000: Communication Bus Line Error 8. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box
(BUS-OFF) connector Q (16P).
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be 9. Check for continuity between the under-dash fuse/
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System relay box connector Q (16P) No.6 terminal and
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88). body ground.
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR a (16P)
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.

YES-Go to step 5. =
NO-Intermittent failure. The communication bus Wire side of female terminals
line is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections, or worn/shorted wires. If the
connections are good, check the battery condition Is there continuity?
(see page 22-63) and the charging system .•
YES-Repair the short to ground in the wire .•
NO-Go to step 10.
Are OTCs 81008,81011, and 81032 also indicated
with OTC 81000? 10. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
YES-Go to step 6.
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/ 11. Check for voltage between the under-dash fuse/
relay box.• relay box connector Q (16P) No.6 terminal and
body ground.
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR a (16P)
7. Disconnect the appropriate connector at each
control unit in the table one at a time. Clear the
DTCs, then recheck for DTCs after each unit is
disconnected
Control Unit Appropriate Connector
Gauge control 36P connector
module
Immobilizer-keyless 7P connector
control unit =
Climate control unit Connector 8 (16P) Wire side of female terminals
AcuraLink control Connector 8 (16P)
unit
HandsFreeLink 22P connector Is there voltage?
control unit
YES-Repair the short to power in the wire
Is OTC 81000 indicated with each individual unit between the under-dash fuse/relay box connector,
disconnected? the junction box, and the affected control unit.•
YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the control unit that was NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/
disconnected and 81000 did not reset.. relay box.•
BACK 22-99
DTC 81001: MICU Internal Error (CPU Error) DTC 81002: MICU Internal Error (EEPROM
Error)
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88). sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88).
1. Clear the bTCs with the HDS.
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/
relay box .• YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/
relay box.•
NO-Intermittent failure, the MICU is OK at this
time. Check for loose or poor connections. Ifthe NO-Intermittent failure, the MICU is OK at this
connections are good, check the battery condition time. Check for loose or poor connections. If the
(see page 22-63) and the charging system .• connections are good, check the battery condition
(see page 22-63) and the charging system .•
22-100 BACK
r:'I
I.!:..I
DTC 81008: MICU Lost Communication with DTC 81011: MICU Lost Communication with
Gauge Control Module (AfT Message) Gauge Control Module (VSP/NE Message)
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88). Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88).
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. 1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON ("). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
3. Wait for 6 seconds or more. 3. Wait for 6 seconds or more.
Is OTC 81008 indicated? Is OTC 81011 indicated?
NO-Intermittent failure, the gauge control module NO-Intermittent failure, the gauge control module
is OK atthis time. Check for loose or poor is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections at gauge control module 36P connections at gauge control module 36P
connector and at the under-dash fuse/relay box connector and at under-dash fuse/relay box
connector Q (16P). If the connections are good, connector Q (16P). If the connections are good,
check the battery condition (see page 22-63) and check the battery condition (see page 22-63) and
the charging system .• the charging system .•
Are OTCs 81011 and 81032 also indicated with Are OTCs 81008 and 81032 also indicated with
OTC81008? OTC 81011?
YES-Check for an open in the communication YES-Check for an open in the communication
circuit between the MICU and the gauge control circuit between the MICU and the gauge control
module. Ifthe circuit is bad, repair the open .• module. Ifthe circuit is bad, repair the open .•
NO-Go to the gauge control module input test NO-Go to the gauge control module input test
(see page 22-282) .• (see page 22-282) .•
BACK 22-101
DTC 81032: MICU Lost Communication with

the SRS Unit (CDS Message)
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22c88).
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure, the gauge control module

is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections at the gauge control module 36P
connector, and atthe under-dash fuse/relay box
connector Q (16P). If the connections are good,
check the battery condition (see page 22-63) and
the charging system .•
Are DTCs 81008 and 81011 a/so indicated with

DTC81032?
YES-Check for an open in the communication

circuit between the MICU and the gauge control
module. If the circuit is bad, repair the open .•
NO-Do the gauge control module input test

(see page 22-282) .•
22-102 BACK
r--:'I
~
DTC 81036: IG1 Line Input Error 8. Check for voltage between the gauge control
module 36P connector No. 35 and No. 19 terminals.
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System GAUGE CONTROL MODULE 36P CONNECTOR
Is DTe 81036 indicated? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 5.
time. Check for loose or poor connection at the YES-Faulty MICU; substitute a known-good
gauge control module 36P connector, and at the under-dash fuse/relay box and recheck.•
under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (16P). If the
connections are good, check the battery condition NO-Check No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash
(see page 22-63) and the charging system .• fuse/relay box. If the fuse is OK, check for an open
in the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box
5. Check for DTCs with the HDS. and the gauge control module, or repair a short in
the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box
Is DTe 81008 indicated with DTe 81036? and the gauge control module.•
YES-Troubleshoot the indicated DTC.•
NO-Go to step 6.
BACK 22-103
DTC 81150: Communication Bus Line Error DTC 81200: Communication Bus Line Error
(BUS-OFF) (BUS-OFF)
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
Are DTCs 81000,81008,81011, and 81032 also Are DTCs 81000,81008,81011, and 81032 also
indicated with DTC 81150? indicated with DTC 81200?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC 81000.• YES-Troubleshoot DTC 81000 .•
NO-If only DTC 81150 is present, replace the NO-If only DTC 81200 is present, replace the
gauge control module assembly. If no DTCs are climate control unit. If no DTCs are present, it's an
present, it's an intermittent failure, the system is intermittent failure, the system is OK at this time.
OK at this time. Check for loose or poor Check for loose or poor connections at the climate
connections at the gauge control module 36P control unit 24P connector, and at the under-dash
connector, and at the under-dash fuse/relay box fuse/relay box connector Q (16P) .•
connector Q (16P) .•
22-104 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!::.I
DTC 81750: Communication Bus Line Error DTC 81900: Communication Bus Line Error
(BUS-OFF) (BUS-OFF)
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II).
Are OTCs 81000,81008,81011, and 81032 also Are OTCs 81000,81008,81011, and 81032 also
indicated? indicated with OTC 81900?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC B1000 (see page 22-99) .• YES-Troubleshoot DTCB1000.•
NO-If only DTC B1750 is present, replace the NO-If only DTC B1900 is present, replace the
HandsFreeLink control unit. If no DTCs are present, immobilizer-keyless control unit. If no DTCs are
it's an intermittent failure, the system is OK at this present,it's an intermittent failure, the system is
time. Check for loose or poor connections at the OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
HandsFreeLink control unit 22P connector, and at connections at the immobilizer-keyless control unit
the under-dash fuse/relay box connector Q (16P) .• 7P connector, and at the under-dash fuse/relay box
connector Q (16P) .•
BACK 22-105
DTC 82200: B-CAN BUS OFF

1. Clear the DTCs using the HDS.
3. Start and run the engine for at least 5 seconds then

turn the engine off.
Is orcs 81000,81008,81011, and/or 81032

indicated?
YES-Troubleshoot DTC81000.•
NO-If only DTC 82200 is present, replace the

AcuraLink control unit. Intermittent failure, 8-CAN
communication line is OK at this time. Check for
loose or poor connections. If the connections are
good, check the battery condition (see page 22-63),
and the charging system .•
22-106 BACK
~
~
MICU Input Test
1. Before troubleshooting the multiplex integrated control system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
Mode A (see page 22-88).
2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3.
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, K, and T.
NOTE: All connector views are shown from wire side of female terminals.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (42P)
BLK
.--- ~ liJ;::;ii"/;,;,,;,, i:e}'} '//, :'Ld\,. ,;:,,",i'J;:'

::L..-
".
)\, ....
~
1 2131415161718 9 101 111121 13 14 15 16 117 118 19 20 21
23 24125126127128129130 31 32 1 33 34 35 36/37/38 39 40 41 ~
[~ L...-
I'" ...... , .,\. ,......

...
.", .. iJ
\BLK
~ __Eilil
~ ~
BLK
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR G (21P)
GRN
~ .........
u ,\.;
~
1 2 31415 6 7 8
10 11 12113114 15 16 17 1181191201 ~
n IJ'
I' ',"
(cont'd)
BACK 22-107
MICU Input Test (cont'd)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR K (8P)
DE IT]
[DQ IT! ~J
!
PNK
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR T (34P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
\ BLK
4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system .
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 5.
22-108 BACK
~
L=:..I
5. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector.
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 6.
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
K4 PNK Under all conditions Attach to ground: • Blown No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in the
The ceiling light should come under-hood fuse/relay box
on. • Blown bulb(s)
• Faulty ceiling light
• An open in the wire
6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the MICU must be faulty; replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.
G2 GRN Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the
There should be battery voltage. under-hood fuse/relay box
E6 BlK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G601)
There should be less than 0.5 V. • An open in the wire
F20 BlK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G451)
T34 BlK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
BACK 22-109
Keyless/Power Door Locks/Security System
HOOD SWITCH
Test, page 22-140
SECURITY
INDICATOR
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS
CONTROL UNIT (With built-in receiver)
Troubleshooting, page 22-126
MICU
(Built into the under-dash fuse/relay box)
Input Test, page 22-107
HEADLIGHTS
KEYLESS BUZZER
LOCK BUTTON
PANIC BUTTON
TRANSMITTER UNLOCK BUTTON IGNITION KEY

Test, page 22-142
Programming, page 22-144
Immobilizer Key Registration, page 22-341
22-110 BACK
r--:'I
~
IGNITION KEY SWITCH

Test, page 22-66
DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/

KNOB SWITCH/KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Actuator Test, page 22-136
Knob Switch Test, page 22-137
key Cylinder Switch Test,
LEFT REAR
DOOR SWITCH
\J ----- ---"~ TAILGATE RELEASE ACTUATOR/
LATCH SWITCH
page 22-139 LEFT REAR DOOR LOCK Actuator Test, page 22-139
ACTUATOR/KNOB SWITCH Latch Switch Test, page 22-140
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK SWITCH
Test, page 22-138
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/
KNOBSWTICH
TAILGATE OUTER
HANDLE SWITCH FRONT PASSENGER'S
Test/Replacement, DOOR SWITCH
page 22-141
RIGHT REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR/
KNOB SWITCH
BACK 22-111
System Description
Security Alarm System
The security alarm system is armed automatically after the doors, hood, and tailgate are closed and locked. For the
system to arm, the ignition switch must be off, the key must be removed from the ignition switch, and the MICU must
receive signals that the doors, hood, and tailgate are closed and locked. The alarm can be disarmed at any time by
unlocking the driver's door with the key or pressing the UNLOCK button on the transmitter.
When everything is closed and locked, the only inputs that are grounded, and have 0 V, are the driver's door lock knob
switch (LOCK position), and the audio unit or navigation unit (if equipped). In other words, all of the other switches are
open, and have about 10 to 12 V, including the key cylinder switches. The security indicator in the gauge control
module begins to flash immediately after the vehicle is completely closed and locked, and 15 seconds later, the
security system arms (blink rate changes from slow to fast). Ifthe security indicator does not flash, the system is not
arming. A beep sounds and the parking lights flash to confirm the security alarm system is armed if the LOCK button is
pressed a second time within 5 seconds.
If one of the switches is misadjusted or shorted internally, or there is a short or an open in the circuit, the security
system will not arm. As long as the control unit continues to receive a ground signal (0 V, or open to 12 V depending
on the circuit), it senses that the vehicle is not closed and locked, and the system will not arm. A switch that is slightly
misadjusted can cause the alarm to sound for no apparent reason. In this case, a significant change in outside air
temperature, the vibration of a passing truck, or someone bumping into the vehicle could cause the alarm to sound.
There is no glass breakage or motion detector feature.
If anything is opened or improperly unlocked after the system is armed, the control unit receives a ground signal from
that switch, and the 10 to 12 V reference drops to 0 V. Ifthe audio unit or navigation unit (if equipped) is disconnected,
the input loses its ground, and the input voltage goes to 10 to 12 V. The system sounds the alarm when any ofthese
occur:
• A door or the tailgate is forced open.

• A door is unlocked without using the key or the transmitter.
• The hood is opened.
• The audio unit or navigation unit (if equipped) is disconnected.
• The transmitter PANIC button is pressed.
When the system sounds the alarm, the horn sounds and the exterior lights flash for 2 minutes. The alarm can be
stopped at any time by unlocking the driver's door with the key or by pressing any button on the transmitter.
Panic Mode
The panic mode sounds the alarm in order to attract attention. When the PANIC button on the transmitter is pressed
and held for 2 seconds, the horn sounds and the exterior lights flash for about 20 seconds.
The panic mode can be .cancelled at anytime by pressing any button on the transmitter or by turning the ignition
switch ON (II). The panic mode will not function if the ignition switch is ON (II).
22-112 BACK
~
I.!!:..I
Keyless Entry System
The keyless entry system is integrated with the multiplex integrated control system. The multiplex integrated control
unit (MICU) receives LOCK, UNLOCK and PANIC signals from the immobilizer-keyless control unit (keyless receiver).
The keyless entry system allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle with the transmitter. When you press the LOCK
button, all doors lock. When you press the UNLOCK button once, only the driver's door unlocks. The other doors will
unlock when you press the button a second time. The doors will not lock with the transmitter if a door is not fully
closed, or if the key is in the ignition switch.
When the switch forthe ceiling light is in the center (DOOR) position, it will come on when the UNLOCK button is
pressed. If a door is not opened, the light will go off in about 15 to 60 seconds, (depending on the customized
selections), and the door will relock in about 30 to 90 seconds (depending on the customized selections). If the doors
are not locked will the remote, the light will go off immediately.
BACK 22-113
Circuit Diagram
~.
BAmRY
No.1 tBATlll00 Al No. 211GII50 Al HI No. 10 17.5 Al
+
r-
WHT BLU
IGI
IGI HOT in ON till and START lUll
No.4 tP/Wl\40 Al K2 G21 No. 25 120 Al
~ BLU
No. 23 tlOAI D4 G2
~ GRN GRN
UNDER· DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX Ql
MICU
+B BACK UP IGI
-~
, , -~
U
-~ -~
, ,
- - ~ -~
, . ~
,
-~
T27 T28 131 132 T23 T24 T29 T30 T22

DOOR DOOR
LOCK LOCK
KNOB KNOB
GRY BU BRN PNK WHT PNK ORN LTBLU
KEY
LTGRN
18 16 12 10
,0
UGHT UN· ", / LOCK UN· ", :'LOCK····· : ....... UN· , LOCK UN· ", / LOCK UN· , LOCK
ILEDI LOCK LOCK : LOCK LOCK LOCK
DRIVER'S 22 DRIVER'S 5 DRIVER'S 1 FRONT 10 FRONT

DOOR LOCK DOOR KEY DOOR LOCK PASSENGER'S PASSENGER'S
SWITCH CYUNDER KNOB SWITCH DOOR LOCK DOOR LOCK
SWITCH SWITCH KNOB SWITCH
I G501
I G501
1
G505
1 G505
22-114 BACK
~
~
- - - - • :CANline
JUNCTION BOX GAUGECONTROLMODU~
----GRN ~I I~ GRN
IMMOBIUZER·~SS
CONTROL UNIT
-- --- - -( THANSMIlTER)
I 4 SECURITY
INDICATOR
.
PNK
(~D)
rn
I I 30
I Gl I
JUNCTION
BOX
~4_ - J.B~A~) - - PNK • - - - - - - - ~
I J19
PNK
I
106 UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
B-CAN
MICU
--L
I
----~~\P UNLOCK
(DR)
I
~----~~J~
--L
UNLOCK LOCK ~----~~j~
-L.
I
1 -
-G>
/
-
SG
T341
PG
~
\
\
E6 E33 flO N13 M8 E14 E21 Ml0 N7
YEL
BLK BLK BLK BX GRY

t
YEL
I
VEL
VEL LTBLU LT BLU LTBLU
~FT REAR DOOR

LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER'S FRONT
DOOR LOCK PASSENGER'S
ACTUATOR DOOR LOCK RIGHT REAR DOOR
ACTUATOR LOCK ACTUATOR
LTBLU LTBLU
G501 GOOI GOOI G451
(cont'd)
BACK 22-115
No. 4IH/LJ 150 A) No. 12115 A) FUSE

IUNDER·HOOD IUNDER-HOOD
FUSE/RElAY BOX) FUSE/RElAY BOX)
UNDER·DASH
I W BLU BLU
IWHT
FUSE/RElAY BOX GIS G7 F23 G16
DASH LIGHTS PARKING

LIGHTS/
SIDE MARKER
LIGHTS/
j LEFT/RIGHT
HEADLIGHTS
ILOWBEAM)
TAIllIGHTS
No.21 No. 17
130 A) 115A)
T26 T25
R6 E37 E3 Et7 E2 F27 R13

GRN
PNK GRN LTGRN BRN LTBLU PNK GRY WHT
t
h
PNK PNK
BLUfLK
~ ~
LEFT RIGHT
1 IGNITION 'I '2 '3 '4 4 TRANSMISSION REAR REAR
KEY , RANGE SWITCH
~ ,0 DOOR
,0
DOOR KEYLESS
SWITCH IClosed: UN· ' LOCK UN· LOCK BUZZER
2 IClosed: 5 In pos~ion P) LOCK KNOB LOCK KNOB
IMMOBIlIZER· Key inserted) SWITCH SWITCH
KEYLESS 10
CONTROL UNIT
BLK
1
T
1
BLK
BLK
1 I 1
BLK
G502 Gl01 GOOl G6S1 G451
22-116 BACK
r:-:'I
I.!!:.I
(Wrth navigationl 'I DRIVER'S DOOR SWITCH (Closed: Door openl

1"-"-"-"-"-"-"-"-", '2 FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR SWITCH (Closed: Door openl
JUNCTION BOX : '3 RIGHT REAR DOOR SWITCH (Closed: Door openl
'4 LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH (Closed: Door opanl
I
I
cp 6
VEL
K4
JI6
JUNCTION
BOX
I
I
I
I
VEL
i 04 G504
i UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
L .. _ .. _ .. _. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. _ .. --.J
MICU
;"-"-"-"-"!
I: " i , ,
:
! 04
! I
cp
GI3 EI3 E20
YEL
I E36
GRY PNK BRN BLU

l6
. JUNCTION
BOX
JI5
VEL
TAiLGAlE
OUlER TAILGAlE 2 TAILGATE
HOOD 0 HANDLE LATCH
SWITCH RELEASE
' ' SWITCH ACTUATOR SWITCH
(Closed: (Closed: (Closed :
Hoodopenl UNLATCHED Tailgateopenl
Lever pulledl
07
Y
BLK BLK
BLK BLK BLK BLK
I
..
BLK
1
L .. _ .. _ G504.. _ .. _ .. ..J:
I
I
1
G451
1
G602
1
G602
1
G602
(Wrthout navigationl
BACK 22-117
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 81026: Front Passenger's Door Lock 7. Disconnect the front passenger's power window
Switch Lock/Unlock Signal Error switch 8P connector.
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be 8. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88). FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH
(UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Are both information indicators OFF?
YES-Faulty door lock switch; replace the front
3. Operate the front passenger's door lock switch passenger's power window switch .•
several times.
NO-Go to step 9.
10. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box
YES-Go to step 5. connector T (34P).
NO-Intermittent failure. The front passenger's 11. Check for continuity between the No. 12 (UNLOCK)
door lock system is OK at this time.• and No. 10 (LOCK) terminals ofthe front passenger's
power window switch 14P connector anc;:l body
5. With the front passenger's door lock switch in the ground.
neutral position, select KEYLESS from the HDS and
enter the DATA LIST. FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER
WINDOW SWITCH 14P CONNECTOR
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the FRONT
PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and
FRONT PASSENGER'S DOOR LOCK SWITCH
YES-Go to step 12.

= =
YES-Repair a short to ground in the LOCK or

UNLOCK wire .•
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/

relay box.•
22-118 BACK
r--:,
I..!:!..I
13. Disconnect the front passenger's window switch

14P connector.
14. Disconnect under-dash fuse/relay box connector T

(34P).
15. Check for continuity between the No. 12 (UNLOCK)

and No.1 0 (LOCK) terminals of the front passenger's
power window switch 14P connector.
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER

WINDOW SWITCH 14P CONNECTOR
YES-Repair a short in the wire between the LOCK

and UNLOCK wires .•
NO-Substitute a known-good passenger's

window switch, and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the original
passenger's window switch. If not, the MICU is
faulty, replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.•
BACK 22-119
DTC 81127: Driver's Door Key Cylinder 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Switch Signal Error
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be connector T (34P).
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88). 11. Check for continuity between the No. 31 (UNLOCK)
and No. 32 (LOCK) terminals ofthe under-dash
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. fuse/relay box connector T (34P) and body ground.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR T (34P)
3. Insert the ignition key into the driver's door key

cylinder switch, and turn the key in LOCK and
UNLOCK positions ten times.
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure. The driver's door key
cylinder switch system is OK at this time.•
5. With the driver's door key cylinder in the neutral
position, select KEYLESS with the HDS, and enter YES-Repair a short to ground in LOCK or UNLOCK
the DATA LIST. wire .•
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and relay box.•
DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
(UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST. 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Are both information indicators OFF? 13. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P
connector.
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 7. (34P).
7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P

connector.
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S

DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH (LOCK) and
DRIVER'S DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
YES-Faulty driver'S door key cylinder switch;

replace the driver's door lock actuator.•
NO-Go to step 9.
22-120 BACK
~
I.!!!!!.I

and No. 32 (LOCK) terminals ofthe under-dash
fuse/relay box connector T (34P).

and UNLOCK wires .•
NO-Substitute a known-good MICU, and recheck.

If the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original MICU, if not, replace the driver's door lock
actuator.•
BACK 22-121
OTC 81128: Driver's Door Lock Switch Signal 8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S
Error DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
sure to follow the instructions in 8-CAN System Are both information indicators OFF?
YES-Faulty door lock switch; replace the power
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. window master switch .•
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). NO-Go to step 9.
3. Operate the driver's door lock switch LOCK! 9. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
UNLOCK several times.
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. connector T (34P).
Is DTC 81128 indicated? 11. Check for continuity between the No. 28 (LOCK)
and No. 27 (UNLOCK) terminals ofthe under-dash
YES-Go to step 5. fuse/relay box connector T (34P) and body ground.
NO-Intermittent failure. The driver's door lock UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR T (34P)
system is OK at this time.•
5. With the driver's door lock switch in the neutral

position, select KEYLESS from the HDS and enter
the DATA LIST.

DOOR LOCK SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the DATA LIST.
Are both information indicators OFF? Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 12.

Are there continuity?
NO-Go to step 7.
7. Disconnect the power window master switch 22P UNLOCK wire .•
connector.
relay box.•
22-122 BACK
r:-:'I
~
13. Disconnect the power window master switch 22P

connector.

(34P).
15. Check for continuity between the No. 28 (LOCK)

and No. 27 (UNLOCK) terminals of the under-dash

and UNLOCK wires.•
NO-Substitute a known-good power window

master switch, and recheck. If the symptom/
indication goes away, replace the orignal power
window master switch. If not, the MICU is faulty,
replace the under-dash fuse/relay box .•
BACK 22-123
DTC 81129: Driver's Door Lock Knob Switch 7. Disconnect the driver's door lock actuator 10P
Signal Error connector.
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be 8. Check the ON/OFF information of the DRIVER'S
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and DRIVER'S
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88). DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) in the
DATA LIST.
1. Clea r the DTCs with the HDS.
YES-Check for an open in the driver's door lock
3. Operate the driver's door lock knob switch several knob switch (LOCK) wire or the driver's door lock
times. knob switch (UNLOCK) wire between the MICU and
the driver's door lock knob switch. If OK, replace
4. Check for DTCs with the HDS. the driver's door lock actuator.•
Is DTC B1129 indicated? NO-Go to step 9.
NO-Intermittent failure. The driver's door lock 10. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box
knob switch system is OK at this time .• connector T (34P).
5. Select KEYLESS from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, 11. Check for continuity between the No. 23 (UNLOCK)
and enter the DATA LIST. and No. 24 (LOCK) terminals ofthe under-dash
fuse/relay box connector T (34P) and body ground.
DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK) and the
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK).
Are the DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH

(LOCK) information indicator ON and DRIVER'S
DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK)
information indicator OFF with the driver's door
lock knob switch in LOCK position, and are the
DRIVER'S DOOR LOCK KNOB SWITCH (LOCK)
information indicator OFF and DRIVER'S DOOR
LOCK KNOB SWITCH (UNLOCK) information
indicator ON with the driver's door lock knob Wire side of female terminals
switch in UNLOCK position?
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/ Is there continuity?

relay box.•
NO-Go to step 7. UNLOCK wire .•
NO-Go to step 12.
22-124 BACK
~
~

and No. 24 (LOCK) terminals of the under-dash

wire and UNLOCK wire .•

relay box.•
BACK 22-125
Power Door Locks/Keyless
1. If the door lock system works properly, but the keyless operation does not, refer to the immobilizer-keyless control
unit symptom troubleshooting information (see page 22-333).
NOTE: The keyless system does not function when:

• Any of the doors is open.
• Ignition key is in the ignition key switch.
• Ignition switch is ON (II).
No. Symptom Check Items

1 The doors will not lock or unlock .• • MICU input test (see page 22-131)
• Driver's door key cylinder switch test (see page 22-139)
• Door lock switch test (see page 22-138)
• Door lock knob switch test (see page 22-137)
• Keyless remote transmitter test (see page 22-142)
2 The doors will not lock.• • MICU input test (see page 22-131)
• Tailgate latch switch test (see page 22-140)
• Driver's door switch test (check the door switch ON/OFF
information with the HDS)
3 The doors will not unlock.• • MICU inputtest (see page 22-131)
4 Keyless operation does not work Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-127).
(LOCK, UNLOCK, PANIC).
5 Doors will not unlock with the Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-129).
transmitter, but will unlock with the
door switch.
6 Doors will not lock with the transmitter, Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-129).
but will lock with the door switch.
7 Doors automatically relock after being Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-130).
unlocked with the transmitter even
though a door has been opened.
8 The horn does not sound and/or the Symptom troubleshooting (see page 22-129).
headlights do not flash when PANIC
button on the transmitter pressed.
9 Keyless operation will work even Ignition key switch test (see page 22-207).
though the ignition key is in the
ignition switch.
*: If only one door is not working properly, check that door's lock actuator first, then check the other items listed
in this table.
22·126 BACK
r--:'I
l!!!::..I
Keyless operation does not work (LOCK, 9. Check for voltage between the immobilizer-keyless
UNLOCK, PANIC) control unit 7P connector No.1 terminal and body
ground.
NOTE:
• Before troubleshooting, check the B-CAN DTCs. If any IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT 7P CONNECTOR
DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the indicated DTC first.
• Before troubleshooting, do the keyless transmitter
test (see page 22-142).
2. Try to start the engine.
Does the engine start?

=
YES-The immobilizer system is OK, go to step 3. Wire side of female terminals
NO-Go to the immobilizer symptom

troubleshooting (see page 22-335) .• Is there battery voltage?
3. Turn the ignition switch OFF. YES-Go to step 10.
4. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. NO-Check the No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the under-
hood fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, replace
5. Close all doors, then turn the ignition switch ON (II). the fuse and repair a short to ground in the wire. If
the fuse is OK, repair an open in the wire .•
6. Enter the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, and check the
door switch parameters. 10. Disconnect the ignition key switch 6P connector.
Do al/ door switches indicate OFF? 11. At the ignition key switch side, check for continuity
between the ignition key switch 6P connector No.1
YES-Go to step 7. and No.2 terminals.
NO-Faulty door switch, or shorted door switch IGNITION KEY SWITCH 6P CONNECTOR
wire. Repair as necessary.•
7. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.
8. Disconnect the immobilizer-keyless control unit 7P

connector.
YES-Faulty ignition key switch, replace the

steering lock assembly.•
NO-Go to step 12.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-127
Symptom Troubleshooting (co nt'd)
12. Check for continuity between the immobilizer-

keyless control unit 7P connector No.6 terminal
and body ground.
IMMOBILIZER-KEYLESS CONTROL UNIT 7P CONNECTOR
=
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire .•
NO-Replace the immobilizer-keyless control

unit.•
22-128 BACK
~
I.!!!:..I
Doors will not unlock (or lock) with the The horn does not sound and/or the
transmitter, but will unlock (lock) with the headlights do not flash when the PANIC
door switch button on the transmitter is pressed
NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the 8-CAN DTCs. NOTE: Before troubleshooting, check the 8-CAN DTCs.
If any DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the indicated DTC If any DTC is indicated, troubleshoot the indicated DTC
first. first.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 1. Press the PANIC button.
2. Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch. Does the horn sound?
3. Close and lock the doors. YES-Go to step 3.
4. Try to lock/unlock the doors with the keyless NO-Go to step 2.

transmitter.
2. Press the horn button.
Do the door lock actuators work normally?
Does the horn sound?
YES-Intermittent failure. The system is OK at this
time.• YES-Go to step 3.
NO-Go to step 5. NO-Check the horn circuit.•
5. Open the driver's door. 3. Turn the headlight switch ON.
Does the key-in reminder chime sound with the Do the headlights come on?
key in the ignition switch?
YES-Go to step 4.
YES-Faulty ignition key switch, or short to ground
on the ignition key switch PNK wire. Repair as NO-Check the lighting circuit.•
necessary.•
4. Do the transmitter test (see page 22-142).
NO-Go to step 6.
Is the transmitter OK?
6. Do the transmitter test (see page 22-142).
YES-Substitute a known-good MICU and
Is the transmitter OK? recheck.•
YES-Substitute a known-good MICU and NO-Replace the transmitter.•

recheck .•
NO-Replace the transmitter.•
BACK 22-129
Doors automatically relock after being

unlocked with the transmitter even though a
door has been opened
1. Turn the ceiling light switch in DOOR position.
3. Close all doors.
4. Open and close each door one at a time.
5. Watch the ceiling light and the door indicator on

the gauge control module.
Does the ceiling light and door indicator come on

when the door is open, and go off when the door is
closed?
YES-Substitute a known-good MICU and recheck.

If the symptom goes away, replace the original
MICU .•

MICU and the door switch. If the wire is OK, replace
the door switch .•
22-130 BACK
~
~
MICU Input Test
1. Before troubleshooting the keyless/poor door locks/security system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis
Test Mode A (see page 22-88).
2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) and No. 25 (20 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any fuse is blown, replace it
and go to step 3.
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, M, N, Q, R, and T.

LTBLU
~TGRN BLK PNK YEL BRN BRN LTBLU
~-\
\ / /
~
/ /
1
L-- ,
\ l.··.····· , )\.
~[IJ
12131 4 15 161 7 18 9 101 11 1121 13 14 15 16 117118 19 20 21
23 24125126127128129130 31 32 1 33 34 35 36\37\38 39 40 41
[----r '---
J J ~
1 I "1
/
BLK BLU
/ \
GRN
1 .'.
)\.
a
J
~
[ 14 115\16117
\ 1 213 41
J20 21122 231 24 25
9\10 \11\12\13
261271281 29 30 1 31 32 33 34
[
~
IJ
/BLK
1
BLU
/'\. \
GRN
\
',. ..... S")i
GRN BLU
~ \1 U
.' ,·;,·T
)\.
~
1 231 4 15 6 7 8
10 11 12113114 15 16 17 118119120 1
[
D IJ
1
~
l"i "i . . •.
\
WHT
\
WHT
\
GRY BLU
(cont'd)
BACK 22-131
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR M (10P) CONNECTOR N (14P)
1 2 F=l
3 4 1 2 3 F=l
4 5 6
5 6 71 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 111 12 13 14
/
YEL
\
LTBLU
\
LTBLU GRY
!
CONNECTOR R (20P) CONNECTOR Q (16P)
PNK GRN YEL
j
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
~1 2 3 4 5 6 7
;----f
8
2
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
/
WHT
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR T (34P)
GRN
~
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
\
~K \ORN\ \ ~K \
BLK
BLU BRN
22-132 BACK
~
l=:..I
• If any test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system .
Cavity Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not
obtained
F23 BLU Under all Connect G16 and F23, G16 and G7 • Poor ground (body ground)
G7 conditions terminals with a jumper wire • Blown No. 12 (15 A) fuse in
momenta ri Iy: the under-hood fuse/relay
The horn should sound. box
• Faulty horn
G16 WHT Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 12 (15 A) fuse in
conditions There should be battery voltage. the under-hood fuse/relay
box
G18 WHT Under all Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.4 (50 A) fuse in
conditions There should be battery voltage. the under-hood fuse/relay
box
E20 BRN Under all Connect G21 and E20 terminals • Poor ground (G602)
conditions with a jumper wire: • Faulty tailgate release
The tailgate release actuator actuator
should work (Tailgate should • An open in the wire
open).
N7 LTBLU Under all Connect battery power to the N 13 • Faulty driver's door lock
N13 GRV conditions terminal and ground the N7 actuator
terminal momentarily: • An open in the wire
The driver's door lock actuator
should unlock.
M8 VEL Under all Connect battery power to the M8 • Faulty front passenger's or
M10 LTBLU conditions terminal and ground the M10 right rear door lock actuator
The front passenger's and right
rear door lock actuators should
unlock.
E14 VEL Under all Connect battery power to the E14 • Faulty left rear door lock
E21 LTBLU conditions terminal and ground the E21 actuator
The left rear door lock actuator
should unlock.
R13 WHT Under all Connect G2 and R13 terminals • Blown No. 23 (10 A) fuse in
conditions with a jumper wire momentarily: the under-hood fuse/relay
The keyless buzzer should sound. box
• Faulty keyless buzzer
• Poor ground (G451)
(cont'd)
BACK 22-133

6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors .
CavitY Wire Test condition Test: Desired result Possible cause if result is not obtained
E6 BLK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G601)
There should be less than 0.5 V. • An ooen in the wire
E13 PNK Tailgate outer handle switch Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G602)
unlocked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty tailgate outer handle switch
• An ooen in the wire
Tailgate outer handle switch Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty tailgate outer handle switch
neutral There should be 5 V or more. • Short to around
F20 BLK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G451)
T34 BLK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
E2 LTBLU Right rear door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
There should be less than 1 V. • An ooen in the wire
Right rear door closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
There should be 5 V or more. • Short to around
E3 LTGRN Front passenger's door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door switch
Front passenger's door closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door switch
E17 BRN Left rear door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
Left rear door closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
E36 BLU Tailgate open Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G602)
There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty tailgate latch switch
Tailgate closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty tailgate latch switch
E37 GRN Driver's door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
Driver's door closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
F27 GRN Transmission range switch in P Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G101)
There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty transmission range switch
Transmission range switch in Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty transmission range switch
any other position than P There should be 5 V or more. • Short to around
G13 GRY Hood open Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G451)
There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty hood switch
Hood closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty hood switch
01 GRN Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the under-
There should be battery voltage. hood fuse/relay box
• Faultv under-dash fuse/relav box
04 YEL Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: An open in the wire
There should be 5 V or more.
R6 PNK Ignition key inserted into the Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
ignition switch There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty ignition key switch
Ignition key removed from the Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
ignition switch There should be 5 V or more. • Short to around
T22 LTBLU Front passenger's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G505)
knob switch unlocked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty front passenger's door lock
knob switch
Front passenger's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door lock
knob switch locked There should be 5 V or more. knob switch
• Short to around
22-134 BACK
r:-:'I
I.!!!!.I
T23 WHT Driver's door lock knob switch Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
unlocked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty driver's door lock knob switch
Driver's door lock knob switch Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock knob switch
locked There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
T24 LTGRN Driver's door lock knob switch Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door lock knob switch
unlocked There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
Driver's door lock knob switch Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
locked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty driver's door lock knob switch
T25 GRY Right rear door lock knob switch Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G651)
unlocked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty right rear door lock knob
switch
Right rear door lock knob switch Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door lock knob
locked There should be 5 V or more. switch
• Short to around
T26 PNK Left rear door lock knob switch Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G601)
unlocked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty left rear door lock knob switch
Left rear door lock knob switch Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door lock knob switch
locked There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
T27 GRY Driver door lock switch Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
unlocked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty driver door lock switch
Driver door lock switch in Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver door lock switch
neutral There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
T28 BLU Driver door lock switch locked Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty driver door lock switch
• An QPen in the wire
Driver door lock switch in Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver door lock switch
neutral There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground
T29 PNK Front passenger's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G505)
switch unlocked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty front passenger's door lock
switch
switch in neutral There should be 5 V or more. switch
• Short to ground
T30 ORN Front passenger's door lock Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G505)
switch locked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty front passenger's door lock
switch
• Short to ground
T31 BRN Driver's door key cylinder Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
switch unlocked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty driver's door key cylinder
switch
Driver's door key cylinder Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door key cylinder
• Short to ground
T32 PNK Driver's door key cylinder Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
switch locked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty driver's door key cylinder
switch
Driver's door key cylinder Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door key cylinder
• Short to around
BACK 22-135
Door Lock Actuator Test
Driver's Door and Left Rear Door Front Passenger's Door and Right Rear Door
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator 2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the actuator
(8). (8).
A A
The illustration shows the driver's door. The illustration shows the front passenger's door.
3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and 3. Check actuator operation by connecting power and
ground according to the table. To prevent damage ground according to the table. To prevent damage
to the actuator, apply battery voltage only to the actuator, apply battery voltage only
momentarily. momentarily.
""-
'"
Terminal Terminal
1 2 3 4
Position
LOCK
""- Et> e
Position
LOCK
'" EE> e
UNLOCK e Et> UNLOCK e Et>
4. If the actuator does not operate as specified, 4. If the actuator does not operate as specified,
replace it. replace it.
22-136 BACK
~
a=:..J
Door Lock Knob Switch Test
Driver's Door Passenger's Door
1. Remove the driver's door panel (seepage 20-6). 1. Remove, the passenger's door panel (see page
20-6).
2. Disconnect the 1OP connector (A) from the actuator
(8). 2. Disconnect the 10Pconnector (A) from the actuator
(8).
A
A
3. Check for continuity between the terminals .
• There should be continuity between the NO.6 3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
and No.5 terminals when the door lock knob There should be continuity between the No.8
switch is in the LOCK position andno continuity [No.7] and N,o. 10 [No.5] terminals when the
when the switch is in the UNLOCK position. door lock knob switch in the UNLOCK position and
• There should be continuity between the No.7 no continuity when the switch is in the LOCK
and No.5 terminals when the door lock knob position.
switch is in the UNLOCK position and no [ ] : Left rear door
continuity when the switch is in the LOCK
position. 4. Ifthe continuity is not specified, replace the door
lock actuator.
4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the door
lock actuator.
BACK 22-137
Keyle~is/Power Door Locks/Security System
Door Lock Switch Test
Driver's door Front passenger's door
1. Remove the power window master switch and 1. Remove the front passenger's power window
disconnect its connector (see page 22-228). switch (see page 22-228).
2. Check for continuity between the power window 2. Check for continuity between the front passenger's
master switch 22P connector terminals. powerwind6w switch 14P connector terminals.
• There should be continuity between the No. 16 • There should be continuity between the No.1
and No. 22 terminals when the door lock switch and No. 10 terminals when the door lock switch
is' in the LOCK position. is in the LOCK position.
• There should be no continuity between the • There should be no continuity between the No.1
No. 16 and No. 22 terminals when the door lock and No. 10 terminals when the door lock switch
switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. is in the neutral or UNLOCK position.
• Thete should be continuity between the No. 18 ' • There should be continuity between the No.1
and No. 22 terminals when the door lock switch and No. 12 terminals when the door lock switch
is in the UNLOCK position. is in the UNLOCK position.
• There should be no continuity between the • There should be no continuity between the No.1
No. 18 and No. 22 terminals when the door lock and No. 12 terminals when the door lock switch
switch is in the neutral or LOCK position. is in the neutral or LOCK position.
3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the 3. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the front
power window master switch (see page 22-228). passenger's power window switch (see page
22-228).
22-138 BACK
r--:'I
.. ~
Door Key Cylinder Switch Test Tailgate Release Actuator Test
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6). 1. Open the tailgate.
2. Disconnect the 10P connector (A) from the key 2. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page
cylinder switch (8). 20-174).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the tailgate latch.
3. Check for continuity between the terminals.
• There should be continuity between the No.9 4. Check actuator operation by connecting power to
and No.5 terminals when the door key cylinder the No .. 2 terminal and ground to the No.1 terminal
switch is in LOCK position. momentarily. The actuator should work.
• There should be no continuity between the No.9
and No.5 terminals when the door key cylinder 5. Ifthe actuator does not work, replace the tailgate
switch is in the neutral or UNLOCK position. latch (see page 20-188).
• There should be continuity between the No.8
and No.5 terminals when the door key cylinder
switch is in UNLOCK position.
and No.5 terminals when the door key cylinder
switch is in the neutral or LOCK position.
4. Ifthe continuity is not as specified, replace the door

latch (see page 20-11).
BACK 22-139
Tailgate Latch Switch Test Hood Switch Test
1. Open the tailgate. 1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page 2. Remove the cover (see page 20-187).
20-174).
3. Disconnect the 2P connector from the hood switch.
3. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the tailgate
latch (8).

4. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2
terminals. • There should be continuity between the No.1
and No.2 terminals when the hood is opened
• With the tailgate open, there should be continuity. (latch released) .
• With the tailgate closed, there should be no • There should be no continuity between the No.1
continuity. and No.2 terminals when the hood is closed and
completely latched.
5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
tailgate latch (see page 20-188). ,5. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the
hood latch assembly (see page 20-187).
22-140 BACK
~
~
Tailgate Outer Handle Switch Test/ Keyless Buzzer Test/Replacement
Replacement
1. Remove the left inner fender (see page 20-176).
1. Open the tailgate. 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) and remove the
keyless buzzer by releasing the hooks.
2. Remove the tailgate lower trim panel (see page
20-174).
3. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) and remove the

two bolts.
3. Test the buzzer by connecting battery power to the

No.2 terminal and grounding the No.1 terminal of
the buzzer momentarily; the buzzer should sound.
4. If the buzzer does not sound, replace the keyless

buzzer.

and No.3 terminals when the switch is pressed .
and No.3 terminals when the switch is released.

tailgate outer handle switch.
BACK 22-141
Transmitter Test
NOTE: 5. Open the transmitter and check for water damage.

• If the doors unlock or lock with the transmitter, but
the LED on the transmitter does not come on, the LED • If you find any water damage, replace the
is faulty; replace the transmitter. transmitter, then reprogram and register the
• If any door is open, you cannot lock the doors with transmitter (see page 22-341).
the transmitter. • If there is no water damage, go to step 6.
• If you unlocked the doors with the transmitter, but do
not open any of the doors within 30 to 90 seconds,
the doors relock automatically.
• The doors do not lock/unlock, and panic does not
work with the transmitter if the ignition key is
inserted in the ignition switch.
With HOS
1. Press the lock or unlock button five or six times to

reset the transmitter.
• If the locks work, the transmitter is OK.

• If any of the transmitter buttons does not work,
replace the transmitter, then do the transmitter
programming register (see page 22-341).
• If the locks don't work, go to step 2.
2. Connect the HDS to the data link connector. 6. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one,
and press lock or unlock button and check the
3. Select the KEYLESS from the BODY ELECTRICAL receive condition on the screen of the HDS.
menu, then enter the KEYLESS CHECK.
• If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS .
4. Press lock, unlock, trunk, or panic button and check RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
the res ponce on the screen of the HDS. • .If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTR CODE IS NOT
RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 7.
NOTE: The door lock actuators mayor may not
cycle when receiving input from the transmitter.
• If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS

RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is OK.
• If DIFFERENT KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER
CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, the transmitter is
not registered to the vehicle, if necessary,
reprogram and register the transmitter (see page
22-341).
• If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT
RECEIVED is indicated, go to step 5.
22-142 BACK
~
I.!!::.I
7. Use a different known-good keyless transmitter 3. Open the transmitter and check for water damage.
assembly and repeat steps 3 and 4.
• If you find any water damage, replace the
NOTE: The keyless transmitter does not need to be transmitter.
programmed to the vehicle for this test. • If there is no water damage, go to step 4.
• If (DIFFERENT) KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER

CODE IS RECEIVED is indicated, replace the
keyless transmitter and do the immobilizer
system registration (see page 22-341).
• If KEYLESS ENTRY TRANSMITTER CODE IS NOT
RECEIVED is indicated, the immobilizer-keyless
control unit is faulty, replace it and do the
immobilizer system registration (see page
22-341).
Without HOS
• If the engine does not start, go to the immobilizer

system troubleshooting (see page 22-335).
• Ifthe engine starts, go to step 2. 4. Replace the transmitter battery (A) with a new one,
and try to lock and unlock the doors with the
2. Press the lock or unlock button five or six times to transmitter by pressing the lock or unlock button
reset the transmitter. five or six times.
• If the locks work, the transmitter is OK. • If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.
• If the locks don't work, go to step 3. • If the doors don't lock and unlock, go to step 5.
5. Reprogram and register the transmitter (see page

22-144), then try to lock and unlock the doors.
• If the doors lock and unlock, the transmitter is OK.

• If the doors don't lock and unlock, substitute a
known-good transmitter and recheck (see page
22-341). If still not operating, replace the
immobilizer-keyless control unit.
BACK 22-143
Transmitter Programming
Storing transmitter codes: 6. Within 1 to 4 sec., press the transmitter lock or

The codes of up to six transmitters can be stored into unlock button.
the immobilizerckeyless control unit memory. (If a
seventh code is stored, the code which was input first 7. Confirm you can hear the sound ofthe door lock
will be erased.) actuators within 1 to 4 sec., then push the
transmitter lock or unlock button again, or the code
NOTE: It is important to maintain the time limits will not be stored.
between the steps. Make sure the doors, the hood and
the tailgate are closed. 8. Within 10 seconds of each other, push the lock or
unlock buttons ofthe client's additional
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II). transmitters (up to five additional ones) for which
you want the codes stored in the immobilizer-
2. Within 1 to 4 sec., press the transmitter lock or keyless control unit.
unlock button. Confirm that you can hear the sound of the door
lock actuators after each transmitter code is stored.
3. Within 1 to 4 sec., turn the ignition switch OFF.
NOTE: In order to delete codes for lost transmitters,
4. Within 1 to~sec., turn the ignition switch ON (II). you must have all of the client's transmitters for
which you want the codes stored in the
5. Repeat steps 2-4 two more times. immobilizer-keyless control unit. Using each
transmitter at least once, program a combination of
the transmitters into the immobilizer-keyless
control unit's six available memory positions. Here
are some examples:
, \,
• If the client had 2 transmitters, and lost one, but

will not be replacing it; program the remaining
transmitter six times .
• If the client had 2 transmitters, and lost one, and
will be replacing it; program both transmitters
three times.
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and remove the key.
10. Confirm proper operation with the transmitters.
'-' -'
22-144 BACK
~
Horns I.!:!.J
HORN SWITCH
Test, page 22-147
CABLE REEL
HORN
Test, page 22-147
DDc=J
o OODC=:J
c=:JD
o 0
HORN RELAV CIRCUIT

UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX (Built into the MICU)
BACK
22-145
Horns
Circuit Diagram
BAnERY
UNDER·HOOD
FUSE/RELAY BOX
UNDER·DASH
G16 FUSE/RELAY BOX
F31
MICU
I.
---J]
BRA KE
UGHTS
. ~
--
F23
03 G7
BLU BLU
CABLE
REEL
1 1
H HORN H HORN
(High) ILow)
CRUISE
CONTROL
COMBINATION
SWITCH
• : Ground through steering column.
BACK
22-146
r--:'I
I..!!!:.I
Horn Test/Replacement Horn Switch Test
1. Remove the inner fender (see page 20-176). 1. Remove the steering column covers (see page
20-107).
2. Disconnect the 1P connector (A) from each horn (8).
2. Disconnect the cable reel 20P connector (A) from
the dashboard wire harness.
3. Testthe horn by connecting battery power to the

terminal (A) and grounding the bracket (8). The
horn should sound.
3. Using a jumper wire, connect the No.1 terminal of

the dashboard wire harness 20P connector to body
ground.
A • If the horns sound, go to step 4 .

• If the horns don't sound, check these items:
- No. 12 (15 A) fuse in the under-hood
fuse/relay box.
-MICU.
- Horns.
- An open in the wire.
B
4. If it fails to sound, replace it.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-147
Horns
Horn Switch Test (cont'd)
4. Reconnect the cable reel 20P connector (A) to the

dashboard wire harness.
c
A
5. Remove the driver's airbag assembly (see page

24-146), and disconnect the horn switch 1P positive
terminal (8) from the cable reel (C).
6. Using a jumper wire, connect the cable reel side 1P

connector (C) to body ground .
• If the horns sound, replace the driver's airbag

assembly.
• If the horns do not sound, check these items:
- Cable reel.
- An open in the wire (cable reel subharness).
22-148 BACK
~
Exterior Lights ~
FOG LIGHT INDICATOR HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
MULTI-INFORMATION DISPLAV (MID)

(DRL indication) (With navigation)
FOG LIGHT RELAV

COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH [ Wire colors: VEL, WHT,]
Test/Replacement, page 22-167 BLUandWHT

Test, page 22-180 .
(cont'd)
BACK 22-149
Exterior Lights
SIDE TURN SIGNAL LIGHT (LED)

MICU
HEADLIGHTS
HID Bulb Replacement, page 22-176
HID Lamp System Troubleshooting, page 22-168
High Beam Bulb Replacement, page 22-176
FRONT SIDE MARKER LIGHT
FOG LIGHT Bulb Replacement, page 22-176
Replacement, page 22-177 FRONT PARKINGI
Adjustment, page 22-178 TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
22-150 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
HIGH MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

LICENSE PLATE LIGHTS

INNER TAILLIGHT
BACK-UP LIGHT
TAILLIGHT and BRAKE LIGHT

REAR TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
REAR SIDE MARKER LIGHT
BACK
22-151
Exte'rior Lights
Circuit Diagram
UNDER.JlASH
UNDER.lfOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
-B-
ATIERY
No.1 (BATII100 A) No.2 (lGI (SO Al H1
+ WHT
No.4 (H/Ll (50 Al K1 1G2 HOT in ON lUI

"'V
No. 23 (10AI 04
"'V
J
GRN WHT ORN
lTBLU
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX G2 G18 C3
I
I
~ No.21
(30 A)
No. 18
~ (20 Al
~ No.37
(7.5 AI
. -_..-..,1
MICU I
I
I I
SG PG HEADUGHT HEADUGHT
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
-
T34
~
...L
11 11 I
i
- No. 17 No. 13 .! No.16 No. 12

(15AI 110 Al 115 Al (10AI
I
i
E6 F20 E33 G17 G15 F4 F22
PR PNK GRN WHT lTBLU
LEFT RIGHT
2 2 HEADUGHT 2 2 HEADLIGHT
1
HID UNIT
,I Q ) HIGH
(60 WI
1
HID UNIT
1 ~ DHIGH
(60 WI
ld
lOW (35WI
ld
lOW (35 W)
'- 1 1
"- 1 1
./
,
1 PARKING
BRAKE SWITCH
(Closed:
Lever pulledl
LK BLK BlK BLK BLK BlK BLK BLK
11111 1 1 1
G501 GOO1 G451 G601 G201 G201 G301 Ga01
... L
BACK
22-.152
r--:'I
I.!::..I
'1: HIGH BEAM INDICATOR ILED)

GAUGE CONTROL MODULE '2: UGHT5-0N INDiCATOR (LED)
'3: DRL INDICATOR (LED) (Without navigation)
• - - - - - . : CAN line
23 I 30
I
LTBLU PNK
I UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

I
I
3 No.19
(20A)
I
I
I
I MICU
!!-CAN
~------~~
L , , ,Ir
~-
"
S16 S12 S1 S13 S11 55
No. IS
(1SA)
LTBLU RED ORN GRY GRN BLK
E19
4 6 11 II 10 12
F3 M3
LO 1m)
RED RED RED
HI ", / PASSING OFF

DIMMER
COMBINATION UGHT SWITCH

~RED --.,I---....,~-RED -+---....-----..;;...,
RED ~~---+-RED i R E D ,
RED RED RED RED RED RED RED RED

I
2 LEFT 2 RIGHT LEFT 2 RIGHT 3 LEFT 3 RIGHT I LEFT 1 RIGHT' 1 LEFT I RIGHT I UCENSE
FRONT FRONT FRONT FRONT TAILUGHT TAILUGHT REAR REAR INNER INNER PLATE
PARKING PARKING SIDE SIDE ISw) (SW) SIDE SIDE TAILUGHT TAilliGHT UGHTS
LIGHT UGHT MARKER MARKER MARKER. MARKER (3CP) (3CP) (3CPx2)
122CP) 122CP) UGHT UGHT UGHT UGHT
(3CP) (3CP) (2CP) (2CP)
BLK BLK BLK
I J BLK-t
BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK BLK
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
G201 GaOl G201 G301 G602 G651 G602 G651 G602
BACK 22-153
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Fog Lights
UNDER·DASH
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY
No. 1(BAnll00 AI No. 2 (OP) (SO AI Gl G19 M9
+ WHT
l No. 23 (lOA)
<r'
D4
GRN WHT
G2 UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
MICU
SG PG
-f-
r r-
n
1341
E6 F20 E33 S14 SS R7
PR BLK BLU vl WHT

'·14
8 12
FOG UGHT SWITCH

~- FOGUGHT
RELAY
OFF 3
FOG
UGHT
I
~
I
I
YEL YEL
COMBINATION UGHTSWITCH
Q~LEFT FOGUGHT
(SSW]
RIGHT
FOGUGHT
(55W]
1
IIII
GSOI G601 G451 G601
I I
G201 G301
22-154 BACK
~
L!!!!..I
Circuit Diagram - Brake Lights
UNDER·HOOD UNDER·DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX
~~Y__-+I_N_O~A) I~ G16
~----~------~----,
MICU
IHom circuit)
F31
WT
BRAKE PEDAL
POSITION SWITCH
IClosed : Pedal pressed)
LTGRN
UNDER-DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX F30
F25
MICU LTG
K6
PCM
E34
LTGRN
rl
LTGRN LTGRN LTGRN
1
LEFT BRAKE HIGHMOUNT RIGHT BRAKE
UGHTI21W) BRAKE LIGHT LlGHTI21W)
2 116 WI
III
G602 G602 G651
BACK 22-155
Exterior Lights
Circuit Diagram - Back-up Lights
UNDER·DASH
UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH
No. llBAn 1100 AI No.2 (lG)(50 AI

~~---a~~--~~~-+----WHT--~c===J----~--
HI G20 D Dl
IGI HOT in ON 1111

and START 11111
r--------------BLU - - - - - - - - - -.......
UNDER·DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX D2
No. 10
17.5 AI
MICU
~ -------------------------,1
F9 E15
PCM
I
T
LTBLU
r I
JUNCTION BOX
~
POWER MIRROR
"~T"~'~
WHT LTBLU
"~::w" ~LTBLU
CONTROL UNIT
3 TRANSMISSION
RANGE 2 LEFT
SWITCH BACK·UP
IBack·up UGHT UGHT
5 light swft.hl 1 121 WI 1 121Wl
ICiosed : In position RI NAVIGATION
UNIT
T
I
Gl0l G602
22-156 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!!!..I
DTC Troubleshooting
OlC 81078: Daytime Running Lights Signal 9. Check the voltage between the No.6 and No. 33
Error (Canada) terminals of the under-dash fuse/relay box
connector E (42P) and body ground, and between
OlC 81079: Daytime Running Lights Signal the No. 20 terminal of the under-dash fuse/relay
Error (USA) box connector F (34P) and body ground individually.
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (42P)
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System
2. Pull the parking brake lever.
4. Release the parking brake lever.

=

Is DTC 81078 (Canada) or 81079 (USA)
indicated?
9 10 11 1218
YES-Go to step 7. 2S 27 35 29
NO-Intermittent failure. The daytime running

lights system is OK at this time. Check for loose or
poor connections .•
=
7. Turn the headlight switch ON (high beam).
Do both headlights (high beam) come on?
YES-Go to step 8. Is there less than 0.5 V?
NO-Go to step 10. YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/

relay box.•
NO-Repair an open in the BLK wire or poor
ground (G451, G601) .•
10. Turn the ignition and headlight switches OFF.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-157
Exterior Lights
11. Check the No. 12, No. 13, and No. 18 fuses in the 16. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of
under-dash fuse/relay box. the left headlight (high beam) 2P connector and
No. 15 terminal ofthe under-dash fuse/relay box
Are all fuses OK? connector G (21P).
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX CONNECTOR G (21PI

NO-Replace the blown fuse and recheck. If the

No. 18 (20 A) fuse is blown again, replace the
under-dash fuse/relay box. If the No. 12 (10 A) or
No. 13 (10 A) fuse is blown again, repair a short in
the wire between the under-dash fuse/relay box
and the appropriate headlight (high beam) .•
+B L HIL (HII (PNKI
12. Check the headlight (high beam) bulbs. ,.-..,--,
2
Are the headlight (high beam) bulbs OK? LEFT HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAMI2P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Replace the faulty bulb .•
YES-Go to step 17.
connectors F (34P) and G (21 Pl. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the left
headlight (high beam) and the under-dash fuse/
14. Disconnect both of the headlight (high beam) 2P relay box.•
connectors.
15. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of each headlight (high beam) 2P connector and body
the right headlight (high beam) 2P connector and ground.
No. 22 terminal of the under-dash fuse/relay box
connector F (34P).
HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAMI2P CONNECTOR
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX CONNECTOR F (34PI
+B R HIL (HI) (WHTI

,...-"'T"'"""'.......
2 Wire side of female terminals
RIGHT HEADLIGHT (HIGH BEAMI2P CONNECTOR

Is there continuity? YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/

relay box.•
YES-Go to step 16.
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the right ground (G201-left side, G301-right side) .•
headlight (high beam) and the under-dash fuse/
relay box.•
22-158 BACK
~
1..:::.1
OTC 81275: Combination Light Switch OFF ' 6. Check the ON/OFF information of the HEADLIGHT
Position Circuit Malfunction SWITCH (OFF), HEADLIGHT SWITCH (PARKING)
and HEADLIGHT SWITCH (HEADLIGHT).
OTC 81276: Combination Light Switch
Parking (SMALL) Position Circuit. Malfunction Are the HEADLIGHT SWITCH (OFF) information
indicator ON, HEADLIGHT SWITCH (PARKING)
OTC 81278: Headlight Switch ON Position information indicator OFF and HE,ADLIGHT
Circuit Malfunction SWITCH (HEADLIGHT) information indicator
OFF with the combination light switch in OFF
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be position, and are the HEADLIGHT SWITCH
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System (OFF) information indicator OFF, HEADLIGHT
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88). SWITCH (PARKING) information indicator ON
and HEADLIGHT SWITCH (HEADLIGHT)
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. information indicator OFF with the combination
light switch in SMALL position, and are the
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). HEADLIGHT SWITCH (OFF) information
indicator OFF, HEADLIGHT SWITCH
3. Turn the combination light switch to the park (PARKING) information indicator OFF and
position, headlight position, then back to the off HEADLIGHT SWITCH (HEADLIGHT) information
position. indicator ON with the combination light switch in
ON position?
YES-Check for loose or poor connections
Is DTC 81275,81276 or 81278 indicated? connector. If all the connector tests prove OK,
replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.•
YES-Go to step 5,
NO-Goto step 7.
NO-Intermittent failure. The lighting system is OK
at this time. Check for loose or poor connections .• 7. Disconnect the 12P connector from the
combination light switch.
5. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL
menu, and enter the DATA LIST. 8. Check the ON/OFF information ofthe HEADLIGHT
SWITCH (OFF), HEADLIGHT SWITCH (PARKING)
and HEADLIGHT SWITCH (HEADLIGHT) in the
DATA LIST.
All the information indicators OFF?
YES-Go to step 12.
NO-Go to step 9.

connector S (20P).
(cont'd)
BACK
22-159
Exterior Lights
11. Check the continuity between the body ground and 14. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box
under-dash fuse/relay box connector S (20P) connectors S (20P).
terminals No.1, No. 11, and No. 13 individually.
15. Check for continuity between the under-dash fuse/
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR S (20P) relay box connector S (20P) No.1, No.5, No. 11,
and No. 13 terminals and the combination light
, - - - - - - , H/L OFF SW (ORN) switch 12P connector No.9, No. 12, No. 10, and No.
11 terminals.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
COMBINATION LIGHT SWITCH 12P CONNECTOR
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Wire side of female terminals
SMALL LT SW (GRY)
23456
7 8 9 10 11 12
= = =
COMBI SMALL
GND (BLK) LT SW
(GRY)
Q
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire.• 9 10
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/ 19 20

relay box.•
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR S (20P)
13. Check the combination light switch (see page Is there continuity?
22-167).
Is the combination light switch OK? relay box.•
YES-Go to step 14. NO-Repair an open in the wire .•
NO-Faulty combination light switch; replace it..
22~160
BACK
~
I.!:.I
DTC 81279: Headlight Switch DIMMER 9. Disconnect the 12P connector from the
Position Circuit Malfunction combination light switch.
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be 10. Check the ON/OFF information of the HEADLIGHT
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System SWITCH (HEADLIGHT), HEADLIGHT SWITCH (HIGH
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88). BEAM) and HEADLIGHT SWITCH (PASSING) in the
DATA LIST.
All the information indicators OFF?
YES-Go to step 14.
3. Turn the combination light switch ON.
NO-Go to step 11.
4. Change the DIMMER switch from low beam to high
beam. 11. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
5. Turn the combination light switch OFF, and then 12. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box
PASSING position. connector S (20P).
6. Check the DTCs with the HDS. 13. Check for continuity between the body ground and
under-dash'fuse/relay box connector S (20P)
Is DTC B1279 indicated? terminals No. 11, No. 12, and No. 16 individually.
YES-Go to step 7. UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR S (20P)
NO-Intermittent failure. The lighting system is OK

at this time. Check for loose or poor connections .•
234 5 10
7. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL 20

menu, and enter the DATA LIST. H/LON
8. Check the ON/OFF information of the HEADLIGHT

SWITCH (HEADLIGHT), HEADLIGHT SWITCH (HIGH =
BEAM) and HEADLIGHT SWITCH (PASSING).
Are the HEADLIGHT SWITCH (HIGH BEAM)
information indicator ON, HEADLIGHT SWITCH
(PASSING) information indicator ON with the Is there continuity?
combination light switch in DIMMER position, and
are the HEADLIGHT SWITCH (HEADLIGHT) YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire .•
information indicator OFF, HEADLIGHT SWITCH
(HIGH BEAM) information indicator OFF and NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/
HEADLIGHT SWITCH (PASSING) information relay box.•
indicator OFF with the combination light switch in
ON position?

relay box.•
NO-Go to step 9.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-161
Exterior Lights
15. Check the combination light switch (see page

22-167). '
Is the combination light switch OK?
YES-Go to step 16.

connectors S (20P).

relay box connector S (20P) No.5, No. 11, No. 12,
and No. 16 terminals and the combination light
switch 12P connector No. 12, No. 10, No.6, and
No.4 terminals.
,
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR S(20P}
Wire side 'offemale terminal~. '
" "
l' 12' 3 14 5 6 7 8 9 10
11 112 13 114 15 16 17 18 19 20
PASSING DIMSW
SW(RED} (LTBLU)
.Q .Q .Q
.Q .-"--.1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
COMBI
H/L ON SW (GRN}I : 1 GND (BLK)

relay box.• ",
NO-Repair an open in the wire .•
22-162 BACK
~
~
MICU Input Test
NOTE:
• The MICU turns on the headlights (high beams) in a dimming mode for the Daytime Running Lights under the
following conditions:
- With the ignition switch ON (II)
- The headlight switch OFF
- The parking brake is released (parking brake switch OFF)
• The DRL indicator will come when one of the headlight (high beams) bulbs is blown, or if the high beam wiring has
an open circuit with the daytime running lights ON.
• For Canada models: Ifthe vehicle is equipped with an optional remote control engine start system, the daytime
running lights will not function when started with the remote start.
1. Before troubleshooting the lighting system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page
22-88).
2. Check the No. 12 (10A), No. 13 (10A), No. 15 (15A), No. 16 (15A), No. 17 (15A), No. 18 (20 A), No. 19 (20 A),
No. 21 (30 A), and No. 37 (7.5 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any fuse is blown, replace it and go to
step 3.
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, M, R, S, and T.
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (42P)
RED
BLK
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (34P)
[iliJilij
~
BLK WHT
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR G (21P)
GRN
PNK PUR WHT
(cont'd)
BACK 22-163
Exterior Lights

CONNECTOR M (10P)
RED

CONNECTOR R (20P) CONNECTOR S (20P)
BlU ORN BlK
\
10
11 20
lTBlU

CONNECTOR T (34P)
17
18 34
\
BlK
4_ Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact_
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system_
• If the terminals look OK, go to step 5_
22-164 BACK
~
I.!!:..I
obtained
E19 RED Under all conditions Connect battery power to the E19 • Poor ground (G602)
terminal: • Blown bulb
The left taillight, right rear side • An open in the wire
marker light, inner taillights, and
license plate lights should come
on.
F3 RED Under all conditions Connect battery power to the F3 • Poor ground (G201)
The left front parking light and left • An open in the wire
front side marker light should
come on.
F4 GRN Under all conditions Connect battery power to the F4 • Poor ground (G301)
The right headlight (low beam) • Faulty HID unit
should come on. • An open in the wire
F22 WHT Under all conditions Connect battery power to the F22 • Poor ground (G301)
The right headlight (high beam) • An open in the wire
should come on.
G15 PNK Under all conditions Connect battery power to the G15 • Poor ground (G201)
The left headlight (high beam) • An open in the wire
should come on.
G17 PUR Under all conditions Connect battery power to the G 17 • Poor ground (G201)
The left headlight (low beam) • An open in the wire
should come on.
M3 RED Under all conditions Connect battery power to the M3 • Poor ground (G301 and G651)
The right front parking light, right • An open in the wire
front side marker light, right
taillight, and right rear side
marker light should come on.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-165
Exterior Lights

G2 GRN Under all conditions Check for voltage between G2 terminal • Blown No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the under-
and body ground: hood fuse/relay box
There should be battery voltage. • An ooen in the wire
G18 WHT Under all conditions Check for voltage between G18 terminal • Blown No.4 (50 A) fuse in the under-
and body grol,lnd: hood fuse/relay box
There should be battery voltage. • An ooen in the wire
, There should be less than 0.5 V. • An open in the wire
There should be less than 0.5 V. • An op_en in the wire
R7 BLU Under all conditions Connect body ground to the R7 terminal: • Blown No.6 (20 A) fuse in the under-
The fog lights should come on. dash fuse/relay box
• Faulty fog light relay
• Blown bulb
S1 ORN Combination light switch OFF Check for voltage between S 1 and S5 • Faulty combination light switch
terminals: • An open in the wire
There should be less than 1 V.
Combination light switch in Check for voltage between S1 and S5 • Faulty combination light switch
any other position than OFF terminals: • A short to ground in the wire
S11 GRN Combination light switch Check for voltage between S 11 and S5 • Faulty combination light switch
(Headlight position) ON terminals: • An open in the wire
Combination light switch OFF Check for voltage between S11 and S5 • Faulty combination light switch
terminals: • A short to ground in the wire
S12 RED Combination light switch Check for voltage between S 12 and S5 • Faulty combination light switch
lever pulled (Passing) terminals: • An open in the wire
Combination light switch Check for voltage between S12 and S5 • Faulty combination light switch
lever released from passing terminals: • A short to ground in the wire
. position There should .be 5 V or more .
S13 GRY Combination light switch Check for voltage between S13 and S5 • Faulty combination light switch
(SMALL position) ON terminals: • An open in the wire
S16 LT Combination light switch Check for voltage between S16 and S5 • Faulty combination light switch
BLU (Dimmer) in high beam terminals: • An open in the wire
position There should be less than 1 V.
Combination light switch Check for voltage between S16 and S5 • Faulty combination light switch
(Dimmer) in low beam terminals: • A short to ground in the wire
position There should be 5 V or more.
S14 PUR Combination light switch (Fog Check for voltage between S14 and S5 • Faulty combination light switch
light position) ON terminals: • An open in the wire
22-166 BACK
r--:'I
I.!::J
Combination Light Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 20-107).
2. Disconnect the 12P connector (A) from the combination light switch (B).
111 213 14 I 5 6
II 7 819J 10Jl1 12
3. Remove the two screws, then slide out the combination light switch.
4. Inspect the connectorterminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary, and recheck the system .
• If the terminals look OK, check for continuity between the terminals in each switch position according to the
tables.
- If the continuity is not as specified, replace the switch.
Light switch'
Terminal
I""
Position
4 6 9 10 11 12
Headlight
OFF
N.
"" ,..,
-
"
,..,
-
switch
EDI LOW r"\.
~ -0
- I HIGH ,..,
- ,.., ,..,
-
OFF
Passing
switch f'\
ON 0 ~
Turn signal switch'

Terminal
I"" 1 2 12
Position
~
LEFT r"\.
~
f'\
~
Neutral
~
RIGHT ~ ~
Fog light switch'
1"'- Terminal
8 12
Position
ON
"'- ,..,
-
OFF
BACK 22-167
Extedo,r Lights
HID Lamp System Troubleshooting.
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable, then

AWARNING disconnect the positive cable.
A transient high tension (25,000 V) occurs at the
bulb sockets or the high intensity discharge (HID) 5. Remove the bulb socket from the HID bulb
lamps when the combination light switch is turned (see page 22-172).
ON, it may cause serious electrical shock or
electrocution if you do not observe the cautions 6. Check for discoloration and deformation of the light
below. emitting part of the bulb.
ACAUTION
Discoloration Deformation
• Never turn on the combination light switch
before fitting the HID bulbs to their bulb sockets
and completing the reassembly of the headlight
assembly.
• Do not service the headlights assembly in wet
conditions, such as rain or snow, near a sprinkler
system, or when your hands are wet to prevent
electrocution.
• Do not touch the surface of the HID bulbs with
your bare hands and do not stain it with any oils
and fats.
• Do not disassemble the inverter unit and the
ignitor unit. Is the bulb discolored and/or deformed?
• Do not turn on the HID bulb by using a power
source other than the battery mounted on your YES-Replace the HID bulb, and recheck.•
vehicle.
NO-Go to step 7.
NOTE: Before troubleshooting the HID Lamp System, 7. Check for discoloration, deformation, and traces of
perform the multiplex integrated control system abnormal discharge at the socket mating part.
troubleshooting using B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
1. Check the No. 17 (15 A) and No. 16 (15A) fuses in

the under-dash fuse/relay box.
Are the fuses OK?
YES-Go to step 2.
NO-Replace the fuse(s), and recheck.•

Make sure the ignition switch is OFF. Is the socket normal?
3. Turn the combination light switch OFF. YES-Go to step 8.
NO-Replace the socket, and recheck.•
22-168 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!!!!..I
8. Exchange the HID bulb from the problem headlight 12.. Check for continuity between the No.1 terminal of
with one from another headlight. the HID unit 2P connector and body ground.
9. Reconnect the positive battery cable, then connect HID UNIT 2P CONNECTOR
the negative cable.
10. Turn the combination light switch ON.
Does the headlight come on?
YES-Replace the HID bulb, and recheck .•
NO-Go to step 11.
11. Disconnect the 2P connector from the HID unit. Wire side of female terminals
YES-Go to step 13. ,
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the HID

unit and body ground. If the wire is OK, check for
poor ground at G201 or G301 .•
NOTE: Enter the anti-theft code for-the audio

system and the navigation system (if equipped),
then enter the audio presets.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-169
Exterior Lights
HID Lamp System Troubleshooting (cont'd)
13. Measure the voltage between the No. 2 terminal of 14. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box
the HID unit 2P connector and body ground. connector G (21P).
HID UNIT 2P CONNECTOR 15. Check for continuity between the No. 17 terminal of
the under-dash fuse/relay boxconnector G (21P)
and the No.2 terminal of the HID unit 2P connector.

PUR (Left Headlight)
GRN (Right Headlight)
':i.

HID UNIT 2P CONNECTOR (LEFT HEADLIGHT)
YES-Substitute a known good HID, and recheck. If Wire side of female terminals
the symptom/indication goes away, replace the
original inverter unit.. Is there continuity?
NO- YES-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.•

o For the left headlight, go to step 14.
o For the right headlight, go to step 16. NO-Repair an open in the wire between the
under-dash fuse/relay box and the HID unit..
22-170 BACK
r--:'I
t=:..I

connector F (34P).

the under-dash fuse/relay box connector F (34P)
and the No.2 terminal of the HID unit 2P connector.
HID UNIT 2P CONNECTOR (RIGHT HEADLIGHT)


YES-Replace the under-dash fuse/relay box.•
NO-Repair an open in the wire between the

under-dash fuse/relay box and the HID unit.•
BACK 22-171
Exterior Lights
HID Bulb Replacement
1. Make sure you have theanti-thett code for audio

AWARNING system and navigation system (if equipped), then
A transient high tension (25,000 V) occurs at the write down the audio presets. Make sure the
bulb sockets ofthe high intensity discharge (HID) ignition switch is OFF.
lamps when the combination light switch is turned
ON, it may cause serious electrical shock or 2. Turn the combination light switch OFF...
electrocution if you do not observe the cautions
below. 3. Disconnect the battery negative cable, then
disconnect the positive cable.
4. Remove the headlight assembly (see page 22-175).

ACAUTION
• Never turn on the combination light switch 5. Turn the cover (A) 45 ° counterclockwise to remove
before fitting the HID bulbs to their bulb sockets it from the headlight assembly.
and completing the reassembly ofthe headlight
assembly.
• Do not service the headlights assembly in wet
conditions, such as rain or snow, near a sprinkler
system, or when your hands are wet to prevent
electrocution.
• Do not touch the surface of the HID bulbs with
your bare hands and do not stain it with any oils
and fats.
• Do not disassemble the inverter unit and the
ignitor unit.
• Do not turn on the HID bulb by using a power
source other than the battery mounted on your
vehicle.
22-172 BACK
~
~
HID Unit Replacement
6. Turn the socket (A) 45 0 counterclockwise to 1. Make,sure you have anti-theft code for the audio
remove it from the bulb (8). system andthe navigation system (if equipped),
then write down the audio presets. Make sure the
Headlight: 35 W ignition switch is OFF.
2. Turn the combination light switch OFF.
3. Disconnect the batlerynegative cable, then

disconnect the positive cable.
4. Remove the headlight assembly (see page 22-175).

c
5. Remove the bulb socket from the HID bulb
(see page 22-172).
6. Remove the three mounting screws and HID unit

(A).
7. Pull the retaining spring (C) away from the bulb

then remove the bulb.
8. Make sure the bulb harness (D) is routed correctly

so it does not contact the reflector.
c--___
9. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal.

Make sure the notches in the bulb align with the
tabs in the headlight.
the navigation system(if equipped), then enter the
audio presets.
7. Disconnect the 4P connector (8) from the HID unit.
11. Set the clock.
8. Inspect the gasket (C) for damage. If damaged,
replace it.
audio presets.
11. Set the clock.
BACK 22-173
Exterior Lights
Headlight Adjustment
2. Park the vehicle in front of a wall or a screen (A).
ACAUTION
Headlights become very hot during use; do not A
touch them or any attaching hardware immediately
after they have been turned off. / 25 ft (7.5 m)
/
Before adjusting the headlights:
• Park the vehicle on a level surface.

• Make sure the tire pressures are correct.
• The driver or someone who weighs the same should
sit in the driver's seat.
1. Clean the outer lens so that you can see the center
(A) of the headlights.
3. Turn the low beams on.
4. Determine if the headlights are aimed properly.
Vertical adjustment:
Measure the height of the headlights (A).
Adjust the cut line (8) to the lights height.
22-174 BACK
r--:'I
~
Headlight Replacement " I'·
5. If necessary, open the h.oodand adjust the 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-146).
headlights to local requirements by turning the
vertical adjuster. 2. Remove the connectors (A) from the headlight
assembly (B).
3. Remove the clips and bolts, then remove the

headlight.
4. Remove the bolt (e) and the corner upper beam (0)
from the headlight.
5. Install the headlight in the reverse order of removal.
6. After replacement, adjust the headlight to local

requirement.
BACK 22-175
,EXterior Lights
Bulb Replacement "
Headlight Front Parking/Turn Signal Lights

1. Disconn~ct the 2P connector (A) from the headlight. 1. Disconnect the 3P connector (A) from the front
parking/turn signal light.
Headlight (high beam): 60 W
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lights: 24/2.2 CP
2. Turn the bulb socket 45 ° counterclockwise to 2. Turn the bulb socket 45 °counterclockwise to
remove the,bulb. remove the bulb.
3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal. 3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
22-176 BACK
~
i~
Fog Light Replacement
Front Side Marker Light 1. Remove the front bumper (see page 20-146).
1. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the front turn 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the fog light
signal/front parking light. (8).
Front Side Marker Light: 3 CP
3. Remove the screws, then remove the fog light.
4. Turn the bulb socket (A) counterclockwise to

remove it from the housing.
2. Turn the bulb socket (8) 45 °counterclockwise to
remove it from the headlight housing. Fog Light: 55 W
3. Install a new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
6. After replacement, adjust the fog lights (see page

22-178).
BACK 22-177
Exterior Lights
Fog Light Adjustment Taillight Replacement
Before adjusting the fog lights:. Taillight
• Park the vehicle on a level surface. 1. Remove the covers (A) a nd two bolts from the
• Make sure the tire pressures are correct. taillight (B).
• The driver or someone who weighs the same should
sit in the driver's seat. Brake Lights/Taillight: 21/5W
Rear Turn Signal Light: 21W
Adjust the fog lights to local requirements by turning Rear Side Maker Light: 2CP
the adjuster (A).
2. Carefully pull out the taillight.
3. Disconnect the connectors (A) from the taillight.
4. Turn the bulb socket 45 0 counterclockwise to

remove the bulb.
5. Install the light in the reverse order of removal.
22-178 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!:..I
License Plate Light Replacement
Inner Taillight 1. Open the tailgate, and remove the rear license trim
and the tailgate license panel (see page 20-173).
1. Remove the tailgate lid panel (see page 20-174).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the license
2. Disconnect the 2P connectors (A) from the inner plate light.
taillight.
License Plate Light: 3 CP
Inner Taillight: 3 CP
Back-up light: 21 W
3. Turn the bulb socket 45 ° counterclockwise to

remove the bulb.
4. Remove the four nuts and inner taillight

3. Release the bulb socket (8) from the lens (C) by
pressing on the tabs.
4. Remove the lens from the tailgate by pressing on

the tabs.
5. Install the inner taillight in the reverse order of

removal.
BACK 22-179
Exterior Lights
High Mount Brake Light Brake Pedal Position Switch Test

Replacement
1. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the brake
pedal position switch (B).
1. Remove the covers (A) and two screws from the
high mount brake light.
A
B

terminals.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (B) from the high
mount brake light. • There should be continuity when the brake pedal
is pressed.
Bulb: 16W • There should be no continuity when the brake
pedal is released.
3. Turn the bulb socket 45 o counterclockwise to
remove the bulbs. 3. Check for continuity between the No.3 and No.4
terminals (with cruise control).
• There should be no continuity when the brake
pedal is pressed.
• There should be continuity when the brake pedal
is released.
4. If necessary, adjust or replace the switch, or adjust

the pedal height (see page 19-6).
22-180 BACK
~
Turn Signal/Hazard Flasher L=:..I
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

(Built into combination switch)
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
TURN SIGNAL INDICATORS
MICU
BACK 22-181
Circuit Diagram
UNDER·DASH
UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNmON SWITCH
BAnERY D
~-+-.__~,,~____-.__ N_O~.2TUG,)~(~~A_)__-rH_l___ WHT __~G~~~D
____~~D~I__
IGI HOT in ON (II)

and START 11111
03 04
O~ GN YEL
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX G6 G2 02
MICU ~
,
TURN SIGNALJ
HAZARD FLASHER CIRCUIT
~ -
~
SG PG
r---- r----
T341
E6
- F20 E33 E40 Ml Gl P6 PI
I M2
YEL BRN
JUNCTION
C2 Cl BOX
Ml
C9 C6 M6
VEL VEL YEL BRN
~~
BRN BRN
TURN SIGNAL
3 INDICATOR
1 ;- r- 1 1 ;- -6 1
IG ~ I~::; ~
LEFT RIGHT
~D
2
SIDE
TURN
SIGNAL
~D
2
~2 SIDE
TURN
SIGNAL
~D
2
LEFT LIGHT LEFT RIGHT LIGHT RIGHT
REAR (LED) FRONT FRONT (LED) REAR
IBuiltinto IBuiijinto
TURN
SIGNAL " the mirror)
TURN
SIGNAL
TURN
SIGNAL " the mirror)
TURN
SIGNAL
LIGHT
121Wl
'--
rs LIGHT
(24CP)
LIGHT
124CP)
'--
ru LIGHT
121W)
11111 I I I I I
G501 G601 G451 GOO1 G602 G501 G201 G301 G505 G651
22-182 BACK
~
~
No, 1417.5 A) FUSE

UNDER·DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX
I
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
"
MlCU JUNCTION BOX
Rl ~
ORN~ORN
GRY
HAZARD
, lIGHT
WARNING
(O.84W)
SWITCH
-:r-
-
11r 'r
""
Qll
PUR --~-------'
S5 S19 S18
I
DASH lIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
BLK IT RN I N CONTROlleR
(In the gauge
,control module)
12 2 1
TURN
LEFT SIGNAL
' --- RIGHT SWITCH
COMBINATION UGHT SWITCH
BACK 22-183
Turn Signal/Hazard ~Iasher
DTC Troubleshooting
DTC 81280: Turn Signal Switch Circuit 7. Disconnect the 12P connector from the
Malfunction combination light switch.
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be 8. Check the ON/OFF information of the TURN
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System SIGNAL SWITCH (LEFT) and TURN SIGNAL
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88). SWITCH (RIGHT) in the DATA LIST.
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. All the information indicators OFF?
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). YES-Go to step 12.
3. Turn the turn signal switch to the left position and NO-Go to step 9.
the right position.
4. Check the DTCs with the HDS.
Is OTC ~1280 indicated? connector S (20P).
YES-Go to step 5. 11. Check for continuity between the body ground and
under-dash fuse/relay box connector S (20P)
NO-Intermittent failure. The turn signal/hazard terminals No. 18 and No. 19 individually.
flasher system is OK at this time. Check for loose or
poor connections .•
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR S (20P)
5. Select LIGHTING from the BODY ELECTRICAL

menu, and enter the DATA LIST.
2 10
6. Check the ON/OFF information of the TURN 11 12 20
SIGNAL SWITCH (LEFT) and TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH (RIGHT). TURNL
Q SW(LTGRN)
Are the TURN SIGNAL SWITCH (LEFT)

information indicator ON, TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH (RIGHT) information indicator OFF with Wire side of female terminals
the turn signal switch to the LEFT position, and
are the TURN SIGNAL SWITCH (LEFT)
information indicator OFF, TURN SIGNAL Is there continuity?
SWITCH (RIGHT) information indicator ON with
the turn Signal switch to the RIGHT position? YES-Check for continuity between terminal No.5
and terminals No. 18, and 19 individually. Ifthere is
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/ still continuity, repair short to ground, or to another
relay box.• wire.
NO-Go to step 7. NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/

relay box.•
22-184 BACK
~
.~
13. Check the combination light switch (see page

22-167).
Is the combination light switch OK?
YES-Go to step 14.

connectors S (20P).

relay box connector S (20P) No.5, No. 18, and
No. 19 terminals and the combination light switch
12P connector No. 12, No.1, and No.2 terminals.

1 2 -, 314 5 6 7
-8 9 10 -
11 12113114 15 16 17 18 19 20
TURN R SW (BRN) I TURN
lSW
I ~fr\\
(lTGRN)
1 ...-.Q Q
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
COMBI
GND (BlK) .I

relay box.•
BACK 22-185
MICU Input Test
1. Before troubleshooting the turn signal/hazard flasher system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test
2. Check the No. 10 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If the fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3.
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors D, E, F, G, M, P, Q, R, S, and T.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CO~NECTOR D. (2P)
~YEL
BlK
BlK VEL
~
~
BlK
VEL GRN
22-186 BACK
~
t.=:.I

CONNECTOR M (10P)
BRN
----....
YEL

CONNECTOR P (10P) CONNECTOR (16P)a
BRN
~r'" ~
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
6 7 8 9 10 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
/ /
YEL PUR

CONNECTOR R (20P) CONNECTOR S (20P)
ORN BLK
~ -,J" rL..r-- " "

3 4 5 6 9 10~7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
r1 I 2
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
11 12
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
BRN
\ ~
LTGRN
UMDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR T (34P)
17
18 34
"-BLK
4. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making good contact .
(cont'd)
BACK
5. With the connectors still disconnected, make these input tests at the appropriate connector.
obtained
E40 VEL Under all conditions Connect G2 and E40 terminals • Poor ground (G602)
with a jumper wire: • Blown bulb
The left rear turn signal light • An open in the wire
should come on.
G1 VEL Under all conditions Connect G2 and G1 terminals • Poor ground (G201)
with a jumper wire: • Blown bulb
The left front turn signal light • An open in the wire
should come on.
M1 VEL Under all conditions Connect G2 and M1 terminals • Poor ground (G501)
with a jumper wire: • Faulty left side turn signal light
The left side turn signal light (in • An open in the wire
mirror) should come on.
M2 BRN Under all conditions Connect G2 and M2 terminals • Poor ground (G505)
with a jumper wire: • Faulty right side turn signal
The right side turn signal light light
(in mirror) should come on. • An open in the wire
P1 BRN Under all conditions Connect G2 and P1 terminals • Poor ground (G301, G651 or
with a jumper wire: G501)
The right front turn signal light, • Faulty junction box
right rear turn signal light and • Blown bulb
right turn signal indicator • An open in the wire
should come on.
P6 VEL Under all conditions Connect G2 and P6 terminals • Faulty gauge control module
with a jumper wire: • Faulty junction box
The left turn signal indicator • An open in the wire
should come on. • Poor ground (G501)
011 PUR Hazard warning Check for continuity 011 and R1 • Faulty junction box
switch pressed terminal: • Faulty hazard warning switch
R1 ORN There should be continuity. • An open in the wire
22-188 BACK
r--:'I
~
S. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse/relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors .
obtained
G2 GRN Under all conditions Check for voltage between G2 • Blown No. 23 (10 A) fuse in the
terminal and body ground: under-hood fuse/relay box
There should be battery voltage. • An open in the wire
GS ORN Under all conditions Check for voltage between GS • Blown No. 10 (15 A) fuse in the
terminal and body ground: under-hood fuse/relay box
There should be battery voltage. • An open in the wire
02 VEL Ignition switch ON Check for voltage between 02 An open in the wire
(II) terminal and body ground:
There should be battery voltage.
ES BLK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (GS01)
E33 BLK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (GS01)
S18 BRN Turn signal switch in Check for voltage between S 18 • Faulty combination light switch
right position and S5 terminals: • An open in the wire
S5 BLK There should be less than 1 V.
Turn signal switch in Check for voltage between S18 • Faulty combination light switch
left or neutral and S5 terminals: • Short to ground
S19 LT Turn signal switch in Check for voltage between S19 • Faulty combination light switch
GRN left position and S5 terminals: • An open in the wire
S5 There should be less than 1 V.
BLK Turn signal switch in Check for voltage between S19 • Faulty combination light switch
right or neutral and S5 terminals: • Short to ground
BACK 22-189
Hazard Warning Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the center panel (see page 20-100). 4. If the continuity is not as specified, replace the bulbs
(A) orthe hazard warning switch.
2. Remove the screws and the hazard warning switch
(A).
111 fIT3T415 II
3. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
switch position according to the table.
Terminal
Position
OFF
ON
NOTE: Both illumination bulbs are connected in

parallel. If there is continuity, remove one
illumination bulb at a time and recheck.
22-190 BACK
~
I..:!!..I
Side Turn Signal Light Replacement
1. Remove the mirror holder (see page 20-33). 3. Remove the three TORX screws using a TORX T10
bit, then pull out the side turn signal light (A).
2. Remove the four TORX screws using a TORX T10
bit, then remove the visor (A).
4. Disconnect the 2P connector (8) from the light.
BACK 22-191
Interior Lights
ROOF CONSOLE
DRIVER'S INTERIOR LIGHT SWITCH
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT Test/Replacement, page 22-196
Replacement, page 22-200 FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHTS
AMBIENT LIGHT
Test, page 22-202
PASSENGER'S
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT
MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED
CONTROL UNIT (MICU) VANITY MIRROR LIGHT SWITCH
(Built into the under-dash (Buih into the sunvisor)
fuse/relay box) Test, page 22-200
CEILING LIGHT
'------:;;'""'----;#'---"""""-- FRONT PASSENGER'S

DOOR SWITCH
RIGHT REAR
DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR
COURTESY LIGHT
TAILGATE LATCH SWITCH

Test, page 22-140
PASSENGER'S DOOR CARGO AREA LIGHT

COURTESY LIGHT Test, page 22-198
22-192 BACK
r--:'I
~
GLOVE BOX LIGHT

Test, page 22-198
CONSOLE BOX LIGHT

MGEAR~
CONSOLE LIGHT
BACK 22-193
Interior Lights
Circuit Diagram
UNDER·DASH JUNCTION
UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BDX BOX
I"
BATIERY . . . . - - - - - - - ' - - - - - - - ,
H_o(J'J.:J-....._-cr""'-.Jo---j..;;D,;;,2-RED
~I lTBLU
F2~6
...;;.,.--1t-+---------- lTBlU
""""i""W
K1
WHT lTBLU
UNDER·DASH
FUSE/RELAY BOX 1 ROOF CONSOLE
No. 19 120 A) G18 FRONT
INDIVIDUAL
MICU MAP LIGHTS
(~ .~D
15W) 15W)
...... ....
....
No. 14
17.5 AI
I: I:
+,
E3B
Q12 N2 AMBIENT UGHTS 6

WHT--
GRY GRY 11
t
GRN--
~ INTERIOR
j
LIGHT SWITCH
~LED) G~LED)
GRY
I
GRY
I
GRY
CARGO
AREA
LIGHT
(~
D INTERIOR
LIGHT
SWITCH
Q
'---
.J
:
_________
~,
'
",
: '
LIGHT OFF
3 ON
AUTO
Q ) I1.4W)
4 AlTGEAR 4 ,.. 7 2 5
.
POSmON
CONSOLE
LIGHT
RED RED VEL BLK PNK
I
t
RED
BLK
11.4WI I1.4W)
F10 JUNCTION BOX F6 F9
JUNCTION
I BOX
CONSOLE 1 GLOVE C5 C12 F4
BOX BOX RED VEL BLK PNK
+
LIGHT LIGHT
V V
BlK
1 1
G503
BLK
G505
DASH LIGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
lin the gauge
control modulel
DASHUGHTS
BRIGHTNESS
CONTROLLER
lin the gauge
control module) 1
G501
MICU
22-194 BACK
r:-:'I
I.!!:..I
LTBLU
No. 14175 A) FUSE

lUNDER-DASH
I
---LTBLU T L T B L U
FUSE/RELAY BOX)
LTBLU
CEIUNG
LIGHT
LTBLU
DRIVER'S
SUNVISOR
LTBLU
I
PASSENGER'S
SUNVISOR
l
LTBLU
LTBLU LTBLU
DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S
VANITY VANITY
MIRROR MIRROR
LIGHT LIGHT
SWITCH SWITCH
DRIVER'S FRONT
DOOR PASSENGER'S
DRIVER'S PASSENGER'S COURTESY DOOR
ON VANITY VANITY DOOR LIGHT COURTESY
MIRROR MIRROR 12CP) LIGHT
LIGHT 12 Wl LlGHTI2Wl 12CP)
CARGO
AREA
LIGHT
BLK BLK RED RED ORN
INTERIOR
LIGHTSWITCH
Ibuiltinto
themo! console)
2
T
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAYBOX E16 T10 T9
MICU I
PN K
- - --
-
K4
r
-r- ~- -r ~
" --
E37 E3 E17 E2 E36
DRIVER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
IClosed:
Door open)
LTGRN
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
DOOR
SWITCH
ICiosed :
Door open)
BRN
LEFT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
ICiosed :
Door open)
LTBLU
RIGHT
REAR
DOOR
SWITCH
ICiosed :
Door open)
#I
BLU
2
TAILGATE
LATCH
SWITCH
1 ICiosed:
Tailgate open)
G602
BACK 22-195
Interior Lights
Interior Light Switch Test/Replacement
1. Carefully pry off the lens with a small screwdriver (see page 22-197).
2. Pull down the roof console (A) holding the center part of the roof console.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
OFF DOOR ON
3. Remove the moon roof switch (see page 22-295).
4. Disconnect the 20P connector (8) from the roof console.
5. Check for continuity between the terminals in each interior light switch position according to the table.
NOTE:
• Before testing, check the front individual map light bulb(s) .
• When check for continuity across the diode, use the diode setting (-H-) on the digital volt/ohm meter to check
the diode bias.
'" Position
OFF
Terminal
0
'"
1
0 C\
'-"
.....
2 5
-0
6 11
1.
OFF (Front map
0
0 C\
'oJ -0
light switch ON)
-0
..
~
C\
Middle (DOOR) position "Q 0 r'"'\
-0
ON - 0
'-"
C\
'oJ
..... r'"'\
'-"
'-"
r'"'\
'-" -0
6. If the continuity and the diode bias is not as specified, replace the roof console as an assembly.
22-196 BACK
r--:'I
l!!!:..I
Front Individual Map Light Ceiling Light Test/Replacement
Replacement
1. Turn the ceiling light switch OFF.
1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small 2. Carefully pry the lens (A) off with a small
screwdriver. screwdriver.
Front Map Light: 5W x 2 Ceiling Light: 8 W
2. Check the bulb(s) (B). If the bulb is OK, but there is a 3. Remove the screws, then remove the ceiling light
malfunction, check the interior light switch (B).
(see page 22-196).
4. Disconnect the 3P connector (C) from the ceiling
light.

and No.2 terminals with the switch in the ON
position.
and No.3 terminals with the switch in the DOOR
position.
and No.2 terminals, and between the No.2 and
No.3 terminals with the switch in the OFF
position.
6. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb.

Ifthe bulb is OK, replace the light.
BACK 22-197
Interior Lights
Cargo Area Light Test/Replacement Glove Box Light Test/Replacement
1. Open the tailgate. 1. Remove the glove box stops and damper (see page
20-104).
2. Carefully pry out the cargo area light (A).
2. Turn the bulb socket (A) 45 0 counterclockwise to
Cargo Area Light: 5 W remove it.
Glove Box Light: 1.4 W
3. Remove the bulb (8) from the socket.

3. Disconnect the 2P connector (8) from the light.
terminals. There should be continuity. Ifthere is no
continuity, check the bulb (C). Ifthe bulb is OK,
replace the cargo area light.
22-198 BACK
r--:'I
~
Courtesy Light Replacement
1. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small

screwdriver.
Courtesy Light: 2 CP
2. Remove the bulb (B) from the socket.
BACK 22-199
Interior Lights
Vanity Mirror Light Test/Replacement
1. Remove the sunvisor (see page 20-82). 5. Carefully pry off the lens (A) with a small
screwdriver.
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the sunvisor (A).
Vanity Mirror Light: 2 W

terminals .
• With the vanity mirror cover (8) opened, there

should be continuity .
• With the vanity mirror cover closed, there should
be no continuity. 6. Remove the two screws, then remove the vanity
mirror light (8).
4. If the continuity check is not as specified, go to
step 5. 7. Disconnect the two terminals (C) from the vanity
mirror light.
• There should continuity between the terminals

with the vanity mirror cover opened .
• There should be no continuity between the
terminals, with the vanity mirror cover closed.
9. If the continuity is not as specified, check the bulb

or the light. If the bulb or light is OK, replace the
sunvisor.
22-200 BACK
r:-:'I
L=..I
Console Box Light Replacement Ambient Light Test
1. Open the center console lid. 1. Remove the roof console and disconnect the 20P
2. Carefully pry out the console box light lens (A).
2. Connect the roof console connector terminal No.3
Console Box Light: 1.4 W to battery power and terminal No.7 to body ground.
The ambient lights (A) should turn on. If they do not
turn on, replace the roof console.
3. Turn the bulb socket (B) 45 0 counterclockwise to

remove it from the lens.
4. Remove the bulb (C) from the socket.
BACK 22-201
Component Location Index,
FRONT INDIVDUAL MAP LIGHTS

MULTIPLEX INTEGRATED IGNITION KEY SWITCH

CONTROL UNIT (MICU) Test, page 22-207
(Buit into the under-dash
fuse/relay box)
CEILING LIGHT
FRONT PASSENGER'S
DOOR SWITCH
RIGHT REAR
DOOR SWITCH
DRIVER'S DOOR KEY

CYLINDER SWITCH
Test, page 22-139
CARGO AREA LIGHT

LEFT REAR DOOR SWITCH Test, page 22-198
Replacemant, page 22-198
22-202 BACK
r--:'I
~
Circuit Diagram
• - - - - - : CAN line
UNDER·DASH
UNDER·HooD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNmON SWITCH UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BAmRY
'"I I- -fJ-
No. lIBAT)(l00 AI No. 2IIGI 150 AI Hl D2
+ WHT WHT BLU
~
IGl
No.l0
IGl HOT in ON 1111 17.5 AI
No. 23 (10 AI D4 and START 11111 G2
f----<:n GRN
No. 2217.5 AI D2 G3
~ RED
JUNCTION
BOX
K5
F7[3F2 LTBLU
( TRANSMITTER)
I
LTBLU
,
\f
,
V
• FRONT INDIVIDUAL
MAPUGHTS
IMMOBILIZER· • CEIUNG UGHT
KEYLESS CONTROL
UNIT
14
··
PNK
YPNK
~~
I
IGl
[}JJUNCTION
I BOX BOX
I J19 F4
I
·las T
PNK
K4
B-CAN I MICU
VBU IGI
SG PG
- . ,
~
-. -I- ~
- -.
T341 '-- 1
E6 E33 F20 E37 E3 E17 E2 T31 T32 R6
PNK
BUK BUK 8UK BUK GRN LTGRN BRN LTBLU BRN PNK
t I
~
8 9
,~ DRIVER'S
UN· , , OOORKEY
LOCK LOCK CYUNDER
SWITCH IMMOBILIZER-
DRIVER'S FRONT LEFT RIGHT 21GNmON KEYLESS
PASSENGER'S REAR DOOR 5 CONTROL
OOOR REAR DOOR KEY
SWITCH DOOR SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH UNIT
(Closed : IClosed: (Closed : (Closed: ICiosed :
Dooropenl Dooropenl Dooropenl Dooropenl Key insertedl
BRN
G601 G601 G451

1
G501
I
G501 G502
BACK 22-203
MICU Input Test

1. Before troubleshooting the entry lights control system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-88).
2. Check the No.1 0 (7.5 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/relay box. If any fuse is blown, replace it and go to step 3.
3. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, G, K, Q, and T.
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (42PI
LTBLU LTGRN BLK BRN
~\-I
I
l- I:
:L...-
/.:1. .........•.......
, )\
~ l£II
1 2131415161718 9 10111112113 14 15 16117118 19 20 21
23 24125126127128129130 31 32 1 33 34 35 36137138 39 40 41
'----, - j J
I ....../{.> »,T ... . ....
1 -I
BLK GRN
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (34PI
CiliJIl}j
~
BLK
22-204 BACK
r--:'I
~

CONNECTOR K (8P) CONNECTOR R (20P)
PNK
3 '----.---1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2
8 '-----'---I 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1-----'------'
PNK

CONNECTOR T (34P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
!
BRN
\
BlK
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
obtained
K4 PNK Interior light switch Attach to ground: • Blown No. 22 (7.5 A) fuse in
in middle (DOOR) The ceiling light and front the under-hood fuse/relay
position individual map lights should box
come on. • Blown bulb(s)
• Faulty ceiling light
• Faulty front individual map
light
• Faulty interior light switch
• Faulty junction box
(cont'd)
BACK 22-205

6. Reconnect the connectors to the under-dash fuse!relay box, and make these input tests at the connectors .
E37 GRN Driver's door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Driver's door closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's door switch
There should be 5 V or more. • Short to ground in the wire
E3 LTGRN Front passenger's door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door switch
Front passenger's door closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty front passenger's door switch
There should be 5 V or more. • Short to around in the wire
E2 LTBLU Right rear door open Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
Right rear door closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty right rear door switch
E17 BRN Left rear door open Check for voltageto ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
Left rear door closed Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty left rear door switch
R6 PNK Ignition key inserted into the Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G502)
ignition switch There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty ignition key switch
Ignition key removed from the Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty ignition key switch
ignition switch There should be 5 V or more. • Short to around in the wire
T31 BRN Driver door key cylinder switch Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
unlocked There should be less than 1 V. • Faulty driver door key cylinder switch
Driver door key cylinder switch Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver door key cylinder switch
in neutral There should be 5 V or more. • Short to around in the wire
22-206 BACK
~
I..:!!.I
Ignition Key Switch Test
1. Remove the steering column upper and lower

covers (see page 20-107).
2. Disconnect the 6P connector.
111 12 13141 5 16 II

terminals .
• There should be continuity with the key in the

ignition switch .
• There should be no continuity with the key
removed.

ignition switch.
BACK 22-20,7
Power:Windows
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH

(With built·in control unit)
Input Test, page 22-214 .
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW SWITCH
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Test, page 22-223
RIGHT REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
RIGHT REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR
Test, page 22-224
LEFT REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH

LEFT REAR POWER WINDOW MOTOR

Test, page 22-224
BACK
r--:'I
~
System Description
Auto Reverse Operation
The system is composed of the power window master switch, the front passenger's power window switch, the driver's
power window motor and the front passenger's power window motor.
The power window motor incorporates a pulser, which generates pulses during the motor's operation and sends the
pulses to the power window control unit. As soon as the power window control unit detects no pulses from the pulser,
the power window control unit makes the power window motor stop and reverse. If the window is more than halfway
closed, it will reverse to the half open position. If the window is less than halfway closed, it will stop and reverse about
2 inches. This is to prevent pinching an obstacle during auto-up operation. The auto reverse ope'ration is not active
when the switch is held in the up position.
POWER WINDOW MASTER

SWITCH
~---L-~_--;
~
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
~~
Sensor
Period of
pulses
Period of
MAGNET ~ pulses.
:.- Position when obstacle
~
: is inched
Period of :
pulses :
Threshold value for
. judgment of obstacle
BACK 22-209
Power Windows
Circuit Diagram
-H.....D.;..DD.....RJ
-"UN.;..D_ER..... .....S
.....E.....
/R.....
ELA_Y.....B.....
DX_ _--. UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BATTERY r
No.lIBAn(100A) No.4(P/Wl(40A) K2
+ J-t--o-'-.JJ~p--<:J"'''''O--+-------BLU
G21
~-------~1
UNDER-DASH POWER
RJSE/RELAY BOX IGNITION SWITCH WINDOW
RELAY
L -_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
No. 211G)l50 AI
HI
'-..O--+-WHT ~
~20
. DI WHT
-0- · IGI
IGI HOT in ON 1111

and START lUll
BLU ....;;.;.
nNO.I
17.5 AI
No. 26
120 AI
NI2 N9 N3
LT GRN WHT YEL
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH IS
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
UP DOWN UP DOWN
CONTROL UNIT
UP <±l DOWN <±l SVCC PLSA PLSB SGND
22 21 20 7 5 6
.1.
11
BRN
BLK LT LU D RED GRN ORN
h
BRN BRN
PULSER
DRIVER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR
G501 G501
22-210 BACK
~
~
'1 : DRIVER'S '3 : LEFT REAR

'2 : FRONT PASSENGER '4: RIGHT REAR
- - - - - : Other communication line
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAVBOX
No. 30
120 A)
N10 M4
BRN PUR
POWER WINDOW MASTER SWITCH 7 FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW SWITCH
FRONT
PASSENGER'S
~
?"
~
C~ I ).------
------f~'/ \'~y:
f 'r r)
UP "DOWN
LIGHTS (AUTO) (AUTO)
lLEDx2)
P/WTIMER UP DOWN
CONTROL UNIT CONTROL UNIT
RLSIG RRSIG UART UART UP <B DOWN <B
SVCC PLSA PLSB SGND
I
B~
12 I 2 1 I3 8 14 6 5 4
I
h
I
GRN PUR BU< VEL RED RED BLU VEL
BU< BU<
I
------------
LEFT REAR POWER RIGHT REAR POWER PULSER

WINDOW SWITCH WINDOW SWITCH
FRONT PASSENGER'S POWER WINDOW MOTOR
G505 G505
(cant'd)
BACK 22-211
Power Windows
\
I
Ar-------------------------------1---------~--------------------------------~
!k~ ~~
!kn ~~
POWER WINDOW E41 POWER WINDOW N14

MASTER SWITCH MASTER SWITCH
LEFT REAR POWER

WINDOW SWITCH
Y'
lTi~N
WHT
7
RIGHT REAR POWER
WINDOW SWITCH
Y'
Gr~
PUR
~
I
~
I CONTROL CIRCUIT CONTROL CIRCUIT
I DOWN UP I DOWN UP
UGHT LIGHT
ILEDI·
~LEDI
~~ , - - -' DOWN UP
~ , - - -' DOWN UP
t--,r
~
",\,-~ ~--,r "'\ '-~

r
1 8 14 1 8 14
BLK RED BlU BLK RED BLU
LEFT REAR POWER RIGHT REAR POWER

WINDOW MOTOR WINDOW MOTOR
G601 G561
22-212 BACK
r--:'I
I.!:'..I
Resetting the Power Window Control Unit
NOTE: The clear procedure must be done prior to the learn procedure even if the auto function is working.
Resetting the driver's or passenger's power windows is required when any of the following have occurred:
• Power window control unit (built into the driver's master switch) is • Driver's or passenger's door glass replacement or repair
replaced • Power is removed from the power window control unit while the
• Power window regulator replacement or repair power window is moving.
• Power window motor replacement or repair
• Window run channel replacement or repair
2. Move the driver's or passenger's window all the way down by using the driver's window DOWN switch.
3. Open the driver's or front passenger's door.
NOTE: Steps 4-7 must be done within 5 seconds of each other.
OPEN r--------------------------------------------
Driver's
Door
CLOSED
ON (II)
J
~I I I
Ignition
Switch
OFF I Power window
Jim ' I !i-O~"-

ON
Driver's or
Passenger's
Window Down
Switch OFF
III
~i~~~i~~~
:~~::....:~:....::....::
T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
T1=Less than 5 seconds
5. Push and hold the driver's or passenger's window DOWN sw'itch.
7. Release the driver's or passenger's window DOWN switch.
8. Repeat step 4-7 three more times.
9. Wait 1 second.
10. Confirm that UP AUTO and DOWN AUTO do not work. If UP AUTO and DOWN work, go back to step 1.
11. Move the driver's or passenger's window all the way down by using the driver's or passenger's window DOWN switch.
12. Pull up and hold the driver's or passenger's window UP switch until the window reaches the fully closed position, then continue to hold the
switch for 1 second.
13. Confirm thatthe power window control unit is reset by using the driver's or passenger's window UP AUTO and DOWN AUTO functions.
If the window still does not work in AUTO, repeat the procedure several times, paying close attention to the 5 second time limit between
steps.
BACK 22-213
Power Windows
Master Switch Input Test
NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the power window master switch.
1. Remove the power window master switch (A) (see page 22-225).
GRN LT GRN WHT RED LT BLU BLK
2. Reconnect the driver's door wire harness (8) to the driver's door subharness (e).
• Ifthe terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector.
- If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
-If all the input tests prove OK, the power window master switch must be faulty; replace it.
22-214 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!:I
4. With the master switch still disconnected; make these input tests at the connector.
..
obtained
20 RED Connect the No. 20 Check driver's power window • Blown No. 26 (20 A) fuse in
and the No. 15 motor operation: · the under-dash fuse/relay box
terminals and No. 21 The window should go down. • Faulty driver's power window
and No. 22 terminals motor
momentarily with • An open in the wire
jumper wires • Poor ground (G501)
21 LT Connect the No. 21 Check driver's power window
BLU and the No. 15 motor operation:
terminals and No. 20 The window should go up.
and No. 22 terminals
momentarily with
jumper wires
2 PUR Under all conditions Check for continuity No.2 An open in the wire
terminal and the No.3 terminal
of the front passenger's power
window switch 14P connector:
13 LT Under all conditions Check for continuity No. 13 An open in the wire
GRN terminal and the No.3 terminal
ofthe left rear power window
switch 14P connector:
12 GRN Under all conditions Check for continuity No. 12 An open in the wire
of the right rear power wi ndow
8 BRN Ignition switch ON . Check for voltage to ground: • Faulty MICU
(II) There should be about less than • An open in the wire
1 V.
\cont'd)
BACK 22-21·5
Power'Windows
Master Switch Input Test (cont'd)
5. Reconnect the 22P connector to the power window master switch. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these
input tests at the connector .
• If a" the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the power window master switch.
obtained
4 L:r , ., Ignition switch ON Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.1 (7.5 A) fuse in the
GRN (") There shauld be battery voltage. under-dash fuse/relay box
1 VEL Under a" conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No.4 (P/W) (40 A) fuse
There should be battery voltage; in the under-hood fuse/relay
box
• Faulty power window relay
15 WHT Under a" conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 26 (20 A) fuse in
There should be battery voltage. the under-dash fuse/relay box
11 BRN Under a" conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
22 BLK Under a" conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
There should be, less than 0.5 V. • An open in the wire
7 RED Ignition switch ON Check.for voltage to ground: • Faulty driver's power window
(") . There should be battery voltage. master switch
• Short to ground in the wire
5 GRN Ignition switch ON Check for voltage between the • Faulty driver's power window
(II), and driver's No.5 and No.7 terminals: motor
window switch There should be 0 V-about • An open in the wire
moving up or down 5 v-o V- about 5 V repeatedly • Short to ground in the wire
(a digital voltmeter should
reads about 2.5 V while the
window moves).
6 ORN Ignition switch ON Check for voltage between the
(II), and driver's No.6 and No.7 terminals:
power window There should be 0 V-about
switch moving up or 5 V-O V- about 5 V repeatedly
down (a digital voltmeter should
reads about 2.5 V while the
window moves).
6. Reset the power window control unit (see page 22-213).
22-'2.16 BACK
r--:'I
~
Front Passenger's Power Window Switch Input Test
NOTE: The power window control unit is built into the front passenger's window switch.
1. Remove the front passenger's power window switch (A) (see page 22-226).
VEL RED
2. Reconnect the front passenger's door wire harness to the front passenger's door subharness.
• If the terminals look OK, make the following input tests at the connector.
-If a test indicates a problem, find and correct the cause, then recheck the system.
-If all the input tests prove OK, the front passenger's power window switch must be faulty; replace it.
(cont'd)
BACK 22-217
" ,i
Power Windows
Front Passenger's Power Window Switch Input Test (cont'd)

4. With the switch still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
3 PUR Under all conditions Check for continuity No.3 An open in the wire
of the power window master
14 RED Connectthe No. 14 and the Check front passenger's power • Blown No. 30 (20 A) fuse in the under-
No.7 terminals and No. Band window motor operation: dash fuse/relay box
No.1 terminals momentarily The window should go down. • Faulty front passenger's power
with jumper wires window motor
B VEL Connect the No. Band the No.7 Check driver's front passenger's • An open in the wire
terminals and No. 14 and No.1 power window motor operation: • Poor ground (G505)
terminals momentarily with The window should go up.
jum~er wires
5. Reconnectthe 14P connector to the front passenger's power window switch. Turn the ignition switch ON (II), and make these input tests at
the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the control unit must be faulty; replace the front passenger's power window switch.
7 PUR Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 30 (20 A) fuse in the under-
There should be battery voltage. dash fuse/relay box
1 BLK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G505)
2 BLK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G505)
6 RED Ignition switch ON (II) Check for .voltage to ground: Short to ground in the wire
There should be battery voltaQe.
5 BLU Ignition switch ON (II), and front Check for voltage between the • Faulty front passenger's power
passenger's power window No.5 and No.6 terminals: window motor
switch moving up or down There should be 0 V-about • An open in the wire
5 V-O V- about 5 V repeatedly • Short to ground in the wire
(a digital voltmeter should reads
about 2.5 Vwhile the window
moves).
4 VEL Ignition switch ON (II), and front Check for voltage between the
passenger's power window No.4 and No.6 terminals:
switch moving up or down There should be 0 V-about
5 V-O V- about 5 V repeatedly
(a digital voltmeter should reads
about 2.5 V while the window
moves).
6. Reset the power window control unit (see page 22-213).
22~218 BACK
r--:'I
~
Left Rear Power Window Switch Input Test
1. Remove the left rear power window switch (see page 22-225).
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the left rear power window switch (8).
LEFT REAR WINDOW

RED SWITCH CONNECTOR (14PI BLU
(cont'd)
BACK 22-219
Power Windows
Left Rear Power Window Switch Input Test (cont'd)

4. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
3 LTGRN Power window master Check for continuity between An open in the wire
switch 22P connector the No.3 terminal and power
disconnected window master switch 22P
connector No. 13 terminal:
Check for continuity to ground:
8 RED Connect the No.8 terminal Check for the left rear power • Faulty left rear power window motor
to battery power with a window motor operation: • An open in the wire
jumper wire, and connect The motor should run (the
the No. 14 terminal to body. window should ~o down).
14 BLU Connectthe No. 14 terminal Check for the left rear power • Faulty left rear power window motor
the No.8 terminal to bodv. window should ao uo).
5. Reconnect the connector to the left rear power window switch, and make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the left rear power window switch must be faulty; replace it.
1 BLK Ignition switch ON (II) and Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G601)
left rear power window There should be less than 0.5 V. • An open in the wire
switch pushed UP or
DOWN
7 WHT Ignition switch ON (II) and Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 33 (20 A) fuse in the under-dash
left rear power window There should be battery voltage. fuse/relay box
switch pushed UP or • Faulty power window relay
DOWN • An open in the wire
22-220 BACK
~
~
Right Rear Power Window Switch Input Test
1. Remove the right rear power window switch (see page 22-225).
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the right rear power window switch (8).
RED RIGHT REAR POWER WINDOW BLU

SWITCH CONNECTOR (14P)
(cont'd)
BACK 22-221
Power Windows
Right Rear Power Window Switch Input Test (cont'd)

4. With the connector still disconnected, make these input tests at the connector.
3 GRN Power window master Check for continuity between An open in the wire
switch 22P connector the No.3 terminal and power
disconnected window master switch 22P
connector No. 12 terminal:
Check for continuity to ground: Short to ground in the wire
8 RED Connect the No.8 terminal Check for the right rear power • Faulty right rear power window motor
the No. 14 terminal to body-, window should go up).
14 BLU Connectthe No. 14 terminal Check for the right rear power • Faulty right rear power window motor
the No.8 terminal to bodv. window should gO down).
5. Reconnect the connector to the right rear power window switch, and make these input tests at the connector.
• If all the input tests prove OK, the right rear power window switch must be faulty; replace it.
1 BlK Ignition switch ON (II) and Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G561)
right rear power window There should be less than 0.5 V. • An open in the wire
switch pushed UP or
DOWN
7 PUR Ignition switch ON (II) and Check for voltage to ground: • Blown No. 32 (20 A) fuse in the under-dash
left rear power window There should be battery voltage. fuse/relay box
switch pushed UP or • Faulty power window relay
DOWN • An ooen in the wire
22-222 BACK
~
'~
Driver's and Front Passenger's Power Window Motor Test
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-6). PulserTest
2. Disconnect the 6P connector from the power 5. Reconnect the 6P connector to the power window
window motor. motor.
7. Check for voltage between the terminals.
• There should be battery voltage between the

No.5 (+) and No.2 (-) terminals,
• Connect an analog voltmeter between the No.6
(+) and No.2 (-) terminals, and run the power
window motor down or up. The voltmeter needle
should move back and forth alternately (a digital
voltmeter reads about 2.5 V).
• Connect an analog voltmeter between the No.3
(+) and No.2 (-) terminals, and run the power
window motor down or up. The voltmeter needle
should move back and forth alternately (a digital
voltmeter reads about 2.5 V).
8. If the voltage is not as specified, do the power

window switch input test:
Motor Test • Driver's terminals No.5, 6, 7, and 11 (see step 5

on page 22-216).
3. Test the motor in each direction by connecting • Front passenger's terminals No.2, 4, 5 and 6
battery power and ground according to the table. (see page 22-219).
When the motor stops running, disconnect one
lead immediately. 9. If the switch is OK, replace the power window
motor.
~ Terminal
1 4 10. Reset the power window control unit (see page
Direction
UP
DOWN
'" e
E9
E9
e
22-213).
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,

replace it.
BACK 22~223
Power' Windows
Rear Passenger's Power Window Motor Test
1. Remove the door panel (see page 20-17). 3. Test the motor by connecting battery power and
ground according to the table. When the motor
2. Disconnect the 2P connector from the power stops running, disconnect one lead immediately.
window motor.
~ Terminal
1 2
,
Direction
~
,, UP E9 e
,,,
,,
,, DOWN e E9
4. If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly,
replace it.
22-224 BACK
~
I.!!!:I
Power Window Switch Replacement
Driver's 5. Remove the three screws and the power window

master switch (A) from the door panel.
1. Remove the driver's door panel (see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 22P conector (A) from the power

window master switch.
6. Remove the four screws and the power window

master switch (A).
3. Remove the driver's door subharness (B) from the

power window master switch.
4. Remove the three screws from the door panel, then

pull up on the door pocket (e) to release the clips.
7. Install the switch in the reverse order of removal.
8. After replacement, reset the power wi ndow control

(cont'd)
BACK 22-225
Rower Windows
Power Window Switch Replacement (cont'd)
Front passenger's 5. Remove the three screws and the power window
switch (A) from the door panel.
1. Removal the front passenger's door panel
(see page 20-6).
2. Disconnect the 14P connector (A) from the power

window switch.

3. Remove the front passenger's door subharness (B) switch.
from the power window switch.
4. Remove the three screws from the door panel, then
pull up on the door pocket (C) to release the clips. 8. After replacement, reset the power window control
22-226 BACK
~
I.!:..I
Rear passenger's
2. Disconnect the 14P connector from the power

window switch (A).
3. Remove the screws and the power window switch

from the door panel.

switch.
BACK 22-227
Wipers/Washers
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARMS and LINKAGE

WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
INTERMITTENT WIPER RELAY CIRCUIT

(Built into the MICU)
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR

Test, page 22-245
REAR WINDOW WIPER RELAY

Test, page 22-64
22-228 BACK
r--:'I
~
WASHER RESERVOIR
Replacement, page 22"249
WASHER TUBES
WASHER MOTOR
WASHER FLUID LEVEL SWITCH (WINDSHIELD/REAR WINDOW)
(Canada models) Test, page 22-246
Test, page 22-246 Replacement, page 22-249
REAR WINDOW WASHER NOZZLE
REAR WINDOW WIPER MOTOR

Test, page 22-245
REAR WINDOW WIPER ARM

Wiper Blade Replacement, page 22-250
BACK 22-229
Wipers/Washers
Circuit Diagram - Windshield
UNDER·DASH UNDER DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX

UNDER·HDOD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BOX IGNmON SWITCH
BAmRY
+
No. 11BAT11100 AI No.2 (lG1150 AI H1
WHT
-tl- -&- WHT
IG1
BLU
IG1 HOT in ON 101 and START (1111

02 No. 38 130 AI
~.5AI
IFuse/relay box socketl
IFuse/relay box socketl
WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
.. .. I '....
.\ ....
!! INTERMITTENT
, '
, WASHER 0~ D DWELL TIME
SWITCH ,, I CONTROLLER
MIST HI
0
OFF 6 LO
INT
5 1 3 4 2 8
MICU
56
L.....- PNK
S10
ORN
WHT
S20 ,-:
S15 ~
GRN
YEL
S17 :""'f
54
BLK
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX .l-

-
MICU
---.-:{ ~ \':~----~
[f! T T [f!
~ ~/~----~
T T T
~----~~j~
T fl1 134
~ ~
,
-~ ..L ..L .l ..L
F19 F18 F32 lCanada modelsl F34 F33 E6

! ~~UGE
MODULE
~~NTROL" - "-'
i
VEL BLU WHT
I Y RED ORN
we I I
5 3 4 1@2
GRV
I WINDSHIELD/
HI 1
.-. ~
PRK
WASHER FLUID
LEVEL SWITCH
IClosed:
2 Floatdownl
REAR WINDOW
WASHER MOTOR
2 WINDSHIELD
1 11
WIPER MOTOR
BLK
1
G451 L,,~~._ .. _ .. -.J G601 G501
22-230 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!:I
Circuit Diagram - Rear Window
UNDER·DASH
UNDER·HDDD FUSE/RELAY BOX FUSE/RELAY BDX IGNmON SWITCH UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX
BA+TIERY No.1 (BAnllOOA) No. 2(lGII50 A)

~~--~~-----<~~--~---W~
HI B-·o
. WHT
01 --f)--AT 02 No.8(IOA)
~U~~-'----cr~----~
~ kW~~
IGI HOT in ON (II) and START (III)
07 M7
PNK PNK
No. 38 134
REAR (30 A)
WINDOW
WIPER MICU
RELAY
FI5
PNK
F8 53
RED
E2 05
S4
F34 F33 S9 sa 52 E6
GRN Bu( Bu( RED ORN RED BLU PUR
I 1@2
WINDSHIELD/
I
REAR WINDOW
WASHER MOTOR
REAR
WINDOW
WIPER
RR 0/ ORR MOTOR
WASH o WASH
OFF RR
WIPER
REAR WINDOW WlPER/WASHER SWITCH
G201
I I I
GOO2 GOOl G501
BACK 22-231
Wipers/Washers
OTe Troubleshooting
DTC 81028: Rear Window Wiper Motor (Park) 6. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box
Signal Error connector S (20P) and rear wiper motor 4P
connector.
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System 7. Check for continuity between the No.2 terminal of
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88). the rear wiper motor 4P connector and No.2
terminal ofthe under-dash fuse/relay box
1. Clear the DTCs with the HDS. connector S (20P).
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF, and then back ON (II). UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR S (20PI
3. Turn the rear wiper switch to ON for 15 seconds or
more, then turn the switch OFF.
8 9 10
Does the rear window wiper motor run? 11 18 19 20
YES-Go to step 4.
RR WIP AS (PURl
NO-Go to step 11.
2
3 4
Is DTC 81028 indicated? REAR WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure. The rear window wiper
(Park) signal is OK at this time. Check for loose or YES-Go to step 8.
poor connections.
NO-Repair an open in the PUR wire .•
5. Do the rear wiper motor test (see page 22-247).
8. Check for continuity between the rear window
Does the rear wiper motor run and does it pulse wiper motor 4P connector No.2 terminal and body
normally? ground.
YES-Go to step 6. REAR WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR
NO-Replace the rear wiper motor and recheck .•

RRWIP
r-"T""""2..... AS (PURl
3 4
=
YES-Repair a short to ground in the PUR wire .•
NO-Go to step 9.
22-232 BACK
r--:'I
I.!!!..I
9. Turnthe ignition switch ON (II). 15. Turn the igniton switch ON (.II).
10. Measure the voltage between the rear window 16. Measure the voltage between the No.7 terminal of
wiper motor 4P conector No.2 terminal and body the under-hood fuse/relay box connector 0 (8P) and
ground. body ground.
REAR WIPER MOTOR..4P CONNECTOR UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

CONNECTOR D IBP)
~
RWIP
1 2. AS (PUR)
3 4
'Y.
=
/s there voltage?
/s there voltage?
YES-Repair a short to power in the PUR wire .•
YES-Go to step 17.
relay box.• NO-Repair an open in the PNK wire or blown
No.8 fuse inthe. under-dash fuse/relay box.•
17. Measure the voltage between the NO. 15 terminal
12. Check the No.8 (10 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/ of the under-hood fuse/relay box connector F (20P)
relay box. and body ground.
/s the fuse OK? UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (20P)
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Replace the fuse and recheck the system .•
13. Do the wiper motor test (see page 22-247).
Does the wiper motor run normally?

=
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Replace the windshield wiper motor and
recheck .•
/s there voltage?
14. Do the rear window wiper relay test (see page
22-64). YES-Go to step 18.
/s the relay OK? NO-Repair an open in the PNK wire .•
YES-Go to step 15.
NO-Replace the rear window wiper relay and

recheck.•
(cont'd)
BACK 22-233
Wiper,s/Washers
18. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 21. Check for continuity',between the rear window
wiper motor 4P connector No.3 terminal and body
19. Disconnectthe under-hood fuse/relay box ground,
connectorE(10P) and rear wiper motor 4P
connector. REAR WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR
20. Check for continuity, petween the No.1 terminal of

the rear window wiper motor 4Pconnector and
No.2 terminal ofthe under-hood fuse/relay box
connector E (10P).
UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR E (10P)
=
,,-------,--,,(GRN)
2 3 4 Wire side of female terminals
5 6 9 10
YES-Go to step 22.

1 2
NO-Repair open in the BLK wire or poor ground
3 4
(G602) .•
REAR WIPER MOTOR 4P CONNECTOR
Wire side Of female terminals 22. Disconnect the under-hood fuse/relay box
connector F (20P) and under-hood fuse/relay box
Is there continuity? connector S (20P).
YES-Go to step 21.
NO-Repair open in the GRN wire .•
22-234 BACK
r--:'I
1.::..1

the under-hood fuse/relay box connector F (20P)
and No.3 terminal of the under-dash fuse/relay box
connector S (20P).
UNDER·HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR F (20P)

234 5 6 7 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 20
UNDER·DASH FUSE/RELAY BOX CONNECTOR S (20P)
YES-Repair open in the RED wire .•

relay box.•
BACK 22-235
Wipers/Washers
DTC 81077: Windshield Wiper Motor (Park) 8. Check for continuity between the No.4 terminal of
Signal Error the windshield wiper motor 5P connector and
No. 32 terminal ofthe under-dash fuse/relay box
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be connector F (34P).
Diagnosis Test Mode A (see page 22-88). UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX CONNECTOR F (34P)
rr:r:mm
~ ~
[!]I[I[!J 9 10 11 12 13
28rf28 29
3. Turn the wiper switch to LOW or HIGH for

15 seconds or more, then turn the switch OFF.
Do the windshield wipers run?
YES-Go to step 4. WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR

Wire side of female terminals'
NO-Go to step 12.
YES-Go to step 9.
NO-Repair open in the WHT wire .•
YES-Go to step 5.
NO-Intermittent failure. The windshield wiper

system is OK at this time. Check for loose or poor
connections.•
Does the wiper motor run normally and does it

pulse?
YES-Go to step 7.

recheck .•

connector F (34P) and windshield wiper motor 5P
connector.
22-236 BACK
~
I..!!:..I
9. Check for continuity between the No.4 terminal of 12. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
the windshield wiper motor 5P connector and body
ground. 13. Check the No. 38 (30 A) fuse in the under-dash fuse/
relay box.
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
Is the fuse OK?
YES-Go to step 14.
NO-Replace the fuse and recheck the system .•
= Does the wiper motor run normally?

Is there continuity? recheck.•
YES-Repair short in the WHT wire .• 15. Reconnect the windshield wiper motor 5P
connector.
NO-Go to step 10.
11. Measure the voltage between the No.4 terminal of

the windshield wiper motor 5P connector and body
ground.
=
Is there voltage?
YES-Repair short to power in the WHTwire .•

relay box.•
(cont'd)
BACK 22-237
Wipers/Washers
16. Measure the voltage between the No. 18 (LO) and 18. Measure the voltage between the No.2 terminal of
No. 19 (HI) terminals ofthe under-dash fuse/relay the windshield wiper motor 5P connector and body
box connector F (34P) .and body ground with the ground.
wiper switch in the corresponding position
individually. WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR 5P CONNECTOR
LOW (BLU) HIGH (YEll

~--------------------------,
ITIiI!II1 rm:rml 9 10" 1218

~~ 28 27 2B
29
=
= = Wire side of female terminals

Is there less than 1 V?
Is there battery voltage? YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/

relay box.•
YES-Go to step 17.
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/ ground (G451) .•
relay box.•
17. Measure the voltage between the No.3 (LO) and

No.5 (HI) terminals ofthe windshield wiper motor
5P connector and body ground with the wiper
switch in the corresponding position individually.
YES-Go to step 18.
NO-Repair an open in the BLU (LO) or VEL (HI)

wire .•
22-238 BACK
~
I.!!::.I
DTC B1281:Windshield Wiper Switch MIST 6. Check the ON/OFF information of the WINDSHIELD
Position Circuit Malfunction WIPER SWITCH (MIST), WINDSHIELD WIPER
SWITCH (lNT), WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH
DTC B1282: Windshield Wiper Switch INT (LOW) and WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH (HIGH) in
(AUTO) Position Circuit Malfunction the DATA LIST.
DTC B1283: Windshield Wiper Switch LOW Are the WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH (MIST)
Position Circuit Malfunction information indicator OFF, WINDSHIELD WIPER
SWITCH (INT) information indicator OFF,
DTC B1284: Windshield Wiper Switch HIGH WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH (LOW)
Position Circuit Malfunction information indicator OFF and WINDSHIELD
WIPER SWITCH (HIGH) information indicator
NOTE: If you are troubleshooting multiple DTCs, be OFF with the windshield wiper switch in OFF
sure to follow the instructions in B-CAN System position?
YES-Go to step 13.
NO-Go to step 7.
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF and then back ON (II).
3. Turn the windshield wiper switch in MIST, INT,
LOW, HIGH and OFF positions. 8. Disconnect the 8P connector from the windshield
wiper switch.
4. Check the DTCs with the HDS.
9. Check the ON/OFF information of the WINDSHIELD
Is DTC 81281,81282,81283 or 81284 indicated? WIPER SWITCH (MIST), WINDSHIELD WIPER
SWITCH (I NT), WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH
YES-Go to step 5. (LOW) and WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH (HIGH) in
the DATA LIST.
NO-Intermittent failure, the wiper system is OK at
this time. Check for loose or poor connections .• Are the information fndicatdrs OFF?
5. Select WIPERS from the BODY ELECTRICAL menu, YES-Faulty windshield wiper switch; replace it..
and enter the DATA LIST.
NO-Go to step 10.

connector S (20P).
(cont'd)
BACK 22-239
Wipers/Washers
12. Check for continuity between the body ground and 14. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
under-dash fuselrelay box connector S (20P)
terminals No. 10, No. 20 and No. 15 individually. 15. Check the windshield wiper switch (see page
22-244).
CONNECTOR S (20P) Is the windshield wiper switch OK?
FRWIP
HI&lO
SW(ORN) . YES-Go to step 16.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
NO-Faulty windshield wiper switch, replace it.•
11 15 16 17 18 19 20
FRWIP 16. Disconnect the under-dash fuselrelay box
INT&lO connector S (20P).
SW(WHT) Q
17. Check for continuity between the under-dash fusel
Wire side of female terminals relay box connector S (20P) No.4, No. 10, No. 15
and No. 20 terminals and the windshield wiper
switch 8P connector No.5, No.2 No.3 and No.4
Is there continuity? . terminals.
YES-Repair a short to ground in the wire .• Wire side of female terminals
NO-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fusel COMBI FRWIP

,--_ _ _--, GND (BlK) HI & lO
relay box.• SW(ORN)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13. Check the ONIOFF information in the DATA LlSTfor
WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH (MIST) with the 11 12 13 14 15 16
windshield wiper switch in the MIST position, FRWIP
WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH (I NT) with the MISTSW
windshield wiper switch in the INT position,
Q (GRN).Q
WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH (LOW) with the

windshield wiper switch in the LOW position, and
WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH (HIGH) with the
windshield wiper switch in the HIGH position.
2 3 4
Are all the information indicators ON? '------I 5 6 7 8
WINDSHIELD WIPER SWITCH 8P CONNECTOR

YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fuse/ Wire side of female terminals
relay box.•
NO-Go to step 14. Is there continuity?
YES-Faulty MICU; replace the under-dash fusel

relay box.•
22-240 BACK
r--:'I
a=:.J
MICU Input Test
1. Before troubleshooting the wiper/washer system, troubleshoot the B-CAN System Diagnosis Test Mode A
(see page 22-88), and check the No.8 (10 A), No. 10 (7.5 A) and No. 38 (30 A) fuses in the under-dash fuse/relay
box.
2. Disconnect the under-dash fuse/relay box connectors E, F, S, and T.
NOTE: All connector views are wire side of female terminals.
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX CONNECTOR E (42P)
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX CONNECTOR F (34P)
BLU VEL
~
~
WHT ORN RED
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX CONNECTOR S (20P)

PUR RED BLK PNK BLU RED ORN
1
\\\ 2 3 4 5
\
6 7
\ II
8 9 10
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
GRN
I \
VEL
\
WHT
UNDER-DASH FUSE/RELAV BOX CONNECTOR T (34P)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
\
BLK
(cont'd)
BACK 22-241
Wipers/Washers
3. Inspect the connector and socket terminals to be sure they are all making'good contact.
• If the terminals are bent, loose or corroded, repair them as necessary and recheck the system.
• If all the input tests prove OK, go to step 5. .
obtained
F18 BLU Under all conditions Connect battery power to the F18 • Poor ground (G451)
terminal: • Faulty windshield wiper
Thewiper motor should run at motor
low speed. • An open in the wire
F19 VEL Under all conditions Connect battery power to the F19 • Poor ground (G451)
terminal: ~ Faulty windshield wiper
The windshield wiper motor motor
should run at high s~eed. • An open in the wire
F32 WHT Under all conditions Check for continuity between the An open in the wire
(disconnect the F32 terminal and windshield
windshield wiper I wip~r motor 5P connector No.4
motor 5P connector) terminal:
F33 ORN Under all conditions Connect battery power to the F33 • Faulty windshield/rear
terminal and the body ground to window washer motor
F34 RED the F34 terminal: • An open in the wire
The windshield/rear window
washer motor should run.
52 PUR Under all conditions Check for continuity between the An open in the wire
(disconnect the rear 52 terminal and rear window
window wiper motor wiper motor 5P connector No.2
4P connector) terminal:
53 RED ignition switch ON Connect body ground to the 53 • Poor ground (G602)
(II) terminal: • Faulty rear window wiper
The rear window wiper motor motor
should run. • Faulty rear window wiper
relay
56 PNK Wiper/washer switch Check resistance between 56 and • Faulty windshild wiper/
(intermittent dwell 54 terminals: washer switch
54 BLK timer) turned The resistance should vary • An open in the wire
between 0 and 1 k Q • • A short to ground in the wire
22-242 BACK
r--:'I
1..::.1
T34 BlK Under all conditions Check for voltage to ground: • Poor ground (G501)
S10 ORN Ignition switch ON (II), wiper/ Check for voltage between S10 and S4 • Faulty windshield wiper/washer switch
washer switch (INn ON terminals, and S20 and S4 terminals: • An open in the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), wiper/ Check for voltage between S10 and S4 • Faulty windshield wiper/washer switch
washer switch OFF terminals, and S20 and S4 terminals: • A short to ground in the wire
S15 GRN Ignition switch ON (II), wiper/ Check for voltage between S15 and S4 • Faulty windshield wiper/washer switch
washer switch (MIST) ON terminals: • An open in the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), wiper/ Check for voltage between S15 and S4 • Faulty windshield wiper/washer switch
washer switch (MIST) OFF terminals: • A short to ground in the wire
S17 VEL Ignition switch ON (II), washer Check for voltage between S17 and 84 • Faulty windshield wiper/washer switch
switch ON terminals: • An open in the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), washer Check for voltage between 817 and 84 • Faulty windshield wiper/washer switch
switch OFF terminals: • A short to ground in the wire
820 WHT Ignition switch ON (II), wiper/ Check for voltage between 820 and 84 • Faulty windshield wiper/washer switch
washer switch (lOW) ON terminals: • An open in the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), wiper/ Check for voltage between 820 and 84 • Faulty windshield wiper/washer switch
washer switch OFF terminals: • A short to ground in the wire
WHT Ignition switch ON (II), wiper/ Check for voltage between 820 and S4 • Faulty windshield wiper/washer switch
washer switch (HIGH) ON terminals: • An open in the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), wiper/ Check for voltage between 820 and 84 • Faulty windshield wiper/washer switch
washer switch OFF terminals: • A short to ground in the wire
88 BlU Ignition switch ON (II), rear Check for voltage between S9 and 84 • Faulty rear window wiper/washer
window wiper/washer switch terminals: switch
RRWA8H There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), rear Check for voltage between S9 and S4 • Faulty rear window wiper/washer
OFF There should be 5 V or more. • A short to Qround in the wire
89 RED Ignition switch ON (II), rear Check for voltage between 89 and S4 • Faulty rear window wiper/washer
RRWIPER There should be less than 1 V. • An open in the wire
Ignition switch ON (II), rear Check for voltage between 89 and 84 • Faulty rear window wiper/washer
OFF There should be 5 V or more. • A short to Qround in the wire
BACK 22-243
Wipers/Washers
Wiper /Washer Switch Test/Replacement
1. Remove the steering column covers (see page 4. Check for continuity between the terminals in each
20-107). switch position according to the table.
2. Disconnect the windshield wiper switch 8P Windshield

connector (A) from the wiper/washer switch (B).
:'" Terminal
1 2 3 4 5 8
'"
Position
OFF
INT 0 0
LO 0 r-- 0 fa
HI 0 fa
MistON lQ - tQ
Washer ON 0 0
Intermittent dwell l.IA
timer tlJ rned 10 n. 0
Rear window
Terminal
5 6 7
Position
3. Remove the two screws, then pull out the wiper/ Washer switch
ON and wiper
washer switch. switch OFF
OFF
ON
Wiper and Washer

Switch ON

switch.
22-244 BACK
~
I..!:!..I
Wiper Motor Test
Windshield Rear Window

1. Remove the wiper arms (see page 22-247). 1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tailgate lower
trim panel (see page 20-174).
NOTE: Carefully remove the wiper arms so that
they do not touch the hood. 2. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) from the motor (8).
2. Remove the hood seal and cowl cover.

B
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper
motor (8).
3. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the

No.1 terminal and ground to the No.3 terminal of
the 4P connector. The motor should run. 1ft he
motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, replace
the motor.
No.3 terminal and ground to the No.2 terminal of 4. Connect an analog ohmmeter to the No.2 and
the wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should No.3 terminals, and run the motor at low or high
run at low speed. If the motor does not run or fails speed. The needle of the ohmmeter should pulse.
to run smoothly, replace the motor.
5. If the motor test is not as specified, replace the rear
5. Test the motor by connecting battery power to the window wiper motor.
No.5 terminal and ground to the No.2 terminal of
the wiper motor 5P connector. The motor should
run at high speed. If the motor does not run or fails
to run smoothly, replace the motor.
6. Connect an analog ohmmeter to the No.4 and

No.2 terminals, and run the motor at low or high
speed. The needle of the ohmmeter should pulse. If
it does not, replace the motor.
BACK 22-245
Wipers/Washers
Washer Motor Test Washer Fluid Level Switch Test
1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-176). Canada models
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer 1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-176).
motor (8).
2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer
fluid level switch.

No.2 (No.1) terminal and ground the No.1 (No.2)
terminal of the washer motor. The motor should
run.
( ): Rear window washer direction.
3. Remove the washer fluid level switch from the
o If the motor does not run or fails to run smoothly, washer reservoir.
replace it.
o Ifthe motor runs smoothly, but little or no NOTE: Fluid may flow out of the opening.
washer fluid is pumped, check for a disconnected
or blocked washer hose, or a clogged washer. 4. Check for continuity between the No.1 and No.2
motor outlet. terminals in each float position.
o There should be continuity when the float is

down.
o There should be no continuity when the float is
up.

switch.
22-246 BACK
r--:'I
~
Wiper Motor Replacement
Removal 6. Remove the nut (A) and the link (8) from the wiper
motor (C).
1. Open the hood. Remove the caps, nuts (A), and the
windshield wiper arms (8).
A
31 N·m
(3.1 kgf·m, 22.& Ibf·ftl
B
k;S ...~""'"-==";:;,,. D
&N·m
(0.& kgf·m,
6lbf·ftl
2. Remove the cowl covers (see page 20-163).
3. Disconnect the 5P connector (A) from the wiper

motor.
c
7. Remove the three bolts (D), and the wiper motor
from the wiper linkage assembly (E).
4. Remove the two bolts and the bracket (8).
5. Remove the four bolts (C) and the wiper linkage

assembly (D).
(cont'd)
BACK 22-247
Wipers/Washers
Wiper Motor Replacement (cont'd)
Installation 4. Before installing the wiper linkage assembly to the

vehicle, align the mark (A) of the link and the mark
1. Before installing the motor, plug it in, then turn the (B) of the linkage assembly.
wiper/washer switch to (LO) or (HI) ON, then OFF to
return the motor shaft to the park position.
NOTE:
• Does not use the wiper/wal;herswitch (lNT)
position in this step.
• If necessary, replace any damaged clips.
• Apply mUltipurpose grease to the moving parts.
2. Install the wiper motor to the wiper linkage

assembly. .
3. Install the link to the wiper motor shaft, then align

the mark (A) of the link and the mark (B) of the B
wiper linkage assembly.
A
5. After installation, adjust the wiper arms (see page

22-251).
B
A
22-248 BACK
r--:'I
I!:::..I
Rear Window Wiper Motor Washer Reservoir Replacement
Replacement
1. Remove the right inner fender (see page 20-176).
1. Open the tailgate, and remove the tailgate lower 2. Disconnect the 2P connector (A) from the washer
trim panel (see page 20-174). motor (8).
2. Remove the mounting nut (A), the wiper arm (8)

and the special nut (e).
l;'
A
8.8N·m
(0.9 kgf·m, 6.5 Ibf·ft) ~A o
>? c
c "'B
A5i>. . / 8.8 N·m 3. Disconnect the windshield washer tube (e) and the
~~ (0.9 kgf·m, 6.5 Ibf·ft) rear window washer tube (D).
~~ 4. Remove the clips and bolts, then remove the

washer reservoir.
3. Disconnect the 4P connector (A) and remove the

three mounting bolts (8), then remove the rear
window wiper motor (e).
9.8N·m

Acura RDX SRM 07 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Acura RDX SRM 07 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

@

Chassis and Paint Codes ....................... ........... 1~2

Precautions for Super Handling

Vehicle Identification Number Engine Number

5J8 TB1 8 2 * 7 A 000001 K23A1 - 1000001

PAINT CODE INTERIOR COLOR CODE

Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification

Engine Number Transmission Number

Front Passenger's Compartment:

Steering Wheel: Rear Passenger's Compartment:

DRIVER MODULE DANGER ROOF SIDE MODULE DANGER

SIDE AIRBAG CAUTION

7 HNX T 02.3 DKC

LOAED 11M TESTING OF THIS a. Model Year

FEDERAL and CANADA

NOTE: If you are going to remove heavy components Floor Jack

2. Raise the lift a few inches, and rock the vehicle

Safety Stands 5. Lower the vehicle onto the stands.

To support the vehicle on safety stands, use the same

If the vehicle needs to be towed, call a professional Front:

Flat-bed Equipment - The operator loads the vehicle

To accommodate flat-bed equipment, the vehicle is

The towing hook can be used with a winch to pull the

The only recommended way of towi ng the vehicle is on

Standards and Service Limits

Engme Assem blIV

Fuel and Emissions

Item Measurement Qualification Standard or New Service Limit

A"Ir Con dOt"

Item Measurement Qualification Specification

Item Measurement Qualification Specification

1,572 mm 161 •9·In. )

Lubricants and Fluids ....................................... 3-2

ADDlication Lubricant or Fluid

API CERTIFICATION SEAL Required Engine Oil

-30 -20 -10 o 10 20 30 40·C

General Information (Information Display)

4. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,

• Complete list of maintenance main items (C)

General Information (Information Display) (cont'd)

1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II) position.

2. Push and release the Select/Reset Knob repeatedly

3. Press and hold the Select/Reset Knob for about

NOTE: If you are resetting the display when the

4. Press and hold the Select/Reset Knob for another

General Information (Multi-information Display) (cont'd)

Service Information 3. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,

2. When the ignition switch is in the ON (II) position,

• Complete list of maintenance main items (D)

2. If system message(s) are displayed, press the Info

3. Push and release the Sel/Reset Button repeatedly

4. Press and hold the Sel/Reset Button for about 10

5. Press Info Button repeatedly until the "RESET"

Maintenance Main Items

Check parking brake adjustment (see page 19-7).

• Check rack grease and steering linkage.

Number Maintenance Sub Items

Engine Electrical Charging System

Ref. No. Tool Number Description Oty

STARTER TRANSMISSION RANGE

Symptom Troubleshooting Index

Symptom Diagnostic procedure Also check for

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX